* 
 
 AV 
 
 .^ J* t 
 
 ^# 
 
 
 
 Class L 
 
 Book __ 
 
 Copyright N° 
 
 COPYRIGHT DEPOSIT 
 
 it 
 
 .. 
 
 
 ■ : •■.■" 
 
 
 If 
 
 

 
THE 
 
 ROMANCE OF THE 
 RED STAR 
 
 A 
 
 BIOGRAPHY OF THE 
 EARTH 
 
 > » 
 
 PUBLISHED BY 
 
 DENVER FRATERNITY OF EMETHACHAVAH 
 
 DENVER, COLORADO 
 
 AN ORDER FOUNDED ON THE PRINCIPLES HEREIN LAID DOWN. 
 FOUNDED KOSMON 50. 
 
WB3 
 
 I 
 
 THE L IBRARY OF 
 
 — cgHrQtyt£sgr"l 
 
 Two Copies Receive* 
 
 J«ft«*9 490»,j 
 
 COPYRIGHT ENTRY * 
 
 CLASSO-XXo. N». 
 
 
 Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1901, by the Denver Fraternity of Emethachavah 
 in the office of the Librarian ofCongress, at Washington, D. C. 
 All rights reserved. 
 

 DEDICATED 
 TO ALL MANKIND 
 
JEHOVIH. 
 
 All was. All is. All ever shall be. 
 
 The All spake, and Motion was, and is, and ever shall be; 
 
 And being positive was called He and Him. 
 
 The All Motion was His speech. 
 
 He said: I Am, and comprehended all things, the seen and the unseen. 
 
 Nor is there aught in all the universe but what is part of Him. 
 
 He said: I am the soul of all. 
 
 The seen and unseen are of My person. 
 
 By virtue of My Presence all things are. 
 
 By virtue of My Presence is life. 
 
 By virtue of My Presence are the living brought forth into life. 
 
 I am the Creator, the Quickener, the Destroyer. 
 
 Of two apparent entities am I; nevertheless I am but one. 
 
 These entities are the unseen, which is potent; and the seen, which of 
 
 itself is impotent. 
 Of these two entities, in likeness of Myself, made I all the living. 
 For as the life is the potent part, so is the corporeal part the impotent 
 
 part. 
 Chief over all that live on the earth I made man, male and female. 
 And that man might distinguish Me, I commanded him to give Me a 
 
 name. 
 And man named Me not after anything visible in heaven or on the 
 
 earth. 
 By virtue of My Presence named he Me after the sounds the wind 
 
 utter eth, 
 And he said: 
 
 E— O— IH, 
 Which is now pronounced 
 
 JEHOVIH, 
 And is written thus: 
 
Cycle or Creation 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 In Kosmon man looked upward in 
 prayer, desiring to know the manner of all 
 created things, both on earth and in hea- 
 ven. And Jehovih answered him, saying: 
 
 By virtue of My presence created I the 
 seen and unseen worlds. 
 
 I created Earth, and placed it in the 
 firmament; and by My presence brought 
 man forth a living being. A corporeal 
 body gave I him that he might learn cor- 
 poreal things; and death I made that he 
 might rise in the firmament and inherit My 
 etherean worlds. 
 
 To es I gave dominion over corpor; 
 with es I filled all place in the firmament. 
 But corpor I formed into worlds and 
 moons and suns; beyond number made I 
 them, and I caused them to move in the 
 places I allotted to them. Es I divided 
 into two parts, etherea and atmospherea. 
 These are the three kinds of worlds I cre- 
 ated; but I gave different densities to at- 
 mospherean worlds, and different densities 
 to etherean worlds. 
 
 Think not, O man, that I created space 
 a barren waste, and void of use. Even as 
 man in the corporeal form is adapted to 
 the corporeal earth, so is he in the spiritual 
 form adapted to My etherean worlds. 
 Three great estates have I bestowed upon 
 man; the corporeal, the atmospherean and 
 the etherean. 
 
 The corporeal worlds I created round, 
 with land and water, and I made them im- 
 penetrable, for I bring forth the living on 
 their surface. 
 
 The whirlwind made I as a sign to man 
 of the manner of the creation of My 
 corporeal worlds. As thou beholdest 
 the power of the whirlwind gathering 
 up the dust of the earth and driv- 
 ing it together, know that even so 
 do I bring together the a'ji and ji'ay and 
 nebulae in the firmament of heaven. By 
 the power of the whirlwind create I the 
 corporeal suns and moons and stars. By 
 the power of rotation, swift driving forth 
 
 in the extreme parts, condense I the at- 
 mospherean worlds that float in the firm- 
 ament; and these become My corporeal 
 worlds. In the midst of the vortices made 
 I them, and by the power of the vortices I 
 turn them on their axes, and carry them in 
 the orbits I allotted to them. Wider than 
 to the moons of a planet have I created 
 the vortices, and they carry the moons 
 also. About some of My corporeal worlds 
 have I given nebulous belts and rings, th?t 
 man might comprehend the rotation of 
 their vortices. 
 
 A great vortex created I for each sun, 
 and within such vortices, and subject to 
 them, made I the vortices of corporeal 
 worlds. The sun vortices I caused to ro- 
 tate, and I gave them power to carry the 
 vortices of their corporeal worlds. Ac- 
 cording to their density and position are 
 corporeal worlds thus carried forth and 
 around their suns. 
 
 And above the earth, and to the north 
 and south, I placed polar lights, that 
 man might bear witness that light depended 
 not on the sun. But the sun I placed in 
 the midst of the great vortex, so that 
 every side was as a pole to the corporeal 
 worlds around it. And I made atmos- 
 pherea as a condensing lens, so that the 
 rotation of each and every corporeal world 
 should manufacture its own light, on the 
 side poling to the sun, by the rotation of 
 its vortex. 
 
 Atmospherean worlds I also created in 
 the firmament, and I gave them places and 
 orbits and courses for themselves. But 
 atmospherean worlds I created shapeless 
 and void of fixed form, for they are the 
 elements of corporeal worlds in pro- 
 cess of condensation or dissolution, being 
 intermediate in density betwixt My ethe- 
 rean and My corporeal worlds. Of 
 three degrees of density created I them, 
 a'ji, ji'ay and nebula. But all of them 
 are composed of the same substances, 
 being like the earth, but rarefied. 
 Nor is there on Earth or in it one thing, 
 even iron, lead, gold, water, oil, or stone, 
 
CYCLE OF CREATION 
 
 but the same things are in My atmospher- 
 ean worlds. As I have given light to 
 Earth so have I given light to many of 
 them. And I also created atmospherea 
 around all My corporeal worlds; together 
 made I them. 
 
 For the substance of My ethe r e<*.n 
 worlds I created ethe. And I made ethe 
 the most rarified and subtle of all created 
 things, and gave it power and place, not 
 only by itself, but also power to penetrate 
 and exist within all things, even in the 
 midst of corporeal worlds. And to ethe 
 gave I dominion over both atmospherea 
 and corpor. 
 
 In the All Highest places created I the 
 etherean worlds, and I fashioned them of 
 all shapes and sizes, and I made the ethere- 
 an worlds habitable both within and with- 
 out, with entrances and exits, in arches, 
 angles and curves thousands of miles high 
 and wide, and in colors of endless change 
 and brilliancy, and overruled I them with 
 perfect mechanism. To them I gave mo- 
 tions and orbits and courses of their own. 
 Independent made I them and above all 
 other worlds in potency and majesty. Nei- 
 ther created I one etherean world like an- 
 other in size or density or in component 
 parts, but every one differing from another, 
 and with a glory matchless each in its 
 own way. And were a man to travel a 
 million years on one alone, he could not 
 see half its beauty and glory. And the 
 firmament of heaven hath tens of thou- 
 sands of millions of etherean worlds. 
 
 And I made the snowflake and caused 
 it to fall, that man might behold the 
 beauty and glory of its formation. Let 
 the snowflakes stand before your eyes as 
 microscopic patterns of the etherean 
 worlds in high heaven; and ye shall tint 
 them as a rainbow, and people them with 
 countless millions of angels, spotless, pure, 
 holy, and rich in the knowledge of Me and 
 My works, and full of the majesty of My 
 love. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 Man perceived the general foundation 
 of the world, and he prayed that his eyes 
 might be opened for a sign in heaven; and 
 Jehovih answered him, saying: 
 
 The clouds in the air I bring into view 
 suddenly; by different currents of wind 
 make I thus the unseen visible and tangi- 
 
 ble to man's senses. In like manner do I 
 cause etherean currents to bring forth a'ji 
 and ji'ay and nebulae, prior to making cor- 
 poreal worlds. In all the universe have I 
 made the unseen to rule over the seen. 
 Let the formation of the clouds stand in 
 the view of man on Earth, that he may 
 witness the manner of the unseen becom- 
 ing seen. 
 
 Man perceived, and he prayed for a 
 sign of duration, and Jehovih answered 
 him, saying: 
 
 Behold the tree which has sprung up 
 out of the ground and fulfilled its 
 time; it falls, decays and returneth to the 
 earth. But the wind, which thou seest 
 not, never ceaseth to blow. Even so is the 
 comparative duration of all things. Think 
 not, O man, that corporeal things are an- 
 nihilated because they disappear; for as a 
 drop of water evaporates and riseth in the 
 air as unseen vapor, so do all corporeal 
 things, even earth, stones, gold, silver and 
 lead, become as nothing in the firmament 
 of heaven in course of time. 
 
 Things that man seeth, created I with a 
 beginning and an end; but the unseen I 
 made of endless duration. The corporeal 
 man made I belonging to the seen; but the 
 spiritual man made I as one within the 
 unseen and everlasting. 
 
 As the corporeal man beholdeth cor- 
 poreal things, so doth the spiritual man 
 behold spiritual things. As corporeal 
 things are tangible to corporeans, so are 
 es things tangible to the spirits of the 
 dead. 
 
 When I condensed the earth, and 
 it became firm and crusted over, there 
 arose from the earth heat and moisture, 
 But I limited the ascent of the sub- 
 stances going upward, and the boundary 
 of the limit of moisture was as the clouds 
 that float in the air, and the heat was of 
 like ascent. 
 
 Let this be a sign that even as there 
 riseth up from the earth heat and moist- 
 ure, so there are representatives of all 
 things on Earth which have evaporated 
 upward, and all such things rise to the 
 level of the density like unto themselves, 
 every one to its own level, and they 
 take their places in the strata of the vor- 
 tex. These plateaux of spheres surround 
 the whole earth. Some of them are 
 
. CYCLE OF CREATION 
 
 ten miles high, some a thousand, some 
 a hundred thousand or more miles. And 
 all these spheres that rotate and travel with 
 Earth are the atmospherean or lower 
 heavens. 
 
 As I cause water to rise upward as va- 
 por, and take a place in the air above, let 
 it be a sign and testimony of the places 
 in atmospherea whereon dwell the spirits 
 of the lower heaven. As I made a limit to 
 the ascent of the clouds, so made I a limit 
 to the places of the different kinds of sub- 
 stances in atmospherea; the more subtle 
 and potent to the extreme, and the more 
 dense and impotent nearer to the earth. 
 
 According to the condition of these dif- 
 ferent plateaux in atmospherea, whether 
 they be near the earth or high above, so 
 shall the spirit of man take its place in 
 the lower heaven. According to his diet, 
 desires and behavior during his mortal 
 life, so shall he dwell in spirit on the 
 plateau to which he hath adapted himself. 
 For I made the power of attraction mani- 
 fest in all things before man's eyes, that 
 like should attract like. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 Man sought to know the progress of 
 things, and Jehovih answered him, saying: 
 
 Open thine eyes, O man! There is a 
 time of childhood, a time of maturity, a 
 time of old age, and a time of death to all 
 men. Even so is it with all the corporeal 
 worlds I have created. 
 
 First as vapor the vortex carrieth it 
 forth, and as it condenseth, its friction en- 
 gendered heat, and it is molten, becoming 
 as a globe of fire in space. Then it tak- 
 eth its place as a new born world, and I 
 set it in the orbit prepared for it. 
 
 In the next age I bring it into se'mu, 
 for it is ripe for the bringing forth of liv- 
 ing creatures; and I bestow the vegetable 
 and animal kingdoms. Next it entereth 
 ho'tu, for it is past the age of begetting,, 
 even as the living who are in dotage. 
 Next it entereth a'du, and nothing can gen- 
 erate upon it. Then cometh uz, and it is 
 dissolved away into space. Thus create I, 
 and thus dissipate suns, planets, moons 
 and stars. 
 
 My examples are before all men. My 
 witnesses are without number. I raise the 
 
 tree up out of the ground; I give it a time 
 to bring forth fruit; and then barrenness; 
 and then death and dissolution. I prepare 
 the new field with rich soil, bringing forth; 
 and the old field that is exhausted, barren; 
 and so shall man weigh the progress and 
 destiny of a world. 
 
 Let no man marvel because of the size 
 of the mastodon and mammoth, for there 
 was a time for them as there is a time for 
 the infusoria of this day. I have given thee 
 a sign, O man, in the queen of the honey 
 bee. Because of the change of the 
 cell cometh she forth a queen, even 
 from the same manner of germ as the 
 other bees. Be wise, therefore, and re- 
 member that Earth is not in the same 
 place in the firmament as of old. Let this 
 be a testimony to thee of the growth, the 
 change and the travel of Earth. 
 
 Nevertheless, O man, the seen and the 
 unseen are but parts of My person. I am 
 the Unity— the Whole. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 Man perceived the magnitude and glory 
 of the corporeal worlds. He said: How 
 shall I speak of Thy great works, O Je- 
 hovih, and of Thy wisdom and power? I 
 look upon Thy countless suns, moons and 
 stars, spread out over the heavens. For 
 millions of years Thou hast driven them 
 on in the never-ending firmament. Pro- 
 cessions in and out, and round about, of 
 mighty worlds; by Thy breath going forth. 
 
 Tell me, O my Creator, whence came 
 life? This unseen within me that is con- 
 scious of being? Tell me how all the liv- 
 ing came into life. 
 
 Jehovih heard the words of man, and 
 He answered them, saying: 
 
 I caused the jelly-fish and the green 
 scum of water to be permanently coming 
 forth in all ages, that man might compre- 
 hend the age of se'mu, when the earth and 
 the shores by the water, and the waters, 
 also, were covered over with commingled 
 atmosphere and corporeal substance. And 
 by My presence I quickened it into life, 
 and thus made all the living, both vege- 
 tation and animals. Not that se'mu is 
 jelly-fish or the green scum on water; for 
 the earth in this day produceth not se'mu. 
 Nevertheless, the jelly-fish and the green 
 scum of water are relics of the condition 
 
8 
 
 CYCLE OF CREATION 
 
 which existed in that day of Earth, even 
 as the action of frost on glass in making 
 forms of ferns, trees and grasses, is a relic 
 of the manner of the creation of the vege- 
 table kingdom. 
 
 As I have given to females a time to 
 bring forth their young, so gave I to 
 Earth a time for the conception of 
 the living species on the land, in 
 the water and in the air above, and 
 I called the time the age of se'mu. In 
 the time of se'mu I brought the earth into 
 a'ji and ji'ay, and darkness was upon the 
 face of the earth for the space of three 
 thousand years; and yet for another three 
 thousand years, half darkness covered all 
 the land and water. 
 
 And there fell upon the earth condensed 
 nebula in dust and stones and water com- 
 bined, sufficient in some places to 
 cover up the forests I had made. And 
 that which fell was hot like molten iron, 
 and the trees and forests of the valleys 
 were beaten down, and covered up, and 
 burnt to blackness, forming coal, which 
 bears witness of the regions of a'ji, ji'ay 
 and nebulae in the firmament of heaven. 
 
 Because of my presence quickened 
 I into life all that live, or ever have 
 lived. Because I am male and female, 
 even in My likeness, thus made I them. 
 Because I am the power to quicken 
 into life; so, in likeness of Me thus, made I 
 them, and with power to bring forth. Ac- 
 cording to their respective places created 
 I the living; not in pairs only, but in hun- 
 dreds, thousands and millions of pairs. 
 According to their respective places and 
 the light upon se'mu, so quickened I them 
 in their color, adapted to their dwelling 
 places. 
 
 Each and every living thing created I 
 new upon the earth, of a kind each to it- 
 self; and not one living thing created I out 
 of another. As a sign upon the earth, 
 that man in his darkness may not believe 
 that one animal changeth and becometh 
 another, I gave permission for different 
 animals to bring forth a new living ani- 
 mal, which should be unlike either its 
 father or mother, but I caused the new 
 product to be barren. 
 
 And this shall be testimony before 
 all men that I created each and all 
 the living to bring forth after their 
 
 own kind only. And when I bring a new 
 world into the time of se'mu, My presence 
 quickeneth the substance into life. Ac- 
 cording to the locality and the surround- 
 ings, so do I bring forth the different spe- 
 cies; for they are flesh of My flesh and 
 spirit of My spirit. To themselves give I 
 themselves. Nevertheless, they are all 
 members of My person. 
 
 As a testimony to man, behold Earth 
 was once a globe of liquid fire. Nor was 
 there any seed thereon. But in due sea- 
 son I rained down se'mu on the earth; 
 and by virtue of My presence quickened I 
 into life all the living. Without seed quick- 
 ened I the life that is in them. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 When man comprehended the earth he 
 looked upward and beheld that each and 
 everything in the firmament was orderly. 
 Then Jehovih spake, saying: 
 
 As I have shown system in the cor- 
 poreal worlds, know thou, O man, that 
 system prevaileth in the firmament. As a 
 farmer soweth corn in one place, and 
 wheat in another, and flax — everything in 
 a separate place; even so do I store 
 the ingredients of which worlds are 
 made, everything in its place; the substance 
 of the iron in one place, the substance of 
 the stones in another, the substance of the 
 vegetable kingdoms in another, and even 
 so of the substance of the animal kingdom; 
 and the oils and sand; for I have places 
 in the firmament of heaven for all of them. 
 These that thou hast seen are the a'ji and 
 ji'ay and the nebulae; and amidst them in 
 places there is se'mu also. 
 
 Let no man say: Yonder only is hydro- 
 gen, and yonder only oxygen. The divi- 
 sions of the substances of My creations are 
 not as man would make them. All the el- 
 ements are to be found not only in places 
 near at hand, but in distant places also. 
 
 When I drive forth My worlds in the 
 heavens, they gather a sufficiency of all 
 things. So also cometh it to pass that 
 when a corporeal world is yet new 
 and young it is carried forth, not at 
 random, but purnosely, in the regions suit- 
 ed to it. Hence there is a time for se'mu, 
 a time for falling nebulae to bury deep the 
 forests and se'muan beds, to provide coal 
 
CYCLE OF CREATION 
 
 and manure for a time thereafter. So is 
 there a time when the earth passeth a re- 
 gion in the firmament when sand and oil 
 are rained upon it and covered up, and 
 gases bound and sealed up for the coming 
 generations of men. 
 
 CHAPTER VI, 
 
 And man said: Teach thou me, O Je- 
 hovih, how was the beginning of man on 
 Earth? 
 
 Jehovih said: To the tree I gave life. 
 To man I gave life and spirit also. And 
 the spirit I made was separate from the 
 corporeal life. Out of se'mu I made man, 
 and man was but as a tree, but dwelling in 
 darkness and incapable of immortality; 
 and I called him Asu. 
 
 I looked over the wide heavens of 
 etherea, and I saw countless millions of 
 spirits of the dead, that died in infancy 
 on other corporeal worlds. I spoke in the 
 firmament. And there came in answer to 
 the sound of My voice, myriads of angels 
 from the earth's roadway in etherea where 
 Earth traveled. I said to them: Behold, a 
 new world have I created. Come ye and 
 enjoy it. Yea, ye shall learn from it how 
 it was with other worlds in ages past. 
 
 There came to the new Earth millions 
 of angels from etherea; who had never 
 fulfilled a corporeal life, having died in in- 
 fancy, and these angels comprehended not 
 procreation nor corporeal life. And I said: 
 Go and deliver Asu from darkness, for he 
 shall also rise in spirit to inherit My ether- 
 ean worlds. 
 
 And now was Earth in the latter 
 days of se'mu, and the angels could readily 
 take on corporeal bodies for themselves. 
 Out of the elements of the earth clothed 
 they themselves, by force of their wills, 
 with flesh and bones. By the side of the 
 Asuans took they on corporeal forms. 
 
 And I said: Go forth and partake of all 
 that is on Earth; but if you heed the voice 
 of corpor you will become bound to your 
 offspring and as if dead to the heavens 
 whence ye came. 
 
 But those who had never learned cor- 
 poreal things, being imperfect in wisdom, 
 comprehended not My words, and they 
 dwelt with the Asuans, and there was born 
 of the first race, Asu, a new race, capable 
 
 of immortality; and I took the earth out 
 of the travail of se'mu, and the angels gave 
 up their corporeal bodies. And I said: 
 
 From this time forth on Earth it shall 
 be a crime for angels to cohabit with mor- 
 tals. Because ye have raised up such as 
 shall be joint heirs in heaven, ye shall 
 tread the earth with your feet, and walk 
 by the side of the new born, being guar- 
 dian angels over them, for they are of 
 your own flesh and kin. 
 
 Fruit of your seed have I quickened 
 with My spirit, and man shall come forth 
 with a birth-right to My etherean worlds. 
 As I have quickened the seed of the first- 
 born, so will I quicken all seed to the end 
 of Earth. And each and every man 
 child and woman-child born into life, will 
 I quicken with a new spirit which shall 
 proceed out of Me at the time of concep- 
 tion. As the corporeal earth passeth away, 
 so shall pass away the race of Asu. Nei- 
 ther will I give to any spirit of the 
 higher or lower heavens power to en- 
 ter a womb, or a fetus of a womb, and be 
 born again. 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 Jehovih said: As I bequeathed to 
 Earth a time for creating the living and a 
 time for angels to come and partake of 
 the first fruits of mortality, so shall man 
 at certain times and seasons receive testi- 
 mony from My hosts in heaven. 
 
 As a sign to the inhabitants of the earth 
 that they may comprehend dan'ha in the 
 firmament of heaven, I caused Earth and 
 the family of the sun to travel in an orbit, 
 the circuit of which requireth them four 
 million seven hundred thousand years. 
 And I placed etherean lights at distances 
 of three thousand years in the line of the 
 orbit, at which places, as Earth passeth 
 through, angels from etherea come into its 
 corporeal presence. As ambassadors they 
 come, in companies of hundreds and thou- 
 sands, and tens of thousands, and these are 
 called the etherean hosts of the Most High. 
 Not as single individuals come they; not 
 for a single individual mortal come they. 
 
 And I gave this sign to man on Earth: 
 In the beginning of the light of dan'ha the 
 spirits of the newly dead shall have power 
 to take upon themselves the semblance of 
 corporeal bodies, and appear and talk face. 
 
10 
 
 CYCLE OF CREATION 
 
 to face with mortals. Every three thou- 
 sand years I gave this sign on Earth, that 
 those who learned the powers and capaci- 
 ties of such familiar spirits might bear tes- 
 timony in regard to the origin of man on 
 Earth. 
 
 And when it shall come to pass in any 
 of the times of dan'ha, that these signs are 
 manifest, man shall know that the hosts of 
 the Most High are visiting Earth. Let 
 him who will become wise, enumerate the 
 great lights of my solar serpent, for in 
 such times I set aside things that are old, 
 and establish My chosen anew. 
 
 In the time of Earth when man was 
 brought forth from mortal to immortal 
 life, the Earth passed beyond se'mu, and 
 the angels of heaven remained with cor- 
 poreal man, but not in the semblance of 
 mortals, but as spirits; and by virtue of 
 their presence, strove to make man wise 
 and upright. Upon the earth the number 
 of such angels was millions. To these 
 angels I spake, saying: 
 
 Behold, the work ye have taken in 
 hand. Ye now have sons and daugh- 
 ters on the earth. By your love to them 
 are ye become bound spirits of the lower 
 heaven. Until ye redeem them in wisdom 
 and power even to the sixth generation, ye 
 shall not again arise and inherit My eman- 
 cipated heavens. To which end ye shall 
 become co-workers with one another in 
 system and order. In My name shall ye 
 become an organic body in the heaven of 
 the earth, or lower heaven. 
 
 And I will allot unto you a Chief, who 
 is wise in experience in founding heavenly 
 kingdoms; and he shall appoint, from 
 amongst you, officers and mesengers and 
 ashars, and asaphs, and es'enaurs, and ye 
 shall be numbered and apportioned unto 
 your labor and places like unto My lower 
 heavens on other worlds. And he who is 
 Chief shall be called God of Earth. 
 
 And God shall have a Council and 
 throne within his heavenly city; and the 
 place shall be called Hored, because it is 
 the first heavenly kingdom on Earth. 
 And God shall rule on the throne for it is 
 his; and the Council shall rule with him. 
 In My name shall they have dominion over 
 angels and mortals belonging to Earth. 
 
 And God shall appoint Chiefs under him 
 who shall go down and dwell on the earth 
 
 with mortals; and such Chiefs' labor shall 
 be with mortals for their resurrection. And 
 these Chiefs shall be called Lords, for they 
 are Gods of land, which is the lowest rank 
 of My commissioned Gods. 
 
 And God and his Lords shall have do- 
 minion from two hundred years to a thou- 
 sand or more years; but never more than 
 three thousand years. According to the re- 
 gions of dan into which I bring Earth, 
 so shall be the terms of the office of My 
 Gods and My Lords. And God and his 
 Lords shall raise up officers to be their 
 successors. By him and them shall they 
 be appointed and crowned in My name. 
 
 At the termination of the dominion of 
 My God and his Lords they shall gather 
 together in these My bound heavens, all 
 such angels as have been prepared in wis- 
 dom and strength for resurrection to My 
 emancipated heavens. And these angels 
 shall be called Brides and Bridegrooms to 
 Jehovih. And to God and his Lords, with 
 the Brides and Bridegrooms, I will send 
 down ships from etherea in the time of dan. 
 By My etherean Gods and Goddesses shall 
 the ships descend to these heavens, and re- 
 ceive God and his Lords with the Brides 
 and Bridegrooms, and carry them up to 
 the exalted regions I have prepared for 
 them. And all such as ascend shall be 
 called a Harvest unto Me through My God 
 and Lords. 
 
 And the time of My harvests shall be 
 according to each dan, which is two hun- 
 dred, four hundred, six hundred and five 
 hundred years. And these shall be called 
 My lesser cycles, because they are the 
 times of the tables of prophecy which I 
 give unto My chosen. But at no other 
 times, nor in any other way, shall My Har- 
 vests ascend to My emancipated worlds in 
 etherea. Seven dans have I created for 
 each and every dan'ha. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 The angels understood the command- 
 ments of Jehovih according to their knowl- 
 edge in the etherean heavens; having 
 died in infancy, and having matured in the 
 es worlds; but they understood not the 
 Creator according to the practice of the 
 lower heavens. 
 
CYCLE OF CREATION 
 
 11 
 
 Jehovih said: I condemn ye not because 
 ye have become joint procreators with the 
 Asuans; for ye have done two services 
 unto Me, which are to teach yourselves 
 corporeal things, that ye may understand 
 and sympathize with corporeans, and sec- 
 ondly, because ye have caused Earth to 
 become peopled with such as are capable 
 of immortality. 
 
 Behold ye now what shall happen. 
 Such as are of your flesh and kin who 
 cohabit together, shall rise in wisdom 
 and virtue; but such of them as co- 
 habit with the Asuans will bring forth heirs 
 in the descending grade of life. The first 
 shall bring forth heirs unto everlasting life; 
 but the second shall bring forth heirs that 
 shall go out in darkness. Of which mat- 
 ters your God and Lords will instruct you, 
 that ye may, by inspiration and otherwise, 
 learn to control the behavior of mortals 
 unto everlasting life. And that these la- 
 bors be not too severe upon you, I created 
 the dans and the dan'has in the firmament, 
 wherein ye may be relieved from the watch 
 by other angels coming to exchange with 
 you. 
 
 This also do I put upon you: That to 
 rule over mortals to virtue, by your own 
 wills governing them in all things, is con- 
 trary to My commandments. For what 
 honor hath any man if made to do a thing? 
 But ye shall give mortals of My light, 
 leaving them to choose. Better is it for 
 them to suffer some than to grow up in 
 ignorance of the stings of disobedience. 
 
 Behold, I make this a willing service 
 on your part. Because ye have bound 
 your affections on Earth to your kin, 
 ye willingly become guardian angels over 
 mortals. Yet I make not a separate law 
 unto you. As it is with wou, so shall it 
 be with the spirits of these mortals when 
 they are born into the es world. They will 
 also desire to become guardian angels 
 over their mortal kin. But these spirits, 
 never having known My higher heavens, 
 will be unsuitable for the office of ashars. 
 They would be but as the blind leading the 
 blind. 
 
 To prevent which, God and his Lords 
 shall provide these spirits in the first res- 
 urrection with places to dwell in; and with 
 occupations and opportunities for educa- 
 tion. For I desire them not to remain 
 
 bound to Earth, but to rise up and in- 
 herit My etherean worlds. And in this 
 also shall ye be discreet in governing 
 them, giving them the light of My heavens 
 with some liberty to choose and to perfect 
 themselves. Otherwise, they would only 
 be slaves in heaven. According to their 
 weakness or strength, so shall ye provide 
 for these new spirits entering My es world. 
 
 Therefore such of you as are appointed 
 by My God and My Lords as guardians 
 over mortals shall be called ashars, and ye 
 shall report to your respective Lords ac- 
 cording to the sections of the earth where 
 ye may be. Of many watches shall be the 
 ashars. 
 
 And such of you as are appointed to 
 receive the spirits of the dead into heaven 
 shall be called asaphs and ye shall report 
 to your respective Lords. 
 
 And the ashars shall make a record of 
 every mortal, of the grade of his wisdom 
 and good works; and when a mortal dies, 
 and his spirit is delivered to the asaphs, the 
 record shall be delivered with him ; and the 
 asaph receiving, shall deliver such spirit, 
 with the record, into such place in these 
 heavens as is adapted to his grade, where 
 he shall be put to labor and to school, ac- 
 cording to the place of the resurrections 
 which I created. 
 
 And ye shall thus become organic in 
 heaven, with teachers and physicians; and 
 with capitals, cities and provinces; and 
 with hospitals, nurseries, schools and fac- 
 tories; even so shall ye ultimately inspire 
 man on the earth to the same things. 
 
 And mortals that are raised up to do- 
 minion over mortals shall be called kings 
 and emperors. As My Gods and Lords 
 are called My Sons, so shall kings and em- 
 perors be called sons of God. Through 
 him shall they be raised up to their places, 
 and given dominion unto My glory. 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 Jehovih said: And God shall cause a 
 record to be kept in heaven, of his domin- 
 ions and his Lords. And he and they shall 
 enjoin it upon their successors forever to 
 keep a like record. And in the times of 
 My harvest a copy of these records shall 
 be taken up to My etherean heavens, and 
 filed with My Orian Chiefs and Archan- 
 
12 
 
 CYCLE OF CREATION 
 
 gels in the roadway of the travel of the 
 great solar serpent, for their deliberation 
 as to the progress and management of the 
 inhabitants of Earth and her heavens. 
 
 Think not, O ye angels, that the resur- 
 rection of your heirs, and their descendants 
 that come up out of Earth, is an easy 
 matter and of steady progress, devoid of 
 mishaps and woeful darkness. 
 
 The angels under you shall become at 
 times rebellious and defiant; disregarding 
 your laws and decrees; and they shall de- 
 sert your heavenly places and go down to 
 the earth in millions and hundreds of mill- 
 ions. And they shall drive away the 
 ashars, and then assume guardianship 
 over mortals. But they shall develop no 
 righteousness, but they will inspire mortals 
 to war and destruction. And these angels 
 will themselves take to war and evil on 
 every hand within the place of your hea- 
 vens. With the foul gases of atmospherea 
 shall they make weapons of war and places 
 of torment. With these elements shall they 
 make suffocating hells in order to cast 
 one another in chaos. 
 
 And mortals who shall be slain in war, 
 shall be born in spirit in chaos on the bat- 
 tlefields; in chaos shall such spirits enter 
 the es world. And they shall not know 
 that they are dead (as to earth life), but 
 shall still keep fighting right and left. And 
 enemy shall take enemy in these heavens, 
 and cast them in places of torment which 
 they shall have built, and they shall not 
 know peace nor wisdom. 
 
 And the work of your heavens shall be- 
 come as nothing. And ye shall turn to, go- 
 ing about delivering hells and the spirits 
 in chaos. And your labor shall be ex- 
 haustive. Verily shall ye cry out because 
 ye came and peopled Earth. 
 
 This also have I created possible: For 
 both angels and mortals shall learn to know 
 the elements of the heavens and the earth, 
 and to know the trials and misfortunes of 
 love. Nor have I made wisdom possible 
 unto any man or angel that knoweth not 
 My elements, and the extremes of evil and 
 good which I created. 
 
 But in the times of great darkness which 
 shall come upon Earth and these heavens, 
 I will bring the earth into dan'ha; and My 
 ethereans shall come in My name and de- 
 liver them. And again for another cycle 
 
 shall they be left with the lessons given 
 unto them; but they shall fall again and 
 again in course of time. But again will I 
 deliver them. Through My Gods and God- 
 desses will I cause them to comprehend 
 the magnitude of My creation. 
 
 As ye travel from heaven to heaven in 
 atmospherean ships, even so shall ye in- 
 spire mortals to build corporeal ships and 
 sail across the oceans, that the inhabitants 
 of different divisions of the earth may be- 
 come known to one another. 
 
 And when the inhabitation of the earth 
 shall be completed, and the nations shall 
 have established civil communion around 
 from east to west, in that same time will I 
 bring the earth into the Kosmon Era, and 
 My angel ambassadors, Gods and God- 
 desses, shall render up the records of these 
 heavenly kingdoms. Through them will I 
 reveal unto mortals the creation of My 
 worlds, and the history and dominion of 
 My Gods and Lords on Earth, even from 
 this day down to the time of kosmon. 
 
 A time shall come when Earth shall 
 travel in the roadway of the firmament, and 
 so great a light will be thereon, that its 
 vortex shall burst, even as a whirlwind 
 bursteth, and the whole world shall be 
 scattered and gone as if nothing had been. 
 But ere that time cometh My etherean 
 hosts shall have redeemed man from dark- 
 ness. Nor shall the inhabitants of Earth 
 marry, for the time of begetting will be 
 at an end, and man shall become extinct. 
 The red star, Earth, will have fulfilled its 
 labors, and its services shall be no more. 
 The vortex of the sun shall be round, and 
 the body of the great serpent coiled up. In 
 the place where Earth was, shall some of 
 my far-off worlds come and fulfill the 
 labor allotted to them. And the atmos- 
 phereans who have not been redeemed 
 from darkness in that day shall alight on 
 the new world and also fulfill their labor. 
 
 And Jehovih caused the angels of at- 
 mospherea to asemble together and organ- 
 ize the first kingdom of the heaven on the 
 earth. 
 
 And the record of the great serpent 
 showed the firmament of Tem'yi in the 
 third circuit of c'work'um and dan'ha 
 twenty-four. 
 
 Thus ended the inorganic habitation of 
 Earth and her atmospherea. 
 
Cycle of Sethantes 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 Jehovih called the angels of atmospher- 
 ea to assemble together and organize the 
 first kingdom of the heaven of the earth. 
 And the place was called Hored, because 
 it was the first organic abiding place of the 
 first God of this world. And Hored was 
 situated above the mountains of Aotan in 
 Ughoqui, to the eastward of Ul, of that 
 country called the continent of Pan. 
 
 And the Archangel Sethantes was the 
 wisest of them all, and he said unto them: 
 
 Behold, we have come from far-off hea- 
 vens. By the Voice of Jehovih came we to 
 partake of the glory of the red star, 
 Earth. Jehovih said unto us: Come ye 
 and enjoy the new world I have created. 
 And many obeyed the voice of corpor and 
 became bound by the tie of life which is in 
 the blood. 
 
 And the Voice of Jehovih came to me, 
 saying: Sethantes, My Son, behold, I gave 
 into thy charge in My etherean heavens 
 millions of angels, and thou hast brought 
 them to Earth, and they have fallen 
 from their high estate. Go thou, and de- 
 liver them. 
 
 And I said: What shall I do? And Je- 
 hovih said: Bring thy angel hosts to Hor- 
 ed, for there will I crown thee God of 
 Earth for the resurrection of angels and 
 mortals. And it shall be a heavenly 
 kingdom from this time forth to the end 
 of the world. For it is the time of the arc 
 of Wan, and I will bring from etherea My 
 high raised Goddess, Etisyai, chief factor 
 of Harmuts, and she shall crown thee in 
 My name, God of Earth. 
 
 God said: When I had thus spoken in 
 Hored before the angels of heaven, a great 
 light, like a sun, was seen descending from 
 the firmament above. And I commanded 
 my es'enaurs to chant in praise of Jehovih 
 and His works. 
 
 Meanwhile I had the angels of Hored 
 numbered, and there were of them twenty- 
 seven million six hundred thousand, and 
 these were the same who were on an ex- 
 
 cursion in my charge when the Voice of 
 Jehovih commanded us to visit Earth. 
 
 The light above us descended fast to- 
 ward us; the ship of fire came nearer 
 and nearer, till we saw that it was wider far 
 than the place of Hored and all my angel 
 hosts. And when it had descended 
 to the plateau of Hored there came 
 forth out of the ship one million Archan- 
 gels, from the arc of Wan in the Hosts of 
 A'ji, in the orbit of Fow'sang in etherea, 
 and they bore regalia and crowns from the 
 Orian Chief of Harmuts. Foremost of the 
 Archangels was Etisyai, and her brother 
 Ya'tiahaga, commissioners from the ether- 
 ean heavens. 
 
 When they came near me, Etisyai gave 
 the sign of Jehovih's name, greeting and 
 saying: All hail! In Jehovih's name, and 
 in the love of Harmuts, Orian Chief, we 
 come to greet and crown thee first God of 
 the lower heaven belonging to the corpor- 
 eal earth. 
 
 The Archangels then came forward, sa- 
 luting, and Etisyai said: In Thy name, O 
 Jehovih, I found here a throne. 
 
 And she caused to rise the form and 
 substance thereof; then I said: All hail, O 
 emissaries of Harmuts! Come, Etisyai, 
 thou and thy brother, honor my throne in 
 Great Jehovih's name! 
 
 And she ascended thereon, and Ya'- 
 tiahaga with her. And the other Arch- 
 angels formed a crescent in front of 
 the throne, all of them bearing crowns or 
 diadems, but they stood upright. And now 
 the angel hosts of Sethantes took their 
 places, that they might witness the testi- 
 mony of Jehovih's commission, but the 
 lights from the columns of fire, brilliant in 
 all colors, shades and tints, bafHed many of 
 them from seeing plainly. When all things 
 were in readiness, Etisyai, standing erect 
 and brilliant like a star, raised her right 
 hand, saying: 
 
 Jehovih, All Wise and Powerful! In 
 Thy name this, Thy son, I crown God! 
 From the Orian Chief Harmuts, raised to 
 the rank of God, and by Thee, O Jehovm, 
 
14 
 
 CYCLE OF SETHANTES 
 
 ordained! Henceforth to be known for- 
 ever in Thy emancipated heavens as Thy 
 Son. Peace, wisdom, love, power. 
 
 And now with her left hand she raised 
 high the crown, so that all might see and 
 bear witness, and again giving the sign of 
 Jehovih's name above the crown, where- 
 from a flame of light shot forth brilliantly, 
 she placed the crown on God's head, say- 
 ing: 
 
 Arise, O my Son, Thou Son of Jehovih! 
 Instantly there arose from the millions of 
 souls one universal shout: All hail, O Son 
 of Jehovih. And God rose up, having the 
 crown on his head, and the people cheered 
 him heartily, for he was well beloved. 
 
 Etisyai said: Bring forth thy five chief 
 Lords, that I may crown them also. God 
 then caused the five chief Lords whom he 
 had selected to sit at the foot of the throne. 
 Again Etisyai raised her right hand, say- 
 ing: 
 
 O Jehovih! Almighty! From Whom 
 all glories emanate! In Thy name, these 
 Thy Sons, I crown, Lords of Earth, and 
 of the waters of the earth! From the Orian 
 Chief Harmuts! By my commission do I 
 raise them to the rank of Lords for king- 
 doms of heaven! Peace, wisdom, love, 
 power. 
 
 Then Etisyai took the crowns, which 
 were handed her by the other Archangels, 
 and placed them on the heads of the Lords, 
 saying: 
 
 Arise, O my Lords, and be ye Lords of 
 Jehovih for His glory! And be ye Lords 
 of God, having dominion over the earth 
 and the waters of the earth, in love, wis- 
 dom and power. Amen! 
 
 The Lords rose up, having on their 
 heads the crowns of Lords, and again the 
 multitude saluted with great cheering. 
 When the applause ceased, Etisyai said: 
 
 My God and My Lords, give now the 
 sign of Jehovihs' name, that His glory 
 may be fulfilled. For this was the oath of 
 office. And God and his Lords saluted Je- 
 hovih before the hosts of heaven. And 
 they stood apart a little distance, and Et- 
 isyai said: 
 
 Behold the All Light, Jehovih, encom- 
 passeth me. My voice shall be His Voice. 
 By the glory of faith in Him am I one with 
 the Father. 
 
 And a fleece of golden hue descended 
 from above and encompassed Etisyai 
 around about, and she was like a central 
 star with rays of light emanating. She was 
 entranced by Jehovih. Through her the 
 Creator spoke, saying: 
 
 My Son, God, I brought thee forth out 
 of corpor, quickened into life everlasting. 
 By faith I inspired thee to do whatsoever 
 thou hast done. Faith gave I unto thee, as 
 the tree whereon all perfection is the fruit. 
 By that faith within man that nurtureth 
 the I Am within himself unto perfection, 
 becometh he My son, doing by virtue of 
 My presence. According to thy wisdom 
 and love have I given thee strength; and by 
 thy strength raised thee up. Behold, this 
 day have I given thee a kingdom in at- 
 mospherea, and made thee God before all 
 the kingdoms of heaven. This place shall 
 be thy place and Mine also. Here shalt 
 thou dispense laws in wisdom, and appoint 
 officers in My name and by virtue of My 
 power. And thy kingdom shall be like 
 two kingdoms; one here with the hosts of 
 heaven, and one on the earth with these thy 
 Lords. For thine is the judgment seat and 
 thou art the creator of order over the 
 whole earth. Stretch forth thy hand, My 
 Son, and clothe thyself in the golden flece. 
 
 God made the sign, and then raised his 
 hands upward, saying: Jehovih! Jehovih! 
 By Thy command I call upon Thee to ar- 
 ray me in Thy golden fleece! Behold I am 
 Thy Son. 
 
 And the Archangels tossed up the rai- 
 ment and regalia they had brought from 
 their etherean arc in a'ji, and by the faith 
 that was in God, the substance flew to him 
 and encompassed him in raiment of the 
 upper heaven. 
 
 Then Jehovih spake to the Lords, say- 
 ing: As God hath built a kingdom in 
 Hored, and reigneth over this heaven, and 
 over you and your helpmates, so shall you 
 build kingdoms on the earth, and ye shall 
 rule over mortals in My name, teaching 
 them of Me and My everlasting kingdoms 
 in the firmament above. In testimony of 
 My Voice receive ye this raiment of silver 
 and gold from My archangels. 
 
 The Archangels then draped the Lords 
 in shining raiment. And Etisyai came 
 down from the throne still entranced, say- 
 ing: 
 
CYCLE OF SETH ANTES 
 
 15 
 
 Though My daughter Etisyai will rise 
 up in a flame of fire, yet will I, even Jeho- 
 vih, abide with thee, O God, and with ye, 
 My Lords, now and forever! And then 
 Etisyai took God's hand and led him to 
 the center of the throne, saying: Sit thou 
 on this throne, for it is thy Father's king- 
 dom in the lower heaven of the earth! 
 
 Then God sat down, the entrancement 
 departed from Etisyai, and the Light of 
 Jehovih went and settled upon God and 
 the Lords. But Etisyai sat down at the 
 foot of the throne, and thereupon all the 
 Archangels sat down also. 
 
 God said: Behold, she that is greatest 
 maketh herself least of all. Arise, O 
 Daughter of Jehovih, and enjoy my king- 
 dom, for it is Jehovih's also. And God 
 came down from the throne and took Etis- 
 yai's hand, and she rose up, whereupon 
 God proclaimed the freedom of the hour. 
 Thus was established the first throne of 
 God in these heavens. And now all the 
 hosts mingled together, angels and Arch- 
 angels, joyfully. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 When the hour was ended, God again 
 ascended the throne, and the marshals 
 raised the signals of order, and the Arch- 
 angels went and stood in a crescent in 
 front of the throne. Etisyai sat at the feet 
 of God, and the splendor of her form, un- 
 adorned, save with white and yellow drap- 
 ery, shone through all the talents Jehovih 
 had given her — the perfection of purity, 
 wisdom and love — the like of which only 
 Gods had looked upon. 
 
 God said: In Thy name, O Jehovih, do 
 I now found the session of Thy kingdom 
 in the lower heaven. As long as man and 
 woman shall bring forth heirs upon Earth 
 unto Thee, this kingdom shall not cease 
 to glorify Thee. Let the Lords approach 
 the throne. The es'enaurs now sang, and 
 in the meantime the marshals and escorts 
 conducted the Lords before the throne. 
 When they were in order, the music 
 ceased, and God said: 
 
 Five great divisions of the earth there 
 are, and I have ordained ye the five Lords 
 thereof in Jehovih's name. According to 
 the number of inhabitants on the earth's 
 divisions, and your relative rank before 
 
 heaven have I placed you. When ye have 
 seated yourselves in your respective king- 
 doms, you shall have each twelve messen- 
 gers, whose duties shall be betwixt you 
 and me. Choose ye, therefore, your mes- 
 sengers, this hour, that ere the resurrec- 
 tion of the Archangels they may be con- 
 firmed and their registry borne to heaven 
 above. The Lords chose their messengers, 
 and they were confirmed in the name of 
 Jehovih, and the swift messengers, who 
 ply with the upper heavens, made a record 
 of their names and places. Thereupon God 
 said to them: 
 
 According to your talents have you 
 been chosen. According to your excellence 
 will you be promoted to wider fields of la- 
 bor. May the love, wisdom and power of 
 Jehovih be with you all. Amen. 
 
 And now Etisyai signified that her time 
 of departure had arrived. God came down 
 from the judgment seat, and standing one 
 moment in sorrow, reached forth and took 
 Etisyai's hand, saying: 
 
 Arise, O Daughter of Jehovih, and go 
 thy way! 
 
 Etisyai rose up and pointing upward, 
 said: My home is in the arc of Wan. Jeho- 
 vih dwelleth with thee and me. My swift 
 messengers shall come to thee at times. 
 My love will abide with thee and thy Lords, 
 and the harvest of thy resurrection. In 
 Jehovih's name, farewell! 
 
 Etisyai then walked to the ship of fire; 
 but ere she entered she turned and took 
 one more look at the hosts of Hored, and 
 then, stripping from the frames, luminous 
 drapery, cast it playfully over the es'enaurs, 
 and quickly disappeared in the light. The 
 es'enaurs chanted, and the hosts of Arch- 
 angels joined in with them, and in that 
 same moment of time the ship began to 
 rise, and it was as thousands of columns 
 of fire surrounding one majestic column, 
 and the whole circle rising in spiral form, 
 turning and rising, rising and turning. 
 And when it was a little way up, it seemed 
 like an ascending sun; and then higher 
 and higher, like a far-off star, and then it 
 passed beyond the vision of the angels of 
 Hored. 
 
 When order was proclaimed, the All 
 Light began to gather around about the 
 throne, covering over God and the Lords. 
 Jehovih, through God, said: 
 
16 
 
 CYCLE OF SETHANTES 
 
 Hear ye, for I abide also with these My 
 Lords of the hosts of heaven. 
 
 The Lords said: What shall we do? 
 And Jehovih answered: 
 
 Summon all the angels to pass before 
 the throne of God, one by one, that I may 
 judge them. For as many as dwelt on any 
 of my corporeal worlds of the fifth of the 
 second rate shall abide in the kingdom of 
 Hored, and their labor shall be with the 
 es'yans only. But all of the full of the first 
 rate shall abide in the kingdoms of My 
 Lords, and their labor shall be with mor- 
 tals on earth. 
 
 Then the marshals arranged the an- 
 gels, and they passed in front of the throne. 
 And those destined for labor in atmospher- 
 ea only, turned one way, and those for the 
 earth as ministering angels, turned the 
 other way. And when they had all passed, 
 they were correctly divided according to 
 Jehovih's commandment. 
 
 God said: Hear me, O ye Lords. Take 
 your laborers and repair to your respective 
 places on the divisions of the earth, and the 
 waters of the earth. And ye shall be Lords 
 with me, your God, for the glory of Je- 
 hovih. Whatsoever ye do on the earth will 
 I ratify in heaven. Whomsoever ye de- 
 liver from the earth will I receive in hea- 
 ven. As ye shape and build up mortal 
 man, delivering his spirit into my kingdom, 
 so will I receive him. That your kingdoms 
 may accord with me and mine, I will give 
 you messengers sufficient, and they shall 
 pass daily betwixt us. According to their 
 proficiency and power to pass from place 
 to place, so have I chosen them. 
 
 Let a record be kept within your own 
 kingdoms, and these records shall be your 
 own, to be carried upward with you in the 
 next resurrection to etherea. And yet, ye 
 shall have a record jointly with me, sep- 
 arate from your own record, pertaining to 
 your kingdom's relation with mine. 
 
 When mortals die and are born in spir- 
 it, ye shall enter them in your records as 
 es'yans. And for these es'yans ye shall pro- 
 vide temporary abodes, where they shall 
 tarry, some for a few days, and some for 
 the space of one year or more. Of their 
 numbers and conditions ye shall inform me 
 through the messengers, and I will send 
 ships to bring them to my kingdom. Ye 
 shall appoint asaphs, whose office it shall 
 be to receive es'yans from the ashars. 
 
 Whilst a mortal is alive on the earth, 
 the ashars shall abide with him, guarding 
 him in Jehovih's name. And when he dies 
 the ashar shall deliver the es'yan to the 
 asaph, saying: In Jehovih's name receive 
 this new born spirit. He was my protege; 
 for the good or evil in him charge thou me. 
 And the ashar shall deliver up a record of 
 the mortal life of the es'yan, and the rec- 
 ord shall be kept within your own king- 
 doms. And the asaph shall take the es'- 
 yan saying: In Jehovih's name receive I 
 this new born spirit. He shall then take 
 the es'yan to the place provided to receive 
 it, where it will have nurses and attend- 
 ants acording to its requirements. 
 
 When ships come to your kingdoms 
 the asaphs shall deliver all the es'yans they 
 have received, and bring them to my place 
 in heaven. When God ended, the Lords 
 answered: 
 
 We will labor with thee for the glory of 
 Jehovih. 
 
 God said: To each of you have I given 
 a great division of the earth, and each di- 
 vision shall be named after you. 
 
 This, then, was the rank assigned: Wha- 
 ga, Jud, Thouri, Vohu and Dis; and the 
 lands were called after the names of the 
 Lords and so entered in the books of hea- 
 ven in Hored. 
 
 When all was finished, the Lords came 
 and sat at the foot of the throne, and the 
 es'enaurs chanted a hymn of praise to Je- 
 hovih, and the entire multitude joined 
 therein. When the hymn was ended God 
 rose up, standing midst a sea of light, and 
 raising up both hands, said: O Jehovih, 
 almighty and everlasting. Help us estab- 
 lish this Thy kingdom for Thy glory. 
 
 Then making the sign of Jehovih's 
 name with his right hand, he came down 
 to the foot of the throne, and taking the 
 hand of Whaga, Lord of Whaga, he said: 
 Arise, my son, and go thy way, and Jeho- 
 vih will bless thee. Whaga rose up and 
 stood aside, and then in like manner God 
 raised the other four Lords, and they stood 
 aside also. 
 
 The marshals filed past the throne, sa- 
 luting, and after them the Lords, saluting 
 also; then came the asaphs, and lastly the 
 ashars; and the procession passed be- 
 tween the pillars of fire with which God's 
 laborers had ornamented Hored. 
 
CYCLE SETHANTES 
 
 17 
 
 This was the beginning of the reign of 
 the Lords on Earth. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 And God appointed angel surveyors, to 
 survey the earth and her atmospherea; and 
 astronomers to note the place of the stars; 
 enumerators to number the inhabitants of 
 the earth and atmospherea, to grade them 
 and apportion their places; nurses and 
 physicians to receive the es'yans; builders 
 of heavenly mansions; weavers of fabrics 
 for covering the new born, the es'yans; 
 and builders of heavenly ships for carrying 
 the inhabitants from place to place. And 
 God appointed unto all of these, officers 
 and teachers according to grade. And when 
 God had completed his appointments, the 
 people were apportioned in heaven, every 
 one to his place, to begin the work allot- 
 ted to them. And God called the asaphs 
 and said unto them: 
 
 Go ye down to the earth, and bring me 
 the fruit of the first resurrection. 
 
 The asaphs said: Thy will is our will, 
 but what meanest thou by the fruit of the 
 first resurrection? 
 
 God said: The spirits of the dead. 
 
 The asaphs said: The spirits of the 
 dead? Who are they? 
 
 God said: When a spirit cometh forth 
 from his corporeal body, this shall be 
 called death. 
 
 The asaphs said: Who, then, are the 
 spirits of death? 
 
 And God answered them, saying: O ye 
 that died in infancy, how can ye learn cor- 
 poreal things? Go ye then to my Lord 
 Whaga, and he will show you. 
 
 The asaphs departed and went down to 
 the earth, and the Lord through the ash- 
 ars, delivered unto the asaphs five hun- 
 dred es'yans, and they brought them to 
 Hored, before the throne of God. And 
 God said unto them: Who are these? 
 
 The asaphs said: These are the fruit 
 of the first resurrection. Behold, we know 
 now the beginning and the end of mortal- 
 ity. The earth body of these es'yans was 
 but a womb from which they are now de- 
 livered. 
 
 God said: Even so. Take ye these es'- 
 yans and feed and clothe them, for this is 
 your labor. 
 
 The asaphs answered: Alas, we have 
 tried them with all manner of food on 
 which we ourselves subsist, but they will 
 not eat. 
 
 God said: O ye innocents. You feed 
 on etherean food; these es'yans must have 
 atmospherean food. 
 
 The asaphs then departed, taking the 
 es'yans with them. But after a time they 
 returned to God, saying: 
 
 Behold, O God, we have gathered the 
 atmospherea of trees of all kinds, and of 
 seeds and plants that grow on the earth, 
 all most beautiful to our senses, and we 
 gave these to the es'yans, but lo, they will 
 not eat. Being alarmed, we again hasten- 
 ed to thee. 
 
 God said: O ye of little wisdom, know- 
 ing so much of heaven and so little of 
 earth. Go back to the place whence ye 
 brought these es'yans, and learn what 
 manner of food they subsisted on in mortal 
 life. 
 
 The asaphs went back with all haste 
 to learn in reference to the food. And 
 again they came before God, saying: 
 
 What shall we do, O God? Behold 
 these es'yans whilst in mortality feasted 
 on fish and worms. How can we bring 
 them the atmospherean part of these 
 things? 
 
 God said: Even the last time ye were 
 present ye said ye had gathered of the at- 
 mospherea of trees, and seeds and plants 
 growing out of the earth. Why, then, can- 
 not ye gather of the atmospherea of fish 
 and worms? 
 
 The asaphs said: Alas, this difference 
 have we observed: The trees, and plants 
 and fruits emit delightful atmospheres, most 
 nutritious to the spirit, but that which is 
 emitted from the living fish and living 
 worm is foul smelling, being but the sweat 
 and dead substance. What, then, shall we 
 do? 
 
 God said: Go ye to the place where 
 mortals kill fish and worms, and in the 
 same time that mortals tear these things 
 with their teeth, snatch from their hands 
 and mouths the atmospherean part thereof, 
 and give that to the es'yans. But remem- 
 ber, that little by little ye shall teach them 
 to live on other kinds of food. And as ye 
 do by these es'yans, do ye also in after 
 
18 
 
 CYCLE OF SETHANTES 
 
 time to others, for what men subsist on in 
 corporeal life, is entailed on their spirit 
 for a space of time after entering atmos- 
 pherea; and of like substance shall they be 
 fed spiritually. The asaphs then departed. 
 The Voice of Jehovih came to God, say- 
 ing: 
 
 My Son, behold what the asaphs have 
 done in thy name thoughtlessly. They 
 came to the fishery and did as thou badest, 
 gathering food for the es'yans, and at their 
 side stood the es'yans, saying: Why gath- 
 er ye food for us? Behold we are now 
 strong in spirit; allow us to gather food 
 for ourselves. And the asaphs said: It 
 seemeth well; do as ye desire. Thereupon, 
 the es'yans went to the fishermen and wo- 
 men, who were eating raw flesh, and the 
 es'yans laid hold of the atmospherean part, 
 and ate thereof. And then the asaphs said 
 to them: Ye have feasted sufficiently; come 
 away with us. But lo, the es'yans engraft- 
 ed themselves upon the fishermen and wo- 
 men, and would not depart. The asaphs 
 not knowing what to do, called on My 
 name. Send thou, O God, quickly to them, 
 those skilled in deliverance, that My es'- 
 yans be preserved unto everlasting life. 
 
 And God summoned those skilled in de- 
 liverance of engraftment, and despatched 
 them hastily with messengers to the place 
 of the fisheries. 
 
 Jehovih said: From the trees, fruits, 
 flowers, grains and seeds, have I created a 
 ceaseless harvest going upward into the 
 atmosphere, which shall be the food 
 of the spirits of men newborn in heaven. 
 But whosoever feasteth on flesh on earth, 
 shall not find spiritual food in heaven, but 
 he shall return to the butcheries and eat- 
 ing houses where flesh is eaten, and he shall 
 feast on the atmospherean part thereof 
 before it is rotten. Be ye guarded of them, 
 lest they engraft themselves on mortals, 
 feasting on their feasts and so go down to 
 destruction. 
 
 After many days the asaphs came before 
 God, saying: The physicians severed such 
 as were bound, and we brought them away. 
 Shall this be our labor day and night, to 
 lead these es'yans about, finding them 
 clothes and food? This we have observed, 
 the more we do for them, the less they do 
 for themselves. 
 
 Jehovih spake through God, saying: A 
 nurse I provided for the new born, but 
 when he is grown I commanded him to 
 provide for himself that he may be a glory 
 in My kingdom. By charity alone ye can- 
 not raise man up; but be diligent to teach 
 him to try continually to raise himself, for 
 herein lieth the glory of man. 
 
 The asaphs said: If we leave the es'- 
 yans alone they will return again to the 
 fihseries and fasten themselves upon mor- 
 tals, doing nothing but eat. 
 
 God said: Near the fisheries, but in at- 
 mospherea, go ye and fashion a colony, 
 and it shall be your colony in heaven. 
 Thither take these es'yans, not showing 
 them the way to the fisheries. In the colo- 
 ny put ye them to work, weaving and mak- 
 ing clothes and otherwise producing; but 
 go ye for the food at the fisheries, and 
 bring sufficient every day, giving only to 
 them who labor, or to invalids and helpless 
 ones. By this ye shall inspire them to la- 
 bor, which is the foundation of growth; 
 and in course of time they will not only 
 care for themselves, but join in helping 
 others, which is the beginning of the sec- 
 ond resurrection. Behold, this lesson have 
 ye learned; that according to the diet and 
 the habits of mortals on earth, so must ye 
 provide their spirits when first entered in 
 heaven. 
 
 Choose ye, therefore, of your own peo- 
 ple a sufficient number to make all things 
 required in a delightful colony, whether it 
 be food, clothing, nurseries, hospitals, or 
 places of worship or of dancing, raising 
 them up in industry, love, wisdom, virtue, 
 mirth, benevolence and adoration, and this 
 shall be a new heaven unto you all. This 
 shall be an example of all the kingdoms in 
 heaven. The time cometh when the whole 
 atmospherea around the earth shall be 
 filled with countless millions of angels 
 from the earth. 
 
 Be swift in your labor; the people spring 
 up from the earth rapidly into heaven, 
 and every colony ye now found shall in 
 time to come, be a great kingdom, requir- 
 ing experienced workmen. Whosoever la- 
 boreth most efficiently for Jehovih, him 
 will I promote to wider fields. Words are 
 already taking root in the mouths of mor- 
 tals; and for thousands of years will war 
 reign; might against might, darkness 
 
CYCLE OF SETHANTES 
 
 19 
 
 against darkness. Hundreds of millions 
 will be slain in wars on the earth, and their 
 souls be thrown into chaos. Even as ye 
 beheld these spirits fastening on to mortals 
 for food, so will millions of spirits in cha- 
 os, fasten themselves on the battlefieds, 
 still battling, or upon mortals, obsessing 
 them to madness and death. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 So God and his Lords established 
 such colonies in heaven, and they embraced 
 the arts of healing, education, industry, 
 drapery, manufactures, the building of 
 ships, and all things required for the spirit. 
 And great labor came upon the hosts of 
 God who founded these things, toiling day 
 and night, receiving the es'yans and pro- 
 viding for them food and clothing. And 
 many of the hosts of God lamented that 
 they had come to the corporeal earth, and 
 they framed songs and anthems of lament- 
 ation, and these they chanted even whilst 
 at labor. God was troubled that they 
 should thus lament in presence of the es'- 
 yans, and he called together the proper of- 
 ficers that he might rebuke them; but the 
 Light of Jehovih spake from the throne, 
 saying: 
 
 Rebuke them not, My son. Did I not 
 command them, saying: Behold I have 
 created a new world; come ye and enjoy 
 it. And they listened to the voice of cor- 
 por, becoming bound. Wherefore, then, 
 shall they not lament? Do they not re- 
 member their former homes in etherea, 
 and thus aspire to regain them? But seek 
 thou, O My Son, to make their lamenta- 
 tions a glory in the souls of the es'yans, 
 that they may also aspire to a higher hea- 
 ven. 
 
 The Voice departed, and God perceiv- 
 ing the wisdom of Jehovih, commanded 
 certain officers to collect many of the an- 
 thems and deposit them in the library of 
 Hored in heaven, and they did so. This, 
 then, is the manner of their lamentations: 
 
 Where is my home, O Jehovih? Where 
 I was happy? I dwelt with Thy hosts 
 afar. 
 
 O the songs in Thy upraised kingdoms! 
 When shall I rejoice in the music of my 
 own home in etherea? O those sparkling, 
 
 running waters! O the pastimes and 
 feasts of love! 
 
 Where is it, O Jehovih? It was my 
 home in high heaven. 
 
 I fell in darkness! Wandering soul 
 within me, that leddest me forth. The gar- 
 dens of Jehovih stood on every hand. O 
 senseless feet to take me onward. Into 
 the darkness I was lured; sweet perfumes 
 rose midst the darkness. Intricate in Thy 
 glory, O Jehovih! I lost the way. I was 
 lost! The music of Thy spheres was shut 
 out. I was environed in darkness! 
 
 Where is my home, O Jehovih? Why 
 have I forsaken it? Crystals and high 
 arches on every hand; standing out, shin- 
 ing. And the songs of my sweet loves! 
 Such was my home, a place of glory! I 
 bartered them all away, wandering forth. 
 Buried in the dark. O for my home in 
 high heaven! Mirth, song, rest and love, 
 clear shining. 
 
 Thou, O Jehovih, hast given me sons 
 and daughters. Out of this darkness my 
 gems were born. O I will polish them up. 
 Kin of my kin, I will raise them up. The 
 Goddesses in heaven above will come, de- 
 scending in ships of fire. My jewels shall 
 enter and rise with me. We shall search 
 for my home; the haven of rest. 
 
 I see Thee, O Jehovih, afar off. High- 
 er than the highest of heavens. O hasten 
 my home and my rest! O ripen my pre- 
 cious fruit. O take us to etherean worlds! 
 
 But no one could repeat their numer- 
 ous lamentations, for there were hundreds 
 of thousands of them. And as the ethereans 
 sang them, the es'yans, the newborn in at- 
 mospherea, listened, longingly listened and 
 looked upward. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 In the first year of Hored there were re- 
 ceived into God's kingdom one and a half 
 million es'yans, men, women and children 
 born from the earth. And there were still 
 left within the different divisions of the 
 earth, with the Lords, three and a quarter 
 million es'yans, being for the most part 
 fetals. 
 
 In the first one hundred years there 
 were born of the earth, one hundred and 
 seventy million es'yans. The number of 
 
20 
 
 CYCLE OF SETHANTES 
 
 three generations of Thins was fifty-four 
 millions, and each of the Lord's heavenly 
 places had become large kingdoms. 
 
 In those days the period of five years 
 was allotted to the es'yans as their time of 
 infancy in heaven, requiring nurses and 
 helpers, but some of them required many 
 years more. After five years the es'yans 
 were taken from the nurseries, and taught 
 by symbols and objects the rudiments of 
 education; and drilled in processions, mu- 
 sic, dancing and gymnastics; but every day 
 they were required for a brief period to 
 labor, some at weaving, some at spinning 
 and some at transportation. 
 
 The Voice of Jehovih directed God, say- 
 ing: For the prosperity of My kingdom in 
 heaven, thou shalt make all labor an agree- 
 able exercise for the growth of the spirits 
 of thy dominions. 
 
 And God commanded the officers of 
 Hored to lengthen the hours of labor, ac- 
 cording to the age and strength of the spir- 
 its received up from the earth. 
 
 Jehovih spake to God, saying: Allot 
 to those who have come up from the earth 
 the labor that is most congenial. But thou 
 shalt not allow them to return to their 
 earth kindred unattended, lest they engraft 
 themselves thereon, because of their love, 
 becoming bound to mortals. But when 
 they have lived fifty years in heaven, thou 
 shalt not only permit them to return to 
 mortals, but thou shalt direct them to do 
 so, for after that period they will have no 
 further desire for engraftment. As fast as 
 thou canst appropriate the labor of the 
 earth-born spirits to help in the resurrec- 
 tion of others, so thou shalt do in My 
 name. 
 
 And God and his Lords did so. And in 
 one hundred years' time there were raised 
 up to the second rate, twenty million 
 souls. And many of them comprehended 
 the manufactories, nurseries, schools and 
 hospitals in heaven to the full, and they 
 were in many things equal to the require- 
 ments of their teachers. 
 
 The Voice of Jehovih came to God, 
 saying: It is well, My Son, to take a rest. 
 Behold, thou hast toiled a hundred years, 
 day and night, without ceasing. Thou 
 shalt, therefore, annoint other officers, and 
 spread out the kingdom of Hored to cover 
 all the land of Whaga. And thou shalt ap- 
 
 point in My name thy most efficient officer 
 to sit on the throne for a short time, and 
 thou shalt travel and visit the five Lords 
 of the earth and their kingdoms. And thou 
 shalt take with thee a thousand heralds, a 
 thousand mesengers and five thousand mu- 
 sicians. And thou shalt have a ship suffi- 
 cient to carry thy host, and to be thy house 
 whithersoever thou goest; and set all 
 things in order for an absence of one 
 year. 
 
 -And God called in the surveyors, who 
 brought maps of earth and heaven showing 
 the best places for extending the kingdom 
 of Hored. And God appointed fifty gov- 
 ernors for the fifty places required, and he 
 gave each of them five thousand men and 
 women to accompany them. And when 
 they were chosen God addressed them from 
 the throne, saying: 
 
 According to the commandment of Je- 
 hovih are ye chosen; and by His command 
 will I come to your respective places, and 
 bestow jou with all that is required for 
 building up colonies in Jehovih's name. 
 As ye witnessed the founding of Hored by 
 the Archangel Etisyai, so may you under- 
 stand that I will come to you all. Go forth, 
 then, taking your hosts, and lay the foun- 
 dations for your cities. As ye have learn- 
 ed from me, go ye forth doing as I have 
 done; and as ye do with a small colony, 
 so I will give into your keeping that which 
 is greater when ye are prepared therefor. 
 
 When God ceased, the marshals led the 
 way, and the hosts following their govern- 
 ors filed in front of the throne, saluting 
 with the sign of Jehovih's name, which 
 was answered by God's hands upraised. 
 Meanwhile the es'enaurs sang in glory to 
 Jehovih. Presently the hosts passed out 
 and beyond the pillars of fire. 
 
 When all had quieted, God said: Let 
 the builders of ships begin now and build 
 a ship for me and my hosts, for the time 
 draweth near. And let the graders choose 
 from my laborers, who have toiled a hun- 
 dred years, day and night without ceas- 
 ing, such as shall be my companions and 
 hosts on my journey. And they were so 
 chosen and notified. 
 
 And God said: Whilst I shall be absent, 
 he who standeth highest in the grades, 
 shall sit on my throne, being God in my 
 place. 
 
CYCLE OF SETHANTES 
 
 21 
 
 And God commanded the graders to 
 present before the throne the records, that 
 the Council of Hored might determine the 
 matter. And this was done. And Ha'jah, 
 an etherean, was chosen. And God com- 
 manded them to send word to Ha'jah, 
 with an escort to conduct him to the 
 throne. In due time the escort brought 
 Ha'jah into the place of the kingdom of 
 God, while God was sitting on the throne. 
 They came in with music and filed in 
 front of the throne, forming a crescent, 
 and Ha'jah stood betwixt the horns. 
 
 God said: By the light of Jehovih have 
 I summoned thee hither, O Ha'jah. Long 
 have I known thee, even on other worlds. 
 Of all virtues in man which stand highest, 
 which is, never to mention one's self, thou 
 excellest all men in my kingdom. Thy 
 labors for the general upraising of Hored 
 excellest all others. For this reason thou 
 art preferred, and by Jehovih chosen to be 
 my assistant whilst I am here, and in my 
 absence to be God in Jehovih's name. 
 
 Ha'jah said: This being the will of Je- 
 hovih, proceed thou. 
 
 God struck the gavel, and the holy coun- 
 cil rose to their feet. 
 
 God said: In Jehovih's name I salute 
 thee, Ha'jah, as God of Earth, to hold do- 
 minion in Hored. Come forth and receive 
 thou my throne in Jehovih's name. 
 
 The marshals then conducted Ha'jah to 
 the foot of the throne. God came down 
 and took his hand and led him up. And as 
 they were going forth, a light, as of gold- 
 en fire, came down from the firmament 
 above, sent by the kingdoms high exalted; 
 and God and Ha'jah were covered and il- 
 luminated. 
 
 God said: By Thy Love, Wisdom and 
 Power, O Jehovih, do I receive this Thy 
 Son on Thy throne. Be Thou with him in 
 wisdom and strength for Thy glory for- 
 ever. Amen. 
 
 God stretched forth his hand unto Je- 
 hovih, saying: Give me a crown for Thy 
 Son, God of Earth, O Jehovih! 
 
 And there descended, as if a small star, 
 far lengthened out, a light of gold and sil- 
 ver, and it settled on God's hand, and he 
 fashioned it into a crown, and emblazoned 
 it with the sign God of Earth, and placed 
 it on Ha'jah's head, saying: In Jehovih's 
 
 name, thee I crown, to sit on the throne in 
 Hored during my absence. 
 
 Ha'jah said: Thy Son, O Jehovih, shall 
 fulfill Thy commandments in wisdom and 
 love. O Father, Creator of worlds, 
 give this Thy Son rest and comfort for the 
 glories he hath wrought in Thy name. 
 Amen. 
 
 The Council said: Amen. The es'- 
 enaurs chanted an anthem of praise to Te- 
 hovih. And God led Ha'jah forth and seat- 
 ed him on the throne, saying: Thou art 
 God in my name and Jehovih's also. And 
 since I go down to the earth to sojourn 
 for a season, thou shalt be known as God 
 of both Earth and heaven. 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 So God departed out of'Hored and em- 
 barked on a ship, taking with him seven 
 thousand men and women for an escort, 
 beside a thousand es'enaurs and a crew of 
 three thousand to work the ship. 
 
 And God went to the provinces of the 
 governors in heaven dwelling on earth, 
 whom he had appointed and sent forth; 
 and as he himself had been commissioned 
 by Jehovih in Hored, so did he install the 
 governors on their seats. And the govern- 
 ors were situated within Whaga at re- 
 mote distances, and God sent messengers 
 to them, notifying them of the time he 
 would visit them. And the Lord whose 
 kingdom was situated in the earthly city 
 of Ul'oo, being apprised of God's intend- 
 ed journey, and having first appointed an- 
 other in his place, went and joined God in 
 his ship and traveled with God throughout 
 Whaga, being present at the inauguration 
 of the governors in these heavens. 
 
 To each of the governors God said: 
 That which is given you to accomplish per- 
 taineth to things in heaven; for the Lord's 
 matters pertain to earthly things, and to 
 angels that labor with the corporeans. But 
 ye are to attend to the es'yans, receiving 
 them in heaven, providing them with places 
 to sojourn, and in their helplessness sup- 
 ply them with food and clothes, and the 
 rudiments of learning. Remember also, 
 the time cometh when each of these gov- 
 ernorships shall attain to an independent 
 kingdom; and instead of being governors 
 you shall be raised as sub-Gods. 
 
22 
 
 CYCLE OF SETHANTES 
 
 After God had established the govern- 
 ors, the Lord invited him to visit his place 
 in Ul'oo, and thence go about on 
 earth and see the mortals with whom the 
 Lord had to deal. And God accepted, and 
 the Lord sent messengers on before him, 
 that the house of the Lord which mortals 
 had built, might be replenished and cleans- 
 ed. And his substitute notified the ashars, 
 and the ashars impressed mortals to go and 
 cleanse and purify the house of the Lord. 
 And so mortals fell to work and cleansed 
 the place and burned incense therein of 
 sweet myrrh and hepetan, not even know- 
 ing they were fulfilling the command of 
 the Lord. 
 
 When the ship of the hosts of God came 
 to the city of Ul'oo, mortals saw it high up 
 in the air, and they feared and ran hastily 
 so consult the prophet of the Lord. And 
 the prophet said: Behold, God appeareth 
 in a sea of fire in the firmament of hea- 
 ven. 
 
 And God caused the ship to be made un- 
 seen, that fear might subside on earth, and 
 he descended with his hosts into the house 
 of the Lord, and they went and touched the 
 things mortals had built that they might 
 perceive corporeally. And the Lord gave 
 a banquet, and God and his companions 
 tarried four days, exchanging fellowship 
 with the ashars. And the ashars took 
 the angels who were with him around 
 amongst mortals, both whilst mortals were 
 asleep and awake, showing many things 
 to them. And because of the presence of 
 the hosts of God, mortals were aroused 
 with new vigor to worship the Lord, rising 
 early and going to the house of worship 
 and continuing all day, and not one of them 
 knew the cause thereof. On the evening of 
 the fourth day God commanded his hosts 
 to prepare to renew the journey. 
 
 God said: O Jehovih, who created all, 
 look down and bless Thy Lord. He hath 
 descended from his high estate in etherea 
 to raise these mortals up. Already hath 
 he toiled with them a hundred years. Three 
 generations have risen up out of the earth, 
 and they begin to glorify Thee in Thy 
 kingdoms above the earth. Who but 
 Thee, O Jehovih, can honor Thy Lord or 
 know his sore trials? Behold, man grow- 
 eth up out of the earth, saying: There is 
 no Lord and no God. But his feet and 
 
 hands are guided every hour of the day. 
 Yea, when he enters the unseen worlds, 
 they become seen; but he is helpless in a 
 strange place, and Thy Lord provides him 
 and teaches him. Thy Lord finds a suita- 
 ble place on earth and says: Here will I 
 build a city. He sends his angels forth 
 and they inspire man to come and build a 
 city in the same place. Yet when the city 
 is built, man says: Behold, there is no 
 God and no Lord. The Lord brings the 
 corporeans together and guards them day 
 and night; but man turns away in strife 
 and destruction. Then Thy Lord with- 
 draws his angels from the city because of 
 its wickedness, and it falls in ruins. But 
 man knoweth not the cause. Yet Thy Lord 
 toileth on, day and night, watching, 
 guarding and striving to lift man up out 
 of darkness. O Jehovih, bless Thy Lord 
 and his hosts. Hasten the time when man 
 shall comprehend the foundation of Thy 
 kingdoms. 
 
 The Lord said: O Jehovih, Ever Pres- 
 ent. Hear the words of Thy God. He who 
 comprehends the whole earth and the hea- 
 ven of the earth. He deals with millions. 
 Great is his wisdom and love. Glorify him, 
 Thy Son, of heaven and earth. He fashions 
 the homes of Thy Lords and little ones in 
 great wisdom. His love is the glory of all 
 men. Give swiftness, rest and joy to him, 
 Thy God. 
 
 The mortals of the city of Ul'oo had 
 gathered together to worship, and they 
 were singing and dancing to the Lord, and 
 the angels joined in the singing also. And 
 God went and sat on the altar and illumin- 
 ated it so the mortals could see him. And 
 the chief prophet came near the place of 
 the Lord, and the Lord placed his hand on 
 the forehead of the prophet so he might 
 speak in the name of God. The prophet 
 said: Behold me, I am the God of heaven 
 and earth, and my words come out of the 
 mouth of this my prophet. Keep holy the 
 four days of the moon, for they are the 
 Lord's days. Do no evil, but strive for 
 wisdom and to do good. And when ye 
 are dead, behold, ye shall live, for I have 
 places prepared for you in my heaven. Re- 
 joice and be merry, for the Lord lives and 
 reigneth. 
 
 The prophet ceased, and God rose up 
 from the altar, and his traveling host also, 
 
CYCLE OF SETHANTES 
 
 23 
 
 and saluting the Lord in the name of Je- 
 hovih, resumed his journey in heaven. 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 First to Jud, God headed his ship, run- 
 ning close to the earth, gathering fuel from 
 the tall forests to feed the phosphorescent 
 flame, traveling steadily till the wild coast 
 on the west of Whaga was reached. Here 
 he haltd his ship till his navigators told the 
 distance of the wide sea before them, gath- 
 ering fuel and substance from the rich 
 growing lands. And God commanded: Go 
 forth. Go forth into the sea of heaven. 
 And on plunged the ship of God in the 
 winds of the blue firmament, soaring high 
 above the black clouds. And the music of 
 his thousand es'enaurs leaped forth in time 
 to the waves. 
 
 Onward sped the ship of God; mer- 
 rily sang the crew. On one side the 
 rising moon, the setting sun on the 
 other; beneath lie the black clouds and 
 great corporeal sea; and yet above 
 twinkled the stars and planets of the 
 Great Serpent on his long journey. 
 God surveyed the scene, and the power 
 of Jehovih moved upon him. Then 
 gathered round him his seven thou- 
 sand loves and traveling companions; and 
 God said: 
 
 All Thy places are new, Great Jehovih! 
 For thousands of years have I gazed on 
 Thy matchless splendors; but Thy glory 
 groweth richer day by day. When Thy 
 Voice came to me, more than a hundred 
 years ago, saying: Go, My Son, I have a 
 new garden planted; take some workmen 
 and till the soil; I foresaw the long labor 
 of generations that would spring up out of 
 the earth. I feared and trembled. 
 
 I said: How shall it be, O Jehovih? 
 Shall the new Earth be peopled over, and 
 mortals run their course as on other cor- 
 poreal worlds? First, in wholesome love 
 and worship and due reverence to the 
 Gods, and then for ages bury themselves in 
 bloody wars? O lead me forth, Jehovih. I 
 will take Thy garden for a season, and 
 fence it around with Lords, and wise king- 
 doms. And by the power of Thy pres- 
 ence hedge mortals on every side, that the 
 Earth may bloom as a paradise for angels 
 and men. And Thy sons and daughters 
 
 came with me, and peopled the earth with 
 immortal souls. 
 
 How is it now? How compares my la- 
 bor with that of the Gods on other cor- 
 poreal worlds? O ye Gods and Goddesses, 
 look down upon Earth. Jehovih hath 
 filled my arms with a great load. I trem- 
 ble in the immortal scales. 
 
 And God looked up, transfixed, into the 
 swift passing sky; for his voice reached to 
 the thrones of etherean worlds whereon the 
 Orian Chiefs reigned in all power. And 
 down from amidst the stars shot a single 
 ray of light engrossed with the words: 
 
 Jehovih's Son, all hail! 
 Hail, God of Earth, Jehovih's Son! 
 Glory, glory to Great Jehovih, 
 For all that thou hast done! 
 
 Then upward furled the shining light 
 till it faded midst the far-off stars. Anew 
 the trumpeters and singers sent forth a 
 strain of sweet, soulful music. And as the 
 music glided forth across the waters, other 
 music, strange and welcome, came from 
 the west land to the borders of the sea. 
 The ship was across the sea, and hosts of 
 the Lord of Jud had come to meet the God 
 of Earth and Heaven. And now, saluting 
 loud and long, the two ships drew close to 
 anchorage. Presently they exchanged mes- 
 sengers, and God and his hosts greeted 
 the Lord and his hosts in Jehovih's name, 
 and they were old-time friends. And pres- 
 ently the two ships sped forth, close to the 
 earth, conjoined in the music of anthems of 
 olden times. And they sped on far up into 
 the country, till one pillar of fire standing 
 on a mountain side, proclaimed the place 
 of the Lord, and here they halted and made 
 fast the vessels unseen by mortals. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 These chieftans had long been friends 
 on other worlds, and pledged to join in an 
 adventure on some new corporeal world, 
 to raise up sons and daughters to Jehovih. 
 Now was the pledge being fulfilled, and 
 they had eagerly looked forward to the 
 time of this visit. And so God and the 
 Lord came forth, saying: In Jehovih's 
 name, we meet at last! And they embraced 
 and reassured each other that what they 
 had talked of a thousand years before had 
 really come to pass. 
 
24 
 
 CYCLE OF SETHANTES 
 
 And then came forward the hosts of 
 God and the Lord, knowing one another 
 and saluting and embracing also. There- 
 upon they proceeded to the house of the 
 Lord, which mortals had been inspired to 
 build of wood and clay. And when they 
 were within they joined in prayer and 
 thanks to Jehovih, and sang and danced 
 and rejoiced to their souls' content. 
 
 At sunrise the next morning the mortal 
 priests and priestesses, led by a prophet, 
 went into the house of the Lord, to pray 
 and sing and dance as they had been taught 
 by inspiration of the Lord, but many people 
 lingered without, saying to one another: 
 I fear! For last night I saw lights in the 
 house of the Lord, and I heard singing and 
 dancing before the altar. 
 
 After a time of rejoicing and of quiet, 
 the Lord said: Behold, O God, the follies 
 of judgment, and the vain calculations of 
 even Lords and Gods. We look upon the 
 mature man, saying: Alas, he is stubborn 
 in his own way; we cannot convert him. 
 Then we desire the immature, saying: Him 
 will I raise up in mine own way, and he 
 shall not depart from my judgment. But 
 we tire of his immaturity and slow growth. 
 
 God said: Hereon hangs the highest 
 testimony of the Person of Great Jehovih. 
 The nearest blank of all the living created 
 He man, unlike all the rest and devoid of 
 reason. Whereas, according to the order 
 of the animal world a newborn babe should 
 be already wise. 
 
 Jehovih saith: All the living have I pro- 
 vided with certain paths to travel in; and 
 man created I new that he should grow 
 forever. To the beast I have given an al- 
 ready created sense, to man I allotted an- 
 gels. And even these have I provided with 
 others above them; and yet others above 
 them, forever and ever. Hence, the new- 
 born babe I created a blank in sense and • 
 judgment, that he may be a witness that 
 even he himself was fashioned and created 
 anew by My hand. Neither created I him 
 imperfectly that he should re-enter a womb 
 and be born over again. That which I do 
 is well done, saith Jehovih. 
 
 The Lord said: Thou art wise, O God. 
 Man standeth on the earth, but the earth 
 resteth on that which is lighter than the 
 earth. Jehovih saith: The unseen that 
 
 holdeth the corporeal earth in its place, is 
 of Me. 
 
 And yet, O God, who can attain to 
 know Jehovih? The mortal saith: When 
 I am dead and risen in heaven, I shall see 
 the Great Spirit; but when he dies, he is 
 still helpless; yes, as helpless in his place 
 as he was on the earth. Then he saith: 
 When I am strong arid wise, like Lords and 
 Gods, and can traverse the wide firma- 
 ment, then will I see Jehovih. But when 
 he riseth and can shape his vessel through 
 the whirlwinds of the vortices of heaven, 
 and he is called Lord or God, he findeth 
 the arcs and ethea standing before him 
 still. More and more is he appalled at the 
 thought of the Great I Am who liveth still 
 beyond. 
 
 He hurries down to the corporeal 
 earth to teach mortals and spirits of Jeho- 
 vih, and of His endless worlds and exalted 
 heavens. But, lo, the darkness of them, 
 they say: I see Him not; I hear Him not; 
 I believe not in Him. He is but as the 
 wind, going without sense. He is void; 
 He is nothing. And the Lord inventeth 
 ways and means. Yea, he teaches man to 
 sing and pray to Jehovih, that the sounds 
 may lead his soul upward. The Lord tell- 
 eth him to wear clothes to hide his naked- 
 ness and the Lord sendeth angels to award 
 him for his good deeds. And the angels 
 of the Lord lay plots and strategems in 
 man's pathway to stir him up. Yea, Jeho- 
 vih gave man sleep, so that his corporeal 
 bound spirit might see and hear heavenly 
 things. But man loadeth his stomach and 
 debaucheth on intoxicating smoke and 
 drink till his soul is buried in darkness. 
 And the Lord crieth out in despair: How 
 weak am I, O Jehovih, before Thee! I 
 undertook to be a Lord over men on 
 Earth, to learn my lesson in the gov- 
 ernment of worlds. But O Jehovih, I 
 know I fail in Thy sight. What will Thy 
 God say when he beholdeth my little good? 
 What pity have the Archangels for Thy 
 struggling Lord of earth? 
 
 God perceived the sorrow of his friend 
 and he said: O Jehovih, Who art Almigh- 
 ty, how keener hast Thou made our sense 
 of our own weakness, than those who look 
 upon us. Thy Lord is a God in the glories 
 he hath wrought out of such crude sub- 
 stance, and I sing to his praise and love. 
 
CYCLE OF SETHANTES 
 
 25 
 
 I have looked upon the naked man and 
 woman of this great land, crawling on 
 hands and feet, with no thought but to eat, 
 and I have seen them raised up by Thy 
 Lord and his ashars, to walk upright and 
 use words of speech and to wear clothes 
 and skins to hide their nakedness. Yea, I 
 have cried out with great joy, and I called 
 aloud unto Thee, O Jehovih, saying: Who 
 knoweth the labor of the Lord? Will man 
 ever forget to sing his praise? But Jeho- 
 vih says: I will keep some of the tribes 
 of men in darkness till the last days, for 
 man shall perceive that the barbarous 
 tribes cannot put away their own darkness. 
 Yea, man shall bow down in reverence to 
 My Lords. 
 
 Thus conversed God and his Lord, as 
 they went forth to see the work of the 
 Lord, and to find the mortals that had 
 given up the places of Asu and come to 
 live in villages and cities. Around about 
 over the continent of Jud they traveled for 
 many days and nights. And when God 
 had seen all the work of the Lord, he said: 
 
 Behold, it is good. Thy toil and seclu- 
 sion away from the Lords of the upper hea- 
 vens are severe, but thou art fashioning 
 the love of millions, who shall bless thee. 
 
 And while God sojourned with the Lord 
 of Jud, his hosts regaled themselves with 
 the company of the asaphs in the kingdoms 
 of the Lord, and great was the love and 
 rejoicing amongst them. 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 When God's visit was ended, and the 
 hosts notified, the Lord gave a banquet, 
 during which the angels sang and danced 
 and trumpeted. After that God and his 
 hosts embarked on the ship in readiness to 
 proceed on the journey; and the Lord and 
 his hosts went up to the ship to take 
 leave. 
 
 God said: When dan approacheth we 
 shall meet again. May Jehovih prosper 
 thy harvests till then. 
 
 The Lord said: That is another hun- 
 dred years, O God; I almost live in a wil- 
 derness. I have not ten millions of souls, 
 mortals and spirits. 
 
 God said: Thy kingdom shall be mighty 
 when I come again. May it glorify Jeho- 
 vih! 
 
 They embraced and separated. Each 
 gave the sign of Jehovih's name. Upward 
 raised the ship of God with banners out- 
 stretched, and taking course still west, sped 
 on above the mountain tops, like a meteor 
 hurled from heaven. Meanwhile the trum- 
 peters gave forth the gladly solemn sound 
 of the March of God. 
 
 But ere the ship had made half its 
 journey, an approaching light came forth 
 from the far west, radiant and laden with 
 hosts from the Lord of Dis. When the 
 ships drew near and halted, God called 
 with a loud voice, saying: In Jehovih's 
 name, all hail. I know my Lord cometh. 
 
 And thereupon the Lord answered: 
 Hail to thee, O God, Son of Jehovih! 
 And they turned the Lord's ship and lash- 
 ed the twain together even as they sped on. 
 And after they had all exchanged welcome 
 and good wishes, the Lord said: Ere we 
 go to my exalted throne let us survey the 
 continent over which thy servant is Lord. 
 And God answered: Thy will be done, O 
 Lord. And so they journeyed for many 
 days, oft descending to the earth in places 
 where the Lord's angels had begun colo- 
 nies with mortals, impressing man with 
 words of speech, and to live in villages. 
 
 And God said that all he saw was well 
 done. So they came to the throne of the 
 Lord and sojourned there for sixty days. 
 And God and his hosts and the Lord and 
 his ashars and asaphs were together in 
 general reunion, praying, singing and 
 dancing and reasoning on the endless 
 works of Jehovih. But one book could 
 not contain all that was said and done, 
 and of the excursions made, and the visits 
 over the mountains and plains, where in 
 thousands of years hence man should live 
 and build cities, and go to war and destroy 
 them. And the mathematicians foretold 
 the great cities and nations that would rise 
 up; how this one and that one would 
 move to battle; how their great cities 
 would fall in ruins and be covered up by 
 falling nebulae, and by mountains wash- 
 ing down upon them, so that even their re- 
 membrance should be lost. And yet, fur- 
 ther on, the mathematicians foretold the 
 the coming of kosmon when the ruined 
 cities would be discovered and their histo- 
 ries deciphered by the su'is of man in 
 Great Jehovih's hand. And now when all 
 
26 
 
 CYCLE OF SETHANTES 
 
 these things were estimated, the prophets 
 and mathematicians went before God, as 
 the Lord had commanded them, and they 
 spake to God, Son of Jehovih, telling of 
 all these wonders. 
 
 When they had finished, God said: 
 What is our service on the earth, O Lord? 
 A few centuries at most, and we will have 
 risen up from the earth, taking our hosts 
 with us to dwell in higher realms. But 
 there shall be other Gods and Lords after 
 us, to deal with mortals and spirits newly 
 born. Aft^r awhile there shall be great 
 warriors and great cities and nations, and 
 they shall have Gods and Lords of their 
 times who will dwell many a weary year, 
 aye, century, in the darkness with man. 
 After that again, even the Gods and Lords 
 will be forgotten. And man will turn 
 against Great Jehovih, putting to death 
 His worshippers, themselves preferring 
 idols of stone and metal, and spirits of 
 men born of woman. 
 
 The Lord said: And yet further on 
 a brighter light adorneth the way. Great 
 Jehovih's hand sendeth the traveling 
 worlds into the light of Kosmon, and new 
 prophets arise gathering up the histories 
 lost, and glorious plan of the Great Spirit 
 over all. Yea, even our labor and our 
 ships will be seen by mortals of that day. 
 
 Thus they discoursed, reading the past 
 and future, and weighing the present; 
 whilst angels less informed, gathered 
 around to learn how worlds are peopled, 
 and nations and cities destroyed; the far- 
 off and the near at hand, being as nothing 
 in Jehovih's vast universe. 
 
 But the time came for God's departure, 
 and he and his traveling host embarked, 
 and the Lord and his hosts drew around 
 to receive God's prayer ere he left. And 
 so after they had embraced, God said: 
 Though I go away, my love abideth with 
 you all. And now, O Jehovih, bless these 
 my fellow-laborers, and make them strong 
 to endure their great trials. Thine is the 
 power and glory, O Father. Amen. 
 
 The ship rose up and the hosts ex- 
 claimed: Glory to Thee, O Jehovih, for- 
 ever and forever. 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 Jehovih spake to God, saying: Steer 
 thy ship to the south land, My Son, and 
 
 visit the Lord of Vohu. And God went 
 as commanded to the south, running close 
 to the earth, over deserts and mountains. 
 But when they were a short way on the 
 journey they were met by the ship of the 
 Lord, who had been apprised of God's 
 coming, and they made fast to the vessel 
 of God, and all the angels saluted and in- 
 termingled, having known one another for 
 hundreds of years, and some for more 
 than a thousand years. 
 
 The Lord said: On our journey let 
 us run through the valleys and the banks 
 of rivers, for it is here that both Asu and 
 men dwell. And so they journeyed, sur- 
 veying the earth as they sailed above. 
 The country was mostly barren, support- 
 ing neither man nor beast. But by the 
 river sides man dwelt, burrowing in the 
 ground to avoid the heat by day and the 
 cold by night. And they came to places 
 where the angels of the Lord were dwell- 
 ing with mortals, having inspired them to 
 make villages and to hide their nakedness. 
 
 The Lord said: Behold, O God, only 
 the unseen is potent over man. Could the 
 beasts or the stones of the forest tell man 
 to hide his nakedness, he would not; nei- 
 ther will he heed his brother's voice. 
 Without experience man cannot be ad- 
 vised profitably to himself, for so hath 
 Jehovih made him. Because man cannot 
 discern angel presence, the angels alone 
 can teach man and inspire him to new life. 
 For they talk to him in his sleep, and 
 show him what is for his own good. And 
 when he waketh in the morning he imag- 
 ines it was himself talking, and is ambitious 
 to obey himself. Patient and of long en- 
 durance are the angels of Jehovih. 
 
 God said: Will man ever know he hath 
 been raised up? Will he be believing? 
 Or will he, too, need to go to some new 
 world and raise up the first fruits thereof 
 and toil his hundreds of years with naked 
 mortals? O Jehovih, how wisely Thou 
 hast shapen the labors of the believing and 
 the unbelieving. Lo, man comes forth 
 out of the earth, boasting of his unbelief, 
 saying: Except I see with my own eyes, 
 and feel with my own hands, I will not 
 believe. But thou, O Jehovih, hast fitted 
 a labor for his eyes, and for his hands, to 
 his heart's content. And yet another man 
 cometh forth out of the earth, believing, 
 
CYCLE OF SETHANTES 
 
 27 
 
 and quickly he mounts to the thrones of 
 Thy exalted heavens. 
 
 The Lord said: Who knoweth Thy 
 wisdom, O Jehovih! Who cannot perceive 
 Thee in the foundations of Thy everlasting 
 worlds? Thou hast provided nurses for 
 the new Earth; and thou wilt bring forth 
 on Earth many who will, in the far fu- 
 ture time, be laboring as Thy Lord and his 
 angels labor here. Of what expanse is 
 Thy wisdom, O Jehovih. 
 
 Thus they conversed and journeyed 
 forth till they reached the throne and place 
 of the Lord. . And here they made fast 
 their ships, and they descended down to 
 the city of Ong'oo, which was situated 
 about the middle of the continent of Vohu. 
 And the Lord now sent messengers to all 
 the ashars in his dominions, appointing 
 ten days of rest, and time for feasting, 
 music, dancing and worshipping Jehovih. 
 And the hosts of the. Lord and of God held 
 a reunion, being the first for over a hun- 
 dred years. 
 
 And then God went about over all 
 the continent of Vohu, inspecting the 
 work the Lord had done, and he pro- 
 nounced it good before Jehovih. When 
 God had rested the full time, he and his 
 hosts entered the ship of God, and taking 
 leave of the Lord and his hosts, departed 
 on the journey, saluting the Lord ^Ich a 
 thousand trumpeters in the name of Jeho- 
 vih. 
 
 CHAPTER XI 
 
 And now came the long journey across 
 the ocean. God said: Great is Thy wis- 
 dom, O Jehovih, in the division of waters. 
 These barriers provide nations against na- 
 tions. A refuge Thou hast made beyond 
 the waters, and the evil man cannot pur- 
 sue. But greater still are Thy spirit 
 oceans, O Father. The spirits of darkness 
 cannot cross over, and the spirits of new- 
 born people are not contaminated. Thou 
 far-seeing, Thou bestower of thrift into 
 the hands of Thy Gods and Thy Lords. 
 
 The master of the ship provided well 
 for the journey; and presently the vessel 
 of fire sped over the water, high above 
 the clouds that cover the ocean, onward 
 to the bleak and desolate west. On the 
 far-off coast, the Lord of the land of 
 Thouri stood, stationed in a ship, to wel- 
 
 come God to the great west lands. And 
 this was the land called by angels in after 
 time North Guatama, signifying the meet- 
 ing of nations and the dawn of kosmon. 
 
 God came down out of the ship and 
 stood on the land, and a light of etherean 
 flame descended upon him, and Jehovih 
 spake out of the Light, saying: Hear Me, 
 O My Son, hither have I brought thee. 
 This land is the last of the circle, even 
 as Whaga is the first. Behold, when the 
 earth is circumscribed around about with 
 such as choose Me, I will come hither with 
 a great awakening light to the souls of 
 men. 
 
 On this land will I finish the dominion 
 of the self Gods and Lords on earth. 
 Through Thee and Thy Lords will I now 
 lay the foundation for My kingdoms. On 
 this land will I raise up a people who shall 
 be the fulfilling of that which the I'hins 
 of Whaga profess; for My chosen shall 
 come out boldly against all dominion save 
 Mine, even Jehovih. Look over this land, 
 My Son, and provide unto the time of kos- 
 mon. My prophets shall foretell thee what 
 shall happen. Thou shalt look upon the 
 mountains and strong standing rocks, and 
 the thought of thy soul shall pierce them, 
 and the impression thereof shall be as a 
 written book before the races of men in 
 that day. Neither shall they know the 
 cause, but they shall come forth in tens of 
 thousands, putting away all self Gods and 
 Lords and ancient tyranny, for My sake. 
 Thy soul shall be My talisman, deep en- 
 graven in the land, water and mountains. 
 On this land shall not any Lord nor God 
 be established by the sword, for it is My 
 land, which I planned for the deliverance 
 of the nations of the earth. 
 
 The hosts of both the ships came and 
 joined in happy reunion after a hundred 
 years' separation; and God traveled over 
 the land and waters of the great west con- 
 tinent. And all the places that the Lord 
 had searched out, to the east and west and 
 north and south, even to the farthest 
 boundary, were recorded in the books of 
 heaven. 
 
 God said: And thou, My Lord, shall 
 mark out the place whereon shall be found- 
 ed Jehovih's kingdom on earth. And a 
 record of thy labors shall descend through 
 the Lords and Gods that come after thee, 
 
28 
 
 CYCLE OF SETHANTES 
 
 down to the time of the coming light of 
 Kosmon. And the people who shall dwell 
 here till that day, shall never be worship- 
 pers of any Lord or God, such as other 
 people shall worship. Let my seal be put 
 upon this land in the name of Jehovih. 
 
 So, after that time, God and his Lords 
 rested from their labors. And the Lord 
 prepared a feast of reunion for all the an- 
 gels of his dominions. And they assem- 
 bled and sang and prayed and danced, and 
 conversed on things long past and things 
 of the future, reassuring one another of 
 their love and high esteem. 
 
 When the banquet was ended, God and 
 his traveling host, in due ceremony and 
 order, took their leave. Thus God depart- 
 ed. And when the ship of God was raised 
 up and under way, the Voice of Jehovih 
 came to God, saying: 
 
 Steer thy ship, My Son, around over 
 all the other lands and islands and waters 
 of the earth. Go low down to the earth 
 that thy recording angels may witness the 
 affairs of men and all the places I created 
 on the earth. 
 
 Thus God visited all places on land and 
 water, even where man lived not, as well 
 as where he lived, and the angels made a 
 record thereof in the books of heaven. 
 
 And the time of the journey and the 
 visits of God to the places of earth and 
 her heavens, was one year and seven days, 
 and his visit to the Lords was completed. 
 He sent messengers to Hored announcing 
 the time of his coming. And he then set 
 sail therefor. 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 When it was known in Hored that God 
 was about to return, Ha'jah put all things 
 in readiness for God's reception. 
 
 And there volunteered ten thousand 
 musicians and five thousand bearers of 
 banners, one thousand marshals, and offi- 
 cers of the throne, and one hundred thou- 
 sand receivers, to go part way and meet 
 God and his companions. And Ha'jah 
 granted their prayers and they started at 
 once, being the most majestic host that 
 had as yet gone forth in the lower heaven. 
 And when they were a little way off, God 
 and his ship of fire approached in heavenly 
 splendor. And the marshals met him and 
 
 laid hold of the han'iv of the ship, whereon 
 all the hosts did in like manner, save the 
 musicians, who sang and played. 
 
 When they drew near and entered Hor- 
 ed, Ha'jah broke down from his high es- 
 tate, running to meet God as a child would 
 run to its father. And when the multitude 
 saw this, they also broke loose from decor- 
 ous behavior and gave full vent to their 
 outbursting love for God and his hosts. 
 And all the people became as a tumult in 
 rivalry of rejoicing. After a short time 
 God and Ha'jah turned and walked to the 
 throne, and Ha'jah took his place, and God 
 sat on his right and order reigned. 
 
 Ha'jah said: In Thy % name, O Jehovih, 
 I welcome back Thy first God of Earth to 
 the kingdom Thou hast bestowed upon 
 him, and Thy sons and daughters. As 
 much as he hath glorified Thee, by his la- 
 bor and by his wisdom and love, so do 
 we honor him in Thy, name and for Thy 
 glory. 
 
 God said: In Thy name, O Jehovih, 
 do I return to these, my loves. That I am 
 returned I glorify Thee, O my Father. 
 That thou hast made me to rejoice, is the 
 glory of my life. 
 
 And now a great light gathered 
 around the throne, so that many could not 
 look thereon, and the power of Jehovih 
 came^upon Ha'jah, and the Voice spake 
 through him, saying: 
 
 This is again thy throne, O My Son! 
 Thou shalt finish that which I put upon 
 thee. Thy people shall learn the manner 
 of My kingdoms, and know that even as I 
 make all, so do I rule over all. Hang up 
 thy traveling garb, My Son; dismiss thy 
 traveling hosts and resume thy seat on the 
 throne. 
 
 The Voice departed: Ha'jah rose up 
 and stood aside, and the light fell upon 
 God, and he resumed the throne and was 
 hailed by the multitude in Jehovih's name. 
 
 God said to Ha'jah: Because thou hast 
 prospered my kingdom during one whole 
 year, thou shalt be my companion and as- 
 sistant, with power and wisdom to super- 
 intend all matters that are not direct with 
 my Lords. 
 
 Behold, this day have I set apart as a 
 new day in heaven and earth; because on 
 this day the sun taketh its course for the 
 Hi'dan line; and it shall be called the new 
 
CYQLE OF SETHANTES 
 
 29 
 
 year's day. And from this time forth, it 
 shall be the day of the relief watch in Hor- 
 ed. And ye shall proclaim it throughout 
 heaven and earth to all who serve Jeho- 
 vih. 
 
 The kingdom of Hored has so increas- 
 ed that we must enlarge it, and the Council 
 shall be called Moeb, and it shall be an as- 
 sembly over all councils below it. And 
 Moeb shall no longer deal with the affairs 
 of individuals, even though they be Lords; 
 but it shall have dominion with the cities 
 and kingdoms of heaven, and with judg- 
 ments and decrees. 
 
 But in all matters of less degree, this 
 my son Ha'jah, shall have dominion. And 
 thou, O Ha'jah, shall build thee a house in 
 Hored, near this throne, and it shall be thy 
 place of business. 
 
 CHAPTER XIII. 
 
 So God enlarged the place of Hored, 
 and built one thousand more pillars of fire, 
 enlarging the circle and otherwise making 
 it a place of splendor. And God called to- 
 gether the recorders of heaven, and bade 
 them select one hundred thousand new 
 members for the house of Moeb, choosing 
 them from the highest on the lists. 
 
 God said: In this case, seek not the 
 most learned, nor the most prayerful; but 
 choose ye such as rank highest in assim- 
 ilating to Jehovih and to their fellows; 
 for such are the first to become Gods and 
 Goddesses. Jehovih saith: A strong man 
 may do more good works than a weak one, 
 and yet the latter may stand fairer in My 
 sight. I open the way to the weak and 
 the strong; to the learned and the un- 
 learned. 
 
 God said: In all these matters, what- 
 ever man or woman hath put away self 
 desires for self's sake, serving Jehovih by 
 laboring for others, is on the road to wis- 
 dom. And if the records show a sufficient 
 time for growth in such man or woman, 
 whereby these virtues become organic, 
 then choose ye that person, for of such 
 shall be Moeb. 
 
 So the laborers erected walls consist- 
 ing of pillars of fire, and built Moeb 
 within, suitable for the members to be 
 seated according to their rank, and the 
 day it was finished the recorders brought 
 
 the new members, and they went into the 
 temple to their respective places. 
 
 And when seated, God spake from the 
 throne, saying: To thee, O Jehovih, have 
 I built the house of Moeb in Hored; and 
 by Thy wisdom have I chosen the mem- 
 bers thereof. To thee, O Father, I dedi- 
 cate this temple, and it shall be Thy house. 
 Give us of Thy light, O Jehovih, that we 
 may not err. 
 
 A light descended from the heavens 
 above, and fell upon the members of Moeb, 
 as a symbol of approval by the Archan- 
 gels. Presently the new members stood 
 up and God said: 
 
 Above your heads I make the sign of 
 Jehovih's name, in a circle of fire, with 
 the cross lines and the leaf of life. 
 By it are ye sworn to the Father's la- 
 bor. Hear me, then, O my beloved. Ye 
 are henceforth denied individual ministra- 
 tion with mortals; but ye are now become 
 a unit with many, and as such must labor 
 that your love and wisdom be strong in 
 concert of action. Henceforth ye shall 
 not say: What can I do for this man 
 or that man, or this woman or that woman, 
 or this child or that child? For this is in- 
 dividual labor; and on the earth such min- 
 istration belongeth to the ashars, and 
 in atmospherea such ministration be- 
 longeth to the asaphs. But ye shall 
 minister to organic communities who 
 are composed of individuals. There are 
 communities for factories, others for edu- 
 cation, others for treatment of the sick; 
 and such communities exist both on earth 
 and in heaven. 
 
 Ye shall divide yourselves into groups 
 for this purpose, and every group shall 
 have its special business in charge; and 
 each group shall stand in Moeb as one 
 member of Jehovih's judgment seat. Ac- 
 cording to your talents shall ye divide, 
 and group together, choosing such depart- 
 ment wherein each one hath the greatest 
 wisdom and strength. Withdraw, then, 
 and thus complete your groups according 
 to the rates my proper officers will assign, 
 and then return into Moeb, and in 
 Jehovih's name, take the seats allotted to 
 you all. 
 
 CHAPTER XIV. 
 
 On the second day after Moeb was 
 founded, and all the members were in 
 
30 
 
 CYCLE OF SETHANTE8 
 
 their respective places, Jehovih spake 
 through God, saying: 
 
 Now have you begun the second res- 
 urrection. Even as the mortal putteth off 
 the corporeal body, and is born in spirit, 
 beginning the first resurrection, so are ye, 
 putting away individual self and becoming 
 an organic community, the beginning of 
 the second resurrection. As they of the 
 first are for individual self, so have I bound 
 them close on the face of the earth. As 
 they survived on the earth on corporeal 
 food, so have I made them to survive in 
 the lowest heaven on atmospherean food. 
 As Moeb has risen above these conditions, 
 so will I raise the foundations of the tem- 
 ple of Moeb higher up from the earth than 
 Hored, and Hored shall be the lower 
 house of My kingdom. 
 
 The Voice departed, and God saluted 
 Ha'jah in the name of Jehovih; and a 
 great light enveloped the temple of Moeb, 
 and the es'enaurs chanted a hymn of praise; 
 after which God arose and stood in the 
 throne of Jehovih, saying: 
 
 Glory, glory be to Jehovih! Boundless 
 and Almighty Creator. Thou art ever 
 present, and full of love, wisdom and pow- 
 er. Glory, glory to Thee, forever and 
 ever. Amen. 
 
 The members of Moeb chanted. The 
 swift messengers assumed their respective 
 globes of light, and began to ascend in 
 every direction, carrying the word to the 
 exalted heavens that the second resurrec- 
 tion had been founded in the heavens of 
 the earth. 
 
 And God crowned Ha'jah as sub-God 
 of Hored, and he was proclaimed to all 
 the quarters of heaven and earth. 
 
 CHAPTER XV. 
 
 Ha'jah said: With the exaltation of 
 Moeb, so shall my places be exalted before 
 Jehovih. Let the enumerators of the com- 
 munities of heaven send representatives 
 before me. The communities of manufac- 
 turers who produce food and clothes for 
 the es'yans, the communities for hospitals 
 and nurseries, the communities for educa- 
 tion, the communities for training messen- 
 gers, and all other communities. 
 
 When the representatives came, accord- 
 ing to the instructions of the marshals, 
 and were before the throne, Ha'jah said: 
 
 The toilers shall not be always toilers; 
 the physicians not always runners after 
 the sick. Whosoever is proficient will I 
 exalt. He that can walk shall no longer 
 creep. Many are wise and strong, and 
 some have passed beyond the boundary of 
 self-desires for self-sake. A child may not 
 have self-desires, but then it lacketh wis- 
 dom and strength. A full-grown man or 
 woman may have wisdom and strength, 
 but lack in the abnegation of self. 
 
 I will make every community a double 
 from this time forth, and one shall be 
 called Maga, and the other shall be called 
 Minga. Maga shall be my promoted la- 
 borers, who are being prepared for the sec- 
 ond resurrection. And Maga's labor shall 
 be in concert with Moeb, the house of Je- 
 hovih. But Minga's labor shall be as 
 heretofore, even with individual affairs and 
 the organizing of new places for the de- 
 livered es'yans, who are the fruit of the 
 Lords and their kingdoms on the earth. 
 
 Let the marshals select judges to carry 
 out these my decrees, in the name of Jeho- 
 vih! 
 
 CHAPTER XVI. 
 
 From the founding of Hored until the 
 instalment of Ha'jah, was one hundred 
 and thirty years, and at that time the 
 kingdom of heaven was fully organized ac- 
 cording to the decree of Jehovih. And 
 the kingdoms of the Lords on earth were 
 also established. 
 
 And at that time the earth had passed 
 into Hon'she, in the etherean space, where 
 dwell the Orian Shrevarhs, to whom the 
 swift messengers from God had reported 
 the condition of the earth's surface, with 
 tablets denoting the upward and down- 
 ward grade of mortals. 
 
 The Shrevarhs said: The earth hath 
 not attained her fullness. The gases of 
 her low regions must be purified to make 
 more places for mortals. 
 
 And there fell upon Earth fire and 
 brimstone, iron and phosphorus, and the 
 shower fell in the lowest regions where 
 swamps abounded in poisonous gases, in 
 each of the five divisions of the earth. And 
 God being apprised of the danger com- 
 
CYCLE OF SETHANTES 
 
 31 
 
 manded the Lords to cause the guardian 
 angels to impress mortals to depart away 
 from such places as were to be visited by 
 the shower, and all who could be inspired 
 to leave were not harmed. But many of 
 the Asuans were consumed in the fire. 
 
 And God sent extra workmen, and sur- 
 geons and physicians down from heaven 
 to such spirits as were falling into forget- 
 fulness and dissolution, and commanded 
 that they be engrafted on the surviving 
 Asuans for pity's sake; and this was ac- 
 complished through the Lords of the earth 
 and the ashars. 
 
 At the end of two hundred years God 
 enumerated the people of the lower hea- 
 ven, and there were besides the spirits of 
 the fetals (many of whom were doubtful 
 as to everlasting life), two hundred and 
 ninety-six million souls. Of this number 
 there had been raised up to the grade of 
 Brides and Bridegrooms to Jehovih more 
 than thirty million, who were the first of 
 Earth's production. 
 
 As this was the sixth generation of the 
 offspring of the etherean hosts of Sethan- 
 tes, and all being raised to the rank of 
 Brides and Bridegrooms, their earth bond- 
 age was completed. 
 
 God summoned the house of Moeb for 
 the revelations of Jehovih on the first day 
 of the first year of dan of Hon'she. And 
 when they were thus assembled, and had 
 chanted to Jehovih appropriate anthems 
 for the times past, the All Light came 
 upon God, and he said: 
 
 Behold, the time of dan of Hon'she is 
 at hand. Ere three days pass by, the 
 hosts from the etherean heavens will de- 
 scend to accomplish the resurrection of my 
 hosts to the regions whence they came two 
 hundred years ago. Summon My Lords 
 of the earth, and my people of heaven; 
 proclaim my words unto them. 
 
 O ye that peopled the earth with ever- 
 lasting life; the harvest of the new year is 
 ripened, it shall be gathered into the hea- 
 vens above. Rejoice ye, for the glory of 
 deliverance is at hand. In Orian fields 
 hosts of angels and Archangels full of 
 hope and love, wait to receive these, the 
 first fruits of the new Earth. Make ready, 
 for etherean Gods and Goddesses are set- 
 ting sail in the regions above to come and 
 deliver you. Proclaim My words in all 
 
 places, saying: To as many as desire to 
 ascend, come ye to Moeb in the name of 
 Jehovih. 
 
 Messengers went forth, both in heaven 
 and on earth, and proclaimed as had been 
 commanded. And on the third day there 
 assembled in Moeb and Hored ninety mill- 
 ion angels, to witness the descending and 
 ascending of Jehovih's chosen. And the 
 Archangels of Hon'she sent a hundred 
 thousand Gods and Goddesses to guard 
 Moeb and Hored around about, to dispel 
 and keep away the clouds and sunshine, so 
 as to add glory to the scene. 
 
 CHAPTER XVII. 
 
 The Loo'is came before God, and hav- 
 ing organized themselves into one com- 
 munity, so as to make it lawful to speak 
 in Moeb, they appointed Ga'wasa to speak 
 on behalf of the community. 
 
 Ga'wasa said: Hear me, O God, in 
 the name of Jehovih. Thou hast ordained 
 me according to the custom of heaven, to 
 be a master of generations with mortals, 
 and yet one generation is incomplete; 
 wherefore I have come before thee. This 
 day I have been summoned by Jehovih 
 through Thy messengers, saying: To as 
 many as desire to ascend to etherea in the 
 next resurrection, come, for the time of 
 harvest is at hand. Thus saith God, Son 
 of Jehovih. Behold, now, another gener- 
 ation do I desire to dwell on earth. 
 
 God said: The places of heaven are 
 open to all. If thou wouldst ascend now, 
 do even so. If thou wilt tarry one gener- 
 ation, then thou shalt tarry two hundred 
 years, for of such period will be the next 
 harvest. 
 
 Ga'wasa said: In Jehovih's name let 
 my brethren pass before thee in judgment. 
 
 God said: Jehovih's will be done. 
 
 Ga'wasa withdrew and went and told 
 his brethren what was said; and presently 
 they came in and passed in judgment be- 
 fore God. 
 
 God said: Thou hast said: Let me 
 pass in judgment before thee. Hear me, 
 then, for this is my judgment: If thou as- 
 cend with thy work incomplete, thou wilt 
 be unhappy. Remain, therefore, for a 
 greater glory is within thy reach. 
 
 The loo'is passed to the left, signify- 
 ing their determination to tarry yet two 
 
32 
 
 CYCLE OF SETHANTES 
 
 hundred years with mortals. After the 
 loo'is came others desiring to be ad- 
 judged by God, and to all who had incom- 
 pleted work, God said: Remain. And 
 they so remained. 
 
 Besides these were seventy thousand 
 ethereans eligible to ascend, who volun- 
 teered to remain with mortals another two 
 hundred years. Amongst these were the 
 five Lords and Ha'jah, and four hundred 
 messengers belonging to Hored, and 
 seven hundred women in fetal in the west- 
 ern division of Hored under the dominion 
 of the Lord of Whaga. 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII. 
 
 Jehovih said: The time of Earth is 
 at hand; the deliverance of her first-born 
 will fall at your doors. Come forth, O My 
 Sons and Daughters of the Orian fields 
 of Hon'she, receive ye them from my 
 hand. 
 
 Onesyi, high aspiring Goddess of Hon'- 
 she, and the thousand counselors, called 
 together a host of five millions of emanci- 
 pated angels, and to them the dignified 
 Onesyi said: 
 
 Unlike all harvests heretofore delivered 
 to us from other corporeal worlds, Jehovih 
 sendeth us the first born of Earth. Let 
 us rejoice and glorify Him, O my beloved. 
 Send forth to the boundaries of Hon'she 
 and proclaim the hosts of Earth upraised. 
 Provide them with mansions, ye who re- 
 main at home. And you who volunteer to 
 go to Earth to receive them, come quickly. 
 
 Swift messengers have just come 
 to me from the arc of Wan, proclaiming 
 Etisyai will be there. She it was who be- 
 stowed Jehovih's crown on the first God of 
 the corporeal Earth. Her hosts, a million 
 strong, go by the way of Tiviyus, and 
 pray we meet them in O'wea. And thou, 
 Wistaw, shall sit on my throne while I 
 go to Earth, to receive the thirty mill- 
 ion new born, the glorious gift of Jehovih. 
 
 The young Earth hath given birth. O 
 the joy of the first-born. I will take with 
 me a host of singers, a million strong. 
 Their voices shall have power and sweet- 
 ness to win the love and adoration of all 
 the thirty million. The glory of Jehovih's 
 works shall shine so brilliantly upon them 
 
 that all past trials shall be forgotten. 
 Hasten, O ye Gods and Goddesses! Let 
 down the curtains of fire. Here begins 
 the play of Jehovih in the management of 
 a new world. 
 
 Now gathered together men and wo- 
 men long raised up in the emancipated hea- 
 vens, whose wills were potent over a'ji 
 and nebulae, and swift in appropriating 
 what Jehovih had fashioned in the firma- 
 ment. And they built a ship, the size of 
 which was equal to the width of Hored. 
 And they let down curtains from the ship, 
 and the curtains were like flames of fire, 
 and they reached downward equal to the 
 breadth of Earth. 
 
 These Gods and Goddesses were as a 
 unit in will, and potent and swift in work, 
 and the etherean ship was quickly laden 
 and started on her course through the 
 vault of heaven. Past the a'jian fields of 
 Che'wang she rode swiftly. Soon the hosts 
 of the much-loved Etisyai were seen in a 
 smaller craft, highly polished and swift, 
 making way for O'wea. 
 
 Up went a shout of joy from millions 
 of throats, then a song of delight; O the 
 joy in Jehovih's boundless dominions. 
 And now the twain approached O'wea; 
 they slackened speed and neared each oth- 
 er till the ships touched and were joined 
 by skilled workmen. Forth leapt the two 
 Goddesses, Etisyai and Onesyi, in no 
 stateliness or ceremony, but like children 
 in whom love is transcendant they fly to 
 each other's arms, amidst the outburst of 
 joy from the countless throng. Still on- 
 ward moves the etherean ship, beautiful 
 and majestic, steadily taking course to the 
 new Earth. 
 
 CHAPTER XIX. 
 
 And now the evening of the third day 
 had come, and God and his hosts in Moeb 
 were hastening all things, to be ready for 
 the great light that was to descend from 
 high heaven. The ninety million angels 
 looked upward, waiting and watching. 
 And many a one who remembered Etisyai 
 of two hundred years ago, wondered if she 
 would return in such glory as she display- 
 ed when she came and crowned God by 
 Jehovih's command. 
 
CYCLE OF SETHANTES 
 
 33 
 
 Some were robing themselves in white, 
 and hastening nervously, like a bride about 
 to wed. Some were inclined to sorrow for 
 leaving the earth and lower heaven where 
 they had toiled so long. And some were 
 stately, and by their presence said: Thy 
 will be done, O Jehovih. 
 
 God ascended the throne and Ha'jah 
 came up and sat on his right hand; and the 
 light of Jehovih shone so brightly upon 
 them that many new-born es'yan specta- 
 tors could not look upon them. 
 
 God said: One dan hath come and 
 gone; this harvest is but thirty millions. 
 
 Ha'jah said: Thy Son, O Jehovih, 
 hath shaped the destiny of a world. Great 
 is his glory. 
 
 A light of golden hue gathered above 
 the throne, taking the form of a triangle; 
 and there was engraven on each corner a 
 single letter which read, I-O-D; and it 
 was in the characters of the land of Wha- 
 ga, bestowed by the Lord on the altars in 
 the houses of worship on earth, and its 
 meaning was thirty-three million, which 
 was the number of the earth-born spirits 
 prepared for the emancipated heaven in 
 etherea. 
 
 God said: Take thou this triangle, O 
 thou Son of the Most High. And as 
 long as Seffas endureth on the earth shall 
 it be the bequeathed heirloom of heaven, 
 descending from God to God. 
 
 As God stretched forth his hands the 
 triangle became solid, and God hung it on 
 Ha'jah's neck, adding: In the name of 
 Jehovih, receive this jewel in memory of 
 this parting. 
 
 Ha'jah said: O God, thou symbol of 
 the three attributes, love, wisdom and 
 power. Thou didst leave thy stately home, 
 where thou had Gods and Goddesses for 
 companions, and come to Earth, which 
 was young and curtained round with poi- 
 sonous gases, to guard the young and im- 
 perfect angels of other worlds in their wan- 
 derings forth. Thou didst give them lib- 
 erty and yet redeem them. Thou hast 
 stretched forth thy hand over the earth 
 and made it to yield souls to glorify the 
 Creator. And yet in all the while thou 
 hast never quoted thyself. O that this 
 could be taught to angels and men. This 
 day I am to be crowned to fill the place 
 
 thou hast built up; but I falter and tremble 
 like a child. 
 
 Ha'jah burst into tears, and after a 
 while he added: O Jehovih, Thou hast 
 created love in my soul, and it hath 
 grown to be a mountain. God, Thy Son, 
 who has been my tutor for a thousand 
 years, and on many worlds, corpor and 
 es, is now thrusting Thy glory upon me. 
 
 God said: Heed thou Earth and 
 her heavens, for they are to be thine for 
 one dan. And remember also, that though 
 I ascend with my hosts to etherea, yet I 
 have charge of this world until the com- 
 pletion of this cycle, two thousand eight 
 hundred years. My Archangels shall 
 henceforth answer to thy prayers to Je- 
 hovih. 
 
 Suddenly a light came down from the 
 firmament, like a new star, twinkling, with 
 a halo extending wide on every side. All 
 eyes were turned up, full of expectancy. 
 Hushed and still the ninety million stood. 
 Presently the star assumed a brighter 
 phase and spread its halo onward, with 
 horns descending like a crescent, such as 
 is formed in sacred worship when a God 
 is standing in the midst. Larger and larger 
 the light grew, and tremulous and wav- 
 ing like sheets of fire. Then shot down 
 toward Hored and Moeb three rays oC 
 light, piercing, and in advance of the cen- 
 tral orb. And the three rays were red,, 
 blue and yellow; but the crescent beyond 
 was white, and it shone abroad over the 
 heavens, so that the corporeal sun and 
 stars in the firmament were invisible. 
 
 At beholding the majesty and grandeur 
 of Jehovih's hosts descending, millions of 
 es'yans in the lower heaven broke and 
 fled; some ran and hid to avoid the 
 threatening light. For such is the magni- 
 fying power of etherean flame, that all 
 dark thoughts and hidden evil lurking in 
 the soul are magnified, and made so plain 
 that even the dumb can read them through. 
 
 Millions of the ethereans on God's staff 
 had seen such scenes before, and now 
 stood as though riveted by the joy within 
 them. To them- clung the newly-raised 
 from earth, who had known no other hea- 
 ven. From these there arose millions of 
 whispers, saying: It is like a new death; 
 like a new birth. Behold, a man dies on 
 the earth, and his spirit findeth itself in 
 
34 
 
 CYCLE OF SETHANTES 
 
 another world. And now again we are 
 going to still another world. 
 
 Quickly now, came the great light, the 
 three rays projecting; and these were the 
 orders of marshals from the a'jian fields of 
 O'wea and Hon'she. And there were of 
 marshals one million, and they cast the 
 curtains round about to cover all of the 
 great kingdom of Hored. Chief of the 
 marshals was Ah'jeng; and next to him 
 were five sub-chiefs; and next came one 
 thousand tributary chiefs, who were mas- 
 ters of the ceremonies; and they came in 
 the center of the three great rays of light, 
 descending swiftly and direct toward the 
 throne of God. And the substance of the 
 rays of light was like curtains of cloth, 
 one end of which reached up to the now 
 near approaching crescent sea of fire. 
 
 When the great ship was nearly touch- 
 ing the pillars of fire surrounding Moeb, 
 its speed slackened a little and it came 
 more and more slowly. The chieftains 
 leaped from the etherean flames and stood 
 at the foot of God's throne, saluting in Je- 
 hovih's name. 
 
 God and Ha'jah stood up and answered 
 the sign, then descending went to the left 
 and right of Ah'jeng, and Ah'jeng sat 
 upon the throne and the Voice of Jehovih 
 spake through him, saying: 
 
 Hold up your heads and rejoice, O My 
 sons and daughters. Behold, I come in a 
 flame of fire. I am here and there, through- 
 out the place of heaven, boundless. I 
 gather together and I put asunder the 
 loves of mortals and angels. For they 
 shall go abroad in My firmament and be- 
 hold My glorious works. Down to the 
 corporeal world I descend, and carry hence 
 the loved. I will make all people look up 
 to My kingdoms. Down to the lower hea- 
 ven I come in ships of light, curtained 
 about with etherean mantles, and gather 
 in My harvest of new births to higher 
 worlds, more radiant. My hosts below 
 shall look up and glorify My everlasting 
 splendors. I give the tear of grief and sor- 
 row and pity; but in its flowing forth, I 
 come with holier light and power to stir 
 up the souls of My people. For they shall 
 learn to speak to their Father, Who hears 
 their cry, and is full of love. 
 
 My joy is in the birth and growing up 
 of souls, and in the joy of their joys, and in 
 
 the proclaiming of their adoration for My 
 boundless universe. I call to them in 
 darkness and they come forth; when they 
 halt in the darkness, I call again; and 
 I send my high raised angels to them, 
 and they call also. Yea, I fill the sky with 
 the splendor of my works, that I may stir 
 man up to rise and enjoy the things I have 
 made. 
 
 The Voice departed, and Ah'jeng said: 
 Behold the glory of the heavens, O my be- 
 loved, and the reward of the diligent in 
 heart. Jehovih lives and reigneth, the 
 Highest and never to be reached; the For- 
 ever Beyond, and yet Ever Present. 
 
 O Thou Light of Light and Life of 
 Life, how wonderful is the substance of 
 Thy creation. Thou hast given me light 
 to behold Thy splendors, which are for- 
 ever new. O Jehovih, Thou Past, Present 
 and Future, of one time, which is and was 
 and ever shall be. Jehovih, Thou Seen 
 and Unseen and Potent, who hast from 
 Thy very self imparted a part to all the liv- 
 ing. Who hast raised up these of Hored. 
 Glory be to thee, forever. 
 
 And now by signs and signals, Ah'jeng 
 directed the officers of his hosts to take 
 possession of Moeb and Hored. And the 
 marshals extended out around the place, 
 and by their presence added new light to 
 the pillars of fire. The marshals were dec- 
 orated with colored raiment and signs and 
 symbols, denoting the places whence they 
 came, and their ranks as Gods, and the 
 experience they had passed through. 
 
 And when Ah'jeng ceased speaking, the 
 music of the hosts of angels who had been 
 chosen to make music for the Brides and 
 Bridegrooms filled all the place of Hored, 
 first faintly and far off. The work of the 
 marshals was in keeping with the time of 
 the music; and as the music drew nearer 
 and stronger the marshals descended and 
 filed off to their respective places. 
 
 Presently the advance of the horns of 
 the crescent, and the cold wave of the 
 falling sea of fire, swept over the lower 
 heaven fearfully and of unquestionable 
 power. By a signal from God, the Brides 
 and Bridegrooms joined in the music of 
 the Archangels, and great was the glory 
 thereof. Betwixt the horns of the crescent 
 was a star of wonderful beauty; and it 
 came toward God's throne, reflecting 
 
CYCLE OF SETHANTES 
 
 35 
 
 countless rays of light, brilliant and awe- 
 inspiring. And as the star drew near, it 
 opened on the advance side, as a shell is 
 opened, and there with arms entwined, sat 
 Etisyai and Onesyi. 
 
 Ah'jeng stepped down and stood at the 
 foot of the throne. Masters of the inner 
 temple gathered about the star, and unroll- 
 ed a carpet reaching across the threshold, 
 and the two Goddesses stepped forth from 
 the crystaled cushion within the star, and 
 glided as if on a ray of light, up to the 
 judgment seat of Jehovih. Meanwhile, the 
 musicians, a million of voices, chanted: 
 
 Glory, Glory to Jehovih, Creator of 
 Worlds! 
 
 Whose place magnificence is, and coun- 
 terpart to endless time. 
 
 The All, whose great existence surpass- 
 ed 
 
 The grandest thoughts of men and 
 Gods. 
 
 Whose worlds in splendor are the 
 scrolls 
 
 On which His hands write with the 
 souls of mortals. 
 
 His Almighty Will and Boundless 
 Love! 
 
 Then the millions of Gods and God- 
 desses, formed a mighty amphitheater, in 
 which Moeb, with its thirty-three million 
 Brides and Bridegrooms of Jehovih, occu- 
 pied the arena, themselves arrayed in 
 white, but differently from the redeeming 
 hosts from the etherean worlds. 
 
 In time to the music, without a word of 
 command, moved the hosts, as one person, 
 and each as a shining crystal in the place 
 allotted, and all as perfect as if Jehovih had 
 made each a special work of wonder to 
 inspire man with reverence for the talents 
 He had created withal. Now when the 
 music ceased, all was still. The throne 
 was in the east, facing the west. The hosts 
 of Moeb, who were the Brides and Bride- 
 grooms of Jehovih, occupied the lower 
 place, and the ethereans surrounded them 
 on all sides, rising higher and higher in 
 the distance. 
 
 God and Ha'jah met the Goddesses at 
 the foot of the throne. God knew Onesyi 
 hundreds of years before in other worlds, 
 and he remembered Etisyai, who had 
 crowned him two hundred years ago. So 
 also did Ha'jah know Etisyai and Onesyi. 
 
 When they met they all saluted by touch- 
 ing the right hands; and immediately the 
 Gods ascended to the center of the throne, 
 and God went on the right and Ha'jah on 
 the left. Etisyai and Onesyi looked hope- 
 fully on the Brides and Bridegrooms. 
 Presently the Voice of Jehovih spake out 
 of the light of the throne, saying: 
 
 Soul of My soul, substance of My sub- 
 stance, created I man. Out of My cor- 
 poreal self clothed I him with flesh and 
 blood and bones. Man's spirit I gave 
 from out Mine own spirit, and I quickened 
 him to move on the face of the earth. 
 
 God and the Brides and Bridegrooms 
 responded, being moved by the All Light: 
 Out of corpor I came, quickened by Jeho - 
 vih's Ever Presence. By virtue of his 
 Love, Wisdom and Power came I into the 
 world. To Jehovih all glory is due for- 
 ever. 
 
 Again, Jehovih spake, saying: A Time 
 I allotted to man to grow, to attain love, 
 wisdom and power; a time to rejoice and 
 a time of sorrow; a time to beget offspring 
 and know a father's care and love; to him 
 gave I attributes of My attributes that man 
 might know Me and My love. 
 
 Response: By the bondage of my love 
 to my begotten, do I know my Father lives 
 and reigneth, and will watch over me for- 
 ever. 
 
 Again the Voice of Jehovih said: A 
 time of mortality I gave to man that he' 
 might learn corporeal things, and in the 
 place I quickened him into life, I bound 
 him for a season. But when man hath ful- 
 filled his corporeal life, I provide death to 
 deliver him into a new world. 
 
 Response: Beautiful is Thy wisdom, O 
 Jehovih, and far reaching. I was bound in 
 the flesh even as a beast; likened unto the 
 attributes of a beast was my judgment, 
 struggling for things of the corporeal 
 world. With horror I looked upon death; 
 as a sore calamity did I value Thy cutting 
 me off. But Thou delivered me into an- 
 other world, preserving my reason, bring- 
 ing me to the heavens of my forefathers. 
 
 Then Jehovih said: In no time brought 
 I man new born into the world without a 
 mother and nurse and rich nourishment 
 to feed him withal. Yea, I gave him an- 
 gels to inspire him and lift him up; and I 
 provided a Lord of the earth to manage 
 
36 
 
 CYCLE OF SETHANTES 
 
 his kingdoms and nations, and a God in 
 heaven with a throne and judgment seat, 
 that man in the angel world should be pro- 
 vided and wisely instructed in soul to 
 comprehend the glory and harmony of My 
 worlds. 
 
 Response: Bountiful, O my Father, 
 above. From nothing that I knew of 
 Thou broughtest me into conscious be- 
 ing, and in my helpless days fed me with 
 rich nourishment. Thou gavest me rulers 
 and examples of government on the earth 
 to discipline my soul to the order of men. 
 And when I was born in heaven, I found 
 God on his throne and a well ordered ha- 
 ven of rest, with willing angels to clothe 
 me and feed me and teach me the ways of 
 Thy kingdoms in the firmament. 
 
 Again Jehovih said: When man hath 
 fulfilled his time in the lower heaven, I 
 prepare him by ample teachers for a higher 
 resurrection. As Brides and Bridegrooms 
 My hosts adorn them, and I come in a sea 
 of fire. First was man wedded to the 
 earth; then to the lower heaven was he 
 wed, laboring with spirits and mortals. 
 
 The Voice departed, and now Onesyi 
 spoke, saying: Behold the Brides and 
 Bridegrooms of Jehovih. When they were 
 young they were wed first to the earth and 
 then to the lower heaven without their 
 wills. Now they stand before the throne 
 of God. In Thy name, O Jehovih, I com- 
 mand them to speak their wills. 
 
 Response: I put away myself for Thee, 
 O Jehovih. Make me one with Thee. I 
 put away the earth for Thy kingdom's 
 sake, O Jehovih. Make me one with 
 Thee. I put away Thy Lord and Thy 
 God, O Jehovih, for sake of Thee. Thy 
 Lord and Thy God raised me up and made 
 me strong but lo, the small spark of Thy- 
 self within my soul hath grown to be a 
 giant, bowing to none but Thee, O Jeho- 
 vih. O make me Thy Bride (or Bride- 
 groom), O Jehovih. 
 
 Onesyi said: The lame and the weak 
 shall have a crutch, but the glory of the 
 Father is to see His Brides and Bride- 
 grooms walk alone. Whoever to Jehovih 
 is wed, shall never more to man nor wo- 
 man, nor Lords nor God, nor to any per- 
 son, for self's sake, say: Help. 
 
 Response: God and the Lords were 
 my saviors. Without them I had never 
 
 known of Thy exalted heavens, O Jehovih. 
 Thy spirit calleth me forever upward. 
 Thy Lord and Thy God taught me to look 
 upward; yea, they prayed for me. Now I 
 am strong before Thee, O Jehovih. Hence- 
 forth will I pray to Thee only; but never 
 for mine own benefit, nor for glory, nor 
 for ease, nor for exaltation; but that I may 
 be quick and strong and wise to do Thy 
 will forever. 
 
 Onesyi said: Brides and Bridegrooms 
 of Jehovih, All Hail! All Hail! 
 
 Voice of Jehovih, All Hail! All Hail! 
 
 Onesyi said: To Jehovih and His ever 
 lasting kingdoms are ye wed forever. 
 
 Response: To Thee, O Jehovih, am 1 
 wed forever. 
 
 Onesyi said: To be one with Him for- 
 ever. 
 
 Response: To be one with Jehovih for- 
 ever. 
 
 The Voice of Jehovih said: They shall 
 judge from My judgment seat. In them 
 shall My wisdom shine; for they are Mine 
 forever. 
 
 Response: Henceforth, I will consider 
 Thee first in all things, O Jehovih, for- 
 ever. 
 
 The Voice said: Behold I have woven 
 a crown for them. Adorn them in My 
 name. 
 
 Response: I will have no crown, save 
 that which is woven by Thee, O Jehovih. 
 For Thy glory, will I wear Thy crown for- 
 ever. 
 
 The Voice said: Behold, they that were 
 My sons and daughters have become My 
 Brides and Bridegrooms. 
 
 Response: I am Jehovih's forever. 
 
 Onesyi said: Pass before the throne, O 
 My beloved. The testimony of Jehovih 
 awaited His redeemed. Ye shall dwell in 
 the emancipated kingdoms forever. 
 
 And now the hosts of Brides and Bride- 
 grooms passed singly before the throne of 
 God, the whole thirty-three million. And 
 the es'enaurs chanted a hymn of glory, 
 and there came down from the firmament 
 above mists of yellow, blue and red; and 
 the mists fell into the Archangels' hands 
 who stood about the throne, and by them 
 were woven into crowns, which were placed 
 on the heads of the Brides and Bride- 
 grooms as they passed. And on the 
 
CYCLE OF SETHANTES 
 
 37 
 
 crowns were the words: In Wan brought 
 forth; delivered in Hon'she. 
 
 As the hosts passed in front of the 
 throne, Onesyi said: By that which 
 springeth out of the earth is the atmospher- 
 ean fed and clothed; but the etherean draw- 
 eth from the etherean worlds. Behold the 
 crowns of the earth and of the lower hea- 
 ven are but symbols of love, wisdom and 
 power; but that which I bring from Jeho- 
 vih's kingdoms containeth real virtue. 
 
 And lo and behold, the Brides and 
 Bridegrooms became as Archangels by vir- 
 tue of the crowns from Jehovih's hand. 
 
 CHAPTER XXI. 
 
 When the ceremonies were ended, 
 Onesyi said: In the name of Jehovih, we 
 will soon rise and go on a long journey, 
 and I now proclaim the freedom of the 
 hour in Jehovih's name. 
 
 And the people went and mingled with 
 each other, rejoicing and saluting. And 
 Ha'jah and God and and Etisyai greeted 
 one another, and the Lords came forward 
 and were also greeted; and then the mar- 
 shals and the es'enaurs, and all long-serv- 
 ing laborers. And lastly, all that had re- 
 deemed any man or woman from darkness 
 to light, came also, and were saluted and 
 duly honored. 
 
 And for the space of one hour all the 
 angels indulged in reunion with fullness 
 of heart; but no book could relate a thou- 
 sandth part of the questions asked and love 
 assurances expressed. 
 
 When the hour was ended, Onesyi sig- 
 naled the proper officer, and he sounded 
 the gavel thrice, whereupon all was hushed. 
 
 Onesyi said: As Jehovih bestoweth a 
 new-born child, so also doth He take the 
 father and mother away to the es world. 
 As Jehovih sent Etisyai, my sister, to es- 
 tablish the lower heaven, so have I come 
 by His command to bear hence this harvest 
 to His everlasting kingdom. As a child 
 bewaileth the loss of his father and mother, 
 so will ye that remain bewail the loss of 
 this rich harvest of angels. It is Jehovih's 
 will that ye drink deep of the sorrow of 
 parting, for by this bondage will ye be 
 again reunited in the heavens still above. 
 The progress of the soul of man is forever 
 onward, and the glory of the resurrection 
 of him that goeth before is equally great 
 
 as is the sorrow of him that remains be- 
 hind. But the love that bindeth together is 
 as a chain outstretched across the uni- 
 verse. Swift messengers, well trained to 
 course the vault of heaven, will pass be- 
 tween you, carrying the tidings of your 
 soul's delight. And as Jehovih giveth 
 summer to follow winter, and the winter 
 the summer, so shall the time come again 
 and again, in which ye shall mingle and 
 part; again labor together in broader 
 fields, and again part for a season. Behold 
 the wisdom of Jehovih in placing far apart 
 the places of the souls of men; for all 
 things abiding near together equalize 
 themselves. Even as there is glory in a 
 new birth, so is there glory in death; as 
 there is sorrow in death, so is there joy in 
 resurrection. The time has now come when 
 these that you love you shall not see for 
 a long time. But you should rejoice in 
 the hour of parting, for they rise as Brides 
 and Bridegrooms to Jehovih. 
 
 The es'enaurs sang an anthem of praise 
 in which all the hosts united, and great 
 was the glory thereof. And now Onesyi 
 arose, saying: 
 
 Jehovih, Almighty and Everlasting. 
 Look upon this, Thy Son, Ha'jah. In Thy 
 name, O Father, and by virtue of Thy 
 power in me vested, do I perpetuate and 
 crown him God of Earth. 
 
 Ha'jah, now God, said: Thy will be 
 done, O Jehovih. 
 
 Then Onesyi turned to the five chief 
 Lords of the five divisions of the earth, 
 and bestowed them in like manner. 
 
 And Onesyi stretched forth her hand, 
 saying: Give me a crown, O Jehovih, for 
 Thy Son, God of Earth. And there de- 
 scended etherean substance into her hand, 
 and she raised it up, and it became a 
 crown of great beauty, and she put it on 
 God's head. Then in like manner did she 
 crown the Lords of Earth. 
 
 And Etisyai and Onesyi came down and 
 sat at the foot of the throne. God came 
 down, and stretching forth his hands, said 
 to Etisyai, Onesyi and Sethantes: 
 
 Arise, O Goddess, and go thy way- 
 Arise, O Goddess, and go thy way. Arise, 
 O God, and go thy way. And they rose 
 up and marched forth. 
 
 The proper officers had already pre- 
 pared the ship for its etherean journey, 
 
38 
 
 CYCLE OF SETRANTES 
 
 and soon as Etisyai and Onesyi had en- 
 tered the central star, all the people that 
 were to ascend went into the places as- 
 signed to them. 
 
 God and the Lords returned in tears to 
 the throne; and now the plateau of ever- 
 lasting light began to ascend. Music 
 sprang from every side, glorifying Jehovih 
 and the magnificence of His bountiful 
 worlds. And those of the lower heaven 
 were as the echo of the music above; and 
 the light of the ascending ship of fire 
 made all else as a shadow. But higher 
 and higher it rose, in the form of a cres- 
 cent, slowly turning, turning and rising, 
 higher and higher, and the music faded 
 away in the distance. 
 
 Thus ascended to the emancipated hea- 
 vens in etherea, the first harvest of angels 
 born on Earth. 
 
 CHAPTER XXII. 
 
 God said: Arise, O Lords of my realm, 
 and go to the kingdoms which ye have 
 received from Jehovih's hand; and may 
 His love, wisdom and power be with you 
 all. 
 
 And the Lords departed, they and their 
 attendants, and went to their kingdoms 
 over mortals. 
 
 And God dispensed laws and govern- 
 ment after the manner of his predecessors, 
 enlarging all the places according to the 
 increase in the number of spirits rising up 
 from the earth. And the Voice of Jehovih 
 was with God; and as the first kingdom 
 had been called Hored, so was the second 
 called Hored. And as it had been with 
 the Lords of Earth in their places, so 
 continued it with the new Lords, and they 
 enlarged their places also, according to 
 the increase in the number of inhabitants 
 of the earth. And as it had been of old 
 that messengers went constantly from Hor- 
 ed to the Lords' places, so did they also 
 continue to do; and by this means all the 
 affairs of the lower heaven were kept in 
 harmony, Lords and God. And God ruled 
 in Hored four hundred years, and Hored 
 spread over all the lands of the earth. 
 
 When the time of God and his hosts 
 was fulfilled, Jehovih brought the earth 
 into dan of Eyon, in the arc Lais, whose 
 angels descended in a ship of fire, and de- 
 
 livered God and his Lords and all the 
 hosts under them who were prepared for 
 the etherean resurrection. At this time 
 there were in atmospherea six hundred and 
 twenty-five million inhabitants. And the 
 number of the second harvest was two 
 hundred and eighty million. After the 
 manner of the ascent of the first harvest, so 
 was the ascent of the second harvest. And 
 the place of the landing of the second har- 
 vest in the firmament of heaven was in 
 Lais, and Bin, and the grade of the harvest 
 was seventy-eight, being two less than the 
 grade of the first harvest. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIII. 
 
 So Earth and her heavens passed into 
 the care of succeeding God and Lords, 
 who had been raised up and prepared 
 therefor. And for the present there were 
 no more ethereans dwelling in these re- 
 gions. 
 
 Jehovih said: They that come out of 
 Earth shall be sufficient unto them- 
 selves. As a mother provideth for her 
 child, so do I provide for the spirit gener- 
 ations of a corporeal world. But when 
 they are mature in wisdom, strength and 
 love, I command them to take the places 
 of Lords and Gods in the management of 
 My kingdoms. 
 
 Now after the ascent of the ethereans 
 the whole Earth and its lower heavens 
 were under the dominion of angels born 
 on Earth. Hence, it became a saying: 
 The first was etherean rule; the second was 
 atmospherean rule. For Earth had a God 
 and Lords who had been on no other 
 world. 
 
 And it likewise came to pass that the 
 atmospherean rulers were more lenient 
 and less tyrannical than had been the eth- 
 ereans. For the ethereans had forbidden 
 the es'yans to return to their mortal kind- 
 dred till they had been in heaven fifty 
 years; but the present God and Lords in- 
 dulged hundreds of thousands of es'yans 
 for sympathy's sake to return to their mor- 
 tal kindred. And these es'yans became not 
 not workers in heaven, either for others 
 or for their own resurrection, and they be- 
 came idlers and vagabonds in the lower 
 heaven, oft living with their mortal kin- 
 
CYCLE OF SETHANTES 
 
 39 
 
 dred till their mortal kindred died, and 
 then in turn persuading such es'yans to do 
 as they did. 
 
 And God perceived, when it was too 
 late, that his leniency had laid the founda- 
 tion for disorganizing the kingdom of hea- 
 ven; for the strolling idlers knowing no 
 other heaven, sowed the spirit of disbelief 
 in the places of learning and industry in 
 the lower heaven, persuading others that 
 they were toiling to no good purpose. 
 
 They said: Behold, it was told us on 
 earth that there was a Jehovih. But we are 
 in heaven, and yet we find Him not. Now 
 do we know of a truth there is no All 
 Person. Come, then, let us seek ease and 
 the rich viands that rise up out of the 
 earth. A man liveth on the earth and 
 dieth, and his spirit floateth round about, 
 and there is no more of him. Why will ye 
 serve the Lord? Why will ye serve God? 
 Be free and live for yourselves instead of 
 others. 
 
 Thus it came to pass that little by lit- 
 tle the lower heaven began to fall from its 
 high estate. 
 
 The third dan was six hundred years, 
 and God and his Lords, having provided 
 successors, ascended with their harvest to 
 etherea. And the number thereof was 
 four hundred and eight million Brides and 
 
 Bridegrooms, and their grade was sixty- 
 six. 
 
 The fourth dan was five hundred years, 
 and the harvest was six hundred million 
 Brides and Bridegrooms; and their grade 
 was fifty-eight. 
 
 The fifth dan was three hundred years; 
 and the harvest was two hundred millions, 
 and their grade was fifty, which was the 
 lowest grade capable of emancipation, or 
 capable of surviving in etherea. 
 
 And now darkness set in and covered 
 all Earth around. And from this time 
 until the end of the cycle, which was three 
 thousand years from the birth of man on 
 Earth, there were no more resurrections to 
 the emancipated heavens. The kingdom of 
 Hored was broken up and dissolved. The 
 spirits loved not to labor according to T e- 
 hovih's plan, but remained on the earth; 
 and they were called drujas because they 
 desired not resurrection. 
 
 And God and his Lords, and their offi- 
 cers and teachers, were without subjects 
 and pupils. And mortals were beset by 
 thousands of millions of drujas, so that 
 the ashars were powerless to accomplish 
 good inspiration. At this time there were 
 more than three thousand million angels in 
 atmospherea, and most of them dwelt on 
 earth. 
 
 Thus ended the first cycle. 
 
LORDS' RECORD FOR CYCLE OK SETHANTES 
 
 Jehovih, Creator of all the living, spoke 
 to Sethantes and his hosts who were trav- 
 eling in the region through which the 
 Earth passed, saying: 
 
 That these, My Sons and Daughters, 
 may understand the manner of the creation 
 of man on a new world, go ye to Earth. 
 
 And they came to Earth; and man 
 was like the beast, not having immortality. 
 They were naked, and knew not even the 
 sin of incest. They were called Asu. 
 
 Now by the power of their wills, the 
 ethereans took on corporeal bodies, and 
 being immature in corporeal judgment they 
 dwelt with the Asuans, and a new race was 
 born upon the earth which was called I'hin 
 because they were begotten of both heaven 
 and earth. 
 
 Now the first race of man was called 
 Asu, and possessed not immortality; but 
 the race of Thins was capable of everlasting 
 life and of being taught spiritual things. 
 
 Jehovih's light came to Sethantes, say- 
 ing: Go build a kingdom in the lower 
 heavens, and call it Hored; and an etherean 
 Goddess came down to Earth and 
 crowned Sethantes first God of Earth, 
 and also appointed and crowned five 
 Lords, one to each of the great divisions 
 of the earth. And the Lords also estab- 
 lished kingdoms, but on earth, and as God 
 dealt with angels the Lords had to do 
 with mortals through the ashars. 
 
 Jehovih said: Of all that live on the 
 earth, or in the waters, or in the air, that 
 breathe the breath of life, man only have I 
 delivered unto knowledge of his Creator. 
 
 And the Lord spake unto the I'hin 
 through the ashars, saying: Go hide thy 
 nakedness. And the Thins were afraid 
 and they clothed themselves. And the 
 Lord commanded the angels to give up 
 their corporeal forms, and to be no more 
 seen as mortals, and they did so. 
 
 And Jehovih said unto them: Because 
 ye brought forth heirs in flesh and blood, 
 ye shall be bound to them for six genera- 
 tions. And that man may continue to walk 
 upright, ye shall teach him the law of in- 
 cest, for man of himself cannot attain to 
 
 know this. Neither shall ye permit the 
 Thins to dwell with Asu, lest his offspring 
 go down in darkness. 
 
 And man was thus inspired by the an- 
 gels and he walked upright, and prospered 
 on the earth. But after a season man be- 
 came conceited in his own judgment, and 
 he disobeyed the commandments. And 
 he began to dwell with the Asuans, and 
 there was born into the world a new race 
 called Druk, and they had not the light 
 of the Father in them; neither could they 
 be inspired with shame, nor of heavenly 
 things. 
 
 And the Thins were grateful to the 
 Lord, and they said unto the Druks: 
 Go ye and sacrifice to the Lord, and he 
 will prosper you. But the Druks under- 
 stood not; and slew many of the I'hins. 
 And the Lord said unto the Druks: Be- 
 cause you have slain my people, ye shall 
 depart out of the place where they dwell; 
 and that ye may be known to all the people 
 of the earth I put a mark upon you. So 
 the nations of the Druks were accursed 
 with war, and the Lord said: By this 
 sign shall the tribes of Druks and their 
 descendants be known unto the end of the 
 world. 
 
 And woman, being more helpless than 
 man, cried out with fear, saying: O Lord, 
 how shall I bring forth unto thee, and not 
 unto the sons of death? 
 
 And the Lord said: Because thou hast 
 brought forth in pain, and yet called on 
 my name, behold I will be unto thee as a 
 shield and protector. For I will also put 
 a mark upon the I'hins, my chosen, so 
 thou shall know them as they come unto 
 thee. 
 
 And the Lord commanded the male 
 I'hins, old and young, to be circumcised, 
 that woman might not be deceived by the 
 Druks. And the I'hins circumcised one 
 another, old and young, for it was the tes- 
 timony of the Lord unto woman, that their 
 offspring was born unto everlasting life. 
 
 And the Druks went away into the wil- 
 derness, and dwelt with the Asuans and 
 with one another. And the I'hins labored 
 
CYCLE OF SETHANTES 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 41 
 
 and clothed themselves; but the Druks 
 wandered in the wilderness, neither labor- 
 ing nor clothing themselves. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 The time of the habitation of Asu was 
 eight thousand years; and they survived 
 two thousand years after the time of the 
 birth of the I'hins, and then disappeared 
 off the earth. And there remained on the 
 earth the sacred people, the I'hins, and the 
 carnivorous people, the Druks. 
 
 The I'hins were white and yellow, but 
 the Druks were brown and black; the 
 I'hins were small and slender, but the 
 Druks were tall and stout. 
 
 Now, because the Druks had not pre- 
 viously obeyed the Lord, but went and 
 dwelt with the Asuans, there was a half 
 breed race born on the earth called Yak, 
 signifying ground people; and they bur- 
 rowed in the ground. And the Yaks did 
 not walk wholly upright, but also went on 
 all fours. 
 
 The Lord said: Because the Yaks can- 
 not be taught the crime of incest, behold 
 they shall not dwell forever on the earth. 
 So also shall it be with the Druks, save 
 wherein they cohabit with the I'hins, 
 whose seed is born unto everlasting life. 
 But with the Druks and their heirs that 
 spring from the Yaks, there shall be an 
 end, both in this world and the next. 
 
 And the arms of the Yaks were long, 
 and their backs were stooped and curved. 
 And the Lord said: Because they are the 
 fruit of incest, and not capable of speech, 
 nor of eternal life in heaven, the I'hins 
 shall make servants of them. And that 
 they may not tempt my chosen to bring 
 forth unto destruction, they shall be neu- 
 tralized. 
 
 And the angels of the Lord taught the 
 I'hins to make eunuchs of the Yaks, both 
 males and females, and the I'hins took 
 them for servants. 
 
 And the Lord said: The Yaks shall 
 serve the I'hins, and build and reap for 
 them. 
 
 The I'hins were disposed to live alone, 
 but the Lord called them together, saying: 
 Come and dwell together in cities; for it 
 is better that ye dwell after the manner of 
 
 my kingdoms in heaven. Build ye there- 
 fore a temple for the Lord, and my angels 
 shall dwell with you, teaching you to sing 
 and dance for the glory of your creator. 
 
 And man built a temple for the Lord, 
 and established worship on earth after the 
 manner of heaven. Now it came to pass 
 that the Druks came to witness the rites 
 and ceremonies of the I'hins, but they took 
 no part therein; neither comprehended 
 they the meaning thereof. 
 
 And the Lord said unto the I'hins: 
 That ye may teach some of them of the 
 Lord, build ye within the house of worship 
 an image of me in likeness of man. And I 
 will manifest unto as many as are capable 
 of everlasting life. 
 
 And the I'hins, men and women, built 
 images of the Lord in stone, and clay and 
 wood, and stood them by the altars of sac- 
 rifice. And in the time of worship the 
 angels came and possessed the idols and 
 with audible voices spake before mortals. 
 And the Druks inquired of the I'hins as 
 to the cause thereof. And the I'hins said: 
 Behold, there is a Lord in heaven, more 
 subtle than the air of heaven. He it was 
 that brought us forth out of darkness. He 
 speaketh in the idol that ye may know he 
 abideth with his people. 
 
 The Druks said: What saith he? The 
 I'hins answered: That whomsoever hath 
 attained to remember the Lord is in the 
 way of everlasting life. 
 
 The Druks inquired: How shall a man 
 live forever? Behold, ye that believe also 
 die. The I'hins answered, saying: As the 
 voice of the Lord is unseen but potent, so 
 is there a spirit in man unseen and potent 
 which shall never die, but ascend in hea- 
 ven to habitations prepared by the Lord. 
 
 And many of the Druks pondered on 
 these things, and their thoughts quickened 
 their souls within them, so that they 
 brought forth heirs unto eternal salvation. 
 And the Lord said unto the I'hins: Be- 
 cause ye have done a good thing, go ye 
 abroad, by the roadsides and in other 
 places, and build images unto me and 
 mine, and my angels shall bestow gifts 
 and signs and miracles. 
 
 And the I'hins covered the roadways of 
 the earth over with idols of stone and 
 wood and clay, and the angels of heaven 
 descended to the idols and established 
 
42 
 
 CYCLE OF SETHANTES 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 thereabout heavenly kingdoms. And when 
 man came hither and called on the name of 
 the Lord, is was as a password for the an- 
 gels; and they wrought miracles, and oth- 
 erwise gave evidence unto man of the un- 
 seen. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 And the Lord gave these command- 
 ments unto man: 
 
 Thou shalt strive to remember the Lord. 
 
 Thou shalt not kill. 
 
 Thou shalt build walls around about thy 
 cities, that beasts and serpents may not 
 enter and do thee harm. And if thy hab- 
 itation be in the wilderness, thou shalt 
 build mounds of wood and earth to sleep 
 on at night, that serpents and beasts may 
 not molest thee. 
 
 The I'hins inquired of the Lord, saying: 
 If we build walls around about our cities, 
 how shall we get in and out? How shall 
 we gather our harvests of fruit and nuts 
 and seeds of the field? How shall we as- 
 cend on the mounds which we build in the 
 wilderness? 
 
 The Lord said: Behold, my angels 
 shall teach you to build ladders and how to 
 use them. And when you go into the city 
 at night, you shall take the ladders in after 
 you; and when ye come out in the morn- 
 ing, ye shall let them down again. 
 
 And the angels taught man these things, 
 and man provided the cities and mounds, 
 with ladders. And the I'hins prospered 
 and spread abroad over all the earth, and 
 thev built hundreds of thousands of cities 
 and mounds, and they rejoiced in the glory 
 r* all created things. Neither killed they 
 any man, beast, fish, bird, nor creeping 
 thing that breathed the breath of life. 
 
 And the Lord saw that man was good 
 and grateful in all things, and the Lord 
 called unto the angels of heaven, saying: 
 Why are the I'hins good? For as yet, 
 they are ignorant. 
 
 And the angels answered: Because 
 thou said unto us: Go ye, as guardian an- 
 gels, and inspire man to live without evil, 
 even so have we administered unto the 
 I'hins, guarding and inspiring them night 
 and day. 
 
 The Lord said: Then the I'hins have 
 no honor. Except they learn of them- 
 
 selves to be good, they will be void of wis- 
 dom in heaven. For this reason ye shall 
 withdraw a little, that man may attain in- 
 dividuality. 
 
 And the angels withdrew awhile from 
 the I'hins. And now it came to pass that 
 they had stored in their cities and on their 
 mounds ample provision of food and rai- 
 ment for the winter; but the Druks fol- 
 lowed not the example of the I'hins, for 
 the Druks stored up nothing. And when 
 the angels departed a little way, satan came 
 to the Druks and said unto them: Behold, 
 it is winter, and ye are hungry. Go ye 
 over the ladders and possess the stores of 
 the I'hins. 
 
 And the Druks plundered the I'hins, 
 and satan came to the I'hins also, and 
 many of them were inspired to defend their 
 stores. And war ensued; and it spread 
 around about the whole earth. And the 
 I'hins besought the Lord as to why Jeho- 
 vih suffered evil to come upon his chosen. 
 
 And the Lord said: Because ye de- 
 pended upon me for all things, ye develop- 
 ed not yourselves. Henceforth shall man 
 learn to face evil on his own account. 
 Otherwise he could not attain wisdom. 
 Two entities has the Creator given thee, 
 that which is flesh and that which is spirit. 
 And the flesh shall desire earthly things; 
 but the spirit shall desire heavenly things. 
 Behold, when the Druks came upon thee 
 for thy stores, thy flesh cried out for war, 
 and thy people fell. Again, have I come to 
 raise thee up, to make thee understand the 
 spirit within. It is that, and not the flesh, 
 which shall learn to triumph. 
 
 The I'hins said: Our people are scat- 
 tered and gone. Will they not mingle with 
 the Druks and thus go out in darkness? 
 The Lord said: Behold there were Druks 
 who had learned a little from the images. 
 Now because thy people are scattered and 
 gone they shall go amongst the Druks and 
 teach them, and they shall begin to hide 
 their nakedness. 
 
 So the Lord inspired other people be- 
 side the I'hins, to make and wear clothes, 
 and they thus wore them. 
 
 And again the Lord brought the I'hins 
 together in lodges and cities and he said 
 unto them: Henceforth ye shall live upon 
 the earth as an example of righteousness. 
 And your brethren who have mingled with 
 
CYCLE OF SETH ANTES 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 43 
 
 the tribes of darkness shall no longer mo- 
 lest you, but be your defenders and pro- 
 tectors. 
 
 And there began to be a new tribe on 
 Earth; and they were called I'huans, be- 
 cause they were half-breeds betwixt the 
 Druks and I'hins. The I'huans were red 
 like copper; and they were taller and 
 stronger than any other people in all the 
 world. And the Lord commanded the 
 I'huans, saying: 
 
 Protect ye the I'hins, the little people, 
 white and yellow; call them, the sacred 
 people. For ye are flesh of their flesh. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 About this time man began to use his 
 lips and tongue in enunciating words, prior 
 to which he spoke in the thorax. And the 
 Lord spake unto the I'hins, saying: That 
 the labor of the Lord may be remembered 
 on the earth, go provide me a stone, and I 
 will engrave it with my own hand, and it 
 shall be called Se'moin, because it shall be 
 a testimony unto all nations and peoples, 
 on the earth, of the first written language in 
 all the world. 
 
 And the I'hins prepared a stone, and 
 hewed it flat and then polished it smooth; 
 and the Lord came down in the night and 
 engraved it. And the Lord through his 
 angels taught the I'hins the meaning of 
 the characters engraved thereon. 
 
 And the Lord said: Go into all cities 
 in all countries, and provide ye copies like 
 the tablet I have given. And the angels 
 inspired the I'hins to make tablets and to 
 read them, that the first language of the 
 earth might be preserved to the races of 
 men. 
 
 Now, the I'huans partly obeyed the 
 Lord, and partly obeyed the way of the 
 flesh, and they became warriors and de- 
 stroyers. Nevertheless, they harmed not 
 the I'hins, nor suffered harm to come upon 
 them. 
 
 The Lord had commanded the I'hins to 
 make eunuchs of the Yaks, the monstrosi- 
 ties, and use them as servants, for the Lord 
 saw that the Yaks were not capable of 
 everlasting life. Now the I'huans also 
 served the Yaks in the same way; but they 
 disobeyed the Lord in inflicting the neu- 
 tral gender on their enemies whom they 
 
 captured in war. And although they were 
 themselves half-breeds with the Druks, yet 
 they hated the Druks and pursued them 
 with vengeance. 
 
 In those days the relative proportion of 
 the races of men was: I'hins, one hun- 
 dred; I'huans, three hundred; Druks, five 
 thousand; Yaks, five thousand; and of 
 monstrosities betwixt man and beast, three 
 thousand; but the latter died each genera- 
 tion, for they had not the power of procre- 
 ation amongst themselves. 
 
 And the Lord saw the work of destruc- 
 tion going on, and he sent the I'hins to 
 preach amongst the I'huans, saying: 
 
 Say to the I'huans: Whomsoever is 
 created alive, kill not, for it is the com- 
 mandment of the Lord. For in the time 
 of your most success is slaughtering your 
 fellow man, ye are also peopling heaven 
 with the spirits of vengenace. And they 
 will return upon you, and even the I'huans 
 shall turn upon one another. 
 
 But the I'huans understood not; believ- 
 ed not; and great darkness covered the 
 earth. And all men, save the few I'hins, 
 indulged in wickedness all their mortal life. 
 And the Lord's people worshipped and 
 preached in the temples, and the Lord and 
 his heavenly hosts ministered unto them; 
 but the other races of men would not come 
 to learn of God. 
 
 And the Lord became tired of his la- 
 bor, and he called his angels to him, and 
 said unto them: Behold, man on Earth 
 hath gone so far from my ways that he 
 will not heed my commandments; he can- 
 not hear my voice. And your labor is in 
 vain also. For which reason we will tarry 
 no longer on the earth till man hath ex- 
 hausted the evil that is in him. 
 
 So the Lord and his hosts departed 
 away from the earth. And clouds came 
 over the face of the earth; and the moon 
 shone not; and the sun was only as a red 
 coal of fire; and the stars stood in the 
 firmament as well in the day as at night. 
 The harvests failed; the trees yielded no 
 nuts, and the roots on which man fed 
 ceased to grow. 
 
 And the monstrosities, and the Yaks, 
 and the Druks, died off, tens of millions 01 
 them. And even yet they were not ex- 
 tinct. Nevertheless the I'huans suffered 
 less; and the I'hins not at all. For the 
 
44 CYCLE OF SETHANTES 
 
 Lord had previously inspired them to pro- monished him, but he would not heed. I 
 
 vide against the coming famine. showed him that every living creature 
 
 And the Lord bewailed the earth, and brought forth after its own kind. But he 
 
 the generations of man: understood not; believed not; and he dwelt 
 
 I made man upright, and walked by his with the beasts, falling lower than all the 
 
 side, but he slipped aside and fell. I ad- rest. 
 
Cycle ok Ah'shong 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 When God of Earth and heaven and 
 his Lords had "lost their heavenly domin- 
 ions, the swift messengers bore the re- 
 port to Jehovih's kingdoms in etherea. 
 Earth had passed the ji'ayan eddies at 
 Shrapah, in the etherean roadway Hi-a- 
 balk'yiv, and was heading for the eastern 
 fields of Anakaron, having entered the 
 dan'haian arches of Vehetaivi, where lay 
 the great kingdoms of the Orian Chief, 
 Hieu Wee, with his millions of Gods and 
 Goddesses and high raised ethereans. 
 
 Before Hieu Wee, came the swift mes- 
 sengers, fresh from the heavens of 
 Earth, with their pitiful tales of woe that 
 had befallen the inhabitants thereof. 
 
 Hieu Wee said: I behold the red star, 
 Earth, O Jehovih. I have heard the 
 tale of horror. What shall be done, O Fa- 
 ther? 
 
 Then spake Jehovih, saying: Call thy 
 tributary Chief, Ah'shong. Let him hear 
 the will of Jehovih. 
 
 Then sent Hieu Wee for Ah'shong, 
 who had dominion over the fields of Anak- 
 aron in etherea, through which lay the 
 roadway where Earth was to travel for 
 three thousand years. And when Ah'- 
 shong came before the Holy Council of 
 Hieu Wee's million Gods and Goddesses, 
 the All Light fell upon the throne like a 
 sun, and the Voice of the Creator spake in 
 the midst of the light, saying: 
 
 Behold the red star, Earth; she en- 
 tereth the fields of Anakaron. She is drip- 
 ping wet and cold in the ji'ayan eddies. 
 Her Gods and Lords are powerless in the 
 spell of darkness. Go thou, My Son, Ah'- 
 shong, and deliver Earth and her hea- 
 vens; for behold, I will bring them to thy 
 door. 
 
 Then spake Ah'shong, saying: Thy 
 will be done, O Jehovih. Though I have 
 been long honored in etherea, with many 
 etherean worlds to command, I have not 
 as yet redeemed one corporeal world and 
 her heaven from a time of darkness. 
 
 Jehovih said: Go then, My Son, to 
 the laboring Earth and deliver her; but 
 first appoint thou a successor for Anaka- 
 ron. 
 
 Then Hieu Wee, who was older than 
 the red star, who had seen many corporeal 
 worlds created; had seen them run their 
 course and then disappear — said to Ah'- 
 shong: 
 
 Send thou to Wan, and Hivigat, in 
 etherea, and get the history of Earth 
 and her heaven; and obtain thou also an 
 account of her harvests of Brides and 
 Bridegrooms to Jehovih. And thou shalt 
 call from my realms as many million ether- 
 ean angels as thy labor may require, and 
 with them proceed to Earth, and thou 
 shalt have a line of swift messengers estab- 
 ished betwixt this place and thine, and by 
 the power of Jehovih I will answer thy 
 prayers in whatsoever thou shalt need. 
 
 Ah'shong went back to Anakaron, his 
 etherean kingdom, and before his Holy 
 Council made known Jehovih's will. And 
 he called for sixty million volunteers to go 
 with him, and they came; some from Yo- 
 han; some from T'seing, some from Araith, 
 some from Gon Loo, and from various 
 other places in Anakaron. 
 
 So Ah'shong raised up a successor to 
 Jehovih's throne in Anakaron, and he was 
 installed and crowned according to the dis- 
 cipline of the etherean heavens. 
 
 And Ah'shong sent swift messengers 
 into the former roadway of Earth to 
 obtain its history; its harvests of Brides 
 and Bridegrooms. Thus Ah'shong, well 
 skilled in the course and behavior of 
 worlds, gathered together his millions oi 
 angels, trained in arduous enterprise. 
 Quickly they framed and equipped an Ori- 
 an port-au-gon, and illuminated it with 
 fire-lights. 
 
 Jehovih's Voice spake to Ah'shong, 
 saying: For three days and nights stand 
 thou in the firmament that man on earth 
 and in atmospherea may behold the power 
 and majesty of My chosen in heaven. 
 
46 
 
 CYCLE OF AH'SHONG 
 
 Ah'shong and his hosts embarked and 
 sped forth, and they halted close above 
 Chinvat, so near that the down-hanging 
 curtains of etherean fire almost touched 
 the moon. Here they remained that mor- 
 tals and angels belonging to Earth might 
 behold and fear, for so Jehovih made man, 
 that unusual sights make him weak and 
 trembling, and thus change his behavior. 
 
 Ah'shong said: On the fourth day, O 
 Jehovih, I will cross Chinvat; on the fifth 
 descend toward the earth. Bring me, O 
 Father, Thy mesengers from the lower 
 heaven. I will converse with them. 
 
 Jehovih sent the angels of the lower 
 heaven up to Ah'shong; disheartened they 
 came, to know Jehovih's will. 
 
 Ah'shong said unto them: Jehovih's 
 hosts are come from etherea to redeem 
 these fallen heavens, and teach man on the 
 earth. It is our labor to come in love to 
 the helpless, and. teach them how to sing 
 in Jehovih's praise. Then the swift mes- 
 sengers answered: 
 
 In the All Person's boundless love, find 
 thou recompense for thy holy words, most 
 honored God. Down in darkness, long 
 and earnestly, have the Lords of Earth la- 
 bored conjointly with heaven's God, whose 
 kingdom fell. Alas, our God, who minis- 
 tered over the lower heaven, is crushed 
 and humiliated. The enemies of high 
 heaven, exulting in their spoil of Jehovih's 
 kingdom and His name, mock us, saying: 
 Where now is Jehovih? Whence cometh 
 the higher light, O ye Faithists in an All 
 Person? But now thy ship of etherean 
 fire, maketh the sons and daughters of the 
 earth and her heavens to look up and 
 tremble. And when thy light appeared 
 we made all haste in hope of succor. Our 
 souls are more than filled with thankful- 
 ness; and in Jehovih's name we will back 
 and employ a million trumpeters to pro- 
 claim around the earth and heaven: Je- 
 hovih is come. 
 
 After due salutation the swift messen- 
 gers departed; and Ah'shong made all 
 things in readiness for his descent when 
 the proper time should arrive. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 Jehovih spake to Ah'shong, saying: On 
 the evening of the third day shalt thou 
 move thy etherean ship toward the earth. 
 
 And when thou hast arrived within an ar- 
 rafon thou shalt halt for another three 
 days, that thy magnificence may awe the 
 men and angels of Earth with the power 
 and glory of My emancipated sons and 
 daughters. 
 
 Ah'shong proceeded as commanded, 
 and the magnificence of the scene over- 
 came the stubbornness of men on earth 
 and angels in atmospherea. 
 
 Again Jehovih said: Proceed thou, My 
 Son, and when thou art within half the 
 breadth of Earth, halt once more and 
 make there a plateau, and therein shalt 
 thou remain during the time of dawn, 
 which shall be seven years and six days. 
 This, then, shall be the rule that from this 
 time forth My etherean hosts shall not re- 
 main in atmospherea more than eight 
 years at any one time, and the time shall 
 be called the first dawn of dan, and the 
 next succeeding shall be called the second 
 dawn of dan, and so on, as long as the 
 earth bringeth forth. 
 
 Ah'shong proceded again, and moved 
 to within four thousand miles of the earth. 
 
 Jehovih said: Thy place shall be a dis- 
 tance away from the earth, that thy domin- 
 ion be not disturbed by the confusion of 
 the fallen angels thereof. So also, to as 
 many as thou shalt redeem away from the 
 earth and from mortal contact, the distance 
 of thy kingdom will prevent them from re- 
 turning. 
 
 Ah'shong perceived, and he proclaimed 
 what Jehovih had spoken to him. And the 
 hosts cast out fastenings to the plateau, 
 that the kingdom together with the ether- 
 ean sea of fire might rotate with Earth 
 and its atmosphere. 
 
 Jehovih said: Make strong the founda- 
 tion of thy place, and erect ten thousand 
 pillars of fire around about; and in every 
 direction provide roadways and mansions, 
 and in the midst thou shalt build a house 
 of council, wherein shall sit thy host of 
 dominion during dawn. 
 
 Ah'shong built the place as commanded 
 by Jehovih, and when it was finished Je- 
 hovih said: Thou shalt call the place Ye- 
 shuah, because it is a place of salvation. 
 
 Choose now thy council, My Son, and 
 also thy sub-officers, and when thou hast 
 completed the list, leave in Yeshuah the 
 sub-officers and proceed thou, and thy 
 
CYCLE OF AH'SHONG 
 
 47 
 
 council of one million men and women 
 with thee, down to the earth and heaven 
 thereof, and cast thine eyes upon the in- 
 habitants, for they are in distress. And 
 when thou hast come to the place of My 
 Lords and My God, deliver thou them and 
 bring them to Yeshuah, for they need 
 rest. And as many I'hins in heaven as 
 are capable, bring thou also away with 
 thee, and give them into the care of thy 
 people. 
 
 Ah'shong did as commanded, first se- 
 lecting his council and officers, then he 
 and his hosts proceeded to the earth as had 
 been commanded. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 Up to this time the ancient names of 
 the divisions of the lands of the earth had 
 been maintained, and God and his Lords 
 being driven from the place of Hored, 
 which had gone into dissolution, dwelt 
 part of the time in Whaga and part in Jud 
 and Vohu. And God and his Lords had 
 established three kingdoms, one in Whaga, 
 one in Jud and one in Vohu; and within 
 these kingdoms of heaven there were two 
 hundred million of angels capable of the 
 second resurrection, and one hundred mill- 
 ion es'y an s and unlearned apprentices. 
 Chief of the three heavens was Whaga, 
 and thither had God and his Lords con- 
 gregated with their chief officers when the 
 etherean ship appeared in the firmament. 
 
 Jehovih spake to God, saying: My Son, 
 make ready thy places. Behold, I come in 
 a ship of fire, and My faithful workers shall 
 find rest and happiness. Ah'shong will 
 redeem thy sons and daughters. Yea, he 
 will girdle Earth about with new ether- 
 ean light and great power. Call together 
 thy people, and bid them rejoice and be 
 merry, for the time of deliverance is at 
 hand. 
 
 Then God communicated to the Lords 
 and they again to others, the words of Je- 
 hovih; and at sight of the sign in heaven, 
 the faithful began to rejoice and to gather 
 together in their respective places. But the 
 unbelieving angels dwelling on earth with 
 mortals, of whom there were hundreds of 
 millions, were overcome by the sight of 
 the ship of fire in heaven, and fled in fear 
 in every direction; and by their presence 
 caused mortals to fear and flee also in 
 
 search of some secure place. And many of 
 these spirits of darkness came beseeching- 
 ly to be admitted into the kingdoms of the 
 Lords, whither they had been invited for 
 hundreds of years, but would not come. 
 
 But God and the Lords encompassed 
 their places about with walls of light and 
 would not receive the unbelieving. God 
 said: Till such time as Ah'shong shall 
 arrive, let order be maintained within my 
 kingdom. So it came to pass that for six 
 days and nights the fear that prevailed on 
 earth and in heaven was such as had never 
 been before since the world was created. 
 
 And so great was the splendor and 
 magnificence of Ah'shong's hosts with his 
 musicians and heralds, and the great multi- 
 tude arrayed in shining ranment that even 
 God and the Lords were overcome. 
 
 The etherean marshals approached and 
 divided, first into single columns, then 
 double, then quadruple, and so on, till the 
 fifty thousand marshals had enclosed all 
 sides, save the east, where was an open 
 space through which Ah'shong came, at- 
 tended by his chief counselors, of which 
 there were five thousand. After these came 
 the council of one million, and groups of 
 thousands of es'enaurs, who were chant- 
 ing hymns of praise to Jehovih. 
 
 The lower heaven about the continent 
 of Whaga, and parts of Jud and Vohu, was 
 illuminated by the hosts of Ah'shong, the 
 like of which had never been in atmospher- 
 ea before. Nor was there any work being 
 done on earth or in heaven, but all was 
 commotion and fear. 
 
 And now Ah'shong approached before 
 the throne of God and the Lords, saluting 
 with the sign of Jehovih, saying: In Jeho- 
 vih's name, and by His love, wisdom and 
 power, am I come to give you joy. 
 
 God said: In Jehovih's name, all hail. 
 Ah'shong, Chief of Anakaron, all hail. 
 
 And God went forward to the foot of 
 the throne and received Ah'shong, and the 
 Lords came forward, saluting also. The 
 es'enaurs ceased singing, and Ah'shong 
 proceeded to the throne and sat thereon, 
 and God took off his crown and gave it 
 to Ah'shong, and also gave him the trian- 
 gle, the heirloom of the heavenly kingdoms 
 of Earth bestowed by Jehovih. 
 
 The Voice of Jehovih spake out of the 
 light above the throne, saying: Behold, I 
 
48 
 
 CYCLE OF AH'SHONG 
 
 have come in might and swiftness, for it is 
 the springtime of Earth. My Son, Sef- 
 fas, is afoot on the earth; he hath stirred 
 up the Earth-born; and I will establish My 
 light anew in these heavens. 
 
 Have I not planted the tree of everlast- 
 ing life on Earth, and given God and 
 his Lords dominion over mortals and spir- 
 its to teach them the glories of My upper 
 heavens? And ye that came up from the 
 earth I commanded to be My God and My 
 Lords of Earth and her heavens. Ye 
 were installed by My hand, and have done 
 a good work. Despair not because Hored 
 and Moeb are fallen? Knew I not before- 
 hand that these things would be? Behold, 
 I have provided all My works so that man 
 should be forever making new things. Had 
 Hored stood, there had been no heaven to 
 rebuild on Earth in this day. How, then, 
 could My new-born Gods learn? Think 
 not that I come to teach with Mine own 
 labor. I provide My people that thev shall 
 teach one another. 
 
 What is so conceited as man? And yet 
 I bring him into life the dumbest of ani- 
 mals? Man prideth himself in his power 
 and wisdom. I send the drouth, the rains 
 and winds, the weakest of My members, 
 and they show man he is nothing. So also 
 do My Gods and Lords in the lower hea- 
 ven become conceited of their power and 
 wisdom. Thousands of millions of souls 
 turn from order and high estate into con- 
 fusion and anarchy. Thus do I confound 
 men and angels, and in their seeming mis- 
 ery lay the foundation for an everlasting 
 good. 
 
 The Voice ceased, and Ah'shong said: 
 In the name of Jehovih, I announce my 
 presence over Earth and the lower heavens. 
 
 The marshals said: All hail. Ah'shong, 
 God of Earth and her heavens. Proclaim 
 him in Jehovih's name. 
 
 Hardly had these words gone forth, 
 when the voice of the entire hosts joined 
 in proclaiming: All hail, O God, Son of 
 Jehovih! 
 
 Ah'shong, now God, said: Thy crown 
 shall be my crown, for under this shall Je- 
 hovih's power triumph. Otherwise, people 
 would say: Behold there is no virtue in 
 Jehovih's crowns. 
 
 So he placed it on his head and rose 
 
 up and saluted the retired God and Lords, 
 saying to them: 
 
 I have a place for you; and it is called 
 Yeshuah. Retire thither with my proper 
 officers, and partake of rest and the free- 
 dom of the place until I come also. 
 
 But the retired God and Lords said: 
 We pray thee, put us to labor. But God 
 said: Jehovih's sons must not be humiliat- 
 ed; how, then, can ye labor under me? 
 Were ye not Jehovih's God and Lords? 
 
 They perceived, and after due saluta- 
 tions, were provided with an escort of five 
 hundred thousand men and women; and 
 they departed for Yeshuah. 
 
 God. said: Let M'ghi come before me, 
 and Bing'fo and Nest. They shall be my 
 Lords of dawn in Jehovih's name. 
 
 The three came and stood before the 
 throne. 
 
 God said: I announce the presence of 
 Jehovih's Lords of Earth. The mar- 
 shals said: All hail. O M'ghi, and Bing'- 
 fo and Nest, Jehovih's Lords of Earth. 
 
 These were also proclaimed by the 
 voice of the assembled hosts. 
 
 God said: In Jehovih's name, go your 
 ways, O Lords of Earth. 
 
 Accordingly the Lords were crowned 
 and departed at once, saluting reverently. 
 
 God said: Bring the atmospherean 
 marshals before me. They were brought 
 and stationed in front of the throne. 
 
 God said: Glory be to Thee, O Jeho- 
 vih. I have looked upon Thy sons and 
 daughters who have withstood a great 
 darkness, but retained faith in Thee. In 
 Thy name, and by virtue of Thy power, do 
 I deliver them. Let him who is chief, an- 
 swer me: How many angels are prepared 
 for the second resurrection? 
 
 Sawni, chief marshal, said: Two hun- 
 dred million. 
 
 God said: Retire thou and thy compan- 
 ions, and gather together Jehovih's harvest 
 of souls, and I will send them to Yeshuah. 
 
 The atmosphereans were then duly ar- 
 ranged as commanded, and God called a 
 number of swift messengers and one thou- 
 sand etherean marshals, and they provided 
 an abattos; and the hosts prepared for the 
 second resurrection departed for Yeshuah, 
 as commanded. 
 
 God said: I have now remaining my 
 etherean hosts and the atmosphereans in 
 
CYCLE OF AH'SHONG 
 
 49 
 
 darkness. Of the latter, let them remain as 
 they are for three days, for I will travel 
 around the world, and my etherean hosts 
 with me, observing mortals and spirits in 
 their places and habits, that I may better 
 judge them and provide accordingly. 
 
 So God and his etherean angels provid- 
 ed an abattos, and they embarked and 
 started on their journey, traveling unseen 
 by mortals. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 After God and his hosts had visited the 
 earth and the lower heaven, they returned 
 to Yeshuah and sat in council on the affairs 
 of mortals and atmospherea. 
 
 The council of Yeshuah, of which there 
 were one million members, was formed in 
 groups, and these again represented in 
 groups, and these in still other groups. 
 Consequently, a group of one thousand 
 had one speaker, who became the voice of 
 the thousand. Of these speakers, one hun- 
 dred had one voice in council; and of these, 
 ten had one voice before God, and he was 
 the voice of the whole, and Jehovih was 
 his voice. Thus was the whole council 
 represented in all its parts. And this was 
 the manner of proceeding: 
 
 God commanded the subject; the coun- 
 cil deliberated in thousands, and each 
 speaker became aware of the voice of his 
 group. Then these speakers assembled in 
 hundreds and deliberated, and they again 
 centered into one voice; and each ten of 
 these had one voice before God. Thus it 
 came to pass that the decrees of God were 
 both the wisdom of men and of Jehovih. 
 Hence, the saying: When God said this, 
 or God commanded that, it was the Voice 
 of Jehovih expressed by men and angels. 
 
 God said: We will withdraw from the 
 druj and the druk and leave them desti- 
 tute. Who can approach the beggar with 
 wisdom, or the king with inspiration? A 
 drowning man will try to swim; but the 
 reveler in lust must endure the torments of 
 hell before his soul can learn of Jehovih. 
 Better is it to labor with a child from in- 
 fancy, and thence to maturity, to teach it 
 aright, than to strive with a score of con- 
 ceited adults and fail to redeem one. They 
 that give to such as can help themselves, 
 but will not, make but a mockery of char- 
 ity. Wisdom and uprightness of heart are 
 
 but bread. Jehovih made hunger, and so 
 men love bread. Without hunger they 
 would not eat. Preach not to unwelcome 
 ears. Sermons of wisdom are not to be 
 forced into men's souls. A wise God driv- 
 eth home to man's understanding his help- 
 lessness in spirit when Jehovih is denied. 
 
 I will leave the earth in darkness 
 one more year, that mortals shall cry 
 out to Jehovih. Evil spirits have de- 
 spoiled Hored and Moeb. Evil spirits and 
 evil men say: Behold, there is enough; 
 let us divide; and they produce not, but are 
 devourers living on the substance of oth- 
 ers. They seek ease and comfort. They 
 become more and more helpless. They 
 are on the road to everlasting destruction. 
 The God who can arouse them must be 
 wise indeed. 
 
 Blessed is the surgeon's knife. With its 
 burn comes the return of health. But yet 
 a fool will cry out: Hold, hold, enough — 
 thou inflicter of pain. 
 
 Who hath an eye like Jehovih? His 
 whipping posts are on all sides, but there 
 is a clear road between them. Yet man 
 followeth it not. Withdraw all good an- 
 gels and men, and there is no person left. 
 A man without an arm or a leg is but part 
 of a man. A man without perception of 
 the All Person is a deformity in soul. He 
 seeketh a home for his own ease and glory; 
 but the son of Jehovih seeketh to find the 
 labor that will profit his brethren most. 
 
 To Yeshuah I will bring the fruit of 
 heaven below. There I will build my train- 
 ing schools, and they shall learn the ways 
 of etherea. Build me a house of brother- 
 hood and fill it with willing pupils sworn 
 to labor, and I will make them Gods and 
 Lords in power and wisdom. Behold, a 
 man maketh a factory and turneth out fab- 
 ric for sale. I build a college and make 
 sons and daughters of Jehovih to give 
 away. Bring me such material for warp 
 and filling; Jehovih's fabric shall endure 
 forever. Search out the seed of the I'hin 
 and house them with care, for they shall 
 redeem the earth-born after I ascend to 
 my kingdom in etherea. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 So the angels of atmospherea who were 
 of sufficient grade were brought to Ye- 
 shuah and placed in the schools and facto- 
 
50 
 
 CYCLE OF AH 'SHONG 
 
 ries which the hosts of Ah'shong had built, 
 and such angels were mostly Thins. The 
 sick and deranged spirits were placed in 
 hospitals and nurseries. Now those who 
 were capable of the second resurrection 
 numbered two hundred million. 
 
 God said: Build a ship and take them 
 to Theistivi, which is the most dense ether - 
 ean heaven, and is situated nearest the at- 
 mosphere of Earth. 
 
 Thus a second time the light of Jeho- 
 vih was founded on Earth. God's ether- 
 ean hosts became as teachers in a training 
 school to raise up a God and Lords and 
 marshals and es'enaurs and other officers 
 for a lower heaven. One hundred million 
 spirits did God and his Lords and fellow- 
 laborers bring from the earth to Yeshuah. 
 And God divided the time of study, and of 
 recreation, and of music, and of discipline, 
 marching and so on, suited to all the peo- 
 ple. 
 
 God said: For without discipline there 
 is no order; and discipline cannot be with- 
 out ceremony; nor ceremony without 
 rites and forms and established words. Is 
 it not a foolish soldier that saith: Behold, 
 I am wise. I need no discipline nor manual 
 of arms. What more is he than one of an 
 untutored mob? 
 
 As I drill them in heaven to make them 
 a unit, so give ye to mortals rites and cer- 
 emonies, that coming into heaven, they go 
 not back to their old haunts and fall in 
 darkness. Whatever tendeth to harmonize 
 the behavior ot individuals is of Jehovih; 
 the opposite tendeth to evil. Better is it 
 that men march to the sound of one mon- 
 otonous word, than not to march at all. 
 The value lieth not in the word, but in 
 bringing in unison that which was in chaos. 
 A fool saith: I need not pray, there is no 
 virtue in words; and his soul groweth up 
 at variance with Jehovih. Neither is there 
 more virtue in the prayer or the words 
 than in marching before Jehovih; but what- 
 ever tendeth to unite men in one expres- 
 sion of soul in harmony, is Jehovih's. 
 
 Sacred dances and rites and ceremonies 
 were established in Yeshuah in the name of 
 Jehovih; and the new heaven became a 
 place of delight. 
 
 God said: Teach my chosen to labor 
 hard and wisely; and to dance with ener- 
 gy, and to sing with strength and fullness 
 
 of soul. For what more is there in any 
 man or woman than to learn to put forth? 
 What more pitiful thing is there in heaven 
 than a man or woman who has only drag- 
 ged along? 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 Now God had left on the earth only 
 the very lowest of spirits, and for one 
 whole year the earth was void of Jehovih's 
 light. And mortals loved to commune 
 with the spirits of their kindred, who knew 
 little of heaven, more than they did with 
 ethereans who were wise and holy. 
 
 God said: What man or woman have 
 ye found who saith: Come ye angels of 
 Jehovih, tell me wherein I can do more 
 good works, for I long to serve Jehovih 
 with all my wisdom and strength in doing 
 good to my fellows. Rather do they turn 
 away from such, and drink in the tales of 
 the strolling druj, and so wrap themselves 
 up in darkness. 
 
 When the year of darkness was ended, 
 God sent two million pruners to the earth, 
 saying to them: Find all the evil spirits 
 dwelling with mortals, whether they be 
 fetals or familiars, and gather them into 
 one place. Then find the spirits and fai- 
 ries who have taken caves and waterfalls 
 on earth as their abode, and bring them to 
 the same place. Then find the idiotic and 
 chaotic spirits who dwell on battlefields, 
 and bring them to the same place. Then 
 find the lusters, who dwell in old castles 
 and ruined cities, and in houses of evil, 
 and when they are going out for raids on 
 mortals, seize them and bring them to the 
 same place. 
 
 The ethereans went and collected all 
 the spirits of darkness belonging to the 
 earth, and brought them to a place in at- 
 mospherea, and there were of them nine 
 hundred million. 
 
 God said: Prepare a ship suitable to 
 transport them to Hudaow, in Ji'ya, and 
 there provide them a kingdom to them- 
 selves, giving them a God and Lords, and 
 proper officers to discipline and educate 
 them for Jehovih's kingdoms. 
 
 Thus they were removed, and Earth 
 and its lower heaven were purified from 
 evil spirits by the decree of God in Ye- 
 shuah, in the second year of the first dawn. 
 
CYCLE OF AWSHONG 
 
 51 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 And at the time mortals died, their 
 spirits were taken by the asaphs to Ye- 
 shuah. 
 
 God said: Tell my Lords of Earth 
 to teach mortals by inspiration and other- 
 wise of my kingdom, Yeshuah. 
 
 And through the Lords and the ashars, 
 the name, Yeshuah, was established on the 
 earth. 
 
 God said: In the time of Kosmon, men 
 shall say: Whence came the name of hea- 
 venly things? But Yeshuah shall lie hid 
 away, and Jehovih will in that day stretch 
 forth His hand and disclose all. 
 
 But mortals were thick of tongue, and 
 could not say Yeshuah, and they said 
 I-e-su; hence came the name of many 
 men Iesu, signifying without evil. 
 
 Jehovih spake through God saying: 
 The end of the dawn cometh, and My 
 emancipated sons and daughters shall re- 
 turn to their places, taking the resurrected 
 with them. But that the earth and lower 
 heaven may not be left in darkness, pro- 
 vide ye a God and Lords, and marshals 
 and messengers, and all other officers, to 
 rule and teach in My name. Suffer not 
 My etherean hosts to remain longer than 
 dawn, either on the earth or within atmos- 
 pherea, for I shall take Earth into dark 
 regions in order to build it up to a higher 
 state for the time that cometh after. 
 
 The Voice departed. God said: Let the 
 members of the council deliberate on this 
 matter, and speak before the Father. For 
 I will provide also a heaven in the ancient 
 place of Hored, and it shall be called Bis- 
 pah, for it shall be a place of reception for 
 the spirits of the dead preparatory to their 
 being brought to Yeshuah. 
 
 In the seventh year of dawn God com- 
 manded his council to select another God 
 and Lords and other officers; and the coun- 
 cil proceeded, selecting the purest, holiest 
 and most learned, and a record was made 
 of these matters and deposited in the li- 
 brary of Yeshuah. God called in his Lords 
 of Earth, and they chose the first day of 
 the new moon as the day on which to ap- 
 point their successors, and God called the 
 day Mas. 
 
 When the chosen were in place before 
 the throne, God said: By command of 
 
 Jehovih are ye brought before me, His 
 Son. In his name will I allot you to the 
 places commanded by Him. 
 
 Then he who had ranked highest in 
 godliness was led up to the throne, and 
 God said: In the name of Jehovih, and by 
 His love, wisdom and power, do I declare 
 thee God of Earth. 
 
 The initiate said: All love, wisdom and 
 power cometh from Jehovih. In His name 
 and by virtue of His commandments re- 
 ceive I all that is put upon me, for His 
 glory forever. 
 
 God then said: Give me a crown, O Je- 
 hovih, for Thy Son. 
 
 A scarlet light descended from above, 
 and God reached forth his hands and wove 
 it into a crown and placed it on the initi- 
 ate's head, saying: God of Earth, thee I 
 crown. And now shalt thou receive also 
 the sacred triangle, which is the heirloom 
 of the Gods of earth. And he hung it 
 around his neck, adding: And since there 
 can be but one God on Earth or in this 
 heaven, I herewith uncrown myself in Je- 
 hovih's name, and salute thee, God of 
 Earth. 
 
 Ah'shong now stood to the right, and 
 God went and sat on the throne and there 
 descended red and blue lights from above, 
 enveloping him completely. 
 
 He said: Let the initiates for Lords of 
 earth approach the throne of the Most 
 High Jehovih. 
 
 The five Lords came forward. God said: 
 Join hands and receive ye from Jehovih. 
 By virtue of the love, wisdom and power of 
 Jehovih vested in me, do I receive you as 
 the highest chosen; and I proclaim you 
 Lords of Earth, in Jehovih's name. Ac- 
 cept these crowns from heaven above, 
 which cannot be woven from earthly 
 things. By their power you shall remain in 
 accord with Yeshuah and the kingdoms 
 above. 
 
 God fashioned the crowns and crowned 
 them Lords of the five divisions of the 
 earth. 
 
 The Lords said: In Thy name, O Je- 
 hovih, do I accept that which Thou hast 
 put upon me. With all my wisdom and 
 strength and love will I serve Thee, O my 
 Father, Jehovih! 
 
52 
 
 CYCLE OF AH'SHONG 
 
 The Lords retired and the es'enaurs 
 sang, more than a million voices in con- 
 cert. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 Now had the time come for the end of 
 the first dawn of dan after the creation of 
 man. And this was known in the ethere- 
 an heavens, where lived countless millions 
 of Jehovih's sons and daughters emanci- 
 pated. And, as might be expected, they 
 determined to descend from all sides to 
 witness the labors of Ah'shong, and to re- 
 ceive his works as a profitable lesson for 
 their own future on other new worlds. 
 Consequently, there began to appear in the 
 firmament far-off stars, where the name of 
 Ah'shong had been known for thousands 
 of years. From all sides they came, grow- 
 ing brighter and brighter, larger and larg- 
 er. 
 
 Ah'shong spoke to his companions, 
 saying: Make ready, O my beloved, My 
 friends and your friends are coming. Put 
 our ship in order. Light the pillars of fire 
 and spread out the sails, shining, that they 
 may be glorified in Jehovih's name. 
 
 The proper persons accomplished these 
 things, and to the eastward of Yeshuah, 
 the etherean ship of Ah'shong was anchor- 
 ed; and so great was the size thereof that 
 there was room for the ethereans of Anak- 
 aron and upward of three hundred million 
 of the redeemed of Earth besides. 
 
 Ah'shong said: When our friends ar- 
 rive, we shall join them and make an ex- 
 cursion around the world, discovering its 
 rank and glorious promises; but as to the 
 nine hundred million drujas which I sent 
 off to Hudaow, in Ji'ya, we shall pass 
 thither on our way to Anakaron. 
 
 Brighter and brighter grew the descend- 
 ing stars, the etherean ships from far-off 
 worlds; and larger and larger, till in ma- 
 jesty they neared Yeshuah. Ah'shong then 
 came down and sat at the foot of the throne 
 according to the custom of Gods. God 
 came down and cook him by the hand, say- 
 ing: Son of Jehovih, arise, and take thy 
 hosts and embark in Jehovih's ship, going 
 wherever thou wilt. Ah'shong rose up. 
 The es'enaurs and trumpeters pla.yed and 
 sang. Then Ah'shong said: 
 
 One more love have I in the world, O 
 Jehovih. I go from Yeshuah, but my love 
 remains. To thee, O God, will I look back 
 
 in hope and love for thou wert raised by 
 me. And to thy Lords what less could I 
 say? Yea, and to all the hosts I leave with- 
 in these realms. 
 
 Ah'shong touched God's right hand, 
 then saluting with the third sign of Emeth 
 to Jehovih, departed, and the marshals 
 conducted him off to the ship. 
 
 Ah'shong and his etherean hosts rose 
 up in curtains of light; and presently the 
 ship was loosened from its anchorage and 
 floated upward, and all the angels having 
 entered it, the sails were spread out, and 
 the mantles suspended on every side, till 
 the whole vessel, with its thousands of 
 masts and arcs, looked like a world on 
 fire. The inhabitants of Yeshuah feared 
 and trembled for the mighty works of the 
 Gods and Goddesses; and yet, as the es'- 
 enaurs on the departing ship chanted, more 
 than a million voices, the Yeshuans sang 
 with them, amidst their tears, with souls 
 overflowing with awe and love and admir- 
 ation. 
 
 And at the same time the descending 
 ships of other Gods and Goddesses from 
 etherea were drawing nearer and nearer; 
 and on every side the firmament seemed 
 filled with worlds on fire. Presently they 
 came, first one and then another of the 
 ethereans, and they made fast to Ah'shong's 
 ship, until thus more than five hundred 
 were united into one mighty vessel, and 
 yet so near to Yeshuah that all could be 
 seen. 
 
 And when they had united there were 
 countless millions of angels thus in close 
 proximity, many who had known one an- 
 other for thousands of years, and some 
 who were older than Earth, and knew 
 its history. And these had companions as 
 old as themselves; and they were ripe in 
 experience with corporeal worlds, stars and 
 suns in other regions of Jehovih's king- 
 doms. 
 
 So great was the wisdom of these Gods 
 and Goddesses that to come within 
 Earth's atmosphere was sufficient to en- 
 able them to read all the souls and pray- 
 ers of mortals, and all the thoughts and 
 desires of the spirits of the lower heaven 
 belonging to Earth. To each and all 
 of them the Voice of Jehovih was ever 
 present, and their power was like their 
 wisdom. 
 
CYCLE OF AH'SHONG 
 
 53 
 
 Jehovih hath said: To the corporean I 
 have given power to hear one or two 
 things at the same moment of time; but 
 My Gods can hear intelligently tens of 
 thousands of men speaking at the same 
 time. They can find a way to answer 
 them also. 
 
 When the ships were ready for depart- 
 ure, Ah'shong said: Let us pass low over 
 Yeshuah, and ye shall hear and see those 
 I have founded in a new heaven. 
 
 His companions said: Jehovih's will 
 be done. 
 
 And after they had visited Yeshuah 
 they descended to the earth, and round 
 about the places of the Lords; and when 
 they had seen all, and heard the explana- 
 tion, from those with Ah'shong, of the 
 state the earth was in, and of the heavens 
 of Earth, they rose and sailed toward Ana- 
 karon, whither Ah'shong had invited them. 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 After the ascent of the etherean hosts 
 of Ah'shong to etherea, God and his Lords 
 worked faithfully as Jehovih had com- 
 manded. 
 
 The Lords, who were now called Adon- 
 ya, were such as had been brought forth 
 on Earth. And God, who had dominion in 
 the atmospherea of Earth, was also' Earth- 
 born; and so were all the angels of atmos- 
 pherea the product of Earth. 
 
 Jehovih said: Through the flowers of 
 the field I express myself in color and per- 
 fume; through the lion and mastodon I 
 express myself with power and voracious- 
 ness; through the lamb and the dove I ex- 
 press myself in meekness and docility. 
 Through man I express myself in words 
 and actions; and all men, the wise and the 
 ignorant, are channels of my expression. 
 Some have thick tongues and poor speech, 
 nevertheless they are My babes, My sons 
 and daughters. 
 
 After the se'muan age I gave to the 
 earth from my etherean heavens sons and 
 daughters, and they abode with mortals 
 for three thousand years. And My ether- 
 eans established loo'is on the lands of the 
 earth, and they commanded the loo'is, say- 
 ing: Your office is to lead man and wo- 
 man by inspiration to dwell together as 
 husband and wife. 
 
 In Kosmon I will confound the wise 
 man for he shall not know why man and 
 
 woman lived not indiscriminately as the 
 beasts. I will show him that they who pro- 
 fess Me are led by Me, but they who deny 
 Me go down to indiscriminate communion. 
 Out of My works shall the lessons of the 
 early days of Earth show the presence 
 of My hand. But My loo'is was man and 
 woman inspired to raise up sons and 
 daughters to glorify Me and My works. 
 Such as could comprehend Me, having 
 faith that My presence should ultimately 
 triumph for the highest and best, I com- 
 manded to be called Faithists, and I will 
 keep a thread of the line of Faithist on the 
 earth till the end. 
 
 God through his Lords sent loo'is to 
 the I'hins, and by controlling the parent- 
 age of the unborn brought into the world 
 a new race of men of the same blood 
 as of old, and these heard the Voice of 
 the Lord. And man was delivered into wis- 
 dom, peace and virtue, and the earth be- 
 came as a garden of sweet smelling flowers 
 and luxurious fruit. 
 
 The first harvest was two hundred years, 
 and the number of Brides and Brode- 
 grooms was six hundred millions of grade 
 ninety-two. 
 
 The second harvest was two hundred 
 years, and was eight hundred million an- 
 gels, of grade eighty-nine. 
 
 The third harvest was six hundred 
 years, and was two thousand millions of 
 angels of grade eighty-three-. 
 
 The fourth harvest was five hundred 
 years, and was twenty-three hundred mill- 
 ion angels, of grade seventy-four. 
 
 The fifth harvest was three hundred 
 years, and was six hundred million angels 
 of grade sixty-two. 
 
 And now began wars in atmospherea, 
 thousands of angels against thousands, and 
 millions against millions. And again dark- 
 ness came upon Earth and her hea- 
 vens, and war and destruction were upon 
 all the nations of the world, for so great 
 was the number of spirits of darkness 
 around mortals that they destroyed even 
 their own cities and kingdoms. 
 
 The sixth harvest was four hundred 
 years, and was nine hundred million an- 
 gels, of grade fifty-one. And this was the 
 last harvest, for none were of sufficient 
 grade to abide in the etherean heavens. 
 For the attractions of the great wickedness 
 
54 
 
 CYCLE OF AH'SHONG 
 
 caused the angels of heaven to desert their 
 schools and factories, and descend to mor- 
 tals. 
 
 At the end of the second cycle there 
 were in atmospherea six thousand million 
 angels of darkness who knew not who they 
 were or where they dwelt; neither knowing 
 nor caring whether there were other hea- 
 vens or not. 
 
 And man distinguished not his sister 
 or mother, and woman distinguished not 
 her brother or father. And man became as 
 a harvest that is blighted and rotted be- 
 cause of its rankness. 
 
 Jehovih said: Now will I bewail thee, 
 O Earth. The glories of thy heavens that 
 are past and gone shall be a lesson to the 
 Gods. Thy place of Hored and Moeb, 
 once the holy place of My Son Sethantes, 
 has been destroyed. Now Yeshuah, where 
 floated the plateau of many resurrections, 
 is filled with millions of souls that hear not 
 and see not, but are forever burrowing 
 deep in darkness. The plateaux are broken 
 up, the substance scattered and unorganiz- 
 ed. Nor is there anything left of the 
 glorious work of the Gods in these hea- 
 vens. 
 
Synopsis ok First sixteen cycles 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 Sethanthes was the first God of Earth 
 and her heavens, and his place was within 
 the arc of Wan. And during his cycle of 
 three thousand years, he raised up from 
 Earth four thousand four hundred million 
 Brides and Bridegrooms to Jehovih. 
 
 After Sethantes came Ah'shong, sub- 
 Chief in the realms of Hieu Wee in the 
 Haian arc of Vehetaivi. And during his 
 cycle, also three thousand years, Ah'shong 
 raised up from Earth a harvest of seven 
 thousand two hundred million Brides and 
 Bridegrooms. 
 
 The third cycle was under the domin- 
 ion of Hoo Le, surveyor of Kakayes'sta in 
 the arc of Gimmel, and his harvest was 
 three thousand seven hundred million. 
 
 The fourth cylce was under C'pe Aban, 
 Chieftainess of Sulgoweron in the arc of 
 Yan, and her harvest was four thousand 
 eight hundred million. 
 
 The fifth cycle was under Pathodices, 
 road-maker of Chitivya in the arc of Yaho- 
 mitak, and his harvest was six thousand 
 four hundred million. 
 
 The sixth cycle was under Goemagak, 
 God of I'seg, in the arc of Somgwothga, 
 and his harvest was seven thousand nine 
 hundred million. 
 
 The seventh cycle was under Goepens, 
 God of Kaim, in the arc of Srivat, and his 
 harvest was nine thousand three hundred 
 million. 
 
 The eighth cylce was under Hycis, God- 
 dess of Ruts, in the arc of Hohamagollak, 
 and her harvest was nine thousand four 
 hundred million. 
 
 The ninth cycle was under See'itcicius, 
 inspector of roads in Kammatra, in the arc 
 of Jusyin, and his harvest was ten thousand 
 one hundred million. 
 
 The tenth cycle was under Miscelitivi, 
 Chieftainess of the arches of Lawzgowbak, 
 in the arc of Nu, and her harvest was ten 
 thousand eight hundred million. 
 
 And now the world was full of people. 
 All the continents and islands of the earth 
 were inhabited by man: nor was there left 
 any wilderness wherein man did not dwell 
 
 But the generation of man had fallen from 
 thirty-three to twelve years. And man and 
 woman were at maturity at seven years 
 old; and not many lived thirty years; but 
 they were prolific, many of the mothers 
 bringing forth two score sons and daugh- 
 ters, and from two to four at a birth. 
 
 And man dwelt in peace, and the earth 
 was tilled, and brought forth abundantly 
 of everything that was good for man to 
 eat, and to clothe himself. And there were 
 in those days great cities of hundreds of 
 thousands of inhabitants; thousands and 
 thousands of such cities, and in all the five 
 divisions of the earth. And man built 
 ships and sailed over the ocean in all di- 
 rections, around about the whole world. 
 By the angels of the Lord was he taught 
 and guided in all things. And man had 
 books, both written and printed; and the 
 young were taught in schools a knowledge 
 of the sun and moon and stars, and of all 
 things that are upon the earth and in the 
 waters thereof. This was therefore called 
 the first period of civilization on Earth. 
 
 Now, for the most part, all the people 
 had become I'hins, small, white and yel- 
 low. Nevertheless there were ground -^°o 
 pie with long arms, who were large; but 
 they dwelt by themselves, and their food 
 was of all manner of flesh, and fish and 
 creeping things. The ground people were 
 brown and black, and they lived to be two 
 hundred, and even four hundred, years old. 
 
 Jehovih said: In the early days I raised 
 up I'huans, and I gave them certain com- 
 mandments, amongst which was not to co- 
 habit with the Druks lest they go down in 
 darkness. But they obeyed not My words; 
 and lo and behold, they are lost from the 
 face of the earth. Because the Thins have 
 become a spiritual people and have pros- 
 pered in peace and spirit, behold, they have 
 degenerated in the corporeal body. They 
 yield abundant harvests for My etherean 
 realms, but are like untimely births. Now 
 will I bring Earth into a'jian fields and 
 forests for a long time, and the time of a 
 generation shall be thirty-three years. For 
 My harvests shall be of fruit that is mature. 
 
56 
 
 SYNOPSIS OF FIRST SIXTEEN CYCLES 
 
 And Jehovih brought Earth into new 
 regions in the etherean worlds, and cov- 
 ered it over with a'ji. And after a time 
 many of the I'hins lost the generative de- 
 sire; but the brown people burned with de- 
 sire, and they laid hold of the I'hin women 
 when they went into the fields, and thus 
 brought forth again the I'huan race, the 
 copper colored, strong and bright and 
 quick. 
 
 Accordingly the eleventh cycle, which 
 was under Gobath, God of Ticongothaga, 
 in the arc of Su'ie, brought forth a harvest 
 of six thousand seven hundred million. 
 
 The twelfth cycle was under F'aiyis, 
 Goddess of Looga, in the arc of Siyan, and 
 her harvest was two thousand six hundred 
 million. 
 
 The thirteenth cycle was under Zinea- 
 thaes, in the arc of Oleganaya, and his 
 harvest was one thousand two hundred 
 million. 
 
 The fourteenth cycle was under Toth- 
 sentaga, road-maker in Hapan-nogos, in 
 the arc of Manechu, and his harvest was 
 only six hundred million. 
 
 The fifteenth cycle was under Nimeas, 
 God of Thosgothamachus, in the arc of 
 Seigga, and his harvest was only forty 
 million. 
 
 The sixteenth cycle was under Neph, 
 God of Sogghonnes, in the arc of Ar- 
 broohk, and he failed to bring forth any 
 harvest. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 Now the time of a generation of mor- 
 tals had risen to eighty years, and there 
 were many who lived to be three hundred 
 years old. And they were large and strong 
 and prolific, but were without judgment, 
 
 not knowing their own species. And they 
 mingled together, relatives as well as oth- 
 ers; so that idiocy ?.nd disease were the 
 general fate of the tribes of men. 
 
 This is the grade of declension in the 
 heavens of Earth after Kishalon had 
 changed the period of generation from 
 twelve years. 
 
 Abner, seventh dawn of dan, enduring 
 three thousand two hundred years in Has- 
 taf, etherean a'ji seven, Hoe'tan, grade 
 ninety-nine. 
 
 Enseeni, Goddess of Marsef, etherean, 
 dan of Gem, enduring three thousand 
 years, grade ninety-three. 
 
 Boaz, God of Horn, Orian field, dan 
 of Josh, enduring two thousand seven hun- 
 dred years, grade eighty-eight. 
 
 Dai'vi, Goddess of Wowitski in a'ji 
 thirty-six, dan of Ruth, enduring two 
 thousand nine hundred years, grade ninety- 
 two. 
 
 Lia'mees, Goddess of War in Broek, 
 dan forty, Orian field, enduring three thou- 
 sand years, grade seventy-seven. 
 
 Divi'yas, God of Hut in Habak, ji'ya 
 twenty-two, dan of Neth, enduring three 
 thousand one hundred years, grade sixty- 
 nine. 
 
 Roa'yis'yis, Goddess of Tamak, dan of 
 Bent, one of Hud'du'owts, enduring three 
 thousand and seventy years, grade sixty- 
 one. 
 
 Yij, Chief of Orian field, Lud in Goo, 
 dan seventy-four, enduring two thousand 
 six hundred years, grade fifty-eight. 
 
 Gulyaniv, Chieftainess, Orian field, Ob'- 
 Low in ji'ya forty, enduring three thou- 
 sand four hundred years, grade fifty-one. 
 
 From this time onward there was found 
 no grade in the roadway of the solar pha- 
 lanx sufficiently dense for the angels of 
 Earth. 
 
Cycle of Aph 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 In the time of the world twenty-four 
 thousand years before the Kosmon Era, 
 the solar serpent being in the arc of Noe, 
 in the etherean heavens, and of the Sum 
 of ji'ya eighty-seven, Earth and her hea- 
 vens were in great darkness. Mortals 
 had turned away from God and his Lords. 
 In conceit and darkness had they shut 
 themselves up. They had peopled the hea- 
 vens of Earth with spirits of darkness, 
 the drujas of men of darkness and canni- 
 bals. Like devouring vermin their fetals 
 had floated back upon them, and burrowed 
 deep in pollution. 
 
 Jehovih's Voice spake to the counsel- 
 lors and high ruling chieftains of the ex- 
 alted kingdoms in the firmament, saying: 
 
 O ye Orian Chiefs, and etherean God- 
 desses that dwell in the roadway of the 
 great serpent, behold, the red star, 
 Earth, hath attained her maturity, but she 
 is rank. For fifty thousand years hath 
 she played her part as an ornament of hea- 
 ven and a harvester of bright souls for My 
 exalted regions in the firmament. Call ye 
 a council of those that plant My a'jian gar- 
 dens and My a'jian fields; and of them 
 that whirl My nebulous vortices in the 
 firmament. 
 
 And there assembled in the etherean 
 gardens of Senaya, near the roadway of 
 the solar phalanx, millions of Jehovih's 
 high-raised Gods and Goddesses, and the 
 place was like a park a hundred times 
 larger than Earth; and round about on 
 every side lie the crystalline borders of 
 etherean worlds. And when they were as- 
 sembled, Jehovih spake out of the light 
 inherent, saying: 
 
 Sixteen times have My etherean hosts 
 redeemed Earth and her heavens from 
 darkness into light, and yet ere the end of 
 a cycle she falleth again, and her atmos- 
 pherea with her. And her heavens are fill- 
 ed with thousands of milions of spirits that 
 know not Me and My emancipated worlds. 
 Speak, O Gods and Goddesses. 
 
 Thereupon Sut'loo said: O Jehovih, I 
 have heard. Too prolific is Earth, this 
 young daughter of heaven. 
 
 Next spake Ka'waha, saying: Thou 
 hast spoken, O Jehovih. Too prolific is the 
 rich Earth. Her mortals are overpowered 
 by her atmospherean hosts. For a time 
 her people build up cities and nations, but 
 they are soon overflooded with fetals and 
 drujas, and the mortals devour one another 
 as beasts of prey. 
 
 Chi'jong said: Her people have tilled 
 all the soil of Earth and covered it over 
 with cities, but where are they? Her peo- 
 ple have been learned in matters of heaven 
 and earth, but their knowledge is dissipated 
 by the dread hand of war. 
 
 Dhu'itta said: Her people become wise 
 in a day, but on the next they are fools. 
 One generation becometh skilled in books 
 and knowledge of the sun and moon and 
 stars, and in the mathematics of corporeal 
 things; but a generation followeth, and lo, 
 her people are cannibals again. 
 
 Gaw'zin said: I have heard, O Jeho- 
 vih. I have witnessed, O Father. The red 
 star is too prolific. She is like a garden 
 too rich. Her products are overgrown, 
 and they fall down and doubly enrich the 
 soil again, to reproduce an imperfect giant 
 stock that is barren. So are her sons and 
 daughters; they run all to earthly sub- 
 stance. 
 
 Loo' wan said: Great Spirit, I have 
 heard. We gather Earth's harvests for 
 Thee, O Jehovih, but they are small. We 
 gather Earth's harvests of dark spirits, 
 O Jehovih, and they are ten times larger. 
 Behold, there is no balance between them. 
 
 Thus spake the Gods and Goddesses, 
 till thousands of them had spoken. After 
 that the Voice of Jehovih spake, saying: 
 
 Ye are blessed, My sons and daughters. 
 How can ye bequeath the administration of 
 Earth and her heaven to the Earth-born, 
 till she is made suitable as a gift from My 
 hand? Now hear Me, O My sons and 
 daughters. Five great divisions of the 
 earth have I made, and they have all been 
 
58 
 
 CYCLE OF APH 
 
 inhabited over and tilled by mortals. Yea, 
 on all the divisions of the earth have there 
 been great cities and nations, and men and 
 women of great learning. And as oft as 
 they are raised up in light, so are they 
 again cast down in darkness, because of 
 the great desire of the spirits of the dead 
 to return back to the earth. These drujas 
 return to mortals and fasten upon them as 
 fetals or as familiars, and inspire them to 
 evil. Go now to Earth, O My beloved, 
 and find the division of the earth where 
 most of these drujas congregate, for I will 
 uproot their stronghold. I will break them 
 from their haunts and they shall no longer 
 carry My people down to destruction. 
 
 And now the council deliberated, and 
 after a while caused the records of 
 Earth and her atmospherea to be examined, 
 and they discovered that the heaven of the 
 land of Pan was beyond redemption 
 because of the great numbers of the 
 spirits of cannibals and of the multitude of 
 fetals. It was as if a disease in the flesh 
 be healed over externally, leaving the root 
 of the disease within. The redemption of 
 the cycle remained not with her, but evil 
 broke out forever in a new way. 
 
 Jehovih said: Now will I prune Earth 
 and her heavens. Behold, the division of 
 Pan shall be hewn off and cast be- 
 neath the waters of the ocean. Her hea- 
 ven shall be no longer tenable by the spir- 
 its of destruction. 
 
 And because man is without knowledge, 
 let My Gods and Lords appoint certain 
 masters of generations, who are ethereans 
 of great wisdom, to abide with mortals 
 and inspire such marriages as will best pro- 
 mote spiritual growth. And there will 
 come forth amongst all people certain ones 
 capable of sar'gis and su'is, and they will 
 heed the commandments of My Gods and 
 Lords, forsaking evil and striving to serve 
 Jehovih in all things. 
 
 Go ye, therefore, down to Earth and 
 provide nets and vanchas for receiving the 
 spirits of darkness, and for receiving the 
 spirits of mortals who shall perish in the 
 waters. And provide ye a place in My ex- 
 alted heavens suitable for them; and ye 
 shall wall them about in heaven that they 
 cannot escape, but that they may be weaned 
 from evil. 
 
 And when ye are come to Earth and 
 its heavens, acquaint My God and His 
 Lords with my decree, and say to them: 
 Thus saith Jehovih: Behold, I will sink 
 the land of Pan beneath the waters of 
 the ocean, and her heaven will I carry away 
 to a place in My firmament where she shall 
 no longer engulf My people in darkness. 
 
 Go thou, O God of Earth, and Thou, O 
 Lord of Pan, down to My chosen, and say 
 to them: 
 
 Thus saith the Great Spirit. Behold, I 
 will sink the lands of the earth beneath the 
 ocean, because of the evil of the spirits of 
 darkness. Hear Me, O My chosen, and 
 heed My commandments. Go build ye 
 ships on the mountains, and gather within 
 the ships for My hand is surely stretched 
 over the earth. 
 
 My God of Earth and his Lords, shall 
 gather together all the angels of the earth, 
 from east to west and from north to south, 
 to the land of Pan. 
 
 My etherean ships of fire shall surround 
 Pan on every side. And I will cut loose 
 the foundations of the earth, at the borders 
 of the ocean and the mountains of Gan, 
 nor shall any prop or corner stone stay My 
 hand. And I will send rains and winds and 
 thundering; and the waters of the great 
 deep shall come up upon the lands, and the 
 great cities shall go down and be swallow- 
 ed in the sea. And the rich valleys of Mai, 
 with her thousand cities, shall be rent with 
 the madness of men and women fleeing be- 
 fore the waters of the ocean. And women 
 and children shall fall by the way and be 
 drowned; and men shall go down in the 
 water and rise not. 
 
 And the wide plains of Og, with her 
 thousand cities, and with the great capital 
 of Penj, and the temples of Khu, and Bart, 
 and Gan, and Saing, shall sink to rise no 
 more. And in the deluge, the air of hea- 
 ven shall be filled with the screaming and 
 wailing of millions of mortals going down 
 to destruction. 
 
 I will rescue them from darkness. I 
 will carry them to a'jian regions which I 
 previously created for spirits of darkness. 
 And I will appoint over them Gods and 
 Goddesses to teach them of Me and My 
 kingdoms. 
 
 And Earth and her heavens shall take a 
 new start amongst My habitable worlds. 
 
CYCLE OF APH 
 
 59 
 
 Thus have I provided labor for My high 
 raised angels in the places I created. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 Jehovih said: Hear Me, O ye etherean 
 Gods and Goddesses. They desire not 
 wisdom and resurrection. Their love lieth 
 in darkness. To eat, to sleep and to de- 
 vour are the delights of their souls. The 
 first lesson of life they have not learned. 
 The first heaven of Earth is to them the 
 All of the created worlds. Hear My judg- 
 ment upon them, My holy angels. For I 
 have raised them up again and again. I 
 have founded lower heavens for them that 
 they might learn; but they fall the moment 
 My Gods leave them alone. 
 
 The drujas and fetals shall be carried to 
 Hautuon and surrounded by walls of fire. 
 And they shall be divided up into groups. 
 Kin shall be torn away from kin, and 
 friend from friend, and mother from daugh- 
 ter, and father from son; for they are be- 
 come as absorbents, sucking one another 
 continually. And the walls of fire shall go 
 up around them without ceasing, and they 
 shall not escape. And they that guard 
 them shall keep them from one another, 
 that they shall do no evil. Neither shall 
 they sleep nor rest, but be stirred up and 
 made to know that they are alive, and can 
 exist independent of fetal. For what more 
 is the earth to these spirits of darkness, — 
 what more is their first heaven,— than a 
 place of perpetual devouring? Have they 
 not made it a place of everlasting destruc- 
 tion? They visit their evils upon mortals. 
 The young child cannot escape them, nor 
 the middle aged, nor the old man nor old 
 woman. The heavenly kingdoms founded 
 by Gods and Lords have become pest- 
 houses for drujas and fetals. There is no 
 place left for founding the upright and vir- 
 tuous in heart. 
 
 And God cried out to me, saying: Hear 
 me, O Jehovih. Earth and her hea- 
 vens are gone down in darkness. The Thin 
 hath been despoiled on all the divisions 
 of the earth save Pan. More than thir- 
 ty thousand million angels are gathered on 
 the surface of Earth, and they are too 
 low in grade to be delivered. What shall 
 Thy God do, O Father? Mortals are de- 
 scending in breed and blood. Only as dis- 
 eased vermin do they inhabit Earth. 
 
 Their cities are destroyed, and they dwell 
 after the manner of four-footed beasts. 
 The inspiration of Thy God and his an- 
 gels can no longer reach them. When 
 they die and enter these heavens they art 
 as festering sores upon one another, thou- 
 sands of millions of them. For three thou- 
 sand years have I labored with them, but 
 the abundance of their darkness outmatch- 
 eth Thy God. What shall I do with them, 
 
 Father? How shall Thy God deliver 
 so great a carcass of death? 
 
 Now have I answered in the firmament 
 of My holy sons and daughters. I have 
 called them from remote places in heaven 
 to witness the work of My hand. For as I 
 made Earth and its heaven, so rule I 
 over it to the same end for which I cre- 
 ated it. When they are short of My meas- 
 ure I lengthen them out. When they run 
 foul, I prune them to My own liking, for 
 they are Mine. Behold, the fool hath said: 
 Jehovih hath made a failure. Behold, the 
 Creator created a world for a certain pur- 
 pose, but it ran foul of His mark. 
 
 Did I not quicken man into life in my 
 own way? At zero created I him, and I 
 said: Two roads have I made, O man. 
 One leadeth to everlasting light, and the 
 other to everlasting darkness. Now have 
 
 1 shown him the darkness. It is My wit- 
 ness whereby man knoweth My word is 
 All Truth. Wherefore, then, should I not 
 create the world, and man, and angels, 
 that they go down in darkness? Is it not 
 by darkness and pain that I push man for- 
 ward? Yea, the conceited man would fail 
 himself but for the failures I set up be- 
 fore him. Wherefore, then, have I not 
 created wisely? Have I not a right to do 
 Mine own way? Are not all things mine? 
 If a man die in the corporeal part, is he a 
 failure? How else could man rise to My 
 etherean worlds? 
 
 He was not and I created him. He 
 presumeth to look into My plans and judg- 
 ments. By his little learning he exalteth 
 his conceit and pretendeth to know all 
 things. I cause grain to grow in the field, 
 and the day before it is ripe I send wind 
 and rains to destroy it utterly. I bring 
 forth man with shapely limbs and strong 
 arms, but in the day of his prime I cut 
 him down. I gave the passion of love to 
 the mother, but I take away her first-born. 
 
60 
 
 CYCLE OF APH 
 
 Know I not that first of all things, man 
 shall be taught to know My power, and 
 after that My wisdom? Shall man of 
 Earth say: The Creator was angry, and so 
 sent the land beneath the ocean? He hath 
 not wisdom to comprehend that this day I 
 cast out hell and destruction. The druj 
 is his love, and as vampires they feed on 
 each other to the ruin of both. But I 
 know what is for their own good, and My 
 decree hath gone forth. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 Aph, Orian Chief, said: When I was in 
 the Orian arc of Noe, and the red star pass- 
 ed the Utswowldayark, in the etherean 
 group of Vorh, the Voice of Jehovih came 
 to me saying: Go thou, My Son, and de- 
 liver Earth. Take with thee all whom I 
 may send. 
 
 And I examined the records of the 
 stars of heaven, and of Earth and the 
 accounts of Jehovih's harvests, and I per- 
 ceived the bondage and labor of the red 
 star were of the seventh magnitude in the 
 advance of habitable worlds. 
 
 When His Voice called the legions in 
 high heaven from every side, and below 
 and above Earth, there moved myriads 
 of shapely stars, which were ships of fire, 
 coursing the firmament, whereon rode the 
 Gods and Goddesses called by Jehovih to 
 the labor of Earth and hada. Closing in on 
 every side they came, and nearer and more 
 compact, and brighter, with sparkling pil- 
 lars of fire, till all the space around Earth 
 was hedged in with this army of Jehovih's 
 etherean ships of fire. 
 
 Again I heard Jehovih's Voice saying: 
 O Aph, My Son, My holy one, hearken to 
 the Voice of Jehovih, Creator of Gods and 
 Goddesses. Behold, I sent My Son Neph 
 to the red star with wisdom and power. 
 Long hath he been gone, long struggling 
 with the black darkness of men and angels. 
 As a valiant soldier rusheth into the hea- 
 viest part of battle, and forgetteth himself 
 in desperate contest, but ceaseth not to 
 struggle on against all odds, even so for 
 three thousand years hath My God, Neph, 
 hoped to save whole all the limbs of 
 Earth. From My holy place have I watch- 
 ed the battle for everlasting life; but the 
 too prolific Earth contributed more to the 
 corporeal man than to the spiritual man. 
 
 And I bring My legions to the rescue ot 
 My valiant Son, Neph. Send thou to him, 
 
 Aph, My Son. Proclaim to him and his 
 Lords, and to his ethereans, My Just de- 
 crees. 
 
 Aph said: And I sent swift messengers 
 down to hada, informing Neph, Son of 
 Jehovih, of the march and presence of 
 Gods, and of the decree of the Father; and 
 
 1 added thereunto, saying: O Neph, Son 
 of Jehovih, come hither, bringing thy hosts 
 with thee. 
 
 Presently Neph answered me in Jeho- 
 vih's name, saying: O Aph, Son of Jeho- 
 vih, I come. My prayers are answered. 
 All praise to the All Highest. 
 
 Then we saw, making ready in hada, 
 preparatory to ascending, the ship of Neph 
 and his faithful hosts; and that which was 
 seen from my place was also seen by myri- 
 ads of Jehovihs' vessels surrounding the 
 earth. And my place became as a central 
 throne to which the hosts now made 
 speed, swiftly and orderly. And in the time 
 they came, also rose up the ship of Neph 
 from hada. Meanwhile my ship rested on 
 the borders of Chinvat, in the School of 
 Hein, and from the moon seven agus. 
 
 Jehovih said: Aph, My Son, put a walL 
 of pillars of fire around about the land of 
 Pan; for the false Gods and Goddesses 
 of hada, when perceiving their habitation 
 going down into the water, will endeavor 
 to escape to Jud and Vohu, and other 
 countries. But thou shalt not suffer one 
 to escape; for they have migrated to this 
 division of the earth because of its sump- 
 tuous productions, the better to feast their 
 evil desires. 
 
 And thou shalt spread a net around the 
 borders of Pan, against the line of the 
 ocean and to the high north mountains; 
 and che net shall encompass the continent 
 of Pan, and it shall be to the height of 
 a thousand miles, and in breadth so that 
 no spirit of darkness can escape and find 
 the way abroad. And when thou hast 
 spread the net, thou shalt send a sufficient 
 number of ethereans; and they shall take 
 with them birth blankets; and in the time of 
 destruction, when the mortals go down in 
 death, thy servants shall receive the liberat- 
 ed spirits on the birth blankets, and bear 
 them to the atmospherean column of as- 
 cent. And hither shall thy hosts receive 
 
CYCLE OF APH 
 
 61 
 
 them and provide them with food and 
 clothes after the maner of es'yans. 
 
 But it shall come to pass that many 
 mothers shall perish in the waters, with 
 children in the womb, which live by fetal, 
 as is proper in My sight, for so I created 
 them. Therefore, to all such fetals give 
 special care for they are without sin. And 
 when the mother is dead corporeally, and 
 the fetal also, bring hence their spirits, but 
 together and provide a volunteer angel of 
 fetal power, and deliver the infant spirit to 
 her to be nurtured until the proper time of 
 weaning, and provide in the same place a 
 home for the mother of the child, that she 
 may inherit its love and mirth. 
 
 When the Voice ceased, I, Aph, Son of 
 Jehovih, looked about over the hosts as if 
 in search of a sign that the time had come; 
 but again Jehovih spake, saying: 
 
 In the misfortunes of a fallen world, 
 created I food for the warm love of My 
 etherean Goddesses. Behold them here- 
 about in millions, every one in hope of re- 
 ceiving a prize of that which was lost in 
 darkness, to raise up sons and daughters 
 who shall rejoice in everlasting paradise. 
 Think not that I gave the talent of love 
 only to a mother for her child, and there 
 the talent to end; for as the talent in its in- 
 cipient stage bindeth her soul to her child, 
 so doth the same talent in My Goddesses 
 overspread a helpless world. Are they not 
 as midwives and mothers to thousands and 
 millions of souls being delivered from cor- 
 poreal bondage into everlasting light? And 
 who can number them? Here standeth a 
 hundred milion come from Laygas; a hun- 
 dred million from Inopta; two hundred 
 million from Karduk; a hundred million 
 from Buchk; two hundred million from 
 Nin; two hundred and fifty million from 
 Luth'wig; a hundred million from Pied; 
 two hundred million from Raig; and 
 fifty million from Naivis; two hundred 
 million from Dak'dak; and two hundred 
 and fifty million from Od. I spake in the 
 etherean firmament, and they have an- 
 swered Me. Yea, they come not as curi- 
 osity seekers, and with empty arms; but 
 behold them arrayed with their thousands 
 and millions of small equipments suited to 
 the newborn. What is there they have not 
 remembered to bring with them in some 
 part, for regimen or drapery, to rejoice the 
 
 souls of them that are to be cut off from 
 
 corpori 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 Again the Voice of Jehovih came to 
 me, saying: My Son, make fast thy ship, 
 for thy place shall be the head of the army 
 of My hosts. And let thy consorts extend 
 in a line from thy place down to the earth, 
 for this shall be the delivery of them whom 
 I shall cut off. 
 
 So I made fast, and my messengers 
 hastened to the congregating forces of 
 heaven, informing the etherean groups on 
 Jehovihs' ships of His commandments. 
 And now came Neph. His ship rose up 
 filled with his long laboring hosts. And I 
 greeted him, saying: By the power and 
 wisdom of Jehovih, the continent of Pan 
 is to be cut loose and submerged, and 
 her heavens carried away. Return thou 
 to Earth and bring all the spirits of dark- 
 ness from all the divisions of Earth and 
 her heavens to Pan, that I may carry them 
 away. 
 
 Then Neph and his hosts viewed the 
 imposing scene and returned back to 
 Earth. 
 
 Quickly now, the ships of fire formed 
 in line, extending from my place down to 
 hada, where rested Neph and his Lords 
 of Earth, whose hosts extended to all 
 the divisions of land and water, embracing 
 the various heavenly kingdoms previously 
 built by the Lords. And in the line of 
 the etherean ships were stationed the pla- 
 teaux of rank; and the hosts of Gods and 
 Goddesses took their places according to 
 the rank, of love, wisdom and power man- 
 ifested in the etherean departments whence 
 they came, with an Orian Chief at each ex- 
 tremity. 
 
 And I divided the line into sections, 
 each with two hundred and fifty ships, 
 and there were one thousand sections. And 
 every ship was contracted ten thousand 
 fold, which was the force required to 
 break the crust of Earth and sink a con- 
 tinent. Along the line I stationed senti- 
 nels and talemen and messengers, without 
 number, so that Jehovih's Voice and His 
 Sons' voices could traverse in a moment 
 of time to every part. And after that I 
 formed the tube of transit, which extended 
 in front of the ships, and from the earth to 
 
62 
 
 CYCLE OF APH 
 
 beyond Chinvat; and I filled it with the 
 Earth's atmospherea to the extreme where 
 it joined Io'sank, whither I had determined 
 to deliver the drujas and fetals of such as 
 were to perish in the ocean. For every 
 ten sections I appointed one hundred mar- 
 shals and one God, and for every ten Gods 
 one Chief in Emuts. According to their 
 rank in the heavens whence they came so 
 appointed I them. These, then, were the 
 Chief Emuts, to-wit: 
 
 Agar, of the order of Achav, Son of Je- 
 hovih, in Bowitch, from the corporeal star 
 Godad raised in Ben of a'ji seventy, of sev- 
 en hundred thousand years inhabitant of 
 Gon. 
 
 Hoe'ghi, Son of Jehovih, Marsh'wan of 
 Hadom and Ag, nebulae four and Petrath; 
 swift messenger of Jun, of the corporeal 
 star Alanx, of one million two hundred 
 thousand years inhabitant of Roth'wuk in 
 Jois. 
 
 Fist'humitaivi, Daughter of Jehovih, 
 ji'ya'an Oods'lon in Kaih; Goddess of Ine; 
 Goddess of Ad; Governess of Walwal, of 
 the corporeal star Ter'wig, and of the 
 plains of Exwer and Gohen, in the ether- 
 ean arc of Labis, of one million three hun- 
 dred thousand years. 
 
 Hi'ata, Daughter of Jehovih, and nurse 
 of Hue'enbak, in fifty-seven a'ji, of the cor- 
 poreal star Heats, a milkmaid, Goddess of 
 Luf, Goddess of the plateau of O'banf, in 
 etherea, rank ninety, and of two millions 
 of years inhabitant of Nud and Ix. 
 
 Gon'leps, Son of Jehovih, God of Ney, 
 God of Aper, God of Don, God of Mu, 
 God of Reau; physician of Bo and of Ir, 
 and of Jan'er; marshal of Kute and Oblin 
 of Sharar, in etherea, of the a'ji'an field of 
 Do; of seven hundred thousand years in- 
 habitant of Onlof and Rick'tus. 
 
 Neo, God of Lun and Hintaya; God of 
 Mors, and of Thespune; Master of Peh 
 and Savior of Woh'haggai, a'ji plain seven, 
 and risen from the corporeal star Se'etiyi, 
 and inhabitant of Sirne one million seven 
 hundred thousand years. 
 
 Sicci, Goddess of Nu, in Lotos and 
 Rab; Goddess of Bad; Goddess of Ture; 
 Goddess of Red, a'ji twenty, from the cor- 
 poreal star Ith'mule, inhabitant of Suga 
 one million of years; inhabitant of Ranna 
 one million two hundred thousand years. 
 
 Listiac'ca, Goddess of Man; Goddess of 
 
 Hirze; Goddess of Som and Nye; Weaver 
 of Olt'bak and Agimus; rank ninety; rais- 
 ed on the corporeal star Mem; inhabitant 
 of Das'sawig and Gabriomety two million 
 nine hundred thousand years. 
 
 Tussica, Goddess of Kol; Goddess of 
 Lowst and Wittawhaggat; Goddessof Du'- 
 e'jhi and Loo of Maggatza; Goddess of 
 Ep; Goddess of Gek of Hennasshalonkya; 
 Goddess of Tur in the ji'ay'an swamps of 
 Dobbokta, fifty-five; raised on the corpor- 
 eal sun Nitz, of the serpent Tan, inhabit- 
 ant of Tayay'hitsivi, two million years; in- 
 habitant of Palla one million seven hun- 
 dred thousand years. 
 
 Fiatisi, Goddess of Labbuk; Goddess of 
 Saran'ya, in Gowlodo; Goddess of Iz; God- 
 dess of Serl; Goddess of Lok'low; God- 
 dess of Um of a'ji, seventy-five; Goddess 
 of Wartz and Do'e'huitta; Goddess of 
 Crayya; Goddess of Bak'hoo; Goddess of 
 Teel and Ros'itz; Goddess of Mutz-mutz; 
 Goddess of La'errets of Wouk'humhowtz; 
 Goddess of Bil and Du'sk'wan'guessel; 
 Goddess of Ork'sa; Goddess of Unksoot; 
 Goddess of Si'huitta; Goddess of Shein; 
 Goddess of Isa; Goddess of Ham; Goddess 
 of Reikowow and Shuitit; Goddess of 
 Daing and Gou'wok; Goddess of Faitta'- 
 zammel; Goddess of Zittayya'howb of the 
 gardens of Zittayya'bauf in a'ji seven; sur- 
 geon of Lum'zon; nurse of Paigga of Sen- 
 athais; nurse of Zid; nurse of Loosee; 
 nurse of Home; nurse of Briathath; Queen 
 of Ouppa; Queen of Rog'ga; disciplinarian 
 of Tuh, of Kaibbi'summak, of Tootz'mutz, 
 of Bir'bir, of Ctenski, of Rivvia, of Soon 
 of Hadab, of Fussuhowtz and Ceres; rais- 
 ed on the star Planzza; swift messenger 
 in Bal and Wawa'lauk five hundred thou- 
 sand years; swift messenger in To'wakka 
 and Runfwot five hundred thousand years; 
 inhabitant of Terashash one million years; 
 inhabitant of the fields of Ni'jayay one 
 million years; inhabitant of Gun five hun- 
 dred thousand years; maker of corporeal 
 roadways five hundred thousand years. 
 
 So Fiatisi outranked all other Gods 
 and Goddesses, and was special guest of 
 honor, and the star of Fiatisi's etherean 
 ship was stationed near the earth, that she 
 might the better behold the deliverance of 
 the spirits that were to be freed by the 
 submersion of the land of Pan. 
 
CYCLE OF APR 
 
 63 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 When the etherean hosts were arranged 
 in due order, I called out to Jehovih, say- 
 ing: O Jehovih, deliver thou Earth from 
 evil, for Thy glory forever! 
 
 And now the vortex of Earth was 
 closed in from the extreme, and the earth's 
 crust was broken. A mighty continent was 
 cut loose from its fastenings, and the fires 
 of Earth came forth in flames and clouds. 
 And the land rocked to and fro like a ship 
 at sea in a storm. 
 
 Again the vortex of Earth closed in 
 about on all sides, and by the pressure sank 
 the land beneath the water. And the mor- 
 tals who lived thereon went down to 
 death. And the delivering hosts hastened 
 in all directions with their birth blankets, 
 to receive the drujas and fetals and es'yans, 
 bringing them to the place which had been 
 provided for them. And their numbers 
 were so great that even Gods had scarce 
 seen the like before. And there were of 
 drujas and fetals sixteen thousand six 
 hundred million, many of whom had lived 
 on earth as fetals and drujas, and many of 
 whom were not capable of everlasting life. 
 
 Now when Earth was delivered, and 
 there was no escape for the spirits of the 
 dead, and no returning to mortals, I called 
 out to Jehovih, saying: 
 
 Give me of Thy power, O Jehovih, and 
 I will carry up all the plateaux of hell and 
 the heavens of the buried continent. 
 
 And Jehovih's hand swept over the 
 ocean of the sunken land, cleaving all 
 asunder, and I and My hosts rose, higher 
 and higher, turning and rising. 
 
 I said: Upward, O Jehovih; upward, 
 O Jehovih. 
 
 And all the hosts repeated the same 
 words, for by their wills and knowledge 
 they had strength in their Creator. 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 Jehovih spake to me, Aph, in the firm- 
 ament, saying: Bring the new-born into 
 the forests of Uk'loo and the ji'ay'an roads 
 of the arc of Noe, in the etherean heaven 
 of Hautuon; and when thou hast founded 
 them on a world of their own, leave thou 
 Gods and Goddesses with them, to sort 
 them and provide according to their neces- 
 
 sities, for all things shall be provided unto 
 them that they may attain to knowledge 
 and individuality. And when thou hast 
 placed them, hasten thou with My Son, 
 Neph, back to Earth where I have labor 
 with the ships of the I'hins. And they were 
 thus delivered. 
 
 So I departed as soon as possible, tak- 
 ing leave of Fiatisi, thanking her for her 
 assistance in this great deliverance; and I 
 took with me Neph, Son of Jehovih, and 
 other thirty thousand Gods and Goddesses 
 besides ten million ethereans who had had 
 thousands of years' experience in heaven 
 and on various corporeal worlds; and we 
 came back to earth, even to the ocean 
 where the land had gone down. And 
 when I came to the ships in which the 
 I'hins were escaped, finding the Gods who 
 had them in charge, even as I had previ- 
 ously commanded, Jehovih's Voice came 
 to me saying: 
 
 Bend thou the currents of the winds of 
 heaven, O My Son, and shape the course 
 of the ships, that they shall fall into groups, 
 and thou shalt divide the groups, making 
 four groups in all. And thou shalt drive 
 the groups of ships before the winds of hea- 
 ven, and bring them into the four different 
 lands of the earth, according to its previous 
 history and adaptation. For in all countries 
 shall My chosen begin the laying down of 
 the foundation of My everlasting kingdom, 
 and they shall never more be destroyed 
 by the people of darkness. 
 
 So I divided my hosts according to 
 the commandments put upon me, mak- 
 ing four divisions of them. And I 
 said unto Neph: Direct them, O God, to 
 such countries as Jehovih hath shown 
 thee; for, remember, thou art still God of 
 Earth. 
 
 I said: By thy light, Jehovih, I desire 
 two ships to go to the north land, which 
 was not sunken, for they shall be a testi- 
 mony in time to come. Let Thy Gods, 
 therefore, shift the winds and drive two 
 ships aside from the rest, and in that same 
 time my messengers will go and lead the 
 way to the north land, whither Thy God 
 shall shape the winds of heaven. 
 
 Now, those in charge of the wind cur- 
 rents divided the ships and drove two of 
 them off to the north land. And the Gods 
 and angels turned the currents about and 
 
64 
 
 CYCLE OF APH 
 
 drove the four groups of ships in four dif- 
 ferent ways, according to the directions of 
 God, Son of Jehovih. And the messengers 
 of God lead the way, showing the Gods 
 and angels of the wind the countries des- 
 ignated by Jehovih. 
 
 In one hundred and fifty days time all 
 the ships of the Faithists were in the 
 ports, and the people went ashore in the 
 different countries whither they had been 
 taken. Again Jehovih's Voice came to 
 me, saying: Behold, my people are few in 
 the' world, and lest they take the ships and 
 sail about, and so get divided and lost, 
 thou shalt send thy hosts down to the sea 
 at night to sink the ships. 
 
 And I told Neph what Jehovih had 
 said, and he answered: My angels shall 
 inspire the I'hins to take all things out of 
 the ships, and this night shall thy hosts 
 fulfill the commandment of Jehovih. 
 
 And so it came to pass, that the I'hins 
 took all their goods out of the ships, not 
 knowing they were inspired; and in the 
 night Neph sent angels down and they sank 
 the ships. And in the morning the I'hins 
 beheld their ships had disappeared, and 
 they said with one voice: Of a truth, I 
 know I was inspired, for I could not rest 
 till all the goods were taken out of the 
 ships. Let us, therefore, build an altar 
 unto the Lord, and sing and dance, be- 
 cause he is with us. 
 
 And when Neph saw that their souls 
 were propitious for good works and mir- 
 acles, he stationed his ashars around the 
 altars, and sent other ashars into the 
 country, and they gathered fruit which was 
 growing wild, and brought it to the 
 I'hins, casting it on the altars, even whilst 
 the people danced. 
 
 Thus did I fulfill the work Jehovih 
 commanded me, Aph, to do, whereupon I 
 surrendered my commission to Neph. 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 Neph, God of Earth, said: Behold, O 
 Aph, Son of Jehovih, by the power and 
 magnificence of thy work am I bewildered 
 in thy presence. Who can come so near 
 the Almighty? Who but Jehovih hath at- 
 tained beyond the power of thy soul? Who 
 hath wisdom like unto thee, save the 
 great Creator? Thou hast stretched a line 
 beyond the moon, and by thy spoken word 
 
 crushed in the side of the great Earth as 
 if it were nothing. Thou hast said: Arise' 
 and a world moved at thy command. Yea, 
 thou hast the love and esteem of millions 
 of Gods and Goddesses. And thou earnest 
 against the winds of the earth, saying: 
 Turn ye hither or turn ye thither, and the 
 winds moved before thy words as an obe- 
 dient child to its father's voice. Thou 
 callest down the fire of heaven. It cometh 
 at thy bidding, and thou sayest: O Jeho- 
 vih, put Thy hand under the heavens of 
 Earth, and straightway a light and floor 
 wide as Earth fly into the place of thy de- 
 sire. Now behold, thou hast said: O Je- 
 hovih, I surrender my commission. I have 
 finished that which Thou commandest me 
 to do. Wherefore, O Aph, my soul hath 
 great sorrow. But because thou hast clean- 
 ed up the whole Earth and her heavens, as 
 one might sweep the floor of a house, I am 
 bowed down in gratitude. 
 
 Then Aph, Son of Jehovih, said: O 
 Jehovih, what have I done that Thy Son's 
 love hath come to me? So far as I have 
 become one with Thee, O Thou Everlast- 
 ing Creator, so Thou showest me plainer 
 and plainer that I am nothing. And yet 
 Thy Son heapeth praise upon me, seeing I 
 am but as a figure moved by Thy hand. 
 Shall a man lose sight of the Almighty? 
 Nevertheless, O Jehovih, who so weak in 
 love as I, Thy servant? Because Thou 
 hast quickened me in wisdom and power, 
 so hast Thou made my love as a place that 
 can never be supplied to the fill. How 
 shall I find strength to leave this, Thy 
 Son, on the far off Earth? Do I not glory 
 in his love and great esteem; and yet 
 know I not that I will repine because I 
 have him not with me? 
 
 Hear me, O Jehovih, for I will meas- 
 ure Thy Son with swiftness. Scarce forty 
 thousand years raised up to etherea, and 
 yet Thou madest him God of Earth and her 
 heavens. For three thousand years strug- 
 gled he in the battle against evil and dark- 
 ness and the broad heavens of ether- 
 ea looked on in sympathy, love and 
 hope, because of his tenacity in wis- 
 dom and love. It was as one man fight- 
 ing against a house on fire, and the place 
 filled with helpless babes. And yet Thy 
 God ceased not, nor once rested and said: 
 It is useless; but forever renewed the bat- 
 
CYCLE OF APH 
 
 65 
 
 tie in new ways and stratagems. As a 
 light showeth better in the dark, so did 
 Thy Son Neph, O Jehovih, move the souls 
 of even Gods and Goddesses in Thy ex- 
 alted heavens. 
 
 Then came Thy Voice, O Jehovih, say- 
 ing: Go thou, O Aph, My Son, and de- 
 liver Earth. 
 
 And behold, the congregating of Gods 
 and Goddesses; so eager to fly to the as- 
 sistance of Thy honored Son. 
 
 And Neph said. One favor, O Aph, Son 
 of Jehovih, I ask of thee; which is that 
 thou shalt tarry three days and honor my 
 throne. For I will have it founded and 
 ready; and My Lords shall have the honor 
 of speaking to thee face to face. 
 
 Aph, Son of Jehovih, said: By Thy 
 permission, O Jehovih, I will tarry three 
 days and three nights with Thy Son, God 
 of Earth, and I will honor his throne and 
 speak face to face with his Lords, that I 
 may win their love. 
 
 In three days' time the kingdom of 
 God was founded, and situated in atmos- 
 pherea over the land of Jaffeth, but the 
 plateaux extended with two wings, so as 
 to embrace Shem and Ham; and thither 
 went the Gods with their Lords and at- 
 tendants. 
 
 Now, there were with the God of Earth 
 two million spirts, earth-born, who had 
 volunteered to serve two hundred years for 
 the founding of the new kingdom of hea- 
 ven, and they were well learned in official 
 capacity, knowing how to found plateaux, 
 with factories, mansions, hospitals, nurser- 
 ies, and all such places as are required in 
 heaven for the new-born, so that God only 
 had to say: Do ye this, or so, and they ac- 
 complished the same without error. And 
 now from the hosts of Aph, Son of Jeho- 
 vih, there came before God half a million 
 etherean volunteers who desired to re- 
 main two hundred years with God and 
 his hosts. God said to them: 
 
 Behold, Earth hath passed Tryista, and 
 it is no longer lawful for any but 
 Earth-born to hold the places of sub- Gods 
 and sub-Lords and marshals; and since ye 
 are from different stars raised, and from 
 different etherean circuits, what shall I do 
 that ye may be honored, and also profit- 
 able to yourselves in development? 
 
 Gaitivaya, chief spokesman for them, 
 said: We desire to be laborers only. For 
 what is two hundred years to us? We pray 
 thee, appoint us not to the Thins, for they 
 are already advanced, but appoint us to 
 those who speak but little, and who bur- 
 row in the ground. Neither do we desire 
 a place in thy heaven, but we will abide 
 with mortals, and in the first resurrection 
 of those who are born in darkness. 
 
 God said: Thou shalt remain, and thy 
 people with thee. For since thou hast vol- 
 unteered to leave thy high estate and come 
 and dwell for one dan on the lowest of all 
 places, laboring for the blind and dumb, 
 thou shalt be recompensed with the love 
 of millions in time to come. 
 
 Then God departed, and Aph, Son of 
 Jehovih, went with him; and they came 
 into the midst of the kingdom of God, 
 whereat they halted and God said: Here 
 will I build my throne; and inasmuch as 
 Sethantes in the olden time, called his 
 place Hored, so will I call my place Hored 
 also, and on the earth it shall be called the 
 Mountain of God, for it shall be my home. 
 
 So God stretched forth his hand, say- 
 ing: Throne of Thy throne, O Jehovih. 
 
 And there came down from the heavens 
 above a great light, and it settled around 
 about in the midst of the place of God and 
 Aph, Jehovih's Son; and presently the 
 light gathered up of the atmospherean 
 substance and made it shining and con- 
 densed, and the attendants built the throne 
 of God, and fenced it around with pillars 
 of fire, after the manner of Hored of the 
 ancient days. And God ascended and sat 
 on the throne, and Aph sat on the right 
 hand of God, and the four Lords of 
 Earth on the left hand; but the fifth Lord, 
 Eolait, stood down at the foot. And he 
 said: Behold the division of the earth 
 that was mine is sunk beneath the sea. 
 How then shall I sit on the throne of 
 God? 
 
 God said: Since thy labor hath been 
 taken from thee, thou art as a parable on 
 the newly dead who have lost the earth 
 and have no place in heaven. Since the 
 es'yan serveth a time through the proxy 
 of others, so shalt thou in that which I will 
 bestow upon thee. Know then, thou 
 shalt sit on my right hand, for thou shalt 
 be my assistant during the time of my so- 
 
66 
 
 CYCLE OF APH 
 
 journ; and after that whatsoever thou wilt. 
 
 Eolait said: Thou hast honored me, O 
 God. Jehovih's will be done. So God 
 rose up, raising his hand, and said: O 
 Thou All Light, crown Thou Thy Son, 
 Vice-God of Hored, for Thine own glory 
 forever. 
 
 And as the light of etherea descended 
 into God's right hand, he shaped it into 
 a crown and placed it on Eolait's head, 
 with the usual ceremony of such rank in 
 heaven. And Eolait came and sat on the 
 right hand of God. And in that same 
 time, Aph, Son of Jehovih, rose up, 
 whereupon God and the Lords and the 
 people, sat down. 
 
 Aph said: As a father is made to com- 
 prehend his own early life by looking on 
 his infant son, so hast Thou, O Jehovih, 
 raised up before my eyes the images of 
 times and conditions long past. In these, 
 Thy Lords, Thou hast called me back to 
 the time and place when first Thou and 
 Thy Son crowned me a Lord and a Vice- 
 God over one of the divisions of my native 
 star. And my soul rose up to Thee in fear 
 and prayer; for I understood how un- 
 mindful men and angels are of the labor 
 of Gods and Lords, and prone to rate 
 themselves as Chiefs of all created things. 
 But Thy Voice, O Jehovih, came to me, 
 saying: Complain not, My Son, against 
 the self conceit of men and angels, nor of 
 their criticisms of My God and Lords; for 
 to such boasters do I provide trials, which 
 they perceive not till they are encompassed 
 therewith. Suffer them, therefore, within 
 thy dominions to grow up in their own 
 glory, for I have sufficient labor for them, 
 both in mortality and in heaven. 
 
 And I perceived Thy wisdom, and ap- 
 plied it through my angels; and when my 
 people rose to the first resurrection, and 
 the second resurrection, I knew where to 
 place them. And Thy light came upon 
 me in my place, saying: As thou hast 
 profited in the first lesson, so shalt thou 
 comprehent the second, and even up to 
 the etherean heavens. 
 
 Nevertheless, O Father, Thou suffer- 
 edst all things to harass and perplex my 
 soul; and I was filled with fear and rever- 
 ence because of the great responsibility 
 Thou gavest into my keeping. So great 
 were my tribulations and trials that I 
 
 called out to Thee in Thy holy place to 
 remember all other Gods and Lords in 
 Thy whole universe. 
 
 And Thou saidst: Hear the words of 
 thy Creator, My Son; for I created man 
 to enter heaven as he entered mortal life, 
 and dependent on those above him, that 
 he might comprehend the unity between 
 high and low, strong and weak, light and 
 darkness; and I placed him in My mills 
 wherein he should learn that even as oth- 
 ers grind for him, so should he grind for 
 those beneath him. Otherwise, of what 
 profit is it for My Lords to come down 
 from their liberty and glory in My ether- 
 ean firmament and become Lords over the 
 grovelers in the flesh, or over the es'yans 
 in darkness? Shall selfishness reign in 
 heaven, and everyone for himself? Have 
 I not proven in mortal life that the love 
 of doing good works unto others is all 
 that insures a rich harvest of love in re- 
 turn? Because they stoop from their high 
 estate in order to promote My children 
 which I created alive, are they not be- 
 coming the more one with Me? 
 
 And I perceived Thy wisdom, O Jeho- 
 vih, and Thy power and wisdom came 
 upon me tenfold. Then I sought forever 
 after to go to the lowest and darkest 
 places; but lo, when I had grown in Thy 
 judgment, thou spakest again to me, say- 
 ing: 
 
 O Aph, My Son, because thou hast 
 found the key to unlock the doors to the 
 highest heavens, behold, thou art too 
 mighty for small labor. Come, therefore, 
 with Thy Creator, for I have a whole 
 etherean world at thy command, and thy 
 wisdom and power are required at My 
 hand. 
 
 And I obeyed Thy call, O Jehovih. 
 And then again, after a time, Thou called 
 me again, and my labors extended 
 into many etherean worlds. But I love 
 to look back and glorify Thee for my first 
 Lord-dom, and to treasure up the millions 
 of loves I found in those days. And 
 again, O Jehovih, hast Thou blessed me 
 to meet many millions of them in this 
 pruning of the red star, Earth. Now 
 hast Thou called me to speak on the throne 
 of Thy God of Earth. Alas, Thy God 
 hath said: O Aph, son of Jehovih, come 
 thou and honor my throne. Whereas, O 
 
CYCLE OF APH 
 
 67 
 
 Jehovih, I am the most honored of men 
 and Gods because I have again opened my 
 mouth before Thee and in Thy name. All 
 glory be to Thee, O Jehovih, now and for- 
 ever. 
 
 Then Aph, Son of Jehovih, sat down, 
 and God signalled to the marshals, who 
 proclaimed freedom for two days. There- 
 upon the Gods and Goddesses of Aph's 
 staff filed past the throne, and after them 
 came the hosts of God, and then the hosts 
 of the Lords, for they all desired to pass 
 near and look upon Aph, and receive the 
 signal of his blessing. 
 
 And presently all the people joined in 
 with the es'enaurs and sang a song of 
 glory unto Jehovih, the All Highest. And 
 when it was finished the multitude turned 
 to recreation and social intercourse. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 When the time came, God called his 
 proper officers, and they proclaimed his 
 presence. 
 
 And God said: As it was before the 
 submersion, so shall it be now, for you 
 shall fill the same places as before. Nev- 
 ertheless, from this time forth, all work in 
 heaven and on earth will be new, and as if 
 nothing had been. Let My Lords and 
 their attendants, and their ashars, prepare 
 for their departure; and from such other 
 volunteers as have come into my kingdom 
 they shall receive as they desire, and be 
 assigned to labor suited to them, whether 
 it be with mortals or with spirits in the 
 first resurrection. And my marshals, mes- 
 sengers and asaphs shall travel throughout 
 atmospherea, selecting and appropriating 
 all suitable places for the spirits of the 
 dead, and apportion builders and workmen, 
 and erect factories, schools, hospitals, nur- 
 series, and all other suitable places, adapt- 
 ed to receiving those of the first resurrec- 
 tion, as is done in all atmospherean hea- 
 vens, and all who are thus received shall 
 be called es'yans for the first five years; 
 but after that they shall be called es'seans, 
 signifying having separated from corporeal 
 desire, being full residents of the es world. 
 But those who will not become es'seans, 
 being the spirits of druk mortals and fast- 
 bound to the earth, shall be called drujas, 
 signifying wandering spirits of darkness 
 and of evil. And those who engraft them- 
 
 selves on mortals shall be called fetals, sig- 
 nifying sucklings, and these names shall 
 continue in heaven and on earth to the end 
 of the world. Wherein ye may perceive 
 the fault of leniency of the Gods and Lords 
 of old, be ye circumspect in these times. 
 
 When God thus completed all his com- 
 mandments, and the people were ready to 
 depart, the es'enaurs and trumpeters sang 
 and played a hymn adapted to the new hea- 
 ven; and when this was finished, Aph, Son 
 of Jehovih, spake, saying: 
 
 Behold, the light of the high heaven 
 ooens. Thy Son, O Jehovih, longeth for a 
 great labor. I go on a journey farther 
 than ten thousand suns. Fiatisi, Thy 
 Daughter, O Jehovih, and Goddess of a 
 thousand worlds, hath set apart to join 
 two corporeal stars in a far-off heaven, 
 whereon a thousand million shall be de- 
 livered into spirit life in a single day. With 
 her, by Thy will and power, O Jehovih, I 
 go. But yet, let not these, Thy Gods and 
 Lords and all their hosts, surmise I will 
 forget one single soul of all that are here. 
 And when the next dan appeareth, behold, 
 I will return to them to enjoy a portion of 
 their sweet love. 
 
 And now he descended and sat at the 
 foot of the throne, and God, suffused with 
 tears, came down and took his hand, say- 
 ing: Behold, he who is greatest maketh 
 himself least of all. Arise, O Aph, Son of 
 Jehovih, and crowned immortal God of the 
 Arc of Noe, Son of the Almighty, arise 
 and go thy way. 
 
 So Aph rose up, and shaking hands 
 with God and his Lords, descended to the 
 borders beyond the foot of the pillars of 
 fire, and his hosts with him, being ten mill- 
 ion in number, where the proper persons 
 had in readiness an ascending otevan 
 wherein they all entered. At a given sig- 
 nal the otevan started, but toward the east, 
 and swift as a shooting star it sped forth, 
 and presently disappeared in the distance. 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 Jehovih said: Neph, My Son, God of 
 Earth, hear thou the Voice of Thy Creator. 
 For as thou callest on Me in thy sore hour 
 of trial, so did I come to thee and deliver 
 Earth and her heavens through My Son of 
 the arc of Noe in etherea. Remember now, 
 the upraised of Hautuon, heaven of dark- 
 
68 
 
 CYCLE OF APH 
 
 ness, in Uk'loo, in the frmament, for they 
 are thine until the next dan. 
 
 God said: I have hear.d thy Voice, O 
 Jehovih. But what shall Thy servant do? 
 Behold Aph, hath left with the upraised 
 children of darkness, Gods and Goddesses 
 who transcend Thy servant so far in wis- 
 dom and power that he scarce can look up- 
 on them. How, then, shall it be with me, 
 Thy servant? 
 
 Jehovih said: Nevertheless, the up- 
 raised children of darkness are thine own 
 family, and the glory of thy house in hea- 
 ven shall be the light thou shalt make 
 manifest in them. Fear not, the Gods and 
 Goddesses understand this matter. 
 
 Therefore, when thou hast put Thy 
 kingdom in order, and established the hea- 
 ven of Earth in all its parts, and sta- 
 tioned messengers betwixt thy throne and 
 the thrones of Thy Lords on the earth, 
 thou shalt leave thy Vice-God to rule in thy 
 stead for a season, and thou shalt go to 
 Hautuon, in the etherean forests, for they 
 will be expecting thee. 
 
 God said: Thy will be done, O Fa- 
 ther. I perceive Thy wisdom and glory 
 and justice. Now will I sojourn on my 
 throne one year, and thou, my Vice God, 
 shall relieve me whilst I go and visit my 
 rebellious children in Uk'loo, where Gods 
 and Goddesses are overseeing them. 
 
 The Vice-God said: Thy will be done, 
 O God of Earth. 
 
 Ands in one year's time God had estab- 
 lished heaven in such good manner that 
 he could control the affairs of angels and 
 men into the way of everlasting life. God 
 informed his council, which consisted of 
 five hundred thousand ethereans, men and 
 women, of the words of Jehovih. When 
 it became known in heaven that God was 
 to make a visit of one year's time to Hau- 
 tuon, his hosts from *far and near, to the 
 number of ten million, came to see him de- 
 part. And God proclaimed a day of rec- 
 reation, and the people mingled together 
 to converse on the matter of the deliver- 
 ance of Earth and her heavens and the go- 
 ing down of the continent of Pan. 
 
 On the following day, all hands being 
 refreshed and assembled in order, accord- 
 ing to the discipline of Gods, God spake 
 from the throne, saying: 
 
 Hear the words of your God, and re- 
 joice in the founding of a new heaven. 
 Be wise in heeding that which I shall utter, 
 and make yourselves steadfast in all 
 proven things. Here are millions who 
 stood by my side in the name of Jehovih, 
 in the days of darkness in heaven and 
 earth. For three thousand years our bat- 
 tle lasted; and from out the darkness be- 
 hold our prayers went up to Him who is 
 over all and above all. And your God said: 
 Surely Jehovih will deliver when the vor- 
 tex mergeth into Hi'dan; and ye all re- 
 peated the same thing; and the unity of our 
 souls desire reached up to the Orian 
 Chiefs, Jehovih's mighty Sons and Daugh- 
 ters. 
 
 For as it is proven that a man in con- 
 flict with himself accomplisheth nothing, 
 whilst he who is in harmony with himself 
 is mighty, wherein he ruleth himself to a 
 good purpose; even so hath it been proven 
 that the unity of many angels can, by force 
 of their wills in connection with their work, 
 control the place and proceedings of a 
 world. And ye became a star of faith in 
 Jehovih. 
 
 And they who were without faith in an 
 All Highest Person, were without power, 
 and of no effect save to build up discord 
 to our proceedings. Whilst those who as- 
 sumed to be Gods and Lords, but ignored 
 Jehovih, were not sustained, for having 
 nothing higher than themselves, they rose 
 only to themselves. Which is manifested 
 on earth, even as it was in those days in 
 heaven, boasting of good works or of good 
 prayers, but housing themselves about with 
 the earnings of others. Did not these 
 false Gods and false Lords set up self and 
 worship it? And the fruits of their inspir- 
 ation and their slaves under them, were the 
 angels they sent to rule over mortals, for 
 the glory of their philosophy, wherein 
 mortals soon said the same things of them- 
 selves, which was: Behold, there is no 
 God nor Lord of wisdom in heaven and 
 earth. Whereby the doctrines of the false 
 Gods and Lords overturned their own 
 kingdoms, changing heaven into hada. 
 But when the Light of Jehovih came, ye 
 and your God and Lords were one with 
 His Voice. And now that your God and 
 Lords have established a new heaven and 
 new earth for the glory of Jehovih, he who 
 
CYCLE OF APH 
 
 69 
 
 labored so long in your love goeth to the 
 other wing of the battle, where your breth- 
 ren toiling with those in darkness, will re- 
 joice to hear of your fruitful labors. 
 
 Then God turned to the right, and said 
 to Eolait, Vice-God of Earth: Because 
 thou wert robbed of thy division of the 
 earth, Jehovih hath bestowed thee well. 
 Thou shalt therefore, hold the triangle of 
 the Gods of Earth until thy God returns. 
 
 Thereupon, God hung the triangle on 
 Eolait's neck, saying: In Jehovih's name, 
 all hail, God of Earth. 
 
 The hosts of millions repeated: All 
 hail, God of Earth. 
 
 And Neph came down and sat at the 
 foot of the throne; and God came down 
 and took his hand, saying: Arise, O God, 
 and go thy way. 
 
 So Neph rose up, and the two, with 
 their marshals and attendants, went down 
 to where the proper persons had a ship 
 with mantles and curtains in readiness, and 
 Neph, and his hosts, five hundred thousand 
 in number, entered the ship. Meanwhile 
 the es'enaurs sang an anthem of Glory to 
 Jehovih. At a given signal the ship start- 
 ed upward, amidst the applause of millions 
 of angels assembled. Like a star of light 
 it shot upward higher and higher, till it 
 was seen no more. 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 The Council of Hored being in session, 
 God ascended the throne, and the light of 
 Jehovih fell upon him so that he was well 
 night obscured from sight, and the Voice 
 of Jehovih spake, saying: 
 
 As by My presence, and of Mine own 
 self I made each self, and gave thereto 
 power of words, so do I in light manifest 
 by words to My etherean hosts. As to the 
 Lords of Earth ye have provided ashars, 
 and above them asaphs, and betwixt all 
 my kingdoms allotted messengers, so shall 
 ye also provide for barbarians, familiar 
 spirits, who shall be subject to the order of 
 the ashars and their Lords. 
 
 I create all men, whether I'hins or bar- 
 barians, and your labor shall be not alone 
 with My chosen, whom it is easy to save, 
 but with those also who know Me not, and 
 know not My es worlds. For, besides 
 those destroyed by the flood, behold the 
 earth is still covered over with men, wo- 
 
 men and children. In the time of Aph, ye 
 received volunteers from Osi, in etherea; 
 give them this matter in hand. 
 
 This was done, and they were divided 
 up into groups, and the corporeans having 
 already been numbered by the angels of 
 heaven, the ethereans were distributed ac- 
 cordingly. And these again selected and 
 apportioned familiar spirits to abide with 
 the barbarians. And these familiar spirits 
 were the fathers and mothers and friends 
 who had recently died, and still sojourned 
 in the first resurrection. So the officers 
 provided places on earth for these spirits 
 and persuaded them to reappear before 
 mortals in order to prove continued life. 
 
 Jehovih hath said: Provide ye the way, 
 but cause the familiars to do the labor, but 
 do not make a familiar of the spirit of a 
 young man or woman, lest they become 
 fetals. 
 
 So it came to pass that a new depart- 
 ment of heaven and earth was opened, dur- 
 ing the absence of Neph. At the end of 
 one year Neph returned from the Hautuon 
 colony, bringing with him five million vol- 
 unteers, being of the third resurrection. 
 And it being known in Hored when he 
 would return, a great concourse of angels . 
 gathered to receive him in honor, and to 
 welcome the volunteers. So that when 
 God's etherean star descended, the Vice- 
 God, Eloait, proclaimed a recreation of 
 ten days, which was to follow immediately 
 after God should ascend the throne. And 
 whilst the es'enaurs were singing, the ship 
 of Neph alighted, and the marshals and 
 hosts of honor proceeded to the places, and 
 received God, who at once ascended to 
 the throne and saluted Eolait, Son of Je- 
 hovih, saying: 
 
 By Thy will and power, O Jehovih, Thy 
 Son rejoiceth. 
 
 Eolait said: Welcome, God of Earth. 
 And he saluted with the sign of Jeho- 
 vih's name, and was answered in like man- 
 ner. Without more ceremony he took off 
 the triangle of the Gods and placed it on 
 Neph's neck, saying: In Jehovih's name, 
 receive thou the gift of the ancient Gods. 
 
 God said: Let the marshals proclaim 
 ten days of recreation, whilst we account to 
 our loves how we found matters in Hau- 
 tuon, and of the power of Jehovih mani- 
 fested. 
 
70 
 
 CYCLE OF APH 
 
 CHAPTER XL 
 The Voice of Jehovih spake through 
 God, saying: Because a new heaven is es- 
 tablished, and because the old hath been 
 raised up, let signs be manifested whereby 
 men and angels in after times may know 
 what hath happened. For men and angels 
 may forget the flood and the purging of 
 Earth. Bethink ye, O Gods and Goddesses,, 
 what shall be done? 
 
 Eloait spoke in behalf of the Council, 
 saying: What shall be done, O Jehovih? 
 
 Jehovih said: In kosmon, men and an- 
 gels shall ask for proofs. One will say: 
 How is it possible to relate the words spo- 
 ken in the olden time? Another will say: 
 How can it be proven that the old heaven 
 was taken away? 
 
 Hear, therefore, the words of your Cre- 
 ator; and when one saith: Behold in those 
 days few men had the gift of words and 
 speech, answer ye him, saying: Even so 
 was it in heaven, and because they had not 
 words they could not be made to under- 
 stand. 
 
 And another shall say: The Creator 
 ruleth in large matters, but not in the small; 
 and another shall say: Because the angels 
 come in kosmon, so could they in the old- 
 en time. And ye shall answer them, say- 
 ing: Who knoweth the plan for an earth- 
 quake, whether it be small or large before 
 Jehovih? Is He not ever present, and do 
 not certain conditions bring certain re- 
 sults? And they will answer: Yea. 
 
 Say ye: Give then, a name to the High- 
 est Cause beyond all research and they will 
 say: By the ancients called Jehovih. 
 
 And they shall see that they have en- 
 tangled themselves in a net. For if the 
 condition of ignorance on earth begot ig- 
 norance in heaven, how could the light of 
 heaven come afterward to Earth save 
 from above? Since, then, the light of hea- 
 ven came from above, who should invent 
 the wisdom of a flood to come upon the 
 speech of nations? 
 
 Give them, therefore, words in heaven 
 and words on earth which are matters of 
 this nature, and make the sounds thereof 
 sacred, so that it shall be proven in Jaf- 
 feth, Shem, Ham and Guatama, and in the 
 heavens thereof. 
 
 God said: Thou are all wisdom, O Je- 
 hovih. Now have I a place for the new 
 
 volunteers come from etherea. For this 
 shall be their matter and business with the 
 familiars who dwell with the barbarians. 
 
 So, accordingly, they were alloted. And 
 they were enjoined to sing to mortals the 
 song of the flood; and they thus establish- 
 ed its history to endure forever on the 
 earth. 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 All things prospered in heaven for 
 many years, nor were there great wars on 
 earth, nor famines, nor epidemics. And 
 the Lords appointed sufficient loo'is for 
 all the Faithists, so as to control the I'hin 
 marriages to bring forth sons and daugh- 
 ters who would rejoice in heaven. And 
 when they died their spirits were carried 
 to heavenly places, and entered as es'yans. 
 
 But the Lords appointed no loo'is over 
 the barbarians, and only commanded the 
 asaphs to watch for their spirits in the 
 hour of death, and if possible, to bring 
 them to the organic places of God in Hor- 
 ed. This continued for many years, and in 
 course of time, the familiar spirits aroused 
 up the barbarians, and they began to have 
 dreams and see visions when familiars talk- 
 ed to them whilst they slept. And when 
 this became common, Jehovih said: 
 
 Behold, the time is come to appoint 
 loo'is to abide with the barbarians. The 
 I'hins are a harmless and defenseless peo- 
 ple and cannot subdue the earth. There- 
 fore, I have created the barbarian; for he 
 shall drive away and destroy all evil beasts 
 and serpents; and the forests shall fall 
 down before him. For this purpose the 
 loo'is shall select marriages with a view of 
 raising up great kings and queens. But 
 since, in the olden time, the kings depend- 
 ed on the prophets of God for counsel, 
 and thus were advised against killing any- 
 thing I had created alive, so in this time 
 of the new heaven ye shall permit the kings 
 and queens to consult the spirits of the 
 dead with the talents I have given them. 
 
 This was done also; and the barbarians 
 were attended by familiar spirits, many of 
 whom called themselves God or Lord, or 
 the name of some great king of the olden 
 time. And these familiars, being stupid, 
 supposed themselves to be such persons. 
 The result of their stupid impressions was 
 to inspire the barbarians to believe they 
 
CYCLE OF APH 
 
 71 
 
 were attended by Gods or Lords, or by the 
 spirits of kings or queens; and so they held 
 up their heads and began to think. For 
 as it had been said by the Gods of ancient 
 times: Some are led by flattery, some by 
 self-conceit, some by duty, some by love 
 of righteousness; so are there others who 
 can be led to self improvement by persuad- 
 ing them they are chosen especially by 
 some God or Lord, or the spirit of a re- 
 nowned king or queen, to work wonders. 
 
 God said: There was a certain sick 
 man who could not be cured by the physi- 
 cians. So there came a foolish woman, 
 seeing visions, and said to the sick man: 
 To-morrow thou shalt be healed. God 
 hath been trying thee; but thou hast prov- 
 en thyself in soul, and thy God will with- 
 draw the spell of thy infirmity. Behold, 
 thy God standeth by thee. 
 
 Now on the following day the sick man 
 put forth his spirit and rose up and was 
 well. Wherefore, it hath been adjudged 
 even deceit may accomplish what truth 
 could not. Suffer then the familiars to 
 lead the barbarians on for a season, but be 
 ye watchful at the proper time to appoint 
 new spirits to be with them. 
 
 To the messengers God said: Instruct 
 the Lords that the time is come to reveal 
 the seven tetracts to mortals, especially to 
 the I'hins; for as the ashars are withdrawn 
 a pace, so shall mortals advance a pace. 
 These are the inheritances of all men born 
 on the earth: AN ASH, which is persistent 
 stubbornness by word or thought; ZIM- 
 MAH, wicked device; RA, delight in be- 
 ing bad; BELYYAAL, worthlessness; 
 AVEN, vanity and self-conceit; DIBBAH, 
 slander and reporting of evils; and SA- 
 TAN, to be a leader, especially to the de- 
 light of the other six entities. 
 
 These are the members of the beast in. 
 all men and women; nor is any one with- 
 out them in some manner or degree. Go 
 ye, therefore, to the Lords and say to 
 them: Jehovih hath set the beginning of 
 the resurrection through Aph, His Son, 
 Chief of the Arc of Noe, to lay the te- 
 tracts on the shoulders of mortals. 
 
 The marshals of the Council provided 
 messengers who were at once sent down 
 to the different divisions of the earth; for 
 the tetracts were some of the words se- 
 lected in heaven to be given as everlasting 
 
 names, whereby, in after ages, the tribes 
 of Faithists might be discovered. And 
 they were given alike to the Faithists of 
 Guatama, Jaffeth, Shem and Ham, who 
 were the sons of the Arc of Noe preserved 
 on the earth in that day. For these words 
 were provided in the Hebraic, Vedic and 
 Algonquin languages, to be synonymous, 
 till the coming of the kosmon era. 
 
 CHAPTER XIII. 
 
 The Voice of Jehovih came to God, say- 
 ing: Hored shall advance to the second 
 resurrection, and the first resurrection 
 shall be established with My Lords. And 
 every thirty-three years the Lords shall 
 bring to this, My holy place, those who 
 are capable of the second resurrection, 
 where they shall be prepared for the next 
 resurrection to etherea. 
 
 Accordingly, every thirty-three years 
 there was one migration from the Lords' 
 first resurrection to that of Hored. 
 
 God said: Close the gates of Hored, 
 and from this time ever after only those of 
 the second resurrection can enter. And it 
 was so. And Hored was extended over 
 Jaffeth, Shem and Ham; and over Guata- 
 ma the Lords made two kingdoms, the 
 first and second resurrections, and allot- 
 ted the first to a sub-Lord in his own 
 name, and over the second he presided in 
 person, teaching his people of God in Hor- 
 ed. As the distance of the sea lay be- 
 tween these heavens, the Lord and his at- 
 tendants maintained an etherean ship, and 
 crossed the sea at intervals of eleven 
 years. 
 
 And now new colleges were established 
 in the second resurrection, and the spirits 
 began the study of elements and illustra- 
 tions in es and uz, and the process of travel 
 and of carrying corporeal entities. And 
 these spirits were at times taken down to 
 mortals by the ashars to assist in mira- 
 cles. For the lessons in the second resur- 
 rection embraced the mastery of corpor in 
 alalysis and synthesis. 
 
 And God visited Hautuon every eleven 
 years, and remained one year of Earth's 
 time; so that in two hundred years he 
 made eighteen visits. On his first visit he 
 brought back with him a number of volun- 
 teers, being of those raised by the Arc of 
 Noe; and the next visit he brought back 
 
72 
 
 CYCLE OF APH 
 
 twice as many as the first; and the next 
 time three times as many as the second, 
 and increasing for the eighteen visits. And 
 on the last visit it was estimated how many 
 he had brought back in all, and the num- 
 ber was one thousand million. And they 
 were raised to the second resurrection, 
 having been under the training of Gods 
 and Goddesses in Hautuon, under the di- 
 rection of Aph, Son of Jehovih. And 
 now that the time of dan was drawing 
 near, and Aph should return to provide 
 for the ascent of Jehovih's harvest, God 
 looked up with a cheerful heart; for it was 
 evident that by the expiration of the two 
 hundred years from the submersion of 
 Pan, many of the spirits delivered from 
 Earth in that day would be prepared to 
 take the second resurrection. Wherefore, 
 God prophesied, saying: Through thee, 
 O Jehovih, in another hundred years, I 
 shall have delivered them into etherea as 
 Thy Brides and Bridegrooms. 
 
 CHAPTER XIV. 
 
 Jehovih spake in the light of the throne 
 of God in Hored, saying: Behold a star 
 cometh. 
 
 The Voice ceased, but God and his 
 hosts knew the meaning, for it was the 
 time of Aph to return and complete his 
 deliverance of Neph and his hosts, and his 
 Lords and their hosts. The Council look- 
 ed up into the firmament; and the messen- 
 gers who had heard the Voice, and who 
 were departing on their various missions, 
 also looked upward, even as they sped 
 forth in their places; and they proclaimed 
 it in the places of all the heavens of Earth, 
 and to Lords and their divisions of the 
 earth. 
 
 And the angels of heaven and those 
 that abode with mortals were so stirred up, 
 and because of their presence mortals com- 
 prehended that something unusual was 
 about to happen. The Council of Hored 
 knew not how they should proceed, for 
 the event was to surpass in magnificence 
 anything they had ever witnessed. 
 
 God said: I have heard Thy Voice, O 
 Jehovih. I know a star cometh, and great 
 shall be the glory thereof. Give me light, 
 O Father. How shall Thy servant know 
 the decorum of Orian Chiefs? Behold, I 
 
 am as one abashed with obscurity in Thy 
 wide universe. 
 
 Jehovih's Voice answered: Fear not, 
 My Son. And let Thy council be strong 
 also. Proceed at once to decorate thy peo- 
 ple preparatory to receiving the resurrec- 
 tion. And those who are to be My Brides 
 and Bridegrooms clothe ye in white. 
 
 The whole Council heard Jehovih's 
 Voice, and they ordained officers to pro- 
 ceed throughout atmospherea and put in 
 effect Jehovih's commandment. And the 
 decorated angels, and those prepared as 
 Brides and Bridegrooms for etherea, were 
 ordered to form in companies near the 
 throne of God in Hored; and the officers 
 of companies were also provided with 
 badges, whereon was inscribed an account 
 of their labor on earth and in heaven, the 
 number and nature of their self sacrifices 
 for others' good, and their grade in purity 
 and power and wisdom. And the privates 
 were decorated with stars to illustrate the 
 same things, in degree and number; and 
 the stations of their file in Hored were pro- 
 vided in the order of music, rating them 
 acording to their chord, and their social 
 adaptability. 
 
 For these things were done before eth- 
 erean judges, to whom Jehovih had said: 
 Let the people pass before you, and judge 
 ye them, that being assorted and arranged 
 they shall make one harmonious whole. 
 For it is only by this they will have power 
 to ascend and endure in My regions of 
 light. 
 
 There were one million of these judges, 
 and they took up their stations in different 
 parts of atmospherea, wherever the second 
 resurrection had been established, every 
 judge choosing a district for himself or 
 herself, for they were both men and wo- 
 men. And as the angels passed before 
 them, the wisdom of the judges was so 
 great they could comorehend all they had 
 ever done, either on earth or in heaven. 
 And by signals the proper officers were ad- 
 vised how to decorate and adorn all of 
 them. And as fast as companies of one 
 thousand passed, they were provided with 
 conductors who took them to their places, 
 which had been previously determined by 
 the command of God. 
 
 Whilst the work was proceeding, lights 
 began to appear in the firmament above. 
 
 
CYCLE OF APH 
 
 73 
 
 These were the marshals of the Orian 
 fields in etherea in their star-ships, making 
 course for Hored, and their number was 
 legion. But presently one brighter and 
 more powerful than the rest appeared, com- 
 ing from the western arc of Onah'yi, and 
 it steered direct to God's throne, growing 
 brighter and larger as it came. And when 
 it entered past Chinvat, and was well with- 
 in the vortex of Earth in the belt of 
 the moon's orbit, its light spread across the 
 whole of atmospherea, Hored was illum- 
 ined, and great was the enthusiasm of the 
 angels of Hored. Not long the brilliant 
 star delayed, for he who sailed it was a 
 God of millions of years, and by his wis- 
 dom attained to such mastery that the 
 elements of Earth and atmospherea gave 
 way, as .if appalled by a heaven on fire. 
 Down came the star-ship whose majesty 
 outweighed all ceremony, a very crown of 
 magnificence, even to the arena of the 
 Council of Hored. And he who came, at- 
 tended by half a million, was Sue'ji, master 
 of ceremonies. 
 
 God rose up, saluting, and all the hosts 
 rose up, saluting, whereupon Sue'ji as- 
 cended the throne, greeted by God and his 
 Council. 
 
 Sue'ji said: In Thy name, O Jehovih. 
 And God said: In Thy name, O Jehovih, 
 welcome Thy Son. 
 
 And presently all the place was aglow 
 with a golden light, which ranks first in 
 heaven of all colors, and the Voice of Je- 
 hovih descended on Sue'ji, and he said: 
 
 Behold, I came in the darkness and de- 
 livered Mi, for she was of twins heavily 
 laden. And the one dwelt with the moth- 
 er, but the other I sent to nurse in Hau- 
 tuon. And they are grown to maturity, a 
 son and daughter twin. Turn ye to Hau- 
 tuon; lo, the twin cometh. She was the 
 puny child; but look ye upon her, O ye 
 Gods and Goddesses. Her thousands of 
 millions came in an avalanza from ji'ay'an 
 worlds. Open your arms, O My beloved 
 sons and daughters. 
 
 The Voice ceased, and Sue'ji said: 
 When the harvest of Hautuon arriveth, at- 
 tended by the Gods and Goddesses who 
 helped to deliver the children of darkness, 
 and who have changed them into beacons 
 of light, there shall be three days of recre- 
 ation in atmospherea; for the hosts of Hau- 
 
 tuon shall be shown their native world 
 whence they came. But on the first day, 
 behold, Aph, the Orian Chief, will de- 
 scend in all his glory. And on the fourth 
 day all your upraised sons and daughters 
 shall ascend into the etherean worlds, 
 where there are in waiting, to receive you, 
 millions of millions of souls who have 
 long dwelt in Nirvana. 
 
 Sue'ji ceased speaking, having given 
 commands as to the stations of his mar- 
 shals around Earth and her heaven. 
 
 God sent his messengers, saying: Go 
 ye to Wak'hah and say: God saith: My 
 heavens have been numbered, and the ac- 
 count of my labors rendered and recorded 
 in the libraries of Hored. And of all the 
 hosts who have labored with thy God, be- 
 hold, thou, Wak'hah, stands the highest 
 in grade. Come, therefore, to the throne 
 of thy God, and be anointed God of Earth 
 for the next four hundred years. 
 
 The messengers, attended by one thou- 
 sand marshals, departed for Ad'jun, the 
 place of labor where Wak'hah dwelt, be- 
 ing a physician's nurse for es'yans and still 
 born mortal children and those killed by 
 abortion. And they delivered the message 
 of God, to which Wak'hah replied: O Je- 
 hovih, I have been all my life, now some 
 thirty thousand years, trying to learn 
 where I should be most serviceable to 
 Thee and Thy sons and daughters. And 
 when I think that I have found it, lo, a 
 summons cometh from another way, say- 
 ing: Come thou hither. It seemeth that 
 Thou dost forever hurry us onward. Thy 
 will be done, O Jehovih. 
 
 So the marshals provided an otevan, 
 and Wak'hah was conducted to Hored, to 
 the foot of the throne of God, where he 
 was saluted, according to his rank. 
 
 CHAPTER XV 
 
 Nearer and nearer came the visiting 
 stars, the etherean ships from thousands 
 of worlds, with countless millions of eman- 
 cipated souls, dwellers in the Nirvanian 
 regions of Jehovih. And when they reach- 
 ed the boundary of Earth's vortex they 
 halted a while, to form in rank and 
 rank, that their glory might add to one 
 another; and whilst they stood thus in the 
 great vault of heaven there opened on one 
 side a gateway amidst the star-ships; 
 
74 
 
 CYCLE OF APH 
 
 and far beyond came what appeared 
 to be a strange and mottled sun, 
 swaying to and fro, and this was the 
 thousands of millions of spirits who 
 were delivered from earth to Hau- 
 tuon. And as it came into view ev- 
 ery soul burst forth in one universal shout 
 of applause. And as it came nearer, the 
 curtains and sails and streamers, made of 
 yellow, red and blue fire, began to 
 wave and surge, like a ship in a rough 
 sea, but steadily holding course in the un- 
 dulating elements. Presently could be 
 seen guardian ships, thousands and thou- 
 sands, traveling beside the hosts of Hau- 
 tuon. And the guardian ships were them- 
 selves like stars, and carried millions of 
 etherean souls who had been Gods and 
 Goddesses on many worlds; and they form- 
 ed wings for the Hautuon avalanza, to 
 hold steady the course to the red star, 
 Earth. And thus, in honored discipline, 
 came the millions of Jehovih's worship- 
 pers, who only two hundred years since 
 were but as vermin delving in darkness, 
 and deep buried in death, to whom Great 
 Jehovih, and his exalted worlds were un- 
 known. 
 
 Brighter and brighter grew that great 
 waving sun, sailed by the immortal Gods, 
 and larger and more imposing, till, when 
 it entered Earth's vortex, it became as 
 living fire, large as Earth, and of bril- 
 liant colors, from black to adamant, and 
 blue and white, and purple, yellow, scar- 
 let, pink, and of all shades; and living and 
 sparkling, with the broad curtains suspend- 
 ed, deep as the breadth of a world, with 
 sails and flags that reached upward high as 
 the moon. 
 
 Midway in the vortex of Earth it 
 halted, and the myriads of stars beyond 
 now gathered in majestically from every 
 side, till around Earth's atmospherea 
 was not a place but glowed with Jehovih's 
 fire of heaven. Music, which rose from the 
 throne of God, a little while before, ceased; 
 for here was the play of elements in harmo- 
 ny. Moving, changing, forming, the great 
 kaleidoscope of splendor forever evolved, 
 new and glorious changes stretching 
 abroad over the firmament of heaven. 
 
 And now another gateway opened 
 amidst the stars; and a cluster star was 
 seen approaching from the southeast. It 
 
 was as a star surrounded by stars, and 
 brighter than all the others. This was 
 the star-ship of Aph, the Orian Chief. At 
 sight of which, all who were present turned 
 in pride and wonder. Swift and mighty 
 above all the countless millions of Gods 
 and Goddesses assembled had he attained 
 in the play and management of worlds. 
 And at the sight of his etherean star, an- 
 gels and Gods whispered: Aph! And 
 the magic of his name, widely known in 
 the Nirvanian fields of the emancipated 
 heavens, spread abroad, till every soul ut- 
 tered, Aph, in all the regions of atmos- 
 pherea. 
 
 Nearer and nearer he came, nor halted 
 at Chinvat, the boundary of Earth's 
 vortex; but steadily and with power, sailed 
 on till his star stood in the doorway of 
 heaven, and here halted as if to complete 
 the wondrous scene. But a moment more, 
 and all the fleets of the glorious star- 
 ships moved onward toward Earth, and 
 surrounding it on every side. 
 
 And now the marshals took their parts. 
 First, Sue'ji, chief over all the rest, from 
 the throne of God, cried out: All hail, 
 O Aph, Son of Jehovih. 
 
 And the words were caught up on ev- 
 ery side, and uttered in one breath around 
 the world, went like an echo over all the 
 heavens. Yet, nearer and nearer gath- 
 ered the great star-ships and sun of Hau- 
 tuon, till like a net they joined and filled 
 Earth's atmospherea in the east and west 
 and north and south, and below and above; 
 on every side. 
 
 Then Aph's fleet drew near, and he and 
 his hosts alighted, and he ascended the 
 throne, saying: All hail, O Neph, God of 
 Earth. 
 
 And this was also uttered by the mill- 
 ions of hosts. 
 
 Whereupon the signs and ceremonies of 
 the Gods were briefly concluded, and a rec- 
 reation of three days proclaimed. And the 
 angel hosts came forth out of their ships. 
 And for three days and nights the visitors 
 dwelt on the earth and in the lower atmos- 
 pherea; inspecting how Earth was made; 
 its land and water; its mountains and 
 valleys; its beasts of prey and beasts 
 of burden; its birds and fishes; and above 
 all, its mortal people and spirits who lin- 
 gered on the earth. And then they 
 
CYCLE OF APH 
 
 75 
 
 surveyed atmospherea and the works of 
 God and his Lords; their nurseries, hospi- 
 tals, factories, schools and colleges. 
 
 And the Chiefs from many worlds, and 
 Gods and Goddesses, mingled together, 
 and exchanged their varied experience in 
 the wide regions of Jehovih's universe, of 
 the management of both corporeal and es'- 
 sean worlds, and of the cosmogeny of ether- 
 ean worlds, and of the turning worlds from 
 their orbitic courses, or changing their 
 axic rotation, and of the deliverance of 
 millions of souls into the ji'ay'an fields, 
 and of the creation of new corporeal worlds 
 and the dissolution of others, and the gath- 
 ering together of the spirits who are thus 
 disinherited, and of their final resurrection. 
 Neither seemed there any end to Jehovih's 
 universe, where such wonders go on for- 
 ever. 
 
 And on the fourth day the marshals 
 called order; and so great was the disci- 
 pline of the hosts and the arrangement of 
 the star-ships, that in a moment of time 
 order reigned amongst all these countless 
 millions of people. 
 
 When order was restored, God com- 
 manded Wak'hah to rise, and he said: In 
 Thy name, O Jehovih, I proclaim this, Thy 
 Son, God of Earth for the next four hun- 
 dred years. Guide him in wisdom and 
 love, O Father. 
 
 And God made a crown and placed it on 
 Wak'hah's head, saying: Hail God of 
 Earth, Jehovih's Son. 
 
 And his words were repeated by the 
 hosts. And then God took off the trian- 
 gle, heirloom of the Gods of the red star, 
 Earth, and hung it on Wak'hah's neck, 
 saying: Take this heirloom, the symbol 
 of three entities in one, and wear it for the 
 glory of Jehovih. 
 
 To which Wak'hah, now God, answer- 
 ed: Thy will be done, O Father, Creator 
 and Ruler over all. And all on the throne 
 stood aside, and God ascended the throne 
 and sat in the midst. The es'enaurs chant- 
 ed and the hymn sounded around the 
 whole world. Then Aph, Son of Jehovih, 
 spake, saying: 
 
 In four hundred years, O God, I will 
 come and deliver thee and thy harvest, 
 and thy Lords and their harvest, for the 
 glory of Jehovih, the Unapproachable Al- 
 mighty. Amen. 
 
 And now Aph went and sat down at the 
 foot of the throne, and God came down 
 according to custom and took his hand, 
 saying: Arise, Son of Jehovih, and go thy 
 way. 
 
 And Aph rose up, saluting, and he and 
 his attendants departed and entered his 
 star-ship. The es'enaurs chanted, the 
 trumpeters played, and the solemn march 
 of Jehovih's sea of fire sounded from hea- 
 ven and Earth. 
 
 The marshals now put the great works 
 in order. Neph and his attendants were 
 stationed on the right of Aph in a ship 
 new built. Next to Neph the ship of his 
 Lords and their attendants; after them, 
 their marshals from the different divisions 
 of Earth and atmospherea. Next to 
 them the ships of the messengers; then the 
 factors, then the nurses, then the physi- 
 cians, and so on; and finally the divisions 
 of Earth-raised, who Avere now adjourned 
 to the sun-fleet, being of the same 
 rank. And these comprised the harvest of 
 Neph for Jehovih's emancipated realms; 
 and the number of souls exceded all other 
 harvests raised up from Earth. 
 
 And now had come the time for the as- 
 cent, and Aph said: Give us of Thy pow- 
 er, O Jehovih. And his words were ech- 
 oed in all places in heaven. And 
 the ships started from their founda- 
 tions, and slowly moved back outward 
 from Earth. The es'enaurs played the 
 march; the ethereans tore off strips of 
 fabric and threw them down to Hored, and 
 then formed flowers and leaves and per- 
 fumed them, and cast them out, to fall in 
 the lower heavens. Outward the etherean 
 ships moved, and then parting the breadth 
 of the world rose slowy upward. Pres- 
 ently they turned, and were as one entire 
 world; but with the rotation of the different 
 stars began to separate, all except the har- 
 vest of Neph, which was the central figure, 
 led onward and upward by Aph, Son of 
 the Great Spirit. 
 
 Faster and faster rose the glorious 
 scene, and more awful, and sparkling with 
 splendor. Onward it rose higher and high- 
 er, till it disappeared in the firmament 
 above. 
 
 CHAPTER XVI 
 
 Now was atmospherea like a new hea- 
 ven stripped of visitors, and ready to re- 
 
76 
 
 CYCLE OF APH 
 
 sume labor after a glorious festival. So 
 God at once dispatched all hands to their 
 places, and the factories, schools and col- 
 leges, nurseries and hospitals, were once 
 more alive with willing workers. 
 
 And Hored prospered in every depart- 
 ment; and so also did the departments of 
 the Lords on Earth; and mortals also 
 prospered under the light of the Great 
 Spirit. For four hundred years God 
 reigned in heaven, and his Lords under 
 him, and the second dan of Aph fell up- 
 on Earth. So God appointed An'on as 
 his successor. And now Aph and his at- 
 tendants came to deliver God, his Lords 
 and people prepared for their resurrection 
 up into etherea. And the number of Jeho- 
 vih's harvest was one thousand million 
 souls. 
 
 And God and his Lords reigned their 
 time, and they were also delivered by Aph, 
 and the harvest of Jehovih was eight hun- 
 dred million souls. 
 
 And his successor, God of Hored and 
 atmospherea, and his Lords, fulfilled their 
 dan, and they and their harvests were de- 
 livered by Aph also; and the number of 
 souls delivered was six hundred million. 
 And Jehovih commanded Aph to commit 
 Earth and atmospherea to the successors 
 of Ra'zan of Garowista, in the etherean 
 phalanx of Ar'doth. 
 
 And the next harvest of God and his 
 Lords was two hundred million souls. 
 
 After that Earth passed into the a'ji 
 of Urk'stand for eight hundred years, 
 and the light of the upper heavens was 
 lost to Earth and atmospherea; so there 
 was no harvest for the etherean realms. 
 And because of the darkness in atmospher- 
 
 ea it began to fall in grade; and the 
 seven tetracts took root in Hored, and 
 overspread the dominions of God and his 
 Lords. And many in heaven rose up, and 
 proclaiming themselves Gods and Lords, 
 obtained followers, some to the extent of 
 three million souls. And these false Gods 
 made slaves of their followers, exacting 
 service, and in lieu giving pitiful homes 
 and regimen; and by the labor of their 
 slaves embellishing their mansions and cit- 
 ies in hada. 
 
 Jehovih had said of old: Before mortals 
 I keep death forever present that they may 
 not forget the change from corporeal to 
 spirit life. Otherwise, they would dispute 
 it possible in My hands for these things to 
 be. But My resurrections in heaven are 
 far apart, and the inhabitants thereof lose 
 faith in those above them. Through faith 
 is all power and glory attained. 
 
 And during the last thousand years of 
 the cycle of Aph, there being no resurrec- 
 tions to etherea, many fell into disbelief of 
 the emancipated heavens, and so set about 
 building up heavenly kingdoms on their 
 own account, and for their own glory. And 
 in order to have exalted kingdoms they 
 sent their slaves back to mortals to inspire 
 them with the glory of their false God's 
 kingdoms, that others in turn might be- 
 come slaves. And confusion reigned in 
 heaven again, and it reacted on mortals, 
 through the angels' presence, and war and 
 misery overspread the nations and tribes 
 of men on Earth. 
 
 Thus ended the cycle of Aph, being two 
 thousand six hundred years after the flood, 
 and three thousand six hundred years in 
 all. 
 
 kM 
 
LORDS' RECORD FOR THE CYCLE OP APH 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 Hear me, O man, I am the Lord of 
 Earth, Son of Jehovih. I am one of thine 
 elder brothers. I, thy Lord, with my 
 brother Lords and Gods, in the name of 
 Jehovih speak, saying: 
 
 Peace and patience be unto all men, 
 that ye may comprehend my words, and 
 bear witness that heaven and earth in every 
 part is Jehovih's and that all men and wo- 
 men are His sons and daughters. 
 
 As over mortal kingdoms, kings, so 
 hath Jehovih in His heavens crowned cer- 
 tain Chieftains for times and places, and 
 given them titles by which they have been 
 proclaimed to men and angels. And they 
 are honored in high heaven, and known 
 to the people on the earth as Jehovih's 
 Lord of Earth, and my predecessors have 
 been known for thousands of years 
 amongst mortals as the Lord of Earth. 
 
 If it be said: The king said thus; and 
 generations after, it be said: The king 
 said thus; all men know it was not the 
 same man, but was nevertheless the king. 
 So it is with the Lords, for all of them 
 have been the Lord. Wherefore I, the 
 Lord, by virtue of my authority, in Jeho- 
 vih's name, proclaim the light and the 
 darkness of the past, for inasmuch as I 
 have been exalted by Jehovih, so are ye 
 all in waiting for your turn in the heavens 
 above to become Lords and Gods and 
 Goddesses. 
 
 To draw your souls up in heavenly as- 
 pirations, to become one with the Father 
 in righteousness and good works, Jehovih 
 sendeth His sons and daughters down to 
 the earth, to reveal the glory of His king- 
 doms in the etherean worlds. But be- 
 cause of the darkness of man's soul, man 
 setteth up to mock the words of his Lord, 
 saying: How can I become a Lord or a 
 God? Behold, his word hath not been 
 heard; none have written his speech. 
 
 Was it. not so in all times of Earth? 
 And because of this darkness amongst 
 men, they have laid bare the iniquity of 
 their own hearts. For out of the mouths 
 
 of my chosen, who utter my words, come 
 words of truth, love, wisdom, kind- 
 ness, and the exaltation of virtue. But 
 from those who deny me, come corrup- 
 tion, war, avarice, and the love of earthly 
 things for self-sake. 
 
 Behold, they have quibbled about words 
 and the meaning of words. One saith: 
 How much of this came from the Lord, 
 and how much from the prophet? Making 
 of themselves mathematicians on a matter 
 separate from the subject of the righteous- 
 ness of their own souls. Are not all words 
 at best but pictures and paintings of the 
 spirit that findeth them? And whether 
 the Lord or an angel carry the light to the 
 prophet, what does it matter to the man or 
 woman who seeketh to serve Jehovih by 
 doing good works? if only the words help 
 them in this work? 
 
 Some have said: Behold, I have given 
 all I had to the poor, and I rise early and 
 visit the sick; and in the night I sit up 
 with them; and I gather up orphans and 
 helpless ones, and make them so joyous of 
 heart they thank Jehovih they are created 
 into life. Now, verily all men know that 
 such behavior cometh from them that rec- 
 ognize my word, whether it come from the 
 mouth of a babe or the pen of a fool. 
 Who, then, shall not find delight in the 
 word of the Lord? for they are the ex- 
 pression of Jehovih's light within him, and 
 my word cometh as well now as in the old- 
 en time? 
 
 Behold, I am not for one man only, nor 
 for one woman, nor for one book. But 
 wherever the light of wisdom and the de- 
 sire for virtue and holy deeds shine, there 
 will my speech manifest. Is not Jehovih 
 wide as the universe, and immutable? And 
 to be in harmony with Him, is not this the 
 sum of all wisdom? Therefore, if thy Lord 
 or thy God hath attained to be one with 
 the Father, and he come in dominion on 
 Earth with his millions of angels and 
 ye are inspired by them to do Jehovih's 
 will, what discussion shall man have against 
 heaven or its representative? 
 
78 
 
 CYCLE OF APH 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 I declare freedom unto all men in Jeho- 
 vih's name, but with freedom I also give 
 the experience of the Lords of Earth. Suf- 
 fer therefore my prophets on all hands to 
 embellish the pictures of the past in their 
 own way. Herein is wisdom, for they that 
 strive for the light of my dominion shall 
 receive my angels in Jehovih's name; and 
 by the words they find to express my com- 
 mandments shall they be known to be 
 from me. All words come from the Lord; 
 by him was man made upright on the 
 earth. 
 
 But as the light of a full-grown man dif- 
 fereth from that of a child; so, in different 
 degree was the light of men; and those 
 with Jehovih's light were called Faithists, 
 because they perceived that wisdom shaped 
 all things, and ruled to the ultimate glory 
 of the All One. But those of the lesser 
 light were called Druk, because their trust 
 was more in corporeal than in spiritual 
 things. And the Faithists were also called 
 the chosen people, because they had faith 
 in Jehovih; but the Druks were classed as 
 enemies to the Lord, because they sacri- 
 ficed by means of war and death that which 
 Jehovih made alive. And these two people 
 have lived on the earth from the first. 
 
 And I, the Lord, Son of Jehovih, gave 
 a certain commandment to man, saying: 
 Thou shalt love the Lord with all thy soul, 
 thy wisdom and strength. But man had 
 little strength in this matter; neither did I 
 ask for more than he could give. And an- 
 other commandment was: Thou shalt not 
 kill, and if man had obeyed this command- 
 ment there would have been no war in the 
 world. In like manner gave I the light of 
 heaven unto all men, but my enemies per- 
 verted my words to justify themselves in 
 sin. And if one man saith: The Lord said: 
 Thou shalt not kill; and yet another man 
 saith: The Lord said: Thou shalt kill; no 
 man need mistake which is of the Lord in 
 fact. For the Lord desireth not to see any 
 man killed whom Jehovih created alive. 
 
 And man multiplied and peopled Earth 
 over, building cities and nations and 
 prospering in all earthly things. But as I 
 came to the earth to develop the soul of 
 man chiefly, and for his own ultimate hap- 
 piness in the etherean worlds, I labored 
 not with such as heeded me not, but suf- 
 fered them to go on in their own conceit; 
 
 and they became divided against one an- 
 other, and war and pestilence came upon 
 mortals, resulting in their downfall. And 
 the spirits of those that denied me on earth, 
 still denied me in heaven; and in their 
 stubbornness and conceit continued to 
 dwell with man on the earth. So that in 
 the course of time the world was overrun 
 by spirits of darkness who knew not hea- 
 ven. 
 
 In all of the four great divisions of the 
 earth, my enemies killed many of the 
 Faithists, and there were but few left in 
 mortality. In Pan there was a remnant, 
 but they were scattered and in hiding from 
 their evil pursuers. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 The Lord said: A wise physician am- 
 putateth a diseased limb, and so preserveth 
 the trunk to become healed. Saw I not 
 the rankness of the tribes of darkness, the 
 Druks; and that the proceedings of man 
 would render Earth void? What is all the 
 world if it bring not forth heirs unto ever- 
 lasting life? 
 
 Behold, my chosen had become de- 
 spoiled on all the divisions of Earth save 
 Pan. And they who had been their 
 destroyers had in turn nearly exterminated 
 one another. And as for the land of Pan, 
 it was already in the throes of death. 
 And spirits and mortals had become as a 
 festering sore. The spirits of the dead, 
 tens of thousands of millions of them, 
 would not quit their hold on mortals whilst 
 they lived on the earth. 
 
 And I sent my angels around about the 
 whole earth, and gathered in the spirits of 
 darkness; gathered them unto the land of 
 Pan. 
 
 And I said: I will destroy man from 
 the face of the earth; for the flesh of man 
 is. corrupt, for by the eating of flesh and 
 unwise cohabitation hath he corrupted 
 his race upon Earth. And I, the Lord, 
 called unto my chosen who were perse- 
 cuted and hidden away in the valleys and 
 mountains in the land of Pan. And I said 
 unto them: Because ye have kept my 
 commandments, and sown the seed of 
 righteousness in your generations, you 
 have found favor in my sight. 
 
 Go, therefore, and build ships sufficient 
 to carry all my chosen, and go within them 
 
CYCLE OF APH 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 79 
 
 where none can pursue or destroy. For, 
 behold, I will bring a flood of waters upon 
 the land even unto the highest mountains, 
 to destroy the corruption thereof. Take 
 with you sufficient food to last one hundred 
 and fifty days, for ye shall not be able to 
 come forth to procure food. 
 
 The ships were all built on the moun- 
 tains and numbered one hundred and 
 thirty-eight. I numbered them that were 
 saved, and there were twelve thousand 
 four hundred and twenty; and these were 
 descendants of the first race of man on 
 Earth. The ships were divided into five 
 fleets; four fleets of thirty-four ships, and 
 one fleet of two ships. 
 
 The Lord said: I will name the fleets 
 of my chosen Guatama, Shem, Jaffeth, 
 Ham and Yista, and their names shall be 
 everlasting on Earth. From these few 
 Thins will I people the world over; and I 
 will inspire them to write a history of the 
 flood. 
 
 And in one hundred and fifty days from 
 the beginning of the flood, the ships were 
 brought into their respective places, as the 
 Lord decreed that they should. The fleet 
 Guatama was carried to the eastward and 
 the country where it landed was called 
 Guatama. 
 
 The Lord said: From this place shall 
 my chosen spread out north and south. 
 But they shall not inhabit the lands to the 
 east or west; for they shall be testimony in 
 time to come of the landing place from the 
 continent of Pan. 
 
 The fleet of two ships carried to the 
 north was named Yista, which in the Panic 
 tongue was Zha'Pan, which is the same 
 country that to this day is called Japan, 
 signifying, relic of the continent of Pan, 
 for it lay to the north where the land was 
 cleaved in twain. 
 
 And the Lord said to them: Behold, 
 eight dan'has shall come and of all 
 people ye shall be reckoned the old- 
 est in the world. And until I come and 
 unlock the sea, ye shall remain an exclus- 
 ive people from all tribes and nations. 
 Preserve ye, therefore, the names of my 
 rites and ceremonies, and especially the 
 names of land and water, and the firma- 
 ment above, and ships that plow the wa- 
 ter, and all sounds whatever that man mak- 
 eth in the throat and without the tongue 
 
 and lips; for in the time of my glory on 
 Earth ye shall also be glorified. Pre- 
 serve ye also peace, righteousness and in- 
 dustry, for ye shall be a testimony in the 
 time to come of the presence of my hand 
 and of the Great Spirit also. 
 
 The fleet named Jaffeth was driven to 
 the westward and north, and the country 
 was called Jaffeth. 
 
 The fleet named Shem landed to the 
 south, and the country was called Shem. 
 
 The fleet named Ham landed southwest, 
 and the country was called the land of 
 Ham. 
 
 The Lord said: Behold, my chosen 
 shall manifest many signs and words com- 
 mon to one another in these different di- 
 visions of Earth 
 
 They shall remember the flood. 
 
 They shall repudiate idols, but worship 
 the Great Spirit, Jehovih. 
 
 They shall have the crescent. 
 
 They shall have the triangle. 
 
 They shall preserve the four days of 
 the change of the moon as sacred days, 
 and they shall be called Sabbaths. 
 
 They shall be circumcised. 
 
 They shall remember the seven tetracts: 
 DIBBAH, the enticing evil; RA, the flesh 
 evil; ZIMMAH, the joking evil; BALY- 
 YAAL, worthlessness; AVEN, vanity; 
 AN ASH, delight in destruction; SA'TAN, 
 desire for leadership for self sake. 
 
 They shall have three lights: God's an- 
 gels and Lords; the prophets; the rabbahs. 
 
 They shall have three representative 
 symbols of light: The sun, the moon and 
 the burning flame. 
 
 And my chosen shall use these lights 
 and symbols, signs and seasons in all the 
 divisions of Earth whither I have set- 
 tled them. And in the Kosmorr era I will 
 come and show them the framework of my 
 building which I raise up to the Almighty. 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 And now was the world of one language 
 and one speech. In all places my people 
 spake alike, man to man. 
 
 The Lord spake unto the I'hins, saying: 
 Behold the earth; I give it to you to be 
 yours forever. Mingle not with the Druks, 
 for they are without understanding and not 
 heirs to everlasting life. 
 
 Now many inquired of the Lord, say- 
 ing: If these, having no understanding, be 
 
80 
 
 CYCLE OF APH 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 not heirs to everlasting life, how shall it 
 be with our children who die in infancy? 
 
 The Lord said: This is a matter of 
 seed, and not of learning. Whosoever is 
 born of my chosen shall inherit my ever- 
 lasting kingdom. 
 
 And I said unto the guardian angels 
 whom I had given to man: In the lands 
 whither I will take my people, let them 
 build mounds and walled cities, with lad- 
 ders to enter, after the manner of the an- 
 cients. In all divisions of Earth, alike 
 and like shall they build. For in the time 
 of Kosmon their relics shall be testimony 
 that the I'hin preceded the I'huan, the cop- 
 per-colored race, in all the world. So also 
 will I, the Lord, provide in the Kosmon 
 era to discover the sunken land of Pan, 
 that mortals may comprehend the magni- 
 tude of the work of the Lord. 
 
 In those days the Thins dwelt not 
 alone, but in cities and villages; and they 
 were clothed; and they tilled the ground 
 and brought forth grains and seeds good to 
 eat; and flax and hemp from which to 
 make cloth for covering the body. And 
 their food was of herbs, roots, grains, seeds, 
 and fruits of the earth; but they ate not 
 flesh nor fish, nor of anything that breathed 
 the breath of life. They toiled by day, 
 bringing within their cities the fruit of 
 their labor. And they slept within their 
 cities and on mounds at night, that they 
 might not be molested by beasts of prey 
 and by serpents. 
 
 And every city had one rabbah (head fa- 
 ther), who knew the way of the Lord. 
 By the rab'bah were the altars of the Lord 
 built, and the times of the sacred days 
 foretold. And the rab'bahs made records 
 in writing on stone, which they taught to 
 their successors, and to whomsoever de- 
 sired to learn of the Lord. And the Lord 
 abode with them; and they kept the com- 
 mandments and multiplied in all the divi- 
 sions of the world. 
 
 And in course of time, there were thou- 
 sands of cities and hundreds of thousands 
 of inhabitants who had spread abroad over 
 the lands of the earth. And they built 
 ships and sailed abroad on the seas, and 
 inhabited the islands thereof, north and 
 south, and east and west. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 The Lord said: That my people may 
 remain upright, behold I give unto them 
 and their successors forever, certain sacred 
 words. 
 
 Seven degrees of sacred rites bestow I 
 unto my people. And no man shall take 
 the second till he hath learned all the 
 words of the first; nor shall he take the 
 third till he hath learned all the words of 
 the second; and so on, shall man learn all 
 my sacred words. From mouth to mouth 
 shall they be learned by every man and 
 woman of my people. 
 
 And the Lord said to his prophets: Go 
 to the Druks and cause them to sit on the 
 ground in a circle, and stand ye in the 
 midst, saying: Behold, O Druk, the Great 
 Spirit hath spoken; I have heard His 
 Voice. His words are holy words. Who- 
 ever learneth His words shall have power 
 over sickness and poison and the flowing 
 of blood. And, if a woman, she shall be- 
 come fruitful and have great rejoicing. 
 Hold up your hands and repeat the words 
 of the Lord. 
 
 I will serve the prophets of the Lord. 
 
 Heal my flesh, O Lord, and cure poison. 
 
 The Lord is spirit unseen in the hea- 
 vens. 
 
 He is all power and wisdom and love 
 and anger. 
 
 He can heal and he can tear the flesh, 
 and strike dead. 
 
 His prophets have his good grace; they 
 can hear his voice and interpret him. 
 
 The Lord is my guardian; ten times a 
 day will I remember him. 
 
 The Lord can stop blood; choke it up, 
 O Lord. He can give blood stopping as 
 a power of the prophet's hands. 
 
 Confound my enemies, O Lord. 
 
 The ashars shield me. 
 
 I will honor the Thins, the sacred peo- 
 ple of the Lord. They are my brethren. 
 
 This was the first lesson. 
 
 Blessed be the name of the Lord. He 
 can make me to be alive after I am dead, 
 and this is all he requireth of me, to say: 
 Blessed be the name of the Lord. In the 
 morning I will say it. At noon I will say 
 it. At night I will say it. Blessed be the 
 name of the Lord. 
 
 I will wear clothes to hide my naked- 
 ness, because the Lord requireth it of me. 
 
CYCLE OF APH 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 81 
 
 I will not steal nor speak untruth. 
 
 If my brother taketh what is mine, I 
 will not be in anger, nor judge him; but I 
 will lay the matter before the prophets of 
 the Lord. 
 
 I will do no violence for it is the 
 Lord's commandment. 
 
 This was the second lesson; and the 
 third lesson was: 
 
 I will have but one wife; I will go not 
 after other women whilst she liveth. (I 
 will have but one husband; I will receive 
 no other man whilst my husband liveth). 
 
 I will not allow any man or woman who 
 is diseased to come near the oe'ugah. In 
 the Lord's name I will drive them hence. 
 I renounce them nor will I mingle there- 
 with, for it is the Lord's commandment. 
 
 The fourth lesson was: 
 
 I forswear the hunt. But whatsoever 
 cometh, and it is fit food for man to eat, I 
 will kill it. I will take up fish in the name 
 of the Lord, for they suffer no pain. 
 
 I will till the soil and gather roots to 
 eat, and fibres of barks for clothing, and 
 live like the I'hins, the chosen people of 
 the Lord. 
 
 I renounce murderers ; nor will I marry 
 with them, nor live as they live. They are 
 the enemies of the Lord. 
 
 I will curse no man, nor woman, nor 
 child, for it is the Lord's commandment. 
 
 I renounce anger and all weapons of 
 death. They are enemies of the Lord. 
 
 If a man injure me, I will lay the mat- 
 ter before the Lord's prophet, for his judg- 
 ment is holy. 
 
 If a women entice me, I will go secrete 
 myself and repeat the sacred words. 
 
 I will respect the times of woman, for 
 she is the gift of the Lord to be man's 
 helpmate. 
 
 When my wife hath a newborn child, I 
 will do her labor for forty days, for it is 
 the Lord's commandment. 
 
 The fifth lesson was: 
 
 The four days of the moon are the 
 Lord's; on those days I will not labor. 
 
 I will keep sacred the four days of 
 every moon, and I will repeat the sacred 
 words of the Lord thrice. 
 
 And when the prophets say: Behold 
 the Lord saith this is a sacred day; then 
 will I keep that day holy. 
 
 When the I'hins worship before the al- 
 tar of the Lord, I will keep on the outer 
 circle, for the I'hins are the chosen ser- 
 vants of the Lord. 
 
 When the I'hins march forth, following 
 the prophets, I will come after them, for I 
 will honor the Lord's chosen. 
 
 When the prophets say: Pitch the 
 tents here, I will do so, for the prophet 
 cannot err. 
 
 The sixth lesson was: 
 
 I will provide for the sick, and for the 
 woman with a newborn child. I will give 
 first to the I'hins, then to the Druks. 
 
 To warriors I will give in time of sick- 
 ness, but when they are healed I will say: 
 Go your way. 
 
 And if a man be sick of poison, or a wo- 
 man sick of poison, I will go to the same. 
 But before I go in I will say: O Lord, I 
 go in a place of danger. Come thou 
 through thy ashars and protect me. For 
 the Lord can encompass me around about, 
 and I shall not receive the poison. 
 
 The seventh lesson was: 
 
 I will keep these holy words secret in 
 the name of the Lord. 
 
 When the Lord commandeth, saying: 
 Go here, or go there, or build here a city, 
 or a house or an altar; then will I do the 
 Lord's bidding. 
 
 Thus did the Lord establish laws 
 amongst men; and because of the sacred- 
 ness of the Lord's words, man treasured 
 them and kept holy the commandments of 
 the Lord. And when mortals repeated 
 words for the stopping of blood, behold, 
 my angels compressed the veins. Not the 
 words stopped the blood, but by the words 
 mortals became in concert with my hosts. 
 
 And when a man went into the presence 
 of dangerous diseases, repeating the sacred 
 words, the angels protected him from the 
 disease. 
 
 And the Lord caused the rab'bah to 
 make a wheel, and hang it beside the al- 
 tar. And the meaning thereof was: As 
 this wheel has no beginning or end, so is 
 the Creator. Whosoever turneth the wheel 
 once round hath said: In Thee, my Cre- 
 ator, I trust. 
 
 And the Lord made an image to stand 
 beside the altar, where only holy men and 
 women might pass, and the Lord called 
 
82 
 
 CYCLE OF APR 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 the emblem fete, signifying: Beyond me 
 there is no appeal. 
 
 And the form of the fete was a circle 
 and an all light center with four dark cor- 
 ners cut off. And the Lord explained the 
 meaning, which was: 
 
 That there is a central light within man 
 seeing clearly, but that the four dark cor- 
 ners of the world beset him on all sides. 
 
 And the Lord made an instrument and 
 called it Gau, which was a triangle with a 
 plumb line from the upper corner; and 
 across the plumb line was a hollow reed 
 for seeing through; and at the bottom end 
 of the pumb line was a weight attached, 
 which pointed to marks on the lower bor- 
 der of the triangle. 
 
 And the Lord explained to the prophets 
 how to use the gau for proving all things, 
 even as to the height of mountains, and the 
 velocity of running waters, and how to lay 
 the foundations of the temples. And the 
 prophets on their part taught the Thins, 
 but with them the mysteries were kept a 
 secret against all the world. Hence, in af- 
 ter time came the saying: Even the wick- 
 ed were compelled to employ the Thins. 
 
 In all there were two hundred and 
 eighty signs and emblems and symbols and 
 implements given by the Lord to his peo- 
 ple; and when they were all completed the 
 Lord taught the prophets the meaning; and 
 these became the sacred language of mor- 
 tals in all the divisions of Earth. 
 
Cycle of Sue 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 Jehovih spake to Sue, Orian Chief, in 
 the gardens of Atahavia, saying: Sue, My 
 Son, behold the red star, the far-off Earth. 
 Her harvests are blighted; she. has ceased 
 to bring forth immortal souls to My un- 
 ending realms. 
 
 Sue heard the Voice, and answered: 
 In Thy name, O Jehovih, will I summon 
 My Gods of Hoit and Izaracha. 
 
 And Sue, quick-perceiving God of two 
 worlds in the etherean Seamar, sent swift 
 messengers to Hoit and Izaracha. Then 
 came Le Wing, God of Hoit; and presently 
 Sivian, Goddess of Izaracha, and they stood 
 before Jehovih's throne. 
 
 Sue said: Jehovih's Voice spake to me, 
 saying: Behold the red star, she bringeth 
 forth no sons and daughters more to peo- 
 ple My etherean realms. She is weak and 
 out of tune and cometh this way. And I 
 answered: 
 
 In Thy power and wisdom, O Jehovih, 
 will I visit the red star. Six years will I 
 remain, stand on her soil, and course her 
 heavens, and give such potency to her con- 
 fused God and Lords as will make a thou- 
 sand millions sing for joy. 
 
 I have charts and maps of her atmos- 
 pherean and corporeal parts; and a history 
 of her, as yet, young and adventurous in 
 the field of worlds. I have called you to 
 accompany me. 
 
 Then spake Le Wing and Sivian, say- 
 ing: To do Jehovih's will and thine are 
 we come to thee. 
 
 To the swift messengers Sue said: Go 
 proclaim my will throughout my etherean 
 worlds, and summon up from Ithyivius a 
 hundred million skilled volunteers. When 
 the red star shall cross the boundary line of 
 Izaracha, we will go forth in power in a 
 ship of golden light. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 In the Arinisca of Portan of the ether- 
 ean worlds of Hoit and Izaracha, flew the 
 call of the Gods for volunteers, and so 
 
 welcome was the sound thereof that hosts 
 of ethereans rose up on every hand ready 
 to volunteer and soon the required num- 
 ber stood in waiting. And yet so vast were 
 the fields and arcs of Izaracha that the hun- 
 dred millions chosen were as but a fraction 
 compared to those left uncalled. 
 
 Coming near the throne of Sue in Hoit, 
 the hundred millions formed in squares 
 and stars, and the chosen God took his 
 place at the head and front, looking to the 
 low horizon, where rose the red star, 
 Earth. And now the builders, who had 
 measured the elements lying in the route 
 toward Earth, formed their crescent ship 
 of fire, and equipped it with mantles, 
 curtains and banners. When the ship was 
 completed, Jehovih's light encompassed it 
 about on all sides, and though it was beau- 
 tiful before, it was now illuminated and 
 sparkling and bright as a sun, and rich in 
 golden color. 
 
 When Sue entered the ship the Voice 
 of Jehovih spake, saying: Thou shalt go 
 now, My Son, and give wider range to the 
 tetracts both in angels and mortals. Give 
 broader dominions to tyrant kings and 
 queens on Earth, and greater scope to the 
 self Gods and Lords, and thus increase 
 their responsibility. 
 
 Then all the hosts entered the etherean 
 ship singing and rejoicing, observed by 
 countless millions come to wish them joy 
 on their six years' visit to Earth. 
 
 Sue said: In Thy name, O Jehovih, 
 and by virtue of Thy power in me vested, 
 my hosts shall speed forth at my command. 
 
 And Sue stretched forth his hands, and 
 the mighty ship of heaven turned on its 
 axis, cutting loose from the high firma- 
 ment. And it turned, with its great cur- 
 tains and banners sailing gracefully and 
 swiftly through the blue ether. The music 
 of her es'enaurs swelled and rolled along 
 on the spheres of many worlds, where 
 dwell countless millions of spectators view- 
 ing the marvelous speed and power and 
 brilliant colors of the great ship. 
 
84 
 
 CYCLE OF SUE 
 
 When the ship came to the bridge of 
 Chinvat, and halted, to take in the plan of 
 the whirling Earth, Sue said: Light of Thy 
 light, O Jehovih. And at once as high as 
 the moon and as bright as the sun, the il- 
 luminated ship stood for three days and 
 nights to over-awe the self Gods and war- 
 rior kings and murderers of the earth, 
 whose plentiful souls in chaos polluted hea- 
 ven. And then slowly entered the vortex 
 of Earth, for Sue desired that both cor- 
 poreans and atmosphereans should witness 
 the coming power. So that when the ship 
 neared the disorganized Hored, the self 
 Gods and Lords fled with their hosts, and 
 left their well supplied kingdoms desolate, 
 and rushed down to the earth in millions 
 to hide themselves. 
 
 But the true God and Lords stood firm 
 in their depleted kingdoms, fearing naught, 
 but in faith that this etherean ship was Je- 
 hovih's answer to their long cry for help 
 from the heavenly spheres. And by their 
 pillars of fire still standing, great Sue knew 
 where to land in the lower heaven. And 
 when he neared the place his es'enaurs 
 chanted and the trumpeters played. And 
 God and his hosts sent up rockets, display- 
 ing the three primary colors, and God's es'- 
 enaurs joined in chanting with the hosts 
 above. 
 
 Presently the ship of fire was at the 
 place of landing, and Sue, Jehovih's Son, 
 descended with his host of a hundred mill- 
 ion angels, led by Gussitivi, marshaless of 
 the throne of Sue, in Izaracha. 
 
 Sue said: Hail, O God of Earth. In 
 Jehovih's name, I am come in power and 
 wisdom. 
 
 And God answered: Glory be to Thee, 
 O Jehovih, that Thy Son hath come so far 
 to bless Thy bewildered kingdom. 
 
 Then they saluted, and God said: In 
 the name of the Great Spirit come thou and 
 honor my throne. 
 
 So Sue went forward and greeted by 
 shaking hands; and Sue ascended and sat 
 on the throne, saying: I feel the light of 
 the Father descending on my head. 
 
 Presently the All Light enveloped Sue, 
 and Jehovih's Voice spake through him, 
 saying: 
 
 Hear the words of thy Creator, My Son, 
 and rejoice because I have not forgotten 
 thee and thy people. Behold, this is the 
 
 hour of thy redemption from the trials of 
 tetracts, which are run abroad in My do- 
 minions. Was it not worse than this in 
 the olden time? And I came with My 
 hosts and delivered them. I created man 
 in darkness and gave to him no judgment, 
 that the creation of his own thoughts 
 might be for his own glory forever. But 
 instead of beautifying his thoughts, he 
 hearkeneth to tetracts and buries himself 
 in darkness. The heaven I build for him 
 he destroys, and then buildeth his own, but 
 only to be displeased and turbulent. Nei- 
 ther will he content himself with providing 
 with his own hands, but searches out my 
 most dutiful sons and daughters and makes 
 slaves of them for his own exaltation. 
 
 In the ancient times I sent My sons and 
 daughters to search out these traitors, de- 
 claring unto them that only by forsaking 
 evil and practicing righteousness could 
 they attain to My exalted kingdoms. Their 
 evil places have I cast down, and rebuilt 
 in honor and glory, that their own judg- 
 ment might determine that virtue and good 
 works are the sure foundation for happi- 
 ness that will endure forever. But when 
 I have raised them up in one cycle and 
 made the lower heaven a paradise, alas, My 
 ethereans have been gone away but a little 
 while when the tetracts take root and grow, 
 and turn all things upside down. 
 
 But now will I build them up in a new 
 way. Yea, I will appropriate the evil to 
 their own good in a way they dream not of. 
 The false Gods and Lords shall be arrested 
 and brought before this judgment seat, and 
 I will judge them by their own behavior 
 and desires. Neither will I torment them 
 nor abridge their happiness. Send, there- 
 fore, My Son, thy marshals into the hidden 
 places of these self Gods and Lords and 
 say to them: Thus saith the hosts of hea- 
 ven. Come, My Son, and inherit a king- 
 dom in hada in thine own way, for lo, 
 there is room for all; but that thou art not 
 left behind, come quickly to Hored. 
 
 And they will come, hoping to embellish 
 themselves in the old manner. But My 
 Light shall come in due time in Mine own 
 way. 
 
 The Voice ceased and Sue spake, say- 
 ing: What Jehovih hath ordered, do ye. 
 
 So marshals were sent in all directions 
 in atmospherea to gather in the false Gods 
 
CYCLE OF SUE 
 
 85 
 
 and Lords who had deserted their domin- 
 ions in fear of the light of Sue's etherean 
 ship. And after many days the false ones 
 were brought to Hored, and there were of 
 them seven thousand Gods and Lords. 
 Now when they were before Sue, Jehovih's 
 Son, and arranged so that all could hear 
 and see, the Light gathered about the 
 throne, and Sue addressed them, saying: 
 
 Hear me, O men and women. I have 
 sent for you and you are here. In this I 
 am pleased. Know, then, that what I speak 
 shall be in love and tenderness. Ye have 
 deserted Jehovih's kingdoms, and it must 
 be because it pleased you better than to re- 
 main. Is this not true? And ye also de- 
 serted your own kingdoms? 
 
 For a little while they consulted togeth- 
 er, and then answered: Nay, it pleased us 
 not to desert our own kingdoms; but we 
 were afraid. 
 
 Sue said: Who think ye I am? They 
 answered: A God from some far-off 
 world, but where it lieth we know not. We 
 desire to know who thou art. 
 
 Sue said: I am but an angel like your- 
 selves. Fear me not. But since ye feared, 
 and so deserted your kingdoms, does it 
 not prove that ye are not the all highest? 
 And do ye not perceive that because ye 
 had no All Highest, ye were divided and 
 inharmonious? 
 
 Hear, then, that which I say, and con- 
 sider my words. I want not your king- 
 doms nor anything you have; but that har- 
 mony may reign in heaven, I will give unto 
 every one of you more than you had, and 
 add power unto you also. Since ye behold 
 I am come to Hored, the throne of the an- 
 cients, perceive ye not that whatsoever ac- 
 cordeth with me is of my power also? 
 Take, then, your kingdoms and be Gods 
 and Goddesses, and I will make you as 
 part of one united whole. 
 
 Again, they consulted together, and 
 again they answered: Why shall we take 
 our kingdoms? Our slaves have deserted 
 us; our kingdoms are pillaged of all their 
 value. Yea, our slaves have become wan- 
 dering spirits, and are making their habit- 
 ations with mortals. 
 
 Sue said: What can ye say to these 
 wandering spirits that will induce them to 
 come away from mortals? 
 
 To which they answered: If we prom- 
 ise them provender and clothes, and plenty 
 of rest, they will come. But when we put 
 them to labor, they will run away, having 
 tasted of liberty. 
 
 Sue said: How, then, made ye slaves 
 of them in the first place? 
 
 To which they answered: We took 
 them in the day their mortal bodies died, 
 and they never saw nor knew any other 
 place in heaven. So we appropriated them 
 to our service dutifully. 
 
 Sue said: Know, then, this is my con- 
 clusion. First, that ye shall be made as 
 sub-Gods to one confederacy, and your 
 kingdoms shall be fair to look upon, and 
 well supplied with all things. 
 
 Behold, there are on earth, with the 
 barbarians, hosts of familiars and fetals. 
 Whoever, then, of you, will go down to 
 the earth and bring them away to Hored, 
 shall have them for his slaves. And who- 
 ever bringeth the greatest number, to him 
 will I award the greatest kingdom. And if 
 it be that ye can find emissaries to work 
 for you in bringing fetals and familiars 
 away from the barbarians, then shall such 
 labor be accounted to your credit. And ye 
 shall station round about in the corporeal 
 cities certain angels whose labor shall be 
 to receive newborn spirits, on birth blank- 
 ets, and bring them to your kingdoms also, 
 for they shall be your slaves. 
 
 After that manner spake Sue, and the 
 false Gods and Goddesses were highly 
 pleased, and they divided themselves into 
 certain districts over mortals and for the 
 lower heaven, and were at once sent off to 
 labor in their own way, and they were 
 named sub-Gods. 
 
 Sue said: These sub-Gods have much 
 weight with the barbarians, because they 
 advise them in war. But, behold, it shall 
 come to pass when the sub-Gods have rob- 
 bed the barbarians of their familiar spirits 
 the I'hin priests will have greater weight 
 with them. And the sub-Gods will desire 
 to find favor in my sight, and so teach 
 their slaves, which will cause them to 
 emancipate themselves in time to come. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 Jehovih spake through Sue, saying: 
 Two states have I created open to all 
 men, both on earth and in atmospherea, 
 
8ti 
 
 CYCLE OF SUE 
 
 which are, liberty and bondage. And man 
 I made to choose that which he will; but 
 that he might not err I send my emanci- 
 pated angels to explain these things before- 
 hand. Even so are governments ordained 
 by My holy ones, wherein ye may judge 
 whether a government be of Me or against 
 Me. For if it give liberty to all righteous 
 works, and for the promotion of knowl- 
 edge, providing teachers to the extent of 
 the demand, it is of Me. But if the govern- 
 ment maketh of itself a self, for which its 
 aggrandizement is at the expense of My 
 children's liberty, then it is against Me. 
 
 For I have not created a people to be 
 to-day as were their forefathers, but pro- 
 vided them with perpetual growth in wis- 
 dom and virtue; wherefore the rising gen- 
 erations shall rebel against that which was 
 well and good for their forefathers. All 
 My governments understand this, whether 
 on earth or in heaven. Whatever govern- 
 ment accepteth not this rule, shall go down 
 to destruction. For as I have hedged man 
 about with sentinels, such as pestilence, 
 poverty and hunger, in order to awaken 
 him to knowledge and industry, so have I 
 hedged in all governments with sentinels, 
 such as rebellion, assassinations, war and 
 bankruptcy. As pestilence proveth man's 
 disobedience to My commandments, so do 
 rebellion and anarchy prove the disobedi- 
 ence of governments to the progressive 
 spirit with which I created man. 
 
 The self God saith: I will make a 
 strong government. By armies and cruel 
 masters will I bind the subjects in my do- 
 minions. And he draweth up a multitude 
 of laws, and heaps up books to explain the 
 laws, and he says: Behold, how wise I 
 am! Behold the great wisdom of my 
 judges. Behold the great learning of my 
 books. Behold my most perfect laws. Be- 
 hold my armies that stand behind all, and 
 in great power. But when a ship of fire 
 appeareth in heaven, his kingdom is de- 
 stroyed like a spider's web. For instead 
 of choosing his Creator, Who is strong, he 
 erecteth things that were as nothing. 
 
 As thou hast apportioned to the self- 
 Gods to take kingdoms, suffer them to 
 hedge themselves about with a multitude of 
 laws; but thou thyself shall have no laws 
 save the rites and ceremonies, which thou 
 shalt adorn with music and processions. 
 
 And it shall come to pass that the domin- 
 ions of the self-Gods will prosper for a 
 season; and they will, for sake of self 
 glory, deplete mortals of their familiar 
 spirits and fetals. But in time after, their 
 subjects will tire of the laws of the self- 
 Gods, and hearing that thou hast no laws 
 save rites and ceremonies, they will come 
 to Hored of their own accord. And thou 
 shalt make the nurseries, hospitals, facto- 
 ries and places of education, into places 
 of delight and recreation. 
 
 Sue called the Council, and his own 
 hosts from labor to recreation for one day, 
 and the people mingled together rejoicing; 
 for with the ethereans with the hosts of 
 Sue were many who had been Earth-born, 
 many thousands of years before, and their 
 assurance of the emancipated heavens 
 above had greater weight with the atmos- 
 phereans than anything that others could 
 say. Then Sue and his hosts visited the 
 earth and atmospherea, and returned again 
 to Hored. 
 
 And Sue said: Behold, a time cometh, 
 in all the atmospherean heavens, when the 
 discipline of former days must give way 
 to something new. And such a time is now 
 in this kingdom. It may be likened to a 
 young child that hath been led by the 
 hand for a long time, but now hath be- 
 come strong of limb so as to walk 
 alone. For this purpose hath Earth been 
 brought through the fields of Izaracha, 
 and my hosts are come with music and 
 wisdom. 
 
 Hear then, my decree, O God of Earth, 
 and thou shalt be the most blessed of Gods. 
 Send thy messengers into all parts of at- 
 mospherea, proclaiming a recreation of 
 ten days, of music and dancing, and march- 
 ing with pageantry and feasting. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 When the time of the festival had come, 
 there congregated in Hored, besides the 
 etherean hosts more than a thousand mill- 
 ion souls, to witness and to participate in 
 the ceremonies. 
 
 Sue said: Here is wisdom and folly; 
 false Gods and their dupes; laziness and 
 industry; swiftness and sloth. Yea, here is 
 a world worthless before Jehovih. And 
 why? Simply for lack of discipline and 
 harmony. Every one is for self, and none 
 
CYCLE OF SUE 
 
 87 
 
 are producers for the general good. Alas, 
 they are the same as mortals, but stript of 
 flesh. They are of no value to one an- 
 other, and consequently of no value to 
 themselves. Now will I show thee, O God, 
 that these hapless beings, with no joy in 
 life nor hope of resurrection, shall become 
 a great glory to Jehovih and His kingdoms. 
 
 God said: It is over a thousand years 
 since they have been visited by angels from 
 the higher heavens. Many of them are 
 learned but doubt that there are other 
 heavens than the plateaux of the atmos- 
 pherea of Earth. Millions and millions of 
 them have never seen an etherean. Alas, I 
 fear for them. 
 
 Sue said: Fear not, O God. They are 
 as mortar in my hands. Neither shall 
 there be preaching to them, nor praying 
 for them. They are tired of these things. 
 But I will found a new light amongst 
 them, and it shall speak for us. 
 
 Hear me, then, and with the populace 
 I shall be as one that is unknown. Call, 
 then, thy es'enaurs, and thy trumpeters 
 and harpists, and all the musicians belong- 
 ing to thy kingdom and to the kingdoms 
 of thy Lords, and let the procession begin. 
 For in all public matters, those who are at 
 the front, if wise, can lead on forever. 
 Be politic, therefore, and shape the popu- 
 lace whilst the self-Gods are amazed at 
 the immensity of the hosts assembled. 
 
 God did as commanded, and the people 
 saw there was a head to the proceedings. 
 
 Sue said: Send thy marshals and dec- 
 orators to follow close after the musicians, 
 distributing raiment to all who will follow 
 in the procession. My etherean hosts are 
 advised. They will stand by the way, and 
 with marvelous swiftness, provide the rai- 
 ment. And all possible extravagant colors 
 and fabrics, and hats and ornaments, shall 
 be distributed, and gratuitously. My hosts 
 shall be arrayed in plain white; and they 
 shall march not, but be as servants and 
 workmen. And when the atmosphereans 
 have played and sung over all the boundar- 
 ies of Hored, then shall my etherean hosts 
 sing and play and start the dance. 
 
 All these things were done, and from 
 the very start to the termination of the 
 music there was harmony in every place 
 and corner amongst the thousands of mill- 
 ions assembled. Nor was there ever so 
 
 extravagantly equipped a multitude in 
 Earth's heaven. And so completely capti- 
 vated were the people, their enthusiasm 
 was boundless. Then came the etherean 
 dance, which so far surpassed the ca- 
 pacity of the atmosphereans that not one 
 of them could join in. Neither could they 
 take part in the etherean music. So the 
 atmosphereans looked on, confounded by 
 the excellence of that which was before 
 their eyes. 
 
 Thus ended the first day's proceedings, 
 which to describe in full would require a 
 large book. So the people were called to 
 refreshment. And the ethereans, still 
 dressed in white, and as servants and la- 
 borers, provided the viands. And so easily 
 and with such swiftness did they their 
 work, that now for the first time did the 
 more learned of atmospherea begin to ob- 
 serve them with surprise and wonder. 
 Presently inquiries were made as to who 
 they were and whence they came. For so 
 Jehovih created man, that when of his own 
 accord he admireth the excellence of his 
 neighbor, he goeth to the extreme in prais- 
 ing him. 
 
 So God said: On the morrow shall a 
 new entertainment be given, and new rai- 
 ment and new viands for the feast. And 
 the hosts shouted with great vigor and 
 praise. Then the people mingled together 
 to converse on all they had witnessed. 
 
 When the next day came the ethereans 
 had been divided into groups, and the rites 
 of the ancients and the hosts of a'ji in 
 Partha were anounced, requiring extrava- 
 gant toilets and millions of atmosphereans 
 as assistants. So great was their ambition 
 to take part that only by promises of some- 
 thing in the next rites could the marshals 
 make selections. 
 
 Sue, Jehovih's Son, had previously sta- 
 tioned signal bells at remote distances from 
 one another, and connected them so the 
 sounds would answer quickly. And in the 
 intervening places, extemporized forests 
 and waterfalls were arranged; and near the 
 middle space one thousand columns of fire 
 were erected. So in the morning of the 
 second day, when all these glorious scenes 
 were completed, and the ethereans, still 
 plain and in white, stationed about, the at- 
 mosphereans were more confounded than 
 ever. 
 
88 
 
 CYCLE OF SUE 
 
 First came the birth rites ; then marriage 
 rites; then death rites and the first resur- 
 rection; then the rites of harmony. And 
 the play represented a million of ethereans 
 who went to a corporeal world and follow- 
 ed it through its life, and to death and res- 
 urrection; its darkness and inharmony and 
 terrible suffering in atmospherea; ending 
 with a tableau of a great sun descending to 
 deliver them into everlasting paradise. So 
 grand was the spectacle, and so sublime the 
 music, and the spoken words, that thfe 
 hosts of Hored wept, and laughed and 
 shouted and prayed, as if their souls would 
 break with joy. 
 
 Thus ended the second day, and so com- 
 plete was the glorious work that every 
 soul had sworn a solemn oath to forsake 
 the earth and lower heaven forever. 
 
 Then God announced for the third day, 
 the display of etherean power. And the 
 people were so bewildered already that a 
 child could have led the most stubborn of 
 them all. 
 
 So on the third day the ethereans dis- 
 played their power over the elements of 
 the atmosphere; making corporeal sub- 
 stances and dissolving them at pleasure; 
 making light into darkness and darkness 
 into light; weaving fabrics and making dia- 
 dems and precious stones. Gathering vi- 
 ands from the essence of things evaporated 
 up from the earth; founding plateau and 
 temples in heaven; making ships and 
 chains and musical instruments. And last- 
 ly, the etherean marshals, with half a mill- 
 ion ethereans, turned the winds and sent a 
 heavy shower of rain down to the corporeal 
 earth. 
 
 And all the while the musicians of the 
 hosts of Sue were discoursing music, the 
 sweetness and grandeur of which surpassed 
 the atmosphereans so far that they were 
 as nothing. 
 
 Because of the exhibition of great pow- 
 er and wisdom, the third day had changed 
 the aspirations of every man and woman in 
 the lower heaven. And they were running 
 hither and thither, pleading to be taken as 
 apprentices or servants, pledging them- 
 selves to do everything required of them. 
 So it was decided that half of the next day 
 should be given to initiating them as real 
 beginners in the second resurrection. 
 
 Then God spake to them, saying: I 
 have pleaded with you for hundreds of 
 years to put away your fine raiment and 
 sparkling gems, and to begin adorning 
 your souls, so as to become Brides and 
 Bridegrooms of the Great Spirit. And you 
 would not, but strove continually to adorn 
 yourselves, forgetting to labor for those 
 beneath you. Behold, now. stand Jehovih's 
 Brides and Bridegrooms before you. Are 
 they not plain? And are you not decorat- 
 ed? 
 
 But millions of voices rose up, saying: 
 We will do whatever Thou shalt command, 
 O God. 
 
 Then God answered: Hear me, then, 
 further: This it is to begin the second 
 resurrection; to put away your jewels and 
 diadems and ornaments, and above all 
 things, to forsake self, and henceforth la- 
 bor for others who are beneath you. If 
 ye do this in a brotherhood, ye are already 
 beginning the second resurrection. Nei- 
 ther is there any other road to wisdom and 
 power. 
 
 Again the multitude cried out: We will 
 do anything; we have faith. 
 
 And God answered them: Suffer ye, 
 then, a few to be initiated on to-morrow; 
 but be ye patient and of good judgment; 
 slow to resolve, but firm forever. 
 
 So, on the fourth day, in the morning, 
 behold, more than a hundred million spir- 
 its had abandoned their showy raiment and 
 stood arrayed in white, devoid of jewels 
 and diadems, ready to be initiated and take 
 the vows of the second resurrection. And 
 accordingly new music was prepared, and 
 the procession and ceremonies so arranged 
 that the greatest possible glory would be 
 manifested. Canopies were stretched over- 
 head, and arches and columns on the bor- 
 ders of the march, decorated with flowers 
 and vines; and amidst these, half conceal- 
 ed, were nestled the response singers, who 
 were to speak for and with the initiates. 
 
 And the glad and solemn sound of the 
 Immortal Voice came upon the souls of 
 millions impatient to vow themselves to a 
 new life; and God and his hosts welcomed 
 them with great joy. So grand and impos- 
 ing were the ceremonies, that ere midday, 
 another hundred million applied, also robed 
 in white. And this was continued on the 
 fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth, ninth and tenth 
 
CYCLE OF SUE 
 
 89 
 
 days. And behold, a thousand million an- 
 gels had taken the vows of the second res- 
 urrection. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 After this manner were the words of 
 the initiation, led by the etherean hosts: 
 
 God on the throne said: Jehovih! Al- 
 mighty! Almighty! Boundless! 
 
 Response: How shall I comprehend 
 Thee, Thou Mighty One? 
 
 God: Thou higher than All Gods and 
 Lords! 
 
 Response: Who moves the universe, 
 with power unlimited. 
 
 God: Creator and controller of the cor- 
 poreal worlds! 
 
 Response: In Whose hands the ether- 
 ean firmament is like a fruitful garden, 
 wider than the boundaries of time. 
 
 God: Whose members are all space. 
 
 Response: Whose members are the all 
 that is within space, beyond measure. 
 
 God: Thou, O Jehovih! Thou foun- 
 tain and terminus of all things! 
 
 Response: Jehovih! Jehovih! Of 
 Whom all things are but parts, attuned to 
 Thy will! 
 
 God: Thou All Person, O Jehovih! 
 Incomprehensible. 
 
 Response: Who speakest in the light. 
 Whose Voice is the progress of the uni- 
 verse. 
 
 God: Jehovih, Thou all giver. By giv- 
 ing, createth. 
 
 Response: What are Thy secrets, O 
 Mighy One? O Jehovih, everlasting and 
 greater than magnitude. 
 
 God: I see nothing in all the universe 
 but Thee! All selfs are but fractions of 
 Thyself, O Jehovih! 
 
 Response: Who hath not beholden 
 Thee, O Jehovih? Thy Person is in the 
 east and west, north and south. 
 
 God: Who hath not heard Thy Voice? 
 Who hath not found Thy hand? 
 
 Response: Without Thee, O Jehovih, 
 I go not; I move not. I set out to do 
 things of myself, and fail utterly. 
 
 God: What is man before Thee, O Je- 
 hovih? He setteth up a kingdom and it 
 falleth as a house of straw. 
 
 Response: O Jehovih, how I have 
 wasted my time! My buildings were light- 
 
 er than chaff! My virtues were but bub- 
 bles, and they are bursted and gone! 
 
 God: When will man learn to attune 
 himself to Thee, O Jehovih? 
 
 Response: How can I put away my- 
 self, O Jehovih? Have I not said: I can- 
 not put away mine own judgment? 
 
 God: Man saith: I will not put away 
 my judgment. 
 
 Response: Have I not said: To pro- 
 tect myself is the first law, and to preserve 
 mine own the highest? 
 
 God: Man assumeth to protect him- 
 self, because he is without faith in Thee, O 
 Jehovih; and to preserve his own which in 
 fact is not his. 
 
 And here the Light fell upon the 
 throne, and Jehovih spake out of the Light, 
 saying: 
 
 I have called Thee, O man, from thy 
 youth up! My voice hath never ceased in 
 thine ear. Who can come into life without 
 me? Who can measure his own footsteps? 
 Behold, he treadeth on my ground. Of all 
 that he is made, the substance is Mine. 
 
 The kingdoms on the earth, and the 
 kingdoms of Gods and Lords in heaven are 
 My works. When they have faith in Me, I 
 am with them in love, wisdom and power. 
 Shall a man butt his head against a wall 
 to prove he is greater than his Creator? 
 Behold, I came in the ancient days, saying: 
 Strive to become one with Me, and Thou 
 shalt rejoice that I created thee, Strive to 
 set up for thyself, and thy vanity shall in 
 time pierce thee as a two-edged sword. 
 
 I made thee, O man, with fondness for 
 thy sons and daughters. Of love like Mine 
 own I gave thee a part. And as Thou send- 
 est to thy wayward son, beseeching him to 
 return to thee, so do I bring My messen- 
 gers from higher worlds to call thee. And, 
 that thou mayest not mistake their higher 
 place, I have given them power and wis- 
 dom surpassing thine. 
 
 The Voice ceased, and then the initiates 
 said: 
 
 Henceforth, I will serve only Thee, O 
 Jehovih. For I know Thou wilt appropri- 
 ate me wisely, O Jehovih. 
 
 Accordingly, as the stone is hewn and 
 polished, so wilt Thou put it in the walls 
 of Thy house. 
 
 My labor is to hew and polish and per- 
 fect mine own soul forever. 
 
90 
 
 CYCLE OF SUE 
 
 My soul shall become as a shining star. 
 My love like Thy etherean angels. And 
 plain my raiment, and clean forever. Nor 
 more will I boast, nor speak untruth, for- 
 ever. Nor will I talk of myself. Nor criti- 
 cise my brethren, for they are Thine, O Je- 
 hovih! To do righteous works and lift up 
 my fellows shall be my labor henceforth, 
 forever. 
 
 Make me strong in Thee, O Jehovih. 
 And wise to do Thy will forever. Amen. 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 So impressed were the angels of at- 
 mospherea with the words and music of 
 the ceremonies, that the divided kingdoms, 
 which were without unity and discipline 
 before, were now replaced by extreme sanc- 
 tity and decorum. 
 
 Sue said: The false Gods and Lords 
 have gone off to build kingdoms of their 
 own, and know not what has taken place 
 in Hored. Allow them to proceed until 
 they have purified the corporeans from fa- 
 miliars and fetals; and when they have fin- 
 ished, call thou another festival of all these 
 people, and also send word to the false 
 Gods and Lords who deny Jehovih, the All 
 Person, and they will come bringing their 
 slaves with them adorned in extravagant 
 raiment and jewelry. For they will expect 
 by their pageantry, to triumph over all 
 other Gods, hoping to carry back with 
 them millions of subjects. 
 
 So God did as commanded, and in 
 course of time the false Gods and Lords 
 stript the barbarians on the earth of their 
 familiars and fetals, making slaves of such 
 spirits in heaven. And God gave another 
 festival and it was greater than the first, 
 and there were present about three thou- 
 sand million angels. And the false Gods 
 and Lords came to the festival, equipped in 
 chariots and ships, and with banners and 
 flags, and crowns and diadems, and such 
 wonderful extravagances, the like of which 
 had not been in heaven since the time of 
 the flood. And each and every false God 
 and Lord endeavored to outdo the others 
 in show and parade. The first day of the 
 festival they neither won applause nor cen- 
 sure. The second day they ceased to at- 
 tract attention, for the thrift, purity and 
 wisdom manifested in the countless mill- 
 
 ions of the second resurrection caused even 
 children to receive more praise than the 
 false Gods and Lords with all their glitter 
 and show. On the third day one-half of the 
 false Gods and false Lords cast aside their 
 adornments and appeared in plain white, 
 pleading to be initiated into the mysteries 
 of the second resurrection. And on the 
 day following the rest of them came also, 
 seeking like admission. 
 
 And the Light of Jehovih spake through 
 God on the throne, saying: 
 
 Think O ye Gods and Lords, what are 
 you doing? Yesterday you asked for king- 
 doms, desiring to be rulers over your fel- 
 lows. And ye obtained your desires, be- 
 coming Gods and Lords over millions. 
 And these became your dutiful subjects,, 
 and ye adorned your thrones and your per- 
 sons in great splendor. 
 
 Behold I gave a festival, and ye came as 
 living witnesses of what self-made Gods 
 and Lords could accomplish. And your 
 dutiful subjects came with you to attest 
 their loyalty and good faith in your wisdom 
 and power. 
 
 Now you have cast aside your crowns 
 and high estate, praying to become work- 
 ers among the host of men and women. 
 Are you not mad? And are you not mak- 
 ing yourselves the destroyers of your own 
 subjects? For behold, because of your ab- 
 juration of pomp and glory, all your sub- 
 jects are cast aside in ignorance and misery. 
 
 With one voice the self-Gods and Lords 
 answered: Alas, O God, what shall we do? 
 We can give away our crowns, raiment and 
 our jewels, and our thrones and kingdoms. 
 But we cannot give away our subjects; 
 they will not go. We have bound them to 
 us; and we are bound to them because we 
 accepted them. What shall we do, O God. 
 The burden is more than we can bear. 
 
 God said: Be not disconsolate. You 
 have done a great work. You have res- 
 cued millions of familiars and fetals. And 
 even before you asked to be initiated into 
 the second resurrection most of your sub- 
 jects had already deserted you. Hear the 
 judgment of your Creator, which is that 
 when all your subjects and fetals are risen 
 in wisdom and virtue and good works, so 
 as to take the second resurrection, shall you 
 be promoted. For only until then can ye 
 have freedom of soul. 
 
CYCLE OF SUE 
 
 91 
 
 The Voice ceased, and the self Gods 
 and Lords answered: Thou are just, O 
 Jehovih. We will go to work amongst 
 our poor and ignorant subjects, and make 
 them comprehend Thy wisdom, power and 
 justice. 
 
 For ten days the festival lasted. Thus 
 were first established rites and ceremonies 
 in the lower heaven as a power to work 
 wisdom and virtue. And after that time 
 music, marchinsr and dancing were included 
 in all ceremonies by the Gods and Lords of 
 heaven. 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 In the fifth year of Sue he dispatched 
 swift messengers to Opnetevoc, in etherea, 
 saying: Thus saith Sue, God of two ether- 
 ean worlds: Behold, I am sojourning on 
 Earth, and with the God of Earth and 
 his Lords, have prepared one thousand 
 million Brides and Bridegrooms for Jeho- 
 vih's etherean harvest. Greeting to Nista, 
 of Ho and Tow'en, Goddess; in the name 
 of Jehovih, send an airavagna and com- 
 plete the resurrection of the Father's 
 Brides and Bridegrooms. 
 
 And the Goddess Nista, provided an 
 airavagna, an etherean ship, resolving to 
 come as commander in chief. Sue advised 
 God, saying: Make thou of this matter a 
 great testimony in thy heaven. Send, 
 therefore, thy messengers into all parts, 
 and to thy Lords on the earth, inviting all 
 people to be present to witness the ascent 
 of Jehovih's Brides and Bridegrooms. 
 
 God did as commanded, and on the day 
 of the appearance of Nista, daughter of Je- 
 hovih, in her sun-ship, in the firmament, 
 there were assembled in Hored countless 
 millions of souls inspired of Jehovih. Great 
 was the manifestation of delight when the 
 sun-ship came in full view, descending like 
 a world of fire. And when she passed Chin- 
 vat and was fully within Earth's vortex, 
 the enthusiasm of the people knew no 
 bounds. They sang, and prayed and danc- 
 ed and clapped their hands, as if mad with 
 delight. Meantime the Brides and Bride- 
 grooms had been arrayed in etherean white, 
 and were now saluting those whom they 
 were soon to leave. Quietly the etherean 
 hosts filled their part in the great play of 
 the immortal resurrection. 
 
 Nearer and nearer came Nista in her 
 sun-ship, slowly turning and descending, 
 with ten thousand curtains suspended and 
 waving, and ten times ten thousand ban- 
 ners and flags waving. And then slowly 
 down, lower and lower, till the airavagna 
 rested on the plateau of Hored, to the 
 south of the Temple of Jehovih. Gussitivi, 
 marshaless to the throne of Sue, in Izara- 
 cha, with ten thousand deputies, went for- 
 ward, and with open arms received Nista, 
 saluting her with the sign of the star and 
 square, having been warm friends for two 
 hundred thousand years in the plains of 
 Oayad, in the etherean es'tu of Hi'dan. 
 
 The es'enaurs of both hosts were chant- 
 ing, and the angels of the airavagna com- 
 ing forth in hundreds of thousands, to be 
 saluted by the previously trained Brides 
 and Bridegrooms of Jehovih, and by the 
 hosts of Sue, the etherean laborers. And 
 when Nista came up to the throne, God 
 and Sue rose up amidst the light that was 
 now fast gathering as a mantle of brilliant 
 fire over the place of council. 
 
 Sue said: All hail, O Nista, Jehovih's 
 Daughter! God said: In Jehovih's name, 
 welcome, O Nista. To which Nista an- 
 swered: By the wisdom and power of Je- 
 hovih, O my beloved. 
 
 And Sue and God parted, and Nista as- 
 cended and sat in the midst of the throne. 
 After the ceremonies of salutation Nista 
 said: Let the Brides and Bridegrooms of 
 Jehovih approach the throne of God. 
 
 The marshals then ushered the thousand 
 million to their places, and the swift mes- 
 sengers bounded them on all sides, so that 
 the responses should be uniform and as if 
 spoken by one person. And Nista spake 
 from the throne, and the Brides and Bride- 
 grooms responded in the usual form, and 
 then took the necessary vows and renunci- 
 ations of the earth and lower heaven, ac- 
 cording to Jehovih's commandment. When 
 the ceremonies were finished God proclaim- 
 ed one day of recreation, which was partici- 
 pated in joyously by four thousand million 
 souls. 
 
 So, on the next day, Nista and her 
 hosts, with the thousand million Brides 
 and Bridegrooms, entered the airavagna 
 amidst the cheers and weepings of mill- 
 ions of atmosphereans, who had never wit- 
 nessed so grand a spectacle. 
 
92 
 
 CYCLE OF SUE 
 
 And then Nista, by the power of Jeho- 
 vih, set her ship in motion, raised it up 
 from the lower heaven; moved it upward 
 by her command, saying: Arise! Arise! 
 Airavagna. Embrace thou the realms of 
 great Jehovih! The es'enaurs and trumpet- 
 ers were singing and playing; and those 
 ascending threw down flowers and per- 
 fumes as pleasant remembrances to the 
 countless millions below. And soon the 
 airavagna disappeared in high heaven. 
 
 And this, then, is what followed Sue's 
 ministration: When the end of dawn had 
 come, that is, the six years, he delivered 
 God and his Lords and another thousand 
 million Brides and Bridegrooms, taking 
 them into the borders of Izaracha, where 
 
 were assigned the a'ji'an fields of Rus'tsoo 
 with twelve etherean worlds. 
 
 And Sue left T-hi, as the anointed God 
 of the lower heaven for the next four hun- 
 dred years. And God (T-hi) anointed 
 Lords for the divisions of the earth. And 
 Earth and its heavens prospered, so that in 
 the dan following there were raised up two 
 thousand million Brides and Bridegrooms. 
 
 From this time on there was a decrease 
 in the etherean harvests for two thousand 
 years, after which time there came great 
 darkness on Earth and the heavens be- 
 longing to it; and self Gods filled all at- 
 mospherea, so that men and angels knew 
 not whether there was a true God or Lord 
 in all the universe. 
 
LORDS' RECORD FOR THE CYCLE OK SUE 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 I, the Lord, a one time mortal, with 
 my holy angels who had sprung from 
 Earth in former times, walked with man 
 to keep him upright. By command of the 
 Lord, the angels watched over man, oft- 
 times unknowingly to himself, in all good 
 works and industry. By constant changes 
 of watch the angels relieved one another 
 daily. And in no time did the angels 
 leave the Thins alone and without the light 
 of heaven. And wheresoever the I'hins 
 went the angels went also, and the angels 
 often took on sar'gis, and were seen by 
 man, and man talked with them face to 
 face. And the angels told man what was 
 good for him, showing him the way of 
 righteousness. And man depended on the 
 Lord and his angels for all things helpful 
 to his understanding. 
 
 Now when Earth was inhabited in 
 many places, and there were thousands of 
 cities and villages, the Lord said unto 
 man: 
 
 Behold, thou hast made the earth the 
 joy of the Lord, and now I give it into thy 
 keeping. 
 
 And man answered: It is well. I can 
 keep the earth, and I shall rejoice thereon 
 because it is the gift of the Lord. 
 
 The Lord said: If I stay with thee, day 
 and night forever, thou wilt not put forth 
 thine own power and judgment. 
 Man said: Go thy way, O Lord. 
 Then the Lord withdrew a while, taking 
 his angels with him. 
 
 Now in those days there were ground 
 people dwelling in the wilderness, who had 
 not the light of heaven in them, neither 
 could they be made to understand. As one 
 may discourse to an ox, and it heedeth not; 
 so was speech to the people of darkness. 
 Nevertheless in winter, when food was 
 scarce, the ground people came to the 
 cities of the I'hins, beseeching for food. 
 And the I'hins, remembering the com- 
 mandments of the Lord, went out unto 
 them giving them food. Now, behold, the 
 chosen were tempted by the people of 
 
 darkness, and a new race was born on the 
 earth, and they were called I'huans. These 
 I'huans were copper colored and were ca- 
 pable of speech. 
 
 When the Lord beheld what had hap- 
 pened, he called to the I'hins, saying: O 
 ye that could dispense with the Lord. Gave 
 I not unto you the mark of circumcision as 
 a limit to the line of my chosen? Hear 
 me now in my prophecy: The I'huan shall 
 be taught the name of Jehovih, the Great 
 Spirit, and the plans of Earth and heaven. 
 And the I'huan shall inhabit the whole 
 earth in time to come; and he shall have 
 dominion over everything on earth. And 
 in time to come the I'hin race shall disap- 
 pear from the earth. 
 
 The I'hins inquired of the Lord when 
 these things should come to pass. The 
 Lord said: According to the cycles some 
 twenty-one thousand years. 
 
 The Lord said: From this time forth 
 the I'hins shall not mingle with any other 
 people on the face of the earth. This is 
 my commandment. And whosoever vio- 
 lates my word shall be cast out of my cit- 
 ies, and go and dwell with the barbarians. 
 Inasmuch as the I'huans are your heirs, 
 and are capable of everlasting life, ye shall 
 be unto them the light of my kingdoms; 
 teaching them peace, righteousness and 
 mercy. But ye shall in no case allow them 
 to live in your cities. Neither shall you 
 raise a hand to do them harm. But if they 
 come upon you in multitudes to take your 
 stores, then shall ye depart out of that city, 
 leaving the I'huans to take the goods and 
 food for themselves. For you shall be as 
 an example of non-resistance for the sake 
 of establishing the love of the Lord in 
 them. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 The Lord foresaw that the I'huans 
 should be separated from the Druks, oth- 
 erwise Yaks would again be born into the 
 world. And he said unto the I'hins: Be- 
 hold, the I'huans cannot hear the voice of 
 the Lord. Therefore, go ye unto them, 
 saying: Thus saith the Lord: If ye min- 
 
94 
 
 CYCLE OF SUE 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 gle with the Druks your seed shall not in- 
 herit everlasting life, but go down in dark- 
 ness. 
 
 And the I'hins went and told the I'hu- 
 ans the words of the Lord. But many of 
 the I'huans broke the commandment. And, 
 indeed, Yaks were again born into the 
 world. 
 
 The I'hins said to one another: Are 
 not these like those of the legends of old, 
 who were made eunuchs and servants? 
 
 The I'huans inquired the meaning; and 
 when they were told they made a law unto 
 themselves, making servants of both Yaks 
 and the ground people wherever they came 
 upon them. 
 
 The I'hins feared for the judgments of 
 the Lord, and they called out to him for a 
 remedy. 
 
 And the Lord answered them, saying: 
 Because of the enmity betwixt these two 
 races, behold they will not marry. Suffer 
 ye the I'huans to do in their own way. 
 For of what profit is it to bring forth heirs 
 that cannot inherit my exalted heavens? 
 Because the tribes of darkness cannot be 
 made to understand, behold, their souls go 
 out of being. 
 
 So it came to pass that the I'huans 
 made eunuchs of both sexes of the tribes 
 of darkness, and they made slaves of them 
 also. 
 
 The Lord said: The I'huans shall have 
 laws of their own. Let my chosen go unto 
 them and make laws for them, saying: 
 
 Thus saith the Lord: 
 
 The I'huans shall be guardians over the 
 I'hins, the sacred people; and through the 
 I'hins will I bless the I'huans and make 
 them mighty. Since it is not lawful for the 
 I'hins to kill beast, nor bird, nor serpent; 
 behold, their cities and mounds are invaded 
 by all manner of evil beasts and serpents. 
 The I'huans shall slay all such. And they 
 shall guard around about the cities and 
 mounds, where my chosen abide. 
 
 Hear ye, then, the law of the Lord be- 
 twixe the I'huans one with another: 
 
 Whoso doeth an injury to his neighbor 
 or to a stranger, the same shall be done 
 unto him. 
 
 Whoso taketh from another, shall return 
 two-fold. 
 
 Whoso killeth a man or woman, or 
 child, shall be put to death. 
 
 If a man marries his sister or mother, 
 they shall suffer death together. 
 
 Whoso oppresseth another shall be cast 
 out of the tribe of his people. 
 
 He that blasphemeth the Great Spirit 
 shall be put to death. 
 
 He that respecteth not the time of wo- 
 man shall be put to death. 
 
 The fields have I given to the I'hins, 
 but the forest and wilderness have I, the 
 Lord, given unto the I'huans. 
 
 The I'huans learned the laws and obey- 
 ed them; and they looked upon the I'hins 
 as a sacred people, doing them no harm. 
 The I'huans were a prolific people; four 
 times more prolific that the I'hins, or the 
 ground people. And they spread rapidly 
 over the earth, in all the regions where the 
 earth brought forth fruit and roots, flesh 
 and fish. 
 
 The I'huans were carnivorous, but the 
 I'hins ate neither flesh nor fish. 
 
 The I'hins dwelt in both the warm and 
 the cold countries, for they clothed them- 
 selves and built habitations. But the 
 I'huans wore only a covering about the 
 loins; neither built they any habitations; 
 and they roved about far and near. 
 
 For two thousand years, the I'huans 
 prospered, and they became mighty in 
 many countries. And in course of time 
 they began to war upon one another. And 
 for hundreds of years they descended lower 
 and lower in darkness. 
 
 And they obeyed no longer the com- 
 mandments of the Lord, and mingled with 
 the ground people, bringing forth heirs of 
 darkness. 
 
Cycle ok Apollo 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 Apollo, Son of Jehovih, resident of Pit- 
 mus in etherea, and God of Sufad, Donga 
 and Tah, in the south province of Bum, 
 Orian Chief, Controller of Vortices, said: 
 
 I, Apollo, Earth born of the continent 
 of Pan, submerged by Aph, the Orian 
 Chief, by Jehovih's command, proclaim in 
 the name of Jehovih, Creator of Worlds, 
 peace and wisdom unto all nations and 
 tribes of men. 
 
 Jehovih's Voice came to me in the eth- 
 erean firmament, place of Pitmus, saying: 
 Apollo, My Son, Thou God of Sufad, 
 Donga and of Tah, behold the red star, 
 Earth, she cometh through thy domin- 
 ions. Go thou to her with thy hosts a suf- 
 ficient number and give her a new God 
 and call him Apollo. For neither men nor 
 angels of the red star comprehend the har- 
 mony of My works, and because of the in- 
 harmony in their own souls they deny Me. 
 They know no higher heaven. Behold, they 
 have mutinied against My God and Lords. 
 They have rejected My prof erred wisdom. 
 Their delight is in war and deeds of vio- 
 lence. As men on earth gather round to 
 witness beasts in battle, so gather these 
 countless millions of spirits to witness the 
 kingdoms of mortals in war, fire and plun- 
 der, and by their presence urge men to 
 cruelty and cunning horrors. 
 
 The false Gods and Lords have said: 
 It is well that there be war and destruction. 
 Otherwise, the earth would become too 
 full; for they saw not the higher heavens. 
 Their arguments were framed in a dark 
 corner. And because of their evil inspira- 
 tion mortals have the same philosophy and 
 say: War is justifiable lest the earth be- 
 come too full. For these dark angels shut 
 out from mortals the higher light of faith 
 in Me, thus justifying themselves in 
 war and the slaying of those whom I cre- 
 ated alive, and because they of heaven are 
 given to deeds of darkness, their sins react 
 on mortals, making druks out of men and 
 women. Go, thou, My Son, and make 
 
 them idolaters of harmony, symmetry and 
 music, that they may become organically 
 attuned from the time of their birth. 
 
 I answered: I remember Earth, O Jeho- 
 vih, men and women with long hair, and 
 hands with claw nails, fierce and warlike; 
 whose eyes were like a lion's, with mouth 
 wide and falling open like a dog that is 
 tired. I perceive thy wisdom, O Jehovih. 
 
 So I called together a hundred million 
 of Jehovih's sons and daughters, and told 
 them what had been said, and they an- 
 swered: We have examined the records 
 of the red star since the time of Wan, and 
 we perceive that the time has come for thy 
 labor. 
 
 And I commanded them to send an oni'- 
 yah to the heavens of Earth and deliver 
 her God and Lords and all persons who 
 were capable of the second resurrection, 
 and say ye to God and his Lords: Thus 
 saith Apollo, son of Jehovih: Greeting in 
 the name of the Father, and love unto you 
 all. For your glorious work I have as- 
 signed seven teres in Donga, where is pre- 
 pared a place of rest and comfort. Thither 
 gather your hosts. Earth and her 
 heavens shall be left in darkness for thirty 
 of her days, having neither God nor Lords. 
 
 So my hosts departed for Earth in 
 an etherean ship of fire led by Tu'ain, God- 
 dess of Proe'king, place of great learning 
 in the etherean mountains of Hore-tanad, 
 and they delivered my message, and Earth 
 was without a God or Lords for thirty 
 days. 
 
 And the Voice of Jehovih came to me, 
 saying: The stories of Sue and his mighty 
 resurrections, and of the Gods and God- 
 desses who sang and danced before the at- 
 mosphereans, are still preserved to mortals 
 and angels of Earth. The people of the 
 red star have become rich in rites and cere- 
 monies, and prefer the, swift-footed to the 
 slow, the nimble to the clumsy. The loo'is 
 have well laid out the road to thy success. 
 
 When the time came, I departed, and 
 that all things should express the labor Je- 
 hovih had given me, my oni'yah excelled in 
 
96 
 
 CYCLE OF APOLLO 
 
 beauty all other etherean vessels that had 
 ever yet descended to Earth. I still re- 
 membered my native star with well treas- 
 ured pride. And why shall I not be proud 
 of my native star, and hold up my head in 
 etherea where I have neighbors who 
 sprang from other star worlds? Shall a 
 man forget his love because he is a God? 
 When I was a mortal I loved my neigh- 
 bors. When I entered the second resur- 
 rection I loved all the people of Earth; 
 and when I rose to etherea, my love ex- 
 panded to a thousand worlds; but of all 
 places how can I make Earth and her 
 heavens second in the love of my soul? 
 
 So from Thy etherean realms, O Jeho- 
 vih, wherein for fifty thousand years Thy 
 Gods and Goddesses had trained me in the 
 descipline of Thy etherean heavens, I came 
 down to the red star where Thou first 
 quickened me into being, that I might ful- 
 fill Thy mandates. Thy hand took me up; 
 Thy hand sent me down. How shall I 
 comprehend Thy magnitude, O Jehovih? 
 What is the journey of a God before Thee? 
 We build a ship for a hundred million, and 
 are vain of its size and beauty, but when we 
 launch out into Thy etherean realms, we 
 fain would hide our faces in shame of our 
 vanity. We sail through a thousand of 
 Thy crystal worlds, and talk of great dis- 
 tances, but the mirror of Thy boundless 
 creation lieth still before us. We recall 
 the red star, our native home, a single gem 
 amidst the countless millions Thou hast 
 cast into the universe, and we are speech- 
 less because of Thy awful extent. As a 
 mortal goeth into a dark cavern where the 
 air is damp, so came my hosts, O Jehovih, 
 into the vortex of Earth, the dull at- 
 mosphere. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 Jehovih's Voice came to me, saying: Go 
 around Earth with thy oni'yah, My Son, 
 stir up the atmosphereans; which I did, 
 saying: 
 
 I, Apollo, once a mortal, proclaim: 
 First, wisdom, peace and patience unto all 
 men, and comprehensive judgment whereof 
 I speak. Second, to perceive the reason of 
 things as to what has been and what is to 
 come. The Great Spirit is all harmony, 
 abounding in time and in worlds. As one 
 may assert that ripe fruit is nearer perfec- 
 
 tion than that which is green, which is self 
 evii lent, so he who asserteth that harmony 
 is more to the order of Jehovih than that 
 which is ill-formed and out of tune, hath 
 little reason to prove his assertion before 
 a wise man. Since, then, man perceiveth 
 thai words at best are but slow and coarse 
 repi esentations of the soul's conception of 
 things, how much further lieth a God's 
 wisdom beyond the reach of mortal un- 
 derstanding. Remember, O man, that 
 could thou in a moment recollect all thou 
 had ever learned, thou would be wise in- 
 deed. Wert thou in tune with thyself such 
 would be thy wisdom. To become attuned 
 first with thyself, then with thy immediate 
 sun oundings, and then with Jehovih, so 
 that thou can act, move and comprehend 
 harmoniously, is to become one with the 
 All One, which condition awaiteth all men, 
 and is called in high heaven, Nirvana, be- 
 cause to him that hath attained it, things 
 past and things to come are as an open 
 book. 
 
 Marvel not, O man, that the Gods re- 
 veal the words and signs of things long 
 since perished corporeally. The proofs he 
 could give thou could not understand, for 
 the basis of spiritual entity lies not within 
 the measure of the corporeal senses. Nev- 
 ertheless Jehovih has given thee compari- 
 sons. A portrait of a man showeth his 
 looks even after his corporeal body is per- 
 ished; and yet the picture is but a repre- 
 sentative. To the spirit, the corporeal body 
 is but a representative, being a manifested 
 production of spirit. 
 
 Let him who desires to comprehend Je- 
 hovih describe the all highest constantly. 
 To him that desires to comprehend the eth- 
 erean worlds, the homes of spirits long ris- 
 en in Nirvana, let him describe them. Fear 
 not, O man, that thou shalt err. All the 
 imagery thou canst devise is surpassed mill- 
 ions of times in the magnitude of Jehovih's 
 kingdoms. Until thou canst shoot an ar- 
 row without striking the air, fear not for 
 thy weak thoughts shooting amiss in Je- 
 hovih's worlds. 
 
 I, Apollo, proclaim against all vanity 
 and self conceit in the souls of men, where- 
 in every cycle asserteth itself wise and great 
 and learned, and the ancients fools. For the 
 evidence of wisdom lieth not in learning 
 one thing only, but in the adaptation of 
 
CYCLE OF APOLLO 
 
 97 
 
 man to Jehovih and His works, in which 
 measure the modern and the ancient stand 
 not on their judgment in the matter, but by 
 Jehovih's. For if the ancient was not per- 
 fect in his place, neither art thou, O man, 
 in thine. Jehovih revealed to the ancients 
 that which was profitable to the soul of 
 man in that day, and that which is profita- 
 ble to the soul of man of this day is re- 
 vealed to him now. 
 
 Wherefore I, Jehovih's Son, am come 
 to fulfill my labor even as all men in time 
 must complete that which has been as- 
 signed to them. Turn thine eyes inward, O 
 man, and look at the spirit of things. Make 
 thyself as a God looking down on Earth 
 where man has been quickened into life 
 and attained to strength and learning. Be- 
 hold his temples and palaces; his work in 
 stone and iron, gold and silver; his knowl- 
 edge of the sun, moon and stars; with 
 clothes for the body and shoes for the feet; 
 with great generals and armies of soldiers. 
 Is man civilized and war abounding? Who 
 has measured the inhabitants on the earth 
 and found them pure and wise? Do more 
 people live on the land in peace and happi- 
 ness than in cycles past? Because thou art 
 different in many excellencies, thou shalt 
 also remember that many great inventions 
 are forgotten. The world has been peopled 
 over and laid desolate many times. 
 
 Hear me, O man of earth and ye angels 
 of heaven. I proclaim harmony, symmetry 
 and music. One man heareth music, and 
 he crieth out: A tune, a tune. Another 
 man heareth music, but he cannot discern, 
 and he crieth out: A noise, a hideous 
 noise. The one hath an ear for music, and 
 the other has not. The one is one with 
 music; the other, being discordant with 
 himself, declares there is no tune, but only 
 noise. Who has not beholden jehovih, the 
 All Person? Who is it that crieth out, I 
 behold Him not? There is no harmony, 
 no symmetry, no music, no complete 
 whole? Is not the judgment of the per- 
 ceiver higher than he who perceiveth not? 
 If the lack of an ear for music maketh a 
 man dumb to a tune, is it not the lack of 
 spiritual harmony that causes man to per- 
 ceive not the everlasting presence of Je- 
 hovih, the All Person? Can a man learn 
 to sing who hears not the harmony of a 
 tune? How much less, then, can a mortal 
 
 or the spirits of the dead harmonize with 
 the eternal whole if they perceive Him 
 not? 
 
 Hear me, O men and angels. From my 
 words learn to be wise and deep perceiving, 
 He who standeth in darkness seeth not. 
 The time of Jehovih none can comprehend. 
 Before my days, time was no nearer the be- 
 ginning of the universe ,than now. There 
 were men who believed that with death, all 
 would be ended to every man. And Jeho- 
 vih sent angels to prove him in his folly, 
 and though they saw them and talked with 
 them face to face, many would not believe. 
 And in the lower, heaven they were the 
 same. They would not believe in a higher 
 heaven. And though ethereans came to 
 them to prove them in their folly, and 
 talked with them face to face, yet many 
 would not believe. I have searched the 
 disbelievers to understand their souls, and 
 I have found they were begotten in inhar- 
 mony. They pride themselves in their wis- 
 dom, but that which they called wisdom 
 was as a serpent in the soul. 
 
 He who setteth himself up against the 
 king, what is he? He who setteth himself 
 up against the All Person, what is he? 
 Where is the fruit he has brought to mar- 
 ket? His speech is cunning in denial; his 
 arguments for liberty the bait of hada. He 
 crieth out in justification of his mutiny: 
 Liberty, liberty! But he leadeth to inhar- 
 mony and darkness. After that he rusheth 
 to the front, crying out: Follow me! Fol- 
 low me! I will lead to truth and light. 
 And he himself becometh a God, but in 
 falsehood, even as by falsehood he denieth 
 the true God. 
 
 A line lieth betwixt the man who hath 
 too much opinion of his own, and he who 
 hath no opinion at all. One is to be pitied, 
 the other censured. Which, judge ye, do the 
 Gods pity of these two, and which censure? 
 Pity ye him who hath too much opinion of 
 his own; for of all men he standeth the 
 furthest from Jehovih. But the wise man 
 and wise angel follow the median line be- 
 twixt the two. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 Think not, O man, that the Gods de- 
 liver the nations of the world in a day, or 
 by miracles. They first inspire the nations 
 with rites and ceremonies. Then come and 
 
98 
 
 CYCLE OF APOLLO 
 
 appropriate the rites and ceremonies. The 
 hosts of high heaven, unseen by mortals, 
 stir up the whole world, and in one gener- 
 ation behold a new race is born, and man 
 becomes unfitted for war and deeds of vio- 
 lence. The self Gods turn from the peace- 
 ful earth to find their old petty kingdoms 
 broken down and gone. 
 
 Be wise, O man, heed the voice of thy 
 brother, God of three worlds. Man and 
 woman and pro-creators. Whom they be- 
 get are theirs not for a day, but forever, 
 saith Jehovih. Take heed, O man, that thy 
 offspring may be such as will glorify Jeho- 
 vih and not bring bondage upon thee to 
 drag thee down. 
 
 Hear me, O man, the angels of heaven 
 who are good, labor for those beneath 
 them. This is their work day and night. 
 Think not that they go away to idleness 
 forever. To the etherean industry becom- 
 eth rest. To those who have attained to 
 be Gods, there is a spontaneous growth 
 forever. Remember this and be wise. To 
 the atmospherean and mortals, idleness 
 leadeth downward forever; remember this 
 also. The rose and the lily are perfect in 
 their order. Being one with Jehovih they 
 painted not themselves. Let thy soul be- 
 come one with Thy creator; find thou the 
 symmetry of flesh, the symmetry of spirit, 
 the harmony of music, and consider wisely 
 thy behavior. The star of Jehovih is within 
 thy soul. Feed it, O man, and thou, O an- 
 gel of heaven, and it will grow to be a God. 
 Rob it, and thou shalt remain nothing. It 
 is weak and dim in the vain; but in him 
 who forgetteh himself in laboring for oth- 
 ers, it is bright and of great power. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 Jehovih spake to me, saying: Hear 
 your Creator, O My Son. Thou shalt 
 build a new kingdom in heaven and call it 
 Gau; and it shall be thy judgment seat with 
 a council of one hundred thousand men 
 and women. Thou shalt appoint ten thou- 
 sand Lords, and each of the Lords 
 shall be named Apollo, and Earth and 
 the inhabitants thereof shall be divided 
 amongst them. And they shall inspire 
 man to make images of stone and wood, 
 and the images shall have short arms and 
 long legs, and nails instead of claws on 
 
 the fingers, and well formed mouths for 
 motion of the cheeks. 
 
 And the loo'is who have been prepar- 
 ing mortals by birth, shall lead the angels 
 around amongst mortals, finding the most 
 comely formed men and women and young 
 children, and when they have thus chosen 
 them, they shall. report the matter to the 
 Lords, and thou shalt send ethereans to 
 such mortals and they shall be aroused by 
 signs and miracles; and it shall be proven 
 to the kings and queens and governors of 
 all the nations of the earth that comeliness 
 of form are pleasant in My sight. And 
 those who are thus selected shall sing and 
 dance by entrancement so that kings and 
 queens shall be overcome by the achieve- 
 ment. For I will make man wish to beauti- 
 fy himself, and in so doing learn to per- 
 ceive beauty and harmony in My works. 
 
 So I founded Gau where Hored had 
 been, extending over Jaffeth, Shem and 
 Ham, and the rest of my atmospherean 
 heavens I divided amongst my ten thou- 
 sand Lords and Lordesses, whom I select- 
 ed and ordained in the manner of the an- 
 cients. And many of the ten thousand 
 kingdoms of the Lords of Earth had 
 their thrones within the corporeal tem- 
 ples of worship where the hosts of 
 angels assembled in council on the affairs 
 of mortals, and to advise with them 
 through the prophets. 
 
 And they inspired kings and queens to 
 erect images in the temples, and the images 
 were given a name signifying harmony, 
 symmetry and music, and the names varied 
 in many countries because of the languages 
 of the people, and mortals were taught by 
 the inspiration of angels to make the im- 
 ages. According to the perfection thereof 
 were they favored by Jehovih, and the sign 
 of Jehovih's approval was manifested in 
 the time of the sacred dance given by the 
 su'is, which was, if the whirling dance caus- 
 ed many women to fall down by enchant- 
 ment, then Jehovih was pleased. The -en- 
 chantment of the women was what the 
 Lords desired, for the impression of the 
 soul of woman shapeth the unborn child. 
 
 And when kings and queens came to 
 consult on matters of war or personal ag- 
 grandizement, my hosts answered them not 
 to their own profit, but with the Voice of 
 Jehovih. Neither was there a temple in all 
 
CYCLE OF APOLLO 
 
 99 
 
 the world for consulting the spirits but was 
 controlled by my etherean hosts. And the 
 false Gods and Lords having lost all inter- 
 est in mortal affairs, became earnest work- 
 ers to establish themselves in harmony, 
 symmetry and music; and at the end of the 
 time of dan there was not one false God 
 or Lord in atmospherea. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 Jehovih spake in the light of the throne 
 of Gau, saying: My Son, thou hast set the 
 temples of earth wisely, and thy ten thou- 
 sand Lords have the Voice of Thy Creator. 
 Behold this dawn of dan has but five years 
 and two hundred days. The five years are 
 already gone. Call together thy etherean 
 hosts, and they shall report to thee who 
 shall be successors to God and thy Lords. 
 And I answered: Thy will be done. 
 
 So I sent messengers to God in 
 Donga, and around about the world 
 repeating what Jehovih had command- 
 ed, and I said: When the time of 
 dawn is complete, my hosts shall assemble 
 in Gau, from whence we will ascend to our 
 etherean worlds. Invite all the the people 
 in all the kingdoms of atmospherea to be 
 present. 
 
 So the proper officers went to the li- 
 braries of atmospherea to learn who of all 
 the etherean hosts should be selected to re- 
 main as God, and who as Lords, for the 
 next four hundred years. And in twenty 
 days the examiners returned and came be- 
 fore the throne of God and the Council of 
 Gau, whither God and his hosts had re- 
 turned. Zadakawaski, chief speaker, said: 
 We have found that Gur is the highest and 
 most perfect of all the hosts of heaven, to 
 be anointed God for the next four hundred 
 years. 
 
 Apollo said: I remember Gur from Ma- 
 gel in Siftus in etherea, God of Rheata and 
 a'ji seventy-two. Let the marshals go to 
 him and acquaint him with Jehovih's de- 
 cree. 
 
 So ten thousand marshals prepared an 
 otevan adorned with one thousand pillars 
 of light, and with ten thousand musicians 
 escorted Gur, and those who had been se- 
 lected to be his Lords, before the throne 
 of God. 
 
 God said: I salute the, O Gur, in the 
 name of Jehovih. And Apollo stretched 
 
 forth his hand and Gur came and shook 
 hands with him, standing by the throne. 
 
 Gur said: That I have lived to see this 
 day, O Jehovih, I am blessed indeed. Thy 
 will be done. 
 
 Apollo said: To be a weak man is 
 nothing. To be a weak king is nothing. 
 To be a weak God is nothing. But to be 
 strong in Jehovih furnisheth food for the 
 kingdoms of men and angels. Think not, 
 O God and Lords, that to be a good God 
 or Lord is easy. He who ruleth in heaven- 
 ly matters must forever furnish food for the 
 souls of angels and men. I will give you 
 a parable suitable for Gods and Lords. A 
 multitude go into a forest. One man go- 
 eth a little before the rest, and he calls: 
 Here, here. Then he goes a little farther 
 and calls: Here, here; and the multitude 
 follow. If the leader go too fast for the 
 multitude, they will not follow. And if he 
 does not go fast enough they cannot fol- 
 low. The glory of the emancipated hea- 
 vens in etherea lies in the development of 
 every soul to ripeness and bloom, with 
 none too fast and none too slow, but all 
 as one with Jehovih. 
 
 Think not that great thunders and terri- 
 ble strategems can govern heaven and earth 
 righteously. For as one man in an army 
 may cause a panic, or one brave man's up- 
 raised hand lead a nation on to victory, so 
 can ye, O God and Lords, by wisdom in 
 the smallest of Jehovih's plans, rule over 
 Earth and heaven for the glory of His ever- 
 lasting kingdoms. 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 God said: Behold, the dawn of dan is 
 within thirty days to end, and all who 
 choose, and are prepared for the third res- 
 urrection, shall be taken up to etherea. 
 Besides, thyself, O Gur, there are two 
 hundred thousand ethereans who have vol- 
 unteered to remain another four hundred 
 years in these atmospherean heavens, and 
 on earth. From them thou shalt select ten 
 thousand Lords and bestow them with 
 kingdoms over mortals. 
 
 To thee, O Gur, I bequeath two thou- 
 sand million atmosphereans who have been 
 initiated in the second resurrection. And 
 of the first resurrection, two hundred and 
 fifty million; and of fetals three hundred 
 million; and besides these, the inhabitants 
 
 L.fC 
 
100 
 
 CYCLE OF APOLLO 
 
 of the earth (men, women and children), 
 seven hundred million. 
 
 God ceased speaking, and Gur said: Thy 
 will be done, O Jehovih. 
 
 Then the es'enaurs sang, and the trum- 
 peters played the March of Apollo, Jeho- 
 vih's Son. Presently, the marshals and 
 messengers filed before the throne; and a 
 light of golden fire came down from the 
 throne of Helmatia, Orian arc of Tanaya, 
 in etherea, and it fell about the throne of 
 God, and many could not look thereon be- 
 cause of the brilliancy. 
 
 God raised up, and Apollo by his side. 
 God said: I stretch forth my hand untu 
 thee, O Jehovih. Behold, Thy Son Gur, 
 God of Ra'yatuf, in etherea, an Earth-born, 
 forty thousand years inhabitant of Thy 
 emancipated realms. By Thy power, and 
 in Thy name, O Jehovih, I proclaim him 
 God of Earth. Be with him, O Father, that 
 he may add unto Thy glory forever. Amen. 
 
 God took off the triangle, and hung it 
 on Gur's neck, saying: I now bestow thee 
 with the heirloom of the Gods of the red 
 star, the triangle of the ancients. And that 
 thou mayest be still further honored, Apol- 
 lo shall weave a crown for thy head. 
 
 Apollo walked to the left and raised 
 his hand upward, saying: Incomprehensi- 
 ble All Light, weave me a crown for Thy 
 Son, God of Earth. 
 
 And whilst he spake there came from 
 unseen space a flame of yellow fire and 
 lodged on his hand. He turned it once 
 round, and a crown with sparkling gems 
 stood upon his fingers' ends, and he placed 
 it on Gur's head. And Gur went and sat 
 in the midst of the throne, saying: Throne 
 of Thy throne, O Jehovih. All things are 
 Thine. This shall be my resting place to 
 do Thy will. 
 
 When the new God was crowned the 
 multitude of a thousand million applauded 
 with great joy. 
 
 When all was quiet, God rose up from 
 the throne, saying to Apollo and to him 
 who had been God: In Jehovih's name, 
 come and honor my throne. Accordingly, 
 they both sat down on the right hand of 
 God. 
 
 God said: In thirty days the dawn of 
 dan will end. Let the marshals through 
 the messengers proclaim the resurrection 
 of two thousand million to the etherean 
 
 heavens on that day. Proclaim it in all the 
 heavens of Earth, inviting all to come 
 who can; for it shall be a day of the feast 
 of glory. But say not to any one that there 
 has been a change of Gods, lest sorrow 
 come upon the people. 
 
 The marshals then selected messengers, 
 a great number, and then sent them 
 throughout the heavens of Earth, pro- 
 claiming the commandments of God. 
 
 God spake further, saying: For thirty 
 days shall the Council deliberate on my 
 ten thousand Lords, selecting and allot- 
 ting them; and I will crown them in the 
 name of the Father. 
 
 Apollo then said: Now will I clothe 
 myself in strange colors, that none shall 
 know me, and during the thirty days I yet 
 tarry, I will go round the earth, that I may 
 again look upon the star of my birth. 
 
 And he who had given up the throne 
 said: I, too, will again visit the star of 
 my birth. 
 
 Accordingly, God said: Joy be unto 
 ye twain, in Jehovih's name. Behold, I 
 will throw a blanket over the throne, and 
 ye shall change your attire, and when I 
 withdraw it, ye may walk forth unknown. 
 
 And this was done. 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 So Apollo visited all the great divisions 
 of the earth, and the islands of the ocean; 
 and his traveling attendants, companions 
 and officers, made a record of all things 
 they saw, especially those relating to the 
 corporeans; their manners, sizes, color, 
 habits, education and procreative capaci- 
 ties; and the records were to be carried to 
 etherea in the coming ascent. 
 
 And Apollo and his companions then 
 visited atmospherea, making like observa- 
 tions of the people in the first and second 
 resurrections, recording the number and 
 kind of nurseries, hospitals, factories, 
 schools and colleges, together with the 
 asaphs, teachers and physicians, nurses and 
 so on. And this record was also prepared 
 so as to form a brief history of Earth's 
 heaven. 
 
 On the twenty-eighth day, Apollo and 
 his hosts returned to Gau. In the mean- 
 time, the word of God, commanding the 
 assembly for the ascent of two thousand 
 million of Jehovih's Brides and Bride- 
 
CYCLE OF APOLLO 
 
 101 
 
 grooms, had aroused the people of the 
 lower heaven; millions of them never hav- 
 ing witnessed an ascent, nor seen an ether- 
 ean adavaysit, a ship of fire. On the even- 
 ing of the twenty-ninth day a light was 
 seen high up in the firmament to the north- 
 west, brilliant, like a star of the first mag- 
 nitude. Presently it grew larger and 
 brighter, and shot across toward the south- 
 west, and then began to descend toward 
 Earth, growing larger and brighter as it 
 came. 
 
 The people of the lower heaven knew it 
 was the adavaysit of the third resurrction, 
 and they rejoiced before Jehovih, singing 
 and praying. And now the marshals com- 
 menced to form the groups of Brides and 
 Bridegrooms of Jehovih. And the groups 
 were formed in stars, crescents, squares, 
 circles and ovals, being classified according 
 to their rates, and the groups had banners, 
 and signals of colored lights, according to 
 their rank in love and intelligence, or good 
 works, or other characteristic virtues. And 
 these groups were arranged into combina- 
 tions, every combination representing the 
 work done by a sub-Lord or sub-God. And 
 these combinations were again formed into 
 four divisions, representing the four great 
 divisions of Earth, and the four Lords, 
 Jehovih's sons. So that when the whole 
 two thousand million spirits were in due 
 form, they characterized Harmony, Sym- 
 metry and Music, being the symbol of 
 Apollo, Son of Jehovih. 
 
 At midnight, the adavaysit reached 
 Chinvat. Here the ship halted for 
 four hours, and then c^gain began to 
 descend, and rapidly, fearful to be- 
 hold, becoming more scarlet within 
 the vortex, but growing larger and 
 more definite in figure. And when the 
 adavaysit drew near, it was in the form and 
 figure of the groups of Brides and Bride- 
 grooms of Jehovih. It had fifty thousand 
 curtains, and one hundred thousand ban- 
 ners, and the hosts within the ship, seven 
 million souls, bore each a streamer of phos- 
 phorescent light, of all colors, shades and 
 tints, and arrayed in symbols of the name, 
 Apollo. 
 
 Unlike all other etherean ships of fire 
 that had as yet yisite^ Earth's heavens, 
 it was provided with openings in the bot- 
 
 tom, five hundred thousand in number, 
 which were the places of entrance and exit. 
 And the openings were studded with crys- 
 tals of ceaseless fire, of all conceivable col- 
 ore, shades and tints, sizes and figures, 
 curves, circles, angles, crescents, and so on. 
 And within the openings were the crystal 
 and opaque chambers provided for the 
 heirs of the third resurrection. And yet 
 within these chambers, where the reports of 
 the guardian angels of the lives and good 
 works heretofore done by every man and 
 woman of all the two thousand million who 
 were to ascend to Jehovih's higher hea- 
 vens. But in all the records there was not 
 recorded one evil thing, or dark deed, or 
 selfish thought, for of these things the as- 
 cended hosts had long since purged them- 
 selves, till they were gems of the pure light 
 of the Father of all. High up within the 
 ship were the beams and network of tim- 
 ber and ropes and arches. And around 
 about the whole ship was the photosphere 
 of its power, so that the whole adavaysit 
 was like a crystal ship within a globe of 
 phosphorescent light; and yet, in fact, the 
 ship was the true light, and the angels the 
 light of that light, whilst the photosphere 
 was really the shell of darkness made re- 
 flective. 
 
 And the size of the adavaysit was two 
 thousand miles, east and west, and north 
 and south, and seven thousand miles high. 
 And the ship within it was one hundred 
 miles, east and west, and north and south, 
 and two hundred miles high, being light 
 and habitable within as well as without, 
 like the etherean worlds in the firmament. 
 
 As Jehovih maketh worlds, and sendeth 
 them forth in the places of His firmament; 
 so in imitation of Him, His etherean Gods 
 and Goddesses make adavaysits to traverse 
 space from star to star, and from one ether- 
 ean region to another. Great in wisdorn 
 and power are Jehovih's Gods and God- 
 desses. Yet they, too, were once but men 
 and women, with corporeal bodies. 
 
 Jehovih said; I have given power to 
 spirits of the newly dead to clothe them- 
 selves from the atmosphere with corporeal 
 semblances of flesh and blood. And to My 
 exalted atmospherean angels, I have given 
 power to clothe themselves from ethe in 
 forms of light. But to My exalted ethex- 
 
102 
 
 CYCLE OF APOLLO 
 
 can angels, I have given power to clothe 
 their hosts with ships of fire, and otevans 
 and adavaysits. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 Cventi, marshalless for the hosts of 
 Apollo, with ten thousand marshals and 
 fifty thousand respondents of ceremonies, 
 made ready to receive the hosts of the ada- 
 vaysits, commanded by Cim'iad, Goddess 
 of Du'e'ghi, Goddess of Noad and Rak, in 
 etherea, well known to Apollo, and to 
 Phae'ja, God of Norse, long residents of 
 Um, in etherea. 
 
 Cim'iad was a small women, dark and 
 of deep love, most jovial of Goddesses; 
 and had long looked forward with joy to 
 her pleasure of bringing so large a ship to 
 deliver two thousand million of Jehovih's 
 Brides and Bridegrooms. And so, when 
 the adavaysit was about the land in Gau, 
 Cim'iad looked out from the clusters of 
 central stars, the ornaments of the throne 
 within the ship, to see the hosts who were 
 assembled beneath, and joyously clapped 
 her hands with delight, and she was then 
 saluted by Apollo and Phae'ja, and by God 
 and his Lords. Presently the mighty ves- 
 sel landed and made fast; and the ship of 
 Apollo was moved up alongside and made 
 fast to the adavaysit. Meantime Cim'iad 
 came forth out of the ship, and was receiv- 
 ed in the arms of Cventi, marshalless of 
 Apollo, and then proceeded to the throne 
 of God. All the while the musicians had 
 been playing and singing; and the music 
 of the lower heaven was thus united with 
 the music of the upper heaven. 
 
 God said: Welcome, O Daughter of 
 Jehovih. Come thou and honor my throne 
 and His name. 
 
 Cim'iad said: By the grace and love of 
 Jehovih, am I come, O God. And to thee, 
 O Apollo, most wonderful of Earth-born 
 Gods, how can I express my boundless 
 love? And to thee, O Phaeja, long endur- 
 ing Son of Jehovih, my soul is as a twin, 
 for the glory of our everlasting Creator. 
 Behold I am come in Jehovih's name to 
 wed these two thousand million Brides and 
 Bridegrooms to Jehovih. 
 
 Phaeja said: Thy will and Jehovih's 
 be done. And now they shook hands, and 
 Cim'iad went and sat on the throne, salut- 
 
 ing all the assemblage by making the sign 
 of Jehovih's name with her right hand, 
 which was answered by three thousand 
 million spirits. And now the musicians 
 played and sang the Stars of Jehovih. 
 Meanwhile the All Light began to descend 
 on Cim'iad's head, so brilliant that many 
 could not look thereon. And Jehovih 
 spake through Cim'iad, saying: 
 
 I blow my breath upon a corporeal 
 world, and man springeth forth into life. 
 In the womb of Mi I fashion his spirit. 
 When he is shapely I deliver him. I open 
 the heaven of suns, and warm his soul. 
 Brighter than diamonds he cometh forth, 
 as stars for my everlasting worlds. Dress- 
 ed as Brides and Bridegrooms for My 
 chambers of Light and Love. In My arms 
 shall they be blessed forever. In My man- 
 sions rejoice forever. 
 
 The respondents said: I am Thy Bride 
 (or Bridegroom), O Jehovih. My soul 
 findeth love in Thee only, forever. From 
 Mi, my mother, Earth, who conceived me, 
 I rise up. 
 
 All praise to Thee, O Jehovih. And to 
 thee, O God of Earth. And to ye, O Lords 
 of Earth. Thy Lords, O Jehovih, raised 
 me up. How can I render them joy 
 for my stubbornness of heart. And Thy 
 God, for my second resurrection. Thou 
 made us brothers and sisters, O Jehovih. 
 O joy of my soul. To Thee am I behold- 
 en, O Jehovih, Everlasting Creator. 
 
 The All Light answered: Behold Me, 
 
 Brides and Bridegrooms. I am the All 
 that is within All and Over All. Members 
 of My body are all things, seen and un- 
 seen, boundless, forever. 
 
 Response: Who can give like unto 
 Thee, O Jehovih? Not only gavest Thou 
 myself, but sent Thy Gods and Lords to 
 me to teach me how to live to enjoy Thy 
 fullness. I will rise to Thy immortal king- 
 doms, and learn the mysteries of Thy glo- 
 ry and wisdom, O Jehovih. And when I 
 am strong, I will go forth to them who are 
 beneath me, and raise them up to rejoice 
 forever. 
 
 Jehovih said: Laborers with Me. 
 Helpers and companions forever. With ye 
 
 1 wed. 
 
 Response: With Thee we wed, help- 
 mates, forever. In the glory of Thy worlds, 
 without end. 
 
CYCLE OF APOLLO 
 
 103 
 
 Jehovih said: Mine are all harmony; 
 all symmetry; all love; and will endure 
 forever. 
 
 Response: When I was in darkness, I 
 fed on hate and anger, war and lust. 
 But thou hast taught me harmony, 
 symmetry and love, and I shall indulge in 
 them forever. 
 
 Jehovih said: Receive ye My mantles, 
 and My crowns, O My beloved. The dark- 
 ness is come and gone; the rain is dried 
 up; and My flowers are blooming for you, 
 My beloved. 
 
 Response: Glory be to Thee, My Cre- 
 ator and Preserver. All hail to Thy won- 
 drous works, O Jehovih. In all my giving 
 I cannot attain to Thee, forever. Thy 
 crown shall shine in my behavior. 
 
 Jehovih: Thou art Mine, forever. 
 Amen. 
 
 I am Thine, O Jehovih, forever. Amen. 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 When the marriage ceremonies were 
 completed, and the music of five hundred 
 thousand singers and players had ceased, 
 the great light slowly diminished from 
 about the throne, and God announced six 
 hours' recreation and the angels of Gau 
 and of the etherean heavens mingled to- 
 gether joyfully. When the six hours' rec- 
 reation was over, Apollo rose up, and after 
 making the sign of Jehovih's name, stepped 
 aside from the throne of God. Then Cim'- 
 iad arose and gave the same sign, and then 
 stepped aside. Then followed Phaeja, and 
 when they stood on the floor of the throne 
 where all the assembled millions could see 
 them, the silence was so deep that it seem- 
 ed as though time had come to an end. 
 
 The marshals opened the arches of the 
 adavaysit, but as yet not a soul moved 
 from his or her place. Then Apollo, Cim'- 
 iad and Phaeja, more loved than all the 
 Gods who had as yet visited Earth and 
 her heavens, came down and stood at the 
 foot of the throne. God came down from 
 the throne and took Apollo's hand, saying: 
 Arise, O Son of Jehovih, and Go thy way. 
 Apollo rose up and stood aside. And God 
 now took the hand of Cim'iad, saying: 
 Arise, O Daughter of Jehovih, and go thy 
 way. Next he took the hand of the long- 
 tried Phaeja, and both burst into tears 
 and fell into each other's arms. Phaeja, 
 
 who was of few words, was last to break 
 the fond embrace. Then he, Apollo, and 
 Cim'iad, marched forth to the etherean ship 
 of fire, and God assumed the throne blind- 
 ed by his tears. The mantles and crowns 
 of Jehovih now fell on the two thousand 
 million Brides and Bridegrooms. The 
 awakening light of etherea bespoke Jeho- 
 vih's awful presence. With one accord the 
 hosts moved and went into the adavaysit 
 amidst a shower of etherean flowers. 
 
 Then bright Cim'iad stretched forth her 
 slender hand and arm to Jehovih, saying: 
 By Thy power, O Father, I command: 
 Arise, Arise. Adavaysit, arise. And the 
 mighty vessel, with the vessel of Apollo ad- 
 joined, rose up from Gau, rocking, rising 
 and moving to the music of a million trum- 
 peters and singers. Higher and higher rose 
 the etherean ship of fire, turning and ris- 
 ing, passing beyond the vortex of Earth 
 beyond Chinvat, out into the firmament of 
 etherea, higher and higher till it was lost 
 to sight. 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 Jehovih said: Hear your Creator, O 
 Gau. Make seven more plateaux for the 
 second resurrection. Out of the idolatry 
 of My Son, Apollo, will I beautify the in- 
 habitants of Earth. And the cast and 
 mold of men and of women shall become a 
 great power. Make seven more plateaux 
 in the second resurrection, and sort the es'- 
 yans in the hour of birth. 
 
 God and the Council perceived, and so 
 God appointed workmen, and fulfilled the 
 commandments of Jehovih. And he es- 
 tablished seven hundred tributary king- 
 doms of the second resurrection belonging 
 to Gau. These sub-kingdoms were provid- 
 ed with sub-Gods, of whom there were ten 
 thousand. And the Lords had a suffi- 
 ciency of guardian angels, ashars, and 
 loo'is, so that they could direct any re- 
 quired number to such mortals as they 
 chose. The affairs of the sub-Gods were 
 with matters in heaven, save when com- 
 manded by the Lords for special work. 
 
 So Jehovih changed the forms of the 
 Earth-born, and they became worshippers 
 of Apollo. And because of the idolatry of 
 the women for Apollo, their children were 
 born of good flesh, and shapely; so that in 
 four hundred years, the hair on their heads 
 
104 
 
 CYCLE OF APOLLO 
 
 grew long and straight, and men began to 
 have beards. Neither considered any 
 young man any virtue in a young woman 
 so important as her form; nor did young 
 women value any virtue in man so great 
 as a well-molded form. And when mortals 
 died, and their spirits entered the first 
 resurrection, half the labor of the asaphs, 
 the receiving angels, was accomplished. 
 
 So perfect was the way of heaven, that 
 at the end of four hundred years, God and 
 his Lords, and his sub-Gods, had ready 
 for the third resurrection, eight and a half 
 thousand million souls for Jehovih's har- 
 vest, of grade eighty-eight. 
 
 So Apollo sent Adova, division Goddess 
 of Reth, in Coak, in etherea, down to the 
 lower heaven, to deliver God and his hosts. 
 And they were thus raised up to etherea in 
 a sea of fire, and made one with Jehovih. 
 
 In like manner was the next government 
 on Earth and its heavens, and the next 
 deliverance was ten thousand million souls, 
 of grade sixty-five. 
 
 In like manner was the next adminis- 
 tration, and the deliverance was ten thou- 
 sand million, of grade fifty. 
 
 In like manner was the next administra- 
 tion, and the deliverance was ten thousand 
 million, of grade thirty-eight. So Apollo 
 commanded these to be delivered in the 
 a'ji'an fields of Oth, in Sanak and Orant, 
 for they were unsuited for etherea. 
 
 In like manner was the next administra- 
 tion in the lower heaven and on the earth, 
 and the deliverance was sixteen thousand 
 million, but they were of grade twenty- 
 four. And Apollo commanded them to be 
 delivered in the nebulous straits of Kappa- 
 wotchiaka. 
 
 In like manner was the next administra- 
 tion in the lower heaven, but on earth the 
 kings and queens began to destroy ill- 
 formed children and cripples, thus casting 
 the ills of mortality into heaven. And Je- 
 hovih received no harvest for the last dan 
 of Apollo's cycle. 
 
 Thus ended the cycle of Apollo, being 
 two thousand eight hundred years. 
 
CHAPTER I. 
 
 In the beginning of the cycle of Apollo 
 the mortals on Earth brought forth off- 
 spring who were deformed and unshapely. 
 They sat on their haunches all day and 
 even went hungry rather than seek for 
 food. Jehovih's Voice spake to the Lords 
 of the earth saying: 
 
 Hear ye the words of your Creator, O 
 My Beloved. Sing songs of Apollo and 
 his Lords. Let my angels rejoice for the 
 glory of My Son is upon them. I created 
 Apollo for the glory of angels and men. 
 In his idols and images shall my peoole 
 behold the harmony of My beloved. With 
 mine own hands moulded I the ankle, and 
 foot and well-rounded thighs. Behold the 
 arms of My Son with dimples and small 
 wrists. His neck is straight and slender, 
 smooth and round; his shoulders like hewn 
 stone and tapering. His instep is high. 
 He can spring like a deer swift as the wind. 
 He sitteth not on his haunches all day with 
 his hands down like a druk that is tired. 
 He fleeth to the plain and the forest with 
 swift feet. 
 
 But the mortals on earth are without 
 shapeliness before Me. Tney sit on their 
 haunches, but Apollo cometh to the young 
 mother's dreams, and shapeth her unborn, 
 with limbs straight and shapely, with long 
 hair on the head. He standeth by the idol 
 and knoweth the mother's prayer. Who 
 calleth on the name Apollo calleth on Je- 
 hovih, Creator of all things. Bletsed are 
 the Lords of Apollo. Blessed are they 
 that bring forth in shapeliness like My Son 
 
 A 11 •"' 
 
 Apollo. 
 
 In Shem, Ham and Jaffeth the Lords 
 inspired mortals to build temples and im- 
 ages in likeness of Apollo, and caused the 
 young mother to look thereon, and by 
 worshipping the images night and day she 
 brought forth shapely, beautiful children. 
 
 But in Guatama the Lord did after 
 this manner: 
 
 The Lord called to man, saying: Where 
 are the Thins, the chosen of the Lord? 
 
 Speak, O man; come forth at the call of 
 thy Lord. 
 
 Then spake man, answering to the call 
 of the Lord, saying: More than four mil- 
 lion are thy people, O Lord. 
 
 The Lord inquired: Where are my 
 people? Where is the place and boundary 
 of the sacred people, the I'hins, whom I 
 delivered in the time of the flood? 
 
 And man answered, saying: From the 
 head of the Ca'ca'tsak, the mountain river 
 or rivers. In Thes'onka, wide as the 
 ocean, and the mountain plains of Om. To 
 the great cities of O'wan'gache and Na- 
 thon; and Neshesh, and Tesumethgad and 
 Naphal; and Yeshuah, by the Lake Owane, 
 here standeth the tower of Rakowana, 
 shining with copper and silver and gold. 
 And by the river Raxaa, and her lake Jon'- 
 gaii. And over the plains of Go'magat, and 
 Takshan, where they build great boats with 
 sails of cloth and beams across. And to 
 the north land of Uphsic and E'chaung, 
 where beginneth the still river Eph'su, 
 running to the wide oceans, Vid and Sa- 
 jins, where the I'huans dig deep down and 
 bring copper and silver and lead in boats 
 to the King of Avaya, Thuan monarch and 
 good protector. 
 
 The Lord said: The greatest place ot 
 all thou hast not named. Search, there- 
 fore and be wise. 
 
 And man was ashamed before the Lor^, 
 so he set out to get great learning to know 
 of what the Lord spake. And traveled one 
 year to the north, and many moons to the 
 south and east. 
 
 Man said: I found a rab'bah of great 
 learning, both in books and spoken words; 
 and not a few prophets of the Lord in the 
 great cities. So I inquired, saying: Which 
 is the greatest place of the Lord's chosen? 
 And they answered even as I had answered 
 the Lord. Then I came to the city of 
 Ta'zuntqua, a place for the yearly dance in 
 the valley of On'out'si, where the rab'bah's 
 temple is covered with polished, copper; 
 and I asked the same question. For the 
 che'ba within me desired to make a record 
 
106 
 
 CYCLE OF APOLLO 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 of all things valuable. But alas, I got no 
 other answer than the echo of my own 
 words. 
 
 The Lord said: Where are my chosen? 
 Where is the greatest place of the I'hins? 
 Thou hast shown me the I'huans, their 
 great cities and kingdoms; their places 
 of great learning? But the greatest of 
 all thou hast not shown. 
 
 Man answered: I know not. 
 
 The Lord said: In amongst the I'huans 
 are the I'hins, the little sacred people. The 
 little cities in the suburbs of the large cities 
 of the I'huans. These are the greatest 
 cities. 
 
 Man inquired of God: How can that 
 be? The I'huans outnumber the I'hins 
 ten to one. 
 
 The Lord said: These that build tem- 
 ples of hewn stone, and cover them with 
 polished copper are not my people. These 
 warrior kings who fortify their cities with 
 soldiers are not my people. But these 
 are my chosen, that live in mounds, and 
 in cities with wooden and clay walls. They 
 are the greatest of all people. They dress 
 not in gaudy colors, nor ornament them- 
 selves with copper, silver and gold. They 
 are the people of learning. They survey 
 the way for the canals. They find the 
 square and the arch. They lead the I'huan 
 to the mines, where lead and copper and 
 silver are buried. Without them the I'huan 
 could not build his own house, nor provide 
 the square of his temple. The I'hins are 
 the greatest people. 
 
 My chosen have shapely legs and arms, 
 feet and hands, and their hair, which is 
 white and yellow, grows long and straight. 
 
 The Lord said unto the I'hins: You 
 have built houses and temples for the 
 I'huans, but of what avail are these things? 
 They are at war tribe against tribe, nation 
 against nation. They no longer hearken 
 to the rab'bahs of my chosen. Long have 
 I prophesied through my chosen, the 
 I'hins. Now will I raise up prophets 
 amongst the I'huans, the copper-colored 
 race. 
 
 The Lord was weary with laboring for 
 the I'huans, for they went more after the 
 way of darkness than light. And the Lord 
 called hence his guardian angels, leaving 
 the I'huans alone for a season, and spirits 
 of darkness came upon them. And in that 
 
 same time the Lord inspired his chosen to 
 display the mold of their thighs, and their 
 short shapely arms. And the I'huans 
 tempted them contrary to law, and the 
 I'huan women brought forth heirs of more 
 shapeliness. And when these heirs grew 
 to be men and women, they had the gift 
 of prophecy, and of seeing visions, and of 
 hearing the voices of the angels of heaven. 
 And they are called Ongwee'ghan, signi- 
 fying good shaped men. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 The Lord said: Do not allow the Ong- 
 wee to dwell with the I'hins lest the seed 
 of my chosen be lost. 
 
 Thousands and thousands of the Ong- 
 wees came into the world; came in the 
 north, south, east and west. And they had 
 long, coarse, black hair, but their skin was 
 brown, and their arms were short like the 
 I'hins. Very proud were the Ongwees. 
 They would not mix with the I'huans; and 
 they dared not mix with the sacred people, 
 because of the commandment of the Lord. 
 
 So the Ongwee'ghan became a new race 
 in the world, having all the symmetry of 
 the I'hins, and the savageness of the 
 I'huans. And being feeders on flesh and 
 fish, fell under the dominion of angels of 
 the lower heaven, and they rejected the 
 Lord. 
 
 The Lord said: Even this will I ap- 
 propriate for their own salvation in time to 
 come. 
 
 So the Lord commanded the I'hins to 
 give to the Ongwees laws, rites and cere- 
 monies; and these things were done as 
 commanded. Then came the angels of the 
 lower heaven, teaching the Ongwees the 
 secret of making eunuchs of their enemies, 
 the I'huans with the long arms; teaching 
 them how to make spears and bows with 
 arrows, and darts, fishing hooks and nets; 
 teaching them how to make fire by strik- 
 ing flint stones; teaching them how to cook 
 flesh and fish and make them more palat- 
 able. And this was the first cooked food 
 for man since the days of the flood. 
 
 The I'hins feared the Lord would visit 
 a judgment upon the land because of the 
 Ongwees killing and eating flesh; but the 
 Lord said unto them: Suffer ye the Ong- 
 wees to fulfill their labor, the land is too 
 full of beasts and serpents. Nevertheless 
 
CYCLE OF APOLLO 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 107 
 
 destruction shall come upon the I'huans, 
 and the ground people, and the Ongwees. 
 Their great cities shall be destroyed, and 
 the land laid desolate; but they shall be 
 built again with greater glory than be- 
 fore. 
 
 In three hundred years the large and 
 handsome race, the Ongwees, transcended 
 the I'huans. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 In the time of Apollo were the first 
 prophets of God raised up from other than 
 the I'hin race. And thy Lord commanded 
 man to remember the God of harmony, 
 symmetry and music, and to build images 
 of them in all the divisions of the earth. 
 
 In Guatama, the Lord raised up hunt- 
 ers, whom he instructed in the methods of 
 slaying beasts of prey and serpents. In the 
 same period of time raised he up for the 
 same purpose other men in Shem, Ham 
 and Jaffeth. And the names of the great 
 slayers were preserved in the mortal his- 
 tories of these countries. 
 
 Thus created the Lord a new race on 
 Earth; and in all the divisions thereof, 
 the new race came of the I'hins and the 
 I'huans. They built great cities and estab- 
 lished mighty kingdoms. 
 
 Then the Lord sent I'hin priests to cir- 
 cumcise the new race, the Ghan. And he 
 commanded the Ghans to marry amongst 
 themselves, promising to give all the world 
 into their keeping. 
 
 And the Ghans began to wear clothes 
 after the manner of the I'hins; and the 
 latter gave them rites and ceremonies, and 
 taught them how to pray and dance be- 
 fore Jehovih. 
 
 The Lord said: Hear me, O man. Un- 
 derstand the labor of the Lord. Jehovih 
 saith to the Lord: Go thou to yonder 
 earth, and make man upright. And the 
 Lord accomplished it. Then saith Jeho- 
 vih: Go yonder and make man shapely. 
 And the Lord findeth a way to do this 
 also. 
 
 Forget not the Lord, for such labor will 
 fall to thy lot when thou art long risen in 
 heaven. Behold, there are millions of 
 new worlds coming into being every day. 
 Expand thy judgment; make thyself com- 
 prehensive, that thou mayest fulfill in 
 wisdom the glory of the Almighty. 
 
 Hear the words of the Lord, O man; 
 be considerate in thy little wisdom of the 
 magnitude of the labor of thy Lord. Cer- 
 tain times and seasons are allotted by Je- 
 hovih for the development of new orders 
 of men on the worlds He created. Accord- 
 ing to the times and seasons and condition 
 of Earth, so hath the Lord provided 
 the race of man. To raise man up, that he 
 may comprehend the beautiful creation, 
 and that he may be adapted in harmony 
 therewith, is the glory of thy Lord. 
 
 Think not that as one division of Earth 
 is made answerable to my will by a certain 
 rule, that another division of the earth is 
 provided in the same way. The Lord find- 
 eth one place filled with beasts of prey and 
 great serpents, which must be destroyed; 
 and he provides a race of men to accom- 
 plish this. And man is allowed to become 
 carnivorous for a season. 
 
 In another country the Lord findeth 
 drouth and famine, and he provideth man 
 with knowledge adapted thereto. So also 
 are there seasons on Earth, when man 
 shall be changed from one condition to an- 
 other; according to the progress of Earth, 
 so the Lord lifteth up man for the glory of 
 the Almighty. 
 
 Suffer not thy judgment to mislead 
 thee as to a law of selection. There is 
 no law of selection. Man hath no inspira- 
 tion of his own, to select »and provide his 
 progeny, neither in shapeliness nor judg- 
 ment. He marrieth because of the flesh; 
 nor careth he for the issue, whether they 
 have long legs or short ones, or whether 
 they become warriors or imbeciles. Nei- 
 ther considereth he what may result there- 
 from. And the Lord and his angels lead 
 man unknowingly to himself, to fulfill his 
 times and seasons. 
 
Cycle of Thor 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 In the Holy Council of Gods and God- 
 desses in Don'ga, the Voice of Jehovih 
 came to Thor, Orian Chief, of Don'ga, in 
 etherea, God of Palla, Surveyor of Torretz 
 and Thassa, God of Galeb, Receiver of Saf- 
 fer, and Hoesonya, God of Wartz and Lo 
 and Yisain, Counselor of the etherean 
 worlds Hituna, Ctaran, Seeing, Sethawan 
 and Hababak, saying: 
 
 My Son, behold the red star, Earth, 
 is travelling from Mos to Dae, and is now 
 dragging through the swamps of Asath. 
 
 Thor spoke before the Holy Council, 
 saying: The young world, Earth, com- 
 eth our way. For three thousand, two 
 hundred years, she will journey in the 
 fields of Don'ga. 
 
 Then the Holy Council deliberated on 
 the matters of Earth and her heavens, 
 and all other corporeal worlds that were to 
 pass through Don'ga for three thousand 
 years; and it was found that the dawn of 
 dan would fall upon Earth first of all. 
 
 Then called Thor for the swift messen- 
 gers that, course the firmament in the re- 
 gions of Apperwaith, the former roadway 
 to Earth, to learn her history. And the 
 swift messengers came and laid their report 
 before the throne of Jehovih, as to what 
 world Earth was, and the harvests of angels 
 she had yielded up to the emancipated hea- 
 vens. When their reports were finished, 
 and deliberated on by the Holy Council, 
 Thor, Son of Jehovih, said: 
 
 For further knowledge as to the present 
 condition of this world, Earth, it is my 
 wish that Yathai, God of Gammotto, 
 choose one million volunteers, and in an 
 airiata, proceed to Earth and her hea- 
 vens to visit her God and Lords, and ascer- 
 tain the condition of their angels and mor- 
 tals, and report back in Don'ga. 
 
 So Yathai, God of Gammotto, was ap- 
 pointed for this purpose, and he provided 
 an airiata, and took with him one million 
 ethereans, and proceeded to Earth and 
 
 her heavens as commanded. And when 
 Yathai came to the throne of God in Gau, 
 God sent an invitation to his seventy-two 
 Lords to come also. 
 
 God said to Yathai: Behold, the Earth 
 and these atmospherean heavens are full of 
 false Gods and Lords. 
 
 Yathai inquired how many there were. 
 God said: More than thirty thousand 
 Gods and one hundred and sixty thousand 
 Lords. In every great city on earth there 
 is a false God or Lord, and he has a small 
 heavenly kingdom of his own. And the 
 spirits of the dead in that place are his 
 slaves, for his own exaltation. And in 
 many of these heavenly kingdoms there 
 are wars and anarchy, where the angels 
 torment one another endlessly. Nor will 
 these false Gods and Lords and their sub- 
 jects admit that there are higher heavens 
 than their own. 
 
 The spirits of the newly dead are cap- 
 tured and kept in ignorance of Jehovih and 
 His vast creations; and made to bow in 
 adoration to the false God or ; Lord, and 
 they inspire mortals to the same worship, 
 and in the time of death they fall as slaves 
 into the dominion of him whom they wor- 
 shipped. The wars in heaven have inspired 
 mortals to war so that wars are continually 
 raging on the earth. And such as are 
 slain on earth battle fields linger on the 
 battle fields still battling. These battle 
 fields are all over the earth and are cov- 
 ered with spirits in chaos and with the 
 spirits of Druks, Yaks and ground people, 
 who know nothing more than the beasts 
 of the field. 
 
 Return, therefore, O Yathai, to thy 
 Orian Chief, Thor, Son of Jehovih, and. 
 say to him: The Qod of Earth is power- 
 less to rescue her angels and mortals from 
 the great darkness upon them; and beseech 
 him in Jehovih's name to help me to de- 
 liver my kingdoms. 
 
 Yathai inquired as to the rescue of men 
 on earth, and as to the times of their ter- 
 mination. 
 
CYCLE OF THOR 
 
 109 
 
 God said: In time to come the I'hin 
 race,' the mound builders, will come to an 
 end. And by that time the Ghans will 
 have triumphed over all the races of Earth. 
 
 When Yathai had obtained this infor- 
 mation, and also learned the localities of 
 the divisions of Earth and her heavens, 
 he departed in his airiata with his compan- 
 ions, and returned to Don'ga in etherea, 
 Where he reported to Thor, Son of Jehovih, 
 all he had learned of the condition of Earth 
 and her heavens. 
 
 Then came the Light of Jehovih to 
 Thor, saying: My Son, take thou a suf- 
 ficient host of ethereans, and go to the red 
 star and her heavens, and deliver them in 
 My name. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 So Thor called for thirty million volun- 
 ters, and he provided, an avalanza, an 
 etherean ship of fire, in which they 
 embarked to travel to the red star, Earth. 
 God and his Lords had been apprised 
 of Thor's coming, and had the cs»pital 
 made ready for his reception, and they 
 had gathered all the angels of the 
 second resurrection, and as many of 
 the first as chose to come, to wit- 
 ness the arrival of the ship of Thor arid 
 his hosts. 
 
 Outward, onward, through etherea sped 
 Thor with his thirty million onward 
 through etherean seas of Hoesonga, 
 toward the arc of Mos, thence to Chinvat 
 and still onward till they reached the pla- 
 teau of Gau and anchored near the throne 
 of God. Thor saluted in the name of Je- 
 hovih, and God answered likewise, after 
 which God proclaimed a day of recreation 
 and the atmosphereans and ethereans min- 
 gled together joyfully. 
 
 When the day of recreation was over 
 Thor ascended the throne and gave the 
 following commands: 
 
 Let one million coristables go to the 
 false Gods and Lords and arrest them, 
 and bring them to Gau for judgment. 
 
 One million captors to possess the 
 thrones and temples of the false Gods and 
 Lords, and hold them. 
 
 Eight million captors to gather in the 
 angel slaves in all the hadan heavens. 
 
 Six milliori dispersers to overthrow and 
 disperse the hells. 
 
 Six million physicians to remove fetals 
 from mortals. 
 
 Two million founders of es'yan nurser- 
 ies for the spirits of infants and helpless 
 ones born into heaven before their time. 
 
 One million founders of hospitals for 
 chaotic and diseased angels. 
 
 Half a million marshals; half a million 
 messengers; and three million builders. 
 
 And these were selected by the proper 
 officers and dispatched to their several 
 places and duties. 
 
 Then Thor reorganized the Council of 
 Gau for the period of dawn. And God and 
 his Lords rested for a season, whilst Thor 
 and his hosts delivered Earth and her 
 heavens. 
 
 In one year all the false Lords and Gods 
 and Goddesses were captured and brought 
 to Gau; but Thor did not pass judgment 
 upon them till they were all brought in. 
 And on this occasion there were assembled 
 in Gau millions of angels to witness the 
 proceedings. 
 
 Thor said to them: Perceive ye not 
 that my power is greater than yours? How 
 can that be? I have but thirty million; 
 and of you there are more than thirty 
 thousand million. Wherein, then, am I the 
 more powerful? Behold, I have arrested 
 all your heavens and heavenly rulers? 
 How is this? Whence my power? 
 
 No one could answer Thor. 
 
 Then Thor said: My army is a unit. 
 Yours are divided. This I declare unto 
 you all: Jehovih first of all. To learn to 
 master the elements of earth and heaven, 
 this is the foundation for acquiring all 
 power. Because ye bound yourselves in 
 heavenly places on the earth, ye rose not 
 up to the places prepared for you. An- 
 swer me now: How standeth the world as 
 to what is to come? 
 
 Many of the false Lords and Gods an- 
 swered after this manner: I fear to speak 
 my mind, lest thou in anger cast me in 
 hell. 
 
 Thor said: Who hath learnt to know 
 Jehovih, and to serve Him, feareth nothing 
 On earth, nor in heaven. Fear is but the 
 manifestation of weakness. Speak, there- 
 fore, what ye desire. No harm shall befall 
 you. 
 
 Many of them said: This do I per- 
 ceive, O God, the strongest Gods rule over 
 
110 
 
 CYCLE OF THOR 
 
 the weaker. The strongest mortals rule 
 over the weaker. Therefore, make me thy 
 slave; I am content. Then Thor said: A 
 greater hardship give I unto all. I give 
 you your liberty and freedom. Go, there- 
 fore, whither ye desire; I ask no one to 
 serve me, but say unto you: Go serve Je- 
 hovih by lifting up whomsoever is beneath 
 you. 
 
 They answered: Where shall we go? 
 We know not the way from one heaven to 
 another, nor the way down to the earth. 
 Thou sayest: Go serve Jehovih by lift- 
 ing up such as are beneath us. Now, ver- 
 ily, we cannot lift ourselves up. Had we 
 great riches, or power, or wisdom, then 
 would we willingly do for those beneath us. 
 
 Thor said: Wait not for any of these 
 things, but go at once and serve Jehovih. 
 
 They answered: When we have first 
 provided a way for ourselves, then will we 
 serve Him. 
 
 Thor said: Ye have spoken the dark- 
 ness of all the world. I say unto you: Go 
 serve Jehovih first. 
 
 They answered: How can one serve 
 Jehovih by lifting others up, if he have not 
 clothes, nor food nor habitation? 
 
 Thor said: It is well to ask that ques- 
 tion to your own souls. Let it be the 
 question ye ask yourselves every hour of 
 the day; and watch for an opportunity to 
 answer it by the labor of your own hands. 
 
 Then Thor commanded the light of the 
 pillars of heavenly fire to be raised to a 
 higher grade, and the false Lords and Gods 
 desired to flee before the brilliancy of the 
 light, but knew not where to go. 
 
 Thor said unto them: Why have ye 
 assumed to be Lords and Gods, since ye 
 cannot even master the elements in the 
 lower heavens? I say unto you: The re- 
 gions of Jehovih's universe are boundless. 
 Let no one assume to do that which he 
 cannot do; but little by little, learn to mas- 
 ter the elements surrounding him, and he 
 will in time learn to traverse Jehovih's 
 beautiful firmament, a fit companion for 
 Gods and Goddesses. 
 
 Then spake the false Lords and Gods, 
 saying: O that we had some one to show 
 us the way. 
 
 Then Thor allotted unto them teachers 
 and disciplinarians, and they were taken 
 into educational colonies and put to work. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 When the false Gods and Lords' were 
 dismissed, Thor said: 
 
 To induce men and angels to find the 
 way of resurrection, this is the greatest of 
 all teaching. Man saith: O God, raise up 
 thy servant. And the Lord saith: Hold 
 up thy hands and I will lift thee up. But 
 man will not. Man saith: Send wise and 
 holy angels to me, O Lord, to guide me in 
 righteousness and good works. And the 
 Lord saith. As thou asketh of God, even 
 so do thou of thy fellows. But man will 
 not. 
 
 As it is with man on earth so do we 
 find it in hada. To induce angels to de- 
 velop themselves by taking hold with their 
 own hands, and by the exercise of their 
 own talents, this is the work of Lords and 
 Gods. To rule over them without their 
 knowing it, so as to lead them in the right 
 way, this is wisdom. 
 
 The first passion of man is to eat; the 
 second, the sexual desire; the third, to 
 make others serve him. And if he accom- 
 plish the latter, then is he indeed the prince 
 of evil. 
 
 So also as man buildeth these habita- 
 tions in his soul on earth, how vain his ef- 
 fort for happiness in heaven. To teach 
 him to undo all his past, and to make full 
 restitution unto others, this is the work of 
 Gods and Lords. 
 
 Thor established two thousand educa- 
 tional colonies in atmospherea, besides in- 
 numerable places of manufacturing and 
 building; teaching the angels of heaven 
 how to provide habitations for those born 
 of earth into spirit life. 
 
 In three years of dawn Thor had pre- 
 pared for etherean ascension four thou- 
 sand million Brides and Bridegrooms. 
 
 Now all this while the angels of atmos- 
 pherea had been taught much in regard to 
 the emancipated kingdoms in etherea; of 
 the splendor and majesty and power of 
 Gods and Goddesses. 
 
 Thor spake from the throne of God, be- 
 fore the Holy Council, saying: Send swift 
 messengers to Betatis, Goddess of Terow, 
 in etherea, greeting and say to her: Thus 
 saith Thor, Jehovih's Son, Orian Chief of 
 Don'ga: Come thou to the heavens of 
 Earth. I have four thousand million Brides 
 and Bridegrooms as Jehovih's harvest. 
 
CYCLE OF THOR 
 
 111 
 
 Provide thou an airiata of great size and 
 splendor. 
 
 The swift messengers departed. And 
 proper officers at once set about making 
 ready to receive Betatis. Others were sent 
 into different parts of atmospherea to bring 
 atmosphereans to Gau, that they might 
 witness the glory of the higher heavens in 
 the descent and ascent of the airiata. 
 
 All these things were accomplished. 
 Betatis came in great splendor; and all the 
 kingdoms and sub-kingdoms of Gau were 
 rilled with the thousands of millions come 
 to witness the ceremonies. And the size 
 of Betatis' airiata was. Diameter, east and 
 west and north and south, two thousand 
 miles to the borders of the photosphere, 
 and nine thousand miles high. The ship 
 within the photosphere was one hundred 
 miles east and west, north and south, and 
 was two hundred miles high. Of beams 
 the entire length, there were twelve million 
 four hundred thousand. And there were a 
 sufficient number of chambers within the 
 airiata for every soul to have one; and 
 there were halls and temples also, suitable 
 for music and other entertainments. 
 
 The colors, shades and tints, the mir- 
 rors with opaque ornaments, both movable 
 and fixed, were provided in all possible 
 ways, for ornament and service, the like of 
 which for beauty, had never been surpassed 
 in Don'ga. And when the whole airiata 
 was completed, it looked like an oval globe 
 of light, with a framework within alter- 
 nately transparent and opaque, so as to add 
 beauty to every part. And it was fitted and 
 equipped for the third resurrection, having 
 no storage places for atmospherea, or any- 
 thing in common with the lower heavens. 
 
 To add still further to its splendor, Be- 
 tatis had her airiata ornamented with ban- 
 ners and streamers illuminated, so that at 
 a distance, when seen descending, the whole 
 vessel seemed like a sun surrounded on ev- 
 ery side with movable stars and waving 
 streams of light. Among her hosts were 
 one million trumpeters and harpists, and 
 two million singers. 
 
 In the fore part of the ship was the Holy 
 Council chamber, with four million mem- 
 bers. Above the Council chamber was the 
 chamber of worship; and at either side were 
 the halls for dancing and social reunion. 
 
 When Betatis' ship neared the atmos- 
 
 pherean kingdom of God, millions of her 
 hosts stationed themselves on the galley 
 beams and stay-lines, adding a scene of life 
 to the etherean ship of surpassing beauty. 
 
 With ballast Betatis had provided her 
 ship, so that when she came within 
 Earth's vortex she could stand where she 
 desired whilst Earth and her heavens 
 turned their axial course, that both mortals 
 and angels might witness the brilliancy 
 and glory of the works of Don'ga's chief 
 Goddess. And thus Betatis stood just be- 
 yond the plateau of Gau in her ship of fire, 
 whilst Earth and her heavens made one 
 revolution. The next day she descended 
 into Gau, where God and his Lords, under 
 direction of Thor, Jehovih's Son, had pre- 
 pared the mighty audience. 
 
 When the ship was made fast, the chief 
 marshal of Betatis's hosts conducted Be- 
 tatis up in front of the throne of God. 
 
 Thor said: In Jehovih's name, welcome, 
 Daughter of Light! 
 
 Betatis said: Praise the Almighty. In 
 love am I come in answer to thy prayer. 
 
 Then spake God, saying: Welcome, O 
 Goddess. Come and honor my throne. 
 
 Then Betatis went forward and was 
 greeted after the manner of Gods and God- 
 desses. Then she sat in the midst of the 
 throne, after which the ceremonies of ini- 
 tiation for the Brides and Bridegrooms was 
 accomplished. Then came a day of recre- 
 ation. When it was completed, Betatis 
 and her hosts, together with the four thou- 
 sand million Brides and Bridegrooms, en- 
 tered her airiata and departed upward for 
 the etherean heavens. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 In the fourth year of the dawn, Thor, 
 Son of Jehovih, received from the Holy 
 Council in Buru, of Don'ga, in etherea, a 
 message from the Orian Chiefs allotting 
 to Earth one hundred years' travel in 
 Vocent. And Thor called up Waak, God of 
 Rhines, and said to him: A sore travail 
 hath Jehovih put upon these heavens. Go 
 thou to Hey'loo, Son of Jehovih, and com- 
 mand him to provide an avalanza sufficient 
 to deliver twenty thousand million atmos- 
 phereans to the a'ji'an forests of Gonaya. 
 For the inhabitants of these heavens are too 
 dark to endure the vocent of a hundred 
 
112 
 
 CYCLE OF THOR 
 
 years, and would be precipitated to the 
 earth and engage in fetalism. 
 
 An a'ji'an habitation in etherea is made 
 after this manner. Amidst the ethe'ic waves, 
 the ethereans gather up the atomic ele- 
 ments floating therein, and giving them 
 axic motion, propelling them forth aggre- 
 gating the while, till from a mite it grow- 
 eth as large as the whole world, and is 
 habitable within and without by the spirits 
 of the dead, the angels. 
 
 Jehovih said: In likeness of the solid 
 Earth, and moon and stars, that float in the 
 unseen firmament, so made I atomic parts 
 to all things, and made them to float in 
 ethe. As the earth is to the air, and the 
 ether above, so is an atom of corpor in 
 the ethe'ic solution. Think not, O man, 
 there is but one member of My Person, and 
 that different conditions and states of that 
 one comprise My universe. 
 
 So Waak, God of Rhines, proceeded at 
 once to Hey'loo, informing him of the de- 
 crees of the higher heavens. Thor then 
 sent a messenger to his Lords and mar- 
 shals, to inform them also, and command- 
 ing them to bring to Gau, all the lowest 
 grades of angels from all parts of Earth. 
 
 Thor appointed Ti'See'inij, Goddess of 
 Ares, to superintend the reception of the 
 angels, and to arrange them for entrance 
 into the avalanza, and he gave her as as- 
 sistants, five thousand marshals and cap- 
 tains and one million es'enaurs. And these 
 she apportioned to their respective duties 
 and places. 
 
 To accomplish all this Thor allotted 
 seventy-seven of Earth's days. And so 
 wisely were carried out all the proceedings 
 that on the seventy-seventh day, the ava- 
 lanza was at hand, and all the angels ready 
 to enter therein. Accordingly these things 
 were accomplished; the twenty thousand 
 million angels were carried away on the 
 avalanza, which was walled around on ev- 
 ery side with pillars of fire, so that not one 
 spirit could escape, even were he chaotic 
 or imbecile. Waak and Hey'loo had entire 
 charge of the migration; and they pro- 
 ceeded upward and outward from Earth, 
 seven diameters of Earth's vortex, which 
 brought them into the forests of Gon- 
 aya, where they alighted. Ti'See'inij, 
 Goddess of Ares, had previously sent thith- 
 er a sufficient force of angels, wise and 
 
 strong, to provide for their reception. 
 And when the avalanza arrived, all things 
 were in readiness; and the angels were ap- 
 portioned to different sections of the Gon- 
 aya forests, according to their develop- 
 ment. And proper officers and teachers 
 were provided for them. 
 
 Ti'See'inij established a throne of a'ji, 
 and provided a temple of Council, and all 
 such things as are required in the govern- 
 ment of a new colony. And she promoted 
 Hazadeka, a surveyor in Thalsia, to be 
 God of Gonaya after the expiration of the 
 time of dawn, and she gave him the title, 
 God of Gonaya, for four hundred years. 
 
 After the departure of the avalanza, 
 Thor, Son of Jehovih, provided a new 
 God unto Earth and her heavens, and 
 crowned him, and bestowed upon him the 
 triangle, the heirloom of the Gods of Earth. 
 And the remaining time of dawn, Thor 
 traveled about Earth and her heavens, 
 making records of all things upon the 
 earth, the records to be carried with him 
 to Bum in the time of his ascent. 
 
 In consequence of the depletion occa- 
 sioned by the resurrection of the twenty 
 thousand millions to Gonaya, God and his 
 Lords were greatly relieved of their bur- 
 dens both in Gau and on the earth. 
 
 CHAPTER V 
 
 At the time of the expiration of the 
 dawn of Thor, peace and prosperity were 
 established on earth and in heaven. And 
 now came the time for the ascent of Thor 
 with his hosts. So he sent swift messen- 
 gers to etherea, asking to be delivered 
 with his hosts, and six thousand million 
 Brides and Bridegrooms to Jehovih. 
 
 See We'ing, Goddess of Hotosk, in eth- 
 erea, was appointed by the Council of 
 Buru, to descend for Thor and his hosts, 
 and his six thousand million Brides and 
 Bridegrooms. Accordingly, See We'ing 
 built her ship and gathered in her host, 
 ten million, for the journey, and she named 
 the ship Harp. The photosphere was flat 
 to the north and south, but oval east and 
 west. The openings were on the flat sides, 
 with passages through. The crescent de- 
 scribed a circle of three thousand four hun- 
 dred miles and the depth of the Harp 
 north and south was three hundred miles. 
 
CYCLE OF THOR 
 
 113 
 
 , 
 
 The pillars of fire that ascended from the 
 midst were one thousand seven hundred 
 miles high. 
 
 The stars within the photosphere were 
 provided with five points; and each star 
 had one million chambers, one chamber 
 being allotted as the habitation of one 
 Bride or Bridegroom; and there were 
 seven thousand of these stars. The frame- 
 work was crystalline, transparent and 
 opaque, of all possible colors, shades and 
 tints. Now besides the stars and their 
 chambers the base of the crescent was pro- 
 vided with a salon sufficient for one mill- 
 ion musicians. 
 
 God had commanded information to be 
 sent to the Lords located on the earth, ask- 
 ing them to invite all who chose to come 
 and witness the ascent. And there came, 
 besides the Brides and Bridegrooms, two 
 thousand million angels, many not yet de- 
 livered from the first resurrection. 
 
 So See We'ing, Goddess of Hotosk, 
 came down to Gau in her ship of fire, in 
 great magnificence, and was received by 
 Thor and by God and his Lords. And she 
 ascended the throne and performed the 
 marriage rite for the six thousand million. 
 And after that a recreation of one day was 
 proclaimed in Gau, during which time the 
 atmosphereans and ethereans mingled to- 
 gether freely. 
 
 On the day following, Thor accompan- 
 ied See We'ing into her ship; and their 
 hosts went also, being nearly seven thou- 
 sand million. And then amidst a rain of 
 etherean flowers, See We'ing started her 
 fire ship upward. 
 
 God and his hosts remaining in Gau, 
 saluted in the sign, Jehovih Forever, which 
 was properly answered by the ascending 
 millions. Then on its axis turned the great 
 ship, rising aud turning, higher and higher. 
 And in a little while only an ascending 
 star was seen, and then it disappeared in 
 the distance. 
 
 Thus fulfilled Thor his great mission in 
 dawn to -Earth and her heavens. 
 
 Again Earth and its heavens pros- 
 pered for another season of two hundred 
 years, and the next dan there were deliver- 
 ed five thousand million souls. And a new 
 God and Lords succeeded, and they also 
 prospered. The next harvest was four 
 thousand million souls. 
 
 But again false Gods and Lords began 
 to set up kingdoms of their own in hea- 
 ven, and in the cities of mortals. And ev- 
 ery one called himself either Thor or Apol- 
 lo. And the spirits who manifested in the 
 temples, and in the oracles, all gave one 
 of these names. And mortals who were 
 obsessed believed themselves to be the re- 
 incarnation of Apollo or Thor, for the ob- 
 sessing spirits so called themselves. Oth- 
 ers, more intelligent, said: Have not the 
 prophets foretold that there was to be a 
 second coming of Apollo? And are not 
 these spirits, who appear through the sar'- 
 gis, the very person? 
 
 So great became the superstition of the 
 nations of the earth, that in the fall of the 
 leaf they found proof of the second coming 
 of Apollo or Thor. Many of the spirits 
 deserted the second resurrection in hea- 
 ven, and returned to earth, to wait for in- 
 formation concerning the coming event. 
 
 Jehovih said: All corporeal worlds pass 
 through the age of too much belief. As I 
 gave man a judgment, that he might ex- 
 amine and weigh a matter, so runneth he 
 into unbelief. Then My angels go to him, 
 and show him wherein he believed to lit- 
 tle; but lo, he goeth to the other extreme, 
 believing all things, and not using his 
 judgment. 
 
 God said: Why will not men and an- 
 gels be patient, and wait till a matter is 
 proven meritorious before they pursue it to 
 extremes? The same sun shineth, the 
 same stars stand in the heavens, and 
 Earth, travels steadily on her way; her 
 winds blow, her summers and winters come 
 as in the olden time, yet man thinks that a 
 great wonder is near at hand. And no won- 
 der cometh and nothing new is near at 
 hand. 
 
 How shall I stay them, O Jehovih? 
 Their desires for Apollo call down millions 
 of spirits from my places of resurrection. 
 And in trials and hardships they fall, and 
 become suitable prey for designing false 
 Gods and Lords. 
 
 God and his Lords bewailed the dark- 
 ness of Earth and her heavens. But high 
 up in the etherean heavens, came the Voice 
 of Jehovih, saying: 
 
 Hear your Creator, O ye Gods and 
 Goddesses. Behold the magnitude of My 
 works. I labor not for the profit of this 
 
114 
 
 CYCLE OF THOR 
 
 man or that man; nay, nor for this people 
 nor that people; nor for the inhabitants of 
 one star and one heaven; but for the glory 
 of millions of stars and millions of heavens. 
 Doth not one corporeal man bewail a 
 shower of rain? — and yet his neighbor re- 
 joiceth thereat? One man prayeth for sun- 
 shine and another for shade. Think not 
 that I labor for each one separately, but 
 for the perfection of the whole. Wherefore, 
 then, shall the God of Earth and his Lords 
 bewail the darkness that falleth on Earth 
 in this day. I have prepared places of 
 darkness in the etherean firmament, and 
 places of light; and My corporeal worlds 
 must travel through them. And these 
 places of darkness and places of light are 
 as changes of seasons for My harvests. 
 Now Earth is passing through deep 
 darkness, for the races of men must receive 
 new growth corporeally for things that 
 shall come after. As they absorb from the 
 a'ji of My places in this age, so also do 
 their souls become full of superstition and 
 darkness. 
 
 Thus went Earth into great darkness 
 during the last six hundred years of the 
 cycle of Thor, and there was no harvest 
 from her for the etherean heavens. But 
 the spirits deserted atmospherea in mill- 
 ions and millions, and went down to the 
 earth, to dwell with mortals. The light of 
 Jehovih was shut out from men except the 
 Thins. Thus ambition for improvement 
 was at an end. They became as drones 
 and vagabonds; and when they died their 
 spirits continued to lie about in the places 
 of their mortal life. And many of these 
 spirits persuaded mortals to suicide, and 
 they killed themselves by thousands and 
 tens of thousands, and men had not 
 courage to endure anything. They 
 wanted to be with the spirits of the 
 dead, to talk to them, to see them, and to 
 be rid of earth trials. Neither had the 
 spirits that congregated on earth any 
 knowledge of the higher heavens. They 
 did nothing useful to heaven or earth, not 
 even to themselves. 
 
 Thus ended the cycle of Thor; three 
 thousand two hundred years. 
 
 © 
 
LORDS' RECORD FOR CYCLE OK THOR 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 The Lord foresaw that the knowledge 
 of one generation could be handed down 
 to the next by altars and temples, and by 
 idols and images, and by painted signs and 
 engraved words. 
 
 The Lord said: Behold, I establish my- 
 self with my chosen in written words. 
 Now the time has come when all the races 
 of men on Earth shall be made to know 
 me. And the Lord commanded man to 
 make stone and wooden images of every- 
 thing upon the earth, and also engravings. 
 
 And the Lord sent his angels down to 
 man to inspire him in the workmanship of 
 images and engravings, and man thus ac- 
 complished the commandments of the 
 Lord. 
 
 The Lord said: As every living crea- 
 ture has a name, so shall the image thereof 
 have the same name. 
 
 And the meaning of the images and en- 
 gravings were as follows: A picture of a 
 man was a man; a picture of a tree repre- 
 sented a tree; a picture of a bird repre- 
 sented a bird; and even so was everything 
 represented by its own image. 
 
 The Lord said: Thou shalt make the 
 picture of a spear; and when thou desires 
 to show which way a man goeth, thou shalt 
 add to the graven image the likeness of a 
 spear; and the way it pointeth shall show 
 the way the man is going. Even so shalt 
 thou express the going of everything. 
 
 Thus man in every region of the earth 
 made a written language. The Lord said: 
 This shall be called Panic language, be- 
 cause it is made of earthly images. 
 
 The Lord said: As in the olden time 
 man named all things according to their 
 own spoken words and sounds uttered, so 
 in the days of Thor came to the Ghans the 
 written words of everything on earth and 
 in heaven. 
 
 When man had written the names of all 
 things on earth, the Lord said: Thou shalt 
 write the name of thy Creator. 
 
 Then man inquired: How can I find a 
 word to express the Creator? I know no 
 name save the names I have already made. 
 
 If I could hear the Creator, or see Him, 
 then I could write His name. 
 
 The Lord said: Thou hast named the 
 wind which thou hast not seen: wh'sh. 
 Name thou thy Creator. 
 
 Then man drew a circle and called it 
 O, for it represented that which was with- 
 out beginning or end, and which contained 
 all within itself. Then man drew a line 
 cutting through the circle from east to 
 west, to represent the light of the east 
 traveling to the west. Then man drew a 
 line from below upward, cutting the circle 
 at right angles with the horizontal, to rep- 
 resent the one road of all things from the 
 bottom upward forever. The first line 
 man called E, for it was the name the 
 wind speaketh in the leaves. And the sec- 
 ond line he called IH. And when man had 
 completed the engraving, he called it 
 E-O-IH. 
 
 The Lord said: Keep thou His name 
 and the image thereof a secret betwixt the 
 rab'bahs and thy Lord. Neither shalt thou 
 utter it aloud, for it is sacred. Betwixt 
 thou and thy Creator stands Thy Lord. 
 Behold, 1 am the key of life and death; 
 through me shalt thou unlock all the mys- 
 teries of heaven and earth. Neither shall 
 my rab'bah, nor my prophets, call on the 
 name of any spirit, except the Lord. 
 
 And when man had attained to the 
 knowledge of a written language, the, Lord 
 said: Now shall he have books, and learn 
 to keep records after the manner of the 
 angels of heaven. And the Lord sent an- 
 gels to man in different places, teaching 
 them how to make books of skins, bark 
 and cloth. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 In those days the lands of Jaffeth and 
 Shem and Ham were inhabited by millions 
 of I'huans and Ghans; but the countries 
 lying between them were inhabited by I'hu- 
 ans only. And the Lord spake to the peo- 
 ple of Ham, saying: 
 
 Behold, there are two other countries 
 inhabited by kin of your kin, flesh of your 
 
116 
 
 CYCLE OF THOR 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 flesh; they are Ghans also. And they speak 
 and write with Panic words even as ye do. 
 
 And the Hamites inquired: How far 
 are the two other countries? Where are 
 they? 
 
 The Lord said: Gather together two 
 thousand men and women; provide ye oxen 
 and asses and all things requisite for a 
 journey of four years; and I will lead you 
 to your brethren, whose forefathers were 
 also saved from the flood, by the little sa- 
 cred people, the I'hins. 
 
 The Hamites obeyed the Lord, having 
 provided themselves as commanded, and 
 started on their journey to Jaffeth and 
 Shem in two companies of a thousand 
 each. 
 
 Then spake the Lord to the people of 
 Jaffeth, saying: Behold, there are two 
 other countries inhabited by kin of your 
 kin, flesh of your flesh; and they speak and 
 write the Panic words even as you do. 
 
 The Jaffeth'eyans said: How far are 
 the two other countries? Where are they? 
 
 The Lord said: Gather together two 
 thousand men and women; provide ye all 
 things requisite for a journey of four years; 
 and I will lead you to your brethren, whose 
 forefathers were also saved from the flood, 
 by the little sacred people, the I'hins. 
 
 The Jaffeth'eyans obeyed the Lord, 
 and having provided themselves as com- 
 manded, started for Ham and Shem, in 
 two companies of a thousand each. 
 
 Then spake the Lord to the people of 
 Shem in the same way, telling them of 
 Jaffeth and Ham. And they also equipped 
 themselves in two companies and started 
 for Ham and Jaffeth. 
 
 Thus the Lord inspired these three sep- 
 arate peoples to go and visit one another, 
 in the same period of time. And the Lord 
 said unto them ere they started: 
 
 Very fierce and savage are the I'huans 
 who inhabit the wilderness on the way. 
 Behold, they eat the flesh of both man and 
 beast. But they will not harm the I'hins. 
 Therefore, O my beloved, on your long 
 journey take two score of I'hins. Through 
 the I'hins can the Lord speak all languages, 
 even the language of the barbarians, the 
 I'huans. 
 
 So after a journey of four years, the mi- 
 grants from each country came to the place 
 
 of their destination. And by their written 
 and spoken words they knew one another. 
 And the Lord inspired them to leave 
 records of the journeys. And in all 
 these countries there were made images 
 of stone and copper, and engravings there- 
 on of the children of Noe, and of the flood, 
 and of the tribes of Shem, Ham and Jaf- 
 feth. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 The migrants tarried in the countries 
 they visited for two years, going much 
 about, showing themselves, and relating 
 the history of the country whence they 
 came. And the Lord spoke to the mi- 
 grants in their respective places, saying: 
 The time is come for your departure. Re- 
 turn to your own country, and there relate 
 the glories of this other country. So they 
 returned to their own homes. 
 
 Now during the travel of the migrants, 
 the Lord spake to them every day, through 
 the I'hin priests. The Lord said: Keep 
 together, O my beloved. Ye shall not be 
 lost. 
 
 But the journey was so long that many 
 lost faith, and were not heedful of the 
 words of the Lord. And some of them 
 strayed off among the I'huans and were 
 lost. 
 
 Of the six thousand migrants, there 
 were lost in all, three hundred and eighty- 
 six people, men and women. Some were 
 lost in one place and some in another. 
 
 The Lord said: Sing ye songs of la- 
 mentation for those who are lost, and this 
 shall become a matter of record to the end 
 of the world. And the time shall come 
 when the Lord shall reveal the mystery of 
 this day. 
 
 So, when the people had returned to 
 their respective places, they all sang songs 
 of lamentation for the people that were 
 lost. 
 
 The Lord said: I have shown you the 
 far-off people. I have marked out the 
 road. Keep the road open between the 
 great countries that I have shown you. 
 One expedition shall start to the far-off 
 countries every eleven years. And if per- 
 chance ye find my chosen, bring them 
 home. And on all the camping places of 
 your journey ye shall build an altar to the 
 
CYCLE OF THOR 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 117 
 
 Lord. Ye shall build it in a circle, and the 
 congregation shall sit in the circle thereof, 
 and the priest shall sit in the midst. And 
 through my priests I will speak words of 
 wisdom and comfort. But in all your jour- 
 neys, keep aloof from the I'huans, the bar- 
 barians, the man-eaters; for they have not 
 kept my commandments but have mixed 
 with the Druks. And carry with you on all 
 your expeditions I'hin priests. In all your 
 journeys ye shall encounter your brethren 
 coming and going, who dwell in the far-off 
 countries. And that ye may distinguish 
 them, keep secret the sacred password of 
 the rites of Emethachavah. 
 
 So in the beginning of the cycle of Thor 
 the Lord opened up many ways for the de- 
 liverance of the tribes of men on Earth, 
 and man prospered in the way of righteous- 
 ness for a long time. 
 
 Then darkness came upon the races of 
 men; millions of them returned to savag- 
 ery. And angels of darkness came upon 
 the earth, many of them taking upon them- 
 selves the semblance of corporeal forms, 
 and dwelling with mortals, and engaging 
 in practices whereof it is unlawful to write 
 or speak. So that at the termination of 
 three thousand years, the lands on Earth 
 were covered with darkness. 
 
Cycle ok Osire 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 Now Earth came into the dominions 
 of Osire, Son of Jehovih, God of Lowtsin, 
 an etherean world, where his reign a hun- 
 dred thousand years had illumined many a 
 corporeal star; who ruled in Lowtsin most 
 amiably with equals, but was high strung 
 with impatience toward self-willed ignor- 
 ance. The Voice of Jehovih spake to him 
 on his throne, saying: 
 
 Osire, My Son, go forth and grasp the 
 perishing Earth in her debauched flight, and 
 proclaim thyself with uplifted rod; for as 
 an indulgent father treads softly by his in- 
 fant son, guiding him tenderly, and with 
 wholesome advice, so have I through My 
 Gods and Chiefs, coaxed the red star along 
 for many thousands of years. But as a 
 wise father turneth to his truant son, of lat- 
 er years, commanding, so do I now through 
 thee, stretch My hand over Earth and her 
 heavens. 
 
 She lieth deep buried in anarchy, and 
 false Gods and Lords are despoiling her 
 heavens with war, and casting down on the 
 troubled Earth her millions of spirits of 
 darkness. As driftwood on a surging sea, 
 now riseth high on towering waves, and 
 quickly plungeth down in the roaring wa- 
 ters, to rise again and fall, and repeat for- 
 ever the ceaseless struggle, so do the spir- 
 its of the dead of earth, rise in heaven to 
 be plunged back again in unending toil and 
 darkness on the earth. 
 
 My most holy God and his Lords are 
 powerless to divert the terrible heedless- 
 ness of men and angels. 
 
 Osire summoned a million swift mes- 
 sengers, well trained in the rise and fall of 
 worlds, and bade them go to the red star, 
 Earth, with great speed, promising suc- 
 cor to God and his Lords of Earth, then 
 return quickly back and report to Jeho- 
 vih's throne in Lowtsin. 
 
 When they had departed, Osire called 
 together his Council, and told them the 
 story that had stirred his soul with com- 
 passion; of the spirits newborn in the at- 
 
 mospherea of Earth who persisted in bur- 
 rowing their souls down in hada, heedless 
 of the call and persuasion of a loving God 
 and Lords. 
 
 Jehovih's Light overspread the throne 
 of Osire, and curtained the Gods and God- 
 desses around so that all were clear to 
 comprehend the full history of Earth 
 and her heavens. Yet not one soul moved 
 to answer with haste, but slowly one by 
 one, the speakers, each a representative of 
 a thousand Gods and Goddesses, gave ut- 
 terance to Jehovih's light upon them. And 
 when the multitude had spoken, Osire rose 
 up, and stood in the throne of Jehovih, 
 mantled in white, like one new illumined 
 with a great change in his long life's ad- 
 ministration. To the Gods and Goddesses 
 he spake: 
 
 The veil of the arc of Se'ing uprises be- 
 fore our hallowed shrine. Step by step, all 
 things advance by Jehovih's will, and new 
 roadways in etherea open up fields unex- 
 plored by traveling stars; so onward, step 
 by step, our own endless realm takes the 
 course of manhood in its giant strides. 
 By you have the worlds of corpor and es 
 been blessed for hundreds of thousands of 
 years. Your busy scenes in an old routine 
 change now, and an Orian arc cometh. 
 As an oscillatory star feedeth itself 
 with a change of seasons, so hath 
 Jehovih coursed the wave of his trav- 
 eling suns, to give our etherean realms an 
 endless life, diversified by change of scenes 
 and constant surprises, which are the glory 
 of the soul. 
 
 As thus Osire, the Mighty, with a soul 
 full of words, engraved by Jehovih's hand, 
 discoursed on the glories awaiting the high 
 worlds, where he and his brother Gods and 
 Archangels dwelt in the All Perfect, there 
 came back, hastening, as with Omnipo- 
 tence impelled, the swift messengers from 
 the slow Earth, with their etherean arrow 
 ship shooting like a meteor on fire. Then 
 came Hagan, spokesman of the messen- 
 gers, before Jehovih's throne, his mantle 
 
CYCLE OF OSIRE 
 
 119 
 
 turned back, and his eyes radiant with sure 
 knowledge, saluting in Jehovih's name. 
 He. said: 
 
 Osire, Jehovih's Son, and ye Gods and 
 Goddesses, as the All Light gave Voice to 
 our far-seeing God of Lowtsin, so stand I 
 here to corroborate in Jehovih's name. 
 The day of sweet persuasion to the Earth- 
 born is done. Jehovih led the I'hins in 
 fortuitous paths by gentle words and love, 
 but left them weak before the warring ele- 
 ments. But now Jehovih hath provided a 
 race called the Ghans who can and will 
 master the earth and subdue it. The Ghans 
 are like untamed lions, born conquerors, 
 with capacity to learn and reason, with faith 
 in mastery, but not faith in Jehovih. As a 
 man, having two sons, the one low-strung 
 and passionless, the other in ceaseless mis- 
 chief and desire for havoc, so stand the 
 twain, the I'hins and the Ghans, on the 
 earth. And when they die and enter hea- 
 ven, the first, the I'hins, go as they are 
 directed; but the second, the Ghans, still 
 full of inherent stubbornness and self will, 
 unheed the God and Lords; but back to 
 the earth these well-formed and stately 
 souls return, and set up heavenly kingdoms 
 of their own, in darkness, and fain pursue 
 with most relentless zeal their former ene- 
 mies. And by their loud clamor they 
 break up the kingdoms of Jehovih's Lords, 
 and despoil them, proclaiming heaven and 
 earth free to all. Thus the hapless souls 
 in the lower heaven have been persuaded 
 to fly from the hospitals and nurseries 
 back to mortals, and there fasten them- 
 selves as fetals, shutting their eyes against 
 all further light. 
 
 So mortals have given themselves up to 
 doing the wills of the spirits of darkness, 
 making spoil and desolation a holiday. 
 
 We then came to God, Jehovih's Son, 
 whose throne lieth in Gau, and he said: 
 Take this message to Osire, Jehovih's Son, 
 God of Lowtsin: Greeting, in the Father's 
 name. Behold, the arc of Se'ing is at hand. 
 Send thou, O God, a ship, and deliver my 
 hosts, four thousand million. And after 
 that, in due salutation, we hastened hither. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 Osire said: In written words will I set 
 down explicit laws for these unruly false 
 Gods, the Ghans, and give then bondage 
 
 like the people of other worlds. O that 
 they had had discipline before, instead of 
 sweet persuasion. 
 
 Send ye an es'elene, with suitable at- 
 tendants, to deliver God, his Lords, and 
 their hosts, the Brides and Bridegrooms 
 of Jehovih; and leave Earth in darkness 
 thirty days. 
 
 And command my builders to provide 
 me a ship for my hosts, and let the heralds 
 go forth in Se'ing, anouncing that I am to 
 visit Earth with fifty million helpers. 
 
 Say'ah, scribe of C'taran, thus described 
 the scene. Osire had spoken; his word 
 had gone forth. Heaven was stirred up. 
 Gods and Goddesses knew that new work 
 was at hand. Earth had sons at last worthy 
 the will and service of Gods. Osire, im- 
 petuous and much loved God of Lowtsin, 
 was going to visit these Earth sons. 
 
 Say'ah said: When some Gods give 
 command, the people move along; but 
 when Osire decreed, the whole heaven of 
 Lowtsin ran. And quickly now, the .man- 
 dates were fulfilled. The ships were built; 
 first, the es'elene, commanded by Yok, and 
 equipped with five million souls, and start- 
 ed off in haste to Earth to deliver God 
 and his Lords, and such Brides and Bride- 
 grooms as were prepared for the resurrec- 
 tion. Next, the ship, Buer, an adavaysit, 
 built for Osire and his hosts, fifty million. 
 
 Osire said: Let swift messengers be 
 stationed along the roadways; and they 
 shall announce the proceedings of my Gods 
 and Lords, and their whereabouts. And 
 even so was the order of heaven executed. 
 
 In due time Osire left his high place 
 and with his hosts in the etherean ship of 
 fire, started out toward Earth at break- 
 neck speed; for such was the disposition 
 of this most determined God. Nor halted 
 he at Chinvat, the boundary of Earth's 
 vortex, but sped on with banners and cur- 
 tains flying, and martial music to stir up 
 the souls of his hosts. Down he came to 
 the earth with his fire ship, and sped round 
 it, to learn its weak points; and next rose 
 up a little to view the atmospherean spir- 
 its who had presumed defiance toward 
 high heaven. In the place where Gau had 
 been (whose God had ruled by love for 
 eight hundred years, and was unappreciat- 
 ed by the crude boasters, the unlearned 
 druj), there now stood castles and man- 
 
120 
 
 CYCLE OF OSIRE 
 
 sions of the false God, Utaya, round 
 whom a million sentinels armed for battle 
 were stationed to protect and do his will. 
 
 Hither came Osire and over the battle- 
 ments raised his ship, and brought it into 
 the arena of the Council of hada. Then, 
 halting, bade his marshals proclaim his 
 voice: Come forth, O Utaya; behold my 
 power. Thy sentinels stand appalled. 1 
 raised my hosts by higher law, and stand 
 on my feet in thy citadel. 
 
 Utaya said: Strange and audacious God. 
 From what unmannerly region hast thou 
 sprung? Know thou, Gods should kneel 
 outside my walls and beg to know my will 
 for an audience. Then Osire determined 
 to hear his arguments, and thus spake: 
 
 From Great Jehovih, I am come. I 
 kneel to none save Him. To do His will 
 in reverence am I come in power and ma- 
 jesty. But erst I demolish thy pitiful 
 walls, and cast thee down, suppliant, to do 
 my will, tell me wherein excusest thou thy- 
 self to turn from the exalted heavens and 
 build here a kingdom of slaves for thy 
 own glory? 
 
 Utaya said: O thou jester! Erst I de- 
 molish thee and thy ship, and enslave thy 
 hosts as mine, I will then, pacify thy worth- 
 less curiosity, that thou mayest hereafter 
 know thy lesson well. But first, thou hast 
 mocked me for my slaves. What more are 
 thy hosts? Hast thou not tampered with 
 their too willing love by stories of thy un- 
 seen Jehovih, and persuaded them to suffer 
 thee to lead them on to glory? Now I de- 
 clare before thee, there is no Jehovih, no 
 All Person. Hence, thy philosophy is 
 founded on falsehood. The space is be- 
 fore us; the worlds are before us; there is 
 nothing more. Let him who will, assume 
 a kingdom; let him who will, be a slave. 
 I am Apollo. 
 
 Osire said: When I shall have cast 
 thee down, thou mightest say it was merely 
 because it so happened, that one was 
 stronger than another. So, then, that thou 
 mayest remember my words are more in 
 wisdom than in blind force, hear me whilst 
 thou can, for it is not long that I can talk 
 to such as thou. He who admitteth the uni- 
 verse moveth in harmony and discipline, 
 already admitteth the All Person, Jehovih. 
 He who denieth the All Person, Jehovih, 
 denieth unity in all things. If all things 
 
 are not in unity, then are all things divided, . 
 one against another. Wherefore, if there 
 be greater strength in unison than in isola- 
 tion, then therein hath unison won the bat- 
 tle and become the All Person. 
 
 Touching the matter of slaves; there is 
 but one Master; and He ruleth over all; 
 but it lieth in the power of each and every 
 soul to attune himself to the All Person, 
 which is freedom. Of such are my hosts. 
 Thy slaves attune themselves to thee. They 
 cannot rise higher than thou. My hosts 
 have the universe for their model. Be- 
 cause thou canst not find the cause of thy 
 coming into life, why not say thou: A 
 name I will call Him, and it shall be Jeho- 
 vih? 
 
 And now Utaya began with a long dis- 
 course, which Osire waited not to hear, 
 but turned to his marshals, saying: Break 
 ye down the walls of Gau, and raise me ten 
 thousand pillars of fire. I will here rebuild 
 Jehovih's kingdom. Let the es'enaurs 
 chant, All Hail to Osire, God of Earth! 
 
 At which the astonished Utaya stood si- 
 lently, as if to know if it were real, or but a 
 frenzied dream, that any one should deny 
 his power which had been established for 
 three hundred years. Out of the ship came 
 the hosts, and without waiting to be as- 
 signed their part, every one in time to the 
 music took their place in the citadel. Osire 
 strode forward, and by the majesty of his 
 power, overturned the throne of Utaya, 
 the false God, and heaped the rubbish 
 aside. Then stretching forth his hand, he 
 said: 
 
 In Thy name, O Jehovih, and by vir- 
 tue of Thy power in me vested, do I here 
 command the elements to do my will, and 
 raise me a throne worthy of Thy Immortal 
 Son. And quickly the substance of a 
 throne was brought to the place by an un- 
 seen power, and Osire formed it into a 
 throne, and hung it round with transparent 
 tapestry, woven with the elements of silver 
 and gold. 
 
 Meanwhile the laborers of Osire over- 
 turned the walls of Utaya's city, and set 
 free his millions of slaves, even whilst 
 Utaya's officers, panic-stricken, dropped on 
 their knees, pleading for pity, or fled to 
 the earth. And Utaya, conjecturing the 
 worthlessness of his stuff, compared to that 
 which descended from the higher heavens, 
 
CYCLE OF OSIRE 
 
 121 
 
 shouted and called in vain to his most 
 steadfast devotees. 
 
 Osire's work could be compared to a 
 man overturning the toys of a child. And 
 Utaya, to prove his faith in himself, stood 
 sole spectator, unmoved, but helpless, won- 
 dering what would happen next. But now 
 Osire, with no words of explanation or ex- 
 cuse, ascended the new throne and gave 
 the sign of Jehovih's name, which was an- 
 swered by his mighty hosts; when, from 
 the vault of heaven above there descended 
 mantles of light, matchless in brilliancy. 
 
 Utaya was himself illumined, and all his 
 former evil deeds and cruelty stood out as 
 if in huge black spots; and round on every 
 side stood millions of souls, all pure, and 
 transparent, washed by the ordeal of time 
 and holy works. But Utaya was not all 
 evil, or short in owning an honorable ad- 
 versary; and so, quickly comprehending 
 his awful plight in the midst of purity, first 
 let fall a tear, which in pity blinded him 
 from witnessing further his dire humilia- 
 tion, and next weeping like a beaten 
 school-boy, he cried out: 
 
 Enough. Enough. Thou God. Take 
 me hence from thy dissolving fire. I need- 
 ed but to witness some great God's deed 
 to find proof of mine own worthlessness. 
 
 But Osire was not new to such a situa- 
 tion, and proceeded with the affairs of hea- 
 ven, appointing officers and laborers, and 
 apportioning his High Council to do Jeho- 
 vih's will, and so left Utaya alone a while 
 in his own torments. 
 
 O give me relief, cried Utaya, thou God 
 of heaven and earth. I consume. I burn 
 in purity's flame. For pity's sake, turn 
 down the consuming fire. 
 
 Osire halted from his labors long 
 enough to answer thus: All Light cannot 
 cease for convenience of one man. Clothe 
 thyself, O false one, with robes of dark- 
 ness, and hide thy cruel butcheries. Thou 
 that wouldst have made slaves of my hosts, 
 should be made of holier metal than to 
 plead for help. Behold, not one of thy 
 slaves have I taken, or asked to bow in 
 obedience. To the righteous, the worlds 
 are free. Only evil men and evil Gods 
 quail before Jehovih's ceaseless fire. 
 
 Meanwhile Utaya drew close around 
 himself his glittering robes, and pulled his 
 flashing crown down over his scalded eyes, 
 
 which worthless fabric but fed the fury of 
 the All Light that shone from the throne 
 of God, Osire's resting place. The slaves 
 of Utaya had fled, or lay piteously pros- 
 trate, speechless with fear and wonder. 
 Over these the hosts of Osire watched, and 
 hastily took them beyond the now rapidly 
 rising pillars of fire, where they were tem- 
 porarily housed. 
 
 Still the voice of Utaya rang aloud for 
 help and pity; but to him none came. Then 
 he saw that the prostrate victims fared bet- 
 ter, and were less conspicuous. So Utaya 
 cast himself prostrate, along with the rub- 
 bish of his former throne. Then Osire 
 sent Yesta, sister of Atonas, Goddess of 
 Opsa, in etherea, to rescue him, and mantle 
 him around with balm from the upper hea- 
 vens. 
 
 So Yesta and her band took Utaya 
 hence, far beyond the boundaries of the 
 newly built Gau. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 Osire spake from the throne, saying: 
 Proclaim in the east and west, and north 
 and south, that which has transpired in 
 Gau. Go tell the false Gods and Lords in 
 hada that Osire has come. 
 
 Messengers started forth in every quar- 
 ter of the world, inspired by the impetuous 
 utterances of the commanding God. And 
 so, half breathless, and in hastening speed, 
 these young Gods and Goddesses, the mes- 
 sengers, dropped in upon the Lordly de- 
 famers of holiness, and told the tale of the 
 overturned Gau where proud Utaya fell. 
 And they inspired the false rulers to ex- 
 pect even a worse calamity. 
 
 Osire called his council, and appointed 
 new places, with new officers, having no- 
 thing in common with all past administra- 
 tions of Gods of Earth. So far, these ap- 
 pointments were from his etherean hosts, 
 and moved by the fire of his own energy. 
 Some were to build, some to survey and 
 lay the course of streets, and places of hab- 
 itation, and yet others to remove the old 
 hospitals, nurseries and factories, and 
 make way for new ones. 
 
 There were millions of souls now scat- 
 tered and lost in dire confusion, struggling 
 in the outside darkness, whence rose a con- 
 stant wail of fear and torment, strangely 
 wild, compared to the glorious light fast 
 
122 
 
 CYCLE OF OSIRE 
 
 spreading from the rising pillars of fire 
 about the throne of God. Osire's hosts, 
 fifty millions, attuned to harmony, and pre- 
 cision, were proceeding fast with their 
 labor; not one but knew his part. 
 
 Here, a road. Osire would speak; or 
 with his hand command, An otevan to 
 those helpless slaves, and his etherean 
 workmen rushed to fulfill his commands. 
 No loss of time or space to inquire how 
 the matter should be done; for heaven's 
 trained workmen had learned the power of 
 concentrated effort, and the power of 
 knowledge by which the elements stoop to 
 do their wills. 
 
 Jehovih saith: To learn the elements 
 and master them is to become a God or 
 Goddess. How, then, may the false Gods, 
 by evil deeds, fortify their thrones? My 
 etherean hosts come unarmed, and by a 
 breath blow away their mighty kingdoms. 
 
 And so it was in Gau. Only one Earth 
 day had come and gone since Utaya reign- 
 ed over a hundred million slaves, who daily 
 brought tribute up from the earth to orna- 
 ment his crown-like city; and now the 
 dawn of another world stood supreme in 
 the demolished kingdom.. 
 
 What more pitiful sight than to see the 
 former slaves still loyal to their deposed 
 Utaya; coming to him in his banish- 
 ment, fifty millions, swearing terrible oaths 
 of fidelity to him forever. For so the 
 Great Spirit created man, to even wed 
 himself to misery and ignorance, to prove 
 a most foolish love. And but for Utaya's 
 guardians his very slaves had smothered 
 him, in desperate effort to manifest fidelity. 
 
 Then spake Yesta to him, saying: Raise 
 thy voice against this unseemly crowd, and 
 be commander still, at least to save thy- 
 self. Remember how Jehovih gives this 
 lesson to mortals, to say to evil: Away! 
 For to allow first one and then another to 
 fasten upon thee is as much a crime as a 
 debauched passion unchecked. Bid them 
 begone. For love of self, is a gift from 
 Great Jehovih. Be thou thyself. It will be 
 better for them also. 
 
 Utaya, struggling, said: Alas, fair an- 
 gel, these were my slaves. The hardest 
 blow of all is their acknowledged love. 
 The fire of the throne of Osire was tame to 
 this. For hundreds of years, I gave these 
 creatures pangs and wretchedness, and now 
 
 they give me love. I cannot drive them 
 hence. 
 
 And Utaya bowed his head, sobbing, 
 for such sudden great truths turned all his 
 judgment into the darkness of his past 
 deeds and wickedness, even whilst crowd- 
 ing close on every side, the fifty million 
 kept up their ceaseless assurances of endless 
 love. Nor was there any way open to flight 
 from their ignorant jargon and foul breath. 
 So when Yesta saw how helplessly Utaya 
 had given up, she raised her hand, saying: 
 What shall I do, O Jehovih? 
 
 And the Light descended, and Jehovih 
 spake through Yesta, saying: Flesh of 
 My flesh, created I man. From Mine own 
 spirit gave I man a spirit also; and unto 
 all men alike gave I all things in My 
 worlds. But some men are not content 
 with what I gave, but ask for more, even 
 that they may have their fellows for sub- 
 jects. To these I have given in answer to 
 their prayers. Behold thou, then, O man, 
 why seekest thou to put away to-day even 
 what, a day since, thou didst pray for? 
 They are as good to-day as yesterday. 
 Thou hast said: Man can make himself 
 whatsoever he will. So, thy Creator is 
 worthless to thee. Love is the lightest of 
 all burdens. If thou desirest not to carry 
 their love, how didst thou carry their hate 
 so long? Nevertheless, if thou desirest, 
 thou canst put them away. They are thine, 
 to do as thou wilt. 
 
 Utaya said: How can I put them away? 
 I cannot reason with fifty millions. Nay, 
 before I persuaded a score, the first ones, 
 so ignorant, would forget what I said. 
 Tell me, then, thou Goddess, what shall I 
 do to free myself from this great multi- 
 tude? 
 
 Yesta said: Call not on me, but on thy 
 Creator; and not to be freed for thine own 
 good, but for wisdom to do some good 
 unto them over whom thou hast so long 
 been a remorseless tyrant. These are a 
 small curse to thee, compared to thine 
 own judgment, for from thyself thou canst 
 never flee. Thou shalt undo thy selfish 
 deeds, which thou hast practiced so long. 
 So. turn thou at once, and make oath to 
 Him who made thee, that from this time 
 forth thou wilt do good unto others with 
 all thy wisdom and strength. 
 
CYCLE OF OSIRE 
 
 123 
 
 Utaya said: Alas, thy words are wise 
 and holy, but I have no faith. 
 
 Yesta said: Say not this. Thy words 
 are another bondage on thy soul. To say, 
 I have no faith, is to imprison thyself 
 away from the All Light. Come, haste, or 
 I leave thee; for if thou profess not faith, 
 why shall I longer labor with thee? Say 
 thou, I have faith in Thee, O Jehovih. I 
 can, I will raise up these whom I have 
 cast down. 
 
 Utaya wept, and thus answered: O that 
 I had faith like unto thee. But for long 
 years I taught myself that prayer to Jeho- 
 vih was not required of one so great and 
 strong as I. Alas, I smothered out the fire. 
 And, amidst his sobs, Utaya fell prostrate 
 at Yesta's feet. 
 
 Quickly now she raised her slender 
 hand toward high heaven, saying: O Je- 
 hovih, by Thy power vested in me, I here 
 encircle this, Thy prostrate child, with ad- 
 amantine light. Down from above there 
 came phosporescent flames of light, and 
 Yesta drew a circle round about, while the 
 multitude stood back and looked on in 
 wonder and fear but the surging mass be- 
 yond pressed forward, shouting: Utaya! 
 Utaya! 
 
 Little by little, Yesta extended the light, 
 and her assistants put up a structure to 
 guard the place, so that in a little while it 
 was like a miniature throne in heaven. 
 Yesta then assumed the throne and so 
 took command, placing helpless Utaya by 
 her side. Meanwhile, her assistants sped 
 through the multitude, making roadways, 
 and selecting out the most intelligent of 
 the former slaves and making guards of 
 them. 
 
 Yesta said to Utaya: Now will I give 
 thee a lesson in righteousness; for thou 
 shalt educate and develop all this host, thy 
 former slaves, to thine own level, before 
 thou shalt be raised. Think not it is easy 
 to assume to be a God or a Lord, or even 
 a mortal king. They that make servants 
 of others must also raise them up to be an- 
 gels of light. Heaven is just, as well as 
 bountiful. To whom Jehovih hath given 
 bountifully, it is commanded he shall give 
 bountifully. For hundreds of years thou 
 hast had the service of these hapless crea- 
 tures; so shalt thou now serve them by 
 making them intelligent men and women. 
 
 Yea, till the lowest of them are thine own 
 equals, of whom thou canst be proud, and 
 say before the Father: Behold, my sister! 
 Behold, my brother! — thou, Utaya, shalt 
 not be free. 
 
 Utaya said: I perceive thy words are 
 from the All Highest. This is justice. I 
 perceive now that whilst I rated myself su- 
 preme judge of right and wrong, I judged 
 with partiality to myself. Yea, without an 
 All Highest, I perceive there can be no jus- 
 tice in heaven or earth. O Thou All 
 Light, how can I approach Thee? I have 
 been feeding myself with an endless poi- 
 son; my darkness was my fortress. Teach 
 me the way, O thou angel of Light. What- 
 soever Jehovih wills, that will I do, from 
 this time onward, with all my wisdom and 
 strength. 
 
 So Yesta restored order, and divided 
 the multitude into many parts, and sent 
 officers amongst them to select and assort 
 them, so that as soon as Osire should allot 
 asylums and schools for them, they could 
 be taken thereto. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 Osire lost no time, but installed officers 
 in Gau, and established his Council in as 
 short a time as possible, crowning Ote 
 God on the throne temporarily whilst he 
 himself went forth to other regions to 
 overturn false Gods and Lords. Leaving 
 a sufficient guard and council, Osire, with 
 a host of twenty million, went westward in 
 atmospherea, over the central part of the 
 great north lands, where Wotchak, a false 
 God, was established with a hundred mill- 
 ion slaves, to do his will. 
 
 Wotchak, having been advised by mes- 
 sengers of Osire's approach to Earth's 
 heavens, supposing Osire to be from some 
 remote star, and not knowing there were 
 etherean worlds in the firmament, had 
 walled his kingdom round with a new wall, 
 and doubly fortified his throne, and attired 
 himself and officers gaudily, hoping to 
 overawe the coming God. 
 
 To Wotchak Osire came, and waited 
 not to be announced, nor halted for his 
 sentinels, driving his ship straight up to 
 the throne. 
 
 Halt, halt! cried the astonished Wot- 
 chak. Who dares to profane my throne 
 and set all the rules of virtuous Gods at 
 
124 
 
 CYCLE OF OSIBE 
 
 defiance? Come down from thy ship and 
 crawl on thy belly to thy sovereign God. 
 Know thou, I am great Apollo. 
 
 But Osire deigned only to say: By 
 what authority hast thou made slaves of 
 Jehovih's sons and daughters to augment 
 thy self glory? 
 
 And not waiting a reply, stepped down 
 before the throne, even while a thousand 
 well drilled ethereans stood with him in 
 the form of a star. Then the upper light 
 descended in great brilliancy. Wotchak 
 was frightened, and fled from his throne, 
 and all his council with him. Then spake 
 Osire, saying to his hosts: 
 
 Suffer not this false God and his council 
 to escape. Encircle them around and hold 
 them, to know my will and the decree of 
 Jehovih. Presently, the ethereans brought 
 back Wotchak, who cried out: O let me 
 go! Take all, but let me go! What am I 
 to thee? 
 
 Osire answered him: Such hath been 
 the history of these heavens. In ages 
 gone, the usurping false Gods were suf- 
 fered to go their way, leaving their former 
 subjects helpless on the hands of the eth- 
 erean hosts. That day is past. I am come 
 to make such Gods know that their fate 
 and responsibilities rest on the decrees of 
 the Higher One, even the Creator, Jeho- 
 vih. Behold, thou hast cast down and 
 blighted a hundred million of Jehovih's 
 children, making slaves of them to do thy 
 will. As thou wert the cause of their fallen 
 state, from liberty to bondage, so, now, 
 thou shalt redeem them to freedom, wis- 
 dom and truth. 
 
 Whilst Osire spake, the proper officers 
 let fall the light from the upper heavens, 
 the like of which Wotchak had never seen. 
 Presently all things became transparent, 
 and the enraged Wotchak, foreseeing 
 trouble, thus answered: 
 
 Accuse me not, Thou audacious God. 
 These, my council, urged me hundreds of 
 years ago to my course, only praying they 
 might remain my close advisers. I was 
 their tool, and, if thou desirest justice, 
 make them to feel the sting of repentant 
 labor. Let them have my slaves. I want 
 them not. I have been a most honest, up- 
 right God. 
 
 And now his counselors accused one 
 another, all of them heaping the blame on 
 
 Wotchak. Lighter and lighter grew the 
 etherean flames, from which there was no 
 concealment; and all their former false- 
 hoods and cruel words and evil deeds, 
 were unveiled, disclosing souls dark and 
 hideous, with long covered up crimes, now 
 made bare for the gaze of every eye. 
 
 The scene brought the curious slaves in 
 millions, and they all reassured the suffer- 
 ing false God of their love and loyalty. 
 And when Wotchak looked and beheld the 
 abject wretches who claimed him as their 
 worshipful God, he cried out: Enough! 
 Enough! Unfeeling God! Thou art come 
 in pretended right and peace; and because 
 of thy power imposes on me and my coun- 
 cil torments more terrible than I ever 
 gave to slave of mine. 
 
 Then Osire by waving his hand, caused 
 his hosts to cast aside the false God's 
 throne, with all its glittering gems, and to 
 scatter abroad relics for the multitude. 
 And now three pillars of fire were erect- 
 ed and stood beside Osire and his attend- 
 ants, which took all the strength and cour- 
 age out of Wotchak and his confederates, 
 and they crouched down at Osire's feet. 
 
 Osire called Itu, saying: Take them 
 without, and hand them over to their 
 slaves a while. And Itu and his guard 
 gathered them from the light and bore 
 them hence. Quickly, now, Osire officered 
 this newly conquered place in heaven, and 
 called it Autat, signifying, foundation of 
 perishable laws. And on a new throne, 
 appointed Luce as temporary God, giving 
 him acouncil of one thousand ethereans. 
 And now Osire drew the plan for roads, 
 and temples, and schools, and hospitals, 
 and nurseries, and all such other habita- 
 tions as are required by spirits newborn in 
 heaven, leaving orders to have them com- 
 pleted by a given time. 
 
 Next, Osire ordered the divisions and 
 selections to be made in the now scattered 
 hosts of atmosphereans, and to have them 
 all arrested and put into their proper 
 places. These things he left in the charge 
 of God, Luce, to be carried out. 
 
 Far out in the plateau, Itu and his at- 
 tendants carried Wotchak and his confed- 
 erates, followed by forty million of his for- 
 mer slaves. There Itu left Wotchak and 
 his people, and Itu and his attendants went 
 aside to witness what should transpire. 
 
CYCLE OF OSIRE 
 
 125 
 
 And now Osire departed with his ship 
 and steered southward over the land of 
 Shem, coming to a place in the lower hea- 
 ven called Vibrahj, signifying resplendent, 
 where ruled the false God Daveas, who had 
 eight hundred million slaves, a thousand 
 Lords and ten thousand Governors. And 
 even as Osire rushed in headlong upon the 
 other false Gods, so came he with his fire 
 ship into the great city of Vibrahj, at this 
 time the largest city in the lower heaven. 
 Daveas had been warned by his sentinels, 
 and so came to the front of his capital just 
 in time to see the fearless Osire alight in 
 front of the Council House. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 Osire said: In Jehovih's name, peace 
 be unto thee. But Daveas replied: Nay, 
 in the name of Apollo, who I am. How 
 darest thou to approach my resting place 
 except on thy belly? For four hundred 
 years the honor of my kingdom has been 
 revered by all visiting Gods; but thou com- 
 est as a barbarian. Down, wretch, before I 
 have thee bound and cast into prison. 
 
 Osire said: Why should I not come 
 before thee? Behold the Great Spirit cre- 
 ated the whole universe for His sons and 
 daughters. By what right hast thou usurp- 
 ed any portion of it? And whence thy au- 
 thority to bid me kneel to thee? But if 
 thou canst show me wherein thou hast one 
 just claim to enslave these people, rather 
 let thy argument run thither, for I am come 
 in the name of the Father to liberate them, 
 that they may be prepared for the second 
 and third resurrections. 
 
 Daveas said: Think not that I have 
 neglected to prepare for rebellious Gods 
 like thee. Behold my millions of subjects! 
 What is thy handful? Verily, I tell thee, I 
 have prisons large enough to hold thee and 
 thy hosts. Neither flatter thyself that I am 
 ignorant. For two hundred years I work- 
 ed in the so-called resurrections. I made 
 myself a slave to the multitude, giving all 
 my labor and time. Then I beheld my fol- 
 ly, and so built a third resurrection myself. 
 This is, therefore, my lawful kingdom. 
 Moreover, I tell thee to thy face, thou 
 wretch, there is no higher heaven than 
 mine. Neither comest thou from a hea- 
 ven great as mine. But having great self 
 conceit, thou art come for mischief. I 
 
 have heard of thee in other heavens. But 
 now thou hast put thy head into the halter. 
 Seize him, marshals! Seize him and his 
 hosts! Cast them into prison. 
 
 Osire spake not, but raised his hand 
 upward, and suddenly his hosts cast forth 
 sheets of light brighter than the sun. 
 Daveas stood back affrighted, and his mar- 
 shals fled. Presently, Osire, with a thou- 
 sand attendants, stepped forth in flames of 
 light, and went into the capital and sur- 
 rounded Daveas, the usurper, but touched 
 him not. And now the ship was illumined, 
 and the sentinels of Daveas' Council fled. 
 Then Osire spake, saying: 
 
 By the strength of Thy hand, O Jeho- 
 vih, destroy thou this house and throne. 
 
 Then a great light from the upper hea- 
 vens fell and rested on Osire's palms, and 
 he overthrew the house and throne of Da- 
 veas as easily as though they were made 
 of straw; and as fast as Osire could give 
 the commands his hosts pulled down and 
 scattered the walls and temples. 
 
 Meanwhile the officers of Daveas fled in 
 terror, save such as were overcome by the 
 light, and these fell and buried themselves 
 amidst the rubbish. 
 
 Hold, hold! cried Daveas. Give me air. 
 I am perishing in a consuming fire, and he 
 covered his face with his glittering robes. 
 And now Osire called forth thunder and 
 lightning, and the din and roar confounded 
 all the eight hundred million souls, so they 
 ran no further but stood and waited. 
 
 Osire halted not, but went to a more 
 suitable place to build his throne. Jeho- 
 hovih, Almighty! he cried: Elements of 
 Thy elements, O Father! Found here a 
 throne for Thy son. And whilst his words 
 went forth, the elements rose to do his 
 will, and there was raised a most excellent 
 throne, strong and adamantine, on which 
 Osire ascended. 
 
 Daveas had fallen down flat, weeping 
 and wailing; but Osire, by a motion of the 
 hand, called Wang-te, a most enlightened 
 Archangel, with her attendants, to bear 
 him hence, which was quickly done. 
 
 Now, the place being clear, the hosts 
 of Osire walled around a sufficient space 
 for a city of a thousand million souls, with 
 pillars of light, as brilliant as an arc in 
 etherean firmament. Then Osire ap- 
 pointed Klesta, Dawn Goddess, and he 
 
126 
 
 CYCLE OF OSIRE 
 
 gave her a council of fifty thousand ether- 
 eans. Outside of the walls were Daveas 
 and his eight hundred million subjects, in 
 dire confusion. 
 
 Wang-te, the Archangel, said to Dav- 
 eas: Thou art favored to be free thyself 
 awhile, to organize a new kingdom, but in 
 holiness return and command obedience 
 from this smothering host. Behold, thou 
 hast taught them to believe thou art 
 Apollo. Say to them now: I am not 
 Apollo! I have been false! 
 
 Daveas madly replied: Never! Jeho- 
 vih and His kingdoms accursed be forever! 
 Ye strange spirits, come from far-off king- 
 doms, to despoil and overturn the most 
 righteous place in heaven! Are Jehovih 
 and His servants destroyers? To which 
 Wang-te replied: This is no time for ar- 
 gument. Behold these countless millions! 
 If I withdraw from thee, and my attend- 
 ants also withdraw, thou wilt be as one 
 drowned amidst this sea of ignorance and 
 horrid smells. For pity's sake purge thy- 
 self of thy lifelong falsehoods and treacher- 
 ous tyranny. Announce thyself as Daveas, 
 as thou art, and I can save thee! 
 
 Daveas rudely thrust her aside, saying: 
 Never! I acknowledge to none! If there 
 be a higher heaven, I will ascend thither 
 as I am, Apollo! Wang-te said: In Jeho- 
 vih' s name, put me not off! Remember 
 what thou art and of the little thou hast 
 seen, how powerless thou art before Om- 
 nipotence! Thy fate is like that of all dic- 
 tators, on the verge of a chasm of horrors. 
 
 Daveas waited not to hear her further, 
 but proclaimed aloud, Apollo! Apollo! and 
 stood aside. And presently his former offi- 
 cers rushed to him, and with that came the 
 sea of millions of spirits, unorganized, un- 
 washed, unfed, frightened and mad, for 
 love of the name, Apollo, the meaning of 
 which they knew not; and they became as 
 a knot of serpents, entwined around Da- 
 veas and his officers. And in the terrible 
 brawl not one voice could be distinguished 
 from another. And the outer extreme 
 pressed inward on every side, and present- 
 ly the eight hundred million were as a 
 ball, a knot of darkness, with a dull and 
 rumbling moan within, and fearful clamor 
 on the surface, from which horrid smells 
 issued. 
 
 Wang-te and her attendants hastened 
 back to the throne of Osire, Son of Jeho- 
 vih, to tell what had happened. Osire said: 
 What shall I do, O Father? Then the 
 Light of Jehovih came, and Jehovih spake, 
 saying: Consider My creation, My Son. 
 The young child I made to fall with few 
 bruises; but the full-grown man falleth 
 heavily. Shall I make a separate rule to 
 favor kings and queens of earth, and false 
 Gods in heaven? Nay, I will make of Da- 
 veas an example in heaven, and on earth, 
 also. Because he hath spurned his own 
 name, so will I make both angels and mor- 
 tals to curse and shun the name Daveas. 
 
 Osire said: Proceed ye with my king- 
 dom, in the name of the Father. Let Da- 
 veas remain as he is. 
 
 Then Osire departed, taking the re- 
 mainder of his hosts with him in his fire- 
 ship; and he went to a heavenly place to 
 the westward, where was Seru, a false 
 God, with ten million slaves; and Osire de- 
 stroyed Seru's kingdom also. Next he 
 went to a heavenly place in the north, 
 where Raka, a false God, had several mill- 
 ion slaves; and Osire destroyed his king- 
 dom also, liberating his slaves, and putting 
 a guard over Raka. 
 
 Thus went Osire throughout atmos- 
 pherea, demolishing all the heavenly king- 
 doms of the false Gods, of whom there 
 were in all, seven hundred and eighty; but 
 many of them had not a million subjects. 
 
 Osire and his hosts labored thirty days 
 destroying the kingdoms of the evil Gods, 
 and when this work was completed Osire 
 said to his hosts: In the next thirty days 
 we will build to Jehovih. Take the ship, 
 therefore, to Vibrahj, for there I will found 
 my central kingdom. And after we shall 
 have completed the work of starting the 
 second resurrection on a sure foundation, 
 then will we go down to the earth and 
 overturn the kingdoms of the false Lords 
 with men. 
 
 Jehovih spake to Osire, saying: Send 
 officers out into all the divisions of hea- 
 ven where thou hast destroyed the evil 
 kingdoms, to arrest all the false Gods 
 whom thou hast dispossessed, and bring 
 them hither that I may speak with them. 
 
 Then Osire spake to the officers, say- 
 ing: Go ye out into all the divisions of at- 
 
CYCLE OF OSIRE 
 
 127 
 
 mospherea, and arrest and bring hither 
 all the false Gods whom I have dethroned, 
 saying to each: Osire, God of the lower 
 heavens, commandeth thy presence. Come 
 thou, and hear the Voice of Thy Creator. 
 But many will fear to come because of the 
 Light. Say to all such: The light will be 
 lowered for a short space of time; come, 
 therefore, quickly. 
 
 To all the knots where the false Gods 
 are enveloped, shall ye take sufficient um- 
 brae that ye may release them. But leave 
 a guaid with each knot to hold them in 
 their places. 
 
 The officers went aboard as command- 
 ed, and after many days the false Gods 
 were arrested and brought before the 
 throne of God. And there were assembled, 
 one hundred thousand Archangels, of 
 whom two thousand had risen to the rank 
 of Gods and Goddesses, and thirty thou- 
 sand to the rank of Lords and Lordesses. 
 
 Osire said to the false ones: Greeting 
 in the name of Jehovih! Do not fear me. 
 Be not expectant of torture or punishment. 
 Though I come in all power, my words 
 shall be tempered with wisdom. But I 
 can be no respecter of persons, nor swerve 
 in the least from Jehovih's commandments. 
 In Jehovih's name, I came to deliver those 
 ye had bound; and through Him have I 
 attained power to that end. For I cannot 
 bind you, or cast you in prison. Have not 
 my officers just delivered you from bond- 
 age, and are now holding you free from 
 the knots? 
 
 Most of you are learned men of the sec- 
 ond resurrection; but ye have used your 
 wisdom for self-glorification, being proud 
 to call yourselves Gods; not to teach them 
 of Jehovih and His Kingdoms, but falsely 
 teaching that your own kingdoms were 
 the All Highest, thereby shutting out the 
 true light from the unlearned. 
 
 Jehovih hath blessed you with strong 
 minds and handsome forms, whereupon ye 
 have each of you falsely proclaimed ye were 
 Apollo. Think not that this matter was 
 not known in high heaven. I have here 
 the reports of swift messengers, which were 
 brought to me in the firmament above. I 
 came not in ignorance of what you were 
 doing; neither came I in weakness. More 
 than a hundred thousand million, who 
 have been raised up to etherea from Earth 
 
 and her heavens, stood by my side. 
 Besides these, a million times as many 
 ethereans, from other worlds; and above 
 all of these, the Great Orian Chiefs; and 
 yet beyond, and over all, Great Jehovih! 
 
 Have I not proved my power before 
 you all? Did I go away in a corner and 
 say: Come, I will show you my power? 
 Nay, I came close to you all. As the Fa- 
 ther first proveth power, so have I. That 
 I may talk to you in wisdom, I have had 
 you arrested and brought hither. Hear me 
 then, and remember my words. 
 
 In former cycles, the high Gods who 
 descended to these heavens, finding false 
 Gods, simply liberated their slaves, and put 
 no labor of restitution on the false Gods. 
 This was because the false Gods of those 
 periods were too imbecile and unlearned. 
 But Earth and her heavens have reach- 
 ed a higher state. And with progression 
 cometh responsibility. Ye bound your sub- 
 jects to your kingdoms; and now ye can- 
 not put them aside? Ye taught them your 
 kingdoms were the All Highest and they 
 must now be taught of Jehovih's king- 
 dom. Ye taught them that you were the 
 All Highest Gods! They must now be 
 taught that Jehovih is the All Highest. 
 Ye put aside the ancient rites and cere- 
 monies, wherein the name of Jehovih was 
 used, teaching them to sing to. you only. 
 They must be taught new songs, substitut- 
 ing the Great Spirit, to Whom none can 
 attain, forever. Ye taught them to be un- 
 thinking and contented as slaves. They 
 must now be taught to think for them- 
 selves, and to labor for everlasting liberty. 
 
 And now, touching the law of the res- 
 urrection, remember this is the same in all 
 the created worlds; that the spirit of man 
 groweth by giving away of whatsoever the 
 spirit hath to give. If you have great 
 learning, and you give of it, then more 
 learning shall be added unto you; if ye 
 have goodness of heart, and gentle words, 
 then, by giving this away, more shall be 
 added unto you. If ye have craft in inven- 
 tions or mechanics, and ye bestow of these 
 talents unto others, then will more be add- 
 ed unto you. The corporeal man accumu- 
 lated corporeal things by not giving 
 them away, but the spirit of man only re- 
 ceives greater wisdom by giving away. For 
 he who locketh up the light of the Father 
 
128 
 
 CYCLE OF OSIRE 
 
 that is in him, cannot obtain more light. 
 He who locketh up goodness of heart can- 
 not obtain strength of spirit; and without 
 strength of spirit no man can attain to the 
 third resurrection. But, that men may 
 learn to obtain strength of spirit, the sec- 
 ond resurrection hath been established in 
 atmospherea. 
 
 The chief delight of man shall be, 
 therefore, to find some way to impart his 
 spiritual talents and strength to the great- 
 est possible number of people. Think not 
 that preaching to the ignorant is sufficient; 
 but ye shall take hold with your own hands 
 and show them how to accomplish. Yet 
 not labor alone; for some are so created 
 that ye cannot inspire them without rites 
 and ceremonies and music. 
 
 Now shall a man after having taught 
 and raised up a few, say: Behold, what a 
 good work I have done! But as long as he 
 findeth a man, woman or child who is lack- 
 ing in anything, he shall say to himself: 
 Alas, what I have done is as nothing in the 
 resurrection of my fellows. 
 
 Ye have had your kingdoms. Yea, and 
 boasted of them. Your boasts have as- 
 cended to etherea. Will ye go thither and 
 be asked: Where are your kingdoms? 
 Shall it be said ye shirked the responsi- 
 bility of caring for them whom the Father 
 gave into your keeping? 
 
 Osire ceased; and now a brilliant light 
 descended around about the throne, and Je- 
 hovih spake through Osire, saying: 
 
 As I have given seasons to my corpor- 
 eal worlds, so have I given times in the 
 atmospherean heavens of Earth, where- 
 in my etherean hosts came from my 
 everlasting heavens to accomplish the 
 resurrection of My Brides and Bride- 
 grooms to etherea. And I sent Gods to 
 teach these things to mortals and angels on 
 the earth, and they proclaimed My words, 
 saying: There is no such thing as individ- 
 ual resurrection, for Jehovih created prog- 
 ress to be in compact, that man might 
 learn the strength of unison wherein the 
 Creator is all power because He is the All 
 One. And I caused them to give rites 
 and ceremonies,, chief of which was the 
 oath of service unto Me and My king- 
 doms, wherein many bound themselves, 
 which was, and is, the beginning of lib- 
 erty. And I created examples on earth 
 
 and in the lower heavens, that even the 
 unlearned might understand Me and My 
 works. 
 
 For to him that begetteth children I 
 gave bondage; but this is a bondage that 
 circumventeth not liberty in time to come, 
 for they can ascend to heaven and progress, 
 together better than alone. But some 
 gave themselves up to love earthly things, 
 such as houses and money and kingdoms, 
 which things have no resurrection. Hence, 
 such bondage holdeth the person after 
 death to the thing he loved. And many 
 have set up kingdoms in the lower heavens 
 binding themselves to things that have no 
 resurrection but belong on the plateau in 
 atmospherea where I created them. And 
 to them who have bound themselves to 
 their fellows, saying: I am thy salvation! 
 it is like a young man saying to a maiden: 
 Come, I will be thy husband. And she 
 goeth to him in confidence. Here, then, 
 is bondage, and neither of them can annul 
 that which hath been united; for by their 
 bondage, I am also a party to the contract. 
 And in the same manner, they that assume 
 kingdoms, professing to be Gods of salva- 
 tion, and thus enticing My innocent ones 
 unto themselves, become bound, not only 
 to their subjects, but to the contract ot de- 
 liverance unto salvation. 
 
 The Voice ceased, and Osire said: If a 
 man wed a woman with an evil temper, his 
 glory lieth not in going away from her, 
 but in teaching her to overcome her tem- 
 per; or, if her husband be evil, her glory 
 lieth not in going away from him, but in 
 reforming him. It is wiser to accomplish 
 whatever work Jehovih hath put in thy 
 way, than to desert it for sake of per- 
 sonal comfort. Nevertheless, there is a 
 limit; and to the wise there is power to 
 accomplish much that seemeth impossible. 
 Hear ye, then, my judgment unto you: 
 
 Ye shall again assume kingdoms, 
 and every one have the same subjects he 
 had before. And ye shall be provided with 
 places and thrones and have councils of 
 my Archangels also. And I will give each 
 one of you an assistant God, who shall sit 
 on your right hand for four years, which 
 is the time of this dawn, teaching you what 
 to teach and how to teach it. 
 
 My hosts will now conduct you to the 
 places prepared for you, around which are 
 
CYCLE OF OSIRE 
 
 129 
 
 erected walls of fire. And when ye are 
 safely seated on your thrones, your former 
 subjects shall be brought before you in 
 groups, and adjudged to labor, and to 
 schools, and such other places as are suit- 
 ed to them, according to their strength 
 and talents. And ye shall not be free from 
 this labor until you have delivered your 
 subjects unto the third resurrection. 
 
 My hosts shall labor with you to this 
 end, that Jehovih may be glorified in your 
 harvests for the emancipated worlds. 
 Therefore, in Jehovih's Name, receive ye 
 ordination from my hands, by the power 
 and wisdom of the Great Spirit. 
 
 The officers showed them how to make 
 the sign of Jehovih's Name, and how to 
 stand before the throne; and then Osire 
 said: By Thy Love, Wisdom and Power, 
 O Jehovih, do I anoint these, Thy Gods, 
 for Thy service, and for the exaltation of 
 Thy kingdoms, forever! Amen. 
 
 The light was now becoming so bril- 
 liant that many of the newly made Gods 
 quailed before it But the marshals stood 
 beside them, and they passed before the 
 throne of Osire, where they were crowned 
 and arrayed as Gods of the second resur- 
 rection; after which they were again con- 
 ducted before the Council, and saluted in 
 the sign of Jehovih's Name; and from 
 thence they were taken to the kingdoms 
 prepared for them to the time of martial 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 Thus Osire established Vibraj, the re- 
 splendent heaven, with a thousand and 
 eight hundred sub-kingdoms, in atmos- 
 pherea, all under the commandments of 
 the central kingdom. And then he estab- 
 lished the roadways between them, and 
 appointed seven hundred thousand messen- 
 gers. And the several sub-kingdoms es- 
 tablished their places of learning and la- 
 bor; their hospitals and nurseries, and 
 their innumerable asaphs, the receivers of 
 es'yans. 
 
 Osire said: Behold, there is order in 
 heaven. Now will I appoint a God to hold 
 dominion two hundred years; and during 
 the remainder of the dawn of dan I will 
 assist him. Let the examiners search, 
 amongst my hosts, from such as sprang 
 from Earth. 
 
 So the examiners searched; and after 
 thirty days they selected Konas; and when 
 Osire was informed, he sent a thousand of 
 his own attendants, in an otevan, and 
 they brought Konas to Vibraj, to Jeho- 
 vih's throne. Osire said: 
 
 Greeting, in the name of the Father! 
 Thou art chosen above all others; and, 
 after the dawn of dan is ended, thou shalt 
 be God of Earth for two hundred years. 
 Before the ascent of my hosts and of my- 
 self, behold I will crown thee. Till then 
 thou shalt sit on my throne, and fill my 
 place whilst I am absent. 
 
 I have now restored order in heaven, 
 having given all the inhabitants a purpose 
 in concert, whereby their resurrection is 
 founded. Now will I go down to the false 
 Lord's kingdom, on the earth, and to the 
 mortal kings and queens, and restore or- 
 der there also. 
 
 Konas said: Thy will and Jehovih's be 
 done! I am exalted and rejoiced in what 
 is bestowed upon me. Make me strong 
 and wise, O Jehovih, that I may glorify 
 Thy kingdoms! 
 
 So, after due preparation, Osire de- 
 parted privately, taking with him one hun- 
 dred thousand attendants, going down to 
 the earth and to the false Lords' king- 
 doms, in the cities and temples of mor- 
 tals. 
 
 Seven days Osire spent traveling round 
 about the earth, visiting angels and mor- 
 tals, but telling none who he was, or what 
 was his object; and then he halted his ote- 
 van, which had been built for the purpose, 
 in the regions of the mountains of We-ont- 
 ka-woh, in Western Jaffeth. He said: 
 
 We-ont-ka-woh shall be my headquar- 
 ters for a season. Here, then, will I found 
 the first Lord's kingdom for mortals, and 
 inasmuch as mortals have made an idol of 
 Apollo, so will I cast down Apollo, and 
 make them know that I, Osire am Lord of 
 Earth. Then spake We'taing, saying: 
 
 Behold the glory of Jehovih from the 
 first! In our journey around the earth we 
 found the I'hins not idolators, but still 
 worshipers of the Great Spirit, Jehovih. 
 But as to the half-breeds, who can under- 
 stand them? They believe nothing; they 
 believe everything. They ask the idol for 
 rain, and for dry weather; for strength to 
 slay the Druks; for flesh to eat, and for 
 
130 
 
 CYCLE OF OSIRE 
 
 famine to be visited on their enemies. 
 They are as living prey for drujas to feast 
 on; they invite the darkest of all evil. And 
 to do their wills in return, the drujas, the 
 evil spirits, busy themselves inoculating the 
 air with poison to kill their enemies. 
 
 Osire said: With the Thins we have 
 little to do; but as to the Ghans and the 
 I'huans, they shall be converted into dis- 
 believers of the presence of all spirits, save 
 two, Jehovih and satan. To accomplish 
 which end, I will give them three figures: 
 The signs of seasons, which shall represent 
 the Creator in all the parts of the living; 
 the sign of the sun, with motion and all 
 life coming forth; and the hand of man. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 Through Osire, Jehovih said: 
 
 I created man with a corporeal life, 
 that he might learn corporeal things; but 
 behold the I'huans have lost all energy to 
 acquire earthly knowledge, depending on 
 their familiar spirits for information on 
 everything; thereby wasting their mortal 
 lives in non-impiovement. So that when 
 they die and enter heaven they are easily 
 made slaves of by evil spirits. Better were 
 it for them had they no knowledge of spirit 
 life, that they might put to service the tal- 
 ents I created within them. See to this 
 matter, O my Sons and Daughters; for 
 their desire for the presence of the spirits 
 of the dead will draw fetals upon them- 
 selves, and they will go down in darkness 
 like the ancients. 
 
 The Voice departed, and then Osire 
 said: Hear me, my brothers and sisters; 
 this is my commandment to you, and to 
 your successors. 
 
 Possess ye the temples and oracles, 
 where the familiar spirits speak; neither 
 aUow ye familiars to come to kings, nor 
 queens, nor governors, nor to leaders nor 
 rulers of men; but take possession of all 
 such, and answer ye the corporeans with 
 corporeal knowledge only. 
 
 And that ye may be as a unit unto 
 mortals, give ye all the same name, 
 Jehovih through His son Osire. For when 
 ye answer at the oracle, or in the altar or 
 temple, they will ask who the spirit is; and 
 ye shall say: Osire, Son of Jehovih; doing 
 this in my name and the Father's. 
 
 And when ye speak by entrancement, 
 through the seers and prophets, also assert 
 the same thing. And they will ask: Why 
 has the Son of Jehovih come to us? And 
 ye shall say: 
 
 Because ye are an idolatrous people, 
 worshiping before stone and wood; where- 
 by evil spirits take advantage of you, and 
 rule you to your downfall. 
 
 And they will reason amongst them- 
 selves, saying: How know we, then, that 
 thou thyself be not an evil spirit? And ye 
 shall say: It is well that ye ask this, for 
 I declare unto you, ye shall not worship 
 Osire, but only Jehovih, the Creator. This 
 doctrine only is safe. 
 
 Again they will say: Who is satan and 
 his attendants? Ye shall answer: Who- 
 ever professeth any name except Jehovih 
 is of satan. 
 
 Now whilst ye are thus reasoning with 
 them, certain ones in the temple will be 
 worked by the familiar spirits, writhing 
 and twisting, and ye shall say to the next 
 akin: Behold, I will tell thee how to cast 
 out the evil spirit. Thou shalt say: I 
 charge, in the name of Jehovih, to depart. 
 And they will do this, and at the time 
 they use the words: In the name 
 of Jehovih, depart! ye shall drive hence the 
 familiars, thus proving the power of Je- 
 hovih greater than all spirits. 
 
 But that this matter may spread rap- 
 idly, and be valued highly, impart the 
 name of Jehovih in secret, not allowing 
 them to speak it aloud. Choose ye, there- 
 fore, certain mortals, and ordain them 
 through the king, and their labor shall be 
 to cast out evil spirits. 
 
 It will come to pass in many places 
 where ye dispossess the false Lords and 
 their confederates, these evil spirits will 
 inoculate the cattle and beasts of burden 
 with poison, and they will die; and the 
 evil spirits will show themselves to the 
 dogs, and cause them to howl; and the 
 evil spirits will obsess the swine, which are 
 easily influenced, and the swine will appear 
 drunk and foolish. All of which things 
 ye shall prophecy to mortals beforehand, 
 thereby attesting the wisdom of the Great 
 Spirit. 
 
 After these things are accomplished 
 mortals will say further: Behold, thou 
 Son of Jehovih, erst thou came Apollo told 
 
CYCLE OF OSIEE 
 
 131 
 
 us when the plant, and when to reap, when 
 to bring the male and female cattle to- 
 gether; but now that we have put him 
 aside, what shall we do? And ye shall 
 answer them: 
 
 Come in the starlight and I will give 
 you the signs, that ye may know these 
 things yourselves. And where ye speak in 
 the oracle or by entrancement, ye shall 
 point out to them certain stars, and teach 
 them the names thereof; and certain 
 groups of stars, with their names also; and 
 ye shall show them the travel of the sun, 
 north and south, and give them a table of 
 onk, divided into twelve groups, with 
 twelve lines coming from the sun. 
 
 And ye shall raise up priests by inspira- 
 tion, and by entrancement, and through 
 them illustrate the position of the sun in 
 the signs of the onk. And the priests 
 shall explain these things to the unlearned, 
 that they may comprehend of their own 
 knowledge. 
 
 When these things are accomplished ye 
 shall inspire the I'huans to go to the Thins 
 and ask to be circumcised unto Jehovih; 
 and the I'hins, being also under inspira- 
 tion, will bestow them with the sign. 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 When Osire had completed his instruc- 
 tions to his hosts, he sent messengers to 
 Vibraj, saluting, in the name of Jehovih, 
 calling for one million ethereans; and 
 when they had come Osire divided them 
 into ten thousand groups, giving each 
 group one or more of his attendants, 
 whom he had instructed. When all of 
 them were in readiness for the work, Osire 
 said: 
 
 Experience hath proven that to dispos- 
 sess familiar spirits in one place is but to 
 drive them to another. It is wise, there- 
 fore, that in the same day ye make an at- 
 tack in one city or temple, ye shall do so 
 in the principal places all over the earth, 
 giving the familiars no place to fasten 
 upon. Therefore, let the time of attack, in 
 each and every place, be at the begin- 
 ning of sunrise on the morrow; and ye 
 shall possess all the temples, and places of 
 the oracles, and the cities, and the kings, 
 queens, rulers and leaders of men, driving 
 hence, by stratagem or by force, all 
 the false Lords, and all spirits professing 
 
 the name of Apollo, or any representative 
 spirit in the name of Apollo or Thor. 
 
 And mortals will immediately recog- 
 nize that some change is going on in the 
 unseen world; and they will go to the 
 places of spirit communion, asking for 
 Apollo to explain; and ye shall answer: 
 Apollo is cast out! Hear ye the wisdom of 
 the Great Spirit, Jehovih! After which ye 
 shall instruct them as I have commanded. 
 
 So the ethereans drove out the false 
 Lords of the earth, and they banished the 
 familiars of all the kings, queens and 
 leaders of men. And the ethereans taught 
 in the temples and oracles, by entrance- 
 ment and by inspiration, even as com- 
 manded by Jehovih, through his son, 
 Osire. But in all places the Great Spirit's 
 name was made a secret; and it was com- 
 manded of mortals that His name should 
 only be spoken in a low whisper, 
 because Jehovih speaketh to the soul of 
 man silently. And these things were es- 
 tablished; and this was the first universal 
 teaching of the Great Spirit to mortals. 
 
 And Osire decreed: One Lord shall ye 
 give to every city and oracle; but every 
 Lord shall profess Jehovih, being his Son. 
 
 And this was also accomplished; and 
 when the people consulted the oracles as 
 to who the spirit was, the answer was: Je- 
 hovih, through his Son, Lord of Earth or 
 God of Earth. But it was made lawful to 
 use the names Lord and God with audible 
 words; and they were thus used and spok- 
 en by mortals as the substitutive words, 
 permissible in public, in place of the name 
 Jehovih. 
 
 Osire said: It is an easy matter to rule 
 over the kings and queens and prophets, 
 and all learned people, but not so easy to 
 rule over the ignorant, who, having been 
 accustomed to worship Apollo through the 
 idols will long continue to do so. There- 
 fore, ye shall cause the kings to issue 
 edicts prohibiting familiar spirits, and for- 
 bidding soothsayers and workers of magic; 
 and teach ye mortals that these things 
 come of satan. 
 
 This was also done, according to the 
 commandments; and now there was no 
 place left for familiar spirits to obsess 
 mortals. And these spirits distributed 
 themselves after the manner of the spirits 
 of the olden time, some going into swine 
 
132 
 
 CYCLE OF OSIRE 
 
 and living with them; whereupon Osire 
 commanded his hosts to inspire the kings 
 and queens to pass laws prohibiting the 
 eating of swine's flesh, lest mortals be- 
 come bound with fetals. Accordingly, this 
 law was established on the earth. Some of 
 the dispossessed spirits went into the for- 
 ests to dwell, and some to the fountains 
 and mists in waterfalls; others, who were 
 depraved, dwelt in the fisheries and slaugh- 
 ter houses, and still others in the kennels, 
 with dogs and cats. Nevertheless there 
 were many mortals who were dealers in 
 magic and witchery, and these had an 
 abundance of familiars. And when such 
 mortals died the familiars went to their 
 sons and daughters; and so it was said of 
 them they inherited the gift of magic. 
 
 Osire, having overcome the evil spirits, 
 now called a council at We-ont-ka-woh; 
 and there came five hundred thousand 
 angels. 
 
 Osire said: In Jehovih's name will I 
 now deliver them I have cast out; and ye 
 shall labor in conjunction with the Gods 
 of atmospherea to this end. Behold, I 
 have had the familiars enumerated, and 
 there are more than six thousand million 
 of them on earth. Ye shall go forth, there- 
 fore, into all the divisions of the earth and 
 proclaim a great festival, to be held in 
 We-ont-ka-woh, inviting them hither. And 
 ye shall provide them conveyance, bring- 
 ing them across the seas in suitable ves- 
 sels; and when they are congregated here 
 I will destroy the ships so that they can- 
 not return. 
 
 This was accomplished, and more than 
 five thousand million spirits came to the 
 festival, where were provided for them 
 food and clothes of fantastic colors to 
 please the eye of the ignorant; and when 
 they were provided with these things they 
 were entertained with music and dancing, 
 they themselves being taught to take part. 
 For seventy days the festival lasted, and 
 each day varied from another, and the 
 multitude became so intoxicated with de- 
 light and so broken off from their old 
 habits and associations that they forgot all 
 about the ships and conveyances. 
 
 Osire spake to his council in private, 
 saying: Provide ye an airiata large enough 
 for all these people. So, whilst the festi 
 val was going on the proper workmen 
 
 built the vessel, and its capacity was suffi- 
 cient to carry all the multitude of spirits, 
 besides a sufficiency of regimen for them 
 on a long journey. 
 
 Now after the festival had lasted sev- 
 enty days, Osire proclaimed order that he 
 might speak unto them. He said: 
 
 Brothers and sisters, in the name of 
 Jehovih, greeting to you all. I am about 
 to depart to a higher world. That ye 
 might hear my voice, I proclaimed order. 
 That ye may rejoice in my words, I speak 
 in love and tenderness. My home is in a 
 world far away, where there is no suffer- 
 ing, no sorrow. And the spirit of my peo- 
 ple is radiant with light. I would tell you 
 of the beauty and glory of my home, but 
 it would not be just to you. Ye would no 
 longer be content to remain here. Be- 
 cause ye suffered, and my soul was full of 
 pity, I made this festival. The Great 
 Spirit taught me how to make food and 
 clothes, and to travel far and be not afraid. 
 All the people where I live can hear the 
 Voice of the Great Spirit. They learn all 
 things by first learning to hear Him. His 
 wisdom supplieth every want. My love 
 will remain with you, but it will be a long 
 time before I come again. The time of 
 the festival is ended. Your time has come 
 to return to your old places with these 
 Lords of yours whom you have worshiped 
 so long. 
 
 When Osire began to speak the people 
 desired at once to go whither he would 
 decree; and when he suggested for them 
 to return to their former Lords, who were 
 also present, they answered with a uni- 
 versal voice: Nay, never more with them! 
 
 Osire said: I perceive ye desire to go 
 with me and my hosts. I have learned to 
 understand your souls. But do ye under- 
 stand me? I mentioned the great glories 
 in my heavens, but I did not tell you that 
 we worked to make them; yea, we work 
 every day. The Great Spirit made the tree 
 to get its food and clothes without labor; 
 but, behold, it hath no power to travel. 
 Some things in the world labor not; but 
 man, who hath neither feathers, nor hair 
 to cover his body, is provided with talents. 
 Talents are the greatest of all gifts. The 
 air and the ground provide the substance 
 of fruit and foliage to the tree, but the 
 spirit who hath talent can find the sub- 
 
CYCLE OF OSIRE 
 
 133 
 
 stance of fruit and foliage in the air, and 
 gather it. 
 
 Lights of various colors were now 
 being set up by the ethereans and the 
 place enriched with the most enticing per- 
 fumes. 
 
 Osire proceeded: By the cultivation of 
 talents, all things are possible unto all 
 men and women. With a sufficiency of 
 talent ye need no Lords nor oppressive 
 rulers. I mentioned the great beauties of 
 my etherean home. Ye go to the spray of 
 fountains, and disport yourselves in rain- 
 bows; but ye are in a small corner at best, 
 and the substance of your joys are in per- 
 petual failure. Behold the sprays and 
 bows made by my hosts! Hear the music 
 played by the elements of their handi- 
 work. 
 
 The hosts here overcast the entire mul- 
 titude with the vapor of the air, converted 
 into millions of kaledioscopic pictures, and 
 filled the place with the music of currents 
 of wind trained to tunes. 
 
 The hosts were overjoyed beyond 
 measure. 
 
 Again Osire said: Hear me further; 
 the festival must cease. Ye forget, I told 
 you I must go. My marshals will now 
 conduct me and my hosts to my fire-ship. 
 As for ye, my heart is broken. I know 
 the toils and hardships put upon you. But 
 if ye desire these things, they are yours. 
 
 The universal shout was: We will go 
 with thee! Take us in your fire-ship. 
 Teach us how to improve our talents! 
 
 Osire said: What will the Lords do? 
 Shall they remain without subjects? But 
 the false Lords answered quickly: We will 
 also go with thee and be thy servants to 
 do thy bidding. 
 
 Osire said: When I am on the ship 
 I will answer. 
 
 So he departed and went into the airi- 
 ata, to the side of which his own fire-ship 
 was made fast; and presently he command- 
 ed all who chose to come aboard; and be- 
 hold the whole of them, even more than 
 five thousand million, went in. Osire at 
 once commanded the ascent; and thus he 
 delivered them high up in atmospherea, 
 where the proper officers had already pro- 
 vided a plateau of habitation for them; and 
 the name of the plateau was Assan, signi- 
 fying no escape, for here Osire intended to 
 
 have them educated and purged from evil; 
 nor was it possible for them to return to 
 the earth. 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 In Assan Osire appointed Sha'bon as 
 God over the delivered hosts; and Sha'bon 
 selected officers and teachers, and then di- 
 vided the people into groups and sections, 
 according to their development, and then 
 erected schools, and nurseries, and facto- 
 ries,- and put the inhabitants to work, 
 feasting them with rites and ceremonies. 
 
 After Assan was duly organized, Osire 
 departed and went and visited in various 
 kingdoms that had been established by his 
 Lords. 
 
 And the heavens of Earth were thus 
 organized anew under Osire. And the 
 whole time of organization was three 
 years. But Osire spent the remainder of 
 dawn in Vibraj, perfecting it as the central 
 kingdom of atmospherea. And, lastly, he 
 decreed the appointment of ten thousand 
 Lords to dwell on earth; some at the tem- 
 ples of worship, or oracles; some within 
 the cities of the Ghans; and he decreed to 
 his Lords as follows: 
 
 Ye shall teach mortals of heavenly 
 things by inspiration, but not through the 
 oracles. 
 
 Ye shall not allow them to commune 
 with the spirits of the dead, not even their 
 own kin. 
 
 Ye shall not permit spirits to come to 
 their mortal kin. And the spirits of those 
 who die in infancy ye shall deliver to the 
 asaphs in Vibraj. 
 
 Ye shall not permit spirits to inhabit 
 deserted houses, nor permit them to form 
 habitations on the graveyards of the earth. 
 
 Ye shall not permit spirits to inhabit 
 caves or waterfalls on the earth. 
 
 Ye shall not permit spirits to obsess 
 mortals, nor to speak through them by en- 
 trancement, unless they be such spirits as 
 ye appoint in order to carry out these, my 
 decrees; or masters of generation, whom 
 ye shall appoint over mortals. 
 
 Ye shall control the selecting and ap- 
 pointing of guardian spirits over newborn 
 mortals. And all such guardian spirits 
 shall teach their wards nothing of heaven 
 near the earth, but inspire them that it 
 
134 
 
 CYCLE OF OSIRJE 
 
 lieth far away, and very high, from which 
 place none return. 
 
 And the guardians shall also inspire 
 their wards to consult God only, or his 
 Lord, and to do this by secret prayer. 
 
 And that the Lord and God are good- 
 ness, wisdom, love and power. And that 
 all evil cometh from tetracts born with 
 man. 
 
 And ye shall inspire mortals to acquire 
 a knowledge of the sun and moon and 
 stars, giving names unto them, together 
 with their places in the firmament. And 
 give them temples for observation and 
 tablets for instruction. 
 
 For in all things ye shall direct man's 
 soul to the acouisition of corporeal knowl- 
 edge, causing him to look into corporeal 
 things to find a reason for the behavior 
 of all created substance. 
 
 And they shall not depend on the spirits 
 for knowledge, for I am not laying the 
 foundation for spiritual knowledge on 
 earth; that must come afterwards. For as 
 Jehovih first gave to man a corporeal life, 
 and then a spiritual life, so am I laying a 
 foundation for a new race on Earth; and 
 from their kin shall spring the heirs of 
 Kosmon, who shall embrace both cor- 
 poreal and spiritual knowledge. But these 
 shall rise in corporeal knowledge and go 
 down in it. 
 
 Ye shall teach them in truth, but they 
 will in after generations contort your 
 teachings into corporeal worship, prostrat- 
 ing themselves before the sun and moon 
 and stars, going down into disbelief in not 
 only the spiritual life, but in the Great 
 Spirit, and His Gods and Lords. 
 
 All these things must come to pass on 
 the corporeal world; nor is there any res- 
 urrection in the latter days, unless these of 
 this day go through the fall which I am 
 preparing for them. For which reason ye 
 shall found corporeal knowledge in the 
 stars, and name them; for these things will 
 be testimony in Kosmon of the fate of the 
 worshipers of corporeal knowledge in the 
 time of the Osirian cycle. So, leave noth- 
 ing undone that can be done to make mor- 
 tals put aside all spirituality, save to be- 
 lieve in the Great Spirit and a distant 
 heaven; but make them pursue knowledge 
 wholly corporeal. 
 
 For the labor of God and his Lords 
 shall not always be to bring spirits back to 
 earth, to learn of corpor, for this is not 
 Jehovih's plan. A heaven shall be built 
 up of corporeal knowledge, which shall 
 have a base in the firmament of heaven, 
 where spirits can be taught in time to 
 come. 
 
 Fear not that man can be too unbe- 
 lieving in spiritual things in this age; 
 Jehovih requireth even perfection in unbe- 
 lief in certain periods of time. And this 
 is the founding of that era on Earth. 
 Therefore, do these matters with all your 
 wisdom and strength; and may the Light 
 of Jehovih be with you now and forever. 
 
 CHAPTER XI. 
 
 Who shall tell the story of the Gods of 
 earth in the cycle of Osire! Their 
 mighty kingdoms overspreading the 
 whole earth! Hundreds and hundreds, 
 and thousands! Their libraries of rec- 
 ords of holy deeds! A council cham- 
 ber of half a million souls! Hundreds of 
 departments and thousands. Here a com- 
 mittee to select young students to the col- 
 leges of messengers; another to select 
 students to the college of arts; another to 
 select students of mathematics; another 
 for prophecy; another for great learning; 
 another for factories; another for com- 
 pounding and dissolving elements. Then 
 come the departments of the cosmogeny 
 of the stars; then of the etherean worlds; 
 then the roadways of the firmament; then 
 a'ji and ji'ay and nebulae; then se'mu; 
 then hi'dan and dan; then the dawn of 
 dan; then histories of corporeal affairs, 
 and of the affairs of the heavens, far and 
 near; then genealogy of thousands of 
 Orian chiefs; the creation of mineral, 
 vegetable and animal kingdoms. Indeed, 
 to enumerate half of what cometh before 
 a God and his council would itself fill a 
 book. 
 
 Who, then, O Jehovih, shall venture to 
 tell the labor and wisdom of thy etherean 
 Gods! And of the multitude of questions 
 that come before the council from far-off 
 places? A strange voice riseth up from 
 the earth, saying: Have they anything to 
 do in heaven? O, ye Gods! And one-half 
 of the Earth-born coming hither in in- 
 fancy! And the countless millions who 
 
CYCLE OF OSIRE 
 
 135 
 
 know little more than the beasts of the 
 field! Having been falsely taught that 
 these unfortunates would fly off to para- 
 dise and possess great learning in the 
 hour of death! 
 
 O that their understanding could be 
 opened up to Thy kingdoms, Thou All 
 Extending Creator! That their eyes could 
 look upon the greatness of even Thy lower 
 heavens! To behold a thousand depart- 
 ments reaching as wide as the world! And 
 then the hundreds of thousands of branch 
 departments, of hundreds of grades, adapt- 
 ed to every soul that riseth up from the 
 earth. 
 
 O that they could look into the dark 
 places of atmospherea! That they could 
 see a million souls, crazed, wild and bat- 
 tling, plunged into chaos by terrible war, 
 not knowing they are dead! The cease- 
 less toil of nurses and physicians, laboring 
 day and night with them! O the dark- 
 ness upon them! O the glory of thy ex- 
 alted ones! 
 
 Thy swift Gods of dawn! How they 
 hear a hundred tongues at one time, and 
 frame answers for all of them, and by a 
 motion of the hand dispatch messengers 
 to fulfill the same! How they select officers, 
 to know a hundred at a glance, and know 
 where to place them, that every one shall 
 fit his place! Who is there, O Father, can 
 frame into words the proceedings of 
 heaven, so that mortals can comprehend 
 even a fraction of Thy great glories! 
 
 Shall a man light a candle and say it 
 represents the sun? How, then, shall 
 they find the affairs of mortals compara- 
 ble to Thy kingdoms? O that they knew 
 the meaning of the difference between All 
 Light and the darkness of man's judg- 
 ment! 
 
 O that they knew Thee, Thou Central 
 Sun of All Light! They have put away 
 Thy person. Thy great Gods are but 
 myths to them, because of the darkness of 
 their souls. Behold, they look for a small 
 man with a large sword! The power of 
 great wisdom they know not. 
 
 O that they could behold the coming and 
 going of thousands of messengers from 
 far-off kingdoms before the throne of God ! 
 How he hath answered them instantly, 
 and meanwhile heeded the voices of a 
 
 thousand marshals! O that they knew the 
 glory of order, the power of harmony! 
 
 They have seen a clock with a hundred 
 wheels, and the eye of its maker oversee- 
 ing every part in motion, and they call it 
 wonderful! But how can they compre- 
 hend Thy councils, O Jehovih, Thy mill- 
 ions and Thy God on his throne, mantled 
 in Thy light, overseeing a whole heaven! 
 What majesty of words can make mortals 
 comprehend his wisdom, power and great 
 labors ! 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 Osire, through his mathematicians, 
 furnished the Lords with maps of cor- 
 poreal stars, and moon, and sun, and the 
 position of Earth with the sun-belt, 
 and bestowed names of animals upon them. 
 Showed where the region of cows was; 
 the place of bulls; the place of bears; the 
 place of horses; the place of fishes; the 
 place of scorpions; the place of sheep; the 
 place of lions; the place of crabs; the 
 place of death; the place of life; and 
 marked the seasons, and made sections to 
 the year, which was the width of the sun- 
 belt. And he placed the sun in the midst 
 and made lines thence to the stars, with 
 explanations of the powers of the seasons 
 on all the living. 
 
 When the tablets were completed and 
 ready to be delivered to the Lords, Osire 
 said: Take these and bestow them on 
 mortals, both through the oracles and by 
 inspiration, making them sacred with the 
 prophets, seers, and priests, and their 
 kings and queens. 
 
 And ye shall inspire them to build tem- 
 ples of observation, to study the stars; 
 teaching by the gau and by the travel of 
 the sun north and south, and by Cnest, 
 and by dark chambers. For with the cul- 
 ture of the corporeal senses man becometh 
 vigorous, strong and independent; and 
 with the culture of the spiritual senses in 
 corporeans they become weak, sensitive 
 and dependent. 
 
 In the first case they ultimately be- 
 come selfish and wicked, in the second 
 case they become impotent and unadapted 
 to corporeal life, and thus become extinct. 
 
 On all corporeal worlds Jehovih hath 
 provided two seasons for every race; a 
 season for the development of the cor- 
 
136 
 
 CYCLE OF OSIRE 
 
 poreal senses and a season for the develop- 
 ment of the spiritual senses. To find the 
 balance, this is to find kosmon, which lieth 
 far in the future. 
 
 In this day, therefore, I give the mat- 
 ter into your charge, in the name of Je- 
 hovih, that you consider not the spiritual 
 nature of the corporeans in any respect, 
 leaving that matter to God and his sub- 
 Gods, who will receive them at the time 
 of their mortal death. But ye shall teach 
 them to fear no spirit, nor Lord, nor God; 
 teaching them that by their own wills they 
 can cast out the tetracts. Rather inspire 
 ye them to be Gods and Goddesses them- 
 selves; and by their aspirations they will 
 become large, powerful and fearless. 
 
 CHAPTER XIII. 
 
 And now the dawn of dan was finished. 
 Order reigned in heaven and on 
 earth. Men and angels had their eyes 
 turned inward, to know of what capacity 
 Jehovih had made them. And Earth 
 and moon, the sun and stars, were shown 
 in a new light to the senses of men; not to 
 be shunned and despised, but glories given 
 by the Great Spirit for useful purposes. 
 
 Osire prayed to the Creator: Send for 
 my resurrection, O Jehovih. I have up- 
 rooted the evil of idol worship. I have 
 opened man's eyes to Thy corporeal 
 worlds and set a mark on men's souls, 
 wherein man shall not come from earth 
 to heaven, saying: Alas, I have no cor- 
 poreal knowledge! 
 
 Jehovih said: To further man's ulti- 
 mate glory, I have decreed Earth to 
 ji'ay'an fields for three thousand years, in 
 which thy fruit shall have its full growth. 
 
 Osire foresaw the times that from his 
 decrees would spring corporeal philoso- 
 phy, whereto man should look back in 
 after ages, saying: Thence sprang the 
 Osirian system. Yet he looked further on 
 when men should become disbelievers of 
 spiritual things, doing worship to the sun, 
 moon and stars; and profess to find the 
 cause and foundation of all things in 
 corpor. 
 
 Jehovih said: Man shall search all 
 things in order to find Me; but I gave this 
 labor not to one generation of men, nor 
 to those of a hundred, or a thousand years, 
 but to cycles. For when I come in Kos- 
 
 mon to found My kingdom on earth, man 
 shall have the testimony of all speculations 
 and philosophies before him, together with 
 the fruits thereof. And he shall judge that 
 which is good by the evidence of the past. 
 
 High in the arc of Se'ing rose Osire's 
 call, where millions waited, knowing the 
 dawn of dan on the red star was near its 
 end. Swift messengers told the story of 
 Jehovih's work through his Son, Osire, 
 and, measuring the width of the harvest, 
 laid the matter before the reigning God- 
 dess, Antwa. 
 
 And they embarked in an obegia, 
 amidst music and dancing, five million 
 souls aboard, commanded by Eticene, 
 Goddess of Antwa's garden, an etherean 
 plain, where dwelt ten thousand million 
 souls. A place of rest for Gods and God- 
 desses. Off to the red star, Earth, steered 
 the obegia, the pride of Eticene, for the 
 marriage festival of seven thousand million 
 Brides and Bridegrooms, the yield of 
 Osire's harvest for etherea. 
 
 Meanwhile Osire and his hosts pre- 
 pared in the usual way and awaited the 
 coming of Jehovih's light within Earth's 
 vortex. So the obegia pierced the vortex 
 of Earth, with the hosts of Eticene 
 aboard, and the Brides and Bridegrooms 
 shouted with joy, whilst the millions of 
 guests who assembled to witness the awe- 
 inspiring ceremonies joined in applause. 
 
 Down came the ship of fire, broad as a 
 sea, adorned in majesty, to the floors of 
 Vibraj. And from the mantles of light 
 came Eticene, to salute Osire in the name 
 of the Great Spirit, and receive his con- 
 tribution to the emancipated worlds! 
 
 Osire and his attendants, the Archangels 
 gels of Lowstin, received Eticene under the 
 sign of Ormazd, and then presented his 
 delivered sons and daughters, seven thou- 
 sand millions. Whereupon, due ceremo- 
 nies were proclaimed, and the Brides and 
 Bridegrooms of Jehovih entered the 
 obegia. Osire saluted God, who was or- 
 dained to be ruler of Earth and heaven, tor 
 the next two hundred years, and departed, 
 going into the obegia, the fire-ship, for a 
 higher heaven, where waited millions of 
 loves, calling to him to come home. 
 
 Then upward rose the mighty ship, 
 commanded by the slender Eticene, the 
 young Goddess of Antwa's Garden, her 
 little hands stretched upward to Jehovih. 
 
LORDS' RECORD FOR CYCLE OK OSIRE 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 In the beginning of the cycle of Osire 
 the angels in the lower heaven and mor- 
 tals on the earth worshiped Apollo, and 
 mortals depended on the angels to tell 
 them when to sow, when to reap, and when 
 to lay in stores for the winter; neither ob- 
 served man the time for any of these 
 things. But after having destroyed the 
 kingdoms of the numerous false Apollos, 
 Osire appointed a great many Lords on 
 the earth, and when man sought to know 
 the time for sowing and reaping, and of 
 laying in stores, Jehovih's Lords answered 
 them by teaching man to observe the po- 
 sition of the stars in the firmament, and 
 the Lord taught men to call the different 
 groups by name that he might distinguish 
 between them; and man became independ- 
 ent and sought to find the cause of all 
 things in corpor. 
 
 Now Shem had many tribes who had 
 settled on the borders of the sea at Haven- 
 ti and Gats, and the Lord who dwelt with 
 them spoke through the chief prophet Tah, 
 who made a record on stone, and wood, 
 and cloth, of the Lord's word, and these 
 were preserved in the valens of the Lord. 
 And when Tah died the mantle of the 
 Lord's gifts fell on Tah's son; who also had 
 power to hear the Voice; and he also kept 
 a record of the Lord's words. And when 
 he died his son succeeded in the same 
 way, and because of this truth the Lord 
 called all of them by the sacred name Tah, 
 the order of which continued for a hun- 
 dred generations. And these tribes filled 
 the country far and near with cities; and 
 yet, in all the while, they killed nothing 
 that had been created alive on the earth, 
 or in the waters, or in the air above. 
 
 In the early days of the Thins the Lord 
 spake through the chief prophet, saying: 
 When the inhabitants of one city or tribe 
 marry with those of another city or tribe, 
 it is but just that the names of father and 
 mother be given to the offspring. But 
 man understood not the Lord. So accord- 
 ingly the inhabitants combined the names 
 belonging to the neighboring tribes, thus: 
 
 One tribe said ut, another for the same 
 thing said yat, and another tribe said wat, 
 and another hoot, and so on. So the 
 after generation said utyatwathoot (mean- 
 ing wheat), and this was called the Yiha 
 language. And so great was the number 
 and size of the words used that the writ- 
 ings of the ancient prophets were lost, be- 
 cause none could understand them. 
 
 The Lord spake, saying: Because I de- 
 sired to preserve the genealogy of my 
 chosen, ye have applied the law to things 
 that are worthless in my sight. Ye have 
 built a tower of words, so that your lan- 
 guages are confounded one with another. 
 
 The Lord said: Come now, into 
 murdhan, and I will deliver you. 
 
 So the people sat in crescent, and the 
 Lord stood betwixt the horns saying: Be- 
 hold, I am the spirit. My word shall 
 stand against all the world. Hear, then, 
 the commandments of the Lord: 
 
 Because ye have built a tower of words, 
 ye are confounded; but I come to deliver 
 you. Neither will I write nor teach writ- 
 ten words, for they are folly, save to the 
 learned. By word of mouth will I teach, 
 and ye shall repeat after me. And these 
 shall be sacred words to the end of the 
 world. 
 
 So the Lord taught orally in the temple, 
 face to face with the people, and they 
 learned the words and the meaning there- 
 of. And those who learned the best, the 
 Lord named Ritjiv, because he made them 
 teachers over others. 
 
 The Lord said: Because ye have con- 
 founded the language of the ancients I will 
 give you a new language, and it shall be 
 called Vede, meaning perfect; nor shall 
 any man alter the words I give? 
 
 And the Lord spake not about foolish 
 stories, but taught man how to live that 
 he might be happy himself and a glory to 
 the Great Spirit. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 The tribes of Ham were of many 
 colors, and the Lord caused the name 
 Ham to stand as a living testimony to the 
 
138 
 
 CYCLE OF OSIBE 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 coming time of Kosmon. For the Lord 
 foresaw that the time would come when 
 the nations would look back for histories 
 of his peoples, and so the Lord caused cer- 
 tain words and signs to be perserved which 
 should be testimony in the later times of 
 earth. 
 
 Of all colors (black, white, yellow, cop- 
 per, red, and brown) were the tribes of 
 Ham. Nevertheless they were of I'hin 
 blood having flat nails and short arms, and 
 of such as desired to acquire knowledge. 
 And the Lord brought them to a country 
 of rich pastures, where lived but few 
 natives, the dark people, with short hair. 
 The Lord said: Behold the multiple lan- 
 guage of the tribes of Shem, side by side 
 with the tribes of Jaffeth. The latter shall 
 use the derivation of the Panic language of 
 this day even in Kosmon. 
 
 For I gave unto the tribes of these two 
 different lands my ten commandments and 
 ten invocations, to be not written, but 
 spoken and taught from mouth to ear, to 
 be sacred in the language given. And I 
 locked up sufficient of the Panic language 
 in Jaffeth as a testimony to be discovered 
 in after years, showing that unlike Ham 
 and Shem, a mighty nation could retain 
 one language for thousands of years. For 
 I foresaw that philosophers would try to 
 prove that languages were of mortal ori- 
 gin, and that they would change according 
 to the growth of knowledge amongst men. 
 
 The tribes of Ham had previously 
 loved to migrate westward, and the tribes 
 of Jaffeth and Shem loved to stay within 
 their own countries. Jehovih said: 
 
 Having designed Ham for teaching the 
 barbarian world of Me and My dominion, 
 I also prepared them that through their 
 blood men and women should have hair 
 neither straight nor short, but long 
 and curled, red, white and brown, where- 
 by might be traced in after ages the gene- 
 alogy of nations. 
 
 Now, in the midst of these three great 
 countries, Jaffeth, Shem and Ham, was 
 the chief place of the I'huans, where they 
 founded a new nation; and the Lord 
 called them Par'si'eans, because he cre- 
 ated them as a shield to guard his 
 chosen, the I'hins. The difference be- 
 tween the I'huans and the Par'si'eans 
 was that the Ihuans lived near and 
 
 about the I'hins, but the Par'si'eans lived 
 in a nation by themselves. Nevertheless 
 they were all of the same blood and kin, 
 being half breeds betwixt the I'hins and 
 the native Druks; and they were large and 
 of the color of new copper. And because 
 they were favored of the Lord, the Lord 
 gave them separate laws, and commanded 
 them not to mix with the Druks, which 
 commandments they kept for more than a 
 thousand years. But in course of time the 
 Par'si'eans were tempted by the Druks, 
 and some of them fell from their high 
 estate and thev became cannibals. 
 
 And the Lord sent the Ghans, to whom 
 he delivered his oral scriptures, to travel 
 in search of his people; and a number of 
 the Ghans were lost in the wilderness; and 
 this was the country of the Par'si'eans, and 
 that land was filled with wild goats. And 
 the lost Ghans not being flesh eaters could 
 find no food, and they said: Come, let us 
 live on goats' milk. And they so lived for a 
 long season, taming the goats and keeping 
 herds of them. And they roved about, driv- 
 ing their herds with them, for which reason 
 they were called Shepherd Kings. And the 
 Lord looked on them with favor, saying: 
 These that call themselves shepherd kings 
 shall have this country. Out of the seed 
 of these people will I work wonders. And 
 the Lord taught the shepherd kings how 
 to make leather out of skins. The shep- 
 herd kings made bags of leather in which 
 they carried milk, which was thus churned, 
 and they made butter. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 It being not the will of Jehovih that 
 man should be led forever, the Lord said: 
 A teacher that doeth all things for his 
 pupil also sacrifices his pupil; he who 
 teacheth his pupil wrongly sinneth against 
 the Father; he who teacheth his pupil not 
 at all is accessory to evil. So standeth the 
 Lord over the childern of men. 
 
 Behold, I have demonstrated that my 
 chosen can maintain themselves unharmed 
 amongst barbarians; also that by unre- 
 strained marriages a sacred people is 
 quickly lost amongst barbarians; and that 
 man, witnessing terrible conflicts, would 
 rather desire sons of strong limbs and 
 crafty minds, to do murderous work; 
 from which condition he had no incentive 
 
CYCLE OF OSIRE 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 139 
 
 to rise in gentleness and love for the glory 
 of the Great Spirit. 
 
 That I, your Lord, might show after 
 generations, first, that without my hand in 
 the work no good nor peace could come 
 amongst men, and, second, that only by a 
 race of I'hins, as examples of my power, 
 through signs and miracles, could the bar- 
 barians be reached for their own good. 
 Not only did I leave the ruins of my cities, 
 which had no gates of entrance, and 
 houses without doors of entrance, that ye 
 might have testimony of the race of I'hins, 
 but I have shown you that only by such 
 procedure could the barbarians be induced 
 to seek a higher and better mode of living. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 When the Lord established the five 
 peoples who were saved from Pan; and he 
 commanded them to preserve Panic words 
 in their respective countries, and they so 
 preserved them. And the following is 
 what became of these I'hins: 
 
 Those who came to Guatama survived 
 twenty-one thousand years, and attained to 
 one thousand large cities, and three thou- 
 sand small cities, being more than four 
 million souls, and then became extinct as 
 tribes. And they never had any king 
 or queen, or other ruler save the Lord, 
 who ministered unto them through the 
 prophets. And they retained their sacred 
 name of Guatama to the last; but the 
 I'huans called them Ooch'lo'pan, signify- 
 ing people of another world. And in course 
 of time they became diminutive, and de- 
 sired not to marry. And there came great 
 darkness on the earth, with falling ashes, 
 and heat and fevers; and so the Lord took 
 them up to heaven. 
 
 Those who came to Jaffeth survived 
 twenty-one thousand years, and attained to 
 two thousand large cities, and seven thou- 
 sand small ones, being more than eight 
 million souls, and then became extinct as 
 tribes. And they had no king, serving 
 the Lord only. And they retained the 
 name Jaffeth to the last. But the I'huans 
 called them Tua Git, signifying people of 
 spirit light. And then came a'ji on the 
 earth, and it touched them with impoten- 
 cy, and they brought forth no more heirs. 
 
 Those who came to Shem survived 
 twelve thousand years, and attained to six 
 
 hundred large cities, and two thousand 
 small cities, being more than two million 
 souls, and they became extinct by amalga- 
 mation. Neither had they any king, but 
 served the Lord through the prophets. 
 And they retained their name Shem to the 
 last; but the I'huans called them Sri-vede- 
 iyi, signifying people of the perfect light. 
 And impotence came upon them and they 
 disappeared, for many of them married 
 with the I'huans, but their children became 
 I'huans, neither having the silken hair nor 
 the musical voices of the I'hins, nor the 
 light of the upper heavens. 
 
 And those who came to Ham survived 
 twenty-one thousand years, and attained to 
 one thousand two hunderd large cities, and 
 three thousand small cities, being four 
 million souls, but being of mixed colors. 
 But they broke the law of God more than 
 all other Faithists, and they mingled with 
 the I'huans. And they had no kings or 
 queens, serving the Lord only through the 
 prophets. And they retained the name of 
 Ham to the last, when they ceased to exist 
 as a separate people because of their amal- 
 gamation with the I'huans. 
 
 But the tribes that went in the two 
 ships to the north land (Japan) could not 
 be distinguished after a thousand years 
 from the I'huans, because they mingled 
 therewith, and were lost as I'hins. Never- 
 theless they redeemed the barbarians unto 
 wisdom and peace. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 In the time of Osire, the Lord pro- 
 vided for the light and knowledge, that had 
 been with the I'hins, to be merged into the 
 new races, the Ghans and I'huans. By the 
 Lord and his angels was such foundation 
 laid. Before this time the I'hins could not 
 inspire the barbarians to make leather and 
 cloth; nor could they inspire them to in- 
 dustries of any kind. 
 
 The Lord provided oracle houses unto 
 the inhabitants of the earth wherein the 
 Lord could speak face to face with mor- 
 tals, through his angels chosen for this 
 purpose; persuading them to industries, 
 and peace and righteousness, after the 
 manner of the I'hins; teaching them of the 
 stars and sun and moon; showing them 
 how to find the times and seasons of the 
 
140 
 
 CYCLE OF OSIRE 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 earth, and inspiring them to observe the 
 stars and name them. 
 
 But the Lord taught not that man 
 should worship them, but that he should 
 learn their glory and majesty in the firma- 
 ment. But man forgot his Creator because 
 of the wonder of His works. 
 
 Behold, O all ye that say there is no 
 Lord, I have left a remnant of the barba- 
 rians. Let them that find the cause of the 
 progress of man, to come of the earth, go 
 raise up the barbarian. 
 
 I say to man: Go commune with the 
 spirits of the dead; and man doeth it. I 
 say: Come away from such worship and 
 fall down before the stars; and man 
 doeth it. 
 
 Jehovih said: My Lord, go thou; call 
 man to one thing to-day and let him wor- 
 ship it. For man shall fall down and wor- 
 ship everything in heaven and earth. By 
 trying them shall man know them. For in 
 the day of My glory, Kosmon, man shall 
 put away all worshipful things save Me, his 
 Creator. 
 
 Jehovih said: It is not the plan of My 
 heavens for the spirits of the dead to re- 
 main on the earth, engaging in mortal 
 servitude and practices. Behold, the way 
 of My kingdom is upward. Rather shall 
 man on the earth seek to rise upward than 
 that the angels of heaven go downward. 
 
 Hence the Lord carried away the spir- 
 its of the dead, and he turned man's judg- 
 ment to learning the glories of the lower 
 kingdoms. And man advanced in great 
 learning, both of the sun, moon and stars, 
 and of all things on the face of the earth. 
 
 The Lord said: These signs have I 
 given to man that he may comprehend the 
 cycles of his Creator. When spiritual re- 
 search is chief amongst men, they advance 
 not in science, art, nor inventions. But 
 when man is bereft of spiritual aspiration 
 he advanceth in corporeal knowledge and 
 inventions. 
 
 These signs show the changes being 
 wrought on mortals by the hand of the 
 Almighty, through His Gods and Lords. 
 
 The Lord said: Behold, I raised up 
 great kings and queens on the earth; and 
 I gave them pageantry, and rites and cere- 
 monies, after the manner of heavenly 
 things. And these I made as an inspiration 
 to the multitude, that they might learn to 
 
 provide themselves with the luxuries of all 
 cerated things. For I desired not that man 
 should become spiritual until the earth and 
 all manner of savage beasts and serpents 
 were subdued. Otherwise man had de- 
 scended into impotence and failed on 
 Earth. These testimonies have I left be- 
 fore thee, that the spiritual man inclineth 
 to shut himself up in seclusion and prayer; 
 but the Osirians go forth to work man- 
 fully. 
 
 Thus gave the Lord to man the names 
 of the stars, and their seasons; and the 
 seasons of the sun, moon and Earth. 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 Great became the wisdom and power 
 of man on earth in that day, and his 
 power and glory were greater than had 
 ever been before. He established mighty 
 kingdoms and sub-kingdoms over the 
 lands of Jaffeth, Shem, Par'si'e and Arab- 
 in'ya.. He excelled in building temples 
 and palaces, and in all manner of 
 inventions; in fabrics of linen and silk, and 
 wool and fine leather; in writing books 
 and tablets; in mathematics, in navigation 
 and inland travel; in making thermom- 
 eters, and barometers, magnetic needles, 
 telescopes and microscopes; in chemistry 
 and botany. Verily did the philosophers of 
 those days know the mysteries of heaven 
 and earth. 
 
 And man became no longer thankful to 
 God and his Lords; but man became con- 
 ceited, saying: 
 
 The Gods are fools! All things are 
 Nature and of growth. Man has become 
 wise in spite of God and His Lords. All 
 things evolve into higher states. It is the 
 natural order. Neither is there any All 
 Person, Jehovih! He is void, like the 
 wind. 
 
 And the Lord saw the conceit of man, 
 and he said: He that I have raised up 
 turneth against me. Now, will I go away 
 from man for a season, that he may learn 
 wisdom. Behold, man shall also find that 
 many of his fellows will turn against him. 
 
 So the Lord departed out of the star 
 chambers, and the places became filled 
 with the spirits of the newly dead, who 
 were not of the heavens above nor the way 
 of the Almighty. And man inquired of 
 them thus: Behold, thou art now a spiritl 
 
CYCLE OF OSIRE 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 141 
 
 Tell me, is there any God or Lord or Je- 
 hovih! 
 
 And the spirits, desiring to flatter man, 
 and not knowing the heavenly kingdoms, 
 answered: Nay, there is no God, nor 
 Lord, nor All Person, Jehovih! 
 
 So the kings issued edicts, commanding 
 the people to no longer worship God, nor 
 Lord, nor Jehovih! But woe for the judg- 
 ment of kings and queens. Man, having 
 inherent worship in his soul, ceased indeed 
 to worship God, and his Lords, and even 
 Jehovih; but instead he took to worship- 
 ing the stars. 
 
 Now the spirits manifesting in the tem- 
 ples advised one thing through one seer, 
 and another through another; for they 
 were of little knowledge and wholly un- 
 organized. So presently the kings took to 
 war against one another. Anarchy ensued, 
 and man fell to destroying all the glories 
 he had made. 
 
 Thus again, after three thousand years 
 of prosperity, man went down in darkness, 
 again fell under the obsession of drujas, 
 and again became a barbarian for three 
 hundred years more. 
 
Cycle or Fragapatti 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 In Horub, an etherean world on the 
 borders of the arc of Aza, in the proces- 
 sion of Sayutivi, Chod and Gorce, a 
 region of light, where reigned Fraga- 
 patti, Orian Chief of Obsod and Goo- 
 matchala one thousand years; God of 
 Varn, God of Lunitzi, Witchka, Schleinka 
 and Dows, thirty thousand years; Survey- 
 or of Gies, roadway and trail of Fetisi and 
 Mark, seventy thousand years; Prim of 
 Vaga, Tsein, Loo-Gaab and Zaan, forty 
 thousand years. 
 
 Fragapatti said: Jehovih spake to me 
 in the capital of Horub, whilst sitting in 
 the Council of Obsod, where sat my mill- 
 ion Gods, and there came from the Al- 
 mighty's throne a great light, and with the 
 Matchless Voice, Jehovih said: 
 
 My Son! Go to the red star, Earth. 
 She cometh thy way; her coat is red with 
 mortal blood! 
 
 Fragapatti said to the Council of Gods: 
 The Father saith: The red star cometh 
 this way; her coat is red with mortal 
 blood! 
 
 The Gods and Goddesses turned to 
 their tables to mark the time, and quickly 
 the whisper ran to a million ears: The 
 red star! Earth! Ye recollect it was 
 the little star where Sethantes stood man 
 upright, now some sixty thousand years 
 ago; and Aph crushed in her walls and 
 pruned her to the quick. 
 
 And then they overhauled Earth's his- 
 tory, these Gods and Goddesses; meas- 
 ured her course to learn just when she 
 would pass; and they found five years and 
 fifty days would be her dawn of dan, her 
 time to cross the arc of Aza. And as yet 
 she roamed two hundred years away. 
 
 Fragapatti said: Because the All Light 
 hath given such long warning, great labor 
 cometh anon. Let my swift messengers 
 come; I would speak to them. 
 
 Then the marshals ushered in the swift 
 messengers, saluting before the throne. 
 
 Fragapatti said: Autevat, my son, the 
 All Light fell upon me, saying: My son, 
 go to the red star, Earth; her coat is 
 red with mortal blood! Now, by her 
 time, she standeth more than two hundred 
 years beyond the boundaries of Horub. 
 For this I called thee and thy attendants. 
 How long will it take thee to go and sur- 
 vey Earth and her heavens and return? 
 
 Autevat, well trained in such matters, 
 said: Of Earth's time, forty days. 
 Fragapatti said: What number of attend- 
 ants wilt thou require for so great a dis- 
 tance? And Autevat said: Twenty thou- 
 sand. 
 
 Fragapatti said: Provide thee, then, 
 all thou requirest and go at once. And if 
 thou shalt find the inhabitants of Earth 
 suitable for sacred records, commission 
 thou the God to send loo'is to raise up an 
 heir for Jehovih's kingdom. 
 
 Autevat said: Thy will and Jehovih's 
 be done. And, duly saluting, he and his 
 attendants withdrew, and, coming to Gat- 
 wawa, ordered an arrow ship of twenty 
 thousand gauge. In two days it was com- 
 pleted; and during the time Autevat had 
 chosen his attendants for the red star, 
 Earth, to see what was the matter, that a 
 God so far away as Fragapatti was could 
 feel and know the flow of human blood! 
 
 For as mortals can sense things a short 
 distance, Jehovih's upraised Gods can feel 
 the breath of the stars, and know when 
 they are disordered, and the manner of 
 their disorder. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 Fragapatti and the Council were deeply 
 engaged in the Sortiv of an Orian arc, 
 through which the phalanx of Inihab and 
 her constellation was soon to pass; 
 an etherean region where the star Un- 
 howitchata had been dissolved some 
 twenty days before and thirty thousand 
 million bound spirits removed by the chief 
 of Avaia and his band of etherean Gods, 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 143 
 
 who had drawn largely on the inhabitants 
 of Ful, a garden of Horub, in Fragapatti's 
 dominions. And Avaia had quartered the 
 dismembered hosts near Sortiv, where the 
 light of the arc fell sharply on them; to 
 complete which concourse taxed the Gods 
 for more help than was at hand. To rem- 
 edy which, Fragapatti's hosts were extend- 
 ing the ji'ay'an fields of Uth and lowering 
 the grade suitable to the spirits of dark- 
 ness rescued from Unhowitchata, a prolific 
 world, bringing forth imperfect human 
 souls too abundantly. 
 
 And Inihab was soon to pass the arc 
 of Sortiv, with her three hundred stars. 
 many of them larger than Earth, to 
 seventy of which the inhabitants of Horub 
 would need go as redeeming Gods and 
 Goddesses for the dawn of dan upon them. 
 To apportion all of which. Fragapatti and 
 his million Council had work on hand, so 
 that the condition of Earth and her hea- 
 vens weighed not seriously upon them. 
 
 But in such period as would be forty 
 days on Earth, Autevat and his attend- 
 ants, with the arrow ship of fire, returned 
 from Earth and her heavens, speeding 
 close to Obsod, where the marshals re- 
 ceived them, and announced them to the 
 Council. Fragapatti said: Let Autevat 
 and his attendants approach the throne. 
 
 And Autevat went in, saluting, and 
 stood before the chief, Fragapatti. Aute- 
 vat said: In Jehovih's name, and by His 
 power and wisdom, am I here to proclaim 
 of the red star and her heaven. 
 
 First, then: It is three thousand one 
 hundred years since great Osire sowed the 
 seed of mental culture amongst mortals, 
 and it hath grown to be a giant, and a 
 most merciless tyrant. To learn whereof 
 I speak, God and his Lords gave me voice 
 and word, and opened the libraries of their 
 heavens, and accompanied me around 
 about Earth, to all nations, tribes and wan- 
 derers. To me the God of Earth said: 
 
 Greeting to Fragapatti, in the name of 
 the Father! And to thee, His Son! Take 
 thou this record to him and his Council 
 in Horub. For I am powerless through 
 my Lords and hosts against such odds. 
 
 From the time great Osire ascended to 
 his etherean realm, our heaven yielded 
 ample harvests for one thousand five hun- 
 dred years. And God and Lords succeed- 
 
 ed in regular order for every dan put upon 
 Earth. But then came a change, for the 
 a'ji'an fields pressed close on every side 
 of heaven, and the souls of angels and 
 mortals turned down to the earth. After 
 which time only such as were already with- 
 in the second resurrection strove for the 
 upper grades. Thus our colleges, schools 
 and factories were left vacant; for the hosts 
 of es'yans, newborn from Earth, were 
 stubborn in their earthly learning, spurn- 
 ing wise counsel and association. And 
 there were born from Earth into atmos- 
 pherea millions and millions of spirits, 
 who could not believe they were dead, but 
 maintained they were confined in dark 
 dungeons, howling and cursing day and 
 night. For the seed of corporeal knowl- 
 edge had taken root in the I'huan race. 
 They had learned the motions, names and 
 places of the stars, the moon and sun; and 
 from these prophesied the affairs of 
 nations and men. And duly marked out, 
 with maps and charts, the destiny of 
 things, according to the dates of corporeal 
 births and movements, attributing the 
 highest central cause to the sun. 
 
 And thus they cast aside all spirit, even 
 Jehovih, reasoning that if the sun made 
 winter and summer, and grass to grow 
 and die, so it ruled over animals and men. 
 And so the temples built to observe the 
 stars, before which men once fell down 
 and worshiped Jehovih, became the places 
 of decrees to horrid deaths of all who 
 taught or believed in spirit. And now 
 rose a mighty nation on earth of the 
 I'huans, called Par'si'e, and they ignored 
 the decrees of Gods and Lords to build no 
 city larger than two thousand souls; for- 
 sooth declaring the Gods and Lords to be 
 but inspirations from the quickening 
 power of the sun and stars, made dark 
 and personal by the credulity of past ages. 
 And so, in representation of the solar pha- 
 lanx, they built Oas, a sun city, which 
 standeth to this day of a million souls, 
 sworn to make it the central ruler over all 
 the world, and all other places tributary 
 and paying for its glory. And over Oas 
 they made a king, and called him King of 
 the Sun, the kingship to be passed down 
 from him to his heirs forever. 
 
 And Oas was embellished and adorned 
 above all other places that had been on the 
 
14:4: 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 earth, the fame of which spread abroad 
 over Jaffeth, Shem and Ham, betwixt 
 which it lieth. Its colleges became fam- 
 ous, and its observatories were of such 
 magnificence that their roofs were covered 
 with silver and gold. The mirrors and 
 lenses and dark chambers within the tow- 
 ers were so constructed that the stars 
 could be read as well in the day as at 
 night, and the records of observation cov- 
 ered more than a thousand years by men 
 of great learning. But now, alas, Oas as- 
 pires not only to be the central sun in 
 knowledge, but in power and dominion, 
 over the whole world. And so, from her 
 ample treasures, she sendeth forth armies 
 to conquer and destroy, to gather and 
 plunder, to build up her magnificence still 
 greater. 
 
 So Jaffeth, Shem and Ham ran red 
 with human blood, whereat I raised my 
 voice to high heaven, that Jehovih would 
 send deliverance for the souls of men. For 
 of the millions slain, whose spirits still lie 
 on the battle-fields in chaos, or madly 
 fighting some unseeen horror, none can 
 be persuaded to come to holier places in 
 heaven; whilst hosts of them rush madly 
 into Oas, to find their souls accursed by 
 mortals. So the heaven of Earth hath 
 fallen to the earth, save the I'hins and the 
 far-off I'huans, whose spirits my Lords 
 gather in and prepare for resurrection. But 
 amongst the Par'si'e nation, none more be- 
 lieve the dead shall rise, nor that spirit is; 
 but that with the mortal death there is the 
 end, to which the king hath made a de- 
 cree that never more shall man teach or 
 preach of a heaven for spirits of the dead, 
 nor proclaim a Great Spirit, a Creator. 
 
 Autevat said: In such manner God dis- 
 closed the affairs of earth and heaven, 
 which things, in fuller detail, I, with my 
 attendants, beheld in every land and king- 
 dom. And as we sat in Vibraj, in the 
 sacred circle, a light, a single star, ap- 
 peared before us, even at the throne of 
 God; and from its center the book of 
 heaven fell, as if to send broadcast before 
 mortals the plan and will of Jehovih, near 
 at hand. 
 
 At this God said: Tell me, Autevat, 
 thou that travelest across the mighty 
 heavens and art stored with the knowledge 
 of Gods ruling over other worlds, what is 
 
 the signal of this light and sacred book? 
 To which I replied: This, O God: The time 
 hath come to Earth to prove to mortals the 
 things whereof the Gods and Lords have 
 taught. History shall no longer be locked 
 up with the chosen race, the I'hins, but it 
 shall stand before all men. Thou shalt 
 prove the resurrection before these stub- 
 born kings, these slaughterers of men, 
 that they may say, not as the I'hins, we 
 believe the soul immortal, because handed 
 down from the ancients, but because it 
 hath been demonstrated before our eyes. 
 
 God said: How shall this be? To 
 which I replied: Not I, great God, can 
 tell, for that department is not in my keep- 
 ing. But this much I know: Thou shalt 
 send loo'is into the city of Oas, and they 
 shall raise up a su'is sar'gis of the fourth 
 grade. All else leave thou till Fragapatti 
 cometh. 
 
 God said: To reach the fourth grade 
 will require five generations, which shall 
 spring from the I'hin race,' commingling 
 the I'huans. Go, then, O Autevat, to thy 
 etherean home before the Council of 
 Obsod, to Jehovih's throne, and say to 
 great Fragapatti: An heir to the light 
 shall be born ere the dawn of dan of 
 Horub. 
 
 Autevat said: On learning these things 
 I took my leave and came swiftly back to 
 thy realm. 
 
 Fragapatti said: It is well. In the 
 time of the next dawn of dan on Earth 
 I will take a vacation in which to fulfill 
 Jehovih's plan on Earth and in her heav- 
 ens. 
 
 So saluting Autevat, who retired, Frag- 
 apatti proceeded with his Council in the 
 affairs of other worlds, having made a 
 memorandum of the time and place Earth 
 should near the plains of Horub, in 
 the etherean worlds, some two hundred 
 years yet to come. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 And when the time of dawn had come, 
 Jehovih's voice spake to Fragapatti, in his 
 etherean home, saying: My Son! Behold, 
 the dawn of dan neareth the border of 
 Horub, and God and Lords of Earth 
 are proclaiming the name of My infant 
 Son, Zarathustra. 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 145 
 
 So Fragapatti went into his etherean 
 Council of Gods and Goddesses and said: 
 The time hath come; the red star borders 
 on the plains of Horub. Jehovih calleth! 
 
 Then the Council rejoiced, for the 
 weighty matters of hundreds of etherean 
 worlds were settled for a space of time, 
 with promised rest and recreation in cor- 
 poreal fields. 
 
 First spake Ad'ar, God of many worlds, 
 a decreer of time in a'ji'an vortices, in the 
 regions of Hispian suns, saying: O Jeho- 
 vih, I rejoice that Thou hast decreed Frag- 
 apatti five years' rest, the dawn of Earth in 
 dan, with only Earth and her heavens to 
 deal with. 
 
 Next spake Fivaka, Goddess of three 
 etherean worlds, the white-haired wielder 
 of the Scimetar of Bars, period of Os, Car- 
 bon fashioner of the arcs of Job and Sawl. 
 She said: 
 
 O Jehovih, what shall be the prayer of 
 thy daughter Fivaka? What can her love 
 devise for the rest and glory of our Orian 
 Chief, Fragapatti? 
 
 Then spake Che'sin, marshal in chief 
 for seven etherean worlds, small man, with 
 flowing beard, brought forth from the star 
 Indr. He said: O Jehovih, make me con- 
 tributor of my much love to the rest and 
 glory of our Holy Chief, Fragapatti! 
 
 Thus spake ten thousand Gods and 
 Goddesses of their love and high esteem 
 for the worker, Fragapatti, rich in love, 
 power and wisdom, above all etherean 
 Gods in Horub. 
 
 Fragapatti said: Ten millions strong 
 my hosts shall be. On Earth and her 
 heavens, during the dawn of dan, five 
 years and fifty days we shall have no other 
 labor, thus making it as a holiday for 
 Gods and Goddesses to redeem the fallen 
 world ! 
 
 When Fragapatti had spoken, the 
 proper officers and workmen proceeded to 
 their parts, and in seven days the Yattal 
 announced the fire-ship, the beyan float, 
 ready for the journey. Meantime, the se- 
 lection of ten million redeemers had been 
 made, and they came, every one like a 
 brilliant star, to take their rooms in the 
 monarch vessel. Fragapatti made Huod 
 commander in chief, and gave him ten 
 thousand aids. For the curtains and tallij, 
 he made Metrav, Goddess of Rook, Mis- 
 
 tress of the Flowing East. And for the 
 spires, he made lata Mistress of Restless 
 Morn. She was Weaver to Ga'ing, in 
 Reth, four thousand years, and much 
 loved, with black eyes, piercing. Of music 
 Fragapatti made Theritiviv conductor. She 
 was Goddess of Helm, an etherean world 
 in the roadway Zi and Olus, four thou- 
 sand years Mistress of Ne'alt and Exan; 
 one time companion to Etisyai, the Vruiji, 
 loved in Wan and Sangawitch for her 
 mirth in adversity. Of the trumpeters, 
 Fragapatti made Boan conductor; he was 
 God of Ixalata, now on leave of absence. 
 For Chartist, he made Yan the chief; he 
 was Surveyor of Oatha, an etherean sea in 
 the Orian arc of Wede and Hollenpoit- 
 chava, also on leave of absence during the 
 red star dawn. He made Hetta Chief Mis- 
 tress of the Libraries. She was Goddess 
 of Vitia in the Wails of South Eng, thirty 
 thousand years Teacher of Imies, and ten 
 thousand years Counselor of the Orian 
 chief Erris, of the arc Wiamesse. 
 
 Besides these, Fragapatti distributed 
 the minor offices of the float to such Gods 
 and Goddesses whose most exalted states 
 were the extreme opposite. And thus they 
 started on their course, amidst the ap- 
 plause of thousands of millions of ethere- 
 ans, wishing them love and joy on their 
 mirthful cruise in furtherance of Jehovih's 
 will. 
 
 Speeding swiftly across the swamps of 
 Ull, where seven corporeal stars were dis- 
 membered a thousand years ago, now set 
 with a'ji'an fields and forming nebulae; 
 whereto they bring at times the drujas, the 
 dark spirits of other worlds, that they may 
 take on the semblance of corporeal forms 
 to complete their neglected works in times 
 past; the ship rose, and they shot into the 
 pastures of Ze, where Lepsa, God of the 
 corporeal star Tessa four hundred years, 
 was caring for seventy million es'yans, col- 
 onizing them to truth and good works. 
 Lepsa knew the float was coming, and so 
 had called a thousand million spectators, 
 knowing they desired to see great Fraga- 
 patti; and they sang and blew their trum- 
 pets, rejoicing; to which the Gods and 
 Goddesses of the float cast out myriads of 
 arc'ian flowers and sweet perfumes. 
 
 To Evul, now, the ■ ship made way, 
 where seven etherean worlds bordered in 
 
146 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 the arc of Nu, pastures of Elim, God of 
 Ooh'sin, where congregated another host 
 of two thousand million to see them pass, 
 cheering and singing and playing with 
 trumpets and stringed instruments; and to 
 this God, Elim, Fragapatti caused the 
 banners of the float to salute on the sign 
 Jehovih's name, being friends for ninety 
 thousand years, and Elim answered him 
 with a million posts of light, amidst the 
 waving of innumerable banners. 
 
 Onward moved the float, the fire-ship, 
 with its ten million joyous souls, now 
 nearing the borders of Horub, the boun- 
 dary of Fragapatti's honored regions, 
 known for hundreds of thousands of years, 
 and for his work on many worlds. Here, 
 reaching C'vork'um, the roadway of the 
 solar phalanx, near the post of dan, where 
 were quartered five hundred million ethe- 
 erans, on a voyage of exploration of more 
 than four million years, rich stored with 
 the glories of Great Jehovih's Universe. 
 
 Their Koa'loo was almost like a world, 
 so vast and stored with all appurtenances. 
 They talked of going home! Their pilots 
 had coursed the firmament since long be- 
 fore Earth was made, and knew more 
 than a million roadways in the etherean 
 worlds, and where best to travel to witness 
 the grandest contrasting scenes. 
 
 By invitation, Fragapatti halted here 
 awhile, and the hosts interchanged their 
 love and discoursed on their purposes, re- 
 joicing in the glories of Jehovih's everlast- . 
 ing kingdoms; and though they had lived 
 so long and seen so much, every one had 
 new and wondrous works to tell of; for so 
 great is the inventive power of the Great 
 Spirit that never twice alike will one find 
 the scenes in the etherean worlds, but ra- 
 diantly different, moving into everlasting 
 changes, as if each one were to outdo the 
 former in beauty and magnificence. 
 
 Onward sped Fragapatti's fire-ship, 
 richly stored with the soul-stirring won- 
 ders they had just heard from strange trav- 
 elers. Presently the float neared Chin- 
 vat. Here Fragapatti halted for a day, 
 sending swift messengers down to the 
 lower heavens and to the earth, to re- 
 solve where he should anchor during 
 dawn. And the next day he ordered 
 the lights lowered, and now slowly 
 moved toward the rolling Earth, down, 
 
 down, till he reached the third grade 
 of plateau from Earth's surface, called 
 Haraiti. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 Jehovih said: Here, My Son, in Hara- 
 iti, have I laid the foundation of thy king- 
 dom. Here make fast thy fire-ship; call 
 forth thy hosts; build thou a throne. Frag- 
 apatti said: Here will I build a throne, O 
 Jehovih. Haraiti shall be my headquar- 
 ters for the dawn of dan. Come forth, O 
 ye Gods of dawn! Come forth, O ye God- 
 desses of dawn! Hear the voice of the 
 Son of Jehovih. 
 
 The ship was anchored and the ten 
 millions came forth and assembled in a 
 living altar. Fragapattti raised his hand, 
 saying: Throne of Thy throne, O Jeho- 
 vih! And the hosts raised their hands, 
 and the elements took shape and majesty, 
 rising into a| throne brilliant as fire. Then 
 Fragapatti ascended and sat on the throne, 
 saying: Glory be to Thee, O Father! 
 
 A light came down from the etherean 
 firmament and covered the throne over 
 with a canopy wide enough for five mill- 
 ion men to sit under; and at the borders of 
 the canopy the ethereans, whose work it 
 was, set up columns of crystals, opaque 
 and transparent, illuminated with all pos- 
 sible colors, shades and tints. 
 
 Fragapatti said: I will build here a 
 Council Chamber, O Jehovih. And now 
 the hosts, Gods and Goddesses, held up 
 their arms and Jehovih cast down material 
 with which they built the habitable Mouru, 
 a council chamber and capital of Haraiti. 
 Then all hands turned to prayers; then 
 sang in praise. After which Fragapatti 
 said: 
 
 In Thy name, and by Thy Power and 
 Wisdom, O Jehovih, will I now establish 
 Earth's heavens anew. My marshals 
 shall proceed down to Vibraj and com- 
 mand the presence of God and his Lords, 
 and all such others as can endure this 
 light. They shall hear my voice and learn 
 my decrees. 
 
 Ten thousand marshals, saluting, de- 
 parted for the earth and regions below. 
 
 Fragapatti said: Meanwhile, I will ap- 
 point my High Council of the first house 
 of Mouru, Gods and Goddesses of dawn. 
 Hear me, then, in the name of Jehovih. 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 147 
 
 Caoka, God of Airram; Ata-kasha, God of 
 Beraitis; Airyama, God of Kruse; Pathe- 
 ma, Goddess of Rhon; Maidayarrya, Mis- 
 tress of Karyem; Gatha-Ahunavaiti, God- 
 dess of Halonij ; Rama-quacktra, God of 
 Veres; Vahista, God of Volu; Airam- 
 ushya, God of Icisi, the Myazdas; Haptan- 
 haiti, God of Samatras; Yima, God of 
 Aom; Sudgha, God of Laka; I'ragha, God 
 of Buhk-dhi; Elicic, Goddess of N'Syrus; 
 Harrwaiti, Goddess of Haut-mat, in a'ji; 
 Dews, Goddess of Vaerenthagna; Wette- 
 maiti, Goddess of Dyhama; Quactra, God- 
 dess of Aegima; Ustavaiti, Goddess of 
 Maha-Meru; Cura, Goddess of Coronea; 
 Yenne, Goddess of Aka; Caoshyanto, God 
 of Aberet; Rathweiska, God of Huri; 
 Cpentas, God of Butts; Vairyo, God of 
 Nuga-gala; D'Zoata and her brother, 
 Zaota, God and Goddess of Atarevasksha; 
 Ratheweiskare, God of Nece; Yatha, God 
 of Ameshas,. and Canha, God of Srawak, 
 shall be members of the Council of Dawn. 
 
 Fragapatti said: O Jehovih, behold 
 the glory of my house! I have chosen 
 only such as have ruled over whole worlds. 
 Was ever a God favored with such a Coun- 
 cil? Was ever so great a light sent to so 
 small a world as the red star? 
 
 Jehovih said: As I have created man 
 to need relaxation . at times, so have I 
 carried the same conditions to be desired 
 by My highest of Gods. Neither have I 
 exalted any God so high but the most 
 menial office in his glory. Neither shall 
 the autocrat learn sympathy till he liveth 
 with a beggar, nor the highest man learn 
 love and tenderness without taking a sea- 
 son in the depths of misery. 
 
 Fragapatti said: Shall the strong man 
 forget he was once a child? Can an Orian 
 Chief forget he was once a slave? Can he 
 that is in the light forget those who are 
 in the dark? Mighty art Thou, O Jeho- 
 vih! I came to Earth and her heavens to 
 rest myself in Thy service; but Thou wert 
 here before me. Thy Voice riseth up to 
 counsel me; yea, I am still but a child to 
 Thee! 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 When Fragapatti had selected both de- 
 partments of his Council, which comprised 
 one hundred thousand souls, he said: 
 
 When a God espouseth a new kingdom 
 
 it is customary for him to create his own 
 capital and affix the boundaries of his 
 lights and hall of audience; but when he 
 hath Gods and Goddesses for his assist- 
 ants, it is proper for them to help in the 
 buildings. In this case I make it your 
 labor to provide this realm. 
 
 Hardly had his words gone forth when 
 the Gods and Goddesses stretched forth 
 their hands unto Jehovih, and the elements 
 of the plateau took shape, and there stood 
 the canopy of the new kingdom; then 
 again they stretched forth their hands to 
 Jehovih and there came materials of the* 
 walls of the house of heaven; and yet again 
 they stretched forth their hands to Jeho- 
 vih, and there came also materials for the 
 floor and foundation. And the house was 
 called the House of Mouru, the place of 
 the throne of Fragapatti in the lower heav- 
 ens. On the plains beyond the house 
 Fragapatti created a thousand fields, and 
 in each of them he created ten thousand 
 mansions, and every mansion was capable 
 of one thousand souls, with roadways from 
 one to another, Fragapatti designing 
 them, his hosts being the workmen, in the 
 wisdom and power of Jehovih. 
 
 Whilst this work was going on, the 
 marshals who went down to Vibraj re- 
 turned, bringing God and his Lords with 
 them, and also twelve hundred thousand 
 spirits of the second resurrection. Fraga- 
 patti commanded them to bring God and 
 his Lords into the house of Mouru, and 
 they were so brought. 
 
 Fragapatti said: In the name of Jeho- 
 vih, I salute thee, God of Earth, and thy 
 Lords, and thy hosts. 
 
 God said: In Thy name, O Jehovih r 
 am I, and my Lords, and my hosts, blessed 
 with great joy. Now that thou hast come, 
 O Fragapatti, to redeem the Earth-born, 
 this is a joyful period in the time of 
 worlds. 
 
 The Lords said: For ourselves and 
 our hosts, O Jehovih, do we thank Thy 
 Son, Fragapatti. 
 
 Fragapatti said: That thou, O God, 
 may know my decrees, I commanded thee 
 and thy Lords and thy exalted hosts hith- 
 er. Hear me, then, and to whom I send 
 thee do thou my commandments, in the 
 name of Jehovih. The time hath come 
 when mortals on Earth shall begin 
 
148 
 
 CYCLE OF FBAGAPATTI 
 
 their lessons in spiritual things, being 
 themselves made part in the building of 
 Jehovih's kingdoms. Through thee, the 
 present reigning God of Earth and her 
 heavens, must be carried out the death 
 and resurrection of thy chosen heir, Zara- 
 thustra, to prove first, that man on the 
 corporeal earth can live All Pure and with- 
 out sin; second, that corporeal death be- 
 longeth to the earth-body of man, and not 
 to the spirit; and, third, that after death 
 the same person can rise in spirit and ap- 
 pear to mortals, to be seen and known; 
 after which he shall show his final ascent 
 toward the upper heavens in the arms of 
 his God. 
 
 Whilst this cometh upon thee in per- 
 son, thou shalt also, through thy minister- 
 ing angels, prove to mortals the advantage 
 of virtue and truth over sin and darkness. 
 For thou shalt cause to be stricken in 
 death two men who are all impure; and 
 they shall suffer death at the same time 
 with thy heir, Zarathustra; but these shall 
 not have power of themselves to appear 
 before mortals after death. For mortals, 
 shall hereafter be a testimony to one an- 
 other of the reward of virtue, and the 
 power of being one with the Gods who 
 are Sons of Jehovih. But since all attesta- 
 tion by spirits can be set at defiance by 
 the craft of philosophers, thou shalt not 
 wait till after the death of thy heir to teach 
 the truths of the Father's kingdom, but 
 beforehand. Causing Zarathustra, whilst 
 yet mortal, to write down rules of mortal 
 life, and doctrines, and faith, and repent- 
 ance, and praise of the Great Spirit, and 
 of prophecy, and all manner of righteous 
 gifts, and the power of miracles, and the 
 triumph of the spirit of man over cor- 
 poreal elements. And when thou hast com- 
 pleted these things thou shalt bring the 
 spirit of Zarathustra to this House; but 
 the druks who suffer death with him thou 
 shalt deliver in the usual way to the places 
 prepared for their resurrection. 
 
 Tell me, then, how standeth thy heir? 
 And ask of me whatsover thou wilt to as- 
 sist thee to carry out these, my decrees, 
 and it shall be granted unto thee. 
 
 God said: Zarathustra hath attained 
 his twentieth year, and comprehendeth the 
 destiny put upon him. He is pure and 
 wise, with faith and gentleness; but he is 
 
 larger and more powerful than any other 
 man in the world. He is instructed both 
 in the spiritual and corporeal senses, hav- 
 ing a knowledge of the books of the 
 ancients, and of writing and of making of 
 tablets. 
 
 Fragapatti said: Five years thou shalt 
 have in which to complete thy labor. De- 
 part, therefore, to thy place, taking with 
 thee such of thy Lords and hosts as thou 
 mayest require. I will appoint a thousand 
 messengers to travel betwixt thy place and 
 this, that every day thou shalt ask for this 
 or that, and whatever thy requests may be, 
 it shall be granted unto thee. To which 
 God replied: 
 
 I will go now and cause Zarathustra to 
 write a book of wisdom, and give him 
 prophecy over the kings and nations and 
 tribes of men. What I do shall be cited 
 to thee in Mouru. 
 
 Thus saying, God withdrew and select- 
 ed such asssistants as he desired; and after 
 this Fragapatti granted a day of recrea- 
 tion, in which time the ethereans were 
 made well acquainted with the conditions 
 of mortals and of the thousands of mill- 
 ions of spirits still lingering in the first 
 resurrection, and in darkness and chaos. 
 On the next day God and his hosts de- 
 parted for the earth, well attended by 
 thousands of volunteers from the etherean 
 sojourners of Haraiti. 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 Fragapatti said: The Voice of Jehovih 
 spake to me, saying: My Son, appoint 
 thou an assistant chief to sit on thy 
 throne, and go thou around about atmos- 
 pherea, taking surveyors and inspectors 
 with thee; for thou shalt see with thine 
 own eyes the condition of the thousands 
 of millions of spirits in hada. 
 
 Fragapatti said: In Jehovih's name, I 
 announce Athrava my assistant, God of 
 Mouru. There was great rejoicing in the 
 Council at this. Then came Athrava for- 
 ward and ascended Jehovih's throne, and 
 sat on the right hand of Fragapatti. 
 Etherean lights fell upon the place on 
 every side, and Fragapatti gathered from 
 the elements and made a crown for Ath- 
 rava, and crowned him. Officers and 
 workmen were sent to build a conveyance 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 149 
 
 for Fragapatti, and for such attendants as 
 he might take with him. So the next day 
 Fragapatti chose his companions, thirty 
 thousand, making Verethragna speaker, 
 and he and they departed for their inspec- 
 tion of hada and the Earth. His ship was 
 built without lights or curtains, so they 
 might travel unobserved. First, he in- 
 spected the plateau of Haraiti, which prior 
 to this had never been inhabited; and he 
 found its distance from the Earth was 
 equal to ten diameters of the Earth; and 
 its east and west and north and south di- 
 ameters corresponded in size to what the 
 Earth would be were it that volume; that 
 is, the superfice of the plateau was five 
 hundred and twenty-eight thousand miles 
 in every direction. And in the ratio of 
 the number of mortals on the Earth, this 
 plateau would inhabit five hundred and 
 twenty-eight million souls. And yet this 
 was not the thousandth part of the num- 
 ber it could sustain. 
 
 Fragapatti said: Such is Haraiti, O 
 Jehovih. And yet there have been till now 
 no spirits to come and inhabit it! Who 
 can survey Thy works, O Father? Who 
 shall fear for the limit of Thy handiwork? 
 
 Verethragna said: And yet we shall 
 find in the lowest places spirits huddled 
 together like bees in a hive. And is it not 
 so with mortals also? They cluster to- 
 gether in cities and tribes, warring for 
 inches of ground, whilst vast divisions of 
 the Earth lay waste and vacant. 
 
 Fragapatti said: Is this not the sum of 
 the darkness of mortals and of spirits in 
 the lowest realms? They know not how 
 to live? A spider or an ant is more one 
 with the Creator than they. 
 
 Fragapatti and his companions now 
 visited Zeredho, which was six diameters 
 of the Earth distant. Here they found a 
 colony of two thousand million spirits that 
 had been founded by Osire three thousand 
 three hundred years before; but not the 
 same people, being such as came up from 
 the Earth afterwards. They had a God 
 named Hoab, an atmospherean two thou- 
 sand one hundred years. And he was up- 
 right and wise, and of most excellent good 
 works; but, knowing nothing of etherea, 
 had no ambition to rise thither. And his 
 content had visted itself on the colony, 
 and they were contented also. 
 
 Fragapatti asked: To remain here for- 
 ever, is this the extent of thy desires, 
 Hoab? And Hoab answered him, saying: 
 Yea, Master. What more is life than to 
 reach the highest place and remain there? 
 To which Fragapatti said: Is this the all 
 highest? And Hoab said: Yea, Master. 
 Any place and condition is the all highest 
 if man make it so. None can attain higher 
 than I; no people higher than my people. 
 We are freed from the Earth and hada, 
 and we desire not to return thither, nor to 
 go to any other place. 
 
 Fragapatti said: Let us walk a little 
 that I may see thy kingdom. Hoab con- 
 sented, and they walked along, seeing the 
 inhabitants lying at ease, some amusing 
 themselves weaving threads of light, then 
 unraveling them and weaving them over 
 again; others playing with crystals and 
 lenses and opaque and transparent ele- 
 ments, but not one doing anything for 
 another; nor in fact needed they, for all 
 were capable of doing for themselves. 
 Now after they had traveled awhile Fraga- 
 patti said: Hast thou not a desire to re- 
 turn to the plateau below thee, Hoab, 
 where the inhabitants are in misery and 
 darkness, and bring them into thine own 
 realm? To which Hoab said: 
 
 Nay, Master. Let them shift for them- 
 selves. Even if we helped them, they 
 would be thankless. Nay, my doctrine is: 
 Man is the highest of all things; the ele- 
 ments are dumb; the worlds are many and 
 wide. Let man choose a corner for him- 
 self, and there settle forever. 
 
 Fragapatti asked: Because a man 
 chooseth a corner, is it necessarily his 
 own? Hoab said: Our place was be- 
 queathed us by our forefathers; of course 
 it is ours, and will remain ours forever. 
 Neither allow we any other spirits to set- 
 tle in our dominions. Being far away 
 from the rest of the world, we are not 
 much molested. 
 
 Fragapatti said: How came ye hither? 
 Hoab said: Long ago there came a God 
 hither, named Osire, bringing six thou- 
 sand million drujas up from the Earth. 
 With them he founded a colony here, with 
 factories, colleges, hospitals and all things 
 necessary to enlighten the people, giving 
 them ample teachers. In course of time 
 many of the inhabitants migrated away 
 
150 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 from this place, and it was almost depleted 
 of its people. But the Gods below this 
 sent new supplies of inhabitants, of which 
 we are the second and third installments; 
 so we inherited the place, with all its fac- 
 tories and educationals and other places. 
 
 Fragapatti said: As ye were raised up 
 by the Gods of other places, would it not 
 give ye joy to raise up others who are still 
 in darkness? Hoab said: Nay, Master. 
 We are pure and refined; the atmosphere 
 of drujas is unpleasant to us. They would 
 vitiate our own happiness, besides entail- 
 ing toil and responsibility upon us. We 
 cannot mix with any people but the refined 
 and holy. We take care of ourselves; let 
 others do the same. 
 
 Fragapatti said: Who thinkest thou I 
 am, and my people with me? Hoab said: 
 Visitors from some far-off realm, who are 
 either discordant with yourselves or bent 
 on meddling with the affairs of other peo- 
 ples. We have had visitors before, and we 
 never grieved when they left us. To which 
 Fragapatti replied: 
 
 Thou art strong in thy philosophy. To 
 be satisfied with one's own self and be- 
 havior is to be a God in fact. Hadst thou 
 nothing to fear from immigration coming 
 to thy shore, or to fear from some new 
 philosophy undermining thy long estab- 
 lished convictions, thou mightest indeed be 
 the happiest of Gods and thy people the 
 happiest of people. 
 
 Hoab said: True. Thou perceivest 
 wisely. O that there was nothing to fear, 
 nothing to dread forever! 
 
 Then Fragapatti said: And I declare 
 unto thee, Hoab, that such a condition can 
 be attained. For I have seen kingdoms in 
 heaven so fortified. And wert thou and 
 thy people prepared to receive the sacred 
 secrets pertaining thereto, I would most 
 willingly unfold them before thee. Hoab 
 said: Thou art a wise God; tarry thou 
 and teach us. 
 
 Fragapatti said: I am now on a jour- 
 ney and cannot remain longer; but on one 
 condition I will return hither and disclose 
 these matters, so that never more shalt 
 thou fear for immigration into thy coun- 
 try, nor for any philosophy which any man 
 or God can teach. Exact a promise of se- 
 crecy from all thy people. Hoab said: 
 It shall be done. 
 
 So Fragapatti and his hosts withdrew 
 and proceeeded on their journey, promis- 
 ing to return when notification had been 
 served on Hoab's people. But Fragapatti 
 inspected the whole superfice and found it 
 capable of educating and providing for ten 
 hundred thousand million spirits, whereas 
 there were but two thousand million in 
 Hoab's kingdom; and they inhabited only 
 a small corner of the plateau; neverthe- 
 less, Hoab laid claim to the whole. 
 
 After this Fragapatti descended to the 
 next plateau, the first grade plateau above 
 the Earth, called Aoasu, signifying land 
 and sky world, for the first spirit life after 
 mortal death. Aoasu had its foundation 
 on the Earth, and it undulated with moun- 
 tains and valleys, having seas over the 
 corporeal seas. And the outer superfice 
 of Aoasu was from twenty to a hundred 
 miles above the Earth's surface, and hab- 
 itable within and without. But the first 
 resurrections were within it and on the 
 earth's surface, and the second resurrec- 
 tion mostly on its superfice. On the road- 
 way betwixt Aoasu and Zeredho, next de- 
 scending, it was that Osire established 
 Vibraj, which was now so depleted of 
 its people that Fragapatti halted not to 
 examine it, but proceeded to Aoasu direct. 
 Here lay the mountains of Morn and Eve, 
 and the mountains of Moon and Sun and 
 Stars, chief of which groups were: Ushi- 
 daho, Ushidarena, Erezifya, Fraorepa, 
 Ezora, Arezura, Tudae, Bumya, Doitya, 
 Raiodhita, Mazassavao, Autare, a place 
 of light, inhabited by Hura, Lord of Vou- 
 ta; Ereasho, Vata-gaiko, a place of Uz, 
 signifying torments because of its dark- 
 ness. This group of mountains was ninety 
 miles higher than the Earth mountains of 
 Jaffeth. 
 
 South of these were Adarana, Aayana, 
 Isakata, Somya, Kanaka-tafegrhao, Vahra 
 and the double mountain Hamanakanna; 
 eight ranges of the round mountains, Fra- 
 vanku; the four peaks, the Vidwaana. 
 These extended over the Earth mountains 
 of Shem, and had an altitude above the 
 Earth of one hundred miles. These were 
 the oldest inhabited spirit heavens since 
 the submersion of Pan, whose plateaus 
 were carried up to a higher heaven. 
 
 Extending east and west lay the group 
 called the Red Men's group — Aezaka, 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 151 
 
 Maenaka, Vakhedrakae, Akaia, Tudhak- 
 kae, Ishvakhaya, Draoshisvao, Cairivao, 
 Nanhusmao, Kahayuyu, Autarekanhae, 
 Karayaia, which were the first places in 
 heaven for colonizing the spirits of the 
 I'huan race. 
 
 The next group lay to the west and 
 south, which were Gichindava, I'huna- 
 Varya, Raegamna, Akaya, Asha-Cteam- 
 bana, Urinyovadidkae, Asnahovao, Usha- 
 oma, Utsagaerenao, Cyamakhama, Cyama- 
 ka, Vafrayaotso, Vafrayao, Vourrusha and 
 Uasoakhao. 
 
 To the south of this group were the 
 Towering Eagles: Ijatarra, Adhutuva- 
 vata, Ceptimavarenao, Cpentodata, Asna- 
 voaya, Kairogakhaivacao, Tauraiosa, Ba- 
 royo, Barocrayama, Fraayapoa, Udrya, 
 Usayaokhava, Raevao. All of which 
 groups were named by the Gods 
 and Lords of the intermediate pla- 
 teau during the time of the Yi-ha 
 language amongst the mortals, being 
 named after the amalgamation of the 
 tribes of I'hins, every syllable in former 
 ages being one tribe, whereof the Gods 
 have made this testimony to endure from 
 before the time of Fragapatti and Zara- 
 thustra, wherein it may be proven to mor- 
 tals and spirits that this division of the 
 spirit world was revealed to man at the 
 time language was carried to its highest 
 compounding. 
 
 Besides these mountains in the lowest 
 heavens there were four thousand others, 
 the names of which were fully registered 
 in the libraries of heaven by Thor and his 
 sub-Gods; but more than two thousand of 
 them were uninhabited. 
 
 Fragapatti said: Alas, these heavens! 
 Who can measure the vanity of men and 
 angels that cut loose from the Great 
 Spirit, endeavoring to set up kingdoms on 
 their own account! Their places perish. 
 Behold these vagrant spirits, strolling 
 about, or hiding amidst the ruins, millions 
 of them prowling around, ashamed of their 
 rags and nakedness. 
 
 Verethragna said: I thank thee, O Je- 
 hovih, that I am once again amongst the 
 lowest! Keep me, O Father, amidst this 
 darkness, till I shall never again forget 
 the lowest of my brothers and sisters. I 
 behold thy wisdom, O Jehovih! But for 
 these cycles of time, in the dawns of which 
 
 Thy ethereans can come down to witness 
 the bounden in hell, they would themselves 
 forget the horrors. O that Thou wilt not 
 suffer me to rest till I have helped to 
 raise them up to know Thee, and to be a 
 glory within Thy works ! 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 Fragapatti surveyed Aoasu in the east, 
 and his officers enumerated the spirits and 
 recorded their condition, and then he 
 called his conductors, saying: I have 
 measured the East, take me now to the 
 West. 
 
 So the ship, with its passengers, was 
 raised a little and started for the west, 
 running low over the regions lying west 
 of Ham, Shem and Jaffeth. Fragapatti 
 said: 
 
 I see the plan of the Gods on this star 
 was to complete its inhabitation by going 
 westward. For this reason I will see 
 where they designed to have the Eve of 
 Death and the birth of the Father's king- 
 dom on the corporeal part. 
 
 When they came to the Atlantic ocean 
 they raised their ship still higher and sped 
 across for the regions inhabited by the 
 I'hins and I'huans. Arriving thither, they 
 came to Ipseogee, a region in the lower 
 heaven, where Hapacha, Lord of the 
 I'hins, had a kingdom of seventy million 
 souls, many of whom were I'huan spirits. 
 Here Fragapatti halted and made fast his 
 ship, remaining seven days. And Hapacha 
 received him and his hosts and entertained 
 them. And during the time of their so- 
 journ Hapacha sent his otevan out around 
 over all the heavens belonging to Guata- 
 ma, north and south, taking the surveyors 
 and inspectors of the hosts of Fragapatti 
 into all inhabited places, so they could 
 complete their records. In the meantime 
 Hapacha conducted Fragapatti through- 
 out his kingdom, exhibiting the factories, 
 schools, colleges, hospitals and all such 
 places as belong to the second resurrec- 
 tion. 
 
 Fragapatti said to Hapacha: In thee 
 and thy kingdom I am well pleased. Thou 
 shalt hear from me ere many days. At 
 present I must depart. 
 
152 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 So Fragapatti told not who he was, nor 
 what was his mission, but, gathering to- 
 gether his hosts, departed, still going west- 
 ward until he completed the circumference 
 of the Earth. 
 
 Now will I again go around the Earth, 
 said Fragapatti, and inspect mortals and 
 their kingdoms. So his conductors now 
 ran the ship just above the lands, being 
 guided by messengers familiar with the 
 Earth and all the habitable places. And 
 they zigzagged their course, going into all 
 kingdoms, into all large cities, and into 
 forests and plains, determining the condi- 
 tion of the earth and its capabilities, 
 as well as the conditions of mortals 
 and their capabilities. And when Frag- 
 apatti had completed this latter in- 
 spection he returned to Mouru, in Hara- 
 iti; and the whole time of his absence was 
 twenty-seven days. And all the records 
 obtained on the expedition were immedi- 
 ately filed in Mouru, where the High 
 Council and others who chose could read 
 them. And on the third day thereafter 
 Fragapatti resumed the throne of Jehovih, 
 and was prepared to found anew the king- 
 doms of atmospherea, and those of Earth, 
 to overthrow or set aside what was not 
 good, and to raise up both mortals and 
 spirits who had proved themselves 
 worthy. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 Now this was the manner of procedure 
 in the House of Mouru: Fragapatti 
 would announce the subject, then the rep- 
 resentatives of hundreds would speak on 
 the subject, each rank according to exalta- 
 tion. When all that desired to, or whom 
 Fragapatti asked, had spoken, then Fraga- 
 patti would announce the decree, in the 
 name of Jehovih. And this is an example 
 of the decrees: 
 
 Fragapatti said: What shall be the di- 
 visions of the Earth and who the Lords 
 thereof? And when the speakers of the 
 House had expressed their light, then 
 Fragapatti said: In the name of Jehovih 
 these shall be the divisions of the Earth: 
 
 Jaffeth on the east and north, by the 
 sea and to the ice regions, and on the west 
 to the mountains of Oh'e'loo, and it shall 
 be called the first division. 
 
 To the waters in the east and souths 
 and westward to the highlands of E'zar, 
 shall be named Shem. 
 
 The south land shall henceforth be 
 called Arabin'ya, encompassed by the sea. 
 And north of this, the first country of the 
 brown red race, shall be called Heleste, 
 bordering on Shem and Jaffeth on the 
 east and extending half way to the east on 
 the west. 
 
 Uropa shall be Goddess of the west 
 part, and it shall be called after her. And 
 the two great west lands shall be called 
 North Guatama and South Guatama. And 
 all the islands of the Earth shall be called 
 Oce'ya, and the waters of the earth shall 
 be called Oce'a, signifying mirror of the 
 earth and sky. 
 
 For the seven divisions of the Earth 
 there shall be seven rulers of the rank of 
 Lord God; and for South Oce'ya, one 
 ruler of the rank of Lord; and for North 
 Oce'ya, one ruler of the rank of Lord; and 
 for Japan, one ruler of the rank of sub- 
 God. 
 
 Hear me, O ye Gods and Goddesses: 
 Whom I shall proclaim from amongst you 
 shall reign during the dawn of dan only, 
 but they shall raise up successors in Je- 
 hovih's name, to the same rank, to hold 
 dominion two hundred years, the next 
 succeeding resurrection. 
 
 Fragapatti said: I proclaim, in the 
 name of Jehovih, Ah-oan, Lord God of 
 Jaffeth; Yima, Lord God of Shem; E'chad, 
 Lord God of Arabin'ya; Gir-ak-shi, Lord 
 God of Heleste; Uropa, Lord Goddess of 
 Uropa; Yaton'te, Lord God of North Gua- 
 tama; Kow'anea, Lord God of South 
 Guatama; M'wing'mi, Lord God of South 
 Oce'ya; Otshata, Lord God of North 
 Oce'ya, and Soofwa, sub-God of Japan. 
 Approach the throne, O ye Lord Gods 
 and Lords, and sub-God, that ye may be 
 annointed in the name of the Father, and 
 duly crowned with the emblem of All 
 Light. 
 
 First came the Lord Gods, and they 
 stood before the throne of Jehovih, now 
 illumined brilliantly in gold and white. 
 Fragapatti said: By Thy power and wis- 
 dom, O Jehovih, which rest in me, do I 
 annoint these, Thy Lord Gods, and be- 
 stow to Thy kingdoms, for Thy glory. 
 Receive ye this fire, for it is Jehovih's, an- 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 153 
 
 nointing with power and wisdom, that all 
 men, women and children, mortals and 
 spirits coming under your dominion may 
 rejoice in their Creator forever! 
 
 The Lord Gods responded: May I 
 glorify Thee, O Jehovih, in the kingdom 
 Thou hast bestowed upon me! In Thy 
 name I receive this fire, for it is Thy bap- 
 tism with power and wisdom. Whomso- 
 ever Thou hast entrusted to my dominion 
 will I cause to rejoice at all times, and to 
 rise up forever in Thy numberless king- 
 doms! And there came down from above 
 a stream of light and settled upon them. 
 
 Fragapatti said: And to you I be- 
 queath, in Jehovih's name power to exalt 
 successors, that ye may also bequeath to 
 your successors power to exalt successors 
 also; and so on till the next dawn 
 of dan from the etherean kingdoms, 
 for of such manner shall be the do- 
 minion of the Gods and Lords of Earth 
 and her heavens for a long season here- 
 after. 
 
 The Lord Gods responded: Thy pow- 
 er, O Jehovih, do I accept, to exalt a suc- 
 cessor to me in my dominions, with power 
 to his successors after him, to the next 
 etherean dawn of dan. 
 
 Fragapatti said: Crown of Thy Crown, 
 O Jehovih, do I weave of Thy golden 
 light for these, thy exalted Sons and 
 Daughter; and with my hand in Thy 
 name crown them. Be Thou with them 
 now and forever. Amen. Then Fraga- 
 patti gathered of the light present, and 
 fashioned crowns for them, and they came 
 forward to the foot of the throne, and he 
 crowned them. 
 
 And now they sat down at the foot of 
 the throne in ancient custom, and Fraga- 
 patti came down from the throne, bring- 
 ing attendant Gods with him; and they 
 took the hands of the newly annointed 
 Gods and raised them up; and Fragapatti 
 said: Arise thou, O Lord God, and go 
 thy way. Jehovih is with thee. Then they 
 stood aside. 
 
 Then came forward the two Lords. 
 Fragapatti said: O Jehovih, by Thy pow- 
 er and wisdom in me vested, do I appoint 
 and announce these, Thy Lords, to their 
 divisions of the Earth; and with my hands 
 and in Thy name weave I a crown for each 
 
 of them, and crown them Lords of Thy 
 Light, for Thy glory. Amen. 
 
 Hear me, O Lords; that which I be- 
 stow in the name of the Father, and ye 
 receive, ye shall also bestow in the name 
 of the Father upon your successors at the 
 end of this dawn of dan. Though a Lord 
 God hath dominion, first with mortals, 
 and, second, with the first heaven in his 
 division which resteth on the Earth; and 
 though a Lord hath dominion with mor- 
 tals only, and with such ashars as minister 
 unto them, ye twain are made Lords of 
 far distant islands, where ye shall deter- 
 mine many things in your own way, often 
 being Gods also, which I also bequeath 
 unto you and your successors forever. 
 
 The Lords said:. What Thou hast put 
 upon me, O Jehovih, I will do, with Thy 
 power and wisdom, for Thy glory forever. 
 Amen. I receive Thy crown with praise 
 and thanksgiving, and will bestow it in 
 Thy name upon my successor, bright as 
 I now receive it. 
 
 Fragapatti then laid the crowns upon 
 them, and they sat at the foot of the 
 throne also. Then Fragapatti took them 
 by the hand and raised them up, saying: 
 Arise, O Lords of Jehovih, and go your 
 ways. And when they stood aside Soo'fwa 
 came forward. Fragapatti said: In Thy 
 name, O Jehovih, and by Thy power in 
 me vested, do I this, Thy son, crown sub- 
 God of his division of the Earth and its 
 heavens. Of Thy Light I crown him and 
 bestow him with a rod of water and a rod 
 of fire, that he may have dominion in Thy 
 name, and for Thy Glory. Amen! 
 
 Hear me, O God: Thy duties make 
 thee both Lord and God; but thy second 
 resurrections shall be removed at short in- 
 tervals, as thou shalt be hereafter informed. 
 But thou shalt have power to appoint as- 
 sistant Lords to be with thee, in my 
 name and the Father's. And thou shalt 
 also exalt a successor after thee, with pow- 
 er to his successors also. In Jehovih's 
 name, receive thou this crown of yellow 
 light, for it is the emblem of the oldest 
 habitable country above the waters of the 
 Earth! And may the Father be with thee 
 now and forever. Amen. 
 
 He also sat at the foot of the throne, 
 and Fragapatti raised him up, even as the 
 
154 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 others, saying: . Arise, O God, and go 
 thy way. So he stood aside. And now 
 the es'enaurs sang and chanted; and the 
 marshals led the way; and the newly em- 
 powered Gods departed out of the House 
 of Mouru. And there had been provided 
 for them already a vessel sufficient to re- 
 conduct them back to the Earth; and they 
 entered the vessel, and amidst the flying 
 banners and the music of the trumpeters 
 they sped forward and were soon out of 
 sight. 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 The hosts of the second resurrection 
 were now conducted to the mansions pre- 
 viously created in Haraiti by Fragapatti; 
 and they were provided with teachers and 
 occupations, according to their develop- 
 ments. 
 
 Fragapatti said: The marshals in chief 
 will now send the builders of fire-ships be- 
 fore me; I will speak to them. And when 
 the builders had come, and duly saluted 
 before the throne, Fragapatti said: 
 
 Go build me an avalanza capable of 
 carrying three thousand million angels, 
 with as many rooms, capable of descent 
 and ascent, and east and west and north 
 and south motion, and prepare it with a # 
 magnet that it may face to the north 
 whilst traveling. 
 
 The builders saluted, and then with- 
 drew, and went and built the vessel. And 
 it was two hundred thousand paces east 
 and west, and the same north and south; 
 its height was one thousand lengths, and 
 the vesture around it was a thousand paces 
 thick; and it was provided with etherean 
 curtains, two hundred thousand; and with 
 four hundred thousand banners, of all pos- 
 sible colors, shades and tints. 
 
 Besides there were fifty thousand small 
 flags and streamers. The floor was woven 
 in copy of a spider's net, extending from 
 the center outward, and with circular bars 
 at crosses; and the frame-work within was 
 constructed with one million uprights, the 
 entire height of the vessel; and yet across 
 these were twenty million bars; and with- 
 in the whole were the rooms and halls and 
 places for musicians. 
 
 When it was completed the builders 
 notified Fragapatti. He said: Athrava, 
 come thou and sit on the throne. I prom- 
 
 ised to go and see Hoab and his colony, 
 in Zeredho, when he should send me word 
 regarding certain matters. Behold, mes- 
 sengers have notified me, and Hoab de- 
 sires to know how he shall establish his 
 colony, that he may never more fear to be 
 annoyed by other Gods and angels. Let 
 fifty thousand musicians enter the ship 
 with me, besides a sufficient number of 
 captains and officers to manage the ship. 
 
 The marshals at once made the proper 
 selections, and took them to the ship, 
 when they all entered, Fragapatti with 
 them, and they departed. So Fragapatti 
 returned to Zeredho, where the ambitious 
 Hoab and his colony desired to be sole 
 occupant forever. Hoab was waiting to 
 receive him, having aroused up a suffi- 
 cient number of his indolent subjects to 
 maintain the semblance of a heavenly 
 Council. But what a surprise! He had 
 expected only a small vessel, with a few 
 attendants. And now when he beheld the 
 magnificence of the avalanza and the 
 majesty of the band of musicians, so far 
 transcending anything he had ever seen, 
 he feared and was awe-stricken. 
 
 Fragapatti approached slowly, but 
 with Avon lights, and when the ship was 
 near at hand, the hosts aboard cast out 
 hundreds of thousands of perfumed 
 ovaries, which exploded with beautiful 
 colors, filling the atmosphere around about 
 with the most delightful perfume. Finally 
 the avalanza came to anchor, and Fraga- 
 patti, without any ceremony, alighted, tak- 
 ing a thousand attendants with him, and 
 came directly up to Hoab, who was some- 
 what abashed on account of his shabby ap- 
 pearance. 
 
 Fragapatti said: Friend and brother, 
 peace and joy be unto thee and thy house! 
 To which Hoab replied: All hail, Great 
 Chief! Happiness attend thee and thy 
 hosts! And were it not that I had pre- 
 viously discovered thou wert a philosopher 
 like myself, I would apologize for the vast 
 difference betwixt the respective appear- 
 ances of our hosts. But ye are welcome 
 all the same! 
 
 Fragapatti said: A mere incident of 
 conditions, most noble God. Thou art 
 aware, when children go on a holiday ex- 
 cursion, they attire themselves in their 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 155 
 
 best; so it is better that I find an apology 
 than that thou shouldst. 
 
 Hoab said: Nay, Chief, there is a 
 philosophy in this matter which hath wor- 
 ried me of late. A thousand years ago, my 
 colony was ambitious to attire itself in 
 grandeur, and to build fine ships, and go 
 on excursions also. Five hundred years 
 later, they ceased building ships and going 
 on excursions saying: What is the use? 
 Latterly, they are utilitarians, doing just 
 as little as posible. In fact, many of my 
 subjects deny themslves comforts on the 
 plea that they can do without them. 
 
 Fragapatti said: Do you remember 
 that when I was here before I remarked 
 that without contentment no people had 
 attained to peace; and thou didst acquiesce. 
 Why, then shouldst thou not rejoice that 
 thy people have thus subdued ambition and 
 curiosity? Hast thou lost contentment in 
 so short a time? Thou knowest I came 
 hither to impart to thee and thy people the 
 great secret, that ye may so fortify your- 
 selves that ye shall never fear for Gods or 
 angels molesting you. 
 
 Hoab said: Hear me, O Chief: If my 
 people lose all ambition for rites and cere- 
 monies, and dancings and excursions; and 
 keep constantly striving to deny them- 
 selves of everything save what necessity 
 calleth for; and if that necessity becometh 
 smaller and smaller, where will it end? 
 Will not all inspiration die out? For. 
 to tell the truth, since my people have 
 given up rites and ceremonies, and prayers 
 and singings, they have also given up re- 
 joicings of soul, and are becoming like a 
 dead people. 
 
 Fragapatti said: Then thou wouldst 
 seem to prove that to hold on only to the 
 useful in life would ultimately end in sui- 
 cide to the state, to the family, to the in- 
 dividual, and even to the soul? 
 
 Hoab said: Many of my people are 
 too lazy to clothe themselves; and because 
 of shame, they seek secluded places, as 
 they say, to live as they please. Do not 
 such people commit suicide against the 
 state? Has any man a right to withdraw 
 himself from his fellows, saying: It suiteth 
 me better? We have been told that in the 
 first age of mortals they had no ambition 
 to live together, being void of all talents, 
 and that the Gods inspired them to lan- 
 
 guage and to society, giving them rites 
 and ceremonies as an inducement to make 
 them harmonious and attractive to one an- 
 other. 
 
 Fragapatti said: How shall I account 
 for the difference betwixt thy arguments 
 now and the other time I was with thee? 
 Thou desired me to believe that thou and 
 thy people were the highest, best, happiest 
 of all people in all the heavens. Why this 
 change? 
 
 Hoab said: Thou didst promise me 
 thou wouldst teach us some way of pro- 
 tection against being molested by other 
 Gods and spirits from other kingdoms. 
 Since then I have reasoned on the subject, 
 and I perceive that if such a state of se- 
 curity could be given to my people they 
 would wander off in isolation, and even 
 forget language and lose all judgment. 
 How, then, was it thou told me thou hadst 
 been in heavens where such a state of 
 seeming impossibility existeth? 
 
 Fragapatti said: Let not arguments 
 sway thee, O Hoab. But rather examine 
 proofs for thyself. I mistrusted that my 
 statement to thee was too extravagant to 
 be believed without evidence. Behold, 
 then, what I have done. I brought a ves- 
 sel large enough for all thy people, desir- 
 ing that ye go with me to my kingdom, 
 new founded in Haraiti; and if thou 
 shouldst have any further desire, at the end 
 of a few years, I will take thee and thy 
 people to still another kingdom, in a far- 
 off world. After that, if you still desire it, 
 I will provide thee the same conveyance 
 back to Zeredho, with power to rule over 
 it to thy heart's content. 
 
 Hoab said: Fairest of Gods! I feared 
 indeed thou hadst come with the old story, 
 to worship the All Light, the Unknowa- 
 ble Nothingness, with foolish ceremonies, 
 rites, prayers and songs of praise, which, 
 however good for the ignorant and super- 
 stitious, are worthless to a God as en- 
 lightened as I am. This thou canst per- 
 ceive with thine own judgment. Gladly 
 will I go with thee, and I will persuade 
 as many of my people as possible to go 
 also. Thou art the first God that ever 
 came to our heaven that wanted not to 
 circumscribe our liberties, which neither 
 I nor my people can tolerate. 
 
 These things were then communicated 
 
156 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 to the people of Zeredho; and after a few 
 days they gathered together and went into 
 the avalanza, every soul of them. Fraga- 
 patti signaled the commander not to go 
 direct to Haraiti, but by way of Utza, one 
 of the hells in the Aoasu mountains, in- 
 habited by thousands of millions of spirits 
 in darkness, many of whom knew not who 
 they were, nor had they names, being 
 infants, idiots, chaotic and foul smelling. 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 When they came to Utza Hoab cried 
 out: What do my eyes behold? As I 
 live, here are people that once belonged 
 to Zeredho, mine own heaven! By what 
 strange law left they my kingdom to come 
 and dwell in these torments? 
 
 Fragapatti caused the avalanza to halt, 
 that information be obtained. So he called 
 the drujas, and there came thousands of 
 them, ragged and drunken. Hoab knew 
 many of them, and he said: Know ye 
 who I am? And they answered: Yea, 
 Hoab, God of Zeredho. 
 
 Again spoke Hoab, saying: For what 
 reason left ye my glorious kingdom to 
 come and dwell in this hell of iniquity? 
 They answered, saying: Alas, that we left 
 indeed! But since it is so, it is so. Hear 
 us, then, O Hoab, this is the reason: 
 Even as mortals oft leave purity in order 
 to revel in sin. More reason we know not. 
 
 Then spake Fragapatti, saying: Je- 
 hovih saith: I have given man many tal- 
 ents. Because the roadways are not open 
 for their growth, he plungeth into dark- 
 ness. Think not that ye can draw a line 
 and say: O man, thou shalt not do this; 
 for ye are powerless to hold him whom I 
 created to go forward. And if he find not 
 a way to go forward, he will turn and go 
 backward. 
 
 The drujas said: Yea, master; Zered- 
 ho did not fill our souls. We were thirsty 
 for amusement and lightheartedness. We 
 heard no voice but utility. We sheared off 
 all ornaments, and diversion, and art, and 
 finally even music. We fain would hear 
 from Zeredho, to know if they have not 
 ceased to talk, and perhaps to live, for- 
 sooth, Utility hath spoken. And they 
 laughed and frolicked about like idiots 
 and fools, mingling with harlots, thieves, 
 liars and drunkards. 
 
 Fragapatti caused the ship to move on 
 a while, and then halted, and called other 
 drujas, and questioned them in the same 
 manner, and received answers of the same 
 character. 
 
 Again they moved onward, and the 
 same was repeated. Finally they came to 
 a place where all was darkness and noise' 
 and confusion, where they even heeded 
 not the ship, nor the calls made to them. 
 Then spake Fragapatti to Hoab, saying: 
 Has it not been proven to thee that man 
 cannot stand still? * Hoab said: It is true. 
 I perceive now that had I not come out of 
 Zeredho I had not witnessed these things, 
 nor had I seen Zeredho as I now see it. 
 
 Fragapatti said: Be not hasty against 
 thine own philosophy, for I will show thee 
 thine own wisdom by and by. So they 
 traveled seven days in hell, the lowest di- 
 vision of hada, where there was neither 
 government, order, truth, nor virtue, but 
 only torments, wailings and cursings. 
 
 Fragapatti said: Thou hast seen that 
 these many people know not their own 
 darkness. Hoab said: Is it not true, O 
 Chief, that no man knoweth his own 
 darkness? Who knoweth he is not on the 
 downward road? 
 
 Fragapatti said: Thou hast said man 
 is the All Highest. But does it not come 
 home to us all, as to the ancients, that to 
 do good with all our wisdom and strength, 
 and have faith therein, that we are on the 
 road to the All Highest? 
 
 Thou hast certainly proven, said Hoab, 
 that Zeredho is not the All Highest, for it 
 cannot retain its people. Even hell hath 
 prevailed over her. And doth not hell pre- 
 vail over all self-righteousness, and over 
 riches, and kingdoms and empires? If, 
 therefore, hell prevaileth, is not hell the 
 most powerful? And if the most power- 
 ful, is not hell, therefore, the All Highest? 
 The ancients were happy in ignorance, for 
 in believing in an All Person, a Creator, 
 and that they should ultimately see Him, 
 they had an object in view. But with the 
 growth of wisdom we find we cannot re- 
 alize such a Person, and so have no ob- 
 ject in view ahead of us. Thus we recoil 
 upon ourselves, and all is dead. 
 
 Fragapatti said: Has man no lessons 
 from the past? In the ancient times the 
 Gods persuaded mortals to make stone 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 157 
 
 idols and worship them. And they were 
 sufficient until man attained more knowl- 
 edge. Again came the Gods to mortals, 
 inventing a large man-God in the sky, 
 persuading them to worship him. He was 
 a sufficient God till man learned to com- 
 mune with angels; and the angels contra- 
 dicted that philosophy. But, Hoab, have 
 we not a lesson in this, which is, that we 
 must ever have an All Highest Person so 
 far ahead that we cannot attain him? If 
 this be true, when we have surpassed a 
 Person whose figure and condition we 
 can comprehend, is it not incumbent upon 
 us to create within our own souls the 
 thought of an All Person beyond our com- 
 prehensibility? 
 
 Hoab said: It seemeth so. But how 
 canst thou teach thy soul to think of an 
 All Person beyond man's comprehension? 
 Fragapatti said: For a basis to reason 
 from, let us consider the etherean, the at- 
 mospherean and the corporeal worlds to 
 constitute His body; and the motion there- 
 in and thereof, the manifestations of His 
 Power and His Wisdom. Since, then, 
 we ourselves have these things in part, we 
 find also, we have another attribute em- 
 bracing all the others, which is combina- 
 tion concentrated into one person. Shall 
 we not then give to Him, who embraceth 
 all things within Himself, combination 
 concentrated into one person? Otherwise, 
 He is our inferior, which cannot be. 
 Therefore, being ourselves persons, are 
 we not mere offshoots from the All Per- 
 son? Otherwise, we could not have at- 
 tained personality. Does not a child take 
 its personality because its mother was a 
 person? Can man have an entity save he 
 receive it from an entity? Could man be 
 a person, save he sprang from a Person? 
 
 Hoab said: Thou art a great light, O 
 Chief! Verily, thou hast unfolded a uni- 
 verse before me! Yea, there must be an 
 All Person! O that I had seen this 
 philosophy before. 
 
 Fragapatti said: Be not infatuated, O 
 Hoab, with sudden appearances. For 
 were I to show thee first, what it is to 
 believe in an All Person, whose magnifi- 
 cence surpasseth the universe itself, and 
 then that man can attain to be one with 
 Him, even as a note in music is one with- 
 in a tune, I would so far enrapture thy 
 
 soul that thou wouldst do nought but 
 listen. Let us, therefore, suspend our re- 
 search awhile, that we may devise some 
 resurrection for this hell of suffering 
 millions. 
 
 CHAPTER XI. 
 
 The avalanza was so constructed that 
 the words spoken by Fragapatti and Hoab 
 could be heard by all who chose to listen, 
 of whom there were two thousand million 
 on board. And when Hoab expressed con- 
 viction, the same sentiment seized upon 
 the whole assembly; whereupon Fragapat- 
 ti raised his hand, saying: By virtue of 
 Thy power, O Jehovih, will I illumine 
 this hell! And by the strength of Fraga- 
 patti's oneness with Jehovih there was 
 created a sudden light so brilliant, none 
 present save the ethereans could look 
 upon him. Hoab bowed down, and hid 
 his face, and Hoab's hosts were overcome 
 with fear, prostrating themselves on the 
 floors of the avalanza. Fragapatti said 
 to the swift messengers: Go at once to 
 Mouru, greeting, and say that Fragapatti 
 demandeth at once, one million etherean 
 volunteers, for signal centers in Aoasu's 
 lowest hells, bringing rods of fire and 
 water. 
 
 The swift messengers departed hastily. 
 Fragapatti then commanded that the ava- 
 lanza be anchored for a day; and he and 
 many of his hosts went into the hell, where 
 the spirits were weeping and wailing, and 
 cursing, or lying in drunkenness and leth- 
 argy. Many of them were naked and foul 
 smelling; and hundreds of thousands of 
 them, having had diseased corporeal bod- 
 ies, had carried with them into hell the 
 substance of their corruptions, even the 
 rottenness of plague and consumptions, 
 and other diseases too terrible to mention. 
 
 Fragapatti said: By Thy Power, O 
 Jehovih, shall a wall of fire compass these 
 people about. They shall not escape. For 
 were they to return to mortals, they would 
 inoculate them unto death. Fire, O Je- 
 hovih, fire! Thou All Purifier! 
 
 And he cast his hands outward and up- 
 ward in majesty, and there rose up walls 
 of fire on the face of the mountains; and 
 the light thereof fell in the valleys of 
 Ugh'sa, the pit of hell. To the east and 
 west and north and south, Fragapatti 
 
158 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 turned, saying: A wall of fire! A wall of 
 fire! And he, himself, shone as a sun, 
 united with the Eternal All Creator, whose 
 voice was full of power to wield the ele- 
 ments to his will. Presently there were 
 hemmed into one field, more than five 
 hundred million drujas, who by the sud- 
 den transformation were roused up to des- 
 perate wildness, with bated breath, run- 
 ning hither and thither. And yet there 
 were other millions of them so low and 
 stupid and crazed, that the others ran over 
 them as if they were but a heap of rubbish. 
 
 Then Fragapatti went to Hoab, saying: 
 For pity's sake, come thou and help me, 
 and persuade thy hosts also. 
 
 Hoab said: O friend and brother, do 
 not mock me! Thou hast undone me en- 
 tirely. I am nothing. My hosts are noth- 
 ing. For pity's sake temper thine own 
 light. It pierceth me through! 
 
 Fragapatti said: Shall I not send thee 
 quickly back to Zeredho, with thy hosts? 
 Hoab said: My wish is nothing; my will 
 is nothing! Thine and the Great All 
 Power's will be done. 
 
 Fragapatti said: If ever thou hadst 
 faith in thy life, I charge thee now quickly 
 to summon it to thy soul, for Great Je- 
 hovih is with me now, and but ask and 
 speak in faith to the Creator, and it shall 
 be granted unto thee. Speak quickly, 
 whilst yet the power holdeth upon me. 
 Shall I put on a thousand-fold more 
 light? Say thou: In faith I will endure 
 all, for the glory of Jehovih! Give me of 
 fire or torments, or whatsoever Thou wilt, 
 O Jehovih! 
 
 Hoab trembled, and then strained in 
 every part, and at last suddenly sprang up 
 facing the light, almost melting in the 
 flame of fire, and he said: I will endure 
 all in faith of Thee, O Jehovih! Give me 
 of fire or torments, or whatsoever Thou 
 wilt. Henceforth I will do for Thee for- 
 ever! 
 
 Presently his spirit took the crystal 
 form, and the victory dawned upon his 
 soul. A smile, denoting knowledge of All 
 Holiness and Majesty gleamed in his 
 countenance! The light began to retract 
 and to reflect from his face, brilliant and 
 sun-like. He had conquered and won. He 
 said: Thanks, O Jehovih! 
 
 Fragapatti said: Quick now, seize the 
 goal; go forth practicing thy light for oth- 
 ers, and it will grow giant-like. And 
 Hoab was strong in faith, almost mad 
 with the delight of such wondrous change; 
 and he rushed forth, commanding, in the 
 name of Jehovih, raising up hundreds and 
 thousands, even as he had been raised, 
 crystalizing. 
 
 All one day and all one night they la- 
 bored; and all the ethereans with them; 
 and they rescued, and divided, and sub- 
 divided the spirits of darkness into grades 
 and sections. And many of the spirits be- 
 longing to the hosts of Hoab were thus 
 raised to the second resurrection, with 
 light and power. But of the hunderds of 
 millions of spirits in the torments of hell 
 none were as yet raised even to the first 
 resurrection. But they were stirred up 
 and routed out of lethargy; and the sup- 
 plies for their drunkenness were cut off 
 by the walls of fire, created by Fragapat- 
 ti, which went up day and night without 
 ceasing. 
 
 And Fragapatti stationed sentinels with 
 power near the walls of fire, commanding 
 them to cast in the elements of ughs and 
 brimstone, so that the suffocating smell 
 would prevent the drujas from escaping. 
 
 On the second day, a million ethereans, 
 with rods of water and rods of fire, came 
 from Mouru, in answer to Fragapatti's 
 commandment. And when they had arrived 
 before him, and had saluted in the sign of 
 Jehovih's name, he said unto them: Be- 
 hold, I have established one signal center 
 in hell. It will require a thousand more 
 centers before we have broken them up 
 and delivered them. From the rank of das 
 the marshals shall select from amongst 
 you ten thousand, to remain in this cen- 
 ter and complete the work I have laid out. 
 
 So the marshals selected from the 
 ethereans of the rank of das ten thousand. 
 Now the das are such as have attained to 
 power with the rod with water, and the 
 rod with fire, but not with the hand, like 
 the ranks above them. They go amongst 
 the denizens of a signal center with the 
 two rods, casting water with one and fire 
 with the other. And the hosts of spirits 
 of darkness run for them, like cattle for 
 salt; and the das thus discover and assort 
 them; for the lowest spirits go for the 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 159 
 
 rods with water, and the highest for the 
 rods of fire. Because the lowest spirits 
 dread the light; and because the highest 
 desire to be rescued from the lowest. 
 
 On the second day, therefore, the das 
 began work; and there were baptized with 
 water many millions; but with fire only 
 one million. The latter were then taken 
 without and beyond the, walls of fire, and 
 colonized, and clothed and fed, and guar- 
 dians placed over them, preparatory to the 
 nurseries, hospitals, schools, factories, and 
 such other educationals as belong in the 
 lowest heaven. 
 
 On the third day the das went through 
 the same labor again, and again many 
 millions were baptized with water, and 
 but two million with fire. The latter were 
 also taken without and beyond the walls 
 of fire, and colonized in the same manner 
 as those of the previous day. 
 
 Such, then, is the labor of the das in 
 hell, baptizing and selecting; and it contin- 
 ueth until all the people are taken beyond 
 the walls. 
 
 The last taken are, therefore, the low- 
 est grade, and the first taken are the high- 
 est grade. But the last are usually so low 
 in knowledge and ambition that they move 
 not of themselves, but are bestowed in 
 nurseries and hospitals, to be cleansed 
 from their foulness, and to be healed of 
 their infirmities. 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 Fragapatti caused the ship, the ava- 
 lanza, to be moved to other black moun- 
 tains, deep buried in revolting crimes and 
 misery, wherein no one with God-like 
 power had ventured for hundreds of 
 years. Again, he called down Jehovih's 
 fire, and raised walls impenetrable, high 
 on every side, affrighting and stirring up 
 the self-condemned with frenzied fear. 
 And they ran, all polluted with foul 
 thoughts, which had clothed them about 
 with terrible foulness, and oaths and 
 curses and imprecations against all right- 
 eousness. 
 
 And Hoab, now a very sun, desperate 
 to do overwhelming good deeds, even 
 more a thousand times than in his self 
 ease of other days he refrained from dark 
 company lest he be polluted; proclaiming 
 Jehovih, and working hard to stir them 
 
 up, and by his quick and unmistakable zeal 
 proved his soul's connection with the Al- 
 mighty's Power. 
 
 Fragapatti and Hoab rushed in, and 
 hundreds of thousands of ethereans did 
 likewise, laboring for Jehovih, cutting 
 loose with flames of fire the demons' grips 
 of torture on the helpless, and hurling 
 them separate. None could escape be- 
 cause of the walls around, now seething 
 with the choking smell of brimstone, and 
 must needs fall prostrate before the crys- 
 talizing lights thrust at them, weeping and 
 wailing. 
 
 All day and all night Fragapatti and 
 Hoab and the etherean hosts rested not, 
 but waded into the hell of death. Turning 
 them to the right or left, the miserable, 
 devouring wretches, brothers and sisters 
 of mortals and spirits, now engulfed in 
 their own depravity, and by their desperate 
 desire for sin holding millions of the mod- 
 erately good as officers of torture, in order 
 to glut their horrid desire of witnessing 
 horrors. Into groups and series they 
 roughly selected them as a starting point 
 for the das that were to come after and 
 more carefully divide them. Then Fraga- 
 patti called the das and put them to work 
 with their rods of water and fire, making 
 stations beyond the walls of fire, where the 
 naked, trembling, rescued sufferers and 
 drujas were housed and fed, restrained by 
 guardians of ample strength and foresight. 
 For of such nature is the low man and 
 low woman that love of evil in time de- 
 lighteth to feed itself in evil more than in 
 good, and will even turn against benefac- 
 tors and spurn good offerings. 
 
 Of whom Jehovih saith: As by fire 
 the dross of metal is burned and cast out, 
 leaving that which is pure; so created I 
 the righteous with light from My counte- 
 nance to burn out the dross which the 
 wicked nestle in their bosoms. Go, then; 
 deliver the wicked in hell, and make them 
 clean with water and fire, and ye shall 
 find a star in every soul. And as many of 
 these as ye deliver, so is your glory in My 
 etherean kingdoms. For each deliverer 
 is as a sun around which these stars con- 
 gregate, and they magnify one another 
 forever. And when these stars have grown 
 they also go and do in like manner; for it 
 is of such that My exalted ones are in the 
 
160 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 highest heavens, whom ye call Gods and 
 Lords, and justly so, because of their su- 
 premacy. 
 
 Thus went Fragapatti through the 
 lowest regions of Aoasu; for forty days 
 and nights he and his hosts labored, and 
 he broke up the regions of hell and cast 
 out the souls of the tortured, thousands of 
 millions of them. Neither was there left 
 any place standing in all the lowest hells 
 where evil held dominion. And there 
 were esablished in those regions around 
 about two hundred thousand colonies, 
 comprised of the evil ones who had been 
 rescued. But the very lowest, who 
 knew not anything, who were: some in- 
 fants who died at the time of birth; some 
 infants of drunkards who came to the 
 lower heavens with the intoxicating 
 liquors or smoke of their mother's de- 
 bauchery; some very young abortions, 
 slain by their mothers and fathers; some 
 chaotic, killed in wars, who were mad and 
 crazed, howling, screaming and fighting, 
 of whom there were nine hundred million. 
 These Fragapatti had brought away from 
 all the others, putting guardians over 
 them for the present. 
 
 Then he called together the crew of the 
 avalanza, and all the hosts of Hoab, and 
 Hoab himself; and when they were duly 
 in order Fragapatti extemporized a throne 
 and sat upon it, and thus spake, saying: 
 
 Without Thee, O Jehovih, man is noth- 
 ing. Nor can he stand upright, nor hold 
 up his head, save but by Thee. When he 
 cutteth himself off from Thee he falleth 
 like a limb of a tree that is severed. 
 He goeth about boasting: There is 
 no All Person. But his words are as 
 a severing knife, and he knoweth it 
 not. He setteth up his judgment, 
 saying: Thou wert good for fools, O 
 Jehovih; but as for me, Thou art a fool- 
 ish encumbrance. Yea, he saith: Who 
 hath seen Jehovih? And he laughs at his 
 cleverness. He says: What stood Jehovih 
 upon when He created the worlds? How 
 long slept He before He created? What a 
 foolish Creator! He created sin and death. 
 Who knoweth the size of his head, the 
 length of His arm, the place He liveth or 
 who hath heard His voice? Verily, there 
 is no All Person, no All Highest, no Light. 
 This is the second downward stage; and 
 
 in the third he saith: A curse upon Faith! 
 A curse upon all things! A curse upon 
 myself! And then cometh hell and its 
 horrors to swallow him up. 
 
 But Thou art near, O Jehovih! Thy 
 hosts traverse the universe. They come in 
 Thy name, and Thy power and glory are 
 with them. In their majesty they encoun- 
 ter all evil; they cast out hell and its pris- 
 oners. 
 
 Then Fragapatti turned to Hoab say- 
 ing: Speak Thou, O Hoab. Nine hun- 
 dred millions that are still sleeping in 
 death lie at thy -feet. These regions are 
 unsuited for their treatment; whither 
 shall we take them? Or shall we, because 
 they are so dead, leave them to shift for 
 themselves. 
 
 Then rose Hoab, saluting, and tears 
 were in his eyes. He said: Mighty art 
 Thou, O Jehovih! Lo, I was on the verge 
 of an everlasting fall! I was on a steep 
 precipice, but saw it not. With blinded 
 eyes I walked about. I lost Thy counte- 
 nance. My family became strangers to 
 Thee, and we were following close after, 
 to become strangers to one another! Yea, 
 I was ungrateful before Thee. I forgot 
 that Thou hadst created me. I forgot that 
 all the joys I had ever had were bestowed 
 by Thee, and that by Thee I had been 
 made capable of appreciating mine own 
 judgment. And then I raised up my voice 
 against Thee and turned Thee out of the 
 world. Yea, I chose a corner, and appro- 
 priated it for my own ease and glory, say- 
 ing: To keep other Gods and angels 
 away from my lands, this is all I desire. 
 But thou wert mindful of me, O Jehovih! 
 Thy Voice sounded in the heavens above, 
 and Thy Son came down in Thy glory. 
 He beheld my vanity and weakness, and 
 he rebuked me not. Yea, I told him I 
 loved not to go to those beneath me and 
 raise them up. I said: Let them shift for 
 themselves! 
 
 Now am I rebuked in mine own words! 
 Now have I cast myself out of hell. Be- 
 hold, I said: Zeredho shall be a place for 
 me and my people forever! None shall 
 come hither to make us afraid or to annoy 
 us. And Thy Son said to me: I can 
 teach thee and thy people that ye shall 
 never more fear to be annoyed by the low 
 or by the evil-minded; nor shall ye fear 
 
CYCLE OF FRACAPATTI 
 
 161 
 
 for Gods or angels to come and inhabit 
 Zeredho! Thus spake Thy Son, O Jeho- 
 vih ! And he hath given us the secret. We 
 no longer fear that others will encroach 
 upon Zeredho. Behold, Zeredho is Thy 
 place, O Jehovih! These unfortunates, 
 these drujas, are Thy children. They shall 
 go to Zeredho. I fear not pollution, nor 
 do my hosts. We will wade into this 
 filth like scavengers into a filthy street, 
 and we will make these children like shin- 
 ing stars in Thy firmament! Yea, nothing 
 more can make us afraid, O Jehovih! We 
 own nothing; we have nothing to lose. 
 We are Thy servants, now and forever! 
 
 Then spake Fragapatti, saying: Be- 
 hold the size of my avalanza, O Hoab! If 
 thou wilt but take the measure thou shalt 
 find it just the size to take thee and thy 
 hosts and these drujas. Think not that 
 this matter so happened, for I sent before- 
 hand and had all these unfortunates enum- 
 erated, and thy people enumerated also. 
 
 When Hoab perceived this great wis- 
 dom in Fragapatti, and comprehended the 
 care that had been used to accomplish so 
 much, he made no reply at first, but, look- 
 ing at him, burst into tears. Presently he 
 said: By Thy power and wisdom, O Je- 
 hovih, will I also lift my fellows up out of 
 darkness and misery! 
 
 CHAPTER XIII. 
 
 Then Fragapatti sent swift messengers 
 to Mouru, relating all that had been ac- 
 complished, giving also the names of the 
 generals and capains over the newly es- 
 tablished colonies redeemed from Utza, in 
 the Aoasuan mountains, that they might 
 be registered in the libraries of Haraiti. 
 And Fragapatti established a line of mes- 
 sengers betwixt the colonies, and also 
 from the colonies to Mouru, and appoint- 
 ed the messengers to hold office during 
 dawn. And when the affairs of this region 
 of the lower heavens were completed, 
 Fragapatti was ready to ascend with the 
 mad and dumb drujas rescued from hell; 
 and the proper persons carried them into 
 the avalanza, being obliged to blindfold 
 them because of the light. Nor did the 
 drujas cease wailing and crying with fear 
 and pain and craziness. But because of 
 the multitude of infants, Fragapatti had 
 previously provided five hundred thousand 
 
 women of fetal, that the infants might be 
 redeemed to everlasting life. Sixty thous- 
 and physicians had Fragapatti aboard, and 
 they worked hard resuscitating and restor- 
 ing to consciousness the unfortunates. And 
 of the hosts of Hoab, not one was there 
 but went to work, willingly, as nurse and 
 helper. 
 
 Thirty thousand es'enaurs now played 
 and sang, softly and gently as a breath of 
 wind, carrying the tones around the ship 
 as an endless echo, calling and answering 
 from all directions, a continuous and en- 
 rapturing change, now as if near, again as 
 if afar off. So that the uninformed knew 
 not whence the music came, nor how it 
 was produced. 
 
 When the great avalanza was ready to 
 start Fragapatti went into the ship, being 
 almost the last to enter. Already was the 
 light gathering bright and dense about 
 him. And then he called out: Arise! 
 In Jehovih's name, upward rise! And 
 as he spoke, behold, the avalanza moved, 
 and presently the great fire-ship started 
 upward, for all the hosts joined in the 
 same expression, leaving the burning walls 
 and signal centers flickering below, so that 
 even hell overthrown shone with grandeur, 
 
 Fragapatti spake to Hoab, saying; 
 When I took thee and thy hosts from 
 Zeredho, I promised to take thee to Mou- 
 ru, the capital city of Haraiti, my king- 
 dom. Now thou desirest me to go with 
 these drujas to Zeredho. Do you think 
 you could plan their salvation and restore 
 them to light? 
 
 To which Hoab replied: I perceive 
 that of myself I can do nothing but go 
 down hill, or at best keep on a level road. 
 As I now comprehend All Light, there is 
 no one thing in all the universe that can 
 rise of itself. To attain to be one with 
 Jehovih is the beginning of the resurrec- 
 tion of the individual; but he who hath 
 attained power to resurrect others is 
 strong indeed. There are many who 
 spasmodically resurrect others, but, alas, 
 how few can keep them resurrected? Not 
 only must he have the light of Jehovih 
 within himself, but power to make others 
 obtain the Light for themselves. Alas, I 
 am weak! 
 
 Fragapatti said: Understand thyself, 
 O Hoab. Be not deceived, nor short in 
 
162 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 faith to accomplish; for herein lieth the 
 key to all Wisdom and Power. Suffer not 
 thyself to go to the other extreme, saying, 
 man of himself can accomplish nothing. 
 To teach a child this is to hew off its legs 
 and arms. To teach it that it can accom- 
 plish is to make it giant-like. 
 
 Hoab said: I perceive thy wisdom, O 
 Chief. How, then, shall we find a line by 
 which we can train this economy? If we 
 inspire them not with faith to accomplish 
 they will accomplish nothing. If we teach 
 them they are dependent on Jehovih for 
 all things, and that Jehovih doeth all 
 things, and that no man can change his 
 own destiny, that he is moved as a ma- 
 chine; then we will make non-entities of 
 our people. On the other hand, if we in- 
 spire them that they can accomplish, it 
 will grow upon them, and finally they will 
 believe that they do all and Jehovih noth- 
 ing. This was the mire my other king- 
 dom ran into. 
 
 Then spake Fragapatti, saying: Thou 
 perceivest that reason can not solve the 
 matter. Let us, then, suspend the subject, 
 and I will take thee to Mouru and her 
 kingdoms, and we may obtain facts more 
 pertinent than opinion or reason. 
 
 CHAPTER XIV. . 
 
 Upward rose the avalanza with its con- 
 trasting assemblage of the souls of light 
 and the souls of darkness; the es'enaurs 
 chanting anthems of praise and thanks- 
 giving, while the drujas were engaged 
 in cursing everything in heaven or 
 earth, or in weeping and moaning, or in 
 stupor, dull as if dead. Fragapatti had 
 previously sent swift messengers to Ath- 
 rava and the Holy Council of Mouru, 
 where had descended the Light of Jeho- 
 vih, whose Voice came upon them, saying: 
 
 Lo, my hosts come in an avalanza; pre- 
 pare ye a place for them. Choose ye from 
 My ethereans and my atmosphereans thir- 
 ty millions who shall receive the hosts 
 of the avalanza, the nine hundred million 
 in darkness. Go, ye, therefore, to the bor- 
 ders of the sea Che-wan, near the cross- 
 roads Tse-loo, where I have created the 
 plains of Hoo'e'tse-gam, ample for their 
 resurrection. And ye shall provide them 
 houses and hospitals and nurseries, suita- 
 
 ble for them to dwell in, being ready to 
 deliver them when the avalanza arrives. 
 
 Athrava and the Holy Council had re- 
 sponded to this, and the swift messengers 
 in turn had informed Fragapatti of the 
 place prepared. Accordingly, the ava- 
 lanza was landed in Hoo'e'tse-gam, where 
 the thirty millions were in waiting to re- 
 ceive them, disciplined by Ardi'atta, God- 
 dess of Zhei, in etherea, first of the seven 
 Ie'tas in Gom. And they had ten thous- 
 and trumpeters, and four thousand two 
 hundred other players. Ardi'atta had pre- 
 pared the open fields in green, red and 
 brown, and the green fields were near Che- 
 wan, where the avalanza would land; 
 hence it was called Hoo'e'tse-gam, signi- 
 fying green for the newborn. Thus the 
 drujas were delivered from the avalanza, 
 on an open, green plain, neither too dark 
 nor light, but suited to the diseased in 
 mind. 
 
 Fragapatti knew Ardi'atta, for her 
 former kingdom in etherea lay in one of 
 his own provinces, and before the ava- 
 lanza landed he sent a message to her, 
 saying: I will place the drujas on the 
 green fields, and thou and thy hosts shall 
 resuscitate them to consciousness, and they 
 shall be selected and carried into the 
 houses and nurseries which thou hast pro- 
 vided for them. 
 
 Thus were the drujas placed in the care 
 of Ardi'atta and her hosts in Haraiti to re- 
 ceive treatment prior to being carried to 
 Zeredho, Four million of Hoab's hosts 
 also remained with them, as volunteers, to 
 assist in the redemption. Then Fragapatti 
 directed the ship to be steered for Mouru, 
 whither it arrived in due season; and there 
 were in waiting to receive him more than 
 one thousand million souls, and they had 
 provided one million musicians, players 
 and singers, who filled the place with a 
 sea of sweetest melody. 
 
 When Hoab looked upon the beauty 
 and magnificence of the scene, and espe- 
 cially the discipline, his soul was filled with 
 rapture so that he could scarcely speak. 
 
 And when he mastered himself a little 
 he said: O, Fragapatti! How could one 
 so exalted as thou come to me in Zeredho? 
 When I see the perfect discipline of these 
 heavens I am cast down and abashed be- 
 cause of my former vanity. 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 163 
 
 Fragapatti said: To learn not to speak 
 of one's self, whether praised or rebuked, 
 is this not the right road to Jehovih? 
 Hoab said: It is true; therefore the oppo- 
 site must be the wrong road. 
 
 CHAPTER XV. 
 
 When the avalanza was made fast, and 
 the hosts came forth, many of the Zered- 
 ho'ans, fearing the brilliancy of the lights 
 of Mouru, were permitted to go and dwell 
 a little way off; but the others, led by 
 Fragapatti and Hoab, entered the capital 
 city and came before the throne of Jeho- 
 vih, greeted by Athrava and the Holy 
 Council. 
 
 Athrava said: In the name of Jehovih, 
 
 Chief, greeting: And to thee, O Hoab. 
 Come ye and honor the throne of Mouru. 
 
 Fragapatti said: Greeting to thee, Ath- 
 rava; and to ye, most Holy Council, in 
 the name of the Father! Hoab said: 
 Greeting, in Jehovih's name! 
 
 And then Fragapatti and Hoab went 
 forward and ascended the throne and sat 
 on the left hand of Athrava. At once the 
 Light from the etherean worlds began to 
 fall upon the throne and the whole coun- 
 cil, and the color thereof was the most 
 sacred golden yellow. Hoab had never 
 seen such before, and was overwhelmed 
 with fear and delight; but many of his 
 hosts were obliged to hide their faces. 
 Presently the light condensed over the 
 throne, even whilst three thousand mill- 
 ions looked on, until like a very sun it 
 stood above Fragapatti's head. And then 
 came the Voice of the Almighty Jehovih 
 out of the midst of the light, saying: 
 
 Hear the words of thy Creator, O ye 
 angels of heaven! I, who created the cor- 
 poreal and the es'sean worlds! Behold the 
 works of My hands ! Who can find a place 
 where I have not created? Think not that 
 
 1 cannot also create a voice and words. 
 For is this not easier than to create a 
 man who shall create words? Behold My 
 corporeal suns amidst my corporeal star 
 worlds! Behold My etherean suns amidst 
 my es'sean worlds! I made corporeal 
 darkness, and I made corporeal light. I 
 made spiritual darkness, and I made spir- 
 itual light! But I am the light of all 
 light. 
 
 As the wisdom of man inventeth 
 words, so doth the Light of My Light 
 come in words to them that can bear My 
 Light. Behold My wisdom, O man, in 
 creating souls out of the substance of cor- 
 poreal darkness! Thus can their souls 
 hear me and be not afraid. But when they 
 have become pure souls, I come openly. 
 Their throne becometh My throne, their 
 voice My Voice. 
 
 Hear, then, thy Creator, O Hoab! Thy 
 people called to Me in their darkness, but 
 I came not. Thy hand was upon them. 
 Thou hadst said unto them: Behold my 
 wide countries; my mountains and valleys; 
 my bright rivers and refreshing winds. 
 Come ye; they are yours to keep forever. 
 And because thy hand was upon them 
 they were beset with darkness. They could 
 not find their way out; neither beheld they 
 more the glory of My kingdoms. Yea, thou 
 wert as a wanton going after My chosen, 
 and thy voice lured them away from 
 Me. But I spoke in Nirvana, high above, 
 in My thrones of light. And My Sons 
 and Daughters heard My Voice. I said 
 unto them: Lo, the red star and her 
 heavens are fallen in darkness! Go ye to 
 them and deliver them into a new resur- 
 rection. 
 
 I had spoken in the ancient days, say- 
 ing: Inasmuch as ye raise up those who 
 are beneath you, so will I send those who 
 are above down to you to raise you up. 
 But they had forgotten My words; 
 neither strove they more to raise up those 
 who were in the hells below. And I said 
 unto My Nirvanians: Go ye to Zeredho, 
 for she hath enticed My holy ones away 
 from Me. And ye shall give them a para- 
 ble of compensation, and they shall come 
 before My Light and hear My Voice. And 
 ye shall take them to hell and cause them 
 to deliver the drujas through the light of 
 My countenance; and thereafter shall ye 
 bring them to Mouru, that I may speak 
 with them face to face. 
 
 Hear the commandments of your Cre- 
 ator, O Hoab, for that which I give unto 
 you shall be inviolate. Thou shalt have 
 dominion over the Earth and her heavens 
 for two hundred years, commencing at the 
 close of this dawn of dan. And thou 
 shalt be crowned God, with power to 
 raise up successors with power and wis- 
 
164 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 dom. Be wise, O My children, and profit 
 ye in the wisdom of My etherean hosts 
 whilst yet the dawn of dan remaineth. 
 
 The Voice ceased. Then spake Ath- 
 rava, saying: In Thy name, O Jehovih, 
 do I resign from Thy throne till it be the 
 will of Fragapatti and Thy will also. And 
 he rose up and stood aside. Then Fraga- 
 patti went and sat in the midst of the 
 throne. 
 
 Fragapatti said: I proclaim three days 
 recreation to the Holy Council and to the 
 City of Mouru. Behold, my people shall 
 mingle together as brothers and sisters, 
 rejoicing in the Light of the Father. Be 
 ye joyful, singing and dancing. The 
 ascent to Jehovih's kingdoms may be lik- 
 ened unto a ladder with steps, and not an 
 even plain, and ye shall call this the first 
 step in the resurrection of the Earth's 
 heavens in this dawn. 
 
 The hosts then mingled together, greet- 
 ing and rejoicing, for the Zeredho'ans had 
 long desired to - see the ethereans now 
 dwelling in Mouru, and the ethereans had 
 been equally desirous of seeing the atmos- 
 phereans. 
 
 CHAPTER XVI. 
 
 When the time of recreation was ended 
 Fragapatti ascended the throne of Jeho- 
 vih and signaled to the marshals to pro- 
 claim order. Then the vast multitude took 
 their places, and the es'enaurs chanted 
 anthems of praise, and when they finished 
 the signal for business heavenly was given 
 and Fragapatti said: 
 
 Again am I about to depart, and again 
 to leave the God of Mouru, Athrava, with 
 you. And Hoab and such of his hosts as 
 I may choose shall go with me. For, ac- 
 cording to the rank and glory of Gods, I 
 must now deliver Hapacha and his king- 
 dom of Ipseogee, raised up from Guatama. 
 
 Fragapatti then descended to the foot 
 of the throne and sat down; and Athrava, 
 God of Mouru for dawn, came down and 
 took him by the hand and said: Behold, 
 thou hast honored my throne, and the 
 time of thy departure is upon thee. Arise, 
 then, O God, and go thy way. 
 
 And Fragapatti rose up and stood 
 aside, and signaled for Hoab to go and be 
 raised in the same manner, which he did, 
 
 becoming wise in the behavior of Gods 
 toward one another. 
 
 The marshals had selected fifty thousand 
 attendants, besides ten thousand es'enaurs, 
 and at a signal from Fragapatti they 
 marched forth out of the capital, followed 
 by the hosts of Hoab and one hundred 
 thousand ethereans. And when they 
 were beyond the lights of Mouru, be- 
 hold some of the hosts of Hoab rejoiced, 
 because they were better pleased to be 
 where there was less light. Yet there were 
 seven hundred millions of them who re- 
 joiced not, but rather loved the light. 
 Then Fragapatti said: 
 
 It is well that not all are of one mind. 
 The seven hundred millions who love the 
 light more shall be my traveling compan- 
 ions to Ipseogee. Because they are strong 
 in light, I have work for them. But the 
 others shall be taken back to Zeredho, 
 whither I will also come in due time. And 
 after they are settled in Zeredho I will 
 send a God to them, and they shall found 
 a new kingdom, in Jehovih's name. There- 
 fore, enter the avalanza all of you. 
 
 The hosts entered the ship, and Fraga- 
 patti gave the word to- be off, and they 
 sped forth direct for Zeredho, led by 
 swift messengers who knew well the near- 
 est route and the lightest places. And the 
 route taken was through the sea of Foo'- 
 witcha and the Oram of Haiti. Hardly 
 had they gotten under way when the light 
 of the upper heavens began to descend 
 upon Hoab, whose excitement from the 
 wondrous scenes made him propitious to 
 the change, and, feeling the buoyancy of 
 the light, he thus spake: 
 
 How could I forget Thee, O Jehovih, 
 or Thy purposes observe and deny Thy 
 designs? Why saw I not that at my 
 quickening in my mother's womb I was 
 the farthest from Thee? And yet, even 
 then, Thy breath was upon me! And 
 when Thou hadst fashioned me and badest 
 me walk upright, Thou didst send Thy an- 
 gels to me, saying: Behold, Thy Creator 
 liveth! Thou art life of His life, flesh of 
 His flesh. And He gave thee thyself in 
 proof of Himself. I was conceived on the 
 Earth in darkness and built up by Thine 
 own hand. 
 
 And Thou created the honey bee and 
 bade him speak to my soul. He said* 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 165 
 
 Behold me, O man, I am a work- 
 er. In a community I live with my 
 brothers and sisters. I shut my eyes 
 to things sour and bitter, and I store 
 my house with sweet provender. I am 
 the voice of Thy creator. Behold the 
 harmony of mine house, and the provision 
 I make for my newborn! And Thou also 
 created the ant and bade him speak to 
 me. The lesson he taught was: Behold, 
 
 man, I am a worker. In a community 
 
 1 live with my brothers and sisters. I am 
 the voice of thy Creator. Behold the in- 
 dustry of mine house and the burdens we 
 bear jointly into our stores. And Thou 
 created the spider and bade him speak to 
 me. He said: Behold me, O man! I am 
 one with thy Creator. By the geometrical 
 figures of the unseen worlds I build mine 
 house. Think not that I reason or take 
 lessons. I move by the spirit within me, 
 which is the inspiration of the ever present 
 Creator. 
 
 And Thou didst hold up before mine 
 eyes continually that the unseen ruled over 
 the seen. Then I became vain before 
 Thee, O Jehovih! I said: When I am 
 dead and born a spirit, then will I see the 
 unseen, and cannot err more. But lo, my 
 folly in Thy sight! When I was risen in 
 spirit I saw the spirit of things; but, alas, 
 the soul lay still beyond. And to me the 
 soul was now the unseen cause and ruler 
 over the spirit. Again thy holy ones came 
 from the etherean worlds, speaking to me, 
 saying: Beyond the soul cometh Nirvana. 
 
 Now have I beholden Thy crystal 
 spheres and Thy matchless glories. Yea, 
 I look into this sea of Foo'witchah, whith- 
 er I had often gazed before, seeing noth- 
 ing; but now beholding ships laden with 
 Gods and Goddesses from Thy Nirvanian 
 fields, in higher works and worlds moving. 
 And Thy fire stirreth me to the soul, to 
 expand to the mastery of these atmospher- 
 ean heavens. O that I could vent the hal- 
 lowed glory Thou hast bestowed upon 
 me! O that I could thank Thee for the 
 happiness I have because Thou hast cre- 
 ated me! O that I could open up the 
 souls of men to behold Thy wondrous 
 works, and the majesty of becoming one 
 with Thee, Thou Almighty Jehovih! O 
 that they would hear me and believe! O 
 that they would turn not away from Thy 
 
 Light! O that they could learn to glorify 
 Thee every day, for the little light and 
 little joy they receive. How like Gods and 
 Goddesses could they become in Thy 
 kingdoms. But they harbor discontent; 
 they discourse on the little they have re- 
 ceived from Thee. Like the canker worm 
 that groweth to devour, they feed their 
 sorrows by recounting them over and 
 over. For pain they cry out, and for dis- 
 appointment they weep. Yea, they feed 
 their own darkness, and in the end forget 
 Thee, Thou All Light! 
 
 Hoab ceased. Then Fragapatti said: 
 
 Behold Thy wisdom, O Jehovih! 
 Whom Thou wouldst make strong Thou 
 hast made to feel adversity's sting. For 
 the emergencies that . lie ahead Thou 
 plannest Thy Gods to run near the cliffs 
 whereon millions perish. 
 
 Who can attain to know Thy wisdom, 
 O Jehovih! Who can comprehend the 
 millions of Thy Sons and Daughters? 
 And yet Thou knowest every one, and 
 carries them by a breath so gently they feel 
 Thee not, nor know Thee. Within a very 
 hair's breadth Thou takest them, and in 
 the time of desperation Thy hand cometh 
 to the rescue. Man saith: Now will I 
 fortify myself with riches and houses, and 
 all manner of possessions; adversity shall 
 not come upon me. Mine is a kingdom I 
 can see; but Jehovih is afar off. He has 
 more faith in his possessions than in Thee. 
 Thou art suffering him to go away from 
 Thee in his vanity for a season, but sooner 
 or later Thou wilt bring him in with a 
 short turn, either on Earth or in heaven. 
 And he goeth down as an example to 
 hundreds and thousands that envied him. 
 
 Thou hast set up the poor man in 
 faith. He toileth day and night. He is 
 weary and sore; he crieth out with hun- 
 ger; his rags are a shame to him, but he 
 remembereth Thee, O Jehovih! In Thy 
 praise he singeth a song in his soul every- 
 day. To do good unto others is his great 
 delight. And Thy hand reacheth down to 
 him in time thereafter; his soul is like a 
 giant. Thou hast planned him for a very 
 God in heaven! The spark of faith that 
 was in him he nurtured, and it became as 
 a mighty tree that fell not down before the 
 blast. The good he received he exalted, 
 and it fructified and grew as a harvest in 
 
166 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 rich soil. In Thy praise are his songs, and 
 they endure forever. His psalms are the 
 voice of Thy loves, and the multitude of 
 Thy people remember him. 
 
 Thy work hath a sure foundation. Thy 
 wisdom standeth before man's wisdom. 
 No one hath found a failure in Thy word 
 as it speaketh to his own soul. Thy labor 
 is from the subtle and unseeen. But the 
 vain man looketh to Thy object. In his 
 mind he turneth Thy ways upside down. 
 And Thou suffereth him to drink to the 
 fill of his own vanity; and when he findeth 
 himself in torments Thou findest a way 
 to reach him and bring him home. Great 
 is his glory when he findeth Thee. His 
 voice becometh the love of Thy loves for- 
 ever! For thou hast shaped him as an 
 example, and given him scope to run his 
 extreme for his own glory. Yea, Thou 
 hast planned him to be one of Thy great 
 workers that would not go down when he 
 had at last found Thee. 
 
 CHAPTER XVII. 
 
 On the way to Zeredho Fragapatti and 
 his hosts in the avalanza were joined by 
 a ship of a thousand million explorers 
 from the north regions, a thousand times 
 further than the north star, of the seventh 
 magnitude of light, even three higher than 
 Fragapatti. Ctu, the Chief in command 
 of the expedition, greeted in the sign Je- 
 hovih's name, and Fragapati answered in 
 he same sign; and by certain signals the 
 ships approached and made fast, the 
 es'enaurs of both singing and playing the 
 same anthem, five million voices. 
 
 Then Ctu came near to Fragapatti, sa- 
 luting, and the hosts stood in line that 
 they might hear what was said. And after 
 due ceremonies, and acquainting each 
 other with who they were, and whence 
 they came, Ctu said: I see thou hast thy 
 ship ballasted with a north magnet. 
 
 Fragapatti said: This is but a five 
 years' dawn, and I teach my hosts how to 
 ballast that they may better read the maps 
 and roadways of stars and suns. Of these, 
 my hosts, five hundred millions have be- 
 come capable of being delivered into ethe- 
 rea, save in cosmogeny. I am providing 
 them, that when they shall have ascended 
 they may not be lost in the etherean 
 worlds, or be dependent on others. 
 
 Ctu said: What is the length of this 
 serpent? Fragapatti said: Seven and one- 
 eighth hoitumu. And he asked Ctu what 
 distance he had come from his home, and 
 Ctu said: One million four hundred and 
 twelve thousand eight hundred thirty and 
 two hoitumu. 
 
 What time hath thy journey yet before 
 thee? Ctu said: Five hundred thousand 
 years. Then Fragapatti inquired how many 
 star worlds Ctu had so far passed on the 
 journey, and Ctu answered: Twenty 
 thousand star worlds we have passed, some 
 smaller than this red star, and some ten 
 thousand times larger. Some of them yet 
 liquid balls of fire, some newly crusted 
 over, some with atmosphere and water 
 and earth and minerals not yet separated, 
 but boiling, seething, whirling; some firm 
 and just entering the age of se'mu, and 
 some old and worn out. And one we 
 passed had become barren as to living 
 creatures; and the God through whose 
 pastures it passed dissolved and dissipated 
 it in our presence, having invited thou- 
 sands of millions of guests to witness the 
 scene. 
 
 Of atmospherean worlds we have 
 passed more than ninety thousand; some 
 of them larger than the vortex of this red 
 star, and capable of giving homes to a 
 million times a million of inhabitants; and 
 yet on many of them there were no people. 
 
 Thus they discoursed on the size and 
 wonder of Jehovih's kingdoms; but their 
 number and description were so vast only 
 Gods themselves could comprehend them, 
 and when they had about concluded Ctu 
 remarked: 
 
 The mortal desireth to become a spirit; 
 then his ambition is to become an ethe- 
 rean; next a Nirvanian; next an Oe'tan, 
 and then to travel in the surveys of magni- 
 tudes. But those ahead are still more sur- 
 passing in magnificence! Who then can 
 approach the Unapproachable, All High- 
 est! He who fashioned the plan of all 
 creations! Who is there that is not over- 
 whelmed with devotion and awe of Him, 
 who is Ever Present, that extendeth be- 
 yond all limit, our Father, Jehovih? 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII. 
 
 When they drew near Zeredho, Ctu, 
 with his ship and hosts withdrew, duly sa- 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 167 
 
 luting, and they sped on their journey. 
 But Fragapatti halted on the borders of 
 Zeredho and landed seven hundred mill- 
 ions of his hosts, the others remaining 
 aboard. Again the avalanza started forth. 
 Fragapatti said: Now will I visit Yaton'- 
 te, Lord God of North Guatama, and see 
 what he hath accomplished, and perchance 
 he will accompany us to Ipseogee. 
 
 Now when they came to the sea of 
 Ctevahwitich they raised the avalanza 
 fifty thousand miles, for the benefit of 
 Hoab, for here lieth the roadway of Terns, 
 whither pass countless numbers of fleets 
 filled with students in the dismembered 
 warks belonging to the earth. Here the 
 students learn the process of condensa- 
 tion, and the process of dissolution of 
 meteoric stones and small planets, such as 
 a mortal could walk around in a day. On 
 the outer extreme of this sea, the nebulae 
 is in constant waves, where the vortices 
 play, condensing and bursting, like whirl- 
 winds on the earth or corporeal ocean. 
 
 Here Fragapatti explained, saying: In 
 this thou shalt behold the wisdom of Je- 
 hovih, and the uniformity of His works.. 
 Here lieth the first belt away from the 
 Earth capable of having nebulae condensed 
 into meteoric stones. All nebulae lying 
 nearer than this to the Earth's surface is 
 either thrown to the Earth or repulsed 
 from it. Compute, therefore, the distance 
 of this belt from the Earth, together with 
 its density, and thou shalt find that it is 
 the same distance that the wark belts are, 
 with the stars in the firmament of the size 
 of the Earth, and of its density and ve- 
 locity. The first wark belt of the sun is, 
 therefore, the place of its nearest planet, 
 the second wark belt is the place of its 
 next nearest planet, and so on, and these 
 wark belts are all graded in distances ac- 
 cordingly as I have spoken. 
 
 Jehovih hath said: Two ways have I 
 created for my mathematicians to prove 
 My works; one is to measure that which 
 is near at hand, in order to determine that 
 which is far off; the other is, to observe 
 that which is far off, in order to deter- 
 mine that which is near. For, since man 
 could not measure the wark belts of this 
 world, I provided him with means to de- 
 termine the wark belts of the sun, so that 
 
 he might the better comprehend his own 
 world. 
 
 Fragapatti caused the avalanza to be 
 driven in amidst a forest of whirlwinds, to 
 illustrate and to explain, so that the hosts 
 might observe. He said: Thou shalt per- 
 ceive now, that such stones as are con- 
 densed beneath the apex fall to the earth, 
 whilst those ascending frequently rise 
 toward the lighter plateau and explode, to 
 be drawn back within the wark belt. 
 This belt compareth unto the cloud belt 
 near the Earth. Thither the wind currents 
 make rain drops and snow flakes; here 
 the currents make the first nebulous form- 
 ations. 
 
 Whilst Fragapatti was thus discours- 
 ing, the avalanza rocked to and fro, and 
 many of the people perceived now more 
 than ever, the knowledge and power re- 
 quired by angels and Gods, to contend 
 successfully with the elements. But the 
 beauty and grandeur of these fountains, 
 these fire-spouts, whirlwinds of fire, to- 
 gether with the roar and whistling of the 
 flying stones, so enraptured Hoab and his 
 hosts, that they could do naught but look 
 and wonder at the glory thereof. 
 
 For seven days and seven nights did 
 Fragapatti and his hosts travel in this 
 wark belt, observing and studying these 
 miniature worlds, creating and dissipating, 
 and on the eighth day the avalanza was 
 lowered beneath the currents, and they 
 sailed direct for the kingdom of Yaton'te, 
 Lord God of North Guatama, piloted by 
 messengers well acquainted with the 
 course. But not being in a much fre- 
 quented roadway they encountered few" 
 ships of other Gods. 
 
 Yaton'te had been apprised of Fraga- 
 patti's coming, and had accordingly noti- 
 fied his kingdom, and summoned seventy 
 of his Lords to his capital, which was 
 named after himself. So Yaton'te com- 
 manded his otevan to be put in order, 
 and having provided five hundred es'en- 
 aurs in addition to his crew, together with 
 his Lords and ten thousand attendants, 
 went forth to the borders of Hagak, a 
 thousand miles, to meet Fragapatti. And 
 behold, the otevan was only as a small 
 boat is to a ship, when compared to the 
 avalanza. And when they approached 
 
168 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 each other, Fragapatti caused the front of 
 the avalanza to be opened, and the otevan 
 entered within the walls and was made 
 fast. And the hosts of the otevan came 
 out and were received with great joy by 
 Fragapatti and his people. 
 
 Yaton'te had founded the throne of his 
 kingdom a thousand miles north of the 
 northern line of the sun on the Earth, and 
 in the center betwixt the east and the west 
 of North Guatama, and from the Earth 
 upward five hundred miles, and it was 
 here that Fragapatti came to see him. 
 Five hundred miles westward lay Ipseo- 
 gee, extending north and south two thou- 
 sand miles, where reigned Hapacha, who 
 was known as God of the West Wind. 
 
 When the avalanza had reached Ya- 
 ton'te's capital, and the hosts were duly 
 landed in the lower heaven, Yaton'te as- 
 cended his throne, and proclaimed recre- 
 ation for three days and nights. Then 
 Fragapatti said to Yaton'te: How glad 
 I shall be to hear the story of thy adven- 
 tures, and of thy success in this kingdom, 
 for thy record must also be my record to 
 be taken with me at the end of this dawn 
 to the upper heavens. Hoab and his hosts 
 shall also hear thy words. 
 
 Yaton'te replied: I have done what I 
 could. Nevertheless, he who hath built 
 great kingdoms may find little to admire 
 in a small one. 
 
 Fragapatti said: The Creator has pro- 
 vided us with a talent which enables us to 
 live our youth over again in the young, 
 and thus find a new way open to remind 
 us of our follies in youth, and a new chan- 
 nel in which to behold Jehovih's wisdom. 
 
 Yaton'te answered thus: If a man con- 
 vert his neighbor from evil to good, two 
 things are accomplished, the triumph of 
 the man and the reformation of the neigh- 
 bor. If on the other hand a man fail to 
 convert his neighbor, two misfortunes 
 have transpired, the disappointment of 
 one and the loss of glory to Jehovih. It 
 is a strong man indeed that can recount 
 his own failures and say he praises the 
 Father because thereof. 
 
 Fragapatti said: How shall we meas- 
 ure magnitudes, O Yaton'te? Has not a 
 mortal, that hath delivered one Druk into 
 light as great a glory as a God that de- 
 livereth hundreds of thousand? Is not the 
 
 one as great in magnitude as the other? 
 According to our worthiness in righteous 
 persistence, no matter what our limit is, is 
 not this the greatest glory? Jehovih com- 
 manded man first to deliver himself, to 
 master himself, to rule himself. He who 
 can do this is a great ruler. Then Jehovih 
 gave him a small kingdom to rule over, 
 perhaps in the form of a drunkard, or a 
 wanton, or even his own family, to right- 
 eousness. He who doeth this is a great 
 ruler. Is not, then, man's persistence in 
 righteousness the whole glory of his king- 
 dom? 
 
 Yaton'te said: Yes. To try, and again 
 to try, is the sum of the good a man does. 
 And yet what man is there in heaven or on 
 earth but can find an apology for the good 
 work he accomplisheth? Does not the 
 poor man say: O, if I had this, what great 
 good I would ccomplish. And the rich 
 man maketh the same speech; as also does 
 the king. And yet Jehovih has given a 
 kingdom to each and everyone of them. 
 But he who can say: I have done all I 
 could according to my strength and wis- 
 dom, rateth among the highest of men and 
 Gods. Hear me, then, O Fragapatti: and 
 cause thyself to forget all the light of high 
 heaven, and to imagine thyself in a place 
 of darkness, where three thousand million 
 spirits are vagrants, scattered far and 
 wide on the corporeal earth. Such was 
 this kingdom; but the spirits congre- 
 gated not together in hells, as they did in 
 the east, for they had no association; no 
 Gods nor Lords. They were all perpetual 
 migrants, except those who dwelt with the 
 Druks and familiars. And the spirits of 
 those who died in infancy, were taken by 
 the spirits of their fathers and mothers, 
 and cared for only until they gained suf- 
 ficient knowlede to serve as vagrants. And 
 all these spirits were without clothes or 
 drapery of any kind, and devoid of shame; 
 neither were they good or evil, nor had 
 they desire for or knowledge of, a higher 
 heaven, being content to simply rove 
 about, to sleep and to eat. And they had 
 at least a thousand different kinds of signs 
 and utterances, which they had acquired 
 on earth, and mixed up so that neither 
 Lords nor Gods could converse with them. 
 Thus I found them before I built this capi- 
 tal amongst them. I traveled amongst 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 169 
 
 them with music and with fire, and gaudy 
 apparel, in hope to gain their aspiration; 
 but alas they neither smiled nor frowned 
 on my fine shows, but vacantly gazed at us, 
 or even fell asleep whilst our otevan was 
 paraded before them. 
 
 Then I came and built this capital and 
 founded this throne to Jehovih. And then 
 I sent to them, here and there, presents of 
 gaudy attire, in hope to inspire the multi- 
 tude through the few; but alas those attired 
 soon divested themselves of their clothes, 
 perfering nakedness. Thus my second 
 venture became a failure. I then sent a 
 hundred thousand preachers amongst them 
 to portray the greater glory of a higher 
 heaven. But alas, they heeded not, on if 
 heeding would forget all that had been told 
 them. And thus transpired the third fail- 
 ure. Then we held a holy council, implor- 
 ing Jehovih for light and power; and His 
 Voice came to me, saying: Go to their 
 mortal loves my son. Begin thou with 
 es'yans. 
 
 Then I commanded my hosts to go and 
 live for a season amongst mortals; and they 
 brought the es'yans to Yanton'te, under 
 guard of the asaphs. And their kindred 
 followed and desired to remain. And I 
 said unto them: Behold, my place is fair, 
 and my people are clothed. Save ye be 
 clothed, also, ye cannot dwell with us, 
 nor shall ye look upon your kindred 
 whom I have taken for myself. And there 
 came many mothers and fathers and broth- 
 ers and sisters, belonging to the recent 
 dead; and they allowed themselves to be 
 clothed. Thus were the first of them 
 clothed in my kingdom. 
 
 Again I called my hosts together and 
 said unto them: I will divide North 
 Guatama amongst a thousand Lords, and 
 they shall dwell with mortals, having a 
 sufficiency of ashars to give one to each 
 mortal man, woman and child. And when 
 they die by natural death, or in war, the 
 es'yan spirits shaH be brought to my king- 
 dom. 
 
 Then I provided nurses and places of 
 entertainment for those who were brought 
 here. But, alas, the tens of thousands 
 of spirits who thus came because of their 
 kin, and accepted clothing for sake of re- 
 maining, had little talent and less de- 
 sire for anything. At the next holy coun- 
 
 cil the Light came to me, saying: Hear 
 the Voice of thy Creator, O My Son; be- 
 cause thou hast been diligent in striving 
 for the resurrection of My children, I am 
 come to thee. I created men naked, as 
 the foundation of industry. But because 
 this people followed in the Osirian age the 
 abandonment of spirit communion whilst 
 they were yet mortals, they lost sight of 
 My countenance. Neither canst thou in- 
 spire them to industry, save through cloth- 
 ing the body; but, first of all, thou shalt 
 make them ashamed of nakedness; other- 
 wise there is no resurrection for them. 
 
 Then I inquired of the Creator how I 
 should teach them shame. He said: Thou 
 shalt inspire them through mortals. Every 
 plateau except the lowest shall be a thou- 
 sand miles in breadth, and the lowest shall 
 be two thousand miles in breadth. Each 
 plateau shall have a rise of one degree, so 
 that the plateaux shall extend from the 
 earth up to thy kingdom like a stairway. 
 And thy Lords shall provide subjective 
 entertainments and subjective teaching for 
 the two lowest plateaux. And it shall be 
 provided with forests, lakes and rivers, 
 and with all manner of animals and birds 
 and fish, and of whatsoever is suitable 
 food for the mortals. And the lowest pla- 
 teau shall be called Hochedowa, signifying 
 happy hunting ground. And there shall 
 not be any real thing on these two plateaus 
 save the inhabitants and their food, and 
 the mirrors, lenses and machinery for pro- 
 ducing subjective things. And when this 
 work is completed ye shall teach mortals 
 and say to them also: Go tell one an- 
 other, for after death the soul shall go 
 thither in great delight; but except ye 
 wear garments to hide your nakedness ye 
 shall not enter Hochedowa. 
 
 Yaton'te said: When the lowest plateau 
 was made habitable, covering a large por- 
 tion of North Guatama, the Voice came 
 again, saying: Through thy Lords, My 
 Son, thou shalt possess all mortals, every 
 man, woman or child, allowing not one of 
 the drujas to come near them. And be- 
 hold, I will send upon the land in many 
 places great drouths, because of the con- 
 struction of the plateaux, and these wan- 
 dering spirits shall not find sustenance 
 except through thee and thy Lords. And 
 when they come to thee, thou shalt oblige 
 
170 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 them to be clothed, and thou shalt show 
 preference to all such as wear ornaments. 
 
 Yaton'te said: This much have we 
 accomplished, O Fragapatti. The founda- 
 tion of my heavenly kingdom is broad and 
 sure, but I have few subjects to show thee. 
 
 Fragapatti said: Behold, I will take 
 two days of rest, and then I will inspect 
 thy places. Proclaim, therefore, recrea- 
 tion for two more days. 
 
 CHAPTER XIX. 
 
 When the time of recreation was ended 
 Yaton'te called his council together, and 
 when he sat on the throne with Fraga- 
 patti and Hoab on his left hand, the Voice 
 of Jehovih came to him, saying: 
 
 Behold, O My Sons and Daughters, in 
 this heaven and on this land shall rise in 
 time after those who shall begin the 
 founding of My kingdom amongst mor- 
 tals. For in the lands of the East, and the 
 heavens of the East, I have given false 
 Gods and Lords whom mortals fall down 
 and worship, but in this heaven and this 
 land no false God nor Lord shall ever be 
 established by violence, for so I have de- 
 creed. And to accomplish this end I have 
 had these subjective heavens created, and 
 they shall endure till the dawn of kosmon 
 and the overthrow of war and mortal 
 kingdoms. From this throne will I come 
 in that day, through My Chiefs, and reveal 
 the histories of My Kingdoms. And from 
 this heaven I will extend outward until 
 My kingdoms encircle the whole Earth. 
 
 And whether the I'huans be mortals or 
 spirits, ye shall teach them to worship 
 none save the Great Spirit. For a ques- 
 tion will arise amongst mortals in the be- 
 ginning of kosmon as to whether mortals 
 are ruled by the angels of heaven, and as 
 proof to them I will keep out all false 
 Gods, Lords and Saviours, and mortals, 
 through the inspiration that shall descend 
 from this heaven, through the spirits of 
 the I'huan dead, shall become worshipers 
 of the Great Spirit; for I, Jehovih, alone 
 rule over all, and within all My works. 
 And as ye find little inspiration amongst 
 the hosts of wandering spirits now, so will 
 the same lack of inspiration be manifested 
 in the beginning of kosmon amongst mor- 
 tals. The Voice ceased. 
 
 Yaton'te called Et'seing, his assistant 
 God, saying: Come thou and sit on the 
 throne, whilst I accompany Fragapatti to 
 inspect my dominions, and also' to visit 
 God of Ipseogee, after which I will return 
 hither. 
 
 Et'seing sat on the throne, duly salut- 
 ing. Then Fragapatti, perceiving that the 
 great multitude desired to hear him speak, 
 rose up and said: 
 
 I am well pleased with what they have 
 done, O Jehovih. Thou hast wisely 
 chosen them, for in this dawn I perceive 
 the foundation of that which will reach 
 mortals in kosmon. And because Thou 
 hast chosen this place, great is the respon- 
 sibility of these Thy Lords and Thy Lord 
 God. Because they have supplicated Thee, 
 Thou hast guided them, and they cannot 
 err. Because their work hath been slow, 
 they have great honor in patience and per- 
 sistence. May Thy Wisdom, Power and 
 Love continue with them, for Thy glory, 
 now and forever. Amen! 
 
 Fragapatti ceased, but the light became 
 brilliant above his head; and the Voice 
 spake out of the Light, saying: 
 
 More shall they concern themselves in 
 a righteous foundation of My kingdom 
 than in a multitude of conversions and res- 
 urrections. For the standard of their 
 Lords and Gods and their successors is of 
 more value than tens of thousands of the 
 redeemed who are of little wisdom and 
 strength. 
 
 The Voice ceased, and Fragapatti came 
 down from the throne, followed by Ya- 
 ton'te and Hoab. The es'enaurs chanted, 
 All Hail, Great Jehovih's Power! And 
 when they had advanced to Ctius they 
 halted for a moment ,and then filed in 
 front of the throne, saluting in the Sign 
 of Om, and were answered by Fragapatti. 
 After them came the marshals of the trav- 
 eling hosts. Passing out of the capital to 
 the place of the ships of fire, they entered 
 the avalanza, with music and cheering; 
 and thus they departed to survey the king- 
 dom of Yaton'te, and then to go to Ipse- 
 ogee. 
 
 CHAPTER XX. 
 
 After Fragapatti had examined the 
 places of the asaphs and physicians which 
 belong to the lower heavens, he descended 
 
CYCLE OF FEAGAPATTI 
 
 171 
 
 to Hochedowa, the happy hunting ground, 
 in order to witness the games and tourna- 
 ments, which were so far maintained by a 
 great expenditure of labor on the part of 
 the ethereans, in order to teach the dead 
 by subjective illustrations. Jehovih had 
 said: 
 
 As mortal children can be taught by 
 objective illustration, so can the young 
 spirit be taught in a subjective school. 
 Behold the rainbow! It is a subjective il- 
 lustration to mortals of a bow without 
 substance. Man bendeth a stick and saith: 
 Behold a bow! And he holdeth it in his 
 hand; but Mine he cannot touch. I cause 
 mortals to teach their sons and daughters 
 many combinations by the use of objects, 
 that they should know a circle, a square ,a 
 triangle, or learn to compute numbers by 
 the use of objects. Inversely in the same 
 way I created subjective means for the 
 spirits of the dead, that they might be 
 taught and amused by My works. 
 
 To corporeans I gave corporeal eyes 
 and corporeal ears, that they might attain 
 to wisdom on the earth; and to a few I 
 give su'is that they may see and hear 
 things spiritually. To the spirits of mor- 
 tals who die in infancy I give spiritual 
 eyes, and spiritual ears; but without culti- 
 vation they hear not corporeal things nor 
 see corporeal things. But to such spirits 
 as have fulfilled an earth-life, I have given 
 capacity to see and hear after death the 
 matters of both worlds. Nevertheless 
 there are many spirits in heaven who have 
 not fulfilled either a spiritual or a cor- 
 poreal life, and they can see but little and 
 hear but little; for which reason I com- 
 manded that they should be called drujas, 
 signifying spirits of darkness. And I send 
 My Gods and My Lords, saying to them: 
 Go to the spirits of darkness, for they 
 neither see nor hear heaven nor earth, and 
 are wandering about indifferent even to 
 their own nakedness. And ye shall create 
 mirrors and lenses, and optical illusions 
 and delusions, and provide games and en- 
 tertainments for them, so that their under- 
 standing may be opened up for the glory 
 of My kingdoms. 
 
 CHAPTER XXI. 
 
 When the avalanza arrived at Hoche- 
 dowa it was lowered to as to serve as an 
 
 observatory, in order that those therein 
 could witness what was going on, and it 
 could be moved about from place to place. 
 And they witnessed the heavenly tourna- 
 ments and games, the boating and fishing 
 and hunting, and all other entertainments 
 representative of what these angels had 
 been engaged at in mortal life. And it 
 came to pass that many drujas were re- 
 stored to memory of earth life, restored to 
 seeing and hearing, and to know they had 
 entered another world, illustrating to their 
 dull senses that it was possible for them to 
 learn to see and hear understandingly. But 
 there were also within these regions hun- 
 dreds of millions of angels void of form 
 and expression. 
 
 Jehovih had said: When a man hath 
 fainted, thou shalt arouse him by calling 
 his memory to things past. And when the 
 druj in heaven hath ceased to know who 
 he is, thou shalt show him symbols of 
 things past and thus awaken him. 
 
 Jehovih had also said: Behold, O man, 
 thou art the chief glory of my creations. 
 And to thee only, O man, have I given 
 immortality. For the beasts of the field 
 I made like a vessel that is full of water, 
 and when the vessel is destroyed the water 
 flows back to the ocean. I quickened 
 them into life by mine own hand, but 
 when I take away My hand they are gone 
 back into dissolution. As a drop of water 
 evaporates and is seen no more, so is the 
 spirit of all the animals I created before 
 the Light of My countenance except thee, 
 O man, to whom I gave power for ever- 
 lasting life. And as a man may take a 
 drop of water and put it in a phial and 
 keep it for a long time, so have I given to 
 my exalted angels power to take the spirit 
 of a fish or of an animal and reclothe it 
 with the semblance of a body for a season. 
 And yet it is only a subjective existence. 
 And as a man letteth a stone out of his 
 hand, and it falls to the ground, so when 
 my angels let go their hands on My spir- 
 itual animals their spirits fall into the sea 
 of My body, and are seen no more. Even 
 so, also, I created the trees, the grass, the 
 moss and all vegetable things that grow 
 on the Earth. 
 
 Fragapatti also visited the Washa'wow'- 
 wow, the great hunting fields, and the 
 places of tournaments, the Se'ka'to'si, 
 
172 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 where thousands and tens of thousands of 
 drujas were being amused and instructed 
 and awakened to their condition and to 
 their possibilities. And when Fragapatti 
 and his hosts had seen the beauty and 
 grandeur of this lowest of heavens, and 
 made a record of the affairs, Yaton'te said: 
 
 Now, O Fragapatti, have I shown thee 
 the foundation of a great house, my king- 
 dom, which is Jehovih' s also. I am at thy 
 service to go whithersoever thou mayest 
 desire. Then Fragapatti answered: I de- 
 sire to descend beneath to Earth's surface, 
 and survey the plains, and rivers and lakes, 
 in the regions where the Father's King- 
 dom will be founded. Let my mathemati- 
 cians compute the time, and these things 
 shall also be recorded in the etherean li- 
 braries, for the benefit of the angels of 
 that day. 
 
 The mathematicians computed the 
 time, and then Yo'tse'putu, the Chief, said: 
 Eight thousand nine hundred years. 
 
 So Fragapatti caused the avalanza to be 
 lowered down to Earth's surface, and he 
 coursed the land over, east and west, and 
 north and south, and when he saw it was a 
 fair country as to land and water, he said: 
 
 Behold, the Wisdom of Jehovih in the 
 foundation and plans for inhabiting and 
 subduing Earth. And yet, eight thousand 
 nine hundred years! O what innumerable 
 millions on Earth will go down in dark- 
 ness ere that day! Here the Light will 
 fall! Here the beginning of the death of 
 Seffas! Yet Thy hand, O Jehovih, is over 
 all. 
 
 CHAPTER XXII. 
 
 Fragapatti sent messengers to Hapacha, 
 God of Ipseogee, apprising him of the an- 
 ticipated visit. So Hapacha hastily called 
 in his Lords and captains, preparing a time 
 of recreation and suitable reception and 
 entertainments. And Hapacha arranged 
 his hosts in this manner: First, one hun- 
 dred thousand musicians, formed in eight 
 parts of a circle. With each group he pro- 
 vided one thousand marshals, and they 
 stood in front of the musicians, with eight 
 intervening spaces also. Next within he 
 provided places for the messengers, of 
 whom there were three hundred thousand. 
 Then next came the asaphs, of whom 
 there were one million; next came the 
 
 ashars, of whom there were two million; 
 next, the nurses and physicians. Then 
 the teachers in factories and schools and 
 colleges, and of all these there were four- 
 teen million six hundred thousand.. Of the 
 grade above the es'y ans there were twenty 
 million, and of the second grade there were 
 thirty million; but no es'yans were present. 
 
 In the midst of the circle was the throne 
 of Hapacha, now extended so as to ac- 
 commodate his Lords. To the south of his 
 throne were the seats of the captains; and 
 in a crescent were his counselors, of whom 
 there were one million. 
 
 Hapacha having thus called them to- 
 gether, and having explained to but few 
 the purpose, now addressed all present, 
 saying: 
 
 By the Wisdom and Power of Jehovih I 
 speak before you. Since our youth up we 
 have been advised by the guardian angels, 
 their Lords and God, to be firm in faith in 
 Jehovih above all things. For it was de- 
 clared to us, in the olden times, that there 
 was a higher heaven and a lower heaven, 
 and that through faith in the All Highest 
 we should all ultimately ascend and dwell 
 in His most Holy Kingdoms. Ye have 
 been steady workers since your mortal 
 lives were put away, raising up many for 
 this kingdom, and causing them to rejoice 
 in everlasting life. But as it has been prom- 
 ised that the Gods above us would surely 
 come and deliver all who were prepared 
 for the next resurrection, ye have cher- 
 ished hopes for wider fields of labor where 
 ye may become more wise in Jehovih's 
 Light. The time for that resurrection is 
 near at hand for many of you. Our Fa- 
 ther hath brought this heaven into a re- 
 gion of light that ye may be prepared for 
 still greater light beyond. And because of 
 the new light that is with you many of the 
 I'huan es'yans have deserted our nurseries 
 and gone back to the earth, for they love 
 the darkness on earth more than the light 
 of heaven. My Lords have sent messen- 
 gers to me from various parts of the earth, 
 saying: As much as they have deserted 
 your places in heaven, even so much have 
 the es'yans returned to mortals in great 
 numbers. And it hath come to pass that 
 great manifestations of spirit presence are 
 now common to mortals, men, women and 
 children. Many of these es'yans have 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 173 
 
 adopted the roving habits of drujas, deny- 
 ing that there is any higher heaven, hon- 
 estly believing they will have an opportun- 
 ity to reincarnate themselves and dwell 
 again in mortal form; knowing no higher 
 heaven, and knowing no happiness except 
 the indulgence of lust through mortals. 
 
 Being armed in prophecy, your God 
 called you to witness the words and pro- 
 ceedings of Fragapatti, who is on his way 
 hither, accompanied by Yaton'te, God of 
 Yaton'te, creator of Hochedowa. For 
 more than six hundred years have many of 
 us labored in this field, and our harvests 
 for Gau have been the most esteemed of 
 all the resurrections contributed by the 
 Lords of Earth. To comport with our dig- 
 nity, I have commanded the builders of 
 otevans to have in readiness, representing 
 these harvests, a vessel for my Lords and 
 their attendants, and my chief marshal, to 
 go part way and meet our visitors, bearing 
 the sign of the triangle, and of fruit and 
 the altar. 
 
 Hapacha then gave instructions in full; 
 and presently the receiving hosts departed 
 in the otevan, with music and rejoicing, 
 being cheered by the hosts who remained 
 to put the house of Hapacha in order. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIII. 
 
 Fragapatti had previously visited Ha- 
 pacha, but told not who he was, except 
 that he was God of Lunitzi, in etherea. 
 Consequently, Hapacha, now knowing that 
 Fragapatti was coming, mistrusted not 
 that it was the God of Lunitzi, but expect- 
 ed to see him coming in great pomp and 
 glory. For he had heard of the wonders 
 Fragapatti had already accomplished in 
 the eastern heavens, particularly the break- 
 ing up of the hells of Aoasu and the deliv- 
 erance of the tortured inmates. But, with 
 neither lights nor curtains, Fragapatti 
 came to Ipseogee, with the receiving hosts 
 within his vessel, anchoring near the 
 throne of Hapacha. 
 
 Presently Fragapatti, Yaton'te and 
 Hoab came down out of the ship, with the 
 marshals on the left, and the receiving hosts 
 on the right. Hapacha's es'enaurs sang, 
 Jehovih's Name, O ye Lords and Gods. 
 The hosts of the avalanza joined in singing, 
 with trumpets, harps and triangles, and 
 great was the glory of their music. When 
 
 Fragapatti approached the throne the 
 music ceased. Hapacha made the ancient 
 sign of Jehovih's name, and asked: Who 
 cometh here? Fragapatti answered: A 
 Faithist in Jehovih! And he gave the 
 countersign. Then Hapacha said: In His 
 Name, welcome, brother, and thy hosts 
 also. May Jehovih's Love, Wisdom and 
 Power be manifested through me and my 
 people during your sojourn with us. 
 
 Fragapatti said: Jehovih is All Wise. 
 He fashions some men as suns, and the 
 light of their souls extendeth to etherea. 
 And He sends swift messengers from His 
 most exalted heavens to course the vast 
 fields in etherea at certain times; and they 
 passing through both light and dark places 
 scan the distant kingdoms where mortals 
 and angels dwell, and by their great wisdom 
 discern the brightest, best souls, and carry 
 the record thereof to the Gods above. 
 And when these Gods descend to the re- 
 gions wherein these gems are set, they 
 visit them. Thus standeth thy record, O 
 Hapacha, in the higher heavens. And 
 when the Father called me to visit the red 
 star and her heavens, I looked over Jeho- 
 vih's messengers' reports where was set thy 
 name, radiant with love. So to thee I came 
 unknown, and thy great worth and the 
 amity of thy hosts won my love. I promis- 
 ed that thou shouldst hear from me soon, 
 and so behold, Fragapatti is before thee. 
 
 Hapacha said: For this I praise Jeho- 
 vih. Come thou, O Fragapatti, and honor 
 my throne in the name of the Father. 
 And come thou also, Yaton'te, and thou, 
 Hoab. And they went and sat on the 
 throne, and Fragapatti sat in the midst. 
 Again the es-enaurs sang and played, and 
 whilst they sang the light of the upper hea- 
 vens began to envelop the throne. Then 
 spake Fragapatti, saying: 
 
 Because ye have been faithful from the 
 first, ye are become the light of Earth and 
 of this heaven; and as ye have maintained 
 your altars and times of worship, there have 
 been maintained in the upper heavens al- 
 tars and times of worship in conjunction 
 with you. Thus have ye been blessed in 
 hearing the Voice through all the darkness 
 which Earth and her heavens have passed. 
 
 As Jehovih hath given voice betwixt 
 mother and child, though they be distant 
 from each other, so in like manner has he 
 
174 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 given voice to His kingdoms which are in 
 sympathy in righteousness and love. As 
 ye behold the light gathering about the 
 throne, think not that I bring the light, 
 nor that it is sent to me in person. There 
 is a cord betwixt me and my etherean 
 kingdoms, and I am one end thereof; the 
 other end is my throne in etherea. When 
 I sit in the midst of this throne, behold it 
 is illumined by the light of the higher hea- 
 vens. Think not that my heavens are the 
 highest of all. The All Highest can never 
 be attained. Nevertheless, my heavens are 
 conected as with a cord to those above me, 
 and they to still others above, and so on, 
 forever, upward! The All Highest con- 
 ceived of is called Jehovih; and no matter 
 how far it descends, the Voice is still His 
 Voice. 
 
 Fragapatti ceased speaking, and a light, 
 most brilliant like a sun, settled above his 
 head. Many could not look upon it be- 
 cause of its brightness. Presently, Jeho- 
 vih's Voice spake out of the Light, saying: 
 
 Rejoice, O Hapacha, in the name of thy 
 Creator! Sing songs of delight, and let 
 thy people hold up their heads. I have 
 watched over thee and thy hosts. Ye have 
 fulfilled the dawn of My Light. Yester- 
 day I said: Sit ye here, stand ye here,, for 
 to-morrow I come again. And this was 
 My commandment for thousands and tens 
 of thousands of years. But others remem- 
 bered Me not. In the night they went down 
 as a child that falleth asleep. And when I 
 come on the morrow, behold, they had not 
 awakened. And I roused them up and 
 showed them My great Light. Again, I 
 said to them: Three thousand years are 
 as one day in My sight. Sit ye here, stand 
 ye there; and remember Me. To-morrow 
 I come again. But they went down in 
 sleep. They remembered Me not, their 
 Creator. 
 
 But thou, O Hapacha, hast maintained 
 the watch all night long. Thou art the 
 first of Earth Gods who hath kept My 
 kingdom safe in the lower heavens till the 
 morrow come. Now I have come to de- 
 liver thee and thy kingdom to Haraiti, 
 whither thou shalt tarry till the close of 
 dawn, when My Sons and Daughters shall 
 bear thee and thy hosts upward to My 
 emancipated worlds. 
 
 The Voice ceased. Then spake Fraga- 
 patti, saying: For three days I will tarry 
 here. Two days shall be spent in recrea- 
 tion, and on the third day thou shalt ap- 
 point thy successor, and I will then speak 
 again before thee and thy people. 
 
 Hapacha then proclaimed two days of 
 recreation, and the hosts of the avalanza 
 mingled with the Ipseogee'ans, and great 
 was the glory of those two days. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIV. 
 
 Hoab rejoiced not. He alone of all 
 the people assembled was burdened in soul. 
 He said: Jehovih, because I have seen 
 that Thy Son Hapacha, one of Thy Gods 
 in the lowest of heavens, has maintained 
 his kingdom unto Thee till this dawn of 
 light, I am rebuked. Thou gavest into my 
 keeping a kingdom far higher than this, 
 even Zeredho; and I went down as a child 
 that falleth asleep. My kingdom forgot 
 Thee; my people ceased to sing songs unto 
 Thee. We buried ourselves in darkness. 
 And thou hast chosen me to be the next 
 God of Earth and her heavens. How shall 
 I fulfill Thy commandments? How shall 
 I know the way to choose Gods and Lords 
 who will be steadfast and zealous? 
 
 Fragapatti then said unto him: Through 
 faith in Jehovih are all things accomplish- 
 ed. Without faith in Him all things are 
 uncertain. He who saith: I know Jeho- 
 vih lives and reigneth, hath said wisely. 
 But he who says: I go forth in Thy 
 strength, O Jehovih, for I know that I 
 shall accomplish, hath said much more. 
 For his words maintain the power of the 
 Father in Him. 
 
 On the morning of the third day, Ha- 
 pacha called the hosts from recreation to 
 labor. The es'enaurs chanted a hymn of 
 rejoicing, and then Hapacha said: 
 
 To Thee, O Jehovih, are all things com- 
 mitted, even as from Thee they came forth. 
 Thy Voice is upon all men, but at times 
 they hear Thee not. Thine eye is observant 
 of all men. To teach men these simple 
 things is to make Gods of them. To teach 
 them to find Thee, to know Thee, to real- 
 ize Thy Ever Presence and to become one 
 with Thee, this is the labor of Thy Gods 
 and Lords. In Thy name have I raised up 
 one who is to succeed me, in this, Thy 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 175 
 
 kingdom. From Thy Light shall Thy Ori- 
 an Chief weave a crown for him, and with 
 mine own hands will I crown him. 
 
 The marshals now brought forward 
 Penoto, of Caracas, highly learned in dis- 
 cipline, and when he stood before the 
 throne of God, Fragapatti arose and said: 
 Without a keynote, a number of instru- 
 ments cannot be attuned to harmony. 
 Many people, either angels or mortals, be- 
 coming as a unit, are powerful over the 
 elements surrounding them, but if such 
 people disbelieve in an All Highest Per- 
 son, they cannot harmonize, because each 
 one is his own self esteemed all highest. 
 They are without power, without unison, 
 and without sacrifice, accomplishing little 
 good on earth or in heaven. 
 
 Think not that darkness belongs only to 
 the earth, for there are those who rise to 
 the second resurrection, and then fall into 
 unbelief, and then the first resurrection. 
 And some of them even fall into hell be- 
 lieving that evil and destruction is good; 
 and yet others become drujas engrossed in 
 the affairs of mortals, and finally they be- 
 come fetals and vampires on mortals. 
 
 Whoever hath attained the height of his 
 own ideal, is on the precipice of hell; but 
 he who, finding the God of his forefathers 
 too small for himself, inventeth one much 
 higher, is a great benefactor. A fool can 
 ridicule the ancient Person; his delight is 
 to pull down; but a wise man furnisheth a 
 greater All Person. To pull down the All 
 Person, is to pull down His people. To 
 try to make a non-appreciable Person out 
 of Jehovih is to make one's self the oppo- 
 site of a creator. To learn to create and 
 to invent; to learn to congregate and to 
 make, is to travel on the right road. To 
 learn to pull down, to scatter, to annul, to 
 disintegrate, to set things apart from one 
 another, to find evil instead of good, to 
 find folly instead of wisdom, to expose the 
 ignorance of others instead of finding wis- 
 dom in them— all these follow the first in- 
 ception of disbelief in the All Person. 
 
 And since, from disintegration of the 
 compact betwixt the Creator and His chil- 
 dren, the cord of communication is cut off 
 with the exalted kingdoms in etherea, they 
 have indeed double grounds for disbelief; 
 nor can they comprehend how others can 
 be believers in an All Person, much less to 
 
 have faith in Him. For a community be- 
 cometh One Person; a kingdom in etherea 
 becometh One Person; a kingdom in the 
 lower heavens becometh One Person; a 
 kingdom on earth becometh One Person; 
 each and every kingdom being a single 
 figurehead; and as many of those kingdoms 
 as are united, become One Person also, 
 being a single figurehead of many parts, 
 which is the perfection of each and every 
 individual. 
 
 Hence, as a single individual can cut 
 himself off from Jehovih; so can a com- 
 munity, or a kingdom, and so go down to 
 destruction. The strongest, best man in 
 the community is he who laboreth most to 
 perfect the unity, that is, the Person of the 
 community; the strongest man in the king- 
 dom is he who laboreth most to perfect 
 the Person of the kingdom; the strongest 
 man in heaven is he who laboreth most to 
 perfect the All Person of heaven. The 
 weakest of men is the opposite of these. 
 He laboreth to show there is no All Per- 
 son in anything; verily, he is already falling 
 away from the Father. Yea, he accuseth 
 himself, for he saith: I neither see nor hear 
 an All Person, nor believe I in one. 
 
 It was said of old: First, testimony; sec- 
 ond, belief; third, faith; and fourth, works; 
 but I declare unto you that with the ex- 
 panse of knowledge testimony must be 
 strengthened. For in the olden times, an- 
 gels and men could be commanded to be- 
 lieve and they believed. Herein have 
 many of the Lords and Gods of the lower 
 heavens erred; for they furnished not to 
 those beneath them the necessary testi- 
 mony comporting with the advanced 
 knowledge in heaven or on earth. A God 
 shall devise food for meditation, because 
 angels, as well as mortals, without an ad- 
 vanced teacher, are as well off with none 
 at all. 
 
 It was said of old that a God taught the 
 people on one of the stars to believe Je- 
 hovih lived in a straw, and they rose in 
 wisdom, harmony and unity. Then after- 
 ward, another God came and taught them 
 there was no Jehovih, because, forsooth, 
 He could not live in a straw; and the people 
 fell into disbelief, inharmony and disunion. 
 Which, then, of these, was the wiser God? 
 Yet I declare unto you, they were both 
 necessary. For there are times when with- 
 
176 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 out a habitation and a figure, the Great 
 Spirit cannot be taught to either angels or 
 mortals. The labor of the Gods is to lead 
 the people upward, step by step, until they 
 learn to be Gods and Goddesses themselves. 
 
 On this world, mortals were first taught 
 through stone and wooden idols; and after- 
 wards by engraved images. In some of 
 the mixed tribes it will be necessary to 
 teach them Jehovih incarnated in mortal 
 form, and by sympathy for his sufferings, 
 teach them how to follow his spirit up to 
 heaven. But all these subterfuges shall be 
 set aside in the kosmon era. This heaven, 
 more than any other heaven on Earth, will 
 be esteemed by the etherean kingdoms; for 
 beneath you on this part of Earth, will mor- 
 tals first espouse the Father's kingdom. 
 
 Therefore, let your labor be first of all 
 to sow the seed of belief in an All Person,, 
 the Great Spirit. As ye now sow, and 
 build Jehovih's kingdom in your heaven, 
 so, in the coming of the kosmon era, will 
 the same teaching take root in the souls of 
 mortals. Nor shall ye, under any circum- 
 stances, permit Gods, Lords or Saviors to 
 be established as worshipful beings, either 
 in these heavens or on this land. For this 
 land is dedicated to Jehovih for the over- 
 throw of all idols, of Gods, Lords, Saviors, 
 and of everything that is worshipped save 
 Jehovih, the Great Spirit. Neither shall 
 any of these idols be established with effect 
 in these heavens or on this land. But be 
 ye most circumspect to establish Jehovih, 
 the All Person, in the souls of angels and 
 mortals. 
 
 Fragapatti ceased, but signalled for Ha- 
 pacha to ordain Penoto, God of Ipseogee. 
 Hapacha rose up, saying: Penoto, Son of 
 Jehovih. Thou hast been chosen to be 
 God of Ipseogee for six hundred years. 
 Thou hast been favored with much travel- 
 ing in heaven; and for thy benefit, many 
 swift messengers from the emancipated 
 worlds have explained to thee the domin- 
 ions of the Great Chiefs. He through 
 whose fields this world is now traveling, 
 hath stood up before thee. He hath spok- 
 en to thee and thy people. Heed thou his 
 words and thou shalt be one with his king- 
 doms in wisdom and power. And at the 
 end of six hundred years, thou and thy 
 harvest shall be called for by the etherean 
 hosts. Be thou ready for them! And erst 
 
 thou depart thou shalt raise up one suffi- 
 cient to take thy place, and thou shalt be- 
 stow him. 
 
 Penoto said: Thy will and Jehovih's 
 be done. That which is given me to do 
 will I do with all my wisdom and strength, 
 so help me, O Jehovih. 
 
 Hapacha said: By virtue of Thy Love, 
 Wisdom and Power, O Jehovih, vested in 
 me, do I ordain this Thy son, God of Ip- 
 seogee, for the period of six hundred years. 
 Be Thou with him, O Jehovih, and may he 
 and his works glorify Thee forever. Amen! 
 
 Penoto said: Which I accept and cove- 
 nant with Thee, O Jehovih, for Thy glory 
 forever. Amen. 
 
 The es'enaurs now sang: Thou Light 
 and Person, Approved and Sung on High, 
 Jehovih. Our God Hapacha. Thou Hast 
 Called Him. Welcome, Penoto. Thou 
 alone, Jehovih, remainest forever. Glory, 
 glory, be to Thee, O Thou Creator. 
 
 The light gathered brilliantly over Frag- 
 apatti's head, and when the music ceased, 
 the Voice of Jehovih spake out of the 
 Light, saying: 
 
 In the first days I blew My breath upon 
 the lands of Earth, and man became a liv- 
 ing soul. Then, in the second time, I 
 moved My hand upon Earth, and man 
 went forth in power. Thus near hath My 
 Voice approached Earth. Be ye steadfast 
 in My commandments. The time shall 
 surely come when My Voice shall be heard 
 by mortals on Earth. 
 
 The Voice ceased, and then Fragapatti 
 took the light in his hands, as one would 
 take fine flax, and turning it about wove a 
 most brilliant crown of a reddish hue. He 
 said: 
 
 Crown of Thy crown, O Jehovih, have 
 I woven for Thy Son, God of Ipseogee. 
 And he handed it to Hapacha, who said: 
 And in Thy name, O Father, I crown him, 
 second God of Ipseogee, for six hundred 
 years. Be Thou with him, O Father. 
 Amen. 
 
 CHAPTER XXV. 
 
 At the close of the fourth day, Fraga- 
 patti commanded his hosts to embark in 
 the avalanza; and the marshals conducted 
 them in, taking first, the sons and daugh- 
 ters of Ipseogee, being sixty million; next 
 the Zererho'ans, ten million; and then 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 177 
 
 Fragapatti's etherean attendants, five mill- 
 ion. When those were aboard, Fragapatti, 
 Hoab, Yaton'te and Hapacha, rose up, and 
 after making the sign of the setting sun, 
 went down and sat at the foot of the 
 throne. God, who was Penoto, stepped 
 down and took Fragapatti's hand, saying: 
 Arise, O Chief. The Father calleth. Frag- 
 apatti rose up and stood aside. Then God 
 raised Yaton'te and he stood aside, and 
 then Hoab and he stood aside. And now 
 came the greatest trial of all. God took 
 Hapacha' s hand, saying: Arise, O God, 
 Great Jehovih calleth thee! Go thy way 
 and His. But they both burst into tears, 
 and fell into each other's arms. Hapacha 
 said: O Father! Penoto said: His will be 
 done. And now the light gathered bril- 
 liantly over the scene. Fragapatti moved 
 forward, then Yaton'te, then Hoab, and 
 next Hapacha. 
 
 Penoto resumed the throne. The es'- 
 enaurs chanted, and the light of the higher 
 heavens descended over all the place, mak- 
 ing the close of the scene like a sweet 
 dream. Fragapatti and his hosts were 
 gone. 
 
 Like a bee that is laden with honey, 
 flying from a field of flowers to its home, 
 so returned Fragapatti with his avalanza to 
 Haraiti, swiftly speeding through the vault 
 of heaven, a shooting star in Jehovih's 
 hand. Athrava, God of Haraiti and assist- 
 ant to Fragapatti, knew that the avalanza 
 was coming, and that Hapacha and his 
 hosts were aboard, and he provided a glor- 
 ious reception for them. So for the space 
 of a thousand miles he caused two rows of 
 pillars of fire to be erected, so that the ava- 
 lanza should pass between them; and near 
 the pillars were stationed trumpeters and 
 harpists, one million, divided into one hun- 
 dred groups. And they were so arranged, 
 that when the avalanza passed, they could 
 come aboard. 
 
 Now more than one hundred and fifty 
 millions of the spirits who had been rescu- 
 ed from torture and madness in the hells 
 of Aoasu had been restored to conscious- 
 ness during the absence of Fragapatti. And 
 Athrava had them clothed in gaudy appar- 
 el, and they were bearers of perfumes, flow- 
 ers and torches, as presents for the I'hin 
 hosts of Hapacha. And the lights were 
 lowered at the place of landing, to make it 
 
 acceptable to those newly raised who were 
 aboard. 
 
 Athrava said: As for Mouru, within 
 the walls of light it shall be rated seven; 
 but when Fragapatti hath ascended the 
 throne it shall be raised to nine. And in 
 those days, nine in Haraiti was fifty per 
 cent, of the capacity of endurance in the 
 plateau. 
 
 Jehovih had said: If they raise the light, 
 it will be more acceptable to My etherean 
 hosts, for they have dwelt a long time near 
 the earth, and are thirsting for etherean 
 light. But yet consider ye, here are thou- 
 sands of millions of atmosphereans who 
 cannot endure the etherean light but delight 
 in a lower per cent. See to it then that 
 the walls of light protect My hosts on one 
 side, but raise ye the grade to nine within. 
 
 Athrava said: There shall be flights of 
 stairs leading over the walls of Mouru, 
 and they shall be white and illumined on 
 that day, which shall be sufficient for divid- 
 ing the people according to the light suit- 
 ed to them. The I'hins with Hapacha will 
 go over the walls, for they entered their 
 corporeal cities in the same way; besides, 
 they are capable of enduring the light; but 
 the I'huans with Hapacha will desire to re- 
 main without. For them prepare ye a 
 place of delight and rest. 
 
 But in regard to the ethereans Athrava 
 gave no orders, for they were capable of 
 perceiving all necessary things without in- 
 struction. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVI. 
 
 When Fragapatti entered the avenue of 
 fire where Athrava had stationed the mu- 
 sicians, with his avalanza, so great was the 
 .delight of his hosts aboard they broke all 
 bounds of propriety, and they shouted and 
 sang with the trumpeters with the most 
 exalted enthusiasm, becoming entranced 
 with the enchanting scene about them, and 
 seeing visions of etherea far above them. 
 For Jehovih created man with seasons of 
 clearness far in advance of his growth, 
 which having realized, he returneth to his 
 normal condition to prepare himself consti- 
 tutionally. 
 
 Along the road on either side, were mot- 
 toes peculiar to the hosts of Hapacha, and 
 to mortals of Guatama. When Hapacha 
 saw these, he said: How is it possible? 
 
178 
 
 CYCLE OF FBAGAPATTI 
 
 Whence derived these Gods this informa- 
 tion? But the light came to his own soul, 
 saying: The wise and good sayings of 
 men below, are borne by Jehovih's swift 
 messengers to realms above. Hoab stood 
 near by, and heard Hapacha's remark; and 
 he said: 
 
 How can men and spirits be inspired 
 to wise and good sayings? Who had 
 thought to erect such sign boards on the 
 road to All Light! And yet what darker 
 deeds are done when the soul of man find- 
 eth curses and evil words to vent his aw- 
 ful sins, and walls himself around with hor- 
 rid imprecations, to face in after time and 
 be appalled at the havoc of his own deadly 
 weapons. How few, indeed, comprehend 
 the direful thrust of hateful words, but 
 which are placarded on the signboards of 
 heaven, as his fruit sent to market! The 
 poison dealt out of his mouth to his broth- 
 er man! A man throweth a spear, deadly, 
 and it falleth on the earth and lieth there; 
 but words and sayings are more potent, 
 scoring deep in the soul of things. Fair 
 indeed is it with thee, O Hapacha, and 
 with thy hosts also, with yonder pure scroll 
 to enter Haraiti. 
 
 As the ship passed the lights, the ether- 
 ean musicians came aboard, being anxious 
 to meet Hapacha and his hosts, especially 
 the I'hins, and to congratulate them on be- 
 ing the first harvest from the lowest hea- 
 ven at the end of a cycle. There were just 
 twice as many as Sethantes had prepared 
 in the first dawn on Earth. Fragapatti call- 
 ed the swift messengers belonging to the 
 roads of Gon, in etherea, and he said unto 
 them: Go ye to Sethantes, whose fields lie 
 in the Roads of Gon, and say unto him: 
 Greeting, in the name of Jehovih. The. 
 red star, Earth, hath reached Obsod and 
 Goomatchala, home of Fragapatti, who 
 sendeth love and joy on behalf of sixty 
 million, first harvest of ha'k, grade sixty- 
 five. Of these messengers, four hundred 
 departed, leaving a reserve of eight hun- 
 dred, who continued on the avalanza. The 
 spirits who were arrayed in gaudy attire, 
 withdrew a little from the landing, fearing 
 the light. The ship drew near the walls 
 and was made fast, and two million mar- 
 shals of Mouru came forward as an escort 
 to conduct all who chose over the ascend- 
 ing stairs. And so great was the faith of 
 
 Hapacha's hosts, that over fifty million of 
 them passed within the sea of fire, singing: 
 Glory be to Thee, O Jehovih. Creator of 
 Worlds. Seeing this great faith in them, 
 Athrava commanded red and blue lights, 
 to favor them, and there was not one of 
 the whole number that turned from the 
 light. And now many of them beheld for 
 the first time the glory and power of Gods 
 and Goddesses. Mouru was illuminated on 
 every part. The structure of the temple, 
 its extent and magnificent conception, with 
 its hundred of thousands of mirrors and 
 lenses, its transparent and opaque crystals, 
 translucent and opaque circles and arches, 
 hundreds of millions, which when viewed 
 from any one place was unlike when viewed 
 from another, as if each position were 
 striving to outdo the other in beauty and 
 perfection. So that a person could walk 
 for a thousand years in the temple, and 
 every moment see, as it were, a new place 
 of surpassing grandeur. And so wonder- 
 fully was it arranged that the faces of one 
 thousand million people could be seen from 
 any place where a person might stand, and 
 all these people appeared to constitute a 
 part of the building, being as jewel stones 
 created by Jehovih for the ornamentation 
 of the celestial abodes of His Sons and 
 Daughters. 
 
 Hoab, always quick to speak, said: O 
 that angels and mortals would strive to 
 make of themselves such jewels as these. 
 Hapacha spake not, being overwhelmed 
 with the beauty and magnificence of the 
 scene. 
 
 Yaton'te said: When thou art on the 
 throne Fragapatti, I will leave for the king- 
 dom of Yaton'te. Here then, I will take 
 my leave. Fragapatti shook hands with 
 him, saying: Jehovih be with thee. So 
 Yaton'te remained where he was, but Hoab 
 and Hapacha continued on with Fragapat- 
 ti. All eyes were turned to Hapacha, 
 whose persistence in faith in Jehovih had 
 won the lower heavens to wisdom and 
 love. And as they moved toward the 
 throne, great Athrava rose up, smiling, 
 holding out his hands to receive them. 
 Next, and back of Athrava, were the five 
 Goddesses, Ethro, of Uche and Rok; Guis- 
 saya, of Hemitza, of the valley of M'boid, 
 in etherea; Si'tissaya, of Woh'tabak, the 
 one time home of Fuevitiv; Ctevi, of Nu, 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 179 
 
 Porte'Auga; and Rinava, of the swamps 
 of Tholiji, in South Suyarc of Roads, near 
 Zuh'ta and Hitch'ow, in the south etherean 
 vault of Obsod. 
 
 And the Goddesses also rose up with 
 extended hands; and now, because of the 
 brilliancy of their presence, the throne be- 
 came a scene of hallowed light, and threads 
 thereof extended to all the Council mem- 
 bers, and by these were radiated outward 
 so that every person in the Temple of Je- 
 hovih was connected with the throne, 
 which made every spoken word plain to 
 all. 
 
 Athrava said: In Jehovih's name, wel- 
 come, O Fragapatti. And to thy hosts, 
 welcome also. The Goddesses repeated the 
 same words, and they were echoed by the 
 entire audience. Fragapatti said: In Thy 
 name, O Jehovih, am I delivered to my 
 loves. Be Thou with us, O Father, that 
 we may glorify Thee. Receive ye, O my 
 people, Hapacha, Son of Jehovih, who rose 
 up and stood in the dark all night long, in 
 faith in Jehovih. Behold, I have delivered 
 him and his hosts in dawn. 
 
 And now there appeared, rising like a 
 new sun, Jehovih's Light beyond the 
 throne, reddish tinged, emblem of the 
 Western Light, in honor of Hapacha. 
 
 Then spake Jehovih out of the light, 
 saying: With My breath create I alive the 
 Earth-born child; with My hand quicken I 
 the newborn spirit; and with My Light il- 
 lumine I the soul of My Faithist. Behold 
 I dwell in the All Highest place, and in the 
 lowest of created things; whoever findeth 
 Me, I find also; whoever proclaimeth Me, 
 I proclaim in return. Hapacha, My Son, 
 Savior of men! Of My Light shalt thou 
 be crowned. 
 
 The Voice ceased, and now Fragapatti 
 advanced to the midst of the throne, and 
 took of the light and fashioned a crown, 
 and placed it on Hapacha's head, saying: 
 Crown of Thy crown, O Jehovih, crown I 
 Thy Son . In Thy Light shall he be wise 
 and powerful, with Love to all Thy created 
 beings, henceforth, forever. 
 
 The Goddesses then received them, and 
 after due ceremonies they all took their 
 seats, Fragapatti in the midst of the throne. 
 Athrava resigned at once, during the stay 
 of Fragapatti. The es'enaurs now chanted: 
 Glory Be to Thee, O All Light; the Per- 
 
 son of Every Kingdom, High and Low; 
 Who Hath Brought Our Brothers and Sis- 
 ters Home. 
 
 By natural impulse, Hapacha's hosts, 
 fifty million, rose up and responded, sing- 
 ing: To Thee, O Jehovih, How Shall Our 
 Souls Find Words? Thy Sons' and Daugh- 
 ters' Love, How Can We Recompense? 
 Make us Light and Clear, O Father! 
 Spotless Before Them and Thee! 
 
 But the anthems were long and sung 
 with brilliancy, rejoicing and responding, 
 millions to millions. When the music 
 ceased, Fragapatti said: With the close of 
 dawn of dan, these hosts shall be received 
 as Brides and Bridegrooms of Jehovih, 
 and ascend with us to the regions of Goo- 
 matchala, in etherea. The apportioners 
 will therefore divide them into groups in 
 Haraiti; with etherean teachers to prepare 
 them. That this may be accomplished, I 
 proclaim one day's recreation, to assemble 
 on the next day in order 
 
 CHAPTER XXVII. 
 
 When they were called to order, Fraga- 
 patti said: For the cenvenience of My 
 hosts, the light shall now be raised two de- 
 grees, in which case it will be well to per- 
 mit the hosts of Hapacha to retire to the 
 fields of Hukaira, in Haraiti, where Ath- 
 rava hath already a place and teachers for 
 them. 
 
 Accordingly the conductors now re- 
 moved Hapacha's hosts, all except one 
 million who resolved to endure the light. 
 The es'enaurs chanted whilst these ar- 
 rangements were being carried out, and 
 when they were accomplished the music 
 ceased. 
 
 The chief marshal said: Swift messsen- 
 gers, who are waiting without, salute Je- 
 hovih's throne, and his God, and pray an 
 audience. Fragapatti said: Whence come 
 they? And what is the nature of their bus- 
 iness? 
 
 The marshal said: From the Aoasu'an 
 fields of Howts. Their business is of the 
 Osivi knots. 
 
 Fragapatti said: On the sign of Emuts 
 admit them, greeting from God in Jeho- 
 vih's name. 
 
 The marshal withdrew and returned 
 with one thousand swift messengers of 
 
180 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 whom Adeline was Goddess. She advanc- 
 ed to the left of the throne. 
 
 Fragapatti said: Goddess Arieune, 
 Greeting to Thee, in Jehovih's name! Pro- 
 ceed thou. 
 
 Arieune said: Greeting in love to thee, 
 Fragapatti, and to all thy hosts. I hasten- 
 ed hither from the fields of Howts, section 
 twelve, on the one-time plateau and place 
 of Hored, where are a thousand million in 
 a knot. This I reported to the Lord of Jaf- 
 feth, Ah'oan, whose forces are all employ- 
 ed, and he sent me hither. 
 
 Fragapatti said: It is well. Thou art 
 dismissed. Hoab, canst thou untie the 
 knot? Hoab said: I have faith to try. 
 To which Fragapatti replied: Athrava will 
 go with thee, but do thou the labor. 
 Choose, therefore, thy hosts from my eth- 
 ereans, and have a vessel built sufficiently 
 large so that if thou findest it advisable to 
 bring them away, thou canst do so. Re- 
 tire, then, with the captain of the files, and 
 make thy selections, and in the meantime 
 give commands for the vessel to be built 
 and put in readiness. 
 
 Hoab said: With Jehovih's help I will 
 deliver them. And he saluted, and with 
 the captain of the files he withdrew and 
 made his selections, choosing five million 
 in all, of whom half were physicians and 
 nurses. In the meantime he had the proper 
 workmen build a vessel of sufficient capac- 
 ity and strength, as advised by Fragapatti; 
 and in seven days' time everything was 
 completed, and Hoab commanded his 
 hosts to enter the ship, and he and Athra- 
 va embarked; and were conducted by the 
 Goddess Arieune, in her arrow ship, to the 
 place of the knot. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVIII. 
 
 The Goddess Arieune gauged the speed 
 of her arrow ship to suit that of Hoab's 
 vessel; so onward together they sped in a 
 direct line, propelled as a rocket by con- 
 stant emissions from the stern, the mater- 
 ial being manufactured by the crew and 
 commanders, who are skilled in wielding 
 Jehovih's elements. As mortals find 
 means to traverse the ocean and to raise a 
 balloon, so do high-raised angels build 
 and propel mightier vessels through the 
 firmament. And when the ethereans, high 
 raised in the most subtle spheres, send their 
 
 ships coursing downward in the denser 
 strata of a corporeal world, their ready 
 workmen take in ballast, and turn the fans, 
 and reverse the whirling screws to match 
 the space and course of travel. And men 
 learn this trade, having rank and grade ac- 
 cording to their proficiency; many of them 
 serving apprenticeships of thousands of 
 years, becoming so skilled in wielding the 
 elements, and in the knowledge of the de- 
 grees of density, that thousands of millions 
 of miles of roadways in heaven are as a 
 well-learned book to them. And thus, con- 
 versant with Jehovih's wide domains, they 
 are eagerly sought after, especially in emer- 
 gent cases, or on journeys of millions of 
 miles; for so well they know the require- 
 ments, the places of delight, the dangers of 
 vortices and of eddies and whirlpools, that 
 when a God saith: Take me hither, or 
 yonder, they know the nearest way and the 
 power required. For as Jehovih hath made 
 icebergs on the corporeal ocean, danger- 
 ous to corporeal ships; and heavy currents 
 of wind; and currents in the ocean, so are 
 there in etherea currents and densities 
 which a well-skilled God can take advan- 
 tage of, be is a slow trip of pleasure, or a 
 swift one on urgent business to suffering 
 angels or mortals. And be it God or God- 
 dess, dispatched by a higher Council, to a 
 distant place quickly, he or she must be al- 
 ready acquainted with navigators sufficient 
 to know whom to choose; and likewise, 
 understand the matter well enough to help 
 if required. For oft the navigators have 
 not swift messengers to pilot them; and a 
 short journey of fifty thousand miles may 
 require as much skill as a million, and es- 
 pecially in descending to a corporeal world. 
 
 Hoab knew, and he managed well. Fol- 
 lowing close on the arrow's trail till they 
 neared the ruined plateau, and amidst the 
 broken currents Arieune dropped along- 
 side, perceiving Hoab's less wieldly vessel. 
 and made fast. She said to Hoab: 
 
 Behold, we are near the place. Then 
 Haob asked: How foundest thou a knot 
 in such a wasted country? Arieune answer- 
 ed him: 
 
 When Jehovih created woman, He gave 
 to her two chief attributes, curiosity and 
 solicitude for others. So, passing here, 
 surveying the place where the first heavenly 
 kingdom was, I remembered it had been 
 
CYCLE OF FBAGAPATTI 
 
 181 
 
 said that Aph left some island places where 
 once a colony in heaven had been built, 
 and I halted to examine it. A moan and 
 terrible sound greeted me. I heard the 
 Osivi knots, as I had oft heard others be- 
 fore. We halted and made fast, and pres- 
 ently went about searching led by the sad, 
 sad noise, until we came to the great 
 mound, the knot, a thousand million drujas 
 bound in a heap; wailing, muffled, moan- 
 ing, as if all the heap of them were in the 
 throes of death, but could not die. Being 
 myself powerless to overcome such fearful 
 odds, I made note of the bearing of the re- 
 gions where I should find the nearest God; 
 and so having measured the knot, I set 
 sail as thou hast heard. 
 
 Hoab said: Every day I behold Thy 
 wisdom, O Jehovih! In a new light thy 
 wondrous judgment riseth up before me. 
 Who but Thee, O Father, had seen the 
 fruitage of curiosity made perfect in Thy 
 Daughters? From the little bud seen in 
 mortal form to the scanning of Thy hea- 
 vens. 
 
 As thus Hoab discoursed, they arrived 
 at a suitable halting place, where they 
 made their vessels fast, and then hurried 
 to the knot. Without loss of time, Hoab 
 walled the knot around with low fire, leav- 
 ing a gateway to the east, where he placed 
 a thousand sentinels. One million of this 
 army he stationed outside the walls, and 
 these were divided into groups of selectors, 
 guardsmen, physicians, nurses and bearers, 
 and manufacturers of fire and water. The 
 selectors were provided with rods of fire 
 and water, and blinds. 
 
 Then Hoab stationed another millon be- 
 twixt the knot and the gateway, and these 
 were stationed in four rows, each two rows 
 facing, and but two paces apart; so that 
 betwixt the rows it was like a walled alley- 
 way. And the other three million Hoab 
 caused to surround the knot on every 
 side. Each and every one of these was 
 provided with a fire lamp, which they held 
 in the right hand. And when all things 
 were thus in readiness, Hoab commanded 
 the attack to begin. And at once the at- 
 tackers thrust their fire lamps in the face 
 of the druj nearest by, and seizing them 
 with the other hand pulled them away. So 
 great is the fear of the drujas that at times 
 they will not relinquish their grip at sight 
 
 of the lamp, but often require to be nearly 
 burned and stifled with the light before 
 they release their hold. 
 
 A knot is a mass of millions and mill- 
 ions of spirits who becoming panic-strick- 
 en, fall upon their chief, or leader, who 
 becomes powerless in their grip, and is 
 quickly rolled up on the midst of the knot. 
 
 And when the deliverers thus begin at 
 the exterior of the knot, peeling off the 
 crazed and moaning spirits, they hurl them 
 backward, where they are caught by the 
 seconds, who in turn hurl them into the 
 alley ways, where they are again thrust for- 
 ward till past the gate in the wall of fire. 
 From the time, therefore, that the druj 
 receiveth the thrust of the first lamp in his 
 face, he is not allowed to linger, but is 
 whirled suddenly from one to another so 
 quickly he cannot fasten to any person or 
 thing. For were they to fasten on even the 
 deliverers, first one and then another, soon 
 a second knot would result. Thus to untie 
 a knot of a thousand million crazed angels 
 is not only a dangerous proceeding, but a 
 feat of unusual grandeur to be undertaken 
 by only five million ethereans. 
 
 To provide against accident, Hoab ap- 
 pointed Athrava to take charge of the de- 
 livered after they were beyond the walls; 
 for Athrava had received thousands of 
 years' practice in such matters. So he di- 
 vided and arranged the drujas into groups, 
 placing guards with fire rods over them; 
 and in some cases taking the groups away 
 and walling them around with fire also. 
 
 Now by the time five hundred million 
 of the knot were released, some of the ex- 
 ternal delivered groups began to tie them- 
 selves in knots. And when Athrava saw 
 this, he said to Hoab: Behold, they are 
 becoming too numerous for my hosts. I 
 have not sufficient guardsmen. Hoab said: 
 Then I will cease a while, and instead of 
 delivering, come and assist thee. Thus 
 Hoab labored with those without, untying 
 the small knots and arranging them in 
 safer ways, placing a greater number of 
 guards over them. This done, the es'- 
 enaurs struck up lively music, starting 
 dancings and marchings; for such is the 
 routine of the restoring process practiced 
 by Gods. Then come the nurses with 
 cheerful words, with mirth and gayety, fol- 
 lowing one diversion with another in rapid 
 
182 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 succession. To the raving maniacs, and to 
 the stupid, and to the hopeless blind, the 
 physicians now turned their attention. 
 
 Again Hoab and his army fell upon the 
 knot, pulling the external ones away and 
 hurling them out, but not so rapidly, hav- 
 ing fewer deliverers, for he had bequeath- 
 ed an extra million to Athrava, outside the 
 walls. And after another three hundred 
 million were delivered, Hoab ceased for a 
 time, and joined with Athrava to assist 
 and divide and group them in the same way 
 as before. And he bequeathed another 
 million of his army to Athrava, and then 
 again resumed the attack on the knot, and 
 thus continued till he reached the core of 
 the knot, having untied the whole thou- 
 sand million drujas, gradually lessening his 
 own army and enlarging that of Athrava. 
 
 And when Hoab came to the core of the 
 knot, behold he found Oibe, the false God, 
 who falsely styled himself Thor, the ether- 
 ean. And in the midst of the knot they 
 had jewels of rare value, and stolen crowns 
 and stolen symbols, and rods, holy water, 
 urns, incense, and a broken wheel of Je- 
 hovih, a broken triangle of the Gods; and 
 in fact a sufficiency of things whereof one 
 might write a book in the description. Suf- 
 fice it to say, a false God and his kingdom 
 had collapsed and he fell, crushed in the 
 glory of his throne. And there were with 
 him seven false Lords, who were also 
 crushed in the terrible fall. 
 
 Oibe and his Lords, from their confine- 
 ment in the knot, were also crazed and wild 
 with fear, screaming and crying with all 
 their strength, even as were all the others, 
 like drunkards long debauched, delirious 
 and fearful of imaginary horrors. Or as 
 one's hand, long compressed, becometh 
 numb, and when pressure is taken away it 
 still seemeth to be bound. So would not 
 Oibe and his Lords believe they were free, 
 but still cried and called for help. 
 
 At this time, there came from Ah'oan, 
 God of Jafteth, a messenger whose name 
 was Turbe, with forty companions and five 
 hundred apprentices. Turbe was an atmos- 
 pherean, three hundred years of age, 
 Turbe said: Greeting from Ah'oan in Je- 
 hovih's name. To whom shall I speak; to 
 whose honor credit this deliverance, save 
 Jehovih's? 
 
 Athrava said: To Hoab, a Zeredho'an 
 disciple of Fragapatti, who is sojourning in 
 Mouru, capital of Haraiti. And Athrava 
 further asked Turbe his name, whence he 
 came, and especially if he knew about this 
 knot before, and the history of its cause? 
 To which Turbe replied: 
 
 From Ah'oan this I have learned, that 
 some four hundred years ago, one of the 
 sub-Gods named Oibe, because of his mod- 
 esty and birdlike fleetness, was promoted 
 by Samati, who is now commissioned mas- 
 ter of the I'huans by Fragapatti. This, 
 whom Hoab hath delivered is Oibe, the 
 one-time sub-God of honorable purposes. 
 His kingdom prospered for two hundred 
 years, and his name and fame spread 
 throughout all these heavens, and even 
 down to mortals, who were inspired by his 
 admiring spirits to make images of birds 
 and dedicate them to Oibe. He became 
 vain of the flattery, and losing faith in Je- 
 hovih finally came out in unbelief, saying 
 there was no All Highest, save as each and 
 every God chose to exalt himself. Within 
 his dominions, which numbered nearly a 
 thousand million angels, were a score or 
 more of Lords under him; to the wisest of 
 whom he began to preach his views, look- 
 ing to personal laudation and glory. In 
 the course of a score of years, the matter 
 culminated in Oibe and a few of his favored 
 Lords proclaiming a new kingdom, styled, 
 The All Highest Kingdom in The All 
 Highest Heaven. And the title he assum- 
 ed was, Thor, the Only Begotten Son of 
 All Light. Thor, the All Light Personated. 
 Thor the Personal Son of Mi, the Virgin 
 Universe. 
 
 Thus Oibe turned away from the true 
 God and his kingdoms; and he immediate- 
 ly walled his kingdom around with a stand- 
 ing army; promoting seven of his most 
 efficient devotees as Lords; and others as 
 generals and captains. And at once he sat 
 about enlarging and enriching his throne 
 and his capital, which he called Osivi, and 
 known as Howts on the official charts. 
 
 In the course of one hundred years his 
 kingdom became a place of two thousand 
 million souls. His chief city, Osivi, was 
 the richest and most gaudy city that had 
 ever been in these heavens. The streets 
 were paved with precious stones. The pal- 
 aces for himself, his Lords, and his mar- 
 
CYCLE OF FRAQAPATTI 
 
 183 
 
 shals and generals, were built of the most 
 costly jewels with pillars, arches and cham- 
 bers of the most elaborate workmanship, 
 and of the most costly material. 
 
 Oibe became a tyrant, and with the ex- 
 ception of his Lords and a few favored 
 friends, none were permitted to approach 
 his throne but by crawling on their bellies, 
 and even under guard. Nor were they per- 
 mitted to raise their eyes upon him except 
 at a very great distance. And all his sub- 
 jects were his slaves in fact, though under 
 progressive discipline. These slaves were 
 sent far away into atmospherea, or else 
 down to the earth, to gather tribute for the 
 glory of Oibe and his favorites; nor did 
 these slaves mistrust but they were working 
 for Jehovih, believing that he lived in the 
 capital Osivi. At first Oibe educated and 
 otherwise improved his slaves; but finding 
 them less obedient in consequence of 
 knowledge, he finally destroyed all the 
 heavenly schools and colleges, and resolv- 
 ed to keep his subjects forever ignorant. 
 Consequently the wiser of his subjects de- 
 serted him, and his angels were without 
 knowledge, knowing nothing except that 
 they had to work for Thor forever. In 
 addition to ignorance, Oibe kept his sub- 
 jects forever in fear of himself, forever 
 threatening them with terrible punish- 
 ments if they ceased to pray to him as the 
 only Personified All Light. And in the 
 course of time, his people forgot all aspira- 
 tion for any other heaven or any other God. 
 Many of them were deputized to dwell 
 with mortals as guardian spirits, persuad- 
 ing mortals to worship Thor and Ibis, 
 threatening them with being turned into 
 serpents and toads after death if they obey- 
 ed not these injunctions. 
 
 Thus ruled Thor the false, for four hun- 
 dred years in Osivi. Neither was it possi- 
 ble for Samati to send an army of sufficient 
 strength to overcome such a kingdom. But 
 a change finally came. A light descended 
 from the higher heavens six generations 
 ago; and according to the legends of old, 
 it was ominous that the Gods of higher 
 worlds would intercede. 
 
 So Samati taking advantage of this, sent 
 emissaries to Oibe, and solicited him to 
 give over his evil ways and re-establish Je- 
 hovih. Thor, the false, sent back word 
 saying: When I was a child I was taught 
 
 to fear Jehovih, and I feared Him. After 
 long experience I have discovered there is 
 nothing to fear in all the worlds. If there 
 be any Jehovih, He is without form or per- 
 son or sense. I fear Him not. I revere 
 Him not. My heaven is good enough for 
 me and my Lords. As for my subjects, let 
 no man, nor God, nor Lord, meddle with 
 them. 
 
 Samati, who was the lawful God of all 
 these heavens, and of Earth, thus perceived 
 no way to reach Thor's slaves, for the slaves 
 were too ignorant to desire anything save 
 Thor. Nevertheless, he sent word the sec- 
 ond time to Oibe, saying: Thy kingdom 
 is even now destitute of intelligent people 
 sufficient to protect thee in case of panic. 
 If a comet, or any sudden light, or the 
 passage of an avalanza through thy domin- 
 ions should take place, thou wouldst surely 
 find thyself overthrown in a knot. Thy 
 subjects look upon thee as the All High- 
 est; they will surely rush upon thee. 
 
 Oibe sent the messengers back with an 
 insulting answer. Thus the matter stood 
 until after Ah'oan's appointment as God of 
 Jaffeth and her heavens, which at once cut 
 off Oibe's emissaries to mortals, and con- 
 fined him within his own kingdom. At 
 this time Samati was commissioned to es- 
 tablish the worship of Jehovih amongst 
 mortals, and he communicated Oibe's po- 
 sition to Ah'oan. Ah'oan sent embassa- 
 dors to Thor, the false, beseeching him in 
 the same manner to give up his personali- 
 ty, and return with his kingdom to Jeho- 
 vih, promising him the best of assistance: 
 To this, Thor the false replied, by the mes- 
 sengers, saying: 
 
 Ah'oan, thou usurper! If thou desirest 
 favors of me, thou shalt approach me as all 
 Gods and angels do, by crawling on thy 
 belly before me. Encroach thou not on 
 My Most High Kingdom, or I will banish 
 thee back to thy miscreant regions with 
 stripes and curses. 
 
 Ah'oan was surprised, but perceived 
 that till trouble came upon Oibe nothing 
 could be done for him. So, the time came; 
 Jehovih suffered him to go the full period 
 of self glory. Thus Oibe fell. 
 
 Turbe ceased, and Athrava said: O Je- 
 hovih, when will man cease to fall? Thou 
 hast proclaimed thyself in all places, high 
 and low. Thy Gods and Lords and count- 
 
184 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 less angels have proclaimed Thee! Thou 
 alone art the password to all the universe. 
 Thy name hath a thousand exalted devices 
 to win the souls of mortals and angels 
 from darkness to light, and yet they turn 
 away from Thee, Thou Creator of suns and 
 stars and countless etherean worlds. And 
 they set up themselves as an object of wor- 
 ship. O the smallness of Gods and men. 
 ^0 the vanity of Thy little children. 
 
 Thou hast said to mortals: Go not into 
 the marshes, for there is fever; build not 
 large cities, for there is sin; go not after 
 lust for there is death. But they go in 
 headlong and they are buried and dead. 
 To those who are risen in heaven Thou 
 hast said: Remember the lessons of earth, 
 lest ye fall! Remember the fate of self- 
 -conceit, lest ye be scourged. Remember 
 the king and queen, how they become 
 bound in heaven, lest ye also become 
 bound. But they will not heed. Vain self 
 riseth up in the soul; they behold no other 
 God but themselves in whom they acknowl- 
 edge wisdom. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIX. 
 
 Hoab heard the story of Turbe, and he 
 said unto him: Since I have heard these 
 things, I am resolved to bind Thor, the 
 false, and his Lords and send them with 
 thee to Ah'oan. Because Thor insulted 
 Ah'oan, it would be a just judgment for 
 Ah'oan to restore him. My physicians 
 shall bind them, that they do no harm in 
 their madness, and I will have them put 
 aboard. 
 
 And when this had been accomplished 
 and they were ready to start, Hoab said to 
 Turbe: Give greeting to Ah'oan in the 
 name of Jehovih; and say to him that ac- 
 cording to the laws of these heavens, a 
 false God or Lord, who hath led the people 
 away from Jehovih, shall after his deliver- 
 ance, be made to teach the truth to his 
 deceived subjects. Neither shall he be 
 promoted to any other labor until the low- 
 est of his subjects have been raised up. 
 Accordingly, after Ah'oan's companions 
 have restored Oibe and his Lords to sound- 
 ness of mind, he and his Lords shall be 
 again bequeathed with their own king- 
 doms. In the meantime I will in this same 
 plateau begin the establishment of a new 
 
 kingdom in Jehovih's name with these 
 crazed drujas. 
 
 Turbe and his companions then re-en- 
 tered their boat and set sail at once for 
 Ah'oan's kingdom; Thor, the false, and his 
 Lords, wailing and crying with fear, know- 
 ing nothing else. 
 
 Hoab now turned his attention to the 
 hosts of panic-stricken drujas, who were 
 constantly forming themselves in knots, 
 and yet being as rapidly severed by the 
 ethereans. To Athrava, he said: How 
 more helpless is a deranged spirit than a 
 mortal. At one time they fly from us; at 
 another they run together, or upon us, like 
 molten gum, and we cannot keep them off. 
 
 Athrava said: Behold the wisdom of 
 the Father in creating man in a corporeal 
 body. What a glorious anchorage for a 
 young, a weak or a deranged spirit. What 
 a home a corporeal body is. How better 
 we could manage these crazed ones were 
 they thus provided. 
 
 Hoab said: Which showeth us the way 
 we must proceed to restore them. Since 
 we cannot create corporeal bodies for 
 them, the Father hath given us power to 
 provide for them subjectively. 
 
 Thus Hoab and Athrava proceded. First 
 walling the place around with fire, so none 
 of the drujas could escape, and then divid- 
 ing them into thousands of groups, making 
 subjective bodies for them, to which they 
 bound themselves willingly, and which pre- 
 vented them from fastening to one another. 
 And whilst they were thus provided tem- 
 porarily by their teachers, and governors 
 and nurses, many of them imagined them- 
 selves to be kings and queens and high 
 priests, and even Lords and Gods. For 
 more than a hundred days, Hoab and Ath- 
 rava labored in the above manner; and the 
 phyisicians and nurses and es'enaurs la- 
 bored to restore the minds of the people; 
 and had them well nigh all restored and 
 disciplined when messengers came from 
 Fragapatti, saying: 
 
 Behold the dawn of dan is passing swift- 
 ly, and I must yet visit the Lord Gods in 
 the different heavens of Earth. It is there- 
 fore my decree that Athrava return to 
 Mouru and resume the throne; and that 
 Hoab return also, and join me as my stu- 
 dent and companion on my journeys. Send 
 these, my commandments, to Ah'oan, 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 185 
 
 greeting, in my name, and he will provide 
 a Lord to rule over the delivered knot of 
 Osivi. 
 
 So Hoab and Athrava were relieved by 
 a Lord appointed by Ah'oan, and whose 
 name was Su'kah'witchow, an atmospher- 
 ean pupil of Samati, of four hundred years, 
 and of great resolution and proficiency. So 
 Hoab provided Su'kah'witchow with a 
 throne, and left four million teachers, 
 nurses and physicians with him. And with 
 the other million Hoab and Athrava de- 
 parted for Mouru, in Haraiti. 
 
 Fragapatti, having heard of the success 
 of Hoab in delivering the knot, determined 
 to honor him on his reception at Mouru. 
 Accordingly, Fragapatti sent heralds out 
 into Haraiti, proclaiming a day of recrea- 
 tion, and inviting as may as chose to come 
 to Mouru to receive Hoab. The proper 
 officers provided musicians, flags, banners 
 and fireworks, suitable for the enjoyment of 
 hundreds of millions of the inhabitants of 
 Haraita. Others provided one thousand 
 reception boats to go and meet Hoab's 
 ships. 
 
 Fragapatti afterward said in regard to 
 this matter: Hoab was to be the next God 
 of Earth, and whatsoever would win the 
 love, admiration and awe of his unlearned 
 subjects would contribute to their resurrec- 
 tion. 
 
 CHAPTER XXX. 
 
 So for one day there was great rejoicing 
 in Mouru; and when it was ended, and the 
 people retired to their respective places, 
 Fragapatti said to Athrava: Come thou and 
 resume Jehovih's throne. As for myself, I 
 will go now and establish another habita- 
 tion in Zeredho, and visit all the Lord 
 Gods of Earth. And when I have complet- 
 ed these labors, it will be near the end of 
 the dawn of dan. See to it, therefore, that 
 all who wish to prepare for the third resur- 
 rection be duly notified. 
 
 And now, when Fragapatti had risen up 
 from the throne, swift messengers were 
 announced from Sethantes, the inhabiter of 
 Earth. The marshals were commanded to 
 admit them. Presently the swift messen- 
 gers came in, greeting in Jehovih's name. 
 They said: Sethantes sends love to Fraga- 
 patti. In this resurrection of dawn Seth- 
 antes will visit Mouru. And he will also 
 
 bring with him Onesyi, deliverer of the 
 Brides and Bridegrooms of the first har- 
 vest of Earth. 
 
 When the message had been delivered, 
 there was great rejoicing in the capital. 
 Fragapatti thanked the messengers in Je- 
 hovih's name, and they withdrew. Pres- 
 ently, Fragapatti, Hoab and Hapacha, de- 
 parted out of the capital, and when they 
 reached the avalanza, the marshals had the 
 accompanying hosts assembled, ten mill- 
 ion, and they entered the ship amidst music 
 and rejoicings. They started direct to the 
 kingdom of Yima, Lord God of Shem and 
 her heavens. Yima had been notified of 
 their coming, and had had a piedmazr made 
 in order to go and meet them. The pied- 
 mazr was sufficient to carry ten thousand 
 musicians, thirty thousand rowers, and two 
 hundred thousand travelers; and such were 
 the numbers who embarked on her to meet 
 Fragapatti. 
 
 Three years had now elapsed since 
 Yima set out to establish Jehovih's king- 
 dom in the heavens of Shem, and except 
 through messengers little was known in 
 Mouru of Yima's labors. Fragapatti had 
 said of him: Yima liveth with the Voice; 
 he canot err. 
 
 In the seventh diaphragm of the east 
 Apie, the vessels met, and Fragapatti open- 
 ed the lower division of the avalanza, and 
 took in Yima's boat and crew and passen- 
 gers, amidst music and rejoicings. And, 
 after due ceremonies, Fragapatti caused the 
 avalanza to proceed, and conducted by 
 Leaps, one of Yima's messengers, and they 
 reached Astoreth, the capital of Yima's 
 kingdom in atmospherea, first grade, and 
 resting upon the earth. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXI. 
 
 After Yima's appointment by Fragapat- 
 ti, he had come to these regions; and find- 
 ing great darkness upon both spirits and 
 mortals, he besought Jehovih in regard to 
 the cause and cure thereof. 
 
 The Voice of Jehovih came to Yima, 
 saying: Whether spirits or mortals, they 
 seek rather to obey their own self desires 
 than My commandments. Behold, I sent 
 them Apollo, and he gave them intercourse 
 betwixt the two worlds, angels and mor- 
 tals. And for a season they held up their 
 heads and remembersd Me and My king- 
 
186 
 
 CYCLE OF FEAGAPATTI 
 
 doms. But presently they turned away 
 from Me, and built to their own glory. I 
 had shown them that by industry and 
 perseverance they could attain to knowl- 
 edge and power. But because mortals dis- 
 covered that prophecy could come from 
 the spirits of the dead, they ceased to per- 
 fect themselves, and grew up in idleness. 
 The angels loved not to labor for achieve- 
 ments, being contented with the lowest. 
 And they likewise fell in darkness, forget- 
 tin Me and My higher places above. 
 
 I called out to My Son, Osire, saying: 
 Go thou down to Earth and her heavens, 
 and build them up in My name. Wall 
 them apart that there can be no promiscu- 
 ous communion betwixt the two worlds. 
 
 And Osire came and fulfilled My com- 
 mandments; and the spirits that infested 
 mortals, he drove away, and colonized 
 them, cutting them off from the earth. 
 And for a season, mortals prospered under 
 My dominion, and they sought to improve 
 the talents I created withal. But again 
 they confounded My judgments and per- 
 verted My laws. Every man on the earth 
 hath a philosophy of his own; every spirit 
 in these heavens hath a philosophy of his 
 own. And there is no uniformity between 
 any of them. Hear Me, then, My Son; 
 thou shalt not teach as Osire did, nor yet 
 as Apollo, but pursue a mean betwixt the 
 two. Thou shalt select them permitting cer- 
 tain spirits to return to mortals, and per- 
 mitting certain mortals to attain su'is and 
 sar'gis, and to see and commune with spir- 
 its, making the process of communication 
 a secret amongst mortals, and thus shut out 
 the drujas of heaven. Behold, My Son, 
 Samati, will come this way; labor thou with 
 him and Zarathustra. Into God's hands 
 have I given My decrees; he shall build on 
 the earth. Build thou in heaven. As he 
 buildeth for mortals, build thou for the 
 spirits; and keep Thou open the doorway 
 to My holy places in the heavens above. 
 
 Jehovih's Voice also instructed Yima, 
 saying: 
 
 Go thou from place to place in these 
 heavens and prove thy power, for the fool 
 saith: What canst thou do that I cannot? 
 When he sees the power that comes from 
 My hand, he openeth his ears and eyes. 
 
 Mortals have said: It is good to be 
 good, but it is not practicable. They have 
 
 said: It is wise to be wise, but wisdom 
 runneth in a thousand roadways; every man 
 for himself. The angels of these regions 
 have said: It is good for us to unite into 
 kingdoms; to have Gods and Lords; but 
 who can unite us? Shall we sell our liberty 
 to one person? And they will not unite; 
 they dwell in inharmony. The profit of the 
 one is the injury of others; they are barren 
 of united good. One kingdom may have 
 many good men and many good women, 
 but be no good as a kingdom. I measure 
 not the individuals, but the entire house- 
 hold. I judge the virtue of a kingdom by 
 the harvest it delivers unto me. When a 
 kingdom cannot retain its own members, it 
 is falling away from Me. The uprightness 
 of its few is as nothing in My sight. The 
 secret of the power of a kingdom lieth in 
 its capacity to obey My commandments. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXII. 
 
 For a hundred days, Yima went through 
 the lower heavens, displaying the mira- 
 cles of the upper heavens; and his hosts 
 who traveled with him enlisted pupils, and 
 collected the spirits of young children. 
 And in a hundred days he had many mill- 
 ions of spirits, mostly helpless wanderers. 
 With these he repaireth to Astoreth, and 
 made ready to found his kingdom. 
 
 Jehovih spake to him, saying: Fear not, 
 My Son, because of the helplessness of thy 
 subjects. He who would start a new king- 
 dom is wise in choosing those who have no 
 hobbies. Whosoever goeth forth in My 
 name, I will be with him. 
 
 Yima inquired of Jehovih who should 
 be appointed Assistant God, and the Voice 
 answered: Thulae. So Yima anointed 
 Thulae; and he made Habal chief marshal 
 of the capital. 
 
 Again the Voice of Jehovih came to 
 Yima, saying: Thou shalt appoint unto 
 Shem one hundred Lords, and they shall 
 have dominion over mortals. I will estab- 
 lish temples to my Lords and Gods through 
 My Son, Zarathustra, and thou shalt so 
 provide thy heavenly kingdom, that Thy 
 Lords shall inhabit the temples, commun- 
 ing with the rab'bahs, who shall be called 
 God-irs; but the communion betwixt spirits 
 and mortals shall be known only to God-irs 
 and priests. But mortals shall be left to 
 believe that these fathers have attained to 
 
CYCLE OF FRACAPATTI 
 
 187 
 
 spirit communion by great purity and wis- 
 dom. Likewise, when drujas manifest to 
 mortals, it shall not be countenanced but as 
 a mark of evil, raised up against truth. 
 And when thou hast established thy king- 
 dom, thou shalt cut off the supplies of the 
 drujas, so they will become borrowers from 
 thy people. In this manner, they will in 
 time consent to labor. 
 
 Yima then appointed one hundred 
 Lords, who became the roots of the tree of 
 heaven. The Aoasuan Lords were: 
 
 Ithwa, Yaztas, Micros, Jube, Zarust, 
 Horn, Paoris, Vadeve, Niasha, Cope, 
 Drhon. 
 
 The Thestasias Lords were: Kashvre, 
 Tusht, Yain, Amesh and Amesha; Armait, 
 Wai'iv, Vahois, Vstavia and Comek. 
 
 The general Lords were called Ashem, 
 meaning with voice; that is to say, Ashem- 
 vohu, Lords in chief, given for the king- 
 doms of the Sun, in the land of Shem. 
 They were: Shnaota, Zathias, Mutu, Aoirio, 
 Kaeshas, Cter'ay, Shakya, Thraetem, Gah- 
 naetobirischae, Habarshya, Pai-tis'gomya, 
 Huiyus, Hakdodt, Anerana, Tibalath, Ke- 
 var, Darunasya, Hors, Maidoyes-hemo, 
 Runnas, Gayomoratischi, Ba'ahraya, Zar- 
 tushta, Kai'boryawich'wich'toe'benyas and 
 Cpitama. And Yima made these twenty- 
 five Lords controllers of the Voice, with 
 mortals, to take the place of Samati after 
 the death and ascension of Zarathustra, for 
 which reason they were called the Ashem- 
 vohu. 
 
 The Lords of farmers and herdsmen 
 were: Gaomah, Hoshag, Tamur, Jamshed, 
 Freden, Minochihr-bani and Hus. 
 
 The Lords of seafaring men were : Thae- 
 tas, Mirh-jan, Nyas, Khaftras, Thivia, 
 Agreft, Ardus'lor, Tanafar, Avoitas, Mar- 
 ganesiachta, Hoakastanya and Vartuan. 
 
 The Lordesses of births and mothers, 
 the Hotche'che, were: Kaviti, Way'huts, 
 Howd, Anechorhaite, Juveas, Wisseta, Ho- 
 paeny, Ctnevirchow, Aivipohu, Cadhan, 
 Hucrova, Dion, Balkwoh and Gamosyi. 
 
 The Lords of buildings were: Iratha- 
 ma, Haira'thracna, Heidas, Hutu, Coy'- 
 gaga, Haira'-Wahti, Vivi'seeon, Muta'- 
 hagga, Kaoyas, Macyo, Aims, Hodo, Trus- 
 ivi, Verecopagga and Suyi. 
 
 The Lords of time keeping who had 
 dominion of the change of watch were: Co- 
 purasastras, Vaitimohu and Howitchwak. 
 
 Yima sent his Lords to their several 
 places, and every Lord took with him a 
 thousand attendant angels. Yima said to 
 them before they departed: Stir the people 
 up in your several places; and wherever ye 
 find kings or queens or generals surround- 
 ed by spirits that urge them on in their 
 affairs, remove those spirits, leaving the 
 mortals destitute of inspiration, and their 
 kingdoms and armies will become disor- 
 ganized and helpless. And whenever Sa- 
 mati and Zarathustra come to a city, go ye 
 also, laboring with them. And when Zara- 
 thustra holdeth up his hands and saith: O 
 Father, Light of Thy Light; gather ye of 
 the substance round about, and shield him 
 with a wall of fire. And if Zarathustra say: 
 O Father, Ormazd, give Thy children food, 
 then shall ye supply them fish and fruit. 
 And if a king or captain raise a hand 
 against Zarathustra, gather ye about him 
 and shield him. And if a man draw a sword 
 against Zarathustra, catch ye the blade 
 and break it to pieces. 
 
 Jehovih spake to Yima, saying: The 
 time will come when the present mortal 
 kingdoms shall fall. But the followers of 
 Zarathustra, who will succeed them under 
 Zarathustra, must be protected, as Zara- 
 thustra is protected during dawn. For 
 which reason thy Lords shall raise up oth- 
 er Lords to take their places after the as- 
 cent of this dawn. And the All Light and 
 All Truth shall come to mortals through 
 the priests who shall succeed Zarathustra. 
 But as for kings of great cities, who will 
 not accept My Light, they shall go down 
 in darkness, and their kingdoms shall fall. 
 Yima having established his Lords, now 
 gave his attention to the heavenly king- 
 doms of hada. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXIII. 
 
 Jehovih said to Yima: Thou shalt sep- 
 arate the spirits who have some light from 
 those wholly in darkness. Build thou, 
 therefore, a throne and a plateau sufficient 
 for three thousand million souls; and be- 
 cause there are more females than males, 
 thou shalt call the place of thy throne As- 
 toreth. And when thou hast provided a 
 house for thy Council, thou shalt send 
 forth selectors, who shall bring unto thee 
 as many as choose to come; and these 
 shall be the foundation of thy kingdom. 
 
188 
 
 CYCLE OF FBAGAPATTI 
 
 Yima proceeded as commanded by the 
 Father, and presently he had congregated 
 around about Astoreth a sufficient number 
 to establish places of amusement, places 
 of worship and places of learning. Again, 
 the Voice came to Yima, saying: 
 
 Because thy kingdom is attractive, thou 
 art flooded with idlers, who are of no 
 profit to any one. To keep them away 
 thou shalt wall thy kingdom around with 
 pillars of fire. I created man so he will 
 seek aught that is hidden, and if thou 
 makest thy labors seclusive they will seek 
 them. And when they come to thee thou 
 shalt make a bargain with them for right- 
 eous behavior erst thou feedest them. 
 And when thou hast thus gathered in all 
 who come in this way thou wilt have only 
 half the present number. But those who 
 are left will be without judgment, and thou 
 shalt take them and bestow them in colo- 
 nies and rank them. The lowest of all 
 shall be the first rank; those who come 
 after the pillars of fire are built shall be 
 the second rank; and those who come 
 with the selectors shall be called the third 
 rank. 
 
 And thy ashars shall drive all spirits 
 away from mortals except such as are ap- 
 pointed by thee or Thy Lords. For above 
 all things, thou shalt seek to become con- 
 troller over mortals, to the end that they 
 become Faithists in Me. 
 
 Yima then divided the spirits of heaven 
 according to the commandment of the Cre- 
 ator. After that he took possession of the 
 wandering spirits of darkness, whether 
 they were on Earth or in heaven, and he 
 had them taken into places prepared for 
 them. And he provided them with physi- 
 cians, nurses and teachers, and they were 
 made to understand that they were dead as 
 to their earth bodies, and that they must 
 give up the Earth. After this, Yima estab- 
 lished places of learning in heaven, and 
 places of labor, teaching the angels to 
 clothe and feed themselves by their own 
 industry. 
 
 Again the Voice of Jehovih came to 
 Yima, saying: Behold, My Son, the lower 
 heaven hath reached Spe'oke. It is, there- 
 fore, the time in which angels of the first 
 grade be taught to build heavenly man- 
 sions. 
 
 Yima commanded the teachers and the 
 superintendents of factories to prohibit the 
 spirits from returning to mortals, save by 
 permission. Yima said: It is wiser to in- 
 spire spirits to rise in heaven after death 
 than to have mortals drawing the angels 
 down to the Earth. And My Lords on 
 the Earth shall labor to this end also. 
 
 So Yima taught new inspirations, both 
 in heaven and on the Earth, which were 
 that the spirits of the dead should build 
 homes in heaven for their kindred, and 
 that mortals should be taught that there 
 were mansions in heaven for their souls 
 after death. 
 
 Yima said: Mortals becoming founded 
 in this belief, will not so readily become 
 wandering spirits after death. 
 
 Whilst Yima was thus building in hea- 
 ven, his Lords with their attendant spirits, 
 were manifesting on the Earth, as had 
 never been before since the foundation of 
 this world. The temples of the stars were 
 broken and thrown down by the spirits; 
 the iron gates of the cities were taken off 
 and carried into the forests; the palaces 
 of kings and queens were unroofed, and 
 the stones of the walls of the palaces were 
 hurled from their places; even to the foun- 
 dation, one stone was not left upon an- 
 other; and these things were done by the 
 spirits of heaven. Men, women and chil- 
 dren were carried in the air by the angels, 
 unharmed. The household goods were 
 carried out, and the food of the tables 
 were stripped off, even as mortals sat down 
 to feast, and they were made to behold the 
 food going away; with their own eyes 
 mortals beheld these things. And they 
 were made to see visions and to 
 dream dreams of prophecy, and to have 
 unusual powers. And in many places the 
 spirits took on sar'gis, and walked about 
 amongst mortals, being seen and felt; and 
 they talked audibly, explaining to mor- 
 tals the dominion of Yima and his Lords. 
 
 In all things that Yima and his hosts 
 did in heaven, his Lords worked in har- 
 mony with him in their labor on the earth. 
 Nevertheless, there were also vagrant spir- 
 its on earth who belonged not to the 
 kingdoms of heaven, but who made mani- 
 festations on their own account; and they 
 were given to lying, and to flattery, and to 
 all manner of evil. Yima, little by little, 
 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTT 
 
 189 
 
 removed these evil spirits, and took them 
 away to his colonies. 
 
 Such, then, were Yima's labors when 
 Fragapatti came to see him, and in honor 
 of the occasion Yima had proclaimed rec- 
 reation in Astoreth, and invited his Lords 
 and captains and others to be present and 
 take part in a season of enjoyment. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXIV. 
 
 On the arrival of the avalanza, the es'- 
 enaurs of Astoreth, and the trumpeters 
 of the colonies, sang a hymn in which the 
 hosts aboard the vessels joined; and when 
 they ceased, Thulae, assistant God of As- 
 toreth, commanded the marshals to re- 
 ceive the hosts, foremost of whom were 
 Yima and his attendants, preceded by his 
 traveling marshals and harpists, the latter 
 being five thousand females led by We'- 
 aytris, Goddess of Foes'ana, in etherea. 
 After these ten thousand marshals of 
 Fragapatti; then followed the swift mes- 
 sengers, ten thousand; then Fragapatti 
 with Yaton'te on the left and Hoab on the 
 right; next in order came the musicians, 
 and then the hosts in general. 
 
 Yima ascended the throne at once, but 
 Fragapatti and his hosts halted within the 
 circuit of the altar. Beyond these were the 
 guards of the lights, and outside of these 
 were the Crescent Members of the Coun- 
 cil. 
 
 Yima said: In the name of Jehovih, I 
 welcome thee, O Fragapatti, Chief of Ob- 
 sod and Goomatchala, to the throne of 
 God! In His wisdom and power I would 
 have thee honor Astoreth by taking posses- 
 sion in Jehovih's Name. 
 
 Without replying, Fragapatti walked to 
 the throne, saluting on the sign of high 
 noon, which Yima answered in the setting 
 sun. Yima stood aside, and when Fraga- 
 patti ascended and stood in front of the 
 throne, and in the center, he said: 
 
 Into Thy possession, O Jehovih, re- 
 ceive Thou this, Thy throne. Scarcely 
 had Fragapatti spoken, when a Voice 
 spake out of the Light saying: 
 
 I made Earth wide, and filled it" with 
 many things; and I gave man a corporeal 
 body as a foundation that he might attain 
 to the mastery of land and water, and as 
 an abiding place for the assistance of his 
 own soul. 
 
 And I created atmospherea wider than 
 Earth, and filled it with all manner of spir- 
 itual things, and with the substance of the 
 plateau; but I gave talents to the spirits of 
 the dead with which to attain the mastery 
 of all things in atmospherea. 
 
 Whoever hath attained to these things 
 is like a traveling sun. My Light is upon 
 him. He prepareth the place, and My 
 Voice cometh out of the Light thereof. 
 Let My Sons and Daughters assemble. 
 Where they are gathered together in My 
 name, there am I also. My hand is upon 
 them. My Power becometh one with 
 them, and My Voice is possible in their 
 midst. The Voice ceased. 
 
 There were many present who had not 
 previously heard the Voice of All Light, 
 and because of the brilliancy they were 
 blinded for a time, but recovered presently. 
 Fragapatti then said: Hoab and Yaton'te, 
 come ye and sit on the throne. And they 
 did so; and in the same time the es'enaurs 
 chanted, Hail to the Great Jehovih's 
 Voice! His Sons and Daughters of Thou- 
 sands of Years, are Returned Once More 
 to Their Native Star, to Proclaim His 
 Boundless Glory! 
 
 Fragapatti said: In Jehovih's name, I 
 proclaim a day of recreation, to resume 
 labor at the sound of the trumpet in the 
 east. And now the hosts mingled together, 
 being buoyant with cheerfulness. And 
 during the recreation, millions of ethereans 
 went out into the plateau, visiting the 
 places of learning, the factories and hospi- 
 tals, and such places as belong to the lower 
 heavens. 
 
 On the next day at the call of the trum- 
 pet, the people resumed their places, and 
 when the music ceased, Fragapatti said: 
 To thee, O Turbe, will I speak in the name 
 of Jehovih. Thou art chosen by the Fa- 
 ther to be assistant to Yima, Jehovih's 
 Son, during this dawn, which is near its 
 end, and after that thou shalt be Lord of 
 these heavens and of the earth beneath for 
 two hundred years. Because thou art wise 
 and good Jehovih hath raised thee up, 
 and great is thy glory. That thou mayest 
 have strength and power, thou shalt in thy 
 reign be called Yima also; for the time 
 hath now come on Earth when mortals 
 must learn to know the Lords and Gods 
 who rule over them. 
 
190 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 During the next two hundred years will 
 Earth be traveling in my Orian fields, Goo- 
 matchala, and thou shalt be one with me in 
 thy dominions. I will send to thee whatso- 
 ever thou shalt require at my hand. Thou 
 shalt therefore, keep thy place in order; 
 and if thou needest a'ji, I will send it; if 
 thou needest dan, I will send it. 
 
 Be less concerned about the spirits in 
 thy heavens than about mortals. Mortals 
 must have sufficient dan, that they become 
 not as beasts. And thou shalt make a re- 
 port every eleven years, and my messen- 
 gers shalt deliver it to me. And I will 
 bring the elements of Goomatchala to bear 
 upon thy labor profitably to the Father. 
 
 Be thou also careful of too much leni- 
 ency towards the spirits in the first resur- 
 rection. Do not allow them to abide with 
 mortals as teachers. Remember thou 
 that mortals so love their dead kindred, 
 that they would even deprive them of hea- 
 venly education rather than deny them- 
 selves of the pleasure of having them with 
 them. Remember, also, that the spirits of 
 the recent dead, who are entered as es'- 
 yans so love their mortal kindred, that they 
 would seek no higher heaven than to lin- 
 ger on the earth. Which habit groweth 
 upon them, so that in two or three gener- 
 ations they become drujas, worthless to 
 themselves, knowing little of earth and less 
 of heaven. Be thou firm, therefore, in 
 holding dominion over the es'yans, permit- 
 ting them only to return to mortals under 
 guard; and especially preventing them 
 teaching other than the Ormazdian relig- 
 ion. Then thou shalt be circumspect in 
 Astoreth; remembering that it is the part 
 of a God to provide his kingdom for the 
 development of all the talents Jehovih hath 
 created withal. For thou shalt so commin- 
 gle labor and recreation, rest and learning, 
 that each shall be of equal attraction. 
 
 And whether thy commandments be for 
 angels or for mortals, thou shalt, first and 
 last, inspire them to faith in the Creator, 
 and to follow the little star of light He hath 
 given to every soul. Fragapatti ceased. 
 
 Jehovih said: I have drawn My cres- 
 cent and My altar. Whoever would hear 
 My Voice, and hear My commandments, 
 let them hearken to the forms and ceremo- 
 nies that shape the soul of things. I am 
 Order; I am Statliness without severity; I 
 
 am Love without passion; I am Wisdom 
 by suggestion, and without dictation; I am 
 the most silent, but most powerful! I am 
 the least seen, but always present when 
 asked for. 
 
 And now, since the people knew Frag- 
 apatti was about to depart, the proper offi- 
 cers arranged them so that all could pass 
 in front of the throne to receive his bless- 
 ing. The es'enaurs sang, and the proces- 
 sion began. The lights of the Council were 
 lowered and Fragapatti lowering his lights, 
 came down and stood at the foot of the 
 throne, covered with light drapery, which 
 fell down to his feet. His hands he held 
 upward, and waving them gently, he cre- 
 ated drapery, prefume, and wreaths of 
 flowers, and presented something to every 
 person who passed, of whom there were 
 more than a thousand million. And when 
 the entire company had passed, Fragapatti 
 sat down at the foot of the throne. Then 
 came down Yima and took his hand, say- 
 ing: Son of Jehovih, arise and go thy 
 way, and Jehovih be with thee. So Fraga- 
 patti rose up and departed, and Hoab, Ya- 
 ton'te, Yima and Thulae with him; Yima 
 leaving Hi'etra, Goddess of Me'loo, on the 
 throne of Astoreth. So they entered the 
 avalanza, and, with music and rejoicing, 
 departed on their journey. And Yima con- 
 ducted them throughout his dominions, 
 both in heaven and on earth. Fragapatti 
 dwelt for many days with Yima and Thu- 
 lae; and after he had inspected their la- 
 bors, and his recorders completed their re- 
 cord, which was to be taken afterward to 
 etherea, and deposited in the libraries of 
 Fragapatti's dominions, Yima made his 
 adieu and discharged his piedmazr, and de- 
 parted for Astoreth, where he arrived in 
 due season. But Fragapatti proceeded to 
 the dominion of Ah'oan, Lord God of Jaf- 
 feth and her heavens. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXV. 
 
 The Voice of the Creator was with Ah'- 
 oan from the time of his landing in these 
 lower heavens, and Ah'oan chose a Coun- 
 cil of ten thousand from his hosts, and they 
 sat in a Council for light; and the Voice 
 directed them to build a capital and a 
 throne, and call the plateau thereof Sang'- 
 hi, which he did. And when it was com- 
 pleted. Jehovih said to Ah'oan: Thou are 
 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 191 
 
 My Lord and My God; the labor of thy 
 hand shall endure on the earth and in hea- 
 ven. I will dwell in whatsoever thou 
 buildest. Make thyself an otevan, and go 
 about and inspect all things in thy domin- 
 ions, making a record of the same, which 
 shall be deposited in the libraries of hea- 
 ven, that angels and mortals may read 
 them in after ages. Ah'oan, preparing, 
 therefore, a place of record where the fol- 
 lowing reports were deposited, built an 
 otevan and traveled as commanded: 
 
 These heavens are without order or or- 
 ganization, save one kingdom, ruled over 
 by Oibe, who falsely styleth himself Thor, 
 the Only Begotten Son of Jehovih. The 
 spirits of these heavens are mostly of the 
 first resurrection; nevertheless, there are 
 millions of them who believe they are not 
 dead; and for the greater part, these are 
 in chaos, still lingering on battlefields. In 
 many places there are spirits who set up 
 colonies, trying to provide themselves with 
 homes and clothing, and to found heaven- 
 ly abodes; but they are forever overrun 
 and pillaged by drujas. 
 
 With the mortals of Jaffeth, there are 
 more than two thousand million angels, 
 who know not how to get away from the 
 earth. Of these, millions are fetals, making 
 themselves as twin spirits to mortals. These 
 spirits oft show themselves to mortals, and 
 are believed to be doubles; but the spirits 
 thus bound know not who they are, or 
 whence they came; neither can they go 
 away from the mortals to whom they are 
 bound, and upon whom they live. As for 
 the mortals of Jaffeth, they have cities of 
 warriors, large and fierce. This region of 
 Earth hath been in a'ji thirteen hundred 
 years. 
 
 Now when Ah'oan had thus discovered 
 the condition of things, he returned to 
 Sang'hi, and sat in Council, and Jehovih 
 said to Ah'oan: Thou shalt appoint forty 
 Lords to dwell on the earth; and to each 
 Lord thou shalt give ten thousand assist- 
 ants. And these Lords shall go down to 
 the earth, and drive away the drujas, and 
 take possession of the palaces of kings and 
 queens, and of the temples of the stars; 
 and then obtain control over the captains 
 and generals of armies and blind their 
 judgment and lead them astray, so that 
 they will be powerless in war and destruc- 
 
 tion. And when Samati, God of Zarathus- 
 tra, travels in Jaffeth, thy Lords shall go 
 with him with a sufficient number of an- 
 gels to accomplish successfully all that 
 Zarathustra professeth in My name. And 
 thy Lords shall shield Zarathustra that no 
 harm may come to him, and when enemies 
 pursue him, thy Lords shall lead them as- 
 tray or detain them and thus enable Zara- 
 thustra to escape. For in this dawn My 
 word shall be established on the earth to 
 perish no more forever. And when thou 
 hast thus established Thy Lords, giving 
 them seventy colonies, thou shalt choose 
 one from amongst the atmosphereans to be 
 thy assistant God, who shall sit on the 
 throne of Sang'hi during thy absence. And 
 thou, and thy Holy Council, shall instruct 
 thy assistant God in such manner that, 
 when this dawn is ended, he shall become 
 God in thy place, in My name, for the suc- 
 ceeding two hundred years. Ah'oan ap- 
 pointed the forty Lords, also an assistant 
 as commanded, and these were the names 
 of the Lords appointed: 
 
 First, to have control over the worship 
 of Jehovih on earth: The, Seung-bin, Go- 
 magit, Ben-hong, She-ang, Bog-wi, Ah- 
 tdong, Mwing-wi, Ah-tchook, Gonk-boy, 
 Yuk-hoh, and Ah-wotch. 
 
 Second, to have control over the palaces 
 of kings and queens; and temples: Mina, 
 Ah-chaung, Ahyot, Yowgong, Ohonto, 
 Yongwe, and Ahma. 
 
 Third, to have control over armies and 
 kingdoms: Kear-ak-a, Geeouh-young, Bi, 
 Gwan-gouk, Gee-ooh-young, Sam-sin, and 
 Deth. 
 
 Fourth, to have control over seafarers: 
 Shopgee, Agan-ha, Rax and Lo. 
 
 Fifth, to have control over mothers and 
 births: Songheng, Someconc, Yahiti, Og- 
 ne-kawas, and Hoah'ava. 
 
 Sixth, to have control over marriages: 
 First, the loo'is in general, and then: Ah- 
 sam, Oanis, Yotsam, Iivitgom and Sap- 
 sang. 
 
 So Ah'oan sent his Lords with their 
 assistants to their several places. And im- 
 mediately afterwards he began the coloniza- 
 tion of the angels in his heavens. And in 
 one year he had raised up from Jaffeth 
 more than a thousand million, and prepar- 
 ed them with houses, hospitals, nurseries 
 and factories, and all such things and 
 
192 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 places as are required in hada. In the sec- 
 ond year he delivered another thousand 
 million, more than half of whom had to be 
 taken away from the earth by force. And 
 these he also provided with teachers and 
 overseers in like manner. So by the time 
 Samati, God of Zarathustra, was prepared 
 to travel in Jaffeth, visiting the kings and 
 queens, the Lords of Ah'oan had so far 
 banished the drujas that they were power- 
 less to prevent the decrees of Jehovih. 
 And when Zarathustra went into Jaffeth, 
 the Lords of heaven were with him, and 
 God of the worship of Jehovih, was with 
 him, and the kings and queens of earth 
 were powerless before him. And when 
 Zarathustra went to a city, and, being in- 
 spired by God, and said: Fall down ye 
 walls! the angels of heaven rent the walls 
 and they fell. And when Zarathustra said: 
 Come forth, ye spirits of the dead, the 
 Lords seized the drujas and held them up 
 so that mortals could see them. And when 
 Zarathustra said: O Ormazd, give thy 
 children food! the angels, having previous- 
 ly provided fish and fruit, let it fall upon the 
 people. And thus did Ah'oan's domin- 
 ions extend down to mortals ; thus became 
 the word of Zarathustra Jehovih's word to 
 mortals. 
 
 And now Fragapatti, Chief over all, 
 was coming to inspect the labors of the 
 Lord God Ah'oan, and of Samati. Ah'oan 
 had sent commands to his Lords, and to 
 their assistants, to return to Sang'hi, and 
 remain three days in recreation. And Ah'- 
 oan commanded the captains of the colo- 
 nies of heaven to come, and to bring with 
 them as many of their pupils and subjects 
 as possible. And when Fragapatti's avalan- 
 za came to Sang'hi, there were assembled 
 upward of two thousand million souls to 
 witness the pageantry which Ah'oan had 
 provided. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXVI. 
 
 Never in these heavens had there been 
 such pageantry, and display as when Frag- 
 apatti's avalanza entered Sang'hi; never so 
 many musicians distributed to lend effect 
 to a procession. Of this matter, Ah'oan 
 said: By the pageantry and the music 
 were my hosts of delivered durjas made to 
 realize the glory of the upper heavens; by 
 
 the glory of those three days recreation 
 did I shut out the attractions of the lower 
 world. My people were entranced with de- 
 light; they were as if born into the king- 
 dom of heaven. But the greatest glory' 
 of all. was when Fragapatti honored the 
 throne of Sang'hi. Jehovih sent a light 
 like a sun upon the place; and the Voice 
 spake from the light, so that all the multi- 
 tude saw the Light and heard the words 
 of Jehovih. And when Fragapatti rose up 
 and stood in the midst of the throne, the 
 light was so brilliant that millions of the 
 people fell down before its glory. But the 
 lights were then lowered to suit the newly- 
 born in heaven, and the people of etherea 
 mingled with the atmosphereans explain- 
 ing and inspiring them with the magnitude 
 and glory of the higher heavens. After the 
 recreation, and when the multitude were in 
 order Fragapatti spake from Jehovih's 
 throne, first, to Es'pacia, assistant Goddess 
 to Ah'oan, who was to succeed him after 
 dawn. To her he said: Es'pacia, Daugh- 
 ter of Jehovih, hear thou my words: I am 
 one with Jehovih, and in His name salute 
 thee. Behold, from this time forth, Jeho- 
 vih's word shall dwell with mortals. It 
 shall become anchored to the earth, never 
 to depart; though it may be mutilated and 
 perverted, yet His hand is over it, and it 
 shall not fail. As a mother delighteth in 
 the first spoken words of her child, so 
 shall we all take delight that Jehovih's 
 word hath become engrafted on the earth. 
 Before this time, the word was with the 
 I'hin tribe, but be locked up in secret. 
 It could not be maintained on earth, 
 except by locking it up in secret, with 
 a people prepared as seed for deliv- 
 ering all the races of men. But 
 now the word is delivered openly to mor- 
 tals. If the spirits of the lower heavens 
 know not Jehovih's word, they can be 
 hereafter taken down to the earth and 
 there taught His commandments. Prior 
 to this time, the angels of these lower 
 heavens had no anchorage of light; they 
 constantly fell in darkness and pulled mor- 
 tals down with them. Behold, the word 
 of Light is now engraved through Jeho- 
 vih's Sons, Samati and Zarathustra; it can- 
 not be lost. Thou hast been chosen first 
 Goddess of these heavens, and Lordess of 
 this division of Earth, to maintain the light 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 193 
 
 of this dawn, to angels and mortals. To 
 all the priests and cities of Zarathustra, 
 thou shalt appoint the wisest of thy angel 
 hosts, to protect them. But to such mor- 
 tals as seek to destroy the Zarathustrians, 
 thou shalt lend no assistance but leave 
 them without protection; and maintain thy 
 hosts in the temples of worship whilst they 
 worship the Great Spirit. Throughout 
 Jaffeth thou shalt inspire mortals to hang 
 the wheel of the altar in country places, 
 by the roadsides. And when mortals pass 
 the places, they shall turn the wheel in re- 
 membrance of the Creator. And thou shalt 
 station at each one of these altars, angel 
 sentinels, who shall have messengers to thy 
 throne. And when a mortal passeth a 
 wheel and turneth it, and is afflicted with 
 sickness, thou shalt send angels to heal 
 him. But if he turn not the wheel in re- 
 membrance of Jehovih, and yet be afflicted 
 with sickness, thy sentinels shall not send 
 to thee, nor shalt thou send angels to heal 
 him. Nevertheless, the wheel and the altar 
 shall cause men to think; and if, after a 
 disbeliever hath passed the wheel without 
 turning it, and he be afflicted with sick- 
 ness, and he repenteth, and when returning 
 turneth the wheel, then shalt thou send to 
 him in haste and heal him, that he may 
 proclaim abroad what the Creator hath 
 done for him. 
 
 For as much as thou carriest out these 
 decrees of All Light, so shalt thou remain 
 united with my heavens above, which are 
 united with those still above. And wherein 
 thou shalt lack in power or wisdom, ask 
 thou Jehovih, and I will answer thee in 
 His name. 
 
 Fragapatti then spoke to the Council, 
 and afterwards walked down to the foot of 
 the throne, where the marshals had pro- 
 vided a place for the people to pass before 
 him, even as they had done in Astoreth. 
 Accordingly when the musicians began 
 singing and playing, the people marched 
 before him, and by the waving of his hands 
 he created drapery, flowers and wreaths, 
 and gave to all the people something, al- 
 though there passed before him two thou- 
 said million angels. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXVII. 
 
 So Fragapatti departed, and sailed for 
 Hi-rom, the heavenly kingdom of E'chad, 
 
 Lord God of Arabin'ya and its heavens. 
 E'chad had also the Voice of Jehovih with 
 him. After his appointment to this divi- 
 sion of earth and heaven, Jehovih com- 
 manded him, even as He had Ah'oan, to 
 make an otevan and visit all the paces, 
 and make a record, before he established 
 his kingdom. And these things E'chad 
 did, taking thirty thousand companions 
 with him, who were surveyors, inspectors, 
 recorders and enumerators, and of such or- 
 der as are required in preliminary examin- 
 ations of the earth and lower heavens. Be- 
 sides these, he had also his hosts of musi- 
 cians, his heralds and messengers. He 
 spent forty days in this labor, and then the 
 record was completed, of which E'chad 
 had two copies made, one for his own 
 kingdom in etherea and one for the hea- 
 ven he was about to found. In these rec- 
 ords, the numerators estimated one thou- 
 sand million eight hundred thousand spir- 
 its, wandering about, mostly on the earth, 
 many of them falling into forgetfulness 
 and dissolution. Many of them had forgot- 
 ten who they were, and had no remem- 
 brance of once having lived mortal lives. 
 Millions and millions of them had forgot- 
 ten their speech, and were dumb. Millions 
 of them lived with mortals as fetals and 
 familiars, depending upon the spiritual 
 part of the food mortals ate and drank for 
 their own existence. And yet other mil- 
 lions of them pursued evil for evil's sake, 
 inspiring mortals to war for the delight of 
 seeing them destroy one another, and of 
 persuading mortals to suicide, and to all 
 manner of wickedness. 
 
 In the region of Gavies there were four 
 hells, in which there were sixty million 
 souls in torments, tormenting one anothei 
 with perpetual horrors, especially males 
 and females doing what is even unlawful 
 to mention. And these tormentors would 
 bring in es'yans, fresh from the earth life, 
 and cast them into their hells for these 
 wicked purposes. For even as mortals de- 
 light in vengeance, so can the talent grow 
 until its feast lieth in the fruit of hell; nei- 
 ther desire such spirits to have even their 
 own torments lessened; nor could they of 
 themselves escape were they to try. 
 
 E'chad would fain have rushed in and 
 delivered these hells, but Jehovih said unto 
 him: Go thou first and establish Hi-rom, 
 
194 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 with suitable habitations, and then return 
 and deliver these hells, and thou shalt have 
 places for them. So E'chad established Hi- 
 rom, and appointed the Holy Council of 
 one hundred thousand men and women. 
 Sa-ac he made chief marshal; and he ap- 
 pointed Geth'ya his assistant God. Jeho- 
 vih said to him: Sixty Lords shalt thou 
 appoint to thy division of Earth; and they 
 shall dwell in the principal cities of Arabin'- 
 ya, and have dominion over mortals. And 
 each and every Lord shall have ten thou- 
 sand ashars to do their commands. 
 
 The following are the names of the 
 Lords appointed by the Lord God for 
 Arabin'ya: First, to have dominion over 
 the worship of Jehovih on earth : Tsdasag, 
 Bachar'Raab, Nathan, Neshu, Dath, She- 
 phat, Gaon-ay, Cha'ya and Zeker. 
 
 Second, the loo'is, special masters of 
 generations: Achuzeh, Chata, Galah, Day'- 
 yan, Aphsi, Ishah, Basar and Goi. 
 
 Third, for destroying evil cities; and for 
 protecting good ones, and for building 
 new ones: Atsil, Sherngoth, Matshebah, 
 Achime, Amos, Ahio, Yat-gaab, Zer, How- 
 dawitch, Beodi, Machal, Yay'-baoth, Am- 
 man, Fakir, Cephets, Bachre and Hiv-iv. 
 
 Fourth, to abide on earth with rab'- 
 bahs, and shield them in danger: Macha- 
 veh, Emul, Ashshaph, Alcmosum, Lai- 
 awotch, Trivi-yab, Herivir, Beli-gib, Bar- 
 at'ay, Shav'ya, Tir and Bowd-wahtal. 
 
 Fifth, to inspire to inventions: Kartum- 
 mim, Moses, Beged, Chakasat, Mih-gad, 
 Jagri, Hen-di, Sru, Amothes and Benguda. 
 
 Sixth, to have control over altars and 
 temples: Atman, Kril and Anach. 
 
 In addition to these the Lord God ap- 
 pointed censors of Hi-rom and her colonies 
 in heaven; and the ashars appointed over 
 mortals as guardians were directed to 
 which colony to take their es'yans, where 
 were stationed the asaphs, the receivers. 
 
 As soon as E'chad had these matters 
 completed, he descended into the four 
 hells with his otevan, taking three million 
 angels to help him deliver them. And when 
 he arrived at the place, the power and 
 light of Jehovih was upon him. And he 
 and his hosts of angels surrounded the 
 four hells. 
 
 Fire of Thy Fire, O Jehovih! he cried. 
 Give me here walls of fire to inclose these 
 suffering hells! And there fell from the 
 
 firmament above sheets of fire, walling the 
 places around in such brilliant and suffo- 
 cating flames that not one of the inhabit- 
 ants could escape. And E'chad and his 
 hosts attacked them right and left, raising 
 pillars and walls of fire blinding to the dru- 
 jas. Thus they marched through and 
 through the four hells until the inhabitants 
 were fallen prostrate before them, crying 
 out. And of all the naked men and women, 
 only the recent victims were ashamed. 
 
 E'chad commanded: Now deliver those 
 who are ashamed, making a place beyond 
 the walls of fire; wall ye the place around 
 and then clothe and feed them. 
 
 So E'chad's hosts delivered those who 
 were ashamed. Again E'chad called out: 
 Begin now in sections and deliver the oth- 
 ers into prisons, surrounded by fire, suffo- 
 cating, so they cannot escape. And let not 
 the light cease to fall upon them that will 
 not be clothed. Better is it that they lay 
 prostrate than to display themselves na- 
 kedly. But as soon as they will accept and 
 wear clothes, and cease cursing, deliver 
 ye them into genial lights. 
 
 For six days and nights E'chad labored 
 in delivering the four hells." And there 
 were amongst these drujas three and a half 
 million in chaos, spirits who had lost their 
 minds by the torments that other spirits 
 had bestowed upon them. These E'chad 
 had placed in his otevan, and sent to Hi- 
 rom, to be treated by the physicians. But 
 E'chad and many of his hosts remained 
 with the groups of the delivered, further 
 preparing them for resurrection. And now 
 E'chad had them inspected, and he fur- 
 ther searched the records of the earth to 
 establish the origin of these hells, and as 
 to who they were; and this is the substance 
 of their history: 
 
 In the lower country of Arabin'ya, there 
 had been a tribe of I'huans of hundreds of 
 years, who had attained to thirty cities, 
 chief of which was Os'nu, which was the 
 capital over all the rest. Os'nu was ruled 
 over by Che-muts, a king of great wisdom 
 and power in his youth; but after subju- 
 gating all the large cities of Arabin'ya, he 
 became a tyrant and a man of wickedness. 
 Being learned in the earth, moon, and 
 stars, he drew to his palace other men, and 
 not a few women, of great learning, and to- 
 gether they resolved upon obtaining from 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 195 
 
 the Thins, the sacred people, the secrets of 
 their miracles and religion. Up to this 
 time, all the people in the world respected 
 the Thins, neither denied them in anything. 
 Che-muts, the tyrant, said: Because 
 from our youth we have been taught to 
 revere the I'hins, we have become super- 
 stitious regarding them. Now it is evi- 
 dent that they have some other means of 
 prophecy that consulting the stars. It is 
 my command, therefore, that the different 
 cities of I'hins be seized, and the people 
 put to death, offering succor only to such 
 as reveal their secrets. With their gifts 
 of miracles and power of prophecy, I can 
 march successfully against Par'si'e, Jaffeth 
 and Shem, and I shall become king of all 
 the world. And ye that help me in this 
 matter, instead of merely having cities 
 to rule over, as ye now have, shall have 
 kingdoms with many cities. 
 
 The learned men acceded to this, and 
 shortly after the king's people fell upon the 
 I'hins, pulled down their flimsy walls, put- 
 ting them to flight, or slaying them out- 
 right, offering no salvation save they would 
 reveal their secrets, and give themselves 
 up to marriage with the I'huans. Hab- 
 bak, a chief rab'bah of the I'hins, went to 
 see the king and expostulate. He said 
 unto Che-muts: Behold, my people are 
 older than this county. Our wisdom Com- 
 eth not as other men's, but through mar- 
 riage. How canst thou obtain the secrets 
 of the womb? Besides this, we are sworn 
 before our birth, by our fathers and moth- 
 ers to secrecy in our religion. Thou de- 
 sirest us to intermarry with thy people. I 
 foresee thy aims. Thou hopest for the gift 
 of prophecy, which if given to evil men 
 would give them all power. But know 
 thou, O king, he that desires prophecy for 
 such purpose can never obtain it. Prophecy 
 cometh by the other road. If my people 
 intermarry with thine, it is simply the loss 
 of mine. If thou hadst our passwords and 
 our signs, they would avail thee nothing, 
 being born as thou art. According to our 
 number, we pay thee thy just tribute. I 
 pray thee, then, to change thy decrees, and 
 allow my people to remain as they have 
 for thousands of years. 
 
 Che-muts, the king, said: Why call ye 
 yourselves I'hins? Hab-bak said: Be- 
 cause we are Faithists in One Great Spirit. 
 
 The king asked: What is the secret name 
 of the Great Spirit? Hab-bak said: I can 
 only repeat that name under certain rules; 
 otherwise, I will lose my power of prophe- 
 cy. Besides, if thou knew the name, it 
 would be useless to utter it. To whomso- 
 ever uttereth His name not in faith, it is 
 void. Whoever uttereth His name for 
 earthly gain or earthly glory, uttereth in 
 vain also. Of what value, then, would the 
 name be to thee, even if I violated mine 
 own oath and revealed it to thee? 
 
 The king mocked him, and had him 
 seized and taken to the lion's den, of 
 which all kings and rich people in those 
 days, had one or more, as a place for cast- 
 ing in their disobedient servants. And 
 when Hab-bak was at the lions' den, the 
 king again offered to save him if he would 
 reveal even the name of the Great Spirit, 
 hoping that by its utterance he could also 
 heal the sick, restore the blind and deaf, 
 and prophesy. Hab-bak said: Thou may- 
 est cast me in, and I be devoured, suffer 
 me beforehand, to prophesy concerning 
 thee and thy kingdom. Yea, I will prophe- 
 sy concerning myself. Hear thon, then, 
 my words: 
 
 Thou hast sought to destroy my peo- 
 ple, who are, compared to thine, only as 
 one little finger to a man's whole arm. In 
 Os'nu, thou hast hundreds of thousands of 
 people, and in other cities tens of thou- 
 sands; so many that one man in his whole 
 lifetime could not number them. Yet, as 
 to my people, what are they? Not more 
 than ten thousand, all told. Hear thou my 
 words, not one thousand of my people 
 canst thou destroy. Neither will my peo- 
 ple raise a hand in self defense. But thou 
 wilt cast me into the lions' den and I will 
 be devoured. , And this little hat without a 
 brim, will come out of the lions' den, and 
 it will be a mighty power for thousands of 
 years. It will be red with my blood shed 
 because I am faithful to the Great Spirit in 
 my oath. And it will be restored to my 
 people, and it shall be called the Scarlet 
 Hat! And in the day that it is carried in 
 the streets of Os'nu, thou wilt be slain by 
 thine own people. 
 
 The king laughed, saying: A prophecy 
 often causeth fools to carry it out. With 
 that, he gave the executioners the sign, and 
 they pushed Hab-bak on the trap, and cast 
 
196 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 him into the den, where there were thirty- 
 lions. And they devoured him. And his 
 hat was colored red with blood; and some 
 of the people who were superstitious in 
 regard to the I'hins, procured the hat and 
 went about repeating the prophecy of Hab- 
 bak, and the multitude were anxious for 
 some pretext to justify themselves in de- 
 stroying the tyrant. So, presently the city 
 was in riot, and the people fell upon the 
 king and slew him, and also the learned 
 men and women who were his counselors 
 and subsidiaries. 
 
 In the libraries of heaven it is recorded 
 as follows: Because of the cruelty of Che- 
 muts, king of Os'nu, on earth; thousands 
 and tens of thousands of people had been 
 put to death; and because they died in an- 
 ger, and because of the injustice, their 
 souls went into torment in hada, and they 
 came and incensed the king to greater 
 wickedness, in order to have him slain. 
 And it came to pass that Che-muts, chief 
 king of Arabin'ya, was slain by his own 
 people, and the king's counselors were 
 slain with him. And when their spirits 
 were delivered from their mortal bodies, 
 the drujas went in and beat them. And 
 when it became known in hada that there 
 was a newly started hell, other spirits 
 brought their victims there and cast them 
 in. And the drujas went around about the 
 earth, in Arabin'ya, finding whomsoever 
 they hated, bringing their spirits into hell, 
 beating them and otherwise punishing 
 them, until these four hells became the 
 habitation of sixty million souls. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXVIII. 
 
 When E'chad had discovered the histo- 
 ry of these hells, he searched and found 
 the king's spirit, and also the counselors, 
 but alas they knew nothing, but were more 
 like one in a troublesome nightmare, from 
 which there is no awakening. 
 
 But E'chad appointed physicians and 
 nurses for them, and it was three days be- 
 fore they began to awaken, but yet at the 
 time of Fragapatti's visit they were not 
 sufficiently restored to know who they 
 were or, if knowing one moment, would 
 forget in the next. Yet it was not many 
 days after the deliverance of the Hells that 
 E'chad had the inhabitants removed to Hi- 
 rom and the colonies thereof. 
 
 E'chad having been informed by her- 
 alds that Fragapatti was coming, sent 
 word to his Lords, generals, captains, and 
 superintendents of schools, factories, and 
 hospitals, to come to Hi-rom and enjoy 
 three days' recreation, bringing as many 
 atmosphereans as they could with them. 
 So when Fragapatti came, and the hosts 
 of E'chad, there was great rejoicing for the 
 space of three days; during which time 
 Fragapatti visited all the places and labors 
 of E'chad, having records made thereof, 
 to take with him to etherea at the end of 
 dawn. Now at the end of the three days' 
 recreation, the trumpet in the east called 
 the Council and hosts to order. Fragapat- 
 ti sat in the midst of the throne, E'chad 
 next him, and then Hoab and Yaton'te, 
 and then Thulae and Es'pacia and Geth'ya, 
 and others of lesser rank. A light imme- 
 diately gathered above the throne, but this 
 time deep scarlet, with white border. 
 Fragapatti said: Thy Voice, O Jehovih, 
 be upon these people. Whereupon, the es'- 
 enaurs chanted a hymn, after which the 
 Voice of Jehovih spake out of the light, 
 saying: 
 
 Whosoever raiseth up My children, do 
 I raise up with Mine own hand. To whom- 
 soever uttereth My words in wisdom and 
 truth, do I speak from My judgment seat. 
 Because ye have come down from your ex- 
 alted kingdoms in the upper heavens, and 
 raised up the drujas of these heavens, so 
 come I from My All Highest Holy Place 
 to raise you up. As ye have prepared to 
 found My word with mortals, so prepare I 
 here in Hi-rom a place of delight. Was I 
 not with the I'hins since the creation of 
 man on Earth? And wherein they have 
 been faithful unto Me have I come in 
 great security. The world rose up against 
 My chosen and sought to destroy them, 
 but they failed. And when they cast My 
 faithful servant into the lions' den, he 
 would not violate his oath, even though he 
 suffered death. And I stretched forth My 
 hand and took his hat, red with blood, out 
 of the lions' den; and I gave power unto 
 the hat. And into the far-off country of 
 Jaffeth will I take the title of King of the 
 Sun, and bestow it upon Ya'seang, and nei- 
 ther Arabin'ya nor Par'si'e shall endure in 
 holiness. Behold, I give you a new sign, 
 in addition to the triangle, and it shall be 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 197 
 
 the sign of Hi-rom from this time forth, 
 signifying faith even unto death. 
 
 The Voice ceased, and Fragapatti turn- 
 ed to the red light, and stretched forth his 
 hand and took thereof, saying: Of Thy 
 scarlet, O Jehovih! Give unto Thy servant 
 a Hi-rom, as an emblem of this heaven. 
 And he fashioned it into a hat without a 
 brim, and laid it on the throne. Presently 
 a swift messenger from without, desired 
 admittance before Fragapatti, and he was 
 permitted to come. He said: 
 
 Greeting to thee, O Fragapatti, Son of 
 Jehovih! And by the love of Eoch, God 
 of Tshi, of Ude, grade six, am I sent before 
 thee in Jehovih's name. Behold, one Hab- 
 bak, is without, who was the wearer of Hi- 
 rom. 
 
 Fragapatti said: Admit him, and bid 
 him approach the throne of God. The 
 swift messenger retired, and presently re- 
 turned, bringing in Hab-bak, faithful unto 
 death. And he went up to the throne, and 
 Fragapatti took the scarlet hat, saying: 
 Second only to Jehovih's crown, with Hi- 
 rom, cover I thy head in the name of the 
 Creator. And he placed it on Hab-bak's 
 head, and the light of it was so great that 
 only ethereans could look upon it. 
 
 Then Hab-bak said: By this, Thy Pow- 
 er, O Jehovih, will I go now and deliver 
 unto everlasting light the soul of him who 
 slew me. And I will restore his council 
 also. For they will remember the scarlet 
 hat, and it will be as an anchorage for 
 their crazed minds to rest upon. So Hab- 
 bak saluted on the sign of the triangle and 
 departed. 
 
 And now was come the time of depart- 
 ure for Fragapatti and his hosts. So he in- 
 structed Geth-ya, and bade him travel with 
 him. Then Fragapatti instructed the Coun- 
 cil, which was after the manner of his in- 
 struction to the preceding Councils. And 
 then he descended to the foot of the throne, 
 and the marshals caused the people to 
 march before him. And Fragapatti creat- 
 ed flowers, drapery and ornaments, and 
 gave to every one something as they 
 passed, though there were more than a 
 hundred million souls. And when they 
 had all passed, and resumed the places as- 
 signed them, Fragapatti sat down at the 
 foot of the throne in ancient custom, and 
 E'chad descended, taking his hand, and he 
 
 said unto him: Arise, O Chief, Thou Son 
 of the Most High, and go thy way. 
 
 Fragapatti rose up and, followed by the 
 Gods and Goddesses officiating, they all 
 went into the avalanza and departed, going 
 to the kingdom of Gir-ak-shi, Lord God 
 over Heleste and her heavens. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXIX. 
 
 When Gir-ak-shi arrived at this division 
 of Earth, the Voice of Jehovih came to 
 him, saying: My Lord, hear thou the 
 Voice of thy Creator. I have no I'hins 
 left in thy division of Earth. The I'huans 
 have degenerated by marrying with the 
 Druks. And thou art come to this, My 
 farm, when it is grown up full of weeds 
 and thistles. Look about thy division, and 
 thou shalt find no loo'is, nor ashars of any 
 avail to righteousness. Consider then, 
 what shall be done, that both mortals and 
 spirits may be made to know Me and My 
 kingdoms. 
 
 Gir-ak-shi found the mortals of Heleste 
 to be barbarians, many of them naked, or 
 clothed with the skins of animals to keep 
 them warm in winter. Some of them bur- 
 rowed in the ground, and some lived in 
 houses made of bark, leaves and grass. 
 And their food was mostly fish and flesh. 
 Their cities were numerous but small, and 
 every city spake a different language. 
 Their weapons of war were clubs,, spears, 
 bows and arrows. They had nekher iron 
 nor copper, and used stone for cutting. 
 
 Gir-ak-shi said: What incentive can I 
 give such people that will raise them up? 
 
 Gir-ak-shi then surveyed his; heavens, 
 but alas, there were no kingdoms, no or- 
 ganizations. As mortals lived and died, so 
 their spirits continued around about in the 
 same places. 
 
 Gir-ak-shi said: What incentive can I 
 give such angels that will raise them up? 
 If I tell the mortals to till the soil and 
 make clothes of flax and wool, my words 
 will be interpreted as folly, or as implying 
 hardships. If I tell the angels there are 
 higher heavens, more beautiful, my words 
 will be disbelieved. If I say that all growth 
 depends upon exercise and labor, they will 
 decline to grow. Have I not seen rich 
 men and women in other countries whom I 
 told that in order to rise they must learn 
 to labor, and they heeded me not? 
 
198 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 Jehovih said to Gir-ak-shi: Thou hast 
 more than a thousand million drujas in thy 
 department. The mountains, valleys and 
 forests are filled with them, roving about. 
 As thou wouldst entrap birds by rich bait, 
 so shalt thou gather together all of these 
 drujas thou canst. But as to mortals thou 
 shalt bring famines into certain places, and 
 thus drive them to observe the Unseen 
 Cause of things. 
 
 Gir-ak-shi called together his hosts, 
 millions and millions. He said unto them: 
 Form ye in sacred circles, hundreds of 
 thousands, and go to the places I will point 
 out, and invoke the higher heavens in 
 Jehovih's name. Cast ye a famine here, 
 and a blight in the animals of the forest. 
 Into the water cast ye umbrae, that the 
 fish may die. Make mortals stop and con- 
 sider. 
 
 Let the angels go then, and find the 
 most prophetic amongst mortals, and 
 make them prophesy concerning the fam- 
 ines and the blight. Make ye their proph- 
 ets objects of worship; then I can rule the 
 inhabitants of the earth through the proph- 
 ets. 
 
 Concerning the angels, Gir-ak-shi said: 
 Five heavenly places will I build for the 
 drujas. One shall be called Monk, one 
 Acha, one Troy, one Be-yome and one 
 Hellen. And I will select five Lords to 
 rule in my heavenly divisions: Ki-liope, 
 Lord of Monk; I'tius, Lord of Acha; Foe- 
 be, Lordess of Troy; Liriyi, Lordess of 
 Be-yome, and Co'ye, Lord of Hellen. And 
 ye shall make them places of feasting and 
 sporting for one whole year; nothing that 
 can be done to make them attractive for 
 drujas shall be left undone. 
 
 Into five divisions, half a million each, 
 shall my hosts be selected and apportioned. 
 Whose mission shall be to go around about 
 throughout Heleste and bring in drujas to 
 my five heavenly places. And I will build 
 a plateau in these mountains, the Aguaadi- 
 ca, with a Council of half a million. Let 
 my Lords stand aside, and I will apportion 
 to each of them their attendants. By the 
 star-lights that fall upon them shall they 
 be known and come forth. 
 
 The Lords stod aside, in different 
 places, whilst Gir-ak-shi selected the three 
 million. After that he proceded according 
 to the Voice of Jehovih, and conducted his 
 
 hosts to the places Jehovih commanded. 
 And after they were all placed, Gir-ak-shi, 
 chose his own Council, and built a plateau 
 and a throne to Jehovih on Mount Aguaa- 
 dica and when he considered the wisdom 
 of the manner Jehovih had directed him to 
 thus law a foundation for so great a work, 
 he soliloquized, saying: O Jehovih, will 
 these drujas ever understand the manner of 
 Thine armies? Will these mortals ever un- 
 derstand the proceedings of Thy Lords 
 and Gods? 
 
 For one year the hosts entertained and 
 fed and clothed the drujas sumptuously, 
 and they won them away from the earth; 
 won them to the kingdoms prepared for 
 them. And then Gir-ak-shi commanded 
 the founding of schools, factories and hos- 
 pitals in heaven; and he appointed ashars 
 and asaphs, and began the resurrection 
 through his Lords. And when the fourth 
 year arrived he had colonized in his hea- 
 ven nearly all the drujas, giving them suffi- 
 cient recreation to restrain them from re- 
 turning to the earth. 
 
 For a long time prior to Fragapatti's 
 coming he had it proclaimed, giving invi- 
 tations to them to be present. This he 
 communicated to Fragapatti through mes- 
 sengers. So, Fragapatti knowing the grade 
 of the place determined to come in gaudy 
 colors, and with sufficient music, very loud, 
 and for the manifestation of power. Gir- 
 ak-shi had his people attire themselves in 
 the greatest gaudy colors; for by such man- 
 ifestation do the unlearned judge of the 
 glory and possibilities of high heaven. So, 
 when Fragapatti's avalanza descended from 
 above it was like a sea of fire, decorated in 
 thousands of ways with banners, flags, cur- 
 tains, and all other ornaments that would 
 serve to convey the idea of greatness to the 
 minds of the es'y an s- And Gir-ak-shi had 
 also decorated his place, kingdom and 
 throne, Aguaadica, in the most extravagant 
 splendor. And he and his Lords, and his 
 captains and generals, and his Holy Coun- 
 cil were arrayed majestically. In addition 
 to these things Gir-ak-shi had provided a 
 feast, which was to succeed the ceremonies; 
 and after the feast there were to be divers 
 entertainments. But of these matters, who 
 knoweth the thought of Jehovih! How 
 hath He not provided to bring the dark 
 soul to understanding! 
 
CYCLE OF FEAGAPATTT 
 
 199 
 
 Gir-ak-shi said: To teach mortal teach- 
 ers how to teach the barbarian, O Jehovih ! 
 To teach cold owe to impart warm mirth, 
 O Jehovih! Shall they build a prison and 
 decorate the convict in fine clothes, and bid 
 him take his ease, beholding the virtuous 
 working for him, O Jehovih! Will they 
 ever learn Thy power of resurrection! 
 
 CHAPTER XL. 
 
 Fragapatti, and his hosts remained thir- 
 ty days with Gir-ak-shi and great was the 
 enjoyment of the people; and then Fraga- 
 patti departed, going to the kingdoms of 
 Uropa, first Goddess of a barbarian division 
 on Earth. The Voice of Jehovih had been 
 with her from the first, but there were but 
 few corporeans in her division, and only six 
 hundred million angels, mostly drujas. 
 Nevertheless, Jehovih said unto Uropa: 
 Thou shalt found here a kingdom in My 
 name and it shall become mighty in heaven 
 and on earth. 
 
 Uropa said: What is the best way, O 
 Jehovih? Jehovih answered, saying: As 
 for the drujas, thy knowledge is sufficient; 
 but as for the corporeans, behold, they 
 have neither copper nor iron. Send to 
 Arabin'ya five hundred of thy hosts of 
 ashars who are well skilled in the art of 
 inspiring mortals; and thou shalt cause 
 fifty men who are skilled in mining and 
 working copper and iron to migrate into 
 thy lands. And thy ashars shall inspire 
 them to find the ore, and to work the same, 
 and they shall use the metal they procure 
 for making tools and implements. 
 
 So Uropa sent angels to Arabin'ya, and 
 they inspired fifty men to go to Urooa, 
 and find iron and copper, and work it. And 
 in four years there had gone out of Arabin'- 
 ya not less than twenty thousand men. And 
 the ashars inspired them to marry with the 
 Druks and half-breed I'huans, and in this 
 way a new people was born into Uropa's 
 division. 
 
 In Zeigl, Uropa built her heavenly 
 kingdom and founded the City of Oitch. 
 In her holy Council were five hundred 
 thousand angels; and she had also fifty 
 thousand captains, and two million ashars 
 consisting of both ethereans and atmos- 
 phereans. Her heavenly kingdom was 
 built in the same manner as Gir-ak-shi's. 
 And in four years she had rescued nearly 
 
 all the drujas in these regions of atmos- 
 pherea. So when Fragapatti came to see 
 her, she provided entertainments after the 
 same manner as did Gir-ak-shi, having all 
 her hosts present. 
 
 After this Fragapatti visited Kow-anea 
 and his heavenly kingdoms, and also his 
 earth divisions. Next Fragapatti visited 
 M'wing'mi and his heavenly kingdoms 
 and earth divisions. Next he visited Ots'- 
 hata, and his places, and then Soofwa. 
 With all these Lords and Gods Fragapatti 
 spent many days, examining and recording 
 all the labor done; and he spake before 
 them all, so that his voice was heard by 
 nearly all the people of the lower heavens. 
 And so great was the work accomplished 
 by Fragapatti with any one of these Lords 
 or Gods, that were a complete history 
 written thereof it would require the whole 
 of a mortal man's lifetime to read it. Nor 
 is possible with earth language to describe 
 the beauty and glory of any one of these 
 recreations in his travels. 
 
 CHAPTER XLI. 
 
 The close of dawn was near at hand. 
 Fragapatti returned to Mouru, the heaven- 
 ly kingdom of Haraiti, in atmospherea, 
 richly stored with knowledge of Earth and 
 her heavens. The capital was illuminated, 
 and the decorum of the higher heavens pre- 
 vailed. Already there were assembled 
 more than four million angels prepared for 
 the third resurrection. Fragapatti notified 
 his Lord Gods, and his Lords and Samati 
 of the day and hour when he should ac- 
 complish the resurrection. And then Frag- 
 apatti called his swift etherean messengers 
 and spake to them thus: The dawn of dan 
 is near the close. The Brides and Bride- 
 grooms of Jehovih will number ten thou- 
 sand million souls. Two divisions will I 
 make of grades fifty-five and seventy, for 
 the forests and plains of Goomatchala. 
 This ye shall communicate to Hoseis, God- 
 dess of Alawatcha on the road of Affolkis- 
 tan, saluting in Jehovih's name, and of 
 His Son, Fragapatti, Chief. 
 
 The swift messengers saluted, and then 
 departed. Next he called the messengers 
 for the kingdoms below, and of these mes- 
 sengers there were twenty thousand, di- 
 vided into twelve groups, who had been 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 previously apportioned to certain divisions 
 of heaven and earth. 
 
 To them Fragapatti said: Inform the 
 Lord God of each division, and the Lords 
 and officers under them to anoint their 
 successors; put their kingdoms in order 
 and appear at the throne of Mouru; to pro- 
 vide such ships and such vessels as are 
 suitable, and bring as visitors from their 
 kingdoms and most holy places, as many 
 atmosphereans as desire to come, that they 
 may witness the ceremonies and the ascent 
 of Jehovih's Sons and Daughters, for the 
 resurrection of my hosts is at hand. 
 
 And these commandments were carried 
 unto all the divisions of the corporeal 
 Earth and her heavens. Fragapatti then 
 said unto Athrava: Thou shalt receive the 
 Brides and Bridegrooms. As for myself, I 
 will go down to the earth and receive God 
 and Zarathustra, and they shall be borne 
 in my ship to this place, and thence to 
 etherea. 
 
 In all places on earth and in heaven, the 
 spirit inhabitants were stirred to the ut- 
 most. In Haraiti, there were already more 
 than four thousand colonies, and every one 
 had thousands and thousands eligible to 
 the third resurrection, who would depart in 
 the coming ascension. Of these there were 
 persons of every occupation, and they were 
 perfect in their order, belonging to groups 
 and series of grouos. And now the cap- 
 tains and generals were re-organizing them 
 into phalanxes; and the Gods again organ- 
 izing the phalanxes into kingdoms. Zered- 
 ho sent four hundred million souls to Har- 
 aiti. The Lord Gods were arranging their 
 groups in their several divisions, to be fur- 
 ther organized after arriving at Mouru, 
 from whence the ascension would take 
 place. Some of these had a thousand mill- 
 ion of their own resurrection, including 
 those whom they had previously sent to 
 Haraiti. 
 
 Fragapatti sent special messengers to 
 God, Samati, to learn the day appointed for 
 Zarathustra's death; and he further alloted 
 to Zarathustra three days in hada, in which 
 to preach to mortals by the inspiration of 
 God, and appointed the fourth day as the 
 time of his ascension from the earth. 
 
 And when all these matters had been ar- 
 ranged, Fragapatti ordered the assembling 
 in sacred circle of the Holy Council, Sons 
 
 and Daughters of the Most High. The 
 lights were raised, and only Gods and God- 
 desses could remain near the throne of Je- 
 hovih. Fragapatti commanded Hoab to 
 stand in the midst of the circle, facing the 
 judgment seat. 
 
 Hear the words of thy Creator, O 
 Hoab. With Mine own spirit quickened I 
 thee into life. From thy youth up I have 
 followed thee day by day, with a woman's 
 tenderness. When thou didst try to run 
 away from Me/ I followed after. I called 
 My Son, high raised in My everlasting 
 kingdoms, and I said unto him: O My 
 Son, run thou quickly, for Hoab, My well 
 beloved, is turning away from Me. Go 
 thou and recover him; for he is My chosen. 
 He shall be My God of the red star; her 
 heavens shall bow down before him. I 
 will raise him up and appoint him with My 
 holy fire; his countenance shall shine like 
 a sun. And Fragapatti, My Son, overtook 
 thee in thy flight; with great cunning he 
 captured thee unto My labors. And thou 
 hast raised up thy voice and glorified Me; 
 thine arms have been bared to the harvest; 
 thy fruit is a song of glory. 
 
 Have I not given thee experience in all 
 things? I made thee to walk to the preci- 
 pice of hell and fall not. The darkness of 
 everlasting death I made to encompass 
 thee; in the hour of thy despair I came and 
 raised thee up. Have I not great profit in 
 thee, My Son? My countless millions cry 
 out in all places; they behold Me not; they 
 know not of Me and My heavenly places. 
 Like a troubled sea that knoweth no rest, 
 the voices of mortals and angels cry out 
 forever: There is no light! Wherefore, 
 then, was I not wise in thee, O Hoab? 
 I made thee of strong limb, and with arms 
 reaching far; thy judgment I fashioned for 
 the great multitudes. 
 
 I say to the young bird with feathers: 
 Fly! And it goeth away. I say to man: 
 Go forth in My name! But he looks 
 around. Again I say to him: Go forth! 
 But he turneth to his neighbor for his opin- 
 ion. Again I speak, calling: Come to me! 
 But he standeth wondering. Again I say: 
 Come! But he answers: By and by. 
 Again I say: Come! He replies: I have 
 not all light! And yet I call, and he saith: 
 Alas, there is nothing! And he goeth 
 down in darkness. He curses Me and ac- 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATT1 
 
 201 
 
 cuseth Me of errors! He preacheth My 
 shortness, and by his words cutteth him- 
 self off from Me. In the foul smelling 
 place of darkness, My holy angels cannot 
 come. But I have provided a savior for 
 those who are in darkness; and My shield 
 is upon them. 
 
 Thou shalt wear the triangle of the red 
 star. Two hundred years thou shalt hold 
 dominion over Earth and her heavens. In 
 My name speak, O Hoab! 
 
 Then spake Hoab, saying: Thy Voice 
 is upon Me, O Father! My limbs are 
 weak; my hands tremble like an old man 
 that is palsied. Behold I have sought in 
 vain to find anything perfect in me. I am 
 as a trumpet that is bruised and split. 
 There is no harmony or power within Me. 
 Thou first gavest me a wife and sons and 
 daughters to rule over and to raise up for 
 Thy glory, but I failed utterly. My wife 
 saw not with my ears, nor heard with my 
 ears, nor judged with my judgment. We 
 were like two instruments broken and out 
 of tune. As for my sons, they went astray, 
 like sheep without a herdsman; my advice 
 was as weak to them as the shadow of a 
 tree. And my daughters went away from 
 my love, and chose young men in prefer- 
 ence. Then I cried out unto thee, saying: 
 O Jehovih, why gavest Thou me a king- 
 dom? Behold, it is scattered and gone! 
 Then I went down into the grave in sor- 
 row. But Thy hand raised up my soul in 
 heaven; and thou gavest me another king- 
 dom. But my people would not see through 
 my eyes, and my ears and my judgment 
 were not wrong. And I turned about like 
 one who is lost in a forest, and shutteth 
 his eyes as to the direction of the sun, go- 
 ing by the sound of a multitude of tongues. 
 And my kingdom drew a boundary around 
 itself, and shut out all light. And Thy Son 
 came and delivered me and my people. 
 
 Behold, I was as weak as a child. In 
 my weakness Thy light came upon me. 
 Never more shall I desire others to see 
 through my eyes, or hear through my 
 ears, or judge by my judgment. Thou hast 
 healed me of my infirmity, O Jehovih. 
 Only by one Eye can things be seen; by 
 one Ear can things be heard; by one Judg- 
 ment can things be judged. 
 
 O Jehovih, thou hast said: Go forth in 
 My name! I will go. Thou hast said: 
 
 Thou shalt have dominion over Earth and 
 her heavens! This will I accomplish also, 
 by Thy Light and Power, O Jehovih! 
 
 Then spake Jehovih through Fragapatti, 
 saying: Accept Earth, O Hoab, My Son! 
 My God! It is thine to keep and to rule 
 over! Accept atmospherea, O Hoab, My 
 Son, My God! It is thine to keep and rule 
 over. 
 
 Hoab said: I will be Thy Son, O Je- 
 hovih! I will be Thy God, O Jehovih! 
 From Thee I accept Earth to keep and to 
 rule over! From Thee I accept Earth's 
 heavens, to keep and to rule over! 
 
 Again Jehovih spake through Fragapat- 
 ti saying: What thou doest henceforth do 
 thou in My name, for it is of Me. 
 
 Hoab said: What I do henceforth do I 
 in Thy name, O Jehovih! For I know it 
 is Thee that doeth all glorious things. 
 
 Jehovih spake through Fragapatti, say- 
 ing: W T ith Mine Own hands weave I a 
 crown for thee, My Son, My God of the 
 red star! I place it on thy head for the 
 glory of My kingdoms, which are endless 
 in number and full of holiness! Wear thou 
 My Crown, for it is with Wisdom and Pow- 
 er! 
 
 Then Fragapatti's hands were waved 
 about by the Great Spirit, and a crown was 
 woven and placed on Hoab's head, and it 
 was brilliant and white, and studded with 
 countless gems, millions. 
 
 Hoab said: Crown from Thy hand, O 
 Father! I accept it and wear it, emblem 
 of Thy kingdoms, endless in number and 
 full of holiness. I know Thou wilt ever be 
 with me in Wisdom and Power! I will 
 glorify Thee forever! My kingdoms shall 
 glorify Thee forever! 
 
 The chief marshal now conducted Hoab 
 to the throne of Jehovih, and Hoab sat in 
 the midst of the throne. In the meantime, 
 the es'enaurs chanted a hymn of glory. 
 Hoab then said: Fragapatti, Son of Jeho- 
 vih, Orian Chief, come thou and honor my 
 throne in the name of the Father. Then 
 Fragapatti went to the throne and sat 
 thereon. Next Hoab called up Athrava, 
 then Hapacha, and then other Gods and 
 Goddesses. Then Fragapatti said: 
 
 Behold, the time of the death of Zara- 
 thustra hath come. Abide ye here, and I 
 will go quickly down to the earth and re- 
 
202 
 
 CYCLE OF FBAGAPATTI 
 
 ceive God and Zarathustra, and the hosts 
 of God and his Lords. 
 
 So Fragapatti departed, and sailed swift- 
 ly down to Par'si'e, on the earth, and came 
 to the place of meeting the morning of the 
 fourth day after Zarathustra's death. For 
 three days and nights his spirit had been 
 preaching to the Faithists, explaining the 
 kingdoms of Jehovih. So Fragapatti called 
 unto God, saying: Behold, my Son, thy 
 labor is done. In thee have I great de- 
 light. Behold, my ship lieth by the river; 
 my lights are raised for the everlasting 
 thrones! God (Samati) said: That which 
 Thou didst put upon me I have done! Be- 
 hold, here standeth my son, Zarathustra. 
 
 Zarathustra was then taking leave of his 
 corporeal friends, for his soul was fast be- 
 coming illuminated. He had looked up and 
 beheld the ship of All Light, and he knew 
 now the Voice of the Father. 
 
 So Fragapatti went and took Zarathus- 
 tra in his arms, saying: Come, my beloved. 
 Thy home is yonder! So they went into 
 the ship of fire and ascended to Mouru. 
 
 CHAPTER XLII. 
 
 And now the Lord Gods, and Lords 
 and Gods, began to arrive in Mouru. The 
 marshals, and their officers and workmen, 
 had enlarged the landing places for the 
 hosts of ships; receivers had been appoint- 
 ed and allotted to their various places. 
 Heralds and messengers had been provided 
 with places of announcement; and lines of 
 intercommunion had been laid, so that the 
 words of heralds and messengers could be 
 heard by all the millions in waiting. 
 
 First came Ardi'atta, from Zeredho 
 and Haraiti, Goddess over the spirits that 
 had been delivered out of the hells of Aoa- 
 su by Fragapatti and Hoab. And with her, 
 her successor, Gaipon, manager of the 
 hosts. Ardi'atti brought one thousand 
 three hundred million souls in her ship, 
 mostly visitors who have been delivered 
 out of hell. Besides these, were twenty 
 million raised to the degree of the third 
 resurrection, clothed as Brides and Bride- 
 grooms of Jehovih. These latter were the 
 harvest of Ardi'atta, and in her charge. 
 The receivers of her ship stationed it in its 
 place, and then the receivers of her hosts 
 conducted them to their places. 
 
 And now came E'chad, Lord God of 
 Arabin'ya, in his ship, with more than four 
 thousand million souls, half of whom were 
 Brides and Bridegrooms. His ship was 
 received by the proper officers, and sta- 
 tioned in its pace; and his hosts received 
 by the proper persons, and conducted to 
 their respective places. E'chad entered 
 the south wing of the capital, with the 
 Brides and Bridegrooms, and his successor 
 was with the visiting hosts. When E'chad 
 entered and stood before the throne, Frag- 
 apatti saluted him on the sign Jehovih's 
 Rest, and E'chad answered in The Glory of 
 the Evening! 
 
 Before the hosts of E'chad were landed 
 and placed, there came Ots-ha-ta, Lord of 
 North Oce'ya, with his successor, in a ship 
 with thirty million, of whom two million 
 were Brides and Bridegrooms. His ship 
 was received and stationed in its place; 
 and his hosts received and assigned to their 
 places. 
 
 Next came Kow'anea, God of South 
 Guatama, with his successor, bringing sev- 
 en hundred million souls, of whom sixty 
 million were Brides and Bridegrooms. 
 They were received by the proper officers 
 and assigned to their places. 
 
 Immediately afterwards, Yaton'te came, 
 with his successor and his hosts. Yaton'- 
 te's ship was the most beautiful of all that 
 had yet arrived. His hosts were four thou- 
 sand million souls; but of Brides and Bride- 
 grooms he had but thirty million. Him 
 Fragapatti saluted on the sign of the Star 
 of the West, and Yaton'te answered in the 
 sign of the Golden Circle! He and his 
 hosts were then assigned their places. 
 
 Now came M'wing'mi, God of South 
 Oce'ya, and his little ship was laden with 
 four hundred million souls, and he had 
 three million Brides and Bridegrooms. 
 His ship was received and stationed in its 
 place, and his hosts received and stationed 
 in their places. 
 
 Next came Soo'fwa, God of Japan and 
 her heavens. His was the most brilliant 
 of all the ships, and he had three thousand 
 five hundred million souls aboard, of whom 
 two hundred million were Brides and 
 Bridegrooms. His ship was received and 
 stationed, and his hosts also; and when he 
 entered before the throne, Fragapatti sa- 
 luted him on the sign of Before the An- 
 
CYCLE OF FEAGAPATTI 
 
 203 
 
 cients! And Soo'fwa answered him in the 
 sign of Little Star! 
 
 And now came Uropa, most loved of all, 
 Goddess of the barbarians. Her ship was 
 the swiftest and best trimmed, and she 
 brought one thousand million souls, of 
 whom she had eighty million Brides and 
 Bridegrooms as her harvest. When she 
 entered before the throne of Jehovih, lead- 
 ing her Brides and Bridegrooms, Fragapat- 
 ti saluted on the sign, Persistent Fire! 
 And Uropa answered him in the sign, Je- 
 hovih's Trust! 
 
 Now came great Ah'oan, Lord God of 
 Jaffeth and her heavens. His ship was the 
 largest of all, and he brought five thousand 
 million souls, of whom nearly two> thou- 
 sand million were Brides and Bridegrooms. 
 When he came before Jehovih's throne, 
 Fragapatti saluted him on the sign, The 
 Power of Love! Ah'oan answered him in 
 the sign, Everlasting Life! 
 
 And now the ship of Gir-ak-shi came in, 
 bringing a thousand million souls, of whom 
 eighty million were Brides and Bride- 
 grooms. 
 
 Besides these, there were seventy-six 
 other Gods, from departments of the grand 
 divisions of the heavens, bringing some 
 five million souls and some even twenty 
 million. And there were Lords of islands, 
 and Lords of small places on the earth, 
 who had also come in small ships, bringing 
 some five and some ten million souls. 
 And all these Gods and Lords had Brides 
 and Bridegrooms according to the place 
 and number and condition whence they 
 came. And they were all received and sta- 
 tioned in their proper places. Thus there 
 came to Mouru about thirty thousand mill- 
 ion atmosphereans; and of these there were 
 ten thousand eight hundred million prepar- 
 ed as Brides and Bridegrooms unto the 
 Great Spirit. Besides these, there were the 
 hosts of Fragapatti, the ethereans, ten mill- 
 ion, mostly Gods and Goddesses, and these 
 formed the inner sacred circle of the Holy 
 Council. Next to these were their succes- 
 sors, ten million, who were to be the Holy 
 Council of Mouru after the ascension. And 
 outside of these were stationed the Lord 
 Gods and their attendants, behind whom 
 stood the successors, the Gods and Lords, 
 with their attendants; and yet behind them, 
 their visiting hosts. And occupying places 
 
 amongst them all, the musicians, marshals, 
 messengers, swift messengers, and heralds, 
 were assigned their respective places. But 
 so vast was the multitude of angels, and 
 so great the glory, that one might look 
 thereon all day and not even see the mill- 
 ionth part; nor is it possible for corporeal 
 words to convey but a crude picture of the 
 magnificent scene. 
 
 CHAPTER XLIII. 
 
 God, Samati, said: In my hands gavest 
 Thc?a the red star and her heavens, O Je- 
 hovih! As an emblem of trust, and of the 
 first, second and third resurrections. Thy 
 Sons bestowed upon me the triangle. Be- 
 hold, the time of my reign hath come to an 
 end. Thou callest me to a higher world, 
 with Thy holy harvest. But Thou hast 
 raised up Thy Son, Hoab, who is of great 
 wisdom and power in Thee. He shall be 
 Thy God and Thy Son in the places I have 
 been. To him, in Thy name, O Father, I 
 bestow the triangle, symbol of Thee and of 
 Thy created worlds. By my parting with it 
 is the end of this dawn recorded. By 
 Hoab's reception of it is his dominion be- 
 gun. 
 
 God then took off the triangle and hung 
 it on Hoab's neck, saying: I salute thee, 
 God of Earth. Immediately the es'enaurs 
 chanted, Hail to Thee, O God, Son of Je- 
 hovih! 
 
 Now during the time of the arrival of 
 the hosts of Gods and Lords and their res- 
 urrection, there were to be seen, high in the 
 firmament, above, two stars, like twins, de- 
 scending. These were the avalanzas of Ho- 
 seis, Goddess of Alatatcha, coming to' re- 
 ceive the Brides and Bridegrooms of Je- 
 hovih, to take them to the etherean realms 
 prepared for them by the Orians of the 
 higher heavens. Her avalanza was de- 
 scending by the road of Affolkistan, and 
 coming swiftly. Now between the glory 
 of these lights, and the ceremonies in Mou- 
 ru, the awe and grandeur on every side 
 were overwhelming — the es'enaurs, the 
 singers and the far-off trumpeters. There 
 stood the great multitude of Brides and 
 Bridegrooms, arrayed in white, like a vast 
 sea of white, more than ten thousand mill- 
 ion! 
 
 The ships, like twin stars, grew and 
 grew in size, till like two suns descending, 
 
204 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATT1 
 
 they seemed as wide as the borders of Har- 
 aiti! And whilst the multitude gazed and 
 watched, Fragapatti rose up in his place 
 on the! throne and called out, saying: 
 
 Behold, the time hath now arrived for 
 the brotherhood of Gods and Lords to be 
 bestowed upon Earth and her heavens. As 
 Earth is divided into many sections, so 
 have I bequeathed to Earth many Lords, 
 to hold dominion over mortals! And yet 
 over all of these have I chosen and appoint- 
 ed one God. For in this manner were the 
 first heavenly kingdoms of the red star 
 founded by Sethantes, Son of Jehovih. In 
 the history that followed since his day, it 
 has transpired that first one Lord and then 
 another, lost power in his kingdom, and 
 finally even the Gods were powerless to 
 rule angels and mortals to righteousness. 
 That ye may henceforth be strong, like 
 the heavenly kingdoms on other worlds, 
 I now decree Diva, in the name of Jeho- 
 vih. And God and his Lord Gods, and his 
 Gods and Lords of divisions, shall com- 
 prise the Diva, and the members thereof 
 shall be both male and female. And Hoab, 
 who is God, high raised from Zeredho, 
 shall be over all the rest and his title in the 
 Diva shall be Div. Nevertheless, the name 
 Div shall be used by all the members of 
 Diva, when abiding in their several do- 
 minions. But no other person, except 
 Hoab, neither on earth nor in heaven, 
 shall be entitled to the rank of Div. 
 
 And the Diva shall meet in this capi- 
 tal of Mouru thrice every earth year, to 
 render reports unto one another of the 
 matters of their several dominions; and 
 when the meetings take place, each and 
 every Lord and God, and Lordess and 
 Goddess of Earth and her heavens, shall 
 be present and fulfill these my command- 
 ments. And when the members are as- 
 sembled Hoab only shall have the title of 
 Div; and the members shall salute him as 
 Div, Son of All Light. The meetings of 
 Diva shall be private; nor shall any person 
 be present in Diva, save the novices who 
 may be in preparation to become Lords 
 and Gods by succession, and the novices 
 shall not be entitled to speak in Diva. And 
 each member of Diva shall render reports 
 of his department, as to whether in need of 
 assistance, or his capacity to provide emi- 
 grants to other plateaux, and such report 
 
 shall be made in person before Div; and 
 when all the reports have been reviewed, 
 Div shall render judgment thereon, giving 
 to or exacting from any one or more of the 
 dominions, according to the Voice of Je- 
 hovih upon him. 
 
 And the judgments of Div, Son of All 
 Light, shall be called Divan law, from 
 which there shall be no appeal. And the 
 Lords and Gods shall carry these decrees 
 down to mortals in their several domin- 
 ions, rendering them unto the God-irs on 
 earth, whereby mortals through the Rab'- 
 bah, shall receive communion from the 
 All Light. 
 
 In the time of the assembling of Diva, 
 swift messengers shall be in waiting, and 
 immediately after laws have been made, 
 such swift messengers shall depart from 
 Mouru to the etherean kingdoms, in the 
 roadway of Earth and her heavens, and ren- 
 der the same unto the nearest Orian Chief, 
 or other etherean God, Son of Jehovih. 
 
 To the end, therefore, that my com- 
 mandments shall be in the name of Jeho- 
 vih, let God and Lord Gods, and Gods and 
 Lords, and Goddesses and Lordesses, ap- 
 proach the Father's throne, that I may be- 
 stow them according to the rites and cere- 
 monies of the Gods of other corporeal 
 and atmospherean worlds. 
 
 The marshals now conducted all of 
 them before the throne except Hoab. First, 
 Thulae, then Es'pecia, then Geth'ya, and so 
 on, until the hosts of the dominions were 
 before Fragapatti. And then God (Hoab) 
 rose up and faced toward the west. Frag- 
 apatti said: 
 
 In Thy name, O All Light, do I cre- 
 ate a Diva unto Earth and her heavens; 
 and this, Thy God, I anoint as Div, with 
 power to him to anoint his successor in 
 like manner. May Thy Voice and Judg- 
 ment be with him forever. And these Thy 
 Lord Gods, and these Thy Gods and Thy 
 Lords, and these Thy Goddesses and Thy 
 Lordesses, do I anoint as members of Di- 
 va; and to each and all of them give I 
 power in Thy name to appoint successors 
 after them for Thy allotted seasons. May 
 Thy Wisdom and Power be with them 
 forever. Amen. 
 
 God said: In Thy Name, O All Light, 
 do I accept the Diva. And on behalf of 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 205 
 
 my Gods and Lords, proclaim Thy Divan 
 Power unto heaven and earth. 
 
 The others responded: We will fulfill 
 thy decrees, O All Light, now and hence- 
 forth, forever. Be Thou with us in wis- 
 dom and strength for Thy glory! 
 
 Fragapatti then extended his hand up- 
 ward, saying: (Inqua git s'ang, of Thy In- 
 qua git s'ang, O All Light) Dominion 
 within dominion, give me of Thy symbol, 
 O Jehovih! 
 
 And there came out of the light before 
 the throne a substance, and Fragapatti 
 seized it and formed therefrom, first, a 
 hollow ball, and within a bail and a trian- 
 gle; and he said unto them: 
 
 Behold, O Jehovih, Thou didst call me 
 from my high place in heaven, saying: Go 
 thou unto the red star, Earth; her soil is 
 wet with human blood! Her heavens are 
 dead; My harvest is nothing. And I came 
 and delivered Thy words to mortals, and 
 washed Earth clean. And I gathered to- 
 gether Thy lost children in the lower hea- 
 vens, and have raised them up with power. 
 Whereof, in token of Thy Light that was 
 within me, have I become one within Thy 
 labors, and I have raised up Gods and 
 Lords in Thee also; that one perfect thing 
 may be within another, after the manner of 
 Thy created worlds, this, Thy Holy sign, 
 do I bequeath unto them, to be theirs and 
 their successors' forever! 
 
 So Fragapatti bestowed the Lords and 
 Gods, and his labors were finished. 
 
 In the meantime, the sun ships of Hose- 
 is drew near and landed, both to the south 
 and west of Mouru, and so mighty and full 
 of grandeur were they, the thousands of 
 millions looking on were breathless in awe 
 and wonder. Then the marshals of Hoseis' 
 hosts, of whom there were thirty million 
 aboard, descended out of the ship. And 
 they spread a frowas from the ship even to 
 Jehovih's throne, and Hoseis alighted from 
 the ship and walked forward on the frowas, 
 and Fragapatti and his hosts went and re- 
 ceived her, and conducted her to the throne. 
 
 And now, after due ceremonies betwixt 
 the Gods and Goddesses, Athrava rose up 
 and said: To Thee, O Hoseis, Goddess of 
 Alawatcha, in the name of Jehovih, do I 
 bestow the Brides and Bridegrooms of 
 Earth and her heavens. They are the har- 
 vest of Samati, God of the division of 
 
 Haniostu, his Lords and Gods through the 
 Orian Chief, Fragapatti, for Jehovih's 
 emancipated heavens! 
 
 Hoseis said: Brides and Bridegrooms 
 of Jehovih, in His name, receive I you, to 
 deliver unto the All Highest Worlds. 
 
 And then Hoseis and Athrava proceeded 
 in the ceremonies in the usual way, and 
 were responded to by the ten thousand 
 million Brides and Bridegrooms. When 
 the ceremonies were finished, the time of 
 the ascension was at hand. So Fragapatti 
 and Hoseis, accompanied by their Gods 
 and Lords, went down to the foot of the 
 throne and sat down, and God, who had 
 been Hoab, sat alone in the midst of the 
 throne. The es'enaurs then sang a hymn 
 on The March of Jehovih's Worlds! When 
 it was concluded, God went down and took 
 Fragapatti's hands, saying: Arise, O Son, 
 and thou, O Daughter of Jehovih! Fraga- 
 patti and Hoseis rose up, and then all the 
 Gods and Lords rose up. Then Hoab, 
 God, fell into Fragapatti's arms, and when 
 they had embraced, God withdrew and re- 
 turned to the throne. Fragapatti saluted 
 him on the sign, Faithist, and God an- 
 swered him in the sign, Forever! Where- 
 upon, the hosts followed after Fragapatti 
 and Hoseis and entered the great avalan- 
 zas. 
 
 Fragapatti gave his own avalanza to 
 Athrava and his attendants, and they took 
 from the magnet and made it rotary also. 
 And when they were all aboard, Hoseis 
 commanded the ascension, and the mighty 
 fire ships rose up, turning and rising. 
 Fragapatti created flowers and drapery, 
 and cast overboard sufficient, so that all the 
 twenty million remaining had every one 
 some memento. In a little while the resur- 
 rection was complete. The sun ships rose 
 higher and higher, passing Earth's vortex 
 and entering etherea, going to the king- 
 doms prepared for them by the high raised 
 Sons and Daughters of Jehovih. 
 
 CHAPTER XLIV. 
 
 As commanded by Fragapatti, the Diva 
 met thrice every year in Mouru, and Div 
 decreed laws and government unto mortals 
 and angels after the manner herein describ- 
 ed; and because the sessions of the Diva 
 were long the members reclined on divans. 
 
206 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 Div decreed: To establish birth rites 
 with mortals; to teach mortals when their 
 children were born to consecrate them to 
 Diva under a rod with water, after the 
 manner es'yans were baptized in heaven; 
 with rites, ceremonies and words according 
 to the Divan law. 
 
 Div decreed: In the time of the bap- 
 tism of mortal children the Lords shall ap- 
 point ashars unto such children to keep 
 them in the way of the Almighty. The 
 ashars shall assemble in the house of a 
 Zarathustrian at the time of the birth of a 
 child, and they shall baptize the child with 
 a rod, sprinkling water on its head, and by 
 inspiration and otherwise induce the mor- 
 tals to go through the same ceremony, 
 having a rab'bah to perform with a rod 
 which has been dipped in water. And the 
 father or mother shall say: I bestow this, 
 my child, to be a good Zarathustrian, ac- 
 cording to the Divan law. 
 
 Div decreed: A baptized child showeth 
 it hath sprung from Zarathustrians, and 
 hath inherent in it high possibilities. And 
 if it die in infancy it shall not be received 
 with the children of Druks in heaven, but 
 in such place as will enable the parents 
 after death to visit it with delight. 
 
 Div decreed: To establish wedding rites 
 and ceremonies, with words and proces- 
 sions, in order to bind firmly monogamic 
 marriages, according to the Divan law. 
 
 Div decreed: In time of marriages, my 
 Lords shall appoint new ashars unto man 
 and wife, whose duties are to minister unto 
 them as a small kingdom for the glory of 
 Jehovih. 
 
 Div decreed: They shall be married by 
 the rab'bah with kin and friends present. 
 The rab'bah shall say: Ormazd hath unit- 
 ed you forever. Live ye in peace and love 
 on earth, and ye shall dwell together in a 
 heavenly place of delight after death. What 
 Ormazd hath joined, no man can separate 
 forever. 
 
 And the bride and bridegroom shall say: 
 I bestow myself to this my mate, a good 
 Zarathustrian, according to the Divan law. 
 
 Div decreed: To establish death rites 
 and ceremonies, with words according to 
 the Divan law. 
 
 Div decreed: These are the sacred 
 words in the confession previous to death: 
 I confess, with repentance, I, a good Zara- 
 
 thustrian, unto Thee, O Ormazd; and to 
 the Lords of the heavenly hosts of Diva. 
 
 Div decreed: In the birth rites, in the 
 marriage rites, and in the funeral rites, re- 
 cording angels of the Lord shall be pres- 
 ent, and afterward report these things to 
 my kingdom in heaven. 
 
 Div decreed: All such mortals as carry 
 out these rites and ceremonies, shall be 
 called Zarathustrians. 
 
 CHAPTER XLV. 
 
 Div decreed: If a man be not too 
 weak, he shall confess to the Lord with 
 repentance. But if he be too weak to utter 
 words, then shall the rab'bah confess him 
 by holding the right hand whilst he saith 
 the sacred words. And whilst this is being 
 done, the ashars shall provide a sufficient 
 number of spirits to receive the newborn, 
 and bring him to the place in heaven that 
 hath been previously selected for him. 
 
 Div decreed: The child of a Zarathus- 
 trian being to young to speak, shall not 
 make confession, even through the rab'bah. 
 The rab'bah shall say: O Thou, Master 
 Light! Behold, my child is dead! Receive 
 Thou its little, tender spirit! Take it to 
 Thy heavenly places of delight! 
 
 And the ashars shall take the young es'- 
 yan to a place suited to it, and deliver it to 
 the asaphs; and the asaphs shall examine 
 it, and if it require fetal, they shall provide 
 it in heaven if possible. But if it be too 
 young, then the asaphs, with a sufficient 
 guard, shall take it back to its mortal 
 mother, or its mortal father, or to its broth- 
 er or sister, or other near kin, or to whom- 
 soever the asaphs shall find most advisable. 
 And the spirit child shall be put to bed 
 every night with such mortal as the asaphs 
 shall have selected, that its spirit may draw 
 sustenance sufficient to grow unto everlast- 
 ing life. But the asaphs who have it in 
 charge shall bring it away in the morning 
 to its place in heaven. And in no case 
 shall a spirit child be left to fetal with a 
 contentious woman, nor with a drunken 
 mortal man. 
 
 Div decreed: If the es'yan be a Zara- 
 thustrian, his spirit shall not be allowed to 
 remain longer than three days and three 
 nights about his mortal kindred. And 
 then he shall be taken to his place in hea- 
 
 
CYCLE OF FRAQAPATTI 
 
 207 
 
 ven, and given into the keeping of the 
 asaphs. 
 
 Div decreed: Whilst the mortal rab'- 
 bah is reciting prayers after death, in the 
 morning, at noon and at sunset, the ashars 
 shall assemble in the same house with the 
 newborn spirit, and join in the singing and 
 praying, for it will restore him and help 
 him to realize what hath taken place. 
 
 Div decreed: If the es'yan be a Zara- 
 thustrian, and his kin in heaven be drujas, 
 he shall not be taken to the heaven where 
 they are; nor shall his kin be permitted to 
 see him for thirty days. But after thirty 
 days, in his own place in heaven, his kin, 
 if drujas, may be permitted to see him, but 
 only under guard. 
 
 Div decreed: If the es'yan be a Zara- 
 thustrian, and his kin in heaven belong to 
 the organic heavens, then shall he be taken 
 to them, and his abiding place shall be with 
 them for a season. 
 
 Div decreed: The same law shall apply 
 in the case of a Zarathustrian woman as 
 with a man. 
 
 Div propounded: If a Zarathustrian be 
 dead, and his spirit many years in a place 
 of heavenly delight, and then his mortal 
 wife die, and she be not a Zarathustrian, 
 what shall be done with her? The members 
 of the Diva all spake thereon, and then Div 
 decreed: 
 
 The spirit of such a woman shall not 
 be taken to the place of her husband. For 
 thirty days she shall be kept in a place 
 suitable for her. After that she may visit 
 her husband under guard; but until she ac- 
 cept the Ormazdian law, she shall not 
 dwell with her husband in heaven, nor with 
 her children in heaven. And if she have 
 mortal children she shall not be permitted 
 to see them except under guard. 
 
 Div decreed: The same law shall apply 
 in the case of a Zarathustrian woman in 
 heaven whose husband was not a Zara- 
 thustrian; for he is bound by the same 
 law, and shall be kept separate from his 
 wife in heaven until he accept the Ormaz- 
 dian religion. 
 
 Div asked: If a Zarathustrian man have 
 a wife who is not a Zarathustrian, and she 
 have an untimely birth, whether by acci- 
 dent or abortion, what shall be done with 
 the spirit of the child? All the members of 
 Diva spake thereon, and then Div decreed: 
 
 Such child's spirit shall not be brought 
 to heaven for a season, but shall be fetaled 
 on its natural mother or father, day and 
 night, until the full nine months are com- 
 pleted, and then it shall be delivered with 
 due ceremonies to the asaphs. After that 
 it shall be fetaled according to the Divan 
 law for the spirits of Zarathustrian infants. 
 
 CHAPTER XLVI. 
 
 Div decreed: If a Zarathustrian attain 
 to maturity before he die, his spirit shall 
 be es'yan two years. And during this 
 time he shall be attended by not less than 
 two asaphs when he goeth away from his 
 heavenly home; and the asaphs shall teach 
 him the mode of travel, the manner of 
 knowing localities, both on earth and in 
 the first resurrection. And they shall teach 
 him the varieties and kinds of food suited 
 to the highest and best education of a spir- 
 it. And when he travels with his compan- 
 ions in his own heavenly group, the asaphs 
 of the group shall go along with him and 
 them. And during these two years he' shall 
 be provided from the stores in heaven with 
 food and clothes, and he shall not labor to 
 provide himself with anything. 
 
 Div decreed: At the end of the two 
 years the asaphs shall deliver him, and such 
 of his group as are prepared, into the de- 
 partment of first instruction, and his name 
 shall be entered in the library of that de- 
 partment as entered apprentice in the first 
 resurrection. Here his first lessons shall 
 be as to making clothes and providing food 
 for himself and others. And he shall be 
 entitled to participate in the recreations of 
 the entered apprentice, such as music, 
 dancing, marching, painting and other arts. 
 
 Div decreed: Not less than two years 
 shall he serve as entered apprentice, and 
 longer if his proficiency be not sufficient 
 for advancement. But when he is advanc- 
 ed, he shall no longer be entered appren- 
 tice, but a craftsman. And he shall be tak- 
 en to a place suitable where his labor will 
 contribute to the heavenly kingdoms. And 
 his recreations shall entitle him to instruc- 
 tion in both corporeal and es'sean knowl- 
 edge. As a craftsman he shall serve seven 
 years. 
 
 Div decreed: The craftsman's examina- 
 tion being completed, he shall then return 
 to labor in the nurseries in heaven, becom- 
 
208 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 ing assistant to the asaphs. And during this 
 period he shall report himself at the roll 
 call. And his teachers shall take him 
 down to mortals and teach him how to see 
 and hear corporeal things. And they shall 
 also explain to him fetalism and the obses- 
 sion of mortals by drujas, that he may un- 
 derstand the cause of lying, stealing, tat- 
 tling, conspiracies and murders amongst 
 mortals. 
 
 Div decreed: After he hath served three 
 years as nurse assistant to the asaphs, he 
 shall be promoted to the hospitals in hea- 
 ven, as assistant to the physicians. And 
 they shall teach him the restoration of spir- 
 its in chaos, crazy spirits, deformed spirits, 
 sick spirits, and spirits afflicted with foul 
 smells who cannot clean themselves, and 
 the spirits of women who produced abor- 
 tion on themselves or allowed it to be 
 done, and of monomaniacs, and all manner 
 of diseased spirits. And the physicians 
 shall take him with them when they go 
 down to mortals to remove fetals, and he 
 shall learn how they are severed safely to 
 both. And they shall take him to the bat- 
 tlefields, where mortals slay one another, 
 whose spirits are in chaos or still fighting, 
 and he shall assist in bringing them away 
 from the corporeal place; and also learn 
 how to restore them, and where to deliver 
 them when restored. And if there be knots 
 in any region near at hand, the physicians 
 shall take him down to the same, and show 
 him how they are mastered and delivered. 
 And if there be any hells near at hand, the 
 physicians shall take him thither and teach 
 him how they are delivered and the people 
 restored. For ten years shall he serve as 
 assistant to the physicians. 
 
 Div decreed: Having fulfilled the part 
 of assistant physician, he shall be promoted 
 to the full rank of nurse. And in that de- 
 partment he shall serve ten years, which 
 completeth his education in the nurseries, 
 and he shall be emancipated therefrom, and 
 all the nurseries in the lower heaven shall 
 be free and open to him, and he shall go to 
 whatever one he desires except when spe- 
 cially commanded for a certain work by his 
 Lord, or the God of his division. 
 
 Div decreed: Having passed a satisfac- 
 tory examination by his Lord, he shall be 
 promoted to the full rank of physician. 
 And in that department he shall serve fifty 
 
 years, and then he shall be emancipated 
 therefrom. And all the hospitals in the 
 lower heaven shall be open to him, and he 
 shall choose which of them he desires as 
 his place of labor, unless otherwise required 
 by his Lord, or the God of his division. 
 
 Div decreed: He shall now pass an ex- 
 amination by his Lord, and if he prove 
 himself in a knowledge of the structure of 
 both the corporeal and spiritual man, he 
 shall be registered as entered factor, and he 
 shall serve twelve years in forming and 
 making fabrics for raiment, and other use- 
 ful and ornamental purposes. 
 
 Div decreed: Then his labor shall be 
 gathering and transporting food for twelve 
 years. 
 
 Div decreed: Then for twelve years his 
 labor shall be the wielding of large bodies 
 and carrying the same long distances. 
 
 Div decreed: He shall now enter the 
 school of creation as an apprentice, learn- 
 ing how to create. Thirty years shall he 
 serve therein. 
 
 Div decreed: Then he shall serve twelve 
 years in learning Uz. 
 
 Div decreed: He shall now be eman- 
 cipated from the factories and all such 
 places shall be free and open to him, ex- 
 cept when otherwise required by his Lord 
 or the God of his division. 
 
 Div decreed: He shall now enter col- 
 lege, and serve according to his talents 
 from five to forty years; learning measur- 
 ing distances, rotations, velocities, magnets, 
 corporeal and es'sean; currents of vortices; 
 roadways in vortices; how to measure vor- 
 tices by their spiral force; how to find the 
 center and periphery of vortices. 
 
 Div decreed: He shall now enter archi- 
 tecture as an apprentice, and learn the 
 building of heavenly mansions and cities; 
 and he shall serve eight years, and then, if 
 proficient, be promoted to build judgment 
 seats and thrones, and serve sixteen years. 
 
 Div decreed: He shall now be eligible 
 to the school of light and darkness, and 
 learn the relative power and attraction and 
 repulsion belonging to each; and his edu- 
 cation here shall embrace practice and ex- 
 periment; and he shall serve seventy years 
 for the full course. After which, if he be 
 proficient in creating light and darkness, 
 he shall be emancipated from the colleges 
 and schools, and all such places shall be 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAFATTI 
 
 209 
 
 free and open to him, except when other- 
 wise required by his Lord, or the God of 
 his division. 
 
 Div decreed: He shall now serve twen- 
 ty-four years in building and propelling 
 heavenly boats and small ships. 
 
 Div decreed: He shall now travel fifty 
 years in atmospherea and on the earth, and 
 on the oceans of the earth. 
 
 Div decreed: This shall complete the 
 primary education in the first resurrection. 
 
 CHAPTER XLVII. 
 
 Div asked: After the spirit of a Zara- 
 thustrian has completed his primary edu- 
 cation, what shall he do then? All the 
 members spake on this subject, and then 
 Div decreed as follows: 
 
 He shall serve two hundred years as an 
 apprenticed loo'is. He shall become pro- 
 ficient in the knowledge of the procreation 
 of mortals, learning to prophesy what the 
 offspring will be according to the parent- 
 age; to discern how the es of a mortal gov- 
 erneth the flesh as to good or evil; how the 
 es of a mortal controlleth the sex and uti- 
 mate size, health and strength of the off- 
 spring. 
 
 To learn which, the loo'is shall take 
 him to thousands of mortals, and he shall 
 make a record of what he has under ob- 
 servation and when such mortals have chil- 
 dren born, he shall make a record thereof; 
 and he shall observe the character of the 
 birth, and the foundation of the child, to- 
 gether with what conditions surrounded 
 the mother of the child. And he shall fol- 
 low the child until it has grown up, mar- 
 ried and begotten a child or children; and 
 so on, to the sixth generation. 
 
 Div decreed: After he hath served two 
 hundred years he shall be examined by his 
 Lord, and if found proficient in prophesy- 
 ing to the sixth generation, he shall be en- 
 tered as an ashar, on a list of four twelves 
 for every moon's change. But the forty- 
 eight ashars shall not have charge of more 
 than one hundred and ninety-two mortals, 
 unless otherwise specially allotted by the 
 Lord or God in dominion. 
 
 For four generations, or one hundred 
 and thirty-three years, shall he serve as an 
 ashar. And he shall learn to have domin- 
 ion over his mortal wards day and night 
 without making his presence known to 
 
 them. To accomplish which he shall be- 
 gin with his wards in their first infancy; re- 
 maining with them whilst they sleep, talk- 
 ing to the spirit of the mortal, teaching and 
 persuading. 
 
 Div decreed: Having served the full 
 term as ashar, he shall be entitled to exam- 
 ination by his Lord. But herein beginneth 
 a new form of examination, which is that 
 the examination pertains to his wards, as 
 to what kind of fruit he hath sent to hea- 
 ven, the grade of his es'yans being the 
 standard. 
 
 Div decreed: Having passed the exam- 
 ination as ashar, he shall now be entered 
 as asaph, where he shall serve thirty-six 
 years. Here again his examination shall 
 not be of himself, but of the harvest of his 
 department 
 
 Div decreed: His examination being 
 complete, he shall now receive emancipa- 
 tion from all preceding departments and 
 decrees; and he shall have his choice in 
 ali places he hath passed, unless otherwise 
 specially detailed by the Lord or God of 
 his division. 
 
 Div decreed: He shall now be entitled 
 to enter the school of the primary soul. 
 His first lessons shall be in colors and 
 sounds, both of corpor and es. First, be- 
 ginning with gray of not more than three 
 combinations; and when he hath mastered 
 these, he shall have four, five, then ten, 
 then a hundred and so on, until when any 
 combination of colors is placed before him, 
 he can instantly perceive every color, 
 shade, and tint, and the apparent velocity 
 of light, and its actinic force emanating 
 And he shall pursue this study until he can 
 create is es the counterpart of anything in 
 corpor, or create in corpor the counterpart 
 of anything in es. 
 
 And for sounds, he shall proceed in the 
 same way; first, learning a combination of 
 three, so that when his teacher produces 
 any three sounds together, he can hear 
 them and determine the exact velocity of 
 wave. Then he shall begin with four notes, 
 then five, then ten, then a hundred, and 
 even a thousand, which though made in 
 the same instant, he shall detect every one, 
 and the velocity and force of each. 
 
 Div decreed: He shall now begin the 
 practice of combining and creating color 
 by sounds, and sounds by colors, both in 
 
210 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 corpor and es. His teachers shall make 
 explosions with and without light, and by 
 his eye and ear only shall he be able to de- 
 termine with what elements the explosions 
 were made. 
 
 Div decreed: He shall go far away 
 from the explosions, and when the waves 
 come to him, even though he heareth not 
 the explosion, he shall be able to deter- 
 mine by the waves, of what substance the 
 explosion was made, and whether in light 
 or darkness. And if in light, what colors 
 were manifested. 
 
 Div decreed: He shall now receive in- 
 struction in the sounds of conversation. 
 First, his teacher shall cause him to. hear 
 two people conversing at the same time, 
 missing nothing that is said; then three, 
 four, five, then ten, then a hundred, and 
 then a thousand, but no greater number 
 in this department. 
 
 Div decreed: He shall now analyze the 
 waves of voice, wherein he can hear the 
 sounds thereof. His teacher shall station 
 him in a certain place and cause him to 
 read the waves of sound that come to him, 
 so that he knoweth not only the words 
 spoken, but the kind of persons speaking or 
 singing. 
 
 Div decreed: His teacher shall now 
 cause him to read the waves of sound em- 
 ating from two persons talking at the same 
 time, whom he cannot hear, and he shall 
 understand not only the words spoken, but 
 the kind of persons speaking. Then he 
 shall read the waves in the same way for 
 three persons, then four, then ten, then a 
 hundred, and even a thousand. 
 
 Div decreed: Then he shall be taken to 
 a distance from a battlefield where mortals 
 are in deadly conflict, but he shall not be 
 sufficiently near to hear the sounds; and 
 when the waves come to him, he shall 
 read them and know the number of men in 
 battle, the kind of weapons in use, and the 
 cause of the contention. 
 
 Div decreed: He shall now be promot- 
 ed to be a messenger between Lords, and 
 between the Lords and God. 
 
 Div decreed: For one hundred years 
 shall he serve as messenger, and at the end 
 of that time his Lords and God shall ren- 
 der his record, and promote him to be 
 marshal. And now he shall be emancipat- 
 ed from all preceding departments and de- 
 
 crees to choose whatsoever he will, except 
 when specially required by his Lord or 
 God. 
 
 Div decreed: For two hundred years 
 he shall serve as marshal, and under as 
 many as forty Lords and sub-Gods, and in 
 as many as twenty heavenly kingdoms. 
 
 Div decreed: He shall now be promot- 
 ed to Lord, and have dominion over a city 
 or nation of mortals, and over the spirits 
 belonging to that city or nation. 
 
 CHAPTER XLVIII. 
 
 Div propounded: If a man be not a 
 Zarathustran, and he die, what shall be 
 done with him? All the members spake 
 and then Div decreed: 
 
 Inasmuch as he accepted not the Zara- 
 thustrian law whilst a mortal, he is unsuit- 
 ed to the highest exalted places in heaven. 
 His education shall not run to the Lord- 
 head nor to the God-head, for all official 
 preference shall be to the Zarathustrian. 
 He shall not be a column in the Father's 
 building, nor of the arch-stones of great 
 strength, but he shall stand as a plain 
 brick in the wall. 
 
 Div said: I am not created God merely 
 to serve my time and there an end. But I 
 am to look far ahead as to who shall be 
 Lords and Gods over Earth and her atmos- 
 pherea. 
 
 Div propounded: What then shall be 
 the course of a spirit who was not a Zara- 
 thustrian, and after the members had spo- 
 ken, Div decreed: 
 
 He shall be delivered to the asaphs, who 
 shall enter him in the nurseries as an es'- 
 yan, where he shall remain six years, 
 learning elementary powers and expres- 
 sions. 
 
 Div decreed: He shall then be appren- 
 ticed in manufacturing and general labor, 
 where he shall serve twelve years, unless 
 previously instructed in these things whilst 
 a mortal. 
 
 Div decreed: He shall now enter a 
 school and learn surveying and measuring 
 without instruments, and determining 
 what kind of emanations rise from the 
 earth, their altitude and density; and he 
 shall learn exploration; and enumeration 
 in both corpor and es; the building of 
 piedmazrs and otevans; the constructing of 
 arrow ships, and all other vessels used in 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 211 
 
 the heavens to carry things from place to 
 place. And he shall serve thirty years in 
 these things. 
 
 Div decreed: He shall now be promoted 
 to restoring, nursing and caring for the 
 drujas who are being rescued by the cap- 
 tains, generals and Lords, in which ser- 
 vice he shall serve for thirty years. 
 
 Div decreed: Whatsoever service he 
 did in mortal life in any of these things, 
 shall stand to his credit two-fold in heaven. 
 
 Div decreed: If he now acknowledge 
 and practice faith in the Great Spirit, Jeho- 
 vih, he shall be promoted to the college of 
 creation, and taught to create light and 
 darkness. After this he shall be taught to 
 sar'gis flowers, trees and clothes, and to 
 take elementary lessons in music and ora- 
 tory, in which branches he shall serve fifty 
 years. And then, he shall be entitled to 
 examination, and if he can withstand the 
 third grade of light, he shall be ranked 
 Bridegroom to Jehovih. 
 
 Div decreed: If he does not yet com- 
 prehend faith in the All Person, he shall 
 be granted freedom to all the places where 
 hath served, and he shall be emancipated 
 from all Lords and Gods, and from all la- 
 bor and education, and honorably dis- 
 charged, to pursue whatever he desires in 
 heaven or earth. Nor shall the Lords nor 
 Gods take more notice of him than due 
 respect and honor. 
 
 Div decreed: Because of the latter class 
 rise the false Gods and false Lords, who oft 
 set up kingdoms of their own in atmos- 
 pherea, they shall not rise above the sec- 
 ond resurrection. 
 
 The Voice of Jehovih came to Div, 
 saying: Without false Gods and false 
 Lords, the lowest drujas would never be 
 put to work. They who cannot be risen by 
 persuasion, may be aroused by less scrupu- 
 lous masters, who make slaves of them. 
 
 CHAPTER XLIX. 
 
 The Voice of Jehovih came to Div say- 
 ing: That My Lords and My Gods may 
 not err, thou shalt promulgate the founda- 
 tion of the Divan law. Div perceived, and 
 decreed: 
 
 This is the foundation of Divan law: 
 The decrees of God and his sub-Gods, 
 Lord Gods and Lords. 
 
 A kingdom in heaven riseth or falleth 
 by Divan law. A kingdom or nation on 
 the earth riseth or falleth by Divan law. 
 The virtuous are rewarded and exalted by 
 Divan law; the wicked are cast into trials 
 by the Divan law. Those who are one with 
 the Divan law, are free from the law; but 
 those who reject me and my kingdoms are 
 bound by Divan law. 
 
 But this is not Divan law: Man to be 
 created; to live a time on the earth, then 
 die and enter heaven. These are done by 
 the Ever Presence of the All Light, the 
 Creator. 
 
 This is Divan law: To assist man out 
 of darkness into light; to give security to 
 the helpless; to raise the souls of men to 
 everlasting light; to minister unto the 
 needy; to deliver them that are in pain; to 
 teach man to desist laboring for himself; 
 and to teach him to labor for others. 
 
 But this is not Divan law: For seed to 
 grow; for a tree to grow; for the spider to 
 weave its web. These are done by the 
 Ever Living Presence of the All Master. 
 
 This is Divan law: To regulate the af- 
 fairs of angels and mortals, for their ulti- 
 mate resurrection; to lay the foundation 
 for harmony in community; to gather to- 
 gether the inharmonious and put them in 
 tune. 
 
 But this is not Divan law: To provide 
 the earth with life, or to hold it in its 
 place; to build the place of the higher or 
 lower heavens; or provide corpor or to 
 provide es. These things are done by the 
 Ever Presence of the Creator, and shaped 
 and molded by His hand through the 
 Chiefs of the higher heavens. 
 
 This is Divan law: To bring together 
 in marriage wisely for the child's sake, 
 and for the joy of all. 
 
 But this is not Divan law: To give de- 
 sire to marriage, or desire from marriage. 
 These are from the All Person, the Master 
 Light. 
 
 This is Divan law: When a man walk- 
 eth along, to take him by the hand and 
 bend him to the right or left. 
 
 But this is not Divan law: For the 
 ' man to go forth. This he doeth by the 
 Ever Presence of Jehovih, the Ormazd. 
 
212 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 A carpenter buildeth a house, but he 
 built not the logs nor the stone. The Diva 
 buildeth kingdoms in heaven and on earth, 
 and shapeth them for usefulness and beau- 
 ty; and when they are old and useless the 
 Diva abandoneth them, and they fall to 
 pieces. Nevertheless Ormazd provideth 
 the wherewithal for the whole. 
 
 Div decreed: My Lords shall promul- 
 gate the foundation of Divan law on earth 
 and in heaven, so that mortals shall not 
 worship Divan law. 
 
 darkness quibble on the husks, but discern 
 not the fruit within. 
 
 Jehovih spake to Div saying: Man 
 buildeth a house and it perisheth. Suc- 
 ceeding generations must also build, other- 
 wise the art of building would perish. Bet- 
 ter that the building perish than the art of 
 building. I created all men to labor and 
 to learn. What less requireth My Gods 
 and angels? Because language melteth 
 away My Lords and ashars have constant 
 employment. 
 
 CHAPTER L. 
 
 In the sixth session of Diva, Div de- 
 creed: 
 
 The Divan law shall be the higher law; 
 and ye shall give to mortals a law copied 
 after it, and the mortal law shall be called 
 the lower law. 
 
 One of the members of Diva asked: If 
 a mortal judge sit in judgment between cer- 
 tain men, by which law shall he judge? On 
 this subject the members spake at great 
 length, and Div decreed: 
 
 He cannot discern the higher law but 
 dimly; the lower law he can read plainly 
 in a book. He shall therefore judge by the 
 lower, but by the highest interpretation. 
 
 Div said: The priests of the Zarathus- 
 trians who have carried the alms-bowl, and 
 lived in all things pure, being celibates 
 and serving Ormazd only by going about 
 doing good, have the higher law, the Divan 
 law, and they shall judge by it. 
 
 Nevertheless trouble cometh not into 
 the world by those who strive to do right, 
 but by those who evade. The time shall 
 come when the judge shall not interpret 
 according to the higher law, but he will 
 strive to hide justice in a corner, using 
 words to conceal his own perversion. It 
 is by such men and such angels that hea- 
 ven and earth will be blighted in time to 
 come. 
 
 For as through Zarathustra, Jehovih's 
 Word hath been established on the earth; 
 and since words themselves perish and are 
 supplemented by new words, the time shall 
 come when the higher law will fail, as a 
 house on sand. For there are no words that 
 are everlasting, and that are understood by 
 all men alike. Words themselves are but 
 as husks that surround the corn. Men in 
 
 CHAPTER LI. 
 
 Div propounded: A man and woman 
 in mortal life were as Druks, being filthy 
 and idle, begging from day to day, and yet 
 they had born to them many children. And 
 the children were also lazy and worthless, 
 being beggars also. Now in course of 
 time the man and woman die, and in time 
 after, the children also, and none of them 
 are yet entered into the first resurrection 
 in heaven, being beggars still and dwelling 
 around their old haunts. What shall be 
 done with them? The Lords all spake on 
 this subject, and then Div decreed the first 
 Divan law to rule the Druk: 
 
 Such spirits shall be reported by the 
 ashars to the Lord, and the Lord shall send 
 a captain with a sufficient army to bring 
 them away from the earth, and enter them 
 in a colony for such purpose. 
 
 Div decreed the second Divan to rule 
 the Druk: For thirty days such drujas 
 shall be clothed and fed. If by this time 
 they manifest no inclination to labor but 
 are still lazy, they shall be removed to a re- 
 gion where food can only be obtained by 
 exertion." 
 
 Div decreed the third Divan law to rule 
 the Druk: This law shall also apply to 
 mortals. Through the ashars shall they be 
 inspired to migrate to cold and unproduc- 
 tive regions. 
 
 Div said: Herein hast Thou wisely 
 planned, O Jehovih! For all Thy places 
 in heaven and on earth shall be subdued 
 and made to glorify Thee! 
 
 CHAPTER LII. 
 
 The Diva enacted many acts after the 
 maner herein related, and the number was 
 so great that all the spirits in heaven and 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 213 
 
 mortals on the earth, were far-planned, 
 from their birth until they became Brides 
 and Bridegrooms in heaven. 
 
 Copies of these Divan laws were given 
 to mortals through the Lords and ashars, 
 either by inspiration or by words spoken 
 in sar'gis. And in Jaffeth, Shem and Ar- 
 abin'ya mortal kings decreed mortal laws 
 based on the Divan laws. 
 
 And heaven and earth became as one 
 country, with one king, who was God; 
 and his word ruled over all. And the 
 Lords' kingdoms prospered, and the king- 
 doms of the sub-Gods and Goddesses. And 
 there were rites and ceremonies, and rec- 
 reations, and games, and pageantry on the 
 earth and in heaven, so great that one 
 might write a thousand books thereon, and 
 not have told the tenth part. 
 
 So after God had reigned one hundred 
 and ninety years, he descended from his 
 heavenly place, and went about in all the 
 Lords' dominions, and the sub-Gods' do- 
 minions in the lower heavens, that he 
 might rejoice before Jehovih for the great 
 works he had done. And in all these hea- 
 venly places there was great rejoicing be- 
 fore God; and the es'enaurs made and sang 
 songs of rejoicing; and the trumpeters and 
 harpists proclaimed the glory of Jehovih's 
 Presence. 
 
 And God had the people numbered, that 
 the Gods of the etherean worlds might send 
 in dan for the great resurrection; and the 
 xiumber of Brides and Bridegrooms to Je- 
 hovih was found to be sixteen thousand 
 million. 
 
 Then God directed his fire-ship to run 
 close to the earth, that he might survey 
 mortals and their kingdoms. And he vis- 
 ited all the great nations -of the earth,, to 
 the south and north, east and west. And 
 now his soul cried out in great sorrow be- 
 cause the great peoples of the earth were 
 turning celibates! 
 
 And the Voice of Jehovih came to him, 
 saying: Hoab, My Son, why sorrowest 
 thou? And God answered saying: Be- 
 hold, the earth is not peopled over; the 
 plains and mountains are not subdued; the 
 wilderness is filled with beasts of prey; the 
 Zarathustrians are running into the same 
 line as the Thins; they kill nothing; they 
 live for the soul only; and since they have 
 
 learned the bondage of the lower heavens 
 they will not marry and beget offspring. 
 
 Then Jehovih spake to God, saying: 
 Call not down a'ji nor ji'ay, My Son! Fear 
 not! In ten years, behold, I will bring 
 Earth into dan, and thou shalt bring thy 
 harvest into My emancipated worlds. 
 
 So God sorrowed no more. And on his 
 return to Mouru in the following sessions 
 of Diva, there were passed one hundred 
 and eight supplemental Divan laws. And 
 so great was the power of the Zarathustrian 
 religion on the earth that war ceased, and 
 the tribes and nations dwelt together in 
 peace. The people ceased to build large 
 cities, and ceased striving for the things of 
 earth. But they learned little except rites 
 and ceremonies, prayers and hymns of 
 praise to Ormazd, and to His Gods and 
 Lords, and to Zarathustra, the All Pure. 
 
 So Jehovih brought Earth into the re- 
 gions of dan, and sent seven ships, and de- 
 livered God and his harvest of sixteen 
 thousand million angels, into places of de- 
 light, the Nirvanian fields of Niscrossawot- 
 cha, in etherea. 
 
 Thus ended the dominion of Hoab on 
 Earth, whose greatness had never been sur- 
 passed. 
 
 CHAPTER LIII. 
 
 Then God bewailed the state of Earth, 
 because man ceased to love anything 
 thereon. His whole mind and heart were 
 set upon heavenly things, and the earth 
 was becoming like a neglected farm grown 
 up with weeds and briers. So Jehovih an- 
 swered God's prayers, saying: Behold, I 
 will bring darkness upon Earth from 
 every side. See to it then, My Son, for not 
 only will man desire of the earth, but the 
 angels in thy high heavenly places will for- 
 sake them, and go down to the earth. 
 
 And so it was; Jehovih brought ji'ay 
 upon Earth, and it was in a state of dark- 
 ness for four hundred years, and the sun 
 shone not, but was like a red ball of fire, 
 and corporeal things were without lights 
 and shadows. And men's minds and hearts 
 took after the nature of the corporeal 
 world, losing sight of Ormazd and His 
 heavenly promises, and they bethought 
 them of the desires of earth, and of the 
 pleasures of the flesh-life. Now during 
 ji'ay there fell perpetual atmospherean 
 
214 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 substance on the earth, of which the nature 
 and kind of which the earth is made, but 
 much more rarefied. 
 
 And the plateau of Haraiti and Zeredho 
 were driven down to the earth and near 
 the earth; and the belt of meteoris was 
 moved nearer by thousands of miles, and 
 meteoric stones fell in many places upon 
 the earth, like a rain shower, but burning 
 hot, and with suffocating smell. And the 
 affairs of mortals were changed; they built 
 new cities, and became great hunters, ap- 
 plying the wisdom of their forefathers to 
 the matters of the earth. And the heavenly 
 places of delight were broken up and de- 
 scended to the earth; and the angels were 
 cast upon the earth, turning away from 
 faith in Ormazd, seeking joy in the affairs 
 of earth. And God and his Lords were 
 powerless unto righteous works, either with 
 mortals or angels. But man and woman 
 became prolific, and they grew large, and 
 full of resolution and power. 
 
 The Voice of Jehovih spake to God, 
 saying: Maintain thou thy kingdom; and 
 thy Gods and thy Lords under thee shall 
 also maintain their kingdoms. Nor suffer 
 thou My people to be discouraged with My 
 works. Because I have sent darkness upon 
 Earth to benefit mortals in mortality, so 
 have I also given My heavenly hosts les- 
 sons in My es worlds. Nor shall they call 
 this a judgment upon them, nor say that I 
 do these things in anger, nor as punish- 
 ment, nor for benefit of one to the injury 
 of others. Because thou wert guided by 
 My voice and My commandments in be- 
 stowing the Divan law, behold the strength 
 and wisdom of thy pupils! For inasmuch 
 as they learn to master the elements I cre- 
 ated in atmospherea, so will they become 
 triumphant in My etherean worlds. 
 
 God perceived, and he and his Lords 
 and sub-Gods fortified their kingdoms on 
 every side, and provided assistance to their 
 colleges, factories, hospitals and places of 
 education, in order to maintain the angels 
 who had sought resurrection. Neverthe- 
 less, many angels believed a new or- 
 der of light was coming on Earth, 
 wherein Earth would become the all high- 
 est abode for angels and Gods. Others 
 having lived two or three hundred years in 
 atmospherea, and never having been in eth- 
 erea, began to disbelieve in the higher hea- 
 
 vens, and finally to disbelieve in Jehovih, 
 also. 
 
 And in two hundred years later, God 
 and his Lords lost influence and power 
 with both angels and mortals. And the 
 latter took to war, and the angels who had 
 ministered unto them became wanderers 
 and adventurers, without organization, and 
 cared neither for truth nor wisdom, but 
 flattered mortals for their own glory. And 
 the kings and queens of the earth built 
 temples for their familiar spirits, who as- 
 sumed the ancient names of Gods and 
 Lords. 
 
 Now, when the next dan was near at 
 hand, God enumerated his upraised hosts, 
 and there were prepared as Brides and 
 Bridegrooms for Jehovih's higher heavens 
 twelve thousand million. And because it 
 was less than the number of his predeces- 
 sor, he cried out unto Jehovih, bewailing 
 his weakness. And Jehovih answered him, 
 saying: Bewail not, My Son! Thou hast 
 done a great work. Neither ask thou that 
 thou mayest remain another dan, for the 
 next will not be so fair a harvest. So God 
 grieved no more, but bestowed his king- 
 dom on his successor; and his Lords did 
 likewise, and so did his sub-Gods and all 
 other persons having proteges. And God 
 called together the Brides and Bride- 
 grooms; and Jehovih sent down from eth- 
 erea five great ships of fire, and "delivered 
 God and his hosts into the emancipated 
 worlds. 
 
 CHAPTER LIV. 
 
 In the twelve hundredth year after Frag- 
 apatti, in the east colony of Haraiti, one 
 Ctusk, a former Lord of Jehovih's host, re- 
 nounced Jehovih, the Creator, and falsely 
 proclaimed himself Ahura, the All Master; 
 and he took with him three Lords of grade 
 eighty-eight, and one thousand six hun- 
 dred students of eight hundred years' res- 
 urrection, none of whom were less than 
 grade sixty, and were sufficient to pass as 
 Brides and Bridegrooms. And these stu- 
 dents took with them thirty-six thousand 
 teachers, factors, and physicians, and 
 nurses, all of whom were upward of grade 
 forty. 
 
 And Ahura appropriated to himself one 
 colony of one hundred and ten million an- 
 gels, together with the colleges, schools, 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATT1 
 
 215 
 
 factories, and all things belonging therein. 
 And the three Lords took their kingdoms, 
 and by annexation made them part of Ahu- 
 ra's kingdom. Now these three Lords' 
 kingdoms comprised the largest habitable 
 places of mortals in Vind'yu and Jaffeth, 
 and the greatest heavenly places of angels 
 in the first resurrection. And Ahura divid- 
 ed up the regions he thus obtained, mak- 
 ing confederate heavenly kingdoms, suffi- 
 cient in number to give place of dominion 
 to all his Lords and Gods, and to make 
 sub-Gods out of all the one thousand six 
 hundred students. And after that, Ahura 
 numbered his people, and there were in his 
 heavens more than three thousand million 
 souls! 
 
 God sent messengers to Ctusk, who had 
 assumed the name, Ahura'Mazda, admon- 
 ishing and inquiring: My Lord, whom I 
 have loved, who by mine own hand was 
 crowned in the name of Jehovih, why hast 
 thou deserted the Father's kingdoms? 
 Wherein hast thou had cause to complain 
 against Jehovih? Wherein, against me, thy 
 God? O my son, my Lord, say not thou 
 hast gone so far thou canst not return! 
 What canst thou ask of me that I will not 
 grant unto thee? Nay, even judge thou 
 me, and if thou desirest all the heavens 
 and earth in my place, I will abdicate unto 
 thee, and become thy lowest servant, or 
 whatsoever thou wilt put upon me. 
 
 Ahura returned this answer: Because 
 I have nothing against thee, I have alien- 
 ated myself and my kingdom from thee. I 
 desire not thy kingdom, nor even mine 
 own. Behold, I looked upon thee, and 
 thou wert pure and holy. I looked upon 
 the kingdoms of heaven, and the kingdoms 
 of earth, and they were impure and unholy. 
 Then came certain brother Lords to me, 
 most wise Lords, and they said: A less 
 pure God, a less holy God, would be more 
 efficient. So, I was persuaded to my 
 course. 
 
 God replied to this, saying: Behold, we 
 have a Diva! Why spakest thou not thus 
 before me, face to face? And thy three 
 great Lords were also Divas; and they 
 were silent on the matter likewise. The 
 Div would have decreed whatever was 
 wise. Because I saw not thy thoughts, nor 
 thy Lords; ye have heaped shame upon me. 
 How shall I send my record to etherea? 
 
 Shall I say: Behold, certain Lords con- 
 sulted clandestinely, and then concluded to 
 overthrow the Creator? And they have 
 gone and set up a kingdom of their own, 
 calling it the All Highest? 
 
 Hear me yet, and I will endeavor to 
 speak wisely unto thee. Thy messengers 
 notified me some days since that thou 
 hadst repudiated Jehovih, saying: There is 
 no All Highest Person; I can make myself 
 high as the highest! And thereupon thy 
 messenger gave me a map, saying: Behold 
 thou, here are the boundaries of the king- 
 dom of Ahura'Mazda, the All Sufficient 
 High God! I looked over the map, and 
 beheld its great extent; and I said: He is 
 a great God that can rule over all that! 
 For I knew thee and thy education, which 
 is as great as any Lord's in atmospherea. 
 And thou knowest thou canst not control 
 even a plateau! Canst thou raise thine 
 hand and stay the a'ji, or the ji'ay, or the 
 nebulas? Scarce canst thou change a sin- 
 gle current of wind; nor canst thou cast a 
 drouth on any land. And yet thou know- 
 est there are Gods who can do these 
 things by a motion of one finger! How 
 darest thou, then, proclaim thyself an All 
 Sufficient High God? 
 
 But I will not rebuke the, for I desire 
 thy love and thy help. I would win thee 
 by any sacrifice I can make. Behold, there 
 is great darkness in heaven and on earth. 
 Wherein I may be short, I will rebuke my- 
 self in after ages. I pray thee, then, return 
 to me, and make exactions upon me and 
 my kingdoms. With thy loss, behold, the 
 Diva is broken up. With thy dismember- 
 ment of heavens, others will follow. Alas, 
 I will not look upon even that which my 
 soul seeth. I plead for thy love and for 
 thy assistance. Nevertheless, if the All 
 Highest Light, for the All Best Good, 
 showeth thee that thou art right, come not 
 to me! I know the Great Spirit will sus- 
 tain me, even though my soul is well nigh 
 crushed to pieces to the loss of so fair a 
 love. 
 
 To this Ahura replied: How came the 
 thought to me to do as I did, if it be not 
 the wisest, best course? 
 
 God replied: Because of the long reign 
 of ji'ay, thou wert inoculated with dark- 
 ness; even as a mortal, on a rainy day, los- 
 eth his patience to be wise. 
 
216 
 
 CYCLE OF FBAGAPATT1 
 
 Then Ahura sent the following message: 
 I have been patient in mine answers; but 
 now I will speak plainly. First of all, thou 
 art All Pure, and Most Wise, above all 
 other Gods. For more than two hundred 
 years I have been a faithful Lord unto thee 
 and thy kingdoms. At first the Great 
 Light came to thee, and a voice came out 
 of the light! Then I feared, and was awe- 
 stricken. Because I believed thee so near 
 the Creator, thine every word and act were 
 to me worshipful. At last I rebuked my- 
 self, saying to myself: Fool! Givest thou 
 worship to man born of woman? Remem- 
 ber thy Creator only. 
 
 But the times changed; ji'ay fell upon 
 heaven and earth. Our glorious kingdoms 
 were cast down by the great darkness. 
 Then I reasoned, saying to myself: Behold, 
 when we were in light, Jehovih's Voice 
 spake unto us. When the darkness came, 
 the Voice came not. We sat in the Diva, 
 in the altar circle, praying for light from 
 the Father, but it came not. And I said: 
 More we need the Voice in darkness than 
 in light. For a hundred years we saw not 
 the light of the Voice, nor heard the Voice 
 speak. Thou hast said thou heardst it in 
 thy soul! Who is there in heaven or earth 
 that cannot say as much? In my soul I no 
 longer believe there is an All Person. 
 There are great Gods, a thousand times 
 greater than I; but there is the end! Yea, 
 some of those great Gods may have cast 
 the ji'ay upon us. But that is not my mat- 
 ter. There is room for thee and thy peo- 
 ple; here is room for me and my people. 
 
 Jehovih spake to God, saying: Answer 
 thou not Ahura more. Behold, I will in- 
 terpret him to thee: He will even yet per- 
 suade angels and mortals that it was he 
 who inspired Zarathustra. But he seeth it 
 not himself. Permit him, therefore, to go 
 his way; neither take sorrow to thy soul. 
 Have I not, from the lowest to the high- 
 est, given unto all men even that which 
 they desired? Behold, I can use even bad 
 men in the far future! 
 
 Ahura will strive to walk upright for a 
 long time, but because he hath cut Me off, 
 he will also cut himself off in time to come. 
 Behold, a mortal man striveth for riches 
 honorably, and when he is rich, his riches 
 cut him off from Me by the ruin he casteth 
 upon his competitors. Nor can he extri- 
 
 cate himself. Even so will it be with 
 Ahura: His kingdom and his sub-king- 
 doms, and his multitude of officers will 
 cause him to enslave hundreds of millions 
 of drujas, and they will draw him into a 
 vortex from which he cannot escape. 
 
 So God answered Ahura no more; but 
 neveretheless, his heart was full of sorrow. 
 Now, when the time of the meeting of 
 Diva came, God foresaw that not more 
 than one-half of them would be present, 
 and he feared the questions that might 
 come up. But Jehovih said unto him: Fear 
 not, My Son; for even though many more 
 leave thee, yet shalt thou preserve the Diva 
 to the end of this cycle. 
 
 So it came to pass that Jehovih stilled 
 the tongues of all the Gods and Lords of 
 the Diva in reference to Ahura, even as if 
 they had never known him. And Ahura 
 sent quizzers to different Gods and Lords 
 afterward, to learn what action the Diva 
 had taken in his case. But when he was 
 told that he had not been mentioned, he 
 becamed angered, and he swore an oath 
 than he would build the largest of all hea- 
 venly kingdoms. 
 
 Because of the great darkness on hea- 
 ven and earth, God sent hope and promise 
 into all the kigndoms, urging his Lords 
 and his sub-Gods to maintain faith, not 
 only in themselves, but within the hearts of 
 their respective inhabitants. Now, from 
 the time of the secession of Ahura to the 
 next dan would be three hundred years, 
 and God knew this, though the multitudes 
 in heaven and earth knew it not. And God 
 commanded great recreations and extensive 
 labors in order to prevent further dismem- 
 berment. But in the course of a hundred 
 years many were carried away by the ex- 
 travagant stories told about Ahura's king- 
 doms being places of great delight, and of 
 ease and idleness. 
 
 Ahura's Lords said unto him: Thou 
 shalt adorn thy kingdom; thy throne and 
 thy capital, Ctusk, shall be the largest and 
 most ornamental of all places in the uni- 
 verse; and our sub-kingdoms shall be 
 places of great delight. And Ahura was 
 persuaded, and began self-glorification, and 
 his Lords with him. And in another hun- 
 dred years Ahura had withdrawn and an- 
 nexed unto himself in heaven the following 
 provinces, with their sub-Gods: Etyisiv, 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 217 
 
 with seventy million souls; Howwak, with 
 one hundred million souls; Hyn, with 
 twenty million souls; D'nayotto, with 
 eighty million souls; Erefrovish, with one 
 hundred and ninety million souls; the 
 whole of the kingdom of Gir-ak-shi, six 
 hundred million souls; the whole of the 
 kingdom of Soo'fwa, with eight hundred 
 million souls. And all of these confederat- 
 ed in the lower heavens, making the king- 
 dom of Ctusk, with Ahura as Mazda in 
 Chief, the central kingdom. 
 
 The Diva was by this reduced to seven 
 members, but these remained faithful. And 
 God kept up the standard of resurrection 
 for yet one hundred years more. And then 
 Jehovih sent a region of dan to Earth, and 
 the Most High heavenly hosts descended 
 in fire-ships and took God and his harvest 
 up to etherea. And with all the misfor- 
 tune that befell God and his Lords, there 
 were, nevertheless, six thousand million 
 Brides and Bridegrooms to Jehovih raised 
 up to the higher heavens. 
 
 Now, when the etherean hosts came for 
 the resurrection, knowing the darkness 
 upon the lower heaven and the earth, they 
 sent otevans, with heralds and trumpeters 
 around the world proclaiming the resurrec- 
 tion at hand, and asking all who chose, to 
 repair to Mouru, in Haraiti. And the 
 word was whispered throughout Ahura's 
 kingdom: What! Then, of a truth, there 
 must be higher heavens than this! Alas, 
 had we been faithful till now, we had been 
 Brides and Bridegrooms! So potent was 
 this disaffection for Ahura, that five of his 
 Lords broke membership, and re-affiliated 
 with God and his kingdoms. And thus 
 matters stood when God's successor came 
 to the throne. 
 
 CHAPTER LV. 
 
 The next dan was five hundred years, 
 and God and his heavenly kingdoms pros- 
 pered before Jehovih. But as to the Lord's 
 kingdoms on earth, and as to mortal king- 
 doms and empires, not much light was 
 manifested in them. 
 
 Ahura, who had thus falsely taken, and 
 was known by, the name of Ahura'Mazda, 
 established Lords to rule over mortals. 
 And these Lords were in direct opposition 
 to God's Lords; for the latter taught the 
 higher heavens and the All Person, Jeho- 
 
 vih, or Ormazd, according to the language 
 of mortals. But Ahura's Lords taught only 
 one heavenly kingdom, which was Ahura's, 
 called Ctusk, the All Holy Highest Hea- 
 ven. 
 
 God's Lords inspired mortals to ever- 
 lasting resurrection; Ahura's Lords in- 
 spired mortals to Ahura's kingdom, and 
 there the end. And since mortals had 
 built temples for their rab'bahs, who were 
 gifted with su'is, the spirits congregated in 
 the temples, and oft appeared in sar'gis, 
 teaching openly their several doctrines. 
 And the ashars that labored for Ahura ex- 
 tolled the glory and the delight of Ctusk. 
 and the wonderful majesty and power of 
 Ahura. But the ashars of God's hosts in- 
 spired and taught of the Unapproachable 
 Great Spirit. 
 
 For five hundred years were God's 
 hosts confronted with this opposition; and 
 mortals became divided into two great 
 classes of worshippers, especially in Vind'- 
 yu. And just before God's successor came 
 into dominion, he propounded the matter 
 in Diva; whereupon all the members spake 
 at great length. 
 
 Div decreed: Whatsoever is worship- 
 ped, having comprehensible form or figure, 
 is an idol. He that worshippeth an idol, 
 whether of stone or wood, or whether it 
 be a man or an angel, sinneth against the 
 Creator. This was given unto all of God's 
 Lords, and by them to the ashars, and 
 commanded to be taught to mortals by in- 
 spiration and otherwise. 
 
 When the time of dan came there were 
 seven thousand million Brides and Bride- 
 grooms raised up to Jehovih's emancipated 
 worlds, and the succeeding God and Lords 
 came into dominion under more favorable 
 auspices, but which were not to continue 
 long. The Diva had extended to fourteen 
 members; and God's Lords had succeeded 
 in securing kingdoms in the principal parts 
 of Jaffeth, Vind'yu and Arabin'ya. On the 
 other hand, the emissaries of Ahura, the 
 false, had been most active in extending 
 the kingdom of their idol. Ahura was 
 most cunning with the last Divan act: In- 
 stead of interdicting it, he altered it, so it 
 read as follows: Whatsoever is worship- 
 ped having comprehensible form or figure, 
 is an idol. He that worshippeth an idol, 
 whether of stone or wood, or whether it 
 
218 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATT1 
 
 be a man or an angel, sinneth against the 
 All Highest, who is personated in Ahura'- 
 Mazda, the Holy Begotten Son of all cre- 
 ated creations! 
 
 Then Ahura, determined to found a 
 second heaven, decreeing to his emissaries 
 as follows: Behold Gir-ak-shi, the heaven- 
 ly region belonging above the lands of He- 
 leste! Thither will I build a new heaven, 
 greater than all other heavens, save Ctusk. 
 And when Gir-ak-shi is well founded, I 
 will people it with many millions of mighty 
 angels. And my hosts shall descend to the 
 corporeal earth; to the lands of Par'si'e, 
 and Arabin'ya, and they shall obsess mor- 
 tals day and night, and inspire them to go 
 to Heleste, where they shall build great 
 cities and kingdoms unto me and my hosts. 
 
 And when these things are fulfilled, be- 
 hold, I will send my hosts to Uropa, and 
 build there also heavenly kingdoms and 
 mortal kingdoms; and when these are es- 
 tablished, behold, I will send into other 
 countries, one after another, until my hea- 
 venly kingdoms embrace all places, and 
 until all the earth is mine. For I will be 
 God over all, and ye that labor with me 
 shall be my Lords and sub-Gods forever. 
 And my kingdoms and your kingdoms shall 
 be bestowed with glories and ornaments, 
 the like of which has never yet been. 
 Neither shall the Gods of other worlds 
 come against me or mine to carry away my 
 people. They shall no longer flatter them, 
 calling them Brides and Bridegrooms to 
 Jehovih, a thing none can see or compre- 
 hend. 
 
 So Ahura and his emissaries went to 
 work to carry out these decrees, and in 
 two hundred years they had inspired the 
 Parsi'e'ans and the Arabin'yans to emigrate 
 by tens of thousands to the land of Heleste, 
 which was inhabited by Druks and wander- 
 ers, full of wickedness. Ahura inspired his 
 immigrants to fall upon the native Druks, 
 and destroy them. Wherein had come to 
 pass that which Jehovih spake in Mouru, 
 saying: They who cannot be risen by per- 
 suasion may be aroused by less scrupulous 
 masters. For whilst Ahura's hosts were 
 slaying the Druks of Heleste by tens of 
 thousands, God's heavenly hosts were re- 
 ceiving their spirits and conducting them 
 away to other atmospherean regions. 
 
 These, then, were the divisions of mor- 
 tals on earth at this time: First, the Thins, 
 who were the original Faithists. And they 
 were capable of prophecies and miracles 
 to such an extent that all other people call- 
 ed them the sacred people. Neither did the 
 great warriors of other nations and peoples 
 molest them. The I'hins lived secluded 
 and separate from all other people. Nev- 
 ertheless, they were the seed of everlasting 
 life on Earth, and the foundation for rais- 
 ing up prophets and seers unto other peo- 
 ples. Even as the mother of Zarathustra 
 was of the I'hins, so was it with all men 
 and women born into the world with su'is 
 and sar'gis. For being near Jehovih, they 
 had faith in Him, and Him only. The sec- 
 ond race, equally ancient, was the Druks, 
 the barbarian hordes, incapable of inspira- 
 tion, save for their stomachs' sake. And 
 though they were told a thousand times: 
 Behold, ye have a spiritual body! they un- 
 derstood not, cared not, and forgot it a 
 moment after. And though it were said to 
 them: Behold, there is a Great Spirit! they 
 heard it not, nor understood, nor heeded 
 the words. The third race was the Ihuans, 
 born betwixt the I'hins and the Druks. To 
 this race, in its early days, a commandment 
 was given by God not to marry with the 
 Druks, and they had maintained that law 
 amongst themselves by the sign of cir- 
 cumcision. This, then, was the first begin- 
 ning of persecution against Faithists in 
 Jehovih. 
 
 When Ahura usurped his heavenly king- 
 dom, and appointed guardian angels over 
 mortals, he determined to leave nothing 
 undone in order to overthrow the doctrine 
 of Jehovih, the All Person. So he decreed 
 as follows: Since, by the mark of the cir- 
 cumcision, they have pride in being Faith- 
 ists, I will not have circumcision. After 
 the third generation whosoever hath this 
 mark upon him is my enemy. He shall be 
 pursued, and no profit shall fall to his lot. 
 Suffer not little children to be maimed for 
 my sake; rather let them be circumcised in 
 heart. 
 
 And Ahura put no restriction upon his 
 mortal followers marrying, and it came to 
 pass that those Druks not slain in He- 
 leste married with the worshippers of 
 Ahura. And about this same period of 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 219 
 
 
 time Jehovih brought Earth into a light 
 region for two hundred years. And when 
 the Diva was in session, Jehovih's Voice 
 spake to Div, saying: Let My Sons be 
 not cast down because of the sins of Ahura; 
 rather be wise and appropriate from his 
 wickedness that which will be good in the 
 end. For as it was not lawful for My peo- 
 ple to marry with the Druks, behold, 
 Ahura hath made a law on his own account 
 against circumcision, and it shall come to 
 pass that by their sins even Druks shall 
 be raised up to learn of Me and My king- 
 doms. 
 
 And it came to pass that a fourth race 
 rose up in the world, and it was mongrel, 
 being dark and short and less noble. The 
 I'huans were red, and brown, tall and ma- 
 jestic; the I'hins small, white, and yellow. 
 And Jehovih put these marks upon His 
 peoples that the races might be read in 
 thousands of years. Ahura perceived this. 
 One of his Lords said unto him: Thou 
 Ahura, soughtest to disprove Jehovih in 
 this. Ahura said: 
 
 Behold, there are two senses to all men, 
 the es and the corpor. When one is in 
 abeyance the other acteth. This is su'is. 
 Call together thy companions, and find a 
 remedy; for I will prove all things in heav- 
 en and Earth. 
 
 For fifty years Ahura and his hosts 
 tried by other means to have born into the 
 world a great prophet and seer, but failed. 
 Ahura said: I know the way of the loo'is; 
 They decoy the Thin men to go with the 
 I'huan damsels. But I have sworn there is 
 no Jehovih; how, then, shall I go to the 
 sacred people? And, after all, such a 
 prophet might prove treacherous to my 
 kingdom. So Ahura commanded his emis- 
 saries to weigh the matter for another 
 fifty years, and then to solve the problem. 
 
 So Ahura's emissaries inspired thous- 
 ands of experiments to be made, whereby a 
 prophet or seer could be made amongst 
 the mongrels. And Jehovih suffered them 
 to discover that by pressing down the 
 front brain of infants they could be made 
 capable of su'is. And infants were 
 strapped on boards, and another board 
 strapped on the forehead to press the head 
 flat; and every day the headboard was 
 strapped on anew, tighter and tighter, un- 
 til the forehead, which holdeth the corpo- 
 
 real judgment, was pressed flat, and the 
 judgment of the brain driven up into 
 light-perceiving regions at the top of the 
 head. 
 
 Ahura thus raised up prophets and . 
 seers, and they were willing instruments in 
 his hands. And he sent into all the divis- 
 ions of the Earth tens of thousands of 
 angels, teaching this to mortals, thus lay- 
 ing down the foundation for his grand 
 scheme of reducing heaven and Earth into 
 his own kingdoms. 
 
 Jehovih spake in the Diva, saying: 
 Even this permit ye. The Druks will heed 
 more what one of their own people saith 
 as a seer, than if the same thing were said 
 a hundred times over by an I'hin. 
 
 CHAPTER LVI. 
 
 The next resurrection was six thousand 
 million souls, and God and his Lords and 
 his sub-Gods had maintained the Diva, 
 and maintained all the orders of heaven 
 and the divisions and kingdoms, except 
 what had confederated with Ahura and 
 his kingdoms. And God and his Lords 
 had preserved their colleges, schools, fac- 
 tories, hospitals and nurseries, and their 
 standard in the temples with mortals. And 
 of mortals who remained Faithists, the 
 I'hins and Lords and ashars held com- 
 mand for the glory of Jehovih. But of 
 the mongrels, who were multiplying fast 
 on Earth, Ahura, his Lords and ashars 
 held command. 
 
 But alas for the grade of Ahura's host 
 in heaven! In less than one thousand 
 years he had abolished his colleges and 
 schools, save what pertained to acquiring 
 a knowledge of Earth and atmospherea. 
 He taught not his people to look higher 
 for other worlds, and herein he began the 
 work which was in after time to be his 
 own downfall. 
 
 Jehovih had said: Whoever provideth 
 not a philosophy for the endless acquisi- 
 tion of knowledge, dammeth up the run- 
 ning waters I have made. Suffer Ahura 
 to teach what he will; the time will come 
 when he will be obliged to find an outlet 
 for My created beings. And rather than 
 acknowledge Me in My Person, he will 
 profess to send souls back to earth to be 
 re-incarnated. 
 
220 
 
 CYCLE OF FBAGAPATTI 
 
 Ahura's heavenly kingdoms numbered 
 more than six thousand million souls, and 
 half of them were little better than drujas, 
 being slaves to certain masters, doing 
 • whatsoever they were bidden without 
 knowing, or desiring to know, the reason 
 therefor. 
 
 As yet there were six hundred years to 
 pass before another dawn of dan, in which 
 God, his Lords and their people had faith 
 that Jehovih's hosts would come from on 
 high to help deliver heaven and Earth 
 out of darkness. On the other hand, 
 Ahura, although having been taught the 
 cycles in his early education, spread the 
 word abroad in heaven and Earth that 
 there were no cycles; that, as things are, 
 they had been, and would continue to be. 
 
 So, as much as God's hosts prophesied 
 a coming light, Ahura and his hosts 
 prophesied that nothing of the kind would 
 come. Ahura, moreover, sent the follow- 
 ing order to his Lords, to be taught in 
 heaven and earth, to wit: Am I not he 
 who inspired Zarathustra, the All Pure? 
 Spake I not to him, face to face? Are not 
 all created things mine own? Who, then, 
 knoweth but that I will light up the world 
 again? Behold, I am the Personation of 
 Ormzad, Who was Voidance, but now is 
 me, Ahura' Mazda. In me only is life and 
 death and resurrection. Whosoever call- 
 eth: Ahura'Mazda, Ahura'Mazda! is mine, 
 and within my keeping. Suffer not thy 
 judgment to be warped by prophets who 
 hope for impossible things. 
 
 In the sixth dan and the eightieth year, 
 Ahura's numberless heavenly kingdoms 
 began to be disturbed by his sub-Gods' 
 lack of advancement, and so, sixty of them 
 congregated together and appealed to 
 Ahura, saying: 
 
 In reverence to thee, O thou All High- 
 est God! Many hundreds of years have we 
 served thee. And we have paid thee trib- 
 ute whenever thou hast required it of us. 
 We have helped to adorn thy capital, 
 Ctusk; with diamonds and pearls we have 
 laid thy streets. Thy mansions have we 
 built with .precious gems. And as to thy 
 throne, what one of us is there but hath 
 contributed to glorify it before thee? Yea, 
 in all things have we been most loyal and 
 tributary to thee. Nor are we unmindful 
 of our own wisdom. We remember thy 
 
 arguments of old. Thou didst say to thy 
 God: Behold, thou hast long promised 
 we should be raised to more exalted king- 
 doms, but, behold, two hundred years 
 have elapsed, and there is no advancement. 
 This thou didst use as an argument for se- 
 ceding from thy God's kingdoms. Behold, 
 now we have served thee and thy king- 
 doms more than a thousand years. We 
 come to thee to know wherein we can now 
 serve thee that thou mayest exalt us into 
 kingdoms commensurate with our wisdom 
 and power? 
 
 To this Ahura replied, saying: Most 
 humble and well-meaning Lords and sub- 
 Gods, why came ye not before me, face to 
 face? Why have ye consorted in private? 
 Was not my capital, and my throne, the 
 proper place for your argument? Had ye 
 suggested anything whereby advancement 
 was possible unto you, I had answered 
 your demands. 
 
 But his Lords and sub-Gods came not 
 before him, but sent this answer, to wit: 
 As thou promised us advancement pro- 
 vided we served thee, so promised we our 
 ashars, and our marshals and captains. 
 Now they come to us, saying: For hun- 
 dreds of years have we served: Give us 
 preferment. But we have nothing to give. 
 Think not, O God, that we are unwise, or 
 that we hunger and come begging; or that 
 diadems, or gems, or costly thrones, would 
 satisfy us. We know what thou hast to 
 give — promises! We know every corner 
 of thy vast kingdom, and that all places 
 are full, and that thou canst not exalt us. 
 Wherefore, then, should we have spoken 
 before the throrie in Ctusk? Would not 
 our voices but breed mischief amongst 
 thy other Gods and Lords? Rather let us 
 err ourselves, than that we should injure 
 thee and thy kingdoms. Hear us then, O 
 Ahura'Mazda: 
 
 Whence the desire for endless advance- 
 ment if this heaven be all? If a little 
 knowledge giveth power, wherein is not 
 great knowledge desirable? We have 
 destroyed our great colleges, saying: 
 Higher than we, ye must not go! Remem- 
 ber thou, O Ahura, we were students un- 
 der the Faithist's God and Lords when 
 thou secedest; and thou saidst unto us: 
 Behold the long training of your course; 
 a curriculum of a thousand years! Come 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 221 
 
 with me; I will give you kingdoms at 
 once! So we came to thee, and we were 
 suddenly puffed up with great pride. Be- 
 hold now, we look abroad, and the same 
 stars shine upon us. We have not visited 
 them. We know not how to go so far. 
 The countless etherean worlds lay far be- 
 yond ours. We are told that they are hab- 
 itable. We know not. We have no knowl- 
 edge enabling us to get away from these 
 heavens; save, indeed, back to the filthy 
 Earth. 
 
 To this Ahura replied, saying: It is 
 plain to me ye are beside yourselves. This 
 heaven is good enough. If there be higher 
 heavens, let them come or stay. I go not 
 to them. But, in truth, with your present 
 convictions, I would be an unwise God 
 not to grant you dismissal from my king- 
 doms. 
 
 This ended the matter, and the sixty 
 sub-Gods then deliberated on their course, 
 and finally sent to God, in Mouru, the fol- 
 lowing address: In reverence to thee, 
 God of the Faithists in Jehovih: We have 
 had sub-kingdoms, and know our rank is 
 beneath thine. But we are reaching out- 
 ward and onward; to thee we submit our 
 cause. First, then, there are sixty of us, 
 of the rank of sub-Gods, and we hold seven 
 hundred million subjects. Disaffection 
 hath risen betwixt ourselves and Ahura'- 
 Mazda, from whom we are alienated. But 
 shall we unite our hosts into a new king- 
 dom of our own, or affiliate with some 
 mighty God, that is our question? What 
 preferment canst thou give unto us if we 
 turn our subjects over to thee? 
 
 God answered them, saying: Brothers, 
 hear me patiently, and consider my words. 
 First, then I am not God of the Faithists, 
 nor of any other people, but God of the lo- 
 cality which was assigned me by the Fath- 
 er, through His Son. Neither can ye give 
 your subjects unto me; for by my service 
 to Jehovih I can have nothing, and, least 
 of all, my brothers and sisters. 
 
 In the next place, I can give you no 
 preferment; I have nothing, neither to 
 give nor to sell. Wherein the Father giv- 
 eth me wisdom and power, I impart them 
 unto others. Besides, until ye have also 
 learned to know that ye have nothing, nei- 
 ther subjects nor jewels, also desiring 
 nothing, save wisdom and strength to im- 
 
 part to others, how hope ye to gain ad- 
 mittance into my places of learning? 
 
 And lastly, since ye have kingdoms of 
 your own already, raise ye them up, and 
 thus prove unto me your just merit. 
 
 To this the confederated Gods replied: 
 What meanest thou? That Gods and an- 
 gels must labor for others than them- 
 selves forever, and receive nothing there- 
 for? 
 
 God answered them: Even so; save 
 and except ye shall receive an abundance 
 of happiness, and it will endure forever! 
 
 Here the matter ended for two years; 
 and the sub-Gods, understood not the 
 plan of Jehovih's kingdoms. But their 
 kingdoms were out of sorts, having no 
 head; and hundreds of thousands of their 
 subjects were deserting them and return- 
 ing down to the corporeal Earth, becom- 
 ing wanderers and drujas. Finally the 
 sub-Gods again appealed to God in Mou- 
 ru, inquiring: 
 
 Is not God a God, whether he be for 
 another or for himself? Behold, we have 
 helped to build up Ahura; he is a mighty 
 God! If we affiliate with thee, we will la- 
 bor to build thee up also. Yea, we will 
 adorn thy throne and thy great heavenly 
 city. But since we have been sub-Gods 
 we desire not to enter thy service as 
 menials and servants. What, then, shall 
 we do, that both thou and ourselves may 
 have honor and glory? 
 
 God answered them, saying: Ye can- 
 not serve me; I have no servants. Serve 
 ye Jehovih only. Behold, we are all broth- 
 ers, being sons of the same Great Spirit. 
 As for building me up, sufficient is it for 
 me that He who created me will build me 
 up according to my just deserts. As for 
 adorning my throne, ye can only bring 
 substance to it from the lower kingdoms, 
 which I desire not. Why will ye adorn 
 the heavenly city of Mouru? Behold, it 
 is but a resting place on the great journey 
 to the kingdoms of endless light. In a few 
 hundred years, at most, not only I but my 
 hosts will rise from this place to return 
 not to it forever. 
 
 And lastly, to be a self-God, as is Ahu- 
 ra, is to own all things possible, and hold 
 on thereto; to be a God as I am, is to own 
 nothing, and to retain nothing; but to be 
 forever giving away all one receiveth. 
 
222 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 Said I not to you before: Begin with your 
 own hosts and exalt them. Inasmuch as 
 ye asked for subjects, behold, the Father 
 gave unto you. Think not that he will suf- 
 fer ye now to cast them aside or barter 
 them off. Nor shall ye suffer them to be- 
 come wanderers, nor to return back to the 
 Earth as drujas. As much as ye raise up 
 the kingdoms that have been intrusted to 
 you, so will ye also be raised up. 
 
 Nevertheless, if ye desire to affiliate 
 with Jehovih's kingdoms, the way is open 
 unto you; and your first labor would be, 
 to gather together all your own hosts, and 
 to labor amongst them, teaching them wis- 
 dom, strength and individuality equal to 
 yourselves; and when the lowest of them 
 all is so risen, then can ye enter the king- 
 doms of the Father. As ye have had the 
 profit of your subjects for hundreds of 
 years, return ye now unto them service 
 for service. Jehovih is Justice! 
 
 The sub-Gods made no answer to this 
 for a while, but Jehovih moved upon their 
 hearts, and they perceived wisdom and 
 justice, and they repented, bitterly be- 
 wailing the loss of the thousand years in 
 which they had espoused kingdoms. But 
 they had neither power nor learning suf- 
 ficient to extricate themselves; so they pe- 
 titioned God for more light. Whereupon, 
 God affiliated them, and appointed Vishnu 
 Lord unto them and their hosts. 
 
 And Vishnu took three hundred thous- 
 and laborers, and went with them to Mai- 
 traias, a heavenly place to the west of Vind'- 
 ias, a heavenly place to the west of Vind'- 
 yu, and there established a Lordly divis- 
 ion, with messengers in connection with 
 Mouru, in Haraiti. And Vishnu sent his 
 captains with sufficient forces, under com- 
 mand of the sub-Gods, to arrest such as 
 had become wandering spirits, or had re- 
 turned to the Earth as drujas. And whilst 
 these were on this duty, Vishnu organized 
 his Lord-dom, and this was the first Lord- 
 dom established in heaven, as the lowest 
 kingdoms had heretofore been on the 
 Earth and with mortals. 
 
 Jehovih's Voice had spoken to God in 
 Diva, saying: Behold, the time is Coming 
 when the sub-kingdoms of Ahura, the 
 false, will begin to revolt. And they have 
 thousands of millions of slaves who will 
 strive to go back to the Earth to dwell 
 
 with mortals. They dwell in darkness, 
 and thou shalt not suffer them to regain 
 the Earth, lest the races of men go down 
 in darkness, even as before the submersion 
 of Pan. For which reason, thou shalt es- 
 tablish a Lord-dom, and raise a sufficient 
 army to shield the inhabitants of the 
 earth. And thou shalt make Vishnu thy 
 Lord in My behalf. 
 
 When it was known in Ctusk, the heav- 
 enly place of Ahura, that sixty sub-Gods, 
 with their hosts, had affiliated with Jeho- 
 vih's kingdoms, general disobedience to 
 Ahura was manifested by the remaining 
 sub-Gods, of whom there were yet more 
 than eight hundred, who had within their 
 dominions upward of two thousand mil- 
 lion angels, all slaves, with knowledge of 
 no other heavenly place than the small pre- 
 cinct where they had been kept in drudg- 
 ery hundreds of years. 
 
 The Voice of Jehovih came to God, 
 saying: My Son, take advantage of the 
 seed of disaffection in Ahura's kingdom. 
 Send thou an otevan of great power 
 throughout the heavenly kingdoms. And 
 thou shalt put trumpeters in the otevan, 
 and they shall prophesy the dawn of dan 
 within two hundred years. 
 
 God perceived, and he had his workmen 
 build an otevan of great power; and he 
 provided trumpeters, and sent them forth, 
 saying to them: Ten years shall ye travel 
 in the heavenly places around about the 
 whole earth, prophesying. In less than 
 two hundred years Jehovih's etherean 
 hosts are coming. Prepare ye for the res- 
 urrection; His kingdoms are open for the 
 weary; His Lords and Gods will give you 
 rest! 
 
 Ahura summoned his council of false 
 Gods, hoping they might invent a remedy 
 to counteract so great a prophecy. And he 
 and his Council sat forty days and forty 
 nights in their heavenly capital; but there 
 was no high light amongst them, merely 
 each one giving his opinion. But at the 
 end of forty days Ahura resolved upon the 
 following method, to send a prophecy of 
 his own. Accordingly, he had an otevan 
 built, and sent trumpeters forth with these 
 words, to wit: 
 
 I, Ahura'Mazda, Only Son of the All 
 Nothing Presence, personated in my Very- 
 Self, proclaim from my All Highest Heav- 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 223 
 
 enly Judgment Seat! Hear my words, O 
 ye Gods, and tremble! Hear me, O ye 
 angels, and fall down! Hear me, O mor- 
 tals, and bow down to my decrees. Be- 
 hold, I sent my fire-ship, prophesying that 
 in less than two hundred years I would 
 come in a dawn of dan! But ye obeyed 
 not; ye were defiant before me! Then I 
 swore an oath against all the world! Ye 
 shall know my power! Then I came down 
 out of my holy, high heaven; and I am al- 
 ready come. Now is the dawn of dan! I 
 send my trumpeters first; after them come 
 my lashers and enchainers, whose captain 
 is Daevas, whose God is Anra'mainyus. I 
 will have mine, and I will give Druks and 
 drujas by thousands and tens of thous- 
 ands over to everlasting torments. 
 
 Ahura's Gods had become acquainted 
 with him, during the hundreds and hun- 
 dreds of years, and they no longer trem- 
 bled at his commandments. In their 
 hearts they knew he could not do what 
 he professed; they knew his prophecies 
 were vain boastings. Yea, his very trum- 
 peters believed not what they proclaimed. 
 
 CHAPTER LVII. 
 
 In the one hundred and eightieth year 
 preceding the dawn of dan; that is, two 
 thousand nine hundred and twenty years 
 after Fragapatti and Zarathustra, Jehovih 
 sent swift messengers with six thousand 
 etherean loo'is from the Nirvanian fields of 
 Chen'gotha in etherea. And the swift 
 messengers brought the following message 
 to God of Earth: 
 
 Greeting to thee, God of the red star 
 and her heavens, in the name of Jehovih! 
 By the love and wisdom of Cpenta-armij, 
 Nirvanian Goddess of Haot-saiti, we speak 
 in the Father's name. Peace and joy be 
 unto thee, O God, and to thy sub-Gods 
 and Lords, and Lord Gods and Goddesses. 
 One hundred and eighty years of darkness 
 will now come upon thy kingdoms. And 
 then the darkness will go away, and dawn 
 will be in the place thereof. And in the 
 time of the great darkness, behold, the na- 
 tions of the earth will go down. But the 
 light of the Father's Presence will not be 
 destroyed. A little seed shall endure 
 amongst mortals. That that seed may be 
 propitious to the labor of thy Goddess, 
 who will come in that day, she sendeth 
 
 herewith two thousand etherean loo'is for 
 Vind'yu; two thousand for Jaffeth, and 
 two thousand for Arabin'ya. And thy God- 
 dess decreeth that thou shalt appoint unto 
 these loo'is one of thy Gods, high raised, 
 and he shall go with them, and his labor 
 shall be with them. And the business of 
 this, thy God, and of these, my loo'is, 
 shall be to raise up heirs and followers, 
 who shall be grown to maturity when I 
 come. For through these that they raise 
 up will I deliver the Father's chosen out of 
 the afflictions that will be upon them in 
 that day. 
 
 To this God replied: In the name of Je- 
 hovih, greeting and love unto Cpenta-ar- 
 mij, Goddess of Haot-saiti. I receive thy 
 loo'is with joy, and I appoint unto them 
 my favored God, Yima, God of a thousand 
 years' tuition, namesake of Yima, son of 
 Vivanho, the sweet singer. 
 
 So the swift messengers, with due cere- 
 monies, left the six thousand etherean loo'- 
 is and then departed. And God sent mes- 
 sengers to Yima, commanding him to come 
 to Mouru at once, deputing his assistant 
 God to take his place and retain it until 
 dawn. So Yima appeared presently before 
 the throne of God, and the latter instructed 
 him in all that had been commanded from 
 on high. And Yima sent word to his for- 
 mer kingdom for a thousand of his attend- 
 ants, and they came also. Meanwhile, 
 Yima conferred with the loo'is, who ex- 
 plained to him all that they required. And 
 after this they provided a piedmazr, and 
 descended to the earth, to Jaffeth and 
 Vind'yu and Arabin'ya. 
 
 And Yima stationed his piedmazr mid- 
 way betwixt the three countries, in the first 
 plateau above the clouds, and called the 
 place Hored, in honor of the first heaven- 
 ly kingdom on the earth. And when he 
 had founded his place and named it, he 
 sent word to God, Jehovih's Son, who gave 
 him five hundred messengers, mostly col- 
 lege students. And God gave them, to re- 
 turn, heine currents, so the ethereans could 
 be supplied with regimen of their own or- 
 der. 
 
 Yima made the watches twenty-four 
 hours, changing at sunrise every morning, 
 and arranged so that one-half was on watch 
 and the other half remained as relief watch. 
 And he called in all ashars from the regions 
 
224 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 of mortals where he designed labor; and 
 when they had assembled in Hored, he thus 
 addressed them, saying: 
 
 Behold, it is yet one hundred and eighty 
 years till the dawn of dan. At that time 
 Cpenta-armij, Goddess of Haot-saiti, situ- 
 ated in the Nirvanian fields of Chen-gotha, 
 will come in the Father's name, and with 
 wisdom and power! But until that time, 
 great darkness will be in heaven and earth, 
 especially in these regions. And it shall 
 come to pass that the worshippers of Ahu- 
 ra'-Mazda, will triumph in these lands. 
 They will build great cities and kingdoms, 
 and they will rule over the I'huans to great 
 injury. But the Druks will be redeemed to 
 everlasting life during this period; for the 
 mongrels will wed with them, and their 
 progeny will be capable of receiving light, 
 even in mortality. But these mongrels 
 will be great savages, nevertheless, and 
 there will be cannibals over all these three 
 great lands. And they that are slain in bat- 
 tle will be cut up and put in vessels with 
 salt, and their flesh will be thus preserved 
 for food. 
 
 But because the I'huans, who are Zara- 
 thustrians, will not war, they will be en- 
 slaved by the mongrels, except those who 
 escape to the forests. And betwixt celibacy 
 and torments, the Zarathustrians will have 
 great suffering and bondage, and many of 
 them will be discouraged and lose faith in 
 the Creator. . But that their seed may 
 be preserved and delivered out of 
 bondage, ye shall raise up many who are 
 capable of su'is; and in the time of dawn 
 they shall be rescued from their enemies. 
 Behold, here are present etherean loo'is 
 who will go with you throughout these 
 lands and survey the people, and provide 
 also for such great lights as shall lead the 
 people. 
 
 After Yima thus instructed the ashars in 
 a general way, he handed them over to the 
 loo'is, who divided them into companies of 
 thousands, and each loo'is had one com- 
 pany of ashars. And when this was com- 
 pleted they departed out of Hored, going 
 to their several places. 
 
 In eleven days thereafter, behold, a'ji 
 began to fall on heaven and earth. The 
 belt of meteoris gave up its stones, and 
 showers of them rained down on the earth, 
 and the sun became as a red ball of fire, 
 
 and remained so for one hundred and six- 
 ty-six years. And the peoples of Arabin'ya 
 and Vind'yu and Jaffeth fell from holiness; 
 the Zarathustrians gave up celibacy by 
 hundreds of thousands, and married, and 
 begot children in great numbers; many 
 women giving birth to twenty, and some 
 even to five and twenty children. And 
 some men were the fathers of seventy 
 children, and not a few even of a hundred. 
 And the Zarathustrians, even the Faith- 
 ists with the mark of circumcision, went 
 and married with the mongrels, and they 
 with the Druks, so that the foundations of 
 caste were broken -up. So great was the 
 power of a'ji that even the I'hins oft broke 
 their vows and lived clandestinely with the 
 world's people, begetting offspring in great 
 numbers, not eligible to enter their sacred 
 cities. And yet mortals saw not the a'ji; 
 they saw their cities and temples, as it 
 were, sinking in the ground; but they sank 
 not; it was the a'ji falling and condensing. 
 
 Jehovih had said: Whatsoever I give 
 that feedeth corpor, inspireth man to cor- 
 por; whatsoever I give that feedeth the es, 
 inspireth man to es. And in the days of a'ji, 
 neither angels nor men can inspire mortals 
 with spiritual things, only they that are or- 
 ganically grown in spirit can withstand. 
 
 CHAPTER LVIII. 
 
 Jehovih said: When a'ji cometh near a 
 dawn of dan, let My loo'is be swift in duty; 
 far-seeing in the races of men. I not only 
 break up the old foundations of temples 
 and cities in those days, but the foundations 
 of the abuse of the caste of men. My 
 Voice is upon the races of men. To-day I 
 say: Preserve ye the caste of men: marry 
 ye thus and so, every one to their own line. 
 To-morrow I say: I will have no caste, for 
 the races are becoming impoverished in 
 blood; marry here, marry there! And I 
 give them a'ji, and their desires break all 
 bounds, and I raise them up giants and 
 strong limbed. 
 
 But in those days My loo'is shall fly 
 swiftly and with great power, that a seed 
 may be preserved unto Me and My king- 
 doms. I come not for one race alone; but 
 unto all men; as by My spirit created I 
 them all alive, so is My hand over them to 
 all eternity. And when the shower of a'ji 
 is over, I send My high-raised Gods and 
 
CYCLE OF FRAG AP ATT I 
 
 225 
 
 Goddesses to gather together My flocks, 
 and to proclaim unto them anew My Wis- 
 dom and Power. And those that have been 
 selected and preserved by My loo'is are the 
 foundations of My new order. 
 
 Ahura took advantage of the age of 
 darkness to sow disbelief in Jehovih broad- 
 cast over earth and heaven, and to gather 
 in his harvest for the glory of his own 
 kingdom. And when war and murder and 
 lust were thus reigning on earth, Ahura 
 decreed to his Lords, and they again to 
 his ashars, and they again to mortals: That 
 all that was required of any man or wo- 
 man was not celibacy, nor carrying of the 
 alms-bowl, nor any sacrifice whatever; but 
 by saying prayers to Ahura'Mazda, and to 
 his Lords, and to praise them was 
 all sufficient; that on the third day 
 after death they would ascend and 
 dwell in Ahura's paradise. Nevertheless, 
 such was not truth, for Ahura's emissaries 
 caught the newborn spirits, and made slaves 
 of them, commanding them to gather regi- 
 men and substance for the glory of Ahura's 
 heavenly kingdoms. 
 
 In the fortieth year before dawn, the 
 Voice of the Father came to God, saying: 
 Mouru is becoming uninhabitable; Haraiti 
 shall be moved into the earth; Zeredho 
 shall be no more. Go not to Ahura with 
 this prophecy; he hath denied My Voice; 
 he will not hear. But I will take the foun- 
 dations of Ctusk from under him, and it 
 shall go down into earth. But thou, O 
 God, My Son, I forewarn; for thy king- 
 doms and thy upraised sons and daugh- 
 ters shall be preserved through the dark- 
 ness. They shall become My Brides and 
 Bridegrooms; I will prepare a place for 
 them in great glory. Call together the 
 Diva, and I will speak before them, and My 
 Voice shall be proclaimed throughout all 
 these heavens, save in the heavens of Ahu- 
 ra, where My Voice shall not be proclaim- 
 ed. 
 
 So God called the Diva, and they sat in 
 the sacred circle, and the light, like a sun, 
 gathered above God's head, saying: Come 
 up above Haraiti; behold, I have broken 
 up meteoris; I have fashioned a new pla- 
 teau in the firmament above; whereon are 
 all things plentiful for heavenly kingdoms. 
 Come hither with thy Lord Gods, and with 
 thy Lords, and I will show thee. And 
 
 when thou hast seen, thou shalt possess 
 the place and begin its inhabitation, taking 
 thither thy hosts of thousands of millions. 
 
 When the Light ceased speaking, it rose 
 upward, and Div and Diva rose also and 
 followed after; and thus Jehovih led them 
 to the plateau; and it was called Craoshivi; 
 and God and his sub-Gods possessed the 
 place, and laid the foundation for inhabita- 
 tion; and after that he and his Lords and 
 Gods returned and counseled on the man- 
 ner of removal. 
 
 At this time there were four thousand 
 million Faithists belonging to God's king- 
 doms, most wise and upright, full of pur- 
 ity and good works. But God and his 
 Lords, and Lord Gods, had not sufficient 
 power to remove so many angels, especial- 
 ly as many of them were yet below grade 
 fifty, and hence inclined downward more 
 than upward. So, after due counsel, God 
 decreed to build an avalanza capable of 
 two hundred thousand, and to begin with 
 the highest grades. 
 
 God foresaw of his own wisdom that 
 he should render unto Vishnu and his 
 Lord-dom a sufficient force to protect the 
 mortals of Vind'yu and Jaffeth and Ara- 
 bin'ya, which were soon to be flooded by 
 the hosts of Ahura being cast down on the 
 earth. Accordingly, he sent for Vishnu, 
 and when Vishnu was before the throne of 
 God, the latter told him all the words Je- 
 hovih had said in regard to Ahura and his 
 kingdoms, to be precipitated to the earth; 
 and told him about the new plateau, Crao- 
 shivi, whither the Light had conducted 
 them. And he further commanded Vishnu 
 to return again to his own place, Maitraias, 
 and survey the dominions, and estimate 
 what force he should require in order to 
 protect the mortals of those three earth 
 divisions. 
 
 Vishnu replied: As to the latter part 
 of thy commandment, O God, I have al- 
 ready accomplished. For I feared these 
 things might come to pass, and I provided 
 accordingly. The number I will require of 
 and above grade eighty will be six hundred 
 million! For I must have at least one an- 
 gel for each mortal. 
 
 God answered him, saying: Thou shalt 
 have eight hundred million! Whereupon, 
 Vishnu returned to his own place, Maitrai- 
 as. God immediately sent forth selectors 
 
226 
 
 CYCLE OF FBAGAPATTI 
 
 with power; and they went into all the 
 colleges at;d factories, and other places of 
 Jehovih's kingdoms, and selected out the 
 eight hundred million angels required by- 
 Vishnu, and God sent them to Maitraias as 
 soon as possible. Of the six hundred 
 million angels taken to Maitraias, who had 
 been subjects to Ahura's sub-Gods, besides 
 a hundred million that had strayed off, be- 
 coming wanderers and drujas, Vishnu 
 found thirty million above grade fifty, and 
 these he* appropriated at once, to work in 
 concert with the sub-Gods in building 
 schools, colleges, factories, and all such 
 places required for the elevation of spirits. 
 When he had thus established order, he 
 called together the sub-Gods and said 
 unto them: 
 
 Think not that I am about to leave you; 
 I am not about to leave you. But ye are 
 not mine to keep; nor are ye hosts of 
 mine. Ye asked for them in the first 
 place, and Jehovih gave them to you. I 
 have restored order; the time is now come 
 when one of you must be chief captain 
 over all the rest, and he shall apportion 
 you according to his highest light. Choose 
 ye, therefore, your captain, and I will give 
 him a judgment seat and badge of office, 
 and ye together shall comprise a Council. 
 For I will make this a kingdom when the 
 majority hath passed grade fifty. 
 
 The sub-Gods deliberated for eight 
 days, but, perceiving the responsibility of 
 leadership, not one of them would accept 
 the place. So they came before Vishnu, 
 saying: We pray thee, release us, and 
 raise thou up another person, and he shall 
 be our captain. 
 
 Vishnu said: A certain man and wo- 
 man married, and they prayed Jehovih for 
 offspring, and he answered their prayer, 
 and they had many children. And now, 
 when they beheld their responsibility to the 
 children, they said unto the Great Spirit: 
 We pray Thee, give the responsibility to 
 some other persons. What think ye of 
 them? 
 
 Now I say unto you, Jehovih heard 
 their first prayer, but not the second. If I 
 serve Jehovih, how, then, shall I answer 
 your prayers and appoint another person 
 in your stead? It is a wise man that rush- 
 eth not into leadership and responsibility; 
 but he is a good man, indeed, who, having 
 
 gotten in, saith: Now will I go ahead in 
 Jehovih's wisdom and power with all my 
 might. The Gods who are above us come 
 to such a man and help him! Go ye, then, 
 once more into Council, and appoint a 
 chief captain. 
 
 Hardly had Vishnu said this, when the 
 sub-Gods perceived what was meant by 
 the higher light, and the whole sixty held 
 up their hands, saying: I will serve Thee, 
 O Jehovih! Give me whatsoever Thou 
 wilt! 
 
 With that, Vishnu commanded them to 
 appoint the one with the highest grade. 
 This they did, and it fell upon Subdga; 
 and accordingly, Subdga was made captain 
 in chief of Maitraias, with rank sixty on 
 the first list. So Vishnu created a judg- 
 ment seat for Subdga and gave him a 
 badge of office. And the other sub-Gods 
 were made captains of divisions, and num- 
 bered according to their assignment, and 
 none of them were humiliated before their 
 former subjects, but became trainers and 
 disciplinarians in new fields of labor. And 
 their former subjects were no longer call- 
 ed subjects, but hosts, and they were lib- 
 erated in all things, except liberty to re- 
 turn to mortals. 
 
 Hardly had Vishnu these matters set- 
 tled, when the hosts, eight hundred mill- 
 ion, came as the guard and shields of mor- 
 tals. These Vishnu organized, making 
 Maitraias the central throne over them; 
 and he divided them into companies of 
 one million, and gave to each company 
 one marshal and one thousand messengers. 
 And the marshals again subdivided their 
 hosts into thousands, and numbered them, 
 and to each thousand he gave one master, 
 with his quota of messengers. 
 
 Next, Vishnu divided the three great 
 countries, Vind'yii, Jaffeth and Arabinya, 
 into as many parts as he had appointed 
 marshals; and the lands were mapped out, 
 cities and towns and country places, and 
 each marshal was assigned his place. And 
 there was made a record of these things, 
 with the maps and divisions, and the names 
 of the marshals and masters; and it was 
 registered in the libraries of heaven. So 
 Vishnu's hosts were sent to their places 
 and commanded to give daily reports of 
 their labors, which were to be carried by 
 the messengers to Vishnu. 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATT1 
 
 227 
 
 CHAPTER LIX. 
 
 In Mouru, God and his officers were 
 using all their strength and wisdom to pro- 
 vide for the removal of his hosts to Crao- 
 shivi. The demand for builders, survey- 
 ors and carriers, with power, was so great 
 that God determined to send trumpeters 
 through the kingdoms of Ahura, the false, 
 asking for volunteers. For this purpose 
 he sent twelve otevans in different direc- 
 tions, some even going through the city of 
 Ctusk, Ahura's capital, and they proclaimed 
 aloud what they wanted. And it came to 
 pass that in less than one year the otevans 
 gathered out of Ahura's kingdoms seven- 
 million angels capable of grade seventy, 
 who were able to fill the places required. 
 
 This was the most damaging blow of all 
 to Ahura's kingdoms, for he thus lost the 
 wisest and most powerful of his people. 
 And this news went like fire before the 
 wind. His sub-Gods began to revolt 
 against him, claiming their own kingdoms. 
 Many of them openly preached in their 
 heavenly places against him, accusing him 
 of falsehood and of being a mere pretend- 
 er, with little power. 
 
 Nevertheless, he had great power in the 
 name Ahura'Mazda, for he was believed in 
 heaven, to be the same God, even I'hua'- 
 Mazda, that inspired Zarathustra. And 
 mortals also, living and dying in this be- 
 lief, could not be convinced otherwise. 
 And when their spirits left their mortal 
 bodies, Ahura's angels took them to the 
 heavenly city of Ctusk, where they beheld 
 its glory, shining and magnificent. And 
 they took them in sight of Ahura's throne, 
 but not near it, and they were obliged to 
 crawl on their bellies a long distance even 
 for this purpose. 
 
 And the throne was kept radiant with 
 perpetual fire. Then they were made to 
 re-crawl their way back again, until out 
 of the city. After that it was said unto 
 them: Behold, we have shown thee Ahu- 
 ra'Mazda's heavenly city and the glory of 
 his throne. Himself thou canst not behold 
 till thou hast performed the service which 
 is required of all souls entering heaven. 
 Nor canst thou come again to this city, 
 most brilliant, majestic, till thou hast 
 served under thy Lords and masters thy 
 allotted time. After that thou shalt come 
 
 here and dwell in peace and rest and hap- 
 piness forever! 
 
 And these spirits knew not otherwise, 
 nor would they believe, if told; and they 
 thus willingly made slaves of themselves 
 hundreds of years, carrying provender, or 
 doing drudgery to certain masters who 
 were again serving the Lords and the sub- 
 Gods, going through the same rites and 
 ceremonies in heaven as they were accus- 
 tomed to on earth. 
 
 But Jehovih provideth for all things, 
 wiser than the wisest Gods. He created 
 His creations with a door on every side, 
 full of glory and freedom. And out of the 
 substance of earth and atmospherea con- 
 joined, He created the animal and vegeta- 
 ble kingdoms. And the trees of the earth, 
 and the flesh of animals he created out of 
 the elements of these two — earth and at- 
 mospherea. 
 
 And Jehovih created them that in death 
 the corporeal elements should revert to 
 the respective places where they belong. 
 And in the death of a vegetable or of an 
 animal, when the atmospherean part fleth 
 upward, it carries with it a small part of 
 the dust of the earth. Thus the earth giv- 
 eth away of its substance into atmospher- 
 ea, and in course of time, the fields become 
 barren and produce not, and animals be- 
 come barren and cease to propagate and 
 their species go out of existence. 
 
 And Jehovih created man subject to 
 the same forces, and when Earth is in this 
 period of giving off man loses his desire 
 for the earth, and crieth out for the light 
 of heaven. This giving off period lasts for 
 hundreds of years. Then cometh a time 
 for Earth to receive, and for hundreds of 
 years the atmosphere becomes surcharged 
 with substance from the regions far away, 
 and when it is thus receiving it is called 
 the time of a'ji, because that which falleth 
 is a'ji. When a'ji cometh upon the earth, 
 the drujas come also. The days of the 
 darkness of earth are their delight; their 
 harvest is in the rich falling a'ji; it suiteth 
 their laziness and their inclination to live 
 in idleness. They become in those days 
 like an over-fed animal; and to their mas- 
 ters, the false Gods, they become worth- 
 less, for they derive their sustenance with- 
 out labor. A'ji is their delight; but they 
 are also like a foolish man drinking wine 
 
228 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 with delight, who continueth till his de- 
 light turneth to madness. So the dm- 
 jas feast and disobey their masters; and 
 then they become boisterous and unruly, 
 full of disorder and evil intent, defiant, be- 
 lieving themselves to be Gods and God- 
 desses. Like a beggar with a pocket full 
 of money, who lacketh discipline, and de- 
 termineth to glut his passions to the fill, 
 so it is with the drujas in the time of a'ji. 
 
 Thus Ahura counted without Jehovih; 
 in his heart he had conceived great power 
 in his kingdom; but the long a'ji told upon 
 his heavenly places seriously. His sub- 
 Gods no longer paid him tribute, to sup- 
 port in ease and glory his five million her- 
 alds, his five million musicians, his five 
 million ceremonious paraders, giving and 
 providing for them constantly new cos- 
 tumes and new palaces and new decora- 
 tions. So, first one and then another of 
 his sub-Gods revolted; and Ahura was 
 powerless to enforce obedience, for so 
 dense was a'ji that whomsoever Ahura 
 sent forth only reveled in sumptuous feast- 
 ings. And it came to pass that, af- 
 ter a'ji set in, over six hundred of Ahu- 
 ra's sub-Gods had dissolved all connection 
 with him; and of the two hundred yet re- 
 maining, who were situated close about 
 Ctusk, Ahura's heavenly place, not ten of 
 them could be relied upon in emergency. 
 
 At this time Ahura resolved upon re- 
 gaining his lost dominions, and it was like 
 a man having lost heavily at the games, 
 resolving to win or lose all. Accordingly, 
 Ahura set his workmen to building parade 
 ships, fifty thousand. He said unto his re- 
 maining sub-Gods: Behold, I will tra- 
 verse the heavens in such magnificence and 
 glory that all angels and mortals shall fall 
 down and worship me. And surely, too, 
 this time of a'ji must come to an end; and 
 in that day I will remember those that 
 have been faithful to me. And I will also 
 remember, with a curse, those who have 
 been unfaithful to me. 
 
 For fourteen years the workmen were 
 building Ahura's fleet, and yet they had 
 built but thirty thousand ships. For so 
 great was the desertion of his skilled men 
 that failure met him on all sides. But 
 with these thirty thousand ships Ahura 
 determined to travel throughout all the at- 
 mospherean heavens. Accordingly, he 
 
 called together his heralds, five million; his 
 musicians, five million; his masters of cere- 
 monies, five million; his masters of rites, 
 five million; his marshals, ten million; his 
 captains, twenty million; his generals, 
 three million; his Lords, one million, and 
 of his sub-Gods, one hundred and fifty, 
 with their attendants, twenty "million; his 
 bearers of trophies, ten million; his light- 
 makers, ten million; his waterers, ten mill- 
 ion; his torch-bearers, five million; his 
 body-guard, thirty million. Besides these 
 there were the bearers of banners, the pro- 
 claimed, the road-makers, the surveyors, 
 the directors, and so on, more than fifty 
 million. And yet the traveling hosts, one 
 hundred million, and waiters for them, 
 one hundred million. In all there were 
 upward of four hundred million spirits 
 that went within the thirty thousand ships, 
 and the ships were not full. 
 
 And the ships traveled in the form of a 
 pyramid, but not touching one another, 
 and yet fastened together. And the base 
 of the pyramid was four hundred miles 
 wide every way, and four hundred miles 
 high. And the belt of light around about 
 the pyramid was a thousand miles in diam- 
 eter every way; and it was ballasted to run 
 within fifty miles of the earth's surface. 
 
 Thus set out Ahura for a whole year's 
 cruise in atmospherea; and wherever he 
 went he proclaimed himself thus: Ahura'- 
 Mazda, the Creator! The Only Begotten 
 Son of the Unknowable! Behold, I come; 
 I, the Creator! I have come to judge hea- 
 ven and earth! Whoever is for me I will 
 raise up to Nirvana; whoever is against 
 me I will cast into hell. 
 
 The pyramid reflected light in its trav- 
 el; and Ahura's emissaries on earth used 
 this as a testimony that all things were 
 about to come to an end; the earth to be 
 cast out, and heaven and hell to be filled 
 up with spirits, each to its place, according 
 to its obedience or disobedience to Ahura'- 
 Mazda. On the other hand, Ahura's re- 
 volted sub-Gods laughed at him; and, as 
 for the over-fed and debauched drujas, 
 they mocked at him. So it came to pass 
 that when Ahura visited his revolted sub- 
 Gods in their kingdoms, in stead of re- 
 gaining their allegiance, he was sent on his 
 way with hisses and groans. And yet 
 never since Earth and her heavens were, 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 229 
 
 had there been such great show and pa- 
 geantry. 
 
 Before Ahura had visited half the king- 
 doms in atmospherea he foresaw the futil- 
 ity of his project; the probable downfall of 
 his own mighty kingdoms began to break 
 in on his heart. Enthusiasm for his name 
 was on the wane, and all his magnificence 
 had failed to restore him to what he had 
 been. 
 
 Now, whilst he was absent from Ctusk, 
 the capital of his kingdoms, he had deput- 
 ed Fravaitiwagga to reign in his stead, 
 and to maintain the order and glory of his 
 throne. Fravaitiwagga was a deserter 
 from God's Haienne colony in Haraiti, 
 where he had been educated two hundred 
 years, and was expert in primary surveys, 
 and buildings, but impatient for advance- 
 ment beyond his capacity. He had now 
 been with Ahura three hundred years, 
 learning little, but feasting and frolicking, 
 being a great flatterer of Ahura, and given 
 to long speeches and flowery words. 
 
 Whilst Fravaitiwagga was on the 
 throne, and after the departure of Ahura 
 on his excursion, there came to him one 
 Ootgowski, a deserter from Hestir.ai in 
 Zeredho, who had been in Ahura's ser- 
 vice a hundred and fifty years, but banished 
 from his heavenly place by Ahura on ac- 
 count of gluttony and drunkenness, since 
 which time he had been a wandering spirit, 
 dwelling sometimes in one kingdom and 
 then in another, and oft visiting the earth 
 and gaining access to the oracles, and even 
 to mortal priests, where he represented 
 himself, sometimes as Ahura'Mazda, some- 
 times as God, sometimes a favorite Lord, 
 sometimes Fragapatti, and Thor, and 
 Osire, and, in fact, any name he chose, is- 
 suing decrees and commandments to mor- 
 tals, then going away to return no more. 
 
 Ootgowski came to Fravaitiwagga, and 
 he said unto him: Greeting to thee, O 
 God, in the name of Ahura'Mazda! Be- 
 hold, I am sent to thee in great haste by 
 our Creator, Ahura; who commandeth thy 
 presence in the province of Veatsagh, 
 where is holden a mighty Council with 
 Ahura's re-affiliated sub-Gods. What pre- 
 ferment Ahura'Mazda hath fashioned for 
 thee I know not. To this Fravaitiwagga 
 answered as followeth, to-wit: 
 
 Who art thou, and from what king- 
 dom? And above all, why art thou come 
 without heralds and attendants? To this 
 Ootgowski answered, saying: Behold me! 
 Knowest thou not me? I am Haaron, God 
 of Sutuyotha! Who else could come so 
 quickly? W T ho else but I runneth fearless- 
 ly unattended betwixt the kingdoms of the 
 Gods? 
 
 Fravaitiwagga had been drunk many 
 days, and was so dazed with the pretentious 
 Ootgowski that he took for granted that 
 he was indeed Haaron, a great friend to 
 Ahura. Fravaitiwagga called his Council 
 together and appointed Semmes to be a 
 God in his stead; and so Fravaitiwagga de- 
 parted in an arrow-ship, with messengers, 
 for Veatsagh, which lie in an entirely dif- 
 ferent direction to where Ahura was trav- 
 eling. Semmes, the deputized God of 
 Ctusk, was faithful to his office for four 
 days, and then proclaimed recreation until 
 the trumpet call from the throne. And in 
 this interval the debauchee, Ootgowski, 
 obtained access to the floor of the inner 
 chamber, and induced Semmes to accom- 
 pany him, carrying off all the costly gems 
 and jewels of the throne! And when with- 
 out the capital, they embarked with their 
 plunder in an arrow-ship to some unknown 
 region. 
 
 For many days the members of the 
 Council waited for the trumpet call, but 
 not hearing it, resolved to learn the cause. 
 And after diligent search, not finding Sem- 
 mes, but discovering that the throne had 
 been plundered of its valuables, they were 
 thrown into great confusion. In two days 
 after this the throne was destroyed, the 
 Council divided and gone, and the heaven- 
 ly city of Ctusk turned to riot and plunder. 
 And there were in Ctusk and near about, 
 upward of four thousand million angels 
 with no God, nor leader, nor any head 
 whatsoever. Thus it came to pass that Je- 
 hovih took the throne from Ahura, as had 
 been prophecied. 
 
 And whilst this was going on, Ahura 
 was away with his pyramid fleet, being 
 discomfited wherever he went. But in two 
 hundred and twelve days after his depart- 
 ure on his journey, messengers came to 
 him and told him what had happened in 
 Ctusk. Ahura gave orders to sail at 
 
230 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATT1 
 
 once for his capital; which was done, and 
 his pyramid fleet hastened with all possible 
 speed. Suffice it, in a few days he was 
 back in Ctusk, a witness to the rioting and 
 plundering going on. But the majesty 
 and splendor of his fleet quieted the peo- 
 ple, and restored order for the time being; 
 nevertheless he was without a throne and 
 without a Council. 
 
 CHAPTER LX. 
 
 During the fall of a'ji, God decreed to 
 his Lord Gods, to his Gods and Lords, 
 and Goddesses, as follows: As ye have 
 gathered of the rising atmospherean part 
 of the living earth-substance, so shall ye 
 now turn for your regimen above. It is in 
 heaven now like unto the waters of the 
 earth. When it raineth not, mortals go to 
 the well and fetch up water out of the 
 earth; but when it does rain, they go not 
 to the well for water, but set out vessels, 
 and the rain filleth them. So, in the times 
 of dan, our hosts bring their regimen up 
 from the earth. Wherein ye have many 
 employed as laborers. Behold now, a'ji 
 will rain down upon us sufficient and more 
 than sufficient regimen for one hundred 
 and eighty years. Suffer not, therefore, 
 your laborers to fall into idleness, for this 
 will lead to mischief. But immediately put 
 them to other occupations; allow them to 
 have no spare time. 
 
 The mathematicians discovered there 
 would fall no a'ji in Yaton'te, nor on the 
 lands of Guatama. So, God sent from 
 several divisions in the heavens laborers 
 for those regions. 
 
 Two heavenly kingdoms, Gir-ak-shi 
 and Soo'fwa, of Heleste, and Japan, griev- 
 ed God more than all the rest. For these 
 had become strongholds for Ahura, who 
 had pursued the warfare on earth till in 
 those two great divisions all the Zarathus- 
 trians had been put to death. And the 
 mortal kings of those countries had issued 
 laws commanding all people to be put to 
 death who professed the Great Spirit, Or- 
 mazd. And the law had been carried out 
 effectually. 
 
 So God bewailed Soo'fwa with lamen- 
 tations. He said: O Japan, my beloved, 
 down stricken! How can I restore to thee 
 mortal seed? Thou art afar; no man on 
 thy soil heareth the Creator's voice! How 
 
 can I carry her; she lieth down with cold 
 feet. Whilst God lamented, the voice of 
 the Father came to him, saying: Hear Me 
 in My wisdom, O My Son. I will not suf- 
 fer Ahura to go thither. Withdraw thy 
 guards from the evilest of men. Suffer 
 him to go his way. Ahura shall be brought 
 home before he visiteth Soo'fwa and Gir- 
 ak-shi. 
 
 God perceived; and he sent messengers 
 to the guard over Ootgowski, saying to 
 them: When ye come to the guard, even 
 to the captains, ask permission to speak to 
 Ootgowski. And the captain will permit. 
 Whereupon, ye shall say to Ootgowski: 
 My son, thou earnest hither, saying: Put 
 a guard over me, for I am obsessed of Sa- 
 tan. And God appointed a guard over 
 thee. In this day, behold, God sendeth to 
 thee, saying: I will no longer guard Oot- 
 gowski. For his glory he shall enter the 
 kingdoms of Jehovih and become a work- 
 er for righteousness' sake. 
 
 When the messengers had said this 
 much to Ootgowski, the latter said unto 
 them: God is wise; I volunteered to have 
 myself put under guard, but I am tired 
 thereof. Say to God, his Lords and sub- 
 Gods, I will come to Jehovih's kingdoms 
 and work, for righteousness' sake. But 
 yet a little while I desire rest and travel. 
 So Ootgowski was granted freedom pur- 
 posely, and of his own accord he went and 
 destroyed the foundations of Ahura's 
 throne, as hath been told. And Ahura 
 thus hastened home without completing 
 the travel of the heavens. 
 
 Jehovih said: Let them call the Cre- 
 ator Ahura'Mazda, and call Ahura'Mazda 
 the Creator. Since He hath not shown 
 Himself in a ship, or in the figure of a 
 man, behold, thy inspirers shall teach His 
 Ever Presence. 
 
 God perceived, and a record of the 
 name was made and entered in the librar- 
 ies of heaven. And God looked abroad and 
 saw that the same thing was even so in 
 Gir-ak-shi and Heleste. And God entered 
 this also in the libraries of heaven. And 
 the reading thereof, translated, is as fol- 
 loweth: In the land of Heleste, the high- 
 est, most sacred name of the Great Spirit, 
 the Creator, was decreed by God to be 
 Mazda; and the same thing is decreed of 
 Japan. 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 231 
 
 Hence it was known from that time 
 forth that the origin of the word Master, 
 as applied to the Creator, sprang from 
 those two countries only, and no other di- 
 vision of the earth. Of this matter God 
 said: In thousands of years this word 
 shall be testimony to mortals of the war 
 in heaven of this day, which reached not 
 to the heavens of these two lands. 
 
 So God had no footing in Japan nor in 
 Heleste, nor had he sufficient power to es- 
 tablish a God or Lord in either country, 
 or in the heavens belonging to them. And 
 when Diva assembled, God propounded 
 this matter, on which the fourteen mem- 
 bers spake at length. And then Div de- 
 creed: To the swift messengers in at- 
 tendance, and through them to the ether- 
 ean Goddess, Cpenta-armij, deploring of 
 Diva in Jehovih's name: Two heavenly 
 kingdoms and two corporeal divisions have 
 walled themselves about in idolatry. A'ji 
 hath yet six years, and dawn twenty-six. 
 
 In thirty days thereafter the star-ship, 
 Gee'onea, from Haot-saiti, in etherea, 
 made its appearance in the heavens above, 
 first observed on the borders of the bridge 
 of Chinvat. God sent immediately a swift- 
 rising Ometr to meet the star-ship and 
 conduct it to Craoshivi, whither he had 
 gone with one of his transports, with two 
 hundred million, well selected, to found 
 a new city in heaven. In three days' time 
 the star-ship landed in Craoshivi with one 
 million laborers provided to endure till 
 the coming dawn. 
 
 After due salutations, Os, chief captain 
 of the ethereans, said unto God: In Jeho- 
 vih's name am I come to possess the hea- 
 venly places, Soo'fwa and Gir-ak-shi, and 
 their lands, Japan and Heleste. This work 
 must be accomplished before dawn; be- 
 fore the coming of Cpenta-armij. Send 
 thou, therefore, thy messengers who know 
 the places, that I may conduct my hosts 
 thither to labor. 
 
 God then gave messengers to Os, and 
 the latter departed and went to the king- 
 doms named; and it so happened, by the 
 wisdom of Jehovih, that this took place at 
 the same time that Ahura had returned 
 and found his capital and throne demolish- 
 ed. Hence Ahura was powerless to inter- 
 fere with the labor of Os and his hosts. 
 So Os divided his forces and possessed 
 
 both Soo'fwa and Gir-ak-shi, together with 
 the divisions of the earth belonging there- 
 unto. And Os possessed the corporeal 
 temples of worship, and the places of the 
 oracles, and all places for consulting spir- 
 its. And he taught not the name of Je- 
 hovih, nor of the Great Spirit, nor of the 
 Father; for none of these would be receiv- 
 ed. But this he taught; thus he extolled; 
 thus inspired of the Mazda, the Creator; 
 of the Voice that spake to Zarathustra, the 
 All Pure. To goodness and good works; 
 to self-denial and love; to justice and 
 truth; of mercy and obedience to the all 
 highest light in the soul. 
 
 CHAPTER LXI. 
 
 But even Gods fail at times. For by 
 failures do all persons learn there are 
 higher powers. Only Jehovih never fail- 
 eth. In the last month of the last year of 
 a'ji, even whilst God, Jehovih's Son, and 
 his Lord Gods, and his Lords and sub- 
 Gods, were proud of heart that they should 
 carry Earth and her heavens through safe- 
 ly, they met sore trials. 
 
 A comet came within Earth's vortex, 
 and was drawn in, even as a floating drift 
 is drawn within a whirlpool in a river. 
 The substance of the comet was condensed, 
 and fell on the earth in mist, and dust and 
 ashes. And the earth, and the heavens 
 above the earth, were in darkness twelve 
 days, and the darkness was so great that 
 a man could not see his hand before him. 
 
 And during those days of darkness 
 there were more than four score hells 
 founded within Ahura's heavenly regions, 
 and he was walled about by more than 
 three thousand million angels; pilfered 
 and stripped of all he had. And his re- 
 maining sub-Gods were also bound in hell 
 and robbed of all they had. And present- 
 ly the angels ran for the spirits of the 
 kings and queens who had been tyrants on 
 earth, and they caught them, and brought 
 them and cast them into hell also, taking 
 vengeance on them with stripes and foul 
 smells. And hundreds of thousands of 
 spirits went and gathered foul smells and 
 cast them into hell, and surrounded the 
 hells on every side with foul gases, so that 
 none could escape. So desperate became 
 the madness upon them, that even the tor- 
 mentors rushed in, making a frolic of mad- 
 
232 
 
 CYCLE OF FBAGAPATTI 
 
 ness. And whosoever had ever had an en- 
 emy on earth now ran and caught 
 him in hada and brought him; and 
 they took and cast him into the tor- 
 ments of hell And those who had 
 been slaves hundreds of years to Ahura 
 and his Gods, now caught every one they 
 could lay hands on, and dragged them into 
 hell. 
 
 As soon as God's messengers came and 
 told him what happened, God sent all his 
 available forces to overthrow the place if 
 possible. Vishnu, full of hope and cour- 
 age, sent one-half of his forces to God's 
 assistance, thereby risking the guardian- 
 ship of the three great mortal kingdoms, 
 Vind'yu, Jaffeth and Arabin'ya. And God 
 sent messengers to the heavenly kingdoms 
 of North and South Guatama, saying to 
 the Gods of those places: Behold, Ahura, 
 the false, is involved in torments; his hosts 
 are upon him; three thousand million! 
 Send all above grade seventy at once. To 
 Uropa he sent also, saying the same thing, 
 and adding thereto: Alas, my little wis- 
 dom in sending off a thousand million of 
 mine own hosts to Craoshivi at such a 
 time! 
 
 Craoshivi was the new plateau, difficult 
 of access, and it was scarcely possible to 
 recall his hosts in the time required. And 
 God summoned the Diva, that they might 
 sit for the Father's Voice; and the mem- 
 bers came and sat in the usual way, and 
 Jehovih spake unto God, saying: 
 
 Peace be unto thee, My Son! Neither 
 regret thou that thou sent thy most exalt- 
 ed hosts to Craoshivi. Did I not lead thee 
 thither? And I said unto thee: Possess 
 this place, and send thou thy hosts hither. 
 Neither grieve thou because I sent the 
 nebulae and the darkness of that time. Is 
 it more to thee to behold these things, 
 than for mortals to witness the spring 
 floods that wash away the summer's com- 
 ing harvest? 
 
 To learn to provide against contingen- 
 cies, this is wisdom. Yet not All Wisdom 
 is in man's heart, nor yet with My Gods. 
 How canst thou perceive how it is with 
 Ahura's soul, whether this hell be good or 
 evil unto him in the end? If thou behold 
 My sudden power, how much more must 
 not Ahura feel it? Yet thou shalt deliver 
 him out of hell; by thy hosts shall he and 
 
 his sub-Gods be delivered. But far great- 
 er shall be the torments of his own soul, 
 than what his drujas can heap upon him. 
 Then God inquired of Jehovih, saying: 
 What is the most perfect way, to deliver 
 Ahura and his subjects out of hell? 
 
 Jehovih answered him, saying: Whom 
 he hath despised, send; whom he hath ill- 
 treated, send; whom he hath humbled, 
 send. And when thy Lords and Gods are 
 come to the place, let these, his abused 
 enemies, take the hand of thy Lord or thy 
 God, and they shall call out to Me in the 
 name, Ormazd, the which name Ahura 
 hath tried to destroy for the glory of his 
 own. And at the sound of the name, Or- 
 mazd, thy hosts shall cast burning light 
 into the faces of the drujas, and thus scat- 
 ter them away till Ahura be released; and 
 he shall witness that he hath been released 
 through the name, Ormazd. 
 
 God sent E'chad, and Ah'oan, to de- 
 liver Ahura out of hell, and they labored 
 four years in accomplishing it, and then 
 Ahura was free, and his hosts were divid- 
 ed into groups of tens of thousands, and 
 hundreds of thousands; and God appoint- 
 ed gene-als and captains over them — all 
 except eight hundred million drujas that 
 escaped from hell and through the guards' 
 fires, and descended back to the earth, to 
 torment and deceive mortals. 
 
 So Vishnu failed in some degree to save 
 the nations of the earth from the approach 
 of evil spirits. Jehovih spake to Vishnu, 
 comforting, saying: Because thou hast 
 helped to deliver Ahura, thou shalt not 
 take sorrow to thy heart. What are eight 
 hundred million to thee? So Vishnu 
 grieved no more. 
 
 Now, during the time of the deliverance 
 of Ahura, no less than six knots had been 
 tied in hell, and in one of these Ahura 
 and his sub-Gods had bcome bound, so 
 there was no escape for them. But the 
 outer and extreme knots were untied 
 first, and as fast as the delirious spirits 
 were rescued, they were carried without 
 and beyond the fire-walls and placed un- 
 der guard. Thus in sections was Ahura's 
 hell cast out; and when the deliverers 
 came to Ahura and his confederates they 
 were all, save Ahura, in a state of chaos, 
 frenzied with fear. But Ahura was not be- 
 side himself, though in serious fright. Ah'- 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 233 
 
 oan, Lord of Jaffeth, spake to him, saying: 
 In the name of God, and of Ormazd, I 
 have delivered thee. How is it with thee? 
 
 Ahura said: I am done! I am nothing! 
 One God alone can do nothing. Do with 
 me whatsoever thou wilt. I am thy ser- 
 vant. 
 
 Ah'oan said: Nay, be thou servant to 
 none save Ormazd, thy creator. His 
 name is the watch-word and the power 
 in all the high heavens. By His name 
 thou shalt become one among Godly com- 
 panions. 
 
 Ahura said: But thou must torment 
 me first! Ah'oan said: Wherefore? My 
 work is not to cast down but to lift up. 
 So it is with all of Ormazd's Gods. Be- 
 hold thou here, even thy sub-Gods, and 
 such as thou hast in times past evilly used! 
 See, they hold up their hands in prayer 
 to Ormazd for thee! And is not the way 
 of knowing angels and mortals, whether 
 they be of the Creator? If they pull down, 
 they are not His. If they slander or tor- 
 ment, or speak evil of one another, or 
 give pain, they are not His. How, then, 
 shall I not do good for thee and restore 
 thee to thy kingdom? 
 
 Ahura said: Give me anything, but 
 give me not my kingdom again; for of all 
 torments this is the worst. Ah'oan said: 
 Wouldst thou evilly treat them that had 
 been thy subjects? If so, thou art not of 
 the everlasting resurrection. 
 
 Ahura said: Nay, I would see them 
 not forever! I would hear them not, 
 know them not forever. If, therefore, 
 thou wilt do me good instead of evil, I 
 pray thee take me afar off and alone, that 
 I may meditate forever on the horrors I 
 have passed through. 
 
 Ah'oan said: Hear me now, once for 
 all, and I speak in the name of the Great 
 Spirit, Ormazd: Because thou hast 
 served thyself and compelled others to 
 serve thee for nearly two thousand years, 
 thou hast become blind to the Ormazdian 
 law, which is: That thine own peace and 
 happiness can only come by making res- 
 toration to thy servants, and by lifting up 
 those whom thou hast cast down. How 
 can I deliver thee away from them? I 
 may take away thy person, but I cannot 
 deliver thy memory. No man can be de- 
 livered from himself. One way only is 
 
 open for thee under the Ormazdian law; 
 which is, that thou shalt take thy king- 
 dom again, and deliver it unto righteous- 
 ness, intelligence and good works. Serv- 
 ing Ormazd by doing good unto them 
 whom the Creator gave thee. Many of 
 them have served thee more than a thous- 
 and years,; wouldst thou now cast them 
 off without recompense? 
 
 Ahura said: Thou art just, O Ormazd! 
 I perceive the wisdom of Thy Gods, and 
 the bondage of man. Take me, O Ah'oan, 
 put me in a way to carry out this great 
 light. 
 
 Ah'oan said: Hear thou thy sentence, 
 in the name of Ormazd, the Creator; 
 thou shalt be taken to a place of safety, 
 which E'chad shall select; and thither shall 
 thy most exalted people be taken, and put 
 to work and to school, and in nurseries 
 and hospitals; and thou shalt go about 
 amongst them, teaching and encouraging 
 them in industry and righteousness, for 
 Ormazd's sake. And when thou hast cer- 
 tain ones disciplined in this way, thou 
 shalt receive another installment of thy 
 people, and they shall be disciplined in 
 the same way. And then another install- 
 ment, and so on, until thou hast all thy 
 kingdom. 
 
 And that thou shalt be successful, 
 these, my Lords, and generals, and cap- 
 tains, shall go with thee and labor with 
 thee and thy hosts. - And thou and thy 
 people shall have no ornaments; and your 
 raiment shall be light gray, alike and like, 
 teachers and pupils, save when especially 
 ordered otherwise by God and his depu- 
 ties. 
 
 And when thou and the majority of 
 thy hosts have risen above grade fifty, 
 thou shalt be crowned in the name of Or- 
 mazd, and thy kingdoms shall have a 
 throne, and thou shalt be one amongst 
 the united hosts of the higher heavens. 
 Till then, go thou to thy labors diligently, 
 and may Ormazd abide with thee in wis- 
 dom and power. 
 
 Ahura said: Thou art just, O Ormazd. 
 I will henceforth, forever, serve Thee with 
 all my wisdom and strength! 
 
 And then E'chad and his attendants 
 led the way, and the marshals and gener- 
 als and captains brought Ahura's hosts, 
 the first installment, and they went to a 
 
234 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 place called Ailkin, a heavenly place cap- 
 able of seven thousand million, and there 
 they founded the new colony for Ahura. 
 But Ah'oan and his hosts continued their 
 labors in delivering the hells, until they 
 delivered the four score, and placed all 
 the spirits under guard and discipline. 
 
 CHAPTER LXII. 
 
 Thus the cycle of Fragapatti drew to a 
 close, being three thousand one hundred 
 years. And at this time there were but 
 few people on earth or in heaven, even 
 Druks and drujas, but were capable of ev- 
 erlasting life. 
 
 Jehovih spake to God, saying: Now 
 shalt thou enumerate the inhabitants of 
 earth and heaven, as to all that I have 
 created capable of everlasting life; and of 
 My harvests since the habitation of Earth, 
 when man first walked upright. And their 
 numbers shall be entered in the libraries 
 of heaven, to remain forever. 
 
 So God called together a Council of 
 mathematicians, and they numbered mor- 
 tals and angels, and recorded their num- 
 ber in the libraries of heaven. 
 
 In Fragapatti's cycle were born ninety- 
 two thousand million mortals on the 
 earth. Of these ninety per cent, were 
 born to everlasting life. Ten per cent, 
 went into dissolution, as a drop of water 
 evaporates before the sun and is seen no 
 more. 
 
 In Osire's cycle, ninety-one thousand 
 million. Of these eighty-seven per cent, 
 were born to everlasting life. Thirteen 
 per cent, went into dissolution and were 
 seen no more. 
 
 In Thor's cycle, eighty-eight thousand 
 million. Of these eighty-five per cent, 
 were born to everlasting life, and fifteen 
 per cent, to dissolution. 
 
 In Apollo's cycle, eighty thousand 
 million. Of these seventy-two per cent, 
 were born to everlasting life. 
 
 In Sue's cycle, eighty-seven thousand 
 million. Of these sixty-two per cent, 
 were born to everlasting life, and thirty- 
 eight per cent, went into dissolution. 
 
 In Aph' cycle, sixty-six thousand mil- 
 ino. Of these fifty-four per cent, were 
 born to everlasting life, and forty-six per 
 cent, went into dissolution. 
 
 In Neph's cycle, before the submer- 
 sion of Pan, one hundred and twenty-four 
 thousand million. Of these twenty-one 
 per cent, were born to everlasting life, and 
 seventy-nine per cent, went into dissolu- 
 tion. 
 
 And this comprised one-sixth of the 
 people that had been created alive on the 
 earth since man walked upright; that is 
 three thousand seven hundred sixty-eight 
 thousand million. But in the early days 
 of man only a small percentage were born 
 to everlasting life; and, first of all, only 
 one per cent. 
 
 And God gave thanks unto Jehovih, 
 the Creator, because all the races of men 
 on earth were now capable of everlasting 
 life. 
 
 Of the hells and knots springing out 
 of hada since the days of Wan, this was 
 the proportion: 
 
 In the cycle of Fragapatti, two hun- 
 dred and seventy-six hells, of average dur- 
 ation, thirty years. Involved in these 
 hells, two thousand million angels. Six- 
 ty-four knots, of average duration, two 
 years. Involved in these knots, one 
 thousand million angels. 
 
 In the cycle of Osire, three hundred 
 and eighty-nine hells, of average duration, 
 four hundred years. Involved in these 
 hells, seven thousand million. Two hun- 
 dred and twelve knots, of average durat- 
 ion, three years. Involved in these knots, 
 three thousand million. 
 
 In the cycle of Thor, five hundred and 
 ninety-one hells, of average duration, six 
 hundred years. Involved in these hells, 
 nine thousand million angels. Four hun- 
 dred and thirty-six knots, of average dura- 
 tion, six years. Involved in these knots, 
 four thousand million angels. 
 
 In Apollo's cycle, seven hundred and 
 forty two hells, of average duration, eight 
 hundred years. Involved in these hells, 
 ten thousand million angels. Six hundred 
 and four knots, of average duration, 
 twelve years. Involved in these knots, 
 five thousand million. 
 
 In Sue's cycle, twelve hundred and 
 seventy-three hells, of average duration, 
 one thousand years. Involved in these 
 hells, thirteen thousand million angels. 
 One thousand and five knots, of average 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 235 
 
 duration, thirty years. Involved in these 
 knots, eight thousand million. 
 
 In Aph's cycle, three thousand five 
 hundred hells, of average duration, two 
 thousand years. Involved in these hells, 
 twenty-eight thonsand million angels. Two 
 thousand knots, of average duration, fifty 
 years. Involved in these knots, twenty- 
 five thousand million. 
 
 And these were the numbers of spirits 
 cast into hell and into knots, from the 
 submersion of Pan to the end of the cycle 
 of Fragapatti; but at the dawn of each and 
 every cycle, both the hells and the knots 
 were delivered by the etherean Gods. 
 Save in Fragapatti's cycle, when they 
 were almost entirely delivered by the at- 
 mospherean God. 
 
 Prior to the submersion of Pan, com- 
 monly called the flood, more than half the 
 people entering the es world went into 
 hell and into knots. And in all ages of 
 the world there have been thousands and 
 millions of spirits who delight in hell for 
 certain seasons, even as is manifested in 
 mortals who delight in debauchery, and 
 vengeance, and war. Nor is a hell widely . 
 different, as regards the spirit, from what 
 war is amongst mortals. And as mortals 
 of this day glorify themselves and their 
 generals and captains for the magnitude 
 of their havoc in war, so in the olden 
 times, in atmospherea, there were such 
 great boastings and laudations for such as 
 inflicted the greatest torments and hor- 
 rors in hell. 
 
 And as mortals of the Druk order oft 
 leave their evil ways for a season, and be- 
 come upright and virtuous, loving decen- 
 
 cy and righteousness, and then break faith 
 and indulge in a season of debauchery, 
 so in the es world has it been with mill- 
 ions and thousands of millions of angels. 
 In one day the teachers and physicians 
 were rejoicing before Jehovih because of 
 the steadfastness of their wards to right- 
 eousness; and in the next day were left to 
 deplore the loss of hundreds and thous- 
 ands who had broken faith and gone off 
 for indulgence's sake in some of the hells. 
 And these had to be rescued, persuaded, 
 threatened and coaxed back again and 
 again to the nurseries and hospitals, or to 
 the factories and colleges. Neither know- 
 eth any one, save Jehovih, the labor and 
 fretting and anxiety that were undergone 
 by the teachers and physicians, and Lords 
 and Gods, who had such drujas in charge. 
 For even as it is beholden on earth that 
 men of great learning and high estate oft 
 fall, becoming lower than the beasts of 
 the field, so in heaven were there hun- 
 dreds of thousands, and even millions, oft 
 high raised in the grades, that would 
 stumble and fall into the lowest of hells, 
 and even into the knots. 
 
 Now, up to the last, God and his Lords 
 maintained the Diva; and mortals some- 
 what understood the matter, that there 
 were certain laws in heaven that ruled over 
 mortal kingdoms and empires. So that 
 the words Div and Diva, and Divan laws, 
 began to be realized as a concerted power 
 in heaven greater than man's power. 
 
 So Jehovih brought Earth and her 
 heavens into another dawn of dan, in the 
 arc of Spe'ta, in the Nirvanian roads of 
 Salkwatka, in etherea. 
 
LORDS' RECORD FOR DAWN OK DAN 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 In the beginning of the cycle of Fraga- 
 patti, Samati, God of Earth, and her hea- 
 vens, was assigned the labor of establish- 
 ing the worship of Jehovih upon the earth 
 amongst the I'huans. Mortal men had 
 turned from their Creator and delighted 
 in war. In order to thus establish the 
 worship of Jehovih on earth, it had be- 
 come necessary to raise up a mortal capa- 
 ble of the Voice. 
 
 In those days when an army captured 
 a large city, slaying the people, they car- 
 ried back the spoil to So-qi, king of Oas, 
 capital of Par'si'e, and received rewards 
 according to the amount of plunder. The 
 wars were between the different nations 
 of I'huans. The sacred people, the I'hins, 
 had nothing for which they could be plun- 
 dered; so they were unmolested. 
 
 The I'hin prophet had said: Whoso- 
 ever layeth up treasures in this world, 
 shall find no peace! But ye have built so 
 great a city that ye believe nothing can 
 break it down. Now thou shalt see, O 
 king, thy city shall prove the weakest of 
 cities. There shall be raised up one man 
 amongst the I'hins; and Oas, the mighty 
 city, shall fall before his hand. 
 
 I'hua'Mazda, God of Earth, sent cer- 
 tain loo'is to look around, and afterward 
 he called them and asked what they saw. 
 They said: Work! Work! I'hua'Mazda 
 said: Work it shall be. Go ye, holy mas- 
 ters of generations, down to mortals close 
 around about the city of Oas. And search 
 ye out the seed of the I'hin race, and by 
 inspiration lead them to the fairest daugh- 
 ters of I'hua, in the City of Oas; and they 
 shall be tempted, and a quickened fruit 
 shall ripen in the city, sons and daughters. 
 Again go ye to the I'hins and by inspira- 
 tion bring others and have them tempted 
 by the improved fruit. And yet again re- 
 peat this method, and in the sixth genera- 
 tion ye shall raise up a son having the 
 gifts of su'is and sar'gis, and ye shall call 
 him Zarathustra. 
 
 The loo'is went and accomplished what 
 had been commanded by God. And the 
 child's mother's name was Too'che, and 
 the father's name was Lo'ab. Too'che 
 was su'is-born herself, and was obsessed 
 by Sa'moan, an angel, before she conceiv- 
 ed, and during the time of maternity not 
 allowed to wake from her unconscious 
 trance. And by the loo'is, her soul was oft 
 taken to heaven to behold its glories, and 
 then to return and inhabit her own body. 
 Thus, the child was born in light, and 
 on the day of its birth the obsession fled, 
 and Too'che proclaimed within the city 
 that no man was father to the child, but 
 that she conceived from the All Light, so 
 believing, because unconscious in gesta- 
 tion. 
 
 The learned men cast the horoscope, 
 but found nothing in the stars to alarm the 
 kings, or worthy of credence to the maid- 
 en's story. 
 
 The loo'is went before God, saying: 
 Behold, a child is born capable of All 
 Light. Then spake God, saying: I will 
 come. Go ye and lead the way. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 When yet the child, Zarathustra, nursed, 
 I'hua'Mazda spake through the child whilst 
 its own spirit slept. Then again came the 
 learned men, chief of whom was Asha, son 
 of Zista, learned in a thousand stars and all 
 living creatures, and in the bones of ani- 
 mals no longer living. So Asha spake to 
 Too'che, saying: Can thy suckling talk? 
 Whereupon God answered him, saying: 
 Not the child, but I, I'hua'Mazda. Think 
 not, O man, these small lips utter words 
 prompted by this child's soul. I am come 
 to stay the cruel hand of war; to make 
 man know there is an Unseen Master! 
 Behold, this child hath no sex! It is an 
 iesu, a passionless birth! 
 
 To which Asha said: Can it be this wo- 
 man hath a man hidden under her cloak, 
 and hopes to evade the just punishment 
 of the king? O, thou harlot! Thou told- 
 est a shameful tale of conception without a 
 
CYCLE OF FRACAPATTI 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 237 
 
 man! Thy lies are now added to others to 
 make good the first. Out of the city, 
 wretch, or thou shalt be stoned to death, 
 and thy child with thee! 
 
 Too'che made no answer, save with a 
 flood of tears. Then spake I'hua'Mazda, 
 saying: Hold thy hand on these lips, and 
 perceive how I gesticulate with these lit- 
 tle hands. Yea, take thou the little form 
 in thine own arms. 
 
 Then Asha feared, but fain would hide 
 his fear, and so ,took the child, whilst 
 I'hua'Mazda spake, saying: O man, that 
 thou couldst behold the spirit and would 
 temper thy judgment down to patience and 
 wisdom! 
 
 Asha said: If it be truth thou art the 
 Mazda of the I'huan race, why hast thou 
 come in so questionable weakness? What 
 can a child do? Wieldest thou a sword 
 with these little hands? I had hoped to 
 see a God come in strength, and in majes- 
 ty. 
 
 I'hua'Mazda said: My wisdom is not 
 man's wisdom; my weapons, not arrows 
 and sharp swords! What is great in man's 
 judgment is as nothing to me; what is as 
 nothing to man, I will make great, for I 
 shall overturn this mighty city. Because 
 I am come in peace and love, the city shall 
 be divided, man against man, and bloody 
 war run riot in this walled kingdom. 
 
 Asha said: To what end art thou come? 
 For if it betrue that thou art a God born 
 in this questionable shape, thou hast some 
 motive more than to overthrow the city. 
 I charge thee, then, most precious youth, 
 tell me what thy purpose is, that justice 
 may be done. 
 
 I'hua'Mazda said: The cities of man 
 are as nothing in my sight; I come to 
 teach man of other worlds, and that the 
 souls of the righteous shall live forever, I 
 come to deliver man from darkness into 
 everlasting light. 
 
 Asha said: Thy words are wisdom, or 
 else my sudden surprise hath unfitted my 
 judgment. I will go now, that I may re- 
 flect on this wonder. To-morrow I will 
 come again. Keep this matter quietly. 
 For if it be known that I, of so high es- 
 tate, have talked in temperance on spirit- 
 ual things, I will be doomed to death. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 When Asha had gone, I'hua'Mazda 
 spake to Too'che, saying: Take thou thy 
 child away and hide thyself lest the king 
 have thee and thy child put to death. 
 So Too'che departed with her child, and 
 hid in another part of the city. 
 
 Now Asha went direct to So-qi, the 
 king, and related what had transpired. 
 When he had finished the king said: Ac- 
 cording to the histories of the ancients, 
 when a God appeared amongst mortals, 
 there were signs and miracles. Thou hast 
 told me only words. Go, therefore, again 
 to the child and say: The king desireth a 
 miracle. 
 
 Asha returned the next day, but the 
 woman and child were gone and not one 
 of the neighbors knew whither. Asha said: 
 If I go before the king with this story, he 
 will have me slain as an inventor of lies. 
 So he returned not to the king. 
 
 But where Too'che and her child 
 dwelt, there came a maker of songs, by 
 name Choe'jon, and he spake to the moth- 
 er, saying: Where is the child? She an- 
 swered: He sleepeth in the rack of hay; 
 I will' bring him. So she brought the 
 child from its bed of straw, and sticking 
 to its mantle were straws that had no 
 roots. 
 
 I'hua'Mazda spake through the child, 
 saying: I came to thee, O Choe'jon; I 
 brought thee hither, for thou shalt frame 
 songs about this babe. Choe'jon was 
 frightened, but nevertheless he said: Can 
 this be true, in this enlightened age? A 
 miracle! Shall I talk to thee, O child? 
 Then I'hua'Mazda said: Behold, thou 
 speakest not to the child, but to I'hua'- 
 Mazda. Take these straws to thy writing 
 box and plant them in new earth, and in 
 one day they shall grow and bear ripe 
 wheat. So Choejon departed and planted 
 the straws, and in one day, they grew 
 and bore ripe wheat. 
 
 Choe'jon had sung his songs before the 
 king, and so had permission of the court; 
 and he went and told the king of the mir- 
 acle. The king said: The philosopher, 
 Asha, told me about this child, and I sent 
 him for a miracle, but he returneth not. 
 Thou hast come and said: Behold, a mir- 
 acle! What value is a miracle save to 
 
238 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 those who witness it? Shall thy king ac- 
 cept a thing in belief only? Go, therefore, 
 again to the child and bring it before me, 
 that I may see with mine own eyes. 
 
 Choe'jon returned to the place, but 
 behold, mother and child were gone; nei- 
 ther knew the neighbors whither. But 
 she was concealed in another part of the 
 city. And now there came before her one 
 Os'shan, who was weeping because of the 
 apparent death of his son. To him I'hua'- 
 Mazda spake, saying: Weep not, O man; 
 I have healed thy son and also given sight 
 to thy daughter. 
 
 Os'shan trembled at such words coming 
 from the lips of a child, and he ran home, 
 finding of a truth his son was healed, and 
 his daughter restored to sight. In his joy 
 he returned to the place, but mother and 
 child were gone. Os'shan was hostler to 
 the king, and capable of audience, and so 
 he went and told the king of his good 
 fortune. 
 
 The king said: Asha, the philosopher, 
 told me a fine story of this child, but when 
 I sent him for information he returned 
 not. Then came Choe'jon, the maker of 
 songs, telling me what he had witnessed. 
 I sent him to have mother and child 
 brought before me, but he returned not. 
 Now thou comest with a miracle, such as 
 were told in the dark ages. Go thou, there- 
 fore, and search the city over till thou 
 findest this wonder and bring it before 
 me. 
 
 On the next day another man, the 
 king's brother's son, came before the 
 king, saying: This day I have seen such 
 a wonder as would have been marvelous 
 in the days of angels and Gods. Behold, 
 a little child hath spoken such words of 
 philosophy to me as to make me tremble. 
 And yet, O king, thou knowest I am no 
 coward. My house is hung with a hundred 
 scalps. And this child already proclaim- 
 ed Zarathustra in communion with God, 
 I'hua'Mazda? To me it said: Why killest 
 thou the sons and daughters of thy God? 
 Think not that thy multitude of scalps are 
 a glory before heaven. Behold, I am 
 stronger with my little finger than So-qi, 
 thy king. 
 
 So-qi, the king, said: It is enough! 
 Save this mother and child be brought at 
 once before me, that I may behold the 
 
 truth of these wonders, every male child 
 in Oas shall be cast into fire! The king's 
 brother's wife was with child, and the son's 
 wife was with child, and they foresaw that 
 the decree of the king touched them close- 
 ly; so there went forth many searching for 
 Too'che and Zarathustra. But I'hua'- 
 Madza, directed the mother to go beyond 
 the gates, and led her far into the Forest 
 of Goats, where the tribes of Listians 
 lived. I'hua'Mazda talked to the mother, 
 saying: Twenty years shalt thou tarry in 
 the forest, fearing naught, for thy God will 
 provide for thee. And when thy son shall 
 be larger and stronger than other men, be- 
 hold, thy God will manifest for the re- 
 demption of the races of men who are 
 hunted and slain for the glory of the 
 kings. 
 
 So it came about that the mother and 
 her son dwelt in the Forest of Goats until 
 Zarathustra was a large man and of ma- 
 ture years, and his size was equal to three 
 ordinary men; nor could any number of 
 men lay him on his back. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 When So-qi, the king, issued the de- 
 cree to have Zarathustra found and 
 brought before him, otherwise all the male 
 infants of Oas to be slain, the Lords sent 
 travail on the king's wife and on the 
 king's daughter, wife of Asha, the philos- 
 opher, and the two women gave birth that 
 same day to two sons, a month before 
 their time, but nevertheless unto life and 
 strength and beauty. Now, according to 
 the laws of Oas, a king could not change 
 his own decrees, for he had assumed the 
 position of infallibility, whereupon he had 
 doomed to death his own son and kin. 
 Accordingly, after search had been made 
 in vain to find Zarathustra, the king re- 
 pented of his decree, but knew no way to 
 justify a change of commandment. Asha, 
 hearing of this, came out of concealment, 
 saying to himself: Now will I go to the 
 king and hold him to his dreree, even de- 
 manding that he slay me also. 
 
 So Asha came before So-qi, and after 
 saluting, said: O king, I have- heard of 
 thy strait, and am come to thee that I may 
 counsel thee. 
 
 The king was angered, and he said: 
 Asha, thou earnest before me relating a 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 239 
 
 marvelous story regarding an infant son 
 of a virgin who said she never knew man. 
 Now, according to the laws of the City of 
 the Sun, any man stating for truth that 
 which he cannot prove, is already adjudg- 
 ed to death. Shall not the law be fulfilled, 
 because, forsooth, thou art near me in 
 blood? 
 
 Asha said: Most assuredly, O king, 
 the laws must be carried out. Are they 
 not the all highest? For it followeth that 
 man being the all highest, his laws, above 
 all else, must never be set aside. Therefore, 
 thou shalt have me slain. Think not I 
 am come before thee to plead an excuse in 
 order to save myself; rather let all men 
 perish than that the king's decrees go 
 amiss. 
 
 The king said: Thou art wise, O Asha. 
 The laws cannot err, for they are the 
 standard by which to judge all else. And 
 he who hath risen to be king standeth by 
 nature the infallible highest of all things. 
 History hath proven this. But yet hear 
 me, thou who hast wisdom from the move- 
 ments of the sun and moon and stars; the 
 king, being the all highest, how can he be 
 bound? Cannot he decree new decrees 
 forever? 
 
 Asha said: I will not deceive thee, O 
 king. I know thou art arguing not for 
 me, but for thine own infant son, and for 
 thy daughter's infant son. Neither have I 
 come before thee in prowess, though I 
 love life. But here is the matter: If thou 
 change one law, thou admittest that all 
 laws made by man may also, need chang- 
 ing; which is to say, that wisdom is folly. 
 How, then, shall the judge judge any man 
 by the laws? Is it not setting up error in 
 order to find truth? 
 
 The king said: Thou reasonest well. 
 Methought this morning, in my walk in 
 the market gardens, when the soldiers 
 were spreading the scalps of their enemies 
 in the sun to dry, whether or not, in ages 
 to come, the weaker nations and tribes 
 of men might not attempt to justify their 
 right to life. And were the kings to admit 
 the fallibility of their decrees and laws, no 
 man can foresee the end; for even slaves, 
 servants and women will rise up against 
 the laws, and claim their right to life. 
 Wherein, then, would the world be large 
 enough for all the people? Yet, wherefore, 
 
 O Asha, cometh this heartache of mine 
 against killing mine own son? 
 
 Asha said: What are thy sympathies, 
 O king? If thou wert to justify the es- 
 cape of thy child's life for sympathy, would 
 not my wife and my children justify their 
 sympathy in desiring me to live? Nay, 
 sympathy is the enemy of law and jus- 
 tice. It is the evil in our natures that 
 crieth out for evil. The laws must be 
 maintained; the decrees must be maintain- 
 ed; the king's word must be maintained. 
 No man must suffer his judgment to go 
 higher than the law, or the decrees of the 
 king. This is the City of the Sun. If this 
 city repudiate its own laws, what will not 
 the tributary cities do? Will not they also 
 begin to disrespect the laws, or say: Per- 
 haps the laws are in error? This will come 
 to anarchy. To one purpose only can a 
 great kingdom be maintained. To divide 
 the purposes and judgment of men is to 
 scatter the glory of our civil liberty. Was 
 it not disrespect of the laws, combined 
 with superstition, that caused the nations 
 of ancients to perish? 
 
 The king said: What shall I do, O 
 Asha? My son hath smiled in my face! 
 
 Asha said: Thou shalt send me and thy 
 son and thy daughter's son, and all male 
 infants to the slaughter pen, and have us 
 all beheaded and cast into the fire. Other- 
 wise, it will come true what the infant 
 Zarathustra hath said: Behold, my hand 
 shall smite the city of Oas, and it shall fall 
 as a heap of straw. Think not, O king, I 
 am superstitious and fear such threats; but 
 this I perceive; suffer the laws to be im- 
 peached, and every man in Oas will set up 
 to interpret the laws to be wrong and him- 
 self right. And thy officers will rebel 
 against thee on all sides, and the glory of 
 thy kingdom will perish. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 So after the city had been searched for 
 thirty days, and the mother and child not 
 found, the king appointed a day for the 
 slaughter according to his former decree, 
 and there were ninety thousand male in- 
 fants adjudged to death, the king's son 
 among the rest. Whilst these matters 
 were maturing, the Lord went to Choe'- 
 jon, and inspired him to make songs about 
 Zarathustra, the infant that was stronger 
 
240 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 LORDS' RECORI 
 
 than a king. And also songs about the 
 decree of death to the ninety thousand 
 infant sons of Oas. And the beauty of the 
 songs, together with the nature of these 
 proceedings, caused the songs to be sung 
 in the streets day and night; and the 
 songs approved in satire of the horrors, 
 so the king could not prevent the singing. 
 
 When the day arrived for the slaughter 
 of the male infants, not more than a thou- 
 sand mothers appeared at the place of ex- 
 ecution with their infants, upward of eigh- 
 ty-nine thousand mothers having risen the 
 night previous and departed out of the 
 gates. 
 
 When the king, who had set apart the 
 day as a holiday, arrived at the place of 
 execution, and finding only a thousand in- 
 fants present, he inquired the reason there- 
 for, and having been told, he said: Can it 
 be that mothers love their offspring more 
 than they respect the decrees of the king? 
 Asha was standing near, haying stripped 
 himself ready for execution, and he an- 
 swered the king, saying: 
 
 Because they love their offspring, is it 
 not the love of the flesh? And doth not 
 the law stand above all flesh? In this mat- 
 ter, then, because they have evaded the 
 law, they have also adjudged themselves to 
 death. 
 
 Then came Betraj, the king's wife, 
 bringing the infant. Betraj said: Here 
 is thy son, O king, ready for the sacri- 
 fice! Asha reasonest well; there must be 
 an All Highest which never erreth! The 
 same is the law of the king! Take thou 
 thy flesh and blood and prove thy decrees! 
 What! Why hesitate? If thou swerve 
 from thy purpose, then shalt thou open the 
 door for all men to find an excuse against 
 the law. Doth not the sun blight a har- 
 vest when he will? Yea, and strike dead 
 our most beloved? Art thou not descend- 
 ed from the Sun Gods? Who will obey 
 the laws, if thou, thyself, do not? 
 
 The king said: Behold, it is yet early 
 morn. Let the officers go bring all who 
 have escaped beyond the walls, and both 
 mothers and children shall be put to death. 
 Let the proceedings be suspended till then. 
 
 Now there had congregated a vast mul- 
 titude, anxious to witness the slaughter; 
 and when the king suspended matters, 
 there were up cries of disappointment. 
 
 And many said: When a matter toucheth 
 the king, he is a coward. The king re- 
 turned to his palace, leaving Asha stand- 
 ing stripped for the execution. And the 
 multitude cried out: More is Asha like 
 a king than So-qi! Let us make him king! 
 We will not have a sheep for a king. And 
 none could stay them, or be heard above 
 their noise; and they ran after the king 
 and slew him with stones, and they made 
 Asha King of the Sun; and there was not 
 one infant slain according to the decrees. 
 
 God said: Think not, O man, that 
 things happened without a cause, or that 
 all things are left to chance. In my 
 works I go beforehand and plan the way, 
 even more carefully than a captain layeth 
 siege to a city. Before Zarathustra was 
 born I sent ashars to inspire followers. 
 Think not that Asha made his own argu- 
 ments; but by virtue of the presence of my 
 ashars, he spake and behaved according to 
 my commandments without knowing it. 
 And even so was it with the king's wife; 
 my angels also inspired her to speak be- 
 fore the king. And those who fled out of 
 the city were inspired by my hosts of an- 
 gels. Yet with the king's decree I had no 
 part, for I foresaw he would do this of his 
 own will. And with the multitude in slay- 
 ing the king, I had no part, for I foresaw 
 they would do this of their own account. 
 Neither would the multitude hear my 
 voice, though I had spoken to every man's 
 soul; for in them the tetracts were the as- 
 cendant power. The multitude slew the 
 king because he had gone so far from me 
 he heeded me not. And I made Asha king, 
 because he came so near me my power 
 was with him through my ashars. 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 Now during the childhood of Zarathus- 
 tra, God manifested no more through him; 
 but he sent Ejah, one of his Lords, to be 
 with Zarathustra, day and night. And 
 Ejah taught the infant wisdom in all 
 things. When Zarathustra was yet a child, 
 the Lord began to manifest through him, 
 giving signs and miracles and prophecy 
 before the Listians who lived in the Forest 
 of Goats. This forest was of the width of 
 forty days' journey for a man in all direc- 
 tions except the east, and in all that region 
 there were no houses, the inhabitants liv- 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATT1 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 241 
 
 ing in tents made of bark and skins. The 
 Lord inspired Zarathustra to teach them to 
 build houses, and tame the goats and to 
 live in cities; the chief center of their hab- 
 itations being on the river Apherteon and 
 its tributaries. 
 
 And it was from these inhabitants that 
 sprang in after years the migrants called 
 Fonece'ans, signifying out of the moun- 
 tains. These people were I'huans, but be- 
 cause of the cruelties of the Par'si'e'an 
 kings they had fled and lived in the for- 
 ests. 
 
 The Lord said to Zarathustra: Behold 
 the people who fly from the kings! I have 
 made them kings over goats and the 
 beasts of the fields. And from this time 
 forth the Listians styled themselves shep- 
 herd kings. And Zarathustra taught them 
 that man should have dominion over the 
 beasts of the forests, but that no man 
 should have dominion over his neighbor. 
 Consequently, every man of the Listians 
 styled himself a king, and every woman 
 styled herself a queen. 
 
 Again, the Lord said to Zarathustra: 
 Go thou, my son, whither I will lead thee, 
 and thou shalt find a people sacred to the 
 Great Spirit. So Zarathustra wandered 
 beyond the Forest of Goats, and came to 
 Hara'woetchij, to the south of the moun- 
 tains of Oe-tahla, where were three large 
 cities and twelve small ones, inhabited by 
 I 'hins. Now the Lord had been with the 
 Thins and foretold of Zarathustra coming. 
 The Lord said to the high priest: Thou 
 shalt allow Zarathustra to come within the 
 walls of the cities for he is pure. 
 
 So Zarathustra went in, and in the 
 time of worship before the altar, the Lord 
 appeared in a great light and commanded 
 the high priest, saying: Behold, I have 
 brought my son to thee. Him shalt thou 
 anoint as a priest according to the I'hin 
 laws; and thou shalt teach him the rites 
 and ceremonies of the ancients. Accord- 
 ingly Zarathustra was made a priest and 
 was otherwise accepted as an I'hin, and be- 
 stowed under the rod with water and 
 with fire. And he also taught the sacred 
 words, and the art of writing and making 
 tablets; and of weaving cloth from flax and 
 making clothes. Zarathustra remained 
 with the I'hins seven years, fasting and 
 praying, and singing and dancing before 
 
 the Lord. And then the Lord commanded 
 him to return through the Forest of Goats, 
 which he did, teaching the Listians wher- 
 ever he halted for a rest. 
 
 At the end of another seven years the 
 Lord said to Zarathustra: Behold, the 
 dawn of light is come! Thou shalt leave 
 thy mother with thy people, and I will lead 
 thee to the city of thy birth. Zarathustra 
 said: Tell me, O Lord, of the city of my 
 birth. The Lord said: It is a great city, 
 but it shall fall before thy hand; for I'hua'- 
 Mazda hath turned his favor away from its 
 kings. 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 In two days' journey Zarathustra came 
 to Oas, and entered into the city, and he 
 brought no provender with him. Now it 
 was a law of Oas, that all strangers com- 
 ing into the city, should bring provender 
 as a testimony of fidelity to the laws and 
 to the king. So, when he came to the 
 inner gate, the keeper asked him for pro- 
 vender; but Zarathustra answered him, 
 saying: Naked I came into the world, 
 and Ormazd asketh me not for provender. 
 Is thy king greater than thy Creator? 
 
 The keeper said: I know not thy words. 
 Shall a servant explain laws? To which 
 Zarathustra said: Thou art wise; neither 
 shalt thou suffer for disobedience in let- 
 ting me pass. The Lord will give thee 
 food. When he had spoken thus there fell 
 at the feet of the keeper an abundance of 
 fruit, and the keeper feared, but stood 
 aside, and allowed Zarathustra to pass in. 
 
 The keeper not only told the people 
 of the miracle, but told the king also. 
 This was Asha, who had reigned since the 
 death of So-qi, and no sooner did he hear 
 of the miracle than he remembered the 
 person whom he had seen in infancy. 
 Asha, the king, sent officers at once to find 
 Zarathustra, and bring him before the 
 court. But the Lord knowing these 
 things, inspired Zarathustra to go to the 
 king; and accordingly he went himself be- 
 fore the officers had returned. 
 
 The king said: Who art thou, and for 
 what purpose hast thou come before the 
 king? 
 
 Then spake I'hua'Mazda through Zara- 
 thustra, saying: I am I'hua'Mazda, God 
 of the I'huans. He through whom I 
 
242 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 speak is Zarathustra, whom thou sawest in 
 his mother's arms. I have come before 
 thee, O king, for two reasons: Thou hast 
 sent for me; and I desire to use thee. The 
 king said: Speak further, stranger, that I 
 may approve of thy words. 
 
 In the time of So-qi, said I'hua'Mazda, 
 I made thee king of Oas, and from that 
 day to this, my ashars have been with thee 
 and heard thee oft praying privately for 
 information of the infant thou sawest, for 
 the question resteth heavily on thy judg- 
 ment whether or no man be immortal. 
 Sit thou with me this night privily, and I 
 will show thee So-qi's spirit. 
 
 Asha said: Thou wert to smite the 
 city and it would fall. Behold, it standeth! 
 Yet I desire not to stand in my own light. 
 
 Zarathustra spake to him saying: Fear 
 not, O king, for this philosophy. As thou 
 wouldst bend a straw, so do the Gods 
 wield the nations of the earth. The city 
 will fall ere six years pass, and thou shalt 
 be reduced to beggary, and yet thou shalt 
 be happier than now. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 When night came, the king sat privily 
 with Zarathustra; and I'hua'Mazda cast a 
 light on the wall, and the spirit of So-qi 
 came and appeared before Asha. So-qi 
 said: Knowest thou who I am? And 
 Asha said: Yea, So-qi. So-qi said: True, 
 O king, the soul is immortal! And then it 
 disappeared. 
 
 Asha said: It seemeth to be So-qi. 
 And yet, if it were he, would he not have 
 called me Asha, instead of, O king? Then 
 spake Zarathustra, saying: Call thou for 
 some other spirit. Asha said: Allow the 
 spirit of my wife to appear. 
 
 Again the light appeared, and the spirit 
 of Asha's wife inhabited it, and he saw her. 
 Asha said: It is, indeed, like my wife! 
 And then she disappeared. Asha said: 
 Had it been my wife, she would have spok- 
 en. 
 
 Zarathustra said: Call thou for another 
 spirit. Asha called for Choe'jon, the 
 songster, who looked like no other man. 
 And Choe'jon also appeared, and sang one 
 of the songs about the slaughter of the 
 infants. Asha said: It was like Choe'jon, 
 but had it been him he surely would have 
 mentioned the miracle. 
 
 Then Zarathustra said: Call for anoth- 
 er spirit. And Asha called and another 
 appeared; and thus it continued until twen- 
 ty of the spirits of the dead had shown 
 themselves, and talked with him face to 
 face, and every one had related things 
 pertinent to themselves. 
 
 Then spake Zarathustra, saying: To- 
 morrow night shalt thou sit with me again. 
 Now, on the next night, twenty other 
 spirits of the dead appeared and spake 
 face to face with the king. But yet he be- 
 lieved not. Then spake I'hua'Mazda, say- 
 ing: 
 
 What will satisfy thee, O man? For I 
 declare unto thee that spirit is not prova- 
 ble by corpor, nor corpor by spirit. These 
 are two different things; one groweth by 
 aggregating, and the other by dissemina- 
 tion. As by darkness light is known, and 
 by light darkness known, similarly diverse 
 are corpor and spirit known. Thy genera- 
 tions, O king, have long been bred in un- 
 belief in spirit, and unbelief is so entailed 
 upon thee that evidence is worthless before 
 thee. Who thinkest thou I am? 
 
 Asha said: Zarathustra. Then Zara- 
 thustra asked him: Who thinkest thou I 
 am? Again Asha said: Zarathustra. To 
 which I'hua'Mazda said: 
 
 Because thou seest with thine eyes this 
 corporeal body, and hearest with thine 
 ears this corporeal voice, so dost thy cor- 
 poreal judgment find answer. But I de- 
 clare to thee, O king, that there is a spir- 
 itual judgment as well as a corporeal judg- 
 ment. There is a spiritual man within all 
 men, which never dies. The spiritual man 
 which is within, is the only one that can 
 distinguish spiritual things; it is the only 
 one that can recognize the spirits of the 
 dead. 
 
 Then Asha said: How shall I prove 
 there be not some element belonging to 
 the personally, that is a mirror, to repro- 
 duce a semblance of whatsoever is within 
 thy thoughts? 
 
 I'hua'Mazda said: What would that 
 profit thee, if proven? And what would it 
 profit thee if not proven? Hear me, then, 
 for this is wisdom: There are millions of 
 spirits in heaven who are in the same 
 doubt as thou art now in, not knowing 
 that they are dead; especially those slain 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATT1 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 243 
 
 in war, and those dying in unbelief in spirit 
 life. 
 
 Asha said: Who, then, sayest thou, 
 thou art. 
 
 I'hua'Mazda said: First, there is Or- 
 mazd, the Creator, Who is over all and 
 within all, Whose Person is the Whole. 
 Then there are the unseen worlds in the 
 firmament; then this world, and the stars 
 and sun and moon. Then mortals, and the 
 spirits of the dead. 
 
 Because the spirits of the dead know 
 not the higher heavens, Ormazd, the All 
 Master, sendeth His exalted angels down 
 to the earth as masters and teachers, hav- 
 ing captains and high captains that their 
 labor may be done orderly. The highest 
 captain is called I'hua'Mazda. Know 
 then, O king, that I, who speak, have thee 
 and thy city and country in my keeping. 
 I have come to stay man's bloody hand. 
 And through Zarathustra I will reveal the 
 laws of Ormazd, and they shall stand 
 above all other laws. Because thou art the 
 most skilled of men, I made thee king. 
 Because thou hast seen that man must 
 have an All Highest, I have come to thee. 
 Yea, from thy youth up, and during thy 
 long life, I have spoken to thy soul, say- 
 ing: Asha, find thou the. All Highest! 
 Asha, thou shalt have a strange labor be- 
 fore thou diest! Asha, thou who hast at- 
 tained to the measurement of the stars, 
 shalt find the Power behind the stars! 
 
 Asha said: Enough! Enough! O 
 stranger! Thou turnest my head with 
 wonders. I scarcely know if I am living 
 or dead, because of the mastery of thy 
 wisdom. Alas, my kindred are dead; my 
 friends are fools! I have none to tell 
 these wonders to. All thy days shalt thou 
 live in my palace, and whatsoever thou de- 
 mandest shall be granted unto thee. 
 
 I'hua'Mazda said: Till I come again to 
 thee, O king, keep thine own counsel. For 
 the present I must return to the forest. 
 Give, me, therefore, of thy choicest ink and 
 brushes and writing cloth, and send thou 
 two servants with me. 
 
 Asha said: Permit me to be one of thy 
 servants, and I will abdicate my throne. 
 
 I'hua'Mazda said: I shall need thee 
 where thou art. 
 
 Thus ended the interview with the king; 
 and the next day Zarathustra returned to 
 
 the forest to write the Zarathustrian, 
 I'hua'-Mazdian, and Ormazdian laws. 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 Zarathustra said: Interpret to me, O 
 Holy One! 
 
 I'hua'Mazda said: Zarathustra, All 
 Pure! I will interpret; write thou. 
 
 These, then, are the Ormazdian laws; 
 the I'hua'Mazdian laws; the Zarathustrian 
 laws: 
 
 First, Ormazd was, and He created all 
 created things. He was All. He is All. 
 
 The All must have a name; and here I 
 make a circle with cross lines and a leaf 
 intersected, and thou shalt call it Ormazd, 
 the All Master. 
 
 Then I'hua'Mazda made a square, and 
 painted four dark corners in it, and called 
 them Anra'mainyus, the Uh'druk, the oppo- 
 site to All Truth, All Light and All Good. 
 And there stood within the corners of evil, 
 the name of Ormazd, and it was light 
 whilst the corners were black. I'hua'Maz- 
 da said to Zarathustra: This symbol rep- 
 resents the created creation. Hence, the 
 name of the complete symbol is Fate, from 
 which there is no escape. 
 
 Zarthustra inquired of I'hua'Mazda, 
 saying: Is evil, evil? Is good, good? 
 
 I'hua'Mazda said: Evil is evil to man, 
 but evil is not evil to Ormazd. Good is 
 good to man, but good is not good to Or- 
 mazd. Only two conditions are before 
 Ormazd: Not evil, nor good; but ripe and 
 unripe! To Ormazd, that which man call- 
 eth evil, is unripe; to Ormazd, that which 
 man calleth good, is ripe. But so that 
 man be not confounded, thou shalt call 
 unripe, evil; and ripe, good. Without green 
 fruit, none could be ripe. Without evil, 
 none could be good. Ormazd created all 
 creations with all things to fill their own 
 place. 
 
 Zarathustra inquired of I'hua'Mazda: 
 How many words are there that can be 
 written? 
 
 Then answered I'hua'Mazda, saying: 
 Ten times ten thousand thousand are all 
 the words that can be written. 
 
 Then Zarathustra said: Write me down 
 all the words, and explain their meaning 
 to me, that I may go before the world 
 teaching All Truth, that men be no longer 
 in darkness. 
 
244 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 Then I'hua'Mazda wrote thousands of 
 words and explained the meaning of all 
 he wrote. 
 
 Then I'hua'Mazda revealed the secrets 
 of heaven and earth to him, and command- 
 ed him to write them in a book, which he 
 did; and this was the first sacred book, the 
 Ormazdian law; the Zarathustrian law; the 
 I'hua'Mazdian law. 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 I'hua'Mazda said: Ormazd created a 
 good creation. First, the land and water 
 and firm things. Out of the unseen and 
 void created He them. Second, the hea- 
 venly lights; and the heat and the cold. 
 Third, all living animals, and fish and 
 birds. Fourth, man and woman. 
 
 Then spake Ormazd through his son, 
 Vivanho, saying: Speech! Voice! Words! 
 And man and women were the only talk- 
 ing animals created in all the world. 
 
 Ormazd also created Aura'mainjus, 
 with seven heads. The names of the heads 
 were: Vanity, tattling, worthlessness, ly- 
 ing, incurable wickedness, evil intentions 
 for evil, and king and leader for self sake. 
 
 Ormazd also created association, by 
 words bringing men together. 
 
 Ormazd created habitations, and dwell- 
 ing places for the spirits of the dead. And 
 Ormazd created sustenance for the spirits 
 of the dead, haoma. He created the boon 
 of rest for the weary. He created sweet- 
 smelling and rich growing pastures. And 
 Ormazd created combination, which is 
 strength. Then power to receive knowl- 
 edge. 
 
 Ormazd shall be King, and thou shall 
 acknowledge no other. He shall be thy 
 All Highest love forever and above all 
 other loves. 
 
 Thou shalt not bow down in reverence 
 to any except Ormazd, the Creator. 
 
 Thou shalt covenant thyself to thy Cre- 
 ator every day, and teach thy children to 
 do likewise. 
 
 Thou shalt keep holy the four moon's 
 days, for they are the change of watch of 
 the angels over men. 
 
 Thou shalt not kill what thy Creator 
 created alive. 
 
 Thou shalt love thy father next to thy 
 Creator, and obey his voice, and honor thy 
 
 mother, because she brought thee forth 
 by the will of thy Creator. 
 
 Thou shalt not suffer thy desires to 
 lead thee after woman. 
 
 Thou shalt not be vain, for nothing is 
 thine. 
 
 Thou shalt not speak untruth.' 
 
 Thou shalt not talk of thy neighbor be- 
 hind his back, for Ormazd heareth thee, 
 and the angels will go tell thy neighbor's 
 soul what thou hast said. 
 
 Thou shalt not be idle or lazy, or thy 
 flesh will become weak and bear down thy 
 soul. 
 
 Thou shalt not envy, nor harbor hatred 
 against any man nor woman nor child. 
 
 Thou shalt not reprove any man nor 
 woman for their evil, for they are the Cre- 
 ator's. 
 
 Thou shalt reprove thine own child, 
 and teach him the right way. 
 
 Thou shalt not lie with thy wife during 
 pregnancy. 
 
 Thou shalt not take to wife any of thy 
 kin nearer than the fifth generation. 
 
 Thou shalt not take to wife a woman 
 of unclean habits. 
 
 Thou shalt not commit the self-habit. 
 
 Thou shalt not desire of thy neighbor 
 more than thou wouldst give. 
 
 Thou shalt fast one day of the fourth 
 moon all thy life; nothing but water shall 
 enter thy mouth. 
 
 One whole year of thy life thou shalt 
 dwell with the poor, live with the poor, 
 sleep with the poor, begging for alms for 
 the poor. 
 
 CHAPTER XI. 
 
 I'hua'Mazda said unto Zarathustra: 
 Three castes have I made; the first are the 
 I'hins, sacred above all other people, be- 
 cause they keep my commandments; sec- 
 ond, the I'huans, more powerful than oth- 
 er people, because by them I will subdue 
 the earth; and third, the Druks, the people 
 of darkness and who are without power to 
 learn. 
 
 I'hua'Mazda said to Zarathustra: Re- 
 member the caste of men; keep thy blood 
 in the place I created thee; nor shalt thou 
 marry but in the caste I created thee. 
 
 I'hua'Mazda said: A thousand castes 
 I created amongst the I'huans: The king, 
 the doctor, the magician, the priest, the 
 
CYCLE OF FEAGAPATTI — — 
 
 245 
 
 farmer, the bearer of burdens, the messen- 
 ger, swift-footed, and for all other occu- 
 pations. Each and all within their own 
 castes; nor shall they marry but in their 
 own caste. 
 
 After Zarathustra wrote all the com- 
 mandments down, I 'hua'Mazda stooped 
 down and kissed the book, which was 
 made of cloth, saying: This is my holy 
 book. Take it, O Zarathustra, thou All 
 Pure, and go thou forth into the world, 
 teaching and explaining it. 
 
 Then Zarathustra kissed the book, say- 
 ing: This is thy holy book, O I 'hua'- 
 Mazda. I take it; and I will go into all 
 the world, teaching it, and explaining it. 
 
 Thus was completed the first sacred, 
 holy book for mortals. And Zarathustra 
 rose up from his writing, tall and hand- 
 some, inquiring of I'hua'Mazda, saying: 
 Whither shall I go first, O master? 
 
 Then answered I'hua'Mazda, saying: 
 Take my holy book, the Ormazdian law, 
 the Zarathustrian law, first to Asha, king 
 of the I'huans, king of Oas, the City of 
 the Sun. Him I have prepared for thee 
 and thy work before the day of thy birth. 
 
 Then Zarathustra went forth, strong in 
 faith; and he came to Asha, the king. 
 And the king- said unto him: Thou hast 
 tarried so long! Behold, I have cast the 
 horoscope a thousand times. I have proved 
 all the stars in heaven and named them, 
 and made maps of them. And I have 
 measured the power of one star over anoth- 
 er star; and the powers of the stars on 
 this world, and the powers of the sun and 
 moon. I have sent into the great cities of 
 the east, to men of great learning; and to 
 the south and west, to men of great learn- 
 ing. And then I sent to the kings of Jaf- 
 feth and of Shem; to Baugh-ghan-ghad; to 
 Bing-thah; and to the great city of Huug- 
 sin, where the great philosopher, Ah- 
 tdong, liveth. And from all of these I 
 have obtained great wisdom. 
 
 Hear me, then, O Zarathustra; I will 
 speak to thee as if thy philosophy were 
 true; but yet I believe it not: First, then, 
 in all the stars there is nothing but lies; 
 neither mattereth it not if a man be born 
 under this star or that star! I am old 
 now and haye observed thousands of men, 
 even kings and queens, as to whether the 
 stars rule over them, and I declare unto 
 
 thee that the philosophy of the stars is 
 nothing but lies. Yea, I have searched in 
 mine own self, and I find I am often do- 
 ing things contrary to my first intentions; 
 but as to the cause, I know not. 
 
 This also have I discovered: there is 
 one kind of causes that lie with individu- 
 als; and there is another kind of causes 
 that lie with kings and kingdoms ; but, yet, 
 I perceive that each and every mart is 
 bound in his own channel by something 
 stronger than himself. To find the cause 
 of this, I have searched to the extent of 
 all the stars in the firmament, but found 
 not the truth. Now I ask thee, in the 
 name of thy God, if thou canst prove this 
 matter to thy king? 
 
 Then answered Zarathustra, saying: 
 Through my hand hath I'hua'Mazda writ- 
 ten a most holy book, explaining many 
 philosophies. This book have I brought 
 unto thee, according to the commandments 
 of my God. Read thou it. 
 
 Then the king took the book and read 
 it; and on the next day Zarathustra 
 came before the king. The king said: 
 Thy book saith thus and so, but it 
 proveth little. Thy God asserteth he 
 hath done thus and so, and that 
 he created thus and so. First of all, then, 
 I know not if there be a God; second, if 
 there be a God, I know not that he com- 
 eth to thee; and, third, if he come to thee, 
 and he be a just God, why cometh he not 
 to me? And yet, after all, for I doubt not 
 thy wisdom will give sufficient answers to 
 these questions, if it be true there are 
 Gods unseen that rule over us, and spirits 
 of the dead that come to us, persuading 
 our souls unconsciously to ourselves, 
 what mattereth whether we try or not, to 
 obtain truth and wisdom? Shall not all 
 things be left to the spirits of Gods and 
 Lords? Knowest thou not that the an- 
 cients believed these things? And yet 
 what of the ancients? Were they not in 
 darkness, and addicted to horrid rites 
 and ceremonies, and murders, and savage- 
 ry? With our wisdom of disbelief in their 
 religions, have we not attained to great 
 cities and empires? Behold our thous- 
 ands and tens of thousands of large cities! 
 And do they not all have just reason to 
 be proud? For there is not one city but 
 that its walls and gates are adorned with 
 
246 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 thousands of the skeletons and the skulls 
 of serpents and lions, and the scalps of 
 Druks. 
 
 Then spake I'hua'Mazda to the king, 
 through Zarathustra, saying: Hear thy 
 God, O king, and be considerate of my 
 words. There are two births unto all 
 men; the first is from the mother's womb, 
 and the second is from the corporeal 
 body. Prior to the first birth, the will 
 and power of the child is nothing as to 
 shaping its own destiny. But prior to the 
 spiritual birth, which is the mortal death, 
 the man hath much to do as to shaping 
 his future destiny in the next world. I 
 declare unto thee, O king, that the cor- 
 poreal man is, therefore, but half accom- 
 plished as to his real life. He is but half 
 his own master; but half the controller 
 of his place and behavior in the mortal 
 world; nevertheless, he is the first half, 
 the first chooser. Think not that spirits 
 and Gods rule men as if they were slaves 
 or toys; for another power also lieth over 
 man, which is neither spirits nor Gods 
 nor stars, nor moon nor sun; but the cor- 
 poreal surroundings that feed his earthly 
 desires. 
 
 This is the Ormazdian law: Not the 
 corporeal stars, or corporeal earth, or cor- 
 poreal man, ruleth over the spirit; but 
 the subtle, the unseen to mortals, is the 
 cause and ruler of all things. 
 
 Asha said: O that I could believe this! 
 O that I knew this were true! O that the 
 unseen worlds could be opened up to my 
 understanding! For I perceive there is 
 more power and virtue in thy philosophy 
 than in my decrees. But touching thy 
 book, O Zarathustra, answer thou me 
 this: Whom do the people in the world 
 belong to, if not to me, the Sun King? 
 Are not the people mine? 
 
 I'hua'Mazda said: All belong to Or- 
 mazd. Is it not here taught that man 
 shall acknowledge obedience and worship 
 to Ormazd only? 
 
 Asha said: I so perceive. Answer me 
 this, O Zarathustra: To disown the king 
 and the king's decrees; will not this bring 
 anarchy? For will not the rulers declare 
 thy doctrine robbeth them of subjects? To 
 which I'hua'Mazda permitted Zarathustra 
 to reply. He said: 
 
 Is it not hard for a man not to have 
 the privilege to choose his own master? 
 Behold, they are now impressed into war; 
 yea, thou keepest standing armies, trained 
 in the labor of death. And this for the 
 glory of the Sun Kingdom. Now hear 
 me, O king, for I am now speaking on 
 my own accord, and no God is speaking 
 through me. And I declare unto thee, I 
 have attained power to go in spirit into 
 the unseen worlds and behold with mine 
 own eyes how it is with the spirits of the 
 dead. And I declare unto thee there are 
 great torments for the wicked. I have 
 seen them in hell, with walls of fire going 
 up around them day and night; suffocating 
 fires of brimstone, from which they cannot 
 escape. And those slain in war, both those 
 that are for the king and those against 
 the king, are equally cast into ceaseless 
 torments, and even kings and queens with 
 them, where all are wailing and cursing; 
 and in their madness, doing wickedly unto 
 others with all their might. 
 
 The king said: If it be that thou canst 
 go into heaven and hell, it must be true 
 thou canst go to places on the corporeal 
 earth the same way. Prove thou this to 
 me, and I will believe all thou hast said. 
 
 Then Zarathustra said: Tell me whith- 
 er I shall go, that I may convince thee, O 
 king? 
 
 Asha said: Go thou to the tower of 
 the horoscope and find the words on the 
 calendar. 
 
 Then spake I'hua'Mazda, saying: Have 
 I not said I am I'hua'Mazda: and Zara- 
 thustra has said he is Zarathustra. But 
 this thou canst not see. Behold, thou shalt 
 witness now thine own craft. Here return- 
 eth Zarathustra. 
 
 Then spake Zarathustra, saying: Thou 
 saidst to me: Go to the tower of the horo- 
 scope and find me the words of the calen- 
 dar. Lo, I have been there, and already 
 returned before thee. These, then, are 
 the words of the calendar: To-ka, Seis, 
 ctvai tnong, biang loo-singooh wotchich; 
 an porh, an oot, an dhi, an git. 
 
 Asha said: This is true. But how 
 shall I determine that thou gatheredst not 
 the calendar from my heart? For I had 
 the knowledge in my heart since sunrise. 
 Then answered Zarathustra, saying: Try 
 me once again; yea, thou shalt ask me for 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI «*«.. — 
 
 247 
 
 some toy of thine, and I will go and pro- 
 cure it. 
 
 Asha said: Behold, when I was a boy 
 I let fall into the river, betwixt the cliffs, 
 at the outer wall, a golden case; go, thou, 
 and bring it. 
 
 Then spake I'hua'Mazda: Two condi- 
 tions belong to all men, belief and unbe- 
 lief. They are as seeds, planted in the soul 
 of man whilst he is yet in his mother's 
 womb; and when he is born into the 
 world, they begin to grow within him. If 
 man favor one only, it will grow at the 
 expense of the other. Because of unbelief 
 in man, he searched after truth and knowl- 
 ledge; but because of belief in man, he 
 findeth happiness; but the latter may lead 
 to stupidity, and the former to cruelty. 
 It is a wise man, therefore, that keepeth 
 these two talents evenly balanced. 
 
 Now whilst I'hua'Mazda spake, the 
 long-lost golden case fell at the king's 
 feet, and it was dripping with water. The 
 king examined it, and then exclaimed: 
 This is true. And yet, if there be spirits 
 and Gods, how shall I determine which 
 one brought this? May it not have been 
 an evil spirit as well as a good one? 
 
 Then spake I'hua'Mazda, saying: Have 
 I not said, I will show thee thine own 
 craft in finding some other reason than 
 the right one? 
 
 Asha said: O ye Gods, cannot ye heal 
 me of my unbelief? My judgment show- 
 eth me I am diseased in heart. O that 
 my mother had been a believing woman 
 before I was born! Tell me, O Zarathus- 
 tra, or I'hua'Mazda, whoever thou art, for 
 I perceive thou art not like any man under 
 the sun, tell me what I shall do, that I 
 may become thy servant? 
 
 I'hua'Mazda said: On the morrow at 
 sunrise I will come to thee again, with 
 Zarathustra, and I will tell thee many 
 things. 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 When the time had come, on the mor- 
 row, the king said: I have not slept. All 
 night I was as one burnt with a fever; for 
 thy wondrous words and miracles have 
 well nigh turned my judgment upside 
 down. 
 
 I'hua'Mazda said: Because a man can- 
 not understand a thing, shall he cry out, 
 
 Miracle! Now I declare I have done no 
 miracle; nor hath Zarathustra. Yet to 
 mortals these things are miracles! If so, 
 is not man a miracle to himself? Is not 
 procreation a miracle? This, then, I have 
 found, O Asha, what man is not accus- 
 tomed to, he calleth a miracle; after he 
 hath seen a matter frequently, he calleth it 
 a natural law. What man hast thou found 
 that comprehendeth the first cause of any- 
 thing under the sun? Why, then, shall a 
 man waste his time in unprofitable re- 
 search? Is it not wiser that man labor to 
 raise his fellow-men out of misery and 
 darkness, than to gratify his own personal 
 desire for great learning? 
 
 The king said: Thou reasonest well. 
 And yet, what learned good man hast thou 
 found who will not say: Yea, to do good 
 is a pretty philosophy! And there endeth 
 his aspiration. What, then, can I say, or 
 what canst thou say, that the words will 
 not be barren of fruit? 
 
 I'hua'Mazda said: Thou art this day 
 king of all the world; nor is there any 
 other kingdom but payeth thee tribute. 
 Whatsoever thou desirest is as a law unto 
 all other kingdoms. For that reason am 
 I come unto thee. Yea, thou wert born 
 to this end. Hear, then, the voice of thy 
 God, and thou shalt do that which is good 
 for thy soul and good for all other peo- 
 ple. 
 
 Asha said: Almost am I tempted to 
 accede to thy wishes ere thou hast re- 
 vealed; but yet hear thou the voice of thy 
 king; what matters it to me about the 
 good of other people? Even if it be prov- 
 en that great men have souls that live af- 
 ter death, it is not yet proven that the 
 Druks have souls also. If they have souls, 
 then heaven must be a stupid place in- 
 deed. For thou hast not shown me that 
 man obtaineth wisdom by dying, nor is it 
 reasonable that he should do so. Rather 
 tell me, O Zarathustra, how I may get rid 
 of the world; for of what use is life at 
 most? 
 
 I'hua'Mazda said: Because thou rejoic- 
 est not in thy life, thou provest that thy 
 philosophy is deficient, and not that the 
 world is. For I will yet prove to thee that 
 thou art overflowing with happiness. To 
 believe the things I reveal and have faith 
 therein, is to become happy. Then the 
 
248 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 king answered him, saying: To believe, 
 there is the matter. I declare unto thee, 
 there is not a grain of belief in my heart. 
 How, then, can it grow? 
 
 I'hua'Mazda said: He who can say, I 
 can think of an All Highest, hath the seed 
 of everlasting life in him. He who liveth 
 the all highest he can; he who thinketh of 
 the All Highest; he who talketh to the All 
 Highest; he who tries to perceive from 
 the standpoint of the All Highest, quickly 
 transcendeth belief and becometh a very 
 God in faith. He becometh master of him- 
 self, and feedeth himself with happiness, 
 even as men feed themselves with bread. 
 
 Asha said: What wouldst thou have me 
 do? To which I'hua'Mazda said: With 
 the people thou hast greater authority 
 than a God, greater than miracles. Thy 
 decrees are all powerful. Thou shalt have 
 copies of this book written on stone and 
 cloth, one copy for every sub-kingdom in 
 thy dominions. And thou shalt send it to 
 them with a sword and a serpent, saying 
 to them: Receive ye this book, for it is a 
 Holy Book, the All Highest Law, the 
 I'hua'Mazdian law, the Zarathustrian law, 
 the Ormazdian law. And it shall be a 
 rule and guide unto you and your king- 
 dom forever. And every king in the 
 Kingdom of the Sun shall serve one year 
 in living with the poor, carrying the alms- 
 bowl for sacrifices unto Ormazd. 
 
 And when thou hast sent this decree 
 forth into all the world, thou shalt thyself 
 give up thy kingdom; and thou shalt give 
 to the poor all thy gold and silver, and all 
 thy treasures whatsoever, having nothing 
 left unto thyself but the clothes that cover 
 thee. And thou shalt go and live with the 
 poor, carrying the alms-bowl thyself in the 
 streets of Oas. And of the food thou gath- 
 erest in the bowl, thou shalt give the 
 choicest parts to the poor. But the poorest 
 of all that is in the bowl shall be thy por- 
 tion. At the end of one year thou shalt 
 go about preaching the Ormazdian law, 
 commanding the cessation of war and the 
 abandonment of evil, and the acceptance of 
 righteousness. 
 
 The king said: What canst thou promise 
 me if I do all these things? Then I'hua'- 
 Mazda allowed Zarathustra to answer him: 
 He said, Nothing! Did the Creator ask 
 this, before He made the world? If thou 
 
 desireth to approach thy Creator, do thou 
 like unto Him. Nor is it my place, nor the 
 angels' place, nor the place of God, to 
 promise thee anything. Thou art not my 
 servant; and thou shalt serve only the 
 Master, All Light. And as I have taught 
 thee, so shalt thou go and teach others, ex- 
 plaining the Ormazdian law. 
 
 Asha said: Do the Gods in heaven 
 give rewards for good works and sacri- 
 fices done on earth? Zarathustra said: He 
 that doeth good works and maketh sacri- 
 fices unto Ormazd hath his reward. For 
 it is by this means that the soul of man 
 becometh strong in the first and second 
 resurrections in the next world. 
 
 Asha said: To be with thee, O Zara- 
 thustra, and feast on the wisdom of thy 
 words, I would make any sacrifice. W T ilt 
 thou go with me amongst the poor? 
 
 I'hua'Mazda said: Nay, thou shalt go 
 alone. And for company thou shalt pray 
 to thy Creator, and make songs of praise 
 unto Him, nor think no more of thyself 
 than as if thou wert dead. 
 
 The king said: It is said of madmen 
 that they think they are not mad. How, 
 then, am I to know but I am mad? Will 
 not the world so adjudge me if I obey thy 
 commandments? And cannot the world 
 judge me better than I can judge myself? 
 It was said of the ancients that Sudga ob- 
 sessed old men and weak-hearted women; 
 and it was for that reason Osiris came and 
 slew him. If there be Gods in heaven, as 
 thou sayst, mayst not thou have come to 
 slay Osiris? 
 
 I'hua'Mazda said: Thou are a great 
 multiplier of arguments; but in all thy 
 speech I have seen nothing that planneth 
 the resurrection of men from darkness 
 into light. And is not this the All Highest 
 that man should aim at? 
 
 Asha said: I am done. Thy judgment 
 is greater than mine. All thou hast com- 
 manded of me I will do. From this time 
 forth I will serve only Ormazd, the Cre- 
 ator. Thy God, O Zarathustra, shall be 
 my God. Thy ways shall be my ways. 
 Henceforth I will argue forever on the 
 side of the Creator. And touching all 
 matters, I will first ask myself what I shall 
 say that would be like thy God would say 
 it; and what I shall do that will fulfill the 
 Ormazdian law. 
 
CYCLE OF FEAGAPATTI «»».■ -««. 
 
 249 
 
 CHAPTER XIII. 
 
 Asha then issued the following decree: 
 Asha, King of Oas, the City of the 
 Sun, King of the Sun, ruler over the whole 
 corporeal world, owner and possessor of 
 all mortals, men, women and children, 
 commander of all flesh, descended from 
 the Sun Gods thousands of years, and 
 whose forefathers were the fathers of all 
 living creatures, Highest of men, and by 
 whose good grace the inhabitants of the 
 earth are permitted to live, and whose de- 
 crees are the standard of all things, Mak- 
 er of Justice and Maker of Truth, and 
 whom none dare question, and on whose 
 word the sun and moon and stars bow 
 down, greeting: 
 
 To the kings and queens of the east 
 and west, north and south, over all the 
 cities in the world, rulers in the temples 
 of the stars, slayers of dragons, slayers of 
 lions, slayers of tigers, and of men and of 
 women and of children and serpents, hon- 
 ored in the golgothas, and by millions of 
 cowering slaves, owners of thousands of 
 wives, and whose boats sail in lakes of 
 mortal blood, and whose crowns are hon- 
 ored by ten thousand men slain every 
 year, sworn on the flesh of the thigh 
 whose words are life and death; and most 
 obedient to the Sun King, I command: 
 
 First, that there is an Ormazd, Creator, 
 All Person! Whose Soul is in all the 
 world, and in all things in the firmament 
 above; Who is Father; Who is the Light 
 of Light, Creator of darkness and men, 
 Who is forever The Going Forth; Who is 
 the Cause of causes; larger than all things 
 seen and unseen; the Power of all power. 
 
 Second, I 'hua'Mazda, His Son. Pure 
 and All Holy; Master of Men; Essence of 
 Ormazd revealed in Word; Savior of Men; 
 Holder of the keys of heaven; through 
 whose help the souls of men can rise to 
 Nirvana, the High Heaven. 
 
 Third, Zarathustra, A man, All Pure, 
 and born wise, being one with I'hua'Maz- 
 da, who is one with Ormazd. Of Whom 
 The Word says: He doeth without miracle. 
 The raising of the dead; healing the 
 sick by the laying on of hands; 
 whose word of command bringeth 
 forth ripe wheat, full grown, in a day; 
 and doing all things that the ancients ac- 
 
 credited to the Gods as miracles, but 
 which the Ormazdian law showeth to be 
 Natural Law to any one who is All Pure, 
 and who draweth power from Ormazd, the 
 Creator, and His holy angels. 
 
 Fourth, A Book, holy and sacred, re- 
 vealed by I'hua'Mazda to Zarathustra, the 
 All Pure; and written on stone and cloth, 
 revealing All Wisdom, which is called the 
 I'hua'Mazdian law, the Ormazdian law, 
 the Zarathustrian law, which is the All 
 Highest Law in All the world, approved 
 by Asha, the king of kings! 
 
 Ten thousand learned scribes in my 
 command have written a copy of The Holy 
 Book, and I herewith command, I, King 
 of the Sun: That this book shall be the 
 All Highest law in all my sub-kingdoms, 
 and that all my kings shall believe it and 
 command the same of their subjects. Nor 
 shall any man stand up against this, my 
 decree, and live; nor shall any man alter 
 one word or sign in this Holy Book; nor 
 disbelieve one word it containeth. And 
 my kings and sub-kings; and my queens 
 and sub-queens, shall obey all the com- 
 mandments, even as I obey them; nor 
 shall any man, or woman, or child, ques- 
 tion these things, as to whether they be 
 the All Highest, or whether there be error 
 in whatsoever cometh from my hand; for 
 by my decree they are made All Truth! 
 For I was raised up by Ormazd, for this 
 purpose; and not one in the whole world 
 hath power like unto me. And ye, to 
 whom these holy words come, shall make 
 oath on a serpent and a sword to obey 
 these, my commandments, now and for- 
 ever. 
 
 Asha sent ofhcers to carry the books 
 he had made to the kings and queens in 
 the east and west, north and south; and 
 those whom he sent were men of great 
 learning, and of the highest caste; and 
 they took with them serpents and swords, 
 and gave them as commanded, exacting an 
 oath from all who received them. 
 
 CHAPTER XIV. 
 
 When Asha, the king, had thus com- 
 pleted the labor of making the books, and 
 of sending them as commanded by Ihua'- 
 Mazda, he sent for Zarathustra. for fur- 
 ther counsel as to how he should abdicate 
 the throne according to the Highest Light. 
 
250 
 
 CYCLE OF FBAGAPATTI 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 And when I'hua'Mazda was before him, 
 even before Zarathustra had yet come, 
 Asha, said: Here cometh that quickened 
 thought again! Behold, I sent for Zara- 
 thustra in order to ask certain questions, 
 and lo, my heart answereth me! Yea, I 
 have nothing to do with what is not mine 
 own! Now, whilst he thus framed his 
 own answer, Zarathustra came and said 
 unto him: Thou desirest to counsel in 
 regard to abdicating thy throne? Behold 
 thou, I'hua'Mazda hath been to thee even 
 now, saying: What hast thou to do with 
 that which is not thine own! 
 
 Asha said: I have heretofore said: 
 That which speaketh to my heart, what is 
 it? Now according to thy wisdom, that 
 that speaketh to ^ny heart is I'hua'Mazda! 
 How shall one know it to be so? Zarathus- 
 tra said: If a man ask the All Light, in ref- 
 erence to his own affairs, and for his own 
 concerns, then receiveth he an answer from 
 the tetracts; but if he ask the All Light in 
 reference to what he shall do for others, 
 to render the highest good unto them, then 
 is the answer from I'hua'Mazda. I de- 
 clare unto thee, O Asha, he is a dark man 
 indeed to whom the Creator speaketh not 
 every day. 
 
 Asha said: What, then, shall I do in a 
 matter like this? As yet, all the world 
 belongs to me. Presently I shall deliver 
 it to itself; shall I not provide a ruler for 
 them? 
 
 Zarathustra said: Why, then, thou wilt 
 be bound to give them one as good and as 
 wise as thyself, otherwise thou wilt cheat 
 them! Furthermore, doth not the Ormaz- 
 dian law say: Thou shalt not have any 
 king but thy Creator? 
 
 Asha said: I so perceive. What then, 
 shall I go away saying nothing? 
 
 Then answered I'hua'Mazda, saying: 
 Thou shalt do more than this; for thou 
 shalt give liberty to all men, and proclaim 
 unto them, commanding that they shall 
 obey the doctrines of the Holy Book, serv- 
 ing no master but the Creator. And when 
 the people are completely broken up by 
 thy decree, thou shalt go away, leaving thy 
 throne and thy capital to whatsoever may 
 come to them. 
 
 Asha said: I perceive. That which 
 hath been given me to do, I will do. Be- 
 hold, I will bestow freedom on all the 
 
 world; and with my alms-bowl go about 
 begging. Heaven must be just, and it is 
 right that I should have the experience of 
 the poor as well as of the rich. How else 
 would I ever become sufficiently wise to 
 be a God in heaven? Yet one thing, O 
 Zarathustra, and I will ask thee no more 
 questions; thou hast said I must pray to 
 Ormazd: Now, behold, I never prayed in 
 my life? Who will teach me to pray? 
 
 I'hua'Mazda said: Let thy lips utter 
 thy holiest desires, and let thy soul seek 
 constantly for new expressions magnifying 
 the wisdom, love and power of Ormazd, 
 the Creator. Neither shalt thou take a 
 thought in regard to rules of prayer; the 
 rules are for the unlearned. He who in- 
 venteth a new prayer to Ormazd every day 
 of his life hath done wisely indeed. For 
 the glory of prayer is the strengthening of 
 one's own soul to perceive the Higher 
 Light. Prayer is not given in order to 
 change the decrees of Ormazd, but to 
 change one's self for the better. 
 
 Asha said: If a man think a prayer, and 
 use no words, is it well with him? 
 
 I'hua'Mazda said: It is well with him; 
 but it is better to add words also. It is 
 well for Ormazd to think a universe, but 
 better to create it. To begin to learn cre- 
 ating, thou shalt use spoken words; the 
 perfection of creating is to have the words 
 bear fruit. He who omitteth words of 
 prayer will in time omit prayer also, and 
 his soul tendeth to barrenness. 
 
 A vain man saith: I have no need to 
 pray; Ormazd knoweth my soul! Why, 
 then, shall not the field say: I shall pro- 
 duce no harvest, because Ormazd knoweth 
 my capacity! I declare unto thee, O Asha, 
 the secret of all spiritual growth lieth in 
 giving out the spirit: He who would 
 grow in wisdom, must give out wisdom; 
 he who would grow in love, must give out 
 love; he who would grow in power of spir- 
 it, must give out power of spirit. Bethink 
 thee, then; if thou prayest silently, thy 
 power goeth weakly to thy audience; but 
 if thou prayest with words openly, thou 
 givest to thine audience of thy fruit; and, 
 for this glory, Ormazd provideth thee 
 abundantly. When thou shalt go with thy 
 bowl to feed the feeble, old, helpless, and 
 blind, thou shalt teach them prayer and 
 confessions; and thou shalt absolve them 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI «-o«d.. r E cor D 
 
 251 
 
 that are depressed because of their sins, 
 that they may rejoice in their lives. 
 
 CHAPTER XV. 
 
 So Asha gave up all he had on earth, 
 and went and lived with the poor, carry- 
 ing the alms-bowl for one year, preaching 
 to and praying for the poor. And it came 
 to pass that at the end of the year he had 
 thousands of followers. And he built al- 
 tars for them, teaching them to worship 
 the Creator; to restore the mark of circum- 
 cision; to be upright before men; to labor 
 for the helpless and distressed, and to do 
 not to any man that which they desired 
 not to be done unto themselves. 
 
 And these people took the name of 
 Zarathustrians, in contradistinction from 
 the Par'si'e'ans. Nevertheless, they were 
 the I'huan race, and the Ghans. And be- 
 cause of their religion, they could not own 
 property, neither houses, nor lands, nor 
 cattle, nor beasts of burden. Many of 
 them gave themselves into servitude to 
 the Par'si'e'ans, but many of them lived on 
 the contributions brought by converts who 
 had had great possessions. 
 
 When Asha abdicated the throne, there 
 were many aspirants to his place, and the 
 Council of the Sun was puzzled to know 
 whom to select, that peace might reign in 
 Oas; but they finally made Hi'ya'tseing 
 king, because he was a great warrior, hav- 
 ing bestowed to the city's Walls and gates 
 more than ten thousand skulls. Hi'ya'- 
 tseing assumed the titles of his predeces- 
 sors, chief of which were King of the Sun, 
 King of Kings, and King of Oas, the cen- 
 tral city of all the world; and sent his- 
 proclamations to the chief cities of Jaffeth, 
 and Shem and Ham, commanding that 
 certain presents be sent to him every year, 
 amongst which were thousands of slaves. 
 
 Hi'ya'tseing was a man of great learn- 
 ing, and had traveled far and near, and he 
 knew the people and the lands of the 
 earth, and he knew the different products 
 of the different lands, and the number of 
 peoples in the great cities of the world, 
 and the number of warriors belonging to 
 the different -sub-kings under him. Besides 
 these things he knew the stars and thefir 
 places, and the groups of cows and horses, 
 
 and bulls, and bears, and lions, and fishes, 
 and serpents, even as they had been taught 
 in the Hyartien period amongst the an- 
 cients. 
 
 Hi'ya'tseing said: The Fete hath made 
 me king of all the world; hence, it is right 
 that I am a king. He said: It is evident 
 because Asha abdicated the throne, that 
 man must have a religion. Because I 
 know all rites and ceremonies of the 
 ancients, I will give man a religion on 
 my own account. Because Asha com- 
 manded the Zarathustrian religion unto 
 the far-off kingdoms, then are Asha and 
 Zarathustra my enemies. Let my officers 
 arrest Asha and Zarathustra and bring 
 them before me. I will make an example 
 of them. 
 
 And on the day that Asha was arrest- 
 ed, behold, the year of his carrying the 
 alms-bowl was ended. Asha and Hi'ya'- 
 tseing had known each other for many 
 years. When Asha was before the king, 
 he said: I have nothing in all the world; 
 why, then, hast thou arrested me? The 
 king said: Because thou gavest away thy 
 possessions, thou art the most dangerous 
 of men. I have decreed thee to be put to 
 death. Art thou prepared? 
 
 Asha said: Yea, O king. And yet, 
 because of our long acquaintance, I ask of 
 thee one boon, which is, that I may be put 
 to death according to the Panic rites which 
 were before the flood. And if, perchance, 
 it be proven to thee there is a God with 
 power to release me, and he so doeth it, 
 then shall not thy hand be raised against 
 me? The king said: Thy boon is granted. 
 
 Accordingly, a wheel of uh'ga was 
 built, and Asha was bound upon it, the 
 king having appointed a guard to watch 
 him till he should die. But because of the 
 king's fear that the test might be tamper- 
 ed with, he caused the yogernot to be set 
 up in his private piazza, with the uh'ga 
 facing the Gate of Lions, so that his pri- 
 vate attendants might also watch. 
 
 Great was the wailing and crying of the 
 people when it was known that Asha had 
 been decreed to death. The city of Oas 
 became as a house of mourning and mad- 
 ness, and it was divided against itself, some 
 for Asha and some for the king. 
 
252 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 Because Asha was old, and thus is view 
 of the king all day, the king repented, but 
 he had no power under the laws to set 
 aside his own decree. And when the sun 
 went down, the king went before Asha, 
 saying: Behold, thou hast been six hours 
 on the wheel, and yet thy God hath not 
 come to release thee. If thou wilt, there- 
 fore, slay thyself with a sword, I will have 
 thee taken down. 
 
 Asha said: I declare unto thee, O king, 
 I have no pain. Whether it be my mad- 
 ness; or whether it be the Gods favor me, 
 what mattereth it, since I suffer not? Nor 
 have I a right to slay myself, since I cre- 
 ated myself not alive. Moreover, if it be 
 the will of my Creator, Ormazd, that I die 
 on the wheel, then it is just. If it be not 
 His will, then will He release me. There- 
 fore, O king, I am content. 
 
 The king said: This indifference com- 
 eth of madness. And thy madness hath 
 affected the City of the Sun. Have thy 
 way, then, and die! 
 
 The king returned to his palace, but 
 on the next morning he came again, mak- 
 ing the same proposal, and receiving sim- 
 ilar answers. And at night he came again, 
 repeating his offer, and again being re- 
 fused, determined to come no more. 
 
 Now on the night of the third day, 
 Asha felt the power of I'hua'Mazda coming 
 upon him, and he said unto the guard: 
 Behold, this night I shall be released! See 
 to it, therefore, as to whether the thongs 
 are well fastened. For, if it so turn out 
 that the Father release me, then will ye 
 stand before the king accused of conniv- 
 ing at my release. Accordingly, the guard 
 re-examined the fastenings, and sent word 
 to the king of what Asha had said. And 
 the king replied: Nay, if he be released, 
 then will I know of a truth there is a God; 
 neither shall one man of my guardsmen 
 stand accused. 
 
 This they told to Asha, and Asha said: 
 I say unto you, not only one shall stand 
 accused, but all of you. And there were 
 of them one hundred, being two watches of 
 fifty each; but it being the change of watch, 
 they all heard, and they laughed in deri- 
 sion. And behold, in that same moment 
 of time, the thongs fell off, and I'hua'Maz- 
 da delivered Asha down from the uh'ga. 
 And the spirit of I 'hua'Mazda was in 
 
 Asha, nor was Asha himself, although con- 
 scious of the things done through him. 
 
 I'hua'Mazda said: Go ye and say to 
 the king: Behold, Asha is delivered by 
 the power of his God. Then the guards- 
 men said: It is not morning; the king 
 sleepeth. 
 
 I'hua'Mazda said: I say unto you, the 
 king sleepeth not, but is joyful with drink- 
 ing wine with his courtiers. They went, 
 then, and told the king, finding, of a truth, 
 he slept not. And the king commanded 
 them to bring Asha before him, which 
 they did. 
 
 Hi'ya'tseing said: What profit have 
 my guardsmen in releasing this old man? 
 Behold, it hath been said that thou, Asha, 
 hadst gold and silver hidden away. I know 
 now of a truth thou hast bribed these 
 guardsmen to set thee free. For which 
 reason, every man of these guardsmen shall 
 be put to death, and their skulls mounted 
 on the walls of Oas, and their skins tanned 
 for leather. Away with them, ye mar- 
 shals; bind them till the rising sun, and at 
 that hour hew off their heads, as I have 
 decreed. And now as for thee, thou old 
 hypocrite and destroyer of liberty! What 
 sayest thou? 
 
 Asha said: According to thy promise I 
 should now be free. There was no stipu- 
 lation in thy decree that I should not 
 bribe thy guardsmen. Behold, then, my 
 wisdom! Have I not revealed to thee that 
 thou canst not trust any man? 
 
 The king said: Thou art the wisest of 
 men. I had hoped to hear thee say thy 
 God released thee, and I had here twelve 
 swordsmen to hew off thy head. But be- 
 'cause, thou hast shown me great craft 
 thou shalt live for a season, but only on 
 condition that thou shalt leave Oas and 
 never return. 
 
 Then spake I'hua'Mazda through Asha, 
 saying: Thou hast decreed the guardsmen 
 to death at sunrise! Now I declare unto 
 thee, O king, not one of them shall die as 
 thou hast decreed. But I, I'hua'Mazda. 
 will deliver them. Think not that I am 
 Asha; I am not Asha, but a spirit, the God 
 of the I'huans. Neither will I spirit away 
 thy guardsmen by a miracle, but by natural 
 nleans, and will I show thee that I am 
 mightier through faith in my Creator than 
 all kings. 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 253 
 
 The king said: It cannot be that there 
 are Gods or spirits. Is man's judgment 
 nothing? These things were suited to the 
 dark ages. They affrighted men to jus- 
 tice., and so served a purpose. But in this 
 enlightened age man shall know justice 
 and wisdom of himself. 
 
 Whilst the king yet spake, I'hua'Mazda 
 caused the attending spirits to assume 
 mortal form by the curtains of Arizzi, back 
 of the king, and they made a noise, so that 
 the king turned to look, and he saw them. 
 He feared, not knowing but they were 
 evil persons concealed, and he said: Rob- 
 bers! murderers! And he drew his sword 
 and thrust at them; but they vanished! He 
 said: 
 
 Verily thou art a devil, O Asha! And 
 he thrust his sword at Asha, but it fell 
 from the handle. He said: Ye Fetes! 
 Kill him! kill him! And whilst he was 
 thus puzzled, Asha walked forth out of the 
 palace, nor would the king's guards lay 
 hands on him. 
 
 CHAPTER XVI. 
 
 When Asha went away from the king's 
 palace, Zarathustra met him, and they 
 went together to the prison where the 
 guardsmen were confined, prior to the ex- 
 ecution on the morrow at sunrise; and 
 there came four hundred of the converts 
 of Asha, and, when they stood around 
 the prison, Zarathustra said unto them: 
 
 Stand ye in the crescent of the living 
 altar, for the power of Ormazd is upon me, 
 and I will deliver this prison! And the 
 keeper of the prison, and also his attend- 
 ants, woke up, and came with spears, say- 
 ing: Disperse! disperse! Or, by the King 
 of the Sun, ye shall die! 
 
 Zarathustra said: Art thou greater 
 than I'hua'Mazda? Thrust, then, thy 
 spear against my breast. The keeper did 
 so, saying: Thy size is nothing to me, 
 thou boaster! But lo, the shaft was broken 
 in a thousand pieces, neither touched trie 
 blade against his garments. Seeing which, 
 the other spearsmen feared, and Zarathus- 
 tra walked up to them and took their 
 spears from them. And the Zarathustri- 
 ans stood in the form of a living altar, 
 and Zarathustra laid his hands against the 
 front wall of the prison, saying: In thy 
 wisdom and power, O Ormazd, deliver 
 
 thou this prison! And, behold, the front 
 wall opened as a door openeth, and the 
 prisoners came out unharmed. 
 
 Zarathustra said': On the morrow the 
 king will decree to death every Faithist 
 within the city. Go ye, therefore, while it 
 is yet night, and command all my people 
 to rise at once and depart out of the city, 
 and I will lead them to a place of safety. 
 So that same night the Faithists lied be- 
 yond the walls. 
 
 And it came to pass that on the next 
 day, when the king heard what had trans- 
 pired in regard to the prison, he decreed 
 to death every Zarathustrian found within 
 the city, even as prophesied by Zarathus- 
 tra. But they were already gone, and 
 there were of them four thousand six hun- 
 dred and thirty, men, women and children. 
 
 CHAPTER XVII. 
 
 I'hua'Mazda spake to Zarathustra, say- 
 ing: Explain these things to my people, 
 for they shall not dwell in darkness nor in 
 fear. Zarathustra said: What shall I tell 
 them, O I'hua'Mazda? 
 
 I'hua'Mazda said: My people are unit- 
 ed; my people are delivered out of the evil 
 city. To themselves, of themselves, and by 
 themselves, have I delivered them, as a 
 separate people. I found an easy way to 
 unite them; I went not by a dark road. 
 This is no miracle, but the manifestation 
 of Faith in the All Light. Take them fur- 
 ther away from Oas; far away in the for- 
 est. And since Asha is an old man, and 
 learned above all other men, he shall be 
 the rab'bah over them. 
 
 But as for thee, O Zarathustra, thou 
 art young and strong. Thou shalt choose 
 fifty men from amongst my people, well 
 learned and strong, full of vigor. And they 
 shall be thy companions; and thou shalt 
 visit the large cities of Jaffeth and Shem 
 and Ham. For four years shalt thou trav- 
 el, delivering the Zarathustrian law; but 
 at the end of that time thou shalt return to 
 Oas, and to this people, my first chosen. 
 And after, Asha shall go with thee to Oas, 
 and thou shalt raise thy hand against the 
 city, and it shall fall. 
 
 Zarathustra then explained these things 
 to the people, and thereafter took them to 
 the valley of Yan'she, by the river Witch'- 
 owitch ; and he divided them into three 
 
254 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 large cities and four small ones, after the 
 manner of the Thins. And he appointed 
 rab'bahs, and made Asha chief rab'bah over 
 all the others. 
 
 And Zarathustra chose fifty men, well 
 learned, and vigorous; and they departed, 
 to establish the Zarathustrian law in the 
 cities of the east and south. I'hua'Mazda 
 led them forth, speaking to Zarathustra, 
 telling him whither to go, and directing 
 him in the nearest roads, over the moun- 
 tains and plains, and across the rivers, 
 And wheresoever they went, I'hua'Mazda 
 provided them with beasts of burden, and 
 beasts to ride on, converting their owners 
 to the Ormazdian law, who gave them all 
 things required. 
 
 The first large city Zarathustra came 
 to was Tse'gow, on the plains of Jo'ab, 
 high walled with wood and stone; and 
 when he came to the gate thereof the keep- 
 er demanded his name and business, speak- 
 ing in another language, and Zarathustra 
 understod him not. Then came I'hua'- 
 Mazda, answering the keeper in his own 
 tongue, saying: 
 
 I am a servant of the Creator, Ormazd; 
 I come to prove immortal life before the 
 king. Send, then, to thy king, and he will 
 admit me and my people. So the keeper 
 sent to the king, who commanded that 
 Zarathustra come before him. And when 
 he and his attendants were thus before the 
 king, the king said: Art thou he of whom 
 the King of the Sun hath spoken? And 
 what is thy business with me? Thy king, 
 even the king of kings, is mad. Then an- 
 swered I'hua'Mazda, saying: 
 
 Zarathustra, of whom the Sun king 
 spake, is before thee. I am here to prove 
 to thee many things pertaining to what is 
 written in the holy book. But ere I 
 utter many words, I pray thee, that thy 
 son, Ha'sing, and thy wife, Hi'ti'us, and 
 thy daughters, Peutu, Zoo, He'in and Za- 
 bee, be also present. 
 
 The king said: How knowest thou the 
 names of my people? And I'hua'Mazda 
 said: Here stand familiar spirits, and they 
 speak to me. Chief amongst them is Ay'- 
 ay, thy grandfather, who slew himself; and 
 next to him are thy kinspeople in spirit, 
 Noa, Wess, Lut, Gan'ce, Mith'ce, Nim'- 
 och, Wo'huin, Ruks and Pa'stctie. 
 
 The king was concerned, for many of 
 these had been slain in wars, nor knew he 
 how Zarathustra discovered their names. 
 So he sent for his wife and son and daugh 
 ters, and they all went into an inner cham- 
 ber, Zarathustra with them. I'hua'Mazda 
 spake to the king, saying: 
 
 Think not that Asha is mad because 
 he hath given up all he had and gone to 
 live with the poor. The Gods call all men 
 mad who do otherwise, especially rich 
 men, and kings, and rulers. For such men 
 set value on things that they cannot retain 
 but during mortal life at most. Asha set- 
 teth value on that which will last forever. 
 I would that all men would do as Asha 
 hath done. Because of unbelief in the 
 Great Spirit, man hath set himself up as 
 the All Highest, and his trade hath be- 
 come war and destruction. I came not to 
 persuade thee to give away thy kingdom 
 nor thy riches, nor yet for any glory or 
 profit to myself. I speak for the hosts be- 
 ing slain, tribe against tribe, city against 
 city; I speak for the millions of spirits in 
 darkness, who dwell on the battlefields. 
 
 I'hua'Mazda thus gained the attention 
 of the king, and, meanwhile, the angels 
 who accompanied him took on semblance 
 of mortals; and presently, the king and his 
 family looked about and saw them, and 
 were frightened; and the king drew his 
 sword, saying: Who have entered thus, 
 uncalled! But as he advanced, behold, 
 the spirits disappeared. The king was 
 amazed, I'hua'Mazda continued speaking: 
 
 Concern thyself not because the spirits 
 show themselves; neither call thou these 
 appearances miracles. Spirits are always 
 present; but because they thus clothed 
 themselves with the semblance of corpor- 
 eal parts, thou hast for the first time seen 
 them. Whilst thou wast quiet, they came; 
 with thy sudden passion they disappeared. 
 
 The king said: Will they come again? 
 Then answered I'hua'Mazda, saying: Since 
 thy wife and thy daughters are frightened, 
 why should they appear again? Yet hear 
 thou me, O king! Since thy youth up 
 thou hast been prepared for this. Thy wife 
 is half-breed with the I'hins, the sacred 
 people. The I'hins were preserved by the 
 Gods to this end, for they are as the lea- 
 ven, prepared for the resurrection of all the 
 races of men. Because of this great vir- 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 255 
 
 tue in thy wife, the spirits of the dead can 
 show themselves before thee. 
 
 Whilst I'hua'Mazda thus spake, the 
 angels again assumed sar'gis, and there 
 were present several spirits whose mortal 
 lives had been cut short by the king's own 
 sword. Chief of these was Awetakeytha, 
 one time king of the city of Tse'gow. 
 
 The sar'gis spake to the king, saying: 
 Think not that I am dead, O king! I am 
 not dead, save in the corporeal part. As 
 by thy sword thou didst cut me off, so by 
 the sword shalt thou be pierced through. 
 Next spake Too'Sain, another sar'gis, say- 
 ing: Till thou art dead, O king, and thy 
 soul cast into hell, I will not cease to tor- 
 ment thee! Next spake Ghon, another 
 sar'gis, saying: Before yesterday I brought 
 venom from rotten flesh, and inoculated 
 thee in the breath of thy mouth! Thou 
 shalt cough blood and foul-smelling cor- 
 ruption! Next spake Owd, saying: I am 
 come from the land of the dead, O king, 
 with the torments of hell for thee! Then 
 spake We'Seay, a sar'gis, saying: I am 
 thy first wife; why slewest thou me? Was 
 not the world wide enough? 
 
 Thus the spirits continued to speak, 
 permitted by I'hua'Mazda to manifest their 
 evil desires and passions in their own way; 
 nor did one spirit appear who had a single 
 good word of cheer for the king. Then 
 the king spake, saying: 
 
 Go away, spirits, or devils! I will see 
 no more! And, with that, he swung his 
 sword about fiercely; but when he quieted 
 a little, I'hua'Mazda spake to him, saying: 
 
 I declare unto thee, O king, heaven is 
 filled with the spirits of the dead, and be- 
 cause they were slain by thee, they lie in 
 wait for thy spirit, when thou shalt die. 
 Think not that by slaying a man thou art 
 rid of him; only the corporeal part is with- 
 in thy power. The soul never dieth. Or- 
 mazd is just. Whom thou hast injured, 
 thou shalt restore. 
 
 The king said: If a man be a bad man, 
 and I kill him, is it not a great good? 
 I'hua'Mazda said: To kill him is a great 
 evil. Thou shouldst convert him to good. 
 The king said: But if he belong to me? 
 Then I'hua'Mazda said: No man belong- 
 eth to thee. The same Creator created all 
 men; and they belong to Him. 
 
 The king said: But I have possession of 
 them. They are mine. If thy Creator is 
 stronger than I, let Him take them. 
 
 I'hua'Mazda said: To take them from 
 thee would be no honor: but for thee to de- 
 liver them is thine own honor. 
 
 Now whilst the king's mind was thus 
 engaged, the angels cut loose the tapestry 
 about the walls, and let it fall to the floor, 
 and with great confusion, the queen and 
 her daughters rose up and fled. 
 
 The king was angered, and thrust his 
 sword at Zarathustra; but it broke into a 
 hundred pieces, and yet no part touched 
 Zarathustra. 
 
 I'hua'Mazda said: Save thou repent 
 of thy evil ways, I will withdraw my holy 
 angels from this house, and thou shalt 
 bear witness that ere the morning sun ap- 
 pears, this palace shall not be left stand- 
 ing. 
 
 But the king was hardened. So, when 
 I'hua'Mazda perceived there was no re- 
 pentance in the king, he withdrew the 
 Lord and his ashars, abandoning the pal- 
 ace to evil spirits, but he sent guardian 
 angels to inspire the queen and her daugh- 
 ters to flee from the house that night, and 
 they so fled. And the spirits of darkness 
 went to the king's enemies and inspired 
 them to go against the palace; and they 
 so went, and destroyed it. 
 
 The next day, Zarathustra went about 
 in the city, which was in great tumult, 
 and I'hua'Mazda spake through him to the 
 people. And in one day he received more 
 than a thousand followers; and when the 
 king saw this, he decreed Zarathustra to 
 death, offering a reward to whomsoever 
 would slay him. The next day he preach- 
 ed again before the people, and received 
 great addition to his followers; and then 
 the king ordered his soldiers, of whom 
 there were ten thousand, to fall upon Zara- 
 thustra and his people, and destroy them. 
 But I'hua'Mazda had prophesied this to 
 his adherents beforehand, and had advised 
 them to flee. And many escaped before 
 morning; but there were also many who 
 were still within the walls when the sol- 
 diers came upon them. 
 
 Zarathustra stretched his hand up- 
 ward, saying: Fire of Thy Fire, O Fa- 
 ther! Give me here a wall of fire! And 
 there rose up a wall of fire betwixt them 
 
256 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 and the soldiers; and the latter, seeing this, 
 turned and fled, crying out; Shri! shri! — 
 signifying spirit. 
 
 Thus Zarathustra led them out of the 
 city, and not one man or woman or child 
 was injured. But it came to pass that the 
 deeds done through Zarathustra were 
 greatly exaggerated in relating them, so 
 that people who had not yet seen him be- 
 lieved the world was about to come to an 
 end. Thus the king lost all discipline over 
 the city; and the people lived without law 
 or order; robbing one another, or de- 
 stroying whatever stood before them. 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII. 
 
 Zarathustra called his fifty companions 
 before him and I 'hua'Mazda said: Because 
 these people are delivered from the ty- 
 rant, they will become his enemies. A 
 people long oppressed, love vengeance. 
 This would thwart the Ormazdian law. 
 Take them, therefore, away from the city, 
 and divide them into groups, and I will 
 send angels, capable of interpreting lan- 
 guages. 
 
 Behold, a God cometh not to ac- 
 complish at random. Nor cometh he 
 to one man only, in order to over- 
 throw the evil of a whole world. 
 My angels have been with you since the 
 day of your birth and ye are a part of my 
 army. After ye have divided these people, 
 and conducted them into forests: ye shall 
 begin to speak with new tongues, and these 
 people will understand you. And ye shall 
 build altars of worship to Ormazd, teach- 
 ing these people songs and prayers and 
 dancing, explaining to them the Ormaz- 
 dian law. 
 
 So, those who fled from the anarchy 
 of the city, were led away, half a day's 
 journey, and there encamped. And the 
 companions of Zarathustra, who were 
 called Inquas, were entranced, and com- 
 prehended the language of the people, and 
 could talk with them understandingly. So 
 they built altars to Ormazd, and taught 
 the people worship, and caused them to 
 take an oath not to kill any man or wo- 
 man or child, nor beast, nor bird; nor any 
 animal created alive. And they bound 
 them on the oath taken under the thigh, 
 to eat only fruit and nuts and roots and 
 bread, according to the Ormazdian law. 
 
 And they divided them into families of tens 
 and families of hundreds, and of a thou- 
 sand, giving them one rab'bah for each, 
 according to the Zarathustrian law. 
 
 But Zarathustra returned into the city, 
 and I 'hua'Mazda clothed him about with 
 fire, at night, and with clouds in the day- 
 light, so that the people could behold his 
 power, and no man dare raise a hand 
 against him. Then he commanded the 
 people to gather together all the skulls 
 on the walls, and the scalps that were 
 hung about the houses and on the poles; 
 and they were taken away and burned. 
 And he disbanded the soldiers; and thus, 
 the king was rendered helpless and left to 
 stroll about, cursing. 
 
 And Zarathustra advised the people to 
 go out of the city and live; and they went 
 forth by thousands, beginning new lives. 
 After that, Zarathustra left the place; and 
 at once it was filled with drujas, and they 
 went to the Druks and inspired them to 
 fire and plunder. And the great city of 
 Tse'gow, with all its temples, and towers, 
 and palaces, was quickly reduced to a heap 
 of ashes. 
 
 Zarathustra went before hundreds of 
 thousands of the people, speaking by the 
 voice of I'hua'Mazda. He said: I hear cer- 
 tain ones saying: Whoever setteth value 
 on earthly things, above heavenly things, 
 it is good for him to have fire and de- 
 struction. All things come of the Father, 
 Ormazd, or by His permission. When He 
 withdraweth His hand from a wicked city, 
 evil spirits rush in. Others have said: 
 Who are evil spirits? Why doth not Or- 
 mazd destroy them? I say unto you, evil 
 spirits are both yourselves and the dead. 
 Whom ye have slain in passion, still live 
 to torment you in spirit. Ye had their 
 skulls hung on the gates and wails; your 
 temples of science were portaled with the 
 scalps of your enemies. The spirits of 
 these people still live, though their bodies 
 be dead, and they obsess you to deeds of 
 wickedness. This is the Ormazdian law; 
 when a man is dead, ye shall either burn 
 the body, or bury it in the ground, that the 
 spirit be not troubled. But ye bound them 
 in spirit; to those who were slain, Tse'gow 
 was an everlasting reminder of their own 
 destruction and defeat. These spirits 
 have gained ten-fold more than ye have 
 
CYCLE OF FEAGAPATTT 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 257 
 
 lost by the fire; for now the Gods can de- 
 liver them in heaven. For which reasons, 
 I declare unto you that it is a great good 
 that Tse'gow is destroyed. The world is 
 large; the lands are very wide. Kill no 
 man, woman, nor child. They are Or- 
 mazd's. Neither shall ye build large cities; 
 they are a curse on the face of the earth. 
 Neither shall ye live alone, for such be- 
 come bound to self; but dwell in families 
 of tens and hundreds and thousands. Hath 
 not the Father given you an example in 
 the I'hins? They kill not, nor take that 
 which is another's; nor are given to lust, 
 nor war, nor quarreling. 
 
 Where is the king's wife, Hi'ti'us? 
 Where is Ha'sing, the prince? And the 
 princesses, Peutu, and Zoo, and He'in, 
 and Zabee? The multitude answered: 
 They are gone! 
 
 I'hua'Mazda said: I say unto you, 
 they were gone, but they are returning. 
 Presently they will be here. They shall 
 speak before you. 
 
 Presently the king's wife and son and 
 daughters, came. Hi'ti'us said: Behold, 
 Tse'gow is burned. Who hath seen the 
 king? He'in and Zabee, the princesses, 
 were very young girls, and they cried for 
 their father. He had slain himself, cutting 
 his bowels across with his sword. 
 
 I'hua'Mazda spake through Zarathus- 
 tra, saying: Come thou, Hi'ti'us, and 
 and stand on the rocks so that all can see, 
 and bring thy children. She came and 
 stood beside Zarathustra. And now the 
 Voice said: Let these bear witness 
 whether the dead do not live in spirit? 
 
 Hi'ti'us said: With my own eyes have 
 I seen the spirits of the dead; with my own 
 ears, heard them talk. My children shall 
 hold up their hands if these things be true. 
 The children held up their hands. Again 
 Hi'ti'us said: Where is my husband, the 
 king? 
 
 Whilst they were yet standing on the 
 rocks, the spirit of the king rose up before 
 all the people, and He'in and Zabee cried 
 out: Here is my father! Then spake I'hua'- 
 Mazda, saying to the spirit of the king: 
 Knowest thou that thou art dead? The 
 spirit of the king spake loud, so that all 
 could hear him; he said: No, I am not 
 dead, but I have done a foolish thing, I 
 cut my bowels across. 
 
 Then Hi'ti'us said: I fear, indeed, the 
 king is dead, and this is his spirit. He 
 looks strangely! I'hua'Mazda said: There 
 is no cut. Thy belly is unharmed. But 
 the spirit persisted, saying: I thrust my 
 hands in the hole, and yet thou sayest, 
 there is no wound! Thou art mad! I re- 
 member thee; it was thee who broughtest 
 back these phantom enemies to torture 
 me! I'hua'Mazda said: What enemies 
 seest thou? The spirit answered: All I 
 ever slew; a thousand or more! Away, ye 
 tormentors! Ye mockers! I will thrust 
 you through. The spirit of the king then 
 stamped and raved, for he saw the spirits 
 of the dead; but the audience saw them not, 
 though they saw him, for he was in sar'gis 
 form. 
 
 I'hua'Mazda said: I say unto the, O 
 king, thou art dead. Couldst thou but 
 awaken to this fact, thou wouldst rise in 
 spirit. Neither canst thou be delivered till 
 these, thy enemies, are also delivered. 
 Then answered the spirit of the king, say- 
 ing: I banish thee from the city of Tse'- 
 gow! Nor shalt thou ever return, under 
 penalty of death! 
 
 I'hua'Mazda said: I tell thee, O king, 
 the city of Tse'gow is destroyed. There is 
 not one house standing! The spirit of the 
 king answered, saying: Thou tormentest 
 me! Thou madman! Thou assertest lies 
 in the face of facts! Begone, wretch! O 
 that my belly were not cut across; I would 
 at thee with vengeance! 
 
 I'hua'Mazda withdrew the sar'gis, and 
 the king could not be seen; nevertheless, 
 his spirit continued cursing and raging all 
 the same. The queen, Hi'ti'us, compre- 
 hended the matter fully, and her heart was 
 heavy with sorrow. 
 
 Then I'hua'Mazda said to her: Re- 
 member the faith of thy forefathers, the 
 I'hins. Be thou strong in the Ormazdian 
 law, and these sorrows will pass away. 
 Nor is there anything in heaven or earth 
 can satisfy the soul that is short before the 
 law. To her that can say, I live the all 
 highest, is happy indeed, and her happi- 
 ness hath a sure foundation. And 
 whosoever perceiving the dead are 
 in torments, let them pray for them, sing- 
 ing anthems unto the Father. Intercede 
 ye with the All Light, to bestow them with 
 peace. Think not that because of your 
 
258 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 prayers the All Light runneth with haoma. 
 to feed the spirits of the dead. But this 
 I declare unto you, that, by peace and joy 
 in your devotions to the Father, the spir- 
 its who are present are thus reclaimed to 
 virtue and exaltation. These things will 
 I yet show unto you; be steadfast and 
 hopeful in Faith, and, when the evening 
 hath come, I will again call up the spirits 
 of the dead before you. 
 
 CHAPTER XIX. 
 
 Because of the destruction of Tse'gow, 
 there were hundreds of thousands of peo- 
 ple rendered homeless and destitute, and 
 groups were surging about in all places, 
 crying out for food, or for some needful 
 thing. I'hua'Mazda said to Zarathustra: 
 The ill-fortune of mortals is the good for- 
 tune of the righteous Gods; but the good 
 fortune of mortals is the glory of evil 
 Gods. Think not that because Tse'gow is 
 burned, and the people hungry, the Voice 
 of the Father is out of place. Now is the 
 time they will give ear. By the loss of 
 earthly treasures, the soul seeketh for that 
 which will endure forever. Go thou, 
 therefore, and I will go with thee; and 
 criers shall be sent out, calling the people 
 to the valley of Tsoak'ya this night. 
 
 When night came, Zarathustra went 
 before the people, and there were tens of 
 thousands of them. I'hua'Mazda spake to 
 them, explaining the Ormazdian law. 
 When he was done speaking, he took Hi'- 
 ti'us, the king's widow, her children, and 
 forty others, and made a crescent of them; 
 and he stood betwixt the horns thereof. 
 And to his left and right were many of his 
 companions. Thus prepared, Zarathustra 
 sang a song, such as the I'hins had taught 
 him in his youth. And the drujas were 
 ushered into the crescent, taking on sar'- 
 gis, the king amongst the number. And 
 the spirit of the king was softened, for 
 they sang peace to his soul and joy for- 
 ever; and presently he awoke from his 
 madness, and realized he was dead; and 
 he rejoiced in Zarathustra, and applauded 
 him before all the people. And the spirits 
 of darkness who were with him did like- 
 wise. 
 
 Zarathustra said: Ye shall not worship 
 any man born of woman, nor call him sa- 
 cred. One only, who is Ormazd, the Cre- 
 
 ator, is Master over all the world. Hear 
 ye now my voice unto Him! 
 
 Zarathustra stretched his arms upward, 
 full of energy, and I'hua'Mazda spake 
 through him, saying: Light of Light, O 
 Father, hear Thou Thy Son! With Thy 
 Almighty hand bless these faithful suffer- 
 ers! Scarcely had these words been spok- 
 en when there fell from the air above, fish 
 and fruit and grains and roots, and all 
 things good to eat, more than sufficient to 
 feed the famished people for three days; 
 although there were more than thirty 
 thousand of them. 
 
 And all this while the sar'gis of the 
 king looked on, and beheld what had been 
 done; and he cried out with a loud voice: 
 Blessed art Thou, O Ormazd! O that I 
 had known Thee! O that I had sought to 
 find Thee! Hi'ti'us, my wife! And my 
 blessed babes! Swear ye to the king, ye 
 will proclaim the I'hua'Mazdian law, for- 
 ever! Swear it! Give me joy! 
 
 Then Hi'ti'us and the children held up 
 their hands as directed by I'hua'Mazda, 
 swearing a solemn oath to maintain the 
 love of Ormazd and the Zarathustrian law, 
 forever. After these, there came thou- 
 sands and thousands of others, who also 
 swore in the same way. I'hua'Mazda 
 then took away the sar'gis, and the spirits 
 could not be seen by mortals. 
 
 CHAPTER XX. 
 
 Again on the next day Zarathustra ap- 
 peared before the multitude, and I'hua'- 
 Mazda spake through him, saying: I 
 came not in an age of darkness, but of 
 light and knowledge. I am not here to 
 proclaim miracles; I serve the Father, 
 Whose Son I am. In heaven there are 
 two kinds of spirits; those who serve 
 the earth and those who serve the Father. 
 If ye serve the earth ye shall be ministered 
 unto by the spirits of the lower heavens, 
 who are bound to the earth. If ye serve 
 the Father, ye are ministered unto by the 
 spirits of the higher heavens. 
 
 Because ye were united in prayer last 
 night to the Father, His holy angels 
 brought ye food. His harvests are over all 
 the earth; His fields are broad. It is not 
 just that He also gather it and bring it to 
 you. To be just to Him, go ye and bring 
 forth out of the rich earth whatsoever 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 259 
 
 ye need, rejoicing in Him. Cease warring; 
 kill not anything He created alive, that 
 walks on the ground or flies in the air. 
 And no flesh save fish, which is cold in 
 life, shall enter your mouths. 
 
 In the morning, when ye first awake, 
 pray to the Creator, Ormazd, after 
 this manner: Glory be to Thee, Thou 
 All Light! Because thou hast created me 
 alive; I will strive with all my might to 
 be upright before Thee; I have faith Thou 
 hast created me wisely; and I know Thou 
 wilt show me the right way. Make my 
 eyes sharper to see into my own soul 
 than into all else in the world, I will dis- 
 cover its dark spots and wash them clean. 
 Seal Thou up my eyes from the sins of 
 others, but magnify their goodness unto 
 me, that I may be ashamed of my unwor- 
 thiness before Thee. This day will I run 
 quickly to the distressed and helpless, and 
 give them joy by some deed or word. Seal 
 up my tongue against slandering any man, 
 woman or child. Whosoever Thou 
 feedest me with, is sufficient for the day; 
 complaint shall not escape from my mouth. 
 Quicken me all day, O Ormazd, with this, 
 my prayer, that I may become a glory in 
 Thy works. Amen! 
 
 I'hua'Mazda said: Remember, that to 
 utter words of prayer, but to practice not, 
 is of little value. He that is true to his 
 light is strong in soul; to be false to one's 
 light is to put out the eyes and stop up the 
 ears. He that would rise in heaven, let 
 him begin to rise on earth. The resurrec- 
 tion lieth in following the All Highest 
 Light one already hath. He that doeth 
 not this, is a fool to ask the Father to raise 
 him up. Hell fire is his boundary in the 
 next world. Because Ormazd gave away 
 Himself, He created all things. By sac- 
 rifice for the elevation of others doth a man 
 begin to approach Ormazd. This is resur- 
 rection in fact. 
 
 CHAPTER XXI. 
 
 I'hua'Mazda called together those who 
 swore allegiance to the Zarathustrian law; 
 and he separated them from the others, 
 and there were in ten days thirty thousand 
 professed followers. Nevertheless, I'hua'- 
 Mazda spake to Zarathustra, saying: Of 
 all these, only one in ten will remain long 
 in faith. And to establish the tenth firmly 
 
 is more valuable than to have ten times as 
 many who understand not what they pro- 
 fess. 
 
 Zarathustra asked: How can a tenth be 
 made firm? 
 
 I'hua'Mazda said: Long ago I told 
 thee to go and live with the I'hins. 
 
 Zarathustra said: I understand. I 
 learned the Wheel of Ormazd from the 
 I'hins. 
 
 Then said I'hua'Mazda: Make thou a 
 Wheel of Ormazd. 
 
 Zarathustra made a wheel, and hung it 
 slanting, facing the sun at high noon. 
 Then I'hua'Mazda explained to the peo- 
 ple, saying: This is a symbol of the name 
 of the Creator, Ormazd. Put it in the 
 place betwixt the horns of the crescent, for 
 it is sacred. Let the Faithists go with me, 
 and I will explain. 
 
 They carried it to the meeting-place 
 and faced it in the same direction. And 
 when the people stood in a circle around 
 it, I'hua'Mazda said: The name of this 
 place shall be Harel, and the name of the 
 wheel shall be the Wheel of the Altar. 
 Behold, then, ye have already sworn an 
 oath under the thigh, in the custom of 
 your forefathers, but ye shall now renew 
 your oath on the Wheel of the Altar of Or- 
 mazd, and His Holy Book. 
 
 I'hua'Mazda then administered the oath 
 unto many, wherein they covenanted to 
 turn from evil and strive to do good; and 
 each and every one turned the wheel once 
 round, as a witness before the Father. 
 When they had all covenanted, I'hua'- 
 Mazda said: Ye shall make many wheels, 
 and carry them along the roadways, and 
 wherever one road crosseth another ye 
 shall place a Wheel of the Altar; and ye 
 shall dedicate the wheel to the Creator. 
 And whoever passeth that way shall halt 
 and remember his Creator; and he shall re- 
 new his covenant, to turn from evil and 
 strive to do good; and in testimony be- 
 fore the Father, he shall turn the wheel 
 once round. 
 
 Thus was established the sacred wheel 
 of the altar amongst the I'huan race. 
 
 I'hua'Mazda spake to Zarathustra, say- 
 ing: What is the most potent thing in ev- 
 ery creature? Zarathustra said: The eye is 
 the most potent. The eye is the most to be 
 feared; the most desirable. The eye of man 
 
260 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 LORDS RECORD 
 
 can go away from man; his hand cannot 
 go way from him, nor his foot. Man's eye 
 can reach the mountains; to the clouds, 
 the moon, the sun and the stars. 
 
 I'hua'Mazda said: If the eye of man 
 is the most potent, what follows? 
 
 Zarathustra said: The eye of Ormazd 
 is His most potent power over man. 
 
 So, Zarathustra made a picture of an 
 eye, and placed it over the altar. Where- 
 upon I'hua'Mazda made the people cov- 
 enant anew, but this time with the I'hua'- 
 Mazdian law, the Ormazdian law. Where- 
 in they said: I know Thine eye is upon 
 me night and day; nothing is hidden from 
 Thy sight, O Ormazd! And I'hua'Mazda 
 commanded them to place a picture of an 
 eye over the altars in all places of worship. 
 
 Then came the first night of the new 
 moon, and Zarathustra went into the place 
 of worship; and a great multitude also 
 came in. So I'hua'Mazda said: This is 
 mas night for the spirits of the dead. That 
 the widow, Hi'ti'us, may have joy this 
 night, I will sing and pray for the spirit 
 of the king. And, afterward, for all spirits 
 who are in darkness. When they sang 
 and prayed, the spirit of the king came in 
 sar'gis, and talked to Hi'ti'us, and to oth- 
 ers. And, after that, the spirit of the king 
 prayed and sang with I'hua'Mazda. Thus 
 was established the first night of the new 
 moon as mas night for the spirits of the 
 dead, and it was demonstrated before the 
 living. 
 
 I'hua'Mazda taught through Zarathus- 
 tra for forty days and nights; teaching the 
 Zarathustrian law, the Ormazdian law. 
 And thousands and thousands of people 
 were converted unto righteousness; and 
 these were called disciples of Zazathustra. 
 
 Zarathustra inquired of I'hua'Mazda 
 what was the best, most potent thing for 
 the generations of men. Then answered 
 I'hua'Mazda, saying: The best, most po- 
 tent thing for the generations of men is 
 to teach the very young child the ever 
 presence of the All Potent Eye, which sees 
 into the body of mortals, and into the soul. 
 
 Zarathustra inquired concerning very 
 young children: Then I'hua'Mazda an- 
 swered, saying: In three days and five 
 days and seven days the rite of circumcision 
 for the males, and piercing the ears for the 
 
 females. And, when they are old enough, 
 they shall be consecrated on the wheel. 
 
 Zarathustra said: To consecrate, what 
 is that? Then answered I'hua'Mazda: To 
 profess the All Highest, the Creator, Or- 
 mazd. And from that time forth the 
 young child shall pray to Ormazd every 
 night before going to sleep, and pray 
 every morning as soon as awake to Or- 
 mazd, renewing its covenant and acknowl- 
 edging the presence of the All Potent Eye. 
 
 Zarathustra inquired concerning chil- 
 dren who were not thus provided. I'hua'- 
 Mazda answered: If they die, they 
 fall into the care of drujas and be- 
 come drujas themselves; but if they live, 
 they will grow up liars and Druks, killing 
 and stealing. 
 
 Zarathustra inquired concerning a con- 
 secrated child, if it die? Then I'hua'- 
 Mazda answered: If a consecrated child 
 die, its spirit is received in heaven by the 
 angels of Ormazd, and taken to a place of 
 delight. 
 
 When these things were explained to 
 the disciples, the mothers brought their 
 children before Zarathustra; and I'hua'- 
 Mazda consecrated them on the altar, and 
 they were baptized with water and fire, 
 and given names by the rab'bah. 
 
 CHAPTER XXII. 
 
 Zarathustra, inquired concerning pro- 
 tection against imposters. To which I'hu- 
 a'-Mazda answered, saying: Prove all 
 things on the altar. If a man come before 
 the people saying: Behold, I am a prophet! 
 and he teach strange doctrines, he shall be 
 tied on the wheel with his face toward the 
 sun at high noon. And if he be a true 
 prophet, the spirits who dwell by the altar 
 will set him free. But, if he be not releas- 
 ed on the third night, the wheel shall be 
 carried out into the forest and stood up 
 by the bushes. And if he be an impostor, 
 the wild beasts will come and devour his 
 flesh. Zarathustra inquired concerning the 
 wheel afterward. I'hua'Mazda said: When 
 an impostor hath perished on the wheel, 
 behold, the wheel shall be no longer used 
 as before. But the disciples shall cut away 
 the rim of the wheel, and cast it away, for 
 it is useless. 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI «>„■.. RECORD 
 
 261 
 
 Zarathustra inquired concerning the 
 government. To which I'hua'Mazda re- 
 plied, saying: To thy disciples there is no 
 need of government, save to do the Will 
 of Ormazd. But no people are all pure; 
 no people are all wise. Two kinds of gov- 
 ernments created the Creator; the first is 
 His Own, the Government of Ormazd; the 
 second is the government of mortals. 
 
 Zarathustra inquired if government did 
 not abridge liberty. I'hua'Mazda said: The 
 Ormazdian government giveth liberty; so 
 far as man's government partaketh after 
 the Ormazdian government, it giveth lib- 
 erty also. 
 
 Zarathustra inquired: What is the 
 best man's government? To which I'hua'- 
 Mazda replied: This is the best, most po- 
 tent government: First, there shall not be 
 more than two thousand people, so that 
 they can know one another; and no city 
 shall be larger than that. 
 
 The wisest, best man shall be the high 
 rab'bah; but the families of tens and fam- 
 ilies of hundreds within the city shall have 
 each, one rab'bah, being the wisest, best 
 man. These rab'bahs shall be the govern- 
 ment of the city. They shall have a gov- 
 ernment house, and it shall be the place of 
 decrees. 
 
 Zarathustra said: How shall they 
 make decrees, that the decrees pervert not 
 liberty? I'hua'Mazda said: Ask not this, 
 O man! He who crieth out constantly for 
 his liberty is a selfish man, he is a Druk. 
 Save a man be willing to sacrifice his lib- 
 erty somewhat, for the public good, he. is 
 unworthy before Ormazd. To find the 
 amount of sacrifice, this is the business of 
 the decrees. 
 
 Zarathustra said: How, then, shall the 
 rab'bah proceed? I'hua'Mazda said: When 
 they are seated, the chief rab'bah shall an- 
 nounce the subject; neither shall any other 
 rab'bah announce the subject. But if a 
 rab'bah have a subject, he shall state it 
 beforehand to the chief rab'bah. After the 
 subject is announced, then shall all the 
 rab'bahs speak on the subject; but they 
 shall not speak against one another; but 
 each one declaring his highest light. When 
 they have all spoken, then shall the chief 
 rab'bah speak his highest light, which 
 he gathereth from the others in the first 
 place, but which is afterward illuminated 
 
 by the Light of Ormazd, and this shall be 
 the decree. 
 
 Zarathustra inquired concerning the 
 laws betwixt cities. I'hua'Mazda spake to 
 Zarathustra, explaining the Ormazdian 
 law. He said: A city is a family of one. 
 A small village is a family of one; for 
 which reason is a city called Ir. And every 
 city shall have one God-ir, who shall be 
 the best and wisest man. The God-irs 
 shall meet in council to consider what is 
 good for all the cities jointly. For some 
 cities are situated for flax and wool, some 
 for iron, and some for copper, and some 
 for ships. 
 
 Zarathustra inquired concerning the 
 Council of God-irs. I'hua'Mazda answer- 
 ed him, saying. The God-irs shall choose 
 the best and wisest man amongst them, 
 and he shall be called God-ir Chief. And 
 he shall sit in the east in the Council 
 chamber, and he shall present the sub- 
 jects, after they have been told to him by 
 the other God-irs. And when he hath pre- 
 sented a subject, all the members shall 
 speak upon it. 
 
 And after they have all spoken, then 
 the God-ir Chief shall speak, and his 
 words shall be the decree, which shall be 
 called the Zarathustrian law, because the 
 All Light dwelleth with the Chief, and he 
 cannot err. This is the Ormazdian law, 
 the I'hua'Mazdian law, the Zarathustrian 
 law. 
 
 Zarathustra said: Of a walled city, 
 what is the Ormazdian law? I'hua'Mazda 
 answered, saying: To the I'hins, walled 
 cities, to protect them from beasts and ser- 
 pents; to I'huans, cities without walls. 
 To the cities of the Druks, walls. This is 
 the kingdom of I'hua'Mazda; they that 
 have faith, why shall they build walls? 
 They shall not hoard up gold and silver; 
 none will rob them. After Zarathustra, 
 two people will live. One shall be the 
 people of this world; the other shall be 
 the people of Ormazd. The former shall 
 strive for earthly things; the latter for 
 spiritual things. And there shall be no af- 
 finity betwixt these two people. From this 
 time forth, the Zarathustrian people, all ex- 
 cept the little I'hins, who have faith in 
 the Father, shall not have walled cities. 
 But this world's people, having no faith in 
 the Father, shall have faith in stone walls; 
 
262 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 whereby ye may know which are righteous 
 in my sight. 
 
 Zarathustra inquired concerning the 
 smallest of cities. I'hua'Mazda answered 
 him, saying: The smallest city is a man 
 and his wife and children. And even as 
 the people in a large city are one with one 
 another, so shall a man and his wife and 
 children be one with one another. 
 
 And as a large city must have a head 
 father, so shall a small one. Whatsoever 
 hath no head is nothing. 
 
 Zarathustra said: In the government of 
 a large city, the fathers speak on a sub- 
 ject, and after them, the head father de- 
 creeth. 
 
 I'hua'Mazda said: Even so shall it be 
 in a family of husband and wife. The wife 
 shall speak first, and the children next, if 
 old enough; and after that the father shall 
 decree. That which is a good law for a 
 large city, is good for a small one. As the 
 kingdoms in heaven are governed, so shall 
 be the kingdoms of earth. 
 
 Zarathustra inquired concerning a bad 
 husband and a good wife, and a bad wife 
 and a good husband? I'hua'Mazda spake 
 to Zarathustra, the All Pure, saying: Who 
 knoweth what is good and what is bad? 
 Are not all men to give themselves as a 
 sacrifice to the Father, and all women also? 
 If a good woman is not willing to sacrifice 
 herself to a bad husband, after having 
 sworn to Ormazd, then she is not good, 
 but a lover of herself. A good woman hath 
 no self to serve. Because she findeth her 
 husband bad, shall she also be bad? Is it 
 not good for her in the place Ormazd pro- 
 vided? Shall she set up her judgment 
 against the Father's? There be men of 
 evil, and of passion, who abuse their wives. 
 Knoweth not every damsel this? For this 
 reason, if she commit herself to her hus- 
 band in the name of the Father, He heareth 
 her. And He establisheth His Kingdom 
 in her house. And that man and that wo- 
 man have no longer themselves to consult 
 as to their desires; for if the Father desir- 
 eth her to leave her husband, or the hus- 
 band to leave the wife, He taketh one of 
 them to heaven. Think not that He chang- 
 eth as the wind, or boweth Himself to 
 please the caprice of man or woman. 
 Rather let the good wife, with a bad hus- 
 band, say to Ormazd: 
 
 Because I was vain, Thou hast rebuked 
 me, O Father. Because I sought to change 
 my condition, Thou hast shown me I 
 knew not what was good for me. Yea, 
 thou hast shown me the folly of my judg- 
 ment before Thee, and I will profit in turn- 
 ing to Thy Will. I will not more open my 
 mouth in complaint. Though I be scourg- 
 ed with stripes, and made ashamed of my 
 household, yet will I glorify Thee. The 
 city Thou hast founded in me, will I be- 
 gin at the foundation, and build up as a 
 holy city, in Thy name. 
 
 And she shall say to her husband, who 
 beateth her: Because the Father gaveth 
 thee to me, I will rejoice and sing in thy 
 praise. Before I sleep at night, I will ask 
 His blessing upon thee, and in the early 
 morning, and at high noon. Though thou 
 mayest hate me, yet will I do so great good 
 works for thee, thou shalt love me. 
 Though thou mayest kill me, yet will I go 
 to heaven and build a house for thee. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIII. 
 
 When Zarathustra had divided the peo- 
 ple, leading his followers away into suita- 
 ble places, he looked back with compas- 
 sion, and he said to I'hua'Mazda: What 
 of them who will not accept the Ormaz- 
 dian law? I'hua'Mazda answered him, 
 saying: Behold, thy arms are full! Let 
 the dead have dominion with the dead. 
 Not only this generation, but many that 
 come after thee, will be unable to accept 
 the Ormazdian law. 
 
 Zarathustra apportioned his people into 
 cities and villages and families, but over 
 the whole of them he appointed Yus'avak, 
 one of his companions who came with him 
 from Oas, as Chief. And when Yus'avak 
 was established as Chief, Zarathustra and 
 his companions traveled further, until they 
 came to the city of Ne'ki'ro, kingdom of 
 Aboatha, king of twelve generations 
 through his forefathers, whose title was, 
 Aboatha, Son of Uzza, Son of Nimrod, 
 Son of the House of Tus'iang, who was 
 descended from before the world was! 
 
 Ne'ki'ro was a walled city, but the 
 Zarathustrians gained entrance without 
 paying tribute, because the law thus fa- 
 vored strangers. Aboatha, in his youth, 
 had traveled amongst the Par'si'e'ans, and 
 knew the language; and when Zarathustra 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI to**.. BECOBO 
 
 26 S 
 
 was before him, speaking in the Oas'an 
 tongue, the king inquired his business, 
 and how long he purposed staying, stat- 
 ing moreover, that he had received the 
 tablets of the Ormazdian law, with the in • 
 terpretations, from the king of the Sun, 
 Asha; and that he had desired to see Zara- 
 thustra. 
 
 Zarathustra said: I came to establish 
 the Ormazdian law. In the name of the 
 All Light will I blunt the edge of the 
 sword and the spear. I have come in the 
 person of I'hua'Mazda, and until I . have 
 fulfilled the commandments upon me, I 
 shall tarry within thy city. 
 
 The king said: My city is not large; I 
 have more scalps and skulls, for the size 
 of my city, than any other king in the 
 world. But know thou, O man, I am a 
 philosopher. Many of my people are also 
 learned people. Hear thou me, then, if 
 thou hast a greater philosophy than I have, 
 I will not only bequeath to thee the public 
 skulls and scalps, to be thy treasures for- 
 ever, but I will also give my skull and 
 scalp into thy hand, as the most valuable 
 treasure in the Jaffeth'ean empire. 
 
 Zarathustra said: Though thou settest 
 great value on skulls and scalps, because 
 they are the product of labor, yet they are 
 of no value to me, nor Ormazd. Neither 
 have I any philosophy for thee. To ac- 
 cept His will; to be servant unto Him, 
 by doing good unto others, comprise the 
 whole of the law, by which all men may be 
 made to rejoice in their creation. 
 
 The king said: Think not that I am as 
 other men. I am not as other men. In 
 the first beginning of all things, there were 
 Seven and Nine things. I was one of 
 them. By division, we created all there is 
 in heaven and earth. Seven thousand and 
 seven millions, and nine thousand and nine 
 millions of times, have I divided myself. 
 One-seventh and one-ninth of all there are 
 of created things is my very self. Tell me, 
 then, hast thou as great a philosophy as 
 this? 
 
 Zarathustra said: O the folly of men 
 before Thee, O Ormazd! They run after 
 that which flattereth self, seeing their fel- 
 lows going down in death, and they raise 
 not their hands to lift them up! I tell 
 thee, O king, thy poorest slave that bring- 
 eth out of the earth food for two men, 
 
 hath a greater philosophy than thine! He 
 that can rule over his own self-conceit, 
 that speaketh not of himself, giveth a bet- 
 ter philosophy of himself than thou hast. 
 He who hath not yet risen from his moth- 
 er's breast, hath more treasures to give 
 than thou hast obtained with all thy phil- 
 osophy. Ere three days have passed by, 
 the city's skulls and scalps will be burned 
 to dust. Nor will thy philosophy avail thee 
 to stay the hand of I'hua'Mazda. 
 
 .The king said: Proposest thou with 
 this handful of men to battle with my 
 army? Zarathustra said: I have spoken. 
 There is no value in discoursing with any 
 man who hath an opinion to establish, nor 
 is man's opinion of value to raise up the 
 souls of men. Bring thou, therefore, thy 
 army, and command them to fall upon me 
 and mine! 
 
 The king said: Thou hast no weapons; 
 think not that I battle with men who use 
 their tongues, like women! 
 
 Zarathustra said: Why boastest thou? 
 Thy soldiers will turn and flee when thou 
 bringest them against me! 
 
 The king turned away then, and or- 
 dered his officers to bring soldiers, and 
 despatch Zarathustra and his companions, 
 and to hang their skulls and scalps on the 
 walls. Zarathustra and his companions 
 went into the king's garden and formed in 
 an altar. When the sun had set, and even- 
 ing came, the king's soldiers, more than 
 ten thousand, came upon them. 
 
 I'hua'Mazda had great power, because 
 of the faith of Zarathustra, and he spake 
 with a loud voice, saying: Light of Thy 
 Light, O Ormazd! Build me here a wall 
 of fire! And behold, there fell from hea- 
 ven curtains of fire, till a great wall stood 
 betwixt the two peoples; nor would one 
 soldier throw a spear or sling a stone; and 
 many of them broke and fled. 
 
 When the king saw the power of Zara- 
 thustra, he feared for his kingdom; and 
 not deciding at once what course to pur- 
 sue, he went into his palace. Then came 
 Zarathustra and his companions out of the 
 garden, but the light extended up above 
 Zarathustra's head like a pillar of fire. 
 I'hua'Mazda spake to some who were near- 
 est, saying: 
 
 Run quickly and call the soldiers back, 
 saying to them they shall be my soldiers, 
 
264 
 
 CYCLE OF FEAGAPATT1 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 and I will give them the weapons of the 
 Creator. So, the messengers ran, and 
 brought many of them back. I'hua'Mazda 
 commanded them to gather the skulls 
 and scalps from the city walls, and from 
 the gates, and go and burn them, and the 
 soldiers did these things. 
 
 The next day after they were consumed, 
 I'hua'Mazda began to preach, explaining 
 the Ormazdian law; and he received many 
 followers. The king had tried by all means 
 to gather his soldiers together, but no one 
 obeyed him. After that Zarathustra went 
 to him, saying: If thou art one-seventh 
 and one-ninth of all things, who thinkest 
 thou I am? 
 
 The king said: They say thou art a 
 very Creator! But, as to my opinion, 
 thou art only a magician. Thou canst not 
 do anything real; for which reason, I 
 hoped thou wouldst come before me. 
 Know, then, thy end hath come! With 
 that, the king struck at Zarathustra; but 
 the king's sword was broken into pieces, 
 and of non-effect. 
 
 The king had two trained chetahs, 
 large as the largest lions, and he ordered 
 them to be unloosed and set upon Zara- 
 thustra. And it was done; but, lo, the che- 
 tahs came and licked his hands. But the 
 king was hardened, and would not believe. 
 I'hua'Mazda called the king to come near, 
 and he came. 
 
 He said unto the king: I am not thine 
 enemy, but the enemy of evil; I come not 
 to take thy kingdom. In a few days I 
 shall leave this place. So, thy kingdom 
 would be worthless to me. And yet I come 
 to establish another kingdom, which is the 
 Father's. I come to overthrow sin and 
 wickedness, and to build up that which is 
 good. And in so doing, it shall be known 
 amongst men that the soul is immortal. 
 Rather would I see thee and thy people 
 alive and full pf joy, than to see them dead. 
 Thou hast said thou understandest the 
 Ormazdian law; perceiving there is also 
 a king's law. 
 
 The king's laws are for the earth- world; 
 to punish the wicked and reward the val- 
 orous; the Ormazdian law is for the Zara- 
 thustrians, who need no kings. Thy sub- 
 jects are for war and plunder; but the sub- 
 jects of the Great Spirit are for doing good, 
 and in love and mercy. And have I not 
 
 shown thee that the Ormazdian laws are 
 the stronger of the two? Yea, a hundred- 
 fold. It is wiser for thee to espouse the 
 stronger law. Thou hast gathered certain 
 treasures, boasting of thy treasures' value. 
 Because thou hast made a law of exchange 
 for skulls and scalps, thou makest them 
 valuable! Because a man bringeth a skull 
 to thee, thou givest him bread. Now I de- 
 clare unto thee, values consist not in the 
 rate of exchange betwixt men. Shall a 
 man gather a heap of stones, and say: Be- 
 hold, they are valuable! Or iron, or gold, 
 or copper, and say: Behold, they are val- 
 uable! A piece of bread is valuable, or 
 flax, or wool. Because man hath set value 
 on things not valuable, he buildeth in false- 
 hood and death. The man who hath the 
 most All Light, hath the greatest valua- 
 bles. For by the Light of the Father all 
 righteous things can be obtained easily. 
 
 Whilst I'hua'Mazda was yet speaking, 
 the spirit of Zarathustra went abroad, and, 
 with ten thousand other spirits, brought 
 fish and fruit, and let them fall around 
 about the place. The people ran and gath- 
 ered them up for food. The king made no 
 reply at first, for he was encompassed 
 about with evil spirits, who were angered 
 with I'hua'Mazda and his proceedings. 
 Presently the king said: 
 
 Because I am transcended by thee, it is 
 no longer useful for me to live. With 
 that, he cut his body across, and fell dead. 
 And Zarathustra commanded that the 
 king's body be laid straight for three days; 
 and it was done; and there came thousands 
 of people to look upon the king, and wit- 
 ness that he was dead. And they saw of 
 a truth that the bowels were gushed out of 
 the wound, and that there was no breath 
 in him. 
 
 So I'hua'Mazda allowed the spirit of the 
 king to live three days in torments, and 
 then he called his disciples around him, 
 saying: Now will I raise the king to life, 
 and it shall be testimony in Jaffeth. And 
 Zarathustra pushed the bowels back into 
 the body, and drew the place shut, saying: 
 In Thy name, O Ormazd, heal I this man's 
 body, as a testimony of Thy Wisdom and 
 Power! And when Zarathustra had drawn 
 his hand over the wound twice, it was 
 healed. And then Zarathustra said: O Fa- 
 ther, as by Thy spirit Thou didst quicken 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI ">«.. -««.. 
 
 265 
 
 into life this, Thy child, in his mother's 
 womb, restore Thou him to life! 
 
 And the king was healed, and restored 
 to life before the people; and he awoke 
 and looked about, and then rose up. He 
 said: I was dead and in hell, and I saw 
 millions of the dead, and they were in hell 
 also. And there went up around about 
 them fires of burning brimstone, and none 
 could escape. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIV. 
 
 When the king was restored, he was as 
 another man, having su'is, and believing 
 in the immortality of the spirit; and he ask- 
 ed Zarathustra what now he should do 
 that he might escape the fires of hell after 
 death. 
 
 I'hua'Mazda spake through Zarathustra, 
 saying: Think not what thou canst do to 
 escape hell fire, for that would be laboring 
 for self. Think what thou canst do to save 
 others. For which reason thou shalt prac- 
 tice the Ormazdian law. One year thou 
 shalt dwell with the poor, carrying the 
 alms-bowl, according to the Zarathustrian 
 law. After that thou shalt preach the 
 I'hua'Mazdian law, of the denial of self 
 for the good of the city, teaching the turn- 
 ing away from earthly things, and striving 
 for spiritual things, having faith in Or- 
 mazd. 
 
 The king said: All these things can I 
 do, yet one thing I cannot do, which is 
 having faith in Ormazd. If He be a Per- 
 son, and created all the creation, is He not 
 the foundation of evil as well as good? 
 If He heretofore created evil, or by in- 
 competence suffered it to enter into crea- 
 tion, may He not do so in after time, even 
 after death? 
 
 Phua'Mazda said: When a potter hath 
 a pot half made, sayest thou it is an evil 
 pot? Nay, verily, but that it is not yet 
 completed. Even so are all men, created 
 by Ormazd. Those who are good are 
 completed, but those who are evil are un- 
 finished work. But the Creator also gave 
 to man knowledge, that he might see him- 
 self in the unfinished state, and the Creator 
 gave to man power and judgment, that 
 man might turn to and help complete him- 
 self, thereby sharing the glory of his crea- 
 tion. The man that doeth all this has al- 
 ready escaped hell fire. 
 
 The king inquired concerning animals, 
 to which I'hua'Mazda answered, saying: 
 Animals are of the earth creation, and are 
 completed in the place of their dwelling. 
 Neither hath any animal aspiration to 
 make itself better or wiser, that it may 
 contribute to the creation. And some men 
 have no more aspiration than an animal 
 serving the flesh only. Only the torments 
 of hell can stir them up. 
 
 When I'hua'Mazda explained the Or- 
 mazdian law, the quarter of which is not 
 here related, the king comprehended, 
 whereupon he took vows on the altar, and 
 under the eye, according to the Zarathus- 
 trian law. So when those people were re- 
 stored, Zarathustra left one of his travel- 
 ing companions with them, as God-ir in 
 Chief, and Zarathustra departed, taking 
 his other companions with him. 
 
 Whereof it is recorded in the libraries 
 of heaven, showing that the next city king- 
 dom was likewise delivered, and the peo- 
 ple became Zarathustrians. And again 
 Zarathustra departed, and came to another 
 city, which was overthrown and delivered 
 also. Until it came to pass that Zarathus- 
 tra overthrew and delivered twenty and 
 four cities and kingdoms in Jaffeth. 
 
 And after that he departed to the up- 
 per lands of Shem, where he also over- 
 threw and delivered many cities and king- 
 doms, establishing the Zarathustrian law. 
 For two whole years he labored in Shem; 
 and so great was the power of Ormazd 
 upon Zarathustra that all the cities and 
 kingdoms of Shem threw of the bondage 
 of the Sun Kingdom of Par'si'e. 
 
 After that Zarathustra traveled toward 
 Ham, which was called Arabin'ya. But in 
 those countries Zarathustra had not so 
 great success, because the people were not 
 learned in books, nor in the stars, nor tab- 
 lets. Nevertheless, Zarathustra delivered 
 many cities. So I'hua'Mazda said to Zara- 
 thustra: Return, now, to thine own coun- 
 try; and thou shalt overthrow yet seven 
 cities and seven great kingdoms; and after 
 that thou shalt return to Oas, and it shall 
 fall before thy hand, and the prophecies 
 made in thy childhood shall be fulfilled. 
 
 So Zarathustra returned to Par'si'e and 
 went to the seven great cities and king- 
 doms, and overthrew them; and many of 
 them were destroyed utterly by fire and by 
 
266 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 war; but Zarathustra delivered the faithful 
 and established the Zarathustrian law with 
 all of them. 
 
 Asha had continued with the Zarathus- 
 trians; but in consequence of the persecu- 
 tions of the kings of Oas, they had been 
 obliged to retire further into the forests 
 and plains and unsettled regions, where 
 roved the Listians, the wild people. To 
 these the Zarathustrians were friends, and 
 the Listians came in great numbers, and 
 dwelt near about the Zarathustrians. After 
 Zarathustra had completed his travels, he 
 returned to the Forest of Goats, in the 
 first place, to meet his followers, and to 
 rejoice with them for the great light I'hua'- 
 Mazda had bestowed upon them. So, 
 when Zarathustra returned to them, there 
 was great rejoicing; and there were pres- 
 ent Zarathustra's mother, and many of the 
 Listians who knew him in his childhood. 
 After many days of rest and rejoicing, 
 I'hua'Mazda came to Zarathustra, saying: 
 Behold, the time hath now come to go 
 against the city of thy birth. Take Asha 
 with thee, and I will cause Oas to fall be- 
 fore thy hand. Accordingly, Zarathustra 
 took Asha and returned to the gates of 
 Oas; but he was known at once; and when 
 he demanded admittance, he was refused, 
 because the king had previously decreed 
 his banishment and death, there being@an 
 offer of reward to whomsoever would de- 
 stroy him and bring his skull to the king. 
 
 CHAPTER XXV. 
 
 In those days, Pon'yah was king of 
 Oas, and, by title, King of the Sun; King 
 of the middle of the world; King of 
 Kings; Mightiest of mortals; Owner of all 
 human flesh; Ruler of the earth, and Mas- 
 ter of Life and Death! 
 
 For nearly four years had Zarathustra 
 been absent, and the effect of his preach- 
 ing in foreign lands had been to cut off the 
 paying of tribute to the City of the Sun. 
 For which reason, Pon'yah, king of Oas, 
 had sworn an oath under his own thigh to 
 pursue Zarathustra, and have him slain. 
 Accordingly, the king had equipped many 
 different armies and sent them in search of 
 Zarathustra; but I'hua'Mazda led Zarathus- 
 tra in a different way or sent spirits to in- 
 
 spire the soldiers to go another way. Con- 
 sequently, none of the armies sent to cap- 
 ture Zarathustra ever found him. When 
 he was heard of in one city, and the sol- 
 diers came to that city, he was gone. And 
 so it continued, until now Zarathustra 
 had returned to the very gates of Oas. 
 Because Zarathustra was the largest man 
 in the world, he was easily known; and 
 from a description he would be easily rec- 
 ognized by those who had never seen him 
 before. 
 
 The keeper of the gate, whose name 
 was Zhoo'das, thought to obtain the re- 
 ward, and hit upon the following plan, say- 
 ing to Zarathustra: I know thee; thou art 
 Zarathustra, who art banished under pen- 
 alty of death. I have no right to admit 
 thee within the city, nor have I a desire to 
 witness thy sure death. But if thou wilt 
 secrete thyself, till the change of watch, 
 when I am absent on the king's reports, 
 thou mayst take thine own risk. But if I 
 admit thee, I will also be put to death. 
 
 Zarathustra said: As for myself, I 
 fear not; but I would not have thee put to 
 death on my account. Where, then, can 
 I secrete myself, till the change of watch? 
 Zhoo'das, the keeper of the gate, said: 
 Within the chamber of the wall. Go thou, 
 and thy friend with thee. 
 
 So Zarathustra went into the chamber 
 of the wall, and Asha went with him. And 
 now, when they were concealed, Zhoo'das 
 called his wife and said unto her: Be thou 
 here, walking back and forth, that they 
 who are concealed will think it is I. And 
 I will run quickly to the guards, and they 
 shall come and seize Zarathustra, for 
 whom the reward is offered. 
 
 And the keeper's wife came and walked 
 back and forth; and the keeper ran quickly 
 and brought the guards, one thousand 
 men, with spears and swords and war 
 clubs and slings and bows and arrows, and 
 they surrounded the place of the chamber 
 on all sides. And then spake Zhoo'das 
 ironically, saying: Come forth, Zarathus- 
 tra, now is the change of watch! 
 
 And Zarathustra and Asha came forth 
 and beheld what was done. Zarathustra 
 said to Asha: The Light is upon me. Go 
 thou with me. No harm shall come to 
 thee. But the time has come when the 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI «■- ««« 
 
 267 
 
 prophecies made in my youth shall be ful- 
 filled. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVI. 
 
 So Zarathustra fell into the power of 
 the Sun King; and the soldiers caused him 
 and Asha to march in their midst to the 
 place of the skulls. And there came forth 
 thousands of people to witness the proceed- 
 ings; for at this time there were many who 
 were in sympathy with Zarathustra, as well 
 as many against him. And in order to stay 
 the multitude, the captain of the army 
 called out many soldiers in addition to 
 those who made the arrest. Others ran to 
 the king's palace, carrying the news of his 
 arrest, and the place he had been taken to. 
 The king^said to the heralds: Though 
 this man shall die, it is fit that proper judg- 
 ment be rendered against him, as an exam- 
 ple before all men. Go, therefore, to the 
 executioners, and command them to bring 
 Zarathustra into my presence, that I may 
 adjudge him to death according to law. 
 
 This was done, and Zarathustra was 
 brought before the king, who accosted 
 him, saying: 
 
 By thy behavior thou art accused be- 
 fore thy king, and I adjudge thee to death. 
 But that thou mayst be as an example be- 
 fore the world, I will render my judgments 
 before the heralds, who shall proclaim my 
 words unto all who desire to witness thy 
 death. 
 
 First, then, thou wert ordered for ar- 
 rest by my predecessor, and thou did not 
 deliver thyself up to my soldiers; neither 
 could they find thee. For which thou art 
 adjudged to death. 
 
 Second. Without permission from the 
 King of the Sun, thou hast traveled in for- 
 eign lands, sowing seeds of disallegiance 
 against the Central Kingdom. For which 
 thou art adjudged to death. 
 
 Third. The King of Kings offered a 
 ransom for thy head, and the king's sol- 
 diers were disappointed in finding thee. 
 For which thou art adjudged to death. 
 
 Fourth. In thy youth thou didst threat- 
 ed to overthrow the city of Oas, the City 
 of the Sun, and failed to make thy word 
 good, thereby being a teacher of lies. For 
 which thou art adjudged to death. 
 
 Fifth. Thou hast cut off the foreign 
 tribute to the rightful Owner of the whole 
 
 world! For which thou art adjudged to 
 death. 
 
 Sixth. Thou hast revived the doctrines 
 of the dark ages, teaching of spirits and 
 Gods, which things cannot exist, because 
 they are contrary to nature, and contrary 
 to the laws of the King of the world! For 
 which thou art adjudged to death. 
 
 Seventh. Thou hast taught that there 
 is an unseen Creator greater than thy 
 king; which is contrary to reason. For 
 which thou art adjudged to death. 
 
 Eighth. Thou returnedst to Oas not 
 openly, but as a thief, and hid thyself in a 
 chamber of the wall. For which thou art 
 adjudged to death in the manner of 
 thieves, which is the most ignoble of all 
 deaths. 
 
 Therefore, I command the executioners 
 to take thee to the den of thieves and cast 
 thee therein; and on the morrow, at high 
 noon, thou shalt be hung up by thy feet 
 along with the thieves where thou shalt be 
 left hanging till thou art dead. 
 
 That my judgment may appease thy 
 best friends, what sayest thou against my 
 decrees? 
 
 Zarathustra said: All the charges thou 
 hast made against me are true this day; 
 but ere to-morrow's setting sun I will have 
 disproved some of them. To-day thy king- 
 dom is large; in two days I will be dead, 
 and thou wilt be dead; and this great city 
 will be destroyed. Yea, the Temple of the 
 Sun will be rent in twain, and fall as a 
 heap of rubbish. 
 
 The king laughed in derision, and then 
 spake to Asha, saying: Thou art an old 
 fool. Go thy way. So Asha was liberated, 
 and Zarathustra was taken to the den of 
 thieves and cast therein. And the den of 
 thieves was surrounded by the dens of lions 
 that belonged to the king's gardens. And 
 a bridge passed over, and, when the pris- 
 oners were within, the bridge was with- 
 drawn. And no prisoner could escape but 
 would fall a prey to the lions, which were 
 fed on the flesh of the persons executed ac- 
 cording to law. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVII. 
 
 During the night, Pon'yah, King of the 
 Sun, bethought him that perhaps he might 
 obtain the secrets of Zarathustra, as re- 
 gards his powers with uz, and he sent him 
 
268 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATT1 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 the following message, to-wit: If thou 
 wilt reveal the secrets of thy power to thy 
 king, thy life shall be spared; and if thou 
 wilt prostrate thyself before the King of 
 Kings, saying: There is none higher! thou 
 shalt have five cities to rule over all thy 
 days. To which Zarathustra sent back the 
 following reply, to-wit: 
 
 Zarathustra hath no secrets to reveal; 
 neither desireth he five cities, nor one city, 
 to rule over. To-morrow I shall die, and 
 on the following night thou also shalt die. 
 And yet, erst thou diest, thou shalt see the 
 temple of the stars rent in twain and fall 
 down; and the city of Oas shall fall and 
 rise no more; and Ya'seang, in Jaffeth, 
 shall become King of the Sun, and his dy- 
 nasty shall stand thousands of years. 
 
 The king was surprised at such an an- 
 swer, and so angeerd that he smote the 
 messenger with his sling, and he fell dead, 
 and the king ordered his body to be cast 
 into the den of lions. It was near the 
 middle of the night when the body was 
 brought, and Zarathustra, being tall, saw- 
 above the wall, and he called out, saying: 
 Cast not the body into the dens with the 
 lions; for I will call him to life in the 
 name of Ormazd. And the men laid the 
 body down by the outer wall, and Zarathus- 
 tra said: He that is standing by the body 
 shall lay his hand upon it. And the man 
 laid his hand on the flesh of the man's 
 body betwixt the neck and the back, and 
 Zarathustra said: The words I say, say 
 thou also: Life of Thy Life, O Ormazd! 
 Restore Thou this, Thy son, to life! 
 
 And behold, the man awoke to 
 life, and opened his eyes, and presently 
 rose up; and Zarathustra bade him depart 
 out of the city. Now the arrest and con- 
 demnation of Zarathustra had caused thou- 
 sands of people to assemble around about 
 the prison; and they beheld the man re- 
 stored to life; and some of them went with 
 him out of the city. And all night, after 
 that, Zarathustra healed the sick, and re- 
 stored the blind and deaf, by calling over 
 the walls in the name of the Father. When 
 it was near sunrise, the next morning, the 
 place of the executions was crowded with 
 spectators. Many of the Zarathustrians 
 believed that Zarathustra would liberate 
 himself by the power upon him; and on 
 the other hand, the king's people, especial- 
 
 ly the learned, desired to realize his execu- 
 tion, for they denounced him as an impos- 
 tor. The latter said: If he be the Master 
 of the I'huans, let him prove his powers 
 whilst he is hanging by the feet. 
 
 It was the law of Oas to keep twelve 
 executioners, representing twelve moons, 
 and at sunrise every morning they put to 
 death whomsoever had been adjudged to 
 death the previous day. Now, there were 
 in prison with Zarathustra two thieves, 
 condemned to the same ignoble death. 
 And they were weeping and moaning! 
 Zarathustra said to them: Weep not, nor 
 moan, but rather rejoice. He Who gave 
 you life is still with you. He will provide 
 another and better home for your souls. 
 Behold, I weep not, nor moan. They who 
 put us to death know not what they do. 
 Rather should the multitude pity them 
 than us. Ye shall this day escape from the 
 tyranny of Oas. 
 
 Zarathustra preached till high noon, 
 and when the light fell on the top of the 
 temple (of the stars) the twelve execution- 
 ers entered the prison and bound the pris- 
 oners' hands together behind their backs; 
 then with another rope they tied the feet, 
 bringing the rope up the back of the legs 
 and passing it betwixt the arms; and they 
 carried the end of the ripe up over a beam 
 and down again; and the executioners seiz- 
 ed the rope and pulled upon it. And they 
 swung the bodies of the victims high above 
 the walls and made fast, leaving them 
 hanging there. 
 
 Thus was Zarathustra hung betwixt two 
 thieves; and whilst he was yet alive a bolt 
 of light fell upon the temple of the stars, 
 and it fell to the round. And when the 
 dust rose it was as a cloud that magnified 
 itself, till the air of the whole city was 
 choking; and there came another bolt of 
 light, and behold, the walls of the 
 city fell down, and Zooh'das perished in 
 the chamber of the wall. 
 
 The multitude ran for the king; and 
 when they brought him out of the palace, 
 another bolt of light fell on the palace, 
 and it was crumbled into dust. The king 
 called to his guards, but they obeyed him 
 not, but fled; and so, the multitude slew 
 the king. The learned men then went 
 down to the place of executions, and Zara- 
 thustra was not yet dead; but the two 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 269 
 
 thieves were dead. And Zarathustra said 
 unto the learned men: Now will I give 
 up my body, and behold, ye shall say I am 
 dead. Let the executioners then take down 
 my body and cast it into the lions' den, 
 and ye shall witness that they will not eat 
 of my flesh. And some shall say: Behold, 
 the lions are not hungry. Thereupon shall 
 ye cast in the bodies of the two thieves, 
 and lo, the lions will fall upon them and 
 eat their flesh. 
 
 Then shall the learned men say: Be- 
 hold Zarathustra's virtue lay in different 
 flesh. Now I declare unto you, these things 
 are not of the flesh, but of the spirit. For 
 angels shall gather about my body and 
 prevent the lions from tearing my flesh. 
 Of which matter ye shall prove before the 
 multitude; for in the time the lions are 
 devouring the flesh of the thieves, the an- 
 gels will go away from my body, and, be- 
 hold, the lions will return and eat of my 
 flesh also. Whereby it shall be proved to 
 you that even lions, the most savage of 
 beasts, have spiritual sight, and are gov- 
 erned by the unseen world. 
 
 When Zarathustra had thus spoken to 
 the learned men, he spake to the Father, 
 saying: Receive Thou my soul, O Or- 
 mazd! And his spirit departed out of his 
 body. So they cast the body into 
 one of the dens, wherein were seven- 
 teen lions, but they fled from the body. 
 Then the executioners cast in the bodies of 
 the thieves, and behold, the lions fell upon 
 them instantly. And when the angels 
 went away from Zarathustra's body, the 
 lions returned to it and ate also. And the 
 keepers turned in other lions, and all the 
 flesh was eaten. And the multitude ran 
 and brought the body of Zhoo'das and 
 cast it in, and the lions ate it also. And 
 next they cast in the king's body, and the 
 lions ate of it, and were appeased of their 
 hunger. 
 
 Now when it was night, some of the 
 Zarathustrians gathered together at a 
 neighbor's house; and Asha was present, 
 and they formed a living altar in order to 
 pray for the soul of Zarathustra, and for 
 the two thieves, and for Zhoo'das, and, 
 lastly, for the king. And now, came the 
 learned men, saying: Why have ye not, 
 during all these years, notified us of these 
 
 things? Behold, Zarathustra is dead! 
 Asha said: 
 
 Have I not carried the alms-bowl pub- 
 licly, proclaiming them from day to day? 
 And the learned people said: Pity, old 
 Asha! A knave hath dethroned his rea- 
 son! Now I declare unto you, it is the 
 same now as in the olden time; the learned 
 men are farther away from the Father 
 than are those devouring lions. Ye look 
 into the corporeal world for light, and 
 truth, and power, but are blind to the 
 spirit, which underlieth all things. I de- 
 clare unto you, whether it be heat or light, 
 or disease, that floateth in the air, or 
 growth that cometh out of the air, in all 
 things it is the unseen that ruleth over the 
 seen. And more powerful than heat and 
 light, and life and death, is Ormazd, the 
 Person of all things. Till ye have learned 
 this, I can explain nothing that ye can 
 comprehend. And yet, to know this, is 
 the beginning of the foundation of ever- 
 lasting happiness. 
 
 Whilst Asha was thus speaking, behold, 
 the soul of Zarathustra came and stood be- 
 fore them, and he was arrayed in the sem- 
 blance of his own flesh, and in his own 
 clothes. And he spake, saying: Fear not; 
 I am the same that was with you and was 
 hanged and died, whose flesh was devoured 
 by the lions; I am Zarathustra! Marvel 
 not that I have the semblance of a corpor- 
 eal body, for its substance is holden to- 
 gether by the power of my spirit. Neither 
 is this a miracle, for the spirits of the liv- 
 ing hold in the same way, each its own 
 corporeal body. As iron attracteth iron, the 
 spirit may learn to attract from the air a 
 corporeal body of its like and measure. 
 
 Then inquired one who was present: 
 Where are the two thieves? To which 
 Zarathustra said: As steam riseth from 
 boiling water, without shape or form, so 
 are their spirits this hour. For this reason 
 was I sent into the world by the Father. 
 Let him who would become controller of 
 his own spirit unto everlasting life, learn 
 the Ormazdian law, seeking to grow in 
 spirit, instead of living for the things of 
 this world. Behold, there are here present 
 Lords of the Hosts of Heaven, who are 
 Sons and Daughters of the Most High Or- 
 mazd, the Creator. They will now gather 
 
270 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 together and reclothe the thieves, and 
 show you of what like they are. Present- 
 ly the two drujas, the thieves who were 
 hanged with Zarathustra, stood before the 
 people in sar'gis, and they raved, and 
 cursed, and moaned; but they were blind 
 and dumb as to the place. Then Asha in- 
 quired of them, as to who they were and 
 what they wanted, but they only cursed 
 him, and added that they were to be 
 hanged. 
 
 Asha said: Behold, ye are already 
 dead, and your spirits risen from the earth! 
 To which they replied by curses against 
 the king. And now the Lords of heaven 
 brought the spirit of the king, but he knew 
 not that he was dead, and he cursed also; 
 whereupon the spirits of the thieves fell 
 upon him with evil intent, and all the peo- 
 ple beheld these things. But the Lords 
 of heaven took away the sar'gis, and the 
 drujas could not be seen more by mortals. 
 
 Zarathustra said: As on the earth they 
 were angered and dumb, they cling to the 
 earth. For which reason ye shall sing an- 
 thems and pray for them three mornings 
 at sunrise; three high-noons, and three 
 evenings at sunset. Do ye this also, hence- 
 forth, forever, for three days, for all your 
 kindred who die, or who are slain. 
 
 And ye shall utter only words of love 
 for the dead; for whosoever uttereth 
 curses for the dead, bringeth drujas upon 
 himself. In your love and forgiveness do 
 ye raise them out of the torments of hell. 
 And inasmuch as ye raise up others, so 
 doth Ormazd raise up your own souls. 
 
 One who was present asked how long 
 a spirit lingered around about? To which 
 Zarathustra said: Some for three days, 
 some for a year, some for a hundred years, 
 and some for a thousand years! Until 
 they have wisdom and strength to get 
 away. But after three days ye shall no 
 longer desire the spirit of the dead to re- 
 main with you; rather shall ye say to 
 Ormazd: Deal Thou with him and with 
 us in Thine Own way, O Father; we are 
 content. Better is it for the spirits that 
 ye remember them high up in paradise; 
 for these thoughts will enable you to rise 
 after ye are dead. 
 
 Remember that All Light answereth 
 everything in heaven and earth after its 
 own manner: If ye kill, ye are answered 
 
 in torments sooner or later: If ye utter 
 falsehood, ye are answered in falsehood: 
 If ye curse, ye will be cursed in return: If 
 ye hate, ye will be hated: If ye seclude 
 yourselves, ye will be excluded: If ye 
 keep evil company in this world, ye will 
 be bound in evil company in heaven: As 
 ye seek to become a leader of men, remem- 
 ber that they whom ye rule over will be 
 your burden in heaven: If ye teach not, 
 ye shall not be taught: If ye lift not oth- 
 ers up, none will lift you up. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVIII. 
 
 On the following evening, when the 
 Zarathustrians were assembled for prayer 
 and singing, the soul of Zarathustra again 
 appeared before them in sar'gis, teaching 
 the Word of Ormazd. He said: 
 
 Two people there are on earth; the one 
 is engrossed in the affairs of earth; the 
 other in the affairs of heaven. Better is it 
 for ye to be of the latter. The fool will 
 say: If all people are engrossed with the 
 affairs of heaven, then who will provide on 
 earth? Such is the argument of all Druks. 
 Fear not, therefore, for the earth people 
 becoming short of votaries. 
 
 So also will it be said of celibacy. The 
 Druks will say: If all people become celi- 
 bates, then will the race of man terminate. 
 Wherefore, I say again unto you, fear not, 
 for there will be plenty left who are full of 
 passion, and are less mindful of the king- 
 doms of heaven. 
 
 Let all who can, live for the Higher 
 Light; the lower will ever be supplied suf- 
 ficiently. 
 
 Even as ye find two peoples on earth, 
 so also do two peoples exist in heaven. 
 The one followeth the Highest Light, and 
 ever riseth toward the highest heavens. 
 The other followeth the affairs of earth, 
 and riseth not, and hence is called druj. 
 The latter engageth in quarrels amongst 
 mortals, inspiring them to evil and low 
 designs. 
 
 One present asked: How shall we 
 know one another, whether we be of hea- 
 ven or of earth? Then Zarathustra an- 
 swered, saying: Seek to know thyself; 
 thou art not thy neighbor's keeper. Search 
 thine own soul a hundred times every day, 
 to know if thou practicest the All Highest 
 light. Neither shalt thou find excuses for 
 
CYCLE OF FRAGAPATTI -«.„ E cop B 2 71 
 
 thy shortness; nor reflect overmuch on 
 past errors, but use them as inspiration to 
 perfect thyself henceforward. 
 
 Another one present asked: How of 
 thieves, and falsifiers, and murderers? 
 Zarathustra said: The man who serveth 
 himself only is worse than any of these; 
 there is no resurrection for him. But if a 
 man cease his evil way, and practice vir- 
 tue, he is on the right road. 
 
 A falsifier is like one with a clean 
 gown on, that goeth about casting filth 
 upon it; he soileth his own spirit. 
 
 A thief is worse than an overburdened 
 beast; he carrieth his stolen goods not 
 only in this world, but in heaven, to the 
 end of his memory. 
 
 A murderer is like a naked man who is 
 ashamed, and cannot hide from the multi- 
 tude. When he is in heaven, his memory 
 of the deed writeth in human blood a stain 
 on his soul, which all others see. 
 
 Another one asked: According to the 
 I'hua'Mazdian law, the highest, best men 
 forsake the world, laboring to raise up the 
 poor and ignorant, reciting prayers and 
 anthems; taking no part in the affairs of 
 people who are engrossed in the matters 
 of earth; who, then, shall be the govern- 
 ment of the wicked? To which Zarathus- 
 tra answered, saying: 
 
 When there are not sufficient men and 
 women for such purpose, there will be no 
 wicked to govern. With all thy preach- 
 ing that the highest, best man will not de- 
 sire to be a leader of men, nor a king, nor 
 a governor, yet there will be plenty left 
 who will fill these places, even though 
 they beheld the walls of hell opened up to 
 receive them. 
 
 Another one asked: If the Zarathus- 
 trians separate, and live by themselves, 
 what will be their power to do good 
 amongst the evil? To which Zarathustra 
 said: 
 
 As the highest heavens send Lords and 
 masters down to mortals, so shall the Zara- 
 thustrians send emissaries amongst the 
 wicked, preaching the truth, and citing 
 the example of the Zarathustrian cities 
 (communities). 
 
 For above all philosophy that man may 
 preach, practice holdeth the highest place, 
 and is most potent. Therefore, practice 
 the Ormazdian law toward one another in 
 
 all things. Avoid men of opinion; men of 
 learning who have pride therein; men of 
 argument; men who quibble for proofs in 
 unprovable things; men who wish to be 
 known as wise men; men who deny; men 
 that can see defects in everything, and 
 have nothing good to offer in place thereof. 
 
 Shun the disbelieving man, for he is 
 diseased, and may inoculate thee; the flat- 
 terer, for he is purchasing thee; a woman, 
 for woman's sake; or a man, for man's 
 sake; company, for company's sake; for 
 all these imply that the Creator is less in 
 thy sight, and not so well loved. 
 
 One asked concerning spirits. To which 
 Zarathustra said: For the affairs of earth, 
 consult the spirits of the earth, the dru- 
 jas; for the affairs of everlasting resurrec- 
 tion, consult thy Creator, and His holy 
 spirits will answer thee in His name. And 
 to whichever thou hast made thyself com- 
 panion, there will be thy abiding place af- 
 ter death. 
 
 See to it that thou becomest not in- 
 veigled by drujas, for spirits can assume 
 any name and form; but weigh their 
 words, whether they be wise, and accord- 
 ing to the Ormazdian law. If they teach 
 not the highest heavens, consider them by 
 their words. To flatter thee, they will pro- 
 fess to remember thee in another life; and 
 to please thee, say thou wert a king, and 
 has lived many lives on the earth. 
 
 But to rise up, away from the earth, 
 and from the lower heavens also; it was 
 for bestowing this word unto men that I 
 was sent into the world. It is to teach 
 you to know the Father's upper heavens, 
 and the way to reach them, that His words 
 were given unto men. 
 
 As it was in the olden time, so will it 
 be again ere another generation pass away. 
 Drujas will teach that the spirits of the 
 dead go into trees and flowers, and inhab- 
 it them; and into swine, and cattle, and 
 birds, and into woman, and are born over 
 again in mortal form. Argue not with 
 them; their philosophy concerneth not 
 thee. Whether they be in darkness or in 
 light judge thou by the glory and beauty 
 of the heavens where they live. If their 
 words are of the earth, they belong to the 
 earth; if they are servants to false Gods 
 or false Lords, they will preach him whom 
 they serve. But these matters are nothing 
 
272 
 
 CYCLE OF FRAGAPATT1 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 to thee; for thou shalt serve the All High- 
 est, the Creator. 
 
 And in regard to the heaven whither 
 thou wouldst ascend after death, magnify 
 it with all thy ingenuity unto the All High- 
 est Perfection. People it with thy highest 
 ideals for thy companions. Then see to it 
 that thou makest thyself a fit companion 
 for them also. If thou do this with all 
 thy wisdom and strength, all the days of 
 thy life, the Father will be with thee, and 
 thou shalt be a glory in His works. 
 
 For three days and nights, after his res- 
 urrection from death, Zarathustra thus 
 preached to his followers, and Asha wrote 
 down the substance of his words, and they 
 were preserved unto the generation 5 of 
 Faithists from that time forth. And these 
 words were called the Ormazdian law, the 
 I'hua'Mazdian law, the Zarathustrian law. 
 And these were the first heavenly words 
 given to mortals on tablets, skins and 
 cloth, except such words as were given in 
 secret to the tribes of I'hins, of which the 
 different nations oi the earth knew no- 
 thing. 
 
 On the morning of the fourth day, 
 when the disciples sat in crescent, which 
 was called the living altar, Zarathustra 
 came again in sar'gis. He said: 
 
 Behold, the time hath come for me to 
 rise out of hada, where I have dwelt for 
 three days. The Gods who were with me 
 all my life are gathered together here, and 
 there are millions of them. Just near the 
 river yonder standeth the boundary line 
 of a heavenly ship of light. It is wider 
 and higher than the eye can see! A million 
 angels are singing in that ship ! And there 
 are Great Gods and Great Lords in it; so 
 bright mine eyes can scarce look upon 
 them. They are all Sons and Daughters 
 of Ormazd. 
 
 The drujas are all run away now. Their 
 foolish gabble is hushed. It is as if another 
 world had come alongside, so majestic 
 that this one was lost. High above, yon- 
 der, something like a sun illumines the 
 ship of fire. I know it is he who hath 
 come for me. I go now. Whither I go I 
 will build for you all. And thou, O Asha; 
 the Gods have thrown a mantle of light 
 over thee! A chain of light reacheth from 
 thee to Ormazd! 
 
 Asha was overcome, and would fain 
 have gone to Zarathustra; but the latter 
 said: Stand thou, that I may kiss thee! 
 So Zarathustra kissed Asha, and disap- 
 peared. 
 
CHAPTER I. 
 
 Jehovih spake to Cpenta-armij, Goddess 
 of Haot-saiti, in Nirvana, in the arc of 
 Spe-ta, Commander of the South fields of 
 Abarom, in the Orian Plains of Bilotho- 
 witchieun, of a reign of two hundred thou- 
 sand years; Surveyor for Otaias, ten thou- 
 sand years; Leader of the Oixan, seventy 
 thousand years; Captain of Geliyas' road- 
 ways, in the forest of Lugga, twenty thou- 
 sand years; Founder and Ruler of Isaas, 
 thirty thousand years; Trencher of the 
 Haigusets swamps, four thousand years; 
 Goddess of Nor, Goddess of Eunigi, God- 
 dess of Poutu, each ten thousand years, 
 saying: 
 
 My Daughter, behold, the red star and 
 her heavens come thy way. She will be in 
 thy dominions for a space of four years 
 and thirty-two days, which time it will 
 take her to cross the arc of Spe-ta. Open 
 thou thy fields in Abarom, and give her 
 forty years' indulgence. 
 
 Cpenta-armij answered, saying: I see 
 the red star, Earth, O Jehovih! Like a 
 wandering ship in a wide ocean she cometh 
 through my fields, the young Earth, travel- 
 ing on, carefully, in the roads of Salkwatka. 
 Hath she so soon, but little more than sixty 
 thousand years, overcome her enduring 
 knots and torturing hells? 
 
 In Thy Wisdom and Power, O Jehovih, 
 I will go in person to this corporeal 
 world, and encourage her God and Lords 
 for the excellent labor done. 
 
 Jehovih said: Call thy Council, and pro- 
 claim from My throne the Feast of the Arc 
 of Spe-ta. Then Cpenta-armij called her 
 High Council, a hundred millions, Sons 
 and Daughters of Jehovih, and she ascend- 
 ed to her place in the midst of the throne 
 of the Great Spirit. 
 
 And there were present: Obed, God of 
 Oise, in Embrahk; Gavaini, Goddess of Ip- 
 thor of the Solastis Plains; Ab, First 
 Shriever of Riv-Seing; Holon-ho, God of 
 Loo-Gam; Raisi, Goddess of Esdras; 
 
 Wishtse, God of Zuth, in Ronega; and all 
 these Gods and Goddesses were above a 
 hundred thousand years raised in etherean 
 realms, and knew Earth before inhabited 
 by man. 
 
 On a visit to Cpenta-armij were: Owks, 
 Orian Chief of Maiter-lan, fifty thousand 
 years, Marshal of Wiski-loo, thirty thou- 
 sand years, God of Tunsin, in the Tarps 
 Roads, ninety thousand years; and See- 
 wah-Gon, Chieftainess of the Orian arc of 
 Su-los, two hundred thousand years, Mis- 
 tress of Aftong, in the Plains of Bel, three 
 hundred thousand years, Pilotess of Lu- 
 wow-lu, one hundred thousand years, God- 
 dess of Eune, in the Mountain of Gem- 
 king; and Ha-o-ha, Founder of Ogee, of 
 Siam, of Wick-a-wick, and the twelve Nir- 
 vanian Old-tse, in Lo-owtz, Eli-hagam, to- 
 gether with their traveling hosts, each five 
 million. 
 
 Cpenta-armij said: For Thy glory, O Je- 
 hovih, I proclaim the Feast of the Arc of 
 Spe-ta. And these, my visiting hosts, shall 
 enjoy the four years' deliverance of the red 
 star and her heavens! 
 
 Then responded Owks, and then See- 
 wah-Gon, then Ha-o-ha, speaking at great 
 length, and rejoicing for the invitation. 
 And they related many adventures on oth- 
 er stars in the time of the arc of deliver- 
 ance, the arc of Spe-ta, and with what 
 Gods and Goddesses they journeyed, and 
 with what Chiefs and Chieftainesses. 
 
 So Cpenta-armij spake to her chief mar- 
 shal, saying: Send thou heralds to the 
 builders, and order me an airavagna capa- 
 ble of five hundred million, and of speed, 
 grade sixty. After this thou shalt select from 
 my attendants one hundred million, and 
 after that three hundred million of the 
 Egisi. 
 
 With these, and with my visitors, I will 
 start for the red star in twenty days. The 
 proper officers attended to these things, and 
 whilst they were moving about, behold, the 
 red star, Earth, rose up in the far-off 
 place, the roadway, and the es'enaurs saw 
 it, and they chanted. 
 
274 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 What is yonder? The red star, Jeho- 
 viii! She rideth round the sun, two hun- 
 dred and seventy million miles. 
 
 Around about her, close; what is that 
 filled with angels, thousands of millions! 
 It is her atmosphere, traveling with her. 
 That little red star is a world, O Father! 
 And the thousands of millions of angels, 
 why do they stay in such heavens, O Je- 
 hovih! 
 
 Then the trumpeters afar off answered: 
 She that spinneth round the sun is the red 
 star, Earth, a new world, a generator of 
 the souls of men. The Gods have called 
 her, but she will not hear. Her atmos- 
 phere is full of angels struggling for the 
 earth. But Thy hand is upon them, O Je- 
 hovih! Thy trumpeters will line the roads 
 of Salkwatka. 
 
 Then sang the es'enaurs: How lovely 
 are Thy works, O Jehovih! Too lovely are 
 Thy places, O Jehovih! Too lovely is the 
 red star, Earth, O Jehovih! Thy chil- 
 dren love it while in mortal form; after 
 death too much they love it, O Jehovih! 
 
 The pipers answer for Jehovih from the 
 Wide East: O so little to love, made I 
 Earth, the red star. I gave her poisoned 
 weeds and vines and grasses; millions of 
 death-dealing serpents. Then I created 
 poisoned marshes and terrible fevers. In 
 sore travail, and full of misery created I 
 man on Earth, that he should turn and 
 look upward for a holier place. 
 
 Then sang the es'enaurs: Too lovely 
 createdst Thou Thy atmospherean heavens, 
 O Jehovih! Thy bounden heavens that 
 travel with the red star, Earth. The 
 spirits raised up from the mortal earth find 
 too much to love in Thy lower heavens, O 
 Jehovih! 
 
 The pipers again answered for Jehovih: 
 My lower heavens created I full of dark- 
 ness and evil possibilities. A place for 
 madness created I it; a place for lying and 
 deceit; full of hell and torments. To drive 
 man upward; to blow My breath upon him, 
 to lift him up, as one lighteth the fire by 
 blowing. 
 
 Cpenta-armij spake from Jehovih's 
 throne, saying: What is the deliverance of 
 man? Is it from his mother's womb? Is it 
 from his corporeal body? Is it from the 
 corporeal world and her atmosphere? 
 Three births hath the Father given unto all 
 
 men. In the first, man hath nothing to do, 
 as to his shaping or time in his mother's 
 womb. In the second he hath a little more 
 to do as to directing his course during his 
 mortal life; but for the third, for the higher 
 heavens, he must work for his own deliver- 
 ance. 
 
 Cpenta-armij said: Three kinds of earth 
 deliverance for man created the Creator: 
 First from his mother's womb, coming cry- 
 ing, blank and helpless; second, from the 
 tetracts, serious and full of fear; third, 
 from the enemies of the Great Spirit. This 
 is the Feast of Spe-ta. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 Cpenta-armij said: I looked afar, and 
 saw Earth and her heavens traveling on. 
 I listened to the voice of mortals! A mer- 
 chant counted over his gains; he said: This 
 is heaven! A drunkard quaffed a cup of 
 poison; he said: This is heaven! A wanton 
 said: This is heaven! A general, red with 
 blood, counted the badges on his breast; he 
 said: This is heaven! A tyrant, rich in toil- 
 ing slaves, said: This is heaven! Then a 
 vast multitude, all smeared with the blood 
 of war, pointed to a field of mortals slain, 
 and said: This is heaven! A farmer stretch- 
 ed wide his arms toward his great posses- 
 sions, uncultivated; he said: This is heaven! 
 A little child with a toy said: This is hea- 
 ven! 
 
 Then spake Jehovih, saying: None of 
 these canst thou convince to the contrary. 
 They are not ready for deliverance. 
 
 I listened to the voice of the spirits, the 
 angels traveling with Earth. A wanderer, 
 going about, with nothing to do, said: This 
 is heaven! An obsessor of mortals 
 said: This is heaven! The fairies, 
 the butterfly angels, the triflers, that 
 forever look in crystal waters to behold 
 their own forms, said: This is heaven! The 
 rollicking, deceiving angels, who went and 
 inspired mortals to falsehood; these angels 
 said: This is heaven! Vampire angels, that 
 nestle in the atmosphere of mortals, largely 
 living on their substance, said: This is hea- 
 ven! Evil angels obsessing mortals for 
 murder's sake, to make mortals burn 
 houses and torture helpless creatures, said: 
 This is heaven! 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 275 
 
 Then spake Jehovih, saying: None of 
 these canst thou convince to the contrary. 
 They are not ready for deliverance. 
 
 Again I listened to the sounds coming 
 from the far-off earth. And I heard the 
 prayers of mortals. The king prayed for 
 his kingdom and for himself. The general 
 prayed for success in war. The merchant 
 for great gains; the tyrant for great au- 
 thority. 
 
 Jehovih said: Only the earth can an- 
 swer such prayers. 
 
 I listened again for the prayers of 
 mortals; they had great afflictions, dire dis- 
 eases, and famines, and wars; the mer- 
 chants were bankrupt, and there was great 
 suffering, and they prayed for deliverance. 
 
 Jehovih said: Shouldst thou deliver 
 them they would return to their old, evil 
 habits. I say unto thee, the merchant shall 
 be bankrupt; the king shall fail; the general 
 be overthrown; the healthy shall be sick 
 for a season. Save they know- My power, 
 they cannot learn; save they feel affliction, 
 they will not help one another. Shall a 
 man say: O Jehovih, come Thou and heal 
 the sick? Shall he not first of all recognize 
 My will and know My power? 
 
 To give money to the drunkard, what 
 good is that? To give wealth and earthly 
 prosperity to them that acknowledge not 
 Me, is to set them against Me. To give 
 healing to the fevered, is to teach them that 
 I have no power in the unseen air. Answer 
 not thou the prayers of these. 
 
 I listened once more to the prayers of 
 mortals. And they were such as lived ac- 
 cording to their higher light; they purified 
 the flesh by pure food, and by bathing 
 every day; and they went about doing good 
 constantly, hoarding up neither clothes, nor 
 silver, nor gold, nor anything earthly. And 
 they purified their thoughts by putting 
 away the evil tongue, and the evil eye, and 
 evil ear; and many of them were bound by 
 the kings, and the tyrants, and the laws of 
 mortals; and some of them were sick. And 
 they prayed, saying: Great is my affliction, 
 
 Jehovih. I know that in Thy sight I am 
 justly punished. 
 
 But hear Thou my prayer, O Father! 
 Make me strong, that I may carry heavy 
 burdens for the weary; give me liberty, that 
 
 1 may go about helping the poor forever. 
 
 Give me wisdom, that I may uncover Thy 
 glories before men. 
 
 Jehovih said: Go thou, My Daughter, 
 and deliver them. They are ready for de- 
 liverance! Answer thou the prayers of 
 such. 
 
 Then I called my hosts together, five 
 hundred millions, in the Nirvanian hea- 
 vens in Haot-saiti, in etherea, the highest 
 heaven. And we entered into the airavag- 
 na, as swelling high on every side, the 
 music of millions cheered us on. Upward, 
 high up shone the glimmering red star, 
 toward which now our steersman pointed 
 our ship, and thitherward turned our buoy- 
 ant souls, saluting our starters with a hap- 
 py good-by! 
 
 Arise! Arise! By my vested power in 
 Thee, O Jehovih, shall the elements fall 
 before my will! Arise; onward! To the 
 red star, speed on! Airavagna, upward, 
 on! 
 
 Thus spake Cpenta-armij, her voice mel- 
 low and sweet, but so tuned to the spheres 
 it could be heard the breadth of a world. 
 And Jehovih, with Whose power and 
 will she had learned to be as one, by long 
 experience and studying submission to His 
 will, lent a willing ear and a strong hand. 
 Out shot the flames, the buoyant force 
 manufactured by less skilled workmen 
 learning the trade of Gods, where whirled 
 the million screws of fire, propelling, till 
 the mighty ship reeled, and turned, and 
 rose from its foundation, with all its joyous 
 hosts aboard, shouting loud, and singing 
 praise to Him who ruleth over all. Then 
 turning round and round, slowly, the great 
 airavagna began her course in the roadway 
 of Salkwatka, in etherea, toward the red 
 star, the young Earth. 
 
 Nearing first the Oixanian Spars of 
 Ochesu, where were gathered near the 
 road ten million spectators to see the God- 
 dess pass in her ship; and their banners 
 waved, and their music burst forth; who 
 were answered by the airavagna's cheer- 
 ing hosts and sailing streamers. She halt- 
 ed, to salute in honor, the Goddess Yuetis- 
 iv, and then ascended a thousand miles. 
 
 Again onward, turning the breadth of 
 the road, a million miles, to the right, to 
 salute Vultanya, Goddess of the swamps of 
 Ailassasak, where stood by the portico of 
 
276 
 
 CYCLE OF CPEJSTA-ABM1J 
 
 her heavenly palace seventy million pupils, 
 in their thousandth year of tuition, to re- 
 ceive the passing- blessing of the Orian 
 Chieftainess, Cpenta-armij. And blither, 
 but a halt, as it were a nod, and downward 
 on their heads Cpenta-armij sent a shower 
 of newly-created flowers from the sphere 
 above, and in turn heard their chorus rise 
 joyfully, in as many million words of love 
 and admiration. 
 
 Still onward, upward sped the airavagna, 
 her hosts viewing the scenes on every side, 
 the richest part and most glorious 
 places of Salkwatka. Where the ether- 
 ean worlds, rich in the glitter of swamps 
 shining on the countless rainbow arches 
 and crystal pyramids, afford an extensive 
 view of the new Orian boundaries of Ote- 
 son's broad kingdoms. Here course the 
 thousands of excursionists from the meas- 
 ureless regions of the Huan lights, where 
 are to be seen a million varieties of fire- 
 ships, of sizes from ten miles across to the 
 breadth of a world, in unceasing travel, in 
 tens of thousands of directions. 
 
 By music alone, some their ships pro- 
 pelled, the vibratory chords affording pow- 
 er sufficient in such high-skilled hands, and 
 the tunes changing according to the re- 
 gions traversed. Others, even by colors 
 made in the waves of sound, went forward, 
 carrying millions of angels, every one at- 
 tuned so perfectly that his very presence 
 lent power and beauty to the monarch ves- 
 sel. And downward and upward, and east 
 and west, and north and south, and of every 
 angle and course; such were the traveling 
 regions of Wellagowthiij, in the etherean 
 fields of Oteson. 
 
 And of the million ships, with their tens 
 of thousands of millions of spirits, the 
 great Goddess, Cpenta-armij, could turn 
 her well-learned eyes on any one, and 
 know its home regions, and from what 
 Orian pastures sailed; or perhaps Nirvan- 
 ian rivers! And her visiting friends, 
 Owks, and See-wah-Gon, and Ha-o-ha, 
 stood by her side, reading the coursing 
 fleets, and relating to one another who they 
 were, and the great Chiefs aboard, with 
 whom thousands of years ago they had 
 been together taming some rambling star 
 and quieting its disturbed vortex, or per- 
 haps surveying a roadway many millions 
 of miles through an a'ji'an forest. 
 
 And coming then to the Crossings, near 
 Bilothowitchieun, where was a small colo- 
 ny, ninety million etherean weavers, super- 
 intended by Cpenta-armij 's ward, Hoewu- 
 el, God of two thousand years, who knew 
 she was coming has way, and had lighted 
 the roadway a hundred thousand miles in 
 honor thereof, she turned the airavagna 
 and cast the streamers and banners, salut- 
 ing. Here again Cpenta-armij sent down 
 to her beloved sons and daughters, for ev- 
 ery one, flowers and keepsakes; and on 
 every flower was written the history and 
 mission to Earth and her heavens. And 
 then again the airavagna upward rose and 
 sped on. 
 
 Thus in Jehovih's wide universe went 
 forth the Chieftainess, Cpenta-armij, 
 toward the red star; passing through 
 ten thousand varieties of etherean 
 worlds and roadways in the ji'ay'an fields 
 and forests of high heaven, seeing millions 
 of etherean ships going hither and thither, 
 every one knowing its own mission and 
 field of labor, whilst the highest raised 
 Gods and Goddesses could exchange cour- 
 tesies with the fiery vehicles, and speak 
 them, to know whither bent, and for what 
 purpose. 
 
 Then rising high; here on a level lieth 
 Earth. At Chinvat, just beyond the sweep 
 of the moon, Cpenta-armij halted to view 
 the rolling Earth, her land and water; and 
 her atmospherean heavens, the sojourning 
 place of the newly dead, and of such as 
 have not aspired to rise to holier heavens. 
 
 Then Cpenta-armij ordered the aira- 
 vagna to take a downward course, steer- 
 ing straight toward the habitable earth. 
 Slowly now, turning slowly, and descend- 
 ing; viewing all the regions on every side 
 in the great vortex, she spies the plateau 
 Craoshivi, the place of God, new founded. 
 And Cpenta-armij, stretching forth her 
 slender hand, itself like a stream of fire, 
 she crieth out: Behold my anchorage! 
 Here bring my ship and make fast, where 
 riseth now the voices of my weary God 
 and his Lords, of me so long expectant. 
 In Thy wisdom and power, O Jehovih, I 
 will raise them up! 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 Jehovih spake to God, ruler of Earth 
 and atmospherea, saying: Well done, 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 277 
 
 O My Son! The beginning of the end of 
 thy trials is at hand. I have spoken in the 
 highest heavens, in My etherean worlds; in 
 the gardens of Haot-saiti, near the arc of 
 Spe-ta, to My Daughter, who hath attained 
 to be One with Me, a Nirvanian in the re- 
 gions of Chen-gotha, the holy Cpenta- 
 armij. 
 
 Her ship, an airavagna, with five hun- 
 dred million etherean deliverers on board, 
 hath started on the road Salkwatka, swiftly 
 bound to thy regions, to thy new plateau, 
 Craoshivi. 
 
 Send thou word to Yima to come, and 
 to Vishnu, and to Os, each to come in 
 rank, attended by ten million, grade above 
 seventy, with es'enaurs, and marshals, and 
 captains, and generals, to come to Crao- 
 shivi. 
 
 And send £hou invitations to thy Diva 
 to come, and to thy sub-Gods, and to thy 
 Lord Gods, and to thy Lords, in all the di- 
 visions of heaven and the divisions of the 
 earth; and to bring of their people all 
 above grade fifty. And to thy marshals 
 give thou a list of all who will be with 
 thee in Craoshivi on that day. And thy 
 marshals shall apportion and divide and 
 arrange all thy hosts thus assembled in 
 Croashivi, according to grade, approaching 
 thy throne in four lines, east and west and 
 north and south, and thy throne shall be 
 the extreme east. 
 
 And in the centre of the cross shall thy 
 marshal provide space sufficient for the 
 hosts of Cpenta-armij to land her airavag- 
 na, and to disembark. But at the extreme 
 boundary of the lines of thy hosts thou 
 shalt draw a circle, and thither shall thy 
 light makers erect pillars of light,. making 
 the circle as a wall of light; and, as the 
 diameter of the circle is to the distance 
 down to the earth's surface, so a tenth 
 thereof shalt thou make as the summit of 
 the apex of the canopy of thy capital 
 chamber, for the Holy Council of thy God- 
 dess. Cpenta-armij. 
 
 God said: Thy will be done, O Jehovih! 
 And thereupon God sent word by his mes- 
 sengers, as commanded by the Great Spirit; 
 sent invitations to all the Gods and Lords 
 of heaven and earth, commanding them to 
 come to Craoshivi. 
 
 And the Lord Gods, and Gods and 
 Lords, thus notified, appointed substitutes 
 
 to rule in their places. And they made ote- 
 vans, every one suitable to the number of 
 angels he was to take with him, and they 
 embarked and rose up from their several 
 places in atmospherea and the earth, and. 
 being guided in their courses by such ex- 
 perts as had learned the way, they came to 
 Craoshivi, where they were received by the 
 chief marshal of God and his officers, and 
 allotted their several places, according to 
 their respective grades. But as the plateau 
 was above grade fifty in Earth's vortex, 
 so there were no angels of less grade than 
 fifty amongst all the hosts assembled. 
 
 And Jehovih commanded God to num- 
 ber the angels thus assembled in Craoshivi, 
 and there were seven thousand nine hun- 
 dred and seventy-five million eight hun- 
 dred thousand, officers and all. 
 
 And the day and the hour of their as- 
 sembling, when they were numbered, was 
 the self same time that Cpenta-armij's fire- 
 ship arrived at Chinvat, when her light 
 burst in full view to the hosts of God in 
 Craoshivi. And they all beheld her com- 
 ing; saw the manner in which a Chieftain- 
 ess cometh to the lower heavens. And be- 
 cause of the great glory before them, they 
 burst forth in a song of praise to Jehovih, 
 the seven thousand million. 
 
 Jehovih spake to God, saying: Ascend 
 thy throne, My Son, and allot the Council 
 and thy officers to their place, for quickly 
 now, behold, My Daughter will descend. 
 And when she cometh, My Voice will be 
 with her for the years and the days of the 
 dawn of dan. 
 
 So God caused his Council and his mar- 
 shal and his Diva to take their places and 
 be in readiness for the emancipated Sons 
 and Daughters. And presently the descend- 
 ing star grew brighter and larger, larger 
 and brighter, till like a sun she shone 
 abroad over all the plateau of Craoshivi. 
 
 In awe stood the Gods at sight of the 
 sublime spectacle; for the light of the aira- 
 vagna was brilliant, and unlike all the lights 
 of the lower heavens, and new to nearly all 
 the people. 
 
 Nearer and nearer descended the ship of 
 light, till soon the music of her hosts de- 
 scended down to those beneath, who, awe- 
 stricken and buoyant with delight, burst 
 forth, entranced with the glory thereof, 
 
278 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 singing, by the force of Jehovih's light 
 upon them, the same glorious anthem. 
 
 And now the marshals cleared the way, 
 for close at hand came the airavagna, over 
 the bows of which Cpenta-armij shone like 
 a central sun, and her visiting hosts, 
 Owks and Ha-o-ha and See-wah-Gon, 
 with her; and but for Cpenta-armij holding 
 out her taper hand, the hosts below would 
 not have known which of the four great 
 lights Jehovih had sent. Presently the cur- 
 tains swept across the high pyramid of the 
 capital, and then the transparent blankets 
 and crystal frame-work; and now the an- 
 chors were let down, three hundred thou- 
 sand; lower and lower, slowly came the 
 mighty ship, till her screen-work, from 
 which the anchors hung, touched the very 
 floors of the capital; and, all radiant with 
 holiness, before God and his hosts stood 
 the ethereans, the glory of the most high 
 heavens. 
 
 The attendants then quickly spread the 
 homa; the masters of arches opened the 
 floor and sides of the airavagna, and there, 
 seated or standing, was ready the central 
 part of the etherean Council chamber. 
 Then came forth the Chieftainess, Cpenta- 
 armij, accompanied by Owks and Ha-o-ha 
 and See-wah-Gon and arriving before the 
 throne stood, waiting for the salutation 
 and the sign. 
 
 God, still sitting on his throne, said: 
 Daughter of Jehovih, Chieftainess of Haot- 
 saiti, in the name of the Father! And 
 hereupon he gave the sign Arc of Spe-ta! 
 Cpenta-armij and her three companions sa- 
 luted in the Sign of the Circuit! Which 
 was the highest compliment any God of 
 Earth had ever received. 
 
 Cpenta-armij said: By Jehovih's com- 
 mand am I before thee, O God. In Love 
 and Wisdom and Power am I come. Be- 
 hold, my Voice is His Voice, Creator of 
 Worlds! 
 
 God said: My throne is founded in Je- 
 hovih's name. Come thou and honor it, 
 and bring thy most high Gods and God- 
 desses with thee. 
 
 They went forward then, and all the 
 Gods and Goddesses, and Lords and Lord- 
 esses stood up, saluting by shaking hands; 
 and then Cpenta-armij went and sat in the 
 midst of the throne. Meanwhile, the 
 es'enaurs chanted a hymn of thanksgiving. 
 
 Cpenta-armij, being controlled by the 
 Voice of Jehovih, said: For joy created I 
 man and woman; for seasons of labor and 
 seasons of recreation. Be ye mirthful be- 
 fore Me, and jubilant toward one another, 
 in remembrance of My creations. And 
 when I call you to labor, behold, Mv hand 
 will move upon you for the furtherance of 
 My kingdoms in their resurrections. 
 
 Hereupon the multitude descended 
 from their places of stateliness, and com- 
 mingled together joyfully. And those who 
 were on the throne came down and min- 
 gled with the multitude, saluting and re- 
 joicing. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 For two whole days Cpenta-armij left 
 the people in recration, but on the third she 
 ascended the throne; and even in 
 that same moment of time, a light 
 spread abroad over all the place, so that the 
 people comprehended indeed what was 
 meant by Jehovih's hand being upon them. 
 And they all resumed their places, where- 
 upon Jehovih spake through Cpenta-armij, 
 saying: 
 
 Whom I brought with Me from Haot- 
 saiti shall be My Council during dawn; but 
 the portals shall remain open on every side. 
 
 Who are not of My Council are not 
 bound unto these, My labors, and the same 
 shall go and come as they choose, remem- 
 bering the call of their respective Gods. 
 
 For know ye all, that whoever aspireth 
 to Me shall come to Me. Ye being above 
 grade fifty are already more to Me and for 
 Me than against Me or from Me, and in 
 equal degree are cast upon your own re- 
 sponsibility. For such is the light of My 
 kingdoms, from the first to the highest: To 
 the child, no responsibility; to grade twen- 
 ty-five, one-quarter; to fifty, one-half; to 
 seventy-five, three-quarters; but to the 
 emancipated in My etherean realms, re- 
 sponsibility not only to self but to all who 
 are beneath. 
 
 Wherein My highest worlds are respon- 
 sible for the lowest, being bound unto one 
 another through Me for the resurrection of 
 all. 
 
 In this day am I come to deliver My 
 Gods down to the earth, to walk on the 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 279 
 
 earth with mortals, raising them up in My 
 name. 
 
 They who shall be raised up in Me; even 
 though still of the earth, shall be holden 
 alike responsible for all who are beneath 
 them; for with My light and power before 
 them, and doing in My name, they that are 
 beneath them will hold them, not only on 
 the earth, but in heaven, for their labors 
 and words. 
 
 The Voice departed, and then Cpenta- 
 armij spake in her own behalf, saying: 
 Once around the earth and heaven will I 
 now travel, seeing with mine own eyes 
 and hearing with mine own ears, even as is 
 commanded of me by the Father; that I 
 may know of mine own knowledge the 
 condition of mortals and of the spirits who 
 dwell both with them and in the lowest hea- 
 vens. He who is still your God shall abide 
 with you, and on this throne, until I re- 
 turn. 
 
 Cpenta-armij then descended and sat at 
 the foot of the throne, and Owks and Ha- 
 o-ha and See-wah-Gon with her, whereup- 
 on God went down and took her hand, say- 
 ing: Arise, O Goddess, and go thy way. 
 And then he raised up the other three in 
 the same way, and they saluted and stood 
 aside. Now, as soon as God raised them 
 up, the All Light settled upon him, and 
 he again ascended the throne and sat in the 
 midst. Then spake Cpenta-armij, saying 
 to God: . 
 
 Jehovih hath commanded the raising of 
 a voice in four divisions of the earth; what 
 is thy light, O God? God said: 
 
 In Jaffeth I have raised up a man named 
 Po, an I'huan of the I 'hin side, of grade 
 ninety-live. In Arabin'ya I have raised up 
 a man named Abram, an I'huan of the I'hin 
 side, of grade ninety-five. In Vind'yii I 
 have raised up a man named Brahma, an 
 I'huan of the I'hin side, of grade ninety- 
 nine. In Guatama I have raised up a man 
 named Eawahtah, an I'huan of the I'hin 
 side, of grade ninety-five. 
 
 The loo'is who have accomplished this 
 labor are still with their wards, but are ap- 
 prised of thy coming. Behold, I send with 
 thee messengers who will answer thy com- 
 mands. 
 
 Hereupon, Cpenta-armij, with her hosts, 
 departed, and entered on otevan which God 
 had had previously prepared for her; and 
 
 she took with her one million attendants, 
 going straight down to the earth. And 
 first of all to visit mortals and mortal king- 
 doms, kings and queens, temples and ora- 
 cles, and then to see Po and Abram and 
 Brahma and Eawahtah, all of whom were 
 sufficiently illumed to see her and to know 
 she was the Person of the All Voice. 
 
 Next after these she visited all the hea- 
 venly kingdoms belonging to the earth, go- 
 ing first to the heavenly kingdom belong- 
 ing to Japan; thence to Ah'oan, of Jaffeth; 
 thence to E'chad, and so on until she saw 
 them all. 
 
 After that Cpenta-armij returned to 
 Craoshivi, making a circuit sufficient to 
 examine all the plateaux below the belt me- 
 teoris.* 
 
 Now the whole time Cpenta-armij had 
 been gone was thirty and two days. Whilst 
 she had been absent, God extended the re- 
 ceiving grounds of Craoshivi twelve thou- 
 sand miles in breadth toward the south, 
 and founded sixty colonies. For even now 
 were, and would be, for the four years to 
 come, ships arriving daily with hundreds of 
 thousands of angels who were being pre- 
 pared for the degree of Brides and Bride- 
 grooms to Jehovih, ready for the third res- 
 urrection. 
 
 Messengers had arrived in Craoshivi 
 daily from Cpenta-armij, so that God knew 
 when she would return. And accordingly 
 he had prepared all things in readiness, 
 and she was received in the name of the 
 Father, in due ceremony. 
 
 And Cpenta-armij ascended the throne 
 of God and sat in the midst, and a light like 
 a sun settled around about her. Her com- 
 panions, Gods and Goddesses, now sat not 
 near her, though on the throne to the right 
 and left. Whilst they were taking their re- 
 spective places, the es'enaurs were chanting 
 anthems, and the awe and majesty of the 
 scene were magnified to the utmost. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 When the light fell full upon Cpenta- 
 armij, the Voice of Jehovih spake through 
 her, saying: 
 
 In thee whom I made God over 
 Earth and her heavens I am well pleased; 
 by My hand hast thou raised them up; 
 through thee have I maintained the Diva 
 even unto this day. 
 
280 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 Thou shalt have honor in My exalted 
 heavens because thou art the first in Spe-ta; 
 but thou shalt crown thy glory by descend- 
 ing to the earth and walking with mortals 
 for the term of four years, even with My 
 Son, Brahma. And when thy time is com- 
 pleted, I will come and deliver thee and 
 Brahma. 
 
 In My name shalt thou raise thy voice 
 and establish Me amongst men; and I will 
 be with thee in wisdom and power. Take 
 thy attendants and proceed to thy labor; in 
 whatsoever thou desirest of Me, call, and I 
 will answer, for I have messengers who 
 shall labor betwixt us. 
 
 God then saluted, and withdrew. Next 
 came Yima, and to him Jehovih spake, 
 saying: 
 
 Being one with God, thou shalt labor 
 even as he laboreth; and thou shalt descend 
 to the earth, even to My corporeal Son, Po, 
 who hath been prepared in My name, and 
 with him shalt thou walk the earth four 
 years. And thou shalt speak in My name, 
 establishing Me amongst mortals, to the 
 end that My chosen shall be delivered into 
 My kingdoms. For thou shalt lead them 
 away from the mortal kings, and teach 
 them to know Me as their only King. 
 
 Take, then, thy attendants and go to 
 thy labor, and at the end of four years I 
 will appoint a successor to thee, and I will 
 deliver thee into My etherean kingdoms. 
 
 Yima then saluted and stood aside. Next 
 came Vishnu, renowned for his labor in 
 Vind'yu and her heavens. To him Jehovih 
 said: 
 
 Being one with God, thou shalt with him 
 fulfill the completion of the Spe-ta in My 
 name. To which end thou shalt descend 
 to the corporeal earth, even Arabin'ya, and 
 dwell thereon for the period of four years, 
 with My corporeal Son, Abram. With 
 Abram shalt thou walk and sojourn day 
 and night, speaking and laboring in Me as 
 fully as My very Self. And thou shalt de- 
 liver My chosen away from the kings' peo- 
 ples, teaching them to have no king but 
 Me, their Creator. To Abram shalt thou 
 reveal My name, Jehovih, and establish it 
 in secret, with due rites and ceremonies. 
 And at the end of four years I will appoint 
 a successor to thee; and thee will I deliver 
 into My emancipated worlds. Take, then, 
 thy attendants and depart to thy labor, and 
 
 I will be with thee in wisdom and power. 
 Vishnu then saluted and stood aside. 
 
 Next came Os, sent by the etherean 
 regions of Haot-saiti to deliver the king- 
 doms of Japan and Heleste and their hea- 
 vens, but who was now relieved by the 
 Divan successor. To Os Jehovih spake, 
 saying: 
 
 In honor of thy volunteering in the 
 days of darkness for the relief of God and 
 his kingdoms, I now create thee God of the 
 first Spe-ta of the red star, and crown thee 
 with Mine Own hand. 
 
 And, lo and behold, even with these 
 spoken words, a light descended in the 
 form of a crown and settled upon his head. 
 Thereupon Jehovih said: In which I have 
 made thee a lawful Div with corporeal 
 power. 
 
 And thou shalt descend to the corporeal 
 earth, even to Guatama, and walk with My 
 Son Eawahtah, whom the loo'is have pre- 
 pared for My Voice, for the term of four 
 years, sojourning with him day and night, 
 gathering together the remnants of My lost 
 tribes, and establishing them in faith of the 
 Great Spirit, in the name, Egoquim, suita- 
 ble to the language I have created for 
 them. 
 
 And at the end of four years I will ap- 
 point a successor to thee; and thee I will 
 restore into My etherean worlds. Take, 
 then, thy attendants and depart to thy labor, 
 and I will be with thee in wisdom and 
 power. 
 
 Then Os saluted and stood aside, and 
 the Voice departed; then Cpenta-armij, on 
 her own account, said: This hour, even 
 now, I dissolve the Diva with honor and 
 glory unto them. The kingdoms ye ruled 
 over shall be my kingdoms during dawn; 
 in the Father's name I assume them and 
 their affairs. Peace and love and wisdom 
 and power be with you all, amen. 
 
 The four inspiring Gods then departed, 
 and in the outer circuit of Craoshivi they 
 had in waiting, which their attendants had 
 prepared beforehand, each one an otevan 
 fully equipped and ready, into which they 
 embarked, with their attendants, fifty thou- 
 sand each. The musicians then saluted 
 them, even as they moved off, severally, in 
 direct lines for the earth. 
 
 Cpenta-armij then lowered the light a 
 little, and her three visiting companions, 
 Owks, Ha-o-ha and See-wah-Gon, sat near 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 281 
 
 her on the throne, even before her etherean 
 Council, five hundred million. 
 
 Cpenta-armij said: I have visited the 
 earth and her heavens, even her heavens on 
 her very surface. By the power vested in 
 me, I release from duty all Lords and Gods, 
 and sub-Gods, and sub-Lords, on the earth 
 and in the heavens of the earth. This my 
 messengers will communicate to them, 
 commanding them, in my love and wis- 
 dom, which are one with the Father, to 
 come at once to Craoshivi, that I may hon- 
 or them and apportion them for the third 
 resurrection, which will occur in four 
 years. • 
 
 To the Lord-dom, Maitraias, founded 
 by Vishnu, I appoint and allot Yugsaesu 
 Lord, with thirty million of my etherean 
 hosts, to be chosen by himself. Let Yugsa- 
 esu come before me! Yugsaesu then came 
 before Jehovih's throne, and Cpenta-armij 
 said unto him: Repair thou unto Maitrai- 
 as, taking thy hosts with thee. And when 
 thou art come to the place, possess it in Je- 
 hovih's name, and order it after the manner 
 of a Lord-dom, providing sub-kingdoms 
 unto thy place as may be required. 
 
 And thou shalt have dominion over all 
 angels that are already with the plateau 
 of Maitraias, or such as may be hereafter 
 sent to thee from the other heavenly divi- 
 sions and from the earth. And thou shalt 
 provide thy kingdom unto the service of 
 the Father, chiefly to prevent angels return- 
 ing to the earth to obsess and pollute mor- 
 tals. For thou shalt find hundreds of mill- 
 ions of them who> have no aspiration but 
 destruction. Many of them were slain in 
 wars on the earth, and are still seeking 
 vengeance, and if escaping to the earth, 
 obsess mortals to burn cities, and to mur- 
 der, and to all manner of wickedness. 
 
 Thy labor, O Lord, is not to reform 
 them or teach them, for I shall appoint and 
 allot others to that end; but thou shalt la- 
 bor wholly and entirely to prevent the re- 
 turn of Maitraisans to mortals. And that 
 thou shalt be strong before them, thou 
 canst draw from all other heavenly king- 
 doms, which I shall found, a sufficient 
 guard to enforce my commandments. 
 
 For four years shalt thou labor in this 
 matter, and thou shalt also raise up one 
 with thy Lord-dom, to be thy successor af- 
 ter thee. Take, then, thy hosts and go to 
 
 thy labors, and the Father will be with thee 
 in wisdom and power. 
 
 Yugsaesu then made his selections from 
 Cpenta-armij's hosts, and they came and 
 passed before Jehovih's throne, saluting, 
 and then withdrew and went into a ship 
 which had, likewise, been prepared for them 
 by the proper persons; and, having saluted 
 with music, they departed, Yugsaesu and 
 his hosts, rejoicing. 
 
 Again Cpenta-armij spake, saying: Be- 
 hold, the time is now come upon the earth 
 when I will divide and allot unto each of its 
 several great divisions heavenly kingdoms 
 accordingly. 
 
 To Japan, because she is a remnant of 
 the submerged continent, I establish a hea- 
 venly kingdom, and it shall be called Suasu. 
 
 To Jaffeth, because she has preserved 
 much of the first language, I establish a 
 heavenly kingdom, and it shall be called 
 Hi-jee-tse. 
 
 To Vind'yti, because she is the most ad- 
 vanced in holiness of all the earth, I estab- 
 lish a heavenly kingdom, and it shall be 
 called Vri-mij. 
 
 To Arabin'ya, because she is the foun- 
 dation of Jehovih's migratory hosts who 
 shall go forth around the earth, I establish 
 a heavenly kingdom, and it shall be called 
 Paradise. 
 
 To Heleste, because she was rescued 
 from darkness by Os in time to meet this 
 arc, I establish a heavenly kingdom, and it 
 shall be called Spe-ta. 
 
 To Uropa, because she was first founded 
 by a woman, I establish a heavenly king- 
 dom, and it shall be called Himmel. 
 
 To South Guatama, because she is the 
 least inhabited of all the great divisions of 
 the earth, I establish a heavenly kingdom, 
 and it shall be called Ahden. 
 
 To North Guatama, because she is the 
 ground on which the circumscribing of the 
 earth by the different nations shall take 
 place, where the revelations of heaven and 
 earth shall be made to man, I establish a 
 heavenly kingdom, and it shall be called 
 Kosmon. 
 
 To all the South Islands, I establish a 
 heavenly kingdom, and it shall be called 
 Flue. 
 
 To all the North Islands, I establish a 
 heavenly kingdom, and it shall be called 
 Sin-Yot. 
 
282 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 Hereupon the light of Jehovih over- 
 spread Cpenta-armij, and His voice spake 
 through her, saying: To My ten heavenly 
 kingdoms which I have made through My 
 Daughter, behold, I choose ten Lords, and 
 My ten Lords shall go to the kingdoms I 
 apportion unto them. In My name shall 
 My Lords build unto Me ten heavenly 
 places of delight, for the spirits of the dead 
 that rise up from the earth. 
 
 And My Lords shall establish in My 
 kingdoms places of learning and places of 
 labor; places for the sick and helpless an- 
 gels that rise up from the earth, that My 
 Lords shall raise them up, to know Me and 
 the glory of the worlds I have created for 
 them; inspiring them to perfect themselves 
 in wisdom and purity and power, that they 
 may arise and inherit My etherean heavens. 
 
 And My Lords shall appoint ashars unto 
 mortals at the time of their corporeal birth; 
 and the said ashars shall be appointed in 
 watch and watch, that they may relieve one 
 another, having a time of labor and a time 
 of rest. And My Lords shall so appoint 
 My ashars that each and every ashar shall 
 have a hundred changes of labor with a 
 hundred different mortals, in order to learn 
 all the varieties of men and women I have 
 created. And the number of ashars shall 
 be equal to the number of mortals dwelling 
 on the earth. 
 
 And My Lords shall appoint asaphs to 
 reside in heaven, sufficient in number to re- 
 ceive the spirits of all who die on the earth, 
 which they shall receive from the ashars in 
 My name. And the asaphs shall take such 
 angels, thus received, and place them in the 
 regions My Lords shall have prepared for 
 them, where there shall be sufficient teach- 
 ers and nurses and physicians in My hea- 
 venly places to administer unto them. 
 
 And My Lords shall provide discipline 
 to the spirits thus received, who shall be 
 trained according to the Divan law which I 
 established through My Gods, which shall 
 extend beyond the es'yan even to the thir- 
 tieth grade. 
 
 And My Lords shall provide for them 
 that have attained to the thirtieth grade to 
 be sent in suitable ships to this place, Crao- 
 shivi, and deliver them to My Daughter, 
 Cpenta-armij, and to her successor, God or 
 Goddess, who shall have dominion over the 
 whole earth and her heavens. 
 
 For behold, it is the nature of man on 
 the earth to go after earthly things instead 
 of heavenly; and it is the nature of the 
 es'yan to strive for the earth instead of My 
 higher heavens. Be ye guarded, therefore, 
 to lay a foundation to prevent angels and 
 mortals from going downward; to provide 
 inspiration to make them desire to ascend 
 to My holy regions. 
 
 The Voice now departed, and Cpenta- 
 armij spake of her own account in Jeho- 
 vih's name, saying: 
 
 Whomsoever I call, let them come be- 
 fore Jehovih's throne, for they shall be the 
 Lords whom I shall anoint for the heavenly 
 kingdoms I have established: 
 
 Le-tzoo, Lord of Suasu, a heavenly 
 place over Japan. 
 
 Oe-wah, Lord of Hi-jee-tse, a heavenly 
 place over Jaffeth. 
 
 Loo-gam, Lord of Vri-mij, a heavenly 
 place over Vind'yu. 
 
 Ha-kappa, Lord of Paradise, a heavenly 
 place over Arabin'ya. 
 
 Jes-Sie, Lordess of Spe-ta, a heavenly 
 place over Heleste. 
 
 Yo-han, Lord of Himmel, a heavenly 
 place over Uropa. 
 
 Hinot-tse, Lordess of Ahden, a heavenly 
 place over South Guatama. 
 
 Ami, Lordess of Kosmon, a heavenly 
 place over North Guatama. 
 
 Horam, Lord of Flue, a heavenly 
 place over the Southern Islands. 
 
 Puetse, Lordess of Sin-Yot, a heavenly 
 place over the Northern Islands. 
 
 All the angels named came before 
 Cpenta-armij when called, and they now 
 stood abreast Jehovih's throne, whereupon 
 the All Light overspread the place, and the 
 Father's Voice spake through Cpenta- 
 armij, saying: 
 
 Ye are My Lords and Lordesses, by Me 
 raised up and allotted your places. For 
 four years shall ye labor, even to the end of 
 this dawn; and ye shall provide successors 
 to take your places after you. And herein 
 lies your greatest glory and Mine. For 
 they that succeed you shall hold dominion 
 two hundred years. And they in turn shall 
 provide successors after them, and so on, 
 for these successions shall continue till the 
 arc of Bon. 
 
 With Mine own hand weave I crowns, 
 and crown you severally for My kingdoms! 
 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ABMIJ 
 
 283 
 
 When these words were spoken, the 
 now fast gathering light, of a variety of col- 
 ors, took the shape of ten separate crowns, 
 and descended on the heads of the Lords 
 and Lordesses. The Voice ceased, but 
 Cpenta-armij spake on her own account, in 
 Jehovih's name, saying: 
 
 My Lords and Lordesses, go to your 
 labors in the love, wisdom and power of 
 the Father, and He will be with you; and 
 ye shall be a glory in His kingdoms. 
 Choose ye, therefore, each and every one 
 ten million of my hosts, who shall go with 
 you to your places, to be afterward ex- 
 changed or divided, as I may direct. That 
 ye may choose in order, he who was first 
 appointed shall choose first; the second 
 next, and so on until ye have all chosen. 
 
 All these Lords and Lordesses were of 
 the Higher Light, and knew beforehand, 
 and had in like manner already chosen 
 their attendants, so that at a given signal 
 the multitudes thus chosen rose up and 
 came before the throne, forming ten groups 
 of ten million each. And they at once 
 formed in line and passed before Jehovih's 
 throne, saluting in the sign, Birth of Spe-ta 
 on the earth, and Cpenta-armij answered in 
 the sign, Jehovih and the lower heavens. 
 
 Cpenta-armij said: For the glory of this 
 scene,. I bequeath a day of rest, that my 
 hosts may witness the departure of the 
 fleets of Jehovih's Lords and Lordesses. 
 At once the hosts joined in a mighty chorus 
 of thanksgiving and praise; and they went 
 without and saw the ships laden with the 
 joyous crews; saw them set their great fleet 
 in motion; sang and shouted to them in Je- 
 hovihs' love, for the glory of His high hea- 
 vens. 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 In the beginning of the second year of 
 Cpenta-armij in Craoshivi, messengers 
 came before Jehovih's throne, saluting, and 
 greeting from Ctusk, who now lived under 
 the name, Ahura, and submitted the follow- 
 ing communication, to-wit: 
 
 Ctusk, who hath become Ahura, a ser- 
 vant of Jehovih, and is now God of Ailkin 
 by just judgment of Jehovih, desireth audi- 
 ence with the Most High-Raised Cpenta- 
 armij, Daughter of the Great Spirit. 
 
 To this Cpenta-armij answered: Greet- 
 ing, in love to my brother Ahura. By the 
 
 Grace and Power of Jehovih, come and see 
 me, bringing thy attendants. Now, after 
 the lapse of a few days, Ahura came to 
 Craoshivi, attended by one million, escort- 
 ed by music, and proclaimed according to 
 the discipline of the higher heavens, with 
 heralds and trumpeters. And Cpenta- 
 armij 's hosts received Ahura and conduct- 
 ed him and his hosts within the capital 
 chamber; and Ahura went before Jehovih's 
 throne, saluting on the sign, Second pla- 
 teau, and Cpenta-armij answered in Nirvan- 
 ian Road, Salkwatka.. She said: 
 
 In the name of the Great Spirit, Whose 
 Daughter I am, I welcome thee in love 
 and high esteem. I know all thy past rec- 
 ord, and look upon thee as the founda- 
 tion of one of Jehovih's brightest suns. 
 Long have I desired that thou shouldst pe- 
 tition to come, to see me, and greet thee 
 in the Father's name. 
 
 Ahura said: O thou Most High Chief- 
 tainess, of hundreds of thousands of years, 
 how can I stand before thee? I know thou 
 hast seen many truants in thy day, and 
 watched their course thousands of years. 
 Thou canst see before me all that awaiteth 
 me and mine; the past and the future are 
 as an open book before thee. That I have 
 stood before thee and looked upon thee, I 
 am blessed above all things since the day of 
 my birth. 
 
 Behold, the hand of the Great Spirit 
 hath appeared before me; I comprehend the 
 only road that leadeth on to everlasting 
 resurrections; I know that the One All Per- 
 son must ever stand as the key-note for 
 angels and mortals. Without Him, a man 
 is as a ship without a rudder; the seas 
 around about him drive him to ruin in the 
 end. Blessed is he who hath had the ex- 
 perience of this in an early day of his life. 
 Nervous and full of fear is he who hath 
 been tried two thousand years ! 
 
 Then spake Cpenta-armij, saying: I per- 
 ceive thy desires, O Ahura! I understand 
 why thou art before me. Thy wisdom is 
 great indeed. Thou perceivest that thy pla- 
 teau is in the second removal from the 
 earth. Thou fearest that some of thy hosts 
 will forsake Jehovih, and usurp kingdoms 
 of their own, even as thou didst in time 
 past. Thou desirest me to raise thy plateau 
 farther away from the corporeal earth. 
 
284 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 Ahura said: If it be Jehovih's will, even 
 for this purpose am I come before thee! 
 
 Now came a great light, bright, like a 
 sun, and settled over the throne, envelop- 
 ing the Goddess, Cpenta-armij, and Jeho- 
 vih's Voice spake out of the light to Ahura, 
 saying: 
 
 My Son, My Son, why hast thou so lit- 
 tle faith! Behold, I am with thee even as 
 with this, My Daughter. All thou lackest 
 is faith. Go thou back to thy plateau and 
 raise thou it thyself. My Daughter shall 
 come to thee, and show thee, and thou shalt 
 not fail. To have faith in Me is to be one 
 with Me; to lack faith in Me is to be far 
 removed from Me. 
 
 Ahura said: O Jehovih, teach Thou me 
 how to begin to have faith. To find the 
 beginning, there is my stumbling block! 
 
 Jehovih said: By trying Me, there is the 
 beginning. By learning to know thine own 
 power in Me; and to know My power in 
 thee; that is the sum of all power and wis- 
 dom. By the lack of faith in Me, man set- 
 teth up himself; by the lack of faith in Me, 
 the self-assuming Gods built kingdoms for 
 themselves. 
 
 The failure of man is proof of My pow- 
 er; the failure of all kingdoms is proof of 
 the lack of faith in Me, whereby My power 
 is manifested over them. First, after the 
 abjuring of self, cometh the constant mani- 
 festation of power through faith, the exam- 
 ple of which holdeth the multitude to Me 
 and My works. 
 
 Inasmuch as thou hast suffered fear in 
 thy soul for a relapse in thy kingdom, thou 
 hast opened the door for disaster. Have I 
 not proved this on earth? — wherein the 
 faith of a captain leadeth his soldiers on to 
 victory, and his lack of faith breaketh them 
 down in weakness. Think not, O Ahura, 
 that My examples are less with My Gods. 
 
 If, therefore, My Daughter should come 
 to thy kingdom and raise it up, behold, she 
 would lessen thy hosts' faith in thee. For 
 which reason thou shalt return to Ailkin, 
 and proclaim to thy people that thou wilt 
 raise thy plateau. And though millions of 
 them will consider it a vanity, and beyond 
 thy power, behold, I will provide unto thee 
 that thou shalt not fail. 
 
 Ahura said: I perceive Thy Wisdom, O 
 Jehovih! That which Thou hast put upon 
 me, I know I shall accomplish through 
 
 Thee. The Voice departed, and Cpenta- 
 armij spake on her own account, saying: 
 Thou shalt proclaim a day for this great 
 work; and thou shalt send invitations to me 
 and my hosts, and to my Gods and Lords, 
 Goddesses and Lordesses. Send thou, 
 therefore, thy surveyors and inspectors, 
 and determine whither thou wouldst raise 
 thy plateau, and thou shalt be provided 
 from my hosts whatever assistance thou 
 mayest need. 
 
 Ahura then saluted, and he and his 
 hosts departed without the capital chamber, 
 where they rested awhile in recreation with 
 the etherean hosts, and then they entered 
 their ship and departed, and returned to 
 Ailkin. After which Ahura appointed the 
 day for the resurrection, and sent messen- 
 gers throughout atmospherea, proclaiming 
 what he would do, inviting Gods and 
 Lords, with their attendants, to come and 
 spend the day with him. 
 
 Jehovih spake to Cpenta-armij, saying: 
 Send thou thy mathematicians to estimate 
 the grade of Ahura's plateau; and send thy 
 surveyors to the place he hath chosen, that 
 thy hosts may know the power required; 
 and provide thou from thine own hosts, 
 privily, suitable stationers that Ahura shall 
 not fail. For, in time to come, Ahura shall 
 be one of My greatest Gods. 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 Ahura, immediately on his return to his 
 kingdom, set about accomplishing this 
 great labor. 
 
 Now there were with Ahura many who 
 had been sub-Gods and captains and gen- 
 erals under him whilst he was in rebellion 
 against Jehovih and His kingdoms; and 
 when they heard of the proclamation they 
 said within their souls: What, is it possible 
 Ahura is at his old games? For they knew 
 not his concert with the kingdoms above, 
 and so believed not in his power. 
 
 Jehovih moved upon Ahura, and in- 
 duced him to send numerators and graders 
 throughout his kingdom, to take the meas- 
 ure of those who had faith, and of those 
 who had no faith; and of those who had 
 neither faith nor doubt. And these 
 Ahura graded and numbered, so when the 
 time came he should know where to place 
 them. Then he numbered the unlearned 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 285 
 
 and dumb; and then the enthusiastic; and 
 he graded them and arranged them also. 
 
 When he had this much accomplished, 
 there came to him one Anuhasaj, a former 
 sub-God, and he said to Ahura, privily: I 
 love thee, Ahura, and for that reason come 
 before thee. Thou shalt meet only failure 
 and disaster in thy undertaking. How 
 many times, in thy mighty kingdom of 
 Ctusk, didst the All High fail to come to 
 thee? 
 
 Ahura said: Because of thy love I re- 
 joice in thee; but because of thy lack of 
 faith I deplore thee. How long will it be 
 before angels and mortals understand the 
 Father and His kingdoms? Behold, in the 
 days of Ctusk I labored not for Jehovih, 
 but for myself and my exaltation, and for 
 the exaltation of my kingdom for mine own 
 ends. Hence the All High came not to an- 
 swer my prayers. Now, in this matter, I 
 am doing that which is not for me, nor for 
 my kingdom for mine own sake, but for 
 the Father's sake only. And I know He 
 will not fail me. 
 
 Anuhasaj said: Hath it not been from 
 the time of the ancients till now, that cer- 
 tain ones say that by prayer and faith all 
 things are possible, assuring us, moreover, 
 that by such are all things accomplished on 
 earth and in heaven? And yet, who hath 
 not witnessed more failure than success? 
 I do not desire to discourage thee, O Ahu- 
 ra, but I know so well the lack of faith on 
 the part of all men, and that to get one's 
 self weaned away from self is the weakest 
 talent in the soul. And, for which reason, 
 too, it is ultimately the greatest glory. But 
 this would seem to me expedient: To have 
 Cpenta-armij and her hosts do this resur- 
 rection for thee. 
 
 Ahura said: Even thine every thought 
 have I already fulfilled. And through the 
 Chieftainess came the Father's Voice, com- 
 manding me to do this resurrection on 
 mine own account. 
 
 To this Anuhasaj made no reply, but in 
 his soul he was not free from the tetracts, 
 being jealous that Ahura had advanced him 
 in obtaining the Father's commands. But 
 Ahura perceived it not, and he said unto 
 Anuhasaj : The hosts of Ailkin have been 
 numbered, and there are four thousand five 
 hundred million. And within the grades 
 above es'yan there are one hundred and 
 
 seventy thousand schools, two hundred and 
 thirty thousand colleges, four hundred 
 thousand factories, and two hundred thou- 
 sand hospitals. 
 
 Behold, on the day of resurrection I 
 shall have the Han-od-wotcha recreation 
 for my hosts. Let this, then, be thy labor, 
 to have the matter proclaimed throughout 
 Ailkin. Anuhasaj said: By Jehovih's leave 
 and thine, I am satisfied. 
 
 Thus ended the matter, and Ahura re- 
 membered, afterward, that Anuhasaj had 
 not answered positive acceptance, and so 
 x\hura feared, and, to make doubly sure, 
 called Evasan, and committed the same 
 charge to him. 
 
 Now when the time came, Anuhasaj 
 fulfilled not his part, but Evasan did; and 
 Evasan, moreover, came to Ahura, bring- 
 ing answers from all the departments. 
 
 In the morning of the day of the resur- 
 rection, Ahura sent for Anuhasaj and in- 
 quired concerning the matter. Anuhasaj 
 said: Nay. I issued not thy proclamation 
 nor thy invitation; for I reasoned on the 
 matter, saying to myself: If the resurrection 
 be a failure, then would it indeed be better 
 that the ignorant know not of it. 
 
 Ahura said: To do well one's part, is 
 this not the highest? Anuhasaj said: It 
 is the highest. Even so have I done that 
 which seemed the highest in mine own 
 sight. 
 
 Ahura said: The resurrection was not 
 for thee nor for me, but for the hosts. 
 For thou hadst previously admitted that the 
 resurrection of this plateau was the high- 
 est, best thing to be done. Because it 
 seemed impracticable in thy sight, thou 
 were not justified in withholding thy hand. 
 Thou shouldst have striven to accomplish 
 that which was for the universal good, not 
 even whispering thy distrust to any one. 
 Then, had it failed, thine own soul had been 
 clear. For which reason Jehovih came to 
 me, and I was admonished to depute Ev- 
 asan in thy stead, and he hath fulfilled my 
 commands. 
 
 Anuhasaj made no reply, but went 
 away in displeasure, and for the present 
 the matter was dismissed. 
 
 Ahura had sent invitations to the Lords 
 of all the divisions of the earth, asking 
 them to come, bringing their attendants 
 
286 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 with them. Of these the following came, 
 to wit: Oe-wah, Lord of Hi-jee-tse; Ha- 
 Kappa, Lord of Paradise; Loo-gam, Lord 
 of Vri-mij; Jes-Sie, Lordess of Spe-ta; 
 Ami, Lordess of Kosmon; Horam, Lord 
 of Flue; and Puetse, Lordess of Sin-Yot, 
 each bringing one million attendants, be- 
 sides hundreds of thousands of visitors of 
 lower grade. 
 
 Cpenta-armij, with her visitors, Owks, 
 and See-wah-Gon, and Ha-o-ha, and five 
 million attendants, and five and thirty mill- 
 ion visitors, from Craoshivi, came in an 
 avalanza made for the purpose. 
 
 The place of removal which Ahura had 
 decided to inherit was in the second belt 
 below meteoris, known in atmospherea at 
 that time as Vara-pishanaha, which laid 
 above the land of Vind'yii, a heavenly 
 place, uninhabited. From Ailkin to Vara- 
 pishanaha was fourteen hours in grade 
 twenty-five, which was the average of 
 Ahura's hosts; but its enlargement in the 
 upper belt would be as fifteen to nine. 
 
 Cpenta-armij and her hosts were the 
 first to arrive in Ahura's dominion; for she 
 had determined that nothing should lead 
 to failure in Ahura's enterprise. Through 
 her advice Ahura stationed water-bearers 
 the entire distance of travel, lest, in the ex- 
 citement, the drujas might run into knots 
 or riot. For such is the nature of dark- 
 ness, both on earth and in the lower hea- 
 vens: the low delight to dwell in a city, or 
 near a place of filth, if companionable, 
 rather than go to a place of isolation where 
 improvement is possible. 
 
 Jehovih had said to Ahura: Suffer not 
 thy drujas to know thou wilt remove them 
 so far from the earth; confide thou only 
 with the wise in reference to thy destiny. 
 Cpenta-armij had said to Ahura: Provide 
 thy drujas a holiday in parade, with rites 
 and ceremonies. And Ahura perceived 
 how the matter had to be, and he appor- 
 tioned eighty million of his hosts to pro- 
 vide parades, rites and ceremonies for the 
 drujas of his hosts, and of these drujas, 
 ranking below grade five, there were one 
 thousand two hundred million, being such 
 angels as knew not the left hand from the 
 right, nor could remember to count five 
 from one day to the next. And yet the 
 next thousand million, rating below grade 
 
 twelve, knew so little more, they were 
 scarcely wiser than beasts in the field. 
 
 Cpenta-armij, seeing these, exclaimed: 
 O Jehovih, how long must Ahura labor 
 with these in order to raise them to grade 
 ninety-nine! O that they who set them- 
 selves up as Gods knew what lay before 
 them! O that leaders of men knew! O 
 that mortal kings and queens knew the 
 bondage that they lay down for themselves! 
 What a work in the lower heavens for 
 them before they can ascend! And yet, O 
 Jehovih, Thou art just. Some one must 
 labor with these unfortunates. It is well 
 that man aspireth to be king, and Lord and 
 God. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 When they were assembled for the resur- 
 rection of the thousands of millions, Cpen- 
 ta-armij went and stood at the right hand 
 of Ahura, and next to her stood Owks; and 
 on the left hand stood See-wah-Gon and 
 Ha-o-ha, and the Voice of Jehovih fell 
 upon Ahura, saying: Extend My lines to 
 the four corners of the world; give into 
 Mv labor the highest grades. 
 
 Acco- dingly, the marshals drew the line 
 on the plateau, and the hosts of etherea 
 stood equally toward every corner, arrang- 
 ed in phalanxes of ten million, each having 
 the form of a quarter of a circle; leaving the 
 lines of power from center to circumfer- 
 ence, and the distance thereof was equal to 
 the width of Vind'yu on the corporeal 
 earth. And the centre of the plateau was 
 high raised, so that Ahura stood on the 
 highest place, which laid near the Capital 
 of the Council. 
 
 Now it so happened that the jealous 
 Anuhasaj stood twelfth on the east line, 
 being the thirteenth from Ahura's left hand. 
 Cpenta-armij said to Ahura: Behold, the 
 line is shattered. Ahura said: I feel no- 
 thing; how sayest thou, The line is shat- 
 tered? She answered him, saying: He who 
 doeth Jehovih's work must deal as Jehovih 
 dealeth. Only those who are in concert 
 with thee must labor with thee. Otherwise 
 thy best endeavors will be thwarted. Ahu- 
 ra said: 
 
 O thou far-perceiving Goddess! In my 
 much love and sympathy I admitted Anu- 
 hasaj to the lines. He hath been my best 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 287 
 
 friend. Cpenta-armij said: Thou shalt 
 know but One Friend, Jehovih. 
 
 Ahura perceived, and he now felt the 
 shattered place, and he sent his chief mar- 
 shal to Anuhasaj to bring him from the 
 rank. And when Anuhasaj was before 
 Ahura, the latter said unto him: Because 
 thou servest thyself, thou shalt stand not in 
 line; behold, there is but One to serve, 
 even Jehovih. Anuhasaj said: A joy upon 
 thee and thy scheme. Because thou art 
 powerless, thou hast singled me out as an 
 excuse before these Gods and Goddesses! 
 
 Ahura made no answer, but spake be- 
 fore Jehovih, saying: Give me strength for 
 Thy Children's sake, O Father! Behold, I 
 have cut loose the foundations of Ailkin; 
 with high-extending cords I have bound 
 her to Vara-pishanaha. By virtue of Thy 
 power in me I will raise her up. In Thy 
 name, let my hosts in will command: 
 Arise! Upward! Onward! O Ailkin! 
 Arise! upward! onward! O Ailkin! Arise! 
 upward! onward! O Ailkin! 
 
 With the third enunciation, which came 
 from the thousands of millions in concert, 
 behold, the plateau moved from her found- 
 ation; turned a little, then slowly, upward 
 arose. Loud shouted all the inhabitants of 
 that heaven; with their own universal will 
 the Great Spirit stretched forth His hand 
 and raised up the heavenly continent. 
 Even as with His hand He toucheth a cor- 
 poreal continent and sendeth it beneath the 
 ocean, so raiseth He His heavenly places 
 toward His emancipated worlds. Yea, be- 
 cause of His Spirit upon His people they 
 desire it risen; with them and Him, All is 
 One. 
 
 And now, the Gods, with unbroken will, 
 held their places as it were a day for the 
 corporeal earth, and not a God or Goddess 
 from the single purpose in thought strayed 
 a moment of time and no distracting 
 thought intervening; for such is the will 
 and mastery of Gods over their own 
 thoughts. Even then, to keep up the con- 
 certed force joyously, those who had the 
 drujas in charge set the games and tourna- 
 ments going, with racing and music, such 
 as should leave not one idle moment for all 
 the hosts of Ailkin, nearly five thousand 
 million. 
 
 Upward and onward rose the great pla- 
 teau, making straight course for Vara-pish- 
 
 anaha. Ahura stood in the eyes of the un- 
 learned populace as the greatest and most 
 masterly of all the Gods. One alone, even 
 Anuhasaj, stood awhile transfixed with dis- 
 appointment and chagrin, even hoping 
 some mishap to Jehovih's proceedings. 
 And, finally, he went wandering about, sore 
 and out of sorts with all righteousness. 
 
 Thus was raised the heavenly place, and 
 no longer called Ailkin, but Vara-pishana- 
 ha, home of Ahura and his hosts. And 
 now, when they were securely established 
 in the place, and the Gods and Goddesses 
 broke from line, they all came greeting to 
 Ahura. And, even in the same moment of 
 time, a messenger came from God, who 
 was with Brahma on the corporeal earth, 
 bringing to Cpenta-armij the following 
 commandment, to-wit: 
 
 In Jehovih's name, give thou a throne 
 and crown to Ahura for me, and in my 
 name. I promised him thus! 
 
 The light came upon Cpenta-armij, and 
 Jehovih spake through her, saying: Behold 
 the work of My hand, O Ahura, My Son! 
 In the substance of heaven fashion I thee a 
 throne and high-raised capital. And with 
 Mine own hands weave thee a crown. 
 From this time forth thou shalt be My 
 God, and I will abide with me. 
 
 Whilst the words were being spoken, 
 the throne rose up before Cpenta-armij's 
 hand, and a high-raised capital came and 
 stood over and about the throne. And 
 there descended from the heavens above 
 bows of light and color, which in Cpenta- 
 armij's fingers were shaped and woven into 
 a crown, which alighted on Ahura's head. 
 And there went up from the hosts a uni- 
 versal shout of praise and thanksgiving. 
 Then broke in the trumpeters, seven mill- 
 ion, and after they played a while, the 
 es'enaurs chanted, The Concerted Hosts of 
 Jehovih! 
 
 Thus was founded Jehovih's heavenly 
 kingdom, Vara-pishanaha; thus established 
 Ahura his dominions where rebellion and 
 secession were cut off forever. And Cpenta- 
 armij gave to Ahura a thousand messen- 
 gers, and opened a roadway to Craoshivi. 
 Ahura ascended his throne, and the Gods 
 and Goddesses saluted him, God of Vara- 
 pishanaha, and they and their attendants 
 departed to their several places. 
 
288 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 In the third year of dawn Jehovih 
 spake to Cpenta-armij, saying: Gather to- 
 gether the officers of thy traveling hosts, 
 and take with thee thy companions, and go 
 and visit all the Lords and Lordesses of 
 the earth, of thy appointing. And let thy 
 recorders make their accounts of the af- 
 fairs of the earth and her heavenly king- 
 doms, that they may be taken to, and en- 
 tered in, the libraries of the Nirvanian 
 kingdoms. 
 
 Also thou shalt set thy collectors of 
 Brides and Bridegrooms to work in Crao- 
 shivi; and give to thy collectors otevans, 
 that they may also visit thy Lords' king- 
 doms and collect all the angels prepared 
 for the next resurrection, and bring them 
 to Craoshivi, where they shall be classified. 
 For in the coming resurrection thou shalt 
 provide twelve avalanzas, and those who 
 are raised to the etherean heavens thou 
 shalt cause to be divided according to their 
 grade and rate, and have them delivered 
 into regions suitable to their advancement. 
 
 During the time prior to this, the 
 Lords had contributed largely to Craoshivi, 
 and already there were upward of twenty 
 thousand million angels capable of taking 
 the third resurrection. The departure of 
 Cpenta-armij on this visit was important, 
 for it involved the selection of the next suc- 
 ceeding God of earth and heaven, who 
 should sit on the throne during her ab- 
 sence. At this time, the reigning God was 
 with Brahma on earth. To him Cpenta-ar- 
 mij sent messengers, acquainting him with 
 the commandments of Jehovih. 
 
 God answered through his messengers, 
 saying: Greeting, in the name of Jehovih, 
 to Cpenta-armij, His Daughter, Chieftain- 
 ess! The reigning God deputeth thee, O 
 Goddess, to make the selection in his 
 stead, to be crowned at the termination of 
 dawn. And now, accordingly, Cpenta- 
 armij sent forth her examiners, to search 
 after the highest, best, most learned of all 
 that had been raised up of the earth, capa- 
 ble of the God-head. For sixty days her 
 examiners were at work, and on the sixti- 
 eth day, in the evening, they had completed 
 the search. And it fell upon Thale of Pe- 
 ola, of corporeal birth, five thousand years. 
 
 Thale, a tiller of the soil in corpor, born 
 in spirit in Yueson, ninety years; five years 
 
 in es'yan; thirty years in factories; in the. 
 nurseries, ninety years; in the colleges, one 
 hundred and eighty years; projector, sev- 
 enty years; surveyor, sixty-five years; 
 measurer, two hundred years; entered an 
 etherean airavagna, and traveled seven hun- 
 dred years; returned to the lower heavens 
 of the earth and was Lord in six succes- 
 sions for each of the chief earth divisions 
 twelve hundred years; was called by Ona- 
 vissa, Goddess of Ni-yi-ag-ag-ha to clear 
 the roads of Chenshaya, beyond Chinvat, 
 where he labored six hundred years. Re- 
 turned again to earth and her heavens, and 
 served as captain and general four hundred 
 years; served as marshal seven hundred 
 years, under four different Gods and 
 Lords; and the balance of the time traveled 
 as messenger and swift messenger. Of the 
 rates in a thousand, he was nine hundred 
 and ninety-nine. And he knew the whole 
 Earth and her capabilities; could read a 
 thousand million voices at the same time, 
 and interpret them and answer them, and 
 had even created plateaux. He knew the 
 atmospherean heavens, habitable and unin- 
 habitable; the roadways; the oceans and 
 nebulous regions; knew the ascending and 
 descending ethe; knew the power in the 
 different rings of Earth's vortex; knew 
 the c-vork-um, and its times and places. 
 
 Cpenta-armij sent a delegation of one 
 million angels to wait on Thale and bring 
 him before the throne at Craoshivi, send- 
 ing them in her private otevan, and under 
 the guardianship of her chief marshal, with 
 this commandment: 
 
 Thale, of Peola, greeting to thee, in the 
 name of Jehovih, Who commandeth thy 
 immediate presence at the throne in Crao- 
 shivi. Of all the honored in these hea- 
 vens, thou standest first on the list, and art 
 appointed by our Father the next succeed- 
 ing God, through His Daughter, Chieftain- 
 ess of Haot-saiti. In my stead thou shalt 
 sit on the throne whilst I complete my 
 labor in dawn; after which thou shalt be 
 crowned, of Earth and her heavens, Je- 
 hovih's God! 
 
 Cpenta-armij knew Thale, for he had 
 sojourned in Otaias, in etherea, three hun- 
 dred years, where she had been Surveyor 
 ten thousand years. So when he came 
 before Jehovih's throne, Cpenta-armij was 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 289 
 
 rejoiced to meet him in person; neverthe- 
 less, she first saluted in rank, saying: 
 
 My brother, welcome in the Father's 
 name, and joy be unto thee. Jehovih hath 
 called thee to this throne; thou shalt be 
 one of the pillars of His everlasting- tem- 
 ples. What I put upon thee in the Father's 
 name, thou shalt consider from Him. 
 
 Thale said: Before Thee, O Jehovih, I 
 bow to Thy decrees, which come through 
 Thy High-Raised Daughter, Chieftainess 
 of Haot-saiti. I accept whatsoever is given 
 me to do, that will raise up man to rejoice 
 in his creation. By virtue of Thy power 
 in me, O Jehovih, I know I shall not fail. 
 May Thy Light be upon me! 
 
 Cpenta-armij now raised the light to 
 the highest atmospherean grade, and said 
 unto Thale: Approach Jehovih's throne, O 
 my brother, and hold up thy hands to- 
 ward Hign Noon, as the symbol of the 
 highest light, for as the sun is to Earth 
 and atmospherea, so is Jehovih to the soul 
 of man and to the etherean worlds. 
 
 Thale stepped to the foot of the throne, 
 and the marshal stood beside him. The 
 whole Council were seated, and sweet mu- 
 sic rose from the es'enaurs, and added to 
 the solemn scene. Thale then faced the 
 place of High Noon in the temple and held 
 up his hands, saying: I am in Thy service, 
 O Jehovih! 
 
 Jehovih spake out of the light over 
 Cpenta-armij 's head, saying: Thale, My 
 Son, thou art My God, and thou shalt 
 have dominion over Earth and her hea- 
 vens for two hundred years. Whatsoever 
 thou shalt do shalt be of Me. Thy word 
 shall be My word; thy labor My labor. 
 And thou shalt have Lords and kingdoms, 
 and all manner of heavenly places; and all 
 of them shall be My places through thee. 
 
 And at the expiration of thy service, 
 thou shalt raise up a successor to thee, 
 who shall be worthy of thee and Me. And 
 he shall have dominion for Me and in 
 My places; and likewise raise up a suc- 
 cessor to come after him, and so on until 
 the next dawn of dan. Be thou joyful in 
 dominion; My worlds are places of delight, 
 mirth, peace, love, righteousness, and good 
 works. 
 
 The Voice ceased, and then Cpenta-ar- 
 mij spake on her own account, saying: He 
 who will crown thee will come at the end 
 
 of dawn; till then thou shalt hold dominion 
 in the Red Hat. Approach the Judgment 
 Seat, my brother, and I will give to thee in 
 Jehovih's name. With that, Cpenta-armij 
 gathered from the colored rays of light a 
 substance light as ethe, and made a red 
 hat and put it on Thale's head. 
 
 Thale then sat down on the throne. 
 Thereupon Cpenta-armij said: Council of 
 Jehovih, hear my voice. A new God have 
 I raised up unto my labor. And thou, O 
 God, hear my voice. A new dominion 
 have I given into thy keeping. 
 
 For one year I shall now visit my Lords 
 and Lordesses in the first plateaux of 
 Earth, for it is a part of my labor for the 
 Father. And when I shall have finished 
 with them, I shall return to my present 
 reigning God of Earth, who is with 
 Brahma, and I will deliver him and Brah- 
 ma, and return again to this kingdom, 
 whence the etherean resurrection will take 
 place. 
 
 Provide ye accordingly in all things, 
 even as I would were I here; and number 
 the Brides and Bridegrooms one hundred 
 and sixty days in advance, and send swift 
 messengers to etherea, to the Nirvanian 
 fields and forests in Chan-us-hoag, and 
 thence through Salkwatka to Haot-saiti, in 
 the etherean fields of Abarom, finding six 
 regions, suitable for grades from sixty to 
 ninety. And ye shall send greeting to my 
 sister, Chue-in-ista, Goddess of Oambuyu, 
 asking her to deliver us. 
 
 Thus saying, Cpenta-armij, and Owks, 
 and See-wah-Gon, and Ha-o-ha took leave, 
 and in their own proper way departed out 
 of Craoshivi, and in the airavagna de- 
 scended to the lowest plateau, and so visit- 
 ed the Lords of the lower kingdoms. 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 The Lords and Lordesses gave not 
 much labor to Cpenta-armij; for they had 
 long been high-raised Gods and Goddesses 
 in other worlds, and knew their parts well. 
 But to each heavenly place Cpenta-armij 
 sent her heralds in advance, and the Lords 
 and Lordesses in turn sent receiving es- 
 corts to meet the airavagna. And when 
 the Chieftainess arrived, she was asked in 
 the usual manner to honor the throne, and 
 she thus sat on all the thrones, ruling in 
 person, and in her presence the Voice 
 
290 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ABMIJ 
 
 of Jehovih spake in the Light before the 
 assembled Council of the Hosts, and it was 
 thus fulfilled in the Arc of Spe-ta that the 
 Voice had circumscribed the whole Earth. 
 
 And when Cpenta-armij was about to 
 depart from each heavenly place, she al- 
 ways descended to the foot of the throne of 
 the Lord, and sat thereon; and the Lord 
 went down and took her hand, saying: 
 Arise, O Goddess, and go thy way; the 
 Father calleth thee! And then would she 
 arise and depart to another Lord or Lord- 
 ess, in like manner. 
 
 Cpenta-armij took with her three thou- 
 sand angel scribes and recorders; three 
 thousand artists; and three thousand geol- 
 ogists and mineralogists. 
 
 Jehovih had said to Cpenta-armij : Thou 
 shalt make reports of the land and water 
 and air of the earth; and of all the living 
 thereon and therein, with pictures thereof; 
 two copies shalt thou make; and when the 
 end of dawn is come, thou shalt take the 
 two copies with thee in thy ascension to 
 My etherean worlds. One copy shalt thou 
 put on record in the library of Haot-saiti, 
 and the other copy shalt thou send to the 
 Hyperiis Council of the United Chiefs and 
 Chieftainesses, for their deliberations. 
 
 For the Hyperiis Council shall deter- 
 mine from this, thy report, what is good 
 for Earth; as to whether she shall be 
 changed in her course, or broken up and 
 divided; or whether she needeth a'ji or 
 dan; and they shall send out road-makers 
 to that end, or send vortices against her 
 vortex, to break it or rule over it, accord- 
 ing to My light upon them. 
 
 Besides these, Cpenta-armij had a thou- 
 sand recorders, whose business it was to 
 prepare reports of the Lords' kingdoms, 
 and of the factories, colleges, nurseries, 
 hospitals, the hells, if any, and knots, if 
 any; to record the grade and number of 
 spirits in each heavenly place; to record 
 the earthly kingdoms, and kings and 
 queens and their subjects, their occupa- 
 tions and grades, and their rate of corporeal 
 life age. To record the percentage of fa- 
 miliar spirits with mortals; the fetals, the 
 drujas; as well as the ashars and asaphs; 
 and the temples and oracles in use by mor- 
 tals; the altars and places of worship. To 
 record the number of Thins still inhabiting 
 
 the earth; the number of pure I'huans, 
 who worshiped only one Great Spirit; the 
 Druk order, who always have idols or sav- 
 iors, and are given to war. 
 
 One full moon of four quarters remain- 
 ed Cpenta-armij with each one of the Lords 
 of Earth; and then she departed, going 
 into all the habitable places on the earth, 
 and in the heavens that rested on the earth. 
 In ten moons she had completed her labor 
 with the Lords of the first resurrection; 
 had witnessed the manner in which the 
 Lords sent away the upraised to Craoshivi, 
 to enter the second resurrection. And her 
 scribes and recorders had completed their 
 labor also. 
 
 And now the Chieftainess sent her aira- 
 vagna back to Craoshivi, with her visitors, 
 Owks, See-wah-Gon and Ha-o-ha. But 
 for herself she had a piedmazr built; and, 
 taking ten thousand attendants, besides the 
 workers of the boat, she descended on to 
 the very earth, to visit the four Gods, in 
 the four great divisions of the earth; with 
 Eawahtah; with Brahma; with Abram, and 
 with Po. With each of these she spent 
 twelve days, and then she departed and 
 went to Maitraias, the heavenly place, the 
 only Lord-dom of Earth, where ruled 
 Yug-sae-su, with thirty million. Here she 
 remained twelve days also; and the inhab- 
 itants gave a tournament and festival. 
 
 After this Cpenta-armij departed for 
 Craoshivi, for the end of dawn was near at 
 hand. 
 
 CHAPTER XI. 
 
 In the Council of Craoshivi the Voice of 
 Jehovih came to Cpenta-armij, saying: Be- 
 hold, the red star neareth the fields of Ab- 
 arom; Great Oteson hath filled the sinks 
 and slues of Yoswakak; thousands of mill- 
 ions of My Sons and Daughters behold the 
 Feast of Spe-ta. 
 
 Hear thou thy Creator, O Cpenta-ar- 
 mij! For thou shalt spread broad the ta- 
 ble of My hosts; such as hath never 
 been before in Haot-saiti. And thou shalt 
 send for Obed, God of Oise; Gavaini, God- 
 dess of Ipthor; Ab, Shriever of Riv-Seing; 
 Raisi, Goddess of Esdras; Wish-tse, God 
 of Zuth; Harava, God on Yon-yon; Vraga- 
 piet, Goddess of Zoe; and Loo-chung, God 
 of Ata-bonaswitchahaha. And thou shalt 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 291 
 
 send for the Gods and Goddesses of the 
 Plains of Cnoe-Chang; and for the Gods 
 and Goddesses of the Chi-ha-wogo Roads; 
 and for all the Gods and Goddesses in their 
 own Nirvanian fields; and for the Great 
 Chief, Shoo-lo, of the Roads of Jinihassij, 
 and for all the Gods and Goddesses in his 
 dominions in My etherean worlds. 
 
 And yet thou shalt remember of thine 
 own knowledge many Gods and God- 
 desses; and thou shalt charge thy com- 
 panions, Owks, and See-wah-Gon, and Ha- 
 o-ha, to sit in Council with thee, that ye 
 may remember such Chiefs and Chieftain- 
 esses, Shrievers, Gods and Goddesses, 
 whose company may be delightful: 
 
 And thou shalt command them in My 
 name to meet in the Feast of Spe-ta, for it 
 is the first in this, My new world. Make 
 way for them; make place for them, O My 
 Daughter! Make wide the roadways in My 
 lower heaven; make My Holy Feast glor- 
 ious. 
 
 Cpenta-armij said: Too wide are the 
 dans of Earth; too far apart and cumber- 
 some, O Father! More than twenty-four 
 thousand million will be my harvest unto 
 thee, O Jehovih! Great is Thy wisdom in 
 Spe-ta; the time for the beginning of quar- 
 ter ascensions, fifty years. 
 
 Thy Gods and Goddesses, O Jehovih, 
 and Thy Chiefs and Chieftainesses, will 
 bind up these loose heavens into whole- 
 some discipline. I will send my swift mes- 
 sengers into Thy far-off etherean worlds, 
 and bring Thy Sons and Daughters to Thy 
 Feast. 
 
 Cpenta-armij sent off into the wide hea- 
 vens, high beyond Earth's heavens, invi- 
 tations to tens of thousands of high-raised 
 Sons and Daughters of the Great Spirit. 
 Then she called her surveyors and table- 
 makers before Jehovih's throne, and said 
 unto them: 
 
 The end of dawn is near at hand; I will 
 give a feast, a very great feast. Go ye and 
 survey the ground from Craoshivi to the 
 Lakes of Oochi-loo, in etherea, and for 
 the length thereof make ye a width in the 
 form of Fete; and the road of the Fete 
 shall be sufficient for the passage of twelve 
 avalanzas abreast; and the depth of the 
 Fete shall be as from the surface of the 
 earth unto Chinvat. Within twelve sios of 
 Abarom, and of the height of the circuit 
 
 of Bilothowitchieun shall ye carry the bor- 
 der flames; and the flames shall be of dou- 
 ble currents, going and coming, that the 
 food of the feast may be brought from any 
 region suited to the high-raised grades. 
 
 And the arc of the feast shall encompass 
 the whole Earth, and extend outward and 
 downward to the belt of Craoshivi, and 
 then downward in two lines, east and west; 
 and the downward lines shall be like the 
 feet of a compass, one stationary and the 
 other movable. And the light that ex- 
 tendeth from the arc down the movable line 
 shall rest on the delivered hosts. of Abram, 
 and it shall bear upon his people, that they 
 may hereafter draw Light direct from the 
 Father's throne in Craoshivi; and it shall 
 move westward and be as an inheritance of 
 Jehovih's light upon His corporeal sons 
 and daughters. 
 
 But the line that standeth in the east 
 shall be a base line and center, whither 
 shall descend the Father's light upon the 
 delivered sons and daughters of the hosts 
 of Brahma and Po. And because of the 
 arc of Spe-ta upon them, they shall remain 
 in their own divisions of the earth. 
 
 And for the deliverance of the harvests 
 of each quarter, the high-raised foot of the 
 arc shall stand to the four quarters, east, 
 west, north and south. 
 
 Jehovih then spake through Cpenta- 
 armij, saying: For I will illume the feet 
 thereof, and My new world, Earth and 
 her heavens, shall rest in the light of My 
 Roads forever. That no man, having My 
 examples before him, can misunderstand 
 Me. 
 
 Behold, only one lesson a day is given 
 to a child; and to a youth, two lessons a 
 day; and to a mature man, many lessons a 
 day; so, in the early creation of man, I 
 give few lessons; then in the youthful age 
 of the race, many more lessons; but when 
 the race hath attained to full manhood, 
 behold, I place My light at their feet, that 
 they may receive My lessons every day. 
 
 In one time I send the angels 
 to lead man up to a knowledge of Me 
 and My places; but when man hath attain- 
 eded to think for himself, I set up My arc 
 of Spe-ta; and it is as a candle in the firma- 
 ment of heaven, wherefrom My Light fall- 
 eth upon the soul of My people, without 
 any interpreter, save Mine Own Voice. 
 
292 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 For which reason, when one of My 
 worlds hath attained to Spe-ta, I come to 
 deliver them from kings, and queens, and 
 priests, and angels, and it is as the maturity 
 of a son in his father's house, when he in- 
 viteth his neighbors and spreadeth a feast. 
 
 Open wide thy places, O Cpenta-ar- 
 mij! A great joy is upon My etherean 
 worlds; My high-raised Sons and Daugh- 
 ters shall have great glory in Earth and 
 her heavens. Behold, I have proclaimed 
 Myself in the words of mortals; four high- 
 raised sons have learned to know their 
 Father in heaven. 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 Cpenta-armij said: Who cannot un- 
 derstand Thy models, O Jehovih! Thou 
 hast sh ,wn to mortals the food of the 
 flesh, a: i the source of the substance of 
 the blood. As a symbol before them of 
 Thy es'sean worlds and Thy es'sean peo- 
 ples, Thou hast created Thy corporean 
 members; to receive and to impart, but this 
 is not all. Thou createdst poison, to show 
 man that anything which receiveth not, 
 and imparteth not, is death. 
 
 Most wisely, O Father, hast Thou pro- 
 vided the degrees of sustenance unto ail 
 Thy creations: To the corporean, corpor- 
 eal food; to the atmospherean, atmospheric 
 food; to the etherean, ethe'ic food. Wide 
 will I spread my tables, O Jehovih. Thy 
 Gods and Goddesses, and Thy high-raised 
 Chieftains, shall sit at the Feast of Spe-ta. 
 
 The Chieftainess sent swift messengers 
 into the regions of etherean worlds, near 
 the Roadway of the Great Serpent, five 
 hundred thousand swift messengers. Down 
 to the atmospherean regions she sent mes- 
 sengers to the Gods and Lords, her labor- 
 ers, ten thousand messengers. To her in- 
 vited guests she provided each one million 
 attendants. 
 
 Next Cpenta-armij sent fifty thousand 
 arrow-ship makers in the regions of Cvent- 
 agma, in the etherean Itis, to prepare cere- 
 monial salvers and connecting rods, so that 
 all the thousands of millions, being united, 
 could hear the Voice of Jehovih from her 
 throne, movable, in her airavagna. Twelve 
 counterparts to these she sent down to the 
 lowest heavenly regions, so the All Light 
 should pierce the corporeal Earth. 
 
 And now, when her well-skilled work- 
 men, of tens of thousands of years' experi- 
 ence, had saluted and gone to their re- 
 spective labors, the Chieftainess spake be- 
 fore the Council, saying: Because of my 
 arc upon Earth and her heavens, the 
 Light of our Father will forever remain 
 with mortals and in the hadan fields. But, 
 behold, even as a young man, coming to 
 maturity, goeth away on his own account, 
 in great hope and self-conceit of his pow- 
 ers, to meet many misfortunes and great 
 darkness, so will it be with Earth and 
 her heavens after Spe-ta. Because I plant 
 my arc in these heavens, and say to the 
 Gods thereof, Ye are free! behold, there 
 shall rise numerous false Gods of great 
 power. And as a young man going forth 
 is puffed up with conceit, so will the at- 
 mospherean Gods believe they know all 
 things, and so bring great darkness and 
 misery upon their kingdoms and upon 
 themselves. 
 
 But the Light of my arc shall stand; 
 shall grow like a small seed planted; and in 
 time to come, both angels and mortals 
 shall understand that there is but One All 
 Light, a very centre, to W r hom all Gods 
 are but as small diadems. As a young man 
 of the earth must have experience of his 
 own to realize his own shortness, so must 
 even the Gods of these lower heavens be 
 left to run with a loose rein, for the glory 
 of Jehovih, and for themselves in final de- 
 liverance. For which reason, hereafter the 
 bondage of the discipline of the God and 
 his Lords shall be as nothing. Only hells 
 and knots shall they longer cast out with 
 fire and water; only by persuasion, and the 
 example of practice, shall they hold do- 
 minion in their respective places. 
 
 As in the early days, a king ruleth with 
 a rod and with tyrannical laws; and as, in 
 a riper age, the king and his armies give 
 way to a power vested in the people, so 
 shall my arc be the giving of the lower 
 heavens, and the earth beneath, into the 
 keeping of themselves. But my arc, which 
 is the foundation of the Father's upper 
 kingdoms within the lower heavens, shall 
 stand forever. 
 
 I go now on my journey down to the 
 earth, in my airavagna, to receive and de- 
 liver my four Gods, Os, and Vishnu, Yima, 
 and Ela-elia, God in Chief. 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 293 
 
 Thus sajdng, Cpenta-armij descended to 
 the foot of Jehovih's throne, and the Light 
 fell upon Thale, and he rose up from the 
 throne and descended, taking her hand, 
 saying: Arise, O Goddess, and hear thou 
 the Voice of thy Father, Creator and 
 Ruler! Behold, thy labor on Earth and 
 her heavens is near the end; and because 
 of thy steadfastness, I am honored in thee, 
 My Daughter. 
 
 Whilst thou art delivering My Gods, 
 behold, I will be with thee, and whatsoever 
 thou desireth of Me I will give unto thee. 
 My Sons and Daughters shall receive the 
 visiting hosts from the high heavens, and 
 allot them places in the feast; and My Sons 
 and Daughters shall receive and adorn My 
 Brides and Bridegrooms; and My trumpet- 
 ers shall proclaim Me in My works, from 
 the surface of the earth to the farthest 
 places in Salkwatka. Yea, My Light- 
 makers shall plant the staff of My holy 
 fire in the throne of Craoshivi, and the foot 
 thereof shall pierce Earth in the land of 
 Vind'yu, to receive and deliver My Earth 
 Son, Brahma. 
 
 Cpenta-armij stood aside, and then said: 
 To ye, my loved companions, Owks, and 
 See-wah-Gon, and Ha-o-ha, when the staff 
 of the Father's Light hath descended to 
 Earth, come ye then to me quickly in my 
 arrow-ship of fire, for it shall be a signal 
 betwixt us that in that hour I will raise up 
 my Gods from the corporeal Earth; and I 
 will open the earth and bring forth the 
 bodies of my son, Brahma, and his wife, 
 Yu-tiv, whose youngest son holdeth the 
 leaven of the Osirian law. And I will 
 have there assembled the hosts of my ten 
 Lords, and I will deliver into their hands 
 and for their successors, the fulfillment of 
 the Divan laws. 
 
 Her companions responded: In Jeho- 
 vih's love, wisdom and power, we will be 
 there. 
 
 CHAPTER XIII. 
 
 The Light of Jehovih now spread over 
 Haot-saiti and lined the Road of Salkwat- 
 ka, in etherea, extending from the Orian 
 Banks of Loo-che-wan to the Oixinian 
 Spars of Ochesu. The Cross Roads, Chi- 
 ea-wha-chong, and the plains of Sha-tu- 
 matz, were as seas and worlds of crystal 
 
 fire. And in the piercing light, the old- 
 time Gods, of millions of years agone, 
 sped forth in awful majesty, in answer to 
 the prayers of Cpenta-armij. 
 
 And there rose over Earth and her 
 heavens, farther than Chinvat, a trident arc, 
 broad as a world, of shimmering light, 
 the countless rays of ethe, as mortals see 
 the glimmering air in a summer's day: but 
 the ethe was of every color, hue and tint, 
 reflective and brilliant, the clear soul of 
 things separate, the very breath of Jehovih. 
 It was the beginning of the form of the arc 
 of Spe-ta, the deliverance of Earth and 
 her heavens into a new condition; to be- 
 stow it upon itself, ratified by the ceremony 
 of a festival for the Gods and Goddesses of 
 hundreds of millions of miles in that re- 
 gion of etherea. 
 
 Msanwhile, their high-raised compan- 
 ion, Cpenca-armij, known and loved in 
 hundreds of etherean worlds, was down on 
 the low earth, laying the corner-stone for 
 Jehovih's everlasting kingdom, whereon 
 should fall, presently, from out the arc of 
 Spe-ta, a shaft of fire. 
 
 And, touched by the hand of Immortal 
 Light, was Brahma, long trained to look 
 toward Jehovih; for his angel wife rose 
 upward, leading his vision toward a realm 
 amongst the Gods and Goddesses, whom 
 he beheld in countless numbers receiving 
 her most royally. Thus gazing on the glor- 
 ious scene, the great man in soul came 
 forth, leaving his corporeal part stretched 
 on the ground. And Cpenta-armij and 
 God received the spirit of Brahma, and he 
 held his place in the sacred circle with 
 mortals three days. 
 
 Then, on the fourth day, the Chieftainess 
 signalled her swift messengers; and they 
 touched the currents along, till they ran 
 high beyond Earth's vortex, where the 
 stationed Gods of etherea fastened on the 
 ethe'ic wave, extending to the great arc 
 over all. 
 
 It was the signal for the shaft of light; 
 and when the signal shot upward, and 
 the shaft of light began to pierce 
 Earth's vortex, making way for Craoshivi, 
 it was also the signal for Owks, See- 
 wah-Gon, and Ha-o-ha, to fly instantly for 
 their arrow-ship and make all speed for 
 Cpenta-armij ; which they did, even as a 
 flash of light darteth forth, guides and di- 
 
294 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 rectors of Jehovih's flame to the grave of 
 Brahma and Yu-tiv. 
 
 And down fell the bolt of light, piercing 
 the new disturbed ground, rich with mortal 
 tears; and as a breath of wind would 
 move a heap of feathers, so did the light, 
 by the wave of Cpenta-armij's hand, blow 
 the earth away, and lift up the buried forms 
 of two dead lovers, Brahma and Yu-tiv, 
 and marched them before the mortal audi- 
 ence, newly animated, and lovingly, hand 
 in hand, triumphant over death. 
 
 Then great Brahma, now quickened in 
 Cpenta-armij's arms spake from Jeho- 
 vih's throne, a few words, to the 
 loving sons and mortal concourse, then 
 took final leave. Cpenta-armij seized the 
 folds of the shaft of light, as a mortal 
 would the ropes and canvas of a toy ship, 
 and wrapping the earthly part of Brahma 
 and Yu-tiv about securely, wheeled in 
 line her own ship and gathered in the 
 etherean current from high heavens. 
 
 Then raising her hand, the known sig- 
 nal to the great workers in the trident arc 
 above, the exchanging currents of the 
 traveling flame began, and now raised up 
 the whole etherean hosts and the bodies of 
 Brahma and Yu-tiv, which had not as- 
 cended a mile before they were etherealiz- 
 ed, scattered and gone, and the souls of 
 the two sweet loves in cognizance and fel- 
 lowship with the millions of Jehovih's Sons 
 and Daughters now swiftly made way for 
 Craoshivi. 
 
 Cpenta-armij's work was done. In the 
 arc of light and companionship of her 
 compeers, the feast was open, and the thou- 
 sands of millions in rapport sat along the 
 series of tables, hundreds of millions of 
 miles, to relish food brought from more 
 than a thousand worlds. 
 
 Meanwhile, God, to finish his labors, re- 
 sumed his throne in Craoshivi, just in time 
 to receive the twelve avalanzas sent from 
 Yuckowts' factories, in Abarom, in etherea, 
 to receive the four-and-twenty thousand 
 million Brides and Bridegrooms in Jeho- 
 vih's name, who were to take the degree of 
 third resurrection and be raised beyond 
 Earth's vortex and emancipated in the 
 etherean realms of Haot-saiti. 
 
 Chue-in-ista, Goddess of Oambuyu, 
 chief commandress of the fleet, having 
 
 been apprised of the number of initiates, 
 had prepared twelve thousand rings, a 
 thousand for each avalanza; and the fleet 
 in turn was , in a ring, and the ring ex- 
 tended sufficiently wide to encircle the 
 holy capital and throne in Craoshivi, so 
 that when it had descended to its place, 
 God and his officers, and the Holy Council 
 of Earth and heaven, now thirty million 
 members, were in the centre of the audi- 
 ence. On every side, far as the eye could 
 see, stood the Brides and Bridegrooms of 
 Jehovih, arrayed in spotless white, fearless 
 before the Light and ceremonies. 
 
 When the fleet landed, Chue-in-ista, the 
 commandress, came forth from the east, 
 facing God on the throne. She said: Thy 
 voice, O God, hath called the name of Je- 
 hovih. Behold, I am His Daughter, sent 
 by Him to know thy will and Holy De- 
 sires? 
 
 God said: Behold, I am His Son! Thou 
 art my Sister! Hear me, then, in our Fa- 
 ther's name. I have here a harvest of four 
 and twenty thousand million angels 
 brought up out of Earth, pure and holy, 
 for Jehovih's emancipated kingdoms. 
 
 Chue-in-ista said: In His name let them 
 answer before me, that I may witness their 
 wisdom and power sufficient to dwell in 
 All Purity. My Father and I are one; my 
 hosts have crossed the Nirvanian pastures; 
 they no longer feed on substance rising 
 from below, but on the Light emanating 
 from etherean realms above. 
 
 God said: I know Thou hast provided 
 me, O Jehovih! 
 
 Then here responded the hosts of Brides 
 and Bridegrooms, saying: By Faith I 
 know I am safe in Thy kingdoms, O Jeho- 
 vih. Take me to Thy emancipated worlds; 
 give me scope and power and wisdom for 
 greater works. 
 
 Then followed the full ceremony of the 
 third resurrection in the usual way( which 
 was witnessed by Cpenta-armij and other 
 Chieftainesses and Chiefs above, who were 
 at the feast of the arc of Spe-ta) ; and when 
 God said: O Jehovih, give me crowns 
 for Thy Sons and Daughters, Brides and 
 Bridegrooms for Thy etherean worlds! 
 There were cast down by Cpenta-armij and 
 her hosts, four and twenty thousand million 
 crowns; and they alighted on Jehovih's 
 Brides' and Bridegrooms' heads. 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 295 
 
 And now God turned to Thale, who was 
 to be his successor for the next two hun- 
 dred years. God said: In Jehovih's name, 
 to thee I bestow the crown of Earth and 
 her heavens. And to thee also do I be- 
 queath the triangle, symbol of the Gods of 
 Earth, and the inqua, and the trident, sym- 
 bolical of the arc of Spe-ta; and emblem of 
 resurrection. 
 
 Thereupon, he who had been God laid 
 the crown and jewels on Thale, saying: 
 Hail, O God of Earth! 
 
 Thale said: In Thy name, O Jehovih, 
 will I be God of Earth and her heavens till 
 the next dan! Be Thou with me, O Fa- 
 ther! 
 
 Thus ended the ceremonies: He who 
 had been God descended to the foot of the 
 throne and sat down; and then God, who 
 had been Thale, came down and took his 
 hand, saying: Arise, O God, and go thy 
 way. And he rose up and prepared to de- 
 part, for now had the ceremonies lasted one 
 full day. Cpenta-armij signalled the 
 hosts for the close of the festival, 
 and with her airavagna passed over 
 and above the fleet, and gave Chue-in-ista, 
 the commandress, the sign, whereupon the 
 ascent began. The tens of thousands of 
 millions of angels entered their respective 
 places. The music of the es'enaurs and of 
 the trumpeters sounded, and resounded, to 
 the distance of a hundred worlds. 
 
 Upward rose the fleets; downward fell 
 the showers of flowers and perfumes to 
 those left behind. Higher and higher the 
 great world of lights; higher and higher, 
 till soon they passed beyond Earth's vor- 
 tex and disappeared. 
 
 CHAPTER XIV. 
 
 Lords and Lordesses in the lower king- 
 doms of these My heavens. Neither 
 shall it be dark during thy reign; and thy 
 labor shall be productive of a great har- 
 vest for My etherean worlds. For which 
 reason thou shalt prepare to reap every 
 fifty years. And for each reaping, behold, 
 My daughter Cpenta-armij will send to 
 thee ships of deliverance for all thou may- 
 est have prepared as Brides and Bride- 
 grooms. 
 
 And behold, I give a new law unto thee; 
 which is, that thou shalt cause thy Lords 
 to deliver unto thee for thy kingdoms all 
 whom they have raised to grade fifty, in 
 advance of thy reapings, in divisions of 
 time like unto thine. And thou shalt call 
 together to thy capital thy Lords from all 
 the divisions of the earth, once every reap- 
 ing; and ye shall sit in Council of Div for 
 seven days each time, and ye shall consti- 
 tute My Holy Eleven; nor shall the Div 
 be larger or smaller than eleven during its 
 life-time. And the Div shall make laws 
 relating to the affairs of each of the hea- 
 venly places, to make them harmonious, 
 one with another, and these shall be called 
 Divan Laws. 
 
 God inquired concerning the light and 
 darkness of the cycle. Jehovih said: The 
 first division shall rate seventy; the sec- 
 ond, sixty; the third, fifty; the fourth, forty; 
 the fifth, thirty; and the sixth, twenty. 
 
 God inquired concerning the Lord of 
 the Lord-dom of Maitraias. Jehovih an- 
 swered him, saying: Because he is not a 
 teacher, he shall not be eligible to the rank 
 of Div. But he shall have the benefit of all 
 the decrees, and all the kingdoms of My 
 other Lords; for he is the earth's body- 
 guard, and a beneficent unto them. 
 
 Jehovih spake to God on the throne, in 
 Craoshivi, saying: These are My divisions 
 in the cycle of My Daughter, Cpenta-ar- 
 mij: Two hundred years; four hundred 
 years; five hundred years; three hundred 
 years; four hundred years, and six hun- 
 dred years; after which I shall send dawn. 
 Five successors shalt thou have, and their 
 reign shall be be according to the divisions 
 I have made. Forty years' indulgence in 
 a great light have I allotted to thee, My 
 Son; so thou shalt perfect all the orders of 
 
 CHAPTER XV. 
 
 When the Diva were assembled, God 
 propounded the duties of the Lord-dom. 
 On which the members spake at length, 
 and then God decreed: 
 
 First: The Lord God of Maitrias shall 
 not have, from this time forth forever, per- 
 mission to use violent force, neither by fire 
 nor water, except in hells or knots. 
 
 Second: By the Arc of Spe-ta: By the 
 decree of the Most High: The Lord God 
 
296 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 of Maitraias is bound by the same rule as 
 the Lords of the lowest heavens; whose 
 walls and pillars of fire are abolished, save 
 on special ocasions; whose respective king- 
 doms are open and free for all spirits above 
 the es'yan grade. 
 
 Third: The Lord God of Maitraias' 
 times and successors shall be the same as 
 the Diva: The stations of the hosts of the 
 Lord God shall be according to the hea- 
 venly realms of the Lords, with Maitraias 
 as the Lord-dom in chief. 
 
 Fourth: The hosts of the Lord God 
 shall be distinguished from ashars and 
 asaphs by the name Mishm, but of a single 
 one the name shall be Mishm-ah. And 
 their leaders shall be called captains and 
 generals. 
 
 Fifth: The labor of the Lord God shall 
 be to prevent drujas returning to the earth 
 to dwell with corporeans; to capture dru- 
 jas on the earth and carry them off to the 
 nearest Lord's heavenly place, and there 
 deliver them. Force by violence being 
 abolished, the mishm shall devise strata- 
 gems, by games and tournaments, or oth- 
 erwise persuasively. 
 
 Sixth: The mishm shall not arrest fe- 
 tals, nor infants, nor the wards of ashars, 
 nor spirits in chaos on battle-fields; for 
 these labors belong to the Lords and their 
 hosts. 
 
 Seventh: Where there are companies 
 of millions of drujas, and the Lord God 
 hath not a sufficient number of mishm, the 
 Lord God shall summon the nearest Lord 
 for help, and it shall be given unto him. 
 
 Eighth: In no case shall it be the la- 
 bor of the Lord God to teach the captured 
 drujas, nor to house them, nor to provide 
 them with schools, nor factories, nor hos- 
 pitals, nor nurseries, for these labors are the 
 Lord's, to whom the Lord God of Maitraias 
 shall deliver them. 
 
 Ninth: To prevent the establishing of 
 heavenly kingdoms by self-constituted 
 Lords and Gods, otherwise false Lords and 
 false Gods; the Lord God of the Lord-dom 
 of Maitraias shall be the central head, in 
 conjunction with all the Lords of the low- 
 est heavens; and his voice will be the rule 
 and guide as to the manner of such labor. 
 
 Tenth: The Lord God shall have one 
 
 hundred thousand messengers; and he shall 
 determine their stations and routes of 
 travel. 
 
 CHAPTER XVI. 
 
 In God's heavenly place, Craoshivi, Je- 
 hovih said: For My chosen on the earth, 
 of Abram, and Po, and Brahma, and Ea- 
 wahtah, provide thou in Craoshivi- for 
 they shall not tarry in the lowest heavens. 
 And for the infants of My chosen, who 
 die in infancy, suffer them not to be en- 
 gulfed in hada, but bring them also to the 
 place of My God. 
 
 The Diva then decreed: Lines of road- 
 ways from the earth up to the kingdom of 
 God for such transport; and appointed of- 
 ficers and laborers to prevent the spirits of 
 God's chosen from falling into the hands 
 of the drujas, and to bring them to Crao- 
 shivi. The Diva said: On the third day 
 after the death of a mortal, his spirit shall 
 be borne to the home of God. And it was 
 so. 
 
 The Diva decreed: The labor of the 
 Lords of all the divisions of hada and of the 
 earth shall be with the undelivered sons and 
 daughters of the earth and her heavens; but 
 in no case shall they labor more with the 
 Faithists; for the Faithists, mortals and 
 spirits, come under the higher law, which is 
 of Jehovih, through His Son, God of Crao- 
 shivi. 
 
 And herefrom rose the saying: The be- 
 lievers go to God, but the unbelievers go 
 to his Lords; they that live the higher law 
 on earth escape hada. 
 
 Now it came to pass in course of time 
 that some corporeans, who belonged not 
 to the societies of Faithists of any of the 
 tribes of Jehovih's chosen, became believ- 
 ers in the All Person, and that to live by 
 the All Highest light was the fulfilment of 
 the Divan law. And they joined not the 
 Faithists, nor followed the rites and cere- 
 monies. God propounded this in Diva: 
 Where shall the spirits of such be deliv- 
 ered? Behold, even on the earth they have 
 delivered themselves away from the Druks; 
 shall we now permit them to fall into the 
 kingdoms of mixed company in hada? 
 
 To have faith in One Great Person, the 
 Ever Present; Creator and Ruler, is 
 well; but to have such faith, and yet not 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 297 
 
 committing one's self to an association of 
 brethren of like faith, proveth such lack of 
 discipline as requireth beginning at the 
 fifth grade in the es'sean world. 
 
 Upon this the Diva decreed: A separ- 
 ate kingdom shall be prepared for those 
 who profess faith in Jehovih, but are with- 
 out practice. 
 
 The name for the kingdom shall be 
 Me-de, and its place shall be in the first 
 plateau above the earth. 
 
 CHAPTER XVII. 
 
 Jehovih spake to God, saying: When 
 thou hast founded Me-de thou shalt make 
 Me-de-ci laws; and thou shalt send thy 
 surveyors down to hada and to the eaith 
 also, and they shall choose a heavenly place 
 for thy new kingdom. And thither shalt 
 thou go and create a plateau and holy place 
 and capital, and provide a throne for it. 
 And when thou hast completed thy work 
 thou shalt call to the throne a sub-God. 
 who shall rule in the place with love, wis- 
 dom and power, in My name. But since 
 many of My chosen forget Me ani so 
 apostate themselves, thy sub-God shall 
 also receive their spirits, and his kingdom 
 shall be their kingdom till they are \ urged 
 of their sins. 
 
 God spake in the Council of Cr; ! oshivi, 
 relating what Jehovih had said t y him, 
 and the Council then ratified the cot,imand- 
 ments of Jehovih. And there was selected 
 one A-chung-le, and made sub-God of Me- 
 de, with the title Anubi, signifying media- 
 tor, and judge of grades. 
 
 God said: Anubi shall have a badge, 
 and a pair of scales; with mine own hands 
 will I invest him. 
 
 And, accordingly, the place, the king- 
 dom, the person, and the badge of office, 
 were duly established by God under the 
 commandment of Jehovih through his 
 kingdom of Craoshivi. And the term of 
 office was made to correspond with God's 
 and his Lords'. Thus was put upon the 
 throne in the heavenly place, Me-de, Anu- 
 bi, who had been A-chung-le, an angel of 
 a thousand years in the colleges of Jeho- 
 vih, most wise and full of love, and indus- 
 trious withal. 
 
 Again Jehovih spake to God, saying: 
 From this time forth My colleges shall be 
 in Craoshivi; from this time forth My 
 schools and primaries shall be in the king- 
 doms of My Lords. The Diva afterward 
 made this another section of the Divan 
 law. 
 
 So God and his Lords removed all his 
 colleges and places of great learning to 
 Craoshivi; but the schools and primary 
 educationals were left in the dominions of 
 the Lords, their heavenly places. 
 
 Now, during the dawn of dan, four 
 etherean Gods had sojourned on the earth, 
 walking with four mortals, namely: With 
 Po, of Jaffeth; Abram, of Arabin'ya; Brah- 
 ma, of Vind'yu, and Eawahtah, of Guata- 
 ma. And the four Gods preached through 
 these four men, explaining Jehovih and 
 His kingdoms; and the angels of Jehovih 
 inspired many followers unto them. For 
 four years these Gods dwelt on the earth, 
 and then ascended into the upper heavens. 
 
 Jehovih spake to God concerning the 
 matter, saying: For four years I bestowed 
 My light in Person on the corporeal- 
 earth, and then I departed; For which 
 reason I left four substitutes, Lords of 
 heaven, on the earth, with My four peoples 
 whom I delivered. And I commanded 
 these My substitutes to abide upon the 
 earth for forty years, in order to indulge 
 My chosen. Provide thou unto them; for 
 My substitutes are ethereans; and thou 
 shalt have their places filled by atmospher- 
 eans from the highest grades. 
 
 The Diva then made a section of the 
 Divan law, providing for the four who 
 stood highest in the grades in Craoshivi to 
 take the places, to dwell with the Faithists 
 in the names of the Great Spirit; and the 
 names given were: To Jaffeth, Te-in; to 
 Aarabin'ya, Jehovih; to Vind'yu, Ormazd; 
 to Guatama, Egoquim; according to the 
 languages, and to the capabilities of mortals 
 to pronounce words. 
 
 The Diva then made another section of 
 the Di\an law, which was the title to be 
 given to the four angels thus provided to 
 bestow the Voice of Jehovih on mortals, 
 and the title was O-yra. 
 
 The Divan law provided that each O-yra 
 should have ten thousand attendants; an- 
 
298 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 gels from above the eightieth grade, from 
 the colleges of Craoshivi, and their attend- 
 ants were to sojourn on the earth with the 
 Faithists as inspiring spirits and protect- 
 ors; and made the term of office for the 
 O-yra eleven years each; and the same for 
 their attendants. 
 
 The Divan law explained the duties of 
 the O-yra and their attendants, which were: 
 that the O-yra should reside with the chief 
 rab'bah or high priest, and be his inspirer; 
 being with him day and night; and by vir- 
 tue of his presence make the chief rab'bah 
 know the voice of the All Highest. And 
 the attendants first in rank were to dwell in 
 the same way with the ordinary rab'bah, 
 and for the same purpose. And the other 
 attendants were to dwell with the multi- 
 tude in like manner and for the same pur- 
 pose. And each O-yra was to have a 
 heavenly place in the mortal temple, where 
 he could meet his attendants in Council 
 in reference to the Faithists and their af- 
 fairs. 
 
 The Divan law made the O-yra and his 
 attendants the heavenly kingdom for the 
 ashars of the Lords who dwelt with mor- 
 tals. 
 
 The Divan law provided for the O-yra 
 to increase the number of his attendants, 
 according to the increase of the number of 
 Faithists in each of the four divisions of 
 the earth. 
 
 Such, then, were the chief of the Divan 
 laws made in heaven in the cycle of Cpen- 
 ta-armij, during the first two hundred years. 
 And all the kingdoms of atmospherea were 
 established and officered; and all the people 
 in these heavens became organic as soon as 
 passing the es'yan age. Nor was there any 
 dissatisfaction amongst any of the Gods or 
 Lords, or other officers, or in any of the 
 colleges, or hospitals; and never since the 
 foundation of this world had there been 
 such prosperity in the resurrections of the 
 inhabitants of heaven. 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII. 
 
 And the harmony of heaven reigned on 
 earth; war ceased amongst men on all the 
 divisions of the earth. And man began to 
 esteem wisdom, truth, virtue, and in- 
 dustry. The inspiration of the angels set 
 man to imitating the affairs of heaven. He 
 
 built schools and colleges, nurseries and 
 hospitals; and factories for silk, linen and 
 cotton cloth; and for making paper, glass, 
 and leather; and for smelting iron, copper, 
 silver and gold. 
 
 Three great peoples sprang up on the 
 earth within two hundred years; in Jaffeth, 
 in Vind'yu, and in Arabin'ya; and a fourth 
 great people were overspreading Heleste 
 in every quarter. And the kings of Heleste 
 were sending emigrants by thousands and 
 thousands into Europa. 
 
 The Lords sent ashars of great wisdom 
 to dwell with mortals, to teach them by in- 
 spiration in regard to all knowledge; to 
 teach them to spin and weave finely; to 
 teach them the seasons, the times of the 
 earth, and moon,. sun, and stars; to observe 
 them with lenses, as had been the case in 
 the cycle of Osiris, but was lost on the 
 earth. The spirits of thousands of years 
 previous were brought back to the earth, 
 to reveal to mortals the lost arts and sci- 
 ences. By night and by day these angels 
 remained in the presence of mortals, and 
 spake unto the souls of men, and made 
 them understand. 
 
 And the Lord God of Maitraias restrain- 
 ed the drujas of heaven from coming back 
 to afflict mortals or lead them astray. 
 He guarded the earth around on all 
 sides, so that, in heaven, the Lords and 
 the Divan hosts, in mirth, styled him The 
 Savior of Men! 
 
 Jehovih rebuked them, saying to God: 
 Thev that sow in mirth oft reap in sor- 
 row. But even the Lords, with all their 
 wisdom, saw not what was in store for 
 their successors. 
 
 The O-yra, the four angels with their 
 thousands of assistant angel hosts, dwelt on 
 the earth, with the Faithists; inspired them 
 in peace, and rites, and ceremonies; inspir- 
 ed them in prayers, and psalms, and sacred 
 dances; dwelt with them day and night; 
 talked to their spirits when they slept; led 
 them by inspiration to happy marriages, 
 that they might beget offspring capable of 
 the Voice. And in each of the four coun- 
 tries the Faithists became as bands of 
 brothers and sisters. And there came to 
 them from the kings' peoples tens of thou- 
 sands, and joined them, living as Faithists, 
 casting their wealth into the rab'bahs' 
 hands, for the benefit of the poor. 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 299 
 
 In two hundred years there were in Jaf- 
 feth three million Faithists. In Arabin'ya 
 there were two million Faithists. In Vind'- 
 yu there were four million Faithists. In 
 Guatama there were one milion Faithists. 
 But the Faithists were mostly poor people, 
 and inhabited many far-apart regions. But 
 the kings' peoples were rich, and had large 
 cities, an abundance of elephants, horses, 
 camels, asses, and cheetahs. 
 
 The Faithists had little learning as to 
 books and instruments for measuring the 
 stars, and moon, and sun; they derived 
 their knowledge from the angels of the 
 Lords. The Faithists' knowledge pertain- 
 ed mostly to perfecting the soul; but the 
 knowledge of the kings' people pertained 
 mostly to earthly matters, and to the grat- 
 ification of self. 
 
 CHAPTER XIX. 
 
 The Anubi's labor on earth was to win 
 the disaffected of the kings' peoples into 
 association; and as far as possible to bring 
 them to the rites of the Faithists. Anubi 
 sent tens of thousands of angels into all the 
 regions of the earth. By inspiration and 
 otherwise these angels established the rites 
 of Anubi. By these rites even kings were 
 converted to the full ceremonies of the 
 brethren. And by the same means were 
 the Mai-chung, of Jaffeth, made into Faith- 
 ists; and by the same rites were the Efhns, 
 of Vind'yu, converted into Faithists, adopt- 
 ing all the rites and ceremonies of Emetha- 
 chavah afterward. 
 
 And it came to pass in course of time 
 that there were no suffering poor in all the 
 world. The Faithists had gathered them 
 all up and made brethren of them; and the 
 contributions to the Faithists by the kings' 
 peoples rendered all the people comforta- 
 ble. 
 
 For the degree of Anubi any one (who 
 desired to learn heavenly things) was eligi- 
 ble. The rites and ceremonies were in dark 
 chambers; and the angels of heaven, clothed 
 in sar'gis, took part therein. And the an- 
 gels taught mortals by the voice the mys- 
 teries of spirit communion; how to sit in 
 circles and crescents; taught the four dark 
 corners, and the four bright sides; taught 
 them how to ascertain from what grade 
 in heaven the spirits came; how to keep off 
 evil spirits; how to attract righteous spirits; 
 
 taught them how to develop in su'is and 
 sar'gis; the application of lotions to the 
 skin that would make poundings and rap- 
 pings. 
 
 The second degree taught the people of 
 the Great Spirit and His secret names; 
 taught them His high holy heavens, where 
 all is rest and happiness forever. Whoever 
 took the second degree had to live one year 
 with the poorest of the poor, going about 
 soliciting alms, reserving only the poorest 
 of things for himself. And if he found a 
 person naked he must take off his clothes 
 and give them to that person. Men and 
 women alike served the same conditions. 
 
 The third degree taught the dominions 
 of God and the Lords, and the place of 
 their abiding, and their respective labors in 
 heaven. And the members must learn the 
 names of the God or Gods, Lord or Lords, 
 and the Divan laws; the words of saluta- 
 tion; the anthems; the prayers; the praise; 
 the positions of utterance; the orders of 
 marching, and to write sacred names. 
 
 The fourth degree taught the arrange- 
 ment of the heavens; the places of the sun 
 and stars and moon; the places and grades 
 of the unseen worlds; the localities of the 
 lower and higher heavens and the places and 
 dominions of false Lords and false Gods; 
 the places in hada, and of hells and knots; 
 of familiar spirits, and also of fetals, both 
 harmless and the destructive vampires, that 
 live on mortals and in swine and cattle, 
 that induce mortals to eat flesh food for 
 that purpose; the key to the place of the 
 north star; the position of the earth's vor- 
 tex; the vortices that move the corporeal 
 worlds, and hold them in place; and the 
 rules for building temples and pyramids, 
 with their spirit chambers. 
 
 Besides this there was the fifth degree, 
 which reached the secret of life in the flesh; 
 to enter the prophetic state; to esti- 
 mate numbers without counting; to find 
 propoi^tions and distances without meas- 
 uring; to forecast the time of things; 
 to find the weight of things without 
 weighing; to find the power of the 
 capstan before it is made, and of the 
 lever and screw; to find the friction of 
 things before they were moved, in order to 
 know the power required. The fifth de- 
 gree was called the degree of prophecy; 
 
300 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-AEMIJ 
 
 and the place of initiation was called the 
 college of prophecy. 
 
 In this degree the angels came in sar'- 
 gis and taught these things orally, and mor- 
 tals initiated thus learned them. But no 
 one could take the fifth degree without hav- 
 ing become proficient in all the four pre- 
 ceding degrees, and without the recom- 
 mendation of the rab'bah who had charge 
 of the college. And such was the wisdom 
 of God that only Faithists could receive the 
 degrees, save the first degree; and, there- 
 fore, the greatest knowledge of the earth 
 was kept in secret with the Faithists. And 
 the kings' people, even the richest and 
 most powerful, were beholden to the sons 
 and daughters of the Faithists. To build 
 a palace or a temple, or an aqueduct or 
 canal, or a ship or any great affair, the 
 kings and the kings' people were obliged 
 to employ Faithists of the fifth degree to 
 superintend the work. 
 
 CHAPTER XX. 
 
 Jehovih spake to God in Craoshivi, his 
 heavenly place, saying: Behold, I have 
 given great light to Earth and her hea- 
 vens hundreds of years; and My Gods and 
 Lords are becoming conceited in their own 
 power and wisdom to rule in heavenly 
 places. Now I will try them for a season, 
 by sending them a'ji'an darkness; for My 
 Gods and Lords must learn to master the 
 elements I have created in the firmament. 
 
 So Jehovih brought Earth and her 
 heavens into a dark region for a season. 
 
 Anuhasaj, a one-time sub-God under 
 Ahura, the false, was cast into hell, and 
 then delivered out of hell, whereupon ne 
 repented, and became a Faithist in heaven; 
 serving many years in holy works in Ailkin, 
 a heavenly place of great wisdom. And it 
 came to pass that Ailkin was raised into a 
 new heavenly place, called Varapishanaha; 
 and in the removing, behold, Ahura order- 
 ed Anuhasaj from the line because of his 
 inharmony. And Anuhasaj allowed him- 
 self to become angered. 
 
 Satan said unto Anuhasaj: Who art 
 thou, that one of less wisdom ordereth 
 thee? Anuhasaj said: Alas, I am a fool, 
 and without will to assert myself. For 
 many years Anuhasaj became a wandering 
 spirit in heaven, going froia kingdom to 
 kingdom, doing nothing; and at times de- 
 
 scending to the earth, observing the king- 
 doms of the earth. 
 
 Satan came again to him and said: Go 
 thou to Ahura, who offended the, in pres- 
 ence of the Chieftainess, Cpenta-armij, 
 and say to him: O God, I crave thy for- 
 giveness. Thou wert right, and I was 
 wrong. I have repented most bitterly. 
 Now I come to thee, with faith in Jehovih. 
 Him will I serve forever. Turn me not off, 
 O Ahura; remember thine own one-time 
 shortness; and the high Gods above thee 
 accepted thee. 
 
 Ahura will delight in thee and take thee 
 at thy word. And thou shalt enter Vara- 
 pinshanaha, asking for the lowest of places; 
 practicing humility in all thy behavior. 
 But be thou fruitful in making acquaint- 
 ances with such as shall serve thee after- 
 ward. And whether it be fifty years, or a 
 hundred, or two hundred, bide thou thy 
 time. But the time shall surely come 
 when thou shalt be exalted; and thou shalt 
 solicit and accept a place in the dominions 
 of the Lord God in the Lord-dom of hea- 
 ven and earth, Maitraias. And whether 
 it be one hundred years more, or two hun- 
 dred years, it mattereth not to thee, but 
 thou shalt finally attain to the Lord-dom. 
 and be duly installed and crowned Lord 
 God of heaven and earth And when thou 
 art thus exalted thou shalt seek to have 
 appointed such Lords to the ten divisions 
 of earth as are thine own special friends. 
 And it shall come to pass that the whole 
 Earth and her heavens shall be thine, and 
 thy title shall be Lord God, and all people 
 on earth and in heaven shall be thy ser- 
 vants. 
 
 And it came to pass in course of 
 another hundred years, Anuhasaj was 
 promoted on the staff of the Lord God, 
 the guardian, where he served the Lord 
 God one hundred and seventy years. So 
 the Lord God named Anuhasaj for his 
 successor. 
 
 So God came from Craoshivi and 
 crowned Anuhasaj Lord God of heaven 
 and earth; with great pageantry and dis- 
 play, God gave him a throne and placed 
 him upon it. And from this time forth An- 
 uhasaj was known and saluted as Lord 
 God, which is the first rank below God. 
 
 The Lord God said unto himself: Who 
 first shall I bring into my favor? Satan 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 301 
 
 said: Thou shalt first bring into thy favor, 
 Anubi, Master of the Scales of Heaven, and 
 when thou hast trained him to thy liking, 
 thou shalt call him Thy Son and Savior of 
 Men! 
 
 The Lord God then questioned: Who 
 next shall I bring into my favor? Satan 
 said: Thou shalt next bring into thy favor 
 the ten Lords of the heavenly kingdoms 
 of the earth. And when thou hast them to 
 thy liking, thou shalt exalt the chief one of 
 them to be above the rest; and him that 
 thou exaltest thou shalt call Osiris, for it 
 is a name loved on earth and in heaven. 
 
 Thou shalt re-establish thy Lord-dom 
 and call it Hored, and it shall be the cen- 
 tral kingdom of all the heavens belong- 
 ing to Earth. And Anubi shall send the 
 spirits of his department to thy heavens; 
 and Osiris and all the other Lords shall 
 send the spirits of their departments to thy 
 kingdom. And in no case shall any more 
 spirits be sent to Craoshivi; for all people 
 in heaven and earth shall be taught that 
 thy kingdom is the All Highest Place; and 
 that thou art the All Highest God, even 
 the Creator of all things; and all angels 
 and mortals shall be thy servants. 
 
 Then went the Lord God to work ear- 
 nestly, but slowly and surely. The Lords 
 of all the divisions of the earth were his 
 special friends, and such as would 
 willingly do his bidding. And they were 
 learned and of high grade of heavenly ex- 
 perience of more than a thousand years. 
 And the Lord God told no one in heaven 
 or on the earth of his designs; gave no 
 sign or token of his behavior that would 
 make messengers or swift messengers look 
 at him to read him; and he passed for the 
 meekest and holiest of Gods. 
 
 But the time came at last for which the 
 Lord God had labored hundreds of years; 
 and he gave a festival in his heavenly 
 place, inviting the Lords and captains and 
 generals and marshals, whom he knew 
 would willingly do his bidding. And they 
 came even as the Lord God had planned, 
 and it was a l4me of great joy. And when 
 the feast was ended, the Lord God spake 
 before them, as one moved in sorrow to 
 do a solemn duty for the sake of Jehovih. 
 
 The Lord God said: O my brothers, 
 hear the words of your Lord God! Behold, 
 I have charge of the Lord-dom of heaven 
 
 and earth, I am as a guardian that stand- 
 eth by a corn-field to see the corn grow 
 unmolested. My experience is not of a 
 year, nor of a hundred years, but of thou- 
 sands of years. 
 
 In Jehovih's name, I speak before you; 
 for the love I bear for the souls of men and 
 angels. I belong not to the Diva as do ye 
 Lords; my voice findeth vent in the full- 
 ness of the Father in me. Who is here 
 that hath not seen great decline, during the 
 last hundred years, in these heavens, in the 
 faith of angels in the All Person? Speak, 
 then, O ye Lords; and if ye have hearts for 
 more energetic service for the Father and 
 His kingdoms, now let your tongues have 
 iull liberty, as becometh Gods. 
 
 Anubi said: Thou art wise, O Lord 
 God. God of Craoshivi layeth the blame 
 on a'ji. 
 
 Then spake Hi-kas, whose heavenly 
 place was over Jaffeth; he said: My Lord 
 God and my Lords, before your wisdom I 
 bow. I am but as a child in heaven, little 
 more than a thousand years. My tongue 
 should be silent before you, my long ex- 
 perienced Lords. Hear me though in my 
 little wisdom, and pity me for it. 
 
 To the east or west, or north, or south, 
 all things grow, in heaven and on the 
 earth; I have seen no greater wisdom than 
 this. One thing groweth not, the Diva. 
 Behold, the Diva made laws hundreds of 
 years ago, and they were wise laws in the 
 time they were made. Ye and I, all of us, 
 are bound by the old Divan laws. The 
 laws have not grown. Gods older than I 
 am, and Lords also, tell us that the All 
 Light is a Person and hath Voice; and 
 moreover that long ago He spake to high- 
 raised Gods, saying: These things shall be 
 thus and so. 
 
 I appeal to your judgment, O my Lord 
 God and my Lords, was that not a wise 
 doctrine for the ancients? For on this au- 
 thority angels and mortals fell down and 
 worshipped Him they saw not. And they 
 were obedient to the will of their mas- 
 ters and teachers on this self-esserted au- 
 thority of a Person no one had seen! 
 Which is to say: It is wiser to worship 
 Him we know not, and cannot compre- 
 hend, and is therefore as nothing before 
 us, than to hearken to the words of most 
 wise Gods and Lords. If to worship that 
 
302 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 which we are ignorant of is the highest of 
 worship, then the fool is the greatest of 
 worshippers. For he is ignorant of all 
 things. And by virtue of this reason, he 
 who is the wisest must be the poorest of 
 worshippers. And of a truth, is it not so, 
 both in heaven and on earth? 
 
 With the acquisition of knowledge, 
 they all put away the Unknowable; the ig- 
 norant are devout worshippers. Shall we 
 hold our tongues, saying: Wh-ce, wh-ce! 
 The ignorant must not hear the truth; the 
 whole truth. To do this, are we not hypo- 
 crites? Some have come to us from far-off 
 regions, saying there are more delightful 
 heavens, much higher! Why, then, shall 
 we not all run away and leave this? My 
 Lord God, and my Lords, these heavens 
 are good enough, if improved. The earth 
 is good enough, if improved. We want 
 larger kingdoms and more adorned thrones 
 in our heavens and on the earth. 
 
 Next spake Che-le-mung, whose hea- 
 venly kingdom was over Arabin'ya. He 
 said: My Lord hath spoken soul words. 
 With knowledge, what more need angels or 
 mortals? What value to them is it to say: 
 Beware! The Unseen heareth and seeth? 
 Or, halt and consider the Divan laws? My 
 Lord God, for the wisest and best and 
 most honest to assume dominion, this I 
 have not seen. Thy kingdom should be the 
 largest and most adorned of all kingdoms. 
 And thou shouldst have, to labor with thee, 
 Lords with kingdoms greater than all Crao- 
 shivi. Cannot our Gods and our Lords 
 make these heavens the greatest of all re- 
 gions in the universe? Shall we and our 
 people forever run off to etherea in search 
 of higher heavens? And not improve our 
 own? To exalt a place by going away from 
 it, who hath seen this done? 
 
 Arc-wotchissij spake next: his heavenly 
 kingdom was over Vind'yu. He said: O 
 that I had not struggled so long to put 
 away wisdom like this! All that hath been 
 spoken I have understood. But I curbed 
 my soul; I thought I was alone in such 
 reason. Now, so suddenly, I have not 
 words well schooled. I speak little, lest I 
 trip myself. It is the joy of my life to lis- 
 ten to such wise arguments. Another time 
 I will say more. 
 
 After him spake Baal, whose heavenly 
 kingdom was over Heleste and the south 
 
 end of Jaffeth to the sea, a young Lord of 
 great promise. He said:, How shall one 
 of my inexperience speak before such Gods 
 as are here! But because ye have touched 
 upon a matter dear to my soul, my words 
 will forth. I have seen all these heavens, 
 and even Craoshivi, waning for hundreds of 
 years. Our kingdoms are like old women, 
 resigned to routine, living, but dead. W T e 
 have the same rites and ceremonies as the 
 ancients; parades and salutations and an- 
 thems sung for thousands of years; and to 
 whom? A figure-head that is void of shape 
 and person and sense. Who is here that 
 hath not deserved honor more than such 
 a being? My Lord God hath labored two 
 thousand years! I have seen him in Vara- 
 pishanaha for more than a hundred years, 
 stooped to the vilest labor, over bad-smell- 
 ing drujas, teaching them, washing them! 
 
 The Lord God should have a kingdom 
 wide as Earth, and a million attendants 
 to do him honorable parade. And when he 
 goeth forth he should have hundreds of 
 thousands of heralds and trumpeters to 
 proclaim he is coming. We need wider 
 fields and more pomp and glory in our hea- 
 vens; and kingdoms with great capital cit- 
 ies, and thrones arrayed in splendor. . 
 
 Then rose Ashtaroth, assistant to Baal, 
 and Lordess of the East Wing of his hea- 
 venly place. She said: Here are other 
 Lordesses, who can speak wisely. As for 
 me, my words are few. The ancients have 
 taught us to be plain in all things. And 
 we have made our heavens like orchards 
 stript of leaves and blossoms. As fast as 
 angels are made bright and useful, they 
 are persuaded to become Brides and 
 Bridegrooms to Jehovih, and fly off to re- 
 mote worlds. Our own beloved Earth, that 
 brought us forth, together with her hea- 
 vens, are thus forever stript of the most 
 valuable fruitage and ornament. 
 
 We all know that atmospherea is ex- 
 tensive enough to contain all the angels 
 Earth will bring forth in millions of 
 years! I appeal to thee, my Lord God, and 
 to ye, most wise Lords, are not these 
 Brides and Bridegrooms hoodwinked by 
 the tales of the etherean Gods? And by 
 the parade and pageantry of the marriage 
 "ceremony? And by the fire-ships, and 
 pomp and splendor of the marshals, and 
 trumpeters, and music, and the high-raised 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 303 
 
 Gods? Behold, we have here one who can 
 invent all these glories, even our Lord 
 God. He should have such a heavenly 
 place of splendor that the Brides and Bride- 
 grooms would fly to him instead of the far- 
 off heavens. 
 
 After this manner spake the Lords and 
 Lordesses, and when they had all spoken, 
 there rose up Anuhasaj, now lawfully 
 anointed Lord God. He said: 
 
 CHAPTER XXI. 
 
 Most wise Lords, in your words ye have 
 done me great honor. There let the matter 
 end. I perceive what any one can under- 
 stand, which is that the center of the hea- 
 vens should be here. Why should the 
 heirs of Earth and atmospherea be car- 
 ried off to other heavens? Sufficient it is 
 for us that we cultivate our own. I am not 
 competent for so great a work. Rather shall 
 ye choose from amongst yourselves the 
 highest, best, wise man, and make him your 
 God. I will be his servant to do whatso- 
 ever he putteth upon me. I have traveled 
 far, and took the measure of many worlds. 
 I declare unto you there are no glories in 
 the far-off worlds, but can be built 
 up in these heavens, and even on the very 
 earth. 
 
 Hear me then and judge ye, not for my 
 fitness, but for my unfitness, and so dismiss 
 me save to make me your servant. Send 
 not off the highest raised angels, but make 
 these heavens suitable unto them. Make 
 this kingdom the All Highest heavenly 
 kingdom; and make your God the highest 
 of all Gods, even the Creator. Him shall 
 ye surround with a capital city, a heavenly 
 place paved with diamonds and most pre- 
 cious gems. And his throne shall be the 
 most exalted of all glories. To which 
 none can approach, save by crawling on 
 their bellies. Yea, such majesty shall sur- 
 round your God as becometh a Creator: 
 and such newly-invented rites and ceremo- 
 nies, dazzling beyond anything in all the 
 worlds ! 
 
 The rights and ceremonies should be car- 
 ried to the highest perfection. Without 
 rites and ceremonies a people are as a dead 
 people; they are as an army without disci- 
 pline. In fact, discipline is void without the 
 formalities of rites and ceremonies. To not 
 have these is to have every one do for self, 
 
 which is the dissolution of all union. Baal 
 hath spoken wisely on this; we need new 
 rites and ceremonies, adapted to the high- 
 est grades. We shall no longer bow to a 
 God we know not, a scattered substance 
 wide as the universe! 
 
 Because ye have spoken, I am pleased. 
 Because ye have come to my feast, I am 
 delighted. To be with one's own loves, 
 what joy is greater than this? It hath been 
 said, man shall love all alike; but I say 
 unto you that that is impossible. We have 
 our preferences, and we delight to come to- 
 gether. Who shall say us nay? 
 
 And yet, my Lords and Lordesses, shall 
 we not deliberate on these things? And 
 council with our best loves upon it; for 
 such is the construction of the mind that it 
 oft seeth better through others' eyes. And, 
 above all, shall we not mature the subject 
 to know if in our own souls we are sincere, 
 doing all things for the good of heaven and 
 earth, and not for ourselves. Ye know 
 how Ahura's kingdom prospered until he 
 began to work for his own glory, but from 
 his errors learn to avoid similar ones. 
 
 And now, since the time of the feast is 
 ended, and our respective kingdoms waiting 
 us, I declare the assembly dissolved. Arise, 
 then, my Lords and Lordesses, and go your 
 ways. And whatsoever ye may desire to 
 communicate to me on this matter, do ye 
 even so through messengers, which ye al- 
 ready have. 
 
 CHAPTER XXII. 
 
 Satan went to all the Lords and Lord- 
 esses in hada, and said unto each and every 
 one: Thine shall be exaltation without la- 
 bor; because thou art wise, others shall 
 serve thee; and great shall be thy glory. 
 As thou hast witnessed the rites and cere- 
 monies, in Craoshivi, of the high-raised 
 Gods, even so shall it be with thee. Be- 
 hold, the heavens of Earth shall become 
 the brightest and most glorious of all hea- 
 vens. Be thou patient, enduring anything, 
 for thou shalt surely, in time to come, be 
 second to none, the highest of Gods! And 
 thy name shall be sung in the ceremonies, 
 and shall be honored even in the far-off 
 heavens. It shall be said of thee, thou art 
 amongst the youngest of Gods, that by 
 thine own self-will mastered all things so 
 suddenly that even the oldest of Gods 
 
304 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 stood appalled at thy daring. Be thou pa- 
 tient, and seeming most humble, and bide 
 thou thy time; thou wert born to be a 
 leader even amongst Gods. Be secret; dis- 
 closing naught. 
 
 Satan said to Anuhasaj, the Lord God: 
 Be thou dignified, and by thy much-pre- 
 fessed love, like a father unto all the oth- 
 ers. And it shall come to pass that they 
 will thrust these great dominions upon 
 thee. Now whilst these matters were with 
 these Lords, behold, in far-off Craoshivi 
 Jehovih spake to God on the throne, before 
 the Council of Jehovih's Son, saying: Be- 
 cause I indulged thy Lords and Lordesses 
 in prosperous places, they are becoming 
 forgetful of Me. For so I created man, in 
 prosperity he idolizeth himself. He saith: 
 Behold me! What great things I can do: 
 Yea, I am wise; I perceive the nothingness 
 of the Creator! And he buildeth to his 
 own ruin. I created life and death all 
 around him, that he might learn My power 
 ere he quitteth the earth. And hada I made 
 wide, with a place of ascent and a place of 
 descent. Upward I placed My holy lights, 
 saying: Come! Downward, I made dark- 
 ness, saying: Beware! hell lieth thither! 
 But they plunge into misery headlong. 
 
 God said: What have they done, O Je- 
 hovih? Jehovih said: They are con- 
 spiring together to rebel against the 
 manner of My everlasting kingdoms. Sum- 
 mon thou the Diva before thee, and bid 
 them speak outright as to what they de- 
 sire. 
 
 God sent messengers into all the divi- 
 sions of the lowest heavens, to the king- 
 doms of Jehovih's Lords and Lordesses, 
 as the Father had commanded, summoning 
 them to Craoshivi. 
 
 Satan spake to Anuhasaj, the plotter of 
 the mischief, saying: Lest God in Crao- 
 shivi get wind of this matter, and so set at 
 naught thy long-laid plans, send thou to 
 him, saying: Greeting, in love to thee, Son 
 of Jehovih, God of Earth and her heavens. 
 From the light before me I am resolved to 
 resign the Lord-dom. Search, therefore, 
 and provide one in my place. 
 
 Satan continued to Anuhasaj : Send 
 thou to thy Lords and Lordesses, saying: 
 Greeting in love to thee, Lord of Jehovih. 
 I foresee that many will desire me to take 
 the place of God of Earth and her hea- 
 
 vens. Seek thou to relieve me of this, and 
 choose one less radical, that thou mayest 
 the more fully indorse him. Behold, I am 
 about to resign the Lord-dom, and desire 
 to see thee. 
 
 The Lords and Lordesses received the 
 two communications at the same time; and 
 they severally laid the matter before their 
 Holy Councils; and great was the excite- 
 ment therein. That which had been planned 
 to be in secret was thus made public in all 
 hada in a day, before thousands of 
 millions! At once the Lords and Lord- 
 esses hastened to Anuhasaj 's capital; and 
 they were each attended by ten thousand 
 attendants. Now when they were assem- 
 bled, perceiving that God in Craoshivi 
 knew of the matter, they were by their own 
 shame further incited to disobey the Divan 
 summons, and at once proceed to found a 
 consolidated kingdom, with Anuhasaj at 
 the head. Anuhasaj pretended that he de- 
 sired not the Godhead, and only agreed to 
 serve provided they installed him with oaths 
 of fidelity. So, after a session of three days, 
 Anuhasaj was elected and enthroned in 
 Hored, a new heavenly place, and crowned 
 Our God of Earth and her heavens, the 
 Very Lord God. Thus he became a false 
 God. But they crowned him not with the 
 true crown, for that was with God in Crao- 
 shivi; but they made one, creating it in the 
 sacred circle. But since he could not be 
 crowned by those beneath him, they were 
 in a quandary how to proceed. 
 
 Then satan spake to Anuhasaj, saying: 
 Command them to lie on their bellies in 
 token of submission to thee, and say to 
 them: Lay the crown at my feet, and I 
 will stand with my head bare; and when ye 
 have prostrated yourselves, I will com- 
 mand the crown in my own name to rise 
 up and lie on my head; and if it so rise, 
 then know ye of a truth our work is the 
 highest, best work. 
 
 Anuhasaj then repeated this to the 
 Lords and Lordesses, and they laid 
 down on their bellies, each being anxious 
 to show fidelity, in hope of exaltation. And 
 when they were down and saw not, Anu- 
 hasaj, having not power in Light, said: 
 Crown of these most holy, wise Lords and 
 Lordesses of heaven and earth, arise thou 
 and lie on the head of him who shall have 
 dominion on earth and in these heavens! 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 305 
 
 And thereupon he stooped down slyly 
 and with his own hand raised it up and 
 crowned himself, and commanded the 
 Lords to rise up. And behold, some 
 of the Lords and Lordesses said they saw 
 with the second sight of the soul, and that 
 the crown rose of its own accord, being 
 under the will of the circle! And they clap- 
 ped their hands, saying: All Hail, Our 
 God! All Hail, Our God! All Hail, Our 
 God! Proclaiming him in the east and 
 west and north and south. 
 
 He responded: The Lord, your God, 
 reigneth! Peace be unto you. Behold, the 
 heavens and earth are mine; be ye stead- 
 fast unto me, and ye shall be glorified in my 
 name. Ye that have been Lords and Lord- 
 esses shall be Gods and Goddesses, with 
 great power and with mighty kingdoms. 
 As I foresaw this, so have I provided for 
 you beforehand. In this very time and 
 place will I crown you and apportion you 
 with great glory. Yet think not that this 
 is the last; it is but the first, and temporary 
 until the new heavens are founded with 
 broader boundaries. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIIL 
 
 Anuhasaj said: I, the Lord, your God, 
 being the All Highest, through your choice, 
 decree, for sake of harmony and concert in 
 our .labors, the establishment of a De'yiis. 
 As the Craoshivians have had a Diva, so 
 will I have a De'yiis. And by virtue of 
 mine own authority I proclaim ye, my 
 Lords and Lordesses, as the holy members 
 thereof. 
 
 As the Diva hath been taught in these 
 heavens, so also be the De'yus, whereof I 
 assume the chief head. As the Diva had 
 laws, so also shall our De'yus; and they 
 shall be promulgated on the earth, and 
 taught to mortals as the laws of De'yus. 
 Therefore by my own voice I dissolve the 
 Diva of heaven; and it shall not be from 
 this time forth forever. And whosoever of 
 ye being members thereof, shall this day 
 resign the Diva, and send word to the 
 ruler of Craoshivi, for his benefit, and for 
 his kingdom's benefit. 
 
 And the ruler of Craoshivi shall con- 
 tinue in his own place and kingdom; for it 
 is his. And the ruler of Vara-pishanaha, 
 called Ahura, shall continue in his own 
 place and kingdom, for it is his. 
 
 First, then I take unto myself Anubi, 
 the Lord loved by you all, and he shall be 
 my associate, and his title shall be Master 
 of the Scales of Heaven, for he shall de- 
 termine the grades of the spirits and send 
 them to their respective departments. On 
 earth his title shall be Savior of Men, Son 
 of De'yus. 
 
 Second, thou, Hi-kas, shalt be Ruler 
 over Jafreth and its heavenly kingdom: and 
 thy title shall be Te-in, and of the first 
 rank of God of the Earth. 
 
 Third, thou, Wotchissij, shall be ruler 
 over Vind'yu and her heavenly kingdom, 
 and thy title shall be Sudga, and of the first 
 rank of God of the Earth. 
 
 Fourth* thou, Che-le-mung, shalt be 
 ruler over Arabin'ya and her heavenly 
 kingdom, and thy title shall be Osiris, and 
 of the first rank of God of the Earth. 
 
 Fifth, thou, Baal, shalt be ruler over 
 Heleste and her heavenly kingdom, and 
 thy title shall be Baal, and of the first 
 rank of God of the Earth. 
 
 Sixth, thou, Ashtaroth, shalt be ruler 
 over Par'si'e, and its heavenly kingdom, 
 and thy title shall be Ashtaroth, of the first 
 rank of Goddess of the Earth. 
 
 Seventh, thou, Fo-ebe, shalt he ruler 
 over Uropa and her heavenly kingdom, 
 and thy title shall be Fo-ebe, and of the 
 first rank of Goddess of the Earth. 
 
 Eighth, thou Ho-jab, shall be ruler over 
 Japan and her heavenly kingdom; and thy 
 title snail be Ho-jab and of the first rank 
 of God of the earth. 
 
 After that the false God made appoint- 
 ments for the other divisions of the earth 
 and their heavenly places, and after that he 
 said unto them: 
 
 All my Gods and Goddesses shall have 
 thrones in their places, and holy councils 
 and attendants as becometh Gods of the 
 first rank. And every one shall have a 
 capital city, with subsidiaries according to 
 the number and place of their spirits and 
 mortal subjects. And every God and God- 
 dess shall manage his or her own kingdom 
 in his or her own way; but every one shall 
 nevertheless be tributary to my kingdom, 
 according to the exactions I put upon him 
 or them. That ye may resign the Diva, 
 and choose your assistants, before being 
 crowned, I declare a day of recreation, to 
 assemble at the trumpeter's call. 
 
306 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 Hereupon the hosts relaxed from duty 
 and made their resignations of the Diva, 
 and sent them with messengers to God in 
 Craoshivi, but not one of them mentioned 
 the new state of affairs resolved upon. On 
 the next day, at the trumpeter's call, they 
 assembled again; and Anuhasaj said unto 
 them: Come ye with me, and I will show 
 you the place of Hored and its boundaries; 
 for it shall not be my kingdom alone, but 
 yours also, for my kingdom shall be the 
 kingdom of your kingdoms. 
 
 And they entered an otevan, and, com- 
 ing in the fourth belt below meteoris, in 
 the sign of the twelfth arc of Chinvat; and 
 Anuhasaj said: From this time forth this 
 belt shall be called Hored, and it shall be 
 my place forever. It shall be the central 
 kingdom of all Earth's heavens. 
 
 And the multitude said: Hail, Kingdom 
 of Hored, the holy hill, place of the Most 
 High God! And it was known thereafter 
 as the belt of Hored, hill of God. It was 
 a three-quarters belt, and the base thereof 
 was ten thousand miles from the earth, and 
 the summit was fifteen thousand miles 
 high; habitable within and without. And 
 its ascending rank in the grades was twen- 
 ty, that is, it was easily habitable by spirits 
 that had attained to that grade; being 
 above the grade of infants and drujas, and 
 above the region of hells and knots, save 
 in cases of great panic. Now, from the 
 first place of Hored, where Anuhasaj 
 crowned himself, which was the eastern 
 base of the hill, to the place for his capital 
 city, he made a roadway and called it Loo- 
 hored, and it was the only opened roadway 
 to the kingdoms below. So it came to 
 pass Anuhasaj had two capital cities; and 
 the first was called the City of the Gate of 
 Heaven, that is, Anubi; and the other was 
 called the Place of Everlasting Rest, that 
 is, Sanc-tu. 
 
 Anuhasaj said to Anubi: Behold, the 
 City of the Gate of Heaven shall be thy 
 place. And thou shalt determine the rate 
 of all souls who desire to enter the Place 
 of Everlasting Rest. Thou shalt be judge 
 over them. And whosoever is not for me 
 shall not enter, but shall be cast into the 
 kingdoms of hada. And those that are for 
 me, thou shalt send unto me. And thou 
 shalt have a Holy Council of one hundred 
 thousand; and of examiners thou shalt 
 
 have one million. And thy capital shall 
 be guarded on every side but one, with pil- 
 lars of fire, so that none can pass but by 
 the Gate of Heaven. And of guardsmen 
 thou shalt have seven millions, divided into 
 seven watches, one for each day. Of mes- 
 sengers betwixt thy place and mine, thou 
 shalt have ten thousand; but betwixt thee 
 and the Gods and Goddesses of the lower 
 kingdoms, thou shalt have five hundred 
 thousand. But, of thine own choice, shall 
 be the number of es'enaurs, trumpeters and 
 marshals, and thy attendants also. And 
 all Gods and Goddesses coming to me, or 
 sending messengers to my holy place, shall 
 come through thy city, even through the 
 Gate of Heaven; and they shall come ac- 
 cording to certain rites and ceremonies 
 which I shall give unto thee. Come, there- 
 fore, and receive thy crown. 
 
 Thus was crowned Anubi; and after 
 him were crowned the other Gods and 
 Goddesses; and Anuhasaj bequeathed to 
 each one his own kingdom, according to 
 the custom of the ancients. And when 
 these matters were completed, he again 
 spake before them, saying: Behold, the ex- 
 ample I have made before you; even before 
 I provided myself for mine own kingdom I 
 have given unto every one all things re- 
 quried. It is meet and proper, therefore, 
 that ye contribute unto me and my place 
 workmen and materials, that I may build 
 in great glory also. For, as I am exalted, 
 and my kingdom made glorious, so have ye 
 whereof to preach gloriously to your inhab- 
 itants of the place in store for them. 
 
 Thus Anuhasaj placed the Gods and God- 
 desses under obligations to himself, and 
 they acquiesced in his proceedings, saying: 
 Nay, we will not only contribute men and 
 women for this purpose, but we will labor 
 with our own hands for the space of twen- 
 ty days, helping to build the capital city, 
 and to open roads, in all directions. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIV. 
 
 Anuhasaj never established the De'yiis 
 as projected at first, but took the name 
 De'yus upon himself, and became known in 
 the heavens by that name. When he had 
 thus established Hored in its entirety, he 
 gave a feast to the Gods and Goddesses; 
 and after it was ended, previous to their 
 departure, he spake before them, saying: 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 307 
 
 The time of duty is now upon you, and 
 upon me, the Lord your God, also. Be ye 
 then solicitous of these things I speak of, 
 that in the everlasting times we may be 
 brethren, and there shall be no other Gods, 
 but ourselves forever. Behold, I have 
 given into your hands to manage your own 
 kingdoms in your way; for which reason I 
 can no longer say, do ye this, or do ye 
 thus and so, for my affairs are in mine own 
 kingdom. But wherein I have wisdom I 
 freely impart, and the choice is yours, 
 whether ye will follow my advice or other- 
 wise, for ye are of equal rank with me. 
 And, moreover, my kingdom is dependent 
 upon you, and not yours upon mine. Hear 
 ye then my words as if I were but one in 
 a Council with wise Gods: 
 
 To overturn Jehovih and His domin- 
 ions on the earth and in these heavens will 
 be your first labor. And whenever corpor- 
 eans embrace Him, calling themselves 
 Faithists in the Great Spirit, or Faithists 
 in Jehovih, of Faithists in Ormazd, or by 
 any other name signifying the All Light, 
 or Unseen, or Person or Ever Presence, ye 
 shall pursue them, and destroy them off 
 the face of the earth. To do which ye shall 
 use the oracles, or prophets and seers, or 
 magicians, or inspiration; and ye shall set 
 the kings and queens of the earth to war 
 upon them, and spare them not, man, wo- 
 man or child. 
 
 And of spirits of the dead who fall into 
 your respective kingdoms, being Faithists, 
 bring them before Anubi and his hosts, 
 and he shall send them into regions of 
 darkness, saying to them: Behold, ye have 
 your Jehovih! And Anubi shall place 
 guards over them, and they shall not know 
 where to go, but will cry out in their dark- 
 ness. Whereupon they shall be sworn 
 into servitude in Hored to the Lord your 
 God forever, and become slaves within your 
 kingdoms. 
 
 And ye shall teach both mortals and 
 spirits that Hored is the All Highest hea- 
 ven, and that it is the place of the All 
 Highest God, even De'yus. For them to 
 attain which, ye shall exact servitude of 
 them in your heavens accordingly as ye 
 may desire. 
 
 In the rites and ceremonies, both in 
 your heavens and on the earth, shall ye en- 
 force the exchanging of words signifying 
 
 Great Spirit to words signifying Lord God r 
 who is of the form and size of a man, de- 
 claring of a truth that I sit on my throne 
 in judgment of the world, for it is mine, 
 and ye are one with me. And all songs 
 of praise shall be changed; and prayers and 
 beseechings to your God, instead of Jeho- 
 vih, or Ormazd, or the Great Spirit. For 
 both mortals and angels shall be made to 
 know that he is my enemy, leading my peo- 
 ple astray. And as to the prophets and 
 seers on the earth, who will persist in 
 preaching or singing to the Great Spirit, 
 ye shall incite torture and punishment and 
 death unto him. And whether I be De'- 
 yus, or God, or the Lord God, or the All 
 Perfect, me only shall they worship, for- 
 ever. And my place, Hored, shall be the 
 sacred hill of God, forever! And none shall 
 approach me but by crawling on their bel- 
 lies; for I will so exalt my lights that none 
 can stand before me. 
 
 When the Lord God had finished his 
 discourse, the other Gods responded in 
 love and adoration. Thus ended the feast, 
 and, according to the rites in other hea- 
 vens, the Gods and Goddesses went and 
 sat at the foot of the throne, and De'yus 
 came down and took them by the hand, one 
 at a time, and raised them up, saying: 
 Arise, O God, and in my name, and wis- 
 dom, and power, go thy way. 
 
 CHAPTER XXV. 
 
 Swift messengers coursing the heavens, 
 from far-off etherean worlds, bound for 
 destinations remote, passed over the re- 
 gions of Hored; and the high-raised travel- 
 ers felt the discordant plots of satan's Lord 
 God and his hosts, thus bent to overthrow 
 the Great Spirit's happy world. And so 
 they sent word to Cpenta-armij, through 
 whose fields the solar serpent moved along. 
 And her Most High Council, one with the 
 Creator, cast about to know the cause and 
 treatment of the dastardly outrage. 
 
 Then spake Jehovih to His Daughter, 
 Chieftainess, saying: The Lord God was 
 duly honored in My name, and swore be- 
 fore Me to serve faithfully, forever, by his 
 highest light. Hold thou him to his pur- 
 pose, and bind him in the world he hath 
 assumed to rule for his own glory. And 
 to his fellow-Gods, conspirators against 
 Me, Who brought them into being, give 
 
308 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARM1J 
 
 thou them full sway to destroy My wor- 
 shippers. Let them raise the name of their 
 God, and bait mortal kings and queens to 
 glut themselves in the havoc of My chosen, 
 the Faithists. 
 
 Earth neareth her greatest corpor- 
 eal growth, and these self-assuming Gods 
 shall build monuments through their mor- 
 tal emissaries, in the greatest divisions of 
 the earth; temples and pyramids, and ora- 
 cle-palaces, which shall stand thousands of 
 years as testimony of the audacity of 
 Gods and Saviors. To honor whom, the 
 Lord God hath sworn to make angels and 
 men suppliant slaves in heaven and earth. 
 For I will use the corporeal temples and 
 pyramids they shall build on the earth 
 at the expense of My chosen, as testimony, 
 in coming ages, of the oppression in the 
 hadan-heavenly kingdoms of these self- 
 Gods. Till which time I cannot teach mor- 
 tals of the vanity of the lower heavens, 
 save in the deserted ruins of their molder- 
 ing monuments. For in kosmon, mortals 
 shall know that even as the earth hath been 
 a place of foolish sacrifice to persons born 
 of woman, so were My heavens debauched 
 in that day by similar oppression and cru- 
 elty. 
 
 Let him who is falsely crowned Osiris, 
 build in the Osirian field, and him who is 
 proclaimed De'yus, build in the hadan field, 
 for the time shall come when these testi- 
 monies shall be required in the sum of 
 earth and heaven. For I will show them 
 that without an All Highest Person there 
 is no resurrection for angels or men. Of 
 which they that are slaughtered, ten thou- 
 sand million, and bound by the Lord God, 
 shall swear, in kosmon, the fall of all things 
 save Me. 
 
 Down to the lower heavens, to God in 
 Craoshivi, sent Cpenta-armij swift mes- 
 sengers, with the words of Jehovih, com- 
 forting to God and his hosts, as to the 
 wide plans on which the Father layeth the 
 destinies of worlds. And God received 
 them, and now comprehended why, alas, 
 his Diva came not, nor answered his call 
 but by resigning. 
 
 But God, the true ruler of heaven and 
 earth, now saw how the prosperity of the 
 indulged heaven had made bad men out of 
 most holy Gods, even as prosperity on the 
 earth closeth up man's eyes against his 
 
 Creator, making himself an egotist in self, 
 and vociferous as to Jehovih's shortcom- 
 ings, according to man's views. And God 
 remembered how he had prayed for the 
 continuation of the light in heaven, which 
 Jehovih granted him; and he repented now, 
 saying: 
 
 O Jehovih, why said I not: Thy will 
 be done; let darkness come! Had I not 
 seen on the earth how night must follow 
 day, and winter follow summer; that I 
 must need pray for endless light in a hea- 
 ven where Thy sons and daughters are as 
 yet but babes in the time and course of 
 worlds? Mine own judgment should have 
 shown me that seasons of darkness should 
 follow seasons of light in Thy lower hea- 
 vens. For, then, had these half-tried Lords 
 and Gods stopped to consider ere they 
 rushed into so mad a scheme. 
 
 God called together the Holy Council 
 in Craoshivi, and told them of the words of 
 the Creator, through His High-Raised 
 Daughter. Then the Council spake, all 
 who chose, and the thirty milions listened. 
 And, meanwhile, messengers fresh from 
 Hored, the seat of rebellion, came in, 
 bringing full news to Craoshivi of the pro- 
 ceedings of the Lord God, alias De'yus, 
 and his self-Gods and Goddesses. When 
 the full particulars had been related, and the 
 Council had spoken upon it, then the light 
 of Jehovih came upon God, and God said: 
 
 In the name of our Father, I will speak 
 to these Gods and Lords and acquaint 
 them with Jehovih's words. Yea, I will 
 entreat them to return even as they were. 
 
 Then God, overwhelmed by the terrible 
 adversity of the heavens intrusted to his 
 keeping, as in a small degree the captain 
 of a merchant's ship, far out at sea, meet- 
 ing with a mishap of broken masts, stript 
 to the hulk, and rudder gone, powerless to 
 save, feeleth the burning shame of incom- 
 petence before mariners, so God, before 
 the High-Raised Chiefs of the etherean 
 worlds, must helplessly view his shattered 
 kingdoms. With great sorrow God sent 
 word to De'yus and his Gods, of Jehovih's 
 warning; and he pleaded for them to re- 
 turn, as a father pleadeth to a wayward 
 son. Off went the messengers swiftly; and 
 God, even though long schooled to ad- 
 verse trials and suspensions, burned with 
 impatience for his messengers to return, 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 309 
 
 hoping that his sweet pleadings might yet 
 reverse the scenes. 
 
 Then came back the messengers, empty 
 handed! Not one of the truant Gods had 
 deigned to answer them. And God wept, 
 scarce believing his messengers, that so 
 great an insult could be heaped upon him, 
 who had done nothing whereof any one 
 could complain. Then Jehovih came and 
 spake to God, saying: Weep not, My Son! 
 He who followeth his highest light from 
 day to day, great is his glory; and in what- 
 soever he loseth he shall regain a thou- 
 sand-fold. Behold, I will bring love to 
 thee that thou knowest not of: Remember 
 thou, as this season is upon Earth and 
 her heavens, even so do I send a season 
 like unto it upon all My worlds. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVI. 
 
 In course of time, word came to Ahura, 
 in Vara-pishanaha, of the proceedings of 
 the Lord God, now styled De'yus, and of 
 the revolt of all the lowest heavens in one 
 fell swoop. And Ahura remembered his 
 own shortcomings, thousands of years ago, 
 and the terrible bondage that came upon 
 him in the end. And he knew De'yus, 
 who had been a sub-God under him hun- 
 dreds of years, the same Anuhasaj, who 
 had tried to break the lines in the arc 
 of Spe-ta, in the resurrection of Ailkin. So 
 Ahura prayed to Jehovih, before the Holy 
 Council in Vara-pishanaha, to know what 
 he should say or do in the matter, or if 
 nothing at all. Jehovih answered him, say- 
 ing: 
 
 My Son, thou art no longer a child. 
 Address thou the Lord God, or not ad- 
 dress him, as seemeth fit in thine own eyes. 
 Behold, I suffered thee to try the same 
 road, that thou mightest understand Me 
 and My kingdoms. 
 
 Thereupon Ahura determined to send 
 word to De'yus, in his own name, and in 
 his own way. This, then, is what he sent: 
 
 To Anuhasaj, my one-time sub-God, 
 greeting to thee in justice and wisdom. 
 Wert thou inexperienced I would treat 
 thee with respect. But thou knowest thou 
 art false. And because thou art false, thou 
 shalt reap in falsehood. Behold, the day 
 shall come when thy Gods will desert 
 thee; for such is the tree thou hast planted 
 in thy kingdoms. This rule holdeth on 
 
 earth and in all the heavens. Can that 
 which is unborn, restrain its own birth? 
 Or that which is not quickened into life, 
 restrain the Creator's hand? So also is it 
 of him that soweth for self; he shall reap 
 a harvest of selfs. And thy Gods will be 
 for themselves, and thy marshals, and all 
 thy hosts; every one pulling in an opposite 
 way. 
 
 Not suddenly will these things come 
 upon thee; for thou shalt have a mighty 
 kingdom and great honor and glory, such 
 as no other God before thee hath had in 
 these heavens. And thy people shall be 
 jealous to serve thee, striving with all their 
 might to outdo one another in worshipful 
 obedience to thee. And thy name, even 
 the names of De'yus and Lord God, shall 
 be worshipped for a season, on the earth 
 above all names that have ever been given 
 in falsehood. And yet the time shall come 
 that thy names shall be cast out of earth 
 and heaven. Even the deeds which thou 
 shalt do will be the means of making thy 
 names execrable. 
 
 Think not, O my Lord God, that thou 
 wilt deal righteously, and keep thyself holy. 
 Behold, I, too, was a revolted God that sat 
 up a kingdom for mine own glory. And, 
 in the time of the beginning thereof, I was 
 most resolute to practice righteousness in 
 all things. But the surroundings over- 
 came me; for as I was allied to self, so 
 selfish officers under me beset me on all 
 occasions, and I was forced to find new 
 places and new glories for them, or, by 
 their grumbling, they would sow my fields 
 with mutiny. I was powerless in the great 
 kingdom I built up. Thou knowest the re- 
 sult. Thinkest thou the larger thy king- 
 dom, the greater will be thy power to avert 
 thy fall? My experience was the opposite 
 of this. 
 
 I admonish thee in wisdom and justice; 
 I know thou art doing these things not for 
 the raising up of the fruit of the earth, 
 but for thine own aggrandizement and 
 glory. And I say unto thee, the time will 
 surely come when thy Gods will do the 
 same things against thee. And in that 
 time the wise and learned and truthful will 
 fly from thee, but the drujas and slaves 
 will not leave thee; but thou shalt be en- 
 vironed with them, and cast into hell. 
 Thou shalt heap misery upon millions of 
 
310 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 thy subjects, but thou shalt not escape the 
 hand of justice: Thou shalt reimburse 
 them every one. Thou hast cast thy net 
 in shoal water; thine own feet shall be tan- 
 gled in the meshes thereof. 
 
 Behold, I, too, once craved a great 
 heavenly kingdom; now I weep day and 
 night because I have it. And thou, too, 
 shalt experience the time of scalding 
 tears, to be rid of that which thou cravest 
 now. Yet, how else shall the dumb be rais- 
 ed in heaven? Who else shall minister to 
 the wandering spirits that overspread the 
 earth? And the evil drujas? And the lust- 
 ers, and foul-smelling? Shall I say to thee: 
 Go on, thou self-presuming Lord God, the 
 Great Spirit hath a rod for thee! Yea, He 
 answereth the ambition of men and Gods 
 sooner or later; in a way they think not of, 
 He bringeth them up with a short turn. 
 
 Thou art like a man desirous of great 
 bulk, that shutteth up the pores of the skin 
 of his flesh; thou seekest to shut up the 
 course of the heavens that riseth out of 
 the earth, upward forever. And as the one 
 choketh up with a foul smell, and dieth, 
 so shall it be with thy kingdom. Behold, 
 the way of everlasting light is outward, on- 
 ward, away from the corporeal worlds; 
 but the way of darkness is toward the 
 earth. Sayest thou the spirits of the dead 
 shall not rise away from the earth? And 
 in their ignorance of the higher heavens, 
 become guides to mortals! Behold, thou 
 hast traveled far; and thou struttest about, 
 saying: It is enough; I, the Lord God, 
 have traveled in the far-off heavens; stay 
 ye at home, and work for me forever, that 
 I may be glorified! 
 
 Wilt thou say: I, the Lord God, I, De'- 
 yus, am the only Son of the Void! Behold, 
 my kingdom lieth in a little corner! Come 
 and worship me, the Lord God, and ye 
 shall see me on my throne! 
 
 Or wilt thou say: The impersonal 
 space, senselessness, by accident fructified 
 itself in corporeal substance, and became 
 me, the Lord God, in size of a full-grown 
 man, and then I created all the creations! 
 Wherefore let men and angels fall down 
 and worship the man, De'yus, who dwell- 
 eth in Hored, a ripple in the lowest hea- 
 vens! 
 
 I profess not to love thee, Anuhasaj, 
 but justice toward them beneath thee. For 
 
 thou shalt hoodwink mortals, and even an- 
 gels of little experience, to believe thou wert 
 the very Creator; but thy Gods know thee 
 as to who thou art, and the Gods above 
 thee know also. All thy days at most have 
 been but two thousand and seven hundred 
 years! And the time shall come upon thee 
 that thou shalt be forced by thine own fault 
 to assert thou wert the very Creator, 
 Whose worlds have run thousands of mill- 
 ions of years! Who can carry so great a 
 falsehood as this! And not carrying it, it 
 shall fall down on thee and on thy people, 
 and take root and spread abroad till thy 
 place and thy Gods' places are the founda- 
 tions of nothing but lies. For the rule 
 holdeth in all places, high and low, that 
 according to the seed sown so shall be the 
 harvest, whether good or bad. Nor can any 
 man or God alter this rule, or bend it to 
 the right or left. 
 
 If it be Jehovih's will that some one 
 shall make the name of God, and Lord 
 God, and De'yus, execrable on earth and 
 in heaven, it may be well that thou hast put 
 thyself into the yoke to that end. Yet I 
 would not have thee so, could I prevent it. 
 
 Thou wert one time my sub-God, and I 
 remember thee well; thou wert young and 
 full of promise. My judgment spake to 
 me of thee, saying: A sub-God, to be 
 proud of for thousands of years! But my 
 judgment was not Jehovih's. My love for 
 thee was early nipped in the bud. For thou 
 wert forever talking of thyself. Thou 
 madest thy neighbor Gods sick by forever 
 relating thy experiences and thy prophe- 
 cies as to what thou wouldst do. And 
 when Jehovih encompassed me about in 
 mine own evil, thou didst tantalize me be- 
 cause I had not followed thy advice. Now 
 I repeat unto the, I could not follow any 
 one's advice. And thou, too, shalt be en- 
 vironed about, and be unable to follow any 
 one's advice. For such is the bondage of 
 the Godhead, save we cut ourselves loose, 
 making Jehovih the Head and Front, and 
 ourselves His servants. For the God 
 should not only be the greatest in his 
 kingdom, but the most menial servant of 
 his people; forever throwing off responsi- 
 bility, and forever urging his subjects not 
 to idolize him, but Jehovih! Forever 
 showing them that their God is nothing 
 more than themselves; that they must 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-AEMIJ 
 
 311 
 
 stand alone, and become, not slaves to 
 their God, but independent beings full of 
 manliness, having faith in the Great Spirit 
 only. By which the God bindeth not him- 
 self nor his people; giving full sway to the 
 love of liberty in every soul, but in tender- 
 ness and love that harmonize with Jeho- 
 vih's proceedings. 
 
 Now when thou earnest back to me after 
 I was delivered out of hell, and my king- 
 doms raised to Vara-pishanaha, thou didst 
 profess to understand these things, and of 
 a truth, to love this philosophy. And thou 
 didst pray fervently to Jehovih, repenting 
 of thy former ways, taking part in the 
 rites and ceremonies. Then I opened by 
 heart to thee. My much love for thee, as 
 when I first knew thee, returned upon me a 
 thousand fold. In joy and in tears I fell 
 upon thee, and I praised Jehovih that He 
 had sent me so sweet a love. In each oth- 
 er's arms we repented and we swore our 
 mutual love forever, then we saw the way 
 of Jehovih clear, and He made us strong 
 and wise, full of rejoicing. 
 
 And we fell to, hand in hand, laboring 
 with drujas, dark and most foul, teaching 
 them day and night, forever repeating to 
 their stupid minds. And when we were 
 both well nigh exhausted thousands of 
 times, and we withdrew for a short time, 
 we rested in each other's arms! Then 
 we reasoned and philosophised on the 
 plans and glories of Jehovih's works; 
 hopefully watching signs of prog- 
 ress in our wards. O the glory of those 
 days! O the richness of thy wisdom and 
 love to me in those days of darkness! For 
 a hundred years we toiled thus, and I was 
 blessed, and my people were blessed by 
 thee, thou star of our love. Then we raised 
 them up, my wards, four thousand millions, 
 were lifted a small way up out of darkness, 
 and our far-off Goddess, Atcheni, needed 
 one who was great, like unto thee, to travel 
 in other regions. And I parted with thee. 
 My soul was as if divided in twain. For 
 hundreds of years thou traveledst and be- 
 came rich in knowledge; but not to return 
 to me, to my bursting heart! What more 
 can I say? Thou art in thy place, and I 
 am in mine; but Jehovih is with Wisdom, 
 Love, Truth and Fidelity, for these are 
 His abiding places. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVII. 
 
 De'yus replied not to Ahura, God of 
 Vara-pishanaha, but sent the messenger 
 away without a word. And satan came 
 again to De'yus, saying: Send word to 
 thy Gods to be firm, for this day hath 
 Ahura and the God of Craoshivi beset 
 them to return to Jehovih's worship. 
 
 De'yus feared nevertheless, so he pon- 
 dered deeply as to what was the best 
 thing he could do. Satan said: O Lord 
 God, this is the best thing thou canst 
 do: For all the Divan laws destroyed, 
 make thou De'yus laws instead. Why shalt 
 thou follow in the footsteps of the ancients? 
 
 The Lord God said: Yea, yea! I will 
 not be bound by the laws of the ancients, 
 but I will have laws of mine own, and they 
 shall be called the Laws of the Lord God. 
 
 Satan said: These, then, shall be thy 
 words, O Lord God, which shall be the 
 laws of De'yus, to wit: 
 
 I, the Lord God, have made self-preser- 
 vation the first law. 
 
 Thou shalt love the Lord thy God with 
 all thy soul, thy heart and mind. Him only 
 shalt thou worship now, henecforth and 
 forever. 
 
 Thou shalt not worship Jehovih; He is 
 void; He is nothing. Nor shalt thou wor- 
 ship any idol of anything, on the earth or 
 in the heavens of the earth. Whoever wor- 
 shippeth anything save me, the Lord God, 
 shall be put to death. 
 
 Behold, I am a God of justice and 
 truth; I am a God of anger; vengeance is 
 mine. I have a gate at the hill of Hored; 
 my guardians are cherubims and seraphims, 
 with flaming swords. Whosoever raiseth 
 his arm against me shall be destroyed. 
 
 Whosoever putteth the mark of the cir- 
 cumcision on a male child shall be put to 
 death. 
 
 Neither shall any man do evil for evil's 
 sake; nor by violence oppress any man, 
 woman or child. 
 
 Whoever exalteth me on earth, him 
 will I exalt in heaven. Whoever over- 
 throweth other Gods, save the Lord God, 
 who is the De'yus of heaven and earth, him 
 will I exalt in heaven. 
 
 Now it came to pass that these decrees 
 of the false God were established on the 
 earth. And the name of De'yus became 
 
312 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ABMIJ 
 
 paramount to all other Gods in Vind'yu 
 and eastern Par'si'e; and the name Te-in, 
 in JafFeth, and the name Lord God, in Ar- 
 abinya. And these peoples had now a new 
 sacred book given to them. And yet all 
 of these names represented one angel only, 
 Anuhasaj, a one-time mortal. 
 
 Prior to this the Faithists on earth were 
 taught non-resistance; to ignore leadership; 
 to return good for evil, and to dwell to- 
 gether as brethren. But now, because of 
 the decrees of Anuhasaj, alias De'yus, 
 Faithists were led astray, becoming war- 
 riors, and aspiring to become kings and 
 rulers. Nevertheless, many of them still 
 called themselves by names signifying 
 Faithists, but changing their belief from the 
 Great Spirit to a God in shape and figure 
 of a man, with attributes like a mortal. 
 And mortals in these countries made im- 
 ages of cherubims and seraphims, having 
 flaming swords; and images of Anubi hold- 
 ing a pair of scales. 
 
 In addition to these earthly decrees, An- 
 uhasaj, alias the Lord God, made heavenly 
 decrees betwixt his own kingdom and the 
 kingdoms of his Gods. The chief decrees 
 were: That, .for the first one hundred 
 years, all angels borne up out of the earth 
 shall fall into their respective divisions, 
 and shall belong as subjects to my Gods, 
 to be appropriated by them in their own 
 way. That after the hundredth year, my 
 Gods shall deliver to me one-tenth of their 
 subjects of the highest grades. 
 
 De'yus made two hundred laws in ref- 
 erence to the kingdoms of his Gods, as to 
 their boundaries and ornamentation, pro- 
 viding great pageantry and countless num- 
 bers of heralds, staff-bearers, musicians, 
 and players of oratory, besides innumera- 
 ble servants and decorators, so that the pa- 
 geantry might be in great splendor. When 
 he had completed these forms and system 
 of government, he sent an invitation to 
 his Gods to again feast with him, that they 
 might ratify his laws and receive them. 
 And the laws of De'yus were ratified and 
 accepted by the Gods; and they went away 
 rejoicing, returning to their respective 
 kingdoms, where they fell to work at once 
 to provide themselves in their glory. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVIIL 
 
 Thus was established the Confederacy of 
 Selfs; that is, the false Lord God, and his 
 
 false Gods, were as many kingdoms united 
 into one; yet every God was secretly 
 sworn unto himself, for his own glory. 
 From the time of the beginning of the re- 
 volt until it was completed as a confederacy 
 was sixty and four days, and the number of 
 inhabitants in these heavens at that time 
 was eight thousand million, men, women 
 and children. And they were well ordered, 
 in nurseries, and hospitals, and schools, 
 and colleges, and factories, and in building 
 ships, and in surveying and in road-mak- 
 ing, and all such other occupations as be- 
 long to the lower heavens. Four thousand 
 million of these were presently sent to 
 Hored, to De'yus. 
 
 De'yus at once set about the work laid 
 out, and issued a decree commanding the 
 destruction of all otevans and other vessels 
 plying to the upper plateau, Craoshivi; and 
 commanding the seizing and destroying of 
 fire-ships or other vessels that might come 
 from the upper regions down to the lower. 
 De'yus said: My people shall not ascend 
 to other heavens. I have made the earth 
 and this heaven sufficient unto all happi- 
 ness and glory. Whosoever buildeth a 
 vessel, saying: I will ascend; or if he say 
 not, but my judges discover him, he shall 
 be cast into the hadan region, prepared for 
 him. And if a man or a woman preach in 
 my heavens, and say: Behold, there is a 
 higher heaven, that person shall be cast 
 into hell, as my son judgeth. 
 
 And I, De'yus, command the locking 
 up of all the books in the libraries of my 
 heavens that in any way teach of Jehovih 
 or Ormazd, or of heavenly kingdoms above 
 mine or greater. For I, the Lord God, 
 will have but one kingdom, and I will draw 
 all people into it to abide with me forever. 
 And my Gods, and my marshals, and gen- 
 erals and captains, shall take their hosts 
 and go around about the regions of Hored, 
 and make a clean roadway, and cut off all 
 connection with the outer kingdoms. And 
 they shall place in the roadway around my 
 heavens a standing army, sufficient to guard 
 my kingdom and my Gods' kingdoms for- 
 ever. And no man-angel, nor woman-an- 
 gel, shall pass outward beyond my roadway 
 forever. 
 
 These things were carried out, save as 
 to the libraries. But there were destroyed 
 four thousand otevans and other ascend- 
 ing ships; and of the places for manufac- 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 313 
 
 turing ships for the outer heavens there 
 were destroyed more than seven hundred. 
 And there were thus thrown out of employ- 
 ment seven hundred million, men and wo- 
 men! And many of these were compelled 
 to go to Hored, where they were assorted 
 as to grade, and put to work, beautifying 
 the capital and Council house and palace 
 of the Lord God, the false. Others were 
 impressed into the standing army, being 
 allotted seasons and years. 
 
 After the outward extreme of hada was 
 thus secured in every way, De'yus turned 
 to the interior. He said: Now will I hide 
 such text-books in my heavenly places, 
 as relate to higher kingdoms and to Jeho- 
 vih; for from this time forth He is my 
 enemy and I am His. Upon my own self 
 have I sworn it; the name of Jehovih and 
 of Ormazd shall be destroyed in heaven 
 and earth; and my name, De'yus, even the 
 Lord God, shall stand above all else. 
 
 For sixty days, the armies of destruc- 
 tion traversed the lowest heavens, high 
 and low, far and near; and they hid away 
 many of the records, and books, and maps, 
 relating to the higher atmospherea and to 
 the etherean worlds beyond; and in sixty 
 days the work of destruction was complete 
 in these heavens, and there was nothing 
 left within sight to prove or to teach the 
 higher heavens, or of Jehovih, or Or- 
 mazd. 
 
 The Lord God, the false, said: Let my 
 name and my place, even Hored, be re- 
 placed instead of those destroyed, for I 
 will make the name De'yus to rule in one- 
 half of the world, and the name Lord God 
 to rule in the other half. The inhabitants 
 of heaven and earth shall know where to 
 find me, and shall behold my person, and 
 witness the strength of my hand. Yea, 
 they shall know my pleasure and ny dis- 
 pleasure, and serve me in fear and trem- 
 bling. 
 
 And the books in the schools and col- 
 leges of these heavens were thus made to 
 rate De'yus, and the Lord God as the All 
 Highest, Most Sacred, Most Holy. When 
 these things were established thus far, De'- 
 yus gave a great feast, and brought into 
 his companionship all the valorous fight- 
 ers and destroyers that had proved them- 
 selves great in fulfilling his command- 
 ments. In the meantime, the laborers and 
 
 officers in charge had extended and beau- 
 tified the palace and capital of the Lord 
 God in Hored beyond anything ever seen 
 in these heavens. So that at the time of 
 this feast, the place was already one of 
 magnificence and glory. And the order, 
 and temper, and discipline of the officers, 
 and servants, more than one million, who 
 had charge of preparing and conducting 
 the feast, were so great that the assembled 
 Gods and great generals, and governors, 
 and marshals, and captains, for a long 
 while, did nothing but ejaculate applause 
 and astonishment. 
 
 Besides these, De'yus had provided re- 
 ceiving hosts, fifty thousand, and of es'- 
 enaurs and trumpeters half a million, and 
 proclaiming heralds one hundred thousand; 
 and the latter, when conducting the dis- 
 tinguished visitors into the presence of 
 De'yus, proclaimed them, amidst the ap- 
 plause of the Council, such honor surpass- 
 ing anything that any of them had ever 
 witnessed. 
 
 The substance of the feast, being above 
 grade twenty, which was above the animal 
 region, was, consequently, of vegetable 
 and fruit es'pa from the earth, previously 
 brought by trained shippers and workers, 
 for this especial occasion. But there was 
 no es'pa of flesh or fish present on the ta- 
 bles; but an abundance of the es'pa of 
 wine, and this was called su-be. 
 
 The walls of the chamber of the feast 
 were ornamented with sprays of colored 
 fire, and from the floor of the chamber 
 there rose upward innumerable fountains 
 of perfume, which were also es'pa brought 
 up from the earth, and forced up in the 
 fountains by more than one million ser- 
 vants, impressed into service from the re- 
 gions of shippers, which had been destroy- 
 ed previously. 
 
 At the feast, with the Lord God and his 
 Gods, there were in all one thousand, two 
 hundred guests; and the feast lasted one 
 whole day, and the Gods and guests ate 
 and drank to their hearts' content, and 
 there were not a few who felt the intoxica- 
 tion of the rich su-be. When the feast 
 was ended, De'yus, through his marshals, 
 signified that he would speak before them; 
 and when quiet was restored, he said: 
 
 With greater joy hath any one in a mat- 
 ter than to make others happy! Because 
 
314 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 ye served me, doing my commandments, 
 behold, I have served you. My feast hath 
 been your feast; my substance have I given 
 unto you, that ye may rejoice in the glory 
 I have received from your hands. Yet 
 think not that the Lord, your God, so end- 
 eth this proceeding: I will not so end it. 
 I have commanded you here that I may 
 honor those that deserve honor from me, 
 your God. My Gods have also great ex- 
 altation in the labor ye have done in my 
 heavens, for my heavens are their hea- 
 vens, and yours also. Because ye have 
 destroyed the ascension, the most worth- 
 less and foolish of things, and cleared away 
 the rubbish of my heavens, ye have also 
 prepared a place for endless glory for 
 yourselves. For which reason, and in jus- 
 tice to you, I have appointed this time to 
 promote you all, according to your great 
 achievements. Nor shall ye fall back on 
 my promotion, resting in ease; for I have 
 a greater labor for you, as well as greater 
 honor and glory. 
 
 Behold, I have commanded the earth 
 and her dominions; and ye, my Gods, shall 
 subjugate her to my name and power. 
 And ye that have proved yourselves most 
 valiant in heaven shall be their chosen offi- 
 cers to go down to the earth in my name, 
 with millions of my heavenly soldiers, to 
 plan and fix the way of mortals unto my 
 hand. As ye have cast out the names of 
 Jehovih and Ormazd in heaven, even so 
 shall ye cast them out on the earth. 
 
 Remember ye, I am a God of anger; I 
 have declared was against all ungodliness 
 on the earth. Whoever worshippeth the 
 Great Spirit under the name Jehovih, or 
 Ormazd, shall be put to death, both men 
 and women. Only little children shall ye 
 spare, and of them shall ye make slaves 
 and eunuchs and whatsoever else that shall 
 profit my kingdoms. Whether they have 
 an idol of stone, or of wood, or of gold, or 
 of copper, they shall be destroyed. Neither 
 shall it save them to make an idol of the 
 Unseen; for such is even more offensive 
 in my sight than the others. Nor will I 
 leave alive one Faithist on the face of the 
 earth. To accomplish which, my Gods 
 shall select ye who are of my feast; accord- 
 ing to their rank shall they choose; and 
 when ye are thus divided and selected, ye 
 shall receive badges from my hand, and re- 
 
 pair with my Gods to the places and ser- 
 vice they desire. And when ye are come 
 down to the earth, ye shall possess your- 
 selves of the oracles and places of worship, 
 driving hence all other angels, and Gods, 
 and Lords, and familiars. And when mor- 
 tals come to consult the spirits ye shall 
 answer them in your own way in order to 
 carry out my commandments. 
 
 And when ye find prophets and seers, 
 who accomplish by the Unseen, who have 
 with them spirits belonging to the king- 
 dom of Craoshivi, ye shall drive away such 
 spirits and obsess the prophet or seer in 
 your own way. But if ye cannot drive 
 hence the Ormazdian angel, then shall ye 
 go to the depths of hell in hada and bring 
 a thousand spirits of darkness, who are 
 foul and well skilled in torment, and ye 
 shall cast them upon that prophet until he 
 is mad. But if it so happen that the proph- 
 et or seer be so protected that spirits of 
 darkness cannot reach him, then shall ye 
 send evil spirits in advance of him to the 
 place he frequenteth, and they shall inoc- 
 ulate the place with virus that shall poison 
 him to death. But if a prophet of Jehovih 
 repent and renounce the Great Spirit, and 
 accept De'yus, or the Lord God, then shall 
 ye drive all evil away from him, and put a 
 guard around about him, for he shall be 
 my subject in time to come. 
 
 And whether ye reach a king of the 
 earth by means of the oracles, or through 
 prophets and seers, or by obsession, it mat- 
 tereth not; but ye shall come to him by 
 some means, either when he lieth asleep or 
 is awake, and ye shall inspire him with the 
 doctrines and the love of the Lord your 
 God. And he shall rise up in great war, 
 and pursue all people who do not profess 
 De'yiis, or the Lord your God; for he shall 
 be as an instrument in your hands to do my 
 will. 
 
 When De'yus ceased speaking, the Gods 
 immediately made their selections, and the 
 generals and captains were thus allotted 
 to new places. And now the attendants 
 carried away the tables of the feast, and 
 the Gods, each with his captains and gen- 
 erals, faced toward De'yus, and formed 
 twelve rows; whereupon De'yus conferred 
 badges, as previously promised. De'yus 
 then departed to the Council chamber, and 
 took his seat on the throne. The guests, 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 315 
 
 and Gods, and Councilors, entered the 
 south gate, and went and stood in the 
 midst of the floor of the chamber; where- 
 upon the Lord God saluted them, Warriors 
 of God, and they answered in the Sign of 
 Taurus, signifying, to enforce righteous- 
 ness, for the image of a bull was one of 
 the signs above the throne. 
 
 These, then, are the names of the Gods 
 and Goddesses, with their generals and 
 captains, that were empowered in heaven 
 to go down to the earth to subjugate it 
 unto the Lord God, the false: 
 
 The Gods and Goddesses were; Anubi; 
 Hikas, now called Te-in; Wotchissij, now 
 called Sudga; Che-le-mung, now called 
 Osiris; Baal, Ashtaroth, Fo-ebe, Hes-loo, 
 He-loo, Orion, Hebe and Valish. 
 
 Their generals were: Hoin, Oo-da, Jah, 
 Knowteth, June, Pluton-ya, Loo-Chaing, 
 Wah-ka, Posee-ya-don, Dosh-to, Eurga- 
 roth, Neuf, Apollo-ya, Suts, Karusa, My- 
 ion, Hefa-yis-tie, Petoris, Ban, Ho-jou-ya, 
 Mung-jo, Ura-na, Oke-ya-nos, Egupt, Hi- 
 ram, T'cro-no, Ares, Yube, Feh-tus, Don, 
 Dan, Ali-jah, Sol, Sa-mern, Thu-wowtch, 
 Hua-ya, Afro-dite, Han, Weel, Haing-le, 
 Wang-le, Ar-ti-mis, Ga-song-ya, Lowthar, 
 Pu, Tochin-woh-to-gow, Ben, Aaron, Nair- 
 wiche, Gai-ya, Te-sin, Argo, Hadar, Atstsil, 
 E-shong, Daridat, Udan, Nadar, Bog-wi, 
 She-ug-ga, Brihat, Zeman, Asrig, Oyeb, 
 Chan-lwang, Sishi, Jegat, At-ye-na and 
 Dyu. 
 
 Their captains were: Penbu, Josh, Yam- 
 yam, Holee-tsu, Yoth, Gamba, Said, Drat- 
 ta, Yupe-set, Wag, Mar, Luth, Mak-ka, 
 Chutz, Hi-rack-to, Vazenno, Hasuck, 
 Truth, Maidyar, Pathemaydn, Kop, Cpen- 
 ta-mainyas, Try-sti-ya, Peter, Houab, Van- 
 aiti, Craosha, Visper, Seam, Plow-ya, Yact- 
 ta-roth, Abua, Zoatha, Kacan-cat, Hovain, 
 Myazd-Loo, Haur, Abel, Openista, Isaah, 
 Potonas, Kiro, Wishka-dore, Urvash, Ash- 
 esnoga, Cavo, Kalamala-hoodon, Lutz- 
 rom, Wab, Daeri, Kus, Tsoo-man-go and 
 Le-W T iang. 
 
 Besides these, there were one thousand 
 officers of lower rank; and now, when they 
 were sealed as to rank, place and allot- 
 ment, they withdrew; and De'yus gave a 
 day of recreation that the Gods with their 
 officers might make the selections from the 
 multitude, for their private soldiers. And 
 in one day's time the armies were made up, 
 
 three thousand million angels, and they 
 departed down to the earth to destroy the 
 Faithists and the names Jehovih and Or- 
 mazd, and establish De'yus, otherwise 
 the Lord God, the false. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIX. 
 
 God, in Craoshivi, bewailed heaven and 
 earth. He said: Great Jehovih, how I 
 have failed in Thy kingdom! Behold, Thou 
 gavest into my keeping Earth and her 
 heavens, and they have gone astray! 
 
 Jehovih said: Behold the plan of My 
 government; which is, to come against 
 nothing in heaven or earth; to seize noth- 
 ing by the head and turn it round by vio- 
 lence to go the other way. Though I am 
 the power that created them, and am the 
 Ever Present that moveth them along, I 
 gave to them to be Gods, with liberty to 
 find their own direction. 
 
 I created many trees in My garden, the 
 greatest of which is the tree of happiness. 
 And I called out unto all the living to come 
 and dwell in the shade of that tree, and 
 partake of its fruits and its perfumes. But 
 they run after prickers and they scourge 
 themselves; and then, alas, they fall to 
 cursing Me, and accusing Me of shortness 
 in My government. I confined them in 
 their mother's womb for a season, showing 
 them there is a time for all things. But 
 they run forward hurriedly, desiring speedy 
 happiness and wisdom, without halting to 
 observe My glories by the road-side. 
 
 I said unto them: Even as I have given 
 liberty unto all My people, so shall ye not 
 impress into your service your brothers 
 and sisters. But the self-assuming Gods 
 make slaves of their fellows; they build 
 roads round about, and station armies of 
 soldiers to prevent My newborn from com- 
 ing to My most glorious kingdoms. They 
 go down to the earth and inspire kings and 
 queens, and rich men, to do the same 
 things. And they portion out to their ser- 
 vants, saying to them: Serve ye me, and 
 I will do for you. They little think that 
 their servants will become as thorns, and 
 stones, and chains, and spears against them 
 in the far future. They build up a justice 
 of their own, saying: As much as my ser- 
 vants labor for me, so will I render unto 
 them. But I have said unto them that no 
 
316 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 man shall serve another but for love, which 
 shall be his only recompense. 
 
 The king and the queen of the earth, 
 and the rich man, shut their own eyes 
 against Me, thinking by that means I can- 
 not see them; they flatter themselves that 
 in heaven they will give the slip to their 
 servants. But I sowed a seed of bondage 
 in My garden, and I said: Whosoever 
 bindeth another, shall himself be bound. 
 And behold, when they are risen in hea- 
 ven, their servants and their soldiers come 
 upon chem; their memory is as a troubled 
 dream that will not away from them. Nev- 
 ertheless, with these great examples before 
 them, still there are angels in hada that 
 have not profited therein. For they say 
 unto themselves: I will build a great king- 
 dom in heaven; I will become the might- 
 iest of Gods; millions of angels shall serve 
 me; I will shut out the Great Spirit and 
 His far-off heavens; I will wall my place 
 around with an army of soldiers, and with 
 fire and water. 
 
 As a libertine stealeth an unsuspicious 
 damsel to abuse her; and, in time, she wak- 
 eth up to the matter but to curse him, so 
 do the false Gods steal upon the inhabit- 
 ants of My places and carry them into 
 bondage. But the light of My understand- 
 ing dwelleth in the souls of My little ones; 
 it waiteth for the spring sun; and it will 
 spring up and grow into a mighty tree to 
 accuse these Gods. 
 
 God inquired concerning warfare? Je- 
 hovih said: I answer all things by good. 
 To the good at heart, I give good thoughts, 
 desires and holy observations. To the per- 
 verse of heart I hold up My glories and the 
 beneficence of virtue and peaceful under- 
 standing. To them that practice charity 
 and good works unto others, laboring not 
 for self, I give the highest delight. Though 
 they be pricked in the flesh with poverty 
 and wicked persecutions, yet their souls are 
 as the waters of a smooth-running river. 
 Amongst them that practice evil, and de- 
 struction, and war, I send emissaries of 
 benevolence and healing, who have plente- 
 ous words of pity. These are My arrows, 
 and spears, and war-clubs, O God: Pity, 
 gentle words, and the example of tender- 
 ness. Soon or late, these shall triumph 
 over all things in heaven and earth. 
 
 Behold, these wars in hada and on the 
 earth will continue more than a thousand 
 years. And the inhabitants will go down in 
 darkness, even to the lowest darkness. For 
 which reason, thou and thy successors 
 shall provide not hastily, as if the matter 
 were to change with the wind. But thou 
 shalt organize a new army of deliverers for 
 My Faithists, and it shall have two 
 branches, one for the earth and one for 
 hada. And the business of thy army shall 
 be to rescue My people from them that 
 seek to destroy them. And as to the spir- 
 its of the dead who were Faithists on the 
 earth, provide thou means of transporta- 
 tion and bring them to thy new kingdom, 
 which thou shalt call At-ce-wan, where 
 thou shalt provide a sub-God, and officers, 
 and attendants, hundreds of millions. And 
 in At-ce-waq, thou shalt provide the sub- 
 God all such places and nurseries, hospi- 
 tals, factories, schools, colleges and such 
 other houses and places of instructions re- 
 quired, in the kingdoms of My Lords in 
 hada. 
 
 And when thou hast this matter in good 
 working order, thou shalt speak before thy 
 Holy Council"; in My name shalt thou say 
 to them: Two hundred thousand hath Je- 
 hovih called; by Him am I commanded to 
 find them; and they shall be wise and 
 strong and without fear. For they shall 
 be angel-preachers in Jehovih's name to go 
 down to Hored, the place of De'yiis, the 
 Lord God the false, and to the kingdoms 
 of his Gods; and their labor shall be to 
 preach and proclaim the Father and His 
 glories in the etherean worlds. And my 
 preachers shall not say one word against 
 the Lord God nor his Gods; but rather the 
 other way; by majesty of Jehovih's love, 
 be loving towards them and their officers 
 and subjects. For by this means shall thy 
 preachers have peaceful dwellings in these 
 warring kingdoms; and thus their voices 
 shall have great weight. For the greatest 
 wisdom of a great diplomatist is not to be 
 too opposite or too vehement, but concil- 
 iating. 
 
 And thy preachers shall travel constant- 
 ly in the lowest kingdoms, teaching and 
 explaining My boundless worlds, sowing 
 the seed of aspiration with the wise and 
 with the ignorant, and especially with the 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 317 
 
 enslaved. And to as many as become con- 
 verted, and desire to ascend to Craoshivi, 
 thou shalt say: Go ye to the border of your 
 kingdom, whither the Father's laborers 
 have a ship to take ye to His kingdom. 
 But thy preachers shall not go with them 
 to excite suspicion or hate, but continue on 
 preaching and inciting the slaves to ascend 
 to higher and holier heavens. 
 
 Then God, of Craoshivi, fell to work to 
 carry out the commandments of Jehovih. 
 And his Council labored with him. At-ce- 
 wan was established and Yotse-hagah was 
 n c-de the sub-God, with a Holy Council of 
 one hundred thousand angels, with a thou- 
 sand attendants, with fifty thousand mes- 
 sengers. He was provided with a capital, 
 and throne, and with ship-makers and 
 builders of mansions, one million angels. 
 After that God and the Council of Crao- 
 shivi organized all the armies as command- 
 ed by Jehovih. And there were in these 
 armies, all told, seventeen hundred million 
 two hundred and eight thousand five hun- 
 dred and sixty, all of whom were above 
 grade fifty, and some as high as ninety. 
 
 And it so turned out that these organ- 
 izations were completed and in working or- 
 der two days prior to De'yus and his 
 hosts beginning their war on the earth. 
 But the Faithist angels were distributed 
 mostly in hada and the regions above. So 
 that whilst De'yus' hosts of three thousand 
 million were gone down to the earth, there 
 were of Faithist angels for the same place 
 but four hundred thousand, save the ashars 
 who were in regular service. 
 
 CHAPTER XXX. 
 
 De'yus was no slow hand; not a dull 
 God. He had two thousand seven hundred 
 years' experience, and his soul quick and 
 strong in mighty works. He rushed not in 
 without first measuring the way, most de- 
 liberately and in great wisdom. At first he 
 felt his way along, to humor the populace, 
 doing as if by proxy Jehovih's commands, 
 till safely fell into his dominion and power 
 his flattered Gods and officers, then boldly 
 launching forth: I, the Lord God, com- 
 mand? The very audaciousness of which 
 unbalanced his friends' judgment, and made 
 them believe for a fact that De'yus was the 
 foremost and greatest, mighty God. To do 
 whose will, and reverently applaud his 
 
 name, was the surest road to home laurels. 
 To win great majesty to himself, and 
 after having sworn to havoc the whole 
 earth in order to establish the name De'- 
 yus, and Lord God, he called to his side 
 his five chief friends: the Gods, Hikas. 
 falsely named Te-in; Wotchissij, falsely 
 named Sudga; Che-le-mung, falsely named 
 Osiris; Baal, and Ashtaroth. And thus in 
 dignity De'yus spake to them: 
 
 It is well, my Gods, ye stand about and 
 see the battles; but let your generals and 
 high captains go forth and mingle in the 
 bloody work. In your kingdoms be con- 
 stantly upraising your magnificence, and in 
 times sallying forth to the earth valiantly, 
 as when kings and queens and prophets are 
 to win a victory, or be plunged into mortal 
 death, to show how your august presence 
 turned the tide of battle. Then hie ye back 
 in dignity to your thrones, leaving your 
 officers and inspiring hosts to go on in the 
 game of mortal tragedy. 
 
 Then spake Osiris, the false, saying: 
 To exalt thy name, O De'yus', thou Lord 
 God; and to persuade mortals that thou, of 
 all created beings can stand in Hored, and 
 by thy will control the victory to whomso- 
 ever applaudeth thee and praiseth thy 
 name, be thou to me the bond of my sol- 
 emn oath, so will I lose or win battles 
 on the earth accordingly as they shall 
 honor thee and despise the Great Spirit, 
 or any other God or Lord. 
 
 Then Te-in, the false, said: To 
 keep mortals in constant war for a thou- 
 sand years; to teach them that battles are 
 won or lost according to the loudest call 
 and praise to thee, O De'yus, under thy 
 thigh will I be as an oath renewed from 
 everlasting to everlasting. 
 
 Sudga, the false, said: By all my parts, 
 to shape the arms and legs of the unborn 
 in comeliness, shall my legions drum into 
 the ears of enciente women a thousand 
 years, swearing them to thy name, O De'- 
 yus; or, if refusing, to curse with crooked- 
 ness all their progeny. And when these 
 mothers sleep, my legions shall find their 
 souls in their dreams, and give them de- 
 light or torment, accordingly as they, when 
 awake, applaud thee, my most mighty 
 Lord God. 
 
 Baal said: To overturn the oracles of 
 Jehovih, and to make the prophets and 
 
318 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 seers receive and announce thy name, O 
 De'yus, thou Lord God of heaven and 
 earth, have I already sworn more than ten 
 thousand oaths. 
 
 Ashtaroth said: The work of my legions 
 shall be to deal death to thy enemies, O 
 De'yus. To them that raise the name Je- 
 hovih, or Ormazd, or Great Spirit, my le- 
 gions shall carry foul smells into their 
 noses whilst they sleep. And for thy ene- 
 mies, who may win a battle against thy 
 people, my legions shall carry inoculation 
 from the rotten dead; in the air shall they 
 carry the virus to the breath of them that 
 will not bow down to the name, Lord God! 
 
 De'yus answered them, saying: So 
 spoken, so shall these things be; I, the 
 Lord your God, command. Send forth 
 your generals and high captains thus de- 
 creed; to each and every one sufficient 
 armies to carry out these, our high re- 
 solves. Into three great armies shall my 
 legions be divided for the earth battles: 
 one to Jaffeth, one to Vind'yu, and one to 
 Arabin'ya and the regions lying west and 
 north. Of the latter, thou, Osiris, shalt have 
 chief command; and thou, Baal, and thou, 
 Ashtaroth, ye twain, so linked in love and 
 one purpose, shall be the earth managers 
 to Osiris' will. For your efficient service, 
 behold, I have given you these high-raised 
 generals and captains: Jah, Pluton-yah, 
 Apollo-ya, Petoris, Hi-ram, T'cro-no, 
 Egupt, Ares, Yube, Ali-jah, Afro-dite, Ar- 
 ti-mis, Ben, Aa-ron, Argo, Atstsil, Nadar 
 and Oyeb, besides Peter, Yact-ta-roth, 
 Haur, Abel, Said, Josh and Wab, who shall 
 be the conquering spirits to play on both 
 sides in battles, urging stubborn mortals on 
 to religious feud till both sides fall in death, 
 or till one, to me and my Gods, boweth 
 down in fear and reverence. And they shall 
 sing their names in mortals ears day and 
 night, and teach them to live in praise of 
 the Lord, your God, the De'yus of heaven 
 and earth, and to be most daring in the 
 overthrow of Jehovih, most hated of Gods. 
 
 To thee, Te-in, another third of my le- 
 gions is committed, to deal with the land 
 of giants, Jaffeth, and urge them on in the 
 same way, to greatness or to death, doing 
 honor and reverence to me and my king- 
 doms. High raised are thy generals: Wah- 
 ka, Ho-jou-ya, Oke-ya-nos, Thu-wowtch, 
 Haing-le, Tochin-woh-to-gow, and Eurga- 
 
 roth, besides Yam-yam, Hi-rack-to and 
 Kancan-cat, Isaah, Lutz-rom and Le- 
 Wiang, and others of high grade and 
 power. 
 
 And to thee, O Sudga, in like manner 
 have I given another third of my legions to 
 play battles with mortals for a thousand 
 years. Like Osiris and Te-in, to set mor- 
 tals up in war, and move them one way 
 and then another, and thus plunge them 
 into each other's bloody arms and death. 
 That they may learn to know of a truth 
 that they are but machines and playthings 
 in the hands of angels and Gods; that they 
 are worked like clay in a potter's hand, 
 till they cry out: Enough! I will bow my 
 head to God, who is Lord over all, great 
 De'yus. Yea, more, I will fight for him 
 and drink even my brother's blood, if De'- 
 yus but prosper me and mine in slaying 
 Faithists, fool-worshippers of Ormazd, the 
 Unseen and Scattered Wind. To him, in 
 likeness of a man, with head and legs, and 
 arms in boundary and size of a man, sitting 
 on a throne in Hored; to him, the great 
 Lord God, will I ever bow in reverence. 
 And thou, O Sudga, shalt play war in 
 Vind'yu, with the most numerous, highest 
 learned people of the earth. For which 
 purpose thou shalt have these, my high- 
 raised generals and captains: Asij, Gaeya, 
 Naiswichi, Samen, Yube, Sol, Mung-jo, 
 Don, Hefa-yis-tie, Lowtha, Daridrat, 
 Udan, Brihat, Bogir, Eshong, Weel, Van- 
 aiti, Plowya, Vazista, Kiro, Cpenista, Vis- 
 per, Cpenta-mainyas and Urvasta, and 
 many others, most determined to rescue 
 the earth from the dominion of far-off 
 Gods. 
 
 De'yus continued: Go forth, ye Gods. 
 And as fast as mortals fall in battle, gather 
 the spirits of the dead into groups, not suf- 
 fering them for pity's sake to lie in chaos, 
 but bring them to your kingdoms in easy 
 riding ships. And when thus housed, apply 
 your physicians and nurses diligently, to re- 
 store them to their senses and new condi- 
 tion; and when they wake up in heaven, 
 beholding the great glory of your thrones 
 and kingdoms, initiate them by solemn rites 
 and ceremonies to sworn servitude to your- 
 selves and to me, your Lord God, to in- 
 herit such bounteous kingdoms. And ye 
 shall thus despoil those of earth to make 
 them know my power and yours, so shall 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 319 
 
 ye pursue those newly arrived in heaven to 
 make them swear solemnly against Jeho- 
 vih, the Great Spirit; the Ormazd, and 
 against all others Gods, but if they stub- 
 bornly refuse, though in heaven, even as 
 they did on earth, take them before my 
 son, Anubi, who shall further examine 
 them; and if they still refuse, Anubi with 
 his strong guard, and brands of fire, shall 
 send them down in hell. 
 
 I, the Lord God, have spoken; my com- 
 mandments are gone forth in heaven and 
 earth; whosoever praiseth and glorifieth 
 me, with everlasting service for the exalt- 
 ation and glory of my kingdoms, shall en- 
 ter into everlasting happiness; but whoso- 
 ever will not bow down to me shall be 
 cast into everlasting torments. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXI. 
 
 Now sallied forth the captains gener- 
 als, and well-disciplined hosts of hada, the 
 angels of De'yus, bent on independence to 
 the earth and heaven from all other rulers 
 save the Lord God, and to establish him 
 forever. Foremost of the three mighty di- 
 visions was Osiris' army, of more than a 
 thousand million angels, going boldly forth 
 to cover the great lands of the earth, Ara- 
 bin'ya, Par'si'e, and Heleste. 
 
 In the front, dashing madly on, was 
 Baal, and next him, his assistant Goddess, 
 Ashtaroth, followed by their first attend- 
 ants and high exalted officers. Some of 
 whom displayed great maps of mortal cit- 
 ies and cultured lands, where the peaceful 
 worshippers of Jehovih dwelt, hundreds of 
 thousands. And the lists of altars and 
 temples to the Great Spirit, where the 
 righteous came daily and deposited their 
 earnings and products as sacrifices for 
 benefit of the weak and helpless. And the 
 wide fields, where toilers brought out of 
 the earth, religiously, wheat, and flax, 
 and cotton, and barley, as gifts from the 
 Great Spirit. And the canals, filled with 
 boats, carrying produce, and fruit, and 
 cloth, in interchange, one district with an- 
 other. And the mounds and tree-temples 
 of the I'hins, the sacred people, small, 
 white and yellow; the forefathers and fore- 
 mothers of the great I'huan race, the half- 
 breeds, betwixt the brown burrowers in the 
 earth and the I'hins. Over these maps, 
 and charts, and lists, the generals and cap- 
 
 tains discoursed as they descended to the 
 rolling earth; most learnedly laying plans 
 to overturn Jehovih's method, and build 
 up De'yus, the God of Hored. 
 
 Osiris himself, to display such dignity 
 as becometh a great God , halted in his 
 heavenly place, and now head-quarters of 
 the belligerents. And so rested on his 
 throne, with his tens of thousands of mes- 
 sengers ready to answer his summons and 
 bear his will to the remotest parts of his 
 mighty army, and to bring him back news 
 in return of the nature of the proceedings. 
 And betwixt Osiris' and De'yus' thrones 
 another long line of messengers extended, 
 a thousand angels, high raised and reso- 
 lute, suitable to travel in the everchanging 
 atmospherean belts of great velocity. 
 
 Beside Baal, on the downward course to 
 the earth, but a little behind him, woman- 
 like, was Ashtaroth, with her thousand at- 
 tendants, all accoutered to show their high 
 esteem for their warring Goddess. By the 
 oft-changing wave of her hand, her part 
 of the army had learned to know her will, 
 and most zealously observe her commands. 
 
 And now, on every side, farther than 
 the eye could see, the thousand millions 
 rushed on, some in boats, some in ships 
 and otevans, and others in single groups, 
 descending. As one can imagine an earth- 
 ly kite sufficient to carry its holder high up 
 in the wind, so, reversed, and single-hand- 
 ed, hundreds of thousands flew toward the 
 earth by ballast flags, the most daring of 
 angels. Toward the earth they came as if 
 on a frolic, full of jokes and loud boasting, 
 sworn and swearing to forever clear the 
 earth of Jehovih's worshippers. Many of 
 them, long trained in schools and colleges 
 and factories, in heaven, only too glad for 
 a change of scenes and labor, and all prom- 
 ised by their superiors that now they were 
 to take their first lessons in becoming Gods 
 and Goddesses. Of whom thousands and 
 thousands hoped for some daring deed, in 
 order to gain sudden promotion. 
 
 To the east and west, and north and 
 south, Baal and Ashtaroth spread out their 
 armies, wide as the three great lands they 
 had sworn to subdue unto the Lord God, 
 who, of woman born, was the most pre- 
 suming son the earth had yet brought forth. 
 And to alight on the earth, to flood the 
 temples and altars with so great an abun- 
 
320 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 dance of spirits as would drive Jehovih's 
 ashars into disastrous confusion, and van- 
 quish them, was the theme and project. 
 To be foremost in so great a work was the 
 temptation of promotion, which caused 
 them on every side to strive with their ut- 
 most speed and power. 
 
 Which Jehovih foresaw, and so spake 
 to -God in Craoshivi, warning him; 
 whereof due observance of the danger had 
 been communicated by messengers to the 
 managing angels in the altars and temples 
 of worship. And these again, through the 
 rab'bahs and the oracles, had spread abroad 
 amongst mortals the threatened dangers, 
 cautioning them. Thus Jehovih's angels 
 fortified themselves, through the faith of 
 mortals, and held on, bringing together 
 their scanty numbers, knowing well that by 
 Jehovih's law they must not resist by arms, 
 but only through words and good example, 
 high-toned by faith in the Father over all. 
 
 Down, down, down on these, on every 
 side came the destroying hosts, the thou- 
 sand million; with oaths and loud clamor 
 rushing for the altars and temples; flying 
 suddenly to the holy arcs; in hundreds of 
 thousands of places, shouting: 
 
 Avaunt this arc! Avaunt this altar! 
 Avaunt this temple! Ye Jehovihian usurp- 
 ers, begone! In the name of the Lord our 
 God! We command! 
 
 But alas, for them, every arc, and altar, 
 and temple to Jehovih was invincible. 
 There stood His angels, so strong in faith, 
 unmoved and majestic, that even the as- 
 sailing spirits halted, overawed. And as 
 they stood a moment, contemplating 
 whence came so great majesty, to be in 
 such common place, the Jehovihians made 
 this reply: 
 
 To none we bow in adoration but Great 
 Jehovih! Whose Very Self contributed to 
 make us what we are, His servants in do- 
 ing good unto others, with all our wisdom 
 and strength. In Him we stand to shield 
 his helpless ones by virtuous peace and 
 love harmonious. Wherefore, then, come 
 ye in arrogance, demanding our wards to 
 service of your God, born of woman? 
 
 The Osirians said: Fly, O sycophants! 
 Ye that bow down in fear and trembling to 
 One hollow as the wind, and Personless. 
 Too long have earth and heaven been ca- 
 joled by far-off foreign Gods, who come 
 
 hither to win subjects for their kingdoms' 
 glory, by that pitiful tale of an Ever Pres- 
 ent Over All, Whom none have seen nor 
 known. Begone! Give us these earthly 
 anchorages! To build earth and heaven, 
 in unit, to be ruled by Gods whom we 
 know and reverence! 
 
 The Jehovihians said: Is this your only 
 power? By threats and commands? O 
 harmless words, in mockery of truthful 
 Gods! No good works nor promises, save 
 to exalt the self of earth and hada, and 
 glorify your masters, born only equal with 
 yourselves. Why not rush in and carry us 
 off, ye that are a thousand to one, and by 
 your deeds prove the great source whence 
 ye draw your power? 
 
 The Osirians said: To give ye a chance 
 of liberty, to save ye from the Savior's 
 judgment, Anubi, who shall cast ye into 
 hell, we hoped to find your willing depart- 
 ure in peace. Behold, ye, then, we will 
 wall this altar around and shut off the at- 
 tendant ashars with mortals, and flood the 
 place with drujas, to obsess them to total 
 madness. If, then ye love your wards, as 
 ye profess, abandon all to us, for the glory 
 of De'yus, whose son is Osiris, our com- 
 manding God. 
 
 The Jehovihians said: Words! words! 
 words! At first no explanation, and only 
 your command. Now, forsooth, an argu- 
 ment! And presently ye will withdraw, 
 deceived in what your commanding Gods 
 told you would result. We tell you we will 
 not hence, save by command of our su- 
 periors, Jehovih's highly raised to prece- 
 dence. 
 
 The Osirians said: For which reason, 
 behold our Lord God, who was honored in 
 the title through Jehovih's hand; whom ye 
 should obey according to your oaths. 
 
 The Jehovihians said: Till such time 
 the Lord God put aside Jehovih, we were 
 his; but when for his self-glory ne denied 
 his Creator, his false position freed us from 
 our obligations. To obey him now, would 
 make us false to Jehovih, and torever weak- 
 en us in reaching the Nirvanian kingdoms. 
 
 But now the clamoring angels, Osirians, 
 in the background crowded forward men- 
 acingly, and the tide rose to the highest 
 pitch. The morning sun was dawning in 
 the east, a most wonderful assistant to Je- 
 hovih's sons in time of battle; and their 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 321 
 
 messengers brought from the fields and 
 country plaecs many ashars who had been 
 on watch all night with sleeping mortals. 
 The Osirians saw them coming; knew the 
 turn, one way or another, was at hand! 
 But by the audacity of the Jehovihians, 
 one to a thousand, were kept looking on 
 in wonder till the sun's rays pierced their 
 weapons and melted them in their hands. 
 First one and then another of the Osir- 
 ians, then tens and hundreds and thou- 
 sands, turned away or looked about, dis- 
 comfited, like a host of rioters attempting 
 to assault a few well-trained soldiers, and, 
 becoming affrighted, turn and flee harm- 
 lessly. So Jehovih's sons and daughters 
 won the victory in the first assault, save in 
 rare instances, one in a hundred, where the 
 Osirians triumphed and got possession. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXII. 
 
 And over all the lands, east and west 
 and north and south, of Arabin'ya and 
 Par'si'e, and Heleste, stood the discomfit- 
 ed Osirian angels, in groups, tens of thou- 
 sands, unseen by mortals, and considering 
 how best to proceed to overthrow Jehovih 
 and His worshippers. Meantime, messen- 
 gers and map-makers bore the disastrous 
 news to Osiris, who in turn sent word on 
 up to De'yiis, the self-Lord God, who now, 
 through Osiris, his most favorite God of 
 power, sent these commands: 
 
 When night is on and mortals sleep, my 
 hosts shall fall upon the ashars, the guard- 
 ian angels, and drive them hence, obsess- 
 ing every man, and woman and child, in 
 these great divisions of the earth. What 
 care I for the altars and temples and ora- 
 cles and arcs? Possess ye the mortals be- 
 fore the morrow's morning sun. Hear ye 
 the command of De'yus, the Lord your 
 God, through his high-raised son, Osiris! 
 
 And the well-stationed messengers plied 
 all day long to the near and remote parts 
 of the assaulting armies, giving De'yus' 
 commands. And ere the sun went down, 
 the whole thousand million knew their 
 work, and were wheeled into line, to march 
 with the falling darkness, and pounce fur- 
 iously upon the ashars of Jehovih. 
 
 But the true God, in Craoshivi, had 
 been warned by Jehovih's Voice of the 
 course of events, and he had sent his mes- 
 sengers with all speed down to the earth to 
 
 warn them of the enemy's designs that 
 night; which they acomplished none too 
 soon, for, already, when they had com- 
 pleted their most exhaustive work, the sun 
 had dropped below the western horizon. 
 
 So, at the midnight hour, the terrible 
 approach began on all sides; and to each 
 and every guardian spirit there came ene- 
 mies, in tens, and hundreds, and thousands, 
 shouting: Begone, thou Jehovihian fooll 
 The Lord our God and his son, Osiris, 
 command! Away from thy sleeping mor- 
 tal ward, or by the voice of God we will 
 cast thee, bound, at Anubi's feet, food for 
 hell! Begone! 
 
 Each Jehovihian answered; To Great 
 Jehovih I am sworn! Though ye bind me 
 and cast me into hell, by the Great Spir- 
 it's hand I will free myself and come here 
 again and teach his sacred name. And re- 
 peat forever my peaceful mission to raise 
 up this heir of Jehovih! 
 
 Again the threatening adversaries 
 stormed, and wondered whilst they storm- 
 ed, that one alone stood so boldly in face 
 of such great odds and flew not away at 
 once. And every ashar laid his hand on 
 the sleeping mortal in his charge, for by 
 this his power was multiplied a thousand- 
 fold, and raising up his other hand, thus 
 addressed the All Highest: By Thy Wis- 
 dom and Power, O Jehovih, circumscribe 
 Thou this, Thy sleeping heir, that whoso- 
 ever toucheth the mortal part shall cut him- 
 self off from Thy everlasting kingdoms ! 
 
 And, with the words, a circle of light 
 fell about the place, bewildering to the as- 
 saulters, who, having once halted, opened 
 the way to their own cowardice to recoil 
 within them, a most valiant warrior against 
 unrighteous deeds. Whereupon, a war of 
 words and arguments ensued, till again the 
 morning sun rose upon the almost harm- 
 less assault, and left the Osirians discom- 
 fited and ashamed. 
 
 Though not in all places, for in some 
 extremes they waited not for words but 
 rushed in and laid hands on the mortals, 
 gaining power sufficient to hurl clubs, and 
 stones, boards, stools and even tables 
 about the house, and so roused, wide 
 awake, the mortal occupants. Who, seeing 
 things tumble about by some unseen pow- 
 er, were quickly up and frightened past 
 composure. Some hurried on to the rab'- 
 
322 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 bahs, some to the oracles and temples, to 
 inquire about the trouble betwixt the ruling 
 Gods. And in these few places, when once 
 De'yus' spirit-soldiers gained possession, 
 they fastened on in thousands, even quar- 
 reling as to who had most honor in the 
 hellish work. And yet not one of the ash- 
 ars in all the lands was seized or borne 
 away. 
 
 And now, in the time of the rising sun, 
 the messengers of the Lord God flew hast- 
 ily to Osiris' kingdom, where he sat on his 
 throne, expecting news of an overwhelm- 
 ing victory. And when they told him of 
 the most pitiful failure, save in so small a 
 degree, Osiris raved and swore: By my 
 soul, I swear an everlasting curse, but I 
 will fill all the hells in hada with these 
 fool-hardy ashars! Yea, even though I 
 go down to the earth in person, and with 
 Baal and Ashtaroth go from house to 
 house throughout the world! 
 
 Osiris again sent word to De'yus, who 
 was of vast experience, and not so hasty; a 
 wiser God, and better acquainted with the 
 tides in mortal energy to serve Jehovih. 
 So De'yus sent back word to this effect: 
 To rest the soldiers three days, that the 
 surveyors might measure the stature of 
 mortal faith, and so make the third attack 
 more successful. And with these words 
 concluded: 
 
 Because of the long spiritual peace 
 amongst mortals, there must be many 
 grown to intellectual disbelief in an All 
 Highest. For groveling down in the earth 
 to measure the rocks, and to study the hab- 
 its of worms and bugs, for generations, 
 their seed hath brought forth many skep- 
 tics, believing nothing of spiritual kind, but 
 rating high their own judgment. With 
 these, for lack of faith in Jehovih, the ash- 
 ars are powerless to ward off my soldiers. 
 Mark them out in every city and in all the 
 country places, and again at midhour of the 
 night, fall upon them, crowding^ away Je- 
 hovih's ashars. Besides these, find the 
 ignorant and superstitious amongst mor- 
 tals, who are lazy and of lustful desires, for 
 by their habits the ashars have little power 
 in their presence. Mark these also, and, at 
 midnight, fall upon them and possess them. 
 
 And go ye amongst the rich, whose sons 
 and daughters are raised in idleness and 
 pleasure; whose thoughts seldom rise to 
 
 heaven: for with them the ashars are also 
 weak to protect them, who are most excel- 
 led: subjects to spirits fond of sporting 
 pleasures. Mark ye them also, and at mid- 
 pleasures. And such as still flatten the 
 head, and are dull in judgment. Mark ye 
 them also, and at midnight fall upon them, 
 driving hence the ashars. 
 
 Abandon ye the altars and arcs and 
 temples and oracles, and all the strongest, 
 most zealous Faithists, for the present. 
 
 Thus prepared, Osiris and Baal and 
 Ashtaroth, for the third assault on Jeho- 
 vih's angels and mortals. And their mill- 
 ions of groups were kept in constant drill, 
 ready for the work. The first fire and flush 
 of boasting was already gone from them, 
 save of a few, and the serious aspect of a 
 long war stared them in the face. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXIII. 
 
 Thus laid the three great countries, Ara- 
 bin'ya, Par'si'e and Heleste, of which Par'- 
 si'e was mightiest, peopled with very gi- 
 ants; lofty-bearing men and women, of red, 
 copper colored; and with an abundance of 
 long black hair; high in the nose and cheek 
 bones; with determined jaws, and eyes to 
 charm and command; mostly full-blooded 
 Ihuans, half-breeds betwixt the I'hins and 
 the burrowers in the ground, the brown 
 people, dull and stupid. The Par'si'e'ans 
 were a proud race, built up in great come- 
 liness by the God Apollo, whose high-rais- 
 ed office was to fashion the breeds of mor- 
 tals into noble forms. Foremost in all the 
 world was Par'si'e in all great deeds, and in 
 men of learning, and in ancient wars. It 
 was here great Zarathustra was born and 
 raised for Jehovih's Voice and corporeal 
 words. Here the first great City of the 
 Sun was built; Oas, whose kings aspired 
 to rule all the world; and great riches 
 amongst men were here first tolerated by 
 the Gods. 
 
 A strip of Par'si'e'an land cut betwixt 
 Jaffeth and Vind'yu, and extended to the 
 sea in the far east; but the great body laid 
 to the west, covering the Afeutian Moun- 
 tains, still plentiful in lions and tigers and 
 great serpents. In these mountains came 
 the I'huan hunters to catch lions and tigers 
 to fight in the games, where men oft, un- 
 armed, went into the arena, and fought 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 323 
 
 them with their naked hands, choking them 
 to death before applauding multitudes. 
 From these mountains the hunters supplied 
 the private dens of kings and queens with 
 lions, whose duty was to devour thieves 
 and other prisoners, according to mortal 
 law. 
 
 And oft these traveling hunters dwelt 
 with the sacred little people in the wilder- 
 ness, the I'hins, whom Jehovih had taught 
 to charm even the great serpents and sav- 
 age lions and tigers to be their friends and 
 worshippers. And herefrom sprang a peo- 
 ple called Listians, who, living mostly in 
 the forests, went naked, to whom the 
 I'hins taught the secret of charming and sa- 
 cred hand power, who worshipped Jeho- 
 vih, owning no man nor God as master, for 
 which the Great Spirit named them Shep- 
 herd Kings, for they ruled over flocks of 
 goats, which supplied them with milk, and 
 butter, and cheese, and wool for cloth for 
 crotch-clothes, the only covering they 
 wore. 
 
 These Shepherd Kings, the Listians, 
 lived in peace, wandering about, making 
 trinkets, which they oft exchanged with 
 the inhabitants of cities and the agricul- 
 tural regions. One-fourth of the people of 
 Par'si'e were Listians, who were well 
 guarded by Jehovih's angels. And these 
 were such as De'yus meant to obsess for 
 future use in terrible wars, but the other 
 three-fourths lived in the fertile regions of 
 Par'si'e, the lands of which were rich in 
 yielding ample harvests. The cities were 
 filled with mills, and factories, and colleges, 
 and common schools, free for all people to 
 come and learn; and altars, and temples of 
 worship, and oracle structures, made with- 
 out windows, so Jehovih's angels could 
 come in sar'gis and teach His Holy Doc- 
 trines. Besides which were temples and 
 observatories for studying the stars, which 
 were mapped out and named. And next to 
 these were the Houses of Philosophy, in 
 all the cities; where great learned men un- 
 dertook to inquire into the things of 
 earth, to learn the character and property 
 thereof. And whether of fish, or worm, 
 stone or ores, iron, silver, gold, or copper, 
 they had learned to read its worth and na- 
 ture. And of things dead, no longer liv- 
 ing on the earth, and of strange stones, and 
 of skins and bones of animals, their houses 
 
 were well filled, for benefit of students and 
 visitors. It was these that De'yus meant to 
 have his armies possess, body and soul, 
 for his own glory, knowing that by their 
 researches in such matters for many gen- 
 erations they had strayed away from Jeho- 
 vih. For such is the rule pertaining to all 
 children begotten on the earth. If the fa- 
 ther and mother be on the downward road 
 in unbelief, the child will be more so; but 
 if on the upward way, to glorify an All 
 Highest, the child will be holier and wiser 
 than its parents. 
 
 In olden times the Gods had inspired 
 the Par'si'e'ans to migrate toward the west 
 and inhabit the lands of Heleste, also a 
 country of giants, but less given to rites 
 and ceremonies; and they carried with them 
 three languages: the Panic, of Jaffeth, the 
 Vedic, of Vind'yu, and the Par'si'e'an; and 
 because they used the same sounds, mostly, 
 but different written characters, a confused 
 language sprang out of these, and was call- 
 ed Fonece, and the people thus speaking 
 were called Foneceans. Hence, Fonece is 
 the first and oldest of mortal-made lan- 
 guages; and this was styled in heaven the 
 period of emancipation of mortals from the 
 dictatorship of angels in regard to written 
 signs and characters and words. Jehovih 
 had said: In that respect man on earth hath 
 advanced enough to stand alone; and it 
 was so, for, from that time to this, neither 
 Jehovih nor his angels have given any new 
 language or written characters to mortals. 
 And all languages that have come from that 
 time onward, are but combinations and 
 branches, and amalgamations and malform- 
 ations of what existed then on the earth. 
 
 The Helestians were rich in agriculture, 
 and in herds of cattle and goats, both wool 
 goats and hair goats; for it was in this 
 country that the angels first taught man 
 how to breed the goats for hair or wool, 
 according as he desired. And these people 
 were also mostly worshippers of Jehovih, 
 and had many altars and temples; dwelling 
 in peace, and loving righteousness. 
 
 Arabin'ya had four kinds of people with- 
 in her regions; the I'huans, the Listians, 
 the I'hins, and the brown burrowers in 
 the ground, with long noses and projecting 
 mouths, very strong, whose grip of the 
 hands could break a horse's leg. The 
 brown people, though harmless, were na- 
 
324 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ABM1J 
 
 ked, living mostly on fish, worms, bugs and 
 roots; and they inhabited the regions of the 
 great river, Tua. Over these people, to sub- 
 due them and destroy them, Osiris allotted 
 his great angel general, Egupt, servant of 
 De'yus. Egupt called the region of his al- 
 lotment after himself, Egupt. In the 
 time of Abraham this country was 
 called South Arabin'ya; but when, in after 
 years, the great scholars entered the rec- 
 ords in the kings' libraries, the later names 
 were used, being written in the Fonecean 
 language and not Eguptian, which was the 
 language of the unlearned. 
 
 But the chief part of all the people in 
 Arabin'ya were I'huans, of color and size 
 and figure like the Par'si'e'ans; being also 
 the offspring of the I'hins and the brown 
 earth-burrowers, from whom they inherited 
 corporeal greatness, even as from the I'hins 
 they inherited holiness of spirit. And the 
 flat heads had mostlv disappeared from Ar- 
 abin'ya. 
 
 And here were thousands of cities, great 
 and small, even as in Par'si'e and Heleste, 
 and they had colleges and houses of Phil- 
 osophy, even like Par'si'e, besides thou- 
 sands of public libraries, which supplied 
 books freely to the poor, who came here to 
 be taught in the sciences, and in the arts 
 of painting, engraving and sculpture, and 
 in astronomy, and mathematics, chemistry, 
 minerals, and assaying. But the Listians 
 were the only people who dealt in charms 
 and the secrets of taming serpents and 
 beasts by virtue of the hand, and by cur- 
 ious scents, prepared secretly. And the 
 Listians maintained the fifth rite in the res- 
 urrection, whereby, on the fifth day after 
 death, the soul of the dead appeared in 
 mortal semblance to his living people, and 
 advised them lovingly, after which he as- 
 cended in their burning incense going to 
 Tehovih! 
 
 Of such, then, were the people over 
 whom the Lord God named De'yus had set 
 his thousand million, to subdue for 
 his own glory. And thus it came to pass, 
 Jehovih spake in Craoshivi, saying: The 
 time shall come when angels and mortals 
 shall know of a truth that the Lord God is 
 a false God, and a vain-glorious usurper. 
 For I will leave one race of I'huans on the 
 earth, in Guatama, even till the era of kos- 
 mon. And men and angels shall see and 
 
 understand that man of himself never in- 
 venteth a God in figure of a man born of 
 woman. And that only through the inspir- 
 ation of My enemies, who build kingdoms 
 in hada for their own glory, hath any peo- 
 ple ever fallen from My estate to worship 
 a God in image of man. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXIV. 
 
 And now came the third assault of Osir- 
 is' legions of angels, innired to desperate 
 madness by the harangues of their gen- 
 erals and captains. And every mortal was 
 marked out, and his degree of faith in the 
 Great Spirit known, so the destroyers knew 
 well where to strike effectively. At mid- 
 night again came the Osirians, rushing on, 
 and by force of numbers laid their hands 
 on many mortals, millions! Held fast, 
 and hurled missiles furiously about the 
 sleeping apartments, to rouse from sleep 
 their mortal victims, who, to wake and 
 see no cause for the whirling stools and ta- 
 bles, and the terrible noises and blows in 
 every corner of their houses, sprang up af- 
 frighted, and at a loss to know what to 
 do. In many places the angels of De'yus 
 spake audibly in the dark, saying: There 
 is but one God, even the Lord your God, 
 great De'yus, on the throne of Hored. 
 Bow down in reverence before him, or de- 
 struction and death shall be your doom' 
 
 The Osirian angels, gloating in their 
 much success, now filled every house, 
 where they had fastened on, and made all 
 such places head-quarters for their cap- 
 tains and generals and thousands and tens 
 of thousands of angel servants, who were 
 proud and boastful, most hilarious, making 
 hideous noises about the house walls. In 
 many instances the ashars were crowded 
 off; for because of the small faith and little 
 spirituality in the mortals captured, their 
 power was weak. 
 
 But not in all cases had the Osirians 
 won, but were in hundreds of thousands of 
 families overcome or baffled till the rising 
 sun, which drove them off, leaving the Je- 
 hovihians still victorious. But sufficient 
 was the glory unto Osiris and his legions, 
 wherefrom messengers were sent to De'yus 
 speedily, with most exaggerated tales of 
 the victories won. 
 
 In Par'si'e there fell this night twelve 
 hundred thousand men, women and child- 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 325 
 
 ren into the clutches of the hosts of De'yus, 
 the Lord God. the false. In Arabin'ya the 
 fallen victims numbered two million; and 
 in Heleste one million and a half! But not 
 yet had the captured mortals realized what 
 had happened; they only knew frantic 
 noises, and flying missiles disturbed them 
 all night long. Many rushed forth to the 
 oracles and altars to learn the cause, and 
 to know if, in truth, the angels of heaven 
 were at war; if Gods had come, as had been 
 told in the old legends, to afflict mortals. 
 The learned acknowledged not the cause 
 to be angels, but sought for cracks in the 
 wood, or concealed persons, or animals, 
 failing in which excited their disbelieving 
 souls so they proclaimed each special won- 
 der, a hundred times magnified. 
 
 Th unlearned believed in the angels 
 thus suddenly come upon them; and culti- 
 vated their coming, and hearkened to their 
 words, to put away Jehovih and accept 
 De'yus: for otherwise, after death, their 
 souls would be weighed by Anubi, and, for 
 lack of faith in the Lord God, instead of 
 Jehovih. cast into everlasting hell. And 
 such mortals, willing tools to follow spirits' 
 advice instead of Jehovih's light within 
 their own souls, were led through the 
 Anubian ceremonies, but malformed by 
 substituting words to glorify De'yus, and 
 Osiris, his so-called son. 
 
 But the philosophers searched deeper, 
 to find if, of a truth, the soul were immor- 
 tal: and if it be a very truth that the souls 
 of the dead come thus back, setting at de- 
 fiance nature's laws, as they called the com- 
 mon things around about them? What, 
 then, were the sum and substance of the 
 created worlds, and ultimate end, the all 
 highest place for man? Which the Os- 
 irian angels answered, explaining that the 
 first heavenly place was hada, wherein were 
 many hells; and that the all highest hea- 
 ven was Hored, where the Lord God sat 
 on his throne in great glory. And around 
 him on every side were thousands of mill- 
 ions of angels who had attained to ever- 
 lasting peace, with nothing more to do but 
 to bow and sing praises unto their God 
 forever! 
 
 CHAPTER XXXV. 
 
 Not many more days passed, till Osiris 
 called together his legions and gave them 
 
 four days' recreation and a great feast. 
 And after the feast was over, he thus spake 
 from his temporary throne on Mount Ag- 
 ho'aden. that is, a place in the sky over the 
 earth mountains of Aghogan, in Par'si'e; 
 complimenting them, saying: 
 
 In the light and power of life and death 
 I speak! Greeting, in Deyus' name, high- 
 est of Gods! In his love, to glorify you all 
 for your great victory, this feast was spread, 
 and my voice upraised in your praise. 
 
 First, to thee, Baal, wise and powerful 
 amongst Gods, for thy great energy and 
 glorious success, do I bestow the Sign of 
 the Sacred Bird, Iboi, to be thine forever. 
 And next, to thee. Ashtaroth, the God- 
 dess that never tireth, or is without a strat- 
 agem, for thy glorious success I bestow 
 thee with the circle and the true cross, to 
 be thine forever. 
 
 To thee, Hermes, most unflinching of 
 generals, second in rank to Lord, for thy 
 victories won, I bestow the Inqua. 
 
 To thee, Apollo-ya, I bequeath a bow 
 and arrow, for thou shalt break the bonds 
 of the creed of circumcision, and tempt 
 mortals to wed by no law but by the im- 
 pulse of the heart. For as the Faithists 
 have been bound by their sign to marry 
 not outside their own people, so shalt thou 
 teach the opposite; for by the cross of 
 the breeds of men, they shall be broken 
 off from Jehovih. 
 
 To thee, Posee-ya-don, I bestow a mod- 
 el ship, for thou shalt have dominion over 
 sea-faring men in all these divisions of the 
 world. 
 
 To thee, He-fa-yis-tie, I bestow a forge 
 and tongs, for thy dominion over mortals 
 shall be with the workers of metals and 
 weapons of war. To thee, Pluton-ya, I 
 bestow a torch and brand of fire, for thou 
 shalt rule over mortals for the destruction 
 of cities and houses, to whomsoever will 
 not bow down to De'yus as the highest 
 God. 
 
 To thee, Urana, queen of the es'enaurs, 
 the very stars of my armies, I bestow a 
 quill and staff, for thou shalt have dominion 
 over the songs of the earth, inspiring mor- 
 tals to sing praises unto the Lord our God. 
 After this manner Osiris went through 
 the list, bestowing and assigning medals, 
 and signs, and symbols, and emblems upon 
 the generals and the captains, and exalting 
 
326 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 many of the privates for daring deeds done, 
 and for victories. And then Osiris allotted 
 to the generals and captains tens of thou- 
 sands of angels especially adapted to their 
 respective work; and he placed Baal and 
 Ashtaroth as chiefs over them. Next Osir- 
 is organized a new division of angels, an 
 army of one hundred million, distributed 
 into one hundred parts, and called this 
 army See-loo-gan, signifying angels who 
 travel about amongst mortals in systematic 
 order, to measure them as to how best 
 they can be used for the glory of the hea- 
 venly kingdoms; and to possess them, or 
 hand them over to be obsessed, as may be 
 deemed profitable. 
 
 hX Pluton-ya's request, Osiris made his 
 selection for him, and then further explain- 
 ed, saying: To thee, all privilege in thy 
 line. If thou find fire not well suited to 
 destroy a city, even though thousands of 
 mortals be obsessed at the same time to fire 
 it, thou shalt command thy army to car- 
 ry virus and inoculate mortals unto death; 
 or to fill the city with epidemic air, well 
 poisoned, throwing mortals into fevers so 
 they shall die. For in all cases, whether 
 Baal or Ashtaroth, or any of thy superior 
 officers, say to thee: Destroy thou that city, 
 or this city, or that family, or this family, 
 or that man, or this man; thou shalt so fall 
 upon the man or place as commanded, and 
 accomplish it. 
 
 And now, with due ceremonies, and 
 with excellent music, the assemblage was 
 commanded back to the earth to resume 
 work. And Osiris' messengers bore the 
 news to De'yus, well exaggerated, extolling 
 the fidelity of Osiris to the highest. From 
 this time forth no masterly raids were made 
 by the Osirians, but they improved the 
 well-adapted times to give to mortals an 
 abundance of wonders in angel manifesta- 
 tions; which bait mortals caught at ea- 
 gerly. And they were, for the most part, 
 easily persuaded to follow angel advice, and 
 so fell to work and built temples, and es- 
 tablished oracles of their own; obliterating 
 the doctrine of the Great Spirit, and substi- 
 tuting the words: The Lord God, and De'- 
 yus, and Anubi, his holy Son and Savior 
 and Judge of the world; and Osiris, God's 
 commanding Lord of the earth. And mor- 
 tals traveled about throughout all regions, 
 preaching and explaining spirit commun- 
 
 ion, and establishing the Anubian rites and 
 ceremonies, but never using the names 
 Great Spirit or Jehovih, save but to deride 
 and accurse. The rites taught virtue, and 
 love, and truth, and the acquisition of 
 knowledge, but taught not peace, but war, 
 which was maintained to be justifiable if 
 done for the glory of the Lord, or for the 
 Lord God, or for the Son, the Savior, An- 
 ubi, whose sign was a pair of scales, and 
 who was sometimes called Judge, and 
 Keeper of the Gate that led to the upper 
 heaven, Hored. Wherefore it came to pass 
 that the mortal adherents of Osiris began 
 to war on the Faithists and take their pos- 
 sessions. And inasmuch as the Faithists, 
 by their pledges to Jehovih, dared not re- 
 sist by weapons of death, but only by walls 
 around their cities, and by stratagems, and 
 by running away, the Osirians had easy 
 victories in most instances. 
 
 In ten years the Osirians began to build 
 great cities, after the manner of the an- 
 cients ; and to gather in their plunder taken 
 from the Faithists. And Osiris, and Baal, 
 and Ashtaroth, through their angel hosts, 
 chose from amongst mortals the largest 
 and strongest, most warlike, and by means 
 of the oracles declared them kings and 
 queens, and instructed them in building pal- 
 aces and having thrones after the manner of 
 Lords and Gods. And directed mortals 
 how to make themselves powerful by or- 
 ganization and obedience to the kings and 
 queens, who were recognized as adopted 
 sons and daughters of the Lord God. 
 
 Now it came to pass, in course of time, 
 that in consequence of the great abundance 
 of angel manifestations, mortals sought by 
 this means to obtain knowledge of heaven 
 and earth, and especially in regard to the 
 end of man. And the Osirian hosts, being 
 the only angels engaged in the matter of 
 establishing De'yus, answered them, say- 
 ing: The life and the end of man are to 
 glorify God, who is Lord of heaven and 
 earth. 
 
 And the mortals pressed the matter fur- 
 ther, asking: Who is God? What are the 
 worlds? Whence came all things? How 
 were the Creation and the Creator? 
 
 For an answer to these questions, Osiris 
 sent messengers to the Lord God in Ho- 
 red; whereupon De'yus called a Council of 
 his Gods and Lords, to meet in Hored, to 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 327 
 
 solve the matter, that a uniform answer 
 might be given unto all the divisions of 
 the earth. In the meantime, and before 
 the Council assembled, satan spake to De'- 
 yus, saying: If thou admit a Creator save 
 thyself, thou art undone. For is this not 
 the point whereon hang the power and do- 
 minion ofjehovih? The Lord God said: 
 Behold, the Great Spirit signifieth every- 
 where. But I am only as a man, small 
 compared to the size of the worlds! 
 
 Satan said: It mattereth not; thou shalt 
 say thou wert the Creator of heaven and 
 earth. De'yus sa id: But this is not truth? 
 How, then, shall I say, I created heaven 
 and earth? Satan said: When Osiris hath 
 come before thee, say thou to him: Whom 
 hast thou found amongst mortals to be 
 the greatest and wisest, best su'is? 
 And when he telleth thee, say thou 
 to him: Osiris, my son, him thou sayest 
 is the greatest su'is shalt thou inspire in 
 person. And thou shalt cause him to write 
 answers to the questions of mortals, that 
 the learned and the ignorant alike may 
 know me and my kingdoms. Behold, be- 
 fore my time both heaven and earth were 
 void as to a Godhead, save to the servants 
 of Jehovih. In this respect, thou shalt per- 
 suade thy seers to know I created them 
 from voidance unto mine own glory. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXVI. 
 
 Anuhasaj, alias the Lord God, had said 
 to Te-in, the false, to whom he gave in 
 charge Jaffeth and her heavenly places: In 
 the self same time that Osiris and his hosts 
 fall upon his divisions of the earth, even in 
 that day and hour shalt thou and thy hosts 
 fall upon Jaffeth, possessing the temples 
 and altars, and places of oracles, where they 
 serve the Great Spirit under the name Or- 
 mazd, and thou shalt subdue them to me 
 under the name Joss, who is and ever shall 
 be Ho-Joss of heaven and earth. 
 
 So Te-in, the false, with his thousand 
 million warriors sped forth, downward, to 
 the earth, wide spread his army, to cover 
 the whole of Jaffeth, in hope to capture it 
 suddenly. And, even as Osiris plunged 
 into the temples and oracle-houses, and 
 about the altars, in the dead of night, to 
 drive away Jehovih's guardian angels, so, 
 like him, and even worse, Te-in was baf- 
 
 fled and repulsed, and saw the morning 
 sun arise upon his shame in total failure. 
 And then he, too, with his mighty legions, 
 went stalking about all day long on the 
 earth, waiting for the next night's assault 
 on sleeping mortals, and to receive new or- 
 ders from the Lord God, as to the next 
 proceeding. 
 
 Then came the second night, and Te-in 
 went in, with his army, furious because of 
 the last night's cowardly failure. And to 
 the sleeping mortals, men, women and 
 children, hied them with oaths and loud 
 boastings, threatening Jehovih's angels 
 with the tortures .of hell if they did not in- 
 stantly resign all unto Ho-Joss, the all 
 highest ruler, dweller in Hored. But 
 faithful stood the Jehovihians; laid their 
 hands on the sleeping mortals, and became 
 all powerful against the terrible odds, and 
 held them in abeyance again, till the sun 
 arose and scattered Te-in's hosts, ashamed 
 and sulky, in most pitiful defeat. Which 
 news Te-in now, most painfully, sent to 
 his commanding God. 
 
 To him, even as to Osiris, De'yus sent 
 word to next attack the houses of the men 
 of learning, the unbelievers; the ignorant 
 and the superstitious; to abandon, for the 
 present, the arcs, and temples, and oracle- 
 houses, and the Faithists, firmly sworn. 
 De'yus said: Send thou thy numerators 
 and mathematicians; and measure and 
 mark all mortals in Jaffeth, as to their vul- 
 nerable points, and map their localities; 
 and when thou hast completed this work, 
 set apart another night for an attack upon 
 them. And thy hosts shall fall not upon 
 the Faithists who are firm in the Great 
 Spirit, Ormazd, but upon the weak and 
 disbelieving, the skeptical and much learn- 
 ed philosophers, who are weak in spirit, 
 and thou shalt not fail. 
 
 So Te-in enummerated the Jaffeth'eans 
 as commanded, marking them as to their 
 vulnerable points, whether in disbelief in 
 spirit, or if given to lust, or to hasty pas- 
 sions, or to telling lies, or to stealing, or 
 to murder, or to hypocrisy, or to desire for 
 leadership. And before the time of battle, 
 Te-in knew the grade of every mortal in 
 Jaffeth. And he called his generals and 
 captains before him in his heavenly place, 
 Che-su-gow, over the Chesian Mountains, 
 
328 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 twenty miles high, showing them the lists 
 and maps. 
 
 Take these, he said, and distribute them 
 before my mighty armies, and ere to-mor- 
 row night they shall learn every mortal's 
 place and quality; and in the night my le- 
 gions shall rush upon the places, laying 
 hands on the sleeping mortals, thus gaining 
 power; and they shall hurl missiles, with 
 terrible noises, through the houses of the 
 sleepers, and so arouse them to awake and 
 behold the war of heaven carried to their 
 homes. 
 
 The generals and captains took the lists 
 and maps, and had millions of copies made 
 of them, and then sent them into all the re- 
 gions of De'yus' militants; and besides sent 
 proclaimers, millions and millions, with 
 terrible oaths against the Great Spirit, but 
 who extolled the munificence of De'yus 
 to the utmost; appealing to their love of 
 independence, and to their power to cast off 
 all other rulers forever, save Ho-Joss. 
 
 And now, when the night of battle 
 came, the infuriated angel warriors of Te- 
 in marched in lines, millions strong, toward 
 the sleeping mortals. Spread broad their 
 great armies, covering the land of Jaffeth 
 from east to west and from north to south. 
 Over Flang'e'loe, the City of the Sun, were 
 sent thirty million of Te-in's warring an- 
 gels, sworn to subjugate the people of 
 great learning, alive or dead, and scatter 
 the angels of Jehovih, or bind them and 
 cast them into hell. Over the city of Pen 
 Goo were Te-in's hosts, twenty million; 
 and over the cities of Tsee, and Wung, and 
 Ha-tzo, and Ne King, and Zoo Wun, each 
 twenty milion of Te-in's angels of war. 
 
 Besides these there were millions and 
 millions stationed over the great valley of 
 Wan, and in the mountains of So Jon. In 
 the plains of Wow Gan were stationed sev- 
 enty million. Five million were allotted 
 to each of the following cities, to wit: Sum 
 Cone, Ah-gee, Ah-sin, Chang ha, Gee 
 Ooh-young, Gwan Gouk, Na'tji, Yuk Hoh, 
 Ah-Tosh, Ah Koan, Chaung, Shon, Nu- 
 Kingdo, Ghi Sam, Seung, Chog, Doth, 
 Jawh, Bing-tah, Gha, Haih, Huug, Wing- 
 tze, Ni Am, Ah Sam and Zow-lin. In the 
 mountains of Witch How Loo were sta- 
 tioned eighty million. On the borders of 
 the sea, for sea-faring men, and for their 
 
 wives and children, were one hundred and 
 ninety million of Te-in's angel soldiers, 
 ready for the assault. Besides these were 
 tens of thousands of smaller armies, sta- 
 tioned in the small cities and country 
 places waiting for the signal to attack. 
 
 Now, in this age, Jaffeth had attained 
 to great wisdom in many things, save in 
 war, in which the people were as babes. 
 More than half her people were Faithis.ts, 
 followers of Po, worshippers of the Great 
 Spirit. And they practiced peace and dwelt 
 in communities. Many of the cities were 
 composed of families of tens, and hun- 
 dreds, and thousands, but nowhere more 
 than two thousand. And the city families 
 were after this manner: The manufactur- 
 ers of woolen cloth, one family; of linen 
 cloth, another; of silken cloth, another; of 
 leather, another; of paper, another; of 
 transportation, another; and so on, till 
 all departments were full; and of these 
 combinations were provinces of fifty thou- 
 sand, and a hundred thousand, and two 
 hundred thousand inhabitants. And in the 
 country places there were small cities, 
 whose people tilled the soil and gathered 
 the fruits of the earth, and they exchanged 
 goods with the manufacturers who dwelt 
 in large cities. 
 
 The government was by priests, one for 
 each communion family, and the priests 
 who were called Wa-shon, were the receiv- 
 ers and distributers of goods, and they min- 
 istered in the temples and at the altars of 
 worship in the name of the Great Spirit, 
 Ormazd, sometimes called Po-e-tain, and 
 sometimes Eolin, and by other names 
 also. Besides the schools and colleges 
 there were Houses of Philosophy, and 
 Houses of Prophecy, and Houses of As- 
 tronomy, thousands and thousands. 
 
 The Jaffeth'eans were large, being I'hu- 
 ans, with one degree more of the brown 
 people's blood in them than the Par'siV- 
 ans. Nor in all the world was there, at that 
 time, so strong a people, and clean and 
 jovial, high aspiring, with great gentleness. 
 And because the land was tilled and made 
 to bloom on every side, the angels of hea- 
 ven named it the Flowery Kingdom; and 
 because the people reveled in song, poetry, 
 and oratory, they were called Lambs of the 
 Great Spirit in the Flush of Spring Time. 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ABMIJ 
 
 329 
 
 And these things were well known to 
 De'yus, and to Te-in, the false, and to hun- 
 dreds of millions of the assaulting angels, 
 sworn to subdue them to Ho-Joss or to 
 everlasting destruction. But because of 
 the power of Jehovih with the most faith- 
 ful of the Faithists, the arcs and temoles 
 of worship had stood unharmed by the Sa- 
 tanic raid. Equally so the Te-ins failed to 
 overpower the Great Spirit's guardian an- 
 gels. So now, after due preparation, the 
 time came for another assault, this time 
 upon the mortals having the least faith in 
 Jehovih. 
 
 On the other hand, the true God, Son 
 of Jehovih, sent word from his throne in 
 Craoshivi to the guardian angels dwelling 
 with these mortals, so unmindful of the 
 Father's care. He said: Come defeat, or 
 disaster, or terrible darkness, overpowering 
 your utmost strength, still struggle ye, in 
 the name of Jehovih. The true Faithist 
 knoweth nothing impracticable, but doeth 
 his utmost for his highest light, though 
 failure stare him in the face. For once dis- 
 trust or weakness entereth the human soul, 
 the man slideth backward down the hill of 
 faith; whilst he who will not consider re- 
 sults, save to serve Jehovih right on, fail 
 or not, riseth, even though his project fail. 
 
 With this and no other word from Je- 
 hovih, the Faithists stood about their weak 
 and helpless wards on the low earth, wait- 
 ing for the thousand million angels of Te- 
 ins. But not in any lengthened suspense, 
 for when the sun stood with the widest part 
 of the earth between, the midnight hour, 
 the militants came rushing on, with oaths 
 most hideous, and by their dense flood of 
 numbers reached the sleeping mortals and 
 laid hands on them. Then, with joy run to 
 madness because of triumph, sent hurling 
 round about appurtenances in the dwell- 
 ings. And, in many places, with audible 
 speech thus held forth in the dark to the 
 affrighted mortals: 
 
 From Sanc-tu I come, to lay in the dust 
 every mortal born that will not down in 
 reverence to Ho-Joss, ruler of worlds. 
 Give ear, O man; the anger of heaven's 
 Creator is let loose upon a disobedient 
 race! 
 
 And then, to give semblance of truth 
 to the words, the angel intruders let fly 
 such knocks and poundings that they 
 
 moved many a house on its foundation^ 
 and rous.ed the mortals, panic-stricken, to 
 find the cause, or to hasten quickly to re- 
 pentance and prayers. 
 
 But not all was their victory; for the 
 Jehovihians firmly held the power in hun- 
 dreds of thousands of places. And yet the 
 Te-in's hosts had a wonderful victory. 
 
 Te-in quickly sent word to De'yus, ex- 
 ulting, and exaggerating the victories won. 
 And in turn, De'yus congratulated him and 
 his army, his thousand million, who, now 
 anchored on the earth, and with mortals,, 
 frolicked about in all regions. 
 
 And in Jaffeth, in course of time, the 
 same questions arose as in Arabin'ya; ques- 
 tions from mortals to the spirits; as to the 
 destination of the soul of man; as to the or- 
 igin of things;. as to the heavenly places? 
 And Te-in in turn sent word on up to De'- 
 yus, in Hored, as to what answer should be 
 given. It was thus, that he, too, was sum- 
 moned to Sanc-tu, in Hored, to meet with. 
 Osiris, and Baal, and Ashtaroth, and Sud- 
 ga, subduer of Vind'yu. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXVII. 
 
 Sudga, the false, sent by De'yus to- 
 overturn the Great Spirit's dominion in 
 Vind'yu, and to establish the highest hea- 
 venly place, Hored, was wiser than Osir- 
 is or Te-in in his wicked work. For he 
 did not permit his army, his thousand mill- 
 ion to rush on for the places of worship 
 and for the oracle-houses. But most delib- 
 erately halted his forces in Haroyu, the 
 lowest heavenly place over the mountains 
 of Vivrat, in Vind'yu, three miles high and 
 broad as the earth, and a commanding sit- 
 uation. Whence, in a sure way, he sent 
 his measurers on ahead down to the earth, 
 to measure mortals, as to their weakness- 
 and strength in faith in Jehovih, and other 
 rulers, heavenly; to map them and mark 
 to number them. 
 
 Great was the peace and beauty and 
 glory of Vind'yu in that day. Her rivers 
 and canals coursed the country over, and 
 her industrious sons and daughters, two 
 hundred million, were, in the eyes of the 
 angels, the pride and glory of the earth. 
 Hundreds of thousands of her people were 
 prophets and seers. And so abundant was 
 spiritual light amongst the people, that 
 even those who learned but one language 
 
330 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 could understand and speak with people 
 from remote parts; words and sentences 
 they had never learned; even when first 
 meeting them. Like the inhabitants of Jaf- 
 feth, as to government and industry, most- 
 ly by the exchange of goods, and not by 
 buying and selling, lived the Vind'yuans. 
 
 Sudga said to his generals and captains: 
 Only by confounding the languages of 
 these people can they be broken up and 
 subdued. Behold, they are becoming as 
 Gods; knowing and understanding in ad- 
 vance of the words spoken. Fall ye upon 
 them, and possess them, and obsess them, 
 all who are easily captured. Get ye a foot- 
 hold here and there in the first place; and 
 in their commerce cripple them. It is a 
 strong city that maketh all kinds of goods; 
 it is a weak - 1 ace indeed that dependeth on 
 another, which is far off. Such people are 
 •easily tripped up. Behold, I will teach these 
 people that I am the only militant before 
 whom every knee shall bow; or, failing to 
 win them thus, I will set city against city, 
 and country place against country place; all 
 against one another, for which their super- 
 abundant languages will furnish excellent 
 material. 
 
 Sudga opened the door at night for his 
 hosts to fall on the weakest of mortals, 
 as to faith in Ormazd, Who had become 
 as a stale story to hundreds of thousands of 
 men and women. In Vind'yu had women 
 risen in knowledge, higher than the high- 
 est of women in other parts of the world. 
 In the Houses of Philosophy and Houses 
 of Science women were foremost, as to 
 men, and skeptical as to the Ormazdian 
 power. 
 
 On rushed Sudga's legions; and even as 
 Osiris and Te-in won in the third assault, 
 so Sudga won in the first. And he, too, 
 sent word to De'yus, and exaggerated be- 
 yond all bounds of truth, as to his vic- 
 tories. Nevertheless, his hosts were suf- 
 ficiently anchored on the earth to claim 
 an everlasting: victory for De'yus and to es- 
 tablish his name. 
 
 And here, also, after a few years, the 
 questions came from mortals, asking thus: 
 Behold, ye cut off the heavens of the an- 
 cients, the Nirvanian regions beyond Chin- 
 vat. Ye teach us that De'yus is the All 
 High Ruler. What, then, is the all high- 
 est for man? How came the worlds? 
 
 Whence came man? How was the creation 
 created? To answer which Sudga sent to 
 De'yus for instructions. And De'yus sent 
 to Sudga, even as to the other Gods, an in- 
 vitation to meet in Hored, to hear the 
 words of the Lord God, to learn his com- 
 mands. 
 
 Thus went the five great warrior Gods 
 before De'yus, taking with them each his 
 ten thousand attendants, besides thousands 
 of trumpeters. De'yus had a good feast 
 prepared for them; and had sent receivers 
 forth to meet them and conduct them to 
 Sanc-tu in great splendor. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXVIII. 
 
 Great was the pomp and parade and 
 glory, in Hored, when De'yus' victorous 
 Gods and their companions and attend- 
 ants came in answer to his summons. The 
 trumpeters of Hored were stationed along 
 more than a thousand miles on the heaven- 
 ly roadways, and in turn the trumpeters and 
 heralds of the visiting Gods extended in 
 advance of the Gods themselves an equally 
 great distance. All the way were the roads 
 lined with flags and banners, and millions 
 of spectators, who had formerly been in 
 schools and colleges in heaven, but were 
 now emancipated from the restrictions of 
 self-improvement, and used as applauders, 
 to sing and shout praises to De'yus for his 
 own glory. 
 
 The table of the feast was private and in 
 secret, and only prepared for the Gods and 
 their close companions, one hundred all 
 told, but the serving host numbered more 
 than one thousand souls. 
 
 Whilst at the feast, De'yus said to Osir- 
 is: Speak thou of thy exploits, and of Baal 
 and Ashtaroth and their valorous legions. 
 
 Then Osiris explained the nature of the 
 earth countries, and of the battles and in- 
 cidents, well exaggerating to the last re- 
 sult. After Osiris had finished his story, 
 De'yus said to Te-in: Speak thou of thy 
 exploits and of thy generals and captains, 
 and of thy valorous legions. 
 
 Whereupon, Te-in displayed the maps 
 of the earth regions where he had been, and 
 his battles, and final success, also much ex- 
 aggerated. And now, after he had finished 
 his story, De'yus said to Sudga: Speak 
 thou of thy generals and captains and thy 
 valorous legions. 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARM1J 
 
 331 
 
 Then Sudga explained the earth region 
 where he had fought and won, extolling 
 his generals and captains, and his hosts, 
 well exaggerated also. When they had all 
 finished their hilarious acounts, and ap- 
 plauded one another in sufficient zeal, in 
 that same time the feast of eating and 
 drinking was ended. Whereupon De'yus 
 stood up and said: 
 
 I new declare the feast ended. Let the 
 tables be removed. Behold, I will speak 
 from the throne, in private, before my five 
 Gods only, save mine own marshals. But 
 unto all others I declare a time of recrea- 
 tion and sport, to be called again to duty 
 when I have finished with my Gods, of 
 which my marshals will inform the trum- 
 peters, who shall sound the call. 
 
 Speedily, now, the attendants took away 
 the tables; and the hosts all withdrew, leav- 
 ing only the Gods and De'yus and his mar- 
 shals. Whereupon De'yus ascended the 
 throne, and then spake, saying: 
 
 I, the Lord your God, who am De'yus 
 of heaven and earth, declare unto you, my 
 Gods and earth rulers, in mine own name, 
 and with love abounding: To declare my 
 doctrines and creations, that all the earth 
 may be subdued alike unto me and mine 
 forever. To surpass not mine own age in 
 my doctrines, nor to explain my axioms. 
 But to surpass the understanding of mor- 
 tals sufficiently unto their knowledge of 
 earthly things, and so appease their curios- 
 ity, as to the questions they put to ye, my 
 Gods. 
 
 Neither will I bind myself as Ahura 
 did; for I will not explain who I am, save 
 that man is in mine own-likeness; nor when 
 the beginning of things was. This heaven 
 I created; and ye also bear witness that I 
 have established the earth in me, through 
 your valorous deeds. 
 
 I, who am your God, look not to mat- 
 ters of a day, or a year; my times are as 
 one time, for from this time forth forever 
 this heaven and the earth are mine, time 
 without end. In which ye behold days and 
 years and the generations of men on the 
 earth pass rapidly. Who, then, shall think 
 seriously of the inhabitants that now are 
 yours and mine? Behold, the earth is 
 fruitful; a thousand years are but as one 
 day; and there shall spring up out of the 
 earth thousands of millions of souls new- 
 
 born. For them are my answers shaped, 
 more than for such as now are. 
 
 In the beginning I created this heaven 
 and the earth unto mine own name and 
 glory. For they were void and without 
 order; darkness was upon them. Where- 
 upon I moved upon them, saying: Let 
 there be light; and there was light. And 
 I drew a line betwixt darkness and light 
 for they had worshipped the void instead 
 of me. Whereupon I declare this the morn- 
 ing and evening of the first day. And I 
 have divided those that were void, and es- 
 tablished my firmament betwixt them, even 
 as land betwixt water and water. And my 
 firmament is heaven, and I have made it to 
 be over such as were void, like water. And 
 this was the morning and evening of 
 the second day. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXIX. 
 
 Osiris, being commanded of God to 
 speak, said: Give us one day, O De'yus, 
 that we may digest this matter. Thereupon 
 De'yus gave them one day; and on the 
 next day, when they were assembled, the 
 Gods ratified every word De'yus had 
 spoken. 
 
 Again De'yus spake, saying: And I saw 
 that the earth was good and that heaven 
 might reign thereon. And I saw that the 
 earth brought forth grass, trees, fruit and 
 seeds, everything after its own kind; and 
 I said: Behold, they are good. Neither 
 attributed I evil unto anything on the 
 earth, or in the waters, or in the air above. 
 But I separated the light from darkness; 
 this was the substance of my creation. And 
 this was the morning and evening of the 
 third day. 
 
 Again Osiris asked for a day, that the. 
 Gods might weigh the words of the Lord 
 God. And God gave them a day; and when 
 they were again assembled, De'yus said: 
 
 Let there be Gods in the firmament 
 above the earth; and they shall separate 
 the darkness from the light of the earth 
 that man may know me and my kingdoms. 
 And my Gods shall teach signs and seasons 
 and days and years, forever, unto the sons 
 of men. And I made myself to rule the 
 light of the world; but Osiris I made to 
 rule the darkness of the world, which is 
 the earth, my footstool. And this was the 
 morning and evening of the fourth day. 
 
332 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 Again De'yus gave the Gods one day, 
 to weigh the matter of his words, and to 
 ratify them, which they did. 
 
 Again De'yus said: Let the waters of 
 the earth bring forth abundantly the mov- 
 ing creatures that live; and let the fowl 
 fly above the earth in the air of the firraa 
 ment. For they are good. Let them be 
 fruitful and multiply, every living, creature, 
 and fill the earth, and the waters of the 
 earth, and the air above the earth, every 
 creature after its own kind. Wherefore my 
 blessing is upon them. And this was the 
 morning and evening of the fifth daj'. 
 
 And De'yus gave his Gods a day to 
 weigh his words and ratify them, which 
 they did. 
 
 And then De'yus said: And now, my 
 Gods, let us make man in our own fashion; 
 and in likeness of ourselves, let them have 
 dominion also, but over the fish in the 
 waters, and the fowl in the air, and over 
 the cattle, and over the earth, and over 
 every living creature upon the earth. And 
 this was the morning and evening of the 
 sixth day. 
 
 And ye shall go to them and say to 
 mortals : 
 
 In our own likeness are ye created, male 
 and female, and God's blessing is upon you. 
 Be ye fruitful, and multiply, and replenish 
 the earth and subdue it; and have dominion 
 over the earth, and the fishes, and fowl, 
 and every living creature on the earth, for 
 they are yours forever! And behold, ye 
 have every herb, and seed, and fruit, which 
 is on the face of the earth, and the roots 
 that grow in the earth, and they shall be 
 your food. But of whatsoever hath breath- 
 ed the breath of life man shall not eat. 
 
 Again De'yus gave the Gods a day of 
 rest, in order to weigh the matter and rati- 
 fy it. 
 
 And again De'yus spake, saying: The 
 Lord your God said unto thee, Osiris; and 
 to thee, Te-in; and to thee, Sudga: Search 
 thou amongst mortals for one high in su'is, 
 for when I announce my doctrines, thou 
 shalt go to such mortal and cause him to 
 write my words, saying: Such are the 
 words of the Lord, thy God. In answer to 
 which I bid ye all now speak before me. 
 
 Osiris said: According to thy com- 
 mandments have I searched and have 
 found Thoth the highest man in su-is, and 
 he dwelleth in Arabin'ya. 
 
 Then spake Te-in, saying: In like man- 
 ner, also searched I, and found Hong, in 
 my division of the earth, the highest man 
 in su'is, and he dwelleth in Ho'e Sin. 
 
 Then answered Sudga, saying: Even 
 so have I accomplished in Vind'yu, and I 
 have found one Anj-rajan. 
 
 De'yus said: To these mortals go ye 
 and give my doctrines in your own ways; 
 according to the languages of mortals, and 
 their capacity to understand. Neither bind 
 I you to my exact words, nor limit you, 
 save that what I have spoken shall be the 
 foundation. Thus, then, endeth the feast; 
 and behold, it is the seventh day; for which 
 reason I sanctify it and declare it a day 
 of recreation. 
 
 CHAPTER XL. 
 
 On the following day the Gods depart- 
 ed, with due ceremonies, after the manner 
 they came, and returned to their kingdoms, 
 and thence down to the earth, each one to 
 his own division. And each of the three 
 Gods -went to his own chosen mortal who 
 had power to see and hear spiritual things. 
 And the Gods possessed them by their 
 presence, and inspired them to write the 
 words of De'yus, word for word; and they 
 were so written, alike and like, in the three 
 great divisions of the earth. And copies of 
 them were made and filed in the libraries, 
 and in the houses of philosophy of mortals. 
 
 But when these matters were thus en- 
 tered, in answer to the queries of mortals, 
 as to the origin of man and his destiny, 
 they were not deemed sufficient by the' 
 learned men. Many of them said: The 
 Lord God hath evaded our questions. 
 
 Then satan came to each of the three 
 Gods who had the matter in charge, and 
 he said unto them: Consult with one an- 
 other as, to what shall be done. So Osiris 
 sent messengers to Te-in and to Sudga, 
 asking them to come to Agho'aden, his 
 heavenly place, for consultation. And, in 
 due course of time, Te-in and Sudga came 
 to Osiris, to his throne, where they were 
 received in great honor and glory. And 
 presently Osiris' marshals cleared the place, 
 so the interview was private, for even the 
 marshals stood afar off. 
 
 Osiris said: What shall we do without 
 a Creator in fact? I know not if my judg- 
 ment be beside itself, for it is said they 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 333 
 
 that lose their reason are the last to dis- 
 cover it. The time was when De'yus, our 
 much-loved Lord God, said: Whilst ye 
 labor on earth for me and my kingdoms, 
 behold, I will reciprocate in all things. 
 Neither shall ye ask for aught but it shall 
 be granted unto you. 
 
 Hear me then, O my brothers, in my 
 complaint; mortals have asked us, to know 
 the origin or man, and his destination; and 
 to know the cause of good and evil. These 
 things I submitted unto our Lord God, in 
 Hored, to learn his will and decree. There- 
 upon he sent messengers to me announcing 
 a feast, on which occasion he would an- 
 swer the questions of mortals satisfactorily. 
 Ye and I went to the feast, and De'yus 
 hath furnished us with something, which is 
 nothing. For mortals can also perceive 
 that what the Lord God hath said leaves 
 their questions still unanswered. De'yus is 
 my friend, and I desire not to press him 
 further on the subject; and so I have called 
 you, to learn of you how ye managed the 
 same issues? 
 
 Te-in said: Before our heavenly king- 
 doms were confederated, Anuhasaj pro- 
 fessed that he would announce himself the 
 head and front of all created creations. 
 Shall we say his courage is less? And so 
 excuse him? 
 
 Sudga said: When he should have said: 
 I created man in mine own image, behold, 
 he hath weakly said: Let us make man! Is 
 it not clear, then, that he shirketh from the 
 responsibility, and desireth ourselves com- 
 mingled in the pitiful story? Hear me, 
 then, my brothers; I am asked how I have 
 answered the issues with mine own division, 
 and say unto you, I have been in the same 
 quandary, and have not answered at all. 
 
 Te-in said: Neither have I. But that 
 we may be justified in so doing, behold, 
 the Lord God said unto us: I bind you 
 not to my words, nor limit you, save that 
 what I have spoken shall be the founda- 
 tion. Now, it is clear, that if we admit 
 that sin is in the world, we must find a 
 way to justify the Lord God, whose ser- 
 vants we are. If he be not justified, then 
 is sin justified. For mortals perceive good 
 and evil understandingly; but to justify a 
 good God for permitting evil is not an easy 
 matter. For in the breath we praise him, 
 we must praise his works, of which sin is 
 
 apparent; and in the same breath that we 
 condemn sin, how shall we glorify De'yus? 
 For have we not proclaimed him the foun- 
 dation of all things; the head and front, 
 before the creation was created? Was not 
 this our battle-cry to urge our angel war- 
 riors on to overthrow Jehovih? And hath 
 not our loud-praised Lord God said: Let 
 us make man! A child should have more 
 courage than this! 
 
 Sudga said: It is plain we all under- 
 stand these issues, and perceive, also, what 
 is required of us. For since De'yus hath 
 left us liberty to add to his doctrines, ac- 
 cording to our own judgment, is it not 
 well that we agree upon a doctrine, even 
 as De'yus professed prior to the confeder- 
 acy? And thus give it to mortals? 
 
 Osiris said: This is wisdom, O my 
 brothers. To make our Lord God the 
 Creator, we must account unto him all 
 things, both good and evil. Wherefore we 
 shall give two masters to man, the one be- 
 ing the serpent, the earth, the lowest in- 
 spirer; and the other the voice of our Lord 
 God. 
 
 Sudga said: My brother hath spoken 
 wisely. And yet, is the term two masters 
 the wisest term? For in declaring the Lord 
 God the highest, we must make him master 
 over the earth also. 
 
 Te-in said: Why shall we not adopt 
 the Eolin of the ancients, substituting 
 the words Lord God? And make a com- 
 mandment over man, forbidding him 
 hearkening to the serpent, lest he be led 
 away from the Lord God, and throw the 
 cause of sin upon man, for violating the 
 Lord God's commandment. 
 
 Osiris said: Most wisely spoken, my 
 brothers. For by accusing man, through 
 the serpent, we clear the Lord God. 
 
 CHAPTER XLI. 
 
 On the following day the three false 
 Gods, Osiris and Te-in and Sudga, wrote 
 their account, each one in his own way. 
 And when they were read, Orisis' stood 
 clearer than either of the others'; but nev- 
 ertheless, Te-in's and Sudga's had much 
 merit. So it came to pass that Osiris' ac- 
 count was adopted, with interpolations 
 from the others'. This, then, is the com- 
 pleted report: 
 
334 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 These are the times of earth and heaven 
 when created; the time the Lord God cre- 
 ated them. And the Lord God formed man 
 out of the dust of the earth, and quickened 
 him through his nostrils with the breath 
 of life, and man became a living creature. 
 
 And God caused mists to rise up from 
 the waters, and spread over the earth, and 
 rain upon it. And he caused trees and 
 herbs to grow up out of the ground; every- 
 thing that is pleasant for the sight and 
 good for food. Thus out of the ground 
 the Lord God caused man to come forth, 
 being of the earth, of the land of Sepe'a. 
 
 To dress the land and keep it pleasant, 
 the Lord God commanded man, saying: 
 This shall be thy labor, in which thou shalt 
 be perfected unto everlasting life. Of all 
 things in the land of Sepe'a mayst thou 
 freely take and enjoy. 
 
 And man prospered on the earth for a 
 long season; and he was naked and not 
 ashamed. And God planted the tree of 
 knowledge in the land of Sepe'a, and he 
 said unto man: This tree have I planted; 
 partake thou not of it, for it pertaineth to 
 life and death. 
 
 And God called the name of the first 
 man A'su. And the Lord God caused man 
 to name all things on the earth, and in the 
 waters, and in the air above the earth, and 
 whatsoever man called every living crea- 
 ture, that was the name thereof. 
 
 And the Lord God caused A'su to fall 
 into a trance; and an angel of heaven came 
 and stood by his side. And the Lord God 
 drew from the flesh, and from the bones, 
 and from the blood of A'su, and thus 
 made woman, and brought her unto A'su. 
 
 And the Lord God repeated his com- 
 mandment unto woman, saying: Thou shalt 
 sojourn for a season on the earth, and 
 cleave unto A'su, for he is thy husband, 
 and thou art his wife; and thou shalt par- 
 take of all things on the face of the earth, 
 save of the tree of life, which is both good 
 and evil, for in the day thou eatest thereof 
 thou shalt surely die. 
 
 But the serpent, the earth, said unto 
 the woman: I say unto thee, in the day 
 thou eatest thereof thou shalt have thine 
 eyes opened, and shalt become as a God- 
 dess, creating offspring. 
 
 And the woman was more easily per- 
 suaded than man, for she had confidence in 
 
 the serpent; and they partook of the fruit 
 thereof; and, of a truth, their eyes were 
 opened, and they beheld their nakedness. 
 
 And presently they heard the Lord God 
 walking in Sepe'a, and they hid them- 
 selves in the bushes. And the Lord God 
 said: Where art thou, A'su? And A'su 
 said: Because we heard thee walking, we 
 hid ourselves, for we were naked. 
 
 The Lord God said: Who told thee 
 thou wert naked? Hast thou eaten of the 
 tree whereof I told thee thou shouldst not 
 eat? A'su said: The woman thou gavest 
 me to be with me, led me, saying: Behold, 
 it is good fruit; and we ate thereof. 
 
 The Lord God said: Woman, what 
 hast thou done? And the woman answered 
 saying: The serpent beguiled me. And the 
 Lord God said unto the serpent: Because 
 thou hast done this, thou art accursed, and 
 thou shalt not rise up from the earth, but 
 return to dust whence thou earnest. 
 
 Unto the woman the Lord God said: 
 Because thou hast conceived, thou shalt 
 have great sorrow; in sorrow bring forth 
 children; thy desire shall be to thy hus- 
 band, and he shall rule over thee. And I 
 will put enmity betwixt the serpent and 
 thine offspring; and the flesh shall call one 
 way, which is unto earth, but the soul of 
 man shall call unto me, the Lord God. 
 And though the serpent bite, yet man shall 
 bruise him, and subdue him. 
 
 And God taught man to make coats of 
 skins and be clothed. And the Lord God 
 said: Lest man partake further, becoming 
 of one of us, he shall go out of Sepe'a, 
 where I created him. So he drove man 
 our of Sepe'a backward, and gave him cher- 
 ubims to hold him on every side, to pre- 
 serve unto man the tree of life, that man 
 might not only fulfill the spirit, but the 
 flesh also. 
 
 When Osiris had gone thus far, Sudga 
 interposed, saying: If we say, Becoming 
 one of us, will not man say: Behold, there 
 are more Gods than the Lord God? 
 
 Te-in said: Because De'yus said: Let 
 us make man, shall we not use us in this 
 instance? 
 
 Osiris said: Hear me, my brothers, yet 
 further; for I have previously found a way 
 out. For I have divided the Lord from 
 God; that is to say: 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 335 
 
 And the Lord God said: Because man 
 hath learned good and evil, I am as twain 
 unto him, for I am Lord of the earth and 
 God of heaven. And that which is on the 
 earth is the Lord's, and that which is in 
 heaven is God's. 
 
 And A'su called his wife's name We-it, 
 for she was the fountain of all men. And 
 We-it brought forth a son, Cain, saying: 
 I have begotten a son from the Lord. And 
 she brought forth another son, Abel. And 
 the first-born was begotten in darkness, 
 but the second in the light of the Lord. 
 And the Lord had more respect unto the 
 second, Abel, than unto the first, Cain. 
 
 In course of time Cain brought of the 
 fruit of the ground and offered it unto the 
 Lord. And Abel brought for the Lord, as 
 his offerings, the firstlings of his flocks. 
 And Cain perceived that the Lord had 
 more respect for his brother, and Cain was 
 wroth, and his countenance fell. 
 
 And the Lord said unto Cain: Why- 
 art thou jealous? If thou doest well, shalt 
 thou not be accepted? And if thou doest 
 not well, sin lieth at thy door. 
 
 But Cain would not be reconciled be- 
 cause of the darkness in him, and when he 
 and his brother were walking in the fields, 
 Cain turned upon Abel and slew him. 
 
 God said: Behold, darkness is between 
 men; the son begotten in darkness falleth 
 upon him begotten in the light. And it 
 shall come to pass on the earth from this 
 time forth that the righteous shall be per- 
 secuted by the unrighteous. 
 
 And the Lord said unto Cain: Where 
 is Abel, thy brother? And he said: I 
 know not. Am I my brother's keeper? 
 The Lord said: The voice of thy brother's 
 blood crieth out unto me from the ground: 
 Now art thou accursed from the earth, for 
 it hath opened to receive thy brother's 
 blood from thy hand. In my sight thou 
 shalt be a fugitive and a vagabond upon the 
 earth. And because thou hast shed blood, 
 blood shall not cease to flow from thy sons 
 and daughters forever. 
 
 Cain said: O Lord, my punishment is 
 greater than I can bear. For I am become 
 the first foundation of all the wars on the 
 earth; for thou hast hid thy face from me; 
 and it shall come to pass that every one 
 that findeth of me in them shall be slain 
 also. 
 
 And the Lord said unto Cain: Whoso- 
 ever slayeth thee or thine, vengeance shall 
 be upon him seven-fold. And the Lord 
 wrote upon Cain's forehead the word 
 Asugsahiben, signifying, Blood for sake of 
 self, a mark, lest any finding him might kill 
 him. 
 
 And from this time forth Cain lost the 
 voice of the Lord, because he went off into 
 darkness. And Cain took a wife and begot 
 heirs, and they were called Cainites, and 
 the heirs after them were called the tribe 
 of Cainites, which survived him nine hun- 
 dred and ten years, after which they were 
 divided into six and twenty tribes. 
 
 And We-it bore another son, Seth, in 
 place of Abel, whom Cain slew. And after 
 these came the generations of men, good 
 and evil. And the Lord God said: Behold, 
 I created man without sin, and I gave him 
 warning, that he might remain holy on the 
 face of the earth. But woman hearkened 
 not to my counsel, but to the serpent, and 
 sin came into the world. Therefore shall 
 woman bring forth in pain all the genera- 
 tions of the earth. 
 
 Thus it was that the Lord God created 
 man; in the likeness of God created he him. 
 And the sons of Cain were called tribes, 
 even unto this day, but the sons of the 
 righteous were called sons of God; where- 
 fore it was said of old: Behold the tribes of 
 earth and the sons of heaven. And the 
 Lord said: Shall I not accord to myself to 
 choose what I will? For this right I gave 
 to man also. And from that time after 
 the sons of God were called' God's chosen. 
 And it came to pass that man multiplied 
 on the face of the earth; and the tribes 
 were mightier than the sons of the Lord 
 God, and the wickedness of man became 
 great in the earth, and the desires of his 
 heart were evil continually. 
 
 And the Lord God repented that he had 
 made man on the earth, and it grieved him 
 at his heart. And the Lord God said: I 
 will destroy man whom I have created; 
 nor will I spare beast nor creeping thing in 
 the place I gave. Behold, I will bring a 
 flood of waters upon the lands of the earth, 
 and I will destroy all flesh wherein is the 
 breath of life. But my covenant is with 
 my chosen, who shall not be destroyed by 
 the flood of waters. 
 
336 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMId 
 
 And God's sens in Noe took with them 
 pairs of the living, of beasts and birds, ac- 
 cording to the commandments of God, to 
 keep the seed alive on the earth. And when 
 the earth was six hundred years in Noe, 
 the flood of waters was come upon the 
 earth. And for forty days and forty nights 
 the rains fell, and the fountains of the sea 
 came up on the lands of the earth. And 
 man and beast alike, that drew the breath 
 of life, died, for the land was no more. 
 
 But the heirs of Noe suffered not; and 
 the ships of the arc, whither the Lord had 
 concealed them, rode upon the waters. 
 And God made a wind to pass over the 
 earth; and the fountains of the deep were 
 stopped, and the rain of heaven restrained, 
 and the ships of the arc borne upon dry 
 land. 
 
 And the Lord God said: Behold, I will 
 build a new earth and a new heaven. For 
 these, my sons, have proven their faith in 
 me. Neither will I again destroy the tribes 
 of men because their hearts are set on evil. 
 And the Lord God swore an oath by the 
 bow of the arc, saying: This is the token 
 of the covenant which I have established 
 between me and all flesh that is upon the 
 earth. And by the sons of Noe was the 
 whole earth overspread, and the Lord 
 blessed the earth, and said: Every moving 
 thing that liveth shall be meat for man; 
 even as the green herb I have given. But 
 flesh with the life thereof, which is the 
 blood thereof, shall man not eat. 
 
 For surely your blood of your lives will 
 I require; of every beast will I require it; 
 at the hand of every man's brother will I 
 require the life of man that feedeth on liv- 
 ing flesh and blood. And whosoever shed- 
 deth man's blood, by man shall his blood 
 be shed; for in my image made I man. 
 And ye, be ye fruitful, and multiply, and 
 bring forth abundantly in the earth, and 
 inhabit it, for it is yours for perpetual gen- 
 erations. 
 
 Thus ended the words of Osiris. Te-in 
 said: Because of flesh and blood, thou art 
 wise, my brother. Sudga said: Hereon 
 hangeth the glory of our enterprise. For 
 man being less restrained than in the Divan 
 laws, will accept the new readily. 
 
 After this, Osiris prepared a book of 
 generations of men on earth; and these 
 were the substance of the doctrines of De'- 
 
 yus and his Gods. And Osiris and Te-in 
 and Sudga departed, and came down to the 
 earth, to their mortal wards, and inspired 
 their wards to write then.: in mortal words, 
 according to the languages in the places 
 where they lived. And they were so writ- 
 ten by these seers; and copies of them were 
 made and put on file in the libraries of the 
 records of the kings and queens of earth, 
 in Arabin'ya, Jafreth and Shem. 
 
 CHAPTER XLII. 
 
 Now, after the three false Gods, Osiris 
 and Te-in and Sudga, had revealed these 
 things to mortals, they sent messengers 
 to De'yus, praying audience with him, that 
 they might disclose to him what they had 
 done. De'yus, therefore, appointed a time 
 of meeting, and the Gods came before him 
 and made their report. After which De'yus 
 said: 
 
 In all ye have done I acquiesce; neither 
 have ye said aught that I would not have 
 said, save that I desired not to laud myself 
 with mine own mouth. And thus ended 
 the matter, as to how mortals were taught 
 to worship the names Lord and God, and 
 Lord God, and Joss, and Ho-Joss, and De'- 
 yus, and Deity, and Dyaus, and Zeus, and 
 various other names, according to the lan- 
 guages of the people of Jaffeth, Vind'yu, 
 Arabin'ya, Par'si'e, and Heleste. And 
 thousands of millions of angels of De'yus 
 and his Gods, who were sent down to mor- 
 tals, inspired them and taught them the 
 same things through seers, prophets, and 
 magicians, and through other people also, 
 by dreams and visions. 
 
 And mortals were taught the secret of 
 spiritually going out of their own corporeal 
 bodies, and returning safely; and in this 
 state they were taken subjectively to the 
 kingdom of De'yus, where they beheld him 
 even as a man, sitting on a throne; and 
 they saw the great glory of the kingdom, 
 and beheld the worshippers, millions of 
 them, glorifying De'yus, the false Lord 
 God. And these persons became preachers 
 on the earth; enthusiastically stirring men 
 up on every hand to draw the sword, spear 
 and sling to go forth in battle, to overthrow 
 the doctrine of the Great Spirit and estab- 
 lish De'yus. And it came to pass that they 
 thus accomplished the will of De'yus in all 
 these divisions of the earth. The Jehovih- 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 337 
 
 ians, being non-resistant, were powerless 
 before them. Kings and queens on the 
 earth accepted these doctrines, and they 
 marshaled their armies in all directions to 
 establish De'yus, who had said unto them: 
 As much as ye exalt me and my kingdoms, 
 so will I exalt you. As I behold, ye are 
 become wise and powerful to rule over 
 many on the earth, so will I give unto you 
 large kingdoms in heaven. 
 
 And the false Lord God and his false 
 Gods prospered in earth and heaven, as to 
 themselves and their kingdoms, nine hun- 
 dred years, and at this time the Faithists 
 of the earth were reduced to a small frac- 
 tion of people, mostly hid away, as sheep 
 from wolves. But in nine hundred and fifty 
 years, behold, the worshippers of the Lord 
 God, the false, began to quarrel and fight 
 amongst themselves. Even as by blood 
 they had established him, so by blood were 
 the kings and queens of the earth over- 
 throwing one another. 
 
 Because of the warfare, schools, and col- 
 leges, and houses of philosophy were 
 wasted away; the factories for spinning and 
 weaving were destroyed and the lands not 
 tilled. 
 
 And now of the heavenly kingdoms of 
 De'yus and his Gods, this is what occurred: 
 They had accumulated twenty-eight thou- 
 sand million spirits, all of whom were ser- 
 vants to De'yus and his Gods. For the 
 most part they were below ten, whilst three 
 thousand million were below grade five, 
 which is helplessness. 
 
 Jehovih had so made man and angels 
 that, whosoever had learned to abnegate 
 self and to labor more for others than 
 themselves, was already above grade fifty, 
 and his ascension should be perpetual 
 thereafter; whilst they that were below 
 grade fifty, who had not put away self, 
 should incline downward, toward the earth. 
 Wherein it had come to pass that the false 
 Lord God and his false Gods were bur- 
 dened with their kingdoms. And though 
 they were adorned to the utmost, having 
 vast cities for their heavenly capitals, with 
 millions of attendants, and millions of mu- 
 sicians, who were forever inventing new 
 and wonderful music, and playing and sing- 
 ing, millions and millions in concert, with 
 millions of trumpeters, near and far off, to 
 fashion echoes beautiful to the ear; and 
 
 though they had decorators forever invent- 
 ing and changing their thousands of mill- 
 ions of flags and banners, and the orna- 
 ments for the pageantry; though they had 
 thousands of heavenly cities, built with hea- 
 venly precious stones, and gems of splen- 
 dor, and with roadways and streets paved 
 with heavenly diamonds and pearls; and 
 though they had tournaments, heavenly, 
 and games, rites and ceremonies, prostra- 
 tions and salutations without end, with 
 great ships, heavenly, capable of coursing 
 atmospherea in journeys and excursions, 
 ships to carry hundreds of millions of an- 
 gels, whose chief occupation was to sing 
 and chant the glory, power and dominion 
 of De'yus and his Gods; yea, though a 
 large book could not contain a description 
 of the thousandth part of their wonderful 
 glory, yet each and every God began to see 
 coining danger. 
 
 Jehovih had said: Two precipices have 
 I left open for testing man's strength, and 
 they are: great prosperity and great ad- 
 versity. 
 
 And satan counseled them in the guise 
 of a good friend. First, he said to 
 De'yus: Thou greatest of Gods! Who 
 is like unto thee? Thou hast routed 
 Jehovih and His hosts in heaven and 
 earth; they are as a remnant skulking 
 away. I will not only praise thee for what 
 thou hast accomplished, but I will chide 
 thee for thy failings. Thou art too honest 
 for thine own good; too pure for thine own 
 benefit; too unsuspecting as regards thy 
 Gods. Being thyself honest, thou hast 
 easily attributed honesty unto others, and 
 they have taken advantage of thee. In 
 the first thou saidst to thy Gods: 
 Maintain ye your schools, colleges, 
 and factories, and otherwise prepare the 
 spirits of the dead unto resurrection. And 
 as fast as they arrive at grade thirty, send 
 ye them to my kingdom, that Hored may 
 be glorified forever. But thy Gods 
 used the angels as slaves, to build 
 up the glory of their own kingdoms. They 
 have allowed their heavenly places of edu- 
 cation, for the most part, to be scattered 
 and gone. Neither have they inspired mor- 
 tals to instruction, as I warned thee at the 
 first. And mortals have thrown aside their 
 schools and colleges, and their places of 
 art, and have become riotous, and given to 
 
338 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARM1J 
 
 gross living, and there is no resurrection in 
 them. Which matters show thee that, soon 
 or late, all the spirits of the earth will be 
 of no grade at all, but as fetals and vam- 
 pires to live on mortals. 
 
 De'yus said: Why are mortals become 
 gross livers? Satan answered him, saying: 
 Behold, in thine own revelation to mortals 
 thou saidst to them: Partake not of fish, 
 nor flesh, nor blood, for food, nor of any- 
 thing that breatheth the breath of life. 
 And now, behold, what came to pass: Thy 
 three Gods, whom thou hadst elevated and 
 trusted, fell to and made other revelations, 
 wherein they said: Partake of fish and 
 flesh; for they desired to please mortals. 
 And lo, it hath come to pass that man not 
 only warreth for thee, but he warreth to the 
 right and left, for it is in his blood, after 
 the manner of beasts that feed on flesh. 
 Thy Gods had no right to give this law 
 unto man without first consulting thee, to 
 know thy will and pleasure. 
 
 De'yus said: Alas, it is true. What 
 shall I do? Satan said: Thou shalt call 
 thy Gods before thee and chide them in 
 thine own way, and command them to go 
 down to mortals and re-establish learning 
 and industry, instead of war. 
 
 De'yus said: Even so shall they come 
 and receive my reprimand. They shall 
 know of a truth that I am the Lord their 
 God. 
 
 Satan spake to the other false Gods, 
 saying unto each: 
 
 O thou wisest of Gods, who shouldst 
 in fact be at the all highest God- 
 head in heaven, because of thy great wis- 
 dom and integrity. When thou puttest 
 forth thine hand to do a thing, it is 
 done; for thou wert born into life dif- 
 ferent from all others, and for the highest 
 of glories. And because of thy greatness, 
 behold, all the Gods of heaven are jealous 
 of thee and fear thee, all of which thou 
 knowest of thine own knowledge. Now, 
 whilst I accord this unto thee, I will also 
 chide thee for thy shortness: For, because 
 thou art honest thyself, thou believest the 
 same of others; wherefore thou art cheated 
 and ill-used on all hands. In the first place, 
 thou didst send thy highest grades to the 
 Lord God, to be his; yea, thou hast robbed 
 thine own kingdom of its finest and best 
 subjects for the glory of De'yus. And who 
 
 is De'yus more than thou? Is he not a 
 coward? for he feared to give his own doc- 
 trines to mortals; but he abridged his 
 words till they were worthless. And thou 
 and thy fellow-Gods made his doctrines up 
 in full for him! Yet thou servest him as if 
 he were thy superior. 
 
 The false Gods said: Alas, it is true, 
 with all my wisdom I have acted like a 
 fool. Because I was too honest and pure 
 for De'yus and his Gods, they have taken 
 advantage of me. What shall I do? 
 
 Satan said: I told thee at the first, that 
 the time should come when thou shouldst 
 rise to be higher than all other Gods. Be- 
 hold the time is near at hand when thou 
 shalt strike the blow. Thou shalt not only 
 have thine own kingdom, but the kingdoms 
 of thy companion Gods; and even De'yus 
 shall be tributary unto thee and thine. 
 
 The false Gods said: What shall I do? 
 And satan answered, saying: De'yus will 
 scent the danger to his kingdom, and he 
 will summon his Gods for consultation. Be 
 thou ready with thine answer unto him and 
 them; not hastily, for such is the manner 
 of the weak; but most deliberately, in high 
 holiness of purpose, for the good of mor- 
 tals and spirits. 
 
 Thus alike and like spake satan unto all 
 the false Gods; and they nursed the planted 
 seed; held it in the light and shade to see 
 it grow, until it became the very giant of 
 each one's understanding. 
 
 CHAPTER XLIII. 
 
 In course of time De'yus called the 
 meeting of his Gods in Hored, and Osiris 
 and Sudga came; and great were the pa- 
 geantry and show that day; and the pomp 
 and glory and splendor of Sanc-tu; with 
 thousands of milions of trained slaves, with 
 their dashing officers of high rank. For at 
 this time it was nearly seven hundred years 
 since even generals and high captains could 
 come into the presence of the Lord God, 
 the false, save by crawling on their bellies, 
 even for miles. 
 
 And in and around about the heavenly 
 house of the capital were erected fifty thou- 
 sand pillars of fire, kept forever going by 
 the labor of his slaves, some of whom stood 
 in their tracks laboring at one thing for 
 more than a hundred years, without change 
 of watch, or rest, being threatened with 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-AEMIJ 
 
 339 
 
 hell, and being too impotent to believe oth- 
 erwise. None could walk upright to the 
 throne of De'yus save his high Council, his 
 high marshals, and his Gods, and Anubi. 
 And none else were permitted to look upon 
 him, under penalty of being cast into hell. 
 
 At first his Gods came to feast with him 
 once a year for more than a hundred years; 
 after that, for awhile, once in six years; 
 and afterward, only once in fifty or a hun- 
 dred years; and then only by special com- 
 mand. 
 
 So it came to pass that the coming of 
 De'yus' Gods was an occasion of rejoicing 
 and glory to upward of twelve thousand 
 million inhabitants of the kingdom of De'- 
 yus. For, far and near, they were extra 
 clothed and fed, and granted freedom for 
 the time being. 
 
 On the last occasion referred to, the 
 Gods were received by hundreds of mill- 
 ions, called the receiving hosts, in fire- 
 ships of great size and brilliancy, and thus 
 conducted up to the roadways of the court, 
 nearer than which the receiving hosts dared 
 not approach. There the Gods were met 
 by De'yus' high Council and high marshals, 
 and with them entered the area and walked 
 up to the high arch of the capital, which led 
 into the place of the throne of De'yus. 
 When inside of the Arch, the Council and 
 marshals parted on either side, and, with 
 the head bowed, chanted an anthem of 
 praise to De'yus. The Gods also bowed 
 with respect and friendship, and walked in 
 the midst directly toward the throne. 
 
 When they were near at hand, the vice- 
 Gods, on either side of De'yus, rose up, 
 saying: In the name of the Lord God of 
 the heavens of the earth, who come here, 
 upright, and as Gods? 
 
 The Gods responded: Behold, we are 
 sons of the Lord God, great De'yus, and of 
 a truth are we Gods ! We demand audience 
 with our Godhead, for the glory of our 
 kingdoms and his. 
 
 De'yus said: Peace, O my vice-Gods! 
 I do recognize these, my brother Gods. 
 Greeting, in the name of heaven and earth. » 
 
 The Gods responded: Greeting unto 
 thee, O Lord God, mightiest of Gods. In 
 thy mighty name, De'yus, we salute thee 
 worshipfully, to know thy will and pleas- 
 ure, that we may serve thee in wisdom, and 
 power, and love. 
 
 De'yus said: Welcome, O ye Gods; the 
 freedom of Sanc-tu is at your hands. Be- 
 hold, 1 will clear my place, that we may 
 consult together privily for the good of an- 
 gels and mortals. 
 
 Thereupon De'yus gave a signal for all 
 his officers and attendants to retire beyond 
 the Arch, which they did. And now 
 that the ceremony of reception was over, 
 De'yus came down from his throne and 
 greeted the Gods cordially by clasping 
 hands, after which they all sat down on 
 the foot seats of the throne; and there were 
 present De'yus, and Osiris, and Sudga, 
 and no others within hearing; for Te-in had 
 not come. 
 
 And for a while they talked together 
 like long-separated friends; and lo and be- 
 hold, the satan that was within each one of 
 them began to fail him in regard to re- 
 proving the others. For even the smoth- 
 ered seed of love which the Great Spirit 
 had given them began to swell up, as if 
 about to burst forth a mighty power. So 
 the time passed on, and none dared ap- 
 proach the subject of his soul's resolu- 
 tion. Till at last, De'yus, the most schooled 
 in satan's cause, put an end to their old- 
 time stories and trivial conversation; he 
 said: 
 
 So much have I loved you both, and 
 am now moved by your august presence, 
 that with all my majesty and power I am 
 weaker than a young child: who will un- 
 concernedly reprove its own father. Or 
 more I am like an old man that, in the ab- 
 sence of his child, findeth cause to quarrel 
 with it; but on seeing it return, breaketh 
 down utterly, and turneth from his previous 
 grieving to an outburst of manifest love. 
 
 Osiris said: What can move thee to 
 this seriousness, O De'yus? For even as 
 thou hast spoken, so hast thou uttered the 
 sentiment that has long lain on my heart. 
 But which now, in reverence to thee and 
 thy great kingdoms, causeth me to melt 
 down like snow in a summer's sun. Pray 
 thee, go on! 
 
 Sudga said: As I live, ye twain, so far 
 my superiors as before whom I am nothing, 
 have spoken the very sentiment of my soul. 
 Pray ye twain, go on; for so great is my 
 love unto you, your most extravagant wish 
 shall be answered by me, though I labor a 
 thousand years to accomplish it. 
 
340 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 Thereupon De'yus sweetly told his tale, 
 even as satan had taught him. And then 
 he bade Osiris speak his mind, and also 
 Sudga speak his; whkh they did, even as 
 satan had taught them their parts. When 
 they had finished, De'yus, much surprised 
 by their pitiful tales, even as the others 
 were at his, thus spake: 
 
 My Gods, how much easier it is to find 
 fault with these affairs than to find a rem- 
 edy. I have seen such as find fault with 
 their neighbors, the kingdom, or the 
 ancients, and yet they accomplished 
 the same faults themselves. We all do 
 know that one of the complaints we had 
 against the old Divan laws was their bond- 
 age over the Lords and their dominions. 
 Whereupon, when we confederated, it was 
 to give independence to each and every 
 Lord to rule his own heaven and division 
 of the earth in his own way. And this was 
 granted unto all my Lords and unto me and 
 my kingdom likewise. And behold where 
 it hath harvested! In the fullness of my 
 soul I gave you certain doctrines to give 
 unto mortals, chief of which was to make 
 my names worshipful on the earth. But I 
 bound you not, saying: Do ye this, and 
 no more. But I said unto you: Here is 
 the substance of the foundations of my 
 doctrines. Go ye unto mortals and teach 
 them these things, adding or abridging ac- 
 cording to your own wisdom. And this 
 ye accomplished, and added thereunto the 
 temptation to mortals to become carnivor- 
 ous, whereby the grades have fallen woe- 
 fully. And now ye find fault with me for 
 exacting a certain number of slaves annu- 
 ally of a certain grade; complaining that 
 your own kingdoms are becoming flooded 
 with drujas. 
 
 Osiris said: Hear me, O Lord my God, 
 for I have labored for thee and thy king- 
 dom many a hundred years. Nor are my 
 words in passion, but well considered; 
 wherein, therefore, if I err, I ask no ex- 
 cuse on account of hastiness. First, then, 
 that our confederacy was founded to make 
 a mighty kingdom, heavenly, having do- 
 minion over mortals on the whole earth; 
 of which kingdom thou wert to be the 
 chief and greatest glory, and ourselves 
 the second. To all of which our songs to 
 this day bear testimony but as for songs or 
 
 testimonies in the libraries of heaven, that 
 our confederacy was founded chiefly to get 
 rid of the Divan laws, I have not seen nor 
 heard of one. 
 
 Sudga said: What I have done is done. 
 I was commanded to a division of the earth, 
 to subdue it unto De'yus, and I have so 
 accomplished it. I have listened to your 
 complaints, but neither hath offered a rem- 
 edy. Ye twain are higher in rank and wis- 
 dom than I; when ye have spoken to the 
 purpose I will also speak. Fon my part, I 
 am thankful there are no Divan laws to 
 bind me. 
 
 De'yus said: The remedy lieth in over- 
 turning the cause of the falls in the grades. 
 For the sake of glorifying themselves, my 
 Gods have suffered places of learning and 
 industry to fall to pieces, both in heaven 
 and earth. There be such as give glory 
 unto charity, and unto rites and ceremo- 
 nies; but I say unto you, my Gods, Indus- 
 try and Learning stand higher than charity 
 or rites and ceremonies; especially so stand- 
 eth industry that yieldeth profitable sup- 
 port. 
 
 Osiris said: Where, O Lord my God, 
 lieth the difference betwixt that which is 
 written or spoken? In thy opening words 
 thou hast even now reiterated the bondage 
 of the Divan laws over the Lords. And in 
 the next breath thou sayest: I command 
 you to re-establish the places of learning 
 and industry. 
 
 Sudga said: Are not written laws less 
 arbitrary than spoken ones? for we see 
 them beforehand, and are not, therefore, 
 shocked by the sudden audacity. 
 
 De'yus said: In either case is it not true 
 that the highest in power and mightiest in 
 the plans and arrangement of his king- 
 doms must either take jibes and insults 
 from his inferiors, whom he hath lifted up 
 and made what they are, or otherwise fall 
 broken-hearted on the loss of their love 
 and worship? For on all hands we behold, 
 alas, beneficiaries are apt to turn like ven- 
 omous serpents, and strike, even though 
 .the blow would send themselves into de- 
 struction. 
 
 Osiris said: That is most especially true, 
 O De'yus, where the highest kingdoms 
 owe their glory and greatness to those that 
 have been subsidiary and built them up. 
 None are so slow to see their danger as 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 341 
 
 they that are exposed to it. There be such 
 who, holding high places, if but their slaves 
 knew who they were and how deceived, 
 would bind them in knots and cast them 
 into hell. 
 
 Sudga said: But in such cases is it not 
 better, O my wise brothers, that the high- 
 est who have been raised up by the toil and 
 industry of others, that labored to have 
 them glorified, turn from their own glory 
 and selfish ends, and divide up their ill- 
 gotten kingdoms, and bestir themselves 
 by sending assistants to those that have 
 them in their power? 
 
 De'yus said: Most wisely spoken, both 
 my Gods. But how shall we teach apes 
 and monkeys to know their masters? They 
 crook their tails and squeal, imagining 
 themselves great monarchs. Whereas, were 
 they cut off from their masters, they would 
 come to grief most ignominiously, or be 
 the foremost plunged into torments. 
 
 Osiris said: Thou wisest of Gods, is it 
 not most strange, wonderful, how better we 
 can see others' shortness than our own? 
 Nor are we much quicker to find a way to 
 save them, which we oft could do were they 
 not self-conceited fools, than to guard our 
 arms, so that when they show the least 
 sign to do us wrong, we inwardly swear 
 within our souls to hurl them into hell. 
 
 Sudga said: O my loves, it is a sad re- 
 flection, when we survey mighty king- 
 doms at their quarrels, knowing that, if 
 either dare raise a hand to destroy, we our- 
 selves hold the key whereby they can be, 
 both, stript of their highest subjects and 
 their greatest glories, and left in the ruins 
 of their own evil. But the wise bide their 
 time, and oft are fortified when others 
 know not of it. 
 
 De'yus said: My most wise Gods, ye 
 have spoken great wisdom. I will weigh 
 your words and be governed accordingly. 
 For your most holy visit I am honored 
 above all I deserve. 
 
 Osiris said: Words cannot express my 
 reverence for thy spoken words, O De'yus. 
 
 Sudga said: I am bowed with sorrow 
 to leave the place of so much wisdom, love 
 and power. 
 
 And now Osiris and Sudga stepped 
 backward four paces each, but separate 
 from each other, with their heads still 
 bowed. By a signal, the vice-Gods re-en- 
 
 tered and stood beside the Gods, and then 
 all, with heads bowed, raised their hands 
 and saluted in the sign Central Sun. De'- 
 yus answered them on the sign Music of 
 the Satellites. 
 
 Slowly now, and with measured step, to 
 low sweet music, backward, the Gods and 
 vice-Gods crossed the area and passed the 
 Arch, where the vice-Gods left them and 
 returned within. But the Gods were now 
 met by the high Council and high marshals 
 and conducted to the entrance gate, where 
 they left them, and they were received, 
 Osiris and Sudga, by their hosts and recon- 
 ducted to their ships, with great pomp and 
 honor, and they at once set sail for their 
 own heavenly kingdoms. Now, in this 
 whole proceeding, the Gods were all sur- 
 prised that Te-in came not, nor, by messen- 
 ger or otherwise, answered the summons; 
 nor could one of them imagine the cause. 
 
 CHAPTER XLIV. 
 
 Te-in, whose heavenly kingdom contain- 
 ed three thousand million angels, being in- 
 formed when Osiris and Sudga were gone 
 to Hored, satan said to him: Now is thy 
 time, call thy Council together; proclaim 
 thyself God of heaven and earth, mighty in 
 all regions, the Central Kingdom of the 
 Eternal Heavens! Choose from amongst 
 thy Council the highest grades, and make 
 them Lords under thee. Jaffeth must 
 be subdued to one nation of peo- 
 ple, and this shall be thy footstool, 
 and thy heavenly kingdom's head- 
 quarters. After which thy Lords shall 
 proceed to the lands of Par'si'e, and Ara- 
 bin'ya, and inspire the inhabitants thereof 
 to another central kingdom, and when mor- 
 tals are thus subdued to limited numbers, 
 thou shalt have but few to deal with in or- 
 der to make thyself God of the whole earth. 
 
 So on the day of De'yus' meeting with 
 Osiris and Sudga, Te-in severed the bonds 
 betwixt his heavenly kingdom and all 
 others, and he chose twelve of his highest 
 grade in the Holy Council, and made them 
 Lords of the earth; but he allotted no por- 
 tion of the earth to any one alone. He 
 said: I will not give them kingdoms; this 
 is the strongest way; to keep everything 
 in one's own hands. 
 
 Te-in, then, through his Lords, whom 
 he sent down to the earth, made Kan Kwan 
 
342 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-AEMIJ 
 
 mortal king of Jaffeth, with the title, King 
 of the World, and Sun, and Moon, and 
 Stars! And the Lords caused Kan Kwan 
 to build an oke'spe, where he could re- 
 ceive the commandments of Te-in, the hol- 
 iest, all highest ruler of heaven, as to what 
 he should do in order to subdue the earth 
 unto himself. 
 
 Te-in said: And, my Lords, say ye to 
 Kan Kwan when the earth is subdued unto 
 himself: Behold, I will also come down 
 and dwell in the temples he buildeth for 
 my Lords. And when the king goeth forth 
 and subdueth a place unto himself, he shall 
 immediately build a worshipful temple and 
 dedicate it to me and my Lords, whose 
 names ye shall give alike and like in all 
 places. For I will not confuse mortals 
 with a. multiplicity of heavenly Lords. And 
 the king shall show unto the people that 
 there is but one High Ruler in heaven, 
 whether he be called Joss or Ho-Joss, or 
 Te-in, or Po-tein, and that I am the Per- 
 son. But in no case shall the king suffer 
 the worshippers of the Great Spirit to re- 
 main alive upon the earth. 
 
 My Lords, take with you, each, one 
 million angels, strong and cunning in war; 
 twelve million are sufficient; for ye shall 
 not scatter them about, but keep close in 
 the neighborhood of war and of the king. 
 As when a fire -burnetii, beginning from a 
 spark and spreading outward till a city is 
 consumed, so be ye concentrated and po- 
 tent. This is the whole art of war. And 
 whilst mortals sleep, your angels shall come 
 upon them and give them dreams and vis- 
 ions of glorious success, make them see 
 themselves in the heat of battle, rushing 
 through the jaws of death unscathed, whilst 
 their manly arms slay about them on every 
 side their enemies by the score in flowing 
 blood. For when these mortals awake and 
 remember their dreams, they will be well 
 whetted for the valorous work. But as 
 to those that are to be conquered, let your 
 angels go to them whilst they sleep, and 
 give them dreams and visions of horrid 
 deaths; make them see the heat of battle 
 and themselves overpowered on every 
 hand, and, pierced with sword and spear, 
 they fall, dying in great agony. For when 
 such mortals wake up and remember their 
 dreams, they are half conquered already. 
 
 My Lords, ye shall inspire the king to 
 
 be merciful and gentle; and when his sol- 
 diers come to a place to subdue it, they 
 shall send truce-men before them, inquir- 
 nig: Who say ye, shall be the ruler? And 
 if the people answer: We are Kan Kwan's 
 slaves, they shall not be slain. Te-in said: 
 
 My Lords, amongst mortals, what is 
 righteousness? Now one Lord said: Rites 
 and ceremonies. Another said: To wor- 
 ship thee, O Te-in. Another said: To fol- 
 low the doctrines of the ancients. Another 
 said: To purify one's self. Another said: 
 To do good with all one's might. Anoth- 
 er said: To practice truth. Another said: 
 To harm no man. 
 
 Te-in said: Not one of you knoweth 
 righteousness. Behold how you stand: The 
 doctrines of the ancients were their own, 
 and they are as dead. To put on a dead 
 man's clothes, will they make the wearer 
 like the dead was? 
 
 Rites and ceremonies are what show- 
 men train their horses with, to run or leap, 
 or lie down, to please their masters. 
 
 To purify one's self! What is that? 
 A mortal man's body cannot be purified, 
 for it is rotten at best. 
 
 To do good with all one's might! Who 
 knoweth the meaning of that? To cut off 
 a crushed foot to save a man's life: Give 
 him pain in the cutting, even whilst he is 
 suffering. Then it is well that some men's 
 heads be cut off for their own good. Yea, 
 even nations extirpated. Let him that 
 doeth, then, do with all his might. See 
 ye not that in this, that before one attempt- 
 eth to do good, he is his own judge, judg- 
 ing by his own judgment? 
 
 To practice Truth! What is that? The 
 Jehovihians say: Jehovih is All Truth. 
 But Jehovih is nothing, scattered as the 
 wind. Then truth is nothing. Wlio hath 
 found a man but saith: To see as I see, is 
 to see the truth; to see as thou seest, is to 
 see falsely? A man told lies knowingly, 
 and practiced them; and he was all truth to 
 himself, for he. was a liar. Therefore, he 
 practiced truth. 
 
 To worship me is unrighteousness in 
 stead of righteousness. To worship Joss is 
 unrighteousness; to worship the nonde- 
 script, Jehovih, is unrighteousness, and to 
 worship Po is unrighteousness also. Be- 
 hold this matter: The large trees in the 
 forest were smothering out the small ones; 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARM1J 
 
 343 
 
 and the small ones said: We praise you, 
 giant oaks, for the many blessings we have 
 received; be merciful unto us! The large 
 trees laughed at them, and they died. Is 
 this not Jehovih? Is this' not the Gods? 
 For all mortals, at best, are but as un- 
 hatched eggs; and when they are dead, 
 their souls are as hatched chickens, for the 
 Gods to play with, and to use in their own 
 way. 
 
 Teach ye this to mortals; and tell them, 
 moreover, to choose what God they will; 
 and if it be me, then I will labor for them; 
 if it be not me, then am I against them. 
 This, then, is righteousness: Reciprocity 
 betwixt Gods and mortals; reciprocity be- 
 twixt mortals themselves; to war for opin- 
 ion's sake in order to develop steadfast- 
 ness; to help the helpless; to feed and 
 clothe the stranger, and to worship the fa- 
 ther and mother. 
 
 CHAPTER XLV. 
 
 Te-in's Lords and their angels departed 
 out of Che-su-gow, Te-in's heavenly place, 
 and descended to the earth on their mis- 
 sion; and this is what came of it: 
 
 Kan Kwan was the son of Kwan Ho, a 
 flat-head; but Kan Kwan came of the con- 
 verts to the Brahmin priests, and so had 
 not his head flattened. But because su'is 
 and sar'gis had long been in their family 
 they descended to Kwan all the same. And 
 he could see and hear the angels and their 
 Lords; hear all the words spoken to him, 
 a most excellent thing in a king, when 
 drujas are restrained from observing him. 
 The Lords guarded Kan Kwan on every 
 side, day and night, and Kwan being stu- 
 pid, because of the flat heads of his par- 
 ents, he was well suited to carry out all 
 that was commanded of him. So he at once 
 announced himself with all his titles, and 
 sent heralds hither and thither to proclaim 
 him and let all peoples and kings know 
 that he was coming to subdue them unto 
 himself. 
 
 Kwan issued this decree: Kan Kwan, 
 king of the world, and of the sun, and 
 moon, and stars, I command! I, son of 
 the sun, son of Te-in, behold! There is 
 but one ruler in heaven, Te-in! There shall 
 be but one on earth, Kan Kwan. ' Bow 
 your heads down! I come! Choose ye: 
 to bow down, or to die. One or the other 
 
 shall be. When the world is subdued to 
 me, I will war no more! 
 
 In those days there were many great 
 kings in Jaffeth, and their kingdoms were 
 in many places far apart. Betwixt them, in 
 a sparse region, in the Valley of Lun, lay 
 the city of Ow Tswe, and this was the small 
 kingdom of Kan Kwan, known for a thou- 
 said years. When other kings heard of 
 Kwan's proclamation they laughed. And 
 this is the vanity of mortals, for they heed 
 not the power of the Gods over them. 
 
 So Kwan started with an army of four 
 thousand soldiers, men and women, with 
 spears, axes, scythes, swords and slings, 
 and bows and arrows; and he marched 
 against Tzeyot, a city of a hundred thou- 
 sand people; and here ruled king Cha Ung 
 Chin, with twenty thousand soldiers. Cha 
 Ung Chin laughed. He said to his cap- 
 tain: Send a thousand women soldiers 
 and kill Kwan and his army; they are mad 
 and know not what war is. 
 
 The captain went forth to battle, but he 
 took beside the thousand women soldiers 
 a thousand men soldiers. But behold, 
 Kwan and his soldiers knew no drill, 
 but they ran forward so strangely that their 
 enemies knew not how to fight them, and 
 they fled in fear, save the captain and a 
 hundred women, who were instantly put to 
 death. But not one of Kwan's army was 
 killed. 
 
 Cha Ung Chin was angry, and he sent 
 ten thousand soldiers against Kwan's rag- 
 ged army; and when the battle was begun, 
 the angels cast clouds before the hosts of 
 Cha Ung Chin, and they thought they he- 
 held hundreds of thousands of soldiers 
 coming upon them, and they turned and 
 fled also, save five hundred, who were cap- 
 tured and instantly slain, men and women. 
 
 Cha Ung Chin said: It is time now I 
 go myself. My laziness has cost me dear. 
 On the morrow I will lead thirty thousand 
 pressed men and women, and make it a 
 day of sport to slaughter Kwan's army. So 
 the king sent his marshals to select and 
 summon his soldiers during the night. 
 Many were too frightened to sleep; and 
 those that slept had such visions and 
 dreams that when they awoke they were as 
 persons nearly dead. 
 
 Cha Ung Chin, next morning, sallied 
 forth out of the city to battle, going before 
 
344 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 his army. When he saw the pitiful army 
 of Kwan, he said: Of a truth, the world is 
 going mad! That such fools have courage 
 is because they know not what a battle is. 
 With that he rushed forward, faster and 
 faster, calling to his soldiers. But they 
 stretched out in a line, after him, for they 
 trembled from head to foot, remembering 
 their dreams. Presently Kwan and his 
 army started for them, not with orderly 
 commands, but screaming and howling. 
 Cha Ung Chin's soldiers took panic, broke 
 ranks and fled in all directions, save one 
 thousand, including King Cha Ung Chin, 
 who were captured and instantly slain. 
 
 And on the same day Kan Kwan went 
 and possessed the city, Tzeyot, command- 
 ing obedience and allegiance of the people. 
 And on the following day he set twenty 
 thousand men to work building a temple 
 to Te-in, pulling down other edifices for 
 the material thereof. Nor had Kwan a 
 learned man in all his army; but the Lords 
 with him showed him how to build the 
 temple, east and west and north and south, 
 and how to make the archways and the pil- 
 lars to support the roof; and the sacred 
 chambers and altars of sacrifice. Of brick 
 and mortar and wood built he it, and when 
 it was completed it was large enough for 
 twelve thousand people to do sacrifice in. 
 And it was, from first to last, forty days in 
 building. 
 
 Besides this, Kwan put another ten 
 thousand men and women to clearing 
 houses and walls away, and making new 
 streets in many ways; so that at the time of 
 the first sacrifice the city of Tzeyot looked 
 not like itself; and Kwan give it a new 
 name, Lu An, and commanded all the peo- 
 ple to call it by that name, or suffer death. 
 
 Kan Kwan made the people go and do 
 sacrifice to Te-in in the temple every morn- 
 ing; enforced a day of rest for each quarter 
 of the moon; enforced worship on the part 
 of children to their fathers and mothers, 
 the father taking first rank. 
 
 Then Kwan made them pray for those 
 who were slain in battle. And these are 
 the words he commanded them: Te-in! 
 Father of Life and Death! Who feedeth on 
 suns and stars! Whose refuse is mortals. 
 In thy praise I bow my head. For thy 
 glory I lie on my belly before thy altar. I 
 am the filthiest of things; my breath and 
 
 my flesh and my blood are rotten. Death 
 would be sweet to me if thou or thy sol- 
 diers would slay me. For my soul would 
 come to thee to be thy slave forever. 
 
 Behold, my brothers and sisters who 
 fought against thee are dead, and I glorify 
 thee because thereof. We have buried their 
 carcasses deep in the ground, good enough 
 for them. But their spirits are lost and 
 wild on the battle-field, howling about. O 
 Te-in, Father, send thy spirits from Che- 
 su-gow, thy heavenly place, to them, to 
 help them out of darkness. And we will 
 ever praise thee, our mightiest, all highest 
 ruler! 
 
 When they made the sacrifice they laid 
 down on their bellies, certain ones prompt- 
 ing them with the words which Kwan re- 
 ceived from the Lords. 
 
 After this; Kwan appointed them a gov- 
 ernor, Ding Jow, who was the first gov- 
 ernor of a province in Jaffeth. For as a 
 Lord is to a God, so is a governor to a 
 king. And this was the first of that order 
 established by the Gods of hada. 
 
 Jehovih had said: Independent king- 
 doms shall not exist side by side; nor shall 
 one be tributary to another; but there shall 
 be one whole, and the lesser shall be parts 
 thereof, not over nor under them, but as 
 helpmates. The wicked will not see this 
 now; but their own wickedness will bring 
 it about in time to come.- 
 
 CHAPTER XLVI. 
 
 Kan Kwan again went forth to conquer 
 and subdue, going to the southward, to 
 Ho-tze, a large city having five tributary 
 cities, ruled over by Oo-long, a king with 
 two hundred wives and thirty thousand sol- 
 diers, men and women, well disciplined. 
 
 Kwan's army was now seven thousand 
 strong, but without discipline; and with no 
 head save himself. And on his march 
 through the country he compelled the farm- 
 ers to embrace the Te-in religion, under 
 penalty of death. Now when he had come 
 near Ho-tze, he sent an order for the king 
 to surrender, even after the manner as at 
 the city he had already conquered. 
 
 Oo-long laughed when told of the kind 
 of company that had come against him, 
 and he sent only women soldiers, eight 
 thousand, to give him battle. When the 
 armies were near together, the Lords said 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 345 
 
 to Kwan: Send thou a truce, and beseech 
 thine enemy to surrender under penalty of 
 death; for the angels of Te-in will deliver 
 them into thy hand, and not one shall die. 
 
 A truce was sent, and the whole of Oo- 
 long's army surrendered and made oaths 
 of allegiance to Kwan, and not one was 
 slain. 
 
 Oo-long, when informed of it, said: 
 Now will I go with all my army and slay 
 this ragged king and all his people, and 
 also my eight thousand who have surren- 
 dered. So he marched to battle with twen- 
 ty-two thousand soldiers. Kwan's army 
 was scattered about the fields. Oo-long 
 said to his captain: Go, thou, tell this fool- 
 ish king to set his army in line of battle; I 
 desire not to take advantage of a flock of 
 sheep. 
 
 The captain started to go, but ere he 
 reached the place, he fell down in a swoon, 
 for the angels overpowered him. The 
 king saw his captain fall, and he cried out 
 to his army: It is enough! My army have 
 never seen such fools, and know not how 
 to battle with them. Come, I will lead! 
 
 At that, he rushed on, followed by his 
 thousands. Instantly, Kwan's army set up 
 their screams and howls, and ran forward 
 in every direction; and Oo-long's 
 army broke and fled, save one thou- 
 sand two hundred who were captured, Oo- 
 long amongst them; and they were instant- 
 ly slain. But of Kwan's army only one 
 man was killed. 
 
 The Lords sent messengers to Te-in in 
 his heavenly place, informing him of 
 Kwan's success. Te-in returned this com- 
 mandment: In what has been done I am 
 well pleased; but suffer not your mortal 
 king, Kan Kwan, to win so easily hereaf- 
 ter; but let him have losses, that he may 
 not forget me and my Lords and my hosts 
 of angels. Place ye him in straits, and 
 cause him to pray unto me; and his army 
 shall pray also. And when they have thus 
 sacrificed, deliver him and his army from 
 their straits, and make him victorious for 
 a season. 
 
 Kwan entered the city of Ho-tsze with- 
 out further opposition, and possessed him- 
 self of it. At once he caused thirty thou- 
 sand laborers to fall to work building a 
 temple to Te-in. Another twenty thousand 
 he caused to pull down houses and make 
 
 other streets, more beautiful. In twenty- 
 eight days the temple and the streets were 
 completed; and on the twenty-ninth day 
 the sacrifices commenced, and all the people 
 were obliged to swear allegiance to Kwan 
 and to Te-in, or be slain. And on the first 
 day there were slain four thousand men 
 and women worshippers of different Gods, 
 but for the main part the Great Spirit, who 
 would not take the oath. After that, none 
 refused, and so Kwan gave the city a new 
 name, Tue Shon; and he appointed So'- 
 wo'tse governor, and commanded the trib- 
 utary cities to come under the yoke. 
 
 After that, Kan Kwan went forward 
 again to conquer and subdue; and the 
 Lords of heaven and their twelve million 
 angels went with him and in advance of 
 him, preparing the way. And the news of 
 his success was spread abroad amongst 
 mortals also, well exaggerated; so that the 
 inhabitants of cities far and near feared 
 him. The Lords suffered Kwan to con- 
 quer and subdue yet three other large 
 cities without loss to his army; and 
 Kwan began to think it was himself 
 that possessed the power, and not Te-in. 
 
 The next city, Che-gau, was a small one, 
 of fifty thousand inhabitants. Kwan in- 
 quired not of Te-in through the Lords as 
 to how to make the attack, but went on his 
 own judgment. Now there ruled over the 
 city a woman, Lon Gwie, a tyrant little 
 loved, and she had but four thousand sol- 
 diers, and Kwan had seven thousand. 
 
 Kwan, arriving near, demanded the 
 place; but the queen answered him not 
 with words; but had her soldiers in am- 
 bush, and thus fell upon Kwan's army, and 
 put one-half of them to death; and yet the 
 queen suffered small loss. Kwan, not find- 
 ing his Lords with him, fled, and his re- 
 maining army with him. But the Lords 
 urged the queen to pursue him, and she 
 again fell upon them and slew another 
 half, and crippled hundreds more. But 
 the queen suffered small loss. 
 
 The Lords then spake to Kwan, where 
 he had escaped, and said unto him: Be- 
 cause thou wert vain and remembered 
 not me, who am thy heavenly ruler, Te-in, 
 I have labored to show thee that of thyself 
 thou art nothing. Then Kwan prayed to 
 Te-in, saying: Most mighty ruler of hea- 
 ven and earth, thou hast justly punished 
 
346 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 me. I pray thee, now, with good repent- 
 ance, in the bitterness of my shame. What 
 shall I do, O Te-in? I am far from home, 
 in a strange country, and my army is well- 
 nigh destroyed. All nations are against 
 me; a sheep is safer in a forest with wolves 
 than I am in these regions. 
 
 The Lord said unto Kwan: Now that 
 thou hast repented, behold I, Te-in, will 
 show thee my power. For thou shalt 
 gather together the remnant of thy army 
 and turn about and destroy the queen and 
 her army, or put them to flight and possess 
 the city. 
 
 Kwan, on the next morning, being in- 
 spired by his Lords, prepared for battle, 
 though he had but seven hundred men. 
 On the other hand the Lords and their an- 
 gels appeared in the dreams and visions of 
 the queen's army, saying to them: The 
 queen is deceived and led away into a trap. 
 Kwan will be joined in the morning by 
 fifty thousand men. Prepare therefore, to 
 die to-morrow. 
 
 On the morrow, then, on the queen's 
 side, the soldiers related their fearful 
 dreams to one another; and hardly had 
 they finished when Kwan's army 
 came upon them. And the angels, more 
 than fifty thousand, took on sar'gis, seem- 
 ing even like mortals. At sight of this, 
 the queen's army were so frightened they 
 could not flee, save a few, but nearly the 
 whole army surrendered, throwing away 
 their arms and lying down. Kwan and his 
 army fell upon them and slew them, more 
 than four thousand, who were rendered 
 powerless by the angel hosts with them. 
 Kwan then went into the city, doing as pre- 
 viously in other cities, establishing himself 
 and Te-in. 
 
 Such, then, was the manner of Te-in, 
 the false, of establishing himself in JafTeth. 
 
 CHAPTER XLVII. 
 
 Sudga, the false God of Vind'yu and her 
 heavens, whose heavenly kingdom con- 
 tained more than three thousand million 
 angels, on his way home from Hored, said 
 to himself: Two things I am resolved 
 upon: to proclaim myself Creator and 
 Ruler of Heaven and Earth; and to change 
 the name of my heavenly place and call it 
 Ahl-burj, the Mountain of the Clouds. 
 
 Satan spoke to Sudga, saying: Thou 
 all highest God. In the land of 
 Vind'yu, down on the earth; and in the 
 heavens above the land of Vind'yu; what 
 God hath labored like unto thee? Thou 
 didst establish De'yus, for nearly a thou- 
 sand years in these regions. Thou possess- 
 est by right that name, and thou shalt call 
 thyself Dyaus and Sudga; and thy heavenly 
 place shall also be Hored, because, for- 
 sooth, it is also a heavenly mountain. 
 
 And so Sudga at once fell to work 
 moving his capital and throne, and 
 to founding his new place. And 
 he also chose twelve Lords, saying to 
 himself, after the manner of Te-in: Though 
 I will have twelve Lords to rule over mor- 
 tals, yet will I not give to any one of them 
 a certain division of the earth for himself. 
 
 And when Sudga was thus founded in 
 his new heavenly place he called his Lords 
 about him and said unto them: Go ye 
 down to mortals, to T-loyovogna, who hath 
 a small kingdom in the valley of Hachchi- 
 satij, in Vind'yu, for I will make him king 
 of all the earth, even as I am ruler of hea- 
 ven. And by obsessions and otherwise ye 
 shall lead him forth to conquer and subdue. 
 Precede ye him in his journeyings, and 
 cause mortals to fear him, that they be 
 easily overcome. Twelve million angels I 
 allot to you as your army, nor shall ye 
 return into my presence until ye have made 
 made T-loyovogna king of Vind-yu. After 
 that I shall bestow you according to merit. 
 
 The twelve Lords, with their twelve 
 million angels of war, departed for the 
 earth, and came to Varaja, the city where 
 lived and ruled T-loyovogna, and they cov- 
 ered the regions even beyond the 
 Valley of Hachchisatij. T-loyovogna 
 was the son of Hucrava, who was the son 
 of Han Cyavarat, who was the son of Aipi- 
 vohu, sacred in su'is to the Gods and Lords 
 of heaven. So T-loyovogna talked with 
 Sudga's chief Lord, who said unto him: 
 Behold, thou shalt proclaim thyself king 
 of all the world; for I and the hosts of 
 heaven are with thee. 
 
 T-loyovogna said: Alas, mine is the 
 weakest of kingdoms; I have not a thou- 
 sand soldiers. Other kings will laugh at 
 me. But the Lord answered him, saying: 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 347 
 
 What are mortal kings in the hands of Dy- 
 aus, he who was Sudga? I say unto the 
 nations of the earth: Go down! and they 
 fall. I say: Rise ye up! and they rise. 
 Man looketh to stone and clay and water 
 for great power; but I that am unseen am 
 greater than all the lands and the waters of 
 the earth, for I rule over them, and over 
 heaven also. I will have but one king on 
 the earth; and as I rule the angels of hea- 
 ven, even so shalt thou rule mortals, and es- 
 tablish thee and me forever! For thy heirs, 
 and their heirs after them, shall have do- 
 minion over every kingdom and country in 
 the world. 
 
 T-loyovogna said: I fear thee, O Dy- 
 aus; I know thy power. But how can a 
 king go to war without soldiers? Or an 
 army without arms? The Lord answered 
 him: Send thy proclamation unto kings 
 far and near, commanding them to bow 
 down unto thee. And presently I will 
 come unto thee and lead thee forth, and 
 thou shalt conquer and subdue them, and 
 not a hair of thy head shall be harmed. 
 
 T-loyovogna did as commanded; and 
 some days after his proclamation had been 
 sent unto the nearest kings, all of whom 
 knew him well, he mustered his army of 
 seven hundred men and one hundred wo- 
 men. And they that had neither spear, nor 
 sword, nor scythe, nor bow and arrows, 
 took clubs, and clappers, and pans, to make 
 noise with, and others took lanterns. 
 
 The first city they approached was Ab- 
 tuib, ruled over by Azhis, who had an army 
 of four thousand men and one thousand 
 women. When near the place, T-loyovog- 
 na sent his demand for the surrender of the 
 city. Azhis answered him not, but said 
 unto his army: Go ye and surround yon- 
 der fool, and destroy him and his army. 
 
 Now, behold, the night came on, very 
 dark, ere the attack was made. And the 
 Lord said unto T-loyovogna: Command 
 thy soldiers to light their lamps. T-loyo- 
 vogna said: I fear, O Lord; for will not 
 lamps expose us unto death? But the 
 Lord said: Light the lamps! So when the 
 lamps were lighted the enemy began to 
 march as if to surround them, some going 
 one way and some the other. And the 
 Lord's angels made lights also, to the left 
 and to the right, so that the enemy, in or- 
 der to surround the lights, kept extending 
 
 in two lines, away from each other. Pres- 
 ently, they judged by the lights that there 
 were tens of thousands of soldiers come 
 against them. Suddenly, now, T-loyovog- 
 na's army sounded their pans and kettles, 
 and set up furious howls and screams; and 
 in the same time the angels of heaven cast 
 stars of light in the midst of Azhis' army, 
 and they became panic-stricken and fled in 
 all directions, save three hundred who were 
 captured and put to death. Then T-loyo- 
 vogna sent one hundred men into the city 
 and captured Azhis and slew him. After 
 this, T-loyovogna entered the city and de- 
 clared the place his. 
 
 And whilst it was yet night, thousands 
 and thousands of the people came and 
 prostrated themselves before T-loyovogna, 
 swearing allegiance. And in the morning 
 of the next day he proclaimed himself king; 
 and he impressed thirty thousand men to 
 build a temple to Dyaus; and yet other 
 twenty thousand to change the streets, and 
 otherwise beautify the place. In forty days 
 the temple was completed, and was large 
 enough for eight thousand souls to do sac- 
 rifice in at one time. T-loyovogna com- 
 pelled the people to prostrate themselves 
 on their bellies and pray to Dyaus, whose 
 home was in Ahl-burj, a high heavenly 
 place, a mountain above the mountains. 
 
 After this T-loyovogna changed the 
 name of the city to Savazata, signifying, 
 first fire-place; and he appointed to rule 
 over it Vistaqpa, to be governor, with right 
 to bequeath it to his son after him. For 
 Sudga had said: To concentrate power, 
 this is the greatest. There shall be but one 
 heavenly ruler, and his Lords shall be his 
 helpmates. Even so shall there be but one 
 king, and his governors shall be his help- 
 mates in the same manner. 
 
 T-loyovogna then marched forward, to 
 conquer and subdue another city; which he 
 accomplished also, and changed the name, 
 appointed a governor, making all the peo- 
 ple swear allegiance to himself as king, and 
 to Sudga, the Dyaus, as heavenly ruler, cre- 
 ator of worlds. 
 
 In this way, even after the same manner 
 as Kan Kwan in Jaffeth, did T-loyovogna 
 proceed in Vind'yii, from city to city, con- 
 quering and subduing. For the Gods, Te- 
 in and Sudga, had oft conferred together on 
 
348 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 this subject previously, and had long ex- 
 perience in manipulating mortals in their 
 games of life and death, nor did mortals 
 mistrust the power above them. 
 
 CHAPTER XLVIII. 
 
 At this time the heavenly kingdoms of 
 Baal and Ashtaroth contained more than 
 twelve thousand million angels. 
 
 When Osiris, the false God of Arabin'- 
 ya and her heavens, left De'yus in Hored, 
 satan spake to him, saying: Osiris, 
 thou art a fool! Thou deservest to be 
 ground to dust! Behold thy wisdom and 
 power, and yet thou cringest to thy infer- 
 iors on every side. Wert thou not made 
 as well; and withal, as masterly in making 
 others to bow to thy will and decrees? 
 What more is required for Gods or men, 
 than to make slaves of others, to do him 
 honor and reverence? 
 
 Then Osiris said: O that I had 
 struck out from the first for my- 
 self! But I will amend my time. When 
 I am in my heavenly place I will send to 
 the earth to my laboring Gods, Baal and 
 Ashtaroth, to come to me, and I will make 
 our three kingdoms into one, and mine 
 shall be chief. And I will offer emoluments 
 to the best, highest grades in Hored, there- 
 by drawing from De'yus his best fruits and 
 flowers, and I will send to him some two 
 or three thousand million of my super- 
 abundant drujas. 
 
 Accordingly, when Osiris arrived at 
 Agho'aden, his heavenly place, he sent 
 messengers down to the earth to Baal and 
 Ashtaroth, summoning them at once to his 
 presence. And they came, being attended, 
 each, with ten thousand companions, be- 
 sides heralds, musicians and trumpeters. 
 Osiris had made great preparation for 
 them. His receiving hosts, one million, 
 were newly adorned for the occasion. The 
 roadway, for three hundred miles, was il- 
 lumed with pillars of fire. The Holy Coun- 
 cil, half a million, were in extra session. 
 The laborers, four thousand million, were 
 granted a day of rest. So that when Baal 
 and Ashtaroth entered the heavenly capi- 
 tal, it was a magnificent scene, and as if in 
 fact Osiris, the false, was a mighty God. 
 
 Great were the ceremonies and saluta- 
 
 tions between the Gods, as also with the 
 generals, captains, marshals and others; to 
 describe which a whole book might be 
 written and yet not mention one-half. Af- 
 ter the reception, Osiris proclaimed an ex- 
 tra day of recreation to Agho'aden, and in 
 the meantime he and Baal and Ashtaroth 
 retired to a private chamber beyond the 
 throne, to the east, to consult on the mat- 
 ters cf heaven and earth. 
 
 Osiris said: My brother and sister, ye 
 are my loves; the worlds are all vain else! 
 De'yus is the most selfish of Gods, and un- 
 reasonable. He said to me: Thou shouldst 
 keep up the grades! Now, behold ye, his 
 own grades are broken down. As I and 
 other Gods send him contributions in sub- 
 jects, so remain such subjects; no more 
 education for them in Hored. Then he 
 complaineth and assumeth to dictate. And 
 this for De'yus' glory. Not a word for 
 lifting angels or mortals up out of dark- 
 ness. 
 
 Baal said: A most unreasonable God. 
 Saidst thou not to him: O that I had the 
 power and means thou hast! What great 
 good I would do! 
 
 Ashtaroth said: This I have found be- 
 fore, the greater power a God hath, the less 
 he doeth for others' good. As for my 
 part, what good can I do? I have scarce 
 two thousand million slaves, all told! O 
 that I had a kingdom like De'yus! But 
 what proposest thou, O Osiris, thou far- 
 seeing God? 
 
 Baal further said: Ashtaroth, thou wise 
 Goddess, thou hast expressed mine own 
 soul. My kingdom is but little larger than 
 thine. I am a very helpless God indeed. 
 But once I reach De'yus' means, my soul's 
 delight will be to fill all the heavens full of 
 schools and hospitals! But speak thou, 
 Osiris, whatsoever thou hast resolved is 
 wise. As for myself I have been two thou- 
 sand years trying to put myself in good po- 
 sition first, so I could help others. 
 
 Osiris said: To cut loose from De'yus; 
 this is wisdom. To send drujas into De'- 
 yus' kingdom, is greater wisdom. To es- 
 tablish Agho'aden as the all highest hea- 
 venly kingdom, with myself at the God- 
 head, and ye twain to be my sole Gods of 
 the earth, is the greatest wisdom. 
 
 Baal said: As I swear, thou hast spoken 
 at last what I have for five hundred years 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 349 
 
 hoped to hear thee say. To thee am I 
 sworn forever. Put thou upon me whatso- 
 ever thou wilt. 
 
 Ashtaroth said: Now am I blessed 
 above all Goddesses. What I have heard 
 thee speak is what I would have spoken. 
 
 Osiris said: It is enough, then, this 
 I proclaim, and on our crossed hands we 
 swear: Agho'aden, All Highest Heaven! 
 Osiris, Son of the All Central Lights! The 
 Most High God! His only Son, Baal, 
 Ruler of the Corporeal Earth! His only 
 Daughter, Ashtaroth, Ruler of the Corpor- 
 eal Earth! Fidelity and Union forever! 
 
 Thus they swore themselves into the 
 Godhead. And on the next day Osiris 
 sent messengers to De'yus, in his heavenly 
 place, informing him of what had been 
 done, and adding thereto: But thou, De - 
 yus, I cut thee off from these earth regions. 
 Get thy supplies whither thou canst. Ad- 
 versity doth a proud soul some good. 
 
 CHAPTER XLIX. 
 
 Osiris said to Baal and Ashtaroth: Go 
 ye down to the earth and subdue it; and 
 your first labor shall be in Arabin'ya, and 
 Par'si'e, and Heleste; after that ye shall 
 fall upon remote parts and subdue them 
 unto ourselves also. But go ye not as other 
 Gods, to destroy mortals, for we want them 
 to propagate and make subjects for us. Nor 
 pursue ye them, tribe against tribe, putting 
 them to death if they worship not Osiris 
 or Baal or Ashtaroth. Nay, not even the 
 worshippers of the Great Spirit, except 
 those whose spirits we cannot catch at time 
 of death; them destroy. But suffer mortals 
 to worship as they may, and if they worship 
 the Creator, say unto them: It is well. 
 If they worship Ahura, say: It is well. If 
 De'yus: Yea, it is well; for all of these are 
 but one person, who is Osiris, whose high 
 heavenly place is Agho'aden. Thus teach 
 them. 
 
 This also shall ye do: Re-establish 
 places of learning, teaching the Osirian 
 law; <~ause to be rebuilt, houses of philos- 
 ophy, oracles and temples; and in all such 
 places where mortals come to consult the 
 spirits, provide ye spirits who shall 
 answer through the oracles for benefit of 
 our dominions. It was ourselves that gave 
 the name Lord God to the Arabin'yans; it 
 
 was ourselves that gave the name De'yus 
 to Par'si'e and Heleste. Let us not waste 
 ourselves undoing what hath been done, 
 but appropriate it to ourselves. 
 
 Such, then, was the basis on which these 
 three Gods set out to establish heaven and 
 earth. Osiris gave to Baal and Ashtaroth, 
 in addition to their own kingdoms, twelve 
 Lords each, to labor with them in the 
 earth department; and every Lord was al- 
 lotted one million spirit soldiers, to be 
 under the Lord's jurisdiction. 
 
 With this, Baal and Ashtaroth returned 
 to their heavenly kingdoms on the earth, 
 and at once set about their labors. First, 
 by inspiring mortal kings and queens, who, 
 being thus inspired, impressed tens of thou- 
 sands and hundreds of thousands of their 
 subject to do the building. And in seven 
 years' time there were built in Parsi'e and 
 Arabin'ya four thousand altars for the sa- 
 cred dances; seven thousand temples of 
 sacrifice, four hundred and seventy oracle 
 temples, and thirty-one sar'gis temples, 
 where the Lords took on corporeal forms 
 and talked and reasoned with mortals; es- 
 pecially on the stars and moon and on the 
 earth; teaching the philosophers the four 
 motions of the earth; axial, oscillaic, or- 
 bitic and vorkum; the plan of the hissa- 
 gow, and the cycles of the earth; the cycles 
 of the sun, and the cycle of the sun's sun; 
 the north star-belt therein, and the vortices 
 that move them all. 
 
 And the inhabitants of Arabin'ya and 
 Par'si'e and Heleste began again to pros- 
 per, and became mighty. But after many 
 years, behold, Baal and Ashtaroth rebelled 
 against Osiris, and seceded from him. 
 And this was the end of the heavenly 
 confederacy founded by De'yus. As for 
 the far-off Gods in other divisions of the 
 earth, they seceded at the time Osiris and 
 Te-in and Sudga did. And from this time 
 on, no more spirits were sent to the Lord 
 God, the false, the author of the name De'- 
 yus. 
 
 When Baal and Ashtaroth seceded from 
 Osiris and resumed their own kingdoms, 
 behold, in all the divisions of the earth, ev- 
 ery God was for himself and his own king- 
 dom. But between Osiris and Baal and 
 Ashtaroth a triangular war ensued in refer- 
 ence to the boundaries and divisions of the 
 land of the earth. 
 
350 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 Now, therefore, the self-Gods had be- 
 come the beginning of a new order of do- 
 minion in heaven and earth, every one in 
 his own way. 
 
 CHAPTER L. 
 
 After the meeting between De'yiis and 
 Osiris and Sudga, when De'yiis was left 
 alone, he thus reasoned: Since Sudga and 
 Osiris have thus left me uncivilly amidst a 
 most disgusting quarrel, it must follow 
 that on their arrival home they will secede, 
 taking their kingdoms with them. Well, 
 it will be well; I will the more warmly bind 
 my fellowship to Te-in, and we twain shall 
 overthrow Sudga and Osiris, and take all 
 their spoils. 
 
 Whilst De'yiis thus soliloquized, mes- 
 sengers came from Che-su-gow, Te-in's 
 heavenly place, bringing this word: Greet- 
 ing to thee, our Lord God: Te-in hath se- 
 ceded, and taken both his heavenly and his 
 corporeal diminions unto himself. With an 
 army of two hundred million angel war- 
 riors he is walling his heavenly kingdom 
 around on every side; none can pass or re- 
 pass without his permission. 
 
 Before De'yiis recovered from his sur- 
 prise, behold, other messengers came from 
 Sudga's heavenly place, saying: Greeting 
 to thee, our Lord God: Sudga hath seced- 
 ed, taking with him his heavenly kingdom 
 and his earth dominions, Vind'yu! With 
 an army of two hundred million angel 
 warriors he is walling his heavenly king- 
 dom around on every side; none can pass 
 or repass without his permission! De'yus 
 said: So alike and like! Then these ras- 
 cal Gods had this planned beforehand! 
 
 Presently other messengers arrived, say- 
 ing: Greeting to thee, our one-time Lord 
 God of heaven and earth! Osiris and Baal 
 and Ashtaroth have seceded, taking their 
 heavenly kingdoms and their mortal do- 
 minions with them. I, Osiris have spoken. 
 Thy higher grades I will draw unto myself; 
 my lower grades I will banish unto thee! 
 
 De'yus said: Well, it is well. I will 
 now make stronger the other heavenly di- 
 visions unto me; and the earth divisions, 
 too long neglected by me; Uropa, Guata- 
 ma, North and South, and their heavenly 
 places. But whilst he thus soliloquized, 
 
 behold, messengers arrived from these 
 places, also announcing their secession in 
 like manner. Then De'yus was silent for 
 a long while, considering. But satan came 
 to him, saying: 
 
 Darkness cometh unto all the great, for 
 by this the light is made to shine brighter. 
 Now, since all access to the corporeal 
 earth is cut off, and since all thy supplies 
 for food and raiment must come up from 
 the earth, it followeth that thou shalt 
 lower Hored, thy heavenly place, nearer to 
 the face of the earth. The which accom- 
 plished, thou shalt send ten thousand mill- 
 ion of thy warrior angels against these re- 
 bellious Gods and despoil them of their 
 dominions, and cast them into hell, and 
 repossess thou the whole earth. 
 
 De'yus said: It is true! My way is 
 clear. These rascally Gods know not how 
 foolishly they have exposed themselves. 
 Hored is wide enough to cover them up. 
 And by fire will I chase the drujas upon 
 them, ten thousand million strong; flood 
 them with such foulness that their king- 
 doms will go to pieces under them and suf- 
 focate them in the horrid stench. 
 
 De'yus then called together his vice- 
 Gods, and his Holy Council, and his high- 
 est raised officers; and he related to them 
 what had occurred, and his plans ahead. 
 But that he might the better deliberate and 
 gain their acquiescence, he granted a day 
 of recreation, to meet on the following day 
 at the trumpet call. ' But on the 
 day of recreation, no less than seven 
 hundred million of his highest grades left 
 him and Hored, and descended to the hea- 
 venly kingdoms of his former Gods, some 
 to one and some to another, whilst a few 
 of them descended to the earth to found 
 small kingdoms of their own. Danger was 
 already staring De'yus in the face. 
 
 Accordingly, he at once chose his offi- 
 cers, and set them to work, but owing to 
 their lack of knowledge in such matters, 
 only a small section was bound and lowered 
 at one time, at which rate a hundred years 
 would be required to accomplish the work. 
 Hereat, De'yus' heart began to fail him. 
 The prophecies of the higher Gods, that he 
 and his kingdoms would be ultimately 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 351 
 
 broken up and cast into hell, began to show 
 signs of realization fearful to contemplate. 
 
 De'yiis had no time for war, but must 
 now use every stratagem in his power to 
 prevent dismemberment in his own king- 
 dom. In these straits a good fortune came 
 to him in a ji'ay'an harvest falling in all the 
 atmospherean heavens, compressing and 
 falling, so that his lowest grades were pro- 
 vided with sustenance from above, and they 
 were pacified. 
 
 Jehovih had spoken to Cpenta-armij, in 
 her far-off etherean worlds, saying: Be- 
 hold, Earth, she entereth now the ji'ay'- 
 an fields of Tu'e'vraga, in My high roads, 
 Loo-sutsk. A little while will I feed the 
 self-Gods of the lower heavens, and lead 
 them on to know My power. 
 
 CHAPTER LI. 
 
 Jehovih spake to God, His Son, in Cra- 
 oshivi, saying: Prepare thou, for the fall 
 of ji'ay in atmospherea. Earth and her 
 heavens enter Loo-sutsk, seventy years in 
 the rates of seven hundred; forty years in 
 five hundred; twenty years in a'ji! Be thou 
 advised; for Craoshivi shall fall to thirty, 
 and Hored be buried in the earth. Call 
 thou My Son, Ahura, and reveal My 
 words! 
 
 So God, in Craoshivi, advised his High 
 Council, and also sent messengers in haste 
 to Vara-pishanaha, to Ahura, and ac- 
 quainted him. After this God propounded 
 in Council. What can Craoshivi do for 
 Anuhasaj ? Thereupon the members spake 
 at great length, more than a thousand of 
 them. 
 
 So God decreed: A commission to wait 
 on Anuhasaj and inform him of his dan- 
 ger, and offer to succor and save him. 
 This is the message thus sent: 
 
 To thee, O Anuhasaj, greeting in Jeho- 
 vih's name, and by our love assured. Thou 
 art adjudged to be in perilous condition. 
 Behold, one hundred and thirty years' 
 pressure will fall on the heavens of 
 Earth; Craoshivi will go down to the 
 depths of hada. Reach up thy hands, and 
 I will come and save thee and thy kingdom. 
 Wilt thou withdraw thine armies and per- 
 mit the resurrection of thy lowest grades? 
 
 Anuhasaj answered in these words: 
 
 Who art thou that thus assaileth my peace- 
 ful kingdom? Thou pretended son of the 
 Void Nothingness? Call thou on me as 
 becometh one with thy small kingdom, and 
 if thou need help for thyself, or for thy pau- 
 pers, I will give unto thee! 
 
 Thereupon God returned this answer: 
 Be thou patient with me, O brother: If it 
 be that I am proved to be in darkness, and 
 thou in the light, I will make thee ample 
 amends. If on the other hand I be in the 
 light, and thou in darkness, I will say 
 naught that would wound thee. If thou 
 wilt apply thyself diligently to solve the 
 place of Earth and her heavens thou wilt 
 find in truth the coming pressure whereof 
 I told thee. Think not that my words are 
 spoken at random, but try them by proph- 
 ecy and by mathematics. 
 
 As to the coming danger, it is an easy 
 matter to estimate. A thousand years ago, 
 when thou first established thyself and thy 
 heaven, Hored possessed an average grade 
 above fifty. And there were four 
 thousand million of them. In two hundred 
 years thou hadst six thousand million, and 
 the grade was raised to sixty-five. In the 
 next two hundred years the number was 
 nearly doubled, but the grade had fallen to 
 forty. And two hundred years later the 
 inhabitants had nearly doubled again, but 
 the grade had fallen to twenty-eight. In 
 the next two hundred years, the increase 
 in numbers was at the same rate as the de- 
 crease in the grade. 
 
 Now behold, thy twenty-eight thousand 
 million, more than half of whom are in 
 Hored, are below grade ten. And when 
 thou didst first possess Hored, a ten grade 
 could not survive thereon. Think not that 
 some accidental thing will raise so great a 
 weight. Look into this matter, as to what 
 thou hast done! Thou hast persuaded thy 
 hosts not to look up to Jehovih and His 
 kingdoms, and lo, they incline downward 
 to the earth. Yea, they have already filled 
 the earth with war and destruction. 
 
 Thou shalt not hope to throw these 
 things on thy Gods, for they will turn 
 against thee and accuse thee. At present 
 they are content to found kingdoms of their 
 own. But they will also come to an end. 
 Because they have seceded from thee, let 
 it be evidence that all the highest grades 
 will follow in the same way. 
 
352 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARM1J 
 
 As for Craoshivi, her lowest grades are 
 above fifty, and therefore self-sustaining; 
 her highest grades are ninety-nine and her 
 average eighty-eight. And hundreds of 
 millions of these are such as my Lords 
 have rescued from thy bondage; others, 
 such Faithists on the earth as thy false 
 Gods put to death for refusing to bow to 
 thee. And have they not proved it is bet- 
 ter to suffer death than to renounce faith 
 in Jehovih? Otherwise they had now been 
 within the company of thy slaves, toiling 
 in darkness. Yea, my kingdom is made up 
 of those that were despised and abused; 
 and of those that thy Gods slew in war, 
 chaotic and mad. For my asaphs followed 
 thy cruel wars and gathered in the spirits 
 of the slain, whom thou wouldst not have. 
 Thou callest them poor still. Why, so they 
 are; they are washed white as snow; and 
 because they have been taught to keep on 
 casting aside all accumulation, save knowl- 
 edge and goodness of heart, in which they 
 are rich indeed. 
 
 They would come to thee now in pity 
 to take thy people by the hand and deliver 
 them away from thee and darkness. And if 
 thy slaves be not delivered away from thee, 
 they will surely, soon or late, turn upon 
 thee and cast thee into hell. I pray thee, 
 therefore, assume thou conversion to Je- 
 hovih, and cast thy kingdom upon Him 
 whilst thou may. For I have the power 
 and the means to deliver thee and thy 
 slaves. Yea, I will give thee a new name, 
 and hide thee away, that they cannot find 
 thee. And thou shalt be one with me in 
 my holy place. Thus the matter remained. 
 
 CHAPTER LII. 
 
 In Vara-pishanaha Ahura had now toil- 
 ed nearly two thousand years with his peo- 
 ple, who for a great part had been drujas, 
 but were now high in the grades. More 
 than two thousand million of them had 
 been raised into light; becoming Brides 
 and Bridegrooms to Jehovih, and had been 
 delivered into the etherean worlds. 
 
 But Ahura suffered not his dominions 
 to be depleted, but did after the manner of 
 God in Craoshivi, and sent down to hada 
 and to the earth and gathered in, both the 
 fallen angels of De'yus and his false Gods, 
 and also the chaotic and foul-smelling spir- 
 its, wild and frenzied; and Ahura had 
 
 them brought to Vara-pishanaha and 
 there sorted, and nursed and restored and 
 put to school and to factories, and taught 
 and developed; hundreds of millions of 
 them becoming bright, wise and of great 
 love and power. 
 
 God sent to Ahura, saying: Greeting to 
 thee in the name of Jehovih: Because of 
 the coming darkness which will soon press 
 upon atmospherea from every quarter, and 
 the trials that will be put upon Gods and 
 angels, let us unite our heavenly kingdoms! 
 Let us bring our plateaux together, and 
 thy kingdom shall be my kingdom, and 
 mine shall be thine; and one of us shall be 
 manager in heaven, and the other shall de- 
 scend to hada and to the earth during the 
 great darkness. 
 
 To this Ahura replied: Greeting to 
 thee, God of Earth and her heavens, and 
 with love and most high reverence. There 
 is wisdom in thy design. I will do whatso- 
 ever thou demandest, to fulfill this great 
 work. 
 
 So God, of Craoshivi, and Ahura, 
 brought their forces to bear on their re- 
 spective plateaux, to unite them. And their 
 places were two thousand miles apart, to 
 the northeast and southwest; and Vara- 
 pishanaha was seven thousand miles below 
 Craoshivi. 
 
 Now the coming pressure would drive 
 them both down near the earth's surface; 
 to steer Vara-pishanaha to the northeast- 
 ward, and to steer Craoshivi to the south- 
 westward, would bring one over the other; 
 and to lower the grade of Craoshivi would 
 bring the twain in contact. And the in- 
 habitants of both dominions were so high 
 in power and wisdom that their presence 
 was higher than the place they inhabited. 
 So that the element of the plateaux was all 
 that was required to be moved. 
 
 To find the power required, and to ar- 
 range the ranks for the proceding, God 
 appointed officers and set them to work, 
 and the officers reported back that the work 
 could be completed in twelve years. And 
 Ahura united with God; and there were en- 
 gaged in this labor three thousand million 
 angels. And they made a bridge betwixt 
 the two plateaux, and it was completed 
 during the first year; and it so connected 
 them that millions of angels could pass and 
 repass whilst the work was going on. 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 353 
 
 Yet God's labors and Ahura's labors is 
 receiving the spirits of the earth, of the 
 Faithists, and of others from the regions of 
 hada, ceased not. Their thousands of 
 otevans sailed the heavens in every 
 direction, gathering in the unfortunate. 
 And now that the self-Gods in hada had 
 quarreled amongst themselves and separ- 
 ated, De'yus' blockade was broken. His 
 mighty standing army against Jeho- 
 vih's believers had melted away; and 
 the otevans sped hither and yonder 
 unmolested. And they gathered in 
 many a thousand; yea, tens of thousands, 
 of De'yus' highest raised angels. The 
 lowest would not come, they had been 
 taught to hate with vengeance Jehovih and 
 His worshippers; to look upon all ills as 
 from Jehovih; to look upon all good de- 
 lights and blessings as the gifts of De'yus, 
 the Lord their God. 
 
 Suffice it to say, in twelve years 
 the great heavens, Craoshivi and Vara-pish- 
 anaha, were united and become as one 
 place. And there was a time of rejoicing 
 and delight; great recreation and commun- 
 ion; great rites and ceremonies, and wor- 
 shipping and rejoicing before Jehovih. Al- 
 ready was the pressure of ji'ay upon the 
 heavens and the earth. Hored was fast 
 falling toward the earth; De'yus' highest 
 raised had already gone; his kingdom was 
 becoming a kingdom of fools and idlers, a 
 most dangerous class when once want and 
 starvation come upon them. 
 
 De'yus, still stubborn, and, withal, hop- 
 ing for a change from some cause he saw 
 not, had now no longer time to quarrel 
 with his truant Gods, but from day to day, 
 liour to hour, was kept on a strain to avert 
 the threatened doom. 
 
 Meanwhile, the false Gods, his own 
 ■one-time pupils, were now heaping into his 
 distracted kingdom millions and millions of 
 drujas, who had been taught on earth that 
 .all that was required of them was to call on 
 the Savior, Anubi, and the Lord God, and 
 that when they died they would go straight 
 to glory to dwell on the holy hill of the 
 Lord God. And these poor creatures the 
 self-Gods now applauded, helping them on, 
 saying: Yea, go on; your Savior, Anubi, 
 will open the gate and pass you in. Hence- 
 forth, forever, ye shall do nothing but bow 
 to De'yus. 
 
 And these spirits of darkness, like idi- 
 ots, were bowing all the time, day and 
 night, doing nothing but bowing, and say- 
 ing: Blessed Anubi! He can save me! 
 Glory to the Lord our God! Then they 
 would begin again: Blessed Anubi! My 
 Savior! Glory be to De'yus! For this 
 was all they knew; neither would they hear 
 nor see else; they were as wild people; 
 with outbursting eyes, looking for Anubi; 
 looking for De'yus; but bowing incessant- 
 ly in all directions; millions of them, tens 
 of millions. 
 
 Anubi gave up his olace in conse- 
 quence, and in fear of them; and his hea- 
 venly city was like a house without a keep- 
 er, where throngs go in and out, around 
 about, forever shouting: O my blessed 
 Savior, Anubi! Glory be to the Lord God. 
 But Anubi was with the false Lord God, 
 striving to help him find some means of 
 escape or safety. 
 
 CHAPTER LIII. 
 
 Darker and darker, the hadan fields 
 palled before the touch of Jehovih's hand, 
 to try the self-assumed Lord God and his 
 heavenly works. As if an epoch new and 
 terrible had come to one so audacious, 
 who foremost in heaven and earth had 
 sought to banish the worship and the name 
 of the Great Spirit from mortals, and give 
 them instead a heavenly ruler in the image 
 of man. 
 
 For before this, all nations knew the 
 office of Gods and Lords, and reverenced 
 them as Jehovih's high officers, raised up 
 spirits of the dead, wise and powerful. But 
 now, in five great divisions of the earth, 
 satan's hadan chief had bound mortals to 
 his name, with threatened penalties, and 
 even death, for mentioning Jehovih's name. 
 And, to put them to the test, made oaths 
 on burning flesh, that whoso would not 
 eat thereof should die. For this was the 
 criterion before the courts that they who 
 refused fish and flesh food, or would not 
 pollute the body by intoxicating drinks 
 and noxious smoke, were possessed of Je- 
 hovihian worship, and so deserved torture 
 and death. 
 
 So the names of Lord and God, and 
 Lord God, and De'yus, had now become for 
 a thousand years fixed in mortals' minds 
 as the Creator, a large man sitting on a 
 
354 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 throne in Hored, his heavenly seat, watched 
 and guarded by his son, Anubi, keeper of 
 the scales, and of the gate to heaven. To 
 make a plausible story of which, the an- 
 gels, through oracles, and magicians, and 
 priests, and prophets, proclaimed that: In 
 the beginning God created the heavens and 
 the earth, and all things therein and. there- 
 on. And he was tired, and rested; and, as 
 if creation was a completed work, left cer- 
 tain laws to run the wonderful machine 
 whilst he sat afar off, looking on; smiling 
 at the pranks of mortals, and their failure 
 to understand him, with a devil and a hor- 
 rid fire to torture their souls, if they sang 
 not in praise of this compounded, false 
 Lord God. 
 
 Thus turned he, their false God, the 
 voice of mortals from Him Who is Ever 
 Present, Whose speech hath every soul 
 heard, Whose Presence moveth all things 
 in heaven and earth! The false God turned 
 them to sing and pray to himself, so he 
 should clutch and bind their souls in end- 
 less slavery; untaught, half fed; as drudges, 
 to bring into his capital, provender and 
 building stones to glorify him forever. 
 
 Over Jaffeth, far and wide, this traitor 
 to Jehovih had sealed in stone, and papy- 
 rus, and wood, and sacred cloth, his name, 
 Ho-Joss, to suit the Panic voice; as whilst 
 in Vind'yu he made them engrave it Dy- 
 aus, to fit the Vedic tongue; and thence 
 in Fonece to suit the higher-spirited race, 
 Adonia-Egad, and go over to Heleste, and, 
 in less distinct Greece, whisper Zeus, 
 saying: These words are watchwords 
 to gain Anubi's ear, and turn the 
 scales for endless paradise, saying: Go ye, 
 engrave my names; and, in mortal librar- 
 ies, register my great exploit, of how I cre- 
 ated the world. And make me spotless 
 pure, letting sin into the races of men by 
 Osiris' cunning tale of We-it's weakness by 
 fault of the earth. For I am not come 
 like Jehovih's captains, spirits sent to rule 
 men for a season, but a very God of blood 
 and bones, who once, in terrible anger, 
 flooded the earth to drown my disobedient 
 sons and daughters. Make ye them to 
 tremble and draw long breath when my 
 name is spoken, or, by mine own soul, I 
 will hurl heaven and earth into the endless 
 chaos! 
 
 Pressing downward ji'ay came, slowly 
 and surely, the very motion spake as a 
 million tongues, serious, awful. For many 
 of the hosts of De'yiis were deserting him 
 on all sides. As one in a small way 
 may see on a sinking ship, how the expert 
 swimmers, with strong arms, leap into the 
 water boldly and swim for the far-off shore, 
 whilst the helpless, in frantic rage, cluster 
 fast upon the distracted officers, hindering 
 them from doing good. • So began the 
 tumult in the fast decending plateau, Ho- 
 red, which was increased a hundred-fold 
 by the flood of drujas cast upon De'yus' 
 kingdom by his own traitorous false Gods. 
 
 De'yiis' generals and captains first tried 
 music to hold the forty thousand million 
 to peace and order; but the es'enaurs them- 
 selves took fright, and fled by the million, 
 flying down to the earth to Osiris', or Te- 
 in's, or Sudga's kingdoms, and over-flood- 
 ing mortals with ghostly revelries. Next, 
 by parades, and rites, and great proces- 
 sions, did De'yiis' officers seek to divert 
 the panic-stricken millions. 
 
 Thus for years this maddened God with 
 wonderful strength of will almost held his 
 own, inventing tens of thousands of strata- 
 gems. But at last, in the downward 
 course, Hored touched upon the corporeal 
 earth; and suddenly, as if startled by the 
 shock, the frantic millions screamed, and 
 then, alas, all order died. 
 
 The doors of hell were opened! The 
 maddened mob broke loose to pillage or to 
 destroy De'yus' throne and capital, with 
 all their splendor. And then rushed 
 in the fault-finders, shouting: Thou lying 
 God, but like a man, who art thou? And 
 thou, Anubi, deceiving judge! A thou- 
 sand horrible deaths to thee! 
 
 But the unlearned drujas knew not 
 who was rank or officer, God or judge, but 
 seized the pale and trembling De'yus and 
 Anubi, and more than a million officers, 
 overpowered them, by ten million to one, 
 pressed on by the foul-smelling crowd. 
 And now, with blows and kicks and cuffs, 
 on every side began the awful fray. Till 
 stretched as wide as the Earth, the count- 
 less millions were plunged into hell. Here- 
 upon, to right and left, was now an un- 
 ceasing combat, and all the hosts of the 
 Lord God were sworn for vengeance 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMU 
 
 355 
 
 against any one they came against. Then 
 came the torturers, casting into hells most 
 offensive smells and suffocating gases, 
 crammed in the nose and mouth of their 
 victims. No more were De'yiis and Anubi 
 seen, but swallowed up in measureless 
 darkness where every soul sought nothing 
 good, but labored hard to give unto others 
 excruciating tortures for vengeance sake. 
 
 CHAPTER LIV. 
 
 God in Craoshivi prayed Jehovih what 
 he should do to release De'yus and Anubi; 
 Jehovih answered, saying: My Son, thou 
 shalt first labor for them that desire; who- 
 so courteth darkness deserveth not thy 
 hand. I have proclaimed from since the 
 olden time, warning to them that put Me 
 away; but in their self-conceit they denied 
 My person and power. Wert thou, this 
 day, to deliver from hell De'yus and Anu- 
 bi, and their thousands of millions of self- 
 torturing slaves, they would but use their 
 deliverance to mock My creation, saying: 
 It lasted not; it was but a breath of wind. 
 In four hundred years I will bring 
 Earth into another dawn of light. Till then, 
 let De'yus and Anubi and their hosts take 
 their course. 
 
 God inquired concerning Osiris and Te- 
 in and Sudga, and Jehovih answered him, 
 saying: Sufficient unto them is the light 
 they have received. Suffer them also to 
 take their course, for they also shall be- 
 come involved in hells of their own build- 
 ing. But be thou attentive to My Chosen, 
 the Faithists, in all parts of heaven and 
 earth; not suffering one of them to fall 
 into the hells of My enemies. 
 
 God acquainted Ahura with Jehovih's 
 words; then Ahura prayed to Jehovih, 
 saying: O Father, grant Thou to me that 
 I may go to Osiris, and to Te-in, and to 
 Sudga, to plead Thy cause. Behold, De'- 
 yus is locked up in hell; even high-raised 
 Gods would not find it safe to go to him. 
 
 Jehovih said: Why, O Ahura, desirest 
 thou to go to Osiris and to Te-in and to 
 Sudga? Knowest thou not, how difficult 
 it is to alter the mind of a mortal man; 
 and yet these self-Gods are ten-fold more 
 stubborn! 
 
 Ahura said: I know, I cannot change 
 them; to break this matter of conceit, and 
 
 all learned men are liable to fall therein, 
 none but Thou, O Jehovih, hast power. 
 But these self-Gods were long ago my 
 most loved friends; behold, I will go to 
 them as a father would to a son, and plead 
 with them. Jehovih gave permission to 
 Ahura to visit them, the three great self- 
 Gods. 
 
 So Ahura fitted out an otevan, and with 
 ten thousand attendants, and one thousand 
 heralds, and with five thousand musicians, 
 besides the officers of the fire-ship, set 
 sail for Che-su-gow, Te-in's heavenly 
 place, over Jaffeth. And when he arrived 
 near the place he halted and sent his her- 
 alds ahead to inquire if he could have au- 
 dience with Te-in. 
 
 Te-in received the heralds cordially, 
 and being informed of their object, sent 
 back this word: Te-in, the most high ruler 
 of heaven and earth, sendeth greeting to 
 Ahura, commanding his presence, but for- 
 bidding Ahura and his hosts from speak- 
 ing to any soul in Che-su-gow save Te-in. 
 
 Ahura received this insulting message 
 with composure, and then proceeded and 
 entered the capital city, the heavenly place 
 of Te-in, where he was met by one million 
 slaves, arrayed in the most gorgeous man- 
 ner. These conducted him and his at- 
 tendants to the arena, where Ahura was 
 received by the marshals, who brought 
 him to the throne, leaving the attendants 
 in the arena. Here Te-in saluted on the 
 sign of Taurus, and Ahura answered in the 
 sign of Friendship. 
 
 Te-in signalled privacy, and so all oth- 
 ers fell back, leaving Ahura and Te-in 
 alone. Te-in said: Come thou and sit 
 beside me on the throne. Ahura said: Be- 
 cause thou hast not forgotten me I am re- 
 joiced. And he went up and sat on the 
 throne. 
 
 Te-in said: Because thou art my friend 
 I love thee; because thou art beside me I 
 am rejoiced. It is more than a thousand 
 years since mine eyes have beholden thee. 
 Tell me, Ahura, how is it with thyself and 
 thy kingdom? 
 
 Ahura said: As for myself I am hap- 
 py; for the greater part, my kingdom is 
 happy also. My trials have been severe 
 and long enduring. But of my four thou- 
 sand million, more than half of them are 
 
356 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 delivered beyond atmospherea, high rais- 
 ed; and of the others they grade from fifty 
 to ninety. 
 
 Te-in said: And for more than two 
 thousand years' toil, what hast thou gained 
 hy striving to raise up these drujas? Ahu- 
 ra said: This only, O Te-in, peace and re- 
 joicing in my soul. 
 
 Te-in said: Hereupon hang two phil- 
 osophies: One seeketh peace and rejoic- 
 ing by laboring with the lowest of the 
 low; the other, by leading the highest of 
 the high. As for me, the latter suiteth me 
 better than the former. I tell thee, Ahura, 
 all things come of the will; if we will our- 
 selves to shut out horrid sights and com- 
 plainings, such as the poor druk and the 
 druj indulge in, we have joy in a higher 
 heaven. To me it is thus; sympathy is our 
 most damnable enemy, for it bindeth us to 
 the wretched and miserable. To put 
 away sympathy is to begin to be a great 
 master over others, to make them sub- 
 servient to our wills. 
 
 Ahura said: Is it not a good thing to 
 help the wretched? Te-in answered: To 
 help them is like drinking nectar; to make 
 one's senses buoyant for the time being, 
 that is all. They relapse and are less res- 
 olute that before, and depend on being 
 helped again. For which reason he who 
 helpeth the wretched doth wrong them 
 -woefully. To make them know their 
 places, this is the highest. For have not 
 ■even the Gods to submit to their places? 
 To learn to be happy with one's place and 
 condition is great wisdom. Herein have 
 thousands of Gods fallen; they helped up 
 the poor and wretched; as one may, in 
 sympathy to serpents, take them into his 
 house and pity them. They immediately 
 turn and bite their helpers. But speak 
 thou, O Ahura; for I have respect to thy 
 words. 
 
 Ahura said: If a man plant an acorn 
 in a flower-pot, and it take root and grow, 
 one of two things must follow: the growth 
 must be provided against or the pot will 
 burst. Even thus draweth, from the 
 sources around about, the lowest druj in 
 heaven. None of the Gods can bind him 
 forever. Alas, he will grow. All our 
 bondage over them cannot prevent the 
 soul, soon or late, taking root and grow- 
 
 ing. How, then, can we be Gods over 
 them forever? 
 
 Te-in said: Thou art a God over them; 
 I am a God over them. Where is the dif- 
 ference? 
 
 Ahura said: I am not in mine own 
 name; though I am God over them, yet I 
 am not God over them. For I teach them 
 they shall not worship me, but Jehovih. I 
 train them that I may raise them away 
 from me. Neither do my people serve me, 
 but serve the Great Spirit. Thou teachest 
 thy drujas that thou art the all highest, 
 and that they shall be contented to serve 
 thee everlastingly. Thou dost limit them 
 to the compass of thy kingdom. I do not 
 limit my subjects, but teach them that their 
 progression is forever onward, upward. 
 
 Te-in said: How do we not know but 
 the time will come unto them, and they 
 shall say: Alas, I was taught in error. 
 They told me there was a Great Spirit, a 
 Person comprising all things, but I have 
 found Him not. Will they not then revolt 
 also? Was not this the cause of De'yus' 
 fall? He had searched the heavens to the 
 extreme, but found not Jehovih. Then he 
 returned, and possessed himself of heaven 
 and earth. Although he failed, and is cast 
 into hell, it is plain that his sympathy for 
 drujas caused his fall. From his errors, I 
 hope to guard myself; for I shall show no 
 sympathy for the poor or wretched; neither 
 will I permit education on earth or in hea- 
 ven, save to my Lords or marshals. When 
 a mortal city pleaseth me not, I will send 
 spirits of darkness to flood it unto destruc- 
 tion. Yea, they shall incite mortals to 
 fire the place, and to riot and death. Thus 
 will I keep the drujas of heaven forever 
 busy playing games with mortals, and in 
 bringing provender and diadems to for- 
 ever glorify my heavenly kingdom. 
 
 Ahura said: Where in all the world 
 hath a self-God stood and not fallen? 
 
 Te-in said: Thou mayest ask of mor- 
 tals: Where is a kingdom or a nation 
 that stood, and hath not fallen? Yet thou 
 perceivest nations continue to try to found 
 themselves everlastingly. But they are 
 leveled in time. Things spring up and 
 grow, and then fall into dissolution. Will 
 it not be so with ourselves in the far fu- 
 ture? Will we not become one with the 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 357 
 
 ever-changing elements, and as nothing, 
 and wasted away? 
 
 Ahura said: One might say of man 
 and spirits: There were some seeds plant- 
 ed; and many of them rotted and returned 
 to earth; but others took root and grew 
 and became large trees. But yet, is it not 
 true also of the trees that they have a time? 
 For they die, and fall down, and rot, and 
 also return to earth. Admit this to be 
 true, O Te-in, and that the time may 
 come when thou and I shall pass out of 
 being, doth it not follow that for the time 
 we live we should contribute all we can to 
 make others happy? 
 
 Te-in said: If by so doing it will ren- 
 der ourselves happy, with no danger to 
 our kingdoms, then yea, verily. For 
 which reason are we not forced back after 
 all to the position that we shall labor for 
 our own happiness, without regard to oth- 
 ers? One man delighteth in art, another 
 in philosophy, another in helping the poor 
 and wretched; another in eating and 
 drinking, and another in ruling over oth- 
 ers; shall not they all have enjoyment in 
 the way of their desires? Shalt thou say to 
 him that delighteth in eating and drinking: 
 Stop thou; come and delight thyself help- 
 ing the wretched! 
 
 Ahura said: This I have seen; the in- 
 telligent and clean have more delight than 
 do the stupid and filthy; the rich more en- 
 joyment than the poor. As for ourselves, 
 we delight more in seeing the delighted 
 than in seeing the wretched. More do we 
 delight to see a child smile than to hear it 
 cry; but there be such that delight more 
 to make a child cry than to see it smile; 
 but such persons are evil and take delight 
 in evil. Shall we, then, indulge them in 
 their means of delight? Or is there not a 
 limit, as when we say: All men have a 
 right to that which delighteth themselves, 
 provided it mar not the delight of others? 
 
 Te-in said: Thou hast reasoned well. 
 We shall delight ourselves only in such 
 ways as do not mar the delight of others. 
 
 Whereupon Ahura said: Then I am 
 not delighted with the manner of thy king- 
 dom; and thou shouldst not practice what 
 giveth me pain. Because thou hast re- 
 solved to educate not mortals nor angels, 
 
 thou hast raised a hideous wall in the face 
 of the Gods. 
 
 Te-in said: This also wilt thou admit: 
 That as we desire to delight ourselves we 
 should look for the things that delight us, 
 turn away from things that delight us not. 
 Therefore, let not the Gods turn their 
 faces this way, but to their own affairs. 
 
 Ahura said: Thou art wise, O Te-in. 
 But this I have found; that something 
 within us groweth, that will not down nor 
 turn aside. In the beginning of life we 
 look to ourselves, which the nature of the 
 young; but when we grow, we take a wife, 
 and we delight to see her delighted; then 
 cometh offspring, and we delight to see 
 them delighted. After this, we delight to 
 see our neighbors delighted; and then the 
 state, and then the whole kingdom. This 
 delight to be delighted groweth within us; 
 and when we become Gods we delight no 
 longer in the delight of a few only, but we 
 expand unto many kingdoms. As for my- 
 self, I first delighted in the delight of Vara- 
 pishanaha; but now I delight to see other 
 Gods and other kingdoms delighted. For 
 that, I have come to thee. I fear thy fate. 
 I love thee. I love all thy people, good 
 and bad. Behold, -this I have found, that 
 it is an easier matter to allow a river to 
 run its course than to dam it up; to dam 
 up a river, and not have it overflow or 
 break the dam, this I have not found. The 
 course of the spirit of man is growth; it 
 goeth onward like a running river. When 
 thou shuttest up the mouth, saying: Thus 
 far and no farther! I fear for thee. I tried 
 this matter once; I was flooded; the dam 
 was broken. I see thee shutting out knowl- 
 edge from mortals and angels; but I tell 
 thee, O Te-in, the time will come when 
 the channel will be too broad for thee. 
 
 Te-in said: How shall I answer such 
 great wisdom? Where find a God like 
 unto thee. O Ahura? And yet, behold, the 
 Lord God, Anuhasaj, toiled with thee hun- 
 dreds of years, and learned all these things; 
 yea, he traveled in the far-off heavens, 
 where there are Gods and kingdoms which 
 have been for millions of years. And he 
 came back and renounced the Great Per- 
 son, Jehovih. He said: All things are not 
 a harmonious whole; but a jumble; a dis- 
 ordered mass, playing catch as catch can. 
 
358 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-AEMIJ 
 
 Ahura said: And what hath befallen 
 liim? And is here not a great argument? 
 For we behold in all times, conditions and 
 places, in heaven and on earth, wherever 
 people assume doctrines like unto his, they 
 tbegin to go down into hell. They flourish 
 a little while, but only as a summer plant, 
 to yield in the winter's blast. This I have 
 seen for a long time coming against these 
 heavens, even thine, that, as darkness 
 crushed De'yiis, S o will thy heavenly do- 
 minions soon or late fall, and in the shock 
 and fray thou wilt suffer a fate like unto 
 De'yus. 
 
 Te-in said: For thy wise words, O 
 Ahura, I am thy servant. I will consider 
 thy argument, and remember thee with 
 love. In a thousand years from now I 
 may be. wiser; and I may have my kingdom 
 so built up that it will be an argument 
 stronger than words. 
 
 Hereupon the two Gods brought their 
 argument to a close, and Te-in signalled 
 his vice-Gods and marshals, and they 
 ■came; and when Ahura and Te-in had sa- 
 luted each other, Ahura was conducted 
 away from the place of the throne, and af- 
 ter that beyond the capital. The vice-Gods 
 and marshals delivered bim to his own at- 
 tendants, and with them he embarked in 
 his otevan, and set sail for Sudga's hea- 
 venly kingdom, over the land of Vind'yu. 
 
 CHAPTER LV. 
 
 Sudga, after assuming a heaven unto 
 himself, moved it over the Nua Mountains 
 and called it Hridat, in which place he had 
 eight thousand million angel slaves, after 
 the same manner as Te-in's. Sudga's cap- 
 ital city, Sowachissa, his highest heavenly 
 seat, was modeled after the fashion of 
 Sanc-tu, De'yus' heavenly place in Hored, 
 at the time of its greatest magnificence. 
 
 The capital house of Sudga was made 
 of precious stones and gems, the work of 
 thousands of millions of angels for many 
 years. And when Hored was pillaged, 
 prior to De'yus being cast into hell, mill- 
 ions of its most precious ornaments were 
 stolen and brought to Hridat. The streets 
 of Hridat were paved with precious stones; 
 and an arena surrounded the palace on 
 every side, set with crystals of every shade 
 and color, and of every conceivable man- 
 
 ner of workmanship. On the borders of 
 the arena stood five hundred million senti- 
 nels, arrayed in splendor such as only 
 Gods had looked upon. Inside the line 
 of sentinels were one million pillars of 
 fire, kept brilliant day and night, by the 
 toil of five hundred million slaves. Inside 
 the line of the pillars of fire were one mill- 
 ion marshals, so arrayed in splendor one 
 could scarce look upon them. These were 
 watch and watch, with two other groups 
 of one million each, and they stood watch 
 eight hours each. 
 
 None but the vice-Gods and the high 
 marshals could cross the arena to the pal- 
 ace, walking, but must crawl on their bel- 
 lies, and for every length crawled, they 
 must kiss the pavement and recite an an- 
 them of praise to Sudga, who now took 
 both names, Sudga and Dyaus. Neither 
 must any one repeat the same anthem 
 twice, but it must be a new anthem for 
 each and every length of the person. For 
 a tall person, a thousand lengths were re- 
 quired, from the line of marshals to the 
 palace, a thousand anthems. So that only 
 the few, as compared to his millions, ever 
 laid eyes on the throne of Sudga. And 
 after they so beheld him on the throne, 
 for they were only permitted to gaze upon 
 him but once, and that at a great distance, 
 and amidst such a sea of fire they scarce 
 could see him, then they must re-crawl 
 back again to the place of beginning, again 
 reciting another thousand anthems. Which 
 made Sudga almost inaccessible, and per- 
 mitted only such as were favored to even 
 look upon him, which with the ignorant is 
 a great power. 
 
 When Ahura came to the capital and 
 sent word to Sudga who he was, praying 
 audience, Sudga gave orders to admit him, 
 commanding Ahura to walk upright into 
 his presence, along with the vice-Gods. 
 Accordingly, in this manner Ahura came 
 before Sudga, and saluted in Love and Es- 
 teem, answered by Sudga in Friendship of 
 Old. The latter at once commanded pri- 
 vacy, and so all others withdrew, and Ahu- 
 ra and Sudga went up and sat on the 
 throne. 
 
 Sudga said: Because thou hast come to 
 see me I am overflowing with joy. Be- 
 cause I know thou hast come to admonish 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 359 
 
 me for my philosophy and the manner of 
 my dominions, I respect thee. Because 
 thou didst once try to found a kingdom of 
 thine own, and failed, I sympathize with 
 thee; but because thou went back on 
 thyself and accepted Jehovih, and so was 
 rescued from thy peril, I commiserate 
 thee. 
 
 Ahura said: To hear thy gifted tongue 
 once more is my great joy. To know that 
 no misfortune was in store for thee and 
 thy kingdom would give me great delight. 
 Because I love thee, and the people of thy 
 mighty, heavenly kingdom, I have come 
 to admonish thee and plead for Jehovih's 
 sake. As for myself, I have found that to 
 cast all my cares on Him, and then turn in 
 and work hard for others, these two things 
 give me the greatest happiness. 
 
 Sudga said: Can a brave man justly 
 cast his -cares upon another? Was not 
 thyself given to thyself for thyself? If so, 
 thou desirest none to work for thee? If 
 so, how hast thou a right to work for oth- 
 ers? If thou prevent them working out 
 their own destiny, wrongest not thou 
 them? Moreover, thou sayest: To cast 
 thy cares on Jehovih, and to work hard 
 for others, these two give thee the great- 
 est happiness. Therefore, art thou not 
 selfish to work for thine own happiness? 
 For is not this what I am doing for myself 
 in my own way? 
 
 Ahura said: Grant all thy arguments, 
 O Sudga, where shall we find the meas- 
 ure of righteous works but in the sum of 
 great results? For you or me to be hap- 
 py, that is little; for a millions angels to 
 be happy, that is little. But when we put 
 two kingdoms alongside, and they be the 
 same size, and have the same number of 
 inhabitants, is it not just that we weigh 
 them in their whole measure to find which 
 of the two kingdoms hath the greater 
 number of happy souls? Would not this 
 be a better method of arriving at the high- 
 est philosophy? 
 
 Sudga said: Yea, that would be higher 
 than logic, higher than reason. That 
 would be the foundation of a sound the- 
 ory. 
 
 Ahura said: And have we not found, 
 both in heaven and earth, that all king- 
 doms that are overthrown have the cause 
 of their fall in the unhappiness and disaf- 
 
 fection of the ignorant. As soon as the 
 masses begin to be in unrest, the rulers 
 apply vigorous measures to repress them, 
 but it is only adding fuel to the fire; it 
 deadens it for a while, but only to have it 
 burst forth more violently afterward. 
 
 Sudga said: Thou reasonest well, O 
 Ahura; go on. 
 
 Ahura said: How, then, shall we de- 
 termine the happiness of two kingdoms, 
 in order to determine which hath the 
 greater happiness? Are not revolts evi- 
 dence of unhappiness? Hear me, then, O 
 Sudga; where, in all the Jehovihian heav- 
 ens, hath there ever been a revolt? And on 
 Earth, where have the Jehovians, the 
 Faithists, rebelled against their rulers? 
 Behold, in the far-off etherean heavens, the 
 Nirvanian fields, hath never been any God 
 or Chief environed in tortures. As for 
 my own kingdom, my people will not re- 
 bel against me, nor need I fortify myself 
 against disaster. 
 
 Sudga said: Thou art wise, O Ahura. 
 The only way to judge a kingdom's hap- 
 piness is by the peace and contentment 
 and civility of its people toward one an- 
 other, and by the confidence betwixt the 
 ruler and the ruled. He who hath to 
 guard himself liveth on the eve of the de- 
 struction of his kingdom and himself. And 
 yet, O Ahura, remember this: The Jeho- 
 vihians of heaven and Earth are high raised 
 ere they become such; any one can be a 
 ruler for them, for they know righteous- 
 ness. But I have to deal with Druks and 
 drujas. How, then, canst thou compare 
 my kingdom with the Nirvanian king- 
 doms? 
 
 Ahura said: Alas, O Sudga, I fear my 
 arguments are void before thee. Thou 
 showest me that the line betwixe selfish- 
 ness and unselfishness is finer than a spi- 
 der's web. Even Gods cannot distinguish 
 it. And yet, behold, there was a time 
 when I said: I will be a mighty God, and 
 bow not to the Unknown that brought me 
 into being. For this I labored long and 
 hard; the responsibility of my kingdom 
 finally encroached upon my happiness. 
 Long after that I put away all responsibil- 
 ity, and made myself a servant to Jehovih. 
 Then a new happiness came upon me, even 
 when I had nothing that was mine in heav- 
 
360 
 
 CYCLE OF CPEJSTA-ARM1J 
 
 en and Earth. It is within my members as 
 a new tree of delight. This it is that I would 
 tell thee of, but I cannot explain it. It baf- 
 fles words, even as a description of the 
 Great Spirit is void because of His won- 
 drous majesty. Such is the joy of His ser- 
 vice that even Gods and angels cannot de- 
 scribe it. With its growth we look famine 
 in the face and weep not; we see falling 
 ji'ay and fear not; with the ebb and flow of 
 the tide of Jehovih's works we float as one 
 with Him, with a comprehensive joy. 
 
 Sudga said: To hear thy voice is joy 
 to me; to not hear thee is great sorrow. 
 Behold, I will consider thy words of wis- 
 dom. In thy far-off place I will come in 
 remembrance and love to thee. 
 
 Thus ended the interview, and Sudga 
 signalled his vice-Gods and high marshal 
 to come; whereat he saluted Ahura in the 
 sign of Craft, and Ahura answered him in 
 the sign, Passage of Time. 
 
 And then Ahura, betwixt the vice-Gods, 
 led by the high marshal, departed, passed 
 beyond the arena, where the vice-Gods and 
 high marshal gave him into the charge of 
 the marshal hosts, who conducted him be- 
 yond the line of sentinels, where Ahura 
 joined his own attendants and went with 
 them into his otevan, and set sail for 
 Agho'aden, Osiris' heavenly place, which 
 had been over Par'si'e, but was now moved 
 over Arabin'ya. 
 
 CHAPTER LVI. 
 
 At this time Osiris' heavenly kingdom 
 numbered thirteen thousand million an- 
 gels, good and bad. And it was the largest 
 heavenly kingdom ever established on 
 Earth. It was built after the manner of 
 Sudga's; that is, modeled after Sanc-tu, in 
 Hored, but more magnificent than Sudga's 
 kingdom, and far larger. The arena-way 
 was five thousand lengths of a man across; 
 so that approaching visitors to the throne 
 must crawl two thousand lengths in order 
 to approach the throne. And they also 
 had to repeat an anthem of praise, or a 
 prayer, for every length crawled, going and 
 coming. And they were, like at Sud- 
 ga's, permitted to approach only to within 
 a long distance from Osiris; whilst the ar- 
 ray of lights around him were so dazzling 
 that scarcely any could look upon him. 
 
 And they that thus approached were so 
 reverential that their minds magnified 
 Osiris' glorious appearance so much, they 
 verily believed they had looked into the 
 Creator's face, and saw, of a truth, man 
 was of his image and likeness. And thou- 
 sands, and even millions, that thus crawled 
 to look upon him, afterward went about 
 in heaven preaching Osiris as the verita- 
 ble All highest creator of heaven and 
 Earth. 
 
 Osiris made his Godhead to consist of 
 three persons: first, himself, as The Foun- 
 tain of the Universe, whose name was Un- 
 speakable; second, Baal, His Only Begot- 
 ten Son, into whose keeping he had assign- 
 ed Earth and all mortals thereon; and, 
 third, Ashtaroth, His Virgin Daughter, 
 into whose keeping he had assigned life 
 and death, or rather the power of beget- 
 ting and the power to cause death with 
 mortals. 
 
 Osiris was the most cunning of all the 
 self-Gods; for thus he appropriated the tri- 
 angle of the Faithists; thus appropriated 
 the names and powers of the Lord God, 
 the false (now in hell), for only through 
 Baal and Ashtaroth could any mortal or 
 spirit ever attain to approach the arena of 
 the throne in Agho'aden. And here again 
 they had to pass the high sentinel, Egupt, 
 before they were entitled to the right to 
 crawl on their bellies over the sacred pave- 
 ment, the way to the heavenly place. 
 
 Only the vice-Gods of Osiris and his 
 chief marshal could walk upright to the 
 capital palace, and they with heads bowed 
 low. And when Osiris was informed of 
 Ahura's coming he sent word that he 
 should come upright, with head erect, but 
 veiled from head to foot. To this Ahura 
 gladly consented; and, being thus veiled 
 by Egupt and handed over to the vice- 
 Gods and the chief marshal, he walked up- 
 right till he came to the high arch of the 
 palace; here they halted, and Ahura sa- 
 luted on the sign, Old Time Love, and 
 Osiris answered in the sign, Joy in Hea- 
 ven. Whereupon Ahura left the vice-Gods 
 and walked near the throne, and Osiris 
 came down, and they embraced in each 
 other's arms, not having seen each other 
 for more than a thousand years. Osiris 
 signalled the vice-Gods and chief marshal 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 361 
 
 to fall back, and they did so, and they as- 
 cended the throne and sat thereon, pri- 
 vately. 
 
 Osiris said: This is a great joy! To 
 meet one's loves, is not this greater, after 
 all, than all the pomp and glory of the 
 Gods? 
 
 Ahura said: True; but who is wise 
 enough to live to enjoy so cheap a glory? 
 We run afar off; we build up mighty king- 
 doms, and our places are replete with 
 great magnificence; in search after what? 
 Whilst that which doth cost nothing, love, 
 the greatest good of all in heaven and 
 Earth, we leave out in the cold. More de- 
 light have I to again look upon thy buoy- 
 ant face, and hear the music of thy voice, 
 than I ever had in my heavenly kingdom 
 of seven thousand million angels. 
 
 Osiris said: Is it not so with all Gods, 
 and with mortal kings and queens? They 
 boast of the extent and power of their 
 countless millions; and yet they have not 
 more to love them than would match in 
 numbers their fingers' ends, whom they can 
 take into their arms in the fullness of reci- 
 procity. What, then, are pomp and glory? 
 Are not kings and queens of Earth but 
 watch-dogs, to guard the flesh and bones 
 of other mortals? And are not the Gods 
 equally base in their trade of ruling over 
 foul-smelling drujas? 
 
 Ahura said: It is so. But whence is 
 this great desire to rule over others; to 
 lead them; to be applauded; and to revel 
 in the toil of the millions? Would it not 
 be wise for the Gods who understand this, 
 to resign their mighty kingdoms and go 
 along with their loves to feast in the great 
 expanse of the universe? 
 
 Osiris said: True, O Ahura. But who 
 hath power to do this? Certainly not the 
 Gods. And is it not so with mortals? 
 For thousands of years, have they not been 
 told: Except ye give up your earthly king- 
 doms, and give up your riches, ye cannot 
 rise in heaven. But, behold, the rich man 
 cannot give up his riches; the king can- 
 not give up his kingdom. They are weak 
 indeed! As well expect an unhatched bird 
 to fly. Yet such souls become but slaves in 
 our dominions. This do I perceive also, 
 of mine own kingdom, I cannot give it 
 up; because, forsooth, I cannot get the de- 
 sire to give it up, although my judgment 
 
 saith it would be the highest, best thing for 
 me. 
 
 Ahura said: Are not great possessions- 
 like unto dissipation? I have seen mortals 
 who admit the highest, best thing to do is 
 to live the highest, best one knoweth, and 
 straightway go off and pollute the body by 
 eating flesh and drinking wine. They also 
 know the right way, but to attain to the 
 desire to put in practice what one knoweth 
 to be the highest, they have not reached. 
 
 Osiris said: Yea, all this is dissipation. 
 And if a man give away what he hath, is 
 not that also dissipation? Can it be true,. 
 O Ahura, that even as we manipulate mor- 
 tals, to drive them to war or to make them 
 play peace, to make them destroy their 
 kingdoms and build up others by our an- 
 gel amies, which they know not of, that 
 we ourselves are ruled over by the Gods in 
 the etherean heavens? 
 
 Ahura said: It seemeth to me thus, 
 Osiris: That the etherean Gods above us 
 rule us, but not in the same way, but by 
 their absence from us when we do unjust- 
 ly, and by their presence when we do 
 righteously. We rule over mortals by di- 
 rect action upon them, shaping their des- 
 tinies by our heavenly wills, and they are 
 often cognizant of our angel servants be- 
 ing with them. But when we cannot ap- 
 propriate a mortal to do our wills, we 
 withdraw our angels and suffer him to fall 
 into the hands of drujas. Not that the 
 Gods above us, O Osiris, send evils upon 
 us; but that we foster evils within our own 
 kingdoms which take root, like thorns 
 and nettles in a neglected field, and they 
 grow and environ us. Even this I have 
 seen in thy heavens in the far future. It 
 will come upon thee, O Osiris, and with 
 all thy wisdom and strength thou wilt 
 meet the same fate as De'yiis, and be cast 
 into hell. 
 
 Osiris said: Were I to judge by all the 
 self-Gods who have been before me, I 
 should assent unto thy wise judgment. 
 But hear thou me, O Ahura, for mine is 
 not like any other heavenly kingdom, nor 
 formed for mine own glory only. This, 
 then, is that that I will accomplish: 
 
 I will cast out sin from amongst mor- 
 tals, and all manner of wickedness; and I 
 will give them a heavenly kingdom on 
 
.362 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 Earth. They shall war no more, nor deal 
 unjustly with one another; nor have suf- 
 fering, nor immature deaths, nor famines, 
 :nor sickness, but peace, love, righteous- 
 mess, good works and nobleness. For I 
 will go down to them in person in time to 
 •come; and I will take with me angels high 
 raised, and appoint them unto mortals, 
 :and give them corporeal bodies for their 
 pleasure, and they shall be the teachers of 
 man on Earth. And man shall put away 
 all selfishness, deceit, lust, and lying; and 
 the races of man shall be taught how to 
 .beget offspring in purity and wisdom. 
 And in that day I will take back the dru- 
 jas of heaven and engraft them on mortals 
 and re-raise them up with understanding. 
 Wherefore, O Ahura, though I fortify 
 myself in all this, am I not laboring in the 
 right way? 
 
 Ahura said: It seemeth to me a dan- 
 gerous proceeding. I would compare thy 
 plan to that of a teacher who took his pu- 
 pil into a place of vice to teach him virtue. 
 
 Osiris said: It hath been so said; but 
 I will cast the higher love down into the 
 "lower. 
 
 Ahura said: Why, so thou canst; but, 
 alas, it will remain down, and forever grov- 
 el on the earth. I have seen a sweet maid- 
 en wed to a vicious husband, and she lifted 
 him not up, but he pulled her down. Will 
 it not be so with the higher love, when 
 'thou weddest it to the earth? Behold 
 the manner of the oracles! We appoint 
 high-raised angels to answer the questions 
 of mortals, to lead them up to virtue and 
 wisdom; but, alas, mortals come not to the 
 oracles to learn these things, but to learn 
 wickedness, and war, and earthly gain. 
 Will it not be so with thy kingdom found- 
 ed on Earth? Instead of helping mortals 
 up, mortals will pull down the angels to 
 answer them in their most sinful desires 
 and curiosity. 
 
 Osiris said: Thou hast great reason on 
 thy side, and facts withal to sustain thee. 
 Yet forget not, O Ahura, I shall have a 
 temple built of stone on earth, and a 
 chamber where I can come and command 
 the kingdom through the mortal king. 
 
 Ahura said: Behold, my mission is 
 fruitless. I have now visited my three 
 loves, Te-in, and Sudga, and thee. And I 
 cannot turn one. In this I have great sor- 
 
 row; for I fear the time may come when 
 great darkness will be upon you all. 
 
 Osiris said: I will consider .thy wise 
 words, O Ahura. And though thou now 
 goest from me, my love will follow thee. 
 
 Hereupon Osiris signalled the chief 
 marshal and the vice-Gods, and they came. 
 Then Osiris and Ahura embraced each 
 other and departed, both saluting in the 
 sign, Love Forever. Ahura retired even 
 as he came, but backward, the vice-Gods 
 on either side and the marshall leading the 
 way. After they crossed the arena Ahura 
 was delivered to Egupt, and the chief mar- 
 shal, and the vice-Gods returned to Osiris. 
 
 Egupt passed Ahura on to his own at- 
 tendants, who conducted him to his fire- 
 ship, wherein they embarked and set sail 
 for his own heavenly place, Vara-pishana- 
 ha. 
 
 CHAPTER LVII. 
 
 Jehovih permitted the self-Gods to 
 prosper for more than four hundred years; 
 and Te-in, Sudga, and Osiris became the 
 mightiest Gods that ever ruled on the 
 earth. 
 
 Te-in had two vice-Gods, Noe Jon 
 and Wang-tse-Yot. Next, chief high mar- 
 shal, Kolotzka, and under him thirty thou- 
 sand marshals. Chief general, Ha-e Giang, 
 and under him one hundred thousand gen- 
 erals and high captains. Of these, twenty 
 thousand were allotted to the dominion of 
 mortals in Jafreth; the others served in 
 heaven, mostly about the throne of Te-in. 
 Chiefly distinguished on Earth were Te- 
 in's fourteen chief generals: Kacan-cat, 
 Yam-yam, Tochin-woh, Ho-jon-yo, Wah- 
 ka, Oke-ya-nos, Haing-le, Lutz-rom, Le- 
 Wiang, Thu-wowtch, Eurga-roth, I-sa-ah, 
 To Gow and Ah Shung. These generals 
 were divided into two parts, seven each; 
 and they were allotted equally, of the 
 twenty thousand rank generals deputed to 
 Earth; and these again were allotted each 
 thirty thousand angel warriors. 
 
 Te-in had said to these fourteen chief 
 generals: When ye come to the earth, 
 and, finding two cities near together, both 
 of which worship other Gods than me, ye 
 shall divide yourselves into two parts; and 
 one army shall go to one mortal city and 
 the other to the other, and by inspiration 
 and otherwise ye shall bring the cities to 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 363 
 
 -war against each other, until both are 
 broken down, or destroyed. After which 
 ye shall inspire another city, that wor- 
 shipped me, to come and possess both of 
 those that are destroyed. Better is it to 
 make our enemies kill each other than to 
 kill them ourselves. 
 
 And such was the mode of warfare by 
 Te-in that all the land of Jaffeth was sub- 
 dued unto himself in less than a hundred 
 years, except a million Faithists, scat- 
 tered here and there; and the Listians 
 who were in the mountains and 
 wildernesses. And great and costly tem- 
 ples were built in all the cities of Jaft'eth, 
 and dedicated to Te-in, Creator and Ruler 
 of Heaven and Earth. 
 
 Now, as to the worshippers of Joss and 
 Ho-Joss, they were not converted but sub- 
 dued, and they worshipped their God in 
 secret, and made rites and ceremonies 
 whereby they might know one another 
 and the better escape persecution. Many 
 of these were rites after the manner of 
 the ancient rite of Baugh-ghan-ghad. 
 
 Of the great cities destroyed in these 
 wars were: Hong We, Chow Go and 
 Sheing-tdo. For Hong We the wars last- 
 ed twenty years; and there were slain 
 within the city five hundred thousand men, 
 women and children. The wars of Chow 
 Go lasted forty years, and within her walls 
 were slain three hundred thousand men, 
 women and children. For Sheing-tdo the 
 wars lasted twenty-five years, and there 
 were slain within her walls three hundred 
 thousand men, women and children. 
 
 In the destruction of Hong We there 
 were consigned to ashes four hundred 
 bouses of philosophy; two thousand four 
 hundred colleges, and twelve thousand 
 public schools. All of which had been 
 made glorious in the reign of Hong, the 
 king of the city. Because he worshipped 
 Ho-Joss, his great city was destroyed. 
 
 In Chow Go there were destroyed six 
 hundred houses of philosophy and two 
 hundred colleges of Great Learning. Here 
 was the Temple of Jonk, which was dedi- 
 cated to the worship of Joss, and which, in 
 building, required twenty thousand men 
 twelve years. It had two thousand pillars 
 of Awana stone, polished; and at the blood 
 altar it had twelve thousand skulls, of 
 which the great king Bak Ho was slaugh- 
 
 terer in the name of Ho-Joss. The throne 
 of worship for the king was set with dia- 
 monds and pearls; and it had a thousand 
 candlesticks of gold and silver. And the 
 fine silk drapery and fine wool drapery 
 within the temple were sufficient, if spread 
 out, for five hundred thousand men to lie 
 down upon. And the drapery was painted 
 and embroidered with pictures of battles 
 and wars; and of scenes in heaven. For the 
 ornamentation of which drapery twenty 
 thousand men and women had labored for 
 forty years. All of which were destroyed, 
 together with all the great city and all its 
 riches and magnificence. 
 
 Sheing-tdo was a city of fashion and 
 splendor, inhabited by the richest men in 
 the world. She had a temple called Cha- 
 oke-king, dedicated to learning, but in 
 fact appropriated to the display of wealth 
 and pageantry. It was round, with a high 
 projecting roof, the eaves of which rested 
 on ten thousand pillars of polished stone. 
 There were four hundred doorways to en- 
 ter the temple; but, within each doorway, 
 one came against the square columns of 
 precious stones that supported the roof 
 inside; and to either side of the columns 
 were passageways that led into the four 
 hundred chambers within. In the center 
 of the temple, artificial stalactites, twenty 
 thousand, hung from the roof; these were 
 made of silk and wool and fine linen and 
 painted, and of colors so bright that mor- 
 tal eye could scarce look upon them, and 
 they were as ice with the sun shining 
 thereon, forming rainbows in every direc- 
 tion. Here came kings and queens and 
 governors of great learning; for here 
 were deposited copies of the greatest 
 books in all the world. 
 
 Besides the temple of Cha-oke-king, 
 there were seven great temples built to 
 Joss, either of which was large enough for 
 ten thousand men to do sacrifice in at one 
 time. For five and twenty years the peo- 
 ple of Sheing-tdo fought to save their 
 great city from destruction, but it fell, 
 was destroyed by king Bingh, and all the 
 temples with it. 
 
 Next to these were the following great 
 cities that were destroyed: Gwoo-gee, 
 which had one hundred houses of philoso- 
 pry and forty colleges for great learning; 
 
364 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARM1J 
 
 one temple, with eight hundred polished 
 pillars and two thousand arches; thirty 
 temples of wheat and corn sacrifice; one 
 storehouse, where wes stored food for one 
 hundred thousand people in case of fam- 
 ine, sufficient for eight years; and all these, 
 and the libraries of the records of the Gods 
 and Lords of earth, and all such things 
 within the city were burnt to ashes. 
 
 The city of Young-ooh, of two hun- 
 dred thousand inhabitants, which had sev- 
 enty houses of philosophy, and thirty-five 
 colleges of great learning, besides many 
 schools; one . Temple of the Stars, where 
 lectures were given daily to the people to 
 teach them the names and places of the 
 stars and their wondrous size and motion; 
 forty temples of sacrifice, seven of which 
 were large enough to hold all the inhabit- 
 ants of Young-ooh, the great city. By 
 king Shaing it was laid in ashes, and no- 
 thing but heaps of stone remained to tell 
 where the city had been. 
 
 The city, Gwan-she, which had thirty 
 houses of philosophy, and seventy temples 
 of sacrifice, two Temples of the Stars ded- 
 icated to Joss; eighty-five colleges of Great 
 Learning, and also a feed-house, stored 
 sufficiently to feed the city seven years; 
 and there were two hundred thousand in- 
 habitants within the city walls. Twelve 
 years the people of this city fought against 
 the incited plunderers, the warriors under 
 the God Te-in, but were conquered at last, 
 and their city laid low. 
 
 And the great cities, Ghi, and Owan, 
 and Chong, and Goon, and Ca-On and 
 Jong-wong, and Sow, and Wowtch-gan, 
 and Sem-Sin, and Gee, and Tiang, and 
 Choe, and Doth, and Ah-mai, and Cone 
 Shu, and Guh, and Haingtsgay, and Ghi- 
 oo-yeng, and Boy-gonk, all of which had 
 houses of philosophy and colleges of great 
 learning, and public schools, and temples 
 of sacrifice, ana feed-houses, and hundreds 
 of thousands of inhabitants. And all these 
 cities were destroyed, and only heaps of 
 stones left to show where they had been. 
 
 Besides these, there were more than 
 two thousand cities of less prominence 
 destroyed. And yet, of villages and small 
 cities, so great were they number destroy- 
 ed, that no man ever counted them. 
 
 City against city; king against king; 
 man against man; for the inhabitants of 
 Jaffeth were obsessed to madness and war 
 and destruction; almost without cause 
 would they fall upon one another to de- 
 stroy; for so had Te-in sent his hundreds 
 of millions of warring angels to inspire 
 mortals to destroy all knowledge, and in- 
 struction, and learning, and philosophy,, 
 and to destroy all trace of all other Gods, 
 and Lords, that he alone might reign su- 
 preme. And these angels taught mortals- 
 how to make explosive powder, and guns 
 to shoot with, more deadly than the bow 
 and arrow; and taught the secret of under- 
 mining a city and blowing it up. 
 
 So the fair land of Jaffeth, with its wis- 
 dom and great learning, became as a dis- 
 tracted and broken-up country. In all di- 
 rections the bones of mortals were scatter- 
 ed over the lands; nor could the land be 
 tilled without digging amongst the skulls. 
 and bones of the great giant race of I'hu- 
 ans that once had peopled it. And of 
 those who were not destroyed, one might 
 say: They were a poor, half-starved, sick- 
 ly breed, discouraged and helpless, badly 
 whipped. 
 
 And the spirits of the dead were on all 
 the battlefields, lighting up the dark nights 
 by their spirit fires, and in the morning 
 and the twilight of the evening they could 
 be seen by hundreds and thousands, walk- 
 ing about, shy and wild! But an abun- 
 dance of familiar spirits dwelt with mor- 
 tals; took on sar'gis forms, and ate and 
 drank with them, and even did things of 
 which it is unlawful to mention. 
 
 Thus was Jaffeth won to the God Te-in. 
 
 CHAPTER LVIII. 
 
 Two vice-Gods had Sudga, Brihat and 
 Visvasrij. Next to these, Sudga's heaven- 
 ly chief marshal, Atma, who had four thou- 
 sand marshals under him, and equally di- 
 vided amongst them to command, one 
 thousand million heavenly warring angels. 
 Atma had authority over thirty thousand 
 generals and captains, to whom were al- 
 lotted two thousand million angels. Chief 
 of the heavenly generals were: Shahara, 
 Vasyam, Suchchi, Dev, Nasakij, Tvara, 
 Watka, Shan, Dorh, Hudhup, Nikish, Ha- 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 365 
 
 jara, Hwassggarom, Viji, Yatamas, Brah- 
 ma, Goska, Fulowski, M'Duhitri, Yaya- 
 mich-ma, Hijavar, Duth, Lob-yam, Hi- 
 gup and Vowiska. And these falsely as- 
 sumed the names of the ancient Gods and 
 .Lords of thousands of years before. 
 
 Sudga had said to them: That my 
 name may be magnified before the new- 
 born in heaven, ye shall also magnify your 
 own names by taking the names of Gods 
 and Lords who are revered in heaven and 
 Earth, for all things are free unto you. 
 But unto none others do I give privilege 
 to choose the names of the ancients. 
 
 Sudga then made the following his Pri- 
 vate Council: Plow-ya, Vazista, Kiro, 
 Cpenista, Visper, E-shong, Bog-wi, Low- 
 tha, Brihat, Gai-ya, Sa-mern, Nais-wiche, 
 Yube, Sol, Don, Mung-jo Urvash, Cpenta- 
 mainyus and Vanaiti; and to each of them 
 ten thousand attendants. 
 
 Then Sudga made two great captains, 
 Varsa arid Baktu, and he said unto them: 
 Two thousand million angels have I al- 
 lotted to go down to the earth, to the land 
 of Vind'yu, to subdue mortals and have 
 dominion over them permanently, and I di- 
 vide the two thousand million betwixt ye 
 twain. But all other angels shall remain in 
 my heavenly kingdom and work for me, 
 and embellish it, and beautify my heaven- 
 ly cities, especially my holy capital. 
 
 Now, when ye twain are permanent on 
 Earth, and secured in the temples and ora- 
 cles, ye shall survey all the lands of Vind'- 
 yu, and the cities, large and small, and all 
 the people therein. And, behold, all men 
 shall be subdued unto my two names, 
 Sudga and Dyaus; and when a city stand- 
 eth, wherein the people worship any other 
 Gods or Lords, that city shall ye destroy, 
 and all the people therein. City against 
 city shall it be, man against man; for as I 
 am the highest God of heaven, so will I be 
 the God of Earth, and its Lord. And ye 
 twain, in finding two cities to be destroyed, 
 shall divide, one going with his angel war- 
 riors to one city, and the other to the oth- 
 er city; and ye shall inspire them against 
 each other unto death; and when they are 
 laid low, ye shall bring into the place, to 
 inhabit it, my worshippers. 
 
 Thus descended to the earth the two de- 
 stroying captain Gods, Varsa and Baktu, 
 with their two thousand million angel war- 
 
 riors. And they spread out over the 
 land of Vind'yu, where were many king- 
 doms and thousands of cities; and they 
 came to mortals asleep or awake, and in- 
 spired them to havoc and destruction, for 
 Sudga's sake. And there were laid in ru- 
 ins, in twelve years, four thousand cities. 
 And chief of these were Yadom, Watcha- 
 da, Cvalaka, Hoce-te, Hlumivi, Ctdar and 
 Yigam, each of which contained more than 
 one million souls, and some of them two 
 million. 
 
 In all of these there were places of 
 great learning, and schools and temples of 
 sacrifice. In Ctdar the roof of the temple 
 was made of silver and copper and gold; 
 and it had one thousand columns of pol- 
 ished stone, and five hundred pillars to 
 support the roof. The walls were covered 
 with tapestry, painted with written words 
 and histories of heaven and Earth, and of 
 the Gods and Lords and Saviors of the 
 ancients. Within the temple were seven 
 altars of sacrifice, and four thousand ba- 
 sins of holy water for baptismal rites. 
 Within the walls of the temple were niches 
 for five hundred priests, for the confession 
 of sins, and for receiving the money and 
 cloth and fruits of the earth, contributed 
 by the penitent for the remission of their 
 sins. Through the central passage within 
 the temple drove the king in his golden 
 chariot, when he came for sacrifice; and 
 the floor of this passage was laid with sil- 
 ver and gold. 
 
 In the center of the temple floor was a 
 basin filled with water, and the size of the 
 basin was equal to twenty lengths of a man. 
 In the middle of the basin was a fountain 
 throwing up water. And on the east and 
 west and north and south sides of the ba- 
 sin were four pillars of polished stone, 
 with stairs within them; and the tops of 
 these pillars were connected by beams of 
 inlaid wood of many colors, polished fine- 
 ly, which were called the Holy Arch of 
 Sudga. On the summit of the arch 
 was a small house called the Voice of the 
 Oracle, for here sat the king's interpreter 
 of heaven and Earth, the reader of visions. 
 And the spirits of the dead appeared in the 
 spray of the fountain, sometimes as stars 
 of light and sometimes in their own forms 
 and features, and were witnessed by the 
 multitude. 
 
366 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 Within each of the five hundred pillars 
 was a sacred chamber, for benefit of the 
 priests communing with angels. In the 
 east pillar was an opening from top to bot- 
 tom, a slatway so the multitude could see 
 through the pillar, which was hollow its 
 entire height. This was occupied by the 
 king's high priest or priestess, as the case 
 might be, and this person had attained to 
 adeptship, so that the angels could carry 
 him up and down within the pillar, even to 
 the top thereof, which was equal to fifty 
 lengths of a man. And the multitude thus 
 beheld him ascending and descending. 
 In the west pillar was the library of the 
 temple, which contained a history of its 
 important events for a period of eight 
 hundred years; of the priest and high 
 priests, and of the kings of the city. 
 
 Next to the Temple, which was called 
 Tryista, stood the House of Learning, 
 were congregated the wise men and wo- 
 men, skilled in philosophy, music, astron- 
 omy and mineralogy. The House was 
 made of polished stone and wood interlock- 
 ed, and in front with one hundred and for- 
 ty columns of polished stone and wood. 
 Within the house were the skins and bones 
 of thousands of creatures, ancient and 
 modern, which were classified and named; 
 and with these were books of philosophy 
 and history, all of which were free to the 
 public one day in seven. 
 
 Next to the House of Learning was the 
 Temple of Death, dedicated to all kinds of 
 battles, battles betwixt lions and men, ti- 
 gers and men, and betwixt lions and tigers, 
 and elephants, and betwixt man and man. 
 And so great was the Temple of Death that 
 its seats could accommodate three hun- 
 dred thousand men, women and children. 
 The temple was circular, and without a 
 roof over the arena. 
 
 But the greatest of all buildings in 
 Ctdar was the king's palace, commonly 
 called Temple of the Sun. This was also 
 made of polished stone, and on the four 
 sides had eight hundred columns of pol- 
 ished stone; and next to the columns were 
 fifty pillars, on every side connected by 
 arches twelve lengths high, whereon rested 
 a roof of wood and stone; and yet on this 
 was surmounted another row of four hun- 
 dred columns of polished wood, inlaid with 
 silver and gold, and these were connected 
 
 on the top by other arches ten lengths 
 high, and on these another roof, and on the 
 top of this a dome covered with gold and 
 silver and copper. From the arena to the 
 dome its height was twenty-eight lengths. 
 To enter the temple from the west was a. 
 chariot roadway, so that the king and his 
 visitors could drive up into the arena of 
 the palace in their chariots. But as for the 
 interior of the king's palace, a whole book 
 might be written in the description there- 
 of, and yet not tell half its richness and 
 beauty and magnificence. 
 
 Besides these great buildings there were 
 four hundred and fifty Temples of Dark- 
 ness, dedicated to the spirits of the dead. 
 These were without any opening save the 
 door; and when the communers were with- 
 in, and the door shut, they were without 
 light. In the midst of these temples, spirits 
 and mortals congregated, and the spirits 
 taught mortals the art of magic; of making 
 seeds grow into trees and flowers; of pro- 
 ducing serpents, trees and flowers; of 
 carrying things through the air; casting 
 sweet perfumes and casting foul smells; of 
 casting virus to one's enemy, and inoculat- 
 ing him with poison unto death; of finding, 
 things lost; of bringing money to the poor, 
 and flowers and food to the sick; of enter- 
 ing the dead sleep, and of becoming uncon- 
 scious to pain by force of the will. Nor 
 could any man or woman attain to be a 
 priest in the Temple of Tryista until he 
 mastered all the degrees in the Temples 
 of Darkness. 
 
 The angels of Sudga decided to destroy 
 this city; and, accordingly, they inspired a 
 war betwixt it and the city of Yadom, 
 which was second unto it in magnificence,, 
 and possessed of temples and palaces like 
 unto it also. Yea, but to describe one of 
 these great cities was to describe the other,, 
 as to mortal glory. For seven hundred 
 years had these cities enjoyed peace with 
 each other, half a day's journey apart, on 
 the great river, Euvisij, in the Valley of 
 Rajawichta. 
 
 And the captain God, Varsa, chose one 
 city, and the captain God, Baktu, chose the 
 other city; and each of them took from 
 their thousand million angel warriors a suf- 
 ficient number, and inspired the two great 
 cities unto everlasting destruction. Even 
 as mortals turn savage beasts into an arena, 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 367 
 
 to witness them tear and flay each other, 
 even so sat these captain Gods in their 
 heavenly chariots, witnessing the two great 
 cities in mortal combat. And when one 
 had too much advantage, the angel hosts 
 would turn the tide, or let them rest a 
 while; then urge them to it again, holding 
 the game in such even balance as would 
 insure the greatest possible havoc to both. 
 
 Eight years these battles lasted; and 
 hundreds of thousands of men, women and 
 children were slain; and when thus the 
 great cities were reduced, the Gods let 
 loose The Band of Death, whose angel of- 
 fice was to carry poison virus from the rot- 
 ten dead and inoculate the breath of the 
 living; and then in desperate madness 
 make mortals fire their cities, to keep them 
 from falling into other hands. And in 
 eight years these great cities, with their 
 mighty temples, were turned to ruin and 
 to dust; and of the people left, only the ig- 
 norant few, starving, helpless wanderers, 
 could tell the tale of what had been. 
 
 Sudga had said: All knowledge 
 amongst mortals is inimical to the Gods in 
 heaven; therefore I will destroy all knowl- 
 edge on Earth. And this was the same doc- 
 trine maintained by Te-in, God of Jaffeth. 
 
 In such manner proceeded the captain 
 Gods of Sudga over all the land of Vind'- 
 yu, laying low all kingdoms, and cities, 
 and places of sacrifice, and places of learn- 
 ing. And in one hundred years the mighty 
 people of Vind'yu were reduced to beg- 
 gary, and to scattered tribes of wanderers. 
 The great canals were destroyed, and the 
 upper and lower country became places of 
 famine and barrenness. And in the valleys 
 and on the mountains, in the abandoned 
 fields and in the wildernesses, lay the bones 
 and skulls of millions of the human dead. 
 And lions and tigers came and prowled 
 about in the ruined walls of the fallen tem- 
 ples and palaces. Nor were there left in 
 all the land a single library, or book, or 
 the art of making books, or anything to 
 show what the great history had been. 
 
 Thus perished the Vedic language, the 
 language of song and of poetry, and of 
 great oratory, except where the few Faith- 
 ists, who had escaped through all these 
 wars, had preserved it in a small degree, 
 
 and still in secret worshipped the Great. 
 Spirit. 
 
 CHAPTER LIX. 
 
 Osiris, the false, on setting up a hea- 
 venly kingdom of his own, and dominion, 
 over Arabin'ya, Par'si'e, and Heleste, said:: 
 Let Te-in and Sudga pursue their course 
 in destroying; mine shall be in the oppo- 
 site way. Three kinds of bad people I 
 have found in heaven and Earth: They that 
 are forever finding fault with, and pulling 
 down, what others have built up; they are 
 most crafty in argument to find the flaws 
 in others, the inconsistencies, errors and 
 shortness; but there is nothing in them to 
 build up anything in heaven or Earth 
 The next bad man is he who findeth fault,, 
 not only with all that hath ever been, but. 
 with all propositions designed for a new 
 state of affairs. He is as worthless as the 
 shaft of a spear without a head. The third 
 bad man I found is he who, seeing the 
 faults and errors of others, harpeth not 
 upon them, but plungeth into work with 
 something new and bold, involving him- 
 self and others in disaster. And these 
 three have the great multitude, the world, 
 to take care of! I alone am capable of de- 
 stroying and building up. 
 
 The non-resistance of the Faithists. 
 hath ever made them dependent on the 
 mercy of their neighbors, in heaven and 
 Earth. They must be destroyed, and their 
 doctrines also. In destroying their doc- 
 trines, I must give something in the place. 
 I have labored to put away Jehovih and es- 
 tablish the Lord God; now to put away the 
 latter and establish myself as myself would 
 take me hundreds of years. Better, then, 
 is it, that since De'yus is cast into hell, I 
 take the names, Lord God, and De'yus, 
 and Creator, and all such as are acceptable 
 in heaven and Earth. Neither will I rob 
 them of their rites and ceremonies, but so 
 add thereunto, that, by the superior glory, 
 they will accept mine. Nor will I abridge 
 mortals of their learning; but, on the con- 
 trary, be most exacting and high in aspira- 
 tion; for by this will I win the approval of 
 the wise and learned. Mortals love idols; 
 therefore L will give them idols. Male and 
 female will I give unto them. 
 
«368 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 Osiris then called Baal, Ashtaroth and 
 Egupt into his heavenly Council chamber, 
 and said unto them: Two idols shall ye 
 inspire mortals to build unto me; and one 
 shall be the figure of a male horse, with a 
 man's head and chest and arms, and he 
 shall point upward, signifying, heavenly 
 rest; and the other shall be the figure of a 
 mare, with the head and breasts and arms 
 •of a woman. And she shall hold a bow and 
 arrow before her, and behind her a sword 
 -and a rose, signifying, for righteousness' 
 sake. And the male idol shall be called 
 Osiris, and the female, Isis. 
 
 For wherein I assert myself creator of 
 all the living, I must show unto men that I 
 .am male and female. Which of a truth is 
 the fountain of all that is in heaven and 
 Earth, wherein Projection and Reception 
 are the sum of all philosophy. In which ye 
 shall teach that to go forth is Osiris, and to 
 rest in meekness is Isis; for which the an- 
 cients used the bull and the lamb. 
 
 For I was a globe, boundless as to size, 
 and swift as to motion. And I put forth a 
 -wing for flying, and a hand for labor, by 
 which are all things conquered and sub- 
 dued. And beneath the wing I set the 
 Lamb of Peace, as a sign of the flight ot 
 the defenceless; but under the hand I set 
 the head of a bull, as the sign of my do- 
 minion. 
 
 And I made heaven and earth with 
 wings flying forth, bearing the serpent and 
 the sun. Square with the world, and cir- 
 cumscribed, have I made all things, good 
 and powerful. And in man's hand I placed 
 the key to unlock the mysteries of the firm- 
 ament of heaven, and the power, wisdom, 
 riches, and glory of the earth. Into his 
 hand I place a club, to slay the lion, or to 
 subdue him. For I am like unto man, hav- 
 ing created him in mine own image, and 
 dominion over all the inhabitants I created 
 on Earth. 
 
 I am the light, and the life, and the 
 death. Out of myself made I all that live 
 or have lived. The sun in the firmament 
 I set up as a symbol of my power. The 
 stars, and the moon, and things that speak 
 not, and know not, are the works of my 
 hand.. Without me nothing is, nor was, 
 nor ever shall be. 
 
 Whoso goeth forth warring for the 
 right is for me, and I am with him. With 
 
 warriors I am a god of war; with the peace- 
 ful I am a lamb of peace. To do, is of me; 
 to not do, is not of me, but of death. An 
 eye for an eye, a tooth for a tooth, blood 
 for blood, mercy for mercy; but force unto 
 all things, with will to conquer, for in these 
 am I manifest unto men. For in the be- 
 ginning I created the world of mine own 
 force; and this is my testimony, justifying 
 force even with violence when the greater 
 good cometh to the greater number. Here- 
 on hangeth my law; in which any man 
 can understand that had the Faithists 
 fought for righteousness, they would have 
 long since mastered the world and subdued 
 it unto their God. What, then, is the strat- 
 agem of Gods, save by some means to re- 
 duce men and angels unto oneness in all 
 things? 
 
 When Osiris had thus addressed the 
 three Gods, he waited for them to speak. 
 Baal said: This is a foundation; we have 
 never had a foundation for men nor angels. 
 Ashtaroth said: This is a head and front 
 to lead the world. Egupt said: The wis- 
 dom of the Faithists was in having a di- 
 rect course. 
 
 Osiris said: Then will I revise the doc- 
 trines of earth and heaven. I will not say 
 this is for De'yus, nor the Lord, nor God, 
 nor Osiris, nor Apollo, nor any other God. 
 But I will give that which all save Jehovih- 
 ians can accept. For I will allot unto God 
 all things, not defining which God, or 
 what God, but God only; the rest will I 
 manage in Agho 'aden, my heavenly king- 
 dom. 
 
 Go ye, therefore, to mortals, and revise 
 the things of De'yus unto God; and if 
 mortals question of the oracles to know 
 who God is, say ye: He is Osiris, to the 
 Osirians; Apollo, to the Apollonians; Isis, 
 to the Isisians; he is the Creator, the mas- 
 tor, the all, out of whom were crated all 
 things; he who created man in his own im- 
 age; who dwelleth on a throne in heaven. 
 
 But if they question further, asking if 
 he is the ever present, answer them: Nay. 
 And if they say: Is he Jehovih, the Great 
 Spirit? answer them, Nay. For I will not 
 allow one Faithist to dwell alive on the 
 face of Earth. 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 369 
 
 CHAPTER LX. 
 
 In Haikwad, in Par'si'e, dwelt king Lu- 
 thag, a man of great wisdom and kingly 
 power. His capital city, Sowruts, lay on 
 the border of Fonecea, and had twelve trib- 
 utary cities, each city being ruled over by 
 a king. And great drouth came upon the 
 regions ruled by Luthag; and, being a king 
 of benevolence, he sent inspectors far and 
 near, to find a country of water and good 
 soil. But alas, they found not what was 
 desired. 
 
 Luthag consulted the oracles, and be- 
 hold, the angel, Egupt, came and answered 
 the king, saying: Send thou thy seer and 
 I will lead him. So the king sent for his 
 high seer, and told him the words of the 
 oracle. The seer said: Wherever thy God 
 touches thee, suffer me to touch also, and 
 perhaps I can hear thy God speak. 
 
 The seer touched the king in the place, 
 and at once Egupt spake to him, and he 
 heard. So the angel Egupt led the seer 
 into the land of Egupt, which at that time 
 was called South Arabin'ya. The seer 
 knew not the country, and he asked the 
 angel. The angel said: Behold, the land 
 of Egupt. Thus was named that land. 
 
 The seer found the land fertile and well 
 watered; and he returned to Par'si'e and in- 
 formed the king. Thereupon the king 
 commanded his people to migrate to 
 Egupt. And they so went, in the first 
 year fifty thousand, and in the second year 
 one hundred thousand; and for many years 
 afterward an equal number. 
 
 These things occurred in the seven hun- 
 dredth year of the reign of De'yus in Hor- 
 ed. And in the space of two hundred years 
 more, behold, the land of Egupt was peo- 
 pled over with millions of people; for the 
 drouth and famines in countries around 
 about drove them hither. 
 
 Luthag sent his son to govern the land 
 of Egupt, and he made it tributary to the 
 kingdom of Sowruts. The son's name was 
 Haxax; and when he was old and died, he 
 left the governorship of Egupt to his son, 
 Bakal, who broke the allegiance with Par'- 
 si'e and established all of Egupt as an in- 
 dependent kingdom. Bakal's son, Goth, 
 succeeded him; and Goth enriched his 
 kingdom with great cities and temples, and 
 places of learning, and founded games and 
 tournaments. Goth's daughter, Rabec, 
 
 succeeded him; and was the first queen of 
 Egupt. Rabec still further enriched the 
 great land with cities and places of learn- 
 ing. Thus stood the country at the time 
 De'yus was overthrown in his heavenly 
 kingdom. 
 
 And now for seventy years the Gods, 
 Osiris, Baal, and Ashtaroth, and Egupt, 
 had not much power with mortals. And 
 during this short period, the shepherd 
 kings migrated into Egupt in vast num- 
 bers; and, in sympathy with these, and of 
 kindred faith, were the followers of Abra- 
 ham, the Faithists, who also migrated rap- 
 idly into Egupt. Meantime the kingdom 
 had passed from Rabec to her oldest son, 
 Hwan; and to his oldest son, Naman; and 
 to his oldest son, Sev; and to his daughter, 
 Arma; and to her oldest son, Hotha; and 
 to his oldest son, Rowtsag. And here 
 stood the matter when Osiris resolved to 
 revise the records of mortals and angels as 
 regardeth the history of creation by God; 
 which he did according to his own decrees, 
 which were as hereinbefore stated. 
 
 So it came to pass that through the or- 
 acles, king Rowtsag bestowed upon the li- 
 braries of Egupt the history of the crea- 
 tion of heaven and Earth, with the origin 
 of sin, and the creation of man, the first of 
 whom was thence called Adam, in- 
 stead of A'su, adopting the Par'si'e'an word 
 instead of the Vedic. And these records 
 were the same from which Ezra, three 
 thousand years afterward, made selec- 
 tions, and erroneously attributed them 
 to be the doctrines of the Faithists, 
 who were called Iz'Zerlites. And the rec- 
 ords of the Faithists were not kept, nor 
 permitted in the state records, but kept 
 amongst the Faithists themselves, for they 
 were outlawed then, because they would not 
 adopt the Saviors and Gods of the state. 
 
 Rowtsag's son, Hi-ram, succeeded 
 him; and Thammas, his son, succeeded Hi- 
 ram. Thammas was a seer and prophet, 
 and could see the Gods and talk with them 
 understandingly. Thammas was succeeded 
 by his daughter, Hannah; and she was suc- 
 ceeded by Hojax, who was the builder of 
 the Temple of Osiris, commonly called the 
 Great Pyramid. In honor of the prophet 
 of De'yus, the first mortal servant of Osir- 
 is, whose name was Thoth, Hojax named 
 himself, Thothma, meaning, God-Thoth; 
 
370 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 for Osiris told Hojax: Thou art the very 
 Thoth re-incarnated; and behold, thou shalt 
 be God of Earth. 
 
 Thothma could hear the Gods and talk 
 with them understandingly. And to him, 
 Osiris, through his angel servant God, 
 Egupt, gave especial care from his youth 
 up. At the age of sixteen years, Thothma 
 passed the examination in the house of 
 philosophy, and in astronomy and miner- 
 alogy. At seventeen he passed The Build- 
 er's School and the Histories of the Thou- 
 sand Gods. At eighteen he was admitted 
 as an Adept in Life and Death, having 
 power to attain the dormant state; and to 
 see without his mortal eyes, and to hear 
 without his mortal ears. At nineteen, he as- 
 cended the throne, it being the time of the 
 death of his father and mother. For be- 
 cause Osiris desired to use Thothma, he 
 sent his destroying angels, and they inoc- 
 ulated the breath of Hannah and her hus- 
 band, and they died by poison in the lungs. 
 
 Osiris, through his servant God, Egupt, 
 thus spake to Thothma, saying: My son, 
 my son! Thothma said: I hear thee, O 
 God; what wouldst thou? Osiris said: 
 Provide thou a dark chamber and I will 
 come to thee. Thothma provided a dark 
 chamber, and then Osiris through his ser- 
 vant God, came to him, saying: 
 
 Thou hast great wisdom, but thou for- 
 gettest thy promise! Thothma said: In 
 what, O God? Osiris said: When thou 
 wert in heaven, thou saidst: Now will I 
 go down to Earth and re-incarnate myself, 
 and prove everlasting life in the flesh. 
 For many years Osiris had told this same 
 thing to Thothma until he believed faithful- 
 ly he had so been in heaven, and returned, 
 and re-incarnated himself for such purpose. 
 And he answered Osiris, saying: Like a 
 dream it so seemeth to me, even as thou 
 sayest. 
 
 Osiris asked Thothma what was the 
 greatest of all things. Thothma said: 
 There are but two things, corporeal and 
 spiritual. 
 
 Osiris said: True. What then is wis- 
 dom? Thothma said: To acquire great 
 corporeal knowledge in the first place; and 
 in the second, to acquire spiritual knowl- 
 edge. But tell me, thou God of wisdom, 
 how can a man attain the highest spiritual 
 knowledge? 
 
 Osiris said: To come and dwell in hea- 
 ven and see for one's self. Thothma said: 
 How long shall a man sojourn in heaven in 
 order to learn its wisdom? Osiris said: 
 One day; a hundred days; a thousand years, 
 a million years, according to the man. 
 Thothma said: If one could leave the 
 corporeal part for a hundred days and trav- 
 el in heaven for a hundred days, would it 
 profit him? Osiris said: To do that is to 
 master death. Behold, thou hast already 
 attained to power of the dormant state. To 
 control the course of the spirit; that is the 
 next lesson. 
 
 Thothma said: Behold, O God, I have 
 attained to the power of the dormant state, 
 even as the magicians who submit to be 
 buried for ninety days. Yea, and I go 
 hence in spirit, and see many things, but 
 my soul is like a breath of wind, and goeth 
 at random. 
 
 Osiris said: Provide thou me a tem- 
 ple, and I will come and teach thee. 
 Thothma said: How to keep the body so 
 long, that it be not damaged, that is the 
 question? The magicians who have been 
 buried long, and being dug up and resusci- 
 tated, find their bodies so damaged that 
 they die soon after. 
 
 Osiris said: Thou shalt build a Tem- 
 ple of Astronomy, and dedicate it unto 
 Osiris, Savior of men and angels, God of 
 heaven and Earth. And it shall be built 
 square with the world, east and west, and 
 north and south. And the observing line 
 shall be with the apex of the Hidan vor- 
 tex, which lieth in the median line of the 
 variation of the north star. In the form of 
 a pyramid shalt thou build it; measure for 
 measure, will I show thee every part. 
 
 And thou shalt provide such thickness 
 of walls that no sound, heat, nor cold, can 
 enter therein; and yet thou shalt provide 
 chambers therein, suitable for thyself and 
 for thy chiefs, and thy friends, who are 
 also adepts. For I have also provided 
 Earth unto heaven, and heaven unto Earth; 
 and my angels shall come and dwell for a 
 season on Earth; and my earth-born shall 
 go and dwell for a season in heaven; yea, 
 they shall come to me on my throne and 
 behold the glories I have prepared for 
 them. 
 
 Nor shall my temple be exclusive, but 
 open unto all who will pursue the philoso- 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 371 
 
 phies of earth and heaven. For which rea- 
 son thou shalt build it with the sun, moon 
 and stars; and it shall be a testimony unto 
 the nations of Earth that thou art the high- 
 est of all mortals, and first founder of ev- 
 erlasting life in the flesh. For as the an- 
 gels of heaven can return to Earth and 
 take upon themselves corporeal bodies for 
 a season, so shalt thou master thine own 
 flesh to keep it as thou wilt. For this is 
 the end and glory for which I created man 
 on Earth. 
 
 CHAPTER LXI. 
 
 Osiris then instructed king Thothma to 
 drive out of the land of Egupt all the 
 Faithists, especially the shepherd kings, 
 who could not be made slaves of. Thoth- 
 ma impressed an army of two hundred 
 thousand warriors, and drove off the shep- 
 herd kings, putting to death more than 
 three hundred thousand of them. And 
 from the Faithists he took all their posses- 
 sions, such as houses and lands, and suffer- 
 ed them not to hold any mortal thing in 
 possession; neither permitting them to till 
 the soil, save as servants, nor to engage 
 in any other labor save as servants. And 
 there went out of the land of Egupt, to es- 
 cape the tyranny of Thothma, three mill- 
 ion Faithists, including the shepherd kings, 
 the unlearned. And in regard to the Faith- 
 ists who remained in the land of Egupt, 
 Osiris, through king Thothma, made the 
 following laws, to-wit: 
 
 Thou shalt not possess any land, nor 
 house, nor ox, nor any beast of burden, 
 nor cow, nor calf, nor shall thy people 
 possess an altar of worship, nor temple, nor 
 place of sacred dance. But a servant and 
 a servant of servants shalt thou be all the 
 days of thy life. But in thy sleeping place 
 and in the sleeping place of thy family thou 
 shalt do worship in thine own way, nor 
 shall any man molest thee therein. 
 
 Thou shalt not profess openly thy doc- 
 trines under penalty of thy blood and thy 
 flesh; nor shalt thou teach more in the 
 schools or colleges; nor shall thy children 
 receive great learning. And of thy arts, 
 of measuring and working numbers, thou 
 shalt not keep them secret longer, or thy 
 blood be upon thee. And if thou sayest: 
 Behold, the Great Spirit; or Jehovih, the 
 Ever Present, thou shalt suffer death, and 
 
 thy wife and thy children with thee. And 
 if a man query, to try thee, asking: Who 
 created the world? thou shalt answer: Be- 
 hold, God! And if he further ask: Think- 
 est thou the Creator is Ever Present? thou 
 shalt say: Nay, but as a man that hath fin- 
 ished his labor, he sitteth on his throne in 
 heaven. And if he further ask thee: Where 
 is God? thou shalt answer: On the Moun- 
 tain Hored, in heaven. And if he still fur- 
 ther ask thee: Is the Ever Present a Per- 
 son? thou shalt say: Nay, the Ever Pres- 
 ent is void like the wind; there is but one 
 ruler in heaven and Earth, even Osiris, 
 who is Lord the God, Savior of Men. 
 
 Who doeth not these things shall 
 be put to death; whoso boweth not unto 
 Thothma, my earthly ruler, shall not live, 
 saith God. 
 
 These laws were entered in the libraries 
 of Egupt, and also proclaimed publicly by 
 the scribes and seers. And yet with these 
 restrictions upon them there remained in 
 the land of Egupt more than two million 
 Faithists. And it came to pass that Thoth- 
 ma began the building of the Temple of 
 Osiris, and he impressed two hundred thou- 
 sand men and women in the building there- 
 of, of which number more than one-half 
 were Faithists. And these laborers were 
 divided into groups of twelves and twenty- 
 fours and forty-eights and so on, and each 
 group had a captain; but for series of 
 groups of one thousand seven hundred 
 and twenty-eight men and women, there 
 were generals, and for every six generals 
 there was one marshal, and for every twelve 
 generals one chief, and these chiefs were of 
 the Privy Council of the king. 
 
 And the king allotted to every chief a 
 separate work; some to dig canals, some to 
 quarry stone, and some to hew the stones; 
 some to build boats, some to provide roll- 
 ers, and others timbers, and yet others, 
 capstans. 
 
 Two places the surveyors found stone 
 with which to build the temple, one was 
 above the banks of the great river, Egon r 
 at the foot of Mount Hazeka, and the other 
 was across the Plains of Neuf, in the Moun- 
 tains of Aokaba. From the headwaters of 
 Egon a canal was made to Aokaba, and 
 thence by locks descended to the Plains of 
 Neuf, and thence to Gakir, the place chosen 
 by the king for the temple to be built. 
 
372 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 And as for the logs used in building, 
 they were brought down the waters of 
 Egon, even from the forests of Gambotha 
 and Rugzak. These logs were tied togeth- 
 er and floated on the water to the place re- 
 quired, where, by means of capstans, they 
 were drawn out of the water ready for use. 
 
 As for the stones of the temple they 
 were hewn in the region of the quarries. 
 And when properly dressed, were placed 
 on slides by capstans, and then, by cap- 
 stans, let down the mountain sides, to the 
 water, whereon they were to float to the 
 place required for them. 
 
 The floats were made of boards sawed 
 by men skilled in the work, and were of 
 sufficient length and width to carry the 
 burden designed. And at the bottom of 
 the floats were rollers, gudgeoned at the 
 ends. Now when a stone was let down 
 from the place of its hewing on to the float, 
 it was ready to be carried to its destina- 
 tion. And when the float thus arrived near 
 Gakir, ropes, made of hemp and flax, were 
 fastened to the float, and, by means of cap- 
 stans on the land, the float was drawn up 
 an inclined plane out of the water, the roll- 
 ers of the float answering as wheels. 
 
 When all things were in readiness for 
 building the temple, the king himself, be- 
 ing learned in all philosophies, proceeded 
 to lay the foundation, and to give instruc- 
 tion as to the manner of building it. These 
 were the instruments used by the king and 
 his workmen: The gau, the length, the 
 square, the compass, and the plumb and 
 line. Nor were there any other instruments 
 of measure or observation used in the en- 
 tire building of the temple. And, as to 
 the measure called a length, it was the av- 
 erage length of a man, after trying one 
 thousand men. This was divided into 
 twelve parts, and these parts again into 
 twelve parts, and so on. 
 
 After the first part of the temple was 
 laid,' the builders of the inclined plane be- 
 gan to build it also, but it was built of 
 logs. And when it was raised a little, an- 
 other layer of the temple was built. Then 
 again the inclined plane was built higher, 
 and another layer of the temple was built; 
 and so on, the inclined plane, which was 
 of wood, was built up even the same as was 
 the temple. 
 
 The width of the inclined plane was 
 the same as the width of the temple, but 
 the whole length of the inclined plane was 
 four hundred and forty lengths. Up this 
 inclined plane the floats, with the stones 
 thereon, were drawn by means of capstans, 
 and by men and women pulling also. 
 
 For four and twenty years was Thoth- 
 ma building the temple; and then it was 
 completed. But it required another half a 
 year to take away the inclined plane used 
 in building it. After that it stood free and 
 clear, the greatest building that had ever 
 been built on Earth or ever would be. 
 
 Such, then, was Thothma's Temple of 
 Osiris, the Great Pyramid. 
 
 Jehovih had said: Suffer them to build 
 this, for the time of the building is midway 
 betwixt the ends of Earth; yea, now is 
 the extreme of Earth's corporeal growth; 
 so let it stand as a monument of the 
 greatest corporeal aspiration of man. 
 For from this time forth man shall seek 
 not to build hmself everlastingly on the 
 earth, but in heaven. And these things 
 shall be testimony that in the corporeal 
 age of Earth man was of like aspiration, 
 and in the spiritual age of man in an oppo- 
 site condition of corporeal surroundings; 
 for by Earth I prove what was; and by 
 man prove what Earth was and is at cer- 
 tain periods of time. 
 
 CHAPTER LXII. 
 
 When the temple was completed, and 
 the king and his four high priests entered 
 into the Holy Chamber, the false Osiris, 
 through his servant God, Egupt, came in 
 sar'gis, and spake unto the king, saying: 
 Here am I, O king! 
 
 Thothma said: My labor is well rec- 
 ompensed. That thou hast come to me, 
 O Lord my God, I am blessed. Osiris 
 said: Keep holy my chambers; suffer no 
 man, nor woman, nor child, that dwelleth 
 on the face of Earth, to know the myster- 
 ies of these, my holies, save and except 
 my adepts. Here layeth the key of ever- 
 lasting life. 
 
 Thothma said: How sayest thou, the 
 key of everlasting life? Osiris said: Here- 
 in is that which is of good and evil, as I 
 commanded thy forefathers; to eat whereof 
 man shall become as Gods, and live for- 
 ever. For this is the triumph of man over 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 373 
 
 death, even for which I created him on 
 Earth. 
 
 Thothma said: Shall only we five know 
 these things? Osiris said: Nay, verily; 
 else the light of my kingdom would not 
 be full. Behold, thou, how I built the 
 temple! Was it not in the keeping of 
 adepts? So, then, as I have given unto 
 thee to know my kingdom, thou shalt give 
 unto others, not suffering these lights to 
 come, save through my commandments. 
 
 Now in the second month after the tem- 
 ple was completed, Thothma, the king, 
 having put the affairs of his kingdom in 
 order, went into the Holy Chamber, and 
 thence ascended into the Chamber of Life 
 and Death, leaving the four chief priests 
 in the Holy Chamber. And Thothma cast 
 himself in death by swallowing his tongue. 
 Whereupon the priests closed the entrance 
 and sealed the king within. 
 
 Osiris, through his servant God, Egupt, 
 said unto the priests: One alone shall re- 
 main; in quarter-watch shall ye dwell with- 
 in the Holy Chamber, and I will remain 
 also. And the priests cast lots, and divided 
 the watch in six hours each, unto every 
 day. And Osiris sent Baal to the spirit of 
 Thothma, and took him to Agho'aden, 
 Osiris' heavenly place, showing unto the 
 spirit the glory of the throne, saying: Be- 
 hold the God of Gods. 
 
 Thothma said: It is a great glory; lo, 
 mine eyes are blinded by the light of the 
 Lord my God. After this, Baal took the 
 spirit of Thothma into a thousand heavenly 
 places in Osiris' kingdom, and showed him 
 the glory thereof. 
 
 Thothma said unto Baal: Thou angel 
 of God, thou hast shown me of a truth, 
 God is in the image of man. Nor is there 
 any but one God, who ruleth over all. 
 
 Baal said: How sayest thou, then; who 
 is God? Thothma said: How sayest thou? 
 For behold, his glory was so great I could 
 not look upon him. 
 
 Then answered Baal, saying: Only an- 
 gels and mortals; these are the sum of all 
 things. He, thou hast looked upon, was 
 even as thou art; a one-time mortal on a 
 far-off star-world. He attained unto the 
 Godhead, to create a world unto himself, 
 even as thou, who art an adept, canst cre- 
 ate flowers and plants and serpents. Thus 
 he came into the void regions of space and 
 
 created Earth and her heavens, and they 
 belong to him, for they are his. And in 
 like manner is every star-world, created 
 and ruled by a God like unto thy God, who 
 is Lord of all. 
 
 Thothma said: O that all people knew 
 these things! O that I may remember them 
 when I am returned to Earth. 
 
 Baal said: More than this shalt thou 
 remember; for I will now take thee to the 
 hells of the idolaters and the Jehovihians. 
 Baal then took the soul of Thothma to the 
 hells of De'yus, and showed him the hor- 
 rors thereof. But he took him not to the 
 regions of God, in Craoshivi. 
 
 Now when Thothma had traveled in 
 heaven for thirty days, Baal brought his 
 spirit back to the Chamber of Death, and 
 showed him how to regain his corporeal 
 part, which he did. And then Baal sig- 
 nalled unto Egupt, and the latter spake to 
 the priest on watch, saying: Behold, Thoth- 
 ma hath returned; go and bring thy broth- 
 er, and deliver him into the Holy Cham- 
 ber. 
 
 And when they came they unloosed the 
 sealing stones and delivered the king into 
 the Holy Chamber, and he was awake from 
 his trance, and remembered all he had 
 seen in heaven, which he related to the 
 high priests who were with him. And both 
 Baal and Egupt came in sar'gis and talked 
 in the Holy Chamber with Thothma and 
 the priests. For one day the king remained 
 in the Holy Chamber, that his spirit be 
 reconciled to the flesh; and on the next day 
 he and the priests came forth out of the 
 temple and sealed the door thereof, and 
 placed the king's guard in charge, that no 
 man or woman might molest the place. 
 Now Thothma had been in the death trance 
 forty days. 
 
 The three angels, Egupt, Baal and Ash- 
 taroth, came into the altar in the king's 
 palace that night, and showed themselves to 
 the college students who had attained 
 adept. Baal spake orally before them, di- 
 recting his words to the king, saying: Be- 
 hold, I am the angel of God thy Lord, 
 whom thou hast beholden in heaven; I am 
 the same who traveled in heaven with thee. 
 What I speak, I say in the name of the 
 Lord our God, whose servant I am. On 
 the morrow shall thy high priests draw 
 lots, and one of them shall enter the Cham- 
 
374 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 ber of Holies, in the Osirian Temple, and 
 do even as thou hast. And after him, be- 
 hold, another of the high priests shall do 
 likewise; and so on, until the four have 
 had thy experience. 
 
 And it came to pass that the four priests 
 in turn cast themselves in death, and vis- 
 ited Osiris' heavenly kingdoms, and also 
 many of the hells of De'yus, being led in 
 spirit by Baal or Ashtaroth, Egupt being 
 the guardian God of the temple. 
 
 When they had thus accumulated the 
 same knowledge of heaven and Earth, the 
 five of them were of one mind as to at- 
 taining life everlasting in the corporeal 
 body. Osiris said: Behold, I will bring 
 many back who are already dead; and they 
 shall call unto their embalmed bodies and 
 wake them up and inhabit them. Go ye, 
 then, to the root of the matter, and pre- 
 pare my people, for I will come in person 
 and inhabit the temple ye have built; and 
 my heavenly kingdom shall descend even 
 to the earth. Prepare ye the Column of 
 the Stars! 
 
 Thothma built a column to the east line 
 of the slat, seven lengths, and the height 
 was thirty-six lengths; of wood and stone 
 built he it, with an opening from the bot- 
 tom to the top, and the width of the open- 
 ing was six lengths. In the walls thereof 
 was a winding stairway, and there were 
 windows looking out to the east and west 
 and north and south, that the stars from 
 every quarter might be observed. On the 
 summit of the column were dwelling-places 
 for the seers and mathematicians with 
 places for the measuring instruments and 
 lenses. When this was completed, Thoth- 
 ma built of wood and stone an external 
 wall across the slat of the temple; and with- 
 in this wall were stairs also, and these led 
 to the top of the pyramid. This wall was 
 also provided with windows, that the north- 
 ern stars might be observed. 
 
 Thothma made an observing column for 
 the sun, and it was provided with lenses of 
 all colors, so that adepts standing at the 
 base of the pyramid could see the sun at 
 every hour of the day, and distinguish the 
 spots and their changes. A gau was set 
 within each of the angles of observation, 
 that the relative position of the sun with 
 northern stars could be determined every 
 day. 
 
 By these two columns, therefore, Thoth- 
 ma and his mathematicians measured the 
 sun and moon and stars, as to the distances 
 and sizes thereof. And Osiris comanded 
 the king to send into the far-off lands of 
 Earth his wisest mathematicians, to ob- 
 serve the winds of heaven, and the drouth 
 upon Earth; and the abundance of the yield 
 of the earth in different regions, in differ- 
 ent years and seasons; and to observe fam- 
 ines and pestilences, and all manner of oc- 
 currences on the face of Earth. He said un- 
 to the king: When thy mathematicians are 
 returned to thee with their accumulated 
 wisdom, thou, or thy successor, shall exam- 
 ine the sun and the stars and moon, as com- 
 pared to the things whereof the mathemati- 
 cians shall relate, one year with another; 
 and three years with another three years, 
 and five with five, and seven with seven, 
 and so on for hundreds of years, and thou- 
 sands of years. 
 
 And when thou hast taken in the term 
 of three thousand three hundred years, and 
 compared the sun and moon and stars, 
 as relate to the occurrences of Earth, thou 
 shalt have the key of prophecy for three 
 thousand three hundred years ahead. And 
 thou shalt say of this land and of that 
 land; and of this people and of that peo- 
 ple, how it will be with them, and thou 
 shalt not err. 
 
 Thothma, the king, called together his 
 mathematicians, and, according to their 
 grade, chose from amongst them twelve 
 hundred. These he divided into groups of 
 one hundred each; and he gave them a suf- 
 ficient number of attendants; and he sent 
 them to all parts of the world, al- 
 lotting to them sixteen years each for ob- 
 servation, according to the commandments. 
 And they took with them all kinds of in- 
 struments to measure with besides scribes 
 to make the records of such matters as 
 came before them. And they wene through- 
 out Arabin'ya, and Vind'yu, and Jaffeth, 
 and Par'si'e, and Heleste, and Uropa, even 
 across to the western sea; and to the south 
 extreme of Arabin'ya, and to the great 
 kingdoms in the interior, and to the north 
 of Heleste and Par'si'e, and Jaffeth, to the 
 regions of everlasting snow. 
 
 And in sixteen and seventeen years they 
 returned, save some who died on the jour- 
 neys. And most wonderful was the knowl- 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 375 
 
 edge these mathematicians gained. In 
 some countries they found philosophers 
 who had the knowledge required even at 
 their tongues' end. Thothma received 
 them in great pomp and glory, and award- 
 ed all of them with great riches. 
 
 And Thothma had these things rewrit- 
 ten and condensed into books, and named 
 them books of great learning, and they 
 were deposited within the south chamber 
 .of the pyramid, where never harm could 
 come to them. 
 
 And Thothma made it a law, that other 
 mathematicians should travel over the 
 same regions for every sixteen years and 
 make like observations; and after them, 
 yet other mathematicians to succeed them, 
 and so on for three thousand three hundred 
 years. And accordingly, a new expedition 
 started forth. Now during the absence of 
 the first mathematicians, Thothma and his 
 philosophers observed the sun and moon 
 and stars every day, and a record was made 
 thereof, as to their places and movements, 
 and as to the earth in the regions fo Thoth- 
 ma's home kingdom. And these observa- 
 tions were reduced to tablets and maos, and 
 a record made of them in the Par'si'e'an 
 language, which was the language of the 
 learned. For the Eguptian language of 
 that day was spoken mostly by the un- 
 learned, and was mixed with the Fone- 
 cean. 
 
 After the mathematicians returned. 
 Thothma and his philosophers examined 
 the whole matter as compared with the 
 maps and tablets of the heavens, and the 
 facts deduced therefrom were written in a 
 separate book and called The Philosophies 
 of God and His Son Thothma, King of 
 Earth. Copies of this book were made and 
 sent into the lands of Arabin'ya, Vind'yii, 
 Jaffeth, and Par'si'e, and Heleste, and Uro- 
 pa, to the priests of God, but the original 
 book was filed in the Holy Chamber, in 
 the Temple of Osiris. 
 
 Thothma applied himself to impart wis- 
 dom unto all men. And during his reign 
 he built in the land of Egupt seventy-seven 
 colleges of Great Learning, twelve colleges 
 of prophecy, two hundred houses of philos- 
 ophy, seven adepteries, and three thousand 
 free schools, and four thousand houses of 
 sacrifice unto Osiris, Savior of all men. 
 Three hundred and forty obelisks to God, 
 
 thirty triumphal arches to De'yus, four 
 thousand oan-nus to the Creator, and these 
 were mounted on pedestals of polished 
 stone, and stood at the street corners. 
 
 And there were graduated to the rank 
 of adept during Thothma's reign more 
 than four thousand men and three hundred 
 women, all capable of the death trance, and 
 of going about in spirit. And of these over 
 seven hundred were permitted within thir- 
 ty years to test the death cast of the holy 
 chamber in the pyramid. And their spirits 
 were conducted into Osiris's heavenly re- 
 gions, and sojourned there for many days, 
 and returned to their bodies unharmed. 
 Because of the position of the chambers, 
 there was no action upon their bodies 
 whilst in the trance. 
 
 Thus did Thothma prove himself to be 
 one of the wisest and greatest men that 
 ever dwelt on the face of Earth. He be- 
 lieved all things the Gods told him, be- 
 lieved he was Thoth re-incarnated, and be- 
 lieved he would never die as to the flesh. 
 The false Osiris, through his servant God, 
 Egupt, had said to Thothma: This is the 
 manner of heaven and Earth, as regardeth 
 man: All men are re-incarnated over and 
 over until perfected to immortal flesh; and 
 in that day man hath so perfected his adep- 
 tism he can remain on Earth or ascend to 
 heaven, even when he desireth. Hence of 
 all knowledge, adeptism is the greatest. 
 
 Thothma asked if there were any new 
 creations. Satan prompted Osiris, who 
 said: Nay; thy spirit is old as Earth. At 
 first it was small and round, like a grain 
 of mustard, only it was spirit. And the 
 multitude of these seeds comprise the All 
 Unseen. When one of them taketh root 
 in gestation, then is the beginning. And it 
 is born into the world a frog, or an ass, or 
 worm, or lion, or small creeping thing; 
 and it liveth its time and it dieth. And 
 the spirit hieth back into another womb, 
 and it is born forth a man low as to knowl- 
 edge, evil as to life. And he liveth a time 
 and dieth again; but again the spirit hieth 
 back to another womb, and it is born forth 
 again, another man, but wiser as to knowl- 
 edge, and less evil as to life. And this 
 continueth to hundreds of generations and 
 to thousands. But he who hath attained 
 adeptship hath it in his power to call forth 
 
376 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 out of the earth his own corporeality: he 
 needeth no longer to go through the flesh 
 of others. 
 
 Thothma was wise even in his belief; 
 for when he was growing old, and behold- 
 ing his flesh sunken, and his eyes growing 
 hollow and dim, and his hands getting with- 
 ered, he inquired of the Gods, saying: I 
 know thou hast taught me truth, O God. 
 I am weak before thee, as to judgment, 
 and curious in my vanity. Osiris said: 
 Speak thou, O king! 
 
 Thothma said: By all the force of my 
 will; and by my great learning, I cannot 
 stay the withering of the flesh. If, there- 
 fore, I already dry up like a mummy, above 
 the power of my will, how will it be with 
 me when I am further emaciated? 
 
 Satan prompted Osiris to answer the 
 king, and so he said: Until thou art even 
 more emaciated thou canst not understand 
 the power of thine own soul. 
 
 • With this the king was reconciled, and 
 even at the time he was tottering on his 
 last legs he began to build a new palace, 
 saying: After I have changed this flesh into 
 immortal flesh, hither will I come and 
 dwell forever. And I shall be surrounded 
 by adepts, wise and faultless. And this 
 shall be the first colony of the kind I will 
 build on Earth. But afterward I will build 
 many colonies of like kind; more and more 
 of them, until I have all Earth redeemed to 
 immortal flesh. For of such shall be my 
 kingdom, and all men and all women on 
 Earth shall own me Lord of all. 
 
 Nevertheless, with all Thothma's wis- 
 dom, and the wisdom of his Gods, he fell 
 on a stone and died suddenly on the day he 
 was one hundred years old. 
 
 CHAPTER LXIII. 
 
 When Thothma was quite dead the 
 priests carried his body into the temple, 
 fully believing his spirit would return from 
 heaven and transform the body from cor- 
 ruptible into incorruptible flesh to live for- 
 ever. And they laid the corpse in the 
 place previously designated by the Gods, 
 and sealed it up according to the commands 
 of the false Osiris, Savior of men. 
 
 Osiris had said: Whoso believeth in 
 me, him will I save unto everlasting life, 
 and though he lose his body, yet again shall 
 he find it, and the corruptible flesh shall be 
 
 changed in the twinkling of an eye, and 
 become incorruptible unto life everlasting, 
 with the spirit that abideth therein. 
 
 On the fifth day the priests opened the 
 chamber, for according to the Laws of 
 Miracles, on that day, the spirit should ac- 
 complish the feat; but behold, it came 
 not and the body still lay cold and 
 dead. But the Gods came in sar'gis and 
 said unto the priests: Seal ye up the body 
 for other five days. And the priests did as 
 commanded; and after that they examined 
 it again, but life had not returned. Again 
 they were commanded to seal it up for 
 other five days, which they did, but life 
 returned not. 
 
 Houaka, who was now the high priest, 
 inquired of Osiris concerning the matter. 
 And Osiris, through his servant God, 
 Egupt, answered him, saying: Go bring 
 a young man who is warm in the blood, 
 which is life in the flesh, and he shall be 
 the seventh son of an adept, and know how 
 to cast himself in death. 
 
 The priests brought Xaian, who, was in 
 his twenty-fourth year, and when he came 
 into the Holy Chamber he was bid to cast 
 himself in death for the benefit of the king's 
 soul. And Xaian thus cast himself, and he 
 was sealed in the chamber of death for five 
 days along with the king's corpse. And in 
 five days the priests brought both bodies 
 into the Holy Chamber, according to in- 
 structions. And Osiris came and com- 
 manded them to stand around the bod- 
 ies, and when they had done so, the 
 angels from Osiris' kingdom came and 
 spirited away the body of the king, and 
 they brought back the spirit of Xaian to 
 inhabit the body of Xaian, and put it in 
 possession thereof, making believe it was 
 the spirit of Thothma returned. 
 
 Houaka said to the Gods: Where is 
 the body of Thothma? Hath it been trans- 
 formed? And the Gods answered: It 
 hath gone to heaven, and will return after 
 many days. But as to the spirit of the 
 king, behold, he is with thee. And the 
 priests spoke to Xaian. believing it was 
 Thothma. And after three days they came 
 forth out of the temple and recrowned 
 Xaian, Thothma the Second, and they 
 proclaimed it abroad that these things 
 were true, although they knew to the con- 
 trary. 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 377 
 
 As to the spirit of Thothma, at the time 
 of death, it was taken to Agho'aden and 
 put amongst the servants of Osiris' hea- 
 venly kingdom, and thus enslaved. So 
 Xaian became king of Egupt. 
 
 Now, as regardeth the false Gods, Osi- 
 ris and his confederates, they never tried 
 to reincarnate the spirit of Thothma, but 
 because of the virtues and the wisdom of 
 Thothma, they used him for the benefit of 
 Osiris' heavenly kingdom, and to estab- 
 lish Osiris everlastingly on the earth as 
 the all highest God. 
 
 As to the kingdoms of the land of 
 Egupt, which succeeded Thothma for 
 hundreds and hundreds of years, the 
 Eguptians were the most learned peo- 
 ple in the world, and especially in a 
 knowledge of the stars, and the sun and 
 moon, and in adeptism and miracles. But 
 woe came unto them; the land became 
 flooded with hundreds of millions of dru- 
 jas; and as to the people of Egupt, the 
 chief desire was to be able to return in 
 spirit after death and dwell with mortals. 
 
 These spirits lost all sight of any 
 higher heavens than to dwell on the 
 earth; they knew no other. And they 
 watched about when children were born, 
 and obsessed them, driving hence the nat- 
 ural spirit, and growing up in the new 
 body of the newborn, calling themselves 
 re-incarnated; and these drujas professed 
 that when they had previously lived on 
 Earth they were great kings, or queens, or 
 philosophers. 
 
 And they taught as their master, Osiris, 
 the false, did: That there was no higher 
 heaven that here on Earth, and that man 
 must be re-incarnated over and over until 
 the flesh become immortal. Not all of 
 these spirits drove hence the natural spirit; 
 but many merely engrafted themselves on 
 the same body; and, whilst such persons 
 lived, these spirits lived with them and 
 dwelt with them day and night; not know- 
 ing more than their mortal companion. 
 And when such person died, behold, the 
 druja went and engrafted itself on another 
 child, and lived and dwelt with it in the 
 same way; and thus continuing, generation 
 after generation. 
 
 And because of these indulgences many 
 of the spirits came in sar'gis in the fami- 
 lies of the Eguptians; eating and drinking 
 
 with them corporeally; yea, and even do- 
 ing things whereof no man may speak, 
 whereby dire disease seized upon the flesh 
 of mortals; and their blood and their flesh 
 became inhabited with vermin. The peo- 
 ple became idlers and vagrants; the lands 
 were not tilled, and the places of learning 
 became deserted ruins. 
 
 CHAPTER LXIV. 
 
 ■m 
 
 In Par'si'e and Heleste, also under the 
 dominion of Osiris, Baal and Ashtaroth, 
 because of the persecutions of Faith- 
 ists, and shepherd kings, the Listians, 
 these people fled into Par'si'e and Heleste 
 for hundreds of years, and they built cities 
 and established kingdoms. And none of 
 these accepted the Lord, or God, or De'- 
 yus, but for the most part worshipped the 
 Great Spirit. Nevertheless, they were not 
 Faithists in purity; for they engaged in 
 war and lived not in communities, with 
 rab'bahs as rulers, but dwelt together after 
 the manner of warriors. 
 
 To Baal and Ashtaroth was committed 
 the duty of subjugating these people unto 
 Osiris, Savior of mortals. So Baal and 
 Ashtaroth, finding them stubborn in the 
 worship of the Great Spirit, finally resolved 
 to make them destroy one another, after 
 the same manner as Te-in, in Jaffeth, and 
 Sudga, in Vind'yu; and they asked Osiris 
 for armies of warring angels for that pur- 
 pose. Osiris gave them the following 
 great angel generals and high captains: 
 
 Jah, Apollon-ya, Petoris, Pluton-ya, Hi- 
 ram, Ben, Yube, Ali-jah, Ares, Sa'wang, 
 T'crono, Afro-dite, Argo, Oyeb, Nadar, 
 Abel, Said, Ar-te-mis, Yac-ta-roth, Wab, 
 Josh and Haur; and besides these there 
 were the following deserters from Te-in 
 and Sudga: Clue, Jon, I-sa-ah, Yam- 
 yam, Luth, Bar, Hote, Ki-dom, Athe- 
 na, Hira, Oke-ya-nos, Hermes, Posee-ya- 
 don, Ura-na, Hace, T'sodus, Rac-Rom, 
 Mi-kak, Tol, Taes, Wo-wouski, Sur, Ala- 
 jax and Hesmoin. 
 
 And Baal and Ashtaroth cast lots for 
 each of the above generals and captains, 
 and they were divided equally be- 
 tween them. And Osiris gave to Baal 
 and Ashtaroth, each, five hundred 
 million warring angels. And thus 
 armed, they descended to the earth, to the 
 
378 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-AEMIJ 
 
 objectionable regions, of Par'si'e and He- 
 leste. In those days these great divisions 
 of the earth were divided into many na- 
 tions and kingdoms. And a kingdom was 
 not measured according to the land, but 
 according to the number of cities that paid 
 tribute to the central city; though some 
 kingdoms had but one city. 
 
 These, then, are some of the largest 
 cities that Baal and Ashtaroth determined 
 to destroy, to-wit: Su-yan, with five trib- 
 utary cities; Lakao, with two tributaries; 
 Haugun, with eight tributaries; Waas, 
 with three; Lowga, with six; Tol, with six; 
 Sun, with five; Tos, with four; Troy, with 
 six; Abed, with two; Athena, with twelve; 
 Hess, with four; Ituna, with twelve; Fado, 
 with ten; Tuns, with seven; and Wa'ke'at, 
 with seven. And besides these there were 
 many large cities without any tributary 
 cities, which were also doomed to everlast- 
 ing destruction. 
 
 The first great cities thus turned to 
 war on each other were Haugun and Low- 
 ga; Ashtaroth choosing Haugun and Baal 
 choosing Lowga. These two cities were 
 both of more than four hundred years' 
 standing, and contained each a half mill- 
 ion inhabitants, besides their tributary 
 cities. Tojak was king of Haugun; he 
 was the son of Soma, who was the son of 
 Atyis, the necromancer. And of Lowga, 
 Turwea was king; he was the son of Diah, 
 son of Bawn, the philosopher. 
 
 When Baal and Ashtaroth, with their 
 armies from heaven, came near to these 
 cities, they halted and built a temporary 
 kingdom in the mountains of Zoe. 
 
 Baal said to Ashtaroth: Behold, thou 
 hast had the choice of cities, give thou me 
 the first assault? Ashtaroth said: On thine 
 own terms shall these battles be, and I will 
 beat thee. To it, then; set on Lowga. 
 
 Baal went to Turwea in his dreams and 
 told him his son was waylaid by the peo- 
 ple of Haugun, and, moreover, that Tojak 
 had determined to come upon him and pos- 
 sess the city. When Turwea awoke, he 
 was troubled about his dream, and he in- 
 quired of the oracle concerning the mat- 
 ter. Ashtaroth had possession of the ora- 
 cle, and she answered the king, saying: 
 Thou art a seed of the Faithists, why fear- 
 est thou for a dream? Have a caution of 
 thy dreams; tell not thy son, for this day 
 
 he goeth on the hunt, and thy words might 
 bring about that which otherwise might 
 not be. The king went his way, but Ash- 
 taroth sent inspiring spirits to the king, 
 saying: To caution thy son, that would be 
 wisdom. And the king went out and cau- 
 tioned his son. 
 
 Ashtaroth then went to Tojak's wife, 
 and gave her a dream that the Prince of 
 Lowga went On a hunt, to all appearances, 
 but came near Haugun for a very different 
 matter, which was no less than the slay- 
 ing of herself and husband. The queen 
 awoke suddenly, and in fear, and told the 
 king her dream. Tojak said: Foolish wo- 
 man; it was but the fault of thy diseased 
 blood, which, coursing the heart, gave 
 thee a foolish dream. Tojak dismissed the 
 matter. On the next day, the angels kept 
 inspiring the queen to send her servants to 
 the place of her dreams, to which she ac- 
 ceded; and her servants were armed with 
 spears, and instructed to kill whomsoever 
 came in their way, as if by accident. 
 
 Thus it came to pass that Turwea's son 
 was slain. Turwea inquired of the oracle, 
 and was answered by Ashtaroth, saying: 
 Why comest thou to me for comfort; is 
 not thy son dead by thine own fault? I 
 said unto thee: Mention not the matter of 
 thy dream to thy son, for oft it happeneth 
 that telling of a thing bringeth it to pass. 
 
 Turwea said: I am justly rebuked, O 
 Apollon-ya! But tell me, thou that know- 
 est all things, since one part of my dream 
 hath come true, may not the other part, 
 and of a truth, Tojak come to possess my 
 kingdom? Ashtaroth said: If I tell thee, 
 thou wilt tattle, and do nothing in 
 thine own defence. Turwea then made 
 oath to obey the oracle; whereupon she 
 commanded him to inarch with all his 
 army against Tojak, and suddenly demand 
 satisfaction in ten thousand lives, to bal- 
 ance the loss of the prince. 
 
 This ended Ashtaroth's part with the 
 city of Lowga; and now she went to Hau- 
 gun, whilst Baal took charge of Lowga, 
 sending his legions of angels to the people 
 of Lowga, to inspire them with madness 
 because their prince was slain. 
 
 Ashtaroth, on her part, now assumed 
 control of the oracle in Haugun, and sent 
 her warring angels to the people of the 
 city, advising them of the justice of slay- 
 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARM1J 
 
 379 
 
 ing the prince, because he was come, not 
 on a hunt, but to slay the king and queen. 
 And Ashtaroth, further, told the king, To- 
 jak: Try thou me as to my truthfulness: 
 Behold, in two days the warriors of Tur- 
 wea will be at thy city's gates; be thou 
 ready for them and drive them hence, or 
 lo, thy city will be reduced to dust and 
 ashes. 
 
 Of course the prophecy of Ashtaroth 
 came true, and Tojak now believed he was 
 in the protection of the Gods. The queen 
 said unto him : I commanded my servants 
 to slay the prince, for the Gods showed it 
 to me that only by this could thy life and 
 mine be preserved. The king, Tojak, jus- 
 tified the queen, saying: Thou hast been 
 the preserver of my life and thine. 
 
 Baal, God of Lowga, thus marched the 
 mortal armies against the city of Haugun, 
 whilst Ashtaroth marched the armies of 
 the latter place to battle against them. And 
 thus, as mortals play a game with sticks 
 and pegs, so played this God and Goddess 
 a game with the mortals of these two 
 great cities; played give and take to see 
 the battles lost or won; and they used their 
 legions of angels to inspire the mortals on, 
 or to make them at times turn and flee. 
 And whilst the Gods rested, amusing 
 themselves by feasting and by talking over 
 the sport of mortal death, the two great 
 cities would also gain a little rest, but only 
 to renew the bloody work. 
 
 For four years the Gods and angels 
 kept these two mortal cities at war; and 
 though they lay a day's journey apart, all 
 the way was strewn with the bones of the 
 slain. And in four years they were reduc- 
 ed to dust and ashes; and as to the people 
 of the last year, for the most part, they 
 were inoculated with the poisoned air of 
 the dead, and they died also. And yet it 
 came to pass, Baal beat Ashtaroth in the 
 battle of death, for he caused all his people 
 to be slain, whilst yet a few of Ashtaroth's 
 remained. 
 
 Thus did Baal and Ashtaroth pursue 
 the other great cities of Par'si'e and He- 
 leste. And the time of the destruction of 
 any two or three cities varied from two 
 years to ten years. For the destruction of 
 Athena and Troy it required twelve years. 
 And for the destruction of Ituna and Fado 
 it required eleven years. Betwixt Su-gun 
 
 and Lakao it required two years to bring 
 them to war. Betwixt Athena and Troy it 
 required three years to bring them to war. 
 Two hundred vampires, angels of lust, 
 were set upon a prince of Troy, and in des- 
 peration he was driven to kidnap an Athe- 
 nian princess, who was led to exposure by 
 Baal's angel hosts. In this great battle 
 Ashtaroth won the game, having succeded 
 in having the whole of the Trojans de- 
 stroyed. 
 
 In the war between Tos and Sun, which 
 lasted nine years, it was an even game, for 
 both cities were entirely destroyed and all 
 the people in them, and also their tribu- 
 tary cities as well. But the city of Tol 
 was destroyed within itself, for there was 
 no city near enough to war upon it. The 
 angels brought virus from the dead of oth- 
 er regions, and inoculated the breath of the 
 people of Tol, and their flesh festered, and 
 they died without war. 
 
 The whole time of destruction was one 
 hundred and six years; and after that Par'- 
 si'e and Heleste were wasted and desert, 
 and wild beasts coursed the country far 
 and near. 
 
 Osiris had said: I will make the land 
 of Egupt the greatest country in the world; 
 I will have the place of my dominion near 
 at hand. Satan had said to Osiris: If 
 thou destroy not Par'si'e and Heleste, be- 
 hold, Baal and Ashtaroth will rebel 
 against thee, choosing these lands for 
 their own kingdoms. 
 
 CHAPTER LXV. 
 
 Jehovih had said: I created man blank, 
 as to good and evil, and gave him liberty: 
 And I gave liberty also to the spirits of the 
 dead. But these spirits set themselves up 
 as Gods; and to glorify themselves used 
 mortals in their own way. For they found 
 that mortals could be turned to good or 
 evil, to war or to peace, to virtue or to 
 lust, according to the inspiration of the 
 angels watching over them. But in this 
 I provided a remedy also, and without 
 abridging their liberty, which was, that the 
 Gods, in contention for mortal souls, 
 should fall out and ultimately destroy their 
 own heavenly kingdoms, wherefrom angels 
 and mortals should escape from bondage. 
 
 And this was so. Te-in and Sudga and 
 Osiris, even whilst their wars and machina- 
 
380 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARM1J 
 
 tions were going on with mortals, were 
 scheming for mastery in hada, each to 
 overthrow the others, and involve them in 
 ruin. And it thus came to pass that a tri- 
 angular war ensued in these two heavens, 
 in which upward of ten thousand million 
 warring angels were engaged hundreds of 
 years. For, as mortals engage in corporeal 
 warfare, so do angels engage in es'sean 
 warfare. For though they cannot kill one 
 another, they can bind and enslave and 
 cast one another into hells, and surround 
 them with never-ending fire, so they can- 
 not escape. And the warring Gods send 
 their armies forth to make captives of 
 their enemies, who, when seized, are ei- 
 ther made subjects of, or else cast into tor- 
 ments. And these armies of warring an- 
 gels, hundreds of millions strong, go into 
 the kingdom of another God, and into 
 suburban districts, carrying hence the sub- 
 jects, with all their acquisitions. And yet 
 at times these raiding armies venture too 
 far, and are themselves captured and cast 
 into torments. So that Gods in hada wall 
 their kingdoms round with standing ar- 
 mies, even as they have taught mortals to 
 defend themselves. And their enemies 
 seek to invent means to break these ar- 
 mies through, and go in and plunder and 
 destroy. 
 
 In times of which madness no voice 
 from Jehovih's angels can gain an attentive 
 ear amongst them; even the same as when 
 mortal kings are at war, for one to say to 
 them: Behold, Jehovih is All Peace! They 
 will even curse Jehovih and peace, so do 
 the fighting angels threaten and curse if 
 one of Jehovih's holy ones interpose in 
 peace and love. 
 
 As like a burning fever or canker worm 
 that needeth run its course, before a heal- 
 ing balm availeth good, so Jehovih permit- 
 teth the Gods to pursue their reign, till 
 helpless, they fall, environed in the harvest 
 they sowed. For a time cometh to every 
 man and woman born, on earth or in hea- 
 ven, when sore disaster, if nothing else, 
 will cast him helpless in agony, to make 
 him own the Mighty Power Who created 
 him; and make him supplicate in pity for 
 some helping hand to lead him safely to 
 the All Person's pleading Voice. Then he 
 is ready to listen; to turn from Gods, and 
 Lords, and Saviors, and Sons who profess 
 
 to save; and to stand upright before the 
 Father, and learn to know Him, and will- 
 ingly learn peace, love, reason and truth. 
 
 Jehovih hath said: In every soul I 
 made a door, and in this My Light shineth. 
 Herein My Voice speaketh; but they turn 
 away, and go after them that speak to the 
 external ear; a serpent biteth them, and 
 they are cast in poison and in death! 
 
 Man on Earth hath said: I will not 
 heed Thy still small voice, O Jehovih, 
 which speaketh to the soul; I will obey the 
 king, that leads on to war, and with loud 
 noises and violent oaths pursueth death- 
 dealing as a virtuous trade. Not Thou, O 
 Jehovih, shall be my master, but the 
 king, who hath great pageantry. Behold, 
 I will stand in his great armies, or be led 
 on to death, even as the king willeth me; 
 for he is my Savior and my defence. His 
 Gods shall be my Gods; his Lords my 
 Lords; his Savior my Savior; by blood 
 and heroic butcheries will I prove my loy- 
 alty. And even so have thousands of mill- 
 ions of angels in hada said: Not the still 
 small voice of my soul will I obey; but 
 yonder gaudy God, whose sacredness is so 
 great none can approach him but by crawl- 
 ing on their bellies! He shall be my Lord 
 and Savior; his battles shall be my battles; 
 to feed the hells of hada with his enemies 
 shall be my trade. 
 
 Even to them that choose darkness and 
 evil have I given liberty, also; for they 
 shall learn by experience, in time to come, 
 that all these guides and leaders, be they 
 kings, or Gods, or Lords, or Saviors, are 
 but snares, from whom, soon or late, they 
 must turn in order to rise out of the hells 
 they have built for others. For, because 
 they put Me afar off, or denied My Per- 
 son, or called Me Void like the wind, I 
 cut them not off; but they cut themselves 
 off from Me, and thus fell into torments. 
 
 For I am as near to the corporean as to 
 the es'sean; let them, then, disown their 
 kings and Gods, and whomsoever hath a 
 kingdom to glorify; and they shall es- 
 pouse Me, for I am Ever Present. For 
 this, all people shall do, either on earth or 
 in heaven. My kingdoms are not by vio- 
 lence or by war, but by liberty to every 
 soul; and whoso practiceth peace, love, and 
 liberty unto others, are My chosen. They 
 are on the way of everlasting resurrection. 
 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-AP^LIJ 
 
 381 
 
 CHAPTER LXVI. 
 
 About the time Baal and Ashtaroth 
 had destroyed the inhabitants of Earth in 
 Par'si'e and Heleste, they applied to Osir- 
 is, demanding promotion to separate king- 
 doms of their own. They said: 
 
 Thou knowest of a truth that for sake 
 of confederacy we merged our own king- 
 doms into thine; to make thee powerful 
 against the wars of Te-in and Sudga in 
 heaven. And to do thy will we have laid 
 desolate the mortal kingdoms of Par'si'e 
 and Heleste. For which things thou didst 
 promise us in the start we should have 
 great kingdoms in heaven. 
 
 Now behold, heaven is but one vast 
 scene of war! And this also do we per- 
 ceive, that the mighty contests are without 
 any prospect of an end. As these heavenly 
 wars raged hundreds of years ago, even so 
 do they this day. Yea, the heavenly forces 
 are becoming less disciplined and less scru- 
 pulous from year to year. By evidence of 
 which it is plain that thy heavens, and Te- 
 in's, and Sudga's, will soon or late be cast 
 into interminable hells. To prevent which, 
 we ask of thee, our God, to give us each a 
 section to ourselves, and we will subdue 
 the places and govern them in our own 
 way. 
 
 Osiris answered them, saying: Of all 
 the Gods, who but I hath done a hand's 
 turn to raise mortal subjects to a higher 
 plane? Te-in's course was destruction; so 
 was Sudga's. And by much importuning 
 ye twain persuaded me to have the mortals 
 of Par'si'e and Heleste destroyed. And 
 now, in the time when most of all we 
 should be united, ye importune me to have 
 my great kingdom disrupted and divided. 
 Peaceive ye not that we have the balance 
 of power in our favor? And also, that if 
 in these troublesome times ye espouse new 
 kingdoms, we will all be at the mercy of 
 Te-in and Sudga. For which reason I be- 
 seech you both to postpone the matter till 
 we have driven our enemies from our 
 doors. Let us be faithful to the confeder- 
 acy. 
 
 Now in this affair Baal and Ashtaroth 
 came not to Osiris in person, but sent 
 messengers, as if they were ashamed of 
 their own proposal. And yet, on the other 
 hand, Osiris invited them not to his king- 
 dom. 
 
 Ashtaroth said to Baal: See what Osir- 
 is hath done! He taketh us for children; 
 giving us sweet promises if we will but 
 keep right on serving him. I tell thee, 
 Baal, thou mayest serve Osiris; but from 
 this time forth I am none of his! Behold, 
 I will mark, out a kingdom of mine own, 
 and I will establish it and rule it in mine 
 own way. Moreover I will send word to 
 Te-in and Sudga; and if Osiris oppose me, 
 they shall know his vulnerable points. 
 
 Baal said: Even so will I; and I will 
 establish a kingdom alongside of thine, 
 and if our enemies attack us we can the 
 better defend ourselves. 
 
 So said, so done. And Baal marked 
 out for his heavenly kingdom over Heleste 
 and northwestern Arabin'ya; and Ashta- 
 roth marked out for her heavenly kingdom 
 over Par'si'e and northeastern Arabin'ya. 
 And the twain no sooner chose their gen- 
 erals and captains, and founded their hea- 
 venly thrones, than they sent word to Osir- 
 is and to Te-in and to Sudga. 
 
 A general dismemberment of these 
 mighty kingdoms took place. In Osiris' 
 heaven there revolted one Kabbath, who 
 took the name Thammas. He was a gen- 
 eral, whom tens of thousands of angel offi- 
 cers delighted to serve. He marked out 
 his heavenly place over western Egupt, 
 and established his throne and officers, and 
 had himself proclaimed to mortals through 
 the oracles as The Only Son of the Great 
 Spirit, The Savior of Men. Teos-judas 
 also revolted from Osiris, and established 
 a heavenly kingdom over South Arabin'ya. 
 Besides these there were: Marcus, Delos, 
 Acta, Hebron, De-bora, Julta, Wab, Thais, 
 and D'nor, great generals and captains in 
 Osiris' heavenly kingdom, all of whom re- 
 volted and began setting up heavenly 
 kingdoms of their own. 
 
 And in Sudga's heavenly kingdom 
 more than one thousand generals and cap- 
 tains revolted and began to establish hea- 
 venly kingdoms of their own. Of these 
 the most prominent were: Judsa, Vishnu, 
 Eorata, Chrisna, Histaga, Vivaulias, Hiras, 
 Haroyu, Ahhoma, V'ractu and Tivirassa. 
 
 And in Te-in's heavenly kingdom more 
 than eight hundred generals and captains 
 revolted, and established kingdoms of their 
 own. Of these the most powerful were: 
 Chong, Ho-Tain, Dyut, Cow, Ghan. Su- 
 
382 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 Lep, Djhi, Hiss, Me Lee, Wang, Hop-jee 
 and Kaab. 
 
 And all the revolted ones called them- 
 selves Gods or Lords or Saviors, and en- 
 deavored to establish an earthly habita- 
 tion as well. And all of them took with 
 them millions and millions and tens of 
 millions of angel followers; and some of 
 them had more than a hundred million 
 subjects to start with. 
 
 So anarchy began to reign in hada. 
 Order was broken down; warfare was di- 
 vided in a thousand ways, and neither an- 
 gels nor Gods could more discover what 
 this war or that war was about, save to in- 
 flict torments on others. And so great 
 was the conflict that over more than half 
 of Earth all the lowest heaven was but one 
 continuous succession of knots and hells. 
 To inflict pain and disorder and destruction 
 was the work of twenty thousand million 
 angels in darkness. 
 
 And now, alas, over all the earth where 
 war had raged hundreds of years, were 
 thousands of millions of spirits in chaos, 
 not knowing in fact they were in the spirit 
 world, but still battling against all who 
 came along, to the left and to the right, be- 
 fore and behind, screaming, bawling with 
 madness, striking out in madness, in un- 
 ceasing agony, in an unending nightmare 
 of madness. 
 
 And from the mighty hosts of darkness, 
 the drujas, now pestering the people 
 on Earth, were hundreds of millions 
 of familiars taking to fetalism! Vam- 
 pire* spirits who suck the blood and 
 flesh of mortals till the brain and heart 
 are wild and mad! Till the mortal is 
 driven to nameless deeds of horrors, des- 
 perate with the foul obsession. Spirits 
 who bring poison and horrid smells to af- 
 flict mortals with; spirits who delight to 
 feed on the flesh of mortals which is cor- 
 rupted with scabs and running sores. Spir- 
 its that teach re-incarnation and lust as the 
 highest, most exalted heaven. 
 
 And now the mighty hosts of Anuhasaj, 
 alias De'yus, the Lord God, the false, 
 broke in on every side, and spread here 
 and there for foulness and for fuel to feed 
 their thousands of hells. And these in re- 
 membrance of Osiris' hated name and 
 treachery went for his great kingdom, fol- 
 lowed by thousands of millions of angels, 
 
 desperate with long-continued slavery, 
 roused for deeds of vengeance. Forth into 
 his capital Agho'aden, they rushed, beat- 
 ing down the pillars of fire and high arch- 
 ways and rushing into the throne of Osiris, 
 seized him and his vice-Gods and high 
 marshals and dragged them off and cast 
 them into foul-smelling hells, hideous with 
 the wail and roar of maniacs and tantaliz- 
 ing drujas, and. with kicks and blows and 
 poundings covered them up in foul dark- 
 ness, heaped deep and smothering in suf- 
 focating gases. 
 
 Then off ran other legions for Te-in 
 and his high officers, and to pillage his 
 kingdom also. And him and them they 
 seized and bore off in triumph to equally 
 horrid hells. And then others for great 
 Sudga ran, even more desperate for ven- 
 geance' sake; and him they also caught, 
 despoiling his mighty kingdom, and cast 
 him into hell. 
 
 And for many of the lesser Gods they 
 ran, and broke them down utterly, and cast 
 them into hells. Only two Gods of the 
 past days in those regions escaped, Baal 
 and Ashtaroth, who fled to save themselves 
 for a more opportune season to carry out 
 their wicked schemes. 
 
 Of the self-Gods of Uropa, and North 
 and South Guatama, little need be said. 
 They established weak heavenly kingdoms 
 and succeeded in inciting mortals to war, 
 but to no great destruction. Their hea- 
 venly kingdoms were for the most part 
 failures; their thrones were poor and dilap- 
 idated almost from the start. Of these 
 great divisions of the earth mortals were 
 too scattered and few to be profitable for 
 false Gods. In Guatama they had not 
 forgotten the lessons of I'tura, the false 
 God who had ruined their forefathers. 
 They were wary, and for the most part 
 preserved their allegiance to the Great 
 Spirit. 
 
 CHAPTER LXVII. 
 
 By the pressure of ji'ay, Craoshivi had 
 descended near the earth, and some places 
 bordered upon it. Darkness had over- 
 spread the land of Earth in some regions 
 for seven hundred years, so that the sun 
 shone not, save as a red ball of fire. And 
 nebula fell in many places to a depth of 
 three lengths, so that even the places of 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 383 
 
 the great cities of Earth, which had been 
 destroyed, were covered up, and it was like 
 a new country. Which was beneficial to 
 Jehovih's angels, in assisting them to de- 
 liver hosts of the chaotic spirits, whose 
 mortal part fell in dread war. For such 
 was the labor of the true God in Craoshivi, 
 Son of Jehovih, and of his hosts of uprais- 
 ed angels. To gather in from every quar- 
 ter of Earth and her heavens the fallen vic- 
 tims of the self-Gods; to restore them to 
 reason and to happier and holier scenes; 
 and to teach them righteousness and good 
 works. 
 
 Jehovih had said to God, His Son: Be- 
 cause one man cannot lift up the whole 
 world he shall not grieve, nor cease doing 
 what he can. For his glory lieth in exert- 
 ing himself to the full. Because the self- 
 Gods have come against thee, they are 
 against Me also; because they have es- 
 poused to be Creators, and thus proclaimed 
 themselves for their own glory, they shall 
 have their fill. Before these times, the 
 false Gods were content to proclaim their 
 own names; but lo and behold, they have 
 made the Lord God as the Creator, and set 
 him up as a man, on a throne, to worship 
 him! 
 
 And Te-in, and Sudga, and Osiris! 
 All of woman born, and knowing My 
 breath upon them. Sufficient is it for thee, 
 My Son, to gather in the afflicted and dis- 
 tressed, and restore them and deliver them 
 in light and truth. Keep thou thy schools 
 and colleges in heaven; and thy nurseries 
 and hospitals, and factories, and thy fleets 
 of swift-flying otevans and airavagnas. 
 And send thou thy faithful volunteers, and 
 make the afflicted to rejoice and hold up 
 their heads in great joy. But to them that 
 will not hear; and to them that curse thee 
 and Me, seeking to destroy for their own 
 glory, be thou silent. My hand is upon 
 them. My ji'ay'an shower covereth Earth 
 and heaven. In their own game shall they 
 cast themselves in darkness and destruc- 
 tion. 
 
 And all the while the self-Gods were at 
 their evil deeds, the Faithists, Jehovih's 
 angels, worshippers of the Ever Present, 
 
 All Person, coursed the heavens along in 
 their fire-ships, calling in the persecuted 
 children of Jehovih. Calling loud and 
 cheerfully through the heavens of the evil 
 Gods, and over the kingdoms of the earth; 
 calling in these words: 
 
 Come! Come! The Father's kingdom 
 is free! Come! Come! In peace and qui- 
 etness thou shalt be thine own master! 
 Behold, the Father's places rise higher and 
 higher! Not downward, to the lower king- 
 doms, nor to the earth, nor to re-incar- 
 nation, the invented tale of drujas; but up- 
 ward to wisdom, goodness, love and hap- 
 piness. Because ye have put away the All 
 Person, ye have fallen in the mire; ye have 
 closed your eyes to yonder higher heaven. 
 Come, O ye that are in bondage! Cut loose 
 from all! Fly to Him Who brought ye 
 forth to life! Disown the world! And 
 self! And all the Gods and Saviors! 
 Lords and kings! Be Jehovih's! Sworn to 
 peace and love! To good works and right- 
 eousness! Come! Come! Our otevans 
 are free! Our airavagnas full of comfort. 
 O come and be our loves! Be fellows, one 
 with Jehovih. ' 
 
 And they gathered in millions and thou- 
 sands of millions! For hundreds and hun- 
 dreds of years they labored in the dis- 
 tracted regions of hada; toiled and toiled 
 till wearied and prostrate, tens of thou- 
 sands of times; then rested a while, invigor- 
 ated for more energetic work. 
 
 But not alone nor unseen, these toiling 
 millions, hundreds of millions of Jehovih's 
 angels, faithful Sons and Daughters. For 
 the labor built up their own spirits to be as 
 very Gods and Goddesses in noble endur- 
 ance. Which was written in their fair 
 faces, so the high-raised messengers of far- 
 off heavens, traveling past, beheld Jeho- 
 vih's soul in them. And so bore the news 
 to other worlds of the darkness of Earth 
 and her evil Gods, and of the faithful, 
 struggling hosts of Jehovih in their uphill 
 work. 
 
 And now Earth and her heavens crossed 
 the boundaries of the ji'ay'an forests, and 
 rolled slowly towards the homes and do- 
 minions of other etherean Gods. 
 
LORDS' RECORD FOR DAWN OR DAN 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 HISTORY OF PO. 
 
 For the four divisions of the earth Je- 
 hovih gave four Sons of holy light and 
 power for the voice of God and his Lords: 
 Po, of Jaffeth; Abram, of Arabin'ya; 
 Brahma, of Vind'yu, and Eawahtah, of 
 Guatama, whose records are everlasting on 
 the earth, which are testimony that these 
 men were raised up by Jehovih for His 
 Own glory, and for the deliverance of men. 
 
 These are the generations of the line of 
 Light from the time of Zarathustra: Shu 
 Sa, Gwan, Loo, Sam, Dhi Jo, Wee, 
 Him, Gow, See, Wing, He Wen, Tse 
 Kong, Lam Ne, Moo Yow Tine, Luts, 
 Hime, Mai Se, Hong, Ghee, Wan Ghee, 
 Tse Loo, succeeding one another. 
 
 All the foregoing were seers and proph- 
 ets of God having the Voice from their 
 youth up, and were each in turn a shield 
 and guardian unto the chosen of God. 
 
 God said: With Tse Loo, behold, the 
 Voice was lost. But I called aloud on the 
 face of the earth, and my Light spread 
 abroad. And there came a woman of Che 
 Song, named Ha-se, an I'hin, through 
 whom the Voice was regained. Ha-se had 
 seven sons and seven daughters, all of 
 whom heard the Voice, and saw the Light. 
 And God divided the fourteen sons and 
 daughters, one from another, and sent them 
 in different ways. 
 
 These, then, are the tribes that sprung 
 of them: King, Si, Gwe, Loo, Hi-Gah, 
 Hi-se-Gua, Yo, Ha Fung, Ne, Hi Lam, 
 Se'ing, Yuth Lo, Jon, Ying'e and Ho Lun 
 Gow. From the line of Ha Fung sprang 
 Enamjo and Ze'zoo, half I'hin. From 
 Ying'e sprang No'e and Yu Laim: also 
 Yu'tse and He-ah. And God commanded 
 the He-ahns to dwell towards the south, 
 and they so dwelt. 
 
 From the line of King descended the 
 We Yah-Ho; and they lived towards the 
 north and made fellowship with the Foe- 
 Sim, who were I'huans by blood, and also 
 
 followers of the Zarathustrian law under 
 the name Sa Sin, having rab'bahs whom 
 they called bah. From the tribes of Foe- 
 Sim sprang Han; and from We Yah-ho 
 sprang Hi and Te-Wing'e; both of which 
 tribes had the Light and the Voice. 
 
 And all the north regions of Jaffeth 
 dwelt in peace and happiness. And God 
 looked upon them and blessed them in all 
 things. Nevertheless, it came to pass that 
 the tribes of Han forgot the commandments 
 of God; and Le Han, a mighty chieftain, 
 rose up amongst them, and re-established 
 the Osirian doctrines; that corporeal 
 knowledge should stand higher than the 
 Ormazdian law. 
 
 Han usurped the central throne of Jaf- 
 feth, calling himself, Han, King of the Sun. 
 And so Han gave himself up to getting 
 knowledge, and to enforcing knowledge 
 upon the people. Han issued the following 
 decree: Han, King of the Sun! Behold, 
 there is one sun and his satellites. There 
 shall be but one kingdom, with satellites. 
 Behold me, I am the sun king! I will 
 put away all other doctrines and learning. 
 Let all the world bow down to me! 
 
 Han was asked: Shall a man not wor- 
 ship the Unseen? He answered: Better is 
 it to worship a stone, which thou canst see. 
 Worship not in words, but in works; 
 worship not in prayer, but in doing right- 
 eously. What is prayer but crying to one's 
 own weakness? If there be an Unseen 
 Light, He will do His own way. What is 
 the use of praying to Him? Rites and cer- 
 emonies to Him are the expression of folly. 
 Rites and ceremonies to our forefathers 
 are excusable. If their souls continue to 
 exist, the rites and ceremonies may give 
 them good pleasure. 
 
 So, Han abolished the worship of Je- 
 hovih and His God and Lords. God look- 
 ed down from his holy hill in heaven, and 
 he said: It is well; let Han have domin- 
 ion. Behold, Han enraptureth the multi- 
 tude with his new doctrines, remembering 
 not that these doctrines were tried thou- 
 sands of years before. 
 
 God prophesied through his prophet 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ ">«».. „ co « 
 
 385 
 
 Zewing'e, saying: Hear me, O Han, and 
 all ye people of the whole world. I prophe- 
 cy by the Voice and Light; I know my 
 words are true words: By words the soul 
 is bent; by not praying to the Unseen, the 
 Unseen will be forgotten. By the abolition 
 of rites and ceremonies to the Gods, the 
 Gods will be forgotten. Man will rise up 
 in self-conceit against his Creator, saying: 
 Behold me; I am the highest of all things; 
 my judgment is the greatest of all wisdom. 
 And the tribes of men will aspire to estab- 
 lish opinions as fundamental doctrines. 
 War and destruction will come upon the 
 nations! 
 
 Han would not heed the prophecy of 
 God. Han established what was called The 
 First Han Dynasty, and it overspread the 
 land of Jaffeth from centre to circumfer- 
 ence. And there came of the laws of Han 
 great persecution against the Faithists, the 
 worshippers of Jehovih. 
 
 Han said: Try them by the food they 
 eat; and whoso refuseth to eat fish or flesh 
 shall suffer death. Neither shall any man 
 nor woman have favor in the courts, who 
 holdeth sacred the life of a cow, or a horse, 
 or dog, or any other animal on the face of 
 the earth, or in the waters, or in the air 
 above the earth. 
 
 So the Faithists, the followers of the 
 Zarathustrian law, were outlawed, and were 
 tortured and put to death on every hand. 
 And it had come true as prophesied by Ze- 
 wing'e. 
 
 God said: Behold, they have not only 
 forgotten the Creator and denied His Per- 
 son in words, but in behavior also. For 
 they no longer hold sacred anything He 
 created alive, even man. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 From Ze-wing'e, God raised up proph- 
 ets for seven generations. Ze-wing'e be- 
 gat Do Tse, who begat Yin, who begat Hi 
 Ne, who begat Lan Se'ang, who begat Dhi 
 Hsotch'e, who begat Ho Lon, who begat 
 Po, who was an iesu in birth. When Po 
 was yet very young, the voice of God came 
 to him, saying: Be steadfast in the doc- 
 trines of thy forefathers, eating neither fish 
 nor flesh. Thy God will protect thee, and 
 thou shalt gather together the scattered 
 tribes of Zarathustrians, the Faithists, and 
 re-establish them in this great land. 
 
 In those days many of the Zarathustri- 
 ans were celibates; and the king saw his 
 people being reduced by war, and he made 
 a law against celibacy, commanding all 
 men to marry, and all women to bring forth 
 children, or be put to death. When Po was 
 grown up, God said to him: Behold, thou 
 canst not fulfill the law, for thou art iesu- 
 born. But I will bring thee a wife like 
 unto thee, who is also barren, but ye twain 
 shall be blessed with three children, and 
 thou shalt call them Wan-ge, To-ghan and 
 Tse Loo. 
 
 And it came to pass that a woman of 
 Hong Ge, with three adopted children, es- 
 caped from the tyranny of Dhi'Wan, flee- 
 ing to the southern tribes of Hi See Gua 
 and Yo, and Gwan Gooh; and, with her, 
 Po wed, and he named his wife Ah T'dowh 
 Jee. Po was twenty years old when he 
 married, and he went with his wife and 
 three children to the country of Heng'a 
 Di, which name signified border land, and 
 he labored at scutching flax and hemp. 
 
 And God came to Po, saying: What is 
 the extent of thy fidelity to the All High- 
 est Light? 
 
 Po said: I will obey Him in all things. 
 
 God said: Wouldst thou sacrifice thy 
 three sons, if commanded by thy Creator? 
 
 Po said: They are the Creator's, not 
 mine. How dare I sacrifice that which is 
 another's? 
 
 God said: Thou art wise; thou knowest 
 the Ormazdian law. 
 
 Then Po asked: Who art thou? Who 
 is this that cometh upon me silently, ask- 
 ing questions? 
 
 God said: Go thou, visit Hi Seiang, the 
 philosopher, and question him. 
 
 Hi Seiang was governor of the south 
 province of Heng'a Di, and was, withal, a 
 man of great learning. Po came to him 
 and questioned him, saying: What is this 
 that asketh us questions? Why do we 
 question and answer ourselves all day 
 long? 
 
 Hi Seiang answered: Are we not two 
 selfs? Do we not discourse within our- 
 selves like two selfs? 
 
 Po said: Which, sayest thou, is the 
 superior self, that which questioneth within 
 
386 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARM1J 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 us forever, or that which is forever answer- 
 ing? 
 
 The governor said: That which asketh 
 questions must be the superior self. Po 
 said: Who is it? Hi Seiang said: It is 
 nothing, it is something. 
 
 Po answered him, saying: It appeareth 
 to me, these two selfs are two different 
 persons; one belongeth to the flesh, the 
 other to the Creator. Because this ques- 
 tioning self is the same one that seeth and 
 heareth Gods and angels. 
 
 Hi Seiang said: What sayest thou? 
 God and angels? 
 
 Po replied: God and angels. To which 
 the governor took exception, saying: Dost 
 thou too defy the law? 
 
 Po said: What I see I see, what I hear 
 I hear. Something external to ourselves 
 made us, and ruleth over us. 
 
 The governor asked: Have we not rid 
 the world of superstition? Why dealest 
 thou with doctrines that were in the dark 
 ages? I tell thee there are two things only 
 in all the universe; the unseen firmament, 
 and the corporeal worlds that float there- 
 in. Their action and reaction on each oth- 
 er produce what we call life, which is but 
 an effervescence that cometh and goeth, 
 and there is the end. The laws are right. 
 Han hath done a good thing in abolishing 
 the doctrines of the ancients. 
 
 Whilst they were yet talking, God sent 
 a blaze of fire into a bush standing near 
 by, and a voice spake out of the flame, say- 
 ing: Who, then, sayest thou I am? For 
 verily I am! 
 
 The governor saw the light, and beheld 
 that the bush was not burnt; and he also 
 heard the voice. Hi Seiang said to Po: Be- 
 hold, thou comest to me, knowing I am a 
 philosopher, and thou hast cast a spell in 
 the bush, like a magician. I am master of 
 a thousand books, and am registered as a 
 man of great learning. Thou hast offended 
 me: 
 
 Po said: Why accusest thou me? For 
 is it not just for me to accuse thee of cast- 
 ing the spell? I cast it not. 
 
 Again did God appear and speak, say- 
 ing: Accuse thou not this, my son, Po. 
 Thou shalt labor with him. Behold, I give 
 into thy keeping the country of Feh; for 
 even this hour hath died Moo Gwon. The 
 
 tribes of Ghan shall be gathered together 
 in Feh and Heng'a Di. 
 
 Hi Seiang, the governor, was astonish- 
 ed at the words of the Light; and he sent 
 a servant, to ascertain if Moo Gwon was 
 dead; (the distance being a day's journey 
 each way) and he found it to be true. 
 
 Hi Seiang, the governor, sent for Ah 
 Sin to come and investigate the nature of 
 Po. So, when the three were together, 
 God wrote in the sand the word Te-in, and 
 it was as if a flame of fire pierced the 
 ground. Po said: From this time forth 
 Te-in shall be the name of the tribes who 
 have faith in the Creator only. Because He 
 alone hath written it. 
 
 Ah Sin said: How canst thou distin- 
 guish betwixt that which is written by the 
 spirits of the dead, and that which is writ- 
 ten by the Creator? 
 
 Po said: Light cometh in light; dark- 
 ness cometh in darkness. 
 
 Hi Seiang asked: Sayest thou, thou 
 canst see the angels and the Gods? 
 
 Po said: I see the angels, but the Gods 
 I cannot see. Angels are like ourselves; 
 but the Gods are as a flame of fire. 
 
 Now, whilst they were thus discoursing, 
 a light in the form of a triangle came and 
 rested on Po's head, and the word Te-in 
 was inscribed on the sides of the triangle. 
 The governor said: What signifieth this? 
 And Po, being under the influence of the 
 light of God, said: 
 
 Call me Te-in; I am the Father (rab'- 
 bah) over all the living. I write in the 
 sand, and speak in the mouths of my seers 
 and prophets. He that ye call Po is my 
 Son, begotten for the deliverance of my 
 chosen out of the bondage of Han and his 
 satellites. Behold, my people are impris- 
 oned and tortured; persecuted and abused. 
 And ye twain have kingdoms taxed for the 
 glory of Han in his unrighteous work. 
 Provide ye also triangles, and espouse me, 
 and I will deliver your kingdoms also. 
 
 Hi Seiang and Ah Sin both desired 
 some pretext to throw off the yoke of the 
 Han dynasty, and now lent willing ears to 
 the instruction of Po and the Voice. Ac- 
 cordingly, the learned men of these prov- 
 inces were called together, to learn of God, 
 through Po, the mysteries of earth and hea- 
 ven, and especially as to the great mon- 
 archy. When these Councils were assem- 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ «>— ■ -obo 
 
 387 
 
 bled, God cast his light upon Po, and they 
 all saw it. And the words Po spake were 
 called Vede'or. Word by word learned 
 they wisdom of God, repeating them over 
 and over, which was called Learning by the 
 Mouth, being in contradistinction from 
 learning by books and tablets. 
 
 God said: Great trials will come upon 
 my people. The kings will seek to destroy 
 the doctrines of Te-in. For which reason 
 ye shall not write nor engrave my words 
 until the coming of Kosmon. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 These, then, are the sacred laws given 
 through Po, by God. 
 
 Seek to bring forth heirs that will be a 
 glory to thy Creator. Marry not because 
 of the impulse of the flesh, but consider 
 thine own spirit and the spirit of thy 
 spouse. Shut not up thyself in celibacy, 
 but multiply and adorn the earth. 
 
 Thy Creator provided milk for the in- 
 fant; but with the coming of the teeth, 
 thou shalt provide for their service also. 
 Feed thou him according to the Ormazd- 
 ian law. To make him a warrior, give 
 thou him fish and flesh. To make him pa- 
 tient and strong, with docility, remember 
 the camel and the ox, feeding on the herbs 
 that grow on the earth. 
 
 Ne-gwon asked: Was not celibacy the 
 highest of all laws? Is it not so now? 
 
 God said: There are times for all things. 
 In the days of Zarathrustra celibacy was 
 the first of laws. In those days man was 
 not ready for these laws. Yet thou shalt 
 not call the one law higher than the other. 
 The fullness of earth knowledge requireth 
 marriage, yet the bondage after death 
 holdeth the spirit of man for six genera- 
 tions to his own heirs. By celibacy, a 
 man's soul is not bound after death by the 
 love he beareth his children to lingec about 
 the earth, and he may ascend quickly into 
 paradise. The man or woman that is weak, 
 or deformed, or blind, or deaf, or with run- 
 ning sores, and he who is iesu, shall not 
 marry, nor bring forth heirs. Nor shall 
 he who is ieus, take sorrow to his soul; for 
 this is the testimony of the Father that his 
 race is' emancipated from the earth. 
 
 Teachers in public shall be celi- 
 bates; children, who decide that they will 
 become teachers, or priests, or priestesses, 
 
 shall take vows of celibacy. For such per- 
 sons are married to the Great Spirit; and 
 they shall be as Gods and Goddesses, 
 knowing no more love to one person than 
 another. 
 
 Remember that they who marry, are 
 chosen by Ormazd to raise up offspring 
 for the glory of heaven and earth; and they 
 shall dwell together in peace, love and har- 
 mony. 
 
 Thou shalt not marry but once; neither 
 shalt thou look after any other partner all 
 the days of thy life. The husband shall be 
 the master of the house; but when he is not 
 present, the wife shall be master. 
 
 Thy sons at the age of eleven years, 
 and daughters at the age of nine years, 
 shall begin to learn maxims. And at that 
 same time they shall be consecrated to the 
 Creator and committed to His service. 
 
 The wise shall rule over the foolish, but 
 to raise them up. 
 
 The rich shall apportion their riches 
 for the benefit of the city. The poor shall 
 reverence the rich and take council from 
 them. 
 
 Behold, I have given many gifts unto 
 my people: the woman to give suck; the 
 very strong man to carry burdens; the wise 
 man to oversee the city; the learned man 
 to explain the ancients; the prophet to hear 
 my voice; the magician to hear the voice 
 of angels; the physician to heal the sick; 
 every several one gave I good gifts. Thou 
 shalt not covet another mans' gifts, but be 
 wise in discovering thine own, and using 
 them for the benefit of the city. Neither 
 shalt thau covet another man's riches, nor 
 anything that is his. What more is a rich 
 man than a watch-dog? Behold, it is his 
 matter, whether he fulfilleth my command- 
 ments. According to every man's gifts do 
 I require of him, as to what he can do 1 for 
 the people of his city. To the poor man, 
 my exactions are lighter than a straw. 
 
 For the ignorant man, and for the very 
 young child, I provided the wise and the 
 rich as Gods to raise them up. As they 
 minister unto them, so do I bless them for 
 their labor. What they do corporeally for 
 the resurrection of those beneath them, so 
 do I answer them in spirit in my resurres- 
 tions in the heavens. 
 
388 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 Seven castes have I made for my chos- 
 en: The first are the prophets; the second, 
 such as have the highest genealogy; the 
 third, the rab'bahs and priests; the fourth, 
 the spe-e-su; the fifth, physicians; the sixth, 
 the rich, and seventh, the very poor. Each 
 and every caste shall remain by itself; all 
 of them are worthy before me, and are 
 equally my children. 
 
 Thou shalt not kill, for food to eat, 
 anything that breathes the breath of life. 
 
 Thou shalt love to search for thy Cre- 
 ator in all things on the earth, in the earth, 
 in the waters, and in the air above the 
 earth. 
 
 Thou shalt love to search for all that is 
 good in thy neighbor; but to excuse all the 
 evil that is in him. 
 
 Thou shalt keep sacred the days of thy 
 God, and cause all thy people to rejoice 
 in the delightful creations of thy Creator. 
 
 Thou shalt obey the prophet of thy 
 God; and be obedient to the rab'bah of the 
 city. Next to these, thou shalt honor thy 
 father and thy mother, and pay reverence 
 to thy grandfather and grandmother. 
 
 In the temple of thy God, remember 
 that all men are alike; for even as death 
 layeth the high and the low alike, so stand 
 my people in the house I have built. 
 
 Thou shalt respect the opinions of all 
 men; for even thyself may be in error. 
 
 Thou shalt speak but little of thyself or 
 anything that is thine; for all others have a 
 history also. 
 
 Thou shalt make thyself compatible 
 unto others in all righteousness. 
 
 To re-instate the Zarathustrian law, the 
 largest city shall not exceed two thousand 
 souls; and the smallest shall be ten fami- 
 lies. Save they are celibates, in which case 
 a city may be as small as eight souls, hav- 
 ing one rab'bah or priest. The best, high- 
 est learned men, who shall be a celibate, 
 shall be the priest and ruler of the city; 
 and the sins of the people of the city shall 
 be upon his head. But if it be a large city, 
 he may choose one, or as many as six 
 priests, to rule with him; and in that case 
 the sins of the city shall be upon them 
 
 When a matter cometh up, the priest 
 shall call whom he will to speak thereon; 
 and when they have spoken, he shall de- 
 cree by his highest light, and that shall be 
 the law without repeal, save by himself. 
 
 It shall be lawful for the governor, who 
 is the chief priest, prior to death, to repeal 
 all his laws; so that his successor shall 
 make new laws. For no man shall be 
 bound after death by his own laws, in 
 which case he could not come back and re- 
 peal them. But as regardeth the laws a 
 governor or chief priest maketh whilst he 
 ruleth over a city, and over all persons 
 whom he hath ruled during his life-time, 
 he shall be responsible for them, both in 
 this world and the next. For if a priest or 
 governor maketh a law of darkness, and his 
 people live by that law, their souls will be 
 in darkness in the next world through his 
 fault, and he shall answer to them in the 
 next world for what he hath done in this. 
 
 Wherein the manufacture of copper or 
 iron, or other things, requires more than 
 two thousand people, there shall be another 
 city, with five breadths of the first city be- 
 tween them. And the government of the 
 second city shall be like unto the govern- 
 ment of the first. But in no case shall 
 there be more than four cities near about 
 in the same country. 
 
 Ye shall neither hire nor be hired; nei- 
 they amongst yourselves nor with the 
 kings' peoples. Nor shall ye have servants 
 nor masters, for ( all shall be alike servants 
 to Ormazd only. 
 
 Sin-wah inquired: Was it not taught in 
 the Zarathustrian age to respect the caste 
 of men according to the number of their 
 servants? And whether, according to the 
 descent of men, they were born of parents 
 who had risen above servitude for many 
 generations? God said: The old law was 
 for the olden time. It was a good law to 
 improve the breed of men for special 
 trades and learning. And that law hath 
 fulfilled its purpose. The physician hath 
 found great cures; and he knoweth all the 
 parts of the flesh and the blood. The min- 
 er knoweth the different kinds of stone, and 
 the metals in them, and how to extract 
 them. The farmer knoweth grounds and 
 the yield thereof, and what they will best 
 bring forth. The spinner and weaver have 
 found the best of fibres for paper and for 
 cloth. And so hath it come to pass in all 
 departments; by the Zarathustrian 'law of 
 caste have they perfected these things suf- 
 ficient unto the requirement of man. For 
 which reason ye shall teach all things unto 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ ">-.■ «"" 
 
 389 
 
 all; and they shall work with their own 
 hands at all industries; remembering that 
 the highest and most perfect man is he 
 that can do all things. 
 
 Jon-Le inquired. Since a man dieth in 
 a few years at most, why shall he strive to 
 learn things that pertain to the earth? 
 
 God said: All learning is as a gymnasi- 
 um to the spirit. Knowledge is the strength 
 of the soul. Ye shall teach all things unto 
 your sons and daughters, perfecting them 
 in the talents created withal. First, to use- 
 ful labors; second, to learning; third, to 
 music and art, sculpture and painting; 
 fourth, to mining; and fifth, to perfection. 
 And ye shall intersperse labor and learning 
 with recreation, not only in rites and cere- 
 monies, but in harmless games, as in danc- 
 ing, racing and playing, old and young. 
 Cultivating joyous hearts, for these are 
 outspoken words of glory to the Great 
 Spirit. 
 
 Every governor, and priest, and rab'- 
 bah, shall provide for a successor; by the 
 light of the All Highest shall they be 
 chosen. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 Hi Seiang became converted to the doc- 
 trines of Po as taught by God, who was 
 called Te-in in those days in that country. 
 Ah Sin and Hi Seiang and Tse Gow en- 
 tered into compact to throw off the domin- 
 ion of Han, and so notified him. Han 
 thereupon declared war against them. And 
 he pursued them cruelly, laying waste a 
 great country. Po and his followers were 
 thus driven toward the south; and on their 
 way they gathered up the Faithists of the 
 tribes of He-ah. 
 
 Now it came to pass that Han's success 
 in war was so great that he concentrated 
 not his armies, but caused them to scatter 
 in different ways. And behold, he went 
 so far that the barbarians fell upon his ar- 
 mies and destroyed them. And Han per- 
 ished by the blow of a barbarian woman. 
 
 In the fourth year of the inspiration of 
 Po, he returned and possessed the coun- 
 tries of Feh, Heng'a Di and Se Lov, and 
 he reinstated Ah Sin and Hi Seiang as 
 governors. Hi Seiang called a council of 
 thirteen kingdoms of Jaffeth, and after 
 seventy days' deliberation Hi Seiang was 
 made ruler over Jaffeth, receiving the title, 
 
 King of the Sun. And he established the 
 doctrines of Po by law, changing the name 
 of All Light, to Te-in, signifying God. 
 And he stopped all persecution against the 
 Faithists; and he prohibited idol worship. 
 
 And Po traveled east and west, north 
 and south; teaching and displaying mirac- 
 ulous things. And God was with him at 
 all times and places. Gathering together 
 the chosen; explaining and practicing the 
 commandments of God (Te-in). And man 
 ceased to worship all idols and Gods ami 
 saviors; worshipping the Creator only. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 HISTORY OF ABRAM. 
 
 Out of the hosts of Par'si'e, who were 
 of the people of Shem, who were since the 
 submersion of Pan, came Abram, a man 
 chosen by God, in the arc of Spe-ta, for 
 the deliverance of the Faithists of Arabin'- 
 ya. 
 
 These, then, are the generations of the 
 line whence came Abram, that is to say: 
 Of Shem and the seventy tribes, first going 
 forth beyond the mountains of Owatchab- 
 habal, Tur who settled in Par'si'e, and his 
 descendants Raf-bak, and his descendants 
 Goe, and his descendants Wawa, and his 
 descendants Sadr. In Sadr the line was 
 lost, but through his daughter Bar-bar re- 
 gained through the I'hins in the land of 
 the Goats, where the Listians lived, having 
 fled from the tyranny of the kings of Oas. 
 
 From Bar-bar was descended Egount, 
 from him Dir, from him Wow-sha, from 
 him He-lial, from him Rac-ca. And here 
 the line ran by female heirs, beginning in 
 Rac-ca's daughter, Hess, from whom was 
 descended Gil-gil, from whom was de- 
 scended Thussa, from whom was descend- 
 ed She, from whom was descended seven 
 generations in su'is; and it was lost in We- 
 ta-koo, but regained again through Thin 
 seed, and appeared in Re-both, and again 
 su'is extended through these generations: 
 Arfaxad, Sala, Eber, Prleg, Roo, Sa-rug, 
 Nahor and Terah; but in Terah the line was 
 lost, but regained by I'hin seed, from whom 
 sprang Geth, from whom sprang Gus, from 
 whom sprang Ra-bak, from whom sprang 
 Ya-shem, and by I'hin seed sprang Ti-lot, 
 and by I'hin seed Shi-ar, and by I'hin seed 
 Shir-ra, from whom descended Na-hor the 
 second, from whom sprang Abram. 
 
390 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 Abram was of pure blood, an I'huan; 
 and the light of su'is had been with his 
 forefathers and foremothers since the flood, 
 and he was large and red, like new copper, 
 and had black hair and long beard, fierce 
 to look upon; but his soul was gentle as a 
 woman's. Abram could see without eyes 
 and hear without ears, knowing things by 
 the light of God which dwelt in him. 
 Wherefore God chose Abram to gather to- 
 gether the Faithists in Arabin'ya and the 
 adjacent countries, even as he had appoint- 
 ed Po in Jaffeth. 
 
 In those days there were great kings 
 and men of great learning, and they had 
 books of learning and instruments for 
 measuring things far and near. Abram 
 knew of these things, for he had been a ser- 
 vant in a king's family where learned men 
 and women congregated. And so, know- 
 ing the power of God was upon him, he 
 ran away in his youth, and lived amongst 
 the Listians, who made baskets and trink- 
 ets in the forests, which they sold to the 
 kings' peoples. 
 
 And God spake to Abram, saying: Fear 
 not for men of learning; neither grieve 
 thou for the learning in books. When they 
 are forgotten, thy words and thy labors will 
 overspread the world. 
 
 And God lived with Abram, teaching 
 him and working miracles through him. 
 And it so happened that the Listians in 
 their rambles, selling wares, told the slaves 
 of the kings about the wonders of Abram. 
 And the slaves fled from bondage and 
 went into the wilderness in search of 
 Abram. And when they came before him, 
 he spake unto them, day by day, as they 
 came, saying: 
 
 Why have ye come? I called you not! 
 And when they could not answer, Abram 
 said unto them: God brought you. Man 
 of himself doeth nothing. Search, then, 
 the records of your generations; for ye are 
 descended from the Faithists of old. 
 
 And they searched, and found not one 
 had come but was descended from before 
 the time of Zarathustra. 
 
 Abram said: Think not that God cometh 
 to one man alone; when he provideth a 
 voice he also provideth ears and hearts. 
 Because ye have been faithful unto him, he 
 calleth you to deliverance from your ene- 
 mies, who are God's enemies also. 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 When there had come to Abram in She- 
 a-do-wan four thousand five hundred souls, 
 God spake to Abram, saying: Come, now; 
 I will lead thee and thy people into anoth- 
 er country. 
 
 God led Abram away from He-sa, his 
 native place, where he was a maker of 
 baskets, and took him to the ancient land 
 of Ham, which had been devastated by 
 Druks, before the flood, as the name signi- 
 fieth; whereafter God surnamed him Abra- 
 ham, and made him chief rab'bah over the 
 Faithists of Arabin'ya. 
 
 So Abram led his people thence and 
 came into Lower Howd-Lutz. And it came 
 to pass that in the next year after they de- 
 parted out of She-a-do-wan a famine came 
 upon the land, and the enemies of God 
 were cut off, and could not pursue Abram 
 and his people. God said: Because they 
 have not raised up one out of the sons of 
 Ham, thy name shall be, henceforth, Abra- 
 Ham, and it shall be testimony in thou- 
 sands of years of my records in the libra- 
 ries of heaven. After this it was that 
 Abram was called Abraham, and he built 
 altars of worship and altars of sacrifice, ac- 
 cording to the commandments of God. 
 
 Now it came to pass in the early days of 
 Abraham, he told his brothers that the 
 light and power of God were with him; 
 and, though others believed in Abraham, 
 yet Lot, Abram's brother, and Lot, 
 Abram's nephew, believed not in Abraham, 
 saying of him: He was born naturally, 
 and is wise of his own judgment. 
 
 God said to Abraham: Behold, it is an 
 easy matter to commune with spirits, but 
 to judge righteously of them is not so 
 easy. For which reason thou and thy wife, 
 and one hundred picked men, shall go and 
 visit Sodom and Gomorrah in the valley 
 of Siddim, where Lot lives. 
 
 And Abraham and his people went as 
 commanded by God, and visited the cities 
 of Sodom and Gomorrah; and God spake 
 privily to Abraham, saying: I will destroy 
 these cities, for they are as hells for evil 
 spirits; but Lot shall escape for thy sake. 
 
 And when they came to Sodom, behold, 
 angels walked amongst the people, and the 
 people knew they were angels, but cared 
 not for them. And there were laws made 
 by Bera, king of Sodom, regarding the be- 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ w- "«»» 
 
 391 
 
 havior betwixt angels and men. And Abra- 
 ham, being pressed by the presence of God, 
 said unto his people: Behold, there are an- 
 gels that love to dwell in lust, and to par- 
 take with mortals; to eat with them; to lie 
 down with them, and to partake in all un- 
 godly pleasures. 
 
 God, through his angels, rained down 
 fire and brimstone on Sodom and Gomor- 
 rah, and they were burnt and destroyed. 
 Lot, the elder, escaped, and went and lived 
 in a cave. 
 
 Now, after Abraham and his people 
 were returned to Jireh, his camp, and it 
 was night, God said to Abraham: Be thou 
 steadfast, and show thy people that they 
 may understand my words. 
 
 And whilst they were yet praying before 
 the altar, God withdrew from Abraham, 
 and suffered the evil angels, who had fol- 
 lowed them from Sodom and Gomorrah, 
 to draw near about the altar. And one of 
 the angels clothed in a great light, with a 
 crown, and with sparkling gems, appeared, 
 so all the multitude of people could look 
 upon him. 
 
 Abraham said: Who art thou? And 
 the spirit said: I am thy God, ruler of hea- 
 ven and earth! Abraham said: I am thy 
 servant; what wouldst thou? And the spirit 
 said: Thou shalt take thine only son, 
 Isaac, and thy hosts who were with thee at 
 Sodom and Gomorrah, and go with me 
 whither I will lead thee, for I have a great 
 work for thee. 
 
 Abraham said: Whatsoever thou puttest 
 upon me to do, that will I do. 
 
 So in the morning Abraham and his son 
 Isaac, and the hosts who had been with 
 Abraham to Sodom and Gomorrah, as- 
 sembled together. And Abraham spake, 
 saying: Whither, O God? The spirit an- 
 swered, saying: Take sticks and a fire- 
 brand and come thou to the summit of 
 yonder hill, for thou shalt restore the rites 
 of burnt offerings. So Abraham told what 
 God had said, and they started, and Isaac 
 carried the bundle of willows, such as 
 basket-makers use, saying: This will light 
 the large pieces; but what wilt thou burn 
 for an offering, O father? And Abraham 
 said: God will provide. 
 
 And when they ascended to the place 
 Abraham gathered logs and heaped them 
 up, and Isaac placed the willows. 
 
 Then spake the spirit, saying: What 
 shall a man love above all things in the 
 world? And Abraham said: His Creator. 
 And the spirit said: For which reason thou 
 shalt offer thine only son, Isaac, as a burnt 
 offering. And it shall be testimony before 
 thy people that thou wilt obey God even 
 to the sacrifice of thine own flesh and kin. 
 
 Abraham said: Show me that thou art 
 God, that I may not err; for I have been 
 commanded not to kill. 
 
 And the spirit departed away from 
 Abraham, perceiving that he knew the 
 higher law. Anl Isaac was grieved at 
 heart, for he desired to witness what a sac- 
 rifice was. And the people, seeing a ram 
 near at hand, went and caught it, and 
 slaughtered it, and sprinkled the blood on 
 the sacrifice, and they lighted the fire and 
 roasted the flesh, and took it and gave it 
 to the poor. 
 
 And Abraham called the place Jehovih- 
 Jireh, and they returned to the camp; and 
 Abraham, being moved of God, spake be- 
 fore the people. 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 Abraham said: This testimony declare 
 I unto you, whereof witnesses are of your 
 own brethren, that even the chosen of God 
 can be deceived by evil angels; for they 
 can take any name and form; and, having 
 no fear of God before them, declare false- 
 hood for truth and darkness for light. 
 And, as ye have seen, the evilest of cities, 
 even as the purest, may be the abiding 
 place of angels. For which reason ye shall 
 not seek signs and miracles, for these may 
 be of evil spirits, even to the showing of 
 their bodies and of conversing learnedly. 
 It is not in the power of man to know by 
 words and signs, or by oaths or promises, 
 what is truth. 
 
 One thing hath the Father created with- 
 al, which is His Own Light. Wherefore 
 be ye believing toward men and angels; 
 and wherein they teach ye according to 
 the Father, which is life unto all, and happi- 
 ness unto all, they are holy. If man or an- 
 gel say: Visit the sick, and administer to 
 the distressed, follow his advice, for it is of 
 the Father. But if man or angel say: Do 
 thou thus, and thou shalt have profit, or 
 glory, or applause, obey him not, for he ad- 
 
392 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 viseth for thyself and not for the brother- 
 hood of men. He is not of God. For spir- 
 its will come in disguise of your fathers 
 and mothers who are dead, professing love 
 and profit to you. Believe them not, save 
 they teach you to sacrifice self for the good 
 of others. 
 
 The wicked in heart, having profited in 
 herds, and in gold and silver, say: Behold, 
 God hath blessed me! But I say unto 
 you, they are cursed, and not of God. 
 Has he gathered you here together be- 
 cause ye were rich? Ye were slaves, and in 
 poverty; sick, and in bondage. And he 
 came and delivered you. Be ye like unto 
 him, and he will abide with you. If a 
 man come, saying: Behold, this is my coat; 
 give it to me! Thou shalt say: Prove thy- 
 self as to who thou art. But if a man 
 come to thee, saying: Thy herd has gone 
 astray; thou shalt not say to him: Prove 
 thyself as to who thou art. But go thou, 
 and see after thy herd. If. a spirit say: Be- 
 hold, I am thy father, say to him: It is 
 well; what wouldst thou? And when he an- 
 swereth thee, consider if his words be of 
 God. And if his words be not of God, 
 which are for the glory of the Creator, 
 thou shalt challenge him to prove himself. 
 
 As God is captain of heaven and earth 
 unto all righteous souls, so is there a satan 
 who is captain over evil spirits. And inas- 
 much as the kings' peoples have not faith 
 in the Father, their souls fall a prey to sa- 
 tan and his hosts. 
 
 Let not any man flatter himself, saying: 
 Behold, I have joined the Faithists; my 
 soul shall escape hell. For in that day and 
 hour God may be putting him to the test, 
 to see if his heart be for good works and 
 holiness. For as ye profess God, ye are 
 doubly bound to practice godliness in your 
 behavior towards men and angels. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 When Lot the younger escaped out of 
 Sodom, he halted in a small city called 
 Ben-ah, and tarried there whilst Sodom 
 and Gomorrah were being consumed with 
 fire; and because he was saved, he called 
 the place Zoar, because he was a worship- 
 per of the doctrines of Zarathustra, who 
 was called in the Fonecean language Zoa- 
 raastra. And the place was called Zoar for 
 
 more than a thousand years. When Lot 
 departed out of Zoar, there went with him 
 two tribes, and there were born of the 
 house of Lot, offspring to the two tribes 
 who accompanied him, and these became 
 the nations in after years known as Moab- 
 ites and Ammonites, who were of the Fo- 
 neceans, as their names show, and they 
 followed the doctrines of Zarathustra. 
 
 In former years God appeared to Abra- 
 ham in a dream, and said unto Abraham: 
 Thou shalt be a father to many peoples. 
 
 When Abraham awoke he told Sarai, 
 his wife, and she was troubled, being bar- 
 ren, and she prayed God for Abraham's 
 sake. Now it happened that Hagar, 
 Sarai's maid, had a son, and called his 
 name Ishmael; and Sarai was jealous of 
 Hagar, and abused her during pregnancy. 
 And God spake to Abraham, saying: 
 Because of the hatred betwixt thy women, 
 Hagars' son will be as a wild man; his hand 
 shall be against every man, and every man 
 shall be against him. 
 
 Abraham said: How, O God? And God 
 said: I told thee thou shouldst be a father 
 to many peoples, and thou told Sarai, thy 
 wife. Now Sarai became vain in her di- 
 sires for offspring, and, in her eagerness, 
 she opened the door of thy house to satan, 
 and hence this matter is upon thee. Go, 
 therefore, my son, and reconcile thy wo- 
 men. And Abraham told Sarai what God 
 had said. And Sarai inquired of Abraham, 
 saying: Before God, tell me is Ishmael 
 thy son? And God shall judge betwixt us. 
 Abraham said: Teach me, O God, to an- 
 swer Sarai, that I may reconcile them. And 
 God said: Behold, thy Creator is the Fa- 
 ther of all the living. 
 
 And when Abraham told Sarai God's 
 words, she cried in sorrow and repentance, 
 saying: Thou art wise, O God! For what 
 matter is it to me, since I know that Ish- 
 mael is thy son, and Hagar is thy daugh 
 ter? 
 
 And Sarai went to Hagar and said: O 
 my sister, I have sinned before God. I saw 
 thy son, and knew the Creator gave him, 
 but I turned against mine own soul, ?nd 
 loved not thy treasure. 
 
 Hagar said: Saidst thy God that Abra- 
 ham was father to my child? And Sarai 
 said: Nay, O Hagar. Hagar said: Nei- 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 .OROS' RECORD 
 
 393 
 
 ther said I thy husband was Ishma^'s fa- 
 ther. 
 
 So they were reconciled, and W right 
 of the beginning of Abraham's nations, 
 Ishmael was Abraham's son be^re God, 
 but not in the flesh. 
 
 Sarai had a son, and he was called Is- 
 aac, because he was born of Sarai after she 
 had passed the time of child-bearing. And 
 when Hagar beheld that Sarai bore a son, 
 Hagar became jealous for Ishmael's sake, 
 and she wept before Abraham. Hagar said: 
 
 I am an Arabin'yan woman, and I left 
 my people for thee. Behold, I am not fa- 
 vored of thy God. Abraham said: Have I 
 not been as a father *o thee ana thy son? 
 Yea, when all peopl° reviled thee because 
 thou hadst a child in maidenhood, laying it 
 on me, I denied thee not, nor justified my- 
 self before the kings' people, suffering 
 these things for God's sake, and thine, and 
 thy child's. Complain not, then, against 
 my house, no* my wife, nor my son, Isaac; 
 all things are of the Creator. 
 
 And Hagar was pacified for a season, 
 but afterward returned to grief and jeal- 
 ousy, and finally resolved to depart away 
 from Abraham's house. Then said Abra- 
 ham to Hagar: The matter lieth with thee. 
 And I give thee, according to the custom 
 of the Arabin'yans, a jug with water, and 
 bread and blankets. So Hagar persisted, 
 and Abraham provided her, and she de- 
 parted, taking Ishmael with her, and she 
 went into Par-an and dwelt there. 
 
 In those days Arabin'ya was divided 
 into many kingdoms, some having one city 
 and some two, and some as many as six 
 cities. And they were constantly at war 
 one with another, and the victors always 
 changed the names of the kingdoms. The 
 largest and most powerful always called it- 
 self the Sun Kingdom, after the manner of 
 the Par'si'e'ans. In the Sun Kingdom 
 dwelt men and women of learning, and 
 they had tablets and books and maps relat- 
 ing to heaven and earth, which books, 
 maps and tablets were kept in a library, 
 the summit of which building was used as 
 an oracle for consulting with the spirits, 
 called Lords of heaven. For which pur- 
 pose, a man or woman, whose head had 
 been flattened in infancy, sat by a table 
 covered with sand, whereon the spirits 
 
 wrote with the finger. And the person so 
 communing with the spirits was called 
 ^E'jin in the South Arabin'yan language, 
 and was in rank next to the Sun King. 
 Now, no matter what wars took place, the 
 library, the temple of the oracle and the 
 ^E'jin were sacred, and never suffered harm 
 even betwixt enemies. 
 
 The kings kept scribes whose business 
 was to write and to translate, and to keep 
 the records of the kingdom. Besides these, 
 there were gatherers of news, who held the 
 second rank of scribes. Now when Abra- 
 ham and his people came into Arabin'ya, 
 the matter was entered in the records of 
 the different kingdoms, with especial ref- 
 erence to Abraham's professing to hear the 
 voice of God, for he had not a flat head, 
 and moreover, had good judgment of his 
 own, quite unlike the iE'jins in the tem- 
 ples. But because Abraham gave no coun- 
 sel as to war or to earthly gain, he was not 
 favored by any of the kings, and suffered 
 to go his way unmolested. 
 
 When Sodom and Gomorrah were de- 
 stroyed, the kings' people heaped the blame 
 of it upon Abraham's head, and there rose 
 up enemies against Abraham in those re- 
 gions. And they also accused him of at- 
 tempting to burn his son Isaac as a sacri- 
 fice to his God, after the manner of the 
 heathen of old. And they accused Abra- 
 ham of being the father of Ishmael, by his 
 servant-maid, and of driving Hagar and 
 Ishmael away to Par-an after he tired of 
 her. And these accusations, and many 
 more of like wickedness, were heard of by 
 the news gatherers, the scribes, and they 
 wrote them down, and their records were 
 entered in the libraries of the kings of 
 Arabin'ya. 
 
 Abraham perceived these matters, and 
 he wept before God, saying: Alas, O God, 
 would that I had great learning and could 
 write my record truthfully before men! 
 God answered him, saying: 
 
 Thy faith being in Jehovih, it is well 
 with thee. In thousands of years, one Ezra 
 shall send his scribes into these countries 
 to gather news, even as do the kings of this 
 day. And his scribes shall translate from 
 these records, with all their errors and 
 falsehoods, and Ezra shall publish the mat- 
 ter as the history of The Deliverance. 
 
394 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 Abraham hearing this of God, bowed 
 down his head and wept, saying: Thy will 
 be done! And God comforted him, say- 
 ing: The God of heaven and earth will 
 come afterward and render the records of 
 thy life, which are not dead, but of life 
 everlasting. Since, then, thy people shall 
 be honored by even that which shall come 
 from their enemies, how much greater will 
 be their glory when God of heaven speak- 
 eth for thee and them! 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 Abraham inquired of God concerning 
 the peoples of the kings and of the Faith- 
 ists. And God said: Whomsoever I lead 
 to thee shall be thine; thou shalt henceforth 
 be father to all men and women and chil- 
 dren that are thine. And they shall be thy 
 family. But all other peoples shall not be 
 thine; nor shalt thou be to them a father 
 nor a prophet. Neither shalt thou make 
 laws for the kings' peoples; nor laws be- 
 twixt thy people and them. Of thine own 
 people shalt thou be, and for thine own 
 people shalt thou be forever. Nor shall 
 thy people have anything in common with 
 the kings' peoples, nor any other peo- 
 ples with them; nor enter into treaties, 
 nor alliances with them in any way what- 
 soever. Both thy labor and the labor of 
 thy people are for Jehovih. through thy 
 God. 
 
 But touching the intercourse betwixt 
 thine and the kings' peoples, be circum- 
 spect to the value of a fraction in buying 
 and selling, to give the full value. Neither 
 suffer my chosen to accept presents, or 
 otherwise to become obligated to other 
 peoples, for it is the law of God. For it 
 shall not be said by the kings' peoples: Be- 
 hold, I made them! For I say unto thee, 
 neither kings nor rich men make the peo- 
 ple of thy God. 
 
 Whosoever would give thee gifts, let 
 liim quit his people and come and dwell 
 with my people in person and spirit. I 
 cannot be put off with money and with 
 gifts, like a peevish child or a wanton wo- 
 man. Shall a man say: Here are gifts 
 for thy God, he is a good enough God! 
 But as for my soul it is too good to give 
 to thee or thy God. 
 
 Neither shalt thou suffer thy people to 
 marry with the kings' peoples, for the same 
 reason. But whosoever will marry my 
 daughters, let him come and dwell, first, 
 with my people, proving that he hath for- 
 saken all the idolatrous gods for Jehovih's 
 sake. It shall be the same of thy sons; if 
 they desire strange damsels for wives, they 
 shall first bring them to dwell one year 
 pmongst my chosen. 
 
 Abraham inquired concerning govern- 
 ment. And God said unto Abraham: To 
 each people to dwell together in peace, 
 order, harmony and love; being disciplined 
 to these, what more is required? Govern- 
 ment belongeth to the kings' peoples. 
 
 Abraham said: O God, teach thou me, 
 for I am as one in the dark cellar groping 
 about. Behold, my people are unlearned. 
 
 God said: Who is learned? I say unto 
 thee, he who knoweth the stars and the 
 rocks, and mountains and valleys, and all 
 that is living and dead, and the tongues of 
 the ancients, but knoweth not the Creator, 
 is unlearned. But he that knoweth the Cre- 
 ator is learned indeed. Better is it that thy 
 people dwell in tents and under trees; and 
 their children roll on the ground, and die 
 not, but grow strong in person and in spirit 
 for the glory of the Creator, than to dwell 
 as the kings' peoples, in magnificent cities, 
 and in lust and death. Before thy God, 
 thy people are a most learned people. 
 
 Abraham inquired of God concern- 
 ing servitude. And God answered him, 
 saying: There is but one Master, even Je- 
 hovih; thy people shall be His servants 
 only. But all people have loves; a damsel 
 saith to her lover: I will be thy servant, 
 and he marrieth her. A man saith to an- 
 other: Thy judgment is greater than mine; 
 I will be thy servant. And the man taketh 
 him in love to work for him. Therefore, 
 for convenience' sake, thou mayest say, 
 master and servant. Nevertheless, my 
 chosen shall not, in fact, have either mas- 
 ters or servants; for the one shall not have 
 authority over the other but by love and 
 free consent. 
 
 Abraham asked concerning the products 
 of labor. God said unto Abraham: Even 
 as I have said of servants and masters, so 
 also is it of the productions that come out 
 of the earth. Nothing belongeth to any 
 man, for all things are Mine, saith the Cre- 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 395 
 
 ator. Nevertheless, for convenience' sake, 
 thou mayest say: This is his product, or 
 that is such a one's product. But still he 
 holdeth it only by his Creator's consent. 
 
 Let all men render unto the Creator His 
 creations, for they are Jehovih's. 
 
 After that, Abraham said: Some men 
 grow flax, and some wool, and some corn; 
 but the seasons bring forth not alike unto 
 all. Others spin and weave; and others 
 make butter and cheese. And yet this hap- 
 peneth also: One man is strong, another 
 weak; one riseth with the sun and toileth all 
 day; another sitteth on the bank, .fishing. 
 Now when the products are brought in, 
 there are no two that are equal. 
 
 And God said: Every man's matter is 
 betwixt him and his Creator. According 
 to diligence and industry He rewardeth 
 them in the end. He that perceiveth this, 
 knoweth his heavenly Father; he that per- 
 ceiveth it not, dwelleth in darkness. 
 
 Abraham said: Shall the lazy be re- 
 buked, and they that shirk be upbraided? 
 And God said: Nay. -Let all thy peo- 
 ple bring their products and cast them be- 
 fore thee, saying: This is my sacrifice 
 unto Jehovih; distribute thou it. And if 
 some bring not anything, neither rebuke 
 them nor pity them; they are the sons and 
 daughters of thy God. And if some deco- 
 rate themselves with fine raiment, or jew- 
 els, censure them not; thy God searcheth 
 their hearts. 
 
 Abraham asked concerning lands. God 
 said: Consider thy God. Did I go to the 
 king and to the rich man and say: Give 
 thou me thy sons and daughters? Nay, but 
 I went to them that were despised by the 
 rich, and by the king, and I said: Come 
 ye! And they came. And when thou wert 
 come hither, did I say: Take thou the 
 king's lands, or the rich man's? Nay, but 
 I led thee to that which was neglected and 
 waste in the eyes of the kings' peoples, and 
 I said: This is thy inheritance. Sufficient 
 is it for thee and thy people to buy burying- 
 places for the dead, which shall not be dis- 
 turbed. But of all other lands, neither buv 
 nor sell. 
 
 And after thy people have improved a 
 place, and a king cometh against thee, say- 
 ing: Either by purchase or by battle, I will 
 have this land; thou shalt say: Nay, nei- 
 ther by purchase nor by battle, shalt thou 
 
 inherit that which is the Creator's; but if 
 thou desirest the land, then will I give it 
 thee without money and without battle. 
 
 And it shall come to pass upon my 
 chosen that they shall be driven from place 
 to place, whither I will lead them; and they 
 shall make the waste lands to bloom like 
 gardens, and the deserts to yield ample har- 
 vests; for they shall dig wells, and till the 
 soil, and prove unto the nations of the 
 earth the glory of my works. And they 
 shall be cut down and driven away, and 
 scattered, but I will come and gather them 
 together. Their places shall be inherited 
 by idolaters and worshippers of strange 
 gods, who will build mighty temples. But 
 my people shall not build in stone, nor 
 wood, nor iron, that shall endure; for they 
 shall go from place to place, proclaiming 
 me and my works; but where they have 
 been, there shall be nothing left on the 
 earth to show their labors. 
 
 But when I have taken them across all 
 the earth, and they are scattered as dust 
 before the wind, and no man can say: Here 
 is a nation of the children of Abraham, lo, 
 I will raise up my voice for them. And in 
 that day temples of stone and mortar of 
 the idolaters will still be standing. But a 
 voice shall go up from the whole earth, 
 even from the far-off nations of the earth, 
 saying: Who laid the foundations of the 
 temple of Jehovih! Who were the sons 
 and daughters of Abraham! 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 When Abraham's wife was getting old, 
 her ears were opened to hear the voice of 
 God. And God said unto her: Concern- 
 ing thy son, Isaac, hear thou thy God, 
 the God of Abraham: My labors are not 
 for a day, nor without judgment. Behold, 
 in the land of Es-seth, the place of thy hus- 
 band in his youth, have I built for many 
 generations concerning the seed of my peo- 
 ple. For which reason thy son Isaac shall 
 take a wife that shall inherit my voice. 
 Before the time of thy husband's father's 
 father, I sent my angel from heaven, say- 
 ing: Go thou and raise up an heir to 
 hear my voice, for I will dwell for a season 
 with the children of men. And my angel 
 fulfilled his part, and I have come and talk- 
 ed with thee and with thy husband face to 
 face. And even in like manner can I talk 
 
196 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 to thy son, Isaac, and he can hear me also. 
 And Isaac shall raise up heirs to my voice 
 through his wife, to whom he is not known 
 in this day. 
 
 Sarai told Abraham what God had said 
 to her; and so Abraham and Sarai went to 
 the altar which Abraham had built, and 
 they prayed alone; and God came and 
 spake, saying: What would ye? 
 
 And Abraham said: Concerning our 
 son Isaac's wife? And God said: Because 
 of the blessing of Sarai, thy wife, who hath 
 been upright all her days, I will give her 
 comfort in her old age. Send thy servant 
 to the land of thy fathers, and I will send 
 my angel with thy servant, and he shall 
 come to a maiden who shall be Isaac's 
 wife. 
 
 So, Abraham called his servant, who 
 was overseer over his goods, and he said 
 to him: Equip thyself with camels and 
 asses, and with servants, and with jewels I 
 will give thee, and go thou to Syria, the 
 land of my fathers, and bring a damsel 
 hither, who shall be Isaac's wife. 
 
 The overseer said unto Abraham: Alas 
 me! How shall, thy servant choose a wife 
 for thy son? Or, if choosing, how shall 
 he induce her to come so far? Abraham 
 said: That which God hath commanded 
 of me, I have told thee, save that God 
 saith: My angel shall go with thy servant, 
 and he shall not err. 
 
 So the servant of Abraham, in fear and 
 trembling, equipped himself with ten cam- 
 els and twenty asses, and with thirty ser- 
 vants, taking presents and goods, and de- 
 parted, and the journey occupied two and 
 twenty days. And all the while the over- 
 seer reasoned upon what he should say, 
 for he had misgivings that he was on a 
 fool's errand. Nevertheless, he prayed to 
 God that he might do his own part wisely. 
 So when he came near Abraham's father's 
 people, the angel of God spake in his heart, 
 saying: She that cometh with a pitcher on 
 her head shall be Isaac's wife. Say thou to 
 her: Wilt thou give me a drink? And 
 she will say: I will give thee a drink, and 
 also draw water for thy servants, and for 
 thy camels. 
 
 And the overseer looked, but saw no 
 damsel, and he marveled; but presently he 
 saw many damsels, one of whom had a 
 pitcher on her head; and his heart failed 
 
 him till she came near, and he said: Give 
 me a drink? And she gave him a drink 
 and said unto him: Thou art a stranger; 
 pray thee, I will water thy camels and give 
 drink unto thy servants. 
 
 And so she gave as she said: and when 
 she had finished, the overseer said unto 
 her: Who art thou? And she answered 
 him, and he perceived she was Isaac's 
 niece by Abraham's father's second wife, 
 but of no blood kin. And then she asked 
 the overseer who he was and whence he 
 came; and he told her, even from Abra- 
 ham, whose servant he was. So she invited 
 him to her people's house, and she ran 
 ahead with joy to tell who had come so far, 
 bringing word from Abraham. 
 
 Now when the camels and asses had 
 been fed, and straw spread for the travelers 
 to lie upon, and when repast was spread for 
 them to eat, the overseer rose up, perceiv- 
 ing the way of God, and he said: Till I 
 have spoken, eat not, but hear ye the words 
 of God. So he related the object of his 
 visit as commanded by God, and in refer- 
 ence to the angel of God, and the words 
 that came to him. And when he had finish- 
 ed, the power of God came upon the dam- 
 sel, whose name was Rebecca, and she 
 rose up and spake, saying: Isaac shall be 
 my husband, and I shall be his wife, for I 
 know this matter is of God! 
 
 So, accordingly, after some days, Re- 
 becca departed from her people, and by 
 her faith in God came to Abraham's home, 
 and Isaac took her to wife, and Sarai re- 
 joiced before God because of the light of 
 his kingdom through Abraham's heirs. 
 
 And God said unto Abraham: Divide 
 thou thy people into families of tens, and 
 families of hundreds, and families of thou- 
 sands, and give to each family one rab'bah, 
 and yet to all of them together one chief 
 rab'bah. And make thou thy will, and ap- 
 point thy son Isaac and his heirs by his 
 wife Rebecca to be thy successor, that my 
 voice may remain with my chosen. 
 
 And Abraham made his will and did in 
 all things as God commanded; and he fur- 
 ther made the rab'bahs officers in the rites 
 of Emethachavah, and communicated to 
 them the sacred name of the Creator, and 
 the plans of the upper and lower heavens, 
 the dominion of God and the dominion of 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ «*«.. «««-» 397 
 
 satan, which were kept secret with the rab'- 
 bah. 
 
 God said: Behold, there is a time to 
 clear up all things, present and past: Were 
 Abraham father to Hagar's son, Ishmael, 
 and had he been true to the law of sacri- 
 fice amongst the heathen, then, Ishmael, 
 being first-born, would have been chosen 
 for the burnt offering. 
 
 CHAPTER XI. 
 HISTORY OF BRAHMA. 
 
 These are the races of Brahma: Gons, 
 Shone, Gamma, This, Ram, Zerl, Mex, 
 Shriv, Vat, Eun and Delta, each a thousand 
 years. Of Gamma and Delta, in the upper 
 country (Wa-wa-o-gan), were born Gu-sem 
 and Hagu by Gamma, and by Delta, Yots, 
 Rammu, Borgl, Otesiv and Riv. Gamma 
 was of the fourth descent of Git-ow; and 
 Delta the third descent of E'wangga, — 
 I'hins from the land of Jaffeth. 
 
 The ascending caste of light in the lower 
 country (Ho-jon-da-tivi) was by Ram, 
 first; then Zerl, I'hin migrants from the 
 land of Ham; then Shriv, then Vat, then 
 Gons and Eun, the half-breed Druks; then 
 Shone, and then This. 
 
 The Zarathustrians who survived the 
 darkness of the cycle of Fragapatti were: 
 
 Zarathustra from the races of Shone and 
 This; and of Zarathustra, Haman; of Ha- 
 inan, Wonchakaka, who begat Zoar, who 
 begat Theo, who begat Andassah, who be- 
 gat Mur, who begat Romsat; these were 
 tribes of the Zarathustrian order, who re- 
 jected idols, Lords, Gods, Saviors, kings, 
 queens and all other rulers on the earth, 
 or in the heavens above the earth, save Or- 
 mazd, the Creator, and in Him had faith 
 that to do righteously, and practice good 
 works, made the nearest perfect man. The 
 Light by the Voice was lost in the sixth 
 hundredth year after Zarathustra, but re- 
 gained in Romsat by the I'hins, whence 
 came the tribe Lojon, who begat Thone- 
 galahogreif, who begat Subinij, and from 
 him to Wowthutchisubinij, which were 
 forty-four generations, and the Voice al- 
 ways came to the chief rab'bah. 
 
 In Chusa-king the Voice was lost, but 
 again restored by the I'hins, whose heirs 
 were called Wah-sin-chung, who begat 
 Avar, who begat Irigavagna, who begat 
 
 Ben-haoma, from whom was descended 
 thirty generations, the chief rab'bah of 
 whom could hear the Voice. Ben-haoma 
 numbered the Faithists of his day, and 
 there were of them four thousand, men, 
 women and children, and all other nations 
 and tribes in Vind'yu were idolaters. 
 
 Through the descendants of Romsat the 
 Voice was again regained by the I'hins, 
 through a tribe called Shiriviyata, who be- 
 gat Them-saga, who begat Friavamarga- 
 lum, who wed with the I'hins and begat 
 Thace, who begat with the I'hins Anu, 
 who begat with the I'hins Maha, who be- 
 gat with the I'hins Brahma, who had both 
 voice and power from the Father. And he 
 was called Brahma because of his great 
 wisdom. 
 
 The angels of Ormazd had prophesied, 
 saying: Out of thy seed shall come one 
 called Brahma, who shall have su'is with 
 power. Things that were revealed in Zara- 
 thustra have been lost, but shall be recov- 
 ered in Brahma. 
 
 Romsat had prophesied, moreover: 
 With the coming, of Brahma is the end of 
 the I'hin race in Shem (Vind'yu). 
 
 Brahma said: Have all men stars? Be- 
 hold, since my childhood up, I have had a 
 star above my forehead. 
 
 No man could answer Brahma. They 
 said: Brahma is foolish, with all his wis- 
 dom. 
 
 Brahma asked the star: Who art thou? 
 
 God said: I am thy star; I am the light 
 of the second heavens. 
 
 Brahma asked: What is thy name, O 
 star, thou mysterious light? God said: 
 Call me Ormazd; I am the same light that 
 spoke to Zarathustra in the olden time. 
 
 Brahma asked: Who art thou, O Or- 
 mazd, thou voice of light? God said: With 
 one only shalt thou commune, thy Creator. 
 One only shalt thou worship, He who 
 created thee alive. 
 
 Brahma said: Why hast thou taken up 
 thy abode above my head? God said: At- 
 tain thou to be one with thy Creator, in 
 wisdom, and goodness, and purity, and 
 thou shalt answer thine own questions. 
 
 Then Brahma applied to the rab'bah, 
 the Zarathustrian priests, and he learned 
 abnegation of self, and the rites and cere- 
 monies of the ancients. 
 
398 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 When Brahma was grown up, God said 
 to him: Arise, my son, and I will lead 
 thee into another country, where thou 
 shalt marry, and settle down for a long 
 season. 
 
 Brahma said: Peaceful have been my 
 slumbers, and joyous my wakeful hours all 
 my life. I have made labor a pleasure, and 
 I give all I have to the poor, doing thy 
 commandments with all my wisdom and 
 strength. From my youth up I killed not 
 any living creature of thine that walks on 
 the earth, or swimmeth in the waters, or 
 flieth in the air. Neither ate I of anything 
 that had ever breathed the breath of life; 
 and I have been most abstemious in plain 
 food and water only, according to the Zar- 
 athustrian law. Hear Thou me, O Or- 
 mazd; for I will break my soul unto Thee, 
 and hold nothing back. Ormazd said: It 
 is well. 
 
 Brahma said: Woe is me, if my soul 
 turneth toward woman! Was I not wed to 
 Thee, O Ormazd? Was I not Thy Bride- 
 groom from my youth up? Why, then, 
 protectest not Thou me unto Thyself? Or- 
 mazd said: In times past I raised up many 
 an iesu, and they, were without flesh de- 
 sires all their days. Such men could not 
 perpetuate the earth; they were good for 
 their day. Zarathustra was an ie-su. My 
 Light is now for them that can perpetuate. 
 All things are possible in my hands. Grieve 
 not, nor smother out any talent I created 
 unto the pure in flesh. 
 
 Brahma said: If I have a woman, O 
 Ormazd, may I not lose my love for Thee? 
 Ormazd said: By faith in Me thou shalt 
 triumph by the road I marked out for thee 
 since before thou wert born. Arise, then, 
 O Brahma, and follow thy star. I will lead 
 thee. 
 
 Brahma said: Can there be another 
 way than by celibacy? Can a married man 
 serve Ormazd? 
 
 So Brahma traveled, and came into the 
 country of Etchoyosin, where lay the 
 mountains of Talavitcha, under King Tya- 
 ma, who had enforced the Zarathustrian re- 
 ligion with sword and spear, and with 
 chains and death, being himself sole inter- 
 preter. When Brahma came to Au'watcha, 
 he halted to inquire the way to the high 
 priest's house, that he might be absolved 
 for twenty days in Tyama's kingdom, ac- 
 
 cording to law, paying the price as appor- 
 tioned for strangers. 
 
 In answer to his summons, there came 
 to the gate, the damsel Yu-tiv, fairest of 
 women, draped, also, to go before the 
 priest for confession. Brahma inquired of 
 her concerning the priest and the tax. Yu- 
 tiv informed him, and, moreover, said: I 
 am going hither, and shall delight to lead 
 thee to the place. 
 
 So Brahma went with Yu-tiv, and when 
 they were gone a little way she said unto 
 him: Whence earnest thou, and what is thy 
 mission? Perhaps I may serve thee. Be- 
 hold, I see a star above thy head I 
 Brahma said: Seest thou a star? Now I 
 say unto thee, there is an old legend that 
 the pure in heart, looking upward, oft see 
 their own paroda, and think it belongeth to 
 another. Yu-tiv reassured Brahma she saw 
 a star, whereupon Brahma took heart and 
 said: 
 
 Yea, I have a star, and the Voice of Or- 
 mazd cometh to me at times. For some 
 years I strove to be a priest, for I saw the 
 wickedness of the world, and, moreover, 
 the tyranny and tortures of the ha'ko, 
 and my soul cried out for the op- 
 pressed who had faith in the Great Spirit 
 more than in the priests. And Ormazd 
 came to me and said. Brahma, My son, 
 forsake thy studies, and take thy broad-axe 
 and go and hew logs. Behold, I will come 
 to thee some time, and thou shalt bless the 
 earth. So I gave up my studies and be- 
 came a hewer of wood, living abstemiously 
 day and night, and praying and striving 
 with all my soul and with all my strength 
 to purge myself of all earthly thoughts. 
 So I grew, as thou beholdest, to be a large 
 man of great strength. But, alas, evil 
 overtook me; my soul desired a woman. 
 And I cried out unto Ormazd, saying: 
 Why hast Thou put this matter upon Thy 
 son? Lo, I strove to be wedded to Thee 
 only; I shut my eyes to all the earth, but 
 Thou hast suffered me to fall. Rescue 
 Thou me, I pray. 
 
 Then spake Ormazd to me. saying: Be- 
 hold, I have revealed My word through 
 such as have no earth desires; but that time 
 is past. I will now prove unto the nations 
 of the earth that I have power in directing 
 the flesh, that heirs may be born unto Me. 
 Arise, therefore, and go whither I will lead 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ «*-o. «cob B 
 
 399 
 
 thee, for thou shalt take a wife and raise 
 up seven sons, and I will deliver My people 
 unto liberty. 
 
 So I rose up and walked after the light 
 of my star; thus far have I come, but how 
 much farther I must go I know not; but I 
 will go to the end of the earth if Ormazd 
 require it of me. 
 
 Yu-tiv said: I pity thee, O man! One 
 so holy should never with woman wed. To 
 win such a man's love, the best of women 
 would forget her God! To bear thee one 
 child, instead of seven, a woman would 
 cleave the earth in twain. It would be like 
 peopling the world with Gods and God- 
 desses. O promise me, stranger, thou wilt 
 turn from such unholy desires. I know 
 not what moveth me past all modesty thus 
 to speak to thee, but before Ormazd, Cre- 
 ator of heaven and earth, erst thou earnest 
 to my father's gate a voice spake in mine 
 ear, saying: Quickly, thou, put on thy 
 robes for confession, and hasten to the 
 priest. I tell thee, O man, to save thee, 
 the angels of Ormazd came to me. It is 
 true that two can see more than one. 
 
 Brahma said: Who art thou, woman? 
 Yu-tiv said: A weaver of mats; no more. 
 My father liveth in yonder thatch; my 
 mother's soul ascended to heaven, giving 
 me birth. She was of the I'hins. From 
 place to place my father and I have been 
 driven; all the ills of earth are written on 
 my soul. And the rudeness of men; the 
 light-heartedness of women! By day and 
 by night my soul crieth out for the miseries 
 of the earth. O the sins of the earth! O 
 the death of little infants! O the trials of 
 the poor! O the suffering of the sick! O 
 the anguish of the imprisoned! O stranger, 
 stranger, stranger! People not this world 
 more! Let us turn our souls upward; to 
 Nirvana; to the regions of endless paradise! 
 To the voices of angels and Gods! To wis- 
 dom that erreth not; to music never dis- 
 cordant! To love that never separateth! 
 Never! 
 
 Brahma said: Now I beseech Thee, O 
 Ormazd, that I may never marry! But be- 
 cause Thou hast raised up here so fair a 
 woman, and withal so wise, give me leave 
 that I may dwell near at hand! 
 
 Then spake Ormazd, out of the midst 
 of the voices of their stars, saying: Hold up 
 
 thy hand, O man! Hold up thy hand, O 
 woman! And they held up their hands, 
 and Ormazd said. I am the Father, and ye 
 are My children. That I may have joy, 
 dwell ye near together. 
 
 Now after this, Brahma and she pro- 
 ceeded to the priest's house and made their 
 sacrifices, and returned and came to Yu- 
 tiv's father's house, and the father's name 
 was Ali-egan-is, called Ali. And Yu-tiv 
 told her father all that had happened, but 
 Brahma said little. Ali said: What the All 
 Light doeth is well done. My house is 
 ample. Brahma shall sojourn as long as 
 he desireth. 
 
 Brahma said: Of mine own accord I 
 am not master of many words. When it 
 pleaseth Ormazd to speak with me, I will 
 raise my voice. Then Yu-tiv spread mats 
 and provided food, and set it before Brah- 
 ma, and he ate; and after that they said 
 prayers according to the laws of the king, 
 and then retired to sleep. 
 
 When morning came, Brahma and Yu- 
 tiv rose early, and came and spake togeth- 
 er, in joy greeting, and they were moved 
 to shake hands, though such a proceeding 
 was not according to the fashion of the 
 country, save betwixt relatives. And it 
 came to pass that there were much togeth- 
 er during the day, and in the evening they 
 walked together, but touched not one the 
 other. Now on the second day, when they 
 walked together, they held hands. And on 
 the third day they joined arms. And on 
 the fourth day they kissed each other. And 
 after that they were only separated at night 
 when they slept But it came to pass that 
 they were so delighted with each other that 
 they sat up nearly all night, so as not to be 
 separate. And all the while they neglected 
 not their devotion to Ormazd; but finally 
 they sat up all night, sleeping not, save in 
 each other's arms. 
 
 Yu-tiv said: Since we sit up all night, 
 it is wiser to sit on mats than on stools. 
 Brahma said: It is wiser. So they pro- 
 vided mats, half raised and half spread 
 down, for a season, and finally laid the mats 
 full length and laid down together. 
 
 But Brahma followed his trade in that 
 country, and it came to pass they had a 
 son born to them, and his name was Whe- 
 ish; and in time another son, and his name 
 
400 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 LORDS RECORD 
 
 was Vus, and then Git-un, and Vede, and 
 Oos, and Sa-it. 
 
 Now after they lived together as man 
 and wife, the voice of Ormazd came not to 
 Brahma; though the angel of Ormazd re- 
 mained, and at times talked to both Brah- 
 ma and Yu-tiv, his wife. Now during all 
 the time, until after the birth of the sixth 
 son, Yu-tiv had faith in Ormazd, and was 
 a Faithist, in her whole heart. But during 
 all these years she had only communion 
 with the angels, and withal had suffered 
 many hardships in common with Brahma. 
 And their love abated not, and Yu-tiv be- 
 lieved in her husband, and encouraged his 
 aspirations. He had said to her ten thou- 
 sand times: I know Ormazd will come; 
 through me will He deliver the Faithists 
 out of bondage. And she believed in him; 
 and believed these things would come to 
 pass, and believed her sons would have the 
 Voice of the Creator with them also. But 
 after the birth of the sixth child, Yu-tiv lost 
 faith in the Father! She said: All my life 
 I have been in error. There is no All Per- 
 son. There is no Voice, save the spirits of 
 the dead, and they know little more of 
 heaven than we. The Creator is dumb, 
 like the wind; His voice is like the 
 wind, it speaketh nothing. And after 
 that, she ceased to use the name Or- 
 mazd, or Father, but said, Eolin, after the 
 manner of the ancients. And Brahma 
 ceased more to speak in presence of Yu-tiv 
 of the coming of Ormazd to himself; and 
 he also adopted the name Eolin, signify- 
 ing, like the wind, void of shape or person. 
 Whilst this state of unbelief was upon them, 
 they had another child born to them, and 
 they called his name Hog, signifying, Fact, 
 or without inspiration; an animal that root- 
 eth in the ground. 
 
 Yu-tiv weaned Hog when he was three 
 years old, and, on the day following, the 
 voice of God came to Brahma, saying: 
 Brahma! Brahma! And Brahma said: 
 Here am I, O Eolin. And the Father said: 
 Be thou faithful another eighteen years! 
 I shall be with thee to the end! 
 
 Brahma was so delighted, he ran home 
 and told Yu-tiv, but she rejoiced not; she 
 made no answer. Silently she looked up- 
 ward for a long while, and then she said: 
 Eighteen years! Hog will be twenty-one. 
 And thou and I will be old. 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 For eighteen years more Ormazd spake 
 not to Brahma, but Brahma remained 
 faithful, and Yu-tiv was full of hope. But 
 when the time was fulfilled in Ormazd's 
 own way, He came with renewed light, 
 which was on the twenty-first birthday of 
 Hog. Whilst Brahma and his family were 
 seated on mats, eating breakfast at sunrise, 
 lo, a light, as of a sun, came within the hut, 
 and passed over Brahma's head, and then 
 disappeared. And out of the void, in the 
 space above their heads, came these words: 
 From this time forth the twenty-first birth- 
 day shall be the time of maturity for man. 
 Be ye watchful for the Voice of Ormazd; 
 He is Ever Present! 
 
 And all of them saw the light and 
 heard the words, save Hog, and Hog, hav- 
 ing been begotten in unbelief, neither saw 
 the light nor heard the voice. And when 
 they all had exclaimed: Behold the light! 
 Hear that voice! — Hog thus spake before 
 them: For many a year ye have prophe- 
 sied this should come to pass when I 
 should reach my twenty-first birthday. For 
 the love ye all bear me, I know ye would 
 not put a joke upon me; but I am serious- 
 ly grieved that ye say: Behold the light, 
 and hear the voice! For I say unto you, 
 these things are not in reason, and cannot 
 be so. But in much hope and faith, all of 
 which ye have cultivated for years, ye al- 
 low your imaginings to stand for realities. 
 
 Now whilst Hog thus spake, the light 
 came again and stood over Brahma's head 
 whilst one might count twenty; and the 
 Voice said: Blessed art thou, O Brahma; 
 blessed thou, O Yu-tiv! These things had 
 to be fulfilled. I preach not by reason 
 alone, but provide living examples! 
 
 Again all of them saw and heard the 
 manifestation of Ormazd, save Hog, and 
 he saw not, and heard not the words of 
 the Spirit. Hog said: Have I not eyes 
 good as the best? Show me a hair that I 
 cannot see; let fall a mite that I cannot 
 hear. Then Whe-ish, the first-born, an- 
 swered him, saying: 
 
 First, my brother, I greet the with my 
 love, for thou art the fairest and best of 
 all the great sons of this God and 
 Goddess, our father and mother. And I 
 appeal to thee in thy great wisdom, how 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 401 
 
 have we all imagined the same light at the 
 same time and place? And greater yet, 
 how have we imagined the same spoken 
 words? Hog replied: 
 
 How can my answers cope with one 
 who hath wisdom like unto thee, O my 
 brother? Thou hast confounded me; but 
 yet I understand not wherein thou, and ye, 
 my most loving brothers, can see and hear 
 things that I cannot. Have we not all the 
 same parts, so like unto one another that 
 our neighbors scarce distinguish us? And 
 above all, we are all the same fruit from a 
 father and mother, the holiest and wisest 
 of created beings. 
 
 Now spake Yu-tiv, saying: I am before 
 Thy judgment, O Ormazd! That which 
 I have done, I have done! Deal Thou with 
 me for my great unbelief; I have sinned 
 against heaven and earth. Even whilst 
 Thou quickened into life within my 
 womb this star of everlasting light, lo, I 
 put out his eyes and stopped his ears 
 against Thee. The unbelief of my soul 
 penetrated the walls of my womb and shap- 
 ed the fruit of my holy husband into a man 
 of darkness. O Ormazd, why was Thy 
 daughter born! 
 
 Hog said: O thou Goddess, mother! 
 Weep not, but rejoice for the glory of my 
 birth. That thou and my holy father, a 
 very God amongst men, brought me into 
 life, my soul is boundless in rejoicing. I de- 
 clare unto thee, O mother, I am not in 
 darkness, nor am I blind and deaf. If 
 there be another world, what mattereth it 
 to me? The glories of this one are bound- 
 less. And if there be a Great Light and a 
 Voice, what are they to me! Thou hast so 
 filled my every vein of blood with thy 
 warm love, and with the sweet love of 
 these, my holy brothers, and with the wis- 
 dom of my father, God of men, that I know 
 nothing but to rejoice and to invent praises 
 and thanks to you all, with all my wisdom 
 and strength. 
 
 And now the Light gathered within the 
 soul of Brahma, and he was as one with the 
 Father. Ormazd, the Creator, then spake 
 through Brahma, saying: I created the 
 earth not to be despised, but that it 
 should be the glory of man. This 
 was the Zarathustrian law, but, for 
 sake of profit, and bondage, and evil, 
 they have perverted My doctrines and 
 
 bound up My peoples. They profess Me, 
 even Ormazd; but they have turned My 
 commandments and My doctrines upside 
 down. I came through Zarathustra and de- 
 livered them that called on Me in faith; 
 and they became My chosen for a season; 
 but they permitted evil to usurp their hearts 
 they squandered My substance in building 
 temples and providing a superabundance of 
 priests and priestesses. They raised up the 
 sword and spear for Me; by blood and 
 death they established kingdoms and called 
 them by My name, Ormazd! The spirit 
 of My Voice they put aside; but the words 
 they retained, and added earthly meaning 
 thereto. Whereby they proclaim darkness 
 for light, and light for darkness. And the 
 poor and distressed that worship Me in 
 truth and in spirit have learned to hate the 
 words established. For which reason they 
 are persecuted, and bound, and taxed, and 
 despitefully used. 
 
 Yea, they that would kill not because 
 of their natural love to Me and My created 
 sons and daughters, they impress into ser- 
 vice of war, taking them from their kin- 
 dred, saying to them: Come away from 
 peace and kill! Be thou a slayer of men; 
 be a soldier of death for the glory of the 
 king. I commanded them, in the olden 
 time, to kill not at all. My words were 
 plain, but the kings commanded the priests 
 to interpret My words whereby war might 
 be justified. 
 
 I commanded them against taking that 
 which was another's. My words were 
 plain. But the kings commanded the 
 priests to interpret the meaning, so the 
 kings could exact tribute for their own 
 glory. And so they levy wheresoever and 
 whensoever they will, saying: For the de- 
 fence of the king and the country! Thus 
 have they perverted My commandments 
 from beginning to end. But I declare unto 
 you, that in My sight, to kill one man, I 
 will hold him accountable who doeth it; 
 and ten times accountable . if he kill ten 
 men, and a hundred times for a hundred. 
 They shall not hide death and murder from 
 My sight by the word war. Neither shall 
 they excuse stealing by levying tax for the 
 king or the country's protection. For by 
 their own evil, hath it come to pass that 
 they talk about protection. Have I made 
 
402 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 a law that one king or one country shall 
 protect itself against another- Seest not 
 any man that these doctrines come of the 
 flesh and not of the spirit? 
 
 They profess to be Faithists in Me. 
 But straightway they go and build forti- 
 fications of earth, and stone, and wood. 
 And they that know Me in spirit and truth, 
 perceiving I am wrongly interpreted for 
 evil's sake, being such as rebel in their 
 souls against these iniquities, they seize 
 and impress for their lifetime as slaves, or, 
 if refusing, they kill them. And they that 
 work such wickedness say: Behold, we 
 have the Zarathustrian law, the I'hua'Maz- 
 dian law, the Ormazdian law; ours is the 
 holy, the revealed word. Let no man raise 
 up his voice against these truths, or he 
 shall surely be put to death! 
 
 I said: Behold, I will go and de- 
 liver them that have faith in Me in spirit 
 and truth. And I went over the lands of 
 the earth, but I found no man in whom 
 My light could shine. And I called My 
 holy masters of generations, My angels 
 high raised in heaven, and I said unto 
 them: Come ye and dwell on the earth 
 many generations, and by inspiration raise 
 ye up one in whom My light shall shine, 
 for I will surely deliver My people. 
 
 Now I declare unto you who are assem- 
 bled, the time is at hand, and ye are all so 
 many parts in My work. Even through 
 My angels named ye these sons; according 
 to their names, so will I establish My king- 
 dom. Suffer, therefore, Vede to write 
 down the words I have spoken, for lo, 
 he hath learning and memory provided to 
 that end. Be ye watchful, when I come 
 again! 
 
 Jehovih (Ormazd) ceased, and Brahma 
 woke as from a trance, though he had 
 heard all that was said. So Vede remem- 
 bered the spoken words, every one, and he 
 wrote them down on cloth prepared for 
 that purpose. And this was the beginning 
 of a new name of a people on the earth, 
 though they were Faithists in fact, and no- 
 thing but Faithists; but they were called 
 by their neighbors sometimes Vedans and 
 sometimes Brahmins. 
 
 CHAPTER XIII. 
 
 The next morning, at sunrise, Jehovih 
 spake again, through Brahma, saying: 
 As I prepared a way for My Voice, 
 be ye wise in laboring to show this 
 light unto all peoples. Neither take ye 
 sorrow to your souls for the latest born, 
 even Hog; for he is also in my keeping, 
 and his wisdom shall be the glory of the 
 earth. For is not all fact interpreted by 
 each and every man from the light of his 
 own standing place? Wherein error com- 
 eth into the world by the darkness of men, 
 in not perceiving rightly the things I have 
 created. Behold, one man seeth the forest 
 with reference to its value in logs; another 
 for splints for mats; another for shade to 
 lie in; another for its solitude; and they all 
 alike see by what dwelleth in them, but 
 they see through their own several win- 
 dows. Consider, then, the injustice of 
 man that saith: Ye shall see as I see; hear 
 as I hear; or who saith: This I have 
 proven for a truth, and that for an un- 
 truth; or who saith: Behold, we are many 
 witnesses, and we attest. 
 
 Whilst Jehovih was thus speaking, an 
 angel appeared and stood in the doorway 
 of the hut, and all save Hog looked and 
 saw the angel, and witnessed the color of 
 the angel's hair and eyes, and the clothes 
 he wore. And they pointed, saying in a 
 whisper: Behold, an angel of heaven! 
 
 Then spake Jehovih, illustrating, say- 
 ing: Whilst yet no one hath spoken, let 
 one at a time privily describe to Hog the 
 appearance of My angel in the doorway. 
 
 Accordingly, they all, save Brahma, told 
 Hog all that pertained to the angel, and 
 they accorded one with another. And Je- 
 hovih said: Speak thou, My Son, Hog. 
 Hog said: To whom shall I speak? For, 
 be Thou my very father, or, of a truth, the 
 Creator, I know not. God said: Who say- 
 est thou the Creator is? Hog said: Even 
 as the wind; the great void; without per- 
 son, or shape, or sense. 
 
 God said unto him: For which reason 
 I say unto thee, because of the unbelief of 
 thy father and thy mother, whilst thou 
 wert in thy mothers' womb, thou art as 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 403 
 
 thou art. This have they attested unto thee 
 thousands of times since thou wert weaned. 
 And they have also attested to thee as of- 
 ten, that during the bringing forth of thy 
 brothers, they were in the fullness of faith 
 in Ormazd. Thou wert born of the 
 earth, and can only see with earthly 
 eyes, and hear with earthly ears, and can 
 reason only with earthly reason. Hog said: 
 Then of a truth I shall go down to earth 
 and there shall be no more of me; but 
 these, my sweet brothers, and this Goddess 
 and this God, my very father and mother, 
 shall inherit everlasting life? 
 
 God said: I would place two eggs be- 
 fore thee, with the birds within them near- 
 ly hatched; now with one thou shalt or>en 
 the shell a little, and the young bird seeth 
 out; the other thou shalt leave closed. Say- 
 est thou one bird will have much advantage 
 over the other when they are hatched? Or 
 that one shall not live, because, forsooth, 
 it saw not through the shell? Such, then 
 is thy way to everlasting life. Of thy 
 darkness I will make light that will reach 
 unto millions. Thy sacrifice is the sacri- 
 fice of a very God amongst Gods. 
 
 Hog said: Because of thy great wis- 
 dom, I fear to speak in thy presence. But 
 thy words come out of his mouth who is 
 the sweetest and holiest of created beings. 
 Therefore I take courage in mine argument. 
 Now, behold, they have all described 
 the angel in the door; alike and like have 
 they described it in all particulars. And 
 the wisdom of thy words goeth to the bot- 
 tom of things, not like the words of man, 
 but faultlessly. Thou hast made me to be- 
 hold I am bound as with iron hoops, and 
 must go that way all my days. Against 
 this I complain not; for I perceive it is not 
 within my judgment to know even myself, 
 as to what is good for me. This, however, 
 thou hast shown me. I was molded as 
 I am; I am as I am. If I have faults, 
 they are not my faults. Neither are they 
 of my father or my mother; for the cause 
 of their unbelief at that time lay not with 
 themselves, but with thee. 
 
 God said: Thy words shall Vede also 
 write down; the glory and wisdom of the 
 earth shall come out of thy mouth. The 
 manner of my edifice shall be shown unto 
 
 the inhabitants of the earth. Thou hast 
 seen the king's temple and how he buildeth 
 it. For the fine posts he sendeth his best 
 hewers into the forest, and they choose the 
 straightest and strongest trees, and fell 
 them and hew them, and polish and en- 
 grave them, and the posts are set up in the 
 front as strength and ornament. But as to 
 the walls of the temple, the king calleth not 
 the best hewers, but the choppers, and they 
 also go into the forest to bring logs, not 
 the straightest and handsomest, but what- 
 soever their axes come upon. And their 
 timbers are put in the walls with mortar 
 and withes. And the temple is completed 
 to the king's will. 
 
 Jehovih said: Of such is My hea- 
 venly edifice; I send not winter to please 
 one man, nor summer; nor the rain. I 
 consider in what way I shall induce men 
 to raise up one another, and to be consider- 
 ate. Through Me, thy father and thy 
 mother and thy brethren, and all Faithists 
 that follow these, My doctrines, shall 
 learn to consider the unbelief of mortals, 
 and the impossibility of one man seeing 
 through another man's eyes. For as I have 
 raised you up a house in love, one to an- 
 other, so will I show the wisdom of disbe- 
 lief, and its necessity on the earth. 
 
 The foremost of all lessons is that all 
 men shall have liberty; and no man's judg- 
 ment be binding on another's; for all do 
 not see alike, nor can they understand alike. 
 That ye shall be alike considerate to them 
 that see not My light, or My Person, even 
 as to those who are born in su'is; for they 
 are the same flesh and blood, and their 
 spirits they have even from the same Cre- 
 ator. 
 
 For the evidence of the past and of 
 the present is before you, that men en- 
 deavor to enforce their doctrines by saying: 
 Behold the Word of Ormazd! Thus hath 
 He spoken! and I am His priest! Bow 
 down your heads! 
 
 Whereas, man shall not bow down, but 
 hold up his head and rejoice. They that 
 seek to enforce Me are My enemies. 
 
 Nor have I said of this man or that: 
 Hear ye him, for he is Truth. Shall the 
 Creator make one greater than Himself, 
 and thus cut Himself off? And yet the 
 
404 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARM1J 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 kings and the priests of this day assume 
 this in I'hua's name. And the mothers and 
 fathers of many have become discouraged 
 because of their great hardships; and they 
 bring forth heirs that have eyes but see 
 not, ears but hear not. 
 
 God said: In the days of Zarathustra, 
 I came to deliver them that had faith but 
 were in bondage; to-day I am come to 
 prove three worlds unto men, and to teach 
 them how they shall bring forth heirs with 
 eyes to see, and with ears to hear spiritual 
 things, with liberty unto all men: First, of 
 the earth and its fullness; second, the in- 
 termediate world of spirits, where all shall 
 sojourn for a season; and, third, the- Nir- 
 vanian worlds beyond Chinvat, where lieth 
 unending paradise for the pure and wise. 
 
 CHAPTER XIV. 
 
 On the next morning, at sunrise, God 
 spake again to Brahma, saying: Consider 
 the fruit of the earth, and the pasturage in 
 the fields. The male and the female feed 
 on the same grass; the one yieldeth milk, 
 the other is for the yoke; neither can any 
 man change these creations. 
 
 What man shall say to another: Feed 
 thou on this; or on that? But they take 
 of them that are born in darkness, and raise 
 up priests! The food for the flesh, or even 
 fasting, cannot bring su'is. The air warm- 
 eth the earth; not the earth the air. The 
 spirit enlighteneth the corporeal part, and 
 not the corporeal part the spirit. Light is 
 the freedom of all; to know this is the be- 
 ginning of wisdom. Nevertheless, without 
 suffering, some that are bound would not 
 know they are bound, or, if knowing, 
 would not desire freedom. 
 
 At this time, Hog, the youngest born, 
 was greatly moved, whereupon God bade 
 him speak. 
 
 Hog said: O that I could believe these 
 things! O that 1 could see! O that I could 
 hear! O the misery of my darkness! O 
 the horrors of the suspense of not knowing 
 a matter! Bitter is my soul, and full of 
 anguish! O the madness of this hour upon 
 me! Wherein, O Wisdom, forgottest Thou 
 the time of my begetting, to let me spring 
 up as an offensive weed in such a garden 
 of paradise! 
 
 And he bowed his head and wept; and 
 then spake Yu-tiv, his mother, that brought 
 him forth. She said: I perceive Thy light, 
 O Father, but I cannot bear it. Thou didst 
 unlock my members to bring forth these 
 seven Gods! Never woman on the whole 
 earth brought forth so rich a harvest; but 
 yet my soul is tortured to the very centre! 
 O that the light of my soul could be trans- 
 ferred to this God of men! And she also 
 wept. 
 
 Now spake Sa-it, saying: Next nearest 
 am I to thee, O my sweet brother, Hog. 
 No love lieth so fondly to thee as mine. 
 And as to thee, Yu-tiv, my Goddess moth- 
 er, thou hast most wisely named me Abun- 
 dant. For in our love hath Ormazd pro- 
 vided us equal to the highest of Gods. Be- 
 cause I have witnessed that this purest and 
 best of brothers cannot see spiritually, my 
 soul is mellowed toward all the world. Yea, 
 my outstretched arms shall receive the 
 darkest of men, and my soul shall go up in 
 praise of Ormazd forever! 
 
 Oos spake next; he said: Most wisely 
 am I named Space; for it hath pleased Or- 
 mazd to show me the breadth of His Crea- 
 tions. What belief or what unbelief is 
 there that He hath not provided a glory 
 for! Because my sweet brother, Hog, 
 has been thus blessed with darkness, he 
 shall be guardian unto me in earthly wis- 
 dom all my days. In my faith I know it is 
 well with him; yet in my love I would that 
 he could see as we all see! 
 
 Then spake Git-un, whose name signi- 
 fied Time. He said: Behold, I am the 
 fourth born, and, as it were, in the middle. 
 Whose love is so delightfully hedged about 
 as mine! Who so surrounded by the 
 Light of heaven and earth! At one end 
 behold my father, God of men; the very 
 voice of heaven and earth; interpreter of 
 the Creator's words! At the other end, 
 the best, sweetest brother ever created on 
 the earth, with all the wisdom of men and 
 angels. O the glory of this hour! O the 
 delight to be with these Gods, and with 
 I'u-tiv, Goddess of women! 
 
 Then Vus, the second born, spake. He 
 said: Wherein shall I glorify Thee, O Or- 
 mazd, and not glorify myself! I am full to 
 overflowing with delight for the love of 
 these, my brothers, and father, very Godsl 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 405 
 
 But for Yu-tiv I have more than love. I 
 preceive through my own sweet mother 
 how the different castes of men are made! 
 O mother, how nearly a righteous woman 
 dwelleth with the Creator! 
 
 Whe-ish said: To rank one's thoughts 
 and desires ever high; would not this de- 
 liver the world? 
 
 Vede said: To know the truth and ever 
 speak it in love and kindness, would not 
 this deliver the world and establish Or- 
 mazd? 
 
 Now woke Brahma from his trance, and 
 he spake, saying: To find the Father; to 
 know Him; to reveal Him; these are all, 
 and for His glory only. 
 
 Now again spake God, saying: Wiser 
 than all the rest is Brahma. Who of ye all 
 hath not spoken of himself or herself? 
 Who hath uttered a word of praise or of 
 thanks, and left out self? Judge ye, then, 
 what is required of men that my spirit may 
 find utterance through their lips. 
 
 Then the Voice departed for that day; 
 and the angel of God appeared in the door, 
 so that all save Hog could see him. The 
 angel said: That ye may see the spirits 
 of the intermediate world, come ye at 
 midnight and sit in the sacred circle in the 
 grove of Ebon. We will appear in sar'- 
 gis. 
 
 Hog heard not the angel, but the oth- 
 ers told him what the angel said. Accord- 
 ingly, at midnight they sat in circle in the 
 grove of Ebon. 
 
 CHAPTER XV. 
 
 And the angel of God appeared in the 
 midst of the circle, in sar'gis, and talked 
 with them face to face. And Hog said 
 unto the angel: Of a truth, I know thou 
 art not mortal, and yet thou hast the sem- 
 blance of flesh, and limbs, and arms, and a 
 very body, and art clothed withal and thy 
 clothes are like mortal clothes. Now I tell 
 thee face to face, I believe thou art no an- 
 gel of the dead, but a very reflected self- 
 substance, produced out of the substance 
 of my father. How sayest thou? The an- 
 gel answered, saying: 
 
 Mortal words cannot convince thee; 
 neither the words of a spirit. Behold, I 
 
 will show thee a friend of thine who is 
 dead. With that, the angel showed the 
 spirit of Hog's friend who was dead, and 
 the man's name was Aara-acta; and so Hog 
 said unto him: Thou art a very counter- 
 part of him I knew. What is thy name? 
 The spirit answered: Aara-acta! I tell 
 thee, O Hog, these things are true. I 
 am the spirit of thy friend; yea, I am that 
 very friend. Hog said: Where dwellest 
 thou? Where hast thou been? Art thou 
 happy? Hast thou visited all the heavens? 
 
 The spirit answered him, saying: I 
 dwell on the earth even as before death; 
 I am happy; the glory of my pres- 
 ent world surpasseth the earth. I 
 have not visited the highest heavens. I 
 am only as yet in the first resurrection. 
 Up above us there are heavens where all 
 the people are Gods and Goddesses. I 
 cannot go there; they are too white. The 
 spirit then disappeared, and Hog said: 
 
 What I have seen I have seen; what I 
 have heard I have heard. Yet I believe 
 not that I have seen a spirit nor heard one. 
 A spirit must in reason be thin and subtle 
 and airlike. 
 
 Then spake the angel of God, saying: 
 How shall I please this man, O Ormazd? 
 This day I showed myself in the door of 
 the hut, thin and subtle and airlike, and he 
 saw me not, nor heard me. Who can find 
 a way to open this man's soul to Thy Wis- 
 dom, O Ormazd? 
 
 Now spake Yu-tiv: Great is the glory 
 of Thy angel, O Ormazd! Heavenly are 
 the spirits of the dead. Welcome, O ye 
 angels of heaven! Then spake Whe-ish, 
 saying: Even the lowest of heavens hath 
 great glory! O the delight to dwell in 
 such a paradise! Then Vus spake, saying: 
 Such wisdom and truth! What are Thy 
 kingdoms, O Father, when even the first 
 heaven hath such glory. Git-un said: Be- 
 cause I have lived to behold these things, 
 I will proclaim Thy wonders, O Ormazd, 
 as long as I live! Vede said: Truth is 
 Thy mightiest work, O Ormazd! Oos said: 
 How wisely hast Thou framed Thy worlds, 
 O Ormazd! Even Thy lowest of angels 
 are the delight of my soul! Next spake 
 Sa-it; he said: Give us of Thy abundance, 
 O Ormazd. Open wide the gates of the 
 
406 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 LORD'S RECORD 
 
 lower heavens. I will take Thy angels to 
 my arms and rejoice forever! Brahma then 
 came out of his trance, though he had 
 heard and seen all. He said: Whoever 
 cometh that can make me better, and show 
 me how most to benefit Thy world, him, O 
 Ormazd, send Thou unto me. 
 
 And lo, first of all, Brahma was answer- 
 ed! A light, bright as a sun, stood in the 
 midst of the cricle, and it was higher than 
 the clouds, and displayed a staff on which 
 was a banner of gold and silver; and on 
 the banner, stars clustered to spell the 
 words, Love, Wisdom and Power! 
 
 Presently 'the scene changed, and the 
 angel of God said: He that spake last 
 (Brahma) hath been answered first, be- 
 cause his words reached to the Fountain 
 Head. Wheresoever ye send your prayers, 
 there are ye answered. To which end I will 
 now open the gates of the lower heavens, 
 and ye shall witness what ye may. 
 
 The angel withdrew the lights, so 
 that great darkness might be upon 
 the circle. Presently, Yu-tiv started 
 as if affrighted somewhat. Then Vus 
 sprang up, saying: What was that? And 
 then another started, till presently all but 
 Brahma and Hog were wild and startled, 
 whispering: What do mine eyes behold! 
 O that foul smell! O that vulgar touch! 
 And then one screamed; and another, and 
 another, until all broke and fled, screaming 
 and crying out in fear and distress; flying 
 in the darkness of the grove, frantic; almost 
 dead with fear! 
 
 Hog ran not; saw nothing to fear; 
 heard nothing to dread; felt nothing to 
 make him ashamed. And his father, Brah- 
 ma, ran not, nor was afraid, and the twain 
 called to the rest, pleaded, coaxed and call- 
 ed in vain; could not stop them; could not 
 find them in the darkness. They returned 
 to the hut, Brahma and Hog saw the 
 torches burning brightly, and came in and 
 found Yu-tiv and her sons huddled togeth- 
 er in each other's arms, white and pale as 
 death. 
 
 Hog asked the reason. Yu-tiv said: 
 
 Sh , are they gone? Sh , keep them 
 
 away! Then spake Vus, saying: O my 
 brother, ask not what we saw! Ask not 
 
 what we felt, and what felt us! These 
 things would not be lawful to mention! 
 Say no more, in heaven's name! The air 
 of heaven is full of drujas. 
 
 Now spake Vede, saying: Alas, O my 
 father, I dropped the holy book, the Veda 
 I am writing. In my fright I let it fall. 
 It is not sized yet, and should it rain ere 
 morning, the holy words will be lost! And 
 not for a thousand worlds would I go back 
 to the grove this night. Oos said: Nor I, 
 for a thousand worlds! Whe-ish said: For 
 all the gold and silver in the world I 
 would not go there this night. So they all 
 spake save Hog, and with all the love they 
 bore for Ormazd's words, nothing doubt- 
 ing they were His very words, not one 
 would venture amongst the evil spirits they 
 had seen, to recover the book. 
 
 Then spake Brahma, saying: For many 
 generations Ormazd hath labored for this; 
 I will go myself; I know He will protect 
 me at all times and in all places. And 
 Brahma rose up to depart; but then spake 
 Hog, saying: Nay, father; thou art old; 
 I am fresh and young, and I know there 
 are no spirits but in the imagination of 
 men. I will go alone! Nor will I bear a 
 lantern nor a torch; nor will I whistle nor 
 sing. I will confront all the evil spirits of 
 hell and their captains. I will recover that 
 book this night though I scrape every leaf 
 from Ebon grove! And mark ye, too, I 
 will return unscathed; nor will I see nor 
 hear a spirit whilst I am gone. So, Hog 
 and Brahma only were fearless 
 
 With that Hog departed, and after a 
 while he returned, rejoicing, bringing the 
 book; and he said: I neither saw nor 
 heard a spirit, and I declare unto you-that 
 none of you saw nor heard them, for there 
 are none. By the extreme bent of your 
 minds, these imaginings seem real. And 
 as to the great Light, with the words Love, 
 Wisdom and Power, which I also saw, I 
 say unto you, it is some emanation from 
 this, our holy and most loved father. How 
 oft have we heard him use those same 
 words! And as to those figures that talk- 
 ed, and had the semblance of men and 
 women, even to their garments, I say unto 
 you all, they emanate from the same source, 
 even from our father, Brahma. 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-AEMIJ 
 
 407 
 
 Now spake Yu-tiv, saying: O happy- 
 unbelief, my son! O that I had been born 
 as thou! O that I had never seen such 
 sights as I saw this night! Then said Oos: 
 O happy brother, our youngest born! 
 Would that I were like unto thee! O the 
 vulgarity of those hands that came upon 
 me this night! Vus said: O that I had 
 never known the unseen world! O that I 
 had been born in darkness like unto thee, 
 our most favored brother! 
 
 After that manner they all spake de- 
 ploringly of their gift of su'is; and when 
 they had thus spoken, the angel of God 
 spake through Brahma, saying: Whilst it 
 is yet night, I speak. With the dawn, at 
 sunrise, is the Father's Voice. Hear me, 
 then, briefly, expecting not much wisdom, 
 for I am not long born in heaven: 
 
 Two great men created the Creator, the 
 Faithist and the unbeliever; the one who 
 hath passed through the trials of the flesh, 
 and attained to the Father's Voice; for in 
 becoming one with the Father, he no long- 
 er standeth in fear of anything in heaven 
 or earth. The glory of constant resurrec- 
 tion is before him forever. All men who 
 have not attained to this may be likened 
 unto a man going up a slippery hillside, 
 who oft riseth high, but suddenly slideth 
 low. They glorify themselves for their own 
 light and wisdom and good gifts, rejoicing 
 for self-sake for the glories that have fallen 
 upon them. But they are cowards. 
 
 Nevertheless, the Creator created a 
 great man amongst these; and such is the 
 unbelieving man. He hath neither gold 
 nor silver, nor house nor land; and he is 
 without spiritual sight or spiritual hearing; 
 but his glory is in understanding his own 
 understanding. He it is that subdueth the 
 forest, and tameth the beasts of the field to 
 man's service. He goeth alone in the dark, 
 fearing naught. He followeth not the 
 course of any man, but searcheth for him- 
 self; the priest cannot make him believe, 
 nor can the angels of heaven; none can 
 subdue his judgment. He beholdeth the 
 glory of the earth and of manhood. He 
 calleth to the multitude, saying: Why per- 
 mit ye others, even priests, to think for 
 you? Arise, O thou, and be a man! Arise, 
 O thou, and be a woman! 
 
 He inspireth of the earth and for the 
 earth; through his arm are tyrants and evil 
 kings overthrown. Through him are doc- 
 trines and religions sifted to the bottom, 
 and the falsehood and evil in them cast 
 aside. Yea, who but Ormazd could have 
 created so great a man as the unbeliever? 
 
 And these two men, the Faithist and 
 the unbeliever, do mostly all the good that 
 is done in the world; the one laboreth at 
 the top of the hill, calling upward; the 
 other laboreth at the bottom of the hill, 
 pushing upward. 
 
 CHAPTER XVI. 
 
 On the next morning, at sunrise, Or- 
 mazd spake again through Brahma, and 
 Vede wrote down the words; and on the 
 succeeding morning, in like manner; and 
 so continued for forty days; and in forty 
 days, behold, the Veda was completed; the 
 holy words of Brahma were written. 
 
 God said to Brahma: Go, now, and 
 
 preach my gospel unto whomsoever will 
 
 hear; proclaiming liberty to all who will 
 
 follow thee. I will be with thee to the end. 
 And thou shalt take Yu-tiv, thy wife, and 
 
 all thy sons with thee, even Hog, the 
 youngest born. 
 
 So Brahma went forth preaching by 
 day, and exhibiting the spirits of the dead 
 by night. But to the chosen he spake at 
 dawn, in the early morning, the time the 
 All Light was upon him. And his sons also 
 preached and explained; and Yu-tiv ex- 
 plained to all women how it was with her 
 when pregnant with her sons. Only Hog 
 preached not; neither opened he his mouth 
 before the populace as to his unbelief. In 
 his soul he said: These things may be 
 true, and if they be true, it is well. If 
 they be not true, still the believing of them, 
 by the populace, worketh righteousness 
 and goodness. With all my philosophy, I 
 cannot move the multitude to righteous- 
 ness. But my father maketh them as a 
 flock of sheep; they cease from evil, and 
 they practice good fellowship. Therefore, 
 I will stand by my father to the end. 
 
 When Brahma came near a city, he 
 halted outside the walls, that according to 
 law the kings could not stay his voice. 
 
408 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 And the multitude came out of the city to 
 hear him, and many returned not; but re- 
 mained with Brahma and his sons in their 
 camp. And when Brahma moved to an- 
 other city they went with him. And in a 
 little while the hosts of Brahma were as an 
 army of thousands. And not a few of them 
 were men and women of wealth, and they 
 cast their treasures at Brahma's feet, say- 
 ing: Take thou this trash, and give me of 
 everlasting life instead. But men of learn- 
 ing came not to Brahma; neither came the 
 priests, nor kings, nor magicians, nor con- 
 suiters of oracles. 
 
 God said: Take thy hosts and establish 
 them in families of tens, and of twenties, 
 and of hundreds, and of thousands, and 
 give thou a head father unto each and 
 every family. And thy people shall be a 
 people unto themselves, having nothing in 
 common with the kings' peoples. Behold, 
 my angel will go with thee, and show the 
 waste lands, such as the kings' peoples de- 
 sire not; and thou and thy people shall pos- 
 sess the lands and dwell together in love 
 and wisdom, doing good to one another. 
 
 So Brahma did as commanded, and he 
 so established the families in the mountains 
 and valleys of Roam, and his people dwelt 
 there, in all six thousand eight hundred 
 and twenty, men, women and children. 
 And there came to Brahma a certain cap- 
 tain-general of the army of King Syaytha- 
 ha, of the West Kingdom of Vind'yu, 
 wherein lay the city of Gowschamgamram- 
 mus, of a million inhabitants, and he said 
 unto Brahma: 
 
 In the name of the king, mightiest of 
 men, Syaythaha, am I before thee, O Brah- 
 ma. Behold, the king sendeth thee gold, 
 silver and copper, saying: Brahma is good! 
 Brahma shall give me the blessing of hea- 
 ven! 
 
 Brahma answered the captain-general, 
 saying: Brahma saluteth the king, might- 
 iest of men, Syaythaha, in the name of Or- 
 mazd, the Creator, in love and in these 
 wise words, that come to the soul of Brah- 
 ma. Brahma sendeth the king's servant, 
 even the captain-general, back to the king, 
 with his gold, silver and copper, saying: 
 Deal thou with thy Creator and not with 
 men! The Great Spirit holdeth all bless- 
 
 ings in His own hands. Give Him thy 
 treasures ! 
 
 The captain-general departed and re- 
 turned with his gold, silver and copper to 
 the king, and told the king Brahma's 
 words. The king was pleased with the wis- 
 dom of Brahma, but withal felt rebuked 
 and sore at heart. So Ormazd suffered sa- 
 tan to possess the king for a season; and 
 the king resolved to destroy Brahma and 
 all his people. And he commanded the 
 captain-general to assemble together fifty 
 thousand men, with arms, ready for battle. 
 And when they were thus prepared, and 
 started on their journey, which would re- 
 quire seven days, the king bethought him 
 to inquire of the oracle as to his best mode 
 of success. 
 
 Now the angel of God had taken pos- 
 session of the oracle, and yet the magi 
 knew it not, nor did Syaythaha. So the 
 king came before the sand table, and the 
 spirit wrote these words: He who hath be- 
 come one with Ormazd is mightier than an 
 army. Take off thy crown, O king, might- 
 iest of men, and thy golden robes, and all 
 that is fine and fair to look upon, and 
 clothe thyself in the poorest of garments, 
 even as a Druk that wandereth about. But 
 thy crown and thy costly robes, and thy 
 raiment, fine and fair to look upon, put 
 upon thy body servant. And ye twain shall 
 go in advance of the army, even before 
 Brahma. And thou shalt witness that the 
 man who professeth to labor for the poor 
 will fall upon his belly before the man of 
 riches and power. And behold, O king, 
 thou shalt feel justified in destroying him 
 that falleth before the crown and robes, 
 knowing he is a hypocrite. 
 
 The king was pleased with this, and he 
 fulfilled all that was commanded of the 
 oracle; and when he came near Brahma's 
 camp, a man came before the king's ser- 
 vant, saying: Behold, O king, command 
 me as thou wilt! And he prostrated him- 
 self on the ground before the king's ser- 
 vant. Whereupon the king, dressed as a 
 Druk, came to him and said: Who art 
 thou? And the man answered: Begone, 
 beggar! My matter is with the king! 
 
 The king ordered the man to be seized 
 and taken away and put to death; and the 
 advance guard fell upon the man and slew 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ ^o.. r.coho 409 
 
 him with war clubs. And when the man 
 was quite dead, Brahma came, and neither 
 the king, nor any of his advance guard, 
 knew him. And Vus and Whe-ish were 
 with their father, and the three came and 
 stood by the dead man. Brahma then took 
 the king's hand, saying: Thou that art 
 in the garb of a Druk come hither, for thou 
 hast flesh and blood unto holiness. Lay 
 thou one hand on the dead man; put thine 
 other hand on my head, for I will prove 
 Ormazd before thine eyes. Behold, thou 
 who hast tried to kill Brahma, killed an- 
 other person! 
 
 And when the king's hands were placed, 
 Brahma stood by the head of the dead man, 
 and his two sons by the heart; and Brahma 
 said: In Thy name, O Ormazd, and by 
 Thy power in me, return thou to life, O 
 man! And arise! Arise! Arise! 
 
 And behold, the man was brought to 
 life, and rose up and stood before the mul- 
 titude. 
 
 The king trembled with fear, and the 
 guard stood back, amazed. And, as for the 
 servant arrayed in the king's garb, he cast 
 aside the crown and robes, and fled into the 
 forest. 
 
 Brahma said unto the king: Here stand- 
 eth the angel of Ormazd, and the angel 
 saith thou art the king in disguise, and, 
 moreover, that he, the angel, advised thee 
 to come here for this purpose, saying to 
 thee in the oracle: He that hath become 
 one with Ormazd is mightier than an army! 
 
 The king said: This is true. I swear 
 before Thee, O Ormazd, henceforth I will 
 wear such garments as these I have on, 
 and my life shall be given to Thy service. 
 Let who will take my kingdom and all I 
 called mine. 
 
 So Syaythaha joined Brahma's hosts; 
 and with Syaythaha came his brothers and 
 their sons and daughters. And, those that 
 came, cast into a heap whatsoever goods or 
 moneys they had, and the head fathers of 
 the families divided and distributed the 
 same according to their best wisdom. And 
 Brahma's people, by commandment of 
 Brahma, called themselves not Brahmins, 
 but Vedans. 
 
 In those days the language of the kings 
 
 of Vind'yu, and of the men of learning, 
 was All-ao, signifying, Out of All that is 
 Good. But the Vedans were the unlearn- 
 ed, and their language was imperfect, and 
 of many meanings for every spoken and 
 written word. And God foresaw the lia- 
 bility to corruption of the Brahmin relig- 
 ion, and he spake to Brahma, saying: Be- 
 hold, I have given thee seven sons, six of 
 light and one of darkness. Thy six sons 
 of light shall establish each one a school 
 amongst my chosen, and teach my scrip- 
 tures by word of mouth. And all that 
 henceforth become rab'bahs shall be capa- 
 ble of repeating every word of the Veda by 
 heart. And, in after ages, if the plates and 
 the books of my holy religion are destroy- 
 ed by war, it mattereth not. The sub- 
 stance of thy labors shall live. 
 
 Then did Brahma's sons as commanded, 
 each and every one becoming a teacher. 
 And again God spake to Brahma, saying: 
 Arise, and go where my angel will lead 
 thee, taking thy wife and thy son, Hog, 
 with thee. And thou shalt travel yet two 
 years from place to place, and then return 
 thither, for thy labor will be completed. 
 
 CHAPTER XVII. 
 
 The place thus founded by Brahma was 
 called Haraoyo, and his people, at this 
 time, extended to seven cities and thirty 
 villages, and possessed all the country of 
 Roam, which had been uninhabited hun- 
 dreds of years. And the Vedans cultivated 
 the lands, living on fruits, roots, and on 
 bread made of wheat grown in the fields; 
 but they ate neither fish nor flesh, nor any- 
 thing that had breathed the breath of life. 
 
 Brahma and his wife, Yu-tiv, and his 
 youngest son, Hog, departed from Hara- 
 oyo, accompanied by seven disciples, and 
 went forth under the direction of the an- 
 gels of Ormazd, to preach and explain the 
 Veda, carrying one book with them. And 
 they went first to the northeast, through 
 the kingdoms of Haomsut, and Ali-oud, 
 and Zeth, and Wowtichiri; thence westerly 
 to Hatiqactra, where the tyrant, Azhi-Aven, 
 had built a temple of skulls, after the man- 
 ner of the ancients. Azhi kept six dens of 
 lions, for devouring his condemned slaves. 
 So, because of oppression, the kingdom of 
 Azhi was profitable unto Ormazd. From 
 
410 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ ««o.. -«•« 
 
 Hatiqactra Brahma obtained three thou- 
 sand followers. And when Brahma had 
 seven thousand followers, the angel of God 
 directed him to the plains of Cpenta-ar- 
 maiti. And here he established his people, 
 dividing them into families and villages, 
 and appointing rab'bahs unto them. And 
 Cpenta-armaiti became known over all the 
 world. 
 
 After this the angel directed Brahma to 
 go to the southwest, through the king- 
 doms of H'spor and Vaetaeyo, and Aram- 
 ya, and thence to Dacyama, to the city of 
 H'trysti, where Ormazd had a host of one 
 thousand already inspired to join Brahma. 
 And now the angel directed Brahma to 
 ^ake his hosts to the mountains of T'cara- 
 rativirwoh, and establish them; which he 
 did. And behold, the time of Yu-tiv and of 
 Brahma was near an end, for they were 
 grown quite old. 
 
 The angel said to Brahma: Great hath 
 been thy labor. Very great Yu-tiv's! Where 
 in all the world is such a woman? From 
 the day thou first beheld her! For the 
 glory of thy sons! And in her age to fol- 
 low thee, walking so far! Behold, O Brah- 
 ma! Yu-tiv is weakening fast. Rise up 
 and take her back to Haraoyo! The moun- 
 tains of Roam are calling her! And thy 
 faithful son, Hog, strong and tall. Take 
 him back with his mother. Haraoyo is 
 calling. 
 
 Brahma went and looked at Yu-tiv, and 
 his soul spake within him, saying: O Or- 
 mazd, have I not forgotten her in Thee, 
 the mother of my sons? O her proud 
 young soul when first I saw her! Alas, I 
 see she is tottering and feeble Brahma 
 went nearer to Yu-tiv and she spake to 
 him, saying: O Brahma, thou God 
 of men! I know not if my eyes are 
 turning dim. But O, I have seen so 
 strange a sight, even toward the high sun. 
 It was myself I saw, rising, going upward! 
 The earth going downward! Then I called: 
 
 Ormazd! Not alone! Behold, my God 
 is yonder! Let me back to Brahma! Then 
 
 1 thought the Creator brought me back 
 and said: Go thou quickly and see thy 
 godly sons in Haraoyo, for thy time hath 
 come! 
 
 Brahma said: My angel saith: Go thou 
 back to Haraoyo, thy labor is nearly fin- 
 ished. For this reason I came to thee. It 
 is well, therefore, for us that we return, 
 taking Hog with us. 
 
 So Brahma, and Yu-tiv, and Hog, with 
 five remaining disciples, departed for Har- 
 aoyo, which lay three days' journey for a 
 man to walk, and they knew not how Yu- 
 tiv would go, for she was worn to the last 
 step, and, above all, her shoes were worn 
 out, and she had only pieces of cloth to 
 her feet. And whilst they were deliberat- 
 ing having only gone a short distance, 
 Hog perceived, going in another direction, 
 a score of soldiers, mounted on horses, and 
 they were leading a number of spare horses 
 with them. Then the soul of Hog spake 
 within him, saying: 
 
 Behold, my father hath made many con- 
 verts in his day, made good men out of bad 
 ones. And he hath ever refused money, 
 and gifts, and presents. Now, whatever 
 justice liveth I know not; but many of the 
 rascals who became followers of my father 
 were conscience-stricken with ill-gotten 
 gains, and, finding that my father would 
 not receive their stuff, they tried me, and 
 behold, my pockets are full of gold and dia- 
 monds. In truth, it may have been a very 
 devil prompted me; but I am supposed not 
 to know the higher light, but to know the 
 lower. Of myself and for myself I want 
 not these things. If they belong to Or- 
 mazd, it followeth I should not keep them. 
 Therefore, if I give of gold or diamonds to 
 those soldiers, they will give me a horse 
 for my angel mother to ride on. Who 
 knoweth but by the way of these soldiers 
 is the nearest road for this gold to find its 
 way to Ormazd? 
 
 So Hog went away and purchased a 
 horse, and brought it to his mother, say- 
 ing: Behold, a man giveth thee a present 
 in the name of Ormazd, but forbiddeth thee 
 to retain it save to ride to Haraoyo, whith- 
 er thou shalt sell it and give the money to 
 the poor. 
 
 Yu-tiv said: A good man he was, and 
 wise, for only on his own conditions could 
 I have accepted the horse. Accordingly, 
 Yu-tiv was mounted on the horse, and they 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ «».■ ««.» 
 
 411 
 
 proceeded on their way, going slowly, for 
 Brahma was also near the end. And after 
 seven days they arrived at Haraoyo, where 
 they were received by Brahma's sons, and 
 by all the multitude of disciples. But ow- 
 ing to Yu-tiv's deep love for her sons, 
 and being worn out withal, and having wit- 
 nessed the glory of righteous works fulfill- 
 ed through her husband and her sons, the 
 strain was too much for her corporeal 
 parts. And they brought straw and stretch- 
 ed her along, and a bundle of straw under 
 her head. Then she spake, saying: 
 
 First to Thee, O Ormazd, my blessing, 
 because Thou createdst me alive, to enjoy 
 Thy glories. Next, O Brahma! My hus- 
 band, my blessing on thee. God of men! 
 Thou hast taught me the fullness of earth 
 and heaven! O the glory of having been 
 thy wife! 
 
 Then she called Whe-ish and said: O 
 my son, my first-born! My blessing on 
 thee. Because I have watched thee from 
 the hour of conception, I have had the 
 wisdom of creation demonstrated before 
 me. O the joy when first mine eyes beheld 
 thee; I am going now, to prepare a place 
 in heaven for thee! 
 
 And, after that, Yu-tiv blessed all her 
 sons, and coming to Hog she said: My 
 blessing on thee, O my latest born, God 
 of men! To all my other sons I have told 
 my love, but to thee my soul overfloweth, 
 I am as a dumb woman. Thou hast been a 
 very God in all thy ways, and believest not 
 in Ormazd; nor in heaven nor angels! For 
 which reason I look upon thee as the high- 
 est of all creations. Thou art good for 
 goodness' sake; wise for wisdom's sake; 
 happy in finding a way to master all un- 
 happiness! 
 
 And these were Yu-tiv's last words; she 
 shut her eyes. She was dead! So they 
 took her body, and robed it in white, and 
 on the fourth day buried her in the forest 
 of Roam. 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII. 
 
 On the day of Yu-tiv's death, Brahma 
 said: Sing no. songs; pray in silence only. 
 Let her soul be in quiet with Ormazd. On 
 the second day Braham said: Pray in 
 whispers, praise in whispers, the best, good 
 deeds of the dead. On the third day Brah- 
 
 ma said: Burst forth a song of praise to 
 Ormazd; extol the virtues of the dead. On 
 the fourth day Brahma said: In song and 
 in prayer bid the dead arise and go onward,, 
 upward! 
 
 Thus they put Yu-tiv in the ground on 
 the fourth day; and then they went and sat 
 in the sacred circle and sang and prayed 
 for her soul to go on to Nirvana. And 
 when they had finished, a light came down 
 the midst of the circle, and an angel in, 
 white appeared. It was Yu-tiv; the spirit 
 of Yu-tiv in the glory of Ormazd, the Cre- 
 ator! 
 
 Then spake the angel Yu-tiv, saying: 
 Out from the head of the corporeal body 
 the spirit is born; and angels stand around;, 
 on a spirit blanket receive they the spirit of 
 the dead. One day, in quiet, they keep the 
 spirit, teaching it to reconcile and under- 
 stand. On the second day, the spirit hear- 
 eth the prayers of the earth-people coming 
 upward; and on the third day, the spirit 
 understandeth death and birth of spirit. 
 And on the fourth day, when ye sang: O' 
 Goddess, arise from the dead! The Father 
 calleth thee from on high! Arise, O God- 
 dess, and go thy way! Then was my spirit, 
 free from the earth; resting in the arms of 
 Gods and Goddesses, who had come from, 
 on high to receive me. Thus, O my belov- 
 ed, on the third day is the first resurrec- 
 tion; and, to the holy, the second resurrec- 
 tion beginneth on the fifth day. After the 
 fifth day call ye me not back again! My 
 labor lieth yonder! I must build houses 
 for you all. Thus Ormazd sendeth me on. 
 before! If it be His will for me to return, 
 to you at times, I will return. His will, 
 above all; this is the greatest wisdom. 
 
 Whe-ish, her first-born, asked: What 
 of the angels of the intermediate world, O 1 
 mother? Then answered his angel mother, 
 saying: They were shown to us in Eboni 
 grove! Alas, some of them do not begin 
 the resurrection for a thousand years! 
 
 Then came the angel Yu-tiv over, near 
 Hog, her latest born, whom she loved so 
 well. She said: Canst thou see me, my 
 son? Hog answered: Nay, I see only a 
 glimmering light faintly: I hear a voice,, 
 but it soundeth not like my mother's voice. 
 Yet, if it be that there is a soul that liveth 
 after death, and if of a truth, thou art the 
 very spirit and soul of her who brought me- 
 
412 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-AEMIJ ^ ««•« 
 
 forth, be thou not unhappy because of my 
 unbelief. As for myself, I am happy be- 
 cause thou broughtest me forth in unbelief; 
 neither would I of my own will be any oth- 
 er way. Whether our eyes be blue or 
 black, or whether we are tall or short, or 
 whether we are believers or disbelievers, 
 even as we are created, and to fill our place 
 in doing good unto others with all our wis- 
 dom and strength, is this not glory enough? 
 
 Yu-tiv said: O thou wisest of men! In 
 the day thou art born in heaven, thou shalt 
 not linger long in the intermediate world, 
 but be crowned a very God indeed! Here 
 endeth my labors with the earth, O ye, my 
 beloved! An otevan waiteth by the way 
 for me to ascend; the Gods and Goddesses 
 are calling me! Farewell, my beloved! 
 Farewell! 
 
 And now the music of heaven descend- 
 ed, and even whilst the mortals sang, the 
 very gates of heaven opened, and the an- 
 gel Yu-tiv rose upward in a sea of fire! 
 But behold, the love of great Brahma was 
 too much for him! His eyes raised up- 
 ward after the ascending light, and his 
 soul burst within him. He fell down and 
 stretched himself on the cold earth! He, 
 too, was dead. 
 
 Then burst the mighty hearts of Brah- 
 ma's sons. The whole earth shook with 
 the wail of Gods. The wind, the air above 
 the earth, stood still, and the forest of 
 Roam shuddered as if the earth were rent 
 in twain. Then wailed the sons and daugh- 
 ters of Haraoyo. Though no man uttered 
 it yet all knew that great Brahma was 
 dead. 
 
 CHAPTER XIX. 
 
 The angel of God came in the sacred 
 circle and stood in the midst. He said: 
 Greeting, in the name of Ormazd! In His 
 name I speak before you. First, then, who 
 of all that was dearest to Brahma, he or 
 she, shall arise! 
 
 And behold, there arose every man, 
 woman and child, more than ten thou- 
 said. The angel said: By the side of 
 Yu-tiv shall ye, his most beloved, bury his 
 body. On the third day after his death, 
 even at the hour of his death, shall ye bury 
 him. And around about the grave shall ye 
 sit thrice a day, morning, noon and night, 
 
 for one hour, singing and praying for the 
 soul of Brahma, for two days. And behold, 
 on the evening of the second day ye shall 
 behold the graves of both Brahma and Yu- 
 tiv opened, and their very bodies will come 
 forth, and Brahma shall speak with you 
 face to face. The angel then disappeared. 
 
 And the people did as commanded; and 
 they sat watching around the graves in a 
 circle, at a distance of ten paces therefrom. 
 And the brothers favored Hog above all 
 the rest, that he might be converted. And 
 accordingly, in the evening of the sec- 
 ond day, when the sun had been two hours 
 set, there descended into the midst of the 
 circle a light, bright as the sun, so that the 
 multitude held their hands before their 
 eyes; and so bright was the light that 
 the graves were burst open. And in the 
 space of a moment of time, the light was 
 lowered so all could look therein; and, 
 behold, Brahma and Yu-tiv, arm in 
 arm, stood in the midst of the circle, even 
 with their flesh and bones and their burial 
 robes. 
 
 Brahma said: Have ye faith in the Cre- 
 ator; with Him are all things possible. He 
 is the All Master of all things. Accept 
 ye not, forever, any God, or Lord, or Sav- 
 ior, or priest or king, but Him, the ever- 
 lasting All One. Practicing good works 
 unto all men; abjuring self in all things; 
 and Ormazd will dwell with you and in you 
 forever. 
 
 Then Brahma and Yu-tiv came near 
 Hog, that he might see clearly. Hog said: 
 Art thou truly Brahma, my father; and 
 thou, too, Yu-tiv, my mother? Yu-tiv 
 spake not, but Brahma said: I am thy fa- 
 ther, even Brahma. To practice the high- 
 est light a man hath; this is all that is re- 
 quired of any man. 
 
 Hog said: Of a truth it is my father! 
 Of a truth it is my mother! 
 
 Brahma said: We are blessed! This 
 is the first belief: to believe in the spirit 
 surviving the corporeal body; the second 
 belief is to learn the All Person. After 
 this cometh faith. 
 
 Hog said: Thou hast proven the first, 
 but as to the All Person, I cannot under- 
 stand. 
 
 Brahma said: As I and thy mother 
 have revealed ourselves to thee, and so 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ "*°" «co, D 413 
 
 proven ourselves, so in due season will 
 Ormazd reveal Himself unto thee. 
 
 And this was the end. Brahma and 
 Yu-tiv rose up in the sea of fire, smiling 
 and waving their hands in love to those be- 
 neath, higher and higher, till they disap- 
 peared in the sky. Then went the people, 
 and witnessed that the graves were open 
 and the bodies gone. They filled up the 
 places, and set a post inscribed: Tomb of 
 Brahma and Yu-tiv, God and Goddess. 
 
 CHAPTER XX. 
 HISTORY OF EAWAHTAH. 
 
 In Guatama, in the Middle Kingdom, 
 by the sea of So-ci-a-pan, came down from 
 heaven, Gitchee, the Creator, the World- 
 Maker, Manito! With silence, speaking in 
 the soul of things. He said: Speak, O 
 earth! Have eyes, O earth! Have ears, 
 O earth! Behold Me, your Maker! 
 
 The earth answered Him, not with 
 words, boasting, but raised up man! 
 
 Man said: Here I am, O Gitchee! The 
 Creator looked and beheld the Thins of 
 Guatama standing before Him, the lit- 
 tle people, white and yellow. Gitchee 
 said: Because thou hast answered me 
 in faith, O earth, thy ong'wee (talking 
 animals) shall be called I'hin. Thus was 
 named the first talkers; men with mouths 
 for words; ears for words. 
 
 Then Gitchee called the I'hins to- 
 gether, and said they were good; even 
 the handsomest of all created creations. 
 And he commanded them to marry, male 
 and female, and beget heirs. 
 
 And they obeyed Gitchee's commands; 
 but the dumb earth cast clouds upward, and 
 blinded the ways of the I'hins, and they 
 strayed away from the mounds, and came 
 to black Druks, which speak not; have no 
 words; being dumb like the black mud of 
 the earth where they burrowed. In the 
 darkness of the earth the I'hins mingled 
 with the Druks, and behold, a second born 
 speaking animal stood upon the earth, tall, 
 and red, and strong, swift and handsome. 
 Gitchee said: 
 
 I blame thee not, O I'hin! I saw the 
 darkness; saw thy straits! But never more 
 shalt thou dwell with Druks, nor with this 
 new race, those with faces like new 
 
 copper. Call then I'hua; for they shall be 
 protectors over my chosen, the I'hins, for- 
 ever. The I'hua shall drive away the 
 baugh and mieu and great serpents, and all 
 man-slaying beasts; for I will make mighty 
 nations out of the seed of the I'huans. 
 
 The first I'huan's name was O-e-du, and 
 his wife's name was Uh-na; and they be- 
 gat Owena and Dan and Shu-sa, but they 
 had no more heirs. At a time soon after, 
 the second man, whose name was Ka-ka- 
 wooh, and whose wife's name was Wees, 
 begat Somma, and Pan-ah, and Kac-ak, 
 and Ku-bak, and Jessom. And these were 
 the first tribes of I'huans in the land of 
 Guatama (after the flood), and they dwelt 
 together, marrying and begetting offspring,, 
 dwelling in peace. And the I'hins taught 
 them in all things, so they became an hon- 
 or on the earth and a glory unto the Crea- 
 tor; but they were mixed so together that 
 one tribe had no preference over another. 
 So they were called the tribe of Oedukka- 
 kaooh, of the middle kingdom, Waneopan- 
 ganosah. 
 
 In the valley of Owak, by the river Ho- 
 e-jon-wan Gitchee created another tribe 
 called Bak-Haw-ugh, and to the north of 
 them, in the mountains Meiu-how-an-go- 
 to-bah; and their tribes commingled, and 
 Gitchee named them Bakhawughmeouhow- 
 augotobah. 
 
 Jesson, son of Rakaooh, married We- 
 pon, daughter of Bakhawughmeiuhowan- 
 gotobah, and they begat Sto-gil-bak, and 
 he begat Kom, and he begat See, and she 
 married Ban, son of the tribe Rakaooh, 
 and Ban's first-born son's name was La- 
 ban-a-see. And Labanasee was born in 
 su'is of the second order, and could hear 
 the voice of the Great Spirit. And the 
 Voice remained with Labanasee during 
 his life-time, which was one hundred 
 and twenty and five years, when he 
 died. And the Voice descended to Le- 
 banasee's son, Hootlabanasee, who lived 
 one hundred and one years, and he died, 
 and the Voice descended to his son, Hata- 
 panagooshhootlabanasee; and thence to his 
 son after him, named Arapanseekasoodat- 
 ivhatapanagoosshhootlabanasee. 
 
 Thus were represented the eighteen 
 tribes of Gitchee's chosen amongst the 
 heirs to the Voice. 
 
414 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ABMIJ 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 Gitchee said unto Ara: Arise and go 
 forth; my hand will guide thee. So Ara 
 rose up and departed by the hand of the 
 Creator, and came to the valley of Owg, 
 broad and sweet-smelling, full of health- 
 giving food and air and water. And there 
 came with Ara into Owg one thousand 
 men, women and children; and they built 
 a city and called it Eftspan, signifying place 
 of beauty. And these took the name of the 
 tribe of Ara, which name survived one 
 thousand seven hundred and fifty years. 
 And their people were tens of thousands. 
 
 After the tribe of Ara lost the Voice, 
 there was raised up Sho-shone, of the 
 tribes of Sto-gil-bak. And Gitchee raised 
 His hand before Sho-shone and pointed the 
 way, and Sho-shone departed out of the 
 country of Tabachoozehbakkankan and 
 came to Owg, and took to wife Hisam, 
 daughter of Ooeguffanauha, and they begat 
 E-a-ron-a-ki-mutz, a son of great beauty 
 and strength, a swift runner. And the 
 voice of Gitchee-Manito came to Earon- 
 akimutz and remained with him during his 
 natural life-time, which was ninety years. 
 And to his son, Fassawanhootaganganea- 
 ronakimutz, and thence to his son, Monag- 
 oamyazazhufassawan-hootaganganearonak- 
 imutz. 
 
 And Monag inhabited the regions of 
 the plains of Yiteauazow, and his people 
 became mighty in cities and agriculture. 
 For four thousand years the Voice of the 
 All Father remained with the regular suc- 
 cession of the heirs of Monag, but their 
 names and their cities' names became so 
 long that no man could speak them or write 
 them. 
 
 So Gitchee raised up Honga, son of Ab, 
 of the tribe of Oedu, of the land of the Mid- 
 dle Kingdom. And Honga went into the 
 mountains of Ghiee, sloping to the east. 
 
 Gitchee spake to Honga, saying: 
 Thou shalt take Oebe for thy wife; out of 
 thy seed will I raise up a greater tribe than 
 all other tribes; and thy first-born son shall 
 have thy name; and thy son's son shall be 
 called Honga also; and thy sons' sons' son, 
 and so on forever. For I am wearied with 
 the burden of names; thy Great Creator 
 hath spoken. 
 
 Then asked Honga, saying: What if I 
 have no son, but only daughters? Or if 
 
 my son or my son's son, have only daugh- 
 ters? 
 
 Gitchee answered: The first daughter. 
 So, in course of time, Honga married 
 and begat heirs; and the Voice of 
 the Great Spirit remained with the 
 tribes of Honga, and it came to pass 
 that he who heard the Voice, who 
 was always the chief prophet for the tribe, 
 was called Honga; but the people them- 
 selves were called ong'wee. 
 
 And the generations of Honga were 
 called — first Honga; second Honga; third 
 Honga; and so on. And this was the be- 
 ginning of the counting of time in Guata- 
 ma. Neither knew any man the number of 
 generations before the time of Honga the 
 first. And the land became full of cities, 
 from the east to the west, and from the 
 north to the south, and the people dwelt in 
 peace, tribe with tribe. 
 
 In those days the kings and learned 
 men devoted their lives to building ca- 
 nals and finding places and roadways for 
 them, and herein laid the great glory and 
 honor of men at that time. And Gitchee 
 perceiving the virtue and wisdom of 
 men, sent his angels to teach man 
 canal - making; to teach man to com- 
 pound clay with lime and sand, to hold 
 water; to teach man to find the gau, the 
 level, and the force of water. The angels 
 also taught man to make pots and ket- 
 tles; to burn the clay in suitable shapes; to 
 find copper ore and silver ore, and gold 
 and lead for the floors of the oracle cham- 
 bers, clean and white shining, suitable for 
 angels. And they taught man how to 
 soften copper like dough; how to harden 
 copper like flint rock, for axes and mat- 
 tocks for building canals; taught man how 
 to work the ore in the fire and melt it; and 
 how to make lead into sheets, like cloth. 
 Taught man to till the soil and grow wheat 
 and corn; taught the women how to grind 
 it and make bread. Taught the hunters 
 how to slay the lion and the tiger and the 
 mastodon, the Hogawatha, the Rooting 
 Animal of Wisdom. 
 
 CHAPTER XXI. 
 
 These, then, were the principal kings of 
 that day: Lanoughl, king of Eboostakgan, 
 a city of tens of thousands, in the valley of 
 Aragaiyistan. Lanoughl was the son of 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ to™., -co.. 415 
 
 Toogaoogahaha, who was the son of Evil- 
 phraiganakukuwonpan, who was the son of 
 Oyoyughstuhaipwehaha, who built the canal 
 (oseowa) of Papaeunugheutowa, which ex- 
 extended from the sea of Hoola'hoola'pan 
 to the plains of Aigonquehanelachahoba, 
 near the sea of Sociapan, where dwelt Heo- 
 thahoga, king of kings, whose temple was 
 roofed with copper and silver. Of ten 
 thousand boats was the canal, ex- 
 tending along, carrying copper and silver 
 from the north regions to the cities of the 
 valley of Hapembapanpan, and to the cities 
 of the mountains of Oaramgallachacha, and 
 to Ghiee, home of Honga the first, the 
 mightiest of red men. 
 
 Next in power to Lanoughl was Tee- 
 see-gam-ba-o-rakaxax, king of the city of 
 Chusanimbapan, in the plains of Erezehoe- 
 gammas, with twelve tributary cities ex- 
 tending along the river Akaistaazachahaus- 
 tomakmak, to the mountains of Nefsaida- 
 wowotchachaeengamma. 
 
 And the third king in power was Chia- 
 
 wassaibakanaizhoo, of the city of Inuistaha- 
 
 . hahacromcromahoesuthaha, and to him 
 
 were tributary seven and twenty cities and 
 
 their kings. 
 
 Chiawassaibakanalszhoo was the son of 
 Tenehamgameralhucksukhaistomaipowwas- 
 saa, who was son of Thusaiganganenosata- 
 makka, who built the great east canal, the 
 Oseowagallaxacola, in the rich valley of 
 Tiedaswonoghassie, and through the land 
 of Seganoegaly alyuciahomaahomhom , 
 where dwelt the large men and women, the 
 Ongewahapackaka-ganganecolabazkoaxax. 
 
 The fourth great king of Guatama was 
 Hooagalomarakkadanapanwowwow, king 
 of the city of Itussakegollahamganseocola- 
 bah, which had seventeen tributary cities 
 of tens of thousands of people. And his 
 kingdom extended from sea to sea in the 
 Middle Kingdom. Here was the temple of 
 Gilofif, with a thousand collumns of pol- 
 ished mahognay, and with a dome of cop- 
 per and silver. And within Giloff dwelt 
 the Osheowena, the oracle of the Creator, 
 for two thousand years. 
 
 The fifth great king was Penambatta, 
 king of the city of Liscararzakyatasagan- 
 gan, on the High Heogula Ophat, with 
 thirty tributary cities of tens of thousands 
 of inhabitants. Here was situate the school 
 
 and college of great learning, the Ahazaho- 
 hoputan, where were taught tens of thou- 
 sands of students. Penambatta was learn- 
 ed, and had traveled far, devoting his life 
 to imparting knowledge. He had six thou- 
 sand attendants, besides six hundred and 
 forty officers. 
 
 The sixth great king was Hoajab, son 
 of Teutsangtusicgammoo ghsapanpan, 
 founder of the kilns of Wooboohakhak. 
 Hoajab's capital city was Farejonkahomah, 
 with thirty-three tributary cities, of tens of 
 thousands of inhabitants, of the plains of 
 He'gow. 
 
 The seventh great king was Hiroughs- 
 kahogamorghtabakbak, and his capital city 
 was Hoesughsoosiamcholabonganeobanzh- 
 ohahhah, situate in the plains of Messogo- 
 wanchoola, and extending eastward to the 
 mountains of Gonzhoowassicmachababdo- 
 huyapiasondrythoajaj, including the valleys 
 of the river Onepagassathalalanganchoo- 
 choo, even to the sea, Poerthawowitcheo- 
 thunacalclachaxzhloschistacombia. He had 
 forty and seven tributary cities of tens of 
 thousands of inhabitants. 
 
 Betwixt the great kings and their capi- 
 tals were a thousand canals, crossing the 
 country in every way, from east to west 
 and from north to south, so that the seas 
 of the north were connected with the seas 
 of the south. In kanoos the people trav- 
 eled and carried the productions of the land 
 in every way. Besides the canals men- 
 tioned, there were seven other great canals, 
 named after the kings who built them, and 
 they extended across the plains in many 
 directions, but chiefly east and west. These 
 were : Oosgaloomaigovolobanazhooegollo- 
 pan, and Halagazhapanpanegoochoo, and 
 Fillioistagovonchobiassoso, and Anetiabo- 
 lalachooesanggomacoaloabonbakkak, and 
 Ehabadangonzhooeportalicha-boggasa-me- 
 gticheepapa, and Onepapollagassayamgan- 
 shuniatedo egonachoogangitiavatoosom- 
 chooibalgadgad, and Hachooaolagobwotch- 
 achabakaraxexganhammazhooelapanpan. 
 
 Besides all these inhabited regions there 
 lay another country to the far west, fifty 
 days' journey, the land of Goeshallobok, a 
 place of sand and salt, and hot, boiling wa- 
 ters. And this region was a twenty days' 
 journey broad, east and west, and fifty 
 days' journey north and south. 
 
416 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARM1J - RDS . BE co RB 
 
 In the High North lay the kingdom of 
 Olegalla, the land of giants, the place of 
 yellow rocks and high spouting waters. 
 Olegalla it was who gave away his king- 
 dom, the great city of Powafuchawowitch- 
 ahavagganeabba, with the four and twenty 
 tributary cities spread along the valley of 
 Anemoosagoochakakfuela; gave his king- 
 dom to his queen Minneganekashaka, with 
 the yellow hair, long, hanging down. And 
 the queen built temples, two hundred and 
 seventy, and two adjacent to the spouting 
 waters, where her people went every morn- 
 ing at sunrise, singing praise to Gitchee, 
 Manito, the Creator. 
 
 South of Olegalla lay the kingdom of 
 Onewagga, around about the sea of Chusa- 
 mangaobe-hassahgana-wowitchee, in the 
 valley of Mauegobah, meaning, Con- 
 secrated Place of the Voice, a kingdom of 
 forty cities. Here reigned for twenty gen- 
 erations the line of kings called Wineoh- 
 gushhagusha, most holy and wise, full of 
 manliness and strong limbed. On the east- 
 ward of the lake lay the Woohootaughnee, 
 the ground of games and tournaments, 
 where came tens of thousands every au- 
 tumn to exhibit their strength, carrying 
 horses and oxen, and running and leaping, 
 running races with the trained aegamma. 
 And to the strongest and swiftest, the king 
 gave prizes of handsome damsels, with 
 straight limbs and shapely necks, proud, 
 who loved to be awarded handsome, 
 mighty husbands. Next south lay the king- 
 dom of Himallawowoaganapapa, rich in le- 
 gends of the people who lived here before 
 the flood; a kingdom of seventy cities and 
 six great canals coursing east and west, 
 and north and south, from the Ghiee Moun- 
 tain, in the east, to the west mountain, the 
 Yublahahcolaesavaganawakka, the place of 
 the king of bears, the Eeughohabakax. 
 And to the south, to the Middle Kingdom, 
 on the deserts of Geobiathaganeganewoh- 
 woh, where the rivers empty not into the 
 sea, but sink in the sand, the Sonagalla- 
 kaxax, creating prickly Thuazhoogallak- 
 hoomma, shaped like a pear. 
 
 CHAPTER XXII. 
 
 Then came the God of evil, Itura, sow- 
 ing evil in the temples and on the altars. 
 Yea, with a false tongue and cunning came 
 he, before the prophets, stealing their eyes 
 
 away, stealing their ears away; holding up 
 his hand, saying: It is the Great Spirit's 
 hand. 
 
 And I'tura obsessed the nations and 
 tribes of men to worship him; infatuating 
 them with the stories of far-off countries, 
 and the glory of kings and queens. And he 
 set on foot a war of plunder; brought ten 
 thousand times ten thousand evil spirits 
 to aid and abet mortals in war. And I'tura, 
 the God of evil, taught mortals to flatten 
 the head, to make prophets for him, and 
 behold, the land of Guatama became a land 
 of seers and prophets and conjurers, seek- 
 ing evil for the sake of evil; consulting the 
 spirits of the dead for war and for earthly 
 glory in blood and death. 
 
 And the fair land of Guatama was over- 
 spread with human blood. Fell war spread 
 along throughout all the mighty kingdoms; 
 kingdom against kingdom; city against 
 city; man against man. And the holy tem- 
 ples were pulled down or burnt; and the 
 canals broken and wasted; the cities burnt 
 and the fields laid desolate. Neither grew 
 there any grain; the grinding mills of the 
 women were silent, like the dead stretched 
 over all the fields! Into the forest, afar off, 
 fled the women with the children, hungry, 
 weeping, starving. And the cities went 
 down; the nations went down; the tribes of 
 men were broken up; only remnants here 
 and there remained. And where had been 
 great and mighty peoples, lay only heaps of 
 ruins, past the power of man to rebuild. 
 
 Then looked down from the highest 
 heaven, the Creator, the Great Spirit; saw 
 the work of desolation; saw I'tura at his 
 bloody work. And the Great Spirit cried 
 out with a loud voice, so that earth and 
 heaven shook with the power of His voice; 
 sifted all things, as a woman sifteth meal. 
 And He found one grain of corn not 
 ground by the God of evil, found Honga! 
 The tribes so fast sworn to the Great Spirit 
 that the evil Gods' and evil spirits' words 
 rolled off and took no hold on them. The 
 Great Spirit saw the tribes of Honga, they 
 that stuck most to the I'hins, the sacred 
 little people, white and yellow, oft marry- 
 ing with them, thus preserving heirs to 
 the Voice. And He called loud and long. 
 
 Honga! Honga! Honga! The Crea- 
 tor would not be put off with silence; called 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-AEMIJ 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 417 
 
 again: Honga! Honga! Honga! Again 
 He called: Honga! Honga! Honga! 
 
 In the first call, I'tura and his evil hosts 
 ran away. In His second call, it was like 
 spring-time, after heavy winter. And in 
 the third call, it was like budding summer. 
 And there came up a sprout of the seed of 
 Honga, an I'huan; taller than any other 
 man with a bright shining face like copper; 
 shining as if all the destroyed temples glis- 
 tened in his broad head. 
 
 And he spake, saying: Here, O Great 
 Spirit, here am I! And the Great Spirit 
 said: Who art thou, My Son? And he an- 
 swered: I am Son of the Creator. Then 
 asked the Great Spirit: Of what tribe? 
 And he answered: My genealogy is of the 
 spirit. Of the I'hin my mother; of the 
 I'huan, my father. 
 
 Then said the Creator: For which rea- 
 son I name thee Eawahtah, spirit and flesh 
 even balanced, best of men. Come thou 
 with Me; walk along with Me; thou shalt 
 re-instate the tribes of men; deliver them 
 out of darkness. 
 
 Eawahtah said: I am Thy servant, O 
 Great Spirit. What shall I call Thee, that 
 the tribes of men be no longer distrustful? 
 Then answered the Creator: Call Me after 
 the wind, O Eawahtah! 
 
 Eawahtah said: How after the wind? 
 The Great Spirit said: Come with Me, My 
 Son. Then Eawahtah walked along and 
 came to a place where the wind blew in the 
 leaves. 
 
 The Creator said: Tell Me, My Son, 
 what saith the wind in the leaves? And an- 
 swered Eawahtah: E! Then the Creator 
 took Eawahtah to the big sea water, and 
 asked: What saith the wind in the water, 
 My Son? And Eawahtah answered: Go! 
 Then took the Creator Eawahtah to the 
 high crags, the rocks above the clouds, 
 piercing, where the wind whistled; and He 
 said: What saith the wind, My Son? And 
 Eawahtah answered: Quim! 
 
 And the Great Spirit said: Call Me 
 Egoquim, O My Son. I am the earth and 
 all that is in the earth and on the earth, 
 and all the stars and moon and sun; they 
 all My. members. And the air above 
 the earth, the Atontea, is another mem- 
 ber of My Person. And higher yet; in 
 the high place above the air, is the ethe, 
 the great penetrator; and that is also a 
 
 member of My Person. I am every- 
 where, far and near; all things thine eye 
 seeth; all things thine ear heareth are 
 of Me and in Me. Behold the flowers 
 of the field; I color them. Behold the 
 ant and the honeybee; I lead them; the 
 bird I teach how to build. 
 
 Man alone is stubborn, setting up ways 
 of his own. O that he could learn to be 
 one with Me! To move and labor with 
 Me! Then spake Eawahtah, saying: Holy 
 Egoquim! I will go and teach man, give 
 him Thy words; make him understand. 
 
 Egoquim said: For that labor called I 
 thee forth, made thee tall and handsome, 
 with strong limbs and broad shoulders. 
 Come, then, My Son, I will go with thee; 
 into all the lands; amongst all the scat- 
 tered tribes; thy voice shall be My Voice. 
 So near thee will I stand, when thou open- 
 est thy mouth to speak, fear not, I will give 
 thee words; thou shalt not err. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVII. 
 
 Eawahtah inquired: What shall I say; 
 how teach the sons and daughters of men? 
 
 Egoquim answered Eawahtah, saying: 
 
 One Great Person, even Egoquim, Cre- 
 ator and Ruler over all in heaven and on 
 earth. Him shalt thou have and no 
 God, nor Lord, nor idol, nor man, nor an- 
 gel, to worship, forever! Him shalt thou 
 love above all things in heaven above, or 
 on the earth, or in the waters of the earth! 
 And thou shalt teach Him to thy children, 
 and command them to teach Him to their 
 children, and so on forever! And thou 
 shalt forswear all Gods, and Lords, 
 and idols, to worship them not forever! 
 And the same to thy children, and to 
 their children after them, forever! 
 
 And thou shalt deal unto all men, and 
 women and children, as justly and kindly 
 as to thine own mother, out of whose 
 breast thou wert fed when thou wert help- 
 less and of no strength. Teaching this to 
 thy children, and to their children after 
 them, forever! 
 
 And to the sick and helpless; to the 
 stranger and the man that cometh afar; to 
 the widow who is destitute; to the child 
 that hath no father; thou shalt be both fa- 
 
418 
 
 CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARMIJ f«.. r CC oro 
 
 ther and mother to them; and take them 
 into thy house and feed them; and give 
 them skins and cloth to wear; and if they 
 be lost thou shalt go with them and show 
 them the way. Commanding these things 
 unto thy children, and to their children 
 after them, forever! 
 
 And thou shalt not tell lies; nor speak 
 falsely against any man, nor woman, nor 
 child; nor break thy word of promise, even 
 though death come upon thee to induce 
 thee otherwise. Unchangeable as the set- 
 ting and rising sun shall be the word of thy 
 mouth! And thou shalt command this to 
 thy children, and to their children after 
 them, forever! 
 
 And thou shalt not take and possess 
 that which is another's; nor suffer thy chil- 
 dren to do so, nor their children after them, 
 forever. 
 
 And thou shalt respect the times of wo- 
 man; and when she is bearing unto thee, 
 thou shalt not lie with her; nor give her 
 heavy labor, nor angry words, nor fret her; 
 but be obedient to her, doing whatsoever 
 she asketh thee to do, for it is her time, 
 and she is thy queen. Teaching this to thy 
 young men and to thy young women, and 
 to theirs that come after them, forever; for 
 their young are begotten of Me, and I will 
 have them shapely, and strong, and brave! 
 
 Thou shalt labor six days, but on the 
 seventh, the moon's day, thou shalt not 
 labor, nor hunt, nor fish, but go to 
 the altar of thy Creator and dance and 
 sing before Me; and sit in silence to hear 
 my words, which I speak into the souls of 
 men, and of women and children. Teach- 
 ing this to thy children, and to their chil- 
 dren that come after them, forever. 
 
 Thou shalt restore the rites and cere- 
 monies of Choe-pan and Annubia-pan but 
 thou shalt not flatten the head to drive 
 the judgment of the brain away to the 
 prophetic regions. Teaching these things 
 to thy children, and to their children after 
 them, forever! 
 
 Then rose up Eawahtah, Son of Ego- 
 quim, saying: I am Thy servant! Lead 
 thou me, for I am going in Thy name, even 
 to the end of the world! 
 
 When thus spake Eawahtah, Son of the 
 Great Spirit, a Light came over him, daz- 
 zling, brilliant, lighting the way, showing 
 him the way. And so great was the spirit 
 on Eawahtah, that when he came to the 
 river, he rose up like an angel, sailed over 
 and landed safely on the other side. Nei- 
 ther knew he whither he was going; knew 
 not the places of the scattered, destroyed 
 peoples. 
 
 And the angels of Egoquim went before 
 him; went into the forests and valleys, 
 calling to the souls of the suffering, starv- 
 ing, dying, saying to them in their despair: 
 Egoquim, the Mighty, is coming! His 
 Son! Behold him! He holdeth the keys of 
 Hochedcwa, the heavenly hunting ground. 
 Come forth from your hiding! Come forth, 
 O My beloved! It is your Heavenly Fa- 
 ther calling. And the women heard! The 
 little children, with sore, bleeding feet! 
 The proud, brave men gave ear! They 
 said: Why do we fight? Why do we de- 
 stroy? It was a wicked God! He called 
 himself the Savior, — the wicked monster, 
 I'tura! 
 
 Then came Eawahtah; came first to the 
 kingdom of Took-shein, and to his queen, 
 Che-guh, in the land, Anagoomahaha, the 
 flat-heads. Told them all the words of the 
 Great Spirit, Egoquim. 
 
 Then spake Took-shein, saying: To me 
 the Great Spirit hath spoken; told me all 
 the words thou hast. I know all thou hast 
 said is true. Then spake Che-guh, saying: 
 To me spake Gitchee, the Great Spirit. 
 True are all thy words, O Eawahtah. By 
 thee will all the scattered tribes be gathered 
 together. Many tribes will there be of the 
 red man. 
 
 Then spake Eawahtah, saying to his 
 good host and hostess: Your place shall 
 be the centre: from your place I will 
 extend outward, always bringing in fol- 
 lowers. Whilst thus they talked, a Light 
 came above them. Look, said Took-shein: 
 It is the hand of Egoquim! Look, said 
 Che-guh: It is the Voice of Gitchee! 
 Then spake Eawahtah: It is a ship of fire 
 coming down from heaven! I hear the 
 voice of the angel of Egoquim, the Mighty! 
 
 Then Eawahtah went and stood betwixt 
 Took-shein and Che-guh, holding their 
 
CYCLE OF CPENTA-ARM1J ^- BE coro 41 g 
 
 hands, so the Voice of Egoquim could 
 speak plainly. 
 
 Then spake Egoquim, saying, speaking 
 out of the ship of fire: Yea, My beloved! 
 I am with you! Behold, My worlds are 
 wide and many. When My back is turned, 
 evil Gods come to steal My children; tell 
 them lies to win them; tell them they are 
 My Sons come to save them! Hard is the 
 fate of those that worship them; but 
 they are Mine. I look around at times; 
 I set the evil Gods flying. Be of strong 
 heart, O My beloved! Many races will 
 come and go on these lands. But the red 
 man shall possess it; inhabit it far and near. 
 Then shall come another evil God, to flay 
 and destroy My sons, and daughters, to 
 cover all the lands over with pure blood. 
 Then will I come again and rout the evil 
 God, raise up My sons and daughters, full 
 of glory. From far over the water will I 
 bring their kindred, who worship none 
 born of woman; a wise speaking people. 
 A people that war not; who kill not the 
 weaker nations. I will come in the Tenon- 
 achi, and the Hoochiquis; My hand shall 
 reach around the earth in that day. I will 
 chase away all Gods and Saviors born of 
 woman. Only the Great Spirit shall all 
 men worship. 
 
 Go forth, My son; build wide My foun- 
 dation; in this land will I found My earth- 
 ly kingdom. 
 
 Then upward rose the ship of heaven; 
 and Eawahtah buckled on his traveling 
 
 slippers; bade good-by to Too-shein; filled 
 his pockets with the bread of Che-guh; 
 kissed her hand good-by, and started. For 
 many years traveled Eawahtah, over all 
 the regions of Guatama; teaching, gather- 
 ing together, swearing the people ever af- 
 ter to be firm to the Great Spirit; made 
 them swear solemn oaths that never more 
 would they listen to any save the Cre- 
 ator; made them swear they would never 
 be caught by another cunning Savior, like 
 I'tura, whose people delight in war. 
 
 Into villages gathered Eawahtah the 
 frightened tribes, and taught them writing 
 and engraving; taught them the secret 
 name of the Great Spirit, Egoquim; and 
 explained to them the moon, how to keep 
 the seventh day for worship. 
 
 The Creator saw the great work of Ea- 
 wahtah; saw the people gathered together 
 in tens of thousands of places. Then spake 
 the Creator to Eawahtah, saying: 
 
 Forty mighty nations shalt thou found, 
 O My son; and every nation shall be an in- 
 dependent nation; but all the nations shall 
 be united into a brotherhood of nations, as 
 one mighty people, and that one shall be 
 called O-pah-E-go-quim. Build thou a 
 model for them, O Eawahtah. 
 
 Then Eawahtah made the nations; unit- 
 ed them into one mighty people, and called 
 them the nations of Opahegoquim. And 
 they planted the country over with corn- 
 fields, and dwelt in peace. 
 
Cycle of Lika 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 In the far-off etherean worlds spake the 
 Voice of Jehovih, saying: Lika, My Son! 
 Behold the red- star, Earth. She cometh 
 thy way; she mergeth dark and soiled from 
 the forests of ji'ay, in the swamps of Bonas- 
 sah. She will cross thy etherean fields, Ta- 
 kuspe, Opel, and Wedojain, dripping with 
 the odor and dross of the ji'ay'an swamps. 
 Go thou to her, and wash clean her soil 
 and her atmospherean heavens. 
 
 Lika said: I will go to the red 
 star, Earth, O Father! I will deliver her 
 into purity and faith. Thy chosen shall be 
 delivered from bondage; Thy God made 
 triumphant on Earth and in her heavens. 
 
 Lika called to his high Council, in his 
 etherean kingdom, Vetta'puissa, in the 
 Plains of Peo'ya, off the Road of Ahtogo- 
 nassas, at the high Arc of Bon, made light 
 by the holy angels of tens of thousands of 
 years; and he said: 
 
 Behold the red star, Earth; the Voice of 
 Jehovih came to me, saying: Go thou to 
 her, O My Son, and wash clean her soil 
 and her atmospherean heavens. And I said: 
 I will go, O Father! I will deliver her 
 into purity and faith. 
 
 Five hundred million etherean hosts 
 will I take with me. For five years and 
 forty days will I and my hosts sojourn on 
 the red star and in her heavens. Her God 
 shall be restored and delivered in Jehovih's 
 name. According to the rank of harvest 
 of the gardens of Honyon, so shall my 
 marshals choose and record my hosts. 
 
 Then spake the historians of the ether- 
 ean libraries of the Vorkman Road, where 
 had traveled Earth for tens of thousands of 
 years. And they detailed the affairs of 
 Earth for many cycles past; made plain be- 
 fore the Gods assembled all the history of 
 Earth and her heavens. 
 
 Then Lika sent swift messengers off to 
 Earth and her heavens; in arrow-ships of 
 fire they sped forth, twenty thousand, well 
 skilled in coursing the etherean heavens 
 
 and penetrating the atmospherean vortices 
 of traveling stars; to obtain the details of 
 her God and her false Gods; her Lords and 
 false Lords; her hadas and her hells; to 
 scan her libraries and hastily return to Vet- 
 ta'puissa, to lay the matters before the 
 high Council and Lika, the Nirvaniaft 
 Chief. 
 
 Lika sprang from the corporeal star 
 Atos, which traverseth the roads, Yatas- 
 ko-owen, of the south circuit of Thoese, 
 the vortex of another far-off sun, and was 
 raised to etherea in the cycle of Sai-kah, 
 one hundred and twenty-five thousand 
 years, by Meth-ya, Goddess of Ori-iyi, af- 
 terward Chieftainess of Yeuna-gamaya. 
 And Lika rose to be God of Avalassak four 
 thousand years; God of Kemma, six thou- 
 sand years; Inspector of Judas' etherean 
 roads at the a'ji'an swamps of Hennassit, 
 fifteen thousand years; Surveyor of Iwalt, 
 two thousand years; Surveyor of the Wa- 
 cha excursion, four thousand years; Re- 
 corder of Hitte-somat, eight thousand 
 years; Deliverer of Habian vortices, twen- 
 ty-six thousand years; Measurer of densi- 
 ties in Ablank, one thousand years; Re- 
 corder of the Ratiotyivi, two thousand 
 years; God of the Home Plains of Cteve- 
 rezed, twelve thousand years; Chief of 
 Mah-ha-dewin, twenty thousand years; and 
 Chief of Vetta'puissa, twenty-five thousand 
 years. 
 
 Lika had for his high Council thirty 
 thousand Chieftains and Chieftainesses, of 
 grades of more than a hundred thousand 
 years in the etherean worlds; five hundred 
 thousand of the rank of Inspectors; seven 
 million of the rank of Gods and Goddesses; 
 and of the rank of Lords and Lordesses, 
 more than half a thousand million. 
 
 Of the Rapon hosts there were seven 
 Chiefs and nine Chieftainesses, who were 
 Lika's private companions. First, Reb- 
 sad, Chief of Sotissav, forty thousand 
 years; Sufristor of Sheleves, sixty thou- 
 sand years; Marshal of Zele'axi, twenty 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 421 
 
 thousand years; Master of Bassaion, sev- 
 enty thousand years; and he passed twen- 
 ty thousand year on the journey of Loo- 
 soit-ta-vragenea, besides thousands of oth- 
 er journeys of less duration. 
 
 Next to Rebsad was Yanodi, ( Chieftain- 
 ess of Ure, seventy thousand years; Chief- 
 tainess of the Roads of Sallatamya, seven- 
 ty thousand years; Marshaless of Petan- 
 asa, forty thousand years; Goddess of the 
 ji'ay'an forest of Loo-loo-woh-ga, sixty- 
 five thousand years; besides Goddess of 
 Mor, Goddess of Chichigennahsmmah, 
 Goddess of El, and of Raumba, and of 
 Zee. 
 
 Next to Yanodi was Thazid, Goddess 
 of Zoleth, Mistress of Yith-kad, Chief- 
 tainess of Hagu, Chieftainess of De'baur, 
 and of Hachull, and of the Roads of Olea- 
 skivedho, besides Goddess of more than 
 one hundred etherean worlds. 
 
 Then came Thoso, Chief of Kassarah 
 and Dassamatz, ninety thousand years; 
 God of Saxax, seven thousand years; God 
 of Chennesa, God of Hoxora, God of Fi- 
 ben, God of Hotab, each six thousand 
 years; surveyor of the Lymthian Roads, 
 twelve thousand years; marker of meteors, 
 two thousand years; Fireman of Thostus 
 on the Ibien excursion, thirty thousand 
 years. 
 
 Next to Thoso came Miente, Chieftain- 
 ess of Gawl and Sanabtis, in whose domin- 
 ions the star T-lemos was uzated, when 
 Gai-loo opened the Road of Enjxiustus 
 for the Nizaigi vortices of Messak; Chief- 
 tainess of Lam-Goo and Kud, Goddess of 
 Itzi, Goddess of Ashem and of the Baxgor 
 Wing, Goddess of the Duik Swamps, and 
 Lordess of Sus and Havrij ; in all one hun- 
 dred and seven thousand years. 
 
 Chema-jius stood next; she was Chief- 
 tainess of Hors-ad and Tu and Okadad, 
 Goddess of Asthy, and Hid, and Sheau- 
 gus, and Jagri, Surveyor of Arvat and the 
 Vadhuan Roads; surveyor of Anchas; sur- 
 veyor of the Han Mountains in the ether- 
 ean Uuj of Drij-Lee; in all two hundred 
 and sixty thousand years. 
 
 Next stood Murdhana, Chieftainess of 
 D'hup and Hen-Dhi, Chieftainess of Hap- 
 pa and Hirish, surveyor of Sepher and 
 Daka, Inspector of Anachu, and Zadon, 
 and Edau, and Medtisha, and Roth; in all 
 ninety thousand years. 
 
 Oshor stood next: Chief of Out-si 
 and of Yotek, and of Samoan, and of Yad- 
 akha, maker of the Bridge of Weasitee, 
 Marshal of the Honlaguoth expedition, 
 and, besides these places, God of seven 
 etherean worlds; in all one hundred and 
 twelve thousand years. 
 
 Next came Yihoha, Chief of Shung- 
 how and Agon, Chief of Neo-sin, God of 
 Izeaha, and Kaon, and Ahsow, and Una, 
 and Yuk-Hoh, and Ahgoon. He was also 
 the builder of the Raxon etherean arches; 
 in all ninety thousand years. 
 
 Hisin was next: Chief of the Kionas 
 Belt, where Yagota, the Orian Chief, 
 walled the Plains of Maga, the Nirvanian 
 home of the delivered hells of Mina half a 
 million years before. Hisin was here called 
 Creator of Wit, because of establishing his 
 Chieftaincy on the ruins of hell. He was 
 also Chief of Mamsa and Jauap, God of 
 Gah, and of Darah, the region of fountain 
 flowers; in all ninety thousand years. 
 
 Bowen was next: Chief of Apaha, for- 
 merly the Farms of Lung-wan and Srid, 
 Chief of Vadhua, and of the Valleys of 
 Nasquam, where a million years before the 
 Chief of Chaksa disrupted the Atmospher- 
 ean Sakri, and liberated from its four thou- 
 sand hells more than thirty thousand mill- 
 ion angel slaves in chaos. Bowen had also 
 served as God of Amaan, and Havat, and 
 Shedo, and Pivan; and as measurer of Pra- 
 cha and Xeri, and Asthus, surveyor of 
 Ulam, and Sheyom, and Chozeh, and Zad- 
 ark; in all eighty thousand years. 
 
 Gwan Goo was next: She was Chief- 
 tainess of Andol, the place of the one-time 
 apex of the Karowgan vortex, where was 
 formed the star Ogitas and sent on its 
 course by Aclon-guin, Orian Chief of 
 Shegoweasa. This vortex, when first 
 formed by Aclon-guin, was three hundred 
 thousand million miles long and was com- 
 etary thirty thousand years in Aclon-guin's 
 hands. Gwan Goo was also Chieftainess of 
 Ahsa-thah and Waegon; Goddess of Anoa, 
 and of Howgil, and of Zahaive; in all one 
 hundred and thirty thousand years. 
 
 Geehoogan was next: Chieftainess of 
 Sumatri in the By-roads of Yotargis, Chief- 
 tainess of the four etherean worlds, Yoni, 
 Ogh, Theum and Wachwakags; surveyor 
 of Unshin, Zarihea and Keanteri; inspec- 
 tress of Saguiz, and Hagimal, and Hafha, 
 
422 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 and Borax, and Rab, and Shor-loo; in all 
 eighty thousand years. 
 
 Next stood Bachne-isij, Chief of Ya- 
 halom, where the Gein Maker, Tarmoth, 
 cleared the Forests of the a'ji'an Haloth, 
 in making a roadway for Havalad's group 
 of Shemasian corporeal stars, in which la- 
 bor he engaged ninety thousand million 
 Nirvanians for four thousand years, and 
 the distance of the road was more than 
 one hundred thousand million miles. Bach- 
 ne-isij was Chief of Agwan, and Shoe-nas- 
 tus, and Hador, and Ad; God of Vach, 
 and of Kuja, and Rai, and Kathab, and 
 Cynab, and Buhd, and Abbir; measurer of 
 the mountains of the etherean worlds, Vij- 
 hath, and Hakan, and Dis; measurer of the 
 arches in the etherean world Niksh; con- 
 structor of the Plains in the Nirvanian 
 world Chom; in all .one hundred and thir- 
 ty thousand years. 
 
 Rehemg was next: Chieftainess of Ot- 
 askaka, commonly called World of Shin- 
 ing Waters, a great visiting place in Nir- 
 vana; she was Goddess of Theasapalas and 
 Timax, weigher of Sultzhowtcih in the 
 Ofel Plains; in all one hundred thousand 
 years. 
 
 Then stood Antosiv, Goddess of Munn, 
 renowned because she was of two hundred 
 and sixty thousand years, and had declin- 
 ed exaltation above the rank of Goddess. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 Far and wide, spread the words of Li- 
 ka, over the Plains of Poeya, where 
 traveled Earth and her heavens. Far off, 
 toward the northern group of twinkling 
 stars, gazed the etherean millions; rose the 
 voice of millions: Where is the red star? 
 Where lieth Earth and her troubled hea- 
 vens? Is not this the young star, a satel- 
 lite that traveleth with the hidan sun? 
 What is the angle and course of this little, 
 traveling world, that our eyes may feast 
 on the road where soon our Chief will send 
 Jehovih's redeeming ships? 
 
 Then they pointed, surmising, by the 
 red-like color and tedious motion, which 
 was Earth, one of the small gems that Je- 
 hovih had placed in the measureless firma- 
 ment. And they gazed thereon, speaking 
 with souls of delight: Great art Thou, O 
 
 Jehovih, to build so wide. To stud the 
 etherean woi^ds with gems like these; to 
 provide a place for the souls of men to 
 germinate. Surely her people, the sons 
 and daughters of the red star, must behold 
 etherea; must realize the difference betwixt 
 a short corporeal life and this endless par- 
 adise. Can it be that they have, in their 
 small heavens, unscrupulous false Lords 
 and false Gods who set themselves up to 
 be worshipped as creators, whom mortals 
 name with bated breath? And have they, 
 too, a host of Saviors, who profess to have 
 the key to all the roads that lead into this 
 great expanse, the etherean worlds? Some 
 excuse mortals have who are brought forth 
 to life on the central suns, to be stubborn 
 in their egotism of their Lords and Saviors 
 and Gods; but on one so small like Earth, 
 how can it be? 
 
 Then came back Lika's swift messen- 
 gers in their arrow-ships; messengers at- 
 tained to be very Gods in wisdom, and in 
 swiftness. And they quickly told the tale, 
 about their visit to the red star and her 
 heavens; told how the God of Earth, Son 
 of Jehovih, had struggled on, but had been 
 outmatched by all odds by self-Gods and 
 self-Lords, who had plunged thousands of 
 millions of hapless souls into torturing 
 hells. And this news Lika spread abroad 
 in his etherean dominions, which only need- 
 ed to be told once, for every sympathetic 
 soul by his shocked appearance told it to 
 others, which spread instantly to thousands 
 of millions of high-raised ethereans. And 
 when Lika said: Five hundred million an- 
 gels shall go with me to the troubled 
 Earth and her heavens; in short time the 
 volunteers were ready to be enrolled on the 
 list. 
 
 Then Lika inquired more fully of the 
 swift messengers, and they answered him, 
 saying: Earth hath passed her corporeal 
 maturity, and mortals have set up a prya- 
 mid to mark the time thereof. The days 
 of the highest, greatest audacity of the 
 self-Gods are past, and are memorized by 
 the pyramid also; for in that self-same 
 time, they taught mortals to worship the 
 God as the Lord and the Savior, instead of 
 the Great Spirit, Jehovih. But darkness 
 is upon the self-Gods, and they are bound 
 in hells; and spirits are also bound in hells. 
 Behold, this is the first dawn of dan on 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 423 
 
 Earth since she passed the limit of her 
 greatest corporeality. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 Lika said to his chief marshal: Enroll 
 thou my hosts, five hundred million, and 
 appoint unto them captains and generals, 
 and grade them and apportion them. Be- 
 side these give me one million singers, 
 one million trumpeters, one million attend- 
 ants, one million heralds, one million mes- 
 sengers and one million recorders and wait- 
 ers. 
 
 Lika called his chief builder and said 
 unto him: Build me a fire-ship, an aira- 
 vagna, with capacity for a thousand mill- 
 ion; and provide thou the ship with offi- 
 cers and workmen sufficient. Consult thou 
 with my mathematicians as to the distance 
 to the red star, and as to the densities 
 through which the ship shall pass, and as 
 to the power required, and the time of 
 the journey, and provide thou all things 
 sufficient therefor. 
 
 Then Lika spake to the high Council, 
 saying: For the time of my absence my 
 vice-Chief, Heih-Woo, shall hold my place. 
 Touching matters whereof ye desire my 
 voice before I go, speak ye! 
 
 Atunzi said: Behold, O Lika, the star, 
 Yatis, headeth towards the a'ji'an Forests 
 of Actawa, and she hath not passed the 
 esparan age! Lika said: To clear the 
 forest Actawa I appoint Eashivi, Goddess, 
 with three thousand million laborers. 
 Eashivi, how sayest thou? Eashivi said: 
 Thanks to Jehovih and to thee, O Lika. 
 I will at once choose my laborers and pro- 
 ceed to make the road. 
 
 Wan Tu'y said: Erst thy return, O 
 Lika, the Hapsa-ogan vortex will cross the 
 south Fields of Vetta'puissa. She hath 
 twenty thousand million souls in grades of 
 sixty and seventy. Lika said: To her as- 
 sistance for three years I appoint Tici-king, 
 God, with fifty million for his hosts. How 
 sayest thou, Tici-king? Tici-king said: 
 By the love of Jehovih, I rejoice in this 
 labor. In sufficient time will I prepare my 
 hosts and accomplish what thou hast given 
 into my keeping. 
 
 Wothalowsit said: In four years the 
 hosts of E'win will return from the double 
 stars, Eleb and Wis, with their harvest of 
 forty thousand million angels. How shall 
 
 they be apportioned? Lika said: To 
 Bonassah, six thousand million; to Opel, 
 two thousand million; to Wedojain, five 
 thousand million; to Feuben Roads, seven 
 thousand million; to Zekel, four thousand 
 million; to Huron, three thousand million; 
 to Poe-ga, six thousand million; to Yulit, 
 one thousand million, and to Zulava, four 
 thousand million; and I appoint Misata, 
 Goddess, to provide the places in these 
 several heavens for them, and to have 
 charge of their selection and allotment. 
 And I give to her five million angels for 
 her laboring hosts. How sayest thou, 
 Misata? Misata said: It is Jehovih's gift; 
 I am rejoiced. I will prepare myself and 
 my hosts. 
 
 Ching Huen said: Behold the star- 
 world, Esatas, in her se'muan age will 
 cross the Roads of Veh-yuis in three years 
 hence! Lika answered Ching Huen, say- 
 ing: To cross these roads of light in her 
 se'muan age would blight her power to 
 bring forth animal life sufficient unto her 
 wide continents. The trail must be filled 
 with se'muan forests to preserve her ges- 
 tative season. To this labor I appoint 
 Ieolakak, God of Esatas' se'muan forests 
 in the Roads of Veh-yuis, four thousand 
 years. And I allot to Ieolakak six thou- 
 sand million laborers. How sayest thou, 
 Ieolakak? He answered: This is a great 
 labor; by the wisdom and power of Jehovih, 
 I will accomplish it. 
 
 Veaga-indras said: In two years the 
 fleets of Leogastrivins will return from 
 their voyage of four thousand years, bring- 
 ing two thousand million guests from the 
 Iniggihuas regions. Who shall provide 
 for their reception? Lika said: Yeanops- 
 tan, with ten million hosts. How sayest 
 thou? Yeanopstan said: A most wel- 
 come labor, O Lika. 
 
 Hiss-Joso said: The Arches of Ras- 
 sittissa, the etherean world of Yungtsze's 
 Plains, are to be cast in four years. Lika 
 said: To Suttuz six million arches, and to 
 Iviji four million arches, and to each of 
 them one hundred million laborers. How 
 say ye? Then spake Suttuz and Iviji say- 
 ing: By the help of Jehovih the labor will 
 be accomplished. 
 
 Sachcha said: The star- world, Neto, will 
 in two years hence pass through the 
 
424 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 south Fields of Takuspe. Lika said: 
 This will be great labor, and I appoint 
 Urassus, with Salas, to accomplish it. And 
 I give to them three years, with four thou- 
 sand million laborers. How say ye? Then 
 answered Urassus and Salas saying: With 
 fear and trembling we rejoice at this great 
 work. By Jehovih's wisdom and power, 
 we shall accomplish it. 
 
 After this manner Lika made more 
 than a thousand appointments to be ac- 
 complished ere he returned from Earth 
 and her heavens; but ordinary matters he 
 left with his vice-Chief, Heih-Woo, and to 
 the high Council, and select ten million. 
 
 Jehovih had said: Even as I provided 
 a little labor unto mortals to develop the 
 talents I created withal, so in like manner 
 provided I greater labor unto the high- 
 risen inhabitants in My etherean worlds. 
 For which reason let My children learn 
 the secret of harmonious and united labor 
 with one another. I gave labor to man 
 not as a hardship, but as a means of great 
 rejoicing. And the talents I gave in cor- 
 por, I gave not to die in corpor, but to 
 continue on forever. As I gave talent for 
 corporeal mathematics, and talent for cor- 
 poreal buildings, even a talent for all 
 things on corporeal worlds; even so I pro- 
 vided I in My etherean worlds for the 
 same talents, but spiritually. Wherein 
 man on the corporeal world, judging the 
 adaptability of talent to corporeal things, 
 may comprehend the nature of the labors 
 I provided in My exalted heavens for the 
 same talents. Neither let any man fear 
 that his talents may become too exalted 
 for the work I have provided; for until 
 he hath created a firmament, and created 
 suns and stars to fill it, he hath not half 
 fulfilled his destiny. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 Jehovih spake in the light of the throne 
 of Kairksak, in Vetta'puissa, saying: Lika, 
 My Son! This is My road and My jour- 
 ney. With thee and thy hosts My Voice 
 shall travel with power; on Earth will I 
 lay my foundation, in spirit and word. Thy 
 companion Chiefs and Chieftainesses shall 
 go with thee; they shall help deliver the 
 inhabitants of Earth and her heavens. My 
 enemies have marked their labors in tem- 
 
 ples and pyramids. Because their hearts 
 rose not up to Me they descended into 
 stone, the most dead of all things. They 
 have carried the inhabitants of Earth down 
 to darkness and death. Suffer their monu- 
 ments to stand as testimonies of them that 
 hated Me, that denied Me, that believed 
 not in Me, the All Person. 
 
 My building shall be the most subtle of 
 all things, the spirit of Mine own body. 
 Verily shall it be a monument within the 
 souls of My chosen. Nor will it go away 
 again in darkness, but it shall encompass 
 the whole earth. For thou shalt find My 
 chosen a scattered people, persecuted and 
 enslaved, the most despised of all the races 
 of men. But I will show My power with 
 them; I will raise them up; the things I 
 do through them, and the words I speak 
 through them, shall become mighty. Their 
 words shall be treasured forever; and none 
 can match them in wisdom of speech, or in 
 the craft of good works. 
 
 But the learned men of all other peo- 
 ples shall be forgotten; their wisdom shall 
 be like the wind that bloweth away. The 
 self-Gods and self-Lords that led them 
 astray shall be as a serpent that biteth it- 
 self unto death. Yea, as long as their 
 pyramids and temples stand, their own 
 falsehoods shall stare them in the face. 
 They have bound themselves in their own 
 bulwarks; they shall yet be My laborers, 
 thousands of years, to undo the evil they 
 sowed on Earth. Nor shall they look down 
 from heaven and behold with joy their 
 temples and pyramids; but as one behold- 
 eth a coal of fire burning in the flesh, so 
 shall their edifices cry out unto them for- 
 ever: Thou False One! And it shall 
 be to them a burning fire that will not die 
 out. And their great learning, even of the 
 stars a<id the sun and moon, and of all 
 the things of Earth, and in the waters, shall 
 pass away and be remembered not amongst 
 men. Yea, the names of their men of 
 great learning shall go down, with none 
 to remember them on Earth. And in time, 
 long after, the nations of peoples will for- 
 get them and their wisdom, and even pity 
 them, and say of them: What a foolish 
 people! 
 
 But My chosen, who are their slaves, 
 and are as nothing in the world, shall 
 speak, and their words shall not be forgot- 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 425 
 
 ten; shall write, and their books will be a 
 new foundation in the world. Because My 
 hand will be upon them, My wisdom shall 
 come forth out of their mouths. And this 
 shall be testimony in the ages to come, 
 as to what manner of knowledge endureth 
 forever. For as the buildings of Earth re- 
 main on Earth, and the spirits of them 
 that incline to Earth rise not up, so have I 
 bound corpor in corpor; but as I planted 
 the quickened spirit of man in man for 
 spiritual knowledge, so shall spiritual 
 knowledge look upward for an everlasting 
 resurrection. 
 
 Lika asked: O Thou All Highest, Je- 
 hovih, what are the preparations of Thy 
 Gods? Wherein shall my hand be strong 
 on Earth? Jehovih answered, saying: For 
 six generations past hath My God prepared 
 unto thee and thy hosts. My Voice was 
 with My God, and I said unto him: My 
 Son, behold, the time cometh in six gener- 
 ations, when I will bring Earth into an- 
 other dawn of dan. And in that day 
 will I bring My Son, Lika, from 
 My etherean worlds; and he shall 
 come with a mighty host of ethereans with 
 great power. Go thou, My Son, down to 
 Earth, and with thy loo'is raise up an heir 
 unto thy voice. In the three great divis- 
 ions of Earth provide thou three servants 
 to do My will. 
 
 So, My Son, God of Craoshivi, hath 
 raised up unto thee, O Lika, three men, 
 Capilya, and Chine, and Moses, the fruit 
 of the sixth generation in the lands of 
 their fathers; and they are of the Faithists 
 in Me, holy men and wise. To these shalt 
 thou send the Gods of their forefathers, 
 even they who were beaten away by the 
 Gods of evil. And Capilya shall deliver 
 the Faithists of Vind'yu, and Chine shall 
 deliver the Faithists of Jaffeth, and Moses 
 shall deliver the Faithists of Egupt. And 
 this, also, shalt thou put upon Moses and 
 his people: He shall lead his people west- 
 ward, until they circumscribe the Earth. 
 Three thousand four hundred years shalt 
 thou allot to them to complete the jour- 
 ney. And wherever they go, they shall 
 establish My name, Jehovih; they shall 
 lead all people away from all Gods, to be- 
 lieve in the Great Spirit, Who I am. 
 
 And when they have carried My name 
 to the west coast of Guatama, and estab- 
 ished Me, behold, I will bring Earth into 
 kosmon; and My angels shall descend upon 
 the earth in every quarter with great pow- 
 er. And it shall come to pass that the 
 Faithists of the children of Moses shall 
 find the Faithists of the children of Chine 
 and the Faithists of the children of Capilya. 
 And all these people shall cry out in that 
 day: No God, no Lord, no Savior! For 
 My hand will be upon them, and their 
 words shall be My words. But they will 
 proclaim Me, the Great Spirit, the Ever 
 Present, Jehovih. And they shall become 
 the power of the world; and shall establish 
 peace and put away war, leading all peo- 
 ples in the way of peace, love and right- 
 eousness. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 Vetta'puissa, in Lika's etherean regions, 
 made glorious by Jehovih's light, and by 
 His purified Sons and Daughters, whose 
 heavenly mansions matched unto their 
 great perfection, was now quickened with 
 great joy. The trained hosts of Jehovih's 
 Son, Lika, knowing he was to take recrea- 
 tion by a journey to the red star, Earth, to 
 deliver her unto holiness and love, pro- 
 vided music and heralds and trumpeters, 
 to claim their reverence and rejoicing. 
 
 The fire-ship, the airavagna, now adorn- 
 ed in splendor, was brought into its place, 
 and the vast hosts for the journey entered 
 into it. A roadway was preserved for Lika 
 and his companion Chiefs and Chieftain- 
 esses. First to lead, of the Rapon hosts, 
 were the Chieftainesses, Yanodi and Tha- 
 zid, and they walked arm in arm. Next 
 after them came Lika, alone. Next came 
 Rebsad and Thoso, arm in arm. Next 
 came Miente and Hors-ad, arm in arm. 
 Then came Chama-jius and Murdhana, 
 arm in arm. Then Oshor and Yihoha, arm 
 in arm. Then Gwan Goo and Geehoogan, 
 and after them Rehemb and Antosiv. Loud 
 swelled the music as the Chiefs marched 
 forth; more than a thousand million in con- 
 certed song to Jehovih; and echoed by the 
 far-off trumpeters. And when the Chiefs 
 entered the ship, followed by the ship's 
 laborers and firemen, all was motionless 
 till the music ceased. 
 
426 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 Lika walked upon the High Arch, and 
 stretching up his hands to Jehovih, said: I 
 go forth in Thy name and love, wisdom 
 and power, O Jehovih! 
 
 Arise, O palace of the firmament; by 
 the power of Jehovih that dwelleth in me, 
 upward! onward! arise! 
 
 And now the laborers and firemen stood 
 to their places. A moment more, and the 
 airavagna rose from its foundation, steered 
 toward the red star, and moved forth over 
 the Fields of Vetta'puissa. A hundred 
 thousand banners and flags floated and 
 waved from every side on the great ship of 
 heaven, and was answered by more than 
 ten hundred thousand more in the hands 
 of the hosts below. The es'enaurs of the 
 ship struck up a quickened march, joined 
 by the millions beneath, whilst the great 
 multitudes waved their hands and shouted 
 in prolonged applause. Thus went forth 
 Lika, Son of Jehovih, to the red star. 
 Earth. 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 As Lika in his ship sped on, coursing 
 the Fields of Sonasat, and Hatar, and 
 Yaax, in the etherean world, Chen-a- 
 goetha, rich in light in these regions, on 
 the Yong-We Road, and now traversed by 
 hundreds of vessels coursing hither and 
 yon, Jehovih's light descended on the 
 High Arch, in the midst of the Rapons; 
 and the Voice of Jehovih spake out of the 
 light, saying: 
 
 As I taught corporeans to build ships 
 to traverse corporeal seas, so have I taught 
 ethereans to build vessels to course My 
 etherean seas. As I bound the corporean 
 that he could not rise up in the air above 
 corpor, save by a vessel, so created I My 
 heavens for the spirits of men, that by 
 vessels they might course My firmament. 
 For the little knowledge I gave to corpor- 
 eans I made as a type of knowledge which 
 is everlasting. And this is the bondage I 
 created unto all places on Earth and in her 
 heavens, making all men understand the 
 power of association. I created wide seas 
 on the corporeal Earth, that man should 
 perceive that one man alone could not 
 cross over; nor in a small boat, with any 
 profit. Neither created I My heavens 
 in the firmament that one angel could 
 go alone on long journeys, becom- 
 
 ing isolated and powerless. But I provid- 
 ed them that they could not escape asso- 
 ciation; yea, I created the firmament that 
 they must congregate together and go. 
 And they fill My seas in heaven and Earth 
 with their great ships; with wants that 
 could not be satisfied in one place created 
 I man. For I drive him forth on strange 
 errands and on missions of profit and love; 
 for I will store him with a knowledge of 
 My works. 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 Onward sped Lika in his airavagna, 
 with his eight hundred million; through 
 the sea of Enea-Wassa, the etherean realm 
 of Haog-sa-uben; shining like a meteor in 
 its flight, the ship of fire of eight hundred 
 million. On every side, the Jehovihian 
 worshippers' vessels, tens of thousands, 
 coursing as many ways, some fast, on mis- 
 sions of quickened labor; some slow, as 
 traveling school-ships, exploring the great 
 expanse and glorious richness of Jehovih's 
 provided worlds, always ready for the 
 new born; each and all the ships as stud- 
 ded gems in the etherean sea, moving 
 brilliantly into kaleidoscopic views, ever 
 changing the boundless scene with sur- 
 passing wonders. And all of these, by 
 signs and signals, the story of their place 
 and mission revealing to the high-raised 
 etherean souls, ships and men, as quick- 
 ened living books of fire, radiant with the 
 Father's light and history of worlds. 
 
 On Lika's ship, as on all the others, 
 every soul, hundreds of millions, enraptured, 
 stood in awe and admiration of the ever- 
 changing scenes; some in silence, absorb- 
 ed in thought; some posing with upraised 
 hands; some ejaculating gleefully; and 
 some in high reverence to Jehovih, utter- 
 ing everlasting praise; every soul its full 
 bent, being the full ripe fruit of the diversi- 
 fied talents as they first shone forth in cor- 
 poreal life. 
 
 Onward sped Lika's airavagna now in 
 the Roads of Nopita, now in the a'ji'an 
 Forest of Quion, most rich in adamantine 
 substances, arches, stalactites and stalag- 
 mites, and in forming and dissolving 
 scenes, a forest, a very background in the 
 etherean worlds for the over-brilliant crys- 
 tal regions of light. And here, too, the 
 tens of thousands of ships of Jehovih's 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 427 
 
 chosen; and on either side the great road- 
 way lay the Fields of Anutiv, inhabited by 
 countless millions of etherean kingdoms. 
 Along the road for hundreds of thousands 
 of miles, stretched up the hands of millions 
 and millions of souls, waving banners and 
 flags to their favored ships, going to some 
 native star, from which Jehovih brought 
 them forth. 
 
 Then changed the course of Lika's air- 
 avagna, by his commands sent through the 
 comet Yo-to-gactra, a new condensing 
 world, already with a head of fire four 
 thousand miles broad; a very ball of melted 
 corpor, whirling like the spindle of a fill- 
 ing spool, winding unto itself the wide ex- 
 tending nebulae. Here were coursing along, 
 hundreds of thousands of school-ships, 
 with students and visitors to view the 
 scenes, most grand in rolling on, now 
 round, now broken, now outstretched, this 
 ball of liquid fire, whirling in the vortex, 
 thirty million miles long. To balance 
 against which vortex many of the ships 
 tossed and rolled, dangerously, had they 
 not been in skilled hands; and, as they 
 were, causing millions of the students on 
 many a ship to fear and tremble, perceiving 
 how helpless they were compared to the 
 Gods who had them in charge. 
 
 Not long did Lika loiter to view the 
 scenes, or to indulge his eight hundred 
 million, but stood his course again for the 
 red star, Earth; coursing the Faussette 
 Mountains, where the God, Vrilla-Gabon, 
 built the Echosinit kingdom, whose capi- 
 tal was Exastras, the place where the Niu- 
 an Gods assembled to witness the first 
 starting forth of Earth. Here, halting a 
 while, and adown went Lika's recorders, to 
 gather from the Exastras libraries Earth's 
 early history and the grade of her creation; 
 a copy of which obtained, the recorders 
 hastily returned, when onward again sped 
 the airavagna, now making course across 
 the Plains of Zed, in the midst of which 
 lay the great sea Oblowochisi, four million 
 miles across, and this also studded over 
 with thousands of etherean ships. And 
 now across to Rikkas, the place of the 
 Goddess, Enenfachtus, with her seven 
 thousand million etherean souls, whereup- 
 on Lika and his hosts cast down millions 
 of wreaths and tokens, and the while, the 
 music of the two spheres mingled together 
 
 in Jehovih's praise. Here, across, the dis- 
 ance was three million miles. 
 
 Now, all the while before, the red star 
 stood upward, inclining upward, 'but here 
 in horizontal line began to stand, gleaming 
 in more effulgent flame. And in the 
 course, where Lika's airavagna should go, 
 the Goddess, Enenfachtus, had previously 
 upraised a thousand pillars of fire to honor 
 him and his company; which great respect 
 Lika and his hosts answered with holy 
 salutations. 
 
 After this, came the ji'ay'an Forests of 
 Hogobed, three million miles across. 
 Here stood the Province of Arathactean, 
 where dwelt the God, Yew-Sin, with thirty 
 thousand million newly-raised Brides and 
 Bridegrooms from the star Kagados. 
 Over these regions Lika sped swiftly, and 
 then to the open sea, Amatapan, on the 
 Vashuan Roads. 
 
 Then a sail of two million miles, in the 
 uninhabited regions of Samma, when he 
 reached Chinvat. And, halting not, but 
 now coursing on a downward plane, made 
 straight toward the swift-rolling Earth, 
 whose speed was three-quarters of a mill- 
 ion miles a day. Through the high-float- 
 ing plateaux of atmospherea came Lika 
 with his fire-ship, large as a continent. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 On the uninhabited, plateau, Theovrah- 
 kistan, rich, and broad as Earth, high 
 above the lands of Jaffeth, and Vind'yti, 
 and Arabin'ya, alighted Lika in his aira- 
 vagna, with his eight hundred million. 
 Here he made fast his fire-ship, and forth 
 came his hosts to found a heavenly king- 
 dom. Lika said: 
 
 I hear Thy voice, O Jehovih; Thy 
 hand is upon me; in Thy Wisdom and 
 Power will I build the foundations of Thy 
 kingdom in these heavens. 
 
 Jehovih said: Call forth thy Rapon 
 hosts, thy companion Chiefs; build thy 
 throne broad for them and thee. And 
 shape thou the area of the capital and 
 stand thy high Council, the chosen million, 
 to the four quarters of the heavens of 
 Earth. 
 
 The legions then built a heavenly place 
 unto Jehovih, and called it Yogannaqac- 
 tra, home of Lika and his eight hundred 
 million. 
 
428 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 Jehovih spake out of the light which 
 Lika built, saying: Lika, My Son, thou 
 shalt build all things new on Earth and in 
 the heavens of Earth, even as if nothing 
 had ever been. Send thou thy messengers 
 in an otevan to the broken-down region of 
 My beloved, God of Craoshivi, and bring 
 him and his thousand attendants unto thy 
 place. 
 
 Thereupon an otevan was sent off, well 
 officered, and in due time it returned, 
 bringing God to Yogannaqactra, where he 
 was received with great joy, and greeted 
 in Jehovih's name. 
 
 Lika said: Speak thou, O God, for I am 
 come to deliver these heavens into Jeho- 
 vih's dominion. What are the light and 
 darkness of the heavens and the earth that 
 have been intrusted to thy keeping, in Je- 
 hovih's name? 
 
 God said: Alas, how can I speak? Be- 
 hold, my kingdoms are scattered and gone; 
 I have nowhere pride in anything I have 
 done in heaven and earth. An exceeding 
 great darkness came upon my people, for 
 a thousand and five hundred years! Thy 
 servants have been overpowered, helpless 
 and tossed as chaff before the wind. 
 
 Lika said: How many Gods? How 
 many dans of darkness? Whither are gone 
 my true Gods? 
 
 God said: Four Gods have risen to ethe- 
 rea with their hosts, heart-broken. Four 
 dans have come and gone; so weak and 
 small, like a breath of air, for the darkness 
 brushed them away. In Savak-haben, in 
 etherea, sojourn thy Gods. 
 
 Jehovih's light fell upon the throne, and 
 His Voice came out of the light, saying: 
 Send thou, O My Son, Lika, to Savak- 
 haben, four arrow-ships, with a hundred 
 thousand attendants for My true Gods, 
 and bring them to Yogonnaqactra. 
 
 Lika then sent four arrow-ships with 
 his swift messengers and a hundred thou- 
 sand attendants, to bring back the four 
 disconcerted Gods. 
 
 God said: Thousands of millions of 
 angels of darkness flood the hadan regions; 
 and as many grovel about on the low earth. 
 De'yus, the false Lord God, is cast into 
 hell, a hell so wide that none can approach 
 his place of torment. Te-in, the false God, 
 the Joss, is also cast into hell; and so is 
 Sudga, the false Dyaus; and so are all the 
 
 false Gods that encompassed the earth 
 around; their kingdoms are in anarchy. 
 The names Lord, and God, and Dyaus, 
 and De'yus, and Zeus, and Joss, and Ho- 
 Joss, and many others, have become wor- 
 shipful on Earth! Not only labored the 
 traitors to put away the Great Spirit, but 
 to establish themselves as men-Gods capa- 
 ble of creating; yea, the veritable Creator 
 of heaven and Earth! 
 
 Lika said: Hear thou, then, the Voice 
 of Jehovih! Because they have put Me 
 aside and assumed to be Creators under the 
 name God, and De'yus, I will magnify the 
 Person of God and De'yus in men's under- 
 standing. Nor from this time forth on the 
 earth, for three thousand years, shall man 
 be confined to the one name, Jehovih, or 
 Eolin, or Eloih, but worship God, or Lord, 
 or De'yus, or Zeus, or Dyaus, or Joss, or 
 Ho-Joss. For since these men have cast 
 themselves into hells, behold, the spirits 
 of the risen shall not find them nor their 
 kingdoms. And thou shalt magnify unto 
 mortals that all names worshipful belong 
 to the Ever Present, whose Person is the 
 spirit and substance of all things. And 
 if they inquire of thee: Who is Dyaus? or, 
 Who is God? or, Who is Joss? thou shalt 
 say: Hath He not said: Behold, I am the 
 Creator of heaven and Earth! and I say 
 unto you, He is the Ever Present, the All 
 Highest Ideal. 
 
 But this bondage shall come upon 
 them: To reap the harvest they have sown. 
 Because one hath said: Build thou a pyra- 
 mid, and thy God will come and abide 
 therein, even as a man dwelleth in a house; 
 he shall be bound while the pryamid stand- 
 eth. And another hath said: Behold, thy 
 God is in the image of a man, and he sit- 
 teth on a throne in heaven; he shall be 
 bound while this belief surviveth on Earth. 
 
 Because they have sown a falsehood on 
 Earth, the harvest is theirs. And until 
 they have reaped their whole harvest they 
 shall not rise into My etherean worlds. 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 When the four Gods, Sons of Jehovih, 
 who had been discomfited in the lower hea- 
 vens by De'yus and his fellow false Gods, 
 came, the light of Jehovih came again on 
 Lika's throne. Jehovih said: 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 429 
 
 I permit not evil to triumph over good 
 but for short seasons; and, soon or late, 
 My righteous Sons and Daughters rise up 
 and rejoice in their trials which I allowed 
 to come upon them. Let not men or an- 
 gels say, because this or that happeneth: 
 Lo, Jehovih sleepeth at his post! or: Lo,Je- 
 hovih is the author of evil, or is impotent 
 to avert it. My times are not as the times 
 of men or angels; nor am I within the judg- 
 ment of men as to what is evil or good. 
 When the wealth of the rich man is stolen, 
 do not mortals say: Poor man, Jehovih 
 hath afflicted him! For they judge Me 
 by what they consider afflictions. But 
 they behold not that I look to the soul of 
 man as to what is good for him. And when 
 the assassin hath struck the king unto 
 death, behold, they say: How hath a good 
 Creator done this? For they consider not 
 *the nation nor the problem of anything 
 but for the day thereof; nor consider they 
 what I do for the souls of many nations, 
 by one small act. 
 
 For all people in heaven and earth are 
 Mine own; they are as trees in My orchard, 
 and I prune them not for the life of the 
 branches, but for benefit of the whole or- 
 chard, and for the harvest that cometh af- 
 ter. I created life, and I take away life; in 
 Mine own way do I with Mine own. I 
 send night to follow the day; clouds to in- 
 terchange with the sunshine. And even so 
 do I give times of dan to My atmospherean 
 heavens, to be followed by seasons of dark- 
 ness. By these changes do mortals and 
 angels and Gods learn to battle with and 
 overcome the elements of My worlds. 
 
 The Gods said: We weep before Thee, 
 O Jehovih. Long and hard we labored our 
 allotted seasons; we were helpless wit- 
 nesses to the great darkness that came 
 upon the inhabitants of heaven and earth. 
 Lika said: To you five Gods, who have 
 toiled in the darkness of Earth and her 
 heavens, I restore your old time names for 
 the season of dawn, after which I will raise 
 you all up, with your kingdoms restored to 
 the full, and ye shall be heirs in my Nir- 
 vanian heavens, in peace and rest. 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 The five Gods' names were Ane, Jek, 
 Lay, Oal and Yith. Lika said unto them: 
 Ye have been heretofore crowned as Gods; 
 
 come ye to the foot of Jehovih's throne, 
 for I will crown you anew. 
 
 When they came to the place designat- 
 ed, Lika continued: Take my crown upon 
 thy head, and speak thou in Jehovih's name 
 in that labor which I put upon thee. 
 
 And thereupon Lika crowned them 
 with a band on the head, inscribed, Inane, 
 Injek, Inlay, Inoal and Inyith, Panic 
 names designating their rank and the age 
 of the Earth in which these things came 
 to pass. 
 
 Lika said: To each and every one I 
 give of my etherean hosts ten million labor- 
 ers for the period of dawn. And these are 
 the labors I allot unto you: To Inane, to 
 go down to the earth, to the land of Vind'- 
 yu, and be inspirer unto my mortal son, 
 Capilya, and his followers. To Inlay, 
 to go down to the earth, to the land of 
 Jaffeth, and be inspirer to my son, Chine, 
 and his followers. To Inoal, to go down 
 to the earth to the land of Egupt, and be 
 inspirer to my son, Moses, and his follow- 
 ers. And ye three shall restore the Faith- 
 ists in these great divisions of the earth 
 unto liberty and safety. And thou, Inoal, 
 shalt deliver Moses and the Faithists out 
 of Egupt, and shape their course west- 
 ward; for they shall circumscribe the earth, 
 and complete it by the time of kosmon. 
 
 To Injek, to go down to the earth, to 
 Par'si'e and Heleste, and provide those 
 peoples to liberate the slaves who are 
 Faithists, whom thou shalt inspire to mi- 
 grate to Moses and his people. To Inyith, 
 to go down to the earth, to Jaffeth and 
 Vind'yu and Arabin'ya, to inspire the scat- 
 tered Faithists in those lands to come to- 
 gether, to the great lights, Capilya and 
 Chine and Moses. 
 
 And ye shall take with you of my hosts, 
 whom I brought from etherea, and labor 
 ye together as one man. And when dawn 
 hath ended, ye shall repair hither, and be 
 raised up into my Nirvanian kingdoms. 
 Nevertheless, ye shall not leave Jehovih's 
 chosen alone, but provide angel successors 
 unto them. And herein I give you a new 
 law unto all my angel hosts who shall here- 
 after dwell with the Faithists on the earth, 
 which is, that successors shall always be 
 provided by the retiring hosts ere they 
 have departed; for the Faithists shall not 
 
430 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 more be left alone for a long season. The 
 five Gods then said: In Thy name and 
 wisdom and power, O Jehovih, we go 
 forth in joy to fulfill Thy commandments. 
 Because we lost Earth Thou hast given it 
 into our hands to redeem it and glorify 
 Thee!' 
 
 And thereupon Lika proclaimed a day 
 of recreation, so the hosts could be select- 
 ed, the fifty million, to which labor the 
 marshals fell to, helping the chosen. Dur- 
 ing the creation, the atmosphereans ex- 
 plained to the ethereans how laid the lands 
 of the earth and the heavens thereunto be- 
 longing. And then, after a season of pray- 
 er and singing, and a season of dancing, 
 the recreation was brought to a close. 
 
 After labor was resumed, the chosen 
 five, with their hosts, saluted before the 
 throne of Jehovih, and then withdrew and 
 went to vessels which had been previously 
 prepared for them, and embarked, and de- 
 parted for the earth. 
 
 Jehovih spake to Lika, saying: Appoint 
 thou other servants unto Me for the other 
 great divisions of the earth, and for the 
 islands in the oceans of the earth; and give 
 unto them each ten million of My servants 
 which thou broughtest from Nirvana. And 
 they shall go down amongst mortals, and 
 by inspiration and otherwise collect to- 
 gether in groups the scattered Faithists 
 who worship Me. And thy servants shall 
 also provide successors to come after them, 
 to abide with mortals, making the seasons 
 of watch short unto them that they shall 
 not be weary thereof. 
 
 Then Lika appointed T'chow, N'yalc, 
 Gitchee, Guelf, Ali and Siwah, and allot- 
 ted them to different divisions of the earth, 
 and he gave them each ten million of the 
 hosts were brought from the Orian worlds. 
 And these were selected after the same 
 manner as the previous ones; and they also 
 saluted and departed for the earth. 
 
 Again Jehovih spake in the light of the 
 throne, saying: Because many are risen in 
 wisdom and truth, I will have Theovrah- 
 kistan for My holy place unto them; and it 
 shall be the region for My Brides and 
 Bridegrooms at the resurrection of dawn. 
 But at the end thereof it shall be divided 
 and subdivided that none may find the 
 place of My standing. For it hath come 
 to pass, that man on the earth learning the 
 
 name of one fo My heavens glorifieth it, 
 and aspireth to rise to it, but to rise 
 to no other heaven. Because My true 
 Gods taught man of Hored in the early 
 days, man desired Hored. Whereupon 
 Mine enemies, the false Gods, each one 
 cried out: Behold, my heavenly place is 
 Hored! I am the All Heavenly ruler! 
 Come hither to me! For, by this means, 
 the name I gave in truth, was usurped 
 and made as a snare to enslave My earth- 
 born. 
 
 And I will not more give to mortals a 
 name of any of My heavenly places; nor 
 shall they be taught of any heavens save 
 the higher and the lower heavens, which 
 shall designate My etherean and My at- 
 mospherean heavens. And by these terms 
 shall man on the earth be fortified against 
 the stratagems of false heavenly rulers. 
 And man shall perceive that when angels- 
 or men or Gods or Saviors say: Come ye 
 unto me, and I will give you of my heaven- 
 ly kingdom! that they are false, and but 
 tyrants to enslave My people. But if they 
 say: Go ye, serve the Great Spirit, and not 
 me, for I am only a man as thou art! then 
 shall it be known that they are of My Nir- 
 vanian hosts. And if they say: Come ye 
 to this heaven or that heaven, for with me 
 only is delight, it shall be testimony against 
 them. But if they say: Verily, Jehovih is 
 with thee; cultivate thyself within Him, 
 and thou shalt find delight in all worlds, 
 then shall it be testimony they are from 
 My emancipated heavens. 
 
 Lika said: Seventy new kingdoms 
 shall ye found in the lowest heaven, where 
 ye shall begin again with schools and col- 
 leges and factories, teaching the spirits of 
 the dead the requirements for resurrection. 
 Two hundred million of my Orian angels 
 shall be allotted to these seventy heavenly 
 places, and during dawn it shall be their 
 work to carry out these commandments. 
 And they shall provide for successors after 
 them, who shall continue for another sea- 
 son; and they shall provide yet other suc- 
 cessors, and so on, even till the coming of 
 the kosmon era. 
 
 Lika then selected the two hundred mill- 
 ion angels, and divided them into seventy 
 groups and companies around about the 
 earth, in the lowest heaven, and after they 
 were duly officered and organized, they sa- 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 431 
 
 luted before the throne of Jehovih and de- 
 parted to their several places. 
 
 Then came the voice of Jehovih to 
 Lika, saying: Behold, of thy five hundred 
 million, are still left one hundred and sev- 
 enty and five million. This, then, is the 
 work thou shalt put upon them: They shall 
 begin at one end of hada and go to the oth- 
 er, delivering all the hells of the false Gods 
 as they go; untying the knots thereof and 
 providing passage for the drujas into one 
 great plateau. For as the false Gods began 
 in confederacy I will bring them back into 
 confederacy, even all of them that are cast 
 into hell. And thou shalt officer them 
 safely; and when they are thus established, 
 behold, thou and thy Rapon hosts shall go 
 and raise them up and deliver them into the 
 a'ji'an Forest of Turpeset, where they 
 shall be habitated and begin a new life of 
 righteousness and love. 
 
 And Anuhasaj, once-crowned Lord 
 God, shall be over them; and Osiris and 
 Sudga and Te-in and all the other confed- 
 erated Gods shall be under him; for even 
 as these Gods labored to cast Me out, be- 
 hold, I give unto them their harvest. 
 
 Then Lika commissioned the one hun- 
 dred and seventy-five million ethereans, 
 and officered them, and sent them into 
 the hadan regions of the earth to deliver 
 the hells thereof. 
 
 Jehovih said to Lika: The rest of thy 
 eight hundred million shall remain in The- 
 ovrahkistan, for the labor here is sufficient 
 for them. And so they remained. 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 The Rapon hosts desired to see Ahura, 
 and so Lika sent an arrow-ship, with one 
 hundred thousand angels, properly offi- 
 cered, to Vara-pishanaha, to Ahura, pray- 
 ing him to come on a visit for ten days, 
 bringing his ten thousand attendants with 
 him. And it thus came to pass that Ahura 
 came to Theovrahkistan, where he was 
 most honorably received and saluted under 
 the Sign Morning of Jehovih's Light, and 
 he in turn answered in the Sign My Words 
 shall serve His Sons and Daughters! 
 
 Accordingly, Lika came down from the 
 throne and greeted Ahura, saying to him: 
 Come thou, then, and stand in the midst 
 of the throne, that thy voice may delight 
 the Holy Council. 
 
 So Ahura ascended the throne, along 
 with Lika, and when the latter sat down, 
 then Ahura walked to the midst and saluted 
 the Holy Council with the Sign Fire and 
 Water, and he spake, saying: 
 
 Because Thou, O Jehovih, hast called 
 me in the sign of the Morning of Thy 
 Light, behold, I am risen up before Thee, 
 to speak to Thy Sons and Daughters. But 
 how shall I clear myself, O Father! I am 
 as one who had a hidden skeleton, and the 
 place of concealment broken down. Be- 
 cause I was by Thee created alive in the 
 world, why should I not have forever glori- 
 fied Thee? This have I asked myself all 
 the days of my life; but Thou troublest not 
 to answer me in my curiosity. 
 
 When I was young in life, lo, I cried 
 out unto Thee, complaining because Thou 
 madest me not wise. I said: Behold, 
 thou createdst all the animals on the face 
 of the earth to know more than I in the 
 day of birth. Yea, I knew not where to 
 find suck, nor could I rise up on my feet, 
 but laid as I was laid down by my nurse. 
 Even to the lambs and the calves and the 
 young colts, Thou gavest greater wisdom 
 and strength than Thou gavest Thy ser- 
 vant. 
 
 I said: Why, then, shall I glorify Thee 
 or sing songs in Thy praise? Why shall I 
 pray unto Thee; Thy ways are unalterable 
 and Thy Voice answereth me not. Thou 
 art void as the wind; Thou are neither Per- 
 son, nor Wisdom, nor Ignorance. And as 
 for Thy servants, who say they hear Thy 
 Voice, behold, they are mad! I said: How 
 can a man hear Thee? It is the reflection 
 of himself he heareth. How can a man see 
 Thee? It is the reflection of himself he 
 seeth. 
 
 And Thou sufferedst me to become 
 strong, as to strength, and wise as to self, 
 even as I had called unto Thee in my 
 vanity. Yea, I prided myself in myself; 
 and as to Thee, I sought to disprove Thee 
 on all hands. And the worthlessness of 
 prayer unto Thee I showed up as a great 
 vanity. Yea, I craved wisdom for sake of 
 showing Thou wert neither wise nor good. 
 And to this end Thou also gavest unto me. 
 And I became conceited in hiding my con- 
 ceit, even from mine own understanding, 
 that I might carry all points. 
 
 I pointed to the fool, saying: Behold, 
 Jehovih's son! I pointed to the desert 
 
432 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 place, saying: Behold, Jehovih's fruitful 
 earth! To the mountain which is rocks 
 and barren, saying: Behold, how Jehovih 
 hath finished His work! And of the evil 
 man, who murdereth his brother, I said: 
 Jehovih, good in one thing, good in all! 
 
 But I knew not the hand that was upon 
 me; Thou wert answering my prayer ev- 
 ery day. Yea, I ventured to judge Thee 
 and Thy works, O Jehovih ! And the craft 
 of my speech won applause; by flattery I 
 was puffed up. And I deemed my judg- 
 ment the right one; and whoso saw not as 
 I saw, I condemned or pitied; yea, I craved 
 great speech that I might show them up in 
 their folly. And in this Thou also an- 
 sweredst me by giving freely; and my 
 words were reckoned great words and 
 wise. And I was quoted and praised far 
 and near. Yea, and I practiced good works 
 that I might show unto others that, even in 
 such like, a belief in Thee was vanity and 
 a waste of judgment. 
 
 Yea, I craved means and great treas- 
 ures that I might render good unto others, 
 in order that mine own philosophy might 
 seem the highest of the high. And even in 
 this Thou renderedst unto me great treas- 
 ures and ample means; and by my good 
 works done unto others I was applauded 
 as a great and good God above all others. 
 I craved a heavenly kingdom that I might 
 prove my great wisdom and power unto 
 thousands of millions; for I pitied them 
 that I thought foolishly dwelt in darkness 
 in regard to Thee. And even yet Thou, O 
 Jehovih, didst not cut me off; but gavest 
 me a great kingdom of seven thousand 
 million! 
 
 And I taught them my philosophy, that 
 there was nothing above them; that Thou, 
 O Jehovih, sawest not, heardst not, an- 
 sweredst not. Yea, I made my will all- 
 powerful that I might cut them off from 
 Thee. But alas for me. I was like the 
 sylph of old who stole into the musical in- 
 struments and put them out of tune. My 
 kingdom was divided into seven thousand 
 million philosophers, every one mad in his 
 own conceit, and in a different way. There 
 was no harmony amongst them. Yea, 
 they were a kingdom of growlers and 
 cursers! I had carried away the tuning 
 fork, for I had cast Thee out, O Jehovih! 
 Mine own philosophy had done it all. 
 
 Because I set myself up as the All 
 Highest, Thou didst indulge me; and I be- 
 came the highest God of my people. Yea, 
 they cast their plaudits on me at first, but 
 afterward all their ills and curses. Neither 
 could I satisfy them in anything in heaven 
 or earth; nor could I turn them off from 
 me, for I had bound them unto me by my 
 great promises. I became as one in a 
 cloud, because of the great trouble upon 
 me and the fear withal. And yet Thou, O 
 Jehovih, didst not forget me; but sent 
 Thy Gods' words unto me, imploring me 
 what to do, that I might be delivered in 
 season. But how could I hear thee, O Je- 
 hovih, or hearken unto Thy Gods? Be- 
 hold, my pride had swallowed me up, I 
 was encompassed on every side. Because 
 I had denied Thee before I must deny Thee 
 still. 
 
 And then greater darkness came upon 
 me; Thy light was obstructed by the walls 
 I had built up against Thee! Then came 
 the crash, as if heaven and earth were rent 
 asunder! I was cast into the chasm; my 
 kingdom was upon me! The leadership 
 and vanity I had sown had cast me into 
 hell! I was in death, but could not die! 
 A knot was bound upon me; foul-smelling 
 slaves were clinched upon me, millions of 
 them, tens of millions; and the shafts of 
 their curses pierced my soul; I was as one 
 lacerated and bound in salt; choked and 
 suffocated with foul gases. 
 
 But yet, Thou, O Jehovih, didst not de- 
 sert me; but did hold my judgment from 
 flying away into chaos. And Thy Voice 
 came to me in the time of my tortures; 
 came as the argument of the Most High! 
 It was like myself that spake to myself, say- 
 ing: He that forever casteth away all 
 things, can never be bound in hell; he that 
 craveth and holdeth fast, is already laying 
 the foundation for torments. 
 
 And I cried out unto Thee, O Jehovih, 
 saying: O that I had possessed nothing! 
 Neither talents, nor craft, nor philosophy. 
 That I had told these wretches to go to 
 Thee, O Jehovih! O that I had told them, 
 Thou alone couldst bless them, or supply 
 them! But I sought to lead them, and lo, 
 they are upon me! O that I could be freed 
 from them. That I could turn about in an 
 opposite way from my former years; hav- 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 433 
 
 ing nothing, craving nothing, but a right 
 to serve Thee, O My Father! 
 
 Thou didst send Thy Gods into the 
 depths of hell, and they delivered me. 
 And I made oath unto Thee, O Jehovih, to 
 serve Thee forever. And Thou gavest me 
 labor, and I bowed myself down to labor 
 for Thy drujas, with all my wisdom and 
 strength forever! And Thy hand came 
 upon me and gave me great power; pow- 
 er even over mine own soul to create hap- 
 py thoughts. 
 
 Why should I not praise Thee, O my 
 Father? Thou gavest me liberty in all 
 my ways, and didst answer me according 
 to my desires. Neither once hast Thou 
 turned away from me nor afflicted me; 
 but because of mine own vanity I cut my- 
 self off from Thee. Yea, Thou hast shown 
 me that to glorify Thee is the foundation 
 of the highest happiness; to sing to Thee 
 is the greatest delight; to praise Thee is 
 the highest wisdom. 
 
 Hereat Ahura halted in his speech a 
 while, and, still standing in the midst of 
 the throne, burst into tears. Presently he 
 said: 
 
 Anuhasaj was my good friend. He it 
 was who since took the name De'yus, and, 
 afterward, proclaimed himself the Creator! 
 I weep in pity for him. He is in hell now. 
 He was my best friend in the time of my 
 darkness. And after I was delivered out 
 of hell, he came and labored with me, full 
 of repentance and love. Oft we rested in 
 each other's arms. Afterward, he traveled 
 far and near in Thy great heavens, O Je- 
 hovih. 
 
 And when he returned to Earth's 
 heavens he came not to see me. And I 
 was broken hearted because of my great 
 love for him. Then he founded his heaven- 
 ly place and called it Hored. And I called 
 out to Thee, O Jehovih, as to what mes- 
 sage I should send him, for I foresaw his 
 kingdom would be broken up and himself 
 ultimately cast into hell. And Thou gavest 
 me liberty to send him a message 
 in mine own way. And in the an- 
 guish of my broken heart I sent him a 
 message, saying, in substance: I have no 
 longer any love for thee! And I chid him 
 and upbraided him because he came not 
 to see me, to gratify my burning love. 
 And I foretold him the great darkness and 
 the hell that would come upon him, even 
 
 as they now are. Now do I repent, O Je- 
 hovih, that I sent him such a message! 
 For near two thpusand years my message 
 hath been to me as if I swallowed a living 
 coal of fire! 
 
 Ahura ceased. Lika spake, saying: Be- 
 cause thou hast pleaded for De'yus, thou 
 hast turned the etherean hosts to him. To 
 thee I allot the restoration of De'yus, 
 alias Anuhasaj. My hosts will in the prop- 
 er time take thee to the hell where he is 
 bound, and thou shalt be the first to re- 
 ceive him. 
 
 Lika then proclaimed a day of recrea- 
 tion, for there were millions of ethereans 
 who desired to meet Ahura and greet him. 
 with love and praise. 
 
 CHAPTER XIII. 
 
 Lika spake before the Rapon hosts, 
 saying: Behold, the hosts of laborers are 
 allotted to their places. Let us go about, 
 and examine Earth and her heavens. 
 It is proper that my surveyors measure 
 her land and water, together with all the 
 living thereon and therein, and especially 
 as to every man and woman and child, and 
 the time of maturity unto them, and the 
 years of the generations of men. 
 
 And man that is brought forth out of 
 the earth shall be numbered; and the grade 
 of his understanding measured; and the 
 nature of his desires and aspirations shall 
 be ascertained; which reports shall be cop- 
 ied and sent into the Orian kingdoms, for 
 the deliberations of the Chiefs, that they 
 may determine as to the requirements of 
 Earth, and as to the nature in which her 
 roadway shall be strewn with either light 
 or darkness for the ultimate perfection of 
 her soul harvests. 
 
 And the heavens of Earth shall be 
 measured, as to the spirits of the dead, and 
 their grades shall be made out, together 
 with their desires and aspirations; the 
 lengths of the times of their bondage to 
 the earth, and the places of their habita- 
 tion, and the nature of their supplies. And 
 a copy of such record shall be made and 
 also sent to the Orian Chiefs, that they 
 may determine as to necessary changes 
 therein and thereof. 
 
 During which time of my absence from 
 Theovrahkistan, I appoint Havralogissasa 
 as vice-Go.ddess in my place. How sayest 
 
434 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 thou, Havralogissasa? She said: Jehovih's 
 will and thine be done. I am rejoiced. 
 
 Lika then called Havralogissasa to the 
 throne, and commissioned her vice-God- 
 dess of Theovrahkistan. And after this 
 Lika gave instructions as to extending 
 the capital, Yogannaqactra, and enlarging 
 the places for reception of the higher 
 grades; all of which were duly provided 
 with the persons to carry out the com- 
 mands. 
 
 And now Lika spake to Ahura, saying: 
 Behold, thou shalt return to thy kingdom, 
 Vara-pishanaha, for when I come hither 
 on my journey, I will resurrect thy hosts 
 as Brides and Bridegrooms to the etherean 
 kingdoms. Thy labor is well done; thy 
 glory is the glory of thousands of millions! 
 May the love, wisdom and power of Jeho- 
 vih be with the, now and forever! 
 
 Thereupon Ahura saluted, and was in 
 turn saluted, when he advanced and met 
 the marshals, who conducted him hence, 
 to the arrow-ship, where he embarked and 
 departed. 
 
 CHAPTER XIV. 
 
 In due time Lika's otevan was complet- 
 ed, and he, with the Rapon hosts, besides 
 one million hosts in attendance, to make 
 necessary surveys and records, entered into 
 the ship and departed for his two years' 
 cruise around Earth and her heavens. 
 
 This, then, is a synopsis of the atmos- 
 pherean heavens at that time: In 
 the hells of Hored, with Anuhasaj, alias 
 De'yus, forty thousand million angels. In 
 the hells of Te-in, eight thousand million; 
 in the hells of Sudga, twelve thousand mill- 
 ion; in the hells of Osiris, seventeen thou- 
 sand million. In the smaller hells in other 
 parts of hada, there were in all fourteen 
 thousand million angels. 
 
 These ninety-one thousand million were 
 not all bound in their respective hells; up- 
 ward of thirty thousand of them surged 
 about, from one hell to another, often in 
 groups of a thousand million. And these 
 groups, at times, descended to the earth, 
 fastening upon mortals, even casting large 
 cities and nations in death. Because they 
 carried the foulness of their hells with 
 them, they impregnated the air with poi- 
 son, so that mortals were swept off by the 
 million. And these were called plagues. 
 
 Now, behold, there were millions of an- 
 
 gels in those days who knew no other life, 
 but to continue engrafting themselves on 
 mortals. And, when one mortal died, they 
 went and engrafted themselves on another. 
 These were the fruit of the teaching of the 
 false Gods, who had put away the All 
 Highest, Jehovih. They could not be per- 
 suaded that etherea was filled with habit- 
 able worlds. And they professed that they 
 had been re-incarnated many times; and 
 that, previously, they had been great kings 
 or philosophers. Some of them remember- 
 ed the ji'ay'an period of a thousand years, 
 and, so, hoped to regain their natural bod- 
 ies and dwell again on the earth, and for- 
 ever. Hence was founded the story that 
 every thousand years a new incarnation 
 would come to the spirits of the dead. 
 
 In Par'si'e and Heleste there were hab- 
 ited with mortals one thousand million da- 
 mons, and twelve hundred million evil spir- 
 its; in Vind'yu there were eleven hundred 
 million drujas, and one thousand million 
 evil spirits. In Egupt there were inhabited 
 with mortals seven hundred million en- 
 grafters, who, for the most part, held the 
 spirits of their victims in abeyance all their 
 natural lives. In Jaffeth there were habited 
 with mortals more than fifteen hundred 
 million drujas and evil spirits, besides 
 four hundred million vampires. So that in 
 these three great divisions of the earth, 
 Vind'yu, and Jaffeth, and Arabin'ya, there 
 were habited upward of ten thousand mill- 
 ion spirits who had not attained to any res- 
 urrection. 
 
 Besides all the foregoing there were 
 thousands of millions of spirits in chaos, 
 being such as had been slain in wars. Of 
 these chaotic spirits there were in Par'si'e 
 and Heleste a thousand million; and in 
 Jaffeth two thousand million; and in Vind'- 
 yu two thousand million. But in Egupt 
 there were not half a million, all told. So 
 that, in atmospherea, at the time of Lika, 
 there were upward of one hundred and 
 twenty-five thousand million angels, who 
 had no knowledge of or belief in any high- 
 er heaven. 
 
 To offset this great darkness, there 
 were of believers in,- and laborers for Je- 
 hovih and his emancipated kingdoms, only 
 four thousand million, and many of these 
 not above grade fifty. And these were 
 members of Craoshivi and Vara-pishanaha. 
 Two thousand million of them were ashars, 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 435 
 
 laboring with the Faithist mortals of 
 Egupt, Jaffeth and Vind'yu. 
 
 CHAPTER XV. 
 
 After Lika had numbered all the mor- 
 tals on the earth, and all the angels in the 
 heavens of the earth, and beheld the great 
 darkness thereof, he visited Hoa-yusta, 
 and found it a good plateau, capable of all 
 grades up to sixty. And Lika possessed 
 the place and consecrated it to Jehovih; 
 and he left thereon three hundred thou- 
 sand Gods and Goddesses, who were of 
 his etherean host. And after this he re- 
 turned to Gessica, chief God, for the de- 
 liverance of the hells of De'yiis, and Te-in, 
 and Sudga, and Lika instructed him. 
 
 Gessica had the vessels constructed 
 with walls of fire around the margins, to 
 prevent the drujas escaping. And there 
 were built in all four hundred vessels, each 
 capable of carrying one hundred million 
 drujas. 
 
 The manner of driving the drujas into 
 them was by leaving part of the fire-wall 
 open, and by fire-brands in the ethereans' 
 hands cutting off sections of drujas from 
 the hells. In this way the ethereans drove 
 the drujas into the vessels, whereupon the 
 doorway in the wall of the ship was closed. 
 And then the workers of the ship put it 
 under way and carried them up to Hao- 
 yusta, where the Gods and Goddesses re- 
 ceived them, placing the drujas in pens, 
 walled with fire, where they could be 
 treated and restored to reason, after which 
 they were to be liberated in installments, 
 according to their safety. In the first year 
 Gessica delivered from the hells of hada 
 five thousand million drujas; but in the sec- 
 ond year he delivered thirty-five thousand 
 million; and in the third year, sixteen thou- 
 sand million. After this the work went 
 slowly on, for the balance of the hells 
 were mostly in knots, some of them hun- 
 dreds of millions. And these had to be de- 
 livered individually, requiring great labor, 
 wisdom and dexterity. 
 
 In the fifth month of the fourth year, 
 Anuhasaj, alias De'yus, was delivered out 
 of the great knot of hell, in which there 
 had been eight hundred million bound for 
 more than four hundred years. After the 
 manner in which Fragapatti delivered 
 knots, even so did Gessica and his hosts 
 
 wth brands of fire. When it was known 
 in which place Anuhasaj was tied, and 
 when it was half delivered, Gessica sent for 
 Ahura to come and have the honor of re- 
 leasing Anuhasaj. And to this end Ahura 
 labored on the knot fifty-five days. 
 
 But Anuhasaj was bereft of all judg- 
 ment, crying out, unceasingly: I am not 
 God! I am not the Lord! I am not De'- 
 yus! He was wild, crazed with fear and 
 torments, frenzied, and in agony. Which 
 Ahura, his friend, beheld; and Ahura 
 caught him in his arms. Ahura called unto 
 him: Anuhasaj! O my beloved! Know- 
 est thou not me? Behold me! I am Ahu- 
 ra! 
 
 But, alas, Anuhasaj knew him not; pull- 
 ed away, tried to escape in fear; his pro- 
 truding eyes seeing not; his ears hearing 
 not. And he kept forever uttering: Let 
 me go, I am not the Lord God, nor De'- 
 yus! I am Anuhasaj! Then broke the 
 good heart of Ahura, and he wept. 
 
 Then they held Anuhasaj and carried 
 him away into the ship, and Ahura helped 
 to carry him. Then the ship rose up and 
 sailed to Hao-yusta. And they took Anu- 
 hasaj to a hospital prepared for maniacs, 
 and stretched him on his back and held 
 him. Then called Ahura to the Gods and 
 Goddesses to come and help him; and they 
 came and seated themselves in the sacred 
 circle. 
 
 And Ahura said: Light of Thy Light, 
 Jehovih! Thou who first quickened him 
 into being, O deliver Thou him! 
 
 A light, like a small star, gathered be- 
 fore Anuhasaj 's face, and this was the first 
 thing his fixed eyes had yet seen. Then 
 Ahura and the Gods and Goddesses sang 
 sweetly: Behold Me! Behold Me! I am 
 with thee! I am never away from thee! 
 Thou art Mine now, and forever shall be! 
 Look upon Me! I am in all things! No- 
 thing is, nor was, nor ever shall be without 
 Me! Hear My Love! I am thy Creator! 
 Only for love, and for love only, created I 
 thee, My beloved. 
 
 Anuhasaj gave a long gasp and relaxed 
 his mighty will, then fell into a swoon, all 
 limp and helpless. Still the Gods stood by 
 him, waiting, watching whilst he slept a 
 while. And then, by signals to the es'- 
 enaurs, Ahura caused other music to stea' 
 upon the scene, to be answered by the dis- 
 
436 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 tant trumpeters. For ? the space of seven 
 days Anuhasaj slept; and all the while the 
 great Gods and Goddesses relaxed not 
 their wills nor steadfast positions. And at 
 the end of the seventh day Anuhasaj began 
 to sing in his swoon, like one weak and 
 out of breath, but half awake! 
 
 How could I deny Thee, O Jehovih! 
 Was not the evidence of mine own life be- 
 fore me? I raised up my voice against 
 my Creator! I plucked Him out of my 
 soul; from all people in heaven and earth 
 I dispersed Him. But they that applauded 
 me turned against me! Even as I had turn- 
 ed against Thee, Thou All Person! In my 
 vanity I owned not that I was in Thee nor 
 of Thee, O Jehovih! O that I had per- 
 ceived I was going farther and farther 
 away; that I had known the road of life 
 and death! 
 
 I see Thy judgment upon me, O Jeho- 
 vih! I hear Thy just decree: Whilst the 
 name of God or Lord or Savior is wor- 
 shipped on the earth I shall labor with the 
 drujas of heaven and the Druks of earth! 
 A most righteous judgment, O Jehovih! 
 Whilst I am in hell or in heaven, in hada 
 or on the earth, will I pursue all peoples, 
 mortals and angels, till I cast out the wor- 
 ship of a God and of a Lord and of a Sav- 
 ior. And Thou alone, Thou Great Spirit, 
 Ever Present Person, Everlasting and Al- 
 mighty, Thou shalt be All in All. 
 
 Again Anuhasaj went off in a swoon 
 for the space of three days, and yet the 
 Gods and Goddesses ceased not their fixed 
 places. And again was the music resumed 
 till Anuhasaj awoke and again chanted in 
 Jehovih's praise. And again he relapsed 
 and again awoke and beheld first of all 
 Ahura. Steadily and wildly he gazed 
 thereon, until his eyes were clouded into a 
 swoon. Another day the Gods watched 
 him, and sang for him; moved not from the 
 sacred circle of Jehovih. 
 
 Then Anuhasaj awoke, saying: Who 
 was it taught me to love? Ahura! Who 
 first proclaimed Jehovih unto mine ear? 
 Ahura! Who was the last to plead Jehovih? 
 Ahura! Who most of all that live labored 
 for me? Ahura! I broke thy heart, O 
 Ahura! I was mad, O I was mad, Ahura! 
 Because of thy love, Ahura, thou praised 
 me; I was vainglorious and unworthy of 
 thee, O my beloved. Thy vision hath 
 raised up before me, Ahura. Second to 
 
 Jehovih, O my love? O that thou knew- 
 est I am here, penitent and heart-broken! 
 I know thou wouldst fly to me, Ahura. 
 Thou alone do I know, who would never 
 desert me, sweet Ahura. 
 
 Then again Anuhasaj relapsed into a 
 swoon, breathless, like one that is dead. 
 Ahura sang: Behold me! I am Ahura. 
 I am come to thee from afar, O Anuhasaj. 
 Awake and behold thy love, my love. My 
 heart is broken for thee, Anuhasaj. A 
 thousand years I have wept for thee. O 
 that thou couldst awake to know me. 
 
 Anuhasaj looked up and beheld Ahura. 
 The latter kept on singing: It is not a 
 dream, Anuhasaj. Thy Ahura is here. Be- 
 hold me! I am he. Break the spell, O An- 
 uhasaj. By Jehovih's power put forth thy 
 soul. Ahura is here. . 
 
 Again Anuhasaj relapsed, but not to 
 swoon; merely closed his eyes and sang: 
 Blessed art Thou, O Jehovih! Thou hast 
 given me a sweet vision! Thou hast shown 
 me the face of my love, Ahura! His sweet 
 voice fell upon mine ear! I am blessed, O 
 Jehovih! Even these hells hast thou bless- 
 ed, O Jehovih! The darkness of endless 
 death is made light by Thine Almighty 
 touch. Thou alone shalt be my song for- 
 ever. Thou alone my theme of delight. 
 Jehovih forever! Jehovih forever and for- 
 ever! 
 
 Then Ahura, seeing the spell was bro- 
 ken, said: Arise, O Anuhasaj. I will 
 sing with thee. Behold Ahura, thy love is 
 before thee. This is no vision. Come thou 
 to the arms of thy love. And he raised An- 
 uhasaj up, and he awoke fully, but trem- 
 bling and weak, and knew understand- 
 ing^.. 
 
 CHAPTER XVI. 
 
 In the same time that Anuhasaj was 
 delivered out of hell, so was Anubi, and 
 from the self-same knot. And he was car- 
 ried on the same calyos to Hao-yusta, the 
 same heavenly place. And he was also in 
 chaos, knowing nothing, only screaming: 
 I am not Anubi. I am not the Savior. I 
 am plain Chesota! 
 
 And he also saw not and heard not, but 
 was wild, desiring to fly away. And they 
 held him fast, and, after the same manner 
 they delivered Anuhasaj to reason, they 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 437 
 
 also delivered Chesota. And when both 
 of them were well restored to sound rea- 
 son, though still timorous, Ahura took 
 them in his own otevan and carried them 
 to Theovrahkistan, before Lika, for judg- 
 ment. And great was the time when they 
 came; and especially the desire of the in- 
 habitants to look upon Anuhasaj, the most 
 audacious God that had ever dwelt on the 
 earth or in her heavens, and, withal, the 
 much-loved friend of Ahura. 
 
 When they came before the throne of 
 Jehovih and duly saluted, Lika said: 
 Whence come ye and for what purpose, O 
 my beloved? 
 
 Ahura said: Hell hath delivered up the 
 bound. My friends are before thee. Then 
 Lika said: In Jehovih's name, welcome. 
 Whatsoever the Father putteth into your 
 souls, that utter ye and be assured of His 
 love, wisdom and power. 
 
 Anuhasaj said: That I am delivered 
 out of hell it is well; that I was delivered 
 into hell it was well likewise. Give thou 
 me Jehovih's judgment. My purpose be- 
 fore thee, is to register my vows unto Je- 
 hovih, that my record and thy just judg- 
 ment may be carried to the heavens above. 
 Like said: My judgment upon thee, Anu- 
 hasaj, is that thou shalt judge thyself! An- 
 uhasaj said: Most righteous judgment, O 
 Jehovih! But knowest thou not Jehovih's 
 voice? 
 
 Lika said: Thou asked for a great 
 heavenly kingdom. Behold, Jehovih gave 
 it thee. As soon as order is restored, thou 
 shalt have thy kingdom again. Anuhasaj 
 said: I want it not. 
 
 Lika said: Thou shalt not say, I want 
 this or that; but say thou wilt do what- 
 soever Jehovih hath given into thy hands. 
 When thou hast raised up thy whole king- 
 dom, behold, thou wilt also be raised up. 
 Anuhasaj said: Alas me, this is also just. 
 Show me the way. I will henceforth labor 
 for the thousands of millions who were my 
 kingdom. 
 
 Lika now bade Chesota speak. He said: 
 
 I called myself Master of the Scales 
 and Savior of Men. Whoever called 
 on me, worshipping me and De'yiis, alias 
 the Lord God, I accepted; whoever wor- 
 shipped me not, nor De'yus, nor the Lord 
 God, I cast into hell, saying: Depart 
 from me, ye cursed, into everlasting tor- 
 
 ments. What, then, O Lika, shall be my 
 judgment? For, behold, I cast a thousand 
 million into torments. 
 
 Lika said: Judge thyself. Chesota said: 
 Alas, the pains I gave can never be called 
 back and undone. Have I, then, no hope? 
 
 Lika said: Whom thou hast pained, go 
 thou to, and by thy good deeds hereafter 
 done to them, so win their love that they 
 will call thee blessed! When all of them 
 have accepted thee, behold, it shall be well 
 with thee. 
 
 Chesota said: O endless task! And 
 yet, it is just. Teach me, then, O Lika, 
 how to carry out this great judgment. 
 
 Lika then asked for Anuhasaj to come 
 forward and be crowned; and when he ap- 
 proached the foot of the throne Lika came 
 down and said: Anuhasaj, Son of Jeho- 
 vih, God of Hao-yaista, thee I crown in 
 Jehovih's name, u;ito His service forever. 
 Be Thou with him, O Jehovih, is wisdom, 
 love and power. 
 
 Anuhasaj said: Into Thy service, O Je- 
 hovih, I commit myself forever! Give me 
 of Thy love and wisdom and power that I 
 may glorify Thee and Thy kingdoms. 
 
 Lika stretched up his hand, saying: 
 Light of Thy light, crown of Thy crown, O 
 Jehovih! And the light was formed in his 
 hand, and a crown came out of the light, 
 and Lika placed it on Aanhasaj's head. 
 The latter then sat down on the foot of the 
 throne, and Lika took his hand, saying: 
 Arise, O God, and go thy way, and the 
 Father be with thee! 
 
 Thereupon Anuhasaj and Chesota sa- 
 luted and stood aside. And then Ahura 
 saluted and stood aside also; whereupon 
 Lika granted a day of recreation, during 
 which time the visiting Gods departed for 
 Hao-yusta. 
 
 CHAPTER XVII. 
 
 To accomplish the resurrection of 
 Vara-pishanaha, Lika had previously 
 sent swift messengers to Ye'a-Goo, 
 Goddess of Ha'mistos, in etherea, to 
 bring an avalanza capable of six thousand 
 million Brides and Bridegrooms for the 
 mid-harvest. Accordingly, at the time Lika 
 and his Rapon hosts were visiting Ahura, 
 the Goddess, Ye'a-Goo, came down in her 
 avalanza, fully equipped. Her avalanza 
 was egg-shaped and veiled without, and 
 
438 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 was seven miles high and five miles wide, 
 every way, habitable throughout. On the 
 outer surface, but under the veil, were 
 twelve thousand porches with banisters. 
 The propelling vortices were within the 
 center, and the workmen were within the 
 summit. On the lowest porch were five 
 hundred thousand es'enaurs, and on the 
 highest porch one thousand trumpeters. 
 Ye'a-Goo's compartment, and the place of 
 the Holy Council, were in the midst; and 
 her throne faced to the north, like Earth's 
 vortex. 
 
 Ahura said to Lika, Son of Jehovih: 
 My Brides and Bridegrooms I give to 
 thee; honor thou this dissolving kingdom 
 by performing the marriage ceremony. 
 Lika said: Thy will and Jehovih's be 
 done. Thus it was it arranged, and the 
 twain, together with the Rapon hosts, as- 
 cended the throne and sat thereon. 
 
 Ahura had previously provided his 
 hosts, in all four and a half thousand mill- 
 ion Brides and Bridegrooms, and arrayed 
 them in white, so that they anxiously 
 awaited the coming of Ye'a-Goo, and were 
 on the lookout to see her magnificent ship 
 descending. A place of anchorage had 
 also been previously made, together with 
 accommodation for the spectators, of 
 whom there were fifteen hundred million, 
 being adopted wanderers, rescued from the 
 various hells during the past hundred 
 years. The Brides and Bridegrooms were 
 arranged in semi-circles facing the throne, 
 leaving a place for the avalanza, but 
 above them, so that when Ye'a-Goo de- 
 scended from her ship, she would be in the 
 midst. 
 
 While the ship's workmen were anchor- 
 ing, Ye'a-Goo and her Holy Council de- 
 scended to the platform, and saluted the 
 Gods and Goddesses on the throne in the 
 sign, The Glory of the Father, and Lika 
 and the others answered under the sign, 
 The Abandonment of Self! 
 
 Ye'a-Goo said: In Jehovih's name am 
 I come to answer the call of His Son, to 
 deliver the emancipated Sons and Daugh- 
 ters. Like said: Behold, O Daughter of 
 Jehovih, the Brides and Bridegrooms are 
 before thee. To thee I give them in Je- 
 hovih's name! 
 
 Ye'a-Goo said: My beloved, know ye 
 the resurrection of the most high heavens? 
 
 Response: Reveal, O Goddess; our 
 faith is strong. 
 
 Thereupon Ye'a-Goo instructed them, 
 and then followed the usual ceremonies, 
 concluding with these words: 
 
 Jehovih's voice: To be My Brides and 
 Bridegrooms forever? 
 
 Response: To be Thy Brides and 
 Bridegrooms forever, O Jehovih! To la- 
 bor for Thee, and to be mouthpieces for 
 Thy commandments, and to be Thy ex- 
 pression forever! And to be in concert 
 with Thy most high Gods for the resurrec- 
 tion of mortals and angels. 
 
 Jehovih: Whom I receive as Mine for- 
 ever! To be one with Me in My king- 
 doms; for which glory I accept you as My 
 Sons and Daughters, Brides and Bride- 
 grooms forever! 
 
 Response: And be Thy Sons and 
 Daughters ! To be one with Thee forever, 
 Thou Most High, Jehovih! 
 
 Ye'a-Goo said: Behold the crowns the 
 Father bestoweth upon His loves, to be 
 theirs forever. Hereat the Rapon Chiefs, 
 with Lika, gathered of the curtains of 
 light and wove crowns and cast them 
 forth, thousands of millions, and the pow- 
 er of the Great Spirit bore them upon the 
 heads of the Brides and Bridegrooms. 
 
 Response: Crown of Thy Crown, O 
 Jehovih! Glory be to Thee, Creator of 
 Worlds! 
 
 Ye'a-Goo: The Father's ship hath 
 come for His chosen. Walk ye in and re- 
 joice, for ye are His harvest. Gods and 
 Goddesses are waiting for you, as a wo- 
 man waiteth for her first-born. They will 
 receive you with joy and love. Yea, they 
 are crying out unto me: Daughter of Je- 
 hovih, why tarriest thou so long? 
 
 Lika now saluted the Brides and 
 Bridegrooms, and said: Arise, O my be- 
 loved, and go your ways, the Father call- 
 eth. 
 
 The Brides and Bridegrooms saluted, 
 saying: Alas, we have not paid out teach- 
 er Ahura. And every one plucked from 
 the rays of Jehovih's light a flower of love, 
 and cast it at Ahura's feet, saying: Most 
 blessed of Gods, love of my love; Jehovih 
 be with thee! 
 
 Ahura responded not; only burst into 
 tears. And now, whilst the Brides and 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 439 
 
 Bridegrooms were going into the ship, 
 Ye'a-Goo came along the platform, accom- 
 panied by the chief marshal, and his staff, 
 and these were followed by Ye'a-Goo's 
 high Council. The Rapon Chiefs rose up 
 and received them, and they all sat on Je- 
 hovih's throne in relaxation and fellow- 
 ship. 
 
 Thus ended the ceremony. The music 
 of the two worlds now commenced: Ye'a- 
 Goo and her hosts embarked, and she 
 gave the word Arise! and lo, the great av- 
 alanza started from its foundation, amidst 
 a universal shout of applause from the 
 four thousand million. Higher and higher 
 rose the ship of fire, toward the bridge 
 Chinvat, out into the etherean heavens. 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII. 
 
 After the judgment of Anuhasaj and 
 Chesota at Theovrahkistan, Ahura asked 
 Lika for assistance to remove the remain- 
 der of Vara-pishanaha to Hao-yusta, which 
 Lika granted, allotting ten million of his 
 etherean hosts to accomplish • it. With 
 these Ahura, Anuhasaj and Chesota ac- 
 complished the removal. 
 
 In not many days after this, Sudga was 
 delivered from the hells of Auprag, of 
 which event Ahura had been previously in- 
 formed, as to the time thereof, and he ac- 
 cordingly went to Auprag, to be in readi- 
 ness to receive Sudga, and help restore him 
 if required. 
 
 Sudga, on his delivery from the knot, 
 where there had been thirty million bound, 
 was bereft of reason, but not gentle like 
 Anuhasaj, but fierce, battling right and 
 left, a very maddened maniac that neither 
 saw nor heard, but raved and cursed with 
 all his strength, choked up with madness. 
 For all the curses of his broken-down 
 kingdom recoiled upon himself; the 
 curses of his thousands of millions 
 of slaves were piercing his soul from every 
 quarter. But they held him fast and car- 
 ried him into the ship, which sailed for 
 Hao-yusta, whither he was landed in the 
 same condition. Ahura was with him, 
 and Ahura caused a circle of deliverance 
 to assemble and labor for his restoration. 
 And it required thirty days and nights to 
 bring him around, so he could even see 
 and hear; but as for his judgment it was 
 
 yet a hundred days more before it mani- 
 fested. 
 
 So Ahura could not wait longer with 
 him, but returned to the hells where Te-in 
 was bound, the mountains of Ak-a- 
 loo-ganuz. But herein was Ahura 
 also disappointed, for Te-in was neither 
 frightened nor wild nor mad; but limpid, 
 helpless as water and without knowledge, 
 more than a vessel of water. His energies 
 had all been exhausted, and in a dead 
 swoon he lay in the heart of a knot. Him 
 they also carried to Hao-yusta, and Ahura 
 provided for his restoration. 
 
 But yet, ere Te-in awoke from his stu- 
 por, Ahura departed for Osiris, who was 
 bound in the hells of Prayogotha. Osiris 
 had been in hell now for more than a hun- 
 dred years, and in a knot for fifty years. 
 When the false Osiris was delivered he was 
 deranged, but preaching Jehovih, calling 
 everybody Jehovih, and everything Jeho- 
 vih. Him they also carried to Hao-yusta 
 and provided restoration for him. And 
 Ahura went thither also to assist with all 
 his wisdom and strength. 
 
 Thus were delivered all the self-Gods 
 who had rebelled against Jehovih and es- 
 tablished the great confederacy, of which 
 not one vestige was now left. But of all 
 the angels delivered out of the hells and 
 knots not one in ten was of sound judg- 
 ment, whilst more than half of them were 
 only drujas at best. 
 
 Thus was founded the new kingdom of 
 Hao-yusta, but yet in charge of the ether- 
 eans, who were to commit it to Anuhasaj 
 and his one-time confederates, for their 
 deliverance. It came to pass in course of 
 time that Sudga, Te-in and Osiris were 
 restored to reason, and in this matter 
 Anuhasaj, Ahura and Chesota were 
 constant workers. And when they were all 
 restored, they in turn fell to, to restore 
 others, to which labor they were commit- 
 ted till the close of dawn. 
 
 Osiris, Te-in and Sudga all desired 
 to go before Lika, to be adjudged and sen- 
 tenced; and they all sentenced themselves, 
 which was granted unto them. On this 
 occasion Osiris said: 
 
 Thy lessons are near at hand, O Jeho- 
 vih. But who will learn them? Mortals 
 go insane, because they have not learned 
 to throw their cares upon Thee. To throw 
 
440 
 
 CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 government upon Thee, O Jehovih, this 
 is wisdom! To cast riches and king- 
 doms into Thy lap; to own nothing; to 
 have nothing; this is the sum of the 
 highest happiness? Whoso doeth this will 
 battle against no man for anything in hea- 
 ven or earth. But he who doeth otherwise 
 will soon or late descend into hell. For 
 what is hell but the opposite of bliss? 
 What is battling against others, but sow- 
 ing the seed of anarchy in one's own soul? 
 To battle against others is to gain the 
 lower, by sacrificing the higher, of which 
 latter Thou, O Jehovih, art the summit. 
 
 To go against Thee, O Father, is to go 
 against one's fellows; to go against one fel- 
 lows is to go against Thee. And who 
 can go against Thee but will soon or late 
 evolve his own fall? Thou hast given to 
 mortal kings and queens, and shown them 
 that soon or late their kingdoms will fall 
 to pieces. And yet Lords and Gods, see- 
 ing these things, will not believe. Every 
 one, in his own conceit, imagineth his par- 
 ticular kingdom will be governed more 
 wisely than all his predecessors. And yet 
 his also falleth. 
 
 Now will I turn to find thee, O Jeho- 
 vih, and the search shall be everlasting. 
 Kingdoms are nothing to me; all posses- 
 sions, save wisdom and love, are but van- 
 ity and vexation. I know Thou art above 
 all else, and yet Thou hast given Thyself 
 all away, so that none can look upon Thy 
 face. Verily hast Thou hid Thyself away; 
 to be like unto Thee is to hide away the 
 self of one's self; and that which remaineth 
 will be Thy mouthpiece and Thy hand. 
 
 Then spake Sudga unto Jehovih, say- 
 ing: Why was I puffed up, seeing that I 
 created not even mine own self? Neither 
 had I anything in earth or heaven to use 
 or to work with, but the substance was 
 made already. Yea, I leapt into Thy gar- 
 den which Thou hadst planted. I raised up 
 my voice against Thee; because Thou wert. 
 too Holy for my gross senses to behold, I 
 condemned Thee. I wanted Thee gross, 
 that I could look upon Thee; that I could 
 walk around Thee, and behold Thy stature. 
 I saw that all men were like unto me in 
 this. Therefore I made a figurehead of my- 
 self; I said unto Thy children: Behold me! 
 And at first they were pleased, because 
 they imagined they had found a Creator 
 
 they could measure. But Thine eye was 
 upon me. Thy hand pointed the way and 
 the manner of my iniquity. And they 
 searched me out and found I was but a 
 man, like unto themselves. Wherefore 
 they condemned me. 
 
 The fool acknowledgeth no person save 
 he can grapple therewith, and find the 
 arms, and the length thereof, and the feet 
 and their standing place. How vain I was 
 in this, O Jehovih! He that professed Thy 
 Person I denounced as a fool; because I 
 saw not Thy completeness Thou didst per- 
 mit me to pursue my vanity. Because I 
 had acknowledged not Thy Person I 
 was forced to make man the All Highest; 
 and this drove me to make myself the all 
 highest man. But Thou earnest not against 
 me to turn me from mine iniquity, but 
 gavest me full play to do my utmost. 
 
 On all sides hast Thou encompassed 
 Thy creation with liberty. Even Thine 
 enemy Thou hast not restrained. He stand- 
 eth in public, saying: Jehovih, I deny 
 Thee. If Thou art mightier than I, strike 
 me down.** Behold, I deny Thee and Thy 
 Person! Thou Void Nothingness! Thou 
 fool Creator, with Thy half-created world. 
 Thou Who hast created sin! And created 
 misery! Thou Father of evil! O Thou 
 dumb Nothing. Yea, even to him hast 
 Thou given free speech; and he buildeth 
 up his own soul in his own way. And for 
 a season he is the delight of the Druk and 
 the druj; yea, they fasten upon him, and 
 he gaineth a multitude of evil ones, divid- 
 ed one against another, but the seed of his 
 curses taketh root in them, and he be- 
 cometh encompassed with foulness and 
 bondage. 
 
 To find harmony in Thee, O Jehovih; 
 to measure the Goodness of Thee; to re- 
 joice in one's joys; to treasure Thy best 
 gifts; to laud Thy love; to love Thee be- 
 cause Thou hast given me power to love, 
 and things to love; to rejoice in Thy fruits 
 and flowers and all perfected things; to 
 dwell forever upon Thy glories and the 
 magnitude of Thy creation; to sing praises 
 to Thee for harmony wherever found; to 
 love to comprehend all good things; to 
 find the good that is in all men and wo- 
 men; to rejoice in delights; to teach others 
 to rejoice, and to search after all perfected 
 beauties, goodness, righteousness and love; 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 441 
 
 these shall be my service unto Thee, my 
 everlasting Father. 
 
 To seek not to find imperfections; to 
 seek not to find inharmonies; to seek not 
 to find evil; to seek not to find ugliness; 
 to seek not to find evil in others, nor their 
 darkness nor shortcomings; to seek not to 
 prove imperfections in Thy works, O Jeho- 
 vih; to find 'no fault with Thee; to com- 
 plain not against Thee; to complain not 
 for trials nor for hardships, nor for the 
 evil others inflict upon me; to quibble not, 
 because I can not comprehend Thy vast- 
 ness; to quibble not for myself; to speak 
 not evilly against anything Thou hast cre- 
 ated; O make Thou me strong and wise 
 forever. 
 
 Te-in spake to Jehovih, saying: Where- 
 in is the limit of experience, O Jehovih! 
 And how short have I not been before 
 Thee, My Father! Behold, I had learned 
 all philosophies; I had been taught for a 
 long season in the right way, but I rebelled 
 against Thee, my Creator. I had been 
 taught to hoard not up anything; to own 
 nothing; to desire nothing, but wisdom and 
 love. And Thy teachers, O Jehovih, show- 
 ed me the evidence of thousands of great 
 rulers, and every one of them had come 
 to evil and destruction. Why then, O Fa- 
 ther, was I not wise in the evidence before 
 me? But I rose up against all this testi- 
 mony, and I fashioned a mighty kingdom. 
 Yea, Thou didst permit me to try in mine 
 own way to the full. 
 
 I went not by peace but by war; I 
 raised me up standing armies and great 
 warriors without limit; by force I estab- 
 lished myself, but only as a tree that grow- 
 eth up and is cut down. But what was I 
 in Thy great universe, O Jehovih? What 
 was my experience but the repetition of 
 others who had been before me? 
 
 Now will I be wise; most cautious in 
 my wisdom, and slow to proceed. But 
 how can I make my experience profitable 
 unto others? Thou hast stood me afar off; 
 whoso heareth me will say: Ah, had I 
 tried it I had succeeded better. Thou 
 dost allow each one to go in and try, but 
 they all fail. Yea, they reiterate their fail- 
 ure; but where is the profit of this experi- 
 ence unto others? How can I ever reach 
 them, O Jehovih! What profit have I more 
 than a mortal that dwelleth on the earth? 
 
 Have not the angels testified for thousands 
 of years that the rich man was crippling 
 his own soul, and that the king and queen 
 were binding themselves with chains for 
 the habitation of hell? But they will not 
 heed; every one hopeth he at least will find 
 a way for escape; to gain prestige over oth- 
 ers; to be a leader; to have servants; to be 
 idle; to live at ease; to have great posses- 
 sions; to revel in luxuries: Are not these 
 more powerful than experience; greater in 
 the eyes of the ignorant than all the wis- 
 dom of earth and heaven? 
 
 Thou hast wisely shaped Thy creatures, 
 O Father! Thou makest great servants of 
 us in a way we know not of. Behold, I de- 
 sired a mighty kingdom in heaven, and 
 Thou gavest one into my hand. Yea, I 
 flattered myself with my success; I laughed 
 at the Gods who had been before my time. 
 How things are changed now, O Jehovih! 
 Thou hast made me a servant of servants; 
 yea, by mine own hand have I bound my- 
 self. Have I not heard mortals say: 
 
 that I had a kingdom to rule over! O 
 that I had great riches, how good I would 
 be! And because Thou deniest them for 
 their own good, they complain against 
 Thee. Who shall answer for the vanity of 
 men and angels! They have not patience 
 with Thee, Who created them alive and 
 knowest what is best. 
 
 One saith: Yonder is a great king, 
 why doeth he not a great good? Or, yon- 
 der is a rich man, why doeth he not a great 
 good also? O that I were in their places, 
 what a great good I would do. How shall 
 
 1 show them, O Father, that to strive to 
 be a king is to go away from doing good; 
 that to strive to be a rich man is to deny 
 goodness? Yea, by the very act of posses- 
 sion is he testimony the opposite way. For 
 he that is good giveth all; even as Thou 
 gavest all and so made all things. And the 
 greater the possession the greater the 
 bondage. Who hath so small a responsibil- 
 ity as he who hath nothing? This is the 
 sum of wisdom, O Jehovih; and all men 
 and all angels soon or late will acknowl- 
 edge it. 
 
 Better hast Thou made it for the ser- 
 vant than for the master; better for the 
 poor than the rich; and these things will 
 also come to their understanding in course 
 of time. But how can I, O Father, make 
 them to know wisdom without experience, 
 
442 
 
 CYCLE OF LTKA 
 
 to accept the testimony of others' tortures 
 in hell? Behold, Thou gavest me great 
 learning when I was of the earth; and 
 when in hada great advantages to attain 
 to deep wisdom; but, after all, I was caught 
 in a snare of my own setting. How much, 
 then, O Father, must I expect of the mul- 
 titude? Happy is he who hath nothing, 
 and desireth only wisdom and love. To 
 cultivate such a garden, what a harvest 
 will ripen out unto him. 
 
 When the three had thus spoken before 
 the throne and before the high Council, 
 Ahura stood aside and spake also. He said: 
 
 CHAPTER XIX. 
 
 O that I could sing Thee a song of de- 
 light, Thou All Highest. Or find the 
 words to make plain Thy marvelous ways. 
 But Thou hast limited me as a shadow, 
 of which Thou art the substance. Thy 
 causes are deep and of long times; my 
 judgment less than a breath of air; I re- 
 solve and reason and devise, but all is 
 nothing before Thee. To-day my soul is 
 buoyed up with great rejoicing; Thou hast 
 sent me my loves. I would bind them with 
 sweet words; their wisdom would I feasr 
 upon forever. In Thy great mercy, Je- 
 hovih, Thou hast showed me a world of 
 delight. How can I repay Thee, or Thy 
 countless millions make to understand the 
 way of rejoicing. 
 
 O that I could show them the secret 
 way of bliss; or turn them in the direction 
 of the All Highest! Could they be the 
 Within; to know the delight of that which 
 proceedeth outward. O that I could make 
 them understand; to look upward instead of 
 downward; to look inward instead of out- 
 ward. How Thou followest up Thy way- 
 ward children; Thy truants that strive to 
 go away from Thee. 
 
 They wander away off, and Thou giv- 
 est the slack of the leading line unto them. 
 They go as if around a circle, and come to 
 the place of beginning at last. O that I 
 could prevail upon them in the start; that 
 I could save them the first journey of the 
 •circle. O that they would go slowly and 
 with Thee always, Jehovih! 
 
 But thou enrichest them with Thy 
 bounteous fields; they travel far and are 
 footsore and weary; and the twain causes 
 are as a new book of songs. O that ex- 
 
 perience may never die! And Thy crea- 
 tions never cease to have adventurous Sons 
 and Daughters! 
 
 O that I could understand Thy Great- 
 ness, or find in the darkness the light that 
 glorifieth Thy countenance. I drink deep 
 of mine own folly, and mine eyes wander 
 about because of the darkness. I come 
 upon Thy pathway and burst forth with a 
 song of delight. Yea, I rejoice for the 
 darkness I' have passed through; in this 
 am I more buoyant in my love to Thee, 
 my Creator. 
 
 How can I make all Thy people to sing 
 songs unto Thee; or teach them to harp 
 not forever on the dark side of things? I 
 have seen the tree of hell they planted in 
 their own souls, and the way they cultivate 
 it. They know not what is meant by sing- 
 ing praises unto Thee, and of Thy growth 
 in them. Why will they interpret me by 
 words, or realize not that I sing because of 
 the exuberance of the soul? O that I could 
 inspire them to talk good of all things; to 
 dwell rather on the beauties Thou hast 
 made, instead of the ills and horrors around 
 them. Can they never understand what it 
 is to sow the seed of the tree of endless de- 
 light? 
 
 O that I could call them unto Thee, 
 Jehovih! Or that I could lift their aspira- 
 tion up from the shadows of death. I 
 would follow them into Thy two great 
 gardens which Thou hast created; that 
 which is unripe, where they go and curse 
 Thee; and that which is ripe, where I have 
 found Thee full of love. Because I said: 
 Sing unto Him forever; pray to Him with 
 great rejoicing, they interpret me to mean 
 words uttered as a mocking-bird. Yea, 
 they grumble forever. 
 
 To find Thee, O Jehovih; to glorify the 
 good that cometh along, this is the salva- 
 tion of the world. Of this my songs shall 
 never end; without a shadow of darkness 
 Thou wilt tune my voice forever. I will 
 sing and dance before Thee; the germ of 
 happiness in my soul will I nurse as Thy 
 holiest gift. For of all the trees which 
 Thou hast planted in the soul of men and 
 angels, this is the most glorious; for it is 
 the perfection of Thy Voice, which singeth 
 in all Thy. living creatures. 
 
 When Ahura had finished, then spake 
 Lika, for the Voice of Jehovih was upon 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 443 
 
 him. He said: Many leaders have I cre- 
 ated for Earth and her heavens; but not 
 one have I created with power to make a 
 leader of himself. My hand is upon them- 
 that I choose; with wisdom and power 
 raise I them up from the beginning. To 
 a people on the earth I give a king; to the 
 inhabitants of My heavens give I Lords 
 and Gods. Because ye have tried the full- 
 ness of self, and raised up mighty realms in 
 heaven, but to come to naught before My 
 hand, ye are as a new power in these hea- 
 vens. 
 
 As by the name Jehovih, I have main- 
 tained the Faithists in earth and heaven, so 
 shall ye rule over My enemies, in righteous- 
 ness and love and good works, by the names 
 Lord and God, which they shall worship 
 until the coming of the next dawn. But I 
 will come in that day and deliver you and 
 them, and there shall be no more Lord or 
 God worshipped upon Earth or in the 
 heavens thereof. Grieve not that ye have 
 had great kingdoms, and been overthrown, 
 and cast into torments; for ye have been so 
 prepared in My works, that I might reach 
 them that are not of the flesh and blood of 
 My Faithists. And inasmuch as ye have 
 gone to the farthest limit of glory and of 
 the darkness of hell, so will I give unto 
 you wisdom, love and power accordingly. 
 To make ready for the kosmon era, I want 
 not a few, but thousands of millions in 
 heaven and earth, to inspire such as live in 
 darkness. 
 
 As I delivered you, so shall ye deliver 
 them; because they will accurse themselves 
 with war and with standing armies for the 
 sake of earthly glory unto their rulers, ye 
 shall encompass them about, and break 
 them up, and deliver them into My king- 
 doms, which are peace and love. As ye 
 have been delivered out of hell, so shall ye 
 deliver the kings and queens of the earth 
 out of the kingdoms wherein they will un- 
 knowingly bind themselves in condemna- 
 tion before Me. They shall be made to un- 
 derstand that, whoso assumeth a kingdom, 
 shall not rule it unto his own glory with- 
 out reaping the fruits of hell. 
 When the king goeth forth, he shall not 
 be afraid he will be cut down; nor shall his 
 marshals stand about him to protect him, 
 for My Person shall shield him, and his 
 people will shout with great joy when his 
 
 steps draw nigh. To serve Me is not in 
 prayer only, or in rites and ceremonies, 
 but in stretching forth the hand to do good 
 unto others with all of one's might. 
 
 Because ye have proved that force and 
 violence only establish for a day, and are 
 not of Me, so shall ye make them under- 
 stand that whoso useth force and violence 
 or armies to sustain himself is not of Me, 
 but is My enemy, and is on the way to 
 destruction. Whoso being a king, or a 
 general, or a captain, and in war, either of- 
 fensive or defensive, professing to serve Me 
 by rites and ceremonies and praises, is a 
 mocker of Me and My kingdoms; yea, a 
 blasphemer in My sight; he provideth the 
 way of his own torments. These are My 
 creations; to answer force with force, vio- 
 lence with violence, mockery with mock- 
 ery; alike and like as seed is sown, so shall 
 the harvest come unto the sowers. Nei- 
 ther shall evil and darkness and misery 
 cease on the earth till I have disbanded the 
 dealers in death; by My own hand will I 
 liberate the nations of the earth; their ar- 
 mies shall go away, like the winter's snow 
 in sun of summer. To which end ye shall 
 be My workers, with wisdom, love and 
 power. 
 
 CHAPTER XX. 
 
 During the fourth year of dawn, the 
 Voice of Jehovih came to Lika, saying: 
 My Son, thou shalt provide thyself an ar- 
 my sufficient, and thou shalt take away 
 from the earth all angels below the first 
 resurrection, save such fetals as are under 
 the dominion of My heavenly rulers. And 
 thou shalt provide them separate regions 
 in My lower heavens, whence they can not 
 return to mortals. And thou shalt appoint 
 rulers and teachers over them, to deliver 
 them out of madness and evil and stupor. 
 Of thy etherean hosts shalt thou appoint 
 teachers and rulers for this purpose; but at 
 the end of dawn they shall deliver their 
 places to atmosphereans selected from 
 Theovrahkistan. From this time forth My 
 atmosphereans shall begin to help one an- 
 other, not depending for all teachers to 
 come from My etherean heavens. 
 
 Lika then called up At'yesonitus and 
 told him of Jehovih's words, and further 
 added: To thee do I therefore allot this 
 labor. And I give unto thee twelve gen- 
 
4M 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 erals, for the different regions of the earth; 
 and unto each of the twelve I allot five 
 million ethereans, whom thou canst draw 
 from the armies that were engaged in de- 
 livering the hells and knots. 
 
 At'yesonitus said: In Jehovih's will and 
 thine, I am pleased. I will divide up the 
 regions of the earth amongst the twelve 
 generals, and give unto each one of them 
 the five million, according to thy com- 
 mandments. 
 
 At'yesonitus then sent officers out into 
 different regions in atmospherea to select 
 the sixty million deliverers, commanding 
 them to report in Theovrahkistan, in the 
 Valley of Tish, his heavenly place, whither 
 he took the twelve generals that Lika had 
 assigned him. 
 
 Lika gave to At'yesonitus a list of the 
 spirits to be thus taken away from mor- 
 tals; showing him the regions of the earth 
 where they were most numerous. At'ye- 
 sonitus then ordered the ship-builders to 
 provide him twelve thousand fire-boats, 
 with bulwarks of fire, and with gateways. 
 
 In the meantime Lika sent Yussamis 
 with four hundred geographers and math- 
 ematicians and surveyors to find the neces- 
 sary plateau to which At'yesonitus could 
 send his captured hosts. Yussamis then 
 founded the six heavenly plateaux known 
 as the Ugsadisspe, a name signifying the 
 Heaven of the Destroying Serpents. 
 
 These, then were the six heavens of 
 Ugsadisspe: Tewallawalla, over Ara- 
 bin'ya, one thuosand two hundred miles 
 high; Setee'song, over Vind'yu, one thou- 
 sand miles high; Go'e'dhi, over Jaffeth, 
 one thousand one hundred miles high; El- 
 lapube, over Uropa, one thousand miles 
 high; Apak, over North and South Guat- 
 ama, six hundred miles high, and border- 
 ing on Yaton'te, the subjective heaven of 
 the ancients, which was now being re-es- 
 tablished by Kaparos; and Fue, over Chi- 
 huahi, nine thousand miles high. 
 
 Yussamis provided these heavens with 
 no roadways, in order to prevent the de- 
 livered spirits flocking together, in which 
 case they might run into anarchy. And, 
 accordingly, appointed unto each of these 
 heavens one ruler of the rank primal God, 
 selecting them from the etherean hosts, 
 but empowering them to bestow their 
 thrones on successors at the end of dawn, 
 giving terms of office not less than two 
 
 hundred years, but subject to the limiting 
 power of God of Theovrahkistan. 
 
 Lika gave four thousand messengers to 
 At'yesonitus, and twelve thousand messen- 
 gers to Yussamis, to whom he also gave 
 sixty million laborers. But each of them 
 provided their own heralds, musicians, 
 marshals and captains in their own way. 
 Now, therefore, At'yesonitus and Yussa- 
 mis, receiving their armies of laborers, fell 
 to work, the former to delivering, and the 
 latter to receiving the drujas of the earth. 
 And Yussamis put his hosts to building 
 houses and hospitals, heavenly places, and 
 to founding cities and provinces through 
 the primal Gods under him. 
 
 CHAPTER XXI. 
 
 Jehovih spake to Lika, saying: These 
 are My ways; reveal thou Me unto them. 
 They that know Me not, shall be made to 
 know Me; My labors shall rise up before 
 them, and their understanding shall be 
 opened. They shall know what I mean 
 when I say I will destroy or I will build 
 up. I have heard man in his vanity, that 
 judgeth Me. His eyes are on the earth 
 only, and in houses and riches. Because I 
 take them away from him, he complaineth 
 against Me. 
 
 I gave man an example in his own 
 child that delighteth in sweets, and idleness 
 and vain pleasures. Man taketh these 
 from his child, saying: Behold, they are 
 not good for thee, save in temperance! 
 Wherein have I injured thee, O man? 
 Wherein destroyed I aught that contribut- 
 ed to thy spirit? Wherein have I suffered 
 destruction to come upon thee, whilst thou 
 followedst My commandments? Why shalt 
 thou complain because I laid great cities 
 in ashes? Sawest thou the millions of dru- 
 jas thou wert holding down in darkness by 
 thy evil habits? 
 
 I am not in anger, nor pull 1 down, nor 
 burn I up any place in a passion. As thou 
 goest forth to destroy a row of houses to 
 stay a great conflagration, shall the people 
 murmur? For thy hand is stretched forth 
 to do a good work for the whole city. 
 
 My heavens are magnified cities, and 
 when a mortal wing offendeth, behold, I 
 clip it short. They are all Mine; and none 
 can question My authority with Mine own. 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 445 
 
 which I wield for the resurrection of the 
 whole. 
 
 Thou hast wept because of the destruc- 
 tion of the books of great learning of the 
 ancients; but thou knowest not thine own 
 words. Saw I not, O man, that thou 
 wouldst never wean thyself from the doc- 
 trines of the dark ages if the books of 
 great learning were not destroyed! In all 
 ages of the world thou hast been bound to 
 the ancients; thou art forever searching 
 backward for wisdom; and to the angels of 
 the dead who pretend to be ancients. I 
 behold the latter, and that they are drujas. 
 I send wise angels down to them to deliver 
 them out of darknesss. And they come 
 and bear the drujas away from thee, for 
 thine own good and theirs. My wise an- 
 gels suffer mortals to burn up the books 
 of the ancients; for I command them to 
 make thee open thine understanding to the 
 living present. 
 
 Jehovih spake to At'yesonitus, and 
 through him to the twelve Gods of deliver- 
 ance, saying: Go forth, My son, in wis- 
 dom and power. Thy labor requireth great 
 strength and stratagems. For thou shalt 
 find the drujas fast bound to mortals and 
 to mortal habitations. As a drowning man 
 clingeth to a log, so cling the drujas to 
 mortals. As a delirious man, mad with 
 drunkenness, flieth in fear from his best 
 friends, so will the drujas fly from thee, 
 and thy hosts who shall attempt to de- 
 liver them. They will inspire their mortals 
 to dread an innovation of the ancient doc- 
 trines. Yea, the twain, not knowing it, 
 will bind themselves together with great 
 tenacity. 
 
 But thou shalt deliver them apart nev- 
 ertheless; by stratagem, or persuasion, or 
 with a strong hand. And when thou hast 
 them separate, thou shalt surround the dru- 
 jas with flames of fire, and carry them off 
 to the boats, which are bulwarked with 
 fire. And thou shalt deliver them in the 
 places My Son, Yussamis, hath ready pre- 
 pared for them. 
 
 Thou shalt not only deliver the drujas, 
 but cause mortals to hate them. Mortal 
 kings shall issue edicts against magicians 
 and prophets and seers and priests; and 
 the consultation of spirits shall come to 
 an end. And man on the earth shall turn 
 to his own soul, which is My light within 
 
 him, and he shall cultivate it and learn to 
 think for himself. 
 
 At'yesonitus prepared a record to give 
 to mortals, and it was by inspiration so 
 given. And the nature of the record was 
 to teach mortals to be guarded against 
 drujas, and know who was afflicted with 
 them. This is said record, as it standeth 
 in the libraries of heaven: 
 
 The man that saith: I pity my neigh- 
 bors, they are surrounded with drujas! 
 
 The man that saith: Fools only believe 
 in obsession! 
 
 The man that saith: There is no All 
 Person! 
 
 The man that saith: My way is wis- 
 dom; thine is wicked! 
 
 The man that saith: Let no one dictate 
 to me! I will have nothing but liberty to 
 the uttermost! 
 
 The man that saith: As the priest 
 thinketh, so do I! 
 
 The man that saith: The ancients were 
 wiser than we! 
 
 The man that saith: Whoso seeth not 
 as I do is a heathen! 
 
 The man that saith: Whoso worship- 
 ped not my God is wicked! 
 
 The man that saith: Wisdom is book- 
 learning! 
 
 The man that saith: There is no wis- 
 dom in books! 
 
 The man that saith: My book is sa- 
 cred; it containeth the sum of all revela- 
 tion and inspiration! 
 
 The man that saith: There is no inspir- 
 ation, nor words thereof! 
 
 The followers of the ancients only. 
 
 He who will have nothing to do with 
 the ancients. 
 
 He who ignoreth rites and ceremonies 
 and prayers. 
 
 He who dependeth on rites and ceremo- 
 nies and prayers. 
 
 Whoso denieth the Ever Present Per- 
 son. 
 
 Whoso followeth the counsel of angels 
 or men. 
 
 Whoso will not learn from the counsel 
 of men and angels. 
 
 Whoso feeleth prayers and confessions 
 to be good for others, but not necessary 
 for himself. Or saith: I will lead and su- 
 pervise; be thou my servant. 
 
446 
 
 CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 Or saith: Behold my rights! Or: Be- 
 hold my earnings. Or: Behold my pos- 
 sessions! 
 
 Or talketh of himself and his experi- 
 ences. Or tattleth of others. Or judgeth 
 his brother, or criticiseth him. 
 
 The self-righteous, who saith: Behold, 
 me, I am holy! 
 
 Or who desireth not new light, or saith: 
 The old is good enough! 
 
 Whoso laboreth for himself only. 
 
 Whoso laboreth not for others in his 
 wisdom and strength. 
 
 That seeketh his own ease. 
 
 That considereth not others' welfare 
 more than his own. 
 
 The hypocrite preaching one way and 
 practicing another. 
 
 That speaketh not openly his doctrines, 
 lest his words profit not his earthly means 
 and associations. 
 
 At'yesonitus said: For these are all as 
 much under the bondage of drujas as is 
 the drunkard, or harlot, or murderer. And 
 after death their spirits float into the same 
 hada of darkness. 
 
 CHAPTER XXII. 
 
 When At'yesonitus' generals and their 
 hosts went through Vind'yu and Jaffeth 
 and Arabin'ya, they concerted with the 
 Gods who had in charge the inspiration of 
 Capilya, Moses and Chine. And not only 
 did the angel generals remove the drujas 
 from mortals, but inspired mortal kings 
 and queens in those great divisions of the 
 earth to issue edicts against magicians and 
 priests who consulted with spirits. 
 
 Jehovih had said: It shall be a testi- 
 mony in the latter days unto the inhabit- 
 ants of the earth of My proceedings; not 
 with one division of the earth only, but 
 with all places. For they shall in after 
 years search history and find that in the 
 same era in these three great divisions of 
 the earth the kings and queens issued 
 edicts against spirit communion. And this 
 fact shall be testimony of My arc of Bon; 
 wherein man shall understand that I come 
 not in one corner of the earth only, and to 
 one people only; but that I have them all 
 in My charge, as a Father that knoweth 
 his own children. 
 
 Neither give I unto them the same as- 
 pirations; for one I send westward to cir- 
 
 cumscribe the earth; one I build up with a 
 multitude of languages, and a multitude of 
 Gods; and the third one I build up without 
 any God save Myself. And they shall un- 
 derstand that where there are many lan- 
 guages there are many Gods worshipped; 
 where there is one language, there is only 
 One worshipped, even Me, the Great 
 Spirit. For in kosmon I will bring them 
 together; and these diversities shall be as. 
 a key to unlock the doctrines and lan- 
 guages of times and seasons long past. 
 
 Man living away from other men be- 
 cometh conceited in himself, deploring the 
 darkness of others, and great nations be- 
 come conceited of themselves and of their 
 doctrines. Each one of the great peoples 
 saying: Behold yonder barbarians! I was. 
 chosen in His especial care. Those others 
 are only heathens, and have not been wor- 
 thy of the Great Spirit's concern. 
 
 But in this day I plant the seed of My 
 testimony, which shall come up and blos- 
 som and bear fruit in three thousand years. 
 
 At'yesonitus and his generals, with their 
 millions of angel hosts, extended east and 
 west and north and south, around all the 
 earth, in all divisions thereof, into every 
 nook and corner. Day and night, At'yeson- 
 itus and his armies labored, ceased not nor 
 rested, but in good method went right on, 
 filling all the lowest place of heaven with 
 their transport boats of fire. And the boats, 
 sped hither and yonder without ceasing, 
 loaded in their ascent with the screaming, 
 frightened drujas, all under guard, and 
 duly preserved against accident or harm 
 by the wise angels over them. 
 
 Some drujas were easily captured and 
 carried away; some weak, helpless and 
 harmless; but hundreds of millions of 
 them mad, and most desperate; some evil,, 
 fearful in desperate oaths, and foul talk,. 
 and dangerous withal. But others were, 
 most pitiful in their love to linger with 
 their mortal kindred; mothers, whose 
 children dwelt on the earth; and children, 
 spirits, whose mothers dwelt on the 
 earth. To separate them and carry away 
 such drujas was a most heart-rending task,, 
 requiring God-like souls to accomplish it. : 
 
 Jehovih had said: As a mortal mother 
 will cling to the mortal body of her dead 
 child, till her friends must tear them apart,, 
 whilst all who look on are broken- 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 447 
 
 hearted because of her love, even such is 
 the bond betwixt the spirit of the dead and 
 the mortal yet left behind. But when My 
 wise angels look upon them, and perceive 
 they are carrying each other down in 
 darkness, then shall they be torn asunder; 
 and the spirit shall be taken away and pro- 
 vided for ultimate resurrection, and only 
 permitted to visit the mortal kin under due 
 guardianship. 
 
 On the battlefields of the earth were 
 hundreds of millions of spirits in chaos, 
 still fighting imaginary battles, not know- 
 ing their bodies were dead; knowing 
 naught but to curse and fight; roving over 
 the battlefields, and would not away, save 
 by capture and being carried ofT. Thus did 
 At'yesonitus and his mighty hosts clear 
 the earth. But of their great labors and 
 wonderful adventures a thousand books 
 might be written. 
 
 And yet not much less were the labors 
 and adventures of Yussamis in Ugsadisspe 
 and her six heavenly places, where his 
 etherean hosts labored unceasingly, prepar- 
 ing places, and keepers, and nurses, and 
 physicians, and teachers for the delivered 
 drujas, the thousands of millions. 
 
 Jehovih said unto Yussamis: Thou 
 shalt assort the drujas; the peaceful to 
 themselves; the dumb to themselves; the 
 mad, chaotic, and all other of My afflicted 
 ones; providing sections and places for 
 them. And teachers and nurses and phys- 
 icians; for they shall be delivered out of 
 darkness also. Yea, every one of them 
 shall become as a star of glory in heaven. 
 
 And Yussamis and his Gods developed 
 the six heavens of Ugsadisspe; established 
 places for the tens of millions of drujas; 
 and provided order and discipline, and al- 
 tars of worship, and schools, and colleges, 
 and factories, and all things whatsoever 
 required in a primary heaven. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIII. 
 
 Jehovih spake to Lika, saying: Behold, 
 the end of dawn draWeth near; go thou 
 once more around about Earth and her 
 heavens, and examine into the labor of thy 
 Gods. And thou shalt take with the thy 
 Rapon hosts, and a sufficient number of 
 heralds and attendants, and such musicians 
 and messengers as thou desirest. And 
 when thou art come to Yaton'te, My sub- 
 
 jective heaven, thou shalt halt a while 
 with Kaparos, and re-establish it in great- 
 er holiness and efficiency. For this is Mine 
 only subjective heaven in the regions of the 
 red star. 
 
 Behold, the spirits of those that die in 
 infancy call out to Me, saying: Tell us, 
 O Thou Creator, how is it with the earth? 
 How is it with mortals who dwell on the 
 earth? What do they toil at? Have they 
 schools and hospitals and factories, like 
 unto ours? Have mortals mishaps and 
 trials? And have they roadways, and 
 oceans of water on the hard earth? How 
 can these things be, O Jehovih? Why is 
 it that mortals cannot go down into the 
 earth and into the bottoms of their oceans, 
 even as we do in the heavens? 
 
 How didst Thou create us alive in the 
 earth? What was the place like? Why do 
 mortals carry around with them such earth- 
 houses? Cannot they go in them and out 
 of them at pleasure? What do mortals 
 mean, O Jehovih, by mortal life and mor- 
 tal death? Doth the clay and stone and 
 water they dwell in have life and death? 
 
 Shall every one retain his own body? 
 How do the earth bodies grow? Do they 
 eat clay and stone? And water? Where 
 do they get their blood? And do they eat 
 hair, that they may have earth hair? Why 
 is it that they bring not up their bodies 
 with them when they are dead? Wear they 
 clothes over the spirit body only, or over 
 the earth body also? 
 
 Great are Thy works, O Jehovih! Take 
 me to Yaton'te, Thy great subjective hea- 
 ven. We would learn by figures in panto- 
 mime the illustrations of the earth. We 
 would learn by Thy panoramic heaven what 
 mortals do? How they live and what their 
 schools are like? How they have contrived 
 to teach the corporeal senses by corporeal 
 things? How their boats are made and 
 propelled; how their vehicles travel along 
 upon the solid earth. 
 
 For which reason, O Lika, thou shalt 
 see to it that Yaton'te be perfected unto 
 this instruction, as welLas to arouse from 
 stupor the spirits of the dead who desire 
 not to rise up from the earth. 
 
 Lika told the Rapon hosts Jehovih's 
 words; and he also gave command to his 
 chief marshal to provide the necessary ote- 
 van with officers, heralds, musucians and 
 
448 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 messengers. Accordingly, as soon as all 
 things were in readiness, Lika committed 
 the throne of Jehovih, in Theovrahkistan, 
 to his vice-Goddess, and Lika and the Ra- 
 pons, with their attendant hosts, departed 
 on their journey. 
 
 Now, since the time of Lika in the pla- 
 teau of Theovrahkistan, it had become 
 habited by thousands of millions of angels, 
 and they were high in the grades. So that 
 the officers of selection were already pre- 
 paring them by the millions for Brides and 
 Bridegrooms to Jehovih. And there were 
 thousands of heavenly cities besides Yo- 
 gannaqactra, which were now in beauty, 
 gaiety, refinement and delight, with music 
 and rites and ceremonies most magnificent. 
 Then there were officers over these offi- 
 cers, whose place it was to sort and ar- 
 range the inhabitants of cities; and others 
 over these for each one hundred and for- 
 ty-four cities; and yet another over these 
 officers, and he was called Marshal of 
 Theovrahkistan. And he was of the same 
 rank as the marshals of the hosts of Lika, 
 conferring with the Marshal in Chief of Je- 
 hovih's throne. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIV. 
 
 Jehovih said to Lika: Finish thy visit 
 and thy inspection, My Son, in all the 
 places of hada on the earth, leaving the 
 land of Jaffeth to the last. And thou shalt 
 go thither, at the time of Chine's resur- 
 rection, and descend with thy ship and 
 take him up from the earth. And shalt 
 bring him with the to Yogannaqactra, 
 where he shall remain the few days that 
 dawn remaineth; and when thy hosts as- 
 cend to etherea thou shalt take Chine with 
 thee and make thy home his home until 
 such time as he may be taught the ways 
 and powers of the higher haevens. For 
 since his corporeal life is a sacrifice for the 
 resurrection of men, he shall receive espe- 
 cial care and assistance in heaven. 
 
 Lika had been previously informed by 
 the God of Chine as to the time Chine 
 would die, his body burnt, and the ashes 
 scattered to the four winds; and the re- 
 gathering up of a corporeal form of Chine, 
 and the seven days' duration thereof. So 
 Lika shaped the course of his otevan, ac- 
 cording to the instruction of his messen- 
 gers, who had been appointed for that pur- 
 
 pose, so that he should reach the field <in 
 time to raise up Chine before the multi- 
 tude. 
 
 The God of Chine had prophesied to 
 mortals through his ward that a fire-ship 
 would descend from heaven on a given 
 day, and take Chine up to heaven. Ac- 
 cordingly a great multitude of mortals were 
 assembled in the field, where they cast the 
 ashes of the dead, watching for the heaven- 
 ly ship. 
 
 Of which matters Lika had been previ- 
 ously informed by his messengers; and 
 Lika had in turn informed the God of 
 Chine the time he would appear with the 
 ship, that he might cause Chine to walk in 
 the midst of the field and so be caught up. 
 And all these matters were carried out in 
 the hands of these great Gods. 
 
 And Lika caused the fire of the ship to 
 be made visible to mortals. And the size 
 of the ship was ten times larger than the 
 field of the dead, so that when the people 
 beheld the light of the ship they feared and 
 trembled, and many of them fell down be- 
 wailing that the world was coming to an 
 end. And God caused Chine to walk out 
 in the field, and Lika sent down a whirl- 
 wind and took him up into the ship, in 
 presence of tens of thousands of mortals 
 assembled. And Lika bore his course now 
 for Yogannaqactra, for the end of the 
 dawn of Bon was at hand. 
 
 CHAPTER XXV. 
 
 Lika sent messengers to all his Gods 
 and Lords, to install their successors, and 
 to bestow them; after which the Gods and 
 Lords were to report in Theovrahkistan 
 ready for the cyclic resurrection. And he 
 commanded them to bring their etherean 
 hosts with them, save such as chose to 
 volunteer to remain until the next dan, two 
 hundred years. 
 
 Lika had previously sent word by his 
 siwft messengers to etherea, to Lissa, God- 
 dess of Teannakak, in etherea, next to 
 Howgil. And he said unto Lissa: My res- 
 urrection will be eight links, each one equal 
 to eight thousand million Brides and 
 Bridegrooms. Send thou a cowppon to 
 deliver them. 
 
 Lissa sent word back to Lika, saying: 
 O Jehovih, I am delighted with the com- 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 mand of Thy Son, Chief of Vetta'puissa! I 
 will deliver the chain of cowppon. 
 
 Then Lissa gave her commands in Te- 
 annakak, to have her builders construct 
 the cowppon; and she also set her officers 
 to work selecting such hosts as she would 
 need for her great undertaking. For she 
 had been notified in sufficient time; for it 
 was a matter of great magnitude even in 
 etherean realms. And so perfectly were 
 Lissa's commands carried out, that every- 
 thing was completed at the appointed time. 
 And then she embarked with her hosts for 
 the red star, Earth, with her thousand mill- 
 ion; on her long journey, twenty thousand 
 million miles! 
 
 Jehovih had said: Carry far My Brides 
 and Bridegrooms; make them know the 
 magnificence of the heavens I have created. 
 House them not together in a small cor- 
 ner. Let them feast their souls on the 
 splendors of My great heavens! 
 
 In the meantime Lika and his hosts in 
 Theovrahkistan were getting ready for the 
 ceremonies and for the ascension. The 
 Gods, with their hosts, were now coming 
 in from every quarter of the lower heavens, 
 bringing in their harvests and quartering 
 them in the places allotted by the mar- 
 shals. 
 
 Most conspicuous and beloved of all 
 was Ahura. Next to him were the five 
 true Gods: Inane, Injek, Inlay, Inoal and 
 Inyith, with their heavenly hosts restored 
 to them; for it was through these five 
 Gods that the three mortals, Capilya, 
 Moses and Chine, had delivered the Faith- 
 ists of Vind'yu, Jaffeth and Arabin'ya. 
 These five Gods had in five years changed 
 the mortal dominions and laws of Vind'yu 
 and Jaffeth, and sent four million Faithists 
 on a westward journey round the earth; 
 and had firmly established the All One in 
 the four great divisions of the earth, and 
 had delivered from bondage all the Faith- 
 ists on the face of the earth. 
 
 Great also was the work accomplished 
 by At'yesonitus, and by Yusammis; and by 
 the Gods that had delivered the hells and 
 the knots; and by many others. So good 
 and great were the works of them all, that 
 a history of any one of them in the five 
 years' labor would make a book that a man 
 could not read in a lifetime. And they had 
 left successors to carry out what they had 
 
 founded; so that all the lower heavens 
 were in order, system and discipline, such 
 as had not been for two thousand years. 
 
 The drujas of the earth were removed 
 away from mortals; the battlefields of the 
 earth were cleared of the chaotic spirits 
 slain in wars. So that the whole Earth and 
 her heavens were delivered into a new con- 
 dition, in the way and form of Jehovih's 
 light. And this was the deliverance of the 
 arc of Bon. 
 
 Then descended Lissa with her chain of 
 cowppon; with her ships fo fire stretched 
 wide as Earth. And the hosts of Theo- 
 vrahkistan, the Brides and Bridegrooms, 
 sixty-four thousand million Sons and 
 Daughters of Jehovih, stood, waiting, 
 watching, nervous, but filled with inex- 
 pressible delight. And they saw the cowp- 
 pon coming; knew the mission of the 
 mighty Goddess, Lissa, Daughter of Jeho- 
 vih! 
 
 Arrayed in spotless white, the sixty- 
 four thousand million stood; the exalted 
 affianced of Great Jehovih! 
 
 Nearer and nearer came the mighty sea 
 of etherean fire; and nearer, till it landed 
 at the plateau of Theovrahkistan. Then 
 came forth Lissa, saluting; and, being an- 
 swered by great Lika, Jehovih's Son, pro- 
 ceeded before Jehovih's throne. Then Lis- 
 sa demanded in the usual form, why she 
 had been summoned in Jehovih's name. 
 Lika answered in the usual form: To be- 
 stow Jehovih's affianced Sons and Daugh- 
 ters. 
 
 After this, each of the five Gods of 
 Earth took their hosts and bequeathed 
 them to Jehovih, through Lissa, His 
 Daughter. 
 
 But so great and grand were the cere- 
 monies that mortal words cannot describe 
 them. And as for the awe and magnifi- 
 cence, together with the music, could they 
 be described to mortals, understandingly, 
 they scarce could live, because of the en- 
 chantment. 
 
 But there is a time, and an end 
 to all such matters; and so there was 
 to the labor of Lika, Son of Jehovih. The 
 hosts were wed, and they marched aboard 
 the great etherean ships, the cowppon. 
 Lika and his hosts went into his own aira- 
 
450 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 vagna. And, as it were, with a thread of 
 light, he made fast to the cowppon, and 
 gave the word, the command to go. Then 
 rose up the mighty seas of fire, the eight- 
 linked cowppon and the airavagna! Slow- 
 ly, steadily moving onward, upward, high- 
 er and higher, faster and faster, and still 
 higher. And thus departed Lika with his 
 thousands of millions of upraised Sons and 
 Daughters of Jehovih. And thus ended the 
 dawn of the arc of Bon. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVI. 
 
 This is the labor of God after the dawn 
 of the cycle of Lika: 
 
 God crowned four thousand four hun- 
 dred Lords, and titled them Lords of the 
 Heavenly Hosts. And God allotted to each 
 one of them one hundred messengers and 
 fifty heralds, and gave them authority to 
 provide their own attendants in their own 
 way. 
 
 God said: When ye are within your 
 own kingdoms, ye shall appoint representa- 
 tives unto my throne. And there shall be 
 of such representative Lords one for every 
 four hundred Lords of the Hosts. And 
 the representative Lords shall be speakers 
 for the kigndoms that appoint them, and 
 have power on important occasions to sum- 
 mon to my throne all their constituent 
 Lords. And the representative Lords shall 
 be known in heaven and entered in the li- 
 braries thereof as the Holy Eleven, for 
 they are symbolical of the seasons of the 
 earth. 
 
 Therefore the Lords of the Hosts elect- 
 ed their Holy Eleven, and God anointed 
 them, and their names were entered in the 
 libraries of heaven. These then are their 
 names: Likar, Lakesh, Yopes Leo,, Vad- 
 huan, Ah Cho, Zahawee, Eezen, Khan, 
 Zedna, Yutemis and Ardolfus. And God 
 gave authority to the Holy Eleven to speak 
 before the throne, after the manner of the 
 Councils of the higher heavens. So, the 
 Lords of the Hosts departed to their sev- 
 eral kingdoms. But the Holy Eleven were 
 duly installed and took their places in front 
 of the throne of God. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVII. 
 
 And God appointed two thousand su- 
 pervisors unto each of the Holy Eleven; 
 and eight thousand eight hundred captains 
 
 of roads, and said to them: Go ye and 
 build roadways between all the heavenly 
 kingdoms in atmospherea. And I gave 
 unto you two thousand million laborers, to 
 be divided between you, according to the 
 distances and places of the roads. And 
 God gave authority to Toyvrahghah to ex- 
 amine the records and make the appor- 
 tionment of officers and laborers on the 
 roads, and he thus accomplished these 
 things. God said: My heavens shall be 
 divided into eleven parts, one unto each 
 of the Holy Eleven, The said eleven di- 
 visions were accomplished and thus named: 
 Sinyativi, Horak, Damaya, Ad' dam, Ho- 
 sea, Harivya, Sinisyo, Amset, Godessa, 
 Itero and Aroqu. 
 
 Damaya, Ad'dam and Hosea comprised 
 all the lowest hadan regions; and these 
 three divisions extended around the earth, 
 and were twelve miles high. 
 
 Sinyativi, Horak and Amset comprised 
 the next grade of heavenly kingdoms out- 
 ward from the earth, and were one thou- 
 sand miles high, more or less. 
 
 Godessa and Itero were the next grade 
 of heavenly kingdoms outward from the 
 earth, and were two thousand miles high. 
 Harivya was next, and was outward from 
 the earth two thousand five hundred miles. 
 And next after this was Aroqu, which was 
 three thousand miles above the earth. 
 And yet there were thousands of plateaux 
 still further away from the earth, and with- 
 in her vortex, but -uninhabited. As for 
 Aroqu and Harivya, they were inhabited 
 mostly by angels of the highest atmospher- 
 ean grades. 
 
 God said: From this time forth all es'- 
 yans shall be maintained within the first 
 sphere of hada, within the regions of Dam- 
 aya and Ad'dam and Hosea. And as they 
 rise in wisdom and strength, they shall ad- 
 vance in place as well as grade, going in 
 the direction of Harivya and Aroqu, from 
 which all resurrections for the etherean 
 worlds shall take place. 
 
 And God caused the boundaries of Ad'- 
 dam and Hosea to embrace the eastern 
 continents of Earth; but Damaya embrac- 
 ed the western. 
 
 To the Lords of the Hosts, God had 
 said: The great love that mortals have 
 
CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 451 
 
 for their kindred who are dead, is like a 
 cord forever pulling their souls back to 
 earth. Neither do mortals understand my 
 heavens, and that the soul of man should 
 rise upward. They cry out unto me contin- 
 ually: O God, send thou back to me the 
 spirit of my kin! And they do not under- 
 stand that their prayers are in opposition 
 to the resurrection of spirits of the dead. 
 And likewise doth the es'yan cry out to 
 me: O God, take me back to my mortal 
 kin! For he also comprehendeth not the 
 resurrection, but in the gratification of his 
 love would linger forever on the earth. 
 Suffer ye not mortals to commune with the 
 spirits of the dead. 
 
 And the Lords carried out the com- 
 mandment of God. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVIII. 
 
 At the time the roadways of Earth's 
 heavens were completed, which was in the 
 three hundred and ninetieth year of the 
 cycle of Lika, this was the standing there- 
 of: 
 
 There had ascended, as Brides and 
 Bridegrooms, for etherea, thirty-six thou- 
 sand millions; nearly one-half of whom 
 were from the kigndoms of Anuhasaj and 
 his sub-Gods. And now inhabiting the 
 five spheres, forty-eight thousand million 
 spirits. In the first sphere, or hada, in 
 which there were two thousand four hun- 
 dred heavenly kingdoms, the grades were 
 from one to seven. 
 
 In the second sphere, which ranked first 
 resurrection in those days, the grades were 
 from seven to fifteen. In these regions 
 there were ten thousand heavenly king- 
 doms. 
 
 In the third sphere the grades were 
 from fifteen to thirty. In these regions 
 there were four thousand heavenly king- 
 doms. And including the kingdoms of 
 Anuhasaj, five thousand more kingdoms. 
 
 In the fourth sphere, the grades were 
 from thirty to sixty, and there were one 
 thousand five hundred heavenly kingdoms 
 in these regions. 
 
 In the fifth sphere, the grades were 
 from sixty to ninety-nine, and here were 
 one thousand heavenly kingdoms. 
 
 And yet, not included in these, were the 
 kingdoms of Yaton'te, the subjective 
 
 heaven, a visiting place, and with but 
 a small fixed population, but whose 
 visitors and students and teachers num- 
 bered three thousand million angels, 
 graded from one to ninety-nine. But 
 many of these belonged in other hea- 
 venly kingdoms. Such then were the in- 
 habitants of the bound heavens. And they 
 numbered, all told, forty-eight times more 
 people than the mortal inhabitants of the 
 earth. But in those days not many women 
 on the earth committed abortions; neither 
 died so many very young children; so that 
 the fetals sent back to inhabit mortals num- 
 bered, all told, only two hundred and thir- 
 ty million. Whilst of vampire spirits, of 
 both classes, such as inhabit gormandizers, 
 gluttons, drunkards, and harlots, absorb- 
 ing their spiritual sustenance, and thus 
 making them breeders of infidels; and such 
 as live on the atmospherean part of mortal 
 food, thus causing their mortal victims to 
 emaciate and to become insane), there 
 were, all told, not more than forty-six 
 million. Besides these, there were thirty- 
 one million lusters, who feed on the se- 
 cret vices of mortals; who were being for- 
 ever pursued from place to place by ash- 
 ars, and often captured and carried away 
 to heavenly kingdoms; but would often es- 
 cape and flee back to mortals. Yet, with 
 all these fetals, and vampires and lusters 
 included, nev^r before had Earth remained 
 so long in so pure a state. 
 
 When the roadways were completed, 
 God proclaimed seven days' recreation in 
 all the kingdoms of heaven, in order that 
 the inhabitants should sing and dance and 
 render praise unto Jehovih for the great 
 works that had been accomplished. And 
 on the last of the seven days, Toyvraghah 
 assigned the roads over to God, and named 
 them Roads of Paradise. Whereupon God 
 crowned Toyvraghah, Primal God of the 
 Roads of Paradise, of twelve hundred thou- 
 sand miles. 
 
 God said: After the manner of the gov- 
 ernment of the etherean heavens do I these 
 things. And as the kingdoms and spheres 
 of my heavens are situated, within and 
 without, with their roadways and heavenly 
 canals, forming one great kingdom with 
 many parts, it shall be a type of the king- 
 doms in etherea, which are thousands of 
 times larger. 
 
452 
 
 CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 CHAPTER XXIX. 
 
 Jehovih said: I gave to man legs and 
 feet to walk; arms and hands to work, 
 eyes to see, and ears to hear; and, withal, 
 the capacity to reflect and comprehend and 
 understand. I gave none of these capaci- 
 ties to man to lie dormant or to be useless. 
 Neither can any man advance to My high- 
 est kingdoms if crippled, or weak, or un- 
 cultivated, in all or in part of these talents 
 I have given him. But he shall be perfect- 
 ed in all particulars before he is capacitated 
 for companionship with my exalted ones. 
 
 God said: It mattereth little what kind 
 of work a man doeth; for one may till the 
 soil, and thus train his hands and arms to 
 full development; and another may weave, 
 or spin, or forge iron, and also attain full 
 development. It is not the kind of labor, 
 but the develpoment that comes of useful 
 practice, which maketh talent to stand 
 upright in heaven as a glory to the Crea- 
 tor. 
 
 For there are servants on earth, who 
 neither read nor write, that are better de- 
 veloped in their talents and members than 
 many of the rich, and kings and philoso- 
 phers. And when they die and enter my 
 heavenly places, the ranks and caste in my 
 kingdoms seem to them to be upside-down. 
 The rich man, or the king, or the pleader, 
 or priest, or the philosopher, may be as a 
 helpless child, whilst he wfto was a ser- 
 vant on earth may be as a very God over 
 them to lift them up. Neither is the pref- 
 erence to the rich, nor the poor, nor to the 
 philosopher, nor the fool; for any of these 
 may be as dwarfs in some talent or part, 
 whilst also any of these may be a most 
 perfect man in spirit. 
 
 So, God established, through his high- 
 raised officers, schools and colleges and 
 factories, heavenly, adapted to the spirits 
 of the dead even as similar places are es- 
 tablished on the earth for mortals. 
 
 CHAPTER XXX. 
 
 Aside from the orderly kingdoms of 
 God, there were seven false kingdoms in 
 hada, ruled over by false Gods and false 
 Goddesses. Chief of these were Baal, with 
 four thousand million angel slaves; the 
 false Yima, with four thousand million an- 
 gel slaves; Ashtaroth, false Goddess, with 
 
 three thousand million angel slaves; So- 
 donius, Goddess, with two million angel 
 slaves, and then came Fue-Sin, Hrivatza. 
 Beside these there were six hundred false 
 Lords and Lordesses, who had occupied 
 the mortal temples of worship, and the or- 
 acle temples. But the latter were driven 
 away from mortals by command of God, 
 that they might be induced to seek resur- 
 rection. God foresaw that the travel of 
 Earth would cause her to pass through an 
 a'ji'an forest of four hundred years, and 
 that darkness would be upon the lower 
 heavens. And God sent down to the 
 earth angel inspectors, numerators and re- 
 corders to prepare the record of mortals 
 for the libraries of heaven. And there 
 were of inspectors, four hundred angels; 
 of numerators, twelve thousand; and grad- 
 ers, ninety thousand; and of bearers, six 
 hundred thousand. Besides these were the 
 messengers, heralds and musicians, of 
 whom there were sixty thousand. Such 
 was the army sent down to the earth ac- 
 cording to God's command. And they 
 were in charge of Toyvraghah and Yulis 
 and Hagonte and Rufus. 
 
 And God called the great mathemati- 
 cians, Yahimus, Menres, Fargawitha, How- 
 itchkal, Jemima, Jordan, Molakka, Kos- 
 situs, Makkas and Agebon; and God said 
 unto them: The time of the fall of a'ji on 
 Earth is at hand. Compute ye the regions 
 of the earth where it will fall most; and 
 having determined, go ye to the mortal 
 prophets who are su'is, and cause them 
 to prophesy unto the inhabitants of the 
 earth. 
 
 The mathematicians saluted and depart- 
 ed for the earth, as commanded. Now 
 when the time of darkness was near at 
 hand, God commanded his Holy Coun- 
 cil and his heavenly kingdoms to 
 pray to Jehovih for the space of one day, 
 for wisdom and strength. In answer to 
 their prayers, there came a swift messen- 
 ger from Lika, Orian Chief, Son of Jeho- 
 vih; he came from Takuspe, in the ether- 
 ean worlds, in an etherean arrow-ship, 
 with thirty thousand. His name was, Yo- 
 taportas, God of Eriasa, in the plains of 
 Woo'-Sin. And when he had come be- 
 fore the throne of God, duly saluting, he 
 said: 
 
 In Jehovih's name I come, greeting by 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 453 
 
 His Son, Lika. God said: In Jehovih's 
 name I am blessed by thy presence, God of 
 Eriasa, Nirvanian Host. What wouldst 
 thou? 
 
 Yotaportas said: By command of Je- 
 hovih, through His exalted Son, thou shalt 
 withdraw thine emissaries from the king- 
 doms of Baal and Ashtaroth, and from all 
 kingdoms on the earth, whose mortals pay 
 obedience to false Gods. A'ji of four hun- 
 dred years will fall upon Earth and her 
 heavens. It is so decreed and provided by 
 the Holy Etherean Dispensers of roads in 
 Vragapathon. Of which matters I am sent 
 to thee that thou mayest be duly provided 
 for. The time is also now at hand when the 
 I'hins will cease to dwell on the earth. 
 The darkness which is necessary to Earth 
 will be too much for them. The heavens 
 that have heretofore received their spirits 
 shall be dissolved, and the plateaux thereof 
 removed to the outer rim of Earth's vor- 
 tex. 
 
 The Lords' reports showed there were 
 at this time on the earth two million three 
 hundred thousand I'hins. Of these, seven 
 hundred thousand inhabited Egupt and 
 western Arabin'ya; two hundred thousand 
 inhabited Chine'ya, the Jaffeth of the an- 
 cients; and the balance, for the most part, 
 inhabited North Guatama and toward 
 Hon'ya-pan. Such, then, were all that re- 
 mained of a people that once covered the 
 whole earth. 
 
 God declared a day of recreation in hon- 
 or of Yotaportas; and the angels of hea- 
 ven had great rejoicing. And on the day 
 following, Yotaportas, with his hosts, de- 
 parted for Eriasa, in etherea. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXI. 
 
 Toyvraghah, Hagonte, Yulis and Ru- 
 fus, with their hosts, returned from their 
 voyage to the earth, and brought records 
 of the standing of mortals in all the tribes 
 and nations of the earth, and of their num- 
 bers, and their grades and generations, and 
 of the Faithists in all the different regions 
 of the earth, and of idolaters, and of all 
 matters pertaining to mortals, and these 
 records were filed in the libraries of hea- 
 en, and a copy of them sent to the ether- 
 ean regions in the roadway of Earth and 
 her heavens. 
 
 Of Faithists, there were thirty-one mill- 
 ion three hundred thousand. In Chine'- 
 ya, thirteen million seven hundred thou 
 sand; in Vind'yu three million three hun- 
 dred thousand; in western Arabin'ya, 
 six million two hundred thousand, and 
 in North Guatama, eight million one 
 hundred thousand. And of all the rest erf 
 the inhabitants of the earth, there were 
 eleven hundred million. Of these, upward 
 of ninety-seven per cent, were capable of 
 everlasting life. The Faithists of Chine'ya: 
 Though they maintained the rites and cer- 
 emonies of the ancients, lived not wholly 
 as a separate people, save in a few places. 
 But they were the head and front of learn- 
 ing and of teaching all the applied arts 
 and industries. Whilst the idolaters of Joss 
 and Te-in and Po were less learned. 
 
 God said of Chine'ya: Whoso shapeth 
 the education of a people will ultimately 
 found them in their own doctrines. The 
 Faithists will make these people a great 
 people. Nevertheless great wars are near 
 at hand here. The idolaters, being war- 
 riors, will suffer most; and the Faithists, 
 who practice peace, will greatly gain upon 
 them. 
 
 The Faithists of Vind'yu lived in fami- 
 ilies and small colonies; they practiced the 
 rites and ceremonies; nor were there any 
 laws against them, as in the olden times. 
 But because of the many languages in this 
 country, all peoples were afflicted. God 
 said: No people can advance much whilst 
 they have many languages. 
 
 The Faithists of western Arabin'ya, 
 who, for the most part, called themselves 
 Israelites, two branches still remained; 
 those who lived under the oral law, and 
 those who lived under the written law. 
 The latter were called Leviticans. The Le- 
 viticans were not scrupulous as regardeth 
 war and the preservation of their seed. 
 And in consequence of their sins they 
 brought great shame upon the Faithists in 
 general. And the Leviticans' examples 
 were evil, and they gained in numbers fast- 
 er than the Oralites. The Leviticans wor- 
 shipped the Great Spirit under the names, 
 Lord and God. As for the Oralites, so 
 called 'because their doctrines and teach- 
 ings were secret and only taught orally, 
 they were non-resistants, and owned no- 
 thing, giving all things to the rab'bah for 
 
454 
 
 CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 the public good. Their practice was love 
 and harmony; doing righteously in all 
 things, and trusting to Jehovih, Whom 
 they worshipped under the name E-O-lh. 
 All the prophets and seers were born of 
 the Oralists. And so great was the spirit- 
 ual power of the Oralites, that during all 
 these hundreds of years the Faithists, six 
 million, had lived without king or govern- 
 or, being a multitude of communities. 
 
 The Faithists of Guatama were little 
 learned, but were peaceful and industrious. 
 And they comprised all the inhabitants, ex- 
 cept the I'hins, in all the land. And they 
 also lived without kings or governors. 
 And every city was ruled over by a rab'- 
 bah, and a group of cities by a chief 
 rab'bah. And the tribes were made into 
 states, with chief rab'bahs as representa- 
 tives, and these states were united into a 
 great government called, The Algonquin. 
 And all the governments were made and 
 maintained for the benefit of tribes that 
 might suffer by famines or fevers. And 
 yet there was not amongst all these mill- 
 ions of people one tyrant or dictator. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXII. 
 
 And now came Earth and her heavens 
 into the a'ji'an forest of Aghanodis, and 
 the pressure was upon all sides of Earth's 
 vortex. And the heavenly kingdoms were 
 stirred up; and the nations of the earth 
 were in trial. 
 
 In the great city of Paradise, heavenly 
 seat of God, were the multitudes of angels, 
 the thousands of millions made to look up- 
 ward, outward, to know the Almighty. 
 As a'ji driveth the weak angels out of hea- 
 ven to seek a lower field, so doth it on 
 earth drive polluted nations to war and to 
 avarice and to death.. When the second 
 shower of a dozen years had fallen, mor- 
 tals in many nations on the earth rushed 
 into war. And even the Faithists began to 
 clamor for kings and standing armies, with 
 great captains and generals, to lead them on 
 to mortal dominion. The Israelites made 
 a mortal king, and by their behavior, said: 
 Rather man than Jehovih. Behold, we 
 will have the Lord with us to fight our 
 battles! And Baal, God of the idolaters, 
 heard and saw, and gloried in the course; 
 and he hastened to the scene with millions 
 of his angel slaves to inspire the Israelites 
 
 to glory in the Lord and God, whom he 
 assumed to be. And millions of the Israel- 
 ites fell beneath his power and became his 
 spirit slaves. The others, still steadfast 
 in the secret oral rites, remained true to 
 the secret name and Person, Jehovih, 
 Which Ashtaroth saw; and, for the first 
 time, after two thousand years' friendship 
 to Baal, she became jealous and filled with 
 vengeful wrath. She said: I see now 
 how this traitorous God hath planned to 
 beat me in the regions west of Heleste and 
 Uropa. By the flesh of my thighs am I 
 sworn, this thing shall not be! I will send 
 a hundred million warring angels down to 
 Babvlon, Tyre, Yedmon and Luce, and in- 
 spire their mortal kings to make war on 
 the westward cities, the strongholds of 
 Baal. And as to impoverished Egupt, I 
 will send thither mortal armies sufficient 
 to destroy everything in the land thereof. 
 Yea, I will send my legions also amongst 
 the Israelites, and inspire them that I, Ash- 
 taroth, am the only true Lord and true 
 God. I will divide them up as a broken 
 bundle of straw, and cast them to the four 
 winds of heaven. On the other hand, Baal 
 said: Because of my success, I know Ash- 
 taroth will be jealous and full of anger; 
 therefore, I will place a standing army be- 
 twixt her heavens and mine; and if she 
 but dare to molest me, I will send my mill- 
 ions against her heavens and despoil her 
 utterly, that she may be cast in hen! 
 
 CHAPTER XXXIII. 
 
 God, through his Holy Council, in Par- 
 adise, now decreed: 
 
 To the Faithists of Arabin'ya, Ebenee- 
 zer captain, with five million angels as a 
 protecting host. To the Faithists of 
 Chine'ya, Luiwitha, captain, with ten mill- 
 ion angels as a protecting host. To the 
 Faithists of Vind'yii, Li Chong, captain, 
 with eight million angels as a protecting 
 host. To the Faithists of Guatama, Manito 
 captain, with ten million angels as a pro- 
 tecting host. And to each of the captains 
 I give authority to draw additional armies 
 from the Lords who hold dominions in the 
 regions where they may be. 
 
 But it so happened that the lowest hea- 
 venly plateaux were also engaged in wars. 
 And in less than a hundred years of a'ji 
 many of the Lords were without kingdoms, 
 
CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 455 
 
 and, with a few chosen friends, became in- 
 voluntary wandering spirits, scattered 
 about in all the heavens of the earth, or 
 upon the earth. God saw this, and through 
 his messengers he said unto them: Having 
 lost your kingdoms, why will you lose 
 yourselves? Is it not better that ye fall to, 
 in the remaining kingdoms and by your 
 steadfastness help to maintain faith in Je- 
 hovih in the hearts of the less learned? 
 
 But satan gained access to their souls, 
 saying to each of them: Thou, who hast 
 been Lord of the hosts of heaven! Thou, 
 take a place like a common laborer! Thou 
 wouldst be laughed at! The non-resistant 
 policy is good enough in times and places 
 of peace. But now is war. And war can 
 only be overcome by war. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXIV. 
 
 And there came to Paradise, of Lords 
 and high officers, whose heavenly places 
 had fallen, different companies of tens and 
 twenties and even hundreds, from various 
 heavenly regions around the earth, and 
 having secured audience before God and 
 his Holy Council, they said: Since we 
 have been faithful in all things, and duti- 
 ful servants to Jehovih, what have we 
 gained? Our kingdoms and high places 
 have fallen to pieces from no fault of our 
 own. Yea, our angels have gone off into 
 anarchy. Where, then, is the justice of 
 Jehovih? 
 
 God said unto them: Of what profit is 
 discussion? If ye fail in one way, try an- 
 other; and in no case seek ye to justify 
 yourselves before Jehovih. He is Judge! 
 There are already hells that have been 
 standing for years. Is it not wiser that ye 
 join together, and go and deliver them? 
 Behold, Jehovih hath furnished us road- 
 ways beforehand; and His Voice came to 
 us prophesying that this darkness would 
 come upon us. And ye were advised, and 
 had sufficient time to provide for the worst. 
 Go ye forth, then, not complaining, but re- 
 joicing, and in Jehovih's name doing with 
 all your wisdom and strength, regardless 
 of favor. 
 
 Thus they came, group after group, for 
 years, before God; but were forever re- 
 buked by the Light of Jehovih, and they 
 went away, but not to work righteously, 
 but to sympathize with one another, and to 
 
 complain against God and against the 
 Holy Council of Paradise. In groups 
 they assembled in places of their own, and 
 began to philosophize on the ways of hea- 
 ven and earth. And every one was sworn 
 within himself to do no evil thing, but to 
 find some more respectable way of serving 
 Jehovih, than by going amongst the ignor- 
 ant and depraved. And they became habit- 
 uated in their meetings, in three places in 
 hada: in Haractu, over Vind'yu, in Eta- 
 shong, over Chine'ya, and in Hapsendi, 
 over Egupt. And these became like great 
 heavenly cities, because of the congregat- 
 ing of the angels of heaven, which con- 
 tinued for many years. 
 
 Finally, they resolved to organize each 
 one of these three places with a distinct 
 head, and to unite three heads as one con- 
 federacy; and the whole to be dedicated to 
 the service of Jehovih. Thus was founded 
 the Confederacy of the Holy Ghost. And 
 by acclamation, three angels were raised 
 to the three capitals, namely: Kabalac- 
 tes, of Haractu; Ennochissa, of Eta-shong; 
 and Looeamong, of Hapsendi. And each 
 and every one of the three took the title, 
 Son of the Holy Ghost. These three had 
 all been Lords, and were high in grade. 
 
 Ennochissa selected seven angels, and 
 gave them the rank of Lord, namely: 
 Haptu, Vazista, Mira, Erasigi, Adamon, 
 Amesh and Cacpa. 
 
 Kabalactes selected seven angels, and 
 gave them the rank of Lord, namely: Li 
 Wan, Amatar, Wenates, Howickam, Shong 
 Tsee, Massaqactus and Enniscabab. 
 
 Looeamong selected seven angels, and 
 gave them the rank of Lord, namely: Pe- 
 tubusetta, Aodi, Monulithens, Miriam, 
 Zestes and Abarothmes. 
 
 Such, then, was the established confed- 
 eracy, which was to play so great a part 
 in the history of heaven and earth. And it 
 differed from all other confederacies, be- 
 cause its members all professed to serve 
 Jehovih. And it required of all its people 
 an oath of allegiance to Jehovih, but un- 
 der the name, Holy Ghost. 
 
 And God admonished them, saying: 
 Though ye be wise in your own conceit, 
 yet shall ye fail. For, having denied His 
 Person, then will ye yourselves become the 
 Person in the understanding of the multi- 
 
456 
 
 CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 tude. And herein will ye, soon or late, 
 come to grief. But, nevertheless, the con- 
 federacy heeded not the words of God. 
 And God was grieved at heart. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXV. 
 
 God said: Behold, three conditions are 
 now within the heavens of the earth: An- 
 archy by the false Gods and their slaves, 
 the confederacy of the Holy Ghost, and 
 the Faithists in Jehovih. Now, therefore, 
 let my chief loo'is come before me, and 
 hear the decree of God. 
 
 When the chief loo'is had come before 
 the throne, God said unto him: Know, 
 then, O Thoanactus, thou shalt go down 
 to the earth, to the land of Chine'ya, and by 
 inspiration bring forth a birth, capable of 
 the Voice, but not capable of su'is. 
 And thou shalt accomplish this service so 
 that he shall be born into the mortal world 
 at the time a'ji ceaseth to fall upon that 
 land. And thou shalt provide him with 
 great learning and great adversity and 
 great experience withal. For he shall es- 
 tablish the fundamental doctrines of the 
 nations of Chine'ya. For his followers 
 shall become the most numerous and 
 peaceful inhabitants on the face of the 
 earth. 
 
 And as thou preparest for his birth by 
 thy mastery over the generations of mor- 
 tals, so shalt thou, through these, thy 
 hosts, raise up such as shall become disci- 
 ples. For however great a man thou 
 mightest raise up, it is wisdom to have also 
 born into the mortal world, at the same 
 era, such hosts of philosophers as shall 
 follow him, and indorse his doctrines. For 
 by this means the establishment of Jehovih 
 and His light amongst mortals shall extend 
 the whole length and breadth of that land. 
 
 Thoanactus said: Jehovih's will and 
 thine be done. This is a most welcome la- 
 bor, O God. And I know, the voice of my 
 hosts are with me. 
 
 God said: In Jehovih's name, thee I 
 crown, Chief of the Hosts of Loo'is, for 
 the land of Chine'ya, for the birth of an 
 heir for the Voice of the Great Spirit. 
 
 Thoanactus was then crowned, and his 
 hosts were provided with badges by God, 
 for they were filed before the throne, and 
 hosts saluted, and departed with due cere- 
 
 mony. Such, then, was God's labor for 
 having born into the mortal world, after 
 many generations, one who was called 
 Ka'yu. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXVI. 
 
 Again God called before his throne a 
 million loo'is, and appointed Etchessa 
 chief over them, saying: Thou, O Etches- 
 sa, shalt go down to the earth, to the land 
 of Vind'yu, taking these hosts with thee. 
 And thou shalt establish a heavenly place, 
 which shall be thy headquarters. Behold. 
 I have given thee many generations in 
 which to bring forth a mortal heir capable 
 of the Voice. Survey thou, then, the gen- 
 erations of Faithists in that land. 
 
 He, whom thou shalt bring forth for 
 this purpose, shall be of some royal fam- 
 ily, a prince of high estate. I shall prove 
 through him, that for love of righteousness, 
 and to serve Jehovih, he will forsake his 
 kingdom and family and friends, and all 
 earthly things and desires, and make him- 
 self as a poor man, dwelling with the poor, 
 laboring with them, teaching them, and in- 
 structing them. For, because of the idola- 
 tries amongst these people they are 
 bound in caste; and he, whom I will 
 teach through, shall prove unto the 
 world that the service of Jehovih requireth 
 of all men, that Jehovih shall stand upper- 
 most, even above kind and caste. In the 
 example of which willing sacrifice, man 
 shall be taught, that all the evils of the 
 earth can be overcome. 
 
 And thou shalt provide unto this man 
 many disciples, and roadways for him to 
 travel, and places to preach; and provide 
 followers unto him, to go about with him. 
 For without these, his preaching and prac- 
 tice would be of little avail. See to it, 
 then, that there may be born in the world 
 a sufficient number, to be disciples and fol- 
 lowers of his doctrines, that he may be a 
 power in the world for re-establishing the 
 Faithists in the Great Spirit. And thou 
 shalt so provide these births, that they will 
 be of the same period of time. 
 
 Etchessa said: In Jehovih's name I am 
 thy servant, with rejoicing. And I answer 
 thee also for these my hosts, that this is a 
 joy unto them, for Jehovih's glory. 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 457 
 
 God said: To which end I crown thee, 
 Chief of Loo'is, for the land of Vind'yii! 
 And God crowned Etchessa; and he gave 
 badges to the other loo'is. And thereafter 
 Etchessa and his hosts filed past the throne 
 of God, duly saluting, and they also depart- 
 ed, going to the earth, to the land of Vind'- 
 yu. Thus were the loo'is empowered of 
 God, to bring into the world the heir, Sa- 
 kaya. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXVII. 
 
 Hamonastas, one of the chief marshals 
 of God, and for the heavenly city of Para- 
 dise, came before the throne, duly saluting, 
 and saying: O God, Son of Jehovih, I 
 would speak before thee! God said: Speak 
 thou, my son. 
 
 Hamonastas said: There standeth with- 
 out the city of Paradise, beyond the pil- 
 lars of fire, and in company with thy high- 
 raised captains, one Nu-ghan, delivered 
 from one of the hells of Hassa, over Egupt, 
 and he crieth out continually: O God, Son 
 of Jehovih! Deliver me! Deliver thou 
 me! O Moses! Moses! Moses! 
 
 He is distracted, continually using the 
 same words over and over, without ceas- 
 ing. Now, behold, the nurses and physi- 
 cians have tried all remedies they can in- 
 vent, but failed utterly to break the spell 
 upon him. For seventy days they have la- 
 bored, and, as a last resort, they have 
 brought him hither, that they might learn 
 from thee. 
 
 God said: Nu-ghan! Is this not one of 
 the Pharaohs, who took up arms against 
 the Faithists of Egupt? Return thou, Ha- 
 monastas, to the keepers of this man, and 
 cause him to be blindfolded, that he may 
 endure the light of the throne; after which 
 thou and his keepers shall bring him before 
 me. 
 
 Hamonastas saluted and departed, and 
 after a time, returned with the keepers and 
 with Nu-ghan, who was crying out unceas- 
 ingly. And now, when he was before the 
 throne of God, God said to him: Behold 
 me, I am God, Son of Jehovih; what 
 wouldst thou? 
 
 But the man heeded not what God said, 
 but kept crying out as before. Whereupon 
 God said unto the keepers: Remove ye 
 the blinds a little, that the light may come 
 upon him. And they removed the blinds 
 
 a little; but, behold, the light made him 
 more distracted than before. And when 
 God saw his deplorable suffering, he in- 
 quired of his keepers, how long the man 
 had been in hell, and they said: Seventy 
 and six years, and in a knot, three years! 
 
 God said: I know that this is Phara- 
 oh, who persecuted the Faithists. Take him 
 again without the walls, and there retain 
 him. I will send one of my swift messen- 
 gers to Lika, in etherea, who knoweth the 
 abiding place of Moses. Perhaps Moses 
 put a curse upon him! If so, only Moses 
 can deliver him. 
 
 And the keepers took the spirit, Nu- 
 ghan, without the city, as commanded by 
 God. And God sent Haeroponitis, sister 
 of Raban, a swift messenger, in an arrow- 
 ship of fire, to the etherean worlds, to Gus- 
 sawanitcha, to Lika's sojourning place at 
 that time, commanding her to lay the mat- 
 ter before the Orian Chief, Lika. 
 
 Haeroponitis, upon her return to the 
 lower heavens, reported: I came before Je- 
 hovih's throne, whereon sat Lika, and I 
 told him the story of Nu-ghan. Where- 
 upon Lika, Son of Jehovih, said: Let my 
 reporters of destinations go find Moses; 
 and if it be that Moses put a judgment on 
 Nu-ghan, then must Moses return to the 
 lower heavens, and deliver him. The jus- 
 tice of Jehovih reacheth to all time and 
 place. 
 
 Whereupon I saluted before the throne 
 of Jehovih, and in company with the re- 
 porters of destinations, started forth again 
 in the etherean realms, and after passing 
 through seven worlds, and upward of three 
 hundred Nirvanian kingdoms, we entered 
 the plains of Sapeas, where are situated 
 the colleges and schools of Embassies, be- 
 longing to the Ghiturpsan board of Ritivi- 
 us. And here we found Moses! 
 
 Moses no sooner looked upon us, hav- 
 ing been told that he was inquired after, 
 than he prophesied the cause. He said: 
 Alas me! Because thou hast come for me, 
 thou hast awakened in me that which slept 
 all these hundreds of years. Yea, it is true, 
 I put a curse upon Pharaoh; for I said 
 unto him: Thou shalt yet call upon me to 
 deliver thee out of torments. 
 
 Instead of this, I should have forgiven 
 him. O Jehovih! I have sinned before 
 Thee! And Thou hast searched me out 
 after all these years, and brought the mat- 
 
458 
 
 CYCLE OF L1KA 
 
 ter home to me. Thou art just, O Thou 
 Almighty! In Thy name and by Thy wis- 
 dom and power will I return to the lower 
 heavens, and take in charge the man and 
 people I adjudged! 
 
 And Moses wept; and he gave command 
 to the builders to provide him at once with 
 a suitable boat of great fleetness. And then 
 Moses procured thirty thousand volunteers 
 to go with him. And when all things were 
 in readiness, Moses took leave of his com- 
 panions, and he and his hosts entered his 
 fire-boat, and presently our two vessels 
 were under way, as if in a race, for the red 
 star, Earth. And, after some days, we ar- 
 rived in the heavens of Earth, even at the 
 city of Paradise, the abiding place of God. 
 
 When it was known in Paradise, that 
 Moses was coming, great joy was mani- 
 fested, for God and the Holy Eleven and 
 the Holy Council, all desired to see Moses. 
 And God commanded the full board of 
 marshals and also the musicians to go with- 
 out the capital, and meet Moses, and es- 
 cort him before the throne. And they ac- 
 complished these things; and Moses came 
 before the throne of God, saluting in the 
 sign, Judgment of Time! And God an- 
 swered him under the sign, Thy Labor is 
 our Joy and Glory! 
 
 And God said: In Jehovih's name, O 
 Moses, come thou, and honor my throne. 
 
 And Moses went up, and sat on the 
 throne, on the right hand of God. And 
 Moses said unto the Holy Council and to 
 the Holy Eleven: Your God shall be my 
 God. In his love and dominion am I cast 
 by Jehovih's will, to deliver those that have 
 suffered from me and my words. 
 
 God said: Shall we not have a day of 
 recreation first? Moses said: Nay; till I 
 have delivered Nu-ghan, there can be no 
 peace. Send, therefore, thy marshals to 
 the keepers of this man, and bring him be- 
 fore the throne. 
 
 And now again, after awhile, Nu-ghan 
 was brought in, all muffled up, to keep the 
 light from hurting him. And he was still 
 crying out: O God, Son of Jehovih! O 
 Moses! Moses! Moses! 
 
 And when Moses beheld this, he was 
 well nigh overcome by the pitiful scene. 
 And Moses brushed away his tears, and rose 
 up, raising his hands to Jehovih, saying: 
 Light of Thy Light, O Jehovih! Power of 
 
 Thy Power, O Jehovih! Deliver Thou 
 him, whom I accursed! Put his griefs and 
 sonows upon me, that hath sinned against 
 him! 
 
 A mantle of yellow light, cloud-like, 
 descended upon Moses, as he stood trans- 
 fixed before Jehovih. All the place was 
 still as death! The blinds and muffles on 
 Nu-ghan fell off, and he stood silent and 
 motionless, gazing with fixed awe upon the 
 holy scene, and upon Moses on the throne 
 of God! 
 
 The spirit of Jehovih moved upon the 
 holy place, and the musicians felt the pow- 
 er. It was the light of one who was migh- 
 ty, from the etherean worlds! Gently, 
 then, the music of ten thousand voices fell 
 upon the holy audience. First mild, as if 
 far off, then louder and louder, as if com- 
 ing near, till soon the words of the an- 
 them proclaimed Jehovih's praise. 
 
 Nu-ghan turned not his eyes from the 
 glory of Moses and the etherean mantle, 
 for he knew Moses, even as it were but 
 yesterday they parted in Egupt, on the 
 earth. Slowly, now, Moses lowered his 
 upstretched arms, and his hands were bril- 
 liant, like yellow fire. And Moses said: 
 solemnly: All praise to Thee, Jehovih! 
 Thou art just, Thou Almighty Creator! 
 
 Nu-ghan added: For through Him is 
 all deliverance, worlds without end. In 
 Thy praise will I sing forever, O Jehovih. 
 Thou, Most High God of Moses, my De- 
 liverer! Make me strong, O Jehovih, that 
 I can look upon him, whom I persecuted 
 and abused. 
 
 Then Moses looked upon Nu-ghan, and 
 said: These things had to be. Thou wert 
 the last of the pyramidal age of man, and 
 I the first founder of the migration of the 
 righteous. All things are done by Jehovih, 
 in His own way and time. 
 
 As, by my curse upon thee and thy peo- 
 ple, have I been bound to come back to de- 
 liver thee and them; so, by thy curse 
 against Israel, shalt thou now return down 
 to earth, and labor to raise up Israel. For 
 Israel hath fallen from communities, and 
 hath taken to kings, after the manner of 
 the heathen and the idolater. Her people 
 are divided and broken Up, and many of 
 them have become worshippers of the false 
 Gods, Baal and Ashtaroth. Yea, they are 
 forgetful of my commandments of peace 
 
CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 459 
 
 
 and love, and have taken to war and to 
 earthly aggrandizement. 
 
 And thou shalt take with thee ten 
 thousand angels of the exalted grades, and 
 go down to the earth, to the habitations of 
 the Israelites; and, by inspiration, thou and 
 thy hosts shall select and inspire such of 
 the Israelites as are within reach of inspira- 
 tion, and thou shalt take them away from 
 all other of their people, and from the hea- 
 then and idolatrous tribes. And thOu and 
 thy hosts shall abide with these mortals, 
 re-establishing them in peace and non-re- 
 sistance, after the manner of the doctrines 
 in the es'sean worlds. And thou shalt call 
 them, Es'eans, that they may be distin- 
 guished from all other peoples. 
 
 Nu-ghan said: Thy decree is most just, 
 
 Moses, and I know of a truth thy words 
 are Jehovih's. I pray thee, how long shall 
 this labor last? 
 
 Moses said: Some hundreds of years! 
 Until thou hast raised a light sufficient un- 
 to Jehovih, that peace and love and the 
 doctrine of good for evil be again re-es- 
 tablished from the blood of the Israelites. 
 And when thou hast perfected the genera- 
 tions of the Es'eans, thou shalt have sent to 
 thee from the throne of God certain loo'is, 
 and they will labor with thee until an Is- 
 raelite is born into the mortal world capa- 
 ble of the Father's Voice. 
 
 Nu-ghan said: Hear me now in my 
 plea, O Moses, thou, Son of the Most 
 High: When I died and entered heaven, 
 
 1 found my kingdom in heaven waiting 
 for me. And they were miserable, being 
 beggars, slaves and idiots, because of the 
 slavery I had put upon them in the earth- 
 life. And I could not escape them, or put 
 them aside. If I went away objectively, 
 then subjectively I remembered them, and 
 was drawn back to them. Yea, I was like 
 a young colt that first being haltered, pull- 
 eth away, but faileth; then pulleth again, 
 and faileth, and so on, until he findeth he 
 cannot escape, then tamely submits, even 
 so was I bound to my kingdom, and oblig- 
 ed in the end to yield and become a slave 
 unto them, to provide for them. For I 
 had so despoiled them of their talents, they 
 were as helpless as infants; and many of 
 them wicked in the extreme. 
 
 Nevertheless, I accepted that which I 
 could not escape; I toiled with them hun- 
 dreds of years, restoring them as well as I 
 could. And in time a ray of happiness 
 came to me, in the hope that in hundreds 
 of years to come I should find my way out. 
 But, alas! darkness came upon my already 
 dark heaven. My evil ones, such as I had 
 slaughtered on earth, came upon me for 
 vengeance' sake. Anarchy overflooded 
 me and my people. They became very 
 demons of madness, and they seized me, 
 and bound me, and bruised me and suffo- 
 cated me with horrid smells. Millions of 
 them! And their curses pierced me like 
 poisoned arrows. Long I fought them; 
 and I cried out unto thee and to Jehovih! 
 But, alas! I was in hell. None could hear 
 my prayers. For days and months and 
 years I held out, but only to experience 
 new and more terrible horrors! How long 
 this woe was upon me, I know not. I only 
 remember, that my soul sickened within 
 me; and I felt a sinking and a fainting, 
 like an endless death, that could not extin- 
 guish me. To me it seemed ten thousand 
 ages! 
 
 Suddenly I find myself here! Distract- 
 ed before thee, thou holy Son of the Great 
 Spirit! Whence came I? What hath oc- 
 curred? Or is this but a spell of delirious 
 dream? And will I relapse again into yon- 
 der terrible nightmare of horrors? How 
 can I go hence, that mine old kingdom 
 come not upon me? Do they not wait 
 hereabout somewhere? To seize me again, 
 for renewed torments? O teach thou me, 
 Moses! How can I fulfill thy righteous 
 judgment? And not be entrapped again, 
 and, perhaps, forever! 
 
 Moses said: I will give thee a new 
 name, and I will clothe thee in garments 
 of mine own making, so they will rather 
 flee from thee, than come to thee. 
 
 And Moses gathered up of the yellow 
 cloud-like mantle, and made a mantle, and 
 clothed Nu-ghan; and he named him, II- 
 laes, signifying, Servant of Light. And af- 
 ter that, he was provided with ten thou- 
 sand co-laborers, assisted by Gafonaya, and 
 sent back to the earth, on his mission. 
 And God appointed one hundred messen- 
 gers unto Illaes, that word might be 
 transmitted every month to Paradise. 
 
460 
 
 CYCLE OF L1KA 
 
 CHAPTER XXXVIII. 
 
 God proclaimed a day of recreation in 
 Paradise, that the inhabitants might meet 
 Moses and his hosts, and rejoice therewith. 
 And great was that day in Paradise. On 
 the following day, Moses departed for the 
 Eguptian people, who had been in hell with 
 Nu-ghan, going to the place of deliverance. 
 And there were of these spirits eleven mil- 
 lion four hundred thousand. And Moses 
 conferred with the inspectors as to places, 
 and having decided on a convenient re- 
 gion, Elaban, he ordered their removal 
 thither. And Moses went with them to El- 
 aban, an isolated region on the Aratesaian 
 plateau, and remained with them one hun- 
 dred and twelve days, establishing them 
 with nurseries, hospitals and factories; and 
 he appointed officers for them, to every 
 group and series, going amongst them in 
 person and ministering to tens of thou- 
 sands of them, and providing them places 
 •of worship. 
 
 After that, Moses appointed Salesmon 
 over them. Thereafter, Moses departed, 
 and returned to Paradise, where he remain- 
 ed two days more, and then took leave, 
 and departed for his own heavenly place 
 in Nirvania. But ere he departed, he said: 
 When the a'ji'an forest is past and gone, 
 and it be Jehovih's will, I shall return 
 again to look after my hosts. 
 
 And now was God's attention directed 
 "to the Faithists of western Arabin'ya, 
 where the God Baal had gained ac- 
 cess and power; having affiliated with 
 one Dagon, a false God, located in those 
 regions, who maintained six earthly oracle- 
 houses and a small heavenly kingdom of 
 bis own. And it came to pass, that the 
 Hebrews were a divided people. A small 
 minority of them still worshipped Jehovih, 
 having colleges of prophecy and places of 
 learning. But the great majority of them 
 were worshippers of the Lord and God, be- 
 lieving the Great Spirit was only a large 
 man in heaven, after the manner of Baal, 
 or Dagon, or Ashtaroth, or any other God! 
 God said of them: Though they pre- 
 tend to be of many kinds, I see but two: 
 Those who worship the Ever Present, Je- 
 hovih; and those who are drifting into 
 heathenism. Mine eyes behold the true 
 Faithists with colleges and with books of 
 learning; but, as for the others, they are 
 
 becoming consulters of the oracles, the 
 same as the heathens. How can they re- 
 main a united people? The Gods of one 
 city and temple teach one doctrine, and the 
 Gods of another place teach another doc- 
 trine. 
 
 God had previously sent to Ebeneezer 
 one Jerub, with ten thousand assistant an- 
 gel strategists, to be with the Faithists. 
 Jerub now asked for another ten thousand, 
 and God sent them to him. And God said 
 unto Jerub: 
 
 A war will* presently result between 
 Baal, Ashtaroth, Dagon and Haughak; 
 and these Gods will not only war in hea- 
 ven, but they will carry their battles down 
 to mortals. And the Israelites will not 
 only forsake their ancient doctrine of 
 peace, but will become great warriors, both 
 against other nations and peoples, and 
 against one another. 
 
 Take thou heed, O Jerub, and whilst 
 Baal and Ashtaroth are in conflict and neg- 
 lectful of the temples and oracles, possess 
 thou them. Better is it, that these false 
 Gods win unto themselves as dutiful sub- 
 jects, five angels, than one mortal. Guard 
 thou well all the colleges of prophecy 
 against the emissaries of these false Gods. 
 And see to it, that the worshippers of Je- 
 hovih have born unto themselves a goodly 
 number of prophets. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXIX. 
 
 There came to Paradise, Gods' heavenly 
 place, one Taenas, a messenger from the 
 chiefs of the so-called Holy Confederacy. 
 God's chief marshal conducted him before 
 God, and, being commanded to speak, he 
 said: Greeting to thee, O God. In behalf 
 of the Three Sons of the Holy Ghost I 
 come before thee to proclaim their words. 
 I have been instructed by them, what to 
 say, and I declare unto thee, O God, my 
 words are their words. 
 
 First, that thou mayest hear us before 
 we are adjudged; second, as thou claimest 
 liberty to think and to speak for thyself, 
 so do we all. And wherein error cometh 
 of our proceedings, it is our own matter, 
 and not thine. As thou sayest: Behold 
 the All Person, so do not we say; but we 
 say: Behold the all expanse; it is but a 
 shadow, a ghost. And for convenience' 
 sake, we name it, Holy Ghost. Is not this 
 
CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 461 
 
 our privilege? Who can deny us? Hath 
 one man rightful dominion over another? 
 Or one captain, or one God? 
 
 God said: Proceed. 
 
 Taenas said: And if we be right, then 
 shall we of our own selves judge what we 
 will do. But if thou be right, and. there 
 be an All Person, thou art then His servant 
 to do His will. Are these points true? 
 
 God said: It seemeth so. 
 
 Taenas said: And liberty to both sides? 
 
 God said: Yea. 
 
 Taenas said: When I was a child, I 
 was helped to walk; but now I am strong, 
 I walk alone. Wherein then shall not my 
 judgment also walk alone? 
 
 God said: Proceed thou, and I will 
 speak afterward. 
 
 Taenas said: We have seen in ages 
 past, that peace hath been forever pro- 
 claimed by the followers of Jehovih; and 
 that both on earth and in heaven such peo- 
 ple become the sufferers and victims of ty- 
 rants of earth and of false Gods in heaven. 
 We propose war, in the name of the Holy 
 Ghost, both on earth and in heaven. We 
 can have no war with thee or thy people, 
 on earth, or in heaven; for thou and thy 
 people, angels and mortals, are all peace, 
 warring not. Our wars can be only with 
 warriors. I put the matter thus: Thou 
 hast a virgin daughter, and a villain as- 
 sail her; thy doctrine is, to rush in and 
 take thy daughter away from him; our doc- 
 trine is, to beat him away from her. 
 
 We behold evil Gods and evil spirits, 
 assailing virtuous people on earth and m 
 heaven. We propose to fight them to de- 
 struction, for righteousness' sake. More 
 then are we to thy favor, O God, than 
 against thee. We dip our hands in blood, 
 for sake of peace and virtue, for sake of 
 liberty and knowledge. We shall say to 
 the man of earth: Thou shalt become 
 learned! To the es'yan in heaven: Thou 
 shalt not return to mortals, but remain in 
 thy place, and become learned and virtu- 
 ous. For which reason we come to thee, 
 O God, that thou mayest know our founda- 
 tion. 
 
 God said: Who, then, sayest thou, 
 men and angels shall worship? 
 
 Taenas said: In this, we command them 
 not. But we give them liberty to worship 
 whomsoever they will. 
 
 God said: Thou hast said: Our doc- 
 trine is, to beat the villain away from the 
 virgin; but what wilt thou, by thy example, 
 teach? 
 
 Taenas answered: That an assailant 
 deserveth punishment. 
 
 God said: And wilt thou say to the 
 peaceful and virtuous: Take up arms, 
 give your enemies torments? 
 Taenas answered: Yea, verily. 
 God said: And by what authority, if 
 they inquire of thee? Taenas said: By au- 
 thority of the Holy Ghost, and the Confed- 
 eracy, and by the Son, that is, each and ev- 
 ery Lord of the Confederacy. For we shall 
 teach mortals and angels that all things are 
 by law; and the word, law, shall take the 
 place of the term, Great Spirit, or Jehovih. 
 God said: Hear me, then, O Taenas, 
 and in love bear my words to thy so-called 
 Triune Confederacy, and to the high lead- 
 ers, saying to them, thus saith God of Par- 
 adise, Son of Jehovih, according to the 
 light of this throne: 
 
 Ye shall triumph for a long season on 
 earth and in heaven; but not in the way 
 ye suppose. For ye will be forced to pro- 
 vide a worshipful head for mortals and an- 
 gels. And it will come to pass, your three 
 heavenly places will become known on 
 earth and in heaven as the Triune Gods, or 
 Trinity! And the people will worship an 
 imaginary figure of three parts, Father, Son 
 and Holy Ghost. And this will become 
 their idol; and he will be accredited with 
 love, anger, jealousy and favoritism, war 
 and destruction. 
 
 Because ye say: Give punishment to 
 the wicked, ye open the door of all evil. 
 For he, who hath a quarrel with his neigh- 
 bor, will accuse him as deserving punish- 
 ment. They, that are in darkness, and be- 
 ing mighty, will fall upon the weak, and 
 slay them. A quarrel will ensue in your 
 three heavenly kingdoms, and ye will be- 
 come as three false Gods. And since ye 
 profess not the All Person, each of ye 
 three Gods will be forced to announce 
 himself as such. For the rule applieth to 
 all men and to all angels, that they, who 
 deny an All Highest Person in the Crea- 
 tor, become establishers of idolatry unto 
 themselves. 
 
 Thou hast said: We shall leave mor- 
 tals and angels to worship whom they will. 
 
462 
 
 CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 Why, then, is it not well to worship Baal? 
 And Dagon? And Ashtaroth? And yet, 
 these Gods make slaves of their subjects, 
 that worship them. 
 
 Taenas said: Nay, they are evil Gods. 
 We will deliver their slaves into freedom. 
 
 God said: Who is master, and who is 
 slave? Either on earth, or in heaven? Why 
 not abolish your Triune Confederacy, lest 
 ye rule over others? And you profess lib- 
 erty, why not practice it? Because ye pro- 
 claim liberty as your chief object, ye will 
 entice the unlearned and the idle and lazy, 
 for all these claim their weaknesses as the 
 boon of liberty. 
 
 It shall come to pass, in the far-distant 
 future, your kingdoms will be made up of 
 the lowest grades. And they will pull you 
 all down from your present high resolves; 
 and ye will become tyrants and evil Gods 
 yourselves, and meet the fate of all your 
 predecessors. 
 
 Earth and her heavens thereof were 
 given into my keeping, for the resurrection 
 of all the inhabitants; but I have neither 
 commission nor desire to accomplish do- 
 minion by violence. As ye have with- 
 drawn from my kingdoms, it is an act of 
 your own. Even mine own grief at your 
 secession showeth me, how short I am H 
 comprehending Jehovih's ways. For I de- 
 clare unto thee, O Taenas, and through 
 thee to thy chiefs, that though your course 
 seemeth evil in my sight, yet will it be 
 proven in the distant future, that Jehovih 
 will appropriate your labors to an ulti- 
 mate good. 
 
 Go thou, therefore, with my words to 
 the chiefs of the Triunes: I part with you 
 all, as a father parteth with a son who go- 
 eth into a consuming fire. 
 
 Taenas said: In reverence to thee, O 
 God, I go to them, that pity thee for thy 
 too peaceful ways. 
 
 Thereupon, Taenas saluted in reverence, 
 and departed, going his way. 
 
 CHAPTER XL. 
 
 God called up Erastes, chief of messen- 
 gers, and he said unto him: Thou hast 
 heard the words of thy God and of Taenas. 
 Take therefore thirty thousand and four 
 hundred messengers, that is, one for each 
 and all of my remaining kingdoms, and go 
 and proclaim the same unto them, that 
 
 they, having due notice, may manage their 
 affairs with wisdom and foresight. 
 
 Erastes said: Jehovih's will and thine 
 be done! And he saluted and withdrew, 
 going to the place of the messengers, and 
 choosing his hosts, instructed them in 
 regard to the message. And he gave to 
 each of them power to choose their officers, 
 and to provide their own vessels of travel. 
 And in not many days thereafter, they all 
 departed. 
 
 Now it came to pass, that the following 
 kingdoms soon fell to pieces, and drifted 
 into the Triune Confederacy, namely: Sho'- 
 e'gan, and her twenty-eight sub-kingdoms, 
 all in the hadan regions; Ghi'e'wan, and 
 her forty-four heavenly hadan kingdoms; 
 Haotus, with seven heavenly hadan king- 
 doms, and five sub-kingdoms; Tuwahtal, 
 and thirty kingdoms in the first resurrec- 
 tion in the plateau of Theovrahkistan; Liv- 
 ragga, and seventy-one heavenly sub-king- 
 doms, of which thirty-eight were ready to 
 enter the second resurrection; Jahkin and 
 Mouru, with ninety-seven heavenly hadan 
 kingdoms, of which eighty-seven were pro- 
 moted to the second resurrection; Ganzoe, 
 with four hundred hadan kingdoms, of 
 which many were below the second resur- 
 rection; Hapsu, with four heavenly king- 
 doms of seventy million angels in the sec- 
 ond resurrection; Iturba, with twelve hea- 
 venly kingdoms of one hundred and four 
 million angels in the second resurrection, 
 half of whom were as high as fifty in' the 
 grades; Wantawacha, with thirty heavenly 
 kingdoms, with three hundred million an- 
 gels in the second resurrection, three- 
 fourths of whom were upward of grade 
 fifty. Of the seven lower kingdoms of 
 the second plateaux, there were eight hun- 
 dred million angels of the first resurrection, 
 who migrated from their provinces to the 
 Triune regions, Amesha; and they destroy- 
 ed the road behind them. 
 
 When God saw the great secession of 
 his heavenly kingdoms, and their allegiance 
 to the Triunes, his soul was filled with sor- 
 row. And the Voice of Jehovih came to 
 him, saying: 
 
 Why takest thou sorrow to thy soul 
 for these things? Shall a God grieve, be- 
 cause his burden is made lighter? Behold, 
 in this day and hour the Gods and Lords 
 of the Triune are rejoicing with great joy, 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 463 
 
 "because of these accessions. Yea, they per- 
 ceive not, what a load they are taking on 
 their shoulders. But thou shalt send agents 
 amongst the Triunes, especially into their 
 capitals and their chief kingdoms. 
 
 So, God appointed many agents, differ- 
 ent from messengers, for they were to be 
 under the command of none but God. God 
 said unto them: Ye shall go to the places 
 I appoint unto each one of you, as travel- 
 ers and sojourners in your own way, and 
 observe the doings of the Triunes, especial- 
 ly the chiefs and leaders, Lords and Gods, 
 and their teaching and government, and in 
 your own good time depart out of the place 
 and return hither and inform my Holy 
 Council and my Holy Eleven. 
 
 And the agents went forth as command- 
 ed. 
 
 CHAPTER XLI. 
 
 The three heavenly kingdoms, Haractu, 
 Eta-shong and Hapsendi, of the Triunes, 
 were independent, but allianced for offence 
 and defence against the evil Gods, Baal, 
 Dagon, Shulleth, Ashtaroth and others, 
 whose angel subjects were kept in slavery, 
 and for evil purposes. Now, therefore, the 
 Triunes jointly declared war, to the end 
 that peace might be secured in these hea- 
 vens. 
 
 Nevertheless, each of the Triunes had 
 charge of his own heavens and over such 
 part of the earth as was covered by his 
 heavens. For they had divided up and ap- 
 propriated both, the earth and the heavens, 
 into three parts, one to each of them. 
 
 A triangular war was going on in hada 
 and on earth betwixt the angel armies of 
 Baal, Dagon and Ashtaroth, in which ten 
 thousand million angels were engaged un- 
 der them. Looeamong declared war against 
 the whole of them, and impressed into his 
 service eight thousand million angel war- 
 riors. 
 
 Ashtaroth, the most vengeful Goddess, 
 had previously sent hundreds of millions of 
 her warring angels down to the apostate 
 Jews, to inspire them to wars and cruel- 
 ties on one another, hoping to exterminate 
 them, lest they become Baal's subjects. 
 And yet other millions of warring angels 
 had she sent to the Par'si'e'an cities, and to 
 the Eguptian cities, Daskrath, Babylon 
 -and Gonassah and Tyre and Romaxain 
 
 and to the kings and queens of many other 
 great cities, to inspire them to send forth 
 armies to destroy, not only the worship- 
 pers of Jehovih, but all people that worship- 
 ped Baal, or Dagon, or any other God. 
 
 Baal, on the other hand, had sent hun- 
 dreds of millions of his warring angels 
 down to the earth, to Heleste and the west 
 regions, and to the Israelites as well, in- 
 spiring mortals to war against the east 
 kingdoms, especially Babylon and Das- 
 krath, two mighty cities in the dominions 
 of the Goddess Ashtaroth. 
 
 And the armies of the mortals were 
 moved forth by the armies of angels, whom 
 they saw not; and war raged east and west 
 and north and south. 
 
 Looeamong, the Triune, said: I will 
 spoil them both. I will send an army of 
 warriors down to the middle kingdoms, to 
 the great tyrant, Cyrus. I will possess the 
 oracles and direct Cyrus to march against 
 Par'si'e. He shall make an alliance with 
 the Argos'yans. Hatchesan and Karsoka 
 shall be my countries. And the cities of 
 Hernia and Babylon and Nine'vah and Gas- 
 sakad and Hannadan and Saluem shall bow 
 down no more to Baal and Ashtaroth, for- 
 ever. 
 
 Belus shall be mine, and the cities and 
 temples of Hina and Maroth and Hovan 
 and Torres and Delfi; and the inhabitants 
 of Phires and Sirhak and Macedon and- 
 Thues, and the great oracle-houses of Myr- 
 silus and Myrsus and Gyges and Can- 
 dawles and Haerkus and Simon and Gam- 
 ma and Fabiyan and Sulus and Craz'ya 
 and Wakadya and P'hrid and Gemnae and 
 Ma'zan and R'hodae. By force will I pos- 
 sess them; yea, by force drive hence all 
 other angels and Gods. And my warrior 
 angels shall possess these temples, so that 
 whoso cometh to consult the Gods shall 
 receive mine own answers. I will drive 
 mortals to war in mine own way, and to 
 whatever place I determine to subdue or 
 destroy. 
 
 Equally menacing were the boasts of 
 the false Goddess Ashtaroth; she had said: 
 Whether I despoil heaven and earth, I 
 care not. If I cannot possess them, I will 
 destroy them, so that no God shall possess 
 them. Into festering knots and hells will I 
 cast tens of thousands of millions of angels, 
 in case I do not succeed in winning all. 
 
464 
 
 CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 I will send millions of warring angels 
 down to Xerxes, the Par'si'e'an king, and 
 to his kingdom, and they shall obsess ev- 
 ery man, woman and child to desperate 
 madness against the Argos'yans and the 
 middle and west nations. I will lead Xer- 
 xes forth with the mightiest army that has 
 ever been on the earth. And they shall de- 
 spoil all regions, whithersoever they march. 
 For I will make Xerxes and all the Par'- 
 si'e'ans believe, they are doing these things 
 for their own prosperity and glory, and for 
 despoiling their own enemies. 
 
 And, after Xerxes hath despoiled and 
 conquered all the earth regions, Baal and 
 all other Gods shall be driven away from 
 the oracles and temples. Xerxes shall is- 
 sue a decree, abolishing all other Gods but 
 me, Ashtaroth. And, when I am thus well 
 anchored on the earth, I will turn my le- 
 gions against this new upstart God, the 
 Triune, Looeamong. And I will cast him 
 into a hell, from which he shall not escape 
 forever! 
 
 So, Ashtaroth concentrated her hea- 
 venly warriors into this great and desper- 
 ate work. For she had been maturing her 
 plans, even before Xerxes came to the 
 throne of Par'si'e. And, since, in those 
 days, the kings and rich men in all those 
 countries consulted the oracles, in refer- 
 ence to all important undertakings, it was 
 1 not a difficult feat for Ashtaroth to obsess 
 the millions of .Par'si'e'ans to carry out 
 her project. 
 
 Accordingly, Ashtaroth commanded her 
 marshals to summon two thousand million 
 angel warriors, men and women, for the 
 work in hand. And when they came to 
 Neabissa, a heavenly region to the north, 
 over the earth-mountains Afflo'yagga, she 
 caused Mateus, her chief orator, to prepare 
 a speech in her behalf, and have it declaim- 
 ed before the angel warriors. Mateus, a 
 one-time Lord to Osiris, nine hundred 
 years previous, now made the speech, and 
 this is a synopsis: 
 
 I, Goddess of all the heavens and of the 
 whole earth. Behold me, Ashtaroth! The 
 earth and her heavens are mine, saith Ash- 
 taroth! I clove the sun in twain; for it is 
 mine. I clove the pieces again; for they 
 were mine. From these I made stars and 
 the moon. But the great earth I made as 
 my foot-stool; for it was mine, and ever 
 
 shall be. I peopled it over with all the liv- 
 ing; they were my creation. And ye also, 
 are mine. 
 
 I peopled the stars, and gave to the in- 
 habitants thereof great delights. And the 
 earth and my heavens were places of great 
 delight. For I gave bountifully to all my 
 children. But the inhabitants of the far-off 
 stars quarreled because of an evil God,. 
 Baal. And they cast him out. And he 
 came here to despoil me and my heavenly 
 places. Witness ye my beloved. I could 
 destroy him with my little finger. But he 
 is unworthy of your Goddess. To you I 
 give the glory to capture him, and cast him 
 into hell, and torture him forever. 
 
 But lest other evil Gods take possession 
 of his earthly places, they shall also be de- 
 stroyed. Hear ye then the command of 
 Ashtaroth, which is, that ye shall go down 
 to the earth, and obsess and inspire the 
 Par'si'e'ans to march forth and destroy all 
 other people on the earth, beginning first 
 with the stronghold of Baal, in Argos, 
 where he hath many sub-Gods under him, 
 where the Argos'yans, not knowing him,, 
 call him, Zeus. And to whomsoever prov- 
 eth valorous amongst my angel warriors, 
 will I give great promotion and glory, and 
 thousands and millions of slaves. For when 
 Baal is overcome and cast into hell, ye 
 shall take his angel slaves, and possess 
 them yourselves, according to your valor- 
 ous deeds. 
 
 So it came to pass, that Xerxes and 
 the people, the Par'si'e'ans, were moved 
 to go forth and destroy the Argos'yans. 
 And king Xerxes took two and a half 
 million soldiers with him for his army. 
 And so great was the inspiration and ob- 
 session of Ashtaroth's angels, that they 
 caused another two and a half million of 
 Par'si'e'ans to go with Xerxes' soldiers. 
 So that Xerxes' whole army was five mill- 
 ion souls, which was the largest army that 
 ever had been on earth. 
 
 CHAPTER XLII. 
 
 Baal, God of the Argos'yans, called to- 
 gether two thousand million angel war- 
 riors, and after properly officering them, 
 caused them to assemble in Beth'hagas, a 
 sub-kingdom of heaven over the Tillag 
 mountains, to the north of Macedon, and 
 he said unto them: 
 
CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 465 
 
 Behold your Creator, who I am! By 
 my breath upon the earth ye came forth. I 
 am he, who was of old called, De'yus, Lord 
 God of heaven and earth. All places are 
 my places, all dominion is mine. My hea- 
 vens gave I unto you for your inheritance 
 forever. But an evil Goddess, Ashtaroth, 
 hath come to despoil you. And she hath 
 sworn upon her thighs to cast you into 
 endless torments. 
 
 Behold, I have sworn a new oath on the 
 sun and moon and stars! Ye shall capture 
 her. and cast her and all her angels into 
 hell, to so abide forever. For I will clear 
 the heavens and the earth, and they shall 
 be clean and full of delight. Hear ye, 
 then, the commandment of your God, Baal, 
 ruler of heaven and earth: 
 
 Ye shall go down to the earth, to the 
 Argos'yans, and obsess them, man, wo- 
 man and child, and inspire them to terri- 
 ble deeds of blood, havoc and death against 
 the Par'si'e'ans who are coming against 
 them. And whilst ye are thus providing 
 corporeal destruction for this evil Goddess, 
 my heavenly hosts under Yaawochad, my 
 Lord of Agansetha, shall attack her angel 
 armies in every quarter of these heavens. 
 And as fast as her drujas are captured, they 
 shall be cast into the hells of Gotha, which 
 I have prepared for them. And to all my 
 valorous workers will I give great promo- 
 tion and power. Ye shall have servants 
 and slaves without number. 
 
 Now, it came to pass, that many years 
 of war and destruction ensued; but Baal's 
 hosts were too powerful for Ashtaroth. 
 And so Baal not only overcame her angel 
 warriors on the earth, but in her heavenly 
 capital also. And his legions rushed upon 
 her, and captured her. Whereat her own 
 angels turned against her, perceiving now 
 that she was an impostor, and not the Cre- 
 ator. And they bound her, and carried 
 her and her Lords and Gods off to Too- 
 semmes, a heavenly place of foul smells, in 
 Gotha, and they built here a place of tor- 
 ment for her and them, and cast them in. 
 And they bought hither tens of thousands 
 of her officers, and cast them in, and also 
 the spirits of kings and queens and of gen- 
 erals and captains who had been her devo- 
 tees, who were slain in battle, and who 
 were yet in chaos. Thus ended the career 
 of Ashtaroth as a false Goddess. And 
 
 there were thus cast into this hell, volun- 
 tary and involuntary, two thousand million 
 angels. 
 
 As to mortals, Xerxes' mighty armies 
 lived not to return to Par'si'e, but were 
 scattered and destroyed. As to the Argos'- 
 yans, they were a ruined people. And all 
 those countries were covered over with the 
 spirits of the dead, in chaos. For these 
 wars had been going on for many, many 
 years. 
 
 CHAPTER XLIII. 
 
 Kabalactes, Triune God of Vind'yu and 
 her heavens, said: Since Vind'yu and her 
 heavens are to be mine forever, I will take 
 mine own time, and make a sure founda- 
 tion. First, I will build me a heaven- 
 ly city, Haractu, above the mountains of 
 Yammalaga, twelve miles high, and the 
 wings thereof shall spread out, broad as 
 the land of Vind'yu. And I will build me 
 a heavenly palace in Haractu, and adorn it 
 in splendor; and it shall also have wings 
 on every side; and the wings shall be the 
 habitations for my officers, my select and 
 Holy Council. 
 
 And when Haractu is thus completed, I 
 will send word into all the heavens of the 
 earth, saying: Come and see Haractu, the 
 heavenly seat of the Holy Ghost; the most 
 glorious city of the Holy Confederacy of 
 the Triune. 
 
 And then shall my legion of angel war- 
 riors go forth to battle in these my hea- 
 vens; and they shall despoil all the false 
 Lords and false Gods worshipped in Vind'- 
 yu. One of two choices will I give 
 unto them, to bow down in obedience to 
 me and to the Triune and to the Holy 
 Ghost, or to be cast into hell. One by one 
 shall Gods and tyrants fall by my hand; I 
 will destroy them utterly and forever. 
 
 Kabalactes then organized his heavenly 
 kingdom: appointing officers and appor- 
 tioning his angels amongst them, accord- 
 ing to the labor allotted to them. And he 
 built the heavenly city, Haractu, and adorn- 
 ed it in great splendor. And he provided 
 hospitals for the sick and imbecile, and 
 nurseries for es'yans, and factories for 
 workmen, and schools and colleges for 
 great learning. 
 
 Look, he said, I have provided places 
 for the poor, the sick, the unlearned, the 
 
466 
 
 CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 helpless and the imbecile, even before I 
 provided a palace for myself. There is a 
 God for you. Behold, I am the servant of 
 the Triune, the Father and the Holy Ghost. 
 My doctrine is: To labor for others first, 
 and for one's self afterward. And since you 
 perceive that my doctrine is a holy doc- 
 trine, ye shall establish it, come what may. 
 For, although I am good, I am also power 
 and majesty, in great anger to overcome 
 evil, and establish righteousness and lib- 
 erty. 
 
 These, then, were the chiefs of Kaba- 
 lactes' staff: Pedmon, Laer, Yodaava, Cra- 
 osha, Varaga Sin Tse, Karapa, Haekiha, 
 Yutobis, Lumbothia, Doravva, Etchwalac- 
 tcha, Myrrhes, Sepia, Tidon, Onatuhu, 
 Durhea, Indra, Kali, Hosanne, Wahtissa, 
 Owella, Gur, Hiak, Cassavragga, How- 
 gotha and Ithra. And as captains: Sara- 
 ma, Janassa, Anatheia, Thodica and Jan- 
 urs. But all the foregoing assumed many 
 false names, both on earth and in heaven, 
 so that no history could reveal who they 
 were, or by their names distinguish where 
 their dominions lay. 
 
 Kabalactes had said unto his chiefs: Be- 
 hold, mortals have many favorite names 
 for worship. Go ye down to the earth, to 
 Vind'yu, and possess the temples of spirit 
 communion, the oracle-houses and what- 
 ever places mortals come to worship in, 
 and these places shall be yours. And to 
 whatever Lord or God, mortals most in- 
 cline to bow down, take ye the name of 
 that Lord or God. For I give this law 
 unto you, that ye shall possess the land of 
 Vind'yu, not with new names, but with 
 the old, but all unto one end, which is the 
 establishing of the Triune God-head. 
 
 Kabalactes then made Pedmon com- 
 mander-in-chief over his angel warriors, 
 and despatched them down to earth, to 
 Vind'yu. 
 
 After this, Kabalactes raised an army 
 two thousand million angels to fight his 
 heavenly battles. Over these he crowned 
 Yettaba, Lord in chief. 
 
 In addition to the heavenly attractions 
 of war, Kabalactes raised an army of mu- 
 sicians of half a million to each group. He 
 also instituted times and places for tour- 
 naments, processions and the display of 
 great pageantry. 
 
 He said: I will not only be powerful in 
 might, but powerful in attractions, above 
 all other Gods. 
 
 Now, even as hath been told of the 
 wars of Looeamong, even so, but in a dif- 
 ferent place, were the terrible conflicts in 
 the heavens of Kabalactes, which were also 
 manifested on the mortals of Vind'yu. So 
 in a few hundred years, that country was 
 but a land of ruins, and over it, in every 
 direction, were hundreds of millions of an- 
 gels in chaos, being the spirits of those 
 slain in the wars. 
 
 Kabalactes said: Now will I clear away 
 the ruins, and build my everlasting edifice 
 on the earth. Behold, I will remodel the 
 sacred books of mortals in mine own way. 
 
 In these signs will .1 rebuild: The tri- 
 angle, representing the three lights, the 
 Son, the Father and the Holy Ghost. I 
 will re-establish the tau, as the sign of my 
 power. And because my heavens are The 
 All Pure, the tau shall be white. The 
 jaugernot shall be my roadmark. These 
 signs shall be given unto my mortal sub- 
 jects, to be theirs forever. And whoso ex- 
 hibits my signs, shall know that they are 
 my covenant which I have made unto mor- 
 tals. 
 
 Kabalactes then appointed twelve thou- 
 sand four hundred and eighty-eight angels, 
 to go down to Vind'yu, to re-write the sa- 
 cred books of mortals. And he crowned 
 Gaonaza chief of the inspiring host. 
 
 To write the five great books, five mor- 
 tals had been previously chosen from be- 
 fore their birth, by the guardian angels 
 appointed for the purpose. These men 
 were: Harritza, to write the Avesta; 
 Vraghettes, to write the Venddad; Roy- 
 hoh, to write the Vispered; Yathavah, to 
 write the Yacna; and Uzariah, to write the 
 Khordavesta. 
 
 The angels chosen by Kabalactes in hea- 
 ven, were sent down to these mortals in in- 
 fancy, to guard them from the time of 
 their birth upward. And the angels were 
 divided into watches, sufficient to keep 
 away all other angels, to be with their mor- 
 tal wards day and night, to converse with 
 them in their dreams, to give them visions 
 and good habits and virtue and truth and 
 wisdom. And it came to pass that when 
 these mortals were grown up, and the time 
 came for their work, they were with their 
 
CYCLE OF L1KA 
 
 467 
 
 guardian spirits as one, knowing and com- 
 prehending the voice of their master, Kab- 
 alactes, whom they were inspired to call 
 Ahura'Mazda, because this name was pleas- 
 ing to mortals. 
 
 Gaonaza, commander of the inspiring 
 hosts, distributed the twelve lights of the 
 throne, the angels in rapport with the five 
 mortals, to each of them, save to Harritza, 
 and to him he gave four. And now, when 
 the writing was done, the following was 
 the manner of inspiration: 
 
 The writer was previously inspired to 
 be at his post at dawn in the morning, and 
 to have all things in readiness for writing 
 half an hour before sunrise, and to write 
 until sunrise. And the angels in rapport 
 stood beside him, laying their hands upon 
 him. Next to these angels stood another 
 angel, with hands upon them; and, after 
 that one, stood another, and so on, for one 
 thousand angels in a line, extending in a 
 direct line toward Haractu, the heavenly 
 seat of Kabalactes. And from the extreme 
 thousandth angel in line on, up to the hea- 
 venly throne, were stretched three cords of 
 es'sean light, even to the High Council, 
 before whom spake the chief of the ten 
 thousand, as previously instructed by Kab- 
 alactes. And, as this chief spake in hea- 
 ven, the es of his voice passed down to the 
 mortal, who framed in earth-words that 
 which was spoken in heaven. 
 
 Thus were written the sacred books of 
 Vind'yu. And copies of these books 
 were written on cloth, paper and stone; 
 and some of which were carried in 
 different directions over Vind'yu. In 
 eighty-seven years Kabalactes completed 
 the sacred books, and disbanded the inspir- 
 ing hosts. 
 
 So far Kabalactes had destroyed nine 
 million men, women and children in the 
 wars. He had also destroyed four thou- 
 sand heathen temples, and more than three 
 hundred cities. And he suppressed over 
 two hundred languages, and banished six 
 thousand two hundred false Lords. He 
 also commanded all languages to be here- 
 after made out of Vedic, Yi-ha and Zend, 
 from which Sanscrit descended. 
 
 CHAPTER XLIV. 
 
 Ennochissa, the Triune God of the hea- 
 venly place, Eta-shong, over Chine'ya, said: 
 According to the splendor of a kingdom, 
 so is the ruler thereof glorified; this I have 
 learned. Therefore Eta-shong shall surpass 
 all other heavenly places. Thus spake he 
 before his Lords. 
 
 Vazista said: Thy Lords are of the 
 same mind. As for Looeamong and Kab- 
 alactes, they are more bent on the affairs 
 of earth than of heaven. 
 
 Ennochissa spent two hundred years in 
 building and beautifying his heavenly city, 
 Eta-shong, employing more than two 
 thousand million slaves for that purpose. 
 And, as to his heavenly palace, and the 
 palace of his High Council, in grandeur 
 and magnificence, the like had not been be- 
 fore in any of the .lower heavens. 
 
 The circuit of the columns of fire, of 
 which there were one million, was equal 
 to half the breadth of the land of Chine'ya. 
 And the height and size of the palace were 
 so great it could be seen at a distance 
 of a thousand miles. In the front 
 of his palace were four hundred thou- 
 sand arches and pillars, and leading 
 up to the foot of the throne, seventy 
 steps, with a breadth of one thousand 
 lengths. In front of the arches was an are- 
 na, four thousand lengths across, and this 
 was ornamented with one hundred thou- 
 sand fountains of fire and water. Inter- 
 spersed, here and there, on the walls and 
 arches, were hanging gardens of flowers, 
 and drapery of gold and silver. 
 
 And as to the workmanship displayed, it 
 was so fine that no language can convey 
 an idea thereof to mortal understanding, 
 except it be said that everything was rep- 
 resented that is on the earth and in the 
 heavens thereof. 
 
 The officers of the palace, next in grade 
 below the High Council, the Lords, mar- 
 shals and recorders, were generals, cap- 
 tains, inspectors, surveyors, receivers and 
 builders, and these were all above grade 
 ninety. There were maintained within the 
 palace .arena half a million es'enaurs and 
 trumpeters, four million fire and water 
 servants, and three million bearers of bur- 
 
468 
 
 CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 dens; and yet, beside these, there were six 
 million caterers and servants. 
 
 Only officers of rank could cross the 
 arena, or approach the arches by walking 
 upright; all others had to crawl on their 
 bellies in approaching the throne, saying 
 prayers the while. 
 
 Now, although the other Triunes had 
 great capitals and palaces, they were not 
 to be compared with Ennochissa's. 
 
 Thus labored this Triune, even to the 
 neglect of his earthly dominions. And it 
 came to pass that God, Jehovih's Son, in 
 Paradise sowed the seed of faith in Chine'- 
 ya in favor of the Creator; so that, by the 
 end of two hundred years, nearly all the 
 spirits of the dead went not to the Triune, 
 but to God in Paradise. And God's angel 
 missionaries went into this Triune's hea- 
 venly kingdom, and won many converts to 
 Jehovih. 
 
 So that Ennochissa discovered that his 
 heavenly kingdom was losing ground. 
 Thereupon he resolved to enter the field of 
 war, and to destroy all mortals in Chine'- 
 ya that worshipped the Great Spirit. And 
 he also resolved to drive out from his hea- 
 vens all angels who believed in Jehovih, 
 or who were missionaries unto the king- 
 don of God in Paradise. 
 
 Ennochissa was thus the first of the 
 Triunes to declare war against Jehovih, 
 which was exactly in opposition to his 
 own professions, when the Confederacy 
 was first formed. From this time on, En- 
 nochissa was called by the Faithists in hea- 
 ven, a false God. As yet. the other two 
 Triunes had fought more for Jehovih than 
 against Him. 
 
 After this, both mortals and angels in 
 Chine'ya knew no peace. And when no 
 war existed betwixt any two or more cities 
 or states, and the people were Jehovihians, 
 Ennochissa, with his hundreds of millions 
 of angel warriors, obsessed such mortals, 
 and plunged them into war, to make them 
 destroy one another. 
 
 CHAPTER XLV. 
 
 When the Triune Gods perceived the 
 great work accomplished by God, Jehovih's 
 Son, in Vind'yii and Chine'ya through Sa- 
 kaya and Ka'yu, they were sorely troubled 
 for the ultimate prospect of their own 
 heavenly kingdoms. Ennochissa, Triune 
 
 of Eta-shong, the heavenly kingdom over 
 Chine'ya, sent an invitation to his two 
 brother Triunes, to come to his heavenly 
 city, to confer as to what should be done. 
 
 Accordingly, Kabalactes and Looea- 
 mong went to Eta-shong, where they were 
 received in great grandeur, by one thou- 
 sand million angels, and conducted to En- 
 nochissa's heavenly capital and to his 
 throne. After due salutations and ceremo- 
 nies, the Triunes all took seats on the 
 throne. Whereupon the High Council re- 
 tired, leaving only the Lords-in-attendance 
 and the chief marshals within the crescent 
 of the throne. 
 
 Ennochissa said: My brothers, peace 
 be with you, because of my great joy for 
 your presence. Behold, Chine'ya, my 
 earthly kingdom, is being sapped in the 
 foundation by the Ka'yu'an doctrines. 
 What more will these people care for the 
 Trinity? Jehovih is triumphant. 
 
 Kabalactes said: As thou hast spoken 
 of Chine'ya, so say I of Vind'yu: The doc- 
 trine of the Trinity is being entirely de- 
 stroyed by the Sakaya'yan doctrines. Our 
 heavenly kingdoms will lose their base of 
 supplies for subjects. Jehovih is trium- 
 phant. 
 
 Looeamong said: My brothers, it is 
 not my place to point out the mistakes of 
 others. But ye twain have built great hea- 
 venly capitals and palaces. Your kingdoms 
 are embellished, as these heavens never 
 were before, with magnificent cities. 
 
 Now, whilst ye were thus building, be- 
 hold, I went with my legions down to the 
 earth to war. I have not only overthrown 
 many of the false Gods and Lords, but 
 put the worshippers of Jehovih to death. 
 Therefore, I have done little to beautify 
 my heavenly kigndoms; but I rest above 
 fear and apprehension. Nevertheless, what 
 soever ye would that I can do, to assist 
 you out of your dilemmas, that will I do. 
 
 Now, after many suggestions and pro- 
 posals, which were not accepted, Ennoch- 
 issa said: As God in Paradise hath 
 taken an earthly course to insure his suc- 
 cess, why shall not we also? Behold, let 
 us seek out a number of mortals also, and 
 through them, establish our doctrines with 
 mortals. 
 
 Looeamong said: A most wise sugges- 
 tion. 
 

 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 469 
 
 Kabalactes said: This have I seen, since 
 a long time, would be necessary to accom- 
 plish. 
 
 Thereupon a coalition was entered into 
 by the three Triunes to give to mortals 
 forty-nine Saviors, in order to establish the 
 Trinity. Which labor should be accom- 
 plished within two hundred years. And it 
 was also stipulated, that the whole forty- 
 nine Saviors should be put to death igno- 
 miniously in order to win mortal sympa- 
 thy. 
 
 To accomplish this, the Triune Confed- 
 eracy provided, that each kingdom should 
 supply one million angels for the army of 
 inspiration, and that the same doctrine 
 should be enunciated through every Savior, 
 raised up for the work. And, accordingly, 
 the three million inspiring angels were se- 
 lected, all being above grade eighty. 
 
 For Looeamong's hosts, Thoth was 
 made captain. For Kabalactes' hosts, Yima 
 was made captain. For Ennochissa's 
 hosts, Satree was made captain. 
 
 Accordingly, these three, Thoth, Yima 
 and Satree, with their three million, were 
 sent down to the earth, to raise up 
 amongst mortals the required Saviors. 
 And there were thus given to the earth, in 
 the space of less than two hundred years, 
 forty-nine Saviors. Their names were: 
 Rita, Gibbor, Gaal, Efrokin, Gargra, 
 Thules, Etrus, Gadamon and Shofal; and 
 Thules, of the house of Thules, Eterus, 
 Gadamon and Shofal; and all of these were 
 of Egupt. 
 
 Of the land of Par'si'e, the following 
 men: Adakus, Mithra, Bali, Malopesus, 
 Gonsalk, Hebron, Belus, of the house of 
 Belus, Megath, Yodman and Beels. 
 
 Of Vind'yii, the following: Indra, Yuth, 
 Sakai, Withoban, Aria, Devatat, Chrisna, 
 Laracqu, Hagre, Anathia, Jannassa and 
 Janeirus. 
 
 Of Chine'ya, the following: Sam Sin, 
 Ah Wah, Ah Chong, K'aou'foor, King 
 Shu, Shaou and Chung Le. 
 
 Of Heleste and Uropa, the following: 
 Datur, Promethus, Quirnus, Iyo, Osseo 
 and Yohannas. 
 
 And all of these preached the doctrine 
 of the Father, Son and Holy Ghost, and 
 performed miracles. And the same angels 
 inspired their enemies to put them to 
 death. Some were boiled in oil, some were 
 
 devoured by lions, and some nailed on the 
 ugsa and left to perish. 
 
 Now so far as the Triune doctrine af- 
 fected mortals, it related chiefly to war. 
 The confederate Gods had said: War for 
 righteousness' sake is just. We go to the 
 earth to put swords and spears in the 
 hands of the innocent and upright, saying 
 to them: Defend yourselves! Establish 
 yourselves! There is no Ever Present All 
 Person. All things were created out of the 
 Holy Ghost. Depend upon yourselves. 
 Rise up and be men, mighty to do the will 
 of the Son, the Father and the Holy Ghost. 
 
 CHAPTER XLVI. 
 
 When God, Son of Jehovih, saw the 
 work of the Triunes, he bewailed the ways 
 of heaven. Jehovih said to him: Bewail 
 not, My Son, nor grieve for what they 
 have done. But make thou a record of 
 their works; for mortals will preserve a his- 
 tory of this period, which shall be called, 
 the Era of Saviors. And it shall stand as 
 the darkest era in the cycle of Lika. But 
 it shall come to pass on the earth, that the 
 Triunes will cut themselves off in a way 
 they see not. For mortals will worship the 
 Saviors. Whereupon the Triunes will be- 
 come divided in their heavenly kingdoms. 
 
 So God bewailed no more, but prepared 
 a new army of a thousand million angels, 
 to go down to the earth, to provide for re- 
 ceiving the spirits of such as were to be 
 slain in wars near at hand. 
 
 Of these hosts, Eyodemus was given 
 command, and he appointed the following 
 officers to each hundred million, to go 
 with him: Sogothwich, Yutempasa, Loo 
 Wan, Thagaik, Maratha, Wein, Shuberth, 
 Le Shong, Taivi and Duraya. 
 
 Nor did they reach the earth any too 
 soon, for war soon circled the whole earth 
 and every nation and tribe and peo- 
 ple were immured in bloody carnage. 
 This period was practically the end of the 
 good works of the Triune, but equally so 
 the beginning of their mighty kingdoms in 
 heaven, which were destined, ere long, to 
 overshadow the whole earth. 
 
 The war, they set on foot on earth, ex- 
 tended into their own kingdoms. And these 
 three Gods, the Triunes, saw, that only by 
 might and desperate vigor, they could pre- 
 serve their heavens from anarchy. Five 
 
470 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 of the sub-Gods of Kabalactes, of Vind'yu, 
 revolted within his own kingdom, and set 
 up places of their own. And they falsely 
 assumed the names of the Saviors, who had 
 been put to death in Vind'yu. 
 
 Kabalactes summoned his remaining 
 chief officers to Haractu, his heavenly city, 
 before his throne. And when they were 
 before him, he said unto them: 
 
 This is the emergency of the Gods. My 
 voice and my strong arm are raised up. 
 Miscreants, whom I elevated to official po- 
 sitions in heaven, have betrayed their trust. 
 With their legions they have seceded, and 
 set up kingdoms of their own. 
 
 I have called you before me, that ye 
 might jointly hear my decree, and obey. I 
 will have order and harmony in my heaven. 
 Neither shall there be but one God in my 
 dominions, even myself. It is my will, 
 therefore, that ye pursue these rebellious 
 captains down to the earth, to their heaven- 
 ly kingdoms, and despoil them utterly. 
 And if need be, ye shall capture them and 
 their chief leaders, and cast them into hell. 
 For they shall understand that I am not a 
 God of peace, like the Jehovihian Gods, 
 but a God of war. 
 
 For this purpose, I appoint Yima as my 
 Holy Ambassador and Earth Warrior. 
 And I give to him two thousand million 
 warriors, that he may make quick work of 
 my rebellious chiefs. My marshal shall se- 
 lect, therefore, for thee, Yima, the two 
 thousand million angel warriors; and thou 
 shalt appoint thine own generals and cap- 
 tains, and go at once down to the earth re- 
 gions of these miscreants, and carry out my 
 commandments. 
 
 Yima and his hosts did as commanded, 
 but not suddenly; for an angel war ensued 
 which lasted forty-six years, before the 
 five rebellious Gods were beaten from their 
 strongholds. And, even then, they were 
 not captured and cast into hell; but they 
 escaped, taking half a million angel war- 
 riors with them, and they migrated to 
 Uropa, to the city of Roma, where they 
 established themselves in security. Thus 
 the deposed Vind'yu Gods became Gods of 
 Roma. 
 
 Immediately after Yima succeeded in 
 clearing Vind'yu, Kabalactes summoned 
 him again to Haractu, his heavenly seat, 
 before his High Council. When he had 
 
 thus come, Kabalactes spoke from the 
 throne, saying: 
 
 Because my wisdom hath triumphed in 
 heaven and earth, I now take unto myself 
 a new name, Budha. And from this day 
 and hour I shall be called by no other name 
 forever. And my heavenly place, my city 
 and my heavens shall be known henceforth, 
 forever, as Haractu, the Budhist heavenly 
 kingdom, the All Highest Heaven of Hea- 
 vens! 
 
 Thou, Yima, shalt repair again to the 
 earth with thy two thousand million war- 
 ring angels, and establish me, as the Bud- 
 ha. By fire and sword, by blood and death 
 shalt thou establish my name on the earth. 
 And thou shalt find a way to teach mortals, 
 that I was Sakaya, and Sakaya was and is 
 the Budha, Son of the Triune, Son of the 
 Holy Ghost. 
 
 Jehovih had said: Behold the time will 
 come unto both Gods and men who deny 
 My All Person, when they will espouse 
 even falsehood for sake of their own selfish 
 ends. 
 
 Jehovih spake to God, saying: Behold, 
 he commandeth himself to be called Budha. 
 Now I say unto thee, suffer this also to be, 
 neither accuse thou him before heaven or 
 earth of his falsehood. Nay, but thou shalt 
 also henceforth call him Budha, signifying 
 All Knowledge, for it is his choice. 
 
 So from this time after, Kabalactes was 
 called Budha in heaven. And his angel 
 hosts under Yima, who descended to the 
 earth, inspired mortals, both through the 
 oracles and by inspiration, to call Sa- 
 kaya, Budha, and Budha, Sakaya. And in 
 not many generations, mortals forgot that 
 they were two persons; but they accredited 
 all things of the spirit to Budha, and all 
 things of the flesh to Sakaya, although the 
 whole matter was false in fact. The follow- 
 ers of Budha professed peace, but practiced 
 war and conquest, setting out by blood and 
 carnage and destruction to establish Bud- 
 hism in Vind'yu. 
 
 Jehovih said to God: Even this shalt 
 thou permit them to do. For herein will 
 they lay the foundation of the final over- 
 throw of this false God, Budha. For they 
 will put aside the Trinity of themselves, 
 retaining Budha and the Holy Ghost. Yea, 
 they will ultimately teach, that Budha is 
 but a principle, and that the Holy Ghost is 
 as nothing. 
 
CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 471 
 
 CHAPTER XLVII. 
 
 Not less were the trials of Ennochissa; 
 for his sub-Gods also revolted, and many 
 of them assumed the names of the Saviors 
 he had given to Chine'ya. And he also 
 sent an army of two thousand million an- 
 gel warriors down to the earth to destroy 
 them, and break them up, and if need be to 
 capture them, and cast them in hell. 
 
 Of these hosts, he made Ya'deth chief 
 captain, giving him power to select his 
 own captains and generals. And it came to 
 pass, that a heavenly war ensued on the 
 earth, in Chine'ya, betwixt the hosts of 
 Ya'deth and the rebellious sub-Gods and 
 their hosts, which lasted seventy years. 
 And Ya'deth gained the victory, clearing 
 away all the rebel angels of the sub-Gods, 
 and putting them to flight. Four of these 
 rebel Gods fled into Argos, to Athena, 
 where they established themselves securely. 
 
 Ennochissa now summoned Ya'deth and 
 his victorious army to Eta-shong, his hea- 
 venly kingdom. And when he was before 
 the throne, Ennochissa said unto him: 
 
 Thou hast beholden the machinations 
 of my brother Triune God, Kabalactes, 
 who hath falsely assumed the name, Bud- 
 ha, and proclaimed himself the All Highest 
 God, and his heaven the All Highest Hea- 
 ven of Heavens. Two things do I decree, 
 this day and hour: An army of angels, 
 for the earth, of two thousand million; and 
 thou, Ya'deth, shalt be their commander, 
 to do my will. And another army of an- 
 gel warriors, for my heavenly kingdom of 
 Eta-shong, and for my kingdom of Da- 
 maya, over Guatama. 
 
 For my heavenly army, thou, Loo Wan, 
 shalt be commander for Eta-shong; and 
 thou, Birawotha, shalt be commander for 
 Damaya. And to ye, I assign the 
 care and protection of my kingdoms 
 with your armies. And ye shall wall your 
 places around and fortify me on every side 
 with angel warriors. Yet, menace not the 
 angels of Budha nor of Looeamong. Nev- 
 ertheless, if they offend, or are disrespect- 
 ful of me and my kingdoms, ye shall ar- 
 rest them, and provide places of torture for 
 them, and cast them in. 
 
 But as for thee, Ya'deth, thou and thy 
 hosts shall return again to the earth, to 
 mortals, and establish me as Brahma, 
 which shall be my name on earth and in 
 
 heaven from this time forth forever. And 
 thou shalt possess the oracles, and by all 
 possible means establish me amongst mor- 
 tals, as well in Vind'yu as in Chine'ya. And 
 all v^ho profess Brahma hereafter, shall be 
 my subjects on their entrance into heaven. 
 
 And if it come to pass that Budha's 
 mortal warriors fall upon the mortal Brah- 
 mans, to destroy them, then shalt thou con- 
 sider that Budha is my enemy. And thou 
 and thy angel warriors shall obsess every 
 Brahman to take up arms, and war to the 
 death every aggressing Budha. For Bud- 
 ha shall learn that I, Brahma, rule these 
 heavens in mine own way. 
 
 So the four thousand million warriors 
 of Ennochissa (now falsely named Brah- 
 ma), were selected, and apportioned and 
 marched off to their several places in great 
 pomp and glory. To describe even one of 
 these armies, with their music and their 
 implements of war, their manual and pro- 
 cession, would require a large book. Then 
 their vessels of war; their implements of 
 fire and water; their banners and flags; and, 
 above all, their enthusiasm. For many of 
 them had been warriors in earth-life, and 
 knew no other trade, and now exulted in 
 the prospect of mortal blood and death. 
 
 Of the sub-Gods of Vind'yu and Chine'- 
 ya, Jehovih said: In time to come, 
 man of the earth will look abroad over the 
 earth and say: How came the Vind'yu 
 Gods in Roma? How came the Chine'ya 
 Gods in Athena? For, since they will not 
 be able to answer their own questions, they 
 will perceive, there must have been a hea- 
 venly cause that mortals knew not of. 
 
 For in time of My revelations, it will 
 not be sufficient unto either heaven or 
 earth to re-establish spiritual communion; 
 but it shall also be shown unto them that 
 there are kingdoms and principalities in 
 heaven. And they are ruled over by both 
 good and bad Gods. Moreover, they shall 
 understand that of a truth whoso worship- 
 ped Budha shall go to Budha to be his 
 slaves; and whoso worshippeth Brahma 
 shall go to Brahma, and be his slaves. I 
 will make it plain to them that to worship 
 a spirit, though he be a God, is but the giv- 
 ing of their own souls into bondage. For 
 they shall in that day understand that the 
 Great Spirit, the Ever Present, is not an 
 idol in the figure of a man, sitting on a 
 throne. 
 
472 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 Moreover, spirits and mortals shall per- 
 ceive that to deny My Person, will, soon or 
 late, bring the doer into a trap from which 
 he cannot escape. Give- then to Ennochis- 
 sa the name Brahma, for it is his ckoice. 
 And thou shalt perceive that the time will 
 come, when he will seek to throw aside, 
 even this name, and even his own person, 
 in order to escape hell. 
 
 Thus were established the two false 
 Gods, Budha and Brahma. And at once 
 there was a war in heaven, as well as on 
 earth. And this was virtually the end of 
 the schools and colleges in these heavens, 
 and also the beginning of the breaking up 
 of the factories and places of industry in 
 the two kingdoms, Eta-shong and Haractu, 
 in atmospherea. 
 
 CHAPTER XLVIII. 
 
 Chine'ya was so well established in the 
 doctrines fo Chine and Ka'yu, that the peo- 
 ple shunned war and idolatry. The Saviors 
 had gained but little footing. And now, 
 when the Gods sought to inspire the people 
 to war, in order to establish themselves, 
 Brahma and Budha, only the most barbar- 
 ous regions could be influenced. 
 
 Brahma, the false God, now perceiving 
 the potency of Ka'yu's books, sent his an- 
 gel warriors to inspire the Sun King, T'sin, 
 to have all the books in Chine'ya destroy- 
 ed, in order to reduce the empire to ig- 
 norance. 
 
 Brahma said: I will have all, or de- 
 stroy all. My angels shall not let sleep in 
 peace, any king or governor in all this 
 land, until he engage in the work of thus 
 destroying mine enemy, Learning. 
 
 Accordingly, the Sun King, T'sin, is- 
 sued a decree, commanding all the books 
 and tablets of Chine'ya to be destroyed. 
 And there were destroyed, in one year, 
 more than five million books, and one mill- 
 ion tablets of stone and copper; being the 
 destruction of the books of the ancients, 
 for upward of twenty thousand years. Be- 
 sides these, there were destroyed many of 
 the books of Ka'yu, but not all of them. 
 
 In the meantime, the anti-war spirit of 
 the people had cried out to the Creator: O 
 Father, what shall we do to avert war, and 
 to preserve the revelations of Thy holy 
 ones of old? And Jehovih answered them, 
 
 through God of Paradise, Jehovih's Son, 
 saying: 
 
 Build ye walls against the barbarians. 
 And your walls shall stand as a testimony 
 of what ye are willing to do, rather than 
 engage in war, even for self-preservation. 
 Because ye have faith in Me, I will be with 
 you even unto the end. 
 
 And so the Faithists of Chine'ya built 
 stone walls, the greatest in all the world. 
 
 Jehovih said: Behold the works of My 
 chosen. As long as these walls stand, they 
 shall be testimony of the struggle of My 
 people, to maintain themselves, by means 
 of peace instead of war. And the walls 
 shall be monuments to the Faithists of 
 this land, who have perished by the false 
 Gods, Brahma and Budha. Yea, the testi- 
 mony of these walls shall be stronger, in 
 time to come, against Brahma and Budha, 
 than though every stone were a sword and 
 a spear. And the followers of My Son, 
 Ka'yu, shall loathe them with pity and hate. 
 
 Since these, My chosen people, have 
 achieved the age of peace on earth, let 
 them shut themselves in from the barbar- 
 ians without, and they shall remain a se- 
 cluded people till the coming of kosmon. 
 
 In Vind'yu also, did the machinations 
 of Budha and Brahma work sore mischief 
 on mortals. In this country both of these 
 false Gods decreed the destruction of all 
 books and tablets, save such as looked fa- 
 vorable to their own doctrines. And there 
 were here destroyed more than two million 
 books and one million tablets, of stone and 
 copper. And the schools and colleges of 
 the people were well nigh destroyed, the 
 whole length and breadth of the land. And 
 in both, Chine'ya and Vind'yu, there were 
 slain in war, in order to establish the names 
 of these Gods amongst mortals, more than 
 one hundred and forty million peo- 
 ple, men, women and children. By the 
 angel warriors of these two Gods were 
 mortals thus inspired in the work of de- 
 struction. Not only against the Faithists 
 were these Gods, but against each other 
 also. And mortals were their victims, for 
 the glory and exaltation of the two hea- 
 venly kingdoms, Haractu and Eta-shong. 
 
 CHAPTER XLIX. 
 
 Looeamong said: Till I have Baal cast 
 into hell, I will not cease the carnage of 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 473 
 
 mortal blood. But Baal, the self-God of 
 Heleste, called his mighty legions in hea- 
 ven, and sent them down to the earth, re- 
 doubled, to inspire mortals to bloody 
 deeds. 
 
 Baal said: Mine is an easy doctrine to 
 understand. All mortals that worship not 
 Baal shall be put to death. The worship- 
 pers of the Trinity, the Father, Son and 
 Holy Ghost, are my enemies. Such mor- 
 tals shall die! Such angels shall go the 
 way of hell. The Faithists, the worship- 
 pers of Jehovih, are also my enemies. 
 Such mortals shall be tortured and sawed 
 in halves. Such angels shall be bound in 
 knots in hell, and suffocated forever! I 
 will have them know that Baal is the All 
 Highest God of heaven and earth. 
 
 Looeamong said: I come not to bring 
 peace, but war! I come to set nation 
 against nation, people against people, man 
 against man. For righteousness' sake will 
 I purify the earth with human blood. I 
 will not have a half-way peace; I will de- 
 stroy my enemies, east and west, north and 
 south. By the Holy Ghost have I sworn 
 it! And the kingdoms of Egupt, and of 
 Media, of Armenia, and Phrygia, and Ar- 
 gos, and Scythia and Noamedia, and of all 
 the regions of Arabin'ya and the west, 
 shall know no peace till I have destroyed 
 the worship of all Gods but the Triunes. 
 And there was no peace in any of those 
 lands. Neither was there system to the 
 warfare, looking to any important result. 
 
 Jehovih hath said: Let this stand as a 
 testimony unto coming generations. For 
 they shall look back to these times, and be- 
 hold, that the wars raged without purpose 
 on the part of any king. And that mortals 
 were but instruments in the hands of the 
 angels, who ruled over them. And it shall 
 be testimony unto them of what cometh 
 upon peoples, who deny My Person. For 
 they shall compare the peace and rejoicing 
 of My people, whilst they had no king, but 
 kept My commandments, with such as put 
 Me away, and tried to make themselves 
 strong in kings and standing armies. 
 
 Baal now established two more heaven- 
 ly kingdoms, one over Jerusalem, and one. 
 above the Apennine mountains, off from 
 Roma. And in the latter kingdom, which 
 he called Arkoli, he made an alliance with 
 the Vind'yu Gods that escaped from their 
 own heavenly regions and fled to the mor- 
 
 tal city, Roma. And near Athena, he 
 founded a sub-kingdom of five hundred 
 million angels, and made an alliance with 
 the Gods that escaped from the Brahman 
 kingdoms. 
 
 Looeamong, the Triune God of the 
 Holy Ghost, beheld, with fear and trem- 
 bling, his formidable enemy, Baal. And so 
 he determined to send to Budha for as- 
 sistance. Thus he solicited: 
 
 To the Triune, the Holy Budha, Son of 
 the Holy Ghost, greeting in love and ma- 
 jesty. By the power of the Triunes are we 
 sworn to each other, to establish the Holy 
 Ghost in heaven and earth. By which con- 
 federacy are we three Gods powerful above 
 all other Gods. Now behold, Baal, the 
 most fiendish of all Gods, wageth war 
 against our holy doctrines in all the regions 
 of my heavenly kingdoms and on my do- 
 minions of the earth also. But my forces 
 in heaven and earth need reinforcement. 
 And I come to thee, according to our orig- 
 inal compact, asking for a thousand million 
 angel warriors. 
 
 By messengers Looeamong sent this 
 appeal to Budha, who answered him: It 
 is said that great trials are the making of 
 angels and mortals. I need my hosts for 
 mine own purposes. Nevertheless, if thou 
 wilt cede Egupt to me, thou shalt have the 
 army thou asketh for, for the space of one 
 hundred years. 
 
 Insulting as was this proposal, Looea- 
 mong was obliged to accede to it, or to 
 have his kingdom destroyed by Baal. Ac- 
 cordingly, such an alliance was entered 
 into; and so, Looeamong removed his 
 heavenly city, Hapsendi, westward, and 
 build it over Noamedia. And immediately 
 thereafter, Budha established a heavenly 
 kingdom in Egupt, and called it Ceionia, 
 giving its management into the keeping of 
 Thoth, the Bertian, an angel, so named, 
 because he was cunning, like a fox. 
 
 With these additional forces, Looea- 
 mong now renewed the assault on Baal on 
 every side, even more violently in his hea- 
 venly places than on earth. And Looea- 
 mong routed Baal from his heavenly king- 
 dom, and from his sub-kingdoms also, but 
 he did not capture him, or subdue him. 
 And the angels of Looeamong obtained 
 Jerusalem and Athena, besides two hundred 
 small cities, with their oracle-houses and 
 temples also. And Looeamong's angel 
 
4:74: 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 warriors took possession of them, so they 
 could answer the oracles, the magicians 
 and priests, in their own way. Baal still 
 maintained an army of three thousand mill- 
 ion angel warriors; and he established him- 
 self in the city of Roma and Hieadas, but 
 used most of his army as rambling maraud- 
 ers. 
 
 Now, when Looeamong beheld, that 
 the other Triunes had taken new names 
 falsely, and that they had gained power 
 thereby, he resolved to adopt for himself 
 the names, Lord God. Thoth, his chief 
 warrior angel, righting against Baal, had 
 said: Most Holy Triune, I must give mor- 
 tals a name to fight for. The term, Holy 
 Ghost, is not potent. 
 
 So, Looeamong falsely assumed to be 
 God, the Lord of heaven and earth. He 
 said to Thoth: Go tell mortals I am the 
 same, who wrought wonders for the Isra- 
 elites. And, then the Israelites will fight 
 for me. 
 
 Thoth did this. And furthermore Looe- 
 among inspired one Ezra, to gather all the 
 records he could, to be proof of his labors 
 for the Israelites. To accomplish this, 
 Thoth employed seven hundred thousand 
 angels, to be with Ezra and the numerous 
 scribes whom Ezra employed. And by 
 their inspiration seventy-two books were 
 written and compiled, which were put on 
 file in the king's library in Jerusalem, and 
 these books were named by Ezra, The 
 Holy Library. 
 
 CHAPTER L. 
 
 Then came Moses from his etherean 
 realms to Paradise, accompanied by a suffi- 
 cient host. The heavenly kingdoms of 
 God were stirred from center to cir- 
 cumference, when it was heralded 
 abroad that Moses was coming. And Par- 
 adise was like a new heavenly city, being 
 acceded by an influx of more than a thou- 
 sand million visitors for the occasion. And 
 heralds and receivers and marshals and mu- 
 sicians extended every way. A whole book 
 might be written on the glory of the oc- 
 casion, when that etherean ship descended 
 from the higher heavens. Suffice it, Moses 
 was received according to the custom of 
 Gods. And God said to Moses: Come and 
 honor my throne; and I will proclaim a file 
 before the throne, to be followed by two 
 days' recreation. 
 
 Then Moses went up, and sat on the 
 throne of God. And God proclaimed the 
 file; whereupon hundreds of millions, thou- 
 sands of millions, filed past the throne of 
 God, that they might look upon Moses' 
 face. And Moses stood up before them. 
 Moses said: 
 
 I remember standing on the earth whilst 
 the hosts that came out of Egupt passed 
 before me! Great Jehovih, what symbols 
 of things Thou givest. And ever with a 
 new thrill of joy to the soul. 
 
 That was all he said; but so great was 
 the love and glory in his face as he stood 
 on the throne of God that every soul that 
 passed said: Moses, blessed Son of Jeho- 
 vih! 
 
 And God granted two days' recreation, 
 during which time the ethereans mingled 
 with the atmosphereans in great delight. 
 Afterwards, Moses, with his hosts went to 
 Elaban, his colony of Eguptians, who were 
 now raised high in the grades. And Moses 
 had them removed to Aroqu, where they 
 were duly prepared and adorned as Brides 
 and Bridegrooms of Jehovih. And, after 
 suitable preparation, Moses provided for 
 their ascent to the Nirvanian fields of Met- 
 apotamas, in etherea, sending them in 
 charge of his own hosts. 
 
 After that, Moses and his remaining 
 hosts descended to the earth, to Arabin'- 
 ya, to the tribes of Es'eans, which had 
 been raised up by Illaes. And great was 
 the meeting betwixt Illaes and Moses. The 
 former broke down with emotion. He 
 said: All praise to Thee, O Jehovih! Thou 
 hast remembered me at last. 
 
 Moses came to him, and said: I have 
 come for thee, O Nu-ghan! I have a place 
 prepared for thee and thy hosts in my 
 etherean kingdoms! Thou hast done well! 
 
 Then Moses and his hosts drew their 
 otevan down to the angel camp, which was 
 near the camp of the mortals, the Es'eans. 
 Many of the Es'eans looked up and beheld 
 the otevan. And Moses and Illaes went 
 and stood before Joshu, and he saw them. 
 
 Moses said unto him: My son! my son! 
 The light of Eloih is upon thee. Israel, 
 through thee, shall regain the All One. 
 
 Thereupon, Moses and his hosts, to- 
 gether with Illaes and his hosts, went into 
 the otevan, and immediately took course 
 for Paradise, God's heavenly seat, where 
 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 475 
 
 they arrived in due season. And, after 
 three days, they again entered the fire-ship, 
 and took course for Moses' etherean 
 realms. 
 
 CHAPTER LI. 
 
 Now, behold, Looeamong stood no 
 longer upon the practice of righteousness, 
 but upon might. Neither considered he 
 more the resurrection of mortals or angels. 
 
 The craft and wisdom of Baal baffled 
 Looeamong, in both his heavenly battles 
 and his battles for mortals. The whole of 
 the countries of Egupt, Par'si'e, Heleste 
 and Uropa were in war; and the heavens of 
 these countries were also in war, with hun- 
 dreds of hells within them. Looeamong 
 fought no longer for the Trinity nor the 
 Holy Ghost, but to save his heavenly king- 
 dom, lest he be captured, and cast into 
 hell. And even more desperately was Baal 
 situated against him. 
 
 In the meantime, the other two Triunes 
 began to war against each other in their 
 heavenly kingdoms, contending for boun- 
 daries and subjects. 
 
 Thoth sent the following message to 
 Looeamong, to-wit: Greeting to thee, 
 thou Most High Triune, in the name of the 
 Holy Ghost. Wherein I am embarrassed, 
 I pray thee, give me leniency. My suit 
 is not without due deliberation and through 
 prayers to the Holy Ghost. Long have I 
 fought thy battles, and I have gained great 
 power and authority in many kingdoms, in 
 heaven and earth. 
 
 But, behold, I labor against Gods who 
 have the advantage of me. The Chine'ya 
 rebel Gods and the Vind'yu rebel Gods, 
 have taken upon themselves names 
 I popular with mortals: Nestor, alias Puith; 
 Neptune, alias Poseidon; Oileus, alias Pen- 
 dre; Priam, alias Hogath; Phoebus, alias 
 Onewakax, and Apollo; Pales, alias Shu- 
 ganista; Pelides, alias Peleus; Saturn, alias 
 Kronos; Thaleia, alias Musae; Thestor, 
 alias Suko, Bayrith and Calchas; Thetis, 
 alias Arama, Mi, Mara, Achill'ya and Ar- 
 gos; Venus, alias Seinalt, Vishnu, Mira, 
 Thor and Theo; Vulcan, alias Anawahah, 
 Ir, Agni and Hefaste'yan; Calianessa, alias 
 Vritta; Hecla, alias Jah, Tyronia and Nile- 
 us; Nermertis, alias Itra, Prometh'ya, Ari 
 and Mithra; Opsendes, alias Miletus, Brah- 
 ma, Ishaka, Davetat, Sakaya and Moroto- 
 
 tha; Pherna, alias Holasa, Iao, Crite and 
 Thammus; Speio, alias Pelides, Hecla and 
 Vulcan; Thor, alias Padua, Hermes, Be- 
 lus, Hiroth and Yosammis; Thoa, alias 
 Thor, Neptune, Orion, Aph and Thulis; 
 Quiurnus, Vishnu, Ahambre, K'isna, Atys 
 and Etus. 
 
 And yet these are not all. For these 
 Gods have no fear of the Holy Ghost, and 
 they choose any name that will be flatter- 
 ing to mortals. And the magicians and 
 priests, and such others as have power to 
 hear the voices of spirits, are led to be- 
 lieve that they hear the very Gods whose 
 names are given. This, then, is my misfor- 
 tune, thou most Holy God of the Triune: 
 
 I am commanded to give but one name, 
 even the Holy Ghost, of the Father, to 
 mortals. Or, whether my angel hosts 
 speak to the oracles or to persons capable 
 of hearing spirits, and say to them: Fight 
 ye for the Holy Ghost, or fight ye for the 
 Creative element, mortals heed us not. Or, 
 they irreverently mock us, saying: What 
 care we for a God that is but a ghost, a 
 shadow, a creative element? Give us Gods 
 that talk, and of themselves. We want no 
 angels from the Holy Ghost. Bring your 
 Gods, and let the oracles tell us what they 
 say. 
 
 Looeamong then sent messengers and a 
 suitable escort to Jerusalem, on the earth, 
 where Thoth was stationed at the time, 
 with an angel host of warriors, command- 
 ing his presence before his Holy Council 
 in Hapsendi, Looeamong's heavenly city 
 and kingdom. 
 
 Now, after Thoth went thither, and they 
 held a Council of many days, a disturbance 
 arose in the Council in consequence of the 
 heat of the debates. For the Gods of the 
 Council, for the most part, said: What 
 better are we than the Jehovihians? What 
 greater power have we than the Jehovih- 
 ians? Who can answer the philosophy of 
 Thoth? It is a truth, mortals have never 
 been satisfied with an angel from the 
 Gods. They want the God himself. Was 
 not this forever the weakness of the Jeho- 
 vihians? Such angels could give no name 
 that mortals knew, save they falsely as- 
 sumed a name. Hence their weakness, 
 compared to such angels as unscrupulous- 
 ly assumed to be Gods. 
 
476 
 
 CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 We all knew these things before our 
 Confederacy was formed. Yea, one of 
 the chief reasons for forming a confed- 
 eracy in heaven was that we might more 
 effectually overcome the power of evil spir- 
 its over mortals. In that day, we said: 
 The three persons, the Son, the Father and 
 the Holy Ghost, would enable us to ap- 
 pear in person and with authority unto 
 mortals. But it hath now come to pass 
 mortals desire a more definite God, one 
 known to them. We cannot truthfully 
 take the name of any God Thoth hath 
 named; nor of any other God worshipped 
 by mortals. 
 
 Looeamong then drove hence from the 
 palace his High Council, that he might 
 have an opportunity to reason with himself, 
 as to what he should do. 
 
 Satan said to Looeamong: Behold, thy 
 one-time brother Triunes have had great 
 advantage of thee from the start. They 
 had more populous kingdoms and subjects 
 of higher grades. Nevertheless, wherein 
 they have prospered thou shalt be wise. 
 They also found it necessary to have a 
 name, that mortals could call unto. And 
 they took upon themselves the names, 
 Brahma and Budha, both of which signify 
 All Knowledge; and this hath satisfied mor- 
 tals. 
 
 Now, thou shalt choose the name, 
 Kriste, which is the Ahamic word for All 
 Knowledge also. In this, then, thou shalt 
 have truth on thy side in heaven before thy 
 High Council, and on earth thou shalt 
 have a personal embodiment. 
 
 CHAPTER LII. 
 
 Thus, it came to pass as had been 
 foretold by God, Jehovih's Son: The Tri- 
 unes will all become false Gods, because 
 they have denied the Almighty. 
 
 God said: There is but One, who is All 
 Knowledge. Whatsoever angel or God an- 
 nounceth himself to be All Knowledge, is 
 false in presence of Jehovih. 
 
 Nevertheless, Looeamong had it pro- 
 claimed in heaven and earth that he was 
 The Kriste, which is the Ahamic expression 
 for All Knowledge. Therefore, Looe- 
 among was from this time forth a false 
 God in heaven and on earth. 
 
 And Looeamong commanded Thoth, 
 his angel warrior in command of his earth- 
 
 ly dominions, to raise up tribes of warriors 
 amongst mortals. And, by the inspiration 
 of Thoth, these warriors were induced to- 
 call themselves Kriste'yans. 
 
 Now, it came to pass, that from this 
 time forth great success attended the wars 
 of Looeamong for the glory of his heavenly 
 kingdoms. And, for the space of three 
 hundred years, Looeamong gradually gain- 
 ed on Baal and his alliances, both on earth 
 and in heaven. 
 
 And Looeamong captured and cast out 
 of his dominions more than seven hundred- 
 false Gods and false Lords. And he broke 
 up six hundred and eighty oracle-houses 
 and temples, used for consulting the spirits,, 
 who called themselves Gods, whose only 
 service was to advise on war, conquest and 
 destruction. So, that, even in Looeamong's 
 falsity, he rendered a great service to Je- 
 hovih, against whom he was doing battle. 
 
 For three hundred years more, Looea- 
 mong, with upward of six thousand million 
 angel warriors, pursued war in heaven and 
 on earth; and he had captured mostly all 
 the earthly strongholds of other false Gods. 
 Baal, however, still maintained himself in 
 Roma, and as God of the Roman empire,, 
 but under many names. 
 
 Now, Looeamong, the false God, be- 
 wailed the wars, and he also bewailed his 
 own doctrines. 
 
 Looeamong cried out in his despair, 
 saying: To whom shall I pray, O thou 
 Holy Ghost? Thou shadow, thou nothing, 
 thou void? Shall I say: O thou all 
 nothing? Thou inconceivable? Thou un- 
 knowable? Thou all hidden? Or shall I 
 say: O thou nature? Thou God of na- 
 ture? Thou senseless? Thou scattered? 
 Thou that hearest not? Thou that knowest 
 not? Thou that seest not? Thou essence? 
 Thou fountain, that is dumb? Thou acci- 
 dent? Thou shapeless? Thou imperson? 
 Thou shortness in all? That beguileth us 
 to come hither, to find thee? Or to go 
 hither to find thee? And find of a truth, 
 that we find thee not? Yea, to under- 
 stand that thou art the waste and desolate 
 of all that is? 
 
 And, as for the Father, which we three 
 built up, is He not dead? A divided king- 
 dom, with three astrayed sons? And every 
 one for himself? O thou Brahma, thou hast 
 a peaceful division. And thou, Budha, a 
 place of great profit. 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 7 
 
 But I, your equal, with an unprofitable 
 division of these western heavens. Mine 
 are warriors in heaven and on earth. 
 Yours, peace and profit. How can I em- 
 bellish Hapsendi, my heavenly seat? And 
 make it a place of grandeur, like unto 
 yours? Behold, my thousands of millions 
 of angels are needed for warriors. How 
 have I time to embellish my throne, and 
 my heavenly city? No wonder, ye twain 
 point the finger of mockery at me, for the 
 poverty of my heavenly kingdom. 
 
 Have I not been fighting battles with 
 satan all these hundreds and hundreds of 
 years? Did I not find heaven, even from 
 the first a place of war? Shall these things 
 continue forever? Whom shall I inquire 
 of? Have I not declared, I am one with 
 the Father, and one with the Holy Ghost? 
 
 Why, then, shall I not look to myself? 
 And is this not the sum of all? Every one 
 for himself? Was not myself a self from 
 the first? And to continue a self for itself 
 forever? Henceforth, I go not down to 
 send peace on earth; I go not to send 
 peace, but a sword. I go to set man at var- 
 iance against his brother and father, and 
 woman against her sister and mother, and 
 a daughter-in-law against her mother-in- 
 law. I will make the foes of a man, they 
 of his own household. 
 
 He that loveth father or mother more 
 than me, is not worthy of me; and he that 
 loveth son or daughter more than me, is 
 not worthy of me. And he that will not 
 take up his sword and proclaim me, is not 
 worthy of me. 
 
 My signs shall be a sword, a skull and 
 cross-bones, and a bull. My edicts shall 
 be bulls; by these shall mine enemies be 
 destroyed. Before me shall every knee 
 bow down, and every tongue confess me, 
 Lord of all. 
 
 Behold, I will give them a book and a 
 guide, whereby they shall know me; in 
 blood will I seal them to the end of the 
 world. 
 
 CHAPTER LIII. 
 
 Whilst Looeamong, the false God, was 
 yet bewailing, behold, Thoth, his chief 
 warrior God, came to him, saying: 
 
 Alas, O master, thy followers have no 
 king or queen on earth to protect them. 
 Thy mortal Kriste'yan warriors, who drew 
 
 the sword to establish thee, have been 
 slaughtered in Cardalia, Cyprus, Aitina, 
 Thessalonico, Dalmatia, Lacaonia, Napla, 
 Selucia, Macedon, Galati and Scythia. 
 
 In Thebes, six thousand Kriste'yan 
 warriors were massacred by the armies of 
 the emperor Maximus, inspired by Baal. 
 
 In Eocla, the Gods Jupiter and Ira in- 
 spired the king Hoethus to slaughter three 
 thousand seven hundred Kriste'yan sol- 
 diers. 
 
 In Utica, the God Jupiter, with seven 
 thousand angels, caused three hundred of 
 thy soldiers to be burnt in a lime kiln. 
 
 In Damascus, two thousand seven hun- 
 dred of thy warriors were cut to pieces 
 with the sword. And the only charge 
 against them was that they were fighting 
 for thee. Yea, their sacred bull was 
 taken from them and roasted alive. And 
 their bloody cross, which thou gavest them 
 as a sign of the battle-cry, was broken and 
 burnt. 
 
 In Crete, one thousand eight hundred 
 of thy warriors, who had served thee well 
 in slaughtering pagans, were walled around 
 with fire, and roasted alive. 
 
 On the plains of Agatha, where thy sol- 
 diers, three hundred and eighty of them, 
 were returning with their booty, having 
 done thee great service in destroying hea- 
 then temples, they were set upon by the 
 Gath'yans and destroyed, and for no other 
 cause than that they served thee. 
 
 Looeamong cried out: Enough! 
 Enough, O Thoth! I, too, will have a 
 mortal emperor. Descend thou again to 
 the earth, to Hatuas, and inspire thou him 
 to raise a mortal army of forty thousand 
 men, and move upon Roma. Behold, I will 
 prove myself before Hatuas, and he shall 
 covenant unto me. Through him will I 
 drive Baal out of Roma. And, as I make 
 myself Kriste of heaven, so will I make 
 Hatuas emperor of the whole earth. 
 
 Thoth then descended to the earth, to 
 Hatuas, who was a su'is, and could both 
 see angels and hear them talk; and Thoth 
 induced Hatuas to raise an army of forty 
 thousand soldiers, and set out for con- 
 quest. 
 
 And when they had come to the plains 
 of Agatha, even where the Kriste'yans had 
 been massacred many years before, behold, 
 Looeamong and his angel hosts appeared 
 
478 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 in the heavens, above Hatuas' army, so 
 that all the soldiers thereof beheld the hea- 
 venly visitors. And Looeamong showed 
 unto Hatuas, in the air of heaven, a true 
 cross, on which was written in letters of 
 blood: Il'Kriste. 
 
 Nevertheless, there was no man present 
 who could read the inscription; and many 
 were the conjectures thereon. In the even- 
 ing, Looeamong descended to Hatuas, and 
 said unto him: This is the interpretation 
 of the sign and cross I showed thee: 
 
 In this sign thou shalt conquer! 
 
 And when thou arisest in the morning 
 thou shalt cause to be made a cross, of 
 most excellent workmanship; and thou 
 shalt have it inscribed: The Kriste, our 
 Lord, Son of the Holy Ghost. 
 
 And this cross shalt thou cause to be 
 carried at the head of thy army. And thy 
 edicts shalt thou call bulls, and they shall 
 be written with lamb's blood, in remem- 
 brance of the sacrifice of the Jews in 
 Egupt, through which sacrifice the Father 
 in heaven delivered them. For I am Lord 
 of heaven and earth. 
 
 Accordingly, a cross was made, and 
 highly decorated, and inscribed as com- 
 manded, and Hatuas and his soldiers went 
 forth with renewed courage. And so great 
 was their zeal, that everything fell before 
 them. 
 
 And now, that Looeamong's angels had 
 an anchorage on earth, they were in all 
 respects the equals of the angels of the pa- 
 gan Gods. So that, whilst Hatuas was vic- 
 torious on earth, Gabriel, otherwise Thoth, 
 was victorious in heaven. And in not many 
 years, Looeamong, through Gabriel, cap- 
 tured Baal and all the false Gods in all the 
 regions far and near. And Gabriel took, 
 along with the captured Gods, seven 
 million six hundred thousand warring an- 
 gels, and carried them all off to Maka- 
 vishtu, in hada, and cast them into hell, 
 where there were already more than ten 
 millions who were in chaos and madness. 
 And Gabriel had the place walled around 
 with fire and noxious gases, so that none 
 could escape. 
 
 Such was the end of the earthly domin- 
 ion of Baal, who had ruled over mortals 
 for evil, for upward of three thuosand 
 years. And, in fact, it was the final ter- 
 mination of the earthly Gods that ruled 
 
 over mortals through the oracles and pagan 
 practices. 
 
 Looeamong inspired Hatuas, the mortal 
 emperor, to call together a council of wise 
 men from all the kingdoms of Arabin'ya, 
 Heleste, Par'si'e and Uropa, to select from 
 all the religious doctrines in the world, 
 that which was the wisest and best, that it 
 might be established by kings, emperors 
 and governors by the sword and spear, so 
 there should never more be but one re- 
 ligion. 
 
 And, in course of time, there assembled 
 a council of seventeen hundred and eighty- 
 six learned men from all the regions 
 named, and they placed themselves under 
 the rules and presence of Hatuas. And he 
 selected from them one hundred and forty- 
 four speakers. As for the others, they were 
 divided into groups of twelves, besides a 
 goodly number being appointed scribes and 
 translators. But many, having the appear- 
 ance of Jews, were rejected altogether. 
 
 Now, the council had brought with 
 them, in all, two thousand two hundred 
 and thirty-one books and legendary tales 
 of Gods and Saviors and great men, to- 
 gether with a record of the doctrines 
 taught by them. Hatuas, being under the 
 inspiration of Looeamong, through Gabri- 
 el, alias Thoth, thus spake: 
 
 Search ye these books, and whatsoever 
 is good in them, that retain; but, whatso- 
 ever is evil, that cast away. What is good 
 in one book, unite ye with that which is 
 good in another book. And whatsoever is 
 thus brought together shall be called, The 
 Book of Books. And it shall be the doc- 
 trine of my people, which I will recommend 
 unto all nations, that there shall be no more 
 war for religion's sake. 
 
 Thoth and his angel hosts formed a cir- 
 cle around about the mortal council, a 
 thousand angels deep on every side, and ex- 
 tending upward densely for a long way, 
 and thence, by a line of light, extending to 
 Looeamong's throne, in Hapsendi, his hea- 
 venly kingdom. By day and by night, 
 Thoth and his hosts watched over the 
 mortal council, overshadowing their every 
 thought and word. 
 
 For four years and seven months the 
 council thus deliberated, and selected from 
 the two thousand two hundred and thirty- 
 one books and legendary tales. And, at 
 the end of that time, there had been select- 
 
CYCLE OF L1KA 
 
 479 
 
 ed and combined much that was good and 
 great, and worded so as to be well remem- 
 bered by mortals. 
 
 As yet, no God had been selected by the 
 council, and so they balloted, in order to 
 determine that matter. And the first bal- 
 lot gave prominence to the following Gods: 
 Jove, Jupiter, Salenus, Baal, Thor, Gade, 
 Apollo, Juno, Aries, Taurus, Minerva, 
 Rhets, Mithra, Theo, Fragapatti, Atys, 
 Durga, Indra, Neptune, Vulcan, Kriste, 
 Agni, Croesus, Pelides, Huit, Hermes, 
 Thulis, Thammus, Eguptus, Iao, Aph, Sat- 
 urn, Gitchens, Minos, Maximo, Hecla, and 
 Phernes. Besides these, there were twen- 
 ty-two other Gods and Goddesses, that re- 
 ceived a small number of votes each. 
 
 In seven days thereafter, another bal- 
 lot was taken, and the number of Gods 
 was reduced to twenty-seven; and in seven 
 days thereafter, another ballot was taken, 
 and the number of Gods was reduced to 
 twenty-one. Thus was the number reduced 
 each ballot, but slower and slower. Six 
 days in the week were allotted to discuss 
 the merits and demerits of the Gods. But 
 many weeks elapsed toward the last, when 
 the number was not reduced. 
 
 For one year and five months the bal- 
 loting lasted, and at that time the ballot 
 rested nearly equal on five Gods, namely: 
 Jove, Kriste, Mars, Crite and Siva. And 
 here the ballot changed not for yet seven 
 times more, which was seven weeks. 
 
 Hatuas spake before the council, saying: 
 Ours is a labor for all the nations of the 
 earth, and for all time. I know the angels 
 of heaven are with us in this matter. We 
 have found five Gods, good and acceptable 
 before the world. What say the council, 
 that the angels give us a sign? For we all 
 know the signs of these Gods. 
 
 The council said: Well said, thou wisest 
 of men! Such a God shall be ours, now 
 and forever. 
 
 And immediately, then and there, Loo- 
 eamong and his angels gave a sign in fire, 
 of a cross smeared with blood, and it rest- 
 ed on a bull's horns. 
 
 Whereupon Kriste was declared God 
 and Lord of all the nations of the earth. 
 
 And the council agreed thereto, unani- 
 mously, and, moreover, to reject all other 
 Gods. 
 
 The next question was, what mortal 
 representative should be chosen? 
 
 The first ballot brought out the follow- 
 ing men: Zarathustra, Thothma, Abra- 
 ham, Brahma, Atys, Thammus, Joshu, Sa- 
 kaya, Habron, Bali, Crite, Chrisna, Thulis, 
 Wittoba and Speio. Besides these, there 
 were included in the ballot, forty-six other 
 men, who received a small number of bal- 
 lots each. 
 
 Now the Council of Nice balloted for 
 twelve months as to what man heard the 
 Voice? 
 
 Hatuas said: The Gods will not let us 
 choose any man. Now, therefore, hear me: 
 Many of those chosen by the Gods have 
 been iesu. Now, since we cannot make 
 preference as to a man, let us say: The 
 man, Iesu. 
 
 Thereupon, the name, Iesu, was adopt- 
 ed, and the sacred books were written ac- 
 cordingly. 
 
 CHAPER LIV. 
 
 After Looeamong had cast out all other 
 false Gods in his earthly dominions, he 
 began enriching his heavenly home, em- 
 ploying no less than seven thousand million 
 angel slaves for that purpose. The place 
 and extent of his heavenly capital was from 
 Hasetus to Roma, and thence northward 
 to the Aquarian Mountains. 
 
 His palace was modeled after Ennochis- 
 sa's, at Eta-shong, and of equal magnifi- 
 cence. His greatest warriors were now 
 exalted as Lords, generals, marshals, and 
 so on. And he provided rites and ceremo- 
 nies, and tournaments, and all manner of 
 heavenly diversities. 
 
 But he made the rules of entrance to 
 his palace so rigid, that only his highest 
 officers and visiting Gods could gain ac- 
 cess to him. 
 
 Now, for upward of a thousand years, 
 the angel warrior, Gabriel, alias Thoth, 
 had been to Looeamong, his most faithful 
 sub-God. And Looeamong had promised 
 Gabriel that, when he overthrew Baal, and 
 cast him in hell, he would give to Gabriel 
 a great heavenly kingdom, with an earthly 
 base. 
 
 Accordingly, Thoth applied for Jerusa- 
 lem, and for the heavens thereunto belong- 
 ing, and for one thousand million slaves. 
 But Looeamong postponed the matter from 
 
480 
 
 CYCLE OF L1KA 
 
 time to time, for more than six hundred 
 years. 
 
 Thoth then sent this message to Looe- 
 among, to-wit: By virtue of mine own 
 worth before the Gods of heaven, I greet 
 thee in peace and love. 
 
 First, in remembrance of thy many 
 promises to me, in which thou hast kept 
 no part thereof. 
 
 Second, that thou art not Kriste, which 
 is All Knowledge, but a usurper and pre- 
 tender. 
 
 Third, that I made thee what thou art: 
 and by mine own hand helped thee to cast 
 out Baal and Ashtaroth, and all the Roma'- 
 yan and .Argos'yan Gods. Of which mat- 
 ters it is known in these three great hea- 
 vens, thou didst promise me for more than 
 seven hundred years, to give me a king- 
 dom of a thousand million subjects. 
 
 And, fourth, since thou art safely raised 
 up above all Gods within these regions, 
 thou hast affected to not know me. Yea, 
 and in thy great heavenly recreations and 
 tournaments and receptions, thou hast not 
 commanded my presence, or in any way 
 shown more remembrance of me than as if 
 I were an es'yan. 
 
 And fifth, thou didst long promise me 
 that, if thou shouldst succeed in establish- 
 ing a sub-kingdom on the earth, or in hada, 
 thou wouldst hand the same over to me, 
 to rank equal with thee in all things. But 
 thou hast greedily kept both kingdoms to 
 thyself, making either place thy residence, 
 according to the times and seasons most 
 propitious to thine own glory and ease. 
 
 And, lastly, that thou sacrificest the lib- 
 erty of thy subjects, making them thy la- 
 borers to embellish thy kingdom, and mak- 
 ing them little better than slaves, in forever 
 parading in the ceremonies given in thy 
 applause. 
 
 These things have I often desired to see 
 thee about; but thou ever pretended to be 
 overrun with other matters, so as to put 
 me off from my opportunity. Whereupon 
 I have prayed to the Holy Ghost, for hun- 
 dreds of years, to have my suit just and 
 honorable and holy. 
 
 But I shall search no further. Hundreds 
 of millions of thy highest grades, who went 
 down to the earth with me to fight thy bat- 
 tles, and who know the justness of my 
 cause, will, at a word from me, withdraw 
 
 from thy kingdom, and join me in an en- 
 terprise of mine own. I shall await patient- 
 ly for thy reply. 
 
 But Gabriel received no reply to his 
 message. And so, in course of time, he 
 called together ten thousand angel war- 
 riors, and they assembled in a place called 
 Kalla-Hored, the place of seven steps, in 
 hada. Gabriel spake before them, saying: 
 
 Here will I establish my kingdom of 
 heaven, and forever. I will show this false 
 Kriste, what I can do. Mark ye, the great 
 power of a God is to establish a good foot- 
 hold on the earth. The natural increase 
 will soon populate a heavenly kingdom. 
 
 I will raise me up a prophet and seer of 
 mine own on the earth, and establish a 
 new doctrine amongst mortals. Behold, I 
 have a sword that will cut to pieces Looe- 
 among's kingdom on earth. For, listen! 
 In the old Eguptian libraries are books and 
 tablets and manuscripts, that will show 
 the perversity of the Constantine bible. 
 Now, when I have established my prophet, 
 I will cause mortal legions of Arabin'yans 
 to possess these libraries, especially Alex- 
 andria's. And I will raise up mortal schol- 
 ars, who shall establish the truth of my 
 prophet's doctrines, and the falsity oi this 
 Kriste's doctrines; and I will thus overturn 
 his earthly kingdom, and possess all these 
 mortal regions myself to be mine forever! 
 
 After that manner, the angel, Gabriel, 
 boasted. And he made the ten thousand 
 his High Council, and from amongst them 
 he oppointed marshals, captains, generals, 
 heralds and officers in general. And they 
 built a throne in heaven unto Gabriel, and 
 called it the Throne of Kalla-Hored; and 
 he went and sat thereon, and then crowned 
 himself, Gabriel, God of Heaven and Earth. 
 And then he crowned ten Lords, to-wit: 
 Ateiniv, Le Chung, Tudol, Raim, Hakaya, 
 Wochorf, Yademis, Stu'born, Wolf and 
 Gussak. And Gabriel thereafter commenc- 
 ed the initiation of members to his king- 
 dom. And there thus acceded to his hea- 
 venly place upward of five hundred thou- 
 sand angels every day, and this continued 
 until Kalla-Hored contained more than 
 eight hundred million angel subjects. Of 
 these, certain selections were made, ac- 
 cording to grade, who were appointed as 
 officers over the rest; and immediately they 
 were put to work, building heavenly man- 
 
CYCLE OF L1KA 
 
 481 
 
 sions, and constructing streets and roads, 
 and all things required in an exalted hea- 
 ven, and in the meantime Gabriel's palace 
 and throne were extended and beautified 
 beyond description. 
 
 Gabriel knew the power of rites and cer- 
 emonies, and he provided unto his heaven- 
 ly kingdom accordingly, so that his people 
 were kept in a constant strain of excite- 
 ment, because of his wonderful inventions. 
 So that millions and millions of them truly 
 believed he was the veritable Creator of 
 heaven and earth, thus in the form of an 
 angel. Gabriel perceived this, and for these 
 he provided places of trust and nearness to 
 him, that his miraculous power might be 
 the better strengthened with the unbeliev- 
 ing. 
 
 Now, the time came when Gabriel's 
 kingdom was sufficiently established, and 
 he began to provide for his great scheme 
 to establish himself with mortals, that their 
 spirits after death might be brought to his 
 kingdom. For such is the order of Jeho- 
 vih's creation, that whomsoever man wor- 
 shipped whilst he is on earth, to that God 
 will his spirit float after death; and with- 
 out resistance become a dutiful slave, not 
 knowing there be other Gods and other 
 heavens. 
 
 And Gabriel made Ateiniv Chief Lord 
 of Lords to go down to the earth, and 
 find a mortal capable of the required inspir- 
 ation. And he gave to Atieniv to be his 
 •co-laborers, Yademis, Stu'born and Wolf, 
 and with them, at their call, three hundred 
 million warrior angels. And with his host, 
 Atieniv departed for the earth, for Arabin'- 
 ya; and as he went forth he dropped of his 
 hosts, at certain distances, groups of angels, 
 which formed the line of light from Gabriel 
 down to the earth. 
 
 CHAPTER LV. 
 
 Gabriel raised upon the earth one Mo- 
 hammed, and inspired him through his an- 
 gel hosts. And the angels inspired Mo- 
 hammed to go once every month in the 
 year into the cave of Hara; on which occa- 
 sions, Gabriel came in person, and talked 
 with Mohammed, who had su'is in great 
 perfection. 
 
 Twelve years in peace did Gabriel in- 
 spire mortals through Mohammed. But, 
 at the end of thirteen years, Mohammed 
 
 attained to sufficient strength to draw the 
 sword for Gabriel's doctrines. And Gabri- 
 el, through inspiration, caused the Moham- 
 medans to commemorate this as the be- 
 ginning of his kingdom on earth. And 
 they, therefore, consecrated the said period 
 of time. And, on this first meeting of the 
 faithful in Gabriel, Mohammed, being un- 
 der inspiration, spake before the multitude, 
 saying: 
 
 There is but one God, and he is God. 
 Heaven is his. The earth is the Lord's, 
 through the angel, Gabriel. This is the 
 sum and substance of all things. This was 
 the doctrine of Abraham and of Moses, 
 our forefathers. But evil men have invent- 
 ed other Gods, which have no existence. 
 They are idols, which exist only in super- 
 stition and ignorance. 
 
 Revere me not, nor call me wise. I 
 am not wise; I have little learning. Knowl- 
 edge cometh to me from the Unseen. My 
 eyes are open, my ears are open. I see 
 and hear spiritual things. The angels of 
 heaven tell me things of wisdom. I do but 
 repeat them. Therefore, I am not wise, 
 nor great. I strive to be honest and up- 
 right before God, but I am weaker that a 
 child in these respects. Therefore, wor- 
 ship not me, nor bow down before me. I 
 am nothing. 
 
 As I am an instrument in the hands of 
 God, through his angel, Gabriel, so also 
 were Abraham and Moses and many of the 
 prophets. They could work miracles. I 
 cannot. Therefore, I am the least of God's 
 prophets. 
 
 That ye may become exalted before 
 God, I am sent into the world. Shall I 
 reveal what Gabriel hath told me? Or do 
 ye believe God is dead, or gone afar off? 
 Believe ye, that he cannot raise up a proph- 
 et in this day? Is God weak? Or hath he 
 forgotten the world he created? 
 
 Why hath this thing come at this time? 
 No man can answer that. Gabriel saith: 
 There is a false God in heaven, and he hath 
 falsely called himself, Kriste. Gabriel 
 saith, that he himself, Gabriel, provided the 
 way for the gathering of the lost sheep of 
 Israel, through an iesu. 
 
 Brothers, I will tell you why I am chos- 
 en of God: It is to circumvent the Kriste'- 
 yans' idolatry from coming into Arabin'ya 
 and the countries north and south and east. 
 
482 
 
 CYCLE OF L1KA 
 
 These countries were given by God to our 
 forefathers, Abraham, Isaac and Jacob, and 
 thence down to Moses, and thence down to 
 us. 
 
 There is but one God, and Gabriel is his 
 angel of all the world. And God raiseth 
 up a prophet from time to time, to bless 
 his chosen people. He put this matter upon 
 me; I know only to serve God. 
 
 The Kriste'yans are merciless warriors. 
 This false Kriste and his worshippers are 
 working for the Romans, and not for sal- 
 vation. Wherever they go, they destroy 
 the libraries, and all manner of learning. 
 Will ye submit, like slaves, to have them 
 despoil you? Is there no Arabin'yan blood 
 in your veins? 
 
 When asked to state the Mohammedan 
 doctrines, he said: To tell no lies; to not 
 commit fornication; to preserve the cere- 
 monies; to give to the poor freely; to ob- 
 serve the sacred days; to aggress not; but 
 to war for the innocent and oppressed; to 
 maintain the liberty of the people; to steal 
 not, and to deceive no man. 
 
 Mohammed, being under inspiration of 
 the God, Gabriel, and his angels, collected 
 together thousands and tens of thousands 
 of warriors, and went forth to conquer. 
 And the angel hosts of Gabriel went forth 
 with Mohammed's army, and inspired them 
 to such degree that they were without fear 
 or hesitation. And Gabriel's hosts of an- 
 gels went into the armies that fought 
 against Mohammed, and inspired them 
 with fear and cowardice and panic. And 
 wherever Mohammed went, there was 
 sure victory, the like of which had not been 
 for many centuries. 
 
 Looeamong, the false Kriste, had pre- 
 viously destroyed, for the most part, the 
 Alexandrian library, having inspired a mor- 
 tal priest, Coatulius, to do the work. And 
 Looeamong, now perceiving the triumph 
 of Mohammed, inspired three hundred 
 monks and priests to go throughout He- 
 leste and Arabin'ya, and destroy the ancient 
 state records and libraries. 
 
 Mohammed was shown this by Gabriel, 
 and he used it as a battle-cry for his sol- 
 diers. 
 
 Looeamong now declared war in hea- 
 ven against the false God, Gabriel; and, in 
 not many years they both carried their war 
 
 down to earth, contending for certain lo- 
 calities on the earth. 
 
 As for the other two false Gods, Kaba- 
 lactes, alias Budha, and Ennochissa, alias 
 Brahma, they had been at war against 
 each other for over six hundred years. 
 Now had these four false Gods possession 
 of the whole earth, at least, wherever there 
 were mortal kingdoms and empires. 
 
 Now, in reference to the Faithists: In 
 Chine'ya and Vind'yu, they were no longer 
 identified with the kingdoms or govern- 
 ments, but lived about in scattered families. 
 In Arabin'ya, Heleste and Uropa, they were 
 scattered in all directions. From the time 
 of Joshu's death, in Jerusalem, they began 
 to migrate, mostly toward the west. And 
 there called themselves, Israelites and 
 Jews. The Jews, so-called, were apostates 
 in fact; eating flesh, and marrying with 
 other peoples. 
 
 Now, after the fall of the great empire, 
 Egupt, her people migrated westward, hun- 
 dreds of thousands of them, and they set- 
 tled in western Uropa, where these people 
 married with the aborigines. Their off- 
 spring were called Druids, Picts, Gales, 
 Wales, Galls, and Yohans, all of which are 
 Eguptian names. Now, when the Faithists 
 were moved by the inspiration of God to 
 have no more kings, and to flee away from 
 the Kriste'yan warriors, they came amongst 
 the people above mentioned. The apostate 
 Faithists married with them. 
 
 God, Son of Jehovih, had said: Suffer 
 the apostates to so marry, for here will I 
 find a way to raise up disbelievers in the 
 false Kriste; and they shall ultimately be- 
 come believers in Jehovih only. For, inas- 
 much as I have suffered them to become 
 scattered, so will I appropriate them to 
 quicken all the races of men to comprehend 
 the All One. 
 
 CHAPTER LVI. 
 
 For five hundred years more, the wars 
 lasted between the four false Gods, Looea- 
 mong, Thoth, Ennochissa and Kabalactes. 
 And then they came to terms, and ratified 
 a division of the earth and her heavens into 
 four great parts, with fixed boundaries. 
 And it was stipulated by them, that the 
 spirits of all mortals at time of death, 
 should go to the heaven which reigned on 
 
CYCLE OF L1KA 
 
 483 
 
 the portion of the earth where they had 
 lived. 
 
 So comparative peace reigned in the 
 heavens of the earth. And after this, there 
 was nothing in common between them. 
 Their respective heavens and their earth 
 possessions were under each one in his 
 own way. 
 
 And they now worked earnestly to 
 adorn and glorify their heavenly kingdoms, 
 their cities, their palaces, and thrones. And 
 each of them exalted their great war cap- 
 tains who had fought so long for them, and 
 they all had councils of millions and mill- 
 ions; and marshals and heralds, and mas- 
 ters of ceremonies, and musicians, hun- 
 dreds of millions. 
 
 And they all had thousands of millions 
 of subjects; but as for themselves, they 
 kept aloof from their people. The private 
 palaces of these Gods, and their private 
 heavenly seats of splendor were seclusive 
 to themselves and their favorite Lords and 
 high officers. 
 
 And all angels else, who desired to see 
 these Gods, were obliged to pass through 
 rigid examinations, and solemnly bind 
 themselves in oaths and castigations before 
 they were permitted to pass the outer col- 
 umns of fire. After this, they were per- 
 mitted to walk on their knees to the second 
 columns of fire. 
 
 Here they were obliged to repeat a 
 thousand prayers and a thousand anthems 
 ere they could pass within. And now, 
 when within the arena, they were obliged 
 to crawl on their bellies; and, for every 
 length crawled, they had to repeat seven 
 new prayers. And it was a thousand 
 lengths from the inner pillars of fire to the 
 arches of the palace, especially of Kabalac- 
 tes' and Looeamong's. Of these arches, 
 there were three million three hundred and 
 thirty-three thousand three hundred and 
 thirty-three in number. And there were 
 four marshals for each arch, and these four 
 had two relief watches for each twenty-four 
 hours. 
 
 To pass the arches, another examination 
 had to be undergone; and, after this, the 
 person must again crawl on the belly till 
 merging into the under arch, where stairs 
 began, of which there were seven steps. 
 On each of these steps he must lay one day, 
 repeating prayers and praises to his God. 
 
 On the upper step, however, he was not re- 
 quired to pray, but might look in silence at 
 the throne, on which, at times, his God 
 came and sat, his Holy Council sitting to 
 the west, facing the east, to the throne. 
 
 From the place of the person on the up- 
 per step to the throne, was five hundred 
 lengths, nearer than which none were per- 
 mitted to come, save by the God's special 
 decree. And, if the God was not on his 
 throne, and his Holy Council sitting, then 
 the person must wait, not moving from his 
 place, perhaps for a day or more. But, af- 
 ter he had observed his God, he was not 
 permitted to remain longer than to say 
 seven prayers. After this he must return, 
 and depart in the same way he came. 
 
 Now, as to the throne and its brilliancy 
 and grandeur, no mortal words can con- 
 vey a knowledge thereof to mortal under- 
 standing; for it was so vast, and withal 
 adorned with elements not found on the 
 earth. Thousands of millions of which 
 gems had been captured from the dispos- 
 sessed false Gods of centuries before. 
 
 And equally astonishing and over- 
 whelming were the seats and places and 
 robes of the Holy Council, which also baf- 
 fleth mortal words to convey an idea of. 
 Only to look on, to be overcome with emo- 
 tion, to remember what great effects can 
 be accomplished by concentrated labor, and 
 to feel the insignificance of isolation, one's 
 wonder was swallowed up in silent awe 
 before the scene. 
 
 Such was the magnificence of each of 
 the four heavenly places of the four false 
 Gods, and not differing but little from one 
 another. In order to obtain the privilege 
 of thus going to look upon the throne and 
 the God thereof, one had to first serve a 
 hundred years in the labors of that hea- 
 ven, and to have his record good during all 
 this time. 
 
 If, in the mortal life, a man had served 
 his God, by preaching and praying, or by 
 fighting battles for him, and had thus at- 
 tained a good record, one hundred years' 
 servitude in heaven entitled him to visit 
 his God on the throne, at the distance 
 named above. 
 
 But if the mortal had been an enemy to 
 the God during his earth-life, he could not 
 attain to approach the throne in less than 
 three hundred years' servitude. Which 
 
484 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 service consisted in laboring in building 
 mansions, or in paving roads in heaven, or 
 in bringing produce up from the earth, or 
 in bringing up other atmospherean ele- 
 ments for the gratification and glory of the 
 God and his tens of millions of high offi- 
 cers. 
 
 So great and grand and far-reaching 
 were these four kingdoms, that angels 
 dwelt therein, hundreds of millions of 
 them, never even hearing of any other hea- 
 ven than the one they were in. 
 
 Now, for the most part, the Brahmans 
 of the earth, on entering the es world, went 
 to the Brahman heavens, ruled over by the 
 false Brahma. And the Budhists of the 
 earth, on entering the es world, went to the 
 Budhist heavens, ruled over by the false 
 Budha. The Kriste'yans of earth, on en- 
 tering the es world, went to the heavens of 
 Looeamong, the false Kriste. The Mo- 
 hammedans went to Gabriel's heavens. Nei- 
 they would they admit they were bound, 
 though they were slaves. Their priests 
 and monks and bishops, archibishops and 
 popes, marched in the processions of hea- 
 ven, praying, singing, and even carrying 
 burdens, hundreds of years, for the privi- 
 lege of ultimately approaching the throne 
 of Ennochissa, or Kabalactes, or Looea- 
 mong, or Thoth, honestly believing they 
 were to look upon the very Creator. 
 
 Their minds were in bondage to so 
 great an extent, that even after they had 
 attained to view their God, at such a dis- 
 tance and in such artificial splendor, they 
 could not receive truth. And when an an- 
 gel of Jehovih came to them, and said: Be-^- 
 hold, this is only one heaven, of which 
 there are millions; this heaven, with all its 
 magnificence, is only one of the lowest 
 of heavens; or, this God, with all his glory, 
 is only one God, of which there are many; 
 there are higher Gods than this; or, the 
 All Highest God is not this, but One not 
 in shape of man; they would not believe. 
 
 These subjects would say: I want not 
 your Jehovih! Behold, I can see my God; 
 he is the Creative element personified. 
 This is the all highest heaven; here is the 
 place and person of the Lord! 
 
 Man sinned not in this; neither sinned 
 the angels of the heavens. The fault was 
 with these false Gods. Because they had 
 taught men that the Creator was in the im- 
 
 age of a man, and sitting on a throne, be- 
 hold, their subjects would not believe oth- 
 
 CHAPTER LVII. 
 
 God, in Paradise, sent the following ap- 
 peal unto the four false Gods: 
 
 In the name of Jehovih, greeting unto 
 you. 
 
 Wherein ye have copied after my ways, 
 ye have gained dominion; but of what 
 profit unto mortals or angels? 
 
 Because ye knew that Jehovih's God 
 appointed ashars unto mortals, ye have also 
 appointed ashars unto them, though not 
 for their resurrection, but to raise up mor- 
 tals with faith in yourselves. Ye have thus 
 built on the earth for the glory of your 
 own kingdoms; for your ashars teach mor- 
 tals not of eternal resurrection, but of at- 
 taining unto your heavens only. 
 
 Thus do your ashars prepare mortals to 
 become slaves in your heavenly kingdoms, 
 that they build unto your own personal 
 glory. For ye take advantage of the in- 
 fant mind, to bend it away from Jehovih, 
 and away from eternal progress, that ye 
 may inherit it as your dutiful subject. 
 
 Wherever I send angels to inspire mor- 
 tals to obtain education and knowledge, 
 ye send contravening angels, and they in- 
 cite mortals to destroy their own libraries 
 and places of learning. 
 
 Ye persuade mortals that the only good 
 and necessary knowledge is contained in 
 your sacred books; for ye desire to prevent 
 mortals from knowing there are other hea- 
 vens than your own, and other Gods than 
 yourselves. 
 
 When I have gathered together wander- 
 ing and chaotic spirits, and provided ways 
 for the resurrection, ye have sent angel 
 emissaries to thwart my labors. 
 
 Ye have provided wicked heavenly pas- 
 times, and disgusting tournaments, within 
 your heavenly places, in order to win sub- 
 jects for your dominions. 
 
 Ye provide excursions from your hea- 
 venly places down to mortals, for your an- 
 gels to witness battles between mortal war- 
 riors, that these angels may satiate their 
 own evil curiosity. Ye thus degrade your 
 own angel subjects by causing them to re- 
 joice in the havoc of mortal flesh and 
 blood. 
 
CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 485 
 
 Ye thus call away from my heavenly 
 schools and colleges angels who had be- 
 gun 1 resurrection, flattering yourselves that 
 you are thus augmenting your heavenly 
 kingdoms by additional subjects. 
 
 On mortal battlefields, where there are 
 hosts of chaotic angels, the spirits of the 
 slain, I send my angels with heavenly 
 ships to gather them up and restore them. 
 But your emissaries come and destroy my 
 ships for wickedness' sake, calling it glori- 
 ous sport. 
 
 Of these great evils ye have been noti- 
 fied times and times again, but ye put not 
 forth your hands to remedy them. 
 
 Ye sell indulgences to your angels to 
 engage in wicked practices; and ye suffer 
 your ashars to inspire mortal priests to 
 sell indulgences to their followers in the 
 same way. Thus do ye compound sin. 
 
 Ye profess to confess the sins of your 
 angels in your heavens, exacting servitude 
 of them as a purchase of your excuse. And 
 your ashars inspire mortal priests to do 
 the same things for their mortal followers, 
 for stipulated prices in money. 
 
 CHAPTER LVIII. 
 
 A thousand years ago, the grades of 
 your heavenly subjects were from thirty to 
 fifty; now, they are fallen to fifteen. As 
 have declined the grades of the angels in 
 your heavens, even so have declined the 
 grades of mortals within your dominions. 
 
 Instead of well-tilled fields and good or- 
 chards, ye have given them war, widows, 
 orphans, paupers, debauchees, thieves and 
 murderers. Instead of giving them good 
 harvests, ye have given them famines and 
 pestilences. For your ashars inspire the 
 priests, and they in turn entice their follow- 
 ers away from the fields, to come and dwell 
 in the cities, where they can be conveni- 
 ently absolved from neglect in not confess- 
 ing you. 
 
 Thus have ye set aside good works and 
 instruction and the desire for knowledge, 
 both within your heavenly kingdoms and 
 on the earth; and, instead thereof, ye have 
 given them rites and ceremonies, leading 
 angels and mortals as if they were cattle 
 for your markets. 
 
 Instead of teaching angels and mortals 
 to think for themselves, ye have prohibited 
 them from thinking, except as your leaders 
 
 think for them. Thus have ye thwarted, 
 with all your might, the cultivations of the 
 talents Jehovih created with all. 
 
 Say not, that I, Jehovih's Son, desire 
 subjects or worshippers; behold, I prohibit 
 both angels and mortals from worshipping 
 me, or anouncing me or my kingdoms, as 
 the all highest. 
 
 I teach them, One only is the All High- 
 est, even Jehovih. I teach them, that I am 
 but Jehovih's servant, working for the res- 
 urrection of mortals and angels. I teach 
 both angels and mortals, they shall not 
 worship any one born of woman. 
 
 And behold, my foot-prints cannot be 
 mistaken. I raised up Zarathustra, Brah- 
 man, Abraham, Moses, Po, Chine and Ca- 
 pilya. Yet, not one of these, with all the 
 wonders they accomplished, was worship- 
 ped by his followers. 
 
 Yet, who was greater than Moses? that 
 stretched forth his hand, and said: Come! 
 And four million people, in bondage, 
 marched out of Egupt! Yet none worship- 
 ped Moses. 
 
 Behold the seventy colonies founded by 
 Zarathustra, and yet they worshipped not 
 him. 
 
 Behold Chine, who named the empire, 
 and turned three hundred million warriors 
 to a people of peace. 
 
 Behold, Capilya, who overturned the 
 laws of thirteen kingdoms in Vind'yii, and 
 gave peace and plenty to a hundred million. 
 Yet, neither Chine nor Capilya were wor- 
 shipped. 
 
 But ye harp on the idle tales of obscure 
 magicians, and teach mortals to worship 
 them. Nevertheless, ye have caused to be 
 preached, in your heavens, that I am a God 
 like unto yourselves, working for mine own 
 glory. 
 
 Now, behold, I prepare my angel hosts 
 in wisdom and virtue, that they may go 
 away from me, and inherit the etherean 
 heavens above. For this was my labor for 
 which Jehovih, through His exalted Gods, 
 made me God of Earth and her heavens. 
 
 And I have sent thus away, as Brides 
 and Bridegrooms to Jehovih, thousands of 
 millions of angels, whom I had raised to 
 grade ninety-nine. Yet, in all the time 
 of your dominions ye have not raised one 
 angel to the emancipated grades. 
 
486 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 Such as are wise within your dominions, 
 tire of your pomp and splendor, and, in 
 course of time, come to my heavens, and 
 renounce all Lords and Gods, and betroth 
 themselves to Jehovih only. And I give 
 them places in my schools, colleges, hos- 
 pitals and factories, and they become fit 
 companions to Gods and Goddesses. Thus 
 your kingdoms become depleted of the 
 highest grades; and your heavenly king- 
 doms and your earthly dominions have 
 chiefly the ignorant and depraved as your 
 idolaters. 
 
 CHAPTER LIX. 
 
 In Jehovih's name, greeting unto thee, 
 Looeamong: Thou hadst a warrior angel, 
 Thoth, who labored for thee more than a 
 thousand years, in order to make thee un- 
 der thy false names worshipful on earth. 
 And thou didst promise Thoth, that when 
 he overcame Dagon, Ashtaroth, Baal and 
 other false Gods, thou wouldst give to him 
 a heavenly sub-kingdom, with a thousand 
 million subjects. And Thoth did thus ac- 
 complish thy desire, but thou didst not give 
 him anything. 
 
 But thou didst further exact of him the 
 destroying of idol worship amongst mor- 
 tals, and the destroying of the oracle-tem- 
 ples for consulting spirits, promising him, 
 that when he had fulfilled these things, 
 thou wouldst give unto him the promised 
 heavenly kingdom. 
 
 And Thoth accomplished these things 
 also; but thou didst refuse again to fulfill 
 thy promise. Whereby Thoth rebelled 
 against thee, and set up his present heaven- 
 ly dominions, inspiring his followers under 
 the name of Mohammed. 
 
 And now, since that day, thou hast tried 
 to destroy him in heaven and on earth. 
 But Thoth was anchored in earthly pos- 
 sessions. 
 
 And thou didst inspire mortals in west- 
 ern Uropa to make crusades against Thoth, 
 in order to possess Jerusalem and Te-theas, 
 whereby millions of mortals were slain, 
 and vast regions of country laid desolate. 
 Behold, thou hadst pretended thou wert 
 the all highest God, and yet thou wert 
 unable to take a small earthly kingdom. 
 
 Thou didst also inflict dire punishment 
 and torturing of the flesh on Jehovih's 
 
 worshippers and on infidels, against thy 
 doctrines. With red-hot pincers pulled the 
 flesh from the bones; or in boiling oil 
 slowly dipped them; or from precipices 
 hurled them; or in boxes lined with prick- 
 ing spikes of iron bound them, thus to blot 
 all knowledge and learning and opposition. 
 
 In Es'pan and Itius, thou hast put to 
 death more than seven million mortals. 
 Nevertheless, these angels will come home 
 to thee in after-time, with vengeance in 
 their souls. Behold, thy false promises to 
 Thoth are already visited upon thy king- 
 doms. 
 
 But, as for Thoth, how shall I judge 
 thee, O Thoth? 
 
 Because thou hast a vast heavenly king- 
 dom, and withal art master on earth, of 
 Jerusalem and Te-theas and Egupt and 
 Punjaub, thou flatterest thyself thou art a 
 great God. But thy heavenly kingdom 
 hath become a place for lusters and foul- 
 smelling spirits in the lowest grades. And 
 thy heaven is surely and steadily declining 
 in grade. 
 
 Now, as to thee, Kabalactes, though 
 hast destroyed a thousand mortal libraries, 
 and put to death sixty million people, in 
 order to establish thyself as Budha, still 
 thou hast steadily declined in grade, and 
 thy kingdoms with thee. 
 
 Thou hast fashioned many sacred cities, 
 and framed many tales as to who thou wert 
 in mortal life. Thou hast falsely called thy- 
 self Budha; and doubly false hast thou tak- 
 en the name, Sakaya Muni. 
 
 Thou hast tortured to death millions of 
 mortals who rejected thee. And when my 
 heavenly ships rescued their distracted and 
 chaotic spirits, thou didst wantonly con- 
 nive with thy drujas to despoil my ships, 
 and cast these helpless spirits into dark- 
 ness. Thou hast done these things for 
 pastimes and diversities for thy falling hea- 
 vens. 
 
 And even so hath it been with thee, En- 
 nochissa. Never had a Lord a fairer oppor- 
 tunity in all Earth's heavens to do a 
 good and great work, than fell into thy 
 hands. But, behold how thou hast har- 
 vested thy heavens! 
 
 A thousand years ago, thy grades were 
 from forty to sixty-five; and this day, they 
 average but ten. It needeth no prophet to 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 487 
 
 foretell that thy declension will lead to de- 
 struction in the end. 
 
 Now, lastly: O ye false Gods, ye de- 
 ceivers and hypocrites, ye have divided 
 Earth and her heavens thereof between 
 yourselves, and re-confederated together 
 for a balance of power. Ye have also per- 
 suaded mortal kingdoms to divide the earth 
 into sections and regions, and to clamor 
 for a balance of power between different 
 kingdoms. Ye have thus caused mortals 
 to provide standing armies to protect them- 
 selves, kingdom against kingdom, after 
 the manner ye protect your own kingdoms 
 in the heavens. 
 
 Kriste'yans against Kriste'yans; Brah- 
 mans against Brahmans; Budhists against 
 Budhists; Mohammedans against Moham- 
 medans; yet all of these four have ye ar- 
 rayed against one another. In very like- 
 ness of your heavens, have ye built on the 
 earth. Ye have inspired mortals to keep, 
 as standing armies, forty million soldiers. 
 
 Ye have inspired mortals to build mili- 
 tary schools and colleges, where the young 
 may be trained in the art of war and de- 
 struction. Ye have inspired mortals to 
 build monuments to their generals and cap- 
 tains, because of their courage to destroy. 
 
 Ye have inspired the wickedest of mor- 
 tals to believe that, if they would read your 
 sacred books, and call on your names, ye 
 would surely save them, and, after death, 
 take them to the highest of heavens. And, 
 yet, when they die, your hosts are not there 
 to receive them. And when they call out 
 for you, your emissaries kick them, and 
 beat them. And they return with ven- 
 geance, to afflict mortals. 
 
 CHAPTER LX. 
 
 When my angels taught man by inspir- 
 ation that the earth was round instead of 
 flat, ye sent spirits of darkness to inspire 
 the death of my philosophers. Because, 
 forsooth, my inspiration agreed not with 
 the sacred books which ye compounded for 
 your own glory. 
 
 Ye have holden up your sacred books, 
 and said: Here are rules and a sure guide 
 to reach the all highest heavens! Knowing 
 the while that your heavens were the low- 
 est of the bound heavens of the earth. 
 
 Now, behold, the same rules apply unto 
 you as to the least of Jehovih's children. 
 
 And whoso seeketh to glorify himself 
 by his kingdoms, or by the magnificence 
 of his possessions, taketh a burden upon 
 his shoulders, that will, soon or late, fall 
 upon him, and crush him. 
 
 And whoso fortifieth himself by armies, 
 whether in the heavens or on the earth, 
 bindeth himself therewith for his ultimate 
 sorrow. 
 
 And whoso turneth away from Jehovih, 
 and saith: I will go not after Him, nor 
 search to find Him more; but I will build 
 unto myself, planneth an edifice that will 
 tumble down upon him in time to come. 
 
 CHAPTER LXI. 
 
 Ye say: Behold, we have scattered Je- 
 hovih's Faithists into all the places of the 
 earth; they are without a kingdom; they 
 have not left one community to themselves 
 on the whole earth! Think ye, Jehovih 
 hath not appropriated them? 
 
 Behold, it is true, ye have despoiled 
 them, and scattered them abroad. Ye have 
 hunted them down in Chine'ya, Vind'yii, 
 Arabin'ya, Par'si'e, Heleste and Uropa. 
 
 Ye have denied them the right to own 
 lands, the right to follow their choice of 
 avocations. Ye have denied them justice, 
 and even a hearing, in courts of trial. 
 
 And your accusation against them was: 
 They worship not Gods born of woman. 
 
 But behold the wisdom of Jehovih; be- 
 cause ye thus dispossessed His people, and 
 they were scattered abroad, they have sown 
 the doctrine of the All One over all the 
 earth and in the heavens thereof. They 
 have been as a leaven, to work in the foun- 
 dations of mighty kingdoms and empires. 
 
 They have given learning unto all peo- 
 ples, to show the magnificence of Jehovih's 
 universe. Behold, inhabitants of the earth 
 now look upward, and ask: May there not 
 be other worlds? How long hath the earth 
 been standing? Could the Creator of 
 thousands of millions of worlds, which 
 have stood for thousands of millions of 
 years, be so young as any one of these pre- 
 tended Gods? And descend to the earth, 
 and do a work so imperfectly that only one 
 small kingdom heard of him? 
 
 As ye declare the Creator to be but a 
 principle, a nonentity, without sense or 
 unity or purpose, so shall mortals declare 
 of you all. They will say: Behold, Brah- 
 
488 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 ma is not a person, but a principle; Budha 
 is not a person, but a principle; Kriste is 
 not a person, but a principle; God-Gabriel 
 is not a person, but a principle. 
 
 Because ye sought to confine the talents 
 of mortals to your sacred books, your sa- 
 cred books have become worthless before 
 Jehovih. Mortals, as well as angels, will 
 repudiate you and your books. Only Druks 
 and drujas will be your followers. 
 
 And thou, Thoth, shalt be the first to 
 be cast down, and thy heavenly kingdoms 
 with thee. 
 
 And thou, Ennochissa, shalt be next, 
 and thy heavenly kingdoms with thee. 
 
 And thou, Kabalactes, shalt be third, 
 and thy heavenly kingdoms with thee. 
 
 And, last of all, thou, Looeamong, shalt 
 go down, and thy heavenly kingdoms with 
 thee. Nevertheless, thou shalt conquer all 
 the earth, and trail it round with mortal 
 blood. And, after that, thou shalt be hated 
 above all other false Gods. 
 
 CHAPTER LXII. 
 
 The four false Gods replied: 
 
 In the names of the Son, the Father 
 and the Holy Ghost, greeting unto thee, 
 God, Jehovih's Son. In confederation as- 
 sembled, we reply unto thee, with patience 
 and mercy. 
 
 We set not up our kingdoms for self- 
 glorification, but righteousness and good 
 works. Behold, the firmament was over- 
 cast with falling a'ji, and our former Lord- 
 doms were broken up and gone. 
 
 And we chose our several places in un- 
 inhabited heavenly regions; therefore, we 
 took nothing from thee. 
 
 We admit the goodness of thy heart 
 and the honesty of thy purpose, but we do 
 not acknowledge thy wisdom a sufficient 
 guide unto heavens like our own. The 
 wise and exalted may rise in wisdom, pur- 
 ity and power, by the policy of love and 
 non-resistance and by the example of good 
 works. But where such inhabitants, either 
 on Earth, or in the heavens thereof, com- 
 prise but a small percent, of the popula- 
 tion, they become the victims of the lawless. 
 And this is the reason thy followers, both 
 on earth and in heaven, are persecuted and 
 abused. 
 
 We admit the declension of our grades, 
 as thou hast said; but, behold, thy emis- 
 
 saries carry off our highest grades. If 
 thou would carry away our drujas only, we 
 would not interdict the travel of thy ships 
 in our heavenly dominions. But, as soon 
 as thy ships come, behold, our highest 
 grades rush for them. For which reason, 
 we have been obliged to prohibit thy labor- 
 ers within our midsts. 
 
 Touching our slaves, of whom we have 
 more than eighteen thousand million, with- 
 out slavery they would do nothing in hea- 
 ven, and, for the most part, would inhabit 
 mortals as vampires, engrafters and famil- 
 iars. Only by holding them as our slaves 
 can we restrain them from these vices. 
 
 Forget not, that ere our heavenly king- 
 doms were established, the earth was cov- 
 ered over in many places with oracles and 
 temples used to consult the spirits. And 
 these spirits were in darkness, holding mor- 
 tals down in darkness. We broke them all 
 up, and thus cleared the earth from innu- 
 merable self-Gods and self-Lords. 
 
 Touching the matter of the name, Holy 
 Ghost, have we not freedom, as well as 
 thou, to choose a name to please ourselves? 
 
 Thou hast prophesied our downfall, 
 and yet thou dost plead for us to prevent it. 
 If we are to be overthrown, how, then, 
 could we avert it? then thy prophecy would 
 not realize truth. Nevertheless, we pro- 
 pose unto thee, if thou wilt renounce the 
 Person of the Creator, and style it, the 
 Holy Ghost, we are prepared to treat with 
 thee. Otherwise, no more! 
 
 CHAPTER LXIII. 
 
 In the same hour, when God, in Para- 
 dise, received the epistle from the four 
 false Gods, a light appeared in the firma- 
 ment above, descending from the etherean 
 heavens. It was a star-ship from the Nir- 
 vanian heavens of Chia'hakad, only four 
 hundred years from the dawn of the Arc 
 of Kosmon. 
 
 Like a crescent, made of stars, with a 
 sun betwixt the horns, it came, a very 
 world of light, swiftly coming toward Par- 
 adise. Down came the ship of fire far be- 
 low the moon's orbit, and then halted. For 
 two whole days it halted, as if to warn the 
 false Gods, the pretended Saviors of angels 
 and mortals, that Jehovih had spoken in 
 the higher heavens. 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 489 
 
 Then again the star-ship moved till it 
 anchored near the throne of God. And 
 there came out of the midst of the arches 
 of the ships, a million angels, well trained 
 in the management of worlds, and they 
 were headed by Hyaponitissa, Goddess of 
 Vaigonataj, in the plains of Myagoth. 
 
 And God of Paradise raised the lights 
 of his heavens, and opened his palace and 
 throne to the approaching Goddess and her 
 hosts. God's Holy Council made way, 
 and Hyaponitissa and her hosts entered the 
 palace of God. 
 
 God said: Hail, Daughter of Jehovih! 
 in His name, welcome to my throne! And 
 God saluted on the sign, The Circle and 
 Triangle. 
 
 Hyaponitissa answered in the sign, 
 Chain of the Circuit, saying: All honor 
 and praise to thee, O God, Jehovih's Son. 
 
 Then she went up, and sat on the throne 
 of God; and her hosts filed in front in a 
 crescent, maintaining the chain of etherean 
 light to the ships, and thence to the worlds 
 above. The es'enaurs chanted an anthem 
 to Jehovih, and, after that, the Goddess 
 rose up, and said: 
 
 Praise be unto Thee, Jehovih; mine 
 eyes have beholden a Son of Thy love; the 
 glory of the red star and her heavens, Thou 
 hast uncovered before me. The toils and 
 trials of Thy God, Thou hast opened as a 
 book is opened. And the dark ages of 
 hundreds of years Thou hast made trans- 
 parent by the light of Thy countenance. 
 
 Thou hast appropriated those, that la- 
 bored for their own glory, to sweep from 
 off Earth and her heavens, oracle worship 
 and idolatry; and these curses shall return 
 not again forever. 
 
 The prayer of Thy God reached up to 
 the heavens Chia'hakad; the Gods of other 
 worlds hearkened unto his voice. And 
 Thy Voice, Jehovih, came upon me, say- 
 ing: Daughter of Vaigonataj, haste thou 
 quickly to the red star; My God is calling! 
 
 And Thou gavest into my hands a mill- 
 ion of Thy Holy Sons and Daughters, with 
 a great ship of fire. And I sped through 
 Thy etherean seas and wide roadways, glo- 
 rying in the work Thou gavest me. 
 
 Now, behold, I am honored before Thee 
 
 and before Thy God and his Holy Council. 
 My love is to them, like a sister's, who had 
 found a long-lost brother; the glory of Thy 
 handiwork, Thou hast manifested in them. 
 
 Thereupon, the Goddess gave the sign, 
 Love to All, and she sat down. Then, God 
 rose up, and said: 
 
 Because Thou hast blessed my people, 
 O Jehovih, I am abashed before Thy God- 
 dess, who hath come so far to see me. Be- 
 hold, in the last hour of my trials, Thou 
 sent unto me; in the time I was heart- 
 broken, Thou thrust into my kingdom the 
 chain of Thy etherean light. 
 
 How can I be unmindful of Thee, Je- 
 hovih; how can I doubt the triumph of the 
 Almighty? Thou hast dwellers in Thy Or- 
 ian realms, whose presence are as a 
 power to overturn a world. And Thou 
 hast found one that speedeth forth at Thy 
 command to show me the way of succor. 
 
 Thereupon, God gave the sign, A Grate- 
 ful Heart, and he also sat down. 
 
 Again the es'enaurs chanted; and, pres- 
 ently, a ray of light passed over the head 
 of Hyaponitissa, the Goddess, and it form- 
 ed above the throne like a brilliant star. 
 And the Voice came out of the star, saying i 
 
 My Son, God of the red star and her 
 heavens, all honor and glory be unto thee. 
 The measure of thy labor is known to My 
 Sons and Daughters in the higher worlds. 
 From this time forth, concern not thyself 
 more about the four false Gods; sufficient 
 unto them is the work they have under- 
 taken. 
 
 Behold, they have appropriated four 
 great divisions of the earth unto them- 
 selves; and the heavens thereof have be- 
 come their dominions. Suffer them, there- 
 fore, to keep what they have taken. 
 
 But, I have another continent, ly- 
 ing beyond the ocean, Guatama, where 
 My people know Me, and worship Me. 
 Thither shalt thou inspire mortals to go- 
 from the east and find Guatama, and inhab- 
 in it. And thither, none of the false Gods 
 shall establish their doctrines by mortal 
 laws, and bind My people. 
 
 And as for the spirits of such mortals 
 as the false Gods caused to be slain in the 
 inquisitions, leave them to those Gods that 
 
490 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 took them. And, though such spirits have 
 vengeance in their hearts, and will be the 
 means of ultimately casting the false Gods 
 into hell, yet thou shalt not go near them. 
 
 But thou shalt look to the mortals, 
 whom thou shalt take over to inhabit the 
 western continent. And thou shalt send 
 loo'is thither, and raise up, by birth, cer- 
 tain mortals, who shall ignore the doctrine 
 of enforced worship for any God or Lord 
 -or Savior. For the people of that land 
 .shall be free, not only in body, but in 
 
 spirit also. And, when the dawn of the 
 Arc of Kosmon cometh, behold, I will 
 open up My heavens unto mortals, and 
 prepare the foundation of My kingdom on 
 earth. 
 
 The Voice ceased, and now God de- 
 clared a day of recreation, that the ether- 
 eans and atmosphereans might mingle to- 
 gether, and rejoice before Jehovih. And 
 on the next day Hyaponitissa departed, 
 leaving the requisite etherean laborers with 
 God. 
 
LORDS' RECORD FOR CYCLE OK LlKA 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 HISTORY OF CAPILYA. 
 
 In the mountains of Dharma, in the 
 high country of Yatinghadatta, in Vind'yu, 
 God, Son of Jehovih, chose the family of 
 Capilya for gathering together the scattered 
 Faithists, and establishing them in safety 
 and prosperity. Six generations previous 
 to the time of Capilya God came down 
 from his holy hill in heaven, to visit the 
 land of Shem, now called Vind'yu. And 
 God called aloud over all that land, but no 
 man could hear his voice. 
 
 Then God called his angels, saying: 
 Come hither. Behold, here is a great 
 country, with millions of people, but they 
 cannot hear the voice of God. 
 
 God commanded the angels to go down 
 amongst mortals, and to dwell with them 
 for six generations. 
 
 To the angels God said: By inspiration 
 and otherwise, lead ye man and woman to- 
 gether as husband and wife, to the profit of 
 Jehovih. Raise me up a man that can hear 
 me, for I will deliver the Father's chosen. 
 
 The loo'is, half a million, then came 
 down to the earth, and Hirattax was com- 
 mander over them. He divided his angel 
 hosts into groups, and allotted to them cer- 
 tain places in the land of Vind'yu, where 
 they were to dwell and to labor. 
 
 In those days the Faithists were known 
 by the names: Vede, and Par'si'e, and Hi- 
 yah, and Syiattahoma, beside various other 
 names. In some places they were slaves, 
 in other places serfs, and in other places 
 hid away in wildernesses and amongst the 
 mountains; being non-resistant and timor- 
 ous, having suffered great persecution by 
 the idolaters of Dyaus and other false 
 Gods and Lords. 
 
 These are the generations of the scat- 
 tered tribes, contributory to the bringing 
 forth of Capilya: In the time of Brahma, 
 Hathiv, who begat Runoad, who begat 
 Yaid, who begat Ovarana, who begat 
 Riviat, who begat Dhor, who begat 
 Avra, who begat Lutha, who begat 
 Jaim, who begat Yanhad, who begat 
 
 Vravishaah, who begat Saratta, who be- 
 gat Hriyiista, who begat Samatrav, who 
 begat Gatonat, who begat Thurin, who be- 
 gat Vrissagga, who begat Hesemwotchi, 
 who begat Ratha, who begat Yoshorvat, 
 who begat Capilya. 
 
 Capilya was a born iesu; and also a 
 su'is and sar'gis. 
 
 When Capilya was born, a light in the 
 form of a crescent appeared above his head, 
 and the Voice spake out of the light 
 thereof, saying: This is my son. By him 
 will I overthrow the governments of the 
 tyrants who have persecuted my people. 
 
 When Capilya' s mother was pregnant, 
 the angels of Jehovih, under the archangel 
 Hirattax, stood guard over her, speaking 
 holy thoughts night and day, whereby the 
 mother's soul ran constantly to heavenly 
 things. And. when Capilya was born, be- 
 hold, Hirattax appointed a host of one 
 hundred and forty-four angels to be with 
 the child day and night. Into four watches 
 of six hours each, divided he the guardian 
 angels. So the angels of God taught Ca- 
 pilya from the time of his birth, and he be- 
 came wise above all other children. 
 
 Jehovih had arranged the power of the 
 kings of Vind'yu to become centered chief- 
 ly in Yokovrana, king of Hafghanistun, of 
 the capital, Oblowski, a great city dedicat- 
 ed to Dyaus. Yokovrana held forty pro- 
 vinces and four hundred cities tributary to 
 himself, and every city furnished one gov- 
 ernor, and these were the royal Council of 
 king Yokovrana. By the laws of Hafghan- 
 istun, the oldest male heir succeeded to the 
 throne; but in case the king had no male 
 heir, then the king's brother's male heir 
 succeeded to the throne. 
 
 Harattax had led the king of kings to 
 marry with a barren woman; and because 
 he could have no heirs, he became a tool 
 for the deliverance of the Faithists, who 
 were persecuted and outlawed. 
 
 And in those days, the worshippers of 
 the Great Spirit, Ormazd, were outlawed 
 in receiving instruction. So that the Faith- 
 ists were held in ignorance, lest a man of 
 learning might rise up amongst them and 
 
492 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD* 
 
 deliver them. And the angel of Jehovih 
 foresaw that Capilya should be a learned 
 man, and acquainted with the cities and the 
 royal Council. For which reason the an- 
 gel, Hirattax, provided the king, Yoko- 
 vrana, to be childless, and to desire an heir 
 as successor to the throne. 
 
 When the king consulted the oracle, 
 behold, the angels of Jehovih had posses- 
 sion, and they answered the king, saying: 
 Put thy wife away in a dark chamber for 
 nine months, and she will deliver to 
 thee a male child, who shall save the 
 crown from thy brother's child. 
 
 The king told the queen, who was near 
 the time of limit for women, and she 
 would not believe. Nevertheless, she also 
 went to consult the oracle, and to her the 
 angel of Jehovih said: Have not kings 
 killed their wives in order to obtain one 
 who shall have an heir to the throne? 
 The queen acknowledged this, adding: 
 What, then, shall I do, for of a truth I 
 know I shall bear no child. 
 
 The angel said: Do thou as the king 
 hath said, and the angels will bring a male 
 child unto thee in thy dark chamber; and 
 thy maids and thy servants shall see to it 
 that no other woman entereth into thy 
 place; and they will testify that the child is 
 thine own. Neither shalt thou, under pen- 
 alty of death, inform the king otherwise. 
 
 On the other hand the angels of Jeho- 
 vih foretold the father and mother of Capil- 
 ya, even before his birth, that the child 
 would be carried away and given to the 
 king, Yokovrana, saying: Ye shall not 
 grieve for the loss of the child, for Or- 
 mazd will make of him a deliverer of his 
 people. And in the day the child is deliv- 
 ered to the queen, its own mother shall be- 
 come its nurse. 
 
 Thus at the time of the birth of Capil- 
 ya, the angels caried him into the city of 
 Oblowski, into the king's palace, and to 
 the queen's arms, in the dark chamber. 
 And also at the same time, the angels il- 
 lumined the chamber, so that all the maids 
 and servants saw the child, and they were 
 frightened and fell down, beseeching Dy- 
 aus for protection. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 When Yokovrana went to the temple to 
 do sacrifice, the high priest besought him 
 to consult the oracle in reference to the 
 child, for his kingdom's sake. And he so 
 consulted the oracle, and the angels of Or- 
 mazd said unto him: 
 
 O king, before whom all people fear,, 
 hear thou the angels of heaven and be 
 wise, for thy kingdom's sake, and for Ca- 
 pilya. Behold, thou hast maintained the 
 custom of thy forefathers, and caused to 
 be slain on the altar of thy God, Dyaus,. 
 twelve young men and twelve virgins for 
 every day of the twelfth new moon, that 
 by blood thy God might triumph on the 
 earth, and that thou mightest be the most 
 feared of kings. And thou hast subdued 
 all the regions of the rich earth to honor 
 thee and thy laws. Therefore, the God of 
 heaven saith thou shalt no longer pursue 
 the sacrifice of human blood, but instead 
 make sacred the blood of the lamb, 
 which shall be called the Lamb of thy God. 
 And in the day of thy first sacrifice, thou 
 shalt bring Capilya to the altar, and sprin- 
 kle the blood of the lamb thou hast slain 
 upon his head, as a blood offering to thy 
 God. And he shall be called Capilya, the 
 Lamb of Heaven. 
 
 To this the king assented, and Capilya 
 was accordingly sprinkled with the blood 
 of a lamb, which was sacrificed on the altar 
 of the king. Thus ended the first of the 
 evil edicts of the false Gods of Vind'yu; 
 and from that time mortals were no longer 
 sacrificed to the Gods, by consent of the 
 kings. 
 
 Capilya was called Yokovrana's son; 
 and he was taught all things which it was 
 lawful in those days to teach a prince; and 
 because he was prepared for the throne, he 
 was made acquainted with the kings and 
 governors of all the tributary cities and 
 countries in the land of Vind'yu. 
 
 When Capilya had attained maturity, 
 he besought the king for leave to travel, 
 saying to the king: Is not the greatest 
 wisdom that which cometh by the eye and 
 the ear? And is it not wise that he who 
 may some day become king should ac- 
 quaint himself with his kingdom whilst he 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 493 
 
 is yet young? For then, he will not only 
 see and hear better than if he were eld, 
 but he will have time to weigh the nature 
 of the government, as to its best adapta- 
 tion to the people. 
 
 To this the king replied: Thou art al- 
 ready wise, my son; thou knowest sutti- 
 •cient of the earth and her people accord- 
 ing to the laws of the ancients. There- 
 fore to travel for wisdom's sake would be 
 great folly. Thine eyes and ears are too 
 sharp already; better is it for thee that 
 thou seest not the people of thy kingdom. 
 For the time may come when thou shalt 
 need to use great severity upon them ; 
 therefore, to be strange with them, thy 
 sympathy will not lead thee away from 
 justice. 
 
 Capilya said: Thou reasonest well, O 
 king; and because thou art wise, I have 
 no credit in being wise also. For it must 
 be true that a son hath his wisdom from 
 his father. And since thou hast so wisely 
 put me off with thy arguments, answer 
 me this; Is it not profitable to a young 
 prince, before he hath the cares of a 
 mighty kingdom, to go abroad and enjoy 
 the pleasures of the world? 
 
 The king said: There are but three 
 pleasures in all the world: eating and 
 drinking is one; sleeping is another, the 
 presence of women is the third. Why, 
 then, shall a man go abroad? Capilya said: 
 And yet thou hidest the true reason as to 
 why thou desirest thy son not to travel. 
 
 The king said: If thou tell me the true 
 cause, then thou shalt go whithersoevei 
 thou desirest. Capilya said: First, then, 
 I will say to thee that I rejoiced because 
 thou didst deny me; for I so loved thee, 
 O king, that I knew no joy but to remain 
 with thee. And, moreover, thou so lovest 
 thy son, thou wouldst not have him go 
 far from thee? 
 
 The king was so delighted with this 
 answer, he said: Of a truth, O prince, 
 thou hast guessed aright. And if thou 
 find it in thy heart to leave me for a sea- 
 son of travel, then will I indeed bear with 
 thy loss until thou returnest. 
 
 So Capilya traveled for nine years, and 
 
 he went to the uttermost extent of the 
 
 land of the Vind'yu, east and west, north 
 
 . and south. And because his nurse, who 
 
 was, in fact, his real mother, had told him 
 
 thousands of times about the persecution 
 of the Faithists, and their sufferings, he 
 sought to obtain information of these scat- 
 tered people, but as yet he knew not he 
 was of that race. At the end of nine years 
 Capilya returned to Yatinghadatta, rich in 
 knowledge as to the inhabitants of Vind'- 
 yu. And when he came before the king 
 Yokovrana, where he was received in great 
 honor, he related the knowledge he had 
 obtained of the country, its extent and 
 grandeur, and its hundreds of great cities 
 and innumerable people. To all of which 
 wisdom the king lent a willing ear; and 
 he declared Capilya was the wisest and 
 most learned man in all the world. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 And now had come the time when God, 
 Son of Jehovih, came to establish Jehovih, 
 and begin the deliverance of the Faithists, 
 and to collect them together in the places 
 designed for them. 
 
 The word of Jehovih came to Capilya, 
 saying: Son of Heaven, hear thou the 
 Voice of the Ever Present! Capilya asked: 
 How sayest thou? The Ever Present? 
 
 Jehovih said: Behold me; I am not of 
 the king's laws; I am the Maker of kings. 
 They have made a law against Me, the 
 Ever Present. They have scattered My 
 people. They have denied My people the 
 right to obtain knowledge. Capilya said: 
 Mine eyes and ears have proved these 
 things. What shall Thy servant do? 
 
 Jehovih said: Thou shalt deliver the 
 slaves unto freedom, and provide them 
 places to dwell together, according to the 
 laws of the ancients. Capilya said: O Or- 
 mazd, why hast Thou put this upon me, 
 Thy servant? Why gavest Thou not such 
 matter into the hands of the Vrix? 
 
 Jehovih said: Thou art thyself of the 
 race of Vrix'Vede, and hast been prepared 
 for this labor from the time of thy birth. 
 Go thou and find thy nurse that cared for 
 thee in infancy, and when thou hast her 
 alone, say to her: Nurse, the voice of hea- 
 ven hath come to me, saying: Capilya, 
 thou art of the race of Vrix; how sayest 
 thou? And the nurse will say to thee: My 
 son! my son! Alas me! Thinkest thou I 
 would be thy death, or thy mother's death? 
 For is not such the law? 
 
494 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 LORDS' RECOhD 
 
 Capilya went and inquired of the nurse, 
 and she said to him: My son, my son. 
 Alas me! Thinkest thou I would be thy 
 death, or thy mother's death? For is not 
 such the law? Capilya answered: Such is 
 the law. But tell me the truth, and I 
 swear unto thee, both under the name of 
 Dyaus and under the name of thy God, 
 Ormazd, that thy words shall be secret 
 with me, as the Gods will. Am I an adopt- 
 ed Vrix? 
 
 The nurse said: Behold, thou hast loved 
 me all thy days; from mine own breasts 
 wert thou fed. Shall I, then, lose thy 
 love, and so die of a broken heart? 
 
 Then Capilya made oath before the 
 Gods, and thereafter she answered him, 
 saying: I am thy mother, O prince! The 
 angels of the Ever Present came to me in 
 the moment thou wert born, and carried 
 thee into the queen's arms; and the king 
 knew not even to this day but thou wert 
 his. 
 
 Capilya said: Why hath this been done? 
 
 The nurse said: Hearken, O prince! 
 The king's wife was barren; the king de- 
 sired a son who should be heir to the 
 throne. Capilya interrupted: And thou 
 bartered thy flesh and blood with the queen 
 for this? 
 
 The nurse said: Patience, O prince! I 
 am of a race that owneth only One King, 
 the Ever Present! Respect me, therefore, 
 till thou hast learned the whole truth. The 
 angels of Ormazd came to me before thy 
 birth, saying: Alas, the Chosen People 
 are persecuted and abused, scattered and 
 despised; but because they are faithful, the 
 Ever Present will come and deliver them. 
 Then I said unto the angels: What is this 
 matter to me? Behold, I am myself but a 
 servant, and can do nothing. Then the an- 
 gel answered, saying: Thou shalt have a 
 son, and shalt call his name Capilya; and 
 he shall be the deliverer of thy people. For 
 which purpose he shall receive great learn- 
 ing. But because great learning is denied 
 to thy people, thy son shall be adopted by 
 the queen, and the king, believing it is his 
 own son, will render unto the child learn- 
 ing and power also. And I said unto the 
 angel: Flesh and blood of me are nothing 
 if I can thereby serve Ormazd. 
 
 Capilya said: Since thou committedst 
 me to thy God, then am I indeed His. 
 
 Now whilst they were yet talking, Je- 
 hovih spake to Capilya, saying: I am not 
 come to give new doctrines unto men, but 
 to rescue My people from bondage, and to 
 restore freedom unto the inhabitants 
 of the earth. For this purpose wert thou,. 
 
 Capilya, sent into the world. Because 
 thou art of the race of the Faithists My 
 voice hath come to thee. Because the 
 king imagineth thou art his son, and lov- 
 eth thee dearly, thou shalt not suffer from 
 his hand. Go, then, whither I will lead 
 thee, and it shall be testimony to thee, 
 that I am Ever Present, moving the Faith- 
 ful by My Presence to come to thee. 
 
 In due time the prince departed from 
 home, not advising the king of his pur- 
 pose; and he went as Jehovih led him, and 
 came to Hosagoweth, near the river Ves- 
 uthata, where there was a forest, with 
 meadows interspersed, and he found a 
 camp of four families of wandering Faith- 
 ists, and they were famished with hunger,, 
 and were ragged. 
 
 The prince, seeing they feared him, said: 
 Be not afraid; I come not to persecute or 
 drive you hence. As ye perceive by my 
 dress, I am a prince, judge ye not me to 
 be your enemy, come to destroy you. For,, 
 by the same power ye were led hither, am 
 
 1 come also. This land do I bequeath to 
 you, to be yours forever. Cease ye, there- 
 fore, traveling about, but begin and till the 
 soil. 
 
 Yatithackka, the rab'bah, said: Sayest 
 thou that thou wert brought hither by 
 the same God? Then, of a truth, thou 
 knowest the signs and passwords? 
 
 Capilya said: None of these things 
 have I learnt; but even as there is a le- 
 gend amongst thy people that one would 
 come of Ormazd and restore His chosen 
 people, so declare I unto you, I am he. 
 That thy Ruler is my Ruler; take me in 
 private with thee, O rab'bah, and the Ever 
 Present will give the signs and passwords, 
 and thus prove me. Moreover, I say to 
 thee in prophecy, ere three suns have risen 
 and set, there shall come to this place hun- 
 dreds and hundreds of thy people. 
 
 Now when the rab'bah had examined 
 Capilya, and found that he had the signs 
 and passwords, he wondered greatly. The 
 prince then caused wood and stone to be 
 laid in the form of a crescent, and its 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 495 
 
 size was sufficient for seats for one hun- 
 dred people. He said: This is the alter 
 of Ormazd. Let us sit this night, for the 
 Father's voice is with me. 
 
 During the day, many more came; so 
 by night there were one hundred, men, 
 women and children, and the prince com- 
 manded them to sit about the altar. And 
 presently the Voice spake in the midst of 
 the altar, saying: 
 
 This is My son, of whom it hath been 
 prophesied, one would come to restore My 
 people. Behold, I am the Ever Present, 
 and not in the figure or image of a man, 
 but I am the All Space and Place, doing 
 My will through My angels and through 
 the souls of men. Be ye steadfast in right- 
 eous works and love toward one another; 
 and most just to a fraction with all other 
 peoples. With you will I establish Myself, 
 even as in the ancient days with your fore- 
 fathers. 
 
 Capilya then appointed the oldest rab'- 
 bah as chief of the altar; and this was the 
 first established Faithist community since 
 many hundred years, that was assured by a 
 prince that they should not be driven off. 
 On the next day the prince took the peo- 
 ple a little way off, about half an hour's 
 walk, and he said to them: Build ye here 
 another altar, for yet, ere night comes, 
 there shall come others even here. Let the 
 worshippers of the Ever Present have an 
 altar provided unto them. 
 
 Accordingly the people, in faith, built 
 another altar; and when it was finished, 
 and the sun gone down, there came many 
 wanderers, Faithists, to the place. 
 
 Capilya said unto them: Come ye to 
 the altar of Ormazd, for he desireth sacri- 
 fice of all whom he blesseth. And they 
 went in and sang, and prayed, giving 
 thanks to Ormazd. 
 
 Jehovih said: Build three more altars 
 at like distances apart; for I will bring My 
 people together for three places of sacri- 
 fice. 
 
 On the next day there came many more 
 wanderers, who had escaped from the prov- 
 ince of Anassayon, where a war was being 
 carried on against raiders from Tubet, the 
 high mountain region. And Capilya built 
 altars for them also; and to them he also 
 appointed rab'bahs and chief rab'bahs. 
 
 Now, they were without food, and many 
 
 had been famished for many days. Capil- 
 ya, perceiving that some of the people were 
 suspicious of him, said: Whoso hath 
 faith that I am of Jehovih, let him stand 
 with me this night, for the Father will 
 manifest unto us. 
 
 Not more than forty came to the place 
 designated; for they feared Capilya was an 
 impostor. And when they were assembled, 
 Capilya tried them, and found of a truth 
 they had faith. And he said unto them: 
 Stand in a circle and join hands, and I will 
 stand in the midst. Yet I know not what 
 Ormazd will do for us. 
 
 And when they were thus standing, Je- 
 hovih sent a cold wind, and there came 
 down from heaven an abundance of Ahao- 
 ma, sufficient to feed the whole of the peo- 
 ple for many days. Neither knew any man 
 of what ahaoma was made; but it was sa- 
 vory and nutritious. And the people came 
 and ate, and also gathered up the ahaoma, 
 and carried it home. Capilya said unto 
 them: Because Ormazd hath done this, 
 go ye into the altars and return thanks 
 unto Him. 
 
 And the people did as commanded; and 
 from this time forth not one of them lack- 
 ed faith in Capilya. And thereupon he said 
 unto them: This place shall be called 
 Maksabi, for it is the first colony in all 
 the world where the Father hath fed His 
 people with His Own hand. So the place 
 was called Maksabi, which, in Vedic, would 
 be Suta-ci-ci. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 For forty days Capilya remained in 
 Maksabi, teaching and helping the people; 
 and on the fortieth day he said unto them: 
 I go now; the Father desireth me. Be ye 
 faithful unto Ormazd, and maintain the 
 sacrifices. In time I will come again unto 
 you, and restore your rites and ceremonies. 
 
 Jehovih said unto Capilya: Even as 
 thou hast done in Hosagoweth, so shalt 
 thou do in Tibethkilrath; for thither will I 
 also bring My chosen from the Province 
 of Yusitra. 
 
 So Capilya went to Tibethkilrath, where 
 were assembled more than seven hundred 
 Faithists; and they feared him, saying to 
 one another: Is this not some one sent of 
 the king to entrap us? 
 
 But when Capilya beheld they feared 
 
496 
 
 CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 him, he said unto them: He who hath 
 faith in Ormazd feareth nothing in heaven 
 or earth. For the Father appointeth a 
 time unto all peoples; nor can they make 
 it more or less. Throtona, one of the rab'- 
 bahs, said unto Capilya: Art thou, indeed 
 one of us? Capilya said: Because I am 
 as I am, I cannot answer thee. If I say I 
 am of thy race, then will not thy people be 
 restored to liberty; for I would suffer 
 death, being a teacher of thy people. If I 
 say I am not of thy race, then thy people 
 will not have faith in me. I say unto thee, 
 I am but a man, even as thou art. There- 
 fore, put thy faith in Ormazd, and wherein 
 my words and my labors are good, render 
 unto me even as to any other man, not 
 more nor less. And yet, even as thou be- 
 lievest in the Ever Present, so do I; 
 as thou believest not in a man-God, so 
 do not I. 
 
 Are not all men brothers, and created 
 by the same Creator? Because the 
 kings acknowledge not this doctrine, they 
 persecute and outlaw thy race. To restore 
 thy people, who are my people also, am I 
 sent into the world. My labor is now upon 
 me; and for that purpose am I here with 
 thee and thy people. This land I 
 bequeath unto the Faithists; and they 
 shall settle here and till the soil, and 
 reap the harvests, and shall not be driven 
 away. And in time to come I will pro- 
 vide teachers, and the Faithists shall have 
 the right to obtain knowledge. 
 
 Capilya built altars for the multitude, 
 saying to them: First of all, thou shalt 
 dedicate to Ormazd all things thou puttest 
 thy hands to, for without such rites of be- 
 stowal thy people cannot be in harmony. 
 Know ye the doctrines of the ancients? 
 
 None of the rab'bahs could answer Ca- 
 pilya, and so he said: Ormazd provided 
 your servant with great learning. For this 
 am I sent to you. Know ye, then, the doc- 
 trines of the ancients, even from the time 
 of Zarathustra and Brahma: 
 
 To rise with the sun; to bathe the body 
 once every day; to eat no flesh nor fish; 
 to pray to Ormazd at sunrise, at high noon, 
 at sunset, and before lying down to sleep. 
 
 Certain philosophers, wise in vanity, 
 said: To rise an hour after the sun is no 
 sin; to bathe one day in seven is sufficient; 
 to eat fish-flesh, which is of cold blood, is 
 
 no sin. Now, behold, after a time, 
 they laid in bed two hours; they ceased to 
 bathe altogether, and as to eating, they 
 halted not with fish-flesh, but ate of all 
 flesh. And sin came upon them; by their 
 behavior they cut themselves off from the 
 Father. Be ye scrupulous in following the 
 texts; and as to him that openeth the door 
 for disobedience, have nothing to do with 
 him or his philosophy. 
 
 Capilya asked: Why doeth one man a 
 good act rather than a bad act? Why do- 
 eth another man a bad act rather than a 
 good one? The rab'bahs said: The first 
 is the speech of Ormazd; the second is the 
 speech of satan; for as these dwell in men, 
 so do they manifest. 
 
 Capilya said: I am pleased with thy 
 answer; for which reason I have before 
 commanded you to build altars and do sac- 
 rifice; for these are the expression of your 
 souls, which testify ye rather would serve 
 the Creator than the destroyer. 
 
 This was also of the ancient doctrines of 
 Zarathustra; but certain philosophers, vain 
 in self-knowledge, said: Can not a man 
 worship in the soul, and without building 
 an altar of stone and wood? And the mul- 
 titude hearkened unto them; and they af- 
 terward went further, and said: Why wor- 
 ship at all? So, they fell in darkness. A 
 soul without an outward expression of wor- 
 ship standeth on the brink of hell. To see 
 an altar, as we pass along, impresses upon 
 us the thought of worship, and of Ormazd, 
 the Creator; it leadeth the soul upward. 
 To see evil, or the temptation of it, is to 
 lead the soul toward darkness. Therefore, 
 let men and women be discreet of their 
 persons; but make the altars of sacrifice nu- 
 merous. 
 
 Capilya asked: What is the first poison? 
 The rab'bahs knew not how to answer. 
 Capilya said: The first poison is self. One 
 man saith: Rites and prayers are good for 
 the stupid and unlearned; I need them not. 
 I say unto you, that man is drunk on 
 the first poison; let not his breath taint 
 you; for here entereth the wedge of de- 
 struction. 
 
 Capilya asked: What is the second poi- 
 son? But when he perceived none would 
 answer, he said: The first leadeth to the 
 second, which is desire to lead others and 
 rule over them. Htahai, one of the rab'- 
 
CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 LOUBS' RCCORO 
 
 497 
 
 bahs, asked: How can we get on without 
 rulers? 
 
 Capilya said: Good men are expressions 
 of the All Light. 
 
 Capilya asked: What is the best and 
 yet the most dangerous thing? Some re- 
 plied as to one thing, and some as to an- 
 other. Capilya said: The best and yet 
 most dangerous thing is speech. To talk 
 of good things; of delights; of love; of 
 Ormazd and His wonderful creations; of 
 life and death; of everlasting happiness; 
 these are good speech, and give the soul 
 great happiness. To talk of evil; of dark 
 deeds; of one's neighbors; of disgusting 
 things and words; these enrich satan's har- 
 vest. 
 
 Three men traveled through a great 
 city, and when they returned home, 
 and the neighbors assembled to hear the 
 story of their travels, one of the travelers 
 related all that he saw, good and bad; an- 
 other one related only all the bad things 
 he saw; and the other one related only the 
 good things he saw. Which, now, of the 
 three, say ye, doeth most for the Father's 
 kingdom? The rab'bahs said: The last 
 one. Capilya said: True! Be ye, then, 
 like him even to one another; for by this 
 course only is speech not dangerous, but 
 of profit unto the world. 
 
 Sufficient is the number of evil men to 
 relate the evils in the world; relate ye the 
 good, for by constantly walking in clean 
 ground ye shall remain clean, in word and 
 deed. 
 
 Search ye both spirits and men, not for 
 the brilliancy of speech, for oft its bril- 
 liancy hideth its poison, or stealeth on the 
 sense unawares; but search their words as 
 to holy ideas and. good delights, to make 
 man rejoice in his life. He who discourses 
 on deceivers and liars and debauchees, is 
 a fireman for satan's hells. Reply not to 
 him, lest your speech become a snare to 
 entrap yourselves. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 For three years Capilya traveled over 
 the land of Vind'yu, east and west, north 
 and south, establishing the Faithists wher- 
 ever he found them; and he donated to 
 them whatever lands laid waste and not 
 tilled; but he touched not any land where- 
 on other people dwelt and tilled the soil. 
 
 And in course of time the servants in the 
 provinces fled from their masters and went 
 and dwelt in the places of Jehovih, to so 
 great an extent that the governors and sub- 
 kings complained against Capilya, and he 
 was reported to Yokovrana, the king, Ca- 
 pilya's foster-father. And the king sent a 
 commission summoning his supposed son 
 to the capital, to answer the charges 
 against him. 
 
 When Capilya was before the Royal 
 Council, and demanded by the king why 
 he had come, Capilya said: The servant of 
 the great king answereth; his words are 
 bound words. Whatsoever cometh out of 
 Capilya's mouth, Capilya holdeth as his. 
 There be such as maintain that man, whose 
 tongue is moved by the spirits of the dead, 
 is irresponsible for his words. Capilya 
 creepeth not through so small a hole. To 
 be master of one's flesh, and desires, pas- 
 sions and words, these are great gifts in- 
 deed. Capilya professeth these. There- 
 fore, Capilya bindeth himself in every 
 word. 
 
 Know, then, Most Royal Council, serv- 
 ants to our Great King, Yokovrana, Capil- 
 ya was summoned here by the king, to 
 answer certain charges made by members 
 of the Royal Council. These charges are 
 that Capilya hath founded certain colonies 
 which have attracted away the servants of 
 the sub-kings and of the rich, and thereby 
 sowed disobedience in the remainder. 
 
 Capilya has come to answer these 
 charges. Hear ye, then, Capilya's answer: 
 
 Capilya being heir to the throne be- 
 sought the king for leave to travel, and 
 the king said unto him: Whatsoever thy 
 soul observeth that may be good for the 
 United Kingdoms, do thou. Said not the 
 king this? 
 
 Yokovrana said: Yea, my son. 
 
 Thereupon Capilya said: When Capil- 
 ya traveled near and far, for nine years, 
 his heart was sick because of the misery 
 of the poor and the glory of the rich. He 
 beheld many forests and many plains where 
 no man dwelt; and he said to himself: Let 
 the poor come hither and live. Yet he 
 called not any poor man. Was it, then, an 
 evil for Capilya to say this to himself? 
 
 The king said: Surely not. 
 
 Then Capilya went on: After a long 
 season of idleness Capilya went the second 
 
498 
 
 CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 LORDS' RECOHO 
 
 time to travel, and when he came to the 
 forests and plains, behold, the poor were 
 gathered together, and yet more coming. 
 So Capilya went amongst them to show 
 them how to dwell together wisely. Was 
 this an evil in Capilya? 
 
 The king said: Nay; of a truth it was 
 good. 
 
 Then Capilya said: In a little while 
 they discovered it was good for them to 
 dwell together and to help one another; 
 and the news spread abroad, whereupon 
 the servants of the governors, and the rich, 
 ran away from them. Is it not just to say 
 of the king and governors and rich men 
 that they are driving their servants away 
 from themselves, because of hardships 
 which are greater than the hardships of the 
 Gods? 
 
 The king said: A good proof. But 
 why sayest thou, the Gods? These people 
 for the most part believe not in the Gods. 
 And many of them, I hear, are believers 
 in the Great Spirit! 
 
 Capilya said: Thou sayest truly, O 
 king. But that is their matter, and not Ca- 
 pilya's. 
 
 The king said: Thou art right, my son. 
 But how sayest thou of education? Shall 
 not the laws be maintained? 
 
 Capilya said: Art thou the king? or 
 merely the servant of the dead? Shall Ca- 
 pilya call him father who is only a servant 
 to carry out the laws of the dead? If so, 
 then hath Capilya sined against the law. 
 But hear ye, who are of great learning; do 
 ye obey one law of the ancients and not 
 another? The law of the ancients was that 
 with the death of the king all laws died, 
 and whoso became king afterward must 
 need make new laws of his own. The law 
 against educating the Faithists is a law of 
 the ancients. Let Capilya's accusers favor 
 which they will; for if they stand by the 
 laws of the ancients, then, indeed, have we 
 no laws, and no king nor sub-kings. If 
 they repudiate the laws of the ancients, 
 then Capilya hath not sinned against any 
 law. 
 
 Yokovrana said: Thou art acquitted, 
 Capilya. The laws of the ancients can not 
 bind thy king nor the king's kings. Touch- 
 ing these matters, then, the Royal Council 
 shall make new laws. And since Capilya 
 hath not contravened any law, neither shall 
 
 the new laws interrupt the orders of the 
 state as they now are. 
 
 After this manner were the speeches of 
 the sub-kings and governors: 
 
 To permit great learning to the Faith- 
 ists is to overthrow Dyaus and his reign- 
 ing Gods and Lords; for by great learning 
 will the Faithists ultimately become mem- 
 bers of the Royal Council; therefore, at all 
 hazards, great learning must be prohibited. 
 Great learning is inimical to good servi- 
 tude. 
 
 Jehovih said to Capilya: Be thou pres- 
 ent when these laws are passed; for by this 
 means My holy angels will rule over the 
 Royal Council for the good of all men. 
 
 For one hundred days the Royal Coun- 
 cil discussed the matter, but the angels of 
 heaven kept them divided as to opinion 
 and belief, so that no law was passed by 
 them. Now after they had thus wasted 
 much time to no purpose, Capilya asked 
 permission to speak before the king and 
 Council as to what was wisdom in the gov- 
 ernment of the nations; and it was granted 
 unto him. This is the substance of Capil- 
 ya's speech: 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 Whoever is born into the world is in 
 part possessor of the world by fact of his 
 birth. All come into the world naked and 
 helpless, and they deserve our assistance 
 because of helplessness. To help the help- 
 less is the highest virtue. 
 
 Two wise men are greater than one; a 
 nation of wise men, what could be greater 
 than this? Yet all men come into the 
 world knowing nothing; to give them 
 great wisdom is to make the nations wise 
 and great. To open the avenues on every 
 side to great learning, this is the founda- 
 tion for a great kingdom. 
 
 To have the soil tilled, is this not 
 greater than hunting and fishing? To 
 throw the lands open in the east, west, 
 north and south, to the tiller of the soil, 
 this is the foundation of plenty. When the 
 poor are supplied with plenty to eat and 
 to wear, with a place to live, there is little 
 crime, but great virtue; but become a great 
 strength in that kingdom. 
 
 To hold more land than one can till is 
 to sin against them that have none, who 
 have not wherewith to live or to earn a 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 499 
 
 living. Yea, such a one is an enemy to 
 the nation. 
 
 There are two kinds of governments: 
 one is government for the government; 
 and the other is government for the peo- 
 ple. The latter government the people will 
 endorse, and by their wills make mighty. 
 The former government seeketh to make 
 itself mighty at the expense of the people. 
 Such a government is in the throes of 
 death. 
 
 To make government and people one, 
 as to prosperity and peace; this is the high- 
 est government. For the government to 
 render unto the people bountifully, as to 
 land and water, and as to great learning. 
 and to music, this is the wisest, best gov- 
 ernment. 
 
 What man is there that loveth not free- 
 dom, the chief of all desires? Can a gov- 
 ernment abridge this without crippling 
 itself or forfeiting the love and co-opera- 
 tion of its people? To bestow liberty, and 
 maintain it unto all people, this is the 
 greatest good thing a government can do. 
 
 But who shall say what is liberty, and 
 the end thereof? A man shall not have 
 liberty that offendeth his neighbor, or de- 
 priveth him of virtuous livelihood. No 
 man should run naked; nor should a man 
 have liberty to go into another's field and 
 take his harvest. How, then, shall a gov- 
 ernment take a man's possessions against 
 his will? But he who hath received great 
 learning will not offend by nakedness, nor 
 by taking that which is another's. 
 
 What, then, is greater than for a gov- 
 ernment to bestow great learning on the 
 people? It is not enough to say to the 
 poor: Here is land; feed yourselves. But 
 men of great learning shall be sent amongst 
 them, showing them how to till the soil, 
 and how to build, and to keep themselves 
 pure in soul and body. For great learn- 
 ing is not in the books only; nay, there 
 are men of great knowledge as to books, 
 who are themselves gluttons, debauchees, 
 bigots, tyrants, and base authority. Such 
 men have not great learning; but in fact, 
 great vanity. 
 
 Two kingdoms, lying side by side; in 
 the one are great philosophers and colleges, 
 but the multitude are in want; in the other 
 kingdom there are no philosophers, as 
 such, nor colleges; but the multitude have 
 
 plenty: The latter is a kingdom of greater 
 learning than the former. For of what 
 consisteth great learning, but in knowing 
 how to live wisely? A few philosophers are 
 not a nation. To bestow such knowledge 
 on the people as will enable them to live 
 wisely and be happy to a good old age, 
 this is the labor of the best, great govern- 
 ment. It is a common saying that such 
 and such a king is a great king, because 
 he hath founded colleges. And this is no 
 small matter. But how much greater is 
 the king who hath founded a thousand 
 poor families, and taught them how to live 
 wisely? 
 
 To make a law to prevent learning; to 
 bind slaves more rigidly, is to weaken the 
 nation; to weaken the kingdom. For, see 
 ye, a man had ten servants, and they were 
 free; then he bound nine of them with 
 chains, and complained because they serv- 
 ed him not well. He was a fool. 
 
 To labor for one's self at the expense 
 of the state, is to rob the state; to hoard 
 up possessions is to rob the poor. What 
 treasure hath any man that he can take 
 out of the world? Better is it to give it 
 whilst one may, for to-morrow we die, 
 leaving it to them that earned it not. 
 
 The highest peace is the peace of the 
 soul, which cometh of consciousness of 
 having done the wisest and best in all 
 things. For after all, is not the earth-life 
 but the beginning, wherein we are as in a 
 womb, molding our souls into the condi- 
 tion which will come upon us after death? 
 In which case we should with alacrity 
 seize upon the passing time and appropri- 
 ate it to doing righteous works to one an- 
 other. ... - 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 When the king and the Royal Council 
 beheld the great wisdom of Capilya, they 
 were struck dumb in their seats. After a 
 while the king said: 
 
 Was it not by blood that our forefa* 
 thers established Dyaus? Scattering the 
 Faithists with great havoc? Shall we 
 gather up the escaped races and nurse 
 them and have them turn upon us and bite 
 us? Shall we not with our valiant arms 
 defend Dyaus? 
 
 To this Capilya answered: Sufficient 
 unto his own battles is the God of Vind'- 
 
500 
 
 CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 yu. If the king must need fight Dyaus' 
 battles, then Dyaus is a weak God indeed. 
 Heaven forbid that Capilya believe in such 
 a God, or labor for one so weak! 
 
 But thou art right, O king; by blood 
 our forefathers established Dyaus; but 
 where is there, either in ancient or modern 
 learning, a commandment that Dyaus shall 
 be maintained by blood? Didst not thou 
 thyself receive a commandment to stop 
 the sacrifice of human blood on the altar? 
 Is it, then, indeed a holier place on the 
 battlefield, that these things must continue? 
 Man loveth vengeance; and more for this 
 than for righteousness he desireth to in- 
 flict or destroy others. Nevertheless, all 
 things are answered accordingly as they 
 are; vengeance answereth vengeance; 
 blood answereth blood; war answereth 
 war. And the same rule applieth to vir- 
 tue, which begetteth virtue; love, which 
 begetteth love; peace, peace; good works, 
 good works. For in these things our souls 
 play a greater part than do our external 
 bodies. 
 
 One of the Royal Council said: How 
 sayest thou of rites and ceremonies? Ca- 
 pilya answered: Without rites and cere- 
 monies the spiritual person of the state 
 and of the community, and of the nation, 
 is like a man that hath thrown away his 
 clothes, and then, with disgust, drowned 
 himself. As the soldiers of the army have 
 drill, which is discipline, so shall the wor- 
 shippers have rites and ceremonies, which 
 are the drill to keep one's soul in reverence 
 for the Creator. But it falleth not to my 
 lot to say unto you what rites or what cere- 
 monies ye shall have. 
 
 Another one of the Royal Council ask- 
 ed. Some men, who are bad, have great 
 pleasures and enjoyments; some men, 
 who are virtuous and wise, have great tri- 
 als and misery: What, then, is the prize 
 which thy philosophy offereth to them that 
 practice righteousness and good works? 
 
 Capilya said: Could thine eyes see as 
 mine have seen, or thine ears hear as mine 
 have heard, then it were easy to answer 
 .thee. Nevertheless, I declare unto thee a 
 great truth, which is also revealed in the 
 doctrines of the ancients, that this is not 
 the real life, but the embryotic state. And 
 many that have great pleasures and enjoy- 
 
 ments in this life, waken up as babes in 
 heaven; whilst many who are virtuous and 
 wise, but suffer great misery, in this life, 
 wake up in heaven in strength and glory. 
 More are trials and exertions to be desired 
 than ease and enjoyment; for the former 
 causeth the soul to look upward; but the 
 latter causeth the soul to look downward. 
 Nevertheless, severe trials are a great in- 
 justice to any man. 
 
 When the king and Royal Council be- 
 held that Capilya had greater wisdom than 
 any other man, the king said unto them: 
 
 No man in all the world hath wisdom 
 sufficient to try my son. How say ye? 
 
 And they answered: That is true. 
 
 Whereupon the king said: Capilya, 
 hear thou the king's decree, and it shall 
 be a law unto thee in all the kingdoms of 
 the world, which is, that thou hast been 
 tried by the greatest king in the world, and 
 art acquitted and declared to be above the 
 dominion of mortals. And thou shalt go 
 whithersoever thou wilt in any land, doing 
 whatsoever thou desirest, and no man shall 
 arrest thee or forbid thee in anything 
 whatsoever. And whatsoever law thou 
 makest, no king shall make another law, 
 above thine, to set it aside. Wert thou not 
 mine own son I would say thou wert be- 
 gotten by the Gods! 
 
 The king's decree was recorded in the 
 House of Records, and copies of the de- 
 cree sent to the tributary cities and king- 
 doms throughout Vind'yii. Yokovrana 
 had also a copy made of Capilya's speech, 
 and it was also recorded and signed by the 
 king and Council, under the name, The 
 Foundation of Laws. 
 
 Jehovih said to Capilya: I have suf- 
 fered this land to endure war for hundreds 
 of years, that they might be ready for this. 
 Behold, they are not slow to accept doc- 
 trines of peace and liberty. 
 
 Capilya inquired concerning the laws, 
 and Jehovih said: Trouble not thyself 
 more; My hand is upon the king and 
 Council. They will pass laws endorsing 
 what thou hast said. Go forth, then, My 
 son, amongst My chosen, and thou shalt 
 establish them anew in rites and ceremo- 
 nies. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 When Capilya had come to Wes-tu- 
 chaw-aw, Jehovih said to him: Send mes- 
 
CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 LORD6' BCCOnD 
 
 501 
 
 sengers into twelve colonies which I will 
 name to thee, to the chief rab'bahs there- 
 of, summoning them hither, for thou shalt 
 teach them alike and like. 
 
 The colonies were: Tahdayis, L'wel- 
 laat, Ha'darax, Thowaka, Dormstdatta, 
 Ghiballatu, Yhon, Themmista, Vrach'hao, 
 Ebotha, Ewen and Sravat, and each of 
 them sent the chief rab'bah with three ac- 
 companying rab'bahs. And Capilya caused 
 them to put on red hats, without brims, af- 
 ter the custom of the ancient Zarathustri- 
 ans. 
 
 Jehovih said to Capilya: Choose thou 
 twenty damsels who are young and well 
 grown; and twenty dames who have borne 
 children. And these shalt thou adorn with 
 blue hats with ear-flaps, after the manner 
 of the Daughters of the Zarathustrian law. 
 
 When Capilya had them clothed with 
 hats and aprons, he caused the rab'bahs 
 and the women to go with him to the 
 summit of a mountain, so that they might 
 not be approached by idlers or spectators 
 without due warning. And on the summit 
 of the mountain Capilya said: When ye 
 were babes, I prayed for you; now that 
 ye are mature ye shall worship the Cre- 
 ator with your own words. Bring, there- 
 fore, every one a stone, and cast it down, 
 for it shall be an altar before Jehovih for 
 our sacrifice. And as I do, do ye. 
 
 They all took stones and cast them in a 
 pile; and when they were yet standing 
 near, Capilya raised his hands to heaven 
 and said: Father, when I was weak, Thou 
 providedst for me. My father and my 
 mother and my rab'bah prayed for me, and 
 taught me of Thee. Wherefore I praise 
 Thee with thanks and glorification. Now 
 that I am strong, I stand upright before 
 Thee and praise Thee and pray to Thee 
 with mine own words. Because Thou mad- 
 est me a man I will labor to prove myself 
 before Thee. As I have here cast down 
 this stone, let it stand as my covenant to 
 Thee that I will from this time forth cast 
 away earthly passions and desires. And be- 
 cause I have raised up both my hands unto 
 Thee, lead Thou me, O Father, in the right 
 way ! 
 
 When they had all repeated these 
 words, Capilya walked once around the al- 
 tar, followed by the others, and he said: 
 Ormazd, Almighty, glory be to Thee for- 
 
 ever! Thou art on the mountain-top and 
 in the valley; Thy circle is the circumfer- 
 ence of the world. I walk in the circle 
 with Thee; Thou art forever by my side; 
 Thy light the glory of my soul. In thee I 
 live; of Thyself madest Thou me! O that 
 I may not dishonor Thy handiwork; or 
 make myself ashamed before Thee. Be- 
 cause Thou art Ever Present, I cannot hide 
 from Thee, and I will be most circumspect 
 in my behavior. 
 
 Capilya then sat down on the altar, say- 
 ing: Go ye hence a little way, and then 
 return, that I may teach you how to ap- 
 proach the altar of Ormazd. 
 
 The people did as commanded, and 
 when they came near, Capilya said: Who 
 cometh? 
 
 Response: A worshipper of Ormazd. 
 Behold the altar of my people, who are 
 known by their piety and good works, and 
 in helping one another. 
 
 Who is Ormazd? 
 
 The Ever Present. He filleth all places 
 and space. He created me alive, and 
 taught me to adore Him and His works. 
 
 Why comest thou to this place above 
 any other? If He be Ever Present why 
 not worship Him in any other place? 
 
 He sendeth guardian angels to abide 
 with His children who are pure and good. 
 These angels desire certain places and 
 times, wherein my soul, may be given to 
 Ormazd. Through His holy angels He 
 teacheth me in wisdom and love. 
 
 Why not worship the angels them- 
 selves, since they are thy guardians and 
 benefactors? 
 
 To call not on the name of any angel 
 who is Lord or God, is my religion; but 
 to call on Jehovih, the Great Spirit. Who- 
 so calleth on the Creator will be answered 
 by Him, Who is the All Highest. 
 
 How can Ormazd answer thee? Hath 
 He lips, and tongue and mouth? 
 
 Ormazd is the Soul of all things; He 
 speaketh to soul. His voice hath had 
 many names; by the heathen and the idol- 
 ater he is called Conscience. 
 
 What profit hast thou in worshipping 
 Him? 
 
 I am so created; because of the fullness 
 of Him in me, I desire to express my ador 
 ation, and to commune with Him. Whoso 
 hath not this desire is an evil man. 
 
502 
 
 CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 Will He answer thy prayers? Turn 
 aside from His usual course and come es- 
 pecially to thee more than to another? 
 
 As a horse drinketh water from a 
 trough and so enlargeth himself, so doth 
 the soul of the righteous man drink from 
 the everlasting Fountain, Ormazd, and the 
 soul of man thus enlargeth and accomplish- 
 eth in answer to its own prayer; neverthe- 
 less, it all cometh from Ormazd. Neither 
 turneth He aside from His usual course, 
 for He is Ever Present, and thus answereth 
 the prayer of the soul of man. 
 
 What prayers answereth He? And 
 what prayers answereth He not? 
 
 He answereth the prayer for purity 
 and love and wisdom and virtue. Whoso 
 prayeth to Him for permission to do good 
 unto others, He answereth without fail. 
 He answereth not selfishness, nor the 
 prayers of the wicked. Wherefore the 
 wicked say: He answereth not prayer. 
 
 Capilya said: My beloved, when ye ap- 
 proach the altar of Ormazd, ye shall re- 
 peat these wise words I have taught you; 
 but not aloud like the idolaters, but in 
 whisper or low voice. 
 
 What is the worship of Ormazd's chos- 
 en? and wherein differeth it from the hea- 
 then's? 
 
 Ormazd's chosen stand equal before 
 Him, and every one shall work out his 
 own resurrection, both in this world and 
 the next. Hence they are direct worship- 
 pers, being taught to worship Ormazd 
 with their own prayers and songs. The 
 heathen priests worship the spirits of the 
 dead, who call themselves Lord, and God, 
 and Savior. The chosen children war not, 
 resent not by violence, but answer evil by 
 good, and practice charity and love. The 
 heathen, the worshippers of God, Lord, 
 and of Dyaus, and all other idols, 
 practice war, maintain armies of soldiers, 
 who are taught the art of killing with 
 great havoc. They build monuments to 
 men, and otherwise blaspheme against Or- 
 mazd. They teach that Ormazd is void, 
 but that He made Himself into Dyaus, a 
 large man, and then created all things, after 
 which He retired to His throne, leaving 
 certain laws to govern His works. 
 
 What is the Zarathustrian law of life? 
 
 To eat not flesh of anything Jehovih 
 created with the breath of life. To bathe 
 
 once every day. To rise with the morning 
 sun, and be temperate in all things. 
 
 What is the Zarathustrian law of father- 
 hood and motherhood? 
 
 To have but one wife; to have but one 
 husband; to maintain sacred the maternal 
 period. 
 
 What was the Zarathustrian compensa- 
 tion? 
 
 All things belong to Ormazd; man is but 
 His servant. The fruits of the earth and of 
 all labor shall be cast into the rab'bah's 
 house, and by him delivered unto the 
 needy. 
 
 Why were the Zarathustrians persecut- 
 ed and destroyed? 
 
 Because they resisted not by violence, 
 and because they worshipped not the idols 
 of the heathens. 
 
 Had they no way of saving themselves? 
 
 To that end Ormazd gave them certain 
 signs and passwords, whereby they might 
 know one another, and in time of distress 
 assist one another to flee away. 
 
 Why did not Ormazd preserve His 
 chosen people? 
 
 By the laws of the circumcision the 
 Faithists could only marry amongst them- 
 selves, in order to preserve a knowledge 
 of Ormazd amongst mortals. They who 
 were holy were preserved; they who went 
 after earthly things, and after the idola- 
 ters, were cut off. But even in this Jeho- 
 vih profited the seed of the Faithist, by 
 raising up heirs of su'is amongst the hea- 
 then. 
 
 Capilya said: Teach ye these things to 
 your children from their youth up, and en- 
 join it upon them to teach them to their 
 children. 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 Jehovih said to Capilya: Thou shalt 
 remain with My chosen until they have 
 learned these rites and ceremonies and 
 doctrines; after which thou shalt go to an- 
 other region whither I will lead thee, and 
 there teach the same things, and in the 
 same way. 
 
 And Capilya did as commanded. 
 
 In the fifth year of Capilya's preaching, 
 the Voice of Jehovih came to him, saying: 
 Behold, thy foster-father is near death's 
 door. Go thou to him and have the law 
 of protection established before his death;. 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 LOROS' RECORD 
 
 503 
 
 and after his death, when thou art king, 
 thou shalt ratify the law, and then abdicate 
 the throne. 
 
 So Capilya returned to Yokovrana, the 
 king, who was ill with fever. The king 
 said: O my son, my son! I feared I 
 should die ere mine eyes beheld thee. A 
 few days more, and it will be over with 
 me. Thou wilt be king. Bethink thee, 
 what wouldst thou ask of me, whilst yet I 
 may accomplish it? 
 
 Capilya said: Call thy Royal Council 
 and pass a law guaranteeing Brahmins and 
 Zarathustrians the lands they have pos- 
 sessed and tilled and are now dwelling 
 upon, to be theirs forever. 
 
 The king assented to this, and the law 
 was so enacted; and this was the first law 
 granting land unto the Faithists, to be 
 their own, by any king in all the world. 
 And the law stipulated that the Faithists 
 should worship in their own way; neither 
 should they be impressed into any army as 
 soldiers of war. 
 
 After the law was established, Yokovra- 
 na said unto Capilya: I was wondering 
 why thou didst not wait till thou wert 
 king, and then enact the law thyself, and it 
 could not be set aside during thy lifetime? 
 I will die soon, and the law will die with 
 me. 
 
 Capilya answered: I shall ratify thy law 
 on the day I ascend the throne, which is 
 binding, according to the rules of the an- 
 cients. Had I waited until I was king, 
 then I had been bound, according to my 
 religion, which is that no one individual 
 possesseth land, save what he tilleth, and 
 then only by donation from the commun- 
 ity in which he dwelleth, and only during 
 his lifetime, after which it reverteth to the 
 community. 
 
 Yokovrana said: Thou art wise, O my 
 son! What is it that thou understandest 
 not? 
 
 After the king rested a while, he said: 
 Capilya, thou hast often said thou hast seen 
 the angels of heaven: Who sayest thou 
 they are? 
 
 Capilya said: Persons who once inhab- 
 ited this earth. Some of them once lived 
 on other worlds. 
 
 The king said: Since thou sayest so, it 
 must be so. I thought, sometimes, they 
 might be different beings that dwell in the 
 
 air, and never dwelt here. Sayest thou, Ca- 
 pilya, all souls are immortal? 
 
 Capilya said: Not all inherit everlasting 
 life. Even as the body goeth into destruc- 
 tion, so can the spirit of a man dissolve 
 out of being. The fruit of them that have 
 attained to faith in everlasting life is safe; 
 but for them that have fallen from faith in 
 everlasting life, and from faith in the Cre- 
 ator, I pity them and their heirs. 
 
 The king said: Why do the oracles tell 
 lies? They are the words of angels. 
 
 Capilya said: If a man will not think 
 for himself, examine for himself, the Cre- 
 ator suffereth him to be the recipient of 
 lies. He is a wise man who hath attained 
 to disbelief in angels and men; for then he 
 will turn to the Creator, Who is All Truth. 
 This is the beginning of wisdom. Some 
 fair men, with stunted souls, who look not 
 about doing good in the world, require the 
 serpent's fang in order to make them 
 think. 
 
 The king said: I have killed many 
 men in my day; sayest thou I have sinned? 
 Capilya said: Inquire thou of thy Creator. 
 I am not thy judge, nor any man's. 
 
 The king asked: If a man be killed 
 and his soul live, then the killing amount- 
 eth to little. We put away the body, but 
 the soul may come back and retaliate. Is 
 it not so? Capilya said: Yea, O king. 
 
 The king reflected a while, and then he 
 asked: My son, can the spirits of them we 
 have slain catch us in heaven and injure 
 us? Capilya said: Yea, O king. 
 
 The king said: And they having been 
 in heaven first would have the advantage 
 in battle. And if they go in crowds and 
 have a leader, they might do great hurt. 
 Know thou, Capilya, I have a great secret 
 for thy philosophy; which is: When death 
 draweth near, we begin to shake in the 
 soul as to what we have done all our lives. 
 Sometimes I think of saying to Dyaus: 
 Here, I will pray thee! But then I re- 
 member I have no merchandise which he 
 would accept. How strong we are in 
 health and prosperity, and how weak in 
 adversity and in death! Sayest thou pray- 
 ers would make my case stand better in 
 heaven ? 
 
 Capilya said: I am not master in hea- 
 ven; or if I were, my love to thee would 
 shield thee from all darkness. 
 
504 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 The king said: The priest saith if I 
 pay him money he can intercede with 
 Dyaus and so secure me a high seat in 
 heaven. I think he faisifieth, for Dyaus 
 oweth him nothing. Two things I have 
 found, even with my little wisdom; the 
 caterer to the king and the caterer to Dy- 
 aus make great pretences, but do but lit- 
 tle as to their promises. These two men, 
 O my son, beware of them. I owe my 
 greatness more to this discretion than to 
 wisdom. They are at the bottom of all the 
 wars and evils in this world. They can 
 deceive even the Gods, I am told. When 
 thou art king, Capilya, put thy wisdom 
 in this matter; spare them not; they are 
 the curse of the world. I regret that I 
 slew not more of them; my conscience 
 pricketh me for this. 
 
 Capilya said: Man's conscience being 
 only part of the man, may it not err? Is 
 not the conscience dependent for wisdom 
 on other things? And after all, if we have 
 done that which seemed the highest, best 
 thing at the time, have we not fulfilled the 
 law? 
 
 The king said: It would seem so. Con- 
 science must depend for its errors or its 
 justice on the education it hath received. 
 But may not conscience be a disease in the 
 heart? To regret for not having done a 
 thing; to regret for having done a thing, 
 these are irreparable complainings. Who- 
 ever can say beforehand, and yet not err, 
 is wise indeed. I find that no man 
 brought himself into the world; nor can he 
 live but a short period at most. When 
 we are young we dislike to die; but at my 
 great age I desire not to live. Evidently 
 He Who created us hath more mastery 
 over us than we have over ourselves. 
 
 Capilya said: That is true; man at the 
 best hath not more than half mastery of 
 himself. 
 
 Yokovrana interrupted, saying: I in- 
 terrupt thee, my son, because my time is 
 short. I would ask thee what is the great- 
 est consolation to a dying man? 
 
 Capilya said: There are two consola- 
 tions that are great to a dying man; one 
 is to know that he left no heirs after him; 
 and the other is, that he leaveth after him 
 a noble son. 
 
 The king said: Thou art wise, my son. 
 I asked the priest in the oracle-house the 
 
 same thing, and he said: For a dying man 
 to have faith that his soul will enter para- 
 dise. Thereupon I said to him: No hon- 
 est man can have such faith; for such a 
 fate would be cheating heaven with one's 
 sins. Were I the Creator, I would break 
 the necks of half the world. Still it may 
 please a foolish dying man to tell him such 
 a tale as regardeth his soul. Thou alone, 
 my son, hath told me the greatest consola- 
 tion to a dying man. My slaves may have 
 faith that they will be kings, but they will 
 wake up in their folly. A man may have 
 faith that his soul will enter paradise, and 
 he may wake up and find it was a mistake. 
 Faith without a guarantee is folly. 
 
 Capilya said: A man to know a thing 
 of his own knowledge hath the greatest of 
 all wisdom. To be as thou art, a philoso- 
 pher in time of death, is evidence of a 
 great soul. Few have attained to this. 
 
 The king said: Before thee I am no- 
 thing as to wisdom. Thou art a mystery 
 to me. Thy mother, whom the doctors 
 slew to put her out of her misery from 
 long sickness, was not wise. And as to 
 myself, I am only great, not wise. I can 
 make men fear me; but thou knowest the 
 secret of love, which is a great thing. Thy 
 name, O Capilya, will be honored long af- 
 ter mine is forgotten. Yet I am the great- 
 est king in all the world. O thou, my 
 most wonderful son! 
 
 Capilya said: Because thou gavest me 
 great learning and a father's kingly care, 
 why should I not be an honor to thee, O 
 king? When thou art in heaven and canst 
 look upon me, I hope thou mayest not lose 
 thy hope for me. 
 
 The king said: It seemeth not wise to 
 me that angels should see too closely their 
 mortal kin, or else they would never rise 
 up to higher heavens. The seers say hea- 
 ven and angels are about us all the while. 
 I think this is a lie, otherwise it would be 
 more hell than heaven to them. 
 
 After the king rested a while he said: 
 I have been surmising what to say to thee,. 
 for I feel the blood in my veins is nearly 
 stopped. And this maketh me think more 
 than ever that man at best is but a gaming 
 ball for the Gods to play with. Who know- 
 eth, perhaps even now they laugh in their 
 sleeves as to how they have used me for 
 some hellish game? O that man had some 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 LORD*' RCCORB 
 
 505 
 
 standpoint to judge things by! O that he 
 had a measure and a foundation to stand 
 upon! I have searched the spirits of the 
 dead, and the Gods of the oracles, and they 
 are lies, lies, lies! 
 
 Capilya said: The small spark of light 
 within our souls is right at the start; and if 
 it be rightly cultivated it will grow bright- 
 er and clearer every day. For is it not in 
 the nature of all things to grow by cul- 
 ture? 
 
 (The king said: To rightly cultivate! 
 There is the matter, O my son. To settle 
 that point the world hath been washed all 
 over with man's blood. Rightly! Who 
 knoweth that word? O that mine enemies 
 were mistaken, and that I was clear in 
 perceiving what was right! 
 
 Again he rested a while and then he 
 said: I had hoped when death came on, 
 I should get glimpses of what is in store 
 for me; but even death is silent and dark 
 and deceiving. My members weaken 
 evenly. This showeth I was begotten of 
 good blood. Hadst thou npt been my son 
 I should know that my family race had 
 run out, and, so, I should have ascended 
 to the higher heavens. Now I may be 
 obliged to dwell on the earth for a long 
 season. As I understand myself now, with 
 all thy wisdom and thy love, I had rather 
 thou hadst been some other man's son. 
 Then I could die easier and not care so 
 much about leaving thee. I have no other 
 kin. 
 
 Capilya said: O king! Thou, hast rent 
 my heart in twain! Of a truth I am not 
 thy son! When thy wife laid in the dark 
 chamber, the angels of heaven stole me 
 and brought me thither. She who nursed 
 me was my mother; and her husband was 
 my father. I am a Brahmin of Zarathus- 
 trian blood, a Faithist! 
 
 The king said: Is this true? It can 
 not be! Go call thy nurse! 
 
 Capilya called in the nurse, and the 
 king said to her: Ere I doom thee to 
 death, I charge thee, is this thy son, and is 
 thy husband his father? 
 
 She answered him: I am sworn to Or- 
 mazd, and can not answer thee. Therefore 
 sentence me, for I have carried a great 
 load many a year. Behold! An angel of 
 heaven appeareth! 
 
 And, lo, an angel appeared before the 
 king, and they all saw the angel, which 
 said: Capilya is not thy son, O king! 
 And yet no sin hath been committed L 
 Thereupon the angel vanished. 
 
 The king said: Were this not a coun- 
 terfeit made by the Gods, then it was my 
 angel wife. So, Capilya! Must here end 
 our love? The earth is going fast from me 
 now! 
 
 Capilya said: Our love will never diet 
 For the good thou hast done for the Zara- 
 thustrians, the Creator will provide 
 thee a home suited to thy great soul. If 
 thou hadst any faults, thou hast more than 
 balanced them. 
 
 The king beckoned for Capilya and the 
 nurse to come to him, and then he said,, 
 feebly: It seems to me I hear the Gods 
 laughing! Keep ye up the joke! My 
 brother's oldest son knoweth nothing of 
 it! A kingdom is but a farce. Hold me 
 up, Capilya. I would have mine eyes feast 
 on the sky only, after having seen thy 
 sweet face. 
 
 Capilya lifted him up, and the king said 
 to the nurse: I bless thee! Thou brought- 
 est forth a good prop! O aden, aden! All 
 is nothing! All is nothing! 
 
 And the breath went out of him; he 
 was dead. 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 Jehovih said to Capilya: My chosen 
 shall not have kings; I, Jehovih, am King. 
 As through Zarathustra I gave the rab'- 
 bahs and chief rab'bahs, so have I through 
 thee; and their families are My families. 
 Kings and kingdoms of men I give to the 
 unrighteous; for they, perceiving not Me, 
 for I am the higher law, shall have' that 
 that they can perceive, which is the lower 
 law. A kingdom is thrust upon thee;. 
 what wilt thou? 
 
 Capilya said: What shall I do, O Je- 
 hovih? 
 
 Jehovih answered, saying: Suffer thy- 
 self to be proclaimed at home and in the 
 provinces, after which thou shalt ratify the 
 laws, and then abdicate, and the kingdom 
 shall fall into other hands. 
 
 Capilya was proclaimed, and thereaf- 
 ter known as king Capilya, and he abdi- 
 cated, and then Heloepesus became king r 
 and he became obligated to Capilya, so 
 
506 
 
 CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 LORDS' RCCORO 
 
 that the latter, though not king, stood as 
 a protector over the Faithists, even greater 
 than Heloepesus, nor could any laws be 
 enacted affecting the Faithists without the 
 consent of Capilya. 
 
 Jehovih had said: My people shall be 
 a separate people; they shall live under 
 My laws, for I am their King. 
 
 Now the whole time, from Capilya's 
 first beginning of the restoration of the 
 Faithists, until establishing a protectorate 
 -for them, was five years. After this Capil- 
 ya traveled about, east and west, and north 
 and south, collecting together the scatter- 
 ed remnants of his people; and he estab- 
 lished them in colonies, and taught them 
 -not only rites and ceremonies, but taught 
 the lost arts of tilling the soil and of mak- 
 ing fabrics out of hemp and wool and silk; 
 and he established schools and provided 
 teachers for the people. 
 
 Capilya said: The first virtue is to 
 learn to find Jehovih in all things, and to 
 love and glorify Him. 
 
 The second virtue is Cleanliness; all 
 people, old and young, shall bathe once a 
 day. 
 
 The third virtue is to eat no fish nor 
 flesh, nor other unclean thing; for of what 
 profit is it to bathe the outer part if one 
 putteth filth within? 
 
 The fourth virtue is Industry. Because 
 the Father gave man neither feathers, nor 
 hair nor wool; let it be testimony of His 
 commandment that man shall clothe him- 
 self. To clothe one's self, and to provide 
 one's self with food; these are the enforced 
 industry upon all people. In addition tr 
 these, to labor for the helpless; to bathe 
 them and feed them, and house them and 
 clothe them; these are the volunteer indus- 
 tries permitted by the Father that ye may 
 prove your soul's worthiness before Him. 
 Without industry no people can be vir- 
 tuous. 
 
 One of the rab'bahs asked him what 
 Industry was? To this Capilya replied: To 
 keep one's self in constant action to a prof- 
 itable result. To rise before the sun and 
 bathe and perform the religious rites by the 
 time the sun riseth; and to labor thereafter 
 not severely but pleasantly until sunset, 
 this is Industry. The industrious man find- 
 eth little time for satan's inspiration. 
 
 The fifth virtue is of the same kind, 
 
 which is Labor. There shall be no rich 
 amongst you; but all shall labor. As ye 
 develop your corporeal bodies unto 
 strength by reasonable labor, so doth the 
 act of labor develop the spirit of man to 
 profitable growth for its habitation in hea- 
 ven. For I declare unto you a great truth, 
 which is, that the idle and the rich, who 
 labor not with the corporeal body, are born 
 into heaven helpless as babes. 
 
 The sixth virtue, which is greater than 
 all the rest, is Abnegation of one's self. 
 Without Abnegation no man shall have 
 peace of soul, either on earth or in heaven. 
 Consider what thou doest, not that it shall 
 profit thyself, but whether it will benefit 
 others, even as if thou wert not one of 
 them. Without the sixth virtue no family 
 can dwell together in peace. 
 
 The seventh virtue is Love. Consider 
 when thou speakest whether thy words 
 will promote love; if not, then speak not. 
 And thou shalt have no enemies all the 
 days of thy life. But if thou canst justly 
 say a good thing of any man, be not silent; 
 this is the secret to win many loves. 
 
 The eighth virtue is Discretion, espe- 
 cially in words. Consider well, and thou 
 wouldst be surprised at the wisdom of thy 
 neighbors. Discretion is a regulator; with- 
 out it, man is like a tangled thread. 
 
 The ninth virtue is System and Order. 
 A weak man, with System and Order, do- 
 eth more than a strong man without them. 
 
 The tenth virtue is Observance. With 
 Observance a man accepteth from the an- 
 cients such things as have been proven to 
 be good, such as rites and ceremonies. 
 Without Observance a man beginneth back 
 even with the earliest of the ancients, and 
 thus casteth aside his profit in the world. 
 
 The eleventh virtue is Discipline, the 
 Discipline for the individual and the fam- 
 ily. He who hath not Discipline is like a 
 race-horse without a rider. A time to rise; 
 a time to eat; a time to pray; a time to 
 dance; a time to labor; these are good in 
 any man; but the family that practiceth 
 them in unison with one another hath Dis- 
 cipline. 
 
 The twelfth virtue is like unto it, and 
 is Obedience. All good and great men are 
 obedient. He that boasteth his disobedi- 
 ence to discipline is a fool and a madman. 
 Greater and better is the weak man of 
 obedience than the strong man of defiance. 
 
CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 LORDS- RtCOHO 
 
 507 
 
 For the one promoteth the harmony of the 
 family; but the other ruptureth it. 
 
 Consider these twelve virtues; they are 
 sufficient laws unto the whole world. Man 
 may multiply books and laws forever, but 
 they will not make the family, nor colony, 
 nor state, happy, without the adoption of 
 these twelve virtues. 
 
 CHAPTER XI. 
 
 Capilya said: Let thy life be thy preach- 
 er. The behavior of one good man, even 
 in a sparse country, is of more avail than a 
 thousand preachers. The clamor of the 
 tongue maketh speedy converts, but it 
 changeth not the blood. They perform the 
 rites and ceremonies, but their behavior is 
 not of the twelve virtues. One community 
 of a score of men and women, that dwell 
 together in peace and love, doing good to- 
 ward one another, is the manifestation of 
 more wisdom than all the books in the 
 world. 
 
 A man that hath learned sympathy is 
 better than the philosopher that will kick 
 a cat or a dog. Great learning is not only 
 in books; he who hath learned to harmon- 
 ize with Ormazd hath great learning. 
 
 Jehovih said: The doctrine of the idol- 
 ater is war; but My Sons and Daughters 
 practice peace, resisting not any man with 
 weapons of death, saith Jehovih. My ser- 
 mons are not in wordy professions, but in 
 the souls of My people who practice My 
 commandments. Ye have witnessed that 
 Sudga's followers said: Behold, Sudga is 
 our Lamb of Peace! And they were na- 
 tions of warriors; they built monuments to 
 glorify their greatest slayers of men. My 
 people say little; profess little, as regard- 
 ■eth their virtues; but their practice is My 
 Voice! 
 
 Capilya said: Whatever should be the 
 character of one man, so be the communi- 
 ty and the state. Harmony is a man's soul 
 is his greatest blessing; and so of the 
 family, and of the state. Whoso will sacri- 
 fice self-gratification for good of the family 
 is the greatest, best one in the family. 
 
 My Father in heaven, is thy Father 
 also; all men and women are my brothers 
 and sisters. To magnify one's soul so as 
 to realize this brotherhood, is a great vir- 
 tue. No matter what name He hath, there 
 is, nevertheless, but One Creator; and all 
 
 peoples are His children. Call thou Him 
 what name thou wilt, I will not quarrel 
 with thee. No man can prove this by war. 
 
 At death the real life beginneth; mold 
 thyself well whilst thy soul hath a good an- 
 chor. The man learning to swim had bet- 
 ter go in with corks, till he find the stroke; 
 like this, thy Creator gave thee a corporeal 
 body. Be not in haste to enter the unseen 
 world; make sure that thou hast learned 
 the stroke of the resurrection erst thou put- 
 test aside thy flesh and bones. 
 
 Religion is the learning of music in a 
 community, in which the rab'bah is the 
 key-note. Music is of two kinds: sounds 
 and assimilation. Dumb instruments may 
 make sound-music; but assimilation com- 
 eth to the real matter of putting one's be- 
 havior into harmony with the community. 
 
 Good works! Who knoweth the mean- 
 ing of these words? King Yokovrana 
 judged the good works of a man by the 
 number of bad man he had slain. When 
 alms-houses promote laziness they are not 
 good works. Preaching, praying, and 
 singing, are not works; they are the blos- 
 soms, with enticing fragrance. Yet satan 
 persuadeth man that these are good works. 
 Nevertheless, all fruit is preceded by blos- 
 soms. The most learned man, the most 
 pious man, and the greatest philosopher 
 can not tell what is the meaning of the 
 words, good works. But a mother, with a 
 child one day old, can tell; a farmer, that 
 hath sowed and reaped one harvest, and 
 given half of it away to the less fortunate, 
 can tell also. To bring forth out of the 
 earth food or clothing, these are good 
 works only so far as they exceed one's own 
 requirements and are given to others. To 
 live on the earnings of others, save in time 
 of helplessness, is evil. To preach and not 
 produce substance for others; such a man 
 is a vampire. He selleth sermons and opin- 
 ions to the ignorant, making believe his 
 words are of Ormazd. 
 
 The preacher shall dwell with the poor, 
 taking hold with his own hands; teaching 
 and helping; he who giveth words only, 
 and not labor, is a servant of hell. He 
 findeth honeyed words, and drawleth his 
 voice; he liveth in ease and plenty; he 
 stretcheth out a long face seriously; he is a 
 hypocrite and a blasphemer against his 
 Creator. 
 
508 
 
 CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 With love and rejoicing, and with will- 
 ing hands, stand thou upright before Or- 
 mazd; for thy preaching shall bear evidence 
 of joyful light; and thy presence give to 
 the weary and disconsolate assurance that 
 thou art the Creator's son, come in earnest 
 to glorify Him by righteous works and a 
 helping hand. Besides Capilya's book of 
 maxims, the quarter of which is not here 
 related, he also restored the Zarathustrian 
 commandments and the songs of Vivanho. 
 Nor since two thousand years were the 
 children so well standing before the world. 
 And peace and plenty came upon the land 
 of Vind'yu, even greater than in the days 
 of Brahma. Thus closeth the history of 
 Capilya, who was led in all things by Jeho- 
 vih, through His angels, even to the words 
 he uttered, though oft he knew it not. 
 Now whilst this was going on in Vind'yu, 
 the Creator also labored through His an- 
 gels in the land of Egupt, with Moses. 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 HISTORY OF MOSES. 
 
 God commanded his loo'is, in the high 
 heavens, saying: Descend ye to the earth, 
 to the land of Egupt, and raise me up a 
 son capable of my voice. 
 
 The angels descended as commanded, 
 and searched over the land of Egupt and in 
 the adjoining countries, examining into the 
 flesh and the souls of men. And they call- 
 ed unto God, saying: The land of Egupt 
 is overrun with spirits of darkness, and 
 mortals have attained to see them; and 
 they dwell together as one people, angels 
 and mortals. 
 
 God said: Go ye amongst my chosen 
 until ye find a man capable of understand- 
 ing between truth and fable. Him inspire 
 ye to an I'hin woman for my voice. 
 
 In Ellakas the loo'is found a man, Bak- 
 sa, a Fonecean, a Faithist, born a su'is, 
 and they said unto him: Why art thou 
 alone in the world? 
 
 Baksa said: Alas, mine eyes have never 
 seen God; mine ears never heard him. I 
 am searching for God in the life of a re- 
 cluse. 
 
 The loo'is perceived what manner of 
 man he was, and they led him to take an 
 l'hin woman to wife, and she bore him a 
 son, Hasumat. 
 
 The loo'is guarded Hasumat till he was 
 grown, and they spake to him, trying him 
 also as to his power to distinguish angel 
 voices. Him they also inspired to take an 
 I'hin woman to .wife, and she bore a son, 
 Saichabal, who was guarded in ;the same 
 way. And the angels inspirel Saichabal to 
 marry Terratha, of the line of Zed. Terra- 
 tha bore a daughter who was named Eda- 
 mas. And Edamas bore a son by an I'hin 
 father without marriage, and she called his 
 name Levi, signifying, joined together, be- 
 cause his toes were not separate on the 
 right foot, nor the fingers separate on the 
 right hand. And Levi grew to be a large 
 man, larger than two men. 
 
 Levi, being of the fourth birth of I'hin 
 blood, was not acknowledged an heir of 
 the chosen race, the Faithists. Therefore 
 Levi established a new line, which was 
 called, the House of Levi. Levi, not be- 
 ing eligible to a Faithist. wife, was inspired 
 by the loo'is to take an I'hin, Metissa, to 
 wife. Metissa bore him a son, Kohath, 
 who, at maturity, was admitted to the Or- 
 der of Avah, the third degree of Faithists, 
 whereupon he was circumcised, and after- 
 ward called an Israelite, the name given to 
 the Faithists of Egupt. 
 
 Kohath took to wife, Mirah, a devout 
 worshipper of Jehovih. Mirah bore him a 
 son, Amram, who took to wife Yokefed, 
 sister-in-law to Kohath, and she bore him 
 a son, who was Moses. Before Moses' 
 birth the loo'is perceived that he would 
 be capable of the Father's voice, and they 
 called unto God saying: In the next gen- 
 eration, behold, thy son will be born. 
 
 CHAPTEL XIII. 
 
 In these days in Egupt there were 
 houses of records, where the affairs of the 
 state, and of the king and governors, were 
 recorded; also the births and marriages 
 and deaths of people. The languages of 
 the learned were Fonecean and Par'si'e'an; 
 but the native languages were Eguptian, 
 Arabic and Eustian and Semis. The times 
 by the learned gave twelve months to a 
 year, but the times of the tribes of Eustia 
 gave only six months to a year. Accord- 
 ingly, in the land of Egupt what was one 
 year with the learned was two years with 
 the Eustians and Semisians. 
 
 God said: My people shall reckon their 
 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 loads' nccomo 
 
 509 
 
 times according to the place and the peo- 
 ple where they dwell. And they did this. 
 Hence, even the tribes of Israel had two 
 calendars of time, the long and the short. 
 
 To events of prophecy there was also 
 another calendar, called the ode, signifying 
 sky-time. One ode was equivalent to 
 eleven years; three odes, one spell, signi- 
 fying a generation: eleven spells, one Tuff. 
 Thothma, the learned man, and builder 
 of the great pyramid, had said: As a di- 
 ameter is to a circle, and as a circle is to 
 a diameter, so are the the rules of the sea- 
 sons of the earth. For the heat or the 
 cold, or the drouth or the wet, no matter, 
 the sum of one eleven years is equivalent 
 to the sum of another eleven years. One 
 spell is equivalent to the next eleventh 
 spell. And one cycle matcheth every 
 eleventh cycle. Whoever will apply these 
 rules to the earth shall truly prophesy as 
 to the drouth and famine and pestilence, 
 except wherein man contraveneth by drain- 
 ing or irrigation. And if he apply himself 
 to find the light and the darkness of the 
 earth, these rules are sufficient. For as 
 there are three hundred and sixty-three 
 years in one tuff, so are there three hun- 
 dred and sixty-three days in one year, be- 
 sides the two days and a quarter when the 
 sun standeth still on the north and south 
 lines. 
 
 In consequence of these three calen- 
 dars, the records of Egupt were in confu- 
 sion. The prophecies and the genealogies 
 of man became worthless. And as to 
 measurements, some were by threes, some 
 by tens, and some by twelves; and because 
 of the number of languages; the measure- 
 ments became coufounded; so that with all 
 the great learning of the Eguptians, and 
 with all the care bestowed on the houses 
 of records, they became even themselves 
 the greatest confounding element of all. 
 
 Jehovih had said: For two thousand 
 years I gave My enemies a loose rein; and 
 they have the longest line of kings in all 
 the world; and yet in the midst of their 
 prosperity they fall down like a drunken 
 man. Even their language is become like 
 a pearl that is lost in a mire. Because the 
 kings of Egupt have outlawed My people, 
 and denied them the right to obtain great 
 learning, behold My people are divided 
 also. One tribe hath one speech, another 
 
 tribe another speech, and so on, till they 
 can not now understand one another; ex- 
 cept in their rites and signs, and pass- 
 words. Yea, the kings have perceived that 
 to keep My people in ignorance is to keep 
 them forever in bondage. But I will raise 
 up a leader amongst My chosen, and 
 I will send him even into the house of 
 the king, and the king shall give him great 
 learning; he shall master all languages, 
 and be capable of speaking with all My 
 people. 
 
 Because the Israelites worshipped not 
 the Gods and Lords, but their Creator 
 only, and because they resented not in- 
 jury done by another, they had been lim- 
 ited into servitude by the Eguptian laws, 
 which had stood for fifteen hundred years. 
 These laws were called the Sun laws, after 
 the manner of the division of the Osirian 
 system, which was: 
 
 The sun is a central power; its accom- 
 panying planets are satellites. In like man- 
 ner the king of Egupt was the Sun King, 
 and his sub-kings were satellites. Osiris, 
 the highest angel in heaven, was the Sun 
 God, that is, God of Gods; for all other 
 Gods were his satellites. He revealed cer- 
 tain laws to mortals, and these were Sun 
 laws; and all minor laws were satellites. 
 A Sun law extended over all of Egupt. 
 but a satellite law pertained to the minor 
 affairs of a city or province; but it must 
 conform to the Sun laws. For in those 
 days the spirits of darkness taught that 
 the sun once whirled so fast that it cast 
 off its outer extreme, and so made the 
 earth, and moon, and stars; and this was 
 the accepted philosophy of the learned 
 Eguptians of that period. Because the 
 worlds run in circles, the circle was the 
 highest measure, or sun measure; and the 
 diameter of the circle was called, the ode, 
 a Fonecean word, signifying short meas- 
 ure. And this name, ode, was applied to 
 the Israelites in satire. But the Israelites 
 made sweet songs and called them odes 
 also. 
 
 Among the Sun laws were the follow- 
 ing: The God of Gods (Osiris) decreeth: 
 Whoso boweth not down to me, shall not 
 partake of me. Behold, mine is the sign 
 of the circle! My enemies shall not receive 
 great learning. They shall not hold sun 
 
510 
 
 CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 places but be as servants only all their 
 lives. And these signs shall discover them: 
 
 If they worship not me, but the Great 
 Spirit; if they deny that the Creator is in 
 the image of a man; if they circumcise, 
 and will not serve as soldiers; 
 
 Then their possessions are forfeited al- 
 ready; nor shall they possess houses in 
 their own right; nor send their children 
 to the schools; for they shall be servants 
 and the servants of servants forever. 
 
 Under the Eguptian laws it was ac- 
 counted a sufficient crime of idolatry to 
 worship the Creator, Jehovih, and the 
 Israelites were not even admitted to the 
 courts to be tried for an offence, but fell 
 under the jurisdiction of the master for 
 whom they labored, and his judgments 
 were unappealable. 
 
 Now at the time of the birth of Moses, 
 there were in Egupt thirteen million in- 
 habitants; and of these, four million were 
 Faithists, more or less faithful. For 
 amongst the Israelites not all were of full 
 faith, but many, to shirk the rigors of the 
 Sun laws, professed to be worshippers of 
 Osiris, and they who would also enlist as 
 soldiers, and otherwise connive in the ways 
 of men, for sake of favors. For which rea- 
 son the Sun King feared the time might 
 come when the Israelites might revolt 
 against the Sun laws or become soldiers 
 and confederate with foreign kingdoms for 
 the overthrow of the Eguptian dynasty. 
 
 For more than three hundred years the 
 God Baal and the Goddess Ashtaroth had 
 driven the foreign kingdoms to war; and 
 in consequence of these wars the Faithists 
 had fled into Egupt, and even accepted 
 servitude rather than be slain elsewhere. 
 
 Jehovih had said: Behold, Mine ene- 
 mies in killing one another, frighten off 
 My chosen. Now will I lead them into 
 Egupt together, and give unto them a 
 great leader, and he shall restore My doc- 
 trines unto them, and I will afterward de- 
 liver them into lands of their own. 
 
 CHAPTER XIV. 
 
 The king's palace and pyramids were 
 surrounded by a wall of stone; with 
 twelve gates, made of wood and iron. The 
 wall was of sufficient breadth for twelve 
 men to walk abreast thereon, and the 
 height of the wall was equivalent to twelve 
 
 squares. On the summit of the wall there 
 were twelve houses for the accommodation 
 of the soldiers who patrolled the walls. 
 And in each and every gateway there were 
 houses for the keepers of the gates. So 
 that no man, woman, nor child, could 
 come into the palace or palace grounds 
 without permission. 
 
 And it came to pass that when Leoto- 
 nas, the king's daughter, walked near the 
 river, accompanied by her maids, she be- 
 held a child in a basket amongst the bul- 
 rushes. Leotonas commanded her maids 
 to bring it to her; and when she looked 
 upon it and beheld it was an Israelitish 
 child, she said: The Gods have sent him 
 to me, and he shall be my child. 
 
 And they bore the child into the pal- 
 ace, and Leotonas said to the king: Be- 
 hold, a wonder of wonders! I have found 
 an Israelitish child in a basket in the 
 rushes, and only Gods know how it came, 
 or how it scaled the walls. The king said: 
 Keep thou the child, and it shall be both 
 a brother and a son to thee. Neverthe- 
 less, my guards shall find the way my 
 grounds are entered, or blood will be upon 
 them. 
 
 Now after some days, and when the. 
 search had been completed and no way 
 discovered as to the manner of the child's, 
 ingress, the king issued a decree com- 
 manding a thousand Israelitish male chil- 
 dren to be put to death, Moses among the 
 rest, unless the mother of the child, Moses, 
 came and acknowledged as to the manner 
 of ingress. The king allotted three days 
 in which time the matter should culmin- 
 ate; but nevertheless the mother came not 
 and acknowledged. 
 
 And the king called his daughter, and 
 said unto her: What shall be done? Leo- 
 tonas said: The king's word must not be 
 broken; nevertheless, thou gavest the child 
 to me, saying: Keep thou it, and it shall 
 be a brother and a son to thee. And 
 straightway I sent my maids and procured 
 an Israelitish woman as nurse for the 
 child. And I set my heart upon the child, 
 nor can I part with it and live. ( Last 
 night I consulted the oracle as to the mat- 
 ter, for I saw that thy mandate must be 
 fulfilled. 
 
 The king said: And what said the ora- 
 cle? Leotonas said: Give word abroad 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 511 
 
 that the nurse of the child is its mother. 
 Now I beseech thee, O king, let it be her- 
 alded- abroad that all is acknowledged. 
 
 The king, seeing the child, relented; 
 and word was proclaimed as Leotonas had 
 desired. And, moreover, the matter was 
 entered in the recorder's house that the 
 mother of the child had made the basket 
 and placed it where it was found, though 
 no reason was assigned therefor. Such, 
 then, was the Eguptian explanation. 
 
 Now the truth of the matter was, the 
 angels of Jehovih came to Yokefed and 
 said: Thy son's name shall be Moses, 
 signifying, a leader-forth, for he shall de- 
 liver the Israelites out of bondage. But 
 he shall be taken from thee, and thou 
 canst not find him. For the angels, of Je- 
 hovih will deliver him into Leotonas' 
 hands. And she shall adopt him as her 
 brother and son, and bestow upon him the 
 education of a prince. 
 
 Yokefed feared, for in those days male 
 children of Israelitish parentage were out- 
 lawed, nor could any man be punished for 
 slaying them. And Yokefed prayed Te- 
 hovih, saying: Thy will be done, O Jeho- 
 vih, for I know Thy hand is upon my son. 
 But I beseech Thee, O Father, that I may 
 come to the princess and be her nurse for 
 the child. The angel of Jehovih said: 
 Swear thou before Jehovih thou wilt not 
 betray to the child that thou art his moth- 
 er! 
 
 Yokefed said: Though I be command- 
 ed by the king, yet will I not own that I 
 am the mother, and it be Thy will, O Je- 
 hovih! 
 
 And Jehovih's angels fashioned a bas- 
 ket; and carried the child and placed it 
 where it was found by Leotonas and her 
 maids. And Leotonas, seeing it was a He- 
 brew child, commanded one of her maids 
 to go and bring an Israelitish woman to 
 nurse it. And the maid went out beyond 
 the Utak gate and found and brought 
 Yokefed, the child's mother, but no one 
 knew she was its mother. And when Yoke- 
 fed had come before the princess, the lat- 
 ter said unto her: Nurse thou the child, 
 for I will be its mother and its sister, for 
 the Gods have delivered it into my hands. 
 And Yokefed said: It is a goodly child; I 
 will nurse it for thee. 
 
 Moses grew and became a large man, 
 being a pure I'huan, copper-colored and 
 of great strength. And Pharaoh, having 
 no son, bestowed his heart on Moses, and 
 raised him as a prince, having provided 
 him men of great learning to teach him. 
 Moses was master of many languages, and 
 withal made acquainted with kings and 
 queens and governors, far and near. And 
 he espoused the cause of the king, whose 
 dominions held seven kingdoms beyond 
 Egupt as tributary kingdoms, which paid 
 taxes to Pharaoh. 
 
 So Pharaoh made Moses embassador 
 to the foreign kingdoms, in which capacity 
 he served twelve years. But because of the 
 prejudice against him, for being of Israel- 
 itish blood, the court of Pharaoh impor- 
 tuned the king for his removal, and Moses 
 was so removed from office under the king. 
 
 The king said to Moses: My son, this 
 is a double infliction on me in my old age; 
 in the first place, it is as a sword-thrust, 
 to cut off my love to thee, lest thou some 
 day become king; and in the second place, 
 it is hard for a Pharaoh to be dictated to 
 by his own court. 
 
 Moses replied: Fear not, O king, that 
 my love and thine can be severed. Oft it 
 happeneth that men are tried in a way 
 they know not the wisdom of, but which, 
 afterward, we realize to be the best thing 
 that could have taken place. As for my- 
 self, I think this rebuke it put upon me by 
 Jehovih because I labored not for mine 
 own people. 
 
 The king said: How so? Moses re- 
 plied: For many days a great heaviness 
 hath come upon me; it is as if the wind of 
 heaven bore down on my heart, saying: 
 Moses, Moses, lift up thy voice for thy 
 people. For, behold, the king, thy father, 
 will favor thee! 
 
 Pharaoh said: What wouldst thou, my 
 son? And if it be possible to be done it 
 shall be done. 
 
 Moses answered: Until I have gone 
 amongst them and ascertained their griev- 
 ances, I know not how to answer thee. 
 The king said: Go, and keep thy counsel 
 to thyself till thou art returned. 
 
 So Moses departed and traveled over 
 the land of Egupt, and was four months 
 absent, and then returned unto Pharaoh. 
 And to him Moses related all the griev- 
 
512 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 LORD'S RECORD 
 
 ances of the Israelites; explaining the tasks 
 put upon them; their denial before the 
 courts; their forbiddance to education; 
 and withal extolled them highly for being 
 a peaceful and virtuous people. 
 
 The king said: It is a pity; it is a great 
 pity. But what can I do, O Moses? Thou 
 beholdest how even thou thyself art chas- 
 tised by the king's court. If I demand the 
 repeal of the laws, the court will heap coals 
 of fire on thy head and on mine. 
 
 Moses said: Neither know I, O king, 
 what to do. And Moses was in great trou- 
 ble of soul; and after he waited a while 
 in silence, he said: O king, this night 
 thou and Leotonas shall reason with me, 
 for I feel it incumbent because of the pres- 
 sure on my soul. 
 
 When the three were alone that night, 
 behold, it was the beginning of the dawn 
 of light. And Moses' ears were opened, 
 and he heard the Voice of Jehovih through 
 his angels saying: 
 
 Behold, O king, and thou, Leotonas, 
 and thou, Moses, now is the beginning of 
 My power on the face of the earth. Moses, 
 My Son, thou shalt take thy people out of 
 the land of Egupt; and I will bestow upon 
 them the lands of the ancients, even whith- 
 er I will lead thee. Change not thy laws, 
 O king; let Egupt have her way; and let 
 the Israelites have their way also. 
 
 The king said: To deliver four million 
 people! O what a labor! 
 
 On the next day Moses walked out, go- 
 ing into the woods to be alone, for heavy 
 trouble was upon him. And an angel of 
 Jehovih appeared in a flame of fire in a 
 bush, calling: Moses, Moses, my son! 
 And Moses saw that the bush was not 
 burnt, and he said: Here am I, and I 
 heard thy voice. 
 
 The voice said: I am the God of Abra- 
 ham, and of Isaac and Jacob. Moses said: 
 What wouldst thou? 
 
 The voice said: Go thou once more 
 amongst thy people, and say thou: I, 
 Moses, am come to deliver you out of the 
 land of Egupt, and into an inheritance 
 which shall be your own. Moses said: 
 My people will ask of me: By whose au- 
 thority speakest thou? What, then, shall I 
 answer them? The voice said: Say thou to 
 them: The I Am sent me. And if they 
 question further, saying: Thou hast a de- 
 
 ceiving spirit, like the Eguptians, then 
 shalt thou say to them: How can ye dis- 
 tinguish one spirit from another? and they 
 will say: Whoso laboreth for himself will 
 deceive us. And thou shalt say to them: 
 Whosoever hath faith in Jehovih, let him 
 give up all, even as I do; and let them fol- 
 low me; for if a multitude go forth in 
 Faith in the Father, then will the Father 
 provide unto them. For this is the mean- 
 ing of Faith, from which ye were named 
 Israelites. 
 
 So Moses and his brother, Aaron, trav- 
 eled about in the land of Egupt, calling to- 
 gether the Raban families, explaining to 
 them, and urging the people to get ready 
 and depart out of Egupt. For three years 
 they thus labored, and it became known 
 far and near that the project was on foot. 
 And the oracles of the Eguptians prophe- 
 sied that when the Israelites were once out 
 of the country they would unite with the 
 kingdoms whereto Moses had been embas- 
 sador, and then return and overpower the 
 Eguptians, 
 
 And in order to stigmatize Moses they 
 said he fled away from Pharaoh's palace 
 because he had seen two men, an Egup- 
 tian and an Israelite, fighting, and that 
 Moses slew the Eguptian and buried him 
 in the sand. And the recorders thus en- 
 tered the report in the Recorder's House. 
 
 Moses was of tender heart and he in- 
 quired of the All Person, saying: Will 
 ever a voice of justice speak in my behalf? 
 Jehovih, through His angel, answered 
 Moses, saying: Suffer thy enemies to put 
 on record what they will, for the time will 
 surely come when the truth shall be re- 
 vealed unto men. Pursue thy course; for 
 it shall be shown that thou dost still visit 
 the king; wherefore, hadst thou fled as the 
 records state, thou wouldst not return, 
 with the report hanging over thy head. 
 
 In those days Egupt was a land of glory 
 and of misery. Hardly is it possible for 
 words to describe the splendor in which 
 the nobles lived. Of their palaces and 
 chariots a thousand books might be writ- 
 ten, and yet not reveal all. And as to the 
 members of the king's court, so grand were 
 they that many of them stood not on the 
 ground from one year's end to the other; 
 but caused carpets to be spread wherever 
 they desired to walk. And as to their 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 513 
 
 chariots, they were bound with silver and 
 gold, and set with precious stones. 
 
 Of the royal court and the nobles, 
 there were two thousand four hundred and 
 eighty, and they owned and possessed ev- 
 erything in Egupt, which was the richest 
 country in the world. The next in rank 
 were the masters, who were servants and 
 tenants to the courtiers and nobles; and 
 the third in rank were the Faithists, called 
 Israelites, who were servants under the 
 masters. 
 
 And it was against the law for any one 
 to call a meeting of the Israelites, or to in- 
 cite them against servitude to the masters; 
 for which reason Moses and Aaron violat- 
 ed the law of the land, nor dared any man 
 to arrest them, because Moses bore with 
 him the king's seal. 
 
 Of the miseries of the land of Egupt 
 the half hath never been told, for they were 
 of the nature of the flesh, and of such kind 
 that one may not mention them fully, for 
 they involve the beasts of the fields, and 
 dogs, male and female, and goats also. 
 Suffice it, the people were victims of evil 
 spirits, and had descended to such unnat- 
 ural practices as poisoned the flesh, which 
 became inhabited with vermin; and they 
 had running sores; and only evil practices 
 alleviated the pains. The people were 
 subject to entrancement. by evil spirits, 
 and the latter appeared amongst the peo- 
 ple, taking on semblance of corporeal 
 forms for evil's sake, also eating and drink- 
 ing with mortals daily. 
 
 When Moses beheld these things he 
 prayed to Jehovih for wisdom and 
 strength; for thousands and thousands of 
 the Israelites were becoming afflicted in 
 the same way. Jehovih answered Moses, 
 saying: Because of the abundance of evil 
 angels in this land it is impossible for My 
 chosen to dwell herein and escape afflic- 
 tion. Moses explained this matter to the 
 Israelites. 
 
 Jehovih said: Moses, thou and thy 
 brother shall return to the king, for he is 
 worried concerning thee and thy labors. 
 Behold, the nobles have complained before 
 the king against thee. 
 
 Moses visited the king, who was sick 
 with a fever; and the king was on his di- 
 van at the fountain in the palace grounds, 
 and the men servants were forcing water. 
 
 When the king saw it was Moses, he rais- 
 ed up, rejoicing, and called Moses to come 
 and sit with him. And servants ran in and 
 told Leotonas that Moses had returned, 
 and Leotonas came also and rejoiced to 
 see Moses. Now whilst they were talking 
 the king was overcome and fell in a faint, 
 whereupon Moses raised him up and re- 
 stored him; and then carried the king unto 
 the palace in his arms. 
 
 Leotonas said: Moses, my son and 
 brother, thou shalt not more leave us 
 alone? Behold, my father is old, and he 
 gave his heart to thee when thou wert a 
 child. Be thou to him his son. Behold 
 how he revives in thy strong hands ! 
 
 Then spake the king, saying: My son, 
 with all thy wisdom, canst thou under- 
 stand a woman? 
 
 Moses said: Alas, O king, save the 
 princess, I have not studied them. But 
 why askest thou? 
 
 The king replied: Leonotas has not 
 said one word about the affairs of the 
 kingdom! What is uppermost in a wo- 
 man's heart, that speaketh she first; but 
 as to man, he speaketh first that which lieth 
 at the bottom of his heart. I love thee, 
 Moses, and delight in thy presence; but 
 my kingdom concerneth me deeply. The 
 nobles have complained against thee for 
 meddling with their slaves, and for this I 
 have desired to see thee. 
 
 Moses said: The Voice came to me, 
 informing me of what thou sayest, and 
 then commanded me to come to thee, for 
 thou wert ill with fever. And the king re- 
 plied, saying: If I should die before thou 
 hast accomplished the migration of thy 
 people, I fear my successor, Nu-ghan, will 
 make it hard for thee. Tell me, therefore, 
 how matters stand with thee? 
 
 Moses said: Jehovih hath planned 
 this migration: it cannot fail. For, wit- 
 ness thou what proof I have found: The Is- 
 raelites were looking for a leader-forth,. 
 even as I was named in the basket. And. 
 wherever I have gone* the rab'bahs and. 
 their families are acquainted with the mat- 
 ter as if it were born in their souls. 
 
 The king said: Everywhere the ora- 
 cles declare against thee and Jehovih; say- 
 ing thou art in the hands of evil spirits. 
 
 Moses said: What are the oracles to 
 me? To feel assured one is in a good 
 work: this is better than oracles. 
 
514 
 
 CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 CHAPTER XV. 
 
 The Voice of Jehovih came to Moses, 
 saying: Have the king give thee commis- 
 sioners who shall go in advance and ex- 
 amine the countries whither I will lead 
 thee; and when the commissioners have 
 returned, thou shalt proclaim to My peo- 
 ple what the commissioners say, and the 
 people will be convinced, and rise up and 
 follow thee. So Moses asked the king for 
 a commission of Eguptians, and the king- 
 appointed thirty-three men, and allotted to 
 them seven months to accomplish the in- 
 spection; and he gave to the commission 
 camels and asses to ride upon, and to carry 
 food to eat on the journey. 
 
 Meanwhile, Moses sent Aaron around 
 about through Egupt, to inform the peo- 
 ple of the commission, and also as to how 
 they should make their outfits. And Aa- 
 ron said unto the rab'bahs: Be ye circum- 
 spect as to the outfits of our people; ob- 
 serving that they carry not away with 
 them anything that is another's, even to a 
 fraction; for thus hath Moses commanded 
 me to say unto you. 
 
 When the commissioners returned and 
 made their report, which was favorable, 
 Moses had the report sent amongst the 
 Israelites; and Moses added: For these 
 be such, as, having little faith in Jehovih, 
 will have faith in the words of the commis- 
 sioners. 
 
 The Gods of the Eguptians were not 
 idle, and they sent word by way of the or- 
 acles to the courtiers and nobles to the ef- 
 fect that Moses had persuaded the king to 
 hand the kingdom over to the foreign na- 
 tions, knowing the king had no son eligi- 
 ble to the throne. 
 
 The courtiers and nobles, therefore, 
 importuned the king to choose one of 
 two things: Either to banish Moses out of 
 the country, and put aside all arrange- 
 ments for the migration of the Israelites; 
 or, on the other hand, to abdicate the 
 throne in favor of Nu-ghan. In the mean- 
 -time, a whole year's drouth came upon 
 Egupt, and the rivers overflowed not, so 
 that a famine was sure to fall upon many 
 -jaarts of the country. 
 
 The king answered the demand of the 
 courtiers and nobles with these words : I 
 am Pharaoh, king of Egupt! Look ye to 
 the threatened famine; provide the stores 
 
 for my people. I declare to you all, a new 
 thing is come unto the world, which is: 
 Migration from Bondage! Nor is it in 
 the power of nobles or courtiers or kings 
 to stay this. 
 
 When the courtiers received this an- 
 swer they said to one another: These are 
 Moses' words, fashioned for the king's 
 mouth. Certainly he hath lost the fear of 
 the Lord, and hearkeneth to the God of the 
 Israelites! 
 
 Jehovih, through His angels, spake to 
 Moses, saying: Now is thy time. Go to 
 the Heads whom thou hast chosen and ap- 
 point a time unto them of one place, and 
 so on unto all the Heads. And thou shalt 
 make the armies going forth so numerous 
 that the Eguptians will be overwhelmed. 
 
 These, then, are Heads, the chief rab'-. 
 bahs appointed by Moses, and the places 
 in Egupt whence they were to depart 
 from: , Rasak, son of Ubeth, of the place 
 Hagor; Ashimel, son of Esta, of the place 
 Ranna; Gamba, son of Hanor, of the place 
 Nusomat; Bothad, son of Nainis, of the 
 place Palgoth; Amram, son of Yoth, of 
 the place Borgol; Lakiddik, son of Sam- 
 had, of the place Apau; Jokai, son of Ked- 
 dam, of the place Hasakar; Jorvith, son of 
 Habed, of the place Oeda; Sattu, son of 
 Bal, of the place Harragatha; Tussumak, 
 son of Aban, of the place Ra; Makrath, 
 son of Filatti, of the place Nabaoth; Hi- 
 jamek, son of Tor, of the place Nu'joram; 
 Fallu, son of Hagan, of the place Ennitz; 
 Shutta, of the place Romja; Jokkin, son of 
 Rutz, of the place Moan; Tudan, son of 
 Barrahha, of the place Hezron; Osharrak, 
 son of Libni, of the place Raim; Tham- 
 mas, son of Rodaad, of the place Sakaz; 
 Misa, son of Tiddiyis, of the place Tessam; 
 and Sol, son of Zakkas, of the place An- 
 nayis. 
 
 Jehovih said: And the Heads shall have 
 notice seventy and seven days; and they 
 shall notify the rab'bah of their places, 
 that due preparation shall be made for the 
 start. Nevertheless, the time appointed 
 unto thy people shall be kept secret with 
 the Heads and with the rab'bahs. And 
 whatever number the rab'bah can send 
 forth, he shall notify the Head; and when 
 all things are in readiness, that number 
 shall go forth on the day appointed, every 
 one on the same day. 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 515 
 
 And Moses appointed the month Abib, 
 and the tenth day thereof, when all the 
 people should start; and moreover, he said 
 unto the Heads: Ye shall see to it that 
 the night before they start, even at the 
 hour of sunset, and the moment thereof, 
 every family shall offer a lamb in sacrifice, 
 and every man, and every woman, and 
 every child that can speak, shall covenant 
 unto Jehovih in the blood of the lamb. 
 When the time of the slaughter is at hand, 
 the family shall stand around, and the 
 iamb shall be in the midst, bound head and 
 foot; and, when the knife is raised for the 
 blow, no one shall speak, for that which 
 is to be, shall be the covenant of the blood 
 of the lamb against Egupt. And when the 
 throat is cut across and the blood flowing, 
 they shall all say: In Egupt the lamb of 
 Jehovih is dead; His God shall go hence 
 with Israel, but Egupt shall be accursed 
 from this night! Accept this, my cove- 
 nant, with Thee, O Jehovih, for innocent 
 blood hath been shed as a testimony before 
 Thee that, with to-morrow's sun, I rise to 
 lie not down again in Egupt forever! 
 
 Thus went Aaron and Akad, bearing 
 this message in secret to the Heads of the 
 Houses of Israel, saying unto them: Thus 
 saith Moses: This is the commandment of 
 Jehovih, Who is Almighty! 
 
 And now, on the eve of success to the 
 Israelites, the king of Egupt, being at the 
 point of death, sent for Moses, and Moses 
 went to him. The king said: If it should 
 be the Lord's will to take me off before 
 thy people are gone, thou wilt have sore 
 trials; for my successor, Nu-ghan, hath a 
 great hate toward Israel. 
 
 ' Moses said: What, then, shall be done? 
 The king said: Behold, the pestilence hath 
 overspread Najaut and Arabenah. Thy 
 people will be cut off from traveling by 
 that way. Nu-ghan and his courtiers 
 dwell in Harboath. Moses replied: My 
 people shall march through Najaut and 
 Arabenah; neither shall the pestilence come 
 upon them, for the hand of the Almighty 
 is in this matter. 
 
 Leotonas, learning that Moses was with 
 the king, went in to see him: She said: O 
 my son and brother, thou art welcome. 
 Behold, the trials of the royal court, and 
 the persistence of the nobles, are the death 
 of the king. 
 
 To this the king said: And still I 
 live, Leotonas! But, alas, these were his 
 last words, for he laughed, and the blood 
 bursted through his heart, and he died 
 then and there, even in Moses' arms. 
 
 CHAPTER XVI. 
 
 Jehovih, through His angels, said unto 
 Moses: When the body of the king is em- 
 balmed and put away, thou shalt go quick- 
 ly to thy people; for he who cometh to the 
 throne is under the voice of the false 
 Baal, and he will try to prevent the depart- 
 ure of My chosen. So, Moses left the cap- 
 ital and did as commanded. 
 
 On Nu-ghan's being crowned he at 
 once issued the following decree: Behold 
 me, I am Pharoah, King of Egupt, and 
 Ruler of the World. God hath raised his 
 voice in my dominions, saying: Hail thou, 
 Sun King of the corporeal world: Be- 
 hold, I gave to thee all the living that are 
 on the face of the earth, and in the waters 
 of the earth, to be thine, to keep forever. 
 And I say unto thee, what is thine own is 
 thine own, and thou shalt have dominion 
 in thine own way, for I made all that are 
 alive on the earth to be thine forever! 
 Whether of beasts of the field, or fish in 
 the waters, or man on the earth; all the 
 living I created for thee, and thou shalt 
 possess them from everlasting to everlast- 
 ing. And the life of the living gave I 
 into thy keeping; and I said unto thee: 
 The house of Pharaoh have I created, and 
 it is my house also. And whoever ruleth 
 on the throne of this land, the same is my 
 son, and is the possessor whilst the breath 
 of life is in him. But when he dieth, and 
 the throne fall to his successor, the rights 
 and the powers and possessions of thy 
 kingdom shall not die nor be set at naught. 
 But the successor shall be my Pharaoh 
 whom I raised up unto my dominions; thus 
 saith the Lord. 
 
 Now, therefore, I, Pharaoh, who am 
 king and possessor of all the world by com- 
 mandment of God, and by his son, Osiris, 
 who is dead and risen, being myself God 
 of the earth, into whose hands are be- 
 queathed all the living, am to-day, yester- 
 day, and forever, the same everlasting king 
 and Lord of all. And I decree unto my 
 people, who are mine by virtue of my au- 
 thority from God, that only by my gra- 
 
516 
 
 CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 cious indulgence hath any man or people 
 right to put one foot before the other, on 
 this my sacred earth. 
 
 And whoso goeth here or there, save 
 by the sign of the signet of my seal, shall 
 surely be put to death. And any multi- 
 tude of my people, who are my servants, 
 whom the God of Gods hath given into 
 my hands to do my works, to till my soil, 
 or to build my houses, or dig canals, or 
 make bricks, or gather harvests, or make 
 cloth, or attend flocks, and to do any 
 work whatsoever, who may design to es- 
 cape out of Egupt, to go to my enemies, 
 the foreign kings, shall be deemed guilty 
 unto death. And if such people start 
 forth, to quit my service, to go out of my 
 holy land, then shall my loyal slaves fall 
 upon them and slay them, right and left, 
 sparing neither man, woman nor child. 
 For thus commandeth the Lord God, 
 whose son I am. 
 
 Jehovih, through His angels, spake to 
 Moses, saying: Go thou; take Aaron thy 
 brother, and go before the king and plead 
 thy cause. 
 
 Moses said: O Jehovih, Thou Almigh- 
 ty, why hast Thou said this unto me? I 
 have no argument in me, like other men? 
 nor have I courage to face a man or wo- 
 man. My tongue is slow to find words till 
 after the opportunity. From my youth up 
 I have known this man, Nu-ghan, who is 
 king, and if he but stamp his foot at me 
 I am helpless before him. 
 
 Jehovih said: For that reason, My son, 
 I can give thee My words. Go, and fear 
 not. Then Moses went before Pharaoh, 
 taking Aaron with him. The king asked: 
 What is thy will? 
 
 And Moses said: I am come to beseech 
 thee to suffer my people to depart out of 
 Egupt. 
 
 The king replied: The Lord is with 
 me; he saith thou shalt not go; and I re- 
 peat the words of my God. 
 
 Then spake Moses, the power of Jeho- 
 vih being upon him: Think not, O king, 
 that bondage is for this world only; here 
 doth not the matter end. Thou hast here 
 said in thy decree, even from the Lord hast 
 thou spoken, saying: The life of the liv- 
 ing I give unto thy keeping. Saidst the 
 Lord this to thee? Wherein, then, is jus- 
 tice, since pestilence and death are coming 
 
 upon thy people? Callest thou this keep- 
 ing them? I declare unto thee, that even 
 in the words of thine own God thou hast 
 failed utterly, and this sin is upon thee. 
 Suffer, then, my people, to depart, that 
 thine own shortness may not be magnified 
 unto thee, in the afflictions which will 
 surely overspread this land. 
 
 The king said: Thou hast no authority; 
 thou art a frozen serpent' that was taken 
 into the house of the king; and being 
 thawed out, thou turnest to bite thy bene- 
 factors. Thou art outlawed by men and ac- 
 cursed by the oracles. It is said of thee, 
 thou hast been to Hored, and there wed 
 for sake of alliance with my high priest, 
 Jethro, for conveyance of my lands unto 
 thy people. Who art thou, that pretend- 
 est to hear a voice, and to be led by the 
 Unseen? Thou slave! 
 
 Moses said: I am not here to plead 
 mine own cause, O king, but my people's. 
 Suffice it, though, that even as thy Lord 
 God standeth upon miracles, I bow not 
 down before him. For these are evidence 
 that thy God and thy Lord are but an- 
 gels of the dead, who labor for thee and 
 thy aggrandizement, and not for all men's 
 welfare. For I have miracles, also; and 
 whatsoever thy magicians can do, that can 
 I do also; have I not eyes and ears, even 
 as the oracles? Now I declare a miracle 
 unto thee, which is that thou thyself shall 
 not only consent to my people going out 
 of Egupt, but thou shalt send armies to 
 drive them out. To turn a rod into a ser- 
 pent, or water into wine; or to show thy 
 spirits of the dead, alas, O king, even they 
 that are of rotten flesh can do such thines! 
 
 Pharaoh said: If the oracle hear God, 
 is not this the greatest? 
 
 Moses replied: He who uttereth what 
 an angel bid him is that angel's servant; 
 he who uttereth a good truth hath spoken 
 with the Creator's voice. 
 
 Pharaoh asked: Sayest thou thy words 
 are the Creator's? 
 
 Moses replied: I am as all good men 
 who speak truth; all that is good, and all 
 truth, are the Creator's words. In a rose He 
 nndeth expression in perfume; in the light- 
 ning His words are thunder; in a bird His 
 words are songs; but in man, His voice is 
 in man's words; for every living creature, 
 and every living thing on the earth, or in 
 
CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 LOKDS' iiccono 
 
 517 
 
 the waters, or in the air above the earth, 
 giveth expression in its own way; because 
 the Father's hand is the foundation of all 
 that is good and true. He is the I Am 
 Who sent me to thee; by His command 
 open I my mouth before thee. And in His 
 name declare I unto thee thou shalt not 
 only suffer my people to depart out of 
 Egupt, but thou shalt send thy armies to 
 drive them out. 
 
 The king said: Moses, Moses, thou art 
 mad! For though all Egupt run blood, yet 
 will I not do as thou hast said. 
 
 Then Moses replied: I tell thee, O 
 king, there are two powers in heaven; that 
 which is for Justice and Goodness, even 
 the I Am; and that which is for sin and 
 death. And if the Creator lift off His pro- 
 tecting hand from Egupt, she shall in that 
 day become the plague spot of the earth. 
 Thou dost remember, when in the ancient 
 days, great Thothma built the first pyramid, 
 thy forefathers decried the power of hea- 
 ven; and straightway all the land, and the 
 great pyramid itself, was flooded with 
 evil spirits. And then came foreign kings, 
 and robbed and plundered Egupt. Think 
 not, O king, these legends are but idle 
 tales; there be Gods and Lords in heaven 
 who could sweep the sea up, and drown all 
 this country. Behold, a day is set; a night 
 is marked out when the lamb of peace shall 
 die. And in that night the first-born of 
 every woman, and the first-born of every 
 beast in the fields, shall die for all the 
 Eguptians; and in that same night not one 
 of the Israelites shall go down in death. 
 Jehovih saith: I will show My power 
 through My people in the time of My cov- 
 enants. 
 
 Pharaoh said: Were these things to be, 
 God had come to more noble quarters. 
 Thou art beside thyself. And I banish 
 thee; nor will I again look upon thy face. 
 
 Moses said: Whether in this world or 
 the next, thou shalt yet call unto me to de- 
 liver thee from torments. Nevertheless, I 
 do thy bidding; neither will I come to thee 
 again; nor shalt thou look upon my face 
 for a long season. With that, Moses and 
 Aaron saluted the king and departed. 
 
 CHAPTER XVII. 
 
 Pharaoh called his chief superintendent 
 and said unto him: As to the Hebrew 
 
 brickmakers, thou shalt no longer supply 
 them with straw, but they shall continue to 
 make the same number of bricks. And as 
 to the tillers of the soil, thou shalt no 
 longer suffer them to have cattle to draw 
 the plows, but they shall draw the plows 
 themselves, and they shall likewise break 
 the same quantity of ground. And in this 
 way the king put extra hardships upon the 
 Israelites because he was angered at what 
 Moses said. 
 
 Moses perceiving this, cried out unto 
 Jehovih, saying: O why didst Thou send 
 me before Pharaoh? Behold, matters are 
 worse than before. O that I had guarded 
 my tongue and been of persuasive speech! 
 
 Jehovih said to Moses: Rebuke not 
 thyself, for thou hast done My commands. 
 And it shall come to pass now, what oth- 
 erwise would not. For such Israelites as 
 hesitated about going out of Egupt, will 
 now decide for themselves as to what they 
 will do. And the hardships that Pharaoh 
 hath newly added, shall be a blessing to thy 
 people. 
 
 And it came to pass that the Israelites 
 went away from their taskmasters, and 
 the rab'bahs sent them to the Heads: and 
 the people of Israel were stirred up from 
 one end of Egupt to the other. And as 
 for the Eguptians. save the courtiers and 
 nobles, they were likewise stirred up, but 
 without any purpose or order; so that all 
 the great land of Egupt had no tillers nor 
 builders; and cleanliness departed away 
 from them; and the country stank as a 
 dead carcass, so that insects and vermin 
 filled all that air of heaven. But of the 
 Faithists, the flesh was good; and vermin 
 came not upon them; nor were they strick- 
 en with fevers, or lepers, or scabs, like the 
 Eguptians. 
 
 Pharaoh ordered his army of two hun- 
 dred thousand men to take the field, but 
 they were scattered and afflicted so that 
 they were only as vagrants, without head 
 or discipline. 
 
 Jehovih spake to Moses, saying: Now 
 will I show her philosophers a miracle in 
 the air above the earth. Have they not 
 said: All things come up out of the earth? 
 for they have tried every way to put Me 
 aside, and to explain My creation away as 
 an idle tale. They shall look and see the 
 sun, and declare of a truth there is no 
 
518 
 
 CYCLE OF L1KA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 cloud; but whilst they look up, they shall 
 see a cloud high up in the heavens, and it 
 shall be broad as the land of Egupt, a very 
 black cloud. And it shall descend to the 
 earth, and it shall prove to be locusts, 
 come without any seed; and they shall be 
 so numerous that in three days they will 
 eat up every green leaf of every tree and 
 herb in all the land. Neither shall they be 
 like any other locusts that have been on 
 the earth or ever shall be; for man shall 
 comprehend that they are not of the seed 
 of the earth. 
 
 Moses sent with a herald this prophecy 
 to the king, and he added thereto: Why 
 hast thou put more hardships on my peo- 
 ple? Seest thou not that the evil thou 
 hadst hoped to accomplish hath cured it- 
 self even before it came to pass? For the 
 Israelites now work not at all, and their 
 taskmasters are left in the lurch. Again I 
 call upon thee to let my people go. 
 
 The king replied not to this, but silent- 
 ly put his officers to work, drilling and 
 equipping his armies and collecting them 
 together; which, when Moses beheld it, 
 he understood to be the sign, as the Great 
 Spirit had previously said, when the cloud 
 would appear. And it came to pass on a 
 very clear day, at noon, a cloud formed 
 high up in the firmament, and it grew 
 blacker and blacker, until it descended 
 upon the earth; and it was locusts, and 
 was even as a snowstorm that covered the 
 land of the earth; in places to the depth of 
 the shoes and ankles. And they ate every 
 green leaf, and herb, and grass, so that in 
 two days there was not a leaf to be found 
 far or near. And on the third day, the lo- 
 custs being still unappeased as to hunger, 
 fell upon the Eguptians, old and young, 
 feeding upon their clothes, and even upon 
 the flesh of the Eguptians. And on the 
 fourth day Jehovih caused a great wind to 
 come, and it blew the locusts ofY into the 
 sea. 
 
 And again Moses sent heralds to the 
 king, saying: Consider now my words 
 and be wise. I have told thee that the 
 hand of the Creator is upon this land. In 
 thy heart thou sayest: Moses is a fool! 
 Only a windstorm brought the locusts from 
 a far-off country. But I say unto thee, O 
 king, this is not so. And thou shalt still 
 further behold Jehovih's power. For as 
 
 the locusts came down out of the firma- 
 ment, and thou hast a philosophy for the 
 occurrence, behold, now another miracle 
 shall come in another way: For there shall 
 suddenly come up out of the water frogs 
 and reptiles, and they shall likewise be 
 so numerous on the land that man shall 
 not find where to put his foot that it shall 
 not come upon them. And the first day 
 they shall be harmless; but on the second 
 day they shall crawl upon the people, and 
 under their clothes, and in their houses; 
 and on the third day they shall eat the 
 flesh of the Eguptians. But they shall not 
 touch one Hebrew in all the land. Nor 
 shall any man find whence came so many 
 frogs and reptiles; for they shall not be 
 like the seed of other frogs and reptiles. 
 And on the fifth day all the frogs and rep- 
 tiles shall suddenly disappear, neither by 
 wind nor rain. But a stench, as of rotten 
 flesh, shall strangle the Eguptians nigh 
 unto death. 
 
 Again I appeal unto thee, O king, to 
 suffer my people to depart out of Egupt 
 in peace. This is the last time I shall so- 
 licit thee. And if thou answerest not me, 
 then shall it come to pass in the month 
 Abib, and on the ninth day and night 
 thereof, the I Am will raise His hand over 
 Israel; but as for Egupt, the Lord shall 
 strike her in death. For in every family 
 of Eguptians, far and near, on that night, 
 shall the first-born fall dead; and that thou 
 shalt not say the prophecy killed them, be- 
 hold the first-born of every beast shall die 
 also, even of goats, and sheep, and cattle, 
 and asses, and of dogs and cats, and of 
 every living creature man useth. For on 
 that night, behold, four million Israelites 
 shall make with Jehovih the covenant of 
 death. And on the morning thereafter 
 they will rise up to not lie down again in 
 Egupt. And this shall be the testimony 
 of innocent blood against thyself and all 
 thy people, for what the Hebrews have 
 suffered. 
 
 The king answered not Moses; and be- 
 hold Egupt was overspread with frogs and 
 reptiles, in every particular, even as Moses 
 had prophesied. Nevertheless, Pharaoh 
 pursued his course. 
 
 Jehovih spake to Moses, saying: Moses, 
 My son, look upon man and pity him, for 
 he believeth not in Me, though I multiply 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 519 
 
 signs and omens continually, and give him 
 prophecies without end. One thing only 
 turneth man's eyes inward; that is, flesh 
 of his flesh, lying dead before him. 
 
 When the Israelites made the covenant 
 of the blood of the lamb, a hot wind blew 
 upon the face of the earth; and the first- 
 born of the Eguptians fell dead, both man 
 and beast. And Pharaoh's son died, and 
 his brother's son; and the first-born of 
 every courtier and every noble's first-born, 
 and all other people, their first-born, so 
 that in every family there lay one dead. 
 
 Pharaoah was now stricken, but not 
 unto repentance, for evil was in his heart, 
 and he cursed Moses and the Israelites, 
 and swore an oath to destroy Israel, man, 
 woman and child, so that never more 
 should there be one on the earth. And 
 such a commandment he sent to his offi- 
 cers, to begin the slaughter. As for 
 the Faithists, not many of them had 
 slept all the night, but were providing 
 for the journey; so that when the morn- 
 ing came, and at the time of sunrise, they 
 every one started. From all the different 
 regions of Egupt they went forth toward 
 Sukkoth. The Heads led the way, and 
 every commune was led by a rab'bah, and 
 every man's family by the father of the 
 family or by the eldest son. And at the 
 start they spake through their leaders, 
 saying: In Thy name, O Jehovih, we de- 
 part out of the land of our birth, to return 
 not forever! Neither shall Egupt prosper 
 more till Thou hast subdued the whole 
 earth unto Thee. 
 
 But all things had changed wonderful- 
 ly as to the Eguptians, for when they be- 
 held the Israelites were indeed going, and 
 knew the miracles that had taken place, 
 they relented, and brought them gifts of 
 gold and silver; and also asses and cam- 
 els for the Hebrew women and children to 
 ride upon; and gave them food to eat. 
 But the Israelitish women said: Nay, if 
 we take these things we will be under ob- 
 ligations to the Eguptians. The Israelites 
 accept not what they cannot pay for. Then 
 the Eguptians bewailed in fear, saying: 
 That we be not accursed by the Gods, take 
 them, we beseech you in the name of your 
 God also. So the Faithist women accept- 
 ed the presents of asses and camels, and of 
 
 other things besides; and they mounted 
 the asses and camels, and rode them. 
 
 When Moses heard of this afterward he 
 rebuked Israel, saying: Because ye have 
 accepted these things it will be said, ye 
 borrowed them and begged them so as to 
 despoil the Eguptians. 
 
 When they arrived near Sukkoth, Je- 
 hovih spake to Moses and Aaron, saying: 
 Stand ye here for twelve days, that ye may 
 behold My people as they pass, and that 
 ye in turn may be seen by them. So 
 Moses and Aaron pitched their tents by 
 the way, on a high piece of ground, and 
 remained there twelve days, and Moses 
 showed himself before them, speaking and 
 encouraging. 
 
 After this the Israelites passed through 
 Etham, on the borders of the wilderness, 
 and thence toward Migdol, near Baal- 
 zephon, the place of the oracle of the 
 God, Baal, and they encamped before Pi'- 
 hahiroth, where Moses commanded them 
 to remain some days to rest. 
 
 Now as for Pharaoh he had not made 
 any attack on the Israelites, for the Lord 
 held his army in confusion. Pharaoh, find- 
 ing that the Israelites were not injured, 
 decided to take the field himself; and ac- 
 cordingly, having impressed all the chari- 
 ots of Egupt, went ahead, leading his army 
 in person. The Israelites were wearied 
 and foot-sore, and discovering that Phara- 
 oh was after them, many of them com- 
 plained and grumbled, saying: O Moses, 
 why broughtest thou us from home? Bet- 
 ter was it for us to have remained in servi- 
 tude to the Eguptians than to be slain. 
 
 Moses rebuked them, saying: Profess 
 ye to be Faithists but yet have not faith 
 in the I Am? Put your trust in Him; for 
 He will deliver ye safely, as He has prom- 
 ised. 
 
 Jehovih spake to Moses, saying: They 
 shall behold the salvation of My hand; 
 for the Eguptians who pursue them this 
 day shall pursue them not again forever. 
 For when thou bringest them to the sea, 
 thou shalt lift up thy rod, and I will di- 
 vide the sea, and My people shall walk 
 across on the land at the bottom of the 
 sea. And Pharaoh's army shall pursue, 
 but be swallowed up in the waters. 
 
 And so it came to pass. Jehovih 
 brought a strong wind and divided the 
 
520 
 
 CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 LORDS RECORD 
 
 waters of the sea and swept them back, 
 and the Israelites went over on land. But 
 Pharaoh's army, who were in pursuit, 
 were caught in the flood of the tide and 
 were drowned. 
 
 Thus delivered Jehovih the Israelites 
 out of Egupt, and Israel believed in Him 
 and in Moses, His servant. Now from the 
 place Sukkoth unto the other side of the 
 sea, a pillar of cloud preceded the Israel- 
 ites by day, and a pillar of fire stood over 
 them by night, and the people looked 
 thereon and saw, every one, the cloud and 
 the light. And the name of the place 
 they reached when the crossed over was 
 Shakelmarath; and they camped there 
 many days. 
 
 From the. time Moses began to put on 
 foot the migration of Israel until he reach- 
 ed Shakelmarath, was four years two 
 hundred and seven days. And the number 
 of Israelites that thus went forth out of 
 Egupt was three million seven hundred 
 and fifty thousand, men, women and chil- 
 dren. And the number of other people 
 who accompanied them was four hundred 
 thousand; and because they were of the 
 uncircumcised tribes of ancients, the He- 
 brews nicknamed them Levites, meaning- 
 imperfect flesh. And Moses commanded 
 the Levites to camp aside, and not to mix 
 with the Israelites, and they obeyed him 
 in all things, maintaining that they were 
 the true descendants of Abraham. 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII. 
 
 Moses called together the Heads and 
 the rab'bahs, privily, and spake before 
 them, saying: What have I taken upon 
 me, O Jehovih? Behold Thy sons and 
 daughters have followed me out of Egupt; 
 how shall I bind them unto Thee and not 
 unto me, O my Father in heaven? 
 
 Jehovih said: Who is like unto thee, 
 Moses, My son; in miracles who can match 
 thee in the magnitude of thy proceeding? 
 Who led forth My millions; and delivered 
 them out of a great power without the loss 
 of a man, woman or child? 
 
 What I say unto thee, say thou unto 
 the rab'bahs and unto the Heads: Not 
 Moses, «nor the Heads, nor the rab'- 
 bahs, brought ye out of Egupt; ye were 
 brought out by the Creator, Jehovih, Who 
 
 is God of all, Captain of all. Head of all, 
 Rab'bah of all. For herein have I drawn 
 the line betwixt My people and My ene- 
 mies, the idolaters of men. Because of 
 signs, and miracles, the idolaters make a 
 man-God of their magician and worship 
 him. 
 
 But I declare unto thee, thou shalt do 
 a greater miracle than any of these; for 
 thou shalt preserve thyself from becoming 
 an idol before men. For thou shalt pro- 
 claim Me unto thy people in all things; 
 teaching them that thou art but a man. 
 And thy Heads and thy rab'bahs shall like- 
 wise teach them after the same manner; 
 for I will put away all idolatry from the 
 face of the earth. Neither will I have 
 kings nor queens; I am sufficient unto all 
 men. 
 
 As Abraham apportioned My people 
 into families, with rab'bahs and with chief 
 rab'bahs, so shalt thou re-establish them. 
 And My commandments, which I gave 
 unto Abraham, will I give unto thee; and 
 My crescent will I re-establish with My 
 rab'bahs. And My crescent shall be the 
 fullness of My law unto the rab'bahs and 
 chief rab'bahs. 
 
 And when it was night Moses and the 
 rab'bahs and the Heads went away aside; 
 placing sentinels that they might be alone. 
 And when they were thus prepared the 
 light of Jehovih came upon Moses, and 
 the books of the ancients were opened be- 
 fore him. And he administered Emetha- 
 chavah upon them; by the voice of Jeho- 
 vih he re-established it; with all the rites 
 and ceremonies. And after that the Heads 
 were no longer called Heads, but Chief 
 Rab'bahs; for Moses anointed them, by 
 command of Jehovih. 
 
 And in not many days Moses wrote 
 the Levitican laws; for the inner temple 
 of Jehovih was in spoken words only; but 
 the outer temple was written. Wherefore 
 it was said: The Hebrews have two laws; 
 one which no man else knoweth; and one 
 for them who are not eligible unto faith, 
 being such as were called Leviticans, being 
 those who had followed the Israelites out 
 of Egupt and who for the most part had no 
 God, little judgment and no learning. 
 
 But of all that Moses did, and taught, 
 and how he labored with his own hands, 
 many books might be written. And it is 
 doubtful if the world ever produced so 
 good and great a man. 
 
CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 LOGOS' XCCOWO 
 
 521 
 
 At the time Moses reached Shakelma- 
 rath he was forty-four years old by the 
 Hebrew sun, but by the Eguptian he was 
 eighty-eight years old. 
 
 Of Pharaoh and his hosts who were not 
 destroyed in the sea, be it said, they re- 
 turned home to their places. And not 
 long after that, Pharaoh banished Osiris 
 from the earth, declaring himself the Sav- 
 ior of the World, and Vice-Regent of the 
 Creator. 
 
 The scribes and recorders assembled in 
 Kaona, and appointed Feh-ya, an Egup- 
 tian, to write the departure of the Israel- 
 ites out of Egupt. And Feh-ya wrote the 
 account and called it the Exodus of the 
 Hebrews, and it was recorded in the king's 
 House of Records. And copies of it sent 
 to the large cities, and there recorded also, 
 for such was the law of Egupt. 
 
 The Book of Genesis, as it stood in the 
 Eguptian records, was written by Akaboth 
 and Duerama and Hazed, and was the sub- 
 stance from which Ezra copied it through 
 his scribes. The inspiration of Genesis 
 was from the God Osiris, the false, and his 
 emissaries, chief of whom were Yotabba 
 and Egupt, who were angel servants to 
 Osiris. 
 
 Touching genealogies, in which men 
 seemed to have lived to so great an age, 
 this, then, is the explanation thereof: 
 Thothma had said to his recorders: In 
 searching for the truth of legends, give ye 
 the latitude thereof. For one legend will 
 say, such a man lived seven hundred years 
 ago; another will say he lived ten hundred 
 and fifty years ago. The latitude between 
 them is, therefore, three hundred and fifty 
 years, which shall be the time of that man's 
 life. 
 
 And in this way latitude became con- 
 founded with fact, and with no intent to 
 deceive. And behold, it came to pass that 
 the records were worthless; and to make 
 matters worse the records were so volum- 
 inous, being more than six thousand 
 books. Nevertheless, they were all written, 
 in the first place not by the Israelites, but 
 by their enemies ; wherein the testimony of 
 the miracle is none the weaker. 
 
 CHAPTER XIX. 
 
 In the time of Moses, the people of Ar- 
 abin'ya worshipped many Gods and Lords. 
 
 whose high heavenly Captain was Osiris. 
 Four chief Gods were under him; they 
 were: Baal, Ashtaroth, Dagon and Ash- 
 dod. There were seven and twenty other 
 Gods also, known to mortals. When the 
 Israelites traveled forth amidst the differ- 
 ent tribes, they were beset to know what 
 Lord or what God they worshipped, and 
 by what Lord or what God they were led 
 forth. 
 
 The Light came to Moses to say to 
 them: Alas, His Name, whom we wor- 
 ship, man dare not utter. Therefore, thou 
 shalt say: The I Am. 
 
 Within the commune families, were cer- 
 tain signs and passwords belonging to the 
 different degrees. There were also oral 
 rules of life and worship, but these were, 
 kept secret from the multitude, but the in- 
 struction of the commune fathers to the 
 families was by this method made to har- 
 monize all the people. For general behav- 
 ior, Moses gave ten commands, which 
 were not only made public, but incumbent 
 on the commune fathers to teach orally to 
 their respective families. The following 
 are the commandments thus taught: 
 
 I am the I Am that brought thee out 
 of Egypt. 
 
 Thou shalt have no Gods nor Lords 
 but the I Am. 
 
 Thou shalt not make any' image of the 
 I Am out of anything that is in heaven 
 above, or on the earth beneath, or in the 
 waters. 
 
 Thou shalt not bow down thyself before 
 idols nor images, nor anything having the 
 form of anything in heaven, or on the 
 earth, or in the waters. 
 
 Thou shalt not speak My name in pub- 
 lic, for I will not hold him guiltless that 
 giveth it to idolaters and lovers of evil. 
 
 Remember the sacred days and keep 
 them holy. Six days shalt thou labor; but 
 the seventh day is the Sa'abbadha. 
 
 Honor thy father and thy mother. 
 
 Thou shalt not kill any living thing. 
 
 Thou shalt not commit adultery. 
 
 Thou shalt not steal; nor bear false 
 witness; nor covet anything that is an- 
 other's. 
 
 In those days it so happened that one 
 Koetha, an Egyptian woman, a su'is, went 
 into the lodge at noon, no person being 
 within the lodge save herself. Now, whilst 
 
522 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 LORDS RECORD 
 
 she was examining the implements, a 
 Voice spake to her, saying: Touch not 
 these, they are sacred. But, the woman, 
 knowing it was a spirit, said: If I tell what 
 I have heard, I will be accursed, for was it 
 not the multitude of seeresses that brought 
 the plagues on Egypt? 
 
 Again the Voice spake, saying: I will 
 give thee the signs and passwords of the 
 High Fathers, that they may know that 
 thou also knowest. Now, thereupon the 
 Spirit told her the secrets; and he likewise 
 said: Say thou to Moses, The I Am saith, 
 Behold, these implements are sacred. Hide 
 thou them by day, for those who have 
 spirit perception, perceiving them, will ob- 
 tain the signs and passwords. 
 
 The woman, Koetha, did as command- 
 ed, and Moses commanded workmen to 
 make an ark and the sacred implements 
 were kept within it, and this ark was the 
 corporeal base of the arc of Bon, a local- 
 ity in the etherean heaven, by which the 
 light of the second resurrection reached 
 the earth to Moses and his people, in a 
 pillar of cloud by day and of light by night. 
 
 The secret ceremonies commanded veg- 
 etable diet for fathers, prophets, seers, and 
 wanonas, and many of Koetha's people 
 followed their example. After some years 
 of experience, those who fasted from flesh, 
 murmured, saying: What have we gained 
 for our sacrifice? So they broke their 
 fasts by hundreds and by thousands; and 
 there came by their camps numberless 
 birds, and they caught and killed and ate 
 them freely; but, being unaccustomed to 
 such diet, they were taken with fever and 
 died, upward of sixty thousand of them, 
 men, women and children, and the place 
 was called Kibrath-Hattaavah, the place 
 of lusters. 
 
 In the year 3269 before Kosmon, the 
 Israelites began to marry with the Canaan- 
 ites, who were under the control of Baal. 
 Ashtaroth, whose dominions extended 
 jointly with Baal over Western and South- 
 ern Arabin'ya, sent spirit emissaries to the 
 handsomest of the women of Canaan, and 
 by impression led them into the camps of 
 the Israelites, to tempt the young men, for 
 by these means did these heathen Gods de- 
 termine to destroy the worshippers of the 
 Great Unseen. And many of the Israelit- 
 ish young men were tempted by the beau- 
 
 ty of the heathen women and thus took 
 them for wives; and these wives brought 
 with them their own familiar spirits, who 
 were slaves to Baal and Ashtaroth. 
 
 God immediately sent Jerub, an ether- 
 ean angel, into the Israelites' camp, giving 
 him ten thousand inspiring spirits to coun- 
 teract the labors of Baal and Ashtaroth. 
 
 When the half-breed children were 
 grown up, having Canaan mothers, they 
 began to murmur against the peace policy 
 of the Israelites, saying: As other people 
 have kings and emperors, why not we? As 
 other people raise up soldiers, declare 
 war, and go forth possessing themselves of 
 lands and cattle, why do not we? 
 
 For three hundred and ninety-seven 
 years after going out of Egypt, the Israel- 
 ites lived without a corporeal king, or oth- 
 er government, save the community of fa- 
 thers; and they attained to the number of 
 six million souls, men, women and chil- 
 dren. But in the three hundred and nine- 
 ty-seventh year, the Gods Baal and Ashta- 
 roth triumphed, through their familiar 
 spirits, and caused the Israelites to anoint 
 a king to rule over them. This king was 
 called Saul, signifying, Of the Lord God. 
 Prior to this, the Israelites acknowledged 
 no God nor Lord, but covenanted with the 
 I Am, E-O-Ih. The name had been 
 kept secret with the fathers, and the com- 
 mandments were announced from the 
 I Am. The familiar spirits now in- 
 spired Saul to change the words of the 
 commandments to the Lord Thy God, as 
 a conciliatory stratagem to please the na- 
 tions and tribes of people who worshipped 
 Baal, Dagon, Ashtaroth, Haughak, and 
 other Gods and Lords of the lower hea- 
 vens. 
 
 Thus was substituted Lord God for 
 E-O-Ih, and as the Great Spirit had 
 been heretofore taught to the Israel- 
 ites as an inconceivable entity, Whose form 
 and extent no man could attain to know, 
 so was He now transformed and declared 
 to be in the form of a man, and having a 
 residence in the firmament of heaven. Thus 
 they made the Creator merely an idol; thus 
 they began the overthrow of the holy doc- 
 trines of Moses. 
 
 Jerub, the etherean angel in command, 
 sought to preserve the old tenets, and 
 amongst mortals sought out one, Samuel, 
 
CYCLE OF LI K A 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 523 
 
 and inspired him to establish a college of 
 prophets, and this was done at Naioth. 
 and hither congregated the inspired; and 
 they established a crescent Tablet, and 
 made prophecies from etherea for a period 
 of seventy years. 
 
 At this time, the Israelites were twain, 
 those of the king and those of E-O-Ih, the 
 prophets, and these placed them at a dis- 
 advantage before neighboring tribes and 
 nations. Having sacrificed the name of 
 the Creator, and -made Him into a 
 man figure, the heathen said: What bet- 
 ter is their Lord God than our Lord or our 
 God? and they made war against the Is- 
 raelites on all sides; and the latter having 
 stooped to a corporeal king, went further 
 on and raised armies of soldiers and went 
 to war. 
 
 In the four hundred and ninth year af- 
 ter the departure out of Egupt, the entire 
 Peace Policy and Non-resistance of the 
 Mosaical Inspiration was overthrown, and 
 the Israelites became warriors, and even 
 warred against one another. 
 
 The Israelites not only worshipped the 
 imaginary idol, Lord God in heaven, but 
 built representatives of him in stone and 
 wood, and worshipped them also. 
 
 And now, one Elijah, a young man 
 from the college of prophets, foretold the 
 coming captivity of the Israelites as a con- 
 sequence of their idolatry. 
 
 In the year 2768 before Kosmon, a 
 young man, Elijah, was raised up from the 
 branch of the college of prophets, and, un- 
 der the inspiration of the angel Jerub, 
 went forth preaching amongst the heathen, 
 preaching not the Lord God, but Jehovih. 
 
 Ahab, a king, a worshipper of Baal, 
 said to Elijah: What better is one God than 
 another, or more powerful? Are not all 
 Gods but the spirits of men raised up in 
 heaven? 
 
 Elijah answered him, saying: I preach 
 neither Lord, nor God, but Jehovih, the 
 Creator, who is Ever Present and Potent 
 over all things. 
 
 Ahab said: Then thy Master hath nei- 
 ther eyes nor ears, knowing nothing, like 
 the wind. He is foolish, and without in- 
 telligent answer to thy prayers. 
 
 Elijah said: Summon thou thy priests, 
 and thy high priests, who have power 
 through Baal and Ashtaroth and Dagon, 
 
 and they and their Gods shall try in a 
 tournament against Jehovih. 
 
 Ahab caused the tournament to take 
 place, and when the priests and high 
 priests of Baal had spread the sacrifice 
 they repeated their invocations for a mir- 
 acle to prove the power of Baal and the 
 other Gods; and behold, Jerub, the ether- 
 ean angel, with ten thousand spirits to as- 
 sist him, prevented any sign or miracle 
 being accomplished by the familiar spirits 
 of Baal and Ashtaroth. 
 
 And now Elijah stretched forth his 
 hand unto Jehovih, saying: If it be Thy 
 will, O Father, give these people a sign of 
 Thy Power! 
 
 And Jerub and his etherean host of 
 angels, caused a flame of fire to descend on 
 the altar and consume the sacrifice. The 
 people feared, and many fell down, ex- 
 claiming, Jehovih is mighty! Jehovih is 
 mighty! 
 
 When the tournament was ended, Eli- 
 jah went upon Mount Carmel, and prayed 
 for rain; and Jerub, with ten thousand 
 times ten thousand angels, brought the 
 winds from the north, south, east and west, 
 and the moisture in the air above was con- 
 verted into rain, and thus the long drouth, 
 was ended. 
 
 In the year 2635 before Kosmon, the 
 college of prophecy raised up Jonah, and 
 Amos, and Hosea. 
 
 In the year 2574 before Kosmon, the 
 kingdoms of Israel perished, and they be- 
 came a scattered people, and fell into bond- 
 age again. 
 
 2439 years before Kosmon, Manasseth,. 
 son of Hezekiah, established idol worship,, 
 and, by law, abolished the worship of Je- 
 hovih. He caused the prophet Isaah to* 
 be sawn in twain; and the judgment was,, 
 because he worshipped Jehovih. 
 
 For three hundred years following, the 
 only Faithists amongst the Israelites were 
 the prophets, and the followers of the 
 prophets, who had never affiliated with 
 those of the kingdoms and armies. 
 
 The Faithists proper were a small mi- 
 nority, and scattered in many lands. The 
 rest, who were called Jews, lived under 
 written laws and ceremonies, which were 
 compiled and established by Ezra, in Jeru- 
 salem, and was completed in the year 2344 
 before Kosmon. From that time forward. 
 
524 
 
 CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 the Jews became worshippers of the Lord 
 and the God, but the scattered tribes of 
 the Faithists still held to the Great Spirit, 
 Jehovih, keeping their service secret. 
 These latter were without sin, doing no 
 war nor resistance of evil against evil, but 
 returning good for evil, and loving one 
 another as one's self. 
 
 From the Faithist branch sprang the 
 Es'eans, cultivating prophecy and purity 
 ■of spirit. The angels of Jehovih now dwelt 
 with the Es'eans, who were the true Isra- 
 elites; though many of the Jews also pro- 
 fessed Jehovih under the name of God and 
 Lord God. 
 
 In three hundred and fifty years after 
 this Jehovih raised up from the Es'eans, 
 one Joshu, an iesu, in Nazareth. Joshu 
 re-established Jehovih, and restored many 
 of the lost rites and ceremonies. In the 
 thirty-sixth year of Joshu's age he was 
 stoned to death in Jerusalem by the Jews 
 that worshipped the heathen Gods. 
 
 CHAPTER XX. 
 
 HISTORY OF CHINE. 
 
 These are the generations of the seven 
 antecedents of Chine, the chosen of the 
 Great Spirit: Tse'wong begat Hi-gan, 
 who begat Ah So, who begat T-sooYong. 
 who begat Ah Paing, who begat T-chook 
 Lee, who begat Tschine Loo, who begat 
 Ah Sho'e, who begat Chine, gifted in su'is 
 and sar'gis of six generations. Of these, 
 T-soo Yong and Ah So were prophets of 
 Ormazd, and Ah Sho'e was a seer; but the 
 six generations could hear the Voice, and 
 they walked upright, keeping in the com- 
 mandments of Jehovih as revealed in the 
 Zarathustrian laws. Ah Sho'e was a bas- 
 ket-maker, and after the manner of the 
 man, Zarathustra; and Chine, his son, 
 was the fourth birth of Ah Sho'e's wife, 
 Song Teng. Like Moses, Chine was of 
 -copper color, and very large, but his hair 
 was red, like a fox, and he was bashful 
 and of few words. Ah Sho'e, Chine's fa- 
 ther, said: I have had other sons; my 
 words are wise and true; Chine was unlike 
 any child born in the world; for boy child, 
 or girl child, no physician could tell which, 
 but rather to the boy kind was he. The 
 angel of Ormazd came to me before the 
 birth and said: The child shall be called 
 
 Chine, signifying no sex; as it is written 
 among the ancients, i-e-su, having no 
 earthly desires. For he shall restore the 
 chosen people of Ormazd. Whereof I 
 told the physicians before the birth, but 
 they would not believe. Nevertheless, by 
 command of Jehovih, I sent for seven 
 physicians to witness the birth, lest it be 
 said after the surgeons have dealt wrongly 
 with the child at its birth. These physi- 
 cians came: Em Gha, Tse Thah, Ah Em 
 Fae, Te Gow, T'si, Du Jon, Foh Chaing, 
 and Ah Koan, and they beheld the child 
 born, whereto they made oath, and a rec- 
 ord thereof, touching the strangeness of 
 such a birth, and of the prophecy of its 
 coming into the world; this record was put 
 in the Ha T'ae King of record belonging 
 to the Sun King. 
 
 Being now in my old age, I, Ah Sho'e, 
 put these things on record, of which hun- 
 dreds have come to ask me concerning the 
 childhood of Chine. 
 
 First, that 'he was the laziest of all chil- 
 dren, and dull past belief. For his broth- 
 ers and sisters mocked him, concerning 
 my prophecy, as to becoming a great man. 
 
 Second, he ate less than a Fa'ak, and 
 grew so thin we were ashamed of him in 
 his childhood; verily was he nothing but 
 skin and bone, with a large head. 
 
 Third, when he walked about, the stools 
 and tables moved out of his way; and yet 
 no hand touched them. Fourth, the an- 
 gels of Ormazd oft carried him about the 
 hut, and would lift him up to pick fruit 
 from the trees. Fifth, he never laughed, 
 but was serious and pleasant, like an old 
 man that had abandoned the world. But 
 he spoke so little no man knew whether 
 he was wise or stupid. When he was three 
 years old his mother weaned him, or rath- 
 er he weaned himself. And from that time 
 forth he never ate but fruit and nuts and 
 grains of rice. When he was sixteen years 
 of age he began to grow suddenly large 
 and strong, and of deep color. Whereat I 
 procured a teacher for him; and be- 
 hold, he could learn a whole book in a 
 day. He learned by hearing once; neither 
 forgot he anything he learned. 
 
 In his twenty-second year he began to 
 talk, and the angels of heaven spake 
 through him also. And great was his 
 speech. From sunrise in the morning until 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 LORDS RECORD 
 
 525 
 
 late at night his tongue ceased not to 
 speak. And his mouth was as if it were 
 the mouthpiece of heaven. For when one 
 angel had discoursed before an audience 
 for a while, then came another and anoth- 
 er, and so on; and when none came, then 
 spake Chine himself. 
 
 And there came before him men of 
 great learning, and philosophers, to try him 
 as to his knowledge; but they all went 
 away confounded. Neither was it possible 
 to ask him a question he could not an- 
 swer correctly. Whether it was to read a 
 tablet or to reveal the size and build of a 
 temple he never saw; or the sickness of a 
 man who was far away; for all things were 
 to him as an open book. 
 
 For four years this great wisdom re- 
 mained in him, and his fame spread from 
 east to west, and from the north to south; 
 no man knew how far. When he was 
 asked how far he could see and hear, he 
 said: Over all my land. And he marked 
 with his finger, saying: On this tablet, 
 Chine land! 
 
 Suddenly Chine's abundant speech ceas- 
 ed, and he answered only yea and nay to 
 all things. And he was silent for seven 
 years and eighty days. And then the an- 
 gels from the second resurrection came to 
 him. After that he spake not as a man, 
 save in private, but he spake as the All 
 Light whereof the world knoweth the rest. 
 
 CHAPTER XXI. 
 
 After Jehovih's voice came to Chine he 
 traveled far and near; and because of his 
 wonderful wisdom, men of great learning 
 and even kings sent for him. And wher- 
 ever he went he preached after the same 
 manner, for peace and love, and against 
 war. For three years Chine traveled, pro- 
 claiming the Creator above all else in hea- 
 ven and earth. And then he rested one 
 hundred and forty days, sleeping like a 
 young child, saying naught more than a 
 child would say. 
 
 Then came a change upon Chine; he 
 was as a new man in the world, and not 
 as a God. And he rose up, saying, My Fa- 
 ther, Creator of men, calleth me. I hear 
 His voice. It is like a burning fire in my 
 soul, moving me. Not with pain, but with 
 great power. He saith: 
 
 Chine, My Son! Chine, My Son! My 
 house is on fire! My little ones are burn- 
 ing. Go thou, Chine, to them. They are 
 in fear and trembling; they know not which 
 way to turn. The kings of the earth have 
 outlawed them; they are hunted down, and 
 are famished. Go thou to them, O Chine! 
 For that end I created thee alive in the 
 world; thou shalt be My Voice unto them. 
 Who can overcome the fire when he re- 
 maineth in the house? He goeth outside 
 where there is water. Call thou My people 
 out of the house of My enemies. Give them 
 a spring of clean water; they are parched 
 and athirst. Say to them: Jehovih liv- 
 eth! His love aboundeth; come ye to My 
 fountains that are not dried up. 
 
 Chine made the following covenant: I 
 swear to Thee, O Jehovih, Thou Al- 
 mighty! I will have no other God but 
 Thee, Thou Creator! All Light, Most 
 Glorious! Thou art my King! Holy, 
 Holy, Ever Present! O my Captain, my 
 All Highest Captain! I salute Thee in the 
 Rising Sun! In the High Noon, most 
 Mighty! And in the sweet Setting Sun! 
 I know nothing but Thee; to Thee I swear 
 this my most solemn oath, O Jehovih! 
 Call Thou up Thy angels, holy and most 
 wise; Thy recording angels! They shall 
 hear my covenant unto Thee, My Creator! 
 They shall write it in the books of heaven, 
 
 my Master! And whilst the sun stand- 
 eth, and the moon and the earth and the 
 stars, my oath unto Thee shall stand up 
 against me: 
 
 Thou only shalt be my King; Thou 
 only shalt be my God and Heavenly Ruler. 
 All other kings I forswear, and all other 
 Gods and captains and great rulers: None 
 of them will I bow down to or worship, 
 forever. 
 
 I swear unto Thee, Thou Great Spirit, 
 Thou art my bond to the end of the world. 
 
 1 will not war not abet war; to peace for- 
 ever am I sworn. And though they im- 
 press me and torture me, or slay me out- 
 right, they shall not force me; I will not 
 draw one drop of blood in any man or 
 woman or child whom Thou hast created 
 alive on the earth. 
 
 I swear unto Thee, Thou All Person, 
 Who art so large that the earth and sun 
 and stars would not fill the hollow of Thy 
 hand; to be like unto Thee, O Jehovih. 
 
526 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 LOGOS' RECORO 
 
 Fair dealing unto all men, as Thou 
 wouldst; good, forgiving and without an- 
 ger forever. And equally in all posses- 
 sions with Thy chosen, O Jehovih. 
 
 To raise them up that are cast down; to 
 deliver the afflicted and helpless; to ren- 
 der not evil, nor the fruit of anger, unto 
 any man, forever, O Jehovih. And good 
 to them that abuse me; and in my actions 
 steadfast in Thy course, my Creator. 
 
 In my blood do I covenant with Thee; 
 by the veins in my flesh make oath for- 
 ever. To wed not out of Thy Order, the 
 Hi-tspe. Blood of the blood of Thy chos- 
 en shall be my heirs and my heirs after me, 
 forever. 
 
 Hear me, O Jehovih; I make a new 
 covenant; it shall be written upon the firm- 
 ament of heaven. I will do good with all 
 my might; the tears of the suffering poor 
 shall be as scalding blood in my veins; I 
 will not sit down and rest, nor take my 
 ease, nor hold possessions whilst they are 
 in want. 
 
 Prick me, O my Father in heaven; 
 sharpen my conscience keener than a 
 sword; drive me to labor for the poor and 
 afflicted, give me no rest, but whilst I am 
 doing good unto them. O that my cove- 
 nant were set with swords, pointing every 
 way; that I could find no peace but in 
 serving Thee, my Creator, Ormazd. And 
 I were pure and strong and wise and swift- 
 er than life and death, and as unfailing. 
 And that my oath reached unto thy chosen, 
 and they heard me; that my voice were 
 sweet unto them, and enticing like an early 
 love. That they would come forth from 
 their hiding places, Thy faithful children, 
 and be not afraid. 
 
 I would go to them as a lover, and bow 
 my head down to them for their long suf- 
 fering, and their faith unto Thee, Jehovih. 
 As a father that has lost his son and 
 found him again, I would take them in my 
 arms, Thy worshippers, Thou All One, Ev- 
 erlasting Spirit. As a rose-bush trampled 
 in the mire; how they have been scourged. 
 O Jehovih. Poor unto death, and ragged 
 and scattered. But I would wash them 
 clean, and give them new soil; their 
 voices in song and praise should gladden 
 the whole earth. 
 
 CHAPTER XXII. 
 
 The great cities of the ancients in Jaf- 
 feth were destroyed by Te-in and his evil 
 spirits, who inspired mortals to war. And 
 for the most part it was a land of ruins, 
 but thousands of cities, standing beside 
 the broken walls, were spread over the en- 
 tire breadth of the land. 
 
 Jehovih spake to Chine, saying; Now 
 is a good time for My chosen. Behold My 
 enemies, the idolaters. They are weak 
 now. They pant with the labor of their 
 great battles. Let My people come out 
 of their quarters and hold up their heads. 
 
 Say thou unto them, O Chine, there is 
 no Joss, no Ho-Joss, no Te-in, no Po, no 
 Po-Te-in, to make you afraid. And whilst 
 the enemy resteth, bid My sons and daugh- 
 ters arise! They shall inhabit the land that 
 is spoilt, and cause it to bloom and bring 
 forth abundantly. Call up My outlawed 
 race; the enemy is sick of his wounds; his 
 heart is ashamed and disconsolate, he is 
 cast down. 
 
 Chine went to A'shong and gathered 
 up many converts, descendants of the 
 Faithists, the pure Brahmins, the line of 
 Zarathustra, the people of the Great All 
 One, who accepted not Gods and Lords. 
 And he established them, and invented 
 plows and mattocks for digging the 
 ground; for these implements had been 
 lost and destroyed, hundreds of years, and 
 no man knew how to make them. 
 
 Chine said unto them; Wait not till ye 
 are well fed and clothed before ye bow 
 down your heads at the altar of Jehovih. 
 When ye have prayed and sung before 
 Him, then go forth into the field to work. 
 And He will bless you. 
 
 Remember the heathen, they say: First 
 provide the natural body, and then the 
 spirit. But I say unto you, Jehovih creat- 
 ed them both together. And he who saith: 
 First provide the natural body, never look- 
 eth to his spirit afterward. In all things 
 give ye precedence to the spirit. Herein 
 lay the foundation of the wisdom of your 
 forefathers, the Zarathustrians. 
 
 Two extremes meeting are always dan- 
 gerous: great wealth and extensive pov- 
 erty. It not only devolveth on the rich to 
 give their substance to the poor, but they 
 shall go amongst them, teaching them and 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 527 
 
 lifting them up. He who doeth not this, 
 consider how vain it is for him to pray to 
 Jehovih. 
 
 Chine established families of the chos- 
 en, but limited them to two hundred; and 
 to each family he gave one priest. But he 
 gave privilege to four thousand people to 
 dwell in one city. 
 
 Chine said: Ye have been afflicted with 
 Gods; I was sent into the world by the 
 Creator to deliver you, and because there- 
 of this land shall be called Chine'ya. 
 
 Chine said: I saw a great mathematician 
 one day, and he said: There are no Gods, 
 nor Lords, nor angels, nor any All Person. 
 Everything is void. He showed me a book 
 he had, and I asked: Who made the book? 
 He said: I made it; nay, I made not the 
 cloth, nor the binding; I mean, I made the 
 philosophy that is in the book; nay, I 
 made not the philosophy, but found it; 
 nay, it was not lost; I mean I led myself 
 to find the philosophy; nay, a man cannot 
 lead himself; I mean that I searched and 
 found what was new to me. So, but lit- 
 tle of that book was his, after all. I saw 
 three angels standing beside that man, and 
 they were laughing at him. If I had asked 
 the angels, they might have said: Nay, the 
 thoughts were ours. And had I looked 
 further I had seen angels back of them, 
 claiming the same things. Yet, even such 
 are not the highest. 
 
 Wherefore I say unto you: All things 
 come from an All Highest, name ye Him 
 what ye will. He who saith: Jehovih spake 
 to me: He is the nearest mark of all. For 
 all good knowledge that cometh to man, is 
 Jehovih's word to that man. Whether it 
 come by an angel or by another man, or by 
 the commonest corporeal thing, it is nev- 
 ertheless from the All Highest. For which 
 reason bow ye not down in worship to 
 man nor angels, but only to the Highest. 
 Jehovih, for He is head and pinnacle of the 
 All Highest conceived of. And in contra- 
 distinction, the all lowest; the foot of the 
 ladder; call ye darkness and evil, wicked- 
 ness, sin, death and satan. 
 
 Attribute not to men nor angels this or 
 that, for they themselves are not first 
 causes nor responsible but in part; but at- 
 tribute all good things unto Jehovih; and 
 all evil things to satan. By these terms ye 
 shall make plain to one another what ye 
 
 mean; and it is an easy matter to look 
 into your own souls and comprehend as to 
 
 which of these two ye most incline. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIII. 
 
 Chine said: One man waiteth till he is 
 rich, before helping the poor; another man 
 waiteth for the angels to inspire him, and 
 give him wonders, before he teacheth the 
 unlearned; another waiteth for the multi- 
 tude to join in first; and yet another wait- 
 eth for something else. Beware of such 
 men. The sons and daughters of Jehovih 
 go right on. They say: It is the highest, 
 best! I will go in! Though I do not ac- 
 complish it, yet I will not fail in my part. 
 
 Consider ye the foundation of things at 
 all times. Jehovih saith: I created all the 
 living to bring forth after their own kind. 
 Be ye perceiving as to whom ye marry, 
 considering as to the All Highest inspira- 
 tion common to your choice. For the rais- 
 ing up of the world shall be mostly accom- 
 plished by the fruit of judicious marriage. 
 
 I declare a bondage unto men that they 
 know not of, for it belongeth in the next 
 world; which is the begetting of selfish off- 
 spring in this world. For whilst their heirs 
 are in darkness they themselves cannot 
 rise in heaven. And like unto this, I also 
 declare a glory in heaven to them that wed 
 in self-abnegation, who do good unto oth- 
 ers constantly and with delight; for they 
 bring forth heirs to glorify Jehovih in 
 good works also. 
 
 To this end was the mark of circumcis- 
 ion given unto your forefathers, lest the 
 Faithist women be led astray by idolaters. 
 And yet, with these precautions, many fell. 
 And their heirs descended lower and lower 
 in darkness until they lost sight of the All 
 Person, and believed not in Him. 
 
 Consider thy heir; show him a house 
 with a head, orderly. That he may grow 
 up understanding the discipline of earth 
 and heaven. The father shall be master in 
 all things; and the mother shall be vice- 
 master in all things, to rule in his absence. 
 For each family shall be a kingdom of it- 
 self; but no one shall be a tyrant, though 
 he have precedence in all things. 
 
 Sit not down by the table to eat until 
 all stand about: and when they are seat- 
 ed, thou shalt say: In Thy praise, O Je- 
 hovih, receive we this. Thy gift: be Thou 
 
528 
 
 CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 .0»DS' RECORD 
 
 \. 
 
 with us unto Thine own glory, forever, 
 amen! For the chief virtue of the words 
 lieth in the discipline to the young mind; 
 holding him steadfast after the orderly 
 manner of the angels in heaven. And be- 
 cause he repeateth it with thee, he learneth 
 to honor thee. 
 
 And when thy sons and daughters are 
 yet small, thou shalt teach them to work; 
 but overtask them not, nor give them pain; 
 remembering they are to be thy glory, 
 which Jehovih bestowed unto thee to be in 
 thy keeping. For they shall sing and play, 
 and clap their hands and dance, for these 
 are their thanks unto the Creator; and they 
 shall be glad because they came into the 
 world. 
 
 Remember thou that labor shall be de- 
 light, and toil a great delight; to have it 
 otherwise to thy children and to thyself is 
 to prostitute man to be as a beast of the 
 field. But thou shalt bring them into 
 groups, and their labor be full of in- 
 struction. And even thy little ones 
 shall learn that thou art but a brother, an 
 elder brother, and one of the same Cre- 
 ator's children; teaching them that one 
 who hoardeth and keepeth things in his 
 own possessions is as a cannibal that eat- 
 eth his own kindred, flesh and blood. 
 
 Above all things thou shalt teach them 
 to keep holy and pure the body; 
 for herein lieth health and strength. 
 To be foul is to be sick, to be sick is to be 
 foul. Behold the heathen and idolater, the 
 feeders on flesh and blood; in the time they 
 boast of health they stink as a carcass ; their 
 flesh is congested and puffed up, their 
 breath like a kennel of dogs. How can their 
 souls be pure or their understanding clear? 
 They have made themselves a festering 
 stink-house for the spirit to dwell in. And 
 they say: Bah! I see no Jehovih! I know 
 no All Person! I deny the soul of things! 
 Where is the spirit? I cannot see it? Or 
 the sound of its voice? I cannot hear it. 
 And there be a Great Spirit, let Him come 
 before me! I would see Him. Yea, in 
 their filthy bodies they say this. Let them 
 be pure and they will understand the vanity 
 of such words. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIV. 
 
 In years prior to this, when Chine had 
 traveled and preached by the voice of Je- 
 
 hovih, he visited the kings and princes and 
 rich men in many regions; and whilst he 
 was thus speaking, rebuking them for their 
 governments and for their possessions, they 
 took no part against him. But afterward, 
 when he was gone, the kings and queens 
 and nobles said: Chine hath preached a 
 dangerous doctrine; for he said: Thou 
 shalt have no king but the Creator, Who is 
 King over all. Will not this set our slaves 
 against us? And if the people go into 
 communities of their own, ignoring the 
 king, where will the king find his revenue? 
 And there were priests of Dyaus and of 
 other Gods, and speakers in temples where 
 the Gods wrote on sand tables. Besides 
 these there were seers and prophets with- 
 out number. And the kings, being on the 
 alert, went into the matter, inquiring of the 
 spirits as to whether the doctrines of Chine 
 were true. 
 
 And some of the spirits said: There is 
 no All Person. Behold, we have visited 
 the stars and the sun, and looked far and 
 near, and we saw not any Creator, or AIL 
 Person. There is no Great Spirit, save Te- 
 in, who was a one-time mortal, but hath 
 risen to all power in heaven and earth.. 
 And other spirits said: There is nothing 
 in heaven that ye have not on earth. How 
 shall we find Ormazd? Waste not your 
 time with Chine and his doctrines. Eat, 
 drink and satiate your desires; for these are 
 the sum and substance of all things in hea- 
 ven and earth. 
 
 Te-zee, king of A'shong, the capital 
 city of the Province of Aen-Na-Po'e, who 
 was withal a great philosopher, had 
 heard Chine preach, and was great- 
 ly interested. Some time after this a ma- 
 gician, Loo Sin, visited Te-zee, who told 
 the magacian about the wonders of Chine. 
 The magician listened to the king's story, 
 and the king asked the magician whether 
 he could himself, in addition to his sleight- 
 of-hand, manifest wisdom in words, like 
 Chine, and if so, how it could be attained? 
 
 Loo Sin, the magician, answered: Te- 
 zee, O king, thou knowest not how thou 
 hast embarrassed me, thy servant. For 
 when we are young, and, finding we have 
 the natural powers for a magician, we go 
 before an adept to be taught all the mys- 
 teries of the order; and here we take a 
 most binding oath never to reveal by hint, 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 529 
 
 word, mark, -or written character, anything 
 that will reveal any of our signs and mys- 
 teries, binding ourselves under great penal- 
 ties, which I cannot name to thee. Know 
 then, O king, I can answer all thy ques- 
 tions, and am anxious to serve thee, but 
 what shall I do? 
 
 The king said: I, being king, absolve 
 thee from thy oath. 
 
 The magician said: Compared to my 
 power, though I only beg from door to 
 door, thy power O king, is but as chaff be- 
 fore the wind. In my subtle realms are the 
 keys of all dominions. Not only do I and 
 my craft rule over mortals, but over the 
 spirits of the dead. My oath, then, is too 
 great for thee to absolve, for I cannot even 
 absolve it myself! 
 
 Te-zee, the king, said: Since, then, thou 
 canst not do all things, and especially, ab- 
 solve an oath, thou art not sufficient for me 
 to deal with. 
 
 Loo Sin, being desirous of earning 
 something, said: As for that, O king, I 
 tell thee I cannot reveal all, for the virtue 
 of my art dependeth much on its secrets 
 and mystery. Nevertheless, as I am very 
 poor, I might reveal an index to thee, to 
 which, if thou wouldst apply thyself dili- 
 gently, thou mightest attain the remainder. 
 The king thereupon commanded him to 
 perform before him, agreeing to award 
 him according to the decree of the fates. 
 And Loo Sin at once fell to work, per- 
 forming wonderful feats, such as causing 
 the tables, and seats, and desks, to move 
 about and to roll over; and to cause voices 
 to speak in unseen places. He also chang- 
 ed rods into serpents, and caused birds to 
 sit on the king's shoulder; and he changed 
 water into wine, and also brought fish and 
 laid them on the floor at the king's feet. 
 
 The king said unto him: All these 
 things I have witnessed from my youth up. 
 Show me now, whilst thou remainest here, 
 how thou canst see into my neighbor's 
 house. 
 
 The magician said: Yea, O king; but 
 for that feat it is necessary to enter the 
 state of entrancement, and the price is ex- 
 pensive! 
 
 The king said: I will pay thy price. 
 Loo Sin turned up his eyes and gave a 
 shudder, as one dying, and having stretch- 
 
 ed himself on the floor, bade the king ques- 
 tion him. 
 
 The king said: Here is chalk; mark 
 thou on the floor the character which is 
 on the top of my tablet, on the left of the 
 throne; Thereupon the magician marked 
 correctly: And again the king tried him as 
 to his power to see without his eyes, and in 
 far-off places; and, having proved him in 
 many ways, the king said: Canst thou also 
 show the spirits of the dead? 
 
 Loo Sin said: Of a truth I can, O king. 
 But that requires me to enter the sublime 
 state of creation, and is even yet more ex- 
 pensive! 
 
 The king said: Have I not said I will 
 pay thee? 
 
 Loo Sin then went into a dark corner 
 and laid himself down on the floor, and 
 then swallowed his tongue, and was mo- 
 tionless and stiff, like one that is quite 
 dead. Presently a light like a thin smoke 
 rose up from the body and stood a little 
 aside, and a voice spake out of the mist, 
 saying: 
 
 Who art thou that callest up the spirits 
 of the dead? Beware! He whose body' 
 lieth stiff and cold beside me, is one of the 
 heirs of the immortal Gods! What wouldst 
 thou, man of earth? 
 
 The king said: Who art thou? The 
 voice answered: I am Joss, Te-in! Ruler 
 of heaven and earth! The Great Spirit per- 
 sonified! Creator of all things! 
 
 The king in satire said: Thou art wel- 
 come, O Te-in! I am one of the most 
 blest of mortals, because thou hast made 
 my place a holy place. 
 
 The spirit then assumed mortal shape 
 and stood before the king, even whilst the 
 magician's body lay on the floor in sight 
 also. 
 
 The spirit said: What question is it 
 troubleth thee, O king? Speak thou, and 
 I will answer thee, for I am all Wisdom 
 and Truth personified. 
 
 The king said: Why hast thou not ap- 
 peared to me before this? Why have I 
 been left in the dark as to thy real exist- 
 ence! Answer thou me this, for it is the 
 foundation on which I desire to rest many 
 questions. 
 
 The spirit said: My son, Te-zee, I have 
 been with thee from thy youth up. watch- 
 ing over thee, for thou shalt become the 
 
530 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 greatest king in all the world. Yea, there 
 are great works for thee to do. And if 
 thou desire to extend thy kingdom, or to 
 win great battles, I will show thee the 
 way. Or if thou desire another woman to 
 wife, I will find her for thee. 
 
 The king said: Thou art a great hea- 
 venly ruler, I fully believe, but thou an- 
 sweredst not my question. Moreover, thou 
 questionest me about my kingdom and 
 about another woman to wife, and these 
 things are not what I desire of thee. And 
 for the matter of women I have not yet 
 one wife; consequently I desire not an- 
 other. 
 
 The spirit said: Who sayest thou I am? 
 
 The king replied: I am at a loss to 
 know if thou art a fool or a devil; and I 
 say that I have either seen one like thee, 
 or else thee, through many a magician. 
 But, alas, there all knowledge endeth. 
 
 The spirit said: Thou saidst thou would 
 pay what the fates decreed. Hear me then, 
 O king; thou shalt give to Loo Sin four 
 pieces of gold. And after that I will ex- 
 plain all things to thee. 
 
 The king then cast the four pieces of 
 gold to Loo Sin, and demanded the knowl- 
 edge as promised. The spirit then said: 
 And on thine oath thou wilt not reveal? 
 
 The king said: I solemnly swear to re- 
 veal naught of what thou teachest me. 
 
 The spirit said: Now, then, O king, I 
 am Loo Sin, the magician! By long train- 
 ing, the magician attaineth to go out of his 
 own body in spirit, and to appear in any 
 form or shape desired. Wilt thou try me? 
 
 The king said: Show me the spirit of 
 king Ha Gow-tsee. 
 
 The spirit walked back to the body of 
 Loo Sin, and presently returned before the 
 king, looking like the spirit of Ha Gow- 
 tsee. 
 
 The king said: It is like the king! 
 
 The spirit answered: Here then, O 
 man, is the end of philosophy. Behold, I 
 am Loo Sin, also. Some men are one spir- 
 it, some two, some three, and some four, 
 to one corporeal body. And yet there is 
 but one person in fact. 
 
 The king asked: What becometh of the 
 spirit when the corporeal part is dead? 
 
 The spirit answered: One of two things 
 is possible to every man: his spirit will 
 either dissolve into non-existence, and be 
 
 scattered and void like the air of heaven, 
 like the heat of a fire that is burnt out; or 
 else it will re-incarnate itself in the body 
 of a child before it is born, and, so, live 
 over again. Thus came all people into the 
 world. A child that is still-born is one in 
 whose body no spirit re-incarnated itself. 
 There are no new creations. The same 
 people live now on the earth that always 
 lived on it; nor will there be any others. 
 They go out of one body when it is old 
 and worn out; and then enter a young one 
 and live over and over again, forever. Nor 
 is there more nor less unto any man, wo- 
 man or child in all the world. 
 
 The king asked: What, then, is the 
 highest, best thing for a mortal man to do 
 during life? 
 
 The spirit said: To eat and drink, and 
 sleep and rest, and enjoy begetting numer- 
 our offspring. 
 
 The king asked: How long would a 
 spirit live if it did not re-incarnate itself? 
 
 The spirit said: If the mortal body is 
 burnt to ashes, then that is the time; if the 
 body be buried, and rot, and return to 
 earth, then that is the time; if the body be 
 embalmed, and keepeth well, the spirit go- 
 eth back in the embalmed body and remain- 
 eth till that body is moldered into dust, or 
 burnt to ashes, then is the spirit set free, 
 and ready to either re-incarnate itself or to 
 dissolve and disappear forever. 
 
 The king asked: As it is with thee, is it 
 the same with all magicians? 
 
 The spirit said: Thou hast only given 
 four pieces of gold; if thou wouldst have 
 more, the'price is expensive. 
 
 The king said: I have told thee I would 
 pay whatever the fates decreed; therefore, 
 proceed. 
 
 The spirit said: It is even so with all 
 magicians. 
 
 The king asked: Show me now that 
 thou canst preach like Chine? 
 
 The spirit said: Thou shalt ask me 
 questions, and I will preach on them. 
 
 The king asked many questions, and 
 the spirit spake thereon. Finally the king 
 said: That is sufficient; I will pay thee; go 
 thou thy way. As for thy preaching and 
 thy doctrines, they are nothing. Now will 
 I send and find another magician; for out 
 
CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 531 
 
 of a counsel with many I shall arrive at 
 the truth. 
 
 CHAPTER XXV. 
 
 Te-zee, the king, sent for another magi- 
 cian, Wan-jho, who came and was com- 
 manded to exhibit his powers; but he also 
 demanded a high price; which the king 
 agreed to pay, and Wan-jho exhibited. 
 First he caused a rose to come within a 
 glass bottle whilst it was shut; then a small 
 serpent he created out of a rod. and caused 
 birds to come and sing to the king; then 
 changed vinegar to water; then writing 
 on a stone tablet without touching the tab- 
 let, and even whilst the tablet lay under 
 the king's foot. Now after he had exhibit- 
 ed many more feats of like character, he 
 demanded his money, saying: The angels 
 are gone; I can do no more. 
 
 The king said: And hast thou not pow- 
 er to bring them back? 
 
 Wan-jho said: How much wouldst 
 thou give? 
 
 The king answered: Three pieces of 
 gold. 
 
 Wan-jho said: Ah, in that case behold, 
 they are come again! What wouldst thou? 
 
 The king commanded him to show the 
 spirits of the dead, so he might converse 
 with them. 
 
 Wan-jho went into the same place 
 where Loo Sin had exhibited, and, lying 
 down, cast himself in the death trance. 
 Presently an angel, robed in white, appear- 
 ed, and came and stood before the king, 
 saying: Most mighty king, what wouldst 
 thou? Behold me, I am the Goddess, Oe- 
 tu Heng, come from my throne in high 
 heaven. And be thou desirous of conquest 
 in war, or to attain great riches, or more 
 wives, most beautiful, then will I by my 
 most potent will give unto thee? 
 
 The king said: I am blest, O Goddess, 
 because thou hast come to see me. But 
 alas, none of the things thou hast mention- 
 ed suiteth me. I desire nothing as regard- 
 eth this world. Give me light as to the 
 place in heaven where dwelleth king See 
 Quan? 
 
 The spirit said: Was he thy friend or 
 thine enemy? 
 
 The king answered: He was my dead- 
 ly enemy. 
 
 The spirit said: I asked thee, is he thy 
 friend or thine enemy? Because I saw 
 one See Quan in hell, writhing in great 
 agony. And yet I saw another See Quan 
 in Paradise. So, then, I will go and bring 
 him that is in hell. The spirit passed over 
 to the corner and presently returned, say- 
 ing: O, O, O, O, O! Horrors! Demons! 
 Hell! pretending to be in torments. After 
 this the king called for many different spir- 
 its, and whether they had ever been, or 
 were fictitious, they came all the same. 
 
 Finally Te-zee, the king, said: Bring 
 me now the wisest God in heaven, for I 
 would question him. 
 
 So the spirit went again toward the 
 corner, and then approached, saying: 
 Man of earth! Because thou hast called 
 me I have come, and I decree four gold 
 pieces to Wan-jho, my prophet. ■ 
 
 The king said: Most just, God! I 
 will pay him. Tell me now whence Com- 
 eth man, and what is his destiny? 
 
 The spirit said: First, then, the air 
 above the earth is full of elementary spir- 
 its; the largest are as large as a man's fist, 
 and the smallest not larger than the small- 
 est living insect on the earth! Their size 
 denoteth their intelligence; the largest be- 
 ing designed for human beings. These 
 fill all the air of the earth, and all the space 
 in the firmament above the earth; they 
 have existed from everlasting to everlast- 
 ing, for they were without beginning. Now 
 whilst a child is yet within the womb, one 
 of these elementaries entereth in the child 
 and straightway there is the beginning of 
 the man. And in like manner are all 
 things produced which live on the earth. 
 
 The king asked: Before such time 
 when man beginneth, whilst these element- 
 aries are floating about, do they know any- 
 thing? 
 
 The spirit said: Many of them have 
 great wisdom and cunning, and are withal 
 great liars and thieves and rascals. Know- 
 est thou one Loo Sin, a magician? 
 
 The king answered: Yea. 
 
 And then the spirit said: Well, Loo 
 Sin is obsessed by the elementaries, and 
 they are all great liars, pretending to be 
 spirits of the dead! As for myself, I am a 
 most virtuous Goddess, from the highest 
 heavenly spheres. I tell thee, O king, 
 these elementaries are the curse of the 
 
532 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 world; they are anxious to be born into 
 life, so they may have souls, and they in- 
 spire mortals to paternity and maternity 
 that they may have an opportunity for in- 
 carnation. 
 
 The king said: Thou hast answered 
 well, O Goddess. I will pay according to 
 try decree. And thereupon the spirit de- 
 parted. 
 
 King Te-zee sent for another magician, 
 Hi Gowh, of the rank of priest, and hav- 
 ing bargained with him as to his price 
 for exhibiting, commanded him to pro- 
 ceed. 
 
 Hi Gowh then exhibited after the same 
 fashion as the others, doing great wonders. 
 And him also did the king command to 
 show him the spirits of the dead. Hi 
 Gowh complained about the price. but 
 being assured by the king that his demands 
 would be paid, the magician went into the 
 same corner and cast himself in a trance; 
 and, presently, a spirit appeared, saying: 
 Greeting to thee, O king! Whether thou 
 desirest conquest, or riches, or more wo- 
 men, name thou to me, and I will give 
 abundantly. Know thou I am the spirit of 
 the great Zarathustra. 
 
 The king said: Great Zarathustra, thou 
 art most welcome. But, alas, none of the 
 things thou hast named are what I desire. 
 Tell me, O Zarathustra, what is the origin 
 and destiny of man? 
 
 The spirit said: First, then O king, in 
 days long past, the sun turned round so 
 swiftly it threw off its outer rim, and the 
 rim broke into a million pieces, flying ev- 
 ery way, and these pieces are the stars and 
 the earth and the moon. And for millions 
 of years the earth was only a stone, melt- 
 ing hot, but it cooled off in time; and the 
 outer stones on the earth were oxidized, 
 and this made moss; then the moss died, 
 but the spirit of the moss re-incarnated 
 itself, and this made grass; and the grass 
 died; but the spirit of the grass lived and 
 re-incarnated itself, and thus made the 
 trees. Then the trees died; but the spirit 
 lived, and it re-incarnated and became ani- 
 mals; and they died, but their spirits lived 
 and re-incarnated and became man. After 
 that the spirit no longer re-incarnateth 
 itself, but floateth upward into peace, and 
 resteth for a long time, when it finally 
 
 mergeth back into the sun and is extinct, 
 like a lamp burnt out. 
 
 The king asked: How, then, is it with 
 thyself? 
 
 The spirit replied: I was the original 
 Sun God, that came away from the sun to 
 take charge of this world. It is in my 
 keeping. 
 
 The king asked: Who, then, is the All 
 First that still stayeth with the sun? 
 
 The spirit answered: Because thou 
 asketh so many questions, O king, thou 
 shalt pay more money. 
 
 The king assured the spirit that the 
 money, to any amount, would be paid; 
 thereupon the spirit said: Ahura-Ormazd 
 was the original of all; but when the sun 
 threw off its surface Ahura-Ormazd was 
 thrown into pieces, one piece going to ev- 
 ery star, save the earth, and I came here of 
 my own accord, because it was larger and 
 better than any other world. 
 
 The king dismissed the spirit and the 
 priest, and sent for another, a magician 
 also of the rank of priest, Gwan Le. And 
 Gwan Le, being assured that his price 
 would be paid, proceeded to exhibit also. 
 And he performed feats even like the oth- 
 ers. Then the king commanded Gwan Le 
 to call the spirits of the dead. The priest 
 apologized about the expense of the death 
 trance, but being further assured that his 
 demands would be paid, he went into the 
 corner and cast himself into the swoon, 
 stiff and cold. 
 
 Presently an angel appeared, saying: 
 Behold me, O king, I am Brahma. And if 
 thou desire conquest in war, or greater 
 riches, or more women, I will grant unto 
 thee. I can tell thee of hidden treasures, 
 and of rich mines, and of women greatly to 
 be desired. Also I can tell thee how thy 
 armies can overcome thy enemies with 
 great slaughter. 
 
 The king said: I am delighted, O Brah- 
 ma. But I desire nothing of which thou 
 hast mentioned. Tell me of the origin and 
 destiny of man. 
 
 The spirit said: Know, then, O king, 
 all things alive have two parts, the corpor- 
 eal and the spiritual; all dead things are 
 but one, which is the spirit. Thou, O king, 
 wert first a stone, a very large stone; then 
 when it moldered into dust thy soul went 
 into silver, a very large piece; but when 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 533 
 
 the silver rusted away, thy soul went into 
 gold; and when the gold was worn away, 
 thy soul began to run into vegetable life; 
 and after that it ran into animal life, then 
 into a low order of man, then into the 
 high order of man, as thou now art. Thus 
 came man up from the beginning, re-incar- 
 nating himself over and over, higher and 
 higher. And when he is perfected in spirit 
 as thou art, he never more returneth to re- 
 incarnate himself. 
 
 The king asked: What doth the spirit 
 after leaving this world? The spirit re- 
 plied: Thou shalt then meet thy sexual 
 indulgence, peopling the spirit realms with 
 delightful offspring. 
 
 The king said: It is well; thou hast a 
 wonderful doctrine. Thereupon the spirit 
 departed, and the priest also. 
 
 The king sent for still another priest, 
 Tseeing. And the king asked him: What 
 seest thou for thy king? 
 
 The priest said: By the rites of my 
 order I cannot disclose any of the secrets 
 of heaven or earth until thou hast paid the 
 price of indulgence, which is two pieces of 
 gold. So the king paid him. 
 
 Tseeing said: If thou desire riches, 
 or success in war, or new wives, speak 
 thou, and I will grant unto thee according 
 to the price. 
 
 The king said: Alas, Tseeing. I desire 
 none of these indulgences; tell me the ori- 
 gin and destiny of man, for I would learn 
 why I am, and the object and end? 
 
 Tseeing said: The first of all was 
 Brahma, which was round like an egg. 
 Then Brahma broke open, and the shell 
 was in two halves, and one half was the 
 sky and the other half was the earth. 
 Then Brahma incarnated himself in the 
 earth; but he came not up as one only, as 
 he expected, but he came up in ten mill- 
 ions and one million parts, and every part 
 was a living thing, a tree, or a plant, or a 
 fish, or a bird, or a beast, or a man. And 
 this is all there is or was or ever shall be. 
 But Brahma looked over the world and he 
 saw that some men were good and some 
 evil. And he said: I will separate the good 
 from the evil. And that justice might be 
 done he called all the nations and tribes 
 of men before him. And when they were 
 come he said unto them: 
 
 Whoever delighteth in the earth, it shall 
 be his forever. And though he die, his 
 spirit shall have power to re-incarnate it- 
 self in another unborn child, and so live 
 over again, and so on, forever. And he 
 shall have great indulgence in the earth, in 
 eating and drinking, and with women, and 
 in all manner of delights, for they shall be 
 his forever. 
 
 But whosoever delighteth in spirit shall 
 be blest in spirit. He shall not, after death, 
 re-incarnate himself and live over again, 
 but shall dwell forever in heaven and have 
 heavenly delights. But since heavenly de- 
 lights are not after the manner of earthly 
 delights, then shall the spiritual chooser 
 not live like earth-people. But he shall 
 live secluded, and shall torment his flesh 
 with fastings and with castigations. Nei- 
 ther shall he marry or live with woman, 
 nor beget children, nor have any indul- 
 gence on the earth whatever, save merely 
 to live, for the earth is not his, nor is he of 
 the earth. And the more he tortureth the 
 flesh, the higher shall be his bliss in hea- 
 ven. 
 
 Now, when Brahma had stated the two 
 propositions unto the children of the earth, 
 he further added: Choose ye now which 
 ye will; for after ye have chosen, behold, 
 there is the end. For ye that choose the 
 earth shall be of the earth, even unto all 
 succeeding generations. But whoso choos- 
 eth heaven, to him and his heirs it shall be 
 final and forever. 
 
 Thereupon mortals made choice, and 
 behold, nearly all of them chose the earth. 
 But in thousands of years and millions of 
 years afterward Brahma repented of his 
 former decree, for he saw the earth became 
 too full of people, and they were sinful be- 
 yond bounds. And Brahma sent a flood of 
 waters and destroyed ten hundred thou- 
 sand million times ten millions of them. 
 And he sent Zarathustra into the world to 
 give new judgment. Zarathustra opened 
 the door of heaven anew, saying: Whoev- 
 er after this chooseth Brahma, and will 
 torture his flesh, and hate the earth, and 
 live away from the world, him will I save 
 from the earth and from hell also, for I 
 am very efficient and influential with the 
 Creator. 
 
 Such, then, O king, is the origin and 
 destiny of man. Some are born for the 
 
534 
 
 CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 earth forever, and some are born for hea- 
 ven. Nevertheless, the way is open unto 
 all, to choose which they will, earth or hea- 
 ven. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVI. 
 
 Te-zee pursued his researches for a long 
 while, and with many prophets, magicians, 
 seers and priests. Afterward he said: 
 
 All is vanity; all is falsehood. No man 
 hath answered me aright, as to the origin 
 and destiny of man. Even the angels, or 
 whatsoever they are, can only inform me 
 of the things of earth; they only see as 
 man seeth. And it may be true that these 
 angels are nothing more than Loo Sin 
 said, the spirit of the magician only. Be- 
 cause his body entereth a trance it seem- 
 eth reasonable. Now, therefore, I will put 
 a stop to these magicians and priests; they 
 are of no use. 
 
 So Te-zee issued a decree covering his 
 own province, commanding magicians and 
 priests to quit the province, under penalty 
 of death. And they thus departed out of 
 his dominions. 
 
 Now it so happened that in five other 
 great provinces, the kings did precisely the 
 same, at about the same time. And these 
 were the provinces: Shan Ji, under king 
 Lung Wan; Gah, under king Loa Kee; 
 Sa-bin-Sowh, under king Ah-ka Ung; Gow 
 Goo, under king Te See-Yong; and these 
 provinces comprised the chief part of Jaf- 
 feth. 
 
 Jehovih commanded Chine to go before 
 king Te-zee, and when he had come, the 
 king said unto him: Some years since I 
 heard thee, and thou wert profound. I 
 am delighted thou hast come before me 
 again, that I may question thee. 
 
 Chine said: When thou heardest me be- 
 fore, the Great Spirit spake through me. 
 Now I am well learned, and He command- 
 eth me to speak of my own knowledge. 
 
 I am a man as thou art; yet every 
 man hath a different work. Thou art 
 king of this province, and I am told, 
 moreover, thou art good and wise. I hope 
 thou art. Otherwise my words will not 
 please thee. As for myself, I was sent into 
 the world to mark out this land and name 
 it Chine'ya, and to establish anew those 
 that accept the Great Spirit. For Chine'ya 
 
 and her people shall remain a different 
 country and different people from all the 
 world. 
 
 Know then, O king, I come not in vain- 
 boasting. I am one of the weakest of men; 
 and yet I have more power than any other 
 man in the world. And yet, of myself, 
 there is nothing whereof to boast. For I 
 am as but a tool in the hands of Ormazd. 
 
 I look upon thee and see thou hast been 
 questioning magicions and priests, and 
 that thou art unsatisfied. Know then, O 
 king, this is thine error, in not magnifying 
 thy judgment. Thou hast worked with 
 magicians who are under the power of an- 
 gels of the first resurrection, and even an- 
 gels below them. All such angels teach on 
 their own individual understanding; as 
 wandering individuals they go about. And 
 their miracles are of the same order, merely 
 individual miracles. 
 
 He, Whom I teach, worketh miracles, 
 not in a small corner but in the affairs of 
 kingdoms and nations; not through magi- 
 cians only, but through kings and queens, 
 and even through common people. Thou 
 thyself art an instrument in His hand. 
 
 Behold, in the same time thou issuest 
 thy decree against magicians and asceti- 
 cism, even in that same time five other 
 great kings do the same thing! This is a 
 miracle indeed! No man can counterfeit 
 His miracles. Neither flatter thyself that 
 such matters occur by accident. They do 
 not occur by accident; but by Jehovih. 
 For His angels in the second resurrection 
 are organized, and work in mighty armies. 
 
 Tezee said: Thou art great, Chine; or 
 else thy sudden philosophy turneth my 
 brain! Go on! How shall we know, first, 
 that there are angels who are really the 
 spirits of the dead? Second,, how shall we 
 distinguish betwixt the first and second 
 resurrections? 
 
 Chine said: Only by seeing and hear- 
 ing with the natural eyes and ears, and 
 with the spiritual eyes and ears, can any 
 man attain to know anything either on 
 earth or in heaven. When these senses are 
 pure and clear, then a man knoweth that 
 the spirits of the dead do live. For I de- 
 clare, O king, of a truth, that my spirit 
 hath emerged from my body on many 
 occasions sometimes going subjective- 
 ly and sometimes objectively. Neither 
 
CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 535 
 
 is this a special creation to me only; but it 
 is that which thousands and tens of thou- 
 sands can attain to by discipline. 
 
 Touching the first and second resurrec- 
 tions, know thou, O king, spirits that dis- 
 pose individual things, or earthly things; 
 or propose riches or personal gain, or mar- 
 riage, discanting to this man or that man as 
 to what is good for him as an individual; 
 spirits giving great names, professing to be 
 this or that person long since dead; all 
 such are deceivers and have not advanced 
 beyond the first resurrection. They deny 
 the I Am, the Great Spirit, the All Person. 
 Their highest heaven is re-engraftment on 
 mortals, and the reveling in lust. They flat- 
 ter thee, telling thee thou wert this or that 
 great man in a former re-incarnation. They 
 labor to make profit to their own ma- 
 gician; they are without truth or virtue, 
 and of little wisdom. 
 
 The second resurrection cometh not to 
 an individual as an individual; it cometh 
 as an army, but not to an individual, but to 
 a kingdom, a nation, a community. For 
 as such angels belong to organized com- 
 munities in heaven, so doth that organiza- 
 tion work with virtuous organizations of 
 mortals. 
 
 This is wisdom, O king; to get away 
 from the individual self; to become one 
 with an organization, to work with the 
 Great Spirit for the resurrection of men. 
 For as thou makest thyself one with many 
 to this end, so laboreth the Father with 
 thee and them. As thou keepest thyself 
 as an individual self, so do individual an- 
 gels come to thee as individuals. Individ- 
 ual answereth to individual; the first res- 
 urrection to the first; the second to the sec- 
 ond. Moreover, the All Person is over all, 
 and worketh each in its own order, unto 
 a great purpose. 
 
 Think not, O king, I am making a new 
 doctrine; I am but declaring that which 
 was also proclaimed to the ancients. And 
 as many as came forward and had faith 
 were called Jehovih's chosen people, be- 
 cause, forsooth, they chose Him. 
 
 Judge thou, then, whoso denieth the 
 All Person is not of His order; neither 
 hath such an one the light of the Father in 
 him. But he who hath attained to under- 
 stand that all things are but one harmoni- 
 ous whole, hath also attained to know what 
 
 is meant by the term, All Person, for He 
 is All; and, consequently, Ever Present, 
 filling all, extending everywhere. 
 
 In contradistinction from Him, two phi- 
 losophies have run parallel, which are dark- 
 ness and evil. One saith the All is not a 
 person, being void, and less than even the 
 parts thereof; the other saith the only All 
 High is the great angel I worship, who is 
 as a man, and separate from all things. 
 These comprise the foundation of all the 
 doctrines in the world, or that have ever 
 been or ever will be. The latter is idolatry, 
 which is evil; the second, unbelief, which is 
 darkness; and the first is faith, truth, love, 
 wisdom and peace. 
 
 Under these three heads are all men 
 classified by Jehovih and His angels. And 
 they may be likened to three men looking 
 across a field; one sees a light and knows 
 he seeth it; another thinks he seeth it, but 
 the third sees nothing at all. 
 
 As a witness, therefore, the latter is 
 worthless; the second is a circumstantial 
 witness; but the first is positive, and stand- 
 eth the highest and firmest of all. He 
 knoweth his Heavenly Father. He seeth 
 Him in the flowers; in the clouds, and in 
 the sunshine; in the fruits and herbs; and 
 in the beasts of the field, and in every 
 creeping thing; and in the stars and moon 
 and earth and sun. In sickness, in health, 
 in sorrow and rejoicing; verily he findeth 
 Jehovih in all things; he knoweth Jehovih's 
 eye is forever upon him; and he walketh 
 upright in truth and faith, pride and re- 
 
 joicing 
 
 Te-zee, the king, asked: Tell me, O 
 Chine, what is the origin and destiny of 
 man? 
 
 Chine said: The Ever Present quick- 
 eneth him into life in his mother's womb; 
 and he is then and there a new creation, his 
 spirit from the Spirit Jehovih, and his 
 body from the earth; a dual being the Fa- 
 ther createth him. His destination is ever- 
 lasting resurrection; in which matter, man 
 can have delightful labor as he riseth up- 
 ward forever and ever. 
 
 The king asked: If Jehovih is all the 
 time creating, will not the firmament be- 
 come too full of angels? 
 
 Chine said: A thousand men read a 
 book, and yet that book is no fuller of 
 ideas than at first. Ten thousand men may 
 
536 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 love thy flower-garden, yet thy garden is 
 no fuller because of their love. The ma- 
 terials of which man was created existed as 
 a part of the Creator; and when man was 
 created he filled no more room than the 
 elements of which he was created. 
 
 The king said: I would that I were as 
 thou art! For which matter, if thou wilt 
 use thy wand and make me even half as 
 wise, I will give away all my kingdom! 
 
 Chine said: Thou canst not bargain 
 for Faith, or purchase it, as a coat or as 
 sandals. And yet until Faith is attained 
 there is no resurrection. No bird ever 
 flew from its nest, without first having 
 faith it could fly. And when thou hast 
 Faith thou wilt cast away thy kingdom and 
 choose heavenly treasures instead. Until 
 thou hast attained Faith thou wilt retain 
 thy kingdom. This is a judgment unto the 
 rich man in the same way. Riches and a 
 king's kingdom may be likened to balls of 
 gold tied to a man's feet in deep water; he 
 cannot rise until he cutteth himself loose, 
 and casteth away that which bindeth him. 
 So, also, are men bound in spirit, and until 
 they put their own hands to the matter 
 there is no resurrection for them. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVII. 
 
 Te-zee, the king, said unto Chine: Be- 
 cause thou hast given me this great light, 
 it seemeth to me I should issue a decree 
 commanding all my people to accept thy 
 doctrines. 
 
 Chine replied: O man! How short 
 thou art in understanding our Father! Vi- 
 olence is His enemy. Such a decree would 
 be no better than a decree establishing any 
 other heavenly ruler. It would thwart it- 
 self. He cometh not with sword and spear, 
 like the idol-Gods; He cometh with educa- 
 tion, the chief book of which is the exam- 
 ple of good works, and of peace and free- 
 dom to all. 
 
 Te-zee said: Thou reasonest well. Hear 
 me, then, thou greatest of men; command 
 me even as if I were the meanest of ser- 
 vants, and I will obey thee. 
 
 Chine said: O king, thou tormentest 
 me with my own inability to make thee un- 
 derstand! Thou shalt not make thyself 
 servant to any man, but to Ormazd, the 
 Great Spirit. 
 
 The king said: Then I will put away 
 my kingdom. 
 
 But Chine said: Consider first if thou 
 can best serve Him by doing this way or 
 that way, and then follow thy highest light, 
 and thou shalt not err. 
 
 The king asked: How, sayest thou, 
 shall I put aside my kingdom and my 
 riches and do as thou dost?, 
 
 Chine said: Thou shalt be thine own 
 judge. If I judge for thee, and thou fol- 
 low my judgment, then am I bound to thee. 
 
 Te-zee said: If the Great Spirit would 
 give me thy wisdom, then would I serve 
 Him. How long, sayest thou, a man shall 
 serve Him in order to reach great wis- 
 dom? 
 
 Chine said: Suppose a man had several 
 pieces of glass; some clear, some clouded 
 with smoke and grease; how long, sayest 
 thou, it would require to make them all 
 clear alike? For such is the self in man; 
 it cloudeth his soul; and when he hath put 
 self away, then is his soul clear, and that 
 is wisdom, for then he beholdeth the Fa- 
 ther through his own soul; yea, and hear- 
 eth Him also. And until he doeth this, 
 he believeth not in His Person or Pres- 
 ence, no matter how much he professeth. 
 
 The king kept Chine many days, and 
 questioned him with great wisdom and de- 
 light. One day Chine said to him: Jeho- 
 vih saith to me: Go thou quickly unto the 
 five other great provinces of Chine'ya, and 
 explain to the kings thereof Who I am. 
 Therefore, O Te-zee, I must leave thee, but 
 after many days I will return to thee and 
 exhibit to thee the testimony of immortal 
 life. 
 
 The king provided camels and servants, 
 and sent Chine on his way. And, after 
 Chine was gone, Te-zee said to himself: 
 Although I cannot decree Chine's doc- 
 trines, I see no reason why I cannot decree 
 the extinction of Te-in and other idol- 
 Gods. And thereupon he did as he thought 
 best, prohibiting the priests from doing 
 sacrifice to Joss, Ho-Joss, Te-in, Po, or 
 any other ruler in heaven, except the Great 
 Spirit. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVIII. 
 
 In course of time Chine completed his 
 labor with the six kings of Jaffeth, and re- 
 turned to Te-zee, to die. At this time there 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 537 
 
 had been established in different places 
 more than a thousand communities of 
 Faithists, either through Chine or his fol- 
 lowers, the chief rab'bahs. And when Chine 
 returned before the king, Te-zee, there 
 came from every quarter of the world men 
 and women to meet him and learn wis- 
 dom. 
 
 So Chine died, and his body was allow- 
 ed to lie five days until the eyes were sunk- 
 en and black, and on the sixth day was 
 burnt to ashes under the superintendence 
 of king Te-zee, and the ashes were scat- 
 tered in the field as commanded. And 
 on the seventh day, whilst the multitude 
 surrounded all the place, a whirlwind came 
 and gathered up the ashes, and the ashes 
 became illumed, and the soul of Chine went 
 therein, and he burst the whirlwind and 
 came down even at the king's feet. 
 
 And Chine said: Knowest thou who I 
 am? 
 
 And the King answered, saying: Of a 
 truth thou art Chine; and thy native land 
 shall henceforth forever be called Chine'ya, 
 in honor thereof. And I will send unto the 
 other kings also, and they will decree the 
 same thing. 
 
 Chine said: Even so, do thou. And 
 since the Father hath allotted me seven 
 days to remain with His chosen and with 
 thee, O king, apprise thou, whom I will 
 name to thee, to come and see me. And 
 thereupon Chine told the king whom he 
 desired to come. 
 
 And Chine walked about on the earth, 
 even the same as before death, nor could 
 any man tell by looking at him that he had 
 passed through death. Nor were his clothes 
 different, although they were made out of 
 the ashes in the whirlwind. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIX. 
 
 Chine said: My brothers and sisters, in 
 the name of the Great Spirit, hear me: 
 These are Chine's last words, for the Fa- 
 ther calleth me. Be ye attentive, that ye 
 may remember my sermon. 
 
 I was sent into the world to wall this 
 great people around with Jehovih's hand. 
 I have made you an exclusive people for 
 three thousand years to come. I have 
 drawn a veil over the bloody past, and 
 taught you to love and respect one another. 
 
 Chine'ya shall become the most numer- 
 ous nation in all the world. 
 
 Be ye exclusive unto one another; suf- 
 fering not outside barbarians to come 
 amongst you, especially to marry with my 
 people. Yet ye shall not war against 
 them. But it is lawful for you to build 
 walls to keep them away. 
 
 And every change of the moon ye shall 
 renew your covenant, which was my cove- 
 nant, with Jehovih. Teaching it to your 
 children, and commanding them to teach it 
 to theirs after them, and so on forever! 
 Swearing ye unto the Great Spirit to ig- 
 nore all heavenly rulers but the Creator, 
 the I Am. 
 
 The Father hath made a wide world, 
 and fruitful and joyous, and He giveth it 
 unto man's keeping. Unto one people one 
 country; unto another people another 
 country, and so on, all the world over. 
 
 Chine'ya He giveth unto you, and He 
 saith: Be ye as brothers and sisters in this, 
 My holy land. Which in the ancients' 
 days was made to bloom as a flowery king- 
 dom by My chosen, the Faithists of old. 
 
 But they were neglectful of My com- 
 mandments. Idolaters came upon them 
 and destroyed them, and laid waste their 
 rich fields; yea, the bones of My people 
 were strewn over all the land. But ye are 
 now once more delivered, and ye shall 
 make Chine'ya bloom again as My celes- 
 tial kingdom. 
 
 And ye shall multiply, and build, and 
 plant, and make this heritage, which I 
 give unto you, as an example unto all peo- 
 ples, of industry and peace and thrift. And 
 of the multitude that can dwell in one king- 
 dom, manifesting love, patience and vir- 
 tue. And by your neglect of war and of 
 war inventions, ye shall be a testimony of 
 My presence in this day. For the time 
 shall surely come when I will put down all 
 unrighteousness, and war, and idolatry, and 
 I will be the All Person unto the whole 
 world. 
 
 Chine hath spoken his last words. My 
 ship of fire descendeth from the highest 
 heaven! Chine will rise up in this; and 
 even so shall ye who are pure and good and 
 full of love. 
 
 A light, like a great luminous cloud„ 
 blinding with holy light, descended over 
 all the field where the multitude were. 
 
538 
 
 CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 Many fell down in fear; and many cried 
 aloud in great sorrow. 
 
 Then Chine went and kissed Te-zee, 
 and immediately walked toward the midst 
 of the field, and was lost in the exceeding 
 great light. And the light turned around 
 like a whirlwind, and rose up, higher and 
 higher, and then was seen no more. 
 
 Chine was gone! 
 
 Te-zee at once made special laws 
 protecting all persons who rejected 
 Gods, Lords and Saviors, but wor- 
 shipped the All Light. Four other kings 
 followed with the same edicts and laws. 
 The Faithists were safely delivered into 
 'freedom throughout Chine'ya. 
 
 CHAPTER XXX. 
 HISTORY OF SAKAYA. 
 
 Sakaya was born in Hagotha, province 
 •of Nao'wan, on the borders of Nepal. His 
 "birth had been foretold by the Faithist 
 prophets, and that he would re-establish 
 the doctrines of Capilya. Sakaya's fa- 
 ther's name was Metanga, and he was 
 of the twelfth generation of Suddhodana. 
 During which time, none of his forefathers 
 ate fish or flesh, or of anything that breath- 
 ed the breath of life. 
 
 Metanga was very old when Sakaya 
 was born, but the wife of Metanga was but 
 'fifteen years old; for which reason, the peo- 
 ple nicknamed the child, Sramana Gotama 
 meaning passionless from father and moth- 
 er. 
 
 Metanga was High Father of the Prov- 
 ince of Nao'wan; consequently, Sakaya 
 was born a prince, as commanded of Je- 
 hovih, in heaven, he should be. Wherein 
 He said: He that I will raise up, shall 
 liave the glory of the earth before him; and 
 he shall grow up as learned as a king and 
 a priest, and he shall re-establish peace and 
 .good will on earth. 
 
 Now there had been bloody times in 
 Vind'yu for four hundred years; during 
 which time a warring sect, who falsely 
 •called themselves Brahmans, had overrun 
 the land with sword and spear, lance and 
 fire, destroying temples, oracles and lan- 
 guages. These were the destructions done 
 by the God Kabalectes, mortals supposing 
 they were under the God Brahma. 
 
 God, Jehovih's Son, had said to Etches- 
 .-sa, chief guardian angel over Sakaya: Thou 
 
 shalt cause thy ward to learn Brahmanism, 
 asceticism and all other religions. 
 
 Thus was Sakaya educated; and at 
 twelve years of age, he took vows of Brah- 
 manism. At fifteen, he desired to acquire 
 the ecstatic state, and he joined a band of 
 seven Brahmin priests, and went about for 
 three years with the alms-bowl, begging 
 for the poor, living as the poor, and fasting 
 and praying, and studying with his teachers 
 and priests. And, yet for other four 
 years, he excluded himself from speech, 
 save to the Holy Ghost, dwelling out of 
 doors, night and day. 
 
 But the ecstatic state came not to Sa- 
 kaya. And one night, his guardian angel, 
 Etchessa, spake to him in a dream, saying: 
 
 Behold, I am Jehovih, and not the Holy 
 Ghost! Yea, I am a very Person! And 
 Ever Present! Why hast thou put Me off? 
 Did I not create thee alive, and make thee 
 a person also? Thou art born of the race 
 of Suddhodana. Thy labor is not to seek 
 the ecstatic state for thyself, but to 
 renew My light on earth. Therefore, 
 give up this, thy most useless life 
 of going about praying, and return 
 thou to thy father's house, and take thee 
 a wife. For how canst thou attain the wis- 
 dom of the earth, without becoming a hus- 
 band and father? 
 
 Sakaya awoke, remembering his dream, 
 and he told it to his priests, and asked 
 them to interpret it. And they said unto 
 him: This was not a dream, but the voice 
 of satan; put thou it aside. 
 
 But Sakaya was more convinced of his 
 dream than of his priests; and he, there- 
 fore, gave up his fasting and praying, and 
 returned to his father's house, saying: Fa- 
 ther, thou art wise after the manner of thy 
 generations. Henceforth I will be no more 
 a priest, nor in fact a Brahman, for that 
 matter, but pursue thy doctrines, which 
 are of deeds more than words. Thou shalt, 
 therefore, choose me a wife, for I will wed 
 and become a father. 
 
 So Sakaya wed, and his wife bore him 
 a son. When he looked upon the child, he 
 said: Thou art the greatest of sermons. 
 
 Now, because of the strange life Sa- 
 kaya had lived, being a prince, he was the 
 wonder of the city of Hagotha, and was 
 much loved by the people, especially the 
 poor, for his alms-bowl had oft relieved 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 539 
 
 them from hunger. Consequently, when it 
 became known he was a father, there came 
 before the royal palace thousands of the 
 poor, singing songs of praise to Sakaya 
 and his child and his wife. And the poor 
 women had infants in their arms. When 
 Sakaya saw the infants, he burst into tears, 
 and came out before the multitude, and 
 spake to them, saying: 
 
 I have looked upon mine own son, and 
 said within my soul: This is mine! And I 
 considered how my son was born a prince 
 and above want; but I considered not this 
 great multitude of babes, who have no as- 
 surance against starvation. Why, then, 
 shall I remain with one, who hath sure 
 provision, and glut myself in ease and the 
 selfish joy of my own house? And leave 
 this multitude of babes to the hazard of 
 precarious life? 
 
 Is not Sakaya of broader soul than this? 
 Have I any right to bring more children 
 into the world, until I have provided sure 
 happiness to them that are already born? 
 What is my family and my kingdom, 
 though I win the land from Yaganosa to 
 the ocean, if this burning within mine own 
 soul will not away, but crieth out forever: 
 Heal thou the sick earth! 
 
 From this time forth do I covenant with 
 Thee, Thou All Light, to give up all the 
 earth, and to serve Thee. I will be Thy 
 Son, O Jehovih! And all my days hence- 
 forth on the earth, labor to ameliorate Thy 
 abundant offspring! Behold these young 
 babes turned upon me, with Thy smile, O 
 Jehovih, in their innocent faces! calling to 
 me: Help! Help! 
 
 CHAPTER XXXI. 
 
 Etchessa, chief of the loo'is, seeing 
 the resolution of Sakaya, departed at once 
 to Paradise, before God on the throne, to 
 receive the commission of Jehovih, and to 
 establish a line of es'ean light to the 
 earth. And thereupon, God caused his 
 officers to select from the volunteers the 
 highest grades, and to arrange them in a 
 line of light down to the earth, to Sakaya, 
 that the voice of God and his Holy Eleven 
 might speak through Sakaya, with the wis- 
 dom of Jehovih. The hosts to be under 
 the direction of Etchessa. The million 
 loo'is were also summoned to their places 
 
 in the line; and in five days' time, the light 
 of the throne of God was made one with 
 the soul of Sakaya, and he began preach- 
 ing, even from the steps of the palace of 
 the king, his father. 
 
 In the meantime, the loo'is of the hosts 
 of Etchessa inspired their mortal wards, 
 men and women, who had been born into 
 the world to become disciples and follow- 
 ers of Sakaya, to come before him. And 
 presently, there assembled in Sakaya's na- 
 tive city, to hear him preach, men and wo- 
 men from remote distances. 
 
 These are the substance of the doctrines 
 preached by Sakaya: 
 
 I am but a man; worship not me. 
 
 I declare my follies publicly before you. 
 Inasmuch as I have been an example of fol- 
 ly, learn ye to be wise by not following my 
 past footsteps. In my youth, I was quick- 
 ened to see the miseries and sorrows and 
 afflictions of mortals. And I cried out unto 
 Ahura'Mazda, as the priests had directed 
 me, to find some sure way to do a great 
 good in the world. 
 
 But in the legends of the ancients I be- 
 held, that certain signs and miracles attend- 
 ed Capilya, Brahma and Zarathustra. So I 
 grieved to attain to signs and miracles. 
 I fasted and prayed and tortured my flesh, 
 to make the earth abhorrent in my sight, 
 according to the rules of the Brahman 
 priests. But nothing came to me more 
 than the commonest magician. 
 
 So I declare unto you, I have renounced 
 Brahmanism and asceticism, and taken up 
 the Zarathustrian religion, which is, that 
 good works are the only salvation. To 
 know, then, what are good works, and to 
 apply the same unto the inhabitants of the 
 earth, should be the chief study of a 
 preacher. 
 
 • And, since most crime and misery come 
 because of poverty, and because of the di- 
 vision of the affairs of men, it is wise to 
 devise, first, a remedy against poverty, and 
 second, a means of attraction to bring about 
 a brotherhood between men. To accom- 
 plish which, the association of tens and 
 twenties and hundreds and thousands, with 
 rab'bahs unto each, as Capilya taught, is 
 the highest and best plan. In which fami- 
 lies, there shall be neither buying or sell- 
 ing, nor ownership, nor divisions, nor 
 castes, nor privileges of one above another. 
 
540 
 
 CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 .OFtDS' RECORD 
 
 Sakaya was asked about such as can 
 work fast, and are strong, and can accom- 
 plish much, shall they not have preference 
 over those that produce little? 
 
 Sakaya answered: A certain man had 
 two sons, one was strong, and the other 
 weak, and yet that father distinguished not 
 between his sons in his will. Was he then 
 just? 
 
 They said: A most just father. 
 
 Sakaya said: So declare I unto you, to 
 give unto one another all things required, 
 and without distinction as to strength, or 
 as to expertness. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXII. 
 
 Sakaya said: Ye cannot associate with 
 all men; for many are of diverse tastes and 
 habits. Nevertheless, refuse ye not all as- 
 sociation because of this, for there are such, 
 as are consonant with you. And such, as 
 are disagreeable to you, are nevertheless 
 compatible to others. 
 
 Ormazd hath created a large field; His 
 people are numerous, and there are many in 
 the world like unto others in all things. 
 Choose ye such, and as ye are one with an- 
 other, so are ye one with the Creator. 
 
 But most of all, will virtue and indus- 
 x try and good works come into the world 
 by the examples ye place before the young. 
 Better is it to hide and subdue your temper 
 in presence of the young, than to conquer 
 a whole state by force of arms. The young 
 are your angels given you by the Creator; 
 and ye are their Gods. Consider ye, then, 
 what kind of a kingdom ye raise up. Hap- 
 piness on earth is answered by happiness 
 in heaven; and that, which planted on 
 earth, is reaped in heaven. 
 
 Touching charity: I say, it is good to 
 take the alms-bowl, and go about begging 
 for the poor; and yet, in the same breath, 
 I say, it is an evil. This I have found of 
 all charity: First, it flattereth him that giv- 
 eth, that he hath done a good work; sec- 
 ond, charity injureth the poor, because it 
 destroyeth manhood, and giveth good 
 caste to a beggar. 
 
 Though this kingdom is filled with his- 
 pitals and houses of charity, it is none the 
 less free from vagrants and helpless ones. 
 And through ye build a thousand houses 
 for the poor, and feed them withal, yet ye 
 
 will have just as many still unprovided for, 
 as when there was but one poorhouse. The 
 law is unalterable in- heaven and earth, that 
 whatsoever ye nurse, will grow. 
 
 I also declare unto you: That if ye do 
 nothing to benefit the afflicted, distressed 
 and helpless, ye commit a worse folly, but 
 ye shall find a remedy in society itself, 
 whereby there shall be no rich and no poor. 
 For it is also law, that where there are 
 rich, there must be poor. Where there are 
 masters, there must be servants. 
 
 Some one asked Sakaya: Suppose a 
 rich man do not feed the poor and help- 
 less, but he give employment to a thou- 
 sand servants: is he not good? 
 
 Sakaya answered: A man may feed his 
 cattle, caring for the sick ones, but still he 
 treateth them as cattle. A man may em- 
 ploy many cattle, but still he treateth them 
 as cattle. And he who doeth this to his 
 brothers and sisters has a curse upon him. 
 But if he give up, what he hath, and mak- 
 eth himself a father over them, to develop 
 himself in manliness and wisdom and vir- 
 tue, then his charities are a virtue. In 
 whatsoever a man doeth, and his own self 
 receiveth prestige over others, that man of- 
 fendeth in the sight of Ormazd. 
 
 Yet these things are not new in the 
 world; they were the doctrines of the an- 
 cients. And in this day, the Brahman 
 priests preach them in languages ye under- 
 stand not. Behold, I break away from 
 their languages, and preach the truth in. 
 your native tongue, and it soundeth new to 
 you. 
 
 I have tried, and proved in mine own 
 person, and I declare unto you, that preach- 
 ing alone is of little avail in the world. 
 Spoken words are a breath of air. They 
 blow away. Written words lie in silence; 
 they are dead. I am not come to preach, 
 nor to build up a new order of preaching, 
 but to found a practice in life, whereby 
 crime and misery and starvation may be 
 averted. 
 
 Ye shall not eat the flesh of any crea- 
 ture that breathed the breath of life; nor of 
 fish that lived in the water nor under the 
 water. 
 
 Ye shall bathe once every day from the 
 crown of the head to the sole of the feet. 
 And before bathing, ye shall say: Before 
 Thee, O Ormazd, I will put away the filth 
 
CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 .OROS' RECORD 
 
 oil 
 
 of my body and the evil of my spirit. And 
 after bathing, ye shall say: As I have with 
 water washed clean the outer man, O Thou, 
 Jehovih, help me to make clean my spirit. 
 
 In the morning, when thou wakest, 
 thou shalt say: Help me, O Jehovih, to 
 keep my thoughts pure this day; and my 
 soul full of love and tenderness. 
 
 In the evening, before sleeping, thou 
 shalt say: Whilst my corporeal body 
 sleepeth, O Ormazd, help my less incum- 
 bered spirit to see the ways of Thy right- 
 eous judgment. 
 
 Without purity, no man can see the 
 Creator; with purity, all men can see Him, 
 and hear Him. It is easier to purify the 
 corporeal body than the spiritual. For diet 
 and baths can accomplish the former. 
 A man may be clean, as to the flesh; but 
 if he have impure thoughts, he is impure in 
 spirit. Whoso speaketh cruelly or un- 
 justly of his neighbor, is foul in spirit. If 
 he speak of the shortcomings and decep- 
 tions of his neighbor, he is foul in spirit. 
 Therefore, purification is the first law. 
 
 The second law is, to strive constantly 
 to do good unto others. 
 
 Some of the multitude asked: What 
 meanest thou, by doing good unto others? 
 
 Sakaya answered: It hath been said, 
 from time without end, that to help the 
 poor, to give to them, to serve them, is 
 good works done unto others. But I say 
 unto you, this is. but half-way to that which 
 is good. For ye shall not only help them, 
 but shall go and teach them, how to help, 
 themselves. This is doing good unto oth- 
 ers. 
 
 Repeating a certain number of prayers 
 daily is good. As ye have depended on the 
 priests to pray for you, I come to teach 
 you, to pray for yourselves. 
 
 The third law is: To abnegate one's 
 self; being willing in heart, to sacri- 
 fice one's own desires, possessions and 
 opinions, for sake of peace and the good of 
 the family. This is the most difficult law. 
 For the selfishness of man causeth him to 
 say: I have such a love of liberty. Let 
 me be the dictator, and do thou my decree. 
 But for this evil amongst men, they could 
 dwell together in peace, the world over. 
 
 The fourth law is: To love all men, 
 women and children, as brothers and sis- 
 ters. 
 
 The fifth law is: To return good for 
 evil; to give pleasure to those that give 
 pain. 
 
 To practice those things, holding all 
 things in common, is sufficient unto the 
 redemption of the world from darkness, 
 war and evil, unto peace, light and happi- 
 ness to all the living. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXIII. 
 
 Sakaya said: Without rites and cere- 
 monies, a people is like a collection of 
 musicians, with every one playing a differ- 
 ent tune. Without pledges to general 
 rules, a community is like a farm without 
 fences, where cattle roam about, destroy- 
 ing the harvests. 
 
 Take no man or woman into the family 
 till first pledged to serve the All Person, 
 Ormazd, with a full and willing heart. To 
 shun satan and his emissaries, be circum- 
 spect. 
 
 And when ye are come together, choose 
 ye the wisest, best man, to be the rab'bah 
 of the community. 
 
 When matters come up for discussion, 
 whoever speaketh thereon shall speak in 
 the behalf of light, and not of darkness. 
 There are two modes of discussion before 
 all men: One is to impart light, and the 
 other is to abuse the opponent. The first 
 is of Ormazd, the second is satan's meth- 
 od. In the family discussion, the latter 
 method shall not be tolerated by the rab'- 
 bah. After the discussion is finished, the 
 rab'bah shall decree according to the light 
 of the Father in him. 
 
 Sakaya was here asked: Why not de- 
 cree according to the majority vote? 
 
 Sakaya answered: That is the lower 
 light, being the light of men only. It is 
 incumbent on every man in the community 
 that entereth the discussion, to speak from 
 the higher light, as he perceiveth it, without 
 regard to policy or consequences. And the 
 same law shall be binding on the rab'bah; 
 and though nine men out of ten side the 
 other way, yet the rab'bah's decree shall 
 stand above all the rest. 
 
 When the discussion turneth upon rites 
 and ceremonies, which the community may 
 adopt, or the music, or the discipline re- 
 garding funerals, or marriages, or births, 
 the speakers shall remember that a family 
 is composed of old and young; of sedate 
 
542 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 and jocose; and that every talent is created 
 for the glory of the whole, and for the 
 glory of the Creator; and they shall enlarge 
 their understanding, to embrace the whole. 
 Remembering, it is easier to walk beside a 
 bull, and turn him in his course, than to 
 come against him for the same purpose. 
 
 One man hath joy in clapping his 
 hands and dancing; another, in po- 
 etry; another, in singing; another in 
 silent prayers. And yet, one hath no pref- 
 erence over another in sight of Him Who 
 created them, for they are His own handi- 
 work. Consider, then, that ye provide a 
 time and place in the community for all of 
 these; for if ye strive to bind them, that 
 are of exuberant spirits, not to dance and 
 clap their hands, they will find vent in se- 
 crecy and to an evil end. Herein have the 
 Brahman priests been aiders and abettors 
 of bawdy houses and of drunkenness and 
 licentiousness; because they have sought 
 to make ascetics by overthrowing your nat- 
 ural talents. 
 
 Sakaya said: Of a truth, religion is no- 
 thing more or less than rites and cere- 
 monies in the discipline of a community. 
 As when an army of soldiers are in training 
 by their captains, when certain commands 
 and manoeuvres cause the soldiers to be as 
 a unit in movement; so is religion in a 
 community, through rites and ceremonies, 
 made as a unit to carry out works of char- 
 ity and harmony and love and righteous- 
 ness. And every member of a community, 
 that taketh no part in its religion, is like 
 an idler mixing in with a company of sol- 
 diers, where his presence tendeth to evil. 
 
 It is easy to preach and call it religion; 
 but the fruit must be measured by the city 
 or the state, that is saved from sin. Who, 
 then, of all the priests in the temple, can 
 say: Here is a community saved from sin! 
 If they cannot do this, then they are them- 
 selves hypocrites. 
 
 Satan calleth out from a dark corner, 
 saying: Remain thou within the wicked 
 world, and live as an escetic, praying 
 alone, living alone. Again he calleth from 
 a dark corner, saying: Thou and thy 
 friends are to pure to mix with the world; 
 go ye away privily, and let the world take 
 care of itself. 
 
 Now, I say unto you: Do none of these 
 things; and, in the same breath, I say: Do 
 all of them. Let your community remain 
 within the world, that it may be a proven 
 example that love, peace, plenty and hap- 
 piness are possible on the earth. Let the 
 community be sufficiently ascetic to attain 
 the beatific state, which is the triumph of 
 spirit over the flesh. 
 
 Take ye no part in the governments of 
 men, of kings, or queens. Neither fight ye 
 for them, nor against them. For they live 
 under the lower law; but ye shall live un- 
 der the law of Jehovih as He speaketh to 
 the soul of man. Neither shall ye have 
 kings, nor queens. 
 
 Lastly, and above all things, live not 
 for the corporeal wants only; remembering 
 ye are not born in spirit, but are in embryo, 
 shaping yourselves for the everlasting life. 
 
 Three doctrines have been, now are, 
 and ever shall be on the earth; they are: 
 First, the believers in the All Per- 
 son, Ever Present; second, the idol wor- 
 shippers', who make the Creator into a 
 man in heaven, and not present but by 
 proxy of certain laws; and, third, infidels', 
 who believe in nothink they cannot take 
 up in the hand, and weigh. 
 
 The Faithists beget Faithists, the idol- 
 aters beget idolaters, the infidels beget in- 
 fidels. For these three conditions are but 
 outward manifestations of the spirit within. 
 The infidel is nearly devoid of spirit; the 
 idolater hath one grade more of spirit; but. 
 the Faithist hath spiritual ascendency. 
 Since the highest best things done in, 
 the world, come of the order of Faithists^ 
 be ye circumspect as to marriage, that your 
 offspring incline more to spirituality than 
 to earthliness. 
 
 The laws of a community must die with 
 the death of the rab'bah, and new laws must 
 be made by the new rab'bah, or the old 
 ones re-enacted. And, in no case, shall the 
 law of precedent, of things past, apply tx> 
 things present. 
 
 When a rab'bah retireth from office, it 
 shall be considered the same as a death,. 
 Nor shall a rab'bah have any privileges or 
 emoluments, over and above any member 
 of the community; nor one man above an- 
 other; nor one woman above another; for 
 there shall be no partiality, even in favor 
 of the learned and good, over the ignorant. . 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 543 
 
 For ye are all brothers and sisters; chil- 
 dren of One Father, created by Him in 
 His own way and for His own glory. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXIV. 
 
 For four years Sakaya preached, travel- 
 ing from the east to the west, and from 
 north to south; and wherever he went, 
 great multitudes came to hear him, for 
 God had so prepared them. And there 
 went with him seventy-two disciples, who 
 were also inspired of God, to learn the wis- 
 dom of Sakaya's words. And the people 
 of Vind'yu were stirred up as they had not 
 been from the time of Capilya. 
 
 After a time the priests and magicians 
 of Brahma sought to condemn Sakaya, say- 
 ing: The oracles and the spirits of the 
 dead declare, his words are not true words. 
 Moreover, if he were of the Holy Ghost, 
 he could show signs and miracles. 
 
 So God gave Sakaya signs and miracles, 
 even to showing the spirits of the dead, 
 who came and stood beside him whilst he 
 preached; and the spirits spake also, de- 
 claring Sakaya's words were of Jehovih. 
 And the multitude saw the spirits, and 
 heard them speak. 
 
 Sakaya said: Of a truth, I do not come 
 of the Holy Ghost; I come of the All Per- 
 son, Ormazd. 
 
 Then God gave to Sakaya power of the 
 Death Cast, whereat his own spirit went 
 out of his corporeal body, and stood in the 
 presence of many men, and was seen by 
 'them; and his spirit spake to them, and 
 they heard his words. And whilst his 
 spirit was thus out of his corporeal body, 
 another angel of God came and inhabited 
 it, and spake before the multitude. 
 
 Now, after these signs came to Sakaya, 
 he preached again, and traveled four years 
 more, showing these things wherever he 
 went. And on these occasions he explain- 
 ed the spirit of things. And he left 
 his corporeal body, and went in spir- 
 it to far-off cities and country places, 
 showing his spirit in regions hun- 
 dreds of miles remote, and he was recog- 
 nized in the communities where he appear- 
 ed. For there were learned men in those 
 days, and they traveled to the places named 
 to see his spirit, to witness if such a thing 
 
 could be; and hundreds and thousands of 
 them testified, it was true. 
 
 Sakaya said: Of these matters be ye 
 most expert in observation; for though 
 they may be proved to you, yet I declare to 
 you they are as nothing. For even magi- 
 cians and spirits of darkness can attain to 
 the same miracles. Nor is there in such 
 wonders one single virtue, that would con- 
 tribute to make the world better, or hap- 
 pier. 
 
 For the spirits of the lower heavens, 
 like mortals, have multitudes of doctrines; 
 and, for the most part, they know nothing 
 of the higher heavens, which I proclaim to 
 you. 
 
 Consider, then, what ye can do that will 
 raise you in spirit; for this is resurrection. 
 First, to purify yourselves; second, to do 
 all the good ye can; and third, to affiliate. 
 Without these, there can be no resurrec- 
 tion. Or, having two of them, and lacking 
 in the third, there can be no resurrection. 
 
 To practice sharply the convictions of 
 the heart; these are the working-tools of 
 resurrection. To practice not what one is 
 convinced of, is hypocrisy; these are like 
 stones tied to the neck of a man in deep 
 water. 
 
 In all, Sakaya preached and practiced 
 fourteen years; and he founded seventy-two 
 communities. And all the members thereof 
 were sworn against war, and against caste, 
 and against idleness, and to worship only 
 the great spirit, Ormazd. And he gave 
 them many rites and ceremonies. 
 
 And then Sakaya said unto the Creator: 
 I know Thou hast in some mysterious way 
 inspired me to do all I have done. There- 
 fore, all the glory is Thine. How best, O 
 Father, may these great truths be impress- 
 ed upon mortals, that they will not soon 
 forget Thy words through me? 
 
 Then answered God to Sakaya, saying: 
 By thy death by the hand of the idolater. 
 
 Sakaya said: Then, O Thou, Who cre- 
 atedst me alive, provide Thou my death as 
 Thou desirest. 
 
 Then God cut asunder the cord of light 
 that extended to the heavenly throne in 
 Paradise. And now the Brahmans 
 conspired against Sakaya, and they 
 went privily and poisoned his food with 
 the blood of swine, killed with poison. And 
 Sakaya ate thereof, not perceiving it; and 
 he was taken with a bloody flux, and died. 
 
544 
 
 CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 And his disciples took his body, accord- 
 ing to the custom of the country, and burnt 
 it, and scattered the ashes thereof to the 
 four corners of the world. And in the 
 night thereafter, God sent a million angels 
 into the field of ashes, with a heavenly ship 
 of fire, and they took the spirit of Sakaya 
 therein, and bore him up to the throne of 
 <Jod. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXV. 
 HISTORY OF KA-YU. 
 
 Thoanactus, Chief of the million loo'is 
 sent by God down to the earth, to Chine'- 
 ya, to raise up an heir capable of the voice 
 of God, sent word to God in Paradise, say- 
 ing: 
 
 Greeting to thee, O God, in the name 
 of Jehovih. Thy Son is born! And his 
 name is Ka'yu. He is son of Heih, who is 
 sub-king of Te'sow, and his mother, Ching- 
 tsae, is not fifteen years old. 
 
 Let us rejoice before Jehovih, who hath 
 quickened into life this tree of universal 
 knowledge. Also have my hosts brought 
 about more than three thousand births, 
 who shall become his disciples in time to 
 come. 
 
 God returned answer to Thoanactus, 
 saying: In Jehovih's name all praise to 
 thee and thy hosts. Thy words have been 
 proclaimed in Paradise! There is great 
 joy in heaven. Send the grades of mortal 
 resurrection in Chine'ya., with doctrines 
 and rites and ceremonies and the dominion 
 of the spirits of the dead. 
 
 Thoanactus then applied to the angels 
 who had charge of the numerating and ap- 
 praising of mortals as to their grades; 
 and having obtained the reports, he 
 made selections, and reported as fol- 
 lows: Thoanactus, greeting to God, 
 Son of Jehovih: Ling, sun king of 
 Chine'ya, with twelve sub-kingdoms, one 
 to represent every month of the year. Four 
 hundred and six millions of mortals; twen- 
 ty-seven hundred million angels, not fet- 
 tered by angel tyrants. Of the angel emis- 
 saries of the Triune God, fifteen hundred 
 millions. 
 
 Mortal grade, eight; maximum, eighty; 
 minimum, nothing. Of fifties, one to sev- 
 en. Of twenty-fives, one to three; of tens, 
 one to one; but of seventy-fives, one to 
 
 forty, mostly guardian births. The rise in 
 the eleventh year, two; in the thirty-third, 
 five; in the hundredth, twelve. 
 
 Of rites and ceremonies, seventy-two; 
 of sacrifice without compunction, thirty- 
 five. Funeral rites, ninety-eight; observ- 
 ances in full, forty-five. Because Chine in- 
 stituted reverence for the dead, the fun- 
 eral rites have become worshipful. After 
 the body is put away, either buried or 
 burnt, mortals read prayers on three suc- 
 ceeding days, at sunset, chanting the vir- 
 tue and love of the dead; and oft the spirit 
 returneth to them, taking on sar'gis, and 
 talking to their mortal kin. 
 
 Perception in su'is, one to three hun- 
 dred and sixty-two; in sar'gis, one to six 
 thousand two hundred and eight. Of spir- 
 its in sar'gis, one to thirty-three thousand. 
 
 Of drujas, not attained to live alone, 
 seven hundred million. Of these, thirty 
 per cent, are in declension, and seventy in 
 ascension. Of mortals in idleness, includ- 
 ing Druks, twenty per cent. 
 
 Of such as are addicted to secret evils 
 and pollution, seventy per cent.; of abor- 
 tionists, one-half of one per cent. 
 
 Furthermore, thy servant herewith send- 
 eth to thee, for the libraries of heaven, a 
 full record of the cities and country places 
 of Chine'ya; and the grade and rate of ev- 
 ery mortal. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXVI. 
 
 Ka'yu grew up to be a man, in every 
 way adapted to the work for which the 
 loo'is had him born into the world by 
 command of God. And dispicles were also 
 born, and duly prepared by the angels of 
 God to become co-workers with Ka'yu. Of 
 these disciples, seventy-two were called, 
 chief disciples, being six from each of the 
 twelve kingdoms and sub-kingdoms of 
 Chine'ya. 
 
 God had said: Suffer not Ka'yu and his 
 chief disciples to know they are instru- 
 ments in my hands, nor to know that my 
 angels inspire them. 
 
 When Ka'yu was ready for the work of 
 God, there came to him from the twelve 
 provinces of Chine'ya seventy-two men and 
 women of great learning, having heard of 
 Ka'yu's wisdom. 
 
CYCLE OF L1KA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 545 
 
 Ka'yu said unto them: Why have ye 
 come? Some gave one reason, and some 
 another. 
 
 Ka'yu said: These things are the work 
 of the Ever Present. Let us conduct. our- 
 selves as Gods. Let us sit in crescent, af- 
 ter the manner of Gods. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXVII. 
 
 God established a line of light from his 
 throne in heaven down to Ka'yu; by the 
 presence of half a thousand million angels 
 maintained he this light of heaven with 
 mortals. And God so spake through Ka'- 
 yu, that man might not know it was God 
 speaking; for he desired to inspire men to 
 self-culture, instead of relying on Gods and 
 angels as heretofore. 
 
 In the language of Ka'yu, the Great 
 Spirit was called, Shang Te; but the word, 
 Te, was God. 
 
 Ka'yu said: Behold, man hath block- 
 aded the road to wisdom. In one place he 
 hath heaped up thousands of books of the 
 ancients; in another place, he wasteth time 
 in rites and ceremonies. Our labor is to 
 remodel the whole, by choosing from all 
 the past that which is the best. Te will 
 guide us in this. 
 
 We must, therefore, make one book, 
 acknowledging the Ever Present. And this 
 book must contain all the glory and beauty 
 now contained in the seven hundred sacred 
 books of the empire. 
 
 And since there are four hundred and 
 eighty-six books on the intermediate 
 world, which no man can learn, we must 
 take from them all their soundest parts, 
 and make one book thereof. And in the 
 same connection, there being twelve hun- 
 dred and seventy books on the spirits of 
 the dead, and their testimonies of the lower 
 and the higher heavens, we must make one 
 book thereof. And of the two thousand 
 two hundred books on magic, and on con- 
 juring spirits, we must make one book 
 thereof. 
 
 Of books of families, there are more 
 than four thousand, which shall also be 
 condensed into one book. 
 
 Of histories, there are more than' four 
 thousand books, which shall be condensed 
 into one book. 
 
 Of law books, there are more than 
 twelve thousand books, and of the prece- 
 dent's of judges' decrees, there are more 
 than thirty thousand books. All of these 
 shall be condensed into one book. 
 
 Of provinces, and of the empire, and of 
 the governors and emperors thereof, there 
 are two thousand seven hundred books, all 
 of which shall be condensed into one book. 
 And of government, there are seven hun- 
 dred books, which shall be condensed into 
 one. 
 
 Of caste, there are four hundred and 
 ninety books, and of properties, three hun- 
 dred and twenty, and all of these shall be 
 condensed into one book. 
 
 My work is to bring confusion to a ter- 
 mination. Of doctrines and laws and rites 
 and ceremonies and philosophies, or both 
 heaven and earth, we have had enough. 
 Even the preachers and conductors of cer- 
 emonies in the temples, who proclaim 
 righteousness and charity and good works, 
 do not practice what they preach. They 
 live in ease and luxury, but tell us to go 
 give to the poor. Yea, and they threaten 
 us wkh hell, if we do it not. 
 
 Of these different doctrines, there are 
 seven hundred kinds in the sacred books; 
 and they all condemn the followers of the 
 others. Whereupon, to escape the damna- 
 tion of hell, a man would need to do sacri- 
 fice more than four thousand days every 
 year! This is not possible to any man. 
 For there are but three hundred and six- 
 ty-five days in a year! Nor is it possible 
 for any man to learn all the books; nay, a 
 thousand years would not suffice. 
 
 Te forbid that I may add more to the 
 burden we have already. And I know he 
 will preserve in our abridgement all that is 
 good in the whole of them. Since we can- 
 not live according to the multitude of doc- 
 trines and philosophies, we must abridge 
 them within the scope of man. Neither 
 must we cut any of them off entirely, or 
 we lead the followers thereof into rebellion. 
 
 Since we have so many law books and 
 so many judges' decrees, all of which a 
 man must learn before he can become a 
 judge of the court, we must cut them down 
 into a few simples, but sufficient to cover 
 the rules of discretion in judgment. Better 
 is it to throw the judge of the court partly 
 on his own judgment and responsibility, 
 
546 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 LORDS' REC6RD 
 
 than for him to be a blank as to judgment, 
 simply reading the decree of a preceding 
 judge. 
 
 And as to the religion of this man, or 
 that man; behold, each, in his own order, 
 performeth his rites and ceremonies and 
 sacrifices and prayers, like a trained horse 
 in a showman's circle, going round and 
 round, and knowing not the meaning there- 
 of. 
 
 I am not sent into the world to destroy 
 what is, or what hath been.; there are 
 enough evil men to do that. I am sent to 
 cull the harvest, and to gather choice seed 
 from what now is, and what hath been. 
 The seed I plant is selected, not to be 
 planted in the ocean, nor on the moon, nor 
 in a far-off country; but to be planted in 
 Chine'ya, and in Chine'ya I will plant it. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXVIII. 
 
 The old foundations were: 
 
 To dwell in families with a father to 
 each and with chief fathers over them. 
 
 As a father is responsible for the behav- 
 ior of his own child, so was the rab'bah re- 
 sponsible for the behavior of his family; so 
 t was the chief rab'bah responsible for his 
 family of rab'bahs. 
 
 The responsibility of a child to its nat- 
 ural father; of a man to the rab'bahs; of 
 the rab'bahs to the chief rab'bahs, was: 
 
 The child shall be taught to love, re- 
 vere and obey its father and mother; the 
 man to love and revere the rab'bah; the 
 rab'bahs to love and revere the chief rab' 
 bahs. 
 
 Now this doctrine of the ancients, hand- 
 ed down from generation to generation, 
 hath proved to be a good doctrine. 
 
 The Creator taught the ancients these 
 principles. The Creator sent His high an- 
 gel, Te, down to mortals to teach them. 
 
 The fundamental doctrines of the an- 
 cient sacred books were: 
 
 To worship none but the Creator. 
 
 To have no images nor idols. 
 
 To keep the day of the change of the 
 moon as a sacred day, and to do no work 
 on that day, but to practice rites, proces- 
 sions and ceremonies, for the glory of the 
 Creator. 
 
 To love the Creator above all else. 
 
 To love one's parents next to Him. 
 
 To kill no living creature maliciously or 
 for food. 
 
 To tell no lies, nor to steal, nor to covet 
 anything that is another's. 
 
 To do unto others what we would 
 that they should do unto us. 
 
 To return good for evil. 
 
 To feed and clothe the stranger, the sick 
 and helpless. 
 
 To be not idle, but industrious. 
 
 To say no ill of any man nor woman nor 
 child. 
 
 To practice the highest wisdom one 
 hath. 
 
 To respect all people, as we desire to be 
 respected. 
 
 If a man do these things, when he dies 
 his spirit is born into the air of the earth, 
 which is the intermediate world, whether it 
 sojourneth until sufficiently purified, and is 
 reverential to the Creator; and then it is 
 taken up by His angels to dwell in the 
 higher heavens forever. 
 
 But if he do not these things? 
 
 His spirit will be bound in hell after 
 death; he will become a victim for the de- 
 light of demons. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXIX. 
 
 Ka'yu said: Such is the base the an- 
 cients have given into our hands, but who 
 could follow them into detail? 
 
 In the ancient days our country was 
 sparsely settled; families were a good con- 
 venience. But, behold, the land is full of 
 people. I have not to deal with a few scat- 
 tered barbarians. I have to deal with a 
 learned people, who have scarcely room to 
 stand. I am only one man; and ye, but 
 seventy-two. 
 
 Of ourselves, we can do nothing. Shang 
 Te hath shaped the times to our hands. 
 Whether we live to see it, it mattereth lit- 
 tle. The time will surely come, when the 
 emperor will be obliged to destroy the 
 books of the ancients. Let us therefore 
 take the cream of them, and provide for 
 their preservation while we may. 
 
 Ka'yu then divided up the labor 
 amongst his seventy-two disciples; appor- 
 tioning the books of the ancients amongst 
 them. And so great was the wisdom and 
 learning of Ka'yu, that in twelve days 
 time some of his disciples were ready with 
 their reports to begin. And from these 
 
. CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 547 
 
 reports Ka'yu dictated, and the scribes 
 wrote down his words. And when a com- 
 mittee presented a revision before Ka'yu 
 that he even knew it before it was read in 
 the Council. And he dictated thereon, 
 making the necessary alterations. After 
 which, the subject was given to the scribes 
 to re-write out in full. 
 
 Now the whole time of the first sitting 
 of the Council was eight and a half years. 
 But so great was the wisdom and mem- 
 ory of Ka'yu, that he called out from the 
 missings of his disciples sufficient to re- 
 quire yet two years' more deliberation. 
 
 And there were thus produced, from 
 the lips of Ka'yu, twenty books, which con- 
 tained the digest of upward of eighteen 
 thousand books. Nor had any man in all 
 the world ever done one-tenth so 
 great a feat of learning. The scribes wrote 
 six copies for every one of the disciples; 
 and when they were thus provided, and 
 were ready to depart, Ka'yu spake to them, 
 saying: 
 
 To know that one hath done the highest 
 thing within his power, this is the highest 
 satisfaction. For e what is any man at 
 most, but an agent of the Most High? To 
 be true to one's own highest idea, is this 
 not serving the Father? To be neglectful 
 in such conviction, is this not the sickness 
 of all the learned? 
 
 If those beneath him honor him, then it 
 is no honor to him. If those above him 
 honor him, then it is a reproval of his 
 other deeds. But if he honor himself, he 
 hath great honor indeed. 
 
 To eat fruit and herbs and rice, these are 
 the purest diet, but only a fool would starve 
 rather than eat flesh. Rites and ceremonies 
 are useful, but even these a man had better 
 dispense with, than to go to war for them. 
 
 To rest on the ancients only, this is 
 great folly. To honor the ancients only, 
 and to believe that they alone received rev- 
 elation, these are the extremes of a foolish 
 understanding. 
 
 To remember that the Creator is Ever 
 Present, and with as much power and love 
 and wisdom to-day as in the ancient days, 
 this is wisdom. 
 
 To try to find some good thing one 
 can do, this is creditable. But to do no- 
 thing good, because one cannot do it in 
 
 his own way, this is execrable. He who 
 findeth a good work to do, and doeth it, 
 hath much satisfaction. But he should not 
 exult therein; for he hath only done his 
 duty. 
 
 Two kinds of men I have found: those 
 who are predestined by the Gods to accom- 
 plish a certain work, and those who are 
 born with no predestination. The first are 
 erroneously called the higher, because they 
 are at the head of great undertakings; but 
 they are nevertheless but instruments in 
 the hands of the Gods. The others, who 
 are born without any particular work, never 
 can understand the former. 
 
 To be born near enough to the Light 
 to see it, and believe in it, and have faith 
 in it, this is a great delight. To be so far 
 from the Creator that one cannot believe 
 in His Person and Presence, this is pitia- 
 ble. 
 
 To one man, celibacy is the highest life, 
 because he hath joy in his Heavenly Fa- 
 ther. But to one who hath not this joy, 
 celibacy is a great punishment. The socie- 
 ty must admit both conditions. There is 
 no mean betwixt these two; therefore, both 
 must be provided for. Those who desire 
 celibacy, approach the termination of the 
 race; those whose desires are the other 
 way, are of a breed not so far on. There 
 need be no quarrel betwixt them. The des- 
 tiny of both must be completed some time. 
 When a country is sparsely settled, 
 those of extremes can go and live aside; 
 it is nothing to govern such a state. Or 
 to proclaim extreme doctrines before them. 
 But when a country is full of people ; 
 two extremes and the mean must dwell in 
 proximity. It is not an easy matter to 
 govern them wisely. 
 
 Whatever people can dwell together in 
 great numbers on the smallest piece of 
 ground, and yet have peace and plenty, 
 such a people are the highest of all peoples. 
 Where an extreme doctrine cannot be 
 carried out, it is better to have a less ex- 
 treme doctrine. People, like a drove of 
 sheep, are much inclined to follow a lead- 
 er. Herein, politicians and lawyers and 
 judges run the state into war. 
 
 To legislate in such a way, that leaders 
 cannot lead the multitude into evil, this is 
 wisdom. Were all leaders dead, the people 
 themselves would not be very bad. Yet it 
 
548 
 
 CYCLE OF L1KA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 is wrong to take any man's life; for life 
 is something man hath no property in. 
 Life resteth with Jehovih only; it is His. 
 
 Before the ignorant, and before fools, 
 we speak by commandment. Chine'ya hath 
 passed that age; our books must be per- 
 suasive. To dictate to the learned, is to 
 cast one's treasures into the fire. By ask- 
 ing them questions, we can often 
 lead them. Coaxing, with effect, is 
 greater than dictation unobeyed. We 
 preach to the rich man, that he should give 
 all he hath to the poor, and he walketh 
 away, giving nothing. When we say to 
 him: Give a little, he doeth it. Herein, 
 the higher doctrine is the lower, and the 
 lower doctrine is the higher, because it 
 hath potency. 
 
 The ancients said, the first best thing 
 was to love the Creator; I think so too. 
 But when a philosopher asketh me to prove 
 that the Creator is a Person, and is worth 
 loving; I am puzzled. To accept Him as a 
 Person, and as All Good, without criticism, 
 this I find giveth the greatest happiness. I 
 have seen men who would pull the Creator 
 to pieces and weigh His parts to know His 
 worth, but such men end in disbelief in 
 Him. One such man who accomplished 
 Shy good in the world, I have not found. 
 He is in the presence of goodly men like a 
 fly that delighteth in breeding maggots ; 
 pretty enough in himself, but a breeder of 
 vermin in the state. ; 
 
 Yet ne who saith : Let the evil practice 
 evil, because the Creator created them, is of 
 a narrow mind. Or, if he saith: Jehovih 
 sent the rain-storm to destroy the harvest; 
 or, Jehovih sendeth fevers to the dirty city: 
 such a man lacketh discretion in words and 
 judgment. But he who perceiveth that 
 man is part of the creation, in which he 
 must do a part of the work himself, or fe- 
 vers will result, such a man hath his un- 
 derstanding open in regard to the Father. 
 
 Betwixt the too much casting of all 
 things in Jehovih's face, and too little be- 
 lief in Him, lieth the mean, which worketh 
 the perfection of man. To try to find the 
 Creator with love and adoration, instead 
 of with a dissecting knife; this leadeth man 
 on the highest road. To trust in Him, 
 wherein we strive to do our best; this is 
 good philosophy. To lie about idly, and 
 
 not plant our fields, trusting in Him; this 
 is great darkness. 
 
 A wise man, perceiving the defects of 
 the society, will not censure it, but turn to 
 and find a remedy. It is for such purpose 
 the angels of the higher heavens raise up 
 great men in the world. I have seen many 
 people in many different kinds of worship, 
 and they go through their parts in the sac- 
 rifice without perceiving the spiritual idea 
 of the founders, and they are neither better 
 nor worse for it. The infidel, with little 
 discretion, seeing this, abuseth all the doc- 
 trines, but a wise man looketh between 
 them to find the good which others lost 
 sight of. 
 
 To find all the beauties in a man or 
 woman, or in their behavior: this is God- 
 like. 
 
 I have seen the criminals being whip- 
 ped, and I have said to myself: Only by 
 a mere circumstance of birth, the wrong 
 ones are being lashed. Otherwise, they 
 had been governors of the states. I once 
 helped a bad man to elude his pursuers, 
 and he escaped whipping, and he reformed 
 himself. Since then, I have been a con- 
 vert to great leniency. The time will come 
 when bad men will not be whipped nor tor- 
 tured, but be appropriated to benefit the 
 province; to shape our laws for such inter- 
 pretation, is the beginning of wisdom in 
 the government. 
 
 To appropriate all men to the best use; 
 this is the wisest governor. To punish a 
 bad man for vengeance sake; this is evil. 
 
 If a man slay my sister, I raise my 
 sword up before him, that he may run 
 against it, but I strike him not. To reform 
 a man is better than to kill him; to lock up 
 a bad man where he can do no harm, is 
 sufficient for the state. 
 
 I have watched the soldiers in drill, 
 and I said: This is a beautiful sight! For 
 I saw the colors of their clothes, and the 
 poetry of their manoeuvres. But I watched 
 them again, and I said: This is wicked! 
 For I looked into the object of the drill, 
 and I beheld blood and death. 
 
 This I perceive : There were a few wise 
 men among the ancients, as wise as the 
 wisest of this day. But, to-day, there are 
 more wise men than in the ancient times. 
 Doth this not lead us to believe that a time 
 will come, when all people will be wise? I 
 
CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 549 
 
 should like to see this; it would settle 
 many vexed questions. The seers tell us 
 the soul of man is immortal; moreover, 
 that they have seen the spirits of the dead. 
 I tried for many years to ascertain if this 
 were true, but I could not discover. Nev- 
 ertheless, I said: It is a good doctrine; I 
 will appropriate it. The Creator must have 
 created man immortal. 
 
 The priests have appropriated this doc- 
 trine also. Moreover, the ancients say, the 
 good are rewarded in heaven, and the evil 
 punished in hell. The people have been 
 told this, and yet they will not be good. 
 Chine said: To deny one's self, and to la- 
 bor for others with all Our wisdom and 
 strength: this is the highest doctrine. 
 
 I saw a man on a mountain, calling to 
 his flocks in the valleys, but they under- 
 stood him not, and came not. Then he 
 came mid-way down the mountain, and 
 called, and the flocks heard him, and un- 
 derstood, and they went up to him. It is 
 easy to plan out high doctrines, but not so 
 easy to give an efficient doctrine. He, 
 who is mid-way, is the most potent. I 
 have observed, that all peoples have higher 
 doctrines than they live up to. 
 
 The boast of a government is not of its 
 value and goodness, and its fatherly care of 
 the helpless, but of its strength in arms, 
 and in its power to kill. To reach the gov- 
 ernment, and make it virtuous and fatherly. 
 This can be done only through the family, 
 then to the hamlet, then to the province, 
 and then to the empire. But this cannot be 
 done without sincere men, who would faith- 
 fully practice these doctrines. 
 
 That ye are sincere, it is proved in your 
 being with me; that you are virtuous and 
 discreet, with propriety, is proved in your 
 giving ear to my words. Yet, in this, how 
 can I be sincere? I say, my words, when, 
 in fact, I feel that no words I utter before 
 the Council, are my words in fact. Is not 
 this true of all good men? Wherein they 
 are mouthpieces for the Gods, or for the 
 circumstances surrounding them? We 
 open our mouth and speak, but where do 
 our ideas come from? 
 
 When the sun shineth on the field, the 
 herbs come forth; is it not the Creator's 
 light falling upon us, that causeth our ideas 
 to come forth? And if we keep away the 
 grass and the weeds, we receive a profita- 
 
 ble harvest. I would that all men would 
 write a book on the Creator. Thought, 
 directed in this way, will not go far from 
 the right road. To feel that He is with 
 us, hearing all our words, seeing all our 
 deeds: is this not the surest foundation to 
 teach our children? To make them sin- 
 cere, and to behave with propriety, what 
 is so potent as faith in the Creator, and in 
 His Son, Shang Te? 
 
 CHAPTER XL. 
 
 The following are the books of Ka'yu: 
 
 Of the Creator, the Great Spirit, Eolin, 
 and His Creation. 
 
 Of the Plan of Corporeal Worlds, the 
 sun, earth, moon and stars, and their 
 sizes and motions, and their power to hold 
 themselves in their places, by the velocity 
 of rotation. 
 
 Of Light and Heat, and thunder and 
 lightning. 
 
 Of the Unseen Worlds; the upper and 
 lower heavens; the habitations of the Gods. 
 
 Of the Intermediate World, or lower 
 heaven, which resteth on the earth. 
 
 Of Shang Te, who hath charge of this 
 world and her heavens. 
 
 Of False Gods, and their kingdoms in 
 the lower heavens; and their power to 
 catch the souls of men after death. 
 
 Of Hell, where the spirits of bad men 
 are tortured for a long season. 
 
 Of the Highest Heavens, the Orian 
 worlds, where the spirits of mortals dwell 
 in everlasting bliss. 
 
 Of the Administration of Gods and 
 drujas over mortals; how nations are built 
 up, or destroyed by the Gods. And these 
 ten were such as in after years were re- 
 corded as the Books of Great Learning, 
 and were made by the Sun Emperor The 
 Standard of the empire. 
 
 The following books of Ka'yu were such 
 as were called, The Lesser Scholarships: 
 
 Ch'un'Ts'en, being the simples of prob- 
 lems. 
 
 The Perfect Man, or Highest Repre- 
 sentative. 
 
 The Mean Man. 
 
 Purification; to purify the flesh; and to 
 purify the spirit. 
 
 Divination; consultation of spirits; leg- 
 erdemain; sargis; su'is; power of the spir- 
 its to give man dreams and visions. 
 
550 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 Maxims, propriety, sincerity, rites and 
 ceremonies, reverence to age, respect to 
 the dead. 
 
 Love; to love the Great Spirit; to love 
 the parents; to love discipline and indus- 
 try; marriage; marriage for earthly sake 
 being wicked; marriage for spiritual re- 
 demption of the world by generations of 
 holier men and women. 
 
 Book of histories, of Gods and Saviors, 
 of kings and emperors, of wise men, of law- 
 givers, of the rise and fall of nations. 
 
 Book of Holies, in six parts: Omnipo- 
 tence, Worship, Eolin's Judgments, Pro- 
 gression, Reverence to the priests, and 
 Obedience to the sacred commandment. 
 
 Book of Gems, also in six parts: Prov- 
 erbs, Poetry, Morning and Evening Devo- 
 tion, Association, in the family, the com- 
 munity, the state and the empire, Confes- 
 sion of Sins, and Praise and Rejoicing in 
 Eolin, the Great Spirit. 
 
 Such were the twenty books of Ka'yu, 
 which were the pith and cream of the 
 eighteen thousand books of the ancients, 
 together with all the light of the latter 
 days added thereto. And in not many 
 years, these also became the standard 
 books of the Chine'ya empire. And the 
 Council of Ts'Sin'Ne came to a close, and 
 the disciples of Ka'yu departed to their re- 
 spective provinces, taking copies of the 
 books with them. 
 
 And, during all these years of labor, 
 Ka'yu knew not that he was inspired. 
 
 And God looked upon the empire of 
 Chine'ya, and he said: Behold, my son 
 shall write other books, but less profound. 
 
 And God inspired Ka'yu to write: 
 
 A Book of Family Sayings; a Book of 
 Anelects; a Book on Government; a Book 
 on Life; a Book on Punishment; and a 
 Book on Inventions. And these were all 
 the books Ka'yu wrote. 
 
 Nevertheless, his fame became so great 
 that many men followed him about, even 
 when he traveled into distant provinces, 
 and they watched for words he spake, and 
 they wrote them down, and these were also 
 made into books. 
 
 CHAPTER XLI. 
 HISTORY OF JOSHU. 
 Because Pharaoh persecuted the Is- 
 raelites, Moses put a curse upon Pha- 
 
 raoh. Now, after hundreds of years 
 in the lower heavens, behold, Pha- 
 raoh was cast into hell, and then into cha- 
 os, and none but Moses could deliver him. 
 Moses descended from the higher heavens, 
 and delivered Pharaoh, and he provided 
 Pharaoh a new name, Illaes, and sent him 
 back to the earth to labor with the Israel- 
 ites, in order to fulfill his shortness in 
 righteous works. Illaes, therefore, became 
 a willing volunteer, and many angels with 
 him. 
 
 And these angels inspired seven hun- 
 dred Israelites to separate themselves from 
 all other people, and to go and live by di- 
 rection of the angels of Jehovih. More- 
 over, the angels inspired these people to 
 call themselves Es'eans, as commanded by 
 Moses in heaven. These Es'eans were 
 pledged to Jehovih, to have no king nor 
 earth-ruler, save their rab'bahs. And they 
 dwelt in communities and families of tens 
 and twenties and hundreds, holding their 
 possessions in common, and doing, in all 
 things, after the manner of the ancient 
 Faithists. 
 
 Illaes had said: Because I persecuted 
 the Faithists, and raised up my hands 
 against them and against Jehovih, I was 
 instrumental, in part, for their fall. Now 
 will I labor with them, to re-establish them 
 in purity and love. 
 
 And Illaes and his angel hosts made 
 the camps of the Es'eans their dwelling 
 places, watching over these few Israelites, 
 day and night, for hundreds of years, and 
 guarded them from all the warring hosts 
 of angels, belonging to the armies of Baal 
 and Ashtaroth, and to the Triune God, 
 Looeamong, and his hosts. And, though 
 the Es'eans lived in great purity of body 
 and soul, yet they were evilly slandered by 
 the world's people. But Jehovih prospered 
 the seed of the Es'eans, in holiness and 
 love, for many generations. 
 
 Then came Gafonya, chief of the loo'is, 
 according to the command of God, to raise 
 up an heir to the Voice of Jehovih. And, 
 in four generations more, an heir was 
 born, and named, Joshu, and he was the 
 child of Joseph and his wife, Mara, of the 
 Es'eans. And, because of the extreme 
 youth of Mara, the child was of doubtful 
 sex, whereupon the rab'bahs said, the child 
 was an iesu. 
 
CYCLE OF LIRA 
 
 LORDS' RECORD 
 
 551 
 
 The time of the birth of the child was 
 three days after the descent of a heavenly- 
 ship from the throne of God. And many 
 of the Es'eans looked up and saw the 
 ship, and they felt the cold wind of the 
 higher heavens fall upon the place and 
 about the tent, where the child was 
 born. And they said, one to another: Je- 
 hovih remembers us. So the messengers 
 from heaven tarried until after the child 
 was born, acquainting Illaes of the time 
 ahead when Moses with his hosts would 
 come to complete the deliverance of the 
 spirits of the Eguptians, whom Moses had 
 colonized in atmospherea. 
 
 Illaes said: Thank Jehovih, I shall once 
 more look upon Moses' face. 
 
 When the birth was completed, the an- 
 gels of heaven re-entered their star-ship 
 and hastened back to Paradise, God's hea- 
 venly seat. 
 
 CHAPTER XLII. 
 
 When Joshu was grown up, and ready 
 for his labor, God provided a host of one 
 hundred million angels to make a line of 
 light from his Holy Council down to the 
 earth; and they so made it. And God pro- 
 vided a guardian host of two thousand mill- 
 ion angels to protect the line of communi- 
 cation; for it was war times in heaven and 
 earth. 
 
 These were the doctrines taught 
 through Joshu: 
 
 Thou shalt keep the ten commandments 
 of Moses. 
 
 Thou shalt not engage in war, nor abet 
 war. 
 
 Thou shalt eat no flesh of any animal, or 
 fish, or bird, or fowl, or creeping thing 
 which Jehovih created alive. 
 
 Thou shalt dwell in families, after the 
 manner of the ancient Israelites, who held 
 all things in common. 
 
 Thou shalt have no king nor queen, 
 nor bow down in worship to any, save thy 
 Creator. 
 
 Thou shalt not call on the name of an- 
 gels to worship them, nor counsel with 
 them on the affairs of earth. 
 
 Thou shalt love thy neighbor as thy- 
 self, and do unto thy fellow man as thou 
 wouldst have him do unto thee. 
 
 Thou shalt return good for evil, and pity 
 to them that sin. 
 
 The man shall have but one wife, and 
 the woman but one husband. ' 
 
 As the children honor the father, so will 
 the family be blessed with peace and plen- 
 ty. 
 
 Remember, that all things are of Jeho- 
 vih, and ye are His servants, to help one 
 another. And as much as ye do these ser- 
 vices unto one another, so serve ye Jehovih. 
 
 Behold only the virtues and wisdom in 
 thy neighbor. 
 
 Call not on the name of any God or 
 Lord in worship; but worship Jehovih 
 only. And when thou prayest, let it be 
 after this manner: 
 
 Jehovih, who rulest in heaven and earth, 
 hallowed by Thy name, and reverent 
 amongst men. Sufficient unto me is my 
 bread. Make Thou me steadfast, to shun 
 temptation, for all honor and glory are 
 Thine, worlds without end. Amen! 
 
 To visit the sick and distressed, the 
 helpless and blind, and to relieve them; to 
 provide for the widow and orphan, and 
 keep thyself unspotted before men; these 
 are the way of redemption. 
 
 All men are the children of One Father, 
 who is Jehovih; and whosoever chooseth 
 Him, and keepeth His commandments, is 
 His chosen. 
 
 Thou shalt not wed but with the chosen. 
 
 Contend not with any man for opin- 
 ion's sake, nor for any earthly thing. And 
 let thy speech be for others' joy. 
 
 Preserve the sacred days of the rab'bahs; 
 and the rites and ceremonies of Emetha- 
 chavah. 
 
 For three years, Joshu traveled amongst 
 the Israelites, preaching these doc- 
 trines. And there were gathered in 
 groups, of tens and twenties and fif- 
 ties, more than two thousand Israelites, of 
 the ancient Order of Moses, who became 
 steadfast followers of the teachings of 
 Joshu. But, because of persecution, by the 
 apostate Jews, they kept themselves aloof 
 from the world, having signs and pass- 
 words, whereby they knew one another. 
 
 First the God, Baal, and after him, 
 Thoth, inspired the kings and rulers, 
 against these Faithists. And they proved 
 them by commanding them to eat flesh, 
 even swine's flesh, which, if they re- 
 
552 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 LORDS RECORD 
 
 fused, was testimony sufficient before the 
 laws, to convict them of being enemies 
 against the Gods. So, they were scourged, 
 and put to death, whenever found. 
 
 Now, Joshu went into the city of Jeru- 
 salem to preach, and in not many days 
 thereafter, he was accused of preaching Je- 
 hovih. And he was arrested, and whilst 
 being carried to prison, he said: 
 
 Ye hypocrites and blasphemers! Ye 
 practice all the evils of satan. Behold, ye 
 shall become vagabonds on the earth. 
 
 At that, the multitude cast stones upon 
 him, and killed him! And God sent a ship 
 of fire, and bore his spirit to Paradise. 
 
 Forty years after Joshu's death, a false 
 God, Looeamong, with millions of angel 
 emissaries, obsessed the inhabitants of all 
 those countries and plunged them into war 
 and anarchy. The Faithists were scattered 
 to the four ends of the earth. 
 
 Looeamong, the false God, now falsely 
 called himself Kriste. And he raised up 
 tribes of mortal warriors, who called them- 
 selves Kriste'yans. The doctrine of these 
 warriors was, that knowledge, which im- 
 plieth general education, was the best pre- 
 ventive against crime and misery. Neither 
 understood any man in those days that the 
 word Kriste had any reference to a man or 
 person. 
 
KOSMON 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 When Jehovih brought the great solar 
 serpent along the road of vorkum, in ether- 
 ea, behold, Earth passed into the light of 
 the Arc of Kosmon. 
 
 To his etherean Gods and Goddesses, 
 Jehovih said: Behold, in twelve genera- 
 tions the dawn of Kosmon will reach 
 Earth. 
 
 In former cycles, I sent My loo'is to 
 raise up certain mortals, through whom I 
 could reveal My commandments unto oth- 
 ers. In Kosmon, behold, I shall not raise 
 up any great leader- forth; My light shall 
 fall upon thousands and thousands. Of 
 many varieties of talents shall be My 
 chosen in that day. For which reason, 
 when ye have descended to Earth, ye shall 
 appoint loo'is unto millions of mortals, 
 and they shall raise up a numerous off- 
 spring unto Me. 
 
 And it shall be born with them to see 
 and feel, that a new era is at hand; and they 
 shall be born skeptical to the ancient doc- 
 trines, Gods, Lords and Saviors. Never- 
 theless, they shall be the best of men, and 
 wise and charitable and most considerate 
 of the opinions of others. 
 
 And when the western continent is in- 
 habited across from east to west, all the 
 earth will be circumscribed with men of 
 wisdom and learning. 
 
 And the year of the circumscribing shall 
 be the beginning of Kosmon. And the 
 heavens of the earth shall be opened, and 
 the angels thereof shall descend to the 
 earth, and make themselves known to mor- 
 tals; even through those whom your loo'is 
 shall have born unto the work. 
 
 And from that time forth, the old order 
 shall decline, to be put away forever; and 
 the new order shall take its place, to tri- 
 umph over all the earth. Thereafter, shall 
 the virtue of preaching come to an end; 
 but practice, in fulfilling good works and 
 living up to My commandments, shall be 
 
 all that will avail for the establishing of 
 My kingdom on earth. 
 
 Go ye forth, My beloved; fulfill the sea- 
 sons of Earth, that My people may rejoice 
 in their lives. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 Far up in the vault of the firmament, in 
 the etherean realms of Jehovih, the Voice 
 of the Almighty had spoken. The Orian 
 Chief of Huamat and Balis called unto the 
 Gods and Goddesses on the plains of Thes- 
 salona, Nadab and Vraghaoma, called for 
 ten million volunteers. Chonling, Son of 
 Jehovih, Chief of Fabi'wotch'osi and Balis, 
 said: Come, O ye Gods and Goddesses, 
 with me down to the red star; Earth nears 
 the Arc of Kosmon. Come and think of 
 mortals; inspire them with holier thoughts; 
 make them comprehend the light of Je- 
 hovih. 
 
 Then spake Thetchaya, Chieftainess of 
 Huamat and Dikaddonas, saying: I will 
 lead you to the rising red star, the little 
 traveling Earth. Behold, she cometh our 
 way; she will cross the Arc of Kosmon in 
 four hundred years. 
 
 Litabakathrava, Orian Chief of Yoham- 
 ma, of two hundred thousand years, God of 
 Ithwan, forty thousand years, said: Be- 
 hold, my otevan, my fire-ship, goeth that 
 way on her cruise of ten thousand years. 
 Come with me, my otevan will carry a 
 thousand million; I will halt and leave you 
 on Earth with mortals. 
 
 Che Sin, Chief of Ahwentaba, of sixty 
 thousand years, called a host of his swift 
 messengers, ten thousand. Unto them he 
 said: Provide an arrow-ship of great ve- 
 locity, and go ye in the former roadway of 
 Earth, in the regions whither she traveled 
 thousands of years; proclaim it in the ether- 
 ean heavens, the corporeal world, Earth, 
 nears the time of Kosmon. Mortals on 
 Earth are to be illumed, and made to com- 
 prehend the glorious plans of the heavens 
 
554 
 
 KOSMON 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 of the Almighty. In four hundred years, 
 the Father's kingdom is to be founded on 
 the red star. 
 
 Bornothetes, Chief of Guaga, called his 
 Holy Council, in the palace of Nu, gardens 
 of Lasanitizi. And they looked across the 
 firmament, far off, to see the slow rolling 
 Earth, where mortals still groped in dark- 
 ness; whose people could not read the un- 
 seen heavens. 
 
 Then spake Atavia, Goddess of Peroni- 
 tus. She said: O, I remember Earth! 
 The form of her lands changed by Aph, in 
 the Arc of Noe, twenty-four thousand years 
 ago. Hi'ata, Goddess of the Flying Wing, 
 was there, and I with her, in her airavagna. 
 O, it is a glorious world. I will be one 
 to go thither, for the four hundred years. 
 
 Atavia was the first volunteer; but now, 
 the names enrolled like sparks of fire, 
 flashing in the firmament. Presently the 
 numerators sent up rockets, the signals, 
 that the ten million had responded to Je- 
 hovih's call. 
 
 These, then, were the etherean king- 
 doms that contributed. Jaison in the 
 swamps of Loe; Rodus, of the mountains 
 of Kembak; Tisain and Carwa, of the 
 plains of Tassahacha; Amos, the Chosone 
 Resort, and Sagamma, the kingdom of Me- 
 thiasi, Goddess of Tuesta. 
 
 Bornothetes sent swift messengers to 
 these kingdoms; some were half a million 
 miles distant, and some lay amidst nebu- 
 lous forests, thousands of miles high and 
 broad. And he called them, to assemble in 
 Piatya, under the arches of Geddis, to con- 
 sult together, and prepare for the journey. 
 So, when the hosts were assembled in Pia- 
 tya, Jehovih appointed Thotagawawa as 
 God of the cruise and mission. 
 
 And Litabakathrava ordered his fire 
 ship to be brought to Piatya, where it no 
 sooner arrived than the hosts of the mis- 
 sion, the ten million, went aboard, as 
 guests and companions to Litabakathrava's 
 fifty million traveling visitors to worlds, 
 ten thousand times further on. 
 
 And now began the trumpeters and the 
 es'enaurs in songs of praise. Then 
 upward, outward, rose the airavagna, the 
 ship of fire, whose photosphere, as to size, 
 was like a world; rose up higher and high- 
 er, heading for the far-off red star, that 
 
 coursed in the serpent's coil, a million and 
 a half miles a day. 
 
 Two thousand million miles off, lay the 
 red star, Earth, seen by the magnifying in- 
 struments of the Gods, seen in its little 
 orbit round the sun, of half a thousand mill- 
 ion miles. Four hundred million miles a 
 day, sped the airavagna through the ether- 
 ean worlds; like a flash of light shot forth 
 the ship of Litabakathrava, Orian Chief of 
 thousands of years, coursing the etherean 
 heavens of Jehovih! A God that, but to 
 look on a corporeal world, knew the grade 
 of her mortals and angels, even as in his 
 flight he passed on. 
 
 Five days and nights traveled the hosts 
 of the emancipated heavens, to reach 
 Earth; traveled through thousands and 
 thousands of etherean worlds, of forests 
 and swamps of ji'ay, and of nebula, and a'ji r 
 and regions of light, and mountains and 
 rivers and plains; countless places, inhab- 
 ited and uninhabited in the great expanse 
 of Jehovih's kingdoms. Then they came to 
 Chinvat, and there halted to survey Earth 
 and her unruly heavens, where the four 
 false Gods proclaimed themselves mon- 
 archs of the universe! A day they rested, 
 in a day they measured the grade and 
 standing of Earth's mortals and angels, 
 and then they descended straight to Para- 
 dise, the place of God, Jehovih's Son. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 Kabalactes said: My most high Holy 
 Council, Lords of heaven and earth, give 
 ear. This day, my scouts on the borders 
 of Vridat, my suburban kingdom in Tua, 
 saw a light descending, like a world on fire. 
 Consternation came upon my dutiful sub- 
 jects, fearing some foreign God menaced 
 their liberties. To appease them, Hathav, 
 my Lord in- command, despatched hither 
 messengers, to know my will. But when 
 they arrived, others came also, but from 
 the heavenly plateau, Itussak, my northern 
 kingdom, with the same ominous tale. 
 Then others, from other kingdoms in my 
 heavenly regions. Some have seen the 
 light but faintly, some have seen it bril- 
 liant as a pillar of fire. Whilst here within 
 our well secured heavenly seat, it hath been 
 only as a falling meteor. Speak, my Lords, 
 know ye more of this? 
 
KOSMON 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 555 
 
 Maithivi, Lordess, said: All Highest 
 of Gods, be considerate of womanly fears, 
 and detract accordingly from my magnified 
 expressions. To me, this descended star is 
 some far-off ally with God, Jehovih's wor- 
 shipper in Paradise. For by the course of 
 the falling light, it landed thither. Is not 
 this some stratagem to re-establish Jeho- 
 vih, Whom we have chased from earth and 
 heaven? 
 
 Fiebkh, Lord, said: It is not a year 
 since some other foreign God descended to 
 Paradise. Behold, this last one cometh 
 from the same angle beyond Chinvat. Per- 
 adventure, the former was but a scout sent 
 from some heavenly realm, which hath 
 now answered with this mighty airavagna? 
 
 Sin Loo, Lord, said: It was said of old: 
 When the heavens clear, look out for Jeho- 
 vih's worshippers, the infidels against the 
 reigning Gods. Now, behold, in the very 
 season when a'ji flieth away, and our souls 
 are on the eve of rejoicing, here cometh an 
 ominous meddler with our slaves, to do us 
 mischief. 
 
 Thus spake many Lords. And in 
 Kabalactes' Holy Council of one million 
 members, were many who had been long 
 promised preferment and higher dominion 
 than to legislate for another's kingdom; 
 and they had received nothing worthy of 
 the name, for more than a thousand years. 
 And these had a small spark of hope left, 
 that some external disaster to Kabalactes' 
 extensive kingdoms would open the way 
 for rich adventures in their own behalf, 
 with millions of slaves to do them rever- 
 ence. So, even whilst their tongues upheld 
 their monstrous idol, the false Budha, their 
 own souls were equally perfidious. 
 
 When many of the High Council had 
 spoken, then again Kabalactes went on: 
 My marshal in chief shall select a host a 
 million strong, and provide them an arrow- 
 boat; to command which I appoint Tean- 
 vettas, general, to go to Paradise in my 
 name, greeting, to learn the will and pleas- 
 ure of this adventurous God that cometh to 
 the vanquished kingdom of Jehovih's Son; 
 to offer him the freedom of my kingdom 
 for a monthly visit. Perchance, he hath 
 never seen a city built of gems and pre- 
 cious stones; and the palace and throne of 
 the all highest God. The which to look 
 
 on may abash him from undertaking some 
 foolish scheme. 
 
 Now, accordingly, from the false Bud- 
 ha's magnificent heavenly kingdom, there 
 went an arrow-boat, the most precious 
 gem ever built in these heavens. And in it 
 a million hosts, arrayed as very Gods and 
 Goddesses in splendor. Whilst Teanvettas, 
 with his shining crown and blazing jewels,, 
 bespake his generalship as from a rich 
 kingdom. Two hundred thousand slaves 
 worked the boat, and many of these had 
 been in earth-life Budhist priests, and were 
 now serving their apprenticeship of two 
 hundred years, in order to have the privi- 
 lege in future time of crawling on their 
 bellies to see the throne of the false Bud- 
 ha, and see their all highest ideal God. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 Whilst Ennochissa and His High Coun- 
 cil were assembled in the palace of Eta- 
 shong, there came messengers from no less 
 than thirty and six of Ennochissa's sub- 
 kingdoms, alarmed, and with magnified ac- 
 counts of the fire-ship seen descending to 
 Paradise. And each and all of these mes- 
 sengers told his tale before the. throne; 
 expressing the fear of the sub-Lords' king- 
 doms, and praying to know Ennochissa's 
 will and pleasure. 
 
 Now, here, even as at Haractu, the 
 Lords of the High Council spake express- 
 ive of their hopes and fears. And here 
 also were many Lords, who had been long 
 promised exaltation, but never received it. 
 And they pretended heartfelt loyalty to 
 Ennochissa, the false Brahma, even whilst 
 with secretive hope they prayed some ad- 
 venturous God might come and break up 
 Ennochissa's kingdom, feeling, that in the 
 spoil they would profit in heavenly king- 
 doms of their own. 
 
 Then spake Ennochissa, saying: In the 
 name of the Holy Ghost, I thank you all. 
 And for your loyalty make myself your 
 humble God to do your wills and pleas- 
 ure. 
 
 First, then, that our unapproachable 
 kingdom shall ever remain the all highest 
 heaven, where ye shall rest secure forever, 
 I will prove most alert to learn the designs 
 of this visiting God. Behold, I will send 
 thither an arrow-boat, with a million Lords. 
 
556 
 
 KOSMON 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 arrayed in splendor, and every one crown- 
 ed; and over them, Kosimathara, Lord in 
 chief. In my name and in the name of the 
 Holy Ghost, my hosts shall greet this God, 
 and invite him hither on a monthly visit. 
 Perchance he hath no knowledge, as to 
 what the all highest God is. 
 
 So, an arrow-boat was made, the most 
 magnificent ever seen in Eta-shong; and in 
 it the million Lords with jeweled crowns 
 embarked, commanded by Kosimathara, 
 Lord in chief, and they sped off for Para- 
 dise also. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 When the Lords of the High Council, 
 of Kalla-Hored, the heaven of the false 
 Mohammed, had expressed their hopes and 
 fears as to the fire-ship descending to Par- 
 adise, Gabriel said: 
 
 Who here feareth, let him speak; who 
 here feareth not, let him speak also. I will 
 know my Lords and High Council. Be- 
 Tiold, I am a warrior God. I profess not 
 peace, like the Triunes, and practice war. 
 I profess war, and practice it. 
 
 I made Looeamong. When he chose 
 to have himself established, as Kriste, I es- 
 tablished him. When he denied me jus- 
 tice, I exposed him in heaven and on the 
 earth as false. When he refused me the 
 heavenly kingdom which he promised, I 
 took it, and established myself. I made ye 
 Lords of my High Council; I drove away 
 from the earth a thousand false Lords, and 
 broke up the oracle-houses of mortals. 
 
 What, then, have I to fear from a for- 
 eign God, coming to the heavens of the 
 earth? Behold, these heavens belong to 
 such as are born of the earth. Let the for- 
 eign Gods return to worlds where they 
 were native born. If this God hath come to 
 battle me, in behalf of Jehovih's God, let 
 him come. Till he or I shall be cast into 
 hell, let the battle wage. Did I not the 
 daring Goddess, Ashtaroth, send to hell? 
 and the mighty Baal after her? And all 
 the Argos'yan Gods; and the Gods of 
 Roma silence and cast into torments? 
 
 Now, behold, I will send an arrow-boat, 
 a million strong, to Paradise, and banter 
 this adventurous God to give me battle. 
 Better try our respective powers, as to who 
 shall go down, than to live in uncertain 
 
 surmises as to such a God's business in an- 
 other God's heavens. 
 
 Then let my marshal provide an arrow- 
 boat, armed with shafts of fire and water, 
 and choose a million warriors for this ad- 
 venture. Over them, my warrior Lord, 
 Justin, shall hold command. And he shall 
 go to Paradise, greeting, in the name of 
 God-Gabriel, to know of the coming God 
 by what right he hath ventured near my 
 holy kingdoms. 
 
 So, Thoth despatched a boat to Para- 
 dise. 
 
 Even as at the heavenly kingdoms of 
 the other three false Gods, so was the 
 alarm in Hapsendi, capital of the heavenly 
 kingdom of Looeamong, who had falsely 
 assumed to be Kriste. After Looeamong's 
 hundreds of messengers, from his various 
 sub-kingdoms, had made their reports as 
 to the appearance of the great light that 
 had descended to Paradise, and of the con- 
 sternation of the sub-Lords, then spake 
 the High Council before the throne of Loo- 
 eamong. Some magnified the omen as a 
 menace; some suggested doubling the 
 number of the standing armies of Looe- 
 among's heavenly kingdoms, and yet oth- 
 ers suggested numerous other things. Af- 
 ter thousands of them had spoken, then 
 spake Looeamong, saying: 
 
 Wise and Holy Lords and Gods of the 
 all highest heavenly kingdom, great have 
 been your wisdom and suggestions. Now, 
 therefore, by the light of the Holy Ghost, 
 hear ye my decrees: 
 
 I will send unto this stranger God, who 
 hath come to Paradise, a fire-boat a million 
 strong, and every one shall go crowned 
 and arrayed with jewels and diadems, and 
 weapons of warfare; and they shall have 
 shields and figure-heads of tau and aries 
 as symbols of my attributes. Behold, I 
 send unto him as a lamb of peace, but I 
 send also the spear and the sword. 
 
 In command of the fire-boat and the 
 hosts thereof I appoint Ajudus, whom I 
 will crown with the mitre and the triangle 
 and the cut ring. And this shall be my 
 message to the stranger God: 
 
 In the name of the Holy Ghost and of 
 the Son, greeting and love. Behold the 
 kingdom of Hapsendi, the all highest holy 
 heaven, is open, and free unto thee. The 
 all highest God and ruler of the greatest 
 
KOSMON 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 557 
 
 heavenly kingdom would know thy will 
 and pleasure. And if it be thy purpose to 
 engage in a good and holy work, behold, I 
 have employment for thee, for thy profit 
 and honor and glory. And, for whatso- 
 ever thou canst accomplish for the resur- 
 rection of my people, shall receive a just 
 reward from my hand. 
 
 Accordingly, a fire-boat of excellent 
 workmanship was provided, and equipped 
 gorgeously and in splendor. And into it 
 the million hosts, crowned as Lords, and 
 commanded by Ajudus, embarked, and set 
 sail for Paradise, the heavenly place of 
 God, Jehovih's Son. 
 
 To work the fire-boat there were four 
 hundred thousand slaves, composed of the 
 spirits of such as had been on earth, popes, 
 archbishops, bishops, cardinals, priests, 
 and others who were serving their bondage 
 of two hundred years, for the privilege of 
 ultimately crawling on their bellies through 
 the arena of the palace, and to approach 
 near enough to look upon Looeamong, 
 their supposed all highest God and Savior. 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 After the Light of Jehovih came to God, 
 saying: Go, provide mortals to cross the 
 ocean, to build up the western continent, 
 God ceased striving to redeem the four 
 heavenly kingdoms of the four false Gods, 
 but directed his energies, to regain a broad- 
 er earth-anchorage for Jehovih's kingdom 
 on earth. 
 
 So, God sent down from Paradise, one 
 Melkazad, crowned as Lord, with ten 
 thousand angels in his command to inspire 
 migration to Guatama, and to make the 
 country known to the eastern peoples. 
 
 And Melkazad, with his hosts, came and 
 ascertained the grade and choice of mor- 
 tals for such purpose. And Melkazad and 
 his hosts did raise up Columbo, a mortal 
 from Genoa, together with crews sufficient 
 in number, whom they inspired to go with 
 ships to the westward, across the ocean, in 
 search of the lay and plan of the world. 
 And Columbo, thus inspired of God, 
 through his holy angels, did discover the 
 western continent, not knowing he was un- 
 der inspiration. 
 
 It was shortly after this, that the angel 
 hosts from etherea came down to the 
 
 throne of God in Paradise, to labor with 
 him in providing for the approach of the 
 kosmon era. Now, whilst God and his 
 angels in the heavenly kingdom of Para- 
 dise were rejoicing because of the success 
 of Columbo, which had been reported by 
 Melkazad to God, behold, in that same 
 time the etherean ship of Litabakathrava 
 arrived. 
 
 And God received the ethereans with 
 great rejoicing; and, after due ceremonies, 
 God declared a recreation of three days, 
 that the angels of Paradise might rejoice, 
 before Jehovih, because of the a'ji of so 
 many hundreds of years was breaking 
 away, and because of Columbo's success, 
 and because of the coming of the ether- 
 eans. Great, indeed, were the rejoicings, 
 the praise, the music and glee of the thou- 
 sand million angels of Paradise. 
 
 At the end of three days, the trumpet 
 called the Holy Council of God, to resume 
 labor before the throne. Then, the mar- 
 shals from various places in God's king- 
 doms called their students and laborers, 
 and withdrew to their several departments. 
 The Holy Council resumed their .places be- 
 fore God, and God ascended the throne, 
 and order reigned. 
 
 Then, God called the ethereans, Chon- 
 ling, Thetchaya, Che Sin, Bornothetes, 
 Atavia and Thotagawawa, to come and 
 honor the throne. Whereupon, these visit- 
 ing Gods did as commanded. 
 
 Then spake God, saying: What trib- 
 ute, O Jehovih, can I pay to Thy Son, Lit- 
 abakathrava? For the light and glory of 
 his presence provide Thou unto me and my 
 Holy Council. 
 
 Thereupon, all the Holy Council, one 
 million, rose to their feet, and then all the 
 Gods rose up also. God said: Come thou, 
 honor my throne. 
 
 Then, Litabakathrava walked up, and 
 sat on the throne of God. When he was 
 seated, God commanded all the rest to be 
 seated. And thereupon, Litabakathrava 
 rose up, and said: 
 
 Thou hast given me great honor, O 
 God of Earth and her heavens. May the 
 light of the Person of Jehovih dawn upon 
 all the kingdoms of heaven and earth. 
 
 Yet, O God, be not puffed up with the 
 hope of sudden success. I have seen many 
 corporeal worlds arrive at the kosmon era. 
 
558 
 
 KOSMON 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 But it is like a new birth, brought forth in 
 pain, and with much labor. 
 
 Thou hast yet several generations of 
 mortals to be born ere kosmon come. The 
 four dark corners of the lodge will bound 
 upon thee, to destroy the work of thy hand 
 and of Jehovih's. The four false Gods will 
 fight thee to the death; only till they go 
 down in hell, can Jehovih's kingdom come. 
 
 On all the corporeal worlds it is ever 
 the same; certain four false Gods rise up 
 to possess the corporeal worlds and their 
 heavens. They will profess truth, but prac- 
 tice falsehood; profess peace, but practice 
 war. They will incite mortals and angels 
 to all manner of evil for sake of thwarting 
 Jehovih's Person and proceedings. 
 
 And when thy people profess Jehovih 
 and not them, behold, they will inspire oth- 
 ers to fall upon thy people to destroy them 
 or to torture them with great suffering. 
 ^Nevertheless, Jehovih shall triumph over 
 -all the earth and in the heavens of the 
 .earth. Men and angels shall be free, and 
 none shall make them afraid. 
 
 Litabakathrava ceased, and sat down, 
 and suddenly a great shining light gathered 
 above his head, and a Voice spake out of 
 the light, saying: 
 
 All the earth is Mine, and the waters, 
 and the air above the earth. These are 
 members of My body and Person. Man I 
 created not to possess them, but to dwell 
 thereon and therein. Unto all men alike 
 gave I of these inheritances; nor to any 
 man a part, nor to any nation or people 
 a part. But with liberty and privilege to 
 draw sustenance and support therefrom. 
 All men are My children; into conscious 
 being created I them alike, privileged unto 
 all the earth, and the air in the firmament 
 above the earth. Brothers and sisters cre- 
 ated I them; of various tribes and races 
 and colors and sizes, but nevertheless, in 
 Mine own way I created them, every one 
 for a glory in the way I made him. 
 
 In the early days, I kept certain races on 
 certain continents and places, that I might 
 unfold him in the glory for which I design- 
 ed him. But in kosmon, I open the gates 
 of the oceans, and the seas, and the rivers, 
 and I say unto all My people: Come forth, 
 behold your brethren; go ye into this coun- 
 try, and into that, and learn wisdom from 
 
 that which I have proved in the family of 
 My house. Be ye profitable unto one an- 
 other, in the experience and practice of My 
 hand upon all peoples. 
 
 In one, tallness; in another, shortness; 
 in one, sound teeth and bones and well- 
 formed limbs; in another, sagacity; in one, 
 a dense population and well-tilled lands; in 
 another, plain food and long life; for in 
 kosmon, man shall go abroad into all coun- 
 tries, one nation with another; and they 
 shall profit by wisdom, to bring forth a 
 new race with all the glories selected from 
 the whole. 
 
 Neither shall man be bound more by 
 the doctrines of this God or that God, or 
 by this Savior or that Savior, nor by any 
 of the ancient books, nor by inspirations 
 of the olden times. But he shall know how 
 to obtain inspirations from My Gods, and 
 My heavens for his own good, and for his 
 own wisdom. 
 
 Neither shall one nation cry out, hea- 
 then; nor pagan. Behold, My mark is 
 upon all those that engage in war, or who 
 maintain warriors; or forts and arsenals, 
 and use weapons of death; and upon all 
 who kill, and eat flesh of anything I cre- 
 ated alive; for all such are pagan and hea- 
 then in My sight. 
 
 My Gods shall minister unto all nations 
 and peoples to these ends, to bring them 
 together in peace and harmony, to open 
 the ports of those that have been seclusive 
 nations and peoples, to persuade them to 
 put away war and destruction, to make na- 
 tions and peoples acceptable to one an- 
 other. 
 
 The Voice of the Light ceased, and all 
 about the throne of God was like a sea of 
 golden fire. The time for the departure of 
 Litabakathrava and his hosts had arrived. 
 Accordingly, he went down, and sat on the 
 foot of the throne, and then God descend- 
 ed, and took his hand, saying: Arise, Ori- 
 an Chief, Jehovih's Son, and go thy way. 
 The Father calleth thee and thy people. 
 
 So Litabakathrava passed down into the 
 arena, and saluted on the sign, Dawn of 
 Kosmon, and God answered in the sign, 
 Fortified in Jehovih's name! 
 
 Litabakathrava and his hosts then went 
 into the otevan, the mighty ship, with its 
 photosphere, large as a continent. And 
 presently, whilst the es'enaurs and the 
 
ROSMON 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 559 
 
 trumpeters chanted, Praise to the Almigh- 
 ty, the vessel started from its foundation, 
 and rose slowly upward, applauded by the 
 thousands of millions assembled in Para- 
 dise. 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 Now, behold, just as the ship of Lita- 
 bakathrava was starting forth, the fire-boats 
 of the four false Gods arrived in Paradise. 
 And the hosts, in the boats, were discom- 
 fited and angry, because their boasted au- 
 dacity was thwarted from having an inter- 
 view with the Orian Chief and his hosts. 
 
 And they of the fire-boats saw one an- 
 other, and were incensed and jealous, and 
 puzzled to know what to do. Neither would 
 any of them confer with God, Jehovih's 
 Son, for they had been thus commanded by 
 the respective false Gods. Now, therefore, 
 after the fire-boats had cruised about a 
 while, displaying their splendor, three of 
 them departed, leaving only the fire-boat of 
 Looeamong's hosts remaining. 
 
 The captain of this boat had said: It is 
 not sufficient that I come hither, and find 
 the foreign God departed. I will ascertain 
 what hath been said and done, and what 
 these Jehovih worshippers are up to. 
 
 So, he went aside, and made his boat 
 fast, and he and his hosts, arrayed in splen- 
 dor, went and talked with the inhabitants 
 of Paradise, inquiring, amongst other 
 things, the cause of such great rejoicing 
 amongst the people. And one of the peo- 
 ple, being unguarded, said: Behold, it is 
 well with us that we rejoice; God, Jeho- 
 vih's Son, hath inspired a new mortal an- 
 chorage. He hath taken Columbo across 
 the ocean, and showed him a new country, 
 where only the Great Spirit, Jehovih, is 
 worshipped. 
 
 The captain of the fire-boat thus discov- 
 ered one of the plans of God for redeeming 
 the world; but the captain disclosed not 
 his joy, though presently, he and his hosts 
 went aboard and departed, making all 
 haste to Hapsendi, the heaven of Looea- 
 mong, the false Kriste. 
 
 On the day after Looeamong learned 
 this matter, he sent a war-ship with seven 
 million warring angels to stir up a mutiny 
 amongst mortals in countries whence Co- 
 lumbo sailed. And, by inspiration, Looea- 
 
 mong's warrior angels did set the rulers of 
 Spain against Columbo, and had him cast 
 in prison, thus breaking the chain of in- 
 spiration betwixt Columbo and the throne 
 of God. 
 
 In the meantime, Looeamong's angels 
 made all haste to have mortal ships and 
 shipmasters of their own king cross the 
 ocean to countries Columbo had discover- 
 ed. Thus did Looeamong's mortal worship- 
 pers cross over to Guatama, and, with 
 them, Looeamong landed and stationed in 
 Guatama one thousand million angel war : 
 riors, sworn laborers to the false Kriste, 
 to establish him in these great lands. 
 
 When God saw how evil had already 
 taken root in these countries, behold, he 
 was doubly resolved to obey Jehovih's 
 commandment in regard to the inquisi- 
 tions. In which Jehovih had said: 
 
 Permit Looeamong to carry out the in- 
 quisitions, to put to death whomsoever he 
 will. For behold, the spirits of those he 
 slayeth in Roma and Venice and Napla and 
 all other cities and countries will remain 
 in their places with vengeance on their 
 souls. And the time shall come when thou 
 shalt withdraw thy protecting angel hosts 
 from these cities; and these angels of ven- 
 geance will come forth and visit their 
 wrath upon this false God and his king- 
 doms. 
 
 So, God was strong in resolution to let 
 evil take its course; and in all countries 
 where the false Kriste had been afflicting 
 mortals, God withdrew his protecting 
 hosts, leaving those countries and those 
 heavens to take their course. And the an- 
 gels of vengeance began to battle other 
 angels, and to obsess mortals unto battle 
 also, and all against the false Kriste. 
 
 Thus opened the door for dissolution 
 in Looeamong's doctrines, which was to 
 end in the entire overthrow of the 
 Trinity, and of the Holy Ghost, and of 
 Looeamong also, under his false name. 
 Thus did war begin again on earth, and in 
 Looeamong's heavens, about himself and 
 his doctrines. 
 
 To make matters worse for himself, he 
 established angel emissaries in his earthly 
 kingdom, in Roma, to inspire the popes to 
 cause mortals to be scourged, imprisoned 
 and put to death for heresy, and these 
 things were done in the name of Kriste and 
 
560 
 
 KOSMOJST 
 
 CYCLr OF LIKA 
 
 the Holy Ghost. And no man could ex- 
 press a word, or thought, reflecting upon 
 Looeamong's earthly doctrines or govern- 
 ment, without falling a victim to mortal and 
 angel emissaries of this false Kriste. Ver- 
 ily were many of these mortal cities ob- 
 sessed by angels of darkness and evil. 
 
 In course of time, behold, mortals, in- 
 spired by vengeance-loving spirits, rose up 
 against Looeamong's popes and cardinals, 
 and protested against the abnegation of 
 man's right to think for himself; and these 
 people called themselves, protestants, pro- 
 'fessing that there were two Kristes, a true 
 one and a false one, and, moreover, that 
 they themselves were worshippers of the 
 true Kriste. Nevertheless, they were also 
 under the inspiration of evil angels, for 
 they fell to work burning and flaying their 
 opponents also. 
 
 And God saw that now was the time to 
 inspire the western nations of Uropa to 
 great learning and to science and to philos- 
 ophy and to western migration. So, God 
 sent angels to teach man once more the tel- 
 escope and the art of printing; and to in- 
 spire man to question the spiritual powers 
 of kings. 
 
 Thus was Looeamong's power in great 
 measure locked up in managing his disrupt- 
 ed kingdoms, whilst God's holy angels pur- 
 sued the road of righteous development for 
 the coming time of kosmon. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 When God saw that Looeamong's war- 
 rior angels had come upon the earth re- 
 gions, discovered by Columbo, God with- 
 drew, saying: Behold, I will use this testi- 
 mony unto Jehovih and against this false 
 Kriste, in time to come. For I will with- 
 draw my angel hosts and give up, for a 
 season, the central lands of Guatama. And 
 mortals in these lands shall not prosper in 
 peace, nor righteousness, nor in learning, 
 nor in science, nor inventions, nor 
 in anything good. For Looeamong's 
 warrior angels shall obsess them, and they 
 shall build up and then destroy, and the 
 people of Aliattes, the Yodopans, shall be 
 destroyed, and the I'huans and their cities 
 shall be ruined. 
 
 So God withdrew from the central 
 lands of Guatama, and it fell under the do 
 minion of the warrior angels of Looea- 
 
 mong, the false Kriste, and they became 
 warriors and destroyers; nor rose they in 
 peace, nor wisdom, nor in anything good 
 under the sun. But they lived as pilferers, 
 debauchees, warriors, murderers and idol- 
 aters of the false Kriste. 
 
 God had said: I will go to the north- 
 ward, to the western coast of Uropa, and 
 my angel hosts shall inspire another people 
 to migrate to Guatama. And it shall 
 be proved, in time to come, that 
 they whom I shall take across the 
 ocean, shall inherit Guatama; and they 
 sha'* prosper in peace, virtue, wisdom, 
 learning and inventions. And man, in after 
 time, shall witness the difference betwixt 
 the people of Looeamong's possessions as 
 compared with mine own in the northern 
 regions. 
 
 And so, God sent his angel hosts 
 amongst the factions of western Uropa, 
 and inspired mortals to rise up, and depart 
 out of that country. And they that were 
 inspired of God crossed over the ocean, 
 and landed in Guatama, and they named 
 the place of their landing Plymouth Rock, 
 saying: For God's sake and for liberty, 
 help us, O Thou, our Creator. But they 
 said not: For Kriste's sake, nor for the 
 sake of the Holy Ghost. 
 
 Nevertheless, Looeamong's angel war- 
 riors had accompanied them across the 
 ocean; and, when they beheld what mor- 
 tals had done, they departed, by means of 
 the mortal ships returning to Uropa, for 
 these angels were too low in grade to cross 
 the ocean without the presence of mortals. 
 And, when they had come to the other 
 side, they reported to Looeamong's angel 
 generals what had been done by mortals, 
 in Guatama, and these angel generals sent 
 a dispatch to Hapsendi, Looeamong's hea- 
 venly kingdom, to learn his will and pleas- 
 ure. 
 
 'Looeamong sent back word as follows: 
 Send thou a sufficient inspiring host 
 to obsess all mortals who have thus pos- 
 sessed Guatama, lest the country fall into 
 Jehovih's hands. Spare them not; possess 
 all, or ruin all, in the name of Kriste and 
 the Holy Ghost. 
 
 God had inspired, for sake of Jehovih, 
 certain other people in northwestern Uro- 
 pa, who were Faithists in heart, but not 
 practicers of the rites and ceremonies, call- 
 
KOSMON 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 561 
 
 ed Quakers, to migrate to Guatama, to 
 shape the destiny of the inhabitants to 
 oeace and virtue and wisdom; and these 
 Quakers were covenanted to Jehovih, to 
 never engage in war, nor to quarrel, nor to 
 contend with any man for opinion's sake. 
 
 So Looeamong's obsessing angels fell 
 upon the colonies of settlers in Guatama, 
 and obsessed them to flay and to burn 
 and to exterminate the Quakers, for 
 Kriste's sake, as mortals said. And the 
 angels of Looeamong inspired mortals to 
 lie in wait for any such other Faithists as 
 might migrate to Guatama. 
 
 God had said: Suffer these hardships 
 to my people to be recorded, for in kosmon 
 they shall be testimony of the power of 
 heaven on mortals. 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 Now, after the etherean angels came to 
 Paradise, in answer to God's prayer for 
 help, God divided his hosts unto all the 
 earth, and the heavens thereof, not for sud- 
 den triumph by violent means, but to the 
 end that man should, in after years, com- 
 prehend the wisdom and glory of Jehovih. 
 
 So, God made divisions of his hosts, 
 four divisions for the earth, he appointed 
 Eezen, Khan, Ah Cho and Lakash, to go 
 to hada, the heavenly kingdoms of the four 
 false Gods, to establish a guard, thence to 
 the earth. And God gave to each of them 
 one thousand million hosts to labor with 
 them. And when these were all selected, 
 and had come before the throne of God, 
 he said unto them: 
 
 Because the four false Gods have ac- 
 complished all the good they can accom- 
 plish, and are now only leading mortals 
 and angels down into darkness, I shall pres- 
 ently cut them and their supplies off from 
 the earth. In that day and hour there will 
 be danger in heaven. For there are more 
 than three hundred million spirits in the 
 hadan heavens, who were put to untimely 
 deaths, in order to establish the false Brah- 
 ma, the false Budha, the false Kriste, and 
 the false God-Gabriel. 
 
 Go ye, then, to your places, and pro- 
 vide yourselves in wisdom and strength. 
 Guard well these spirits, for once they con- 
 gregate for vengeance' sake, they will cast 
 their Gods in hell. 
 
 They answered with one voice: Jeho* 
 vih's will and thine be done! And they 
 saluted, and departed. 
 
 God then called up the other seven of 
 the Holy Eleven: Yopes Leo, Likar, Vad- 
 huan, Ardolfus, Yutemis, Zahakee and 
 Yedna, together with their seven thousand 
 million hosts, and he said unto them: 
 
 Behold, the eleven kingdoms which 
 have been preparing for more than two 
 thousand years shall now be opened up, 
 and established, with roadways to the king- 
 doms of the four false Gods. For the time 
 is near at hand when I shall cast them out, 
 and remove them and their kingdoms away 
 from the earth, and forever. 
 
 That a revolt may be prevented, ye shall 
 provide places and vessels for the removal 
 of their drujas, of which there are more 
 than twenty thousand million. Go, then, 
 to your respective places, and be ye ready 
 by the time of my command. 
 
 They answered unanimously: Jehovih's 
 will and thine be done! And they saluted, 
 and departed also. 
 
 After this, God appointed twelve of the 
 etherean Gods and Goddesses as a Sever- 
 ing Host, and he allotted to them six thou- 
 sand million angels to work with them, 
 when the time should require them. To 
 these twelve Gods and Goddesses, God 
 said: 
 
 When the time is at hand, ye shall 
 take your six thousand million hosts 
 and cut off all the earth supplies on which 
 the four false Gods and their kingdoms 
 subsist. And their kingdoms shall fall in 
 anarchy and ruin. Their drujas shall be 
 liberated; and they shall fall upon their 
 Gods' kingdoms, and despoil them utterly, 
 and cast their false Gods into hell. Go, 
 therefore, to the places whither I have pro- 
 vided, as my messengers will show you. 
 and make ready in all things, for the time 
 and the signal of my hand. 
 
 So, these twelve Gods and Goddesses sa- 
 luted and departed for their labor also. 
 
 Now, as yet, none but the Holy Council 
 and the Gods and Goddesses knew the 
 plans of God, Jehovih's Son, nor the ob- 
 ject and labor provided unto the hosts sent 
 thus forth to all parts of the earth and the 
 hadan heavens. Nevertheless, God had 
 commanded the officers to maintain lines 
 of light with his throne in Paradise, so that. 
 
562 
 
 ROSMON 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 concert of action would manifest all around 
 the earth, in the same moment of time. 
 
 Now, of the fire-boats and crews sent 
 by the false Gods to Paradise, only one, 
 Looeamong's, returned to tell the tale of 
 chagrin and disappointment in not meeting 
 the etherean God, Litabakathrava. As for 
 the other three, fitted out so extravagantly, 
 with a million hosts, crowned and adorned 
 in such magnificence, they concluded to go 
 away, each into a different heavenly region, 
 and establish three independent kingdoms 
 of their own. 
 
 Many of these angel hosts had been 
 promised, for hundreds of years, that they 
 should have sub-kingdoms, with millions 
 of slaves, but had ever been put off, until 
 they were discouraged. Accordingly, they 
 resolved to appropriate their outfits in 
 founding thrones and capitals. 
 
 So, the fire-boat sent out by Ennochissa, 
 returned to his heavenly kingdoms, but 
 not to Ennochissa. And that of Kabalac- 
 tes went to his regions, but not to Kabal- 
 actes. And that of Gabriel returned to his 
 regions, but not to him. And they all pro- 
 ceeded much after the same manner, which 
 was, after having founded a throne, they 
 went about in the fire-boat, enticing sub- 
 jects to come to their places. 
 
 And ere their respective masters 
 were aware of it, they had heaven- 
 ly kingdoms, with hundreds of millions of 
 slaves. When the three false Gods, Enno- 
 chissa, Kabalactes and Gabriel, heard of 
 the proceedings of their traitorous subjects, 
 they, separately, declared war against the 
 pretenders. 
 
 In not many years, therefore, from this 
 small beginning, great wars engrossed 
 these three false Gods' kingdoms on every 
 side, but wholly interior to each one's 
 kingdom. Which enabled God, Jehovih's 
 Son, to pursue the two great plans for the 
 redemption of mortals and angels. These 
 plans were, to provide protection to the 
 Ka'yuans of Chine'ya, the worshippers of 
 Jehovih, and to found the country of Guat- 
 ama free from the grasp of Looeamong. 
 So, as soon as God had provided a suffi- 
 cient protecting host of angels for the 
 Ka'yuans, he devoted his energies to Guat- 
 ama and her heavens. 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 Whilst the heavens of the earth were 
 thus stirred up with war and with antici- 
 pated misfortunes and strange doctrines, 
 there came to Paradise, before the throne 
 of God, a host of seven thousand angels 
 who had been victims of the inquisitions 
 under the inspiration of Looeamong, pray- 
 ing an audience with God. God command- 
 ed them to approach and speak. 
 
 And those who were leaders then came, 
 and spake; and this is the substance of 
 what they said: 
 
 Most Holy God. Jehovih's Son, greet- 
 ing in lov», in pity and in anger! We are 
 not Gods, nor pure, nor holy. Therefore 
 pity us. 
 
 We are not happy, and feel that in our 
 struggles to find truth we have been un- 
 fairly used. Therefore, pity us. 
 
 We were born in mud-holes, and have 
 soiled garments. Therefore, have compas- 
 sion on us. We are in search of clean wa- 
 ter. Therefore., guide us. We have such 
 strength as a mad wolf might be proud of, 
 Therefore, use us. 
 
 We have not such mercy and forgive- 
 ness as becometh Gods. Therefore, give 
 us rough work to do. Such work, in fact, 
 as would require no one to split a hair to 
 discern right or wrong. 
 
 Not that, we desire to glut ourselves in 
 vengeance, against the false Kriste. One 
 step higher, O God. As such a matter, if 
 an innocent lamb were pursued by a wolf, 
 give us to rush in, and save the lamb! 
 
 Now, behold, the rumor hath come to 
 us, that thou wilt establish Guatama free 
 from the dominion of Gods and Saviors. 
 And now, O God, we are so far on 
 the road to purification, that we can no 
 longer catch the false Kriste's angels, and 
 hurl them into hell. Nevertheless, we are 
 not so fastidiously pure, but we would 
 seize his evil-working angels, and hold 
 them by the throats till thou hast thy 
 great country founded safely for Jehovih's 
 kingdom. 
 
 If, therefore, thou canst appropriate 
 seven thousand angels in some loose and 
 unscrupulous corner, to do thee good ser- 
 vice against the tyrant and remorseless 
 Looeamong, behold, we stand before Je- 
 hovih and thee, to do thy will as thou may- 
 est command. 
 
KOSMON 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 563 
 
 God said unto them: My brothers and 
 sisters, in the name of Jehovih, I welcome 
 you. What ye can do, that shall ye do; 
 nor shall any but yourselves judge your- 
 selves. 
 
 As far as ye have the light of the Fa- 
 ther, so shall ye serve Him. To Him only 
 are ye responsible; for His triumph shall 
 be the redemption of heaven and earth. 
 Behold, Looeamong will surely inspire a 
 war, both in Guatama, with mortals, and in 
 the heavens thereof, with the angels. 
 
 My angel hosts shall inspire the mortals 
 of Guatama to found a government free 
 from the dominion of Gods and Saviors. 
 War will follow. 
 
 Now, behold, I have appointed Yotahi- 
 za, as my Lord for those regions. Repair 
 ye thither with my messengers who know 
 the way, and Yotahiza will receive you in 
 my name, and give you work in justice, 
 truth and wisdom. 
 
 The army of the inquisition then salut- 
 ed, and departed, and they came to Yota- 
 hiza's heavenly station with the colonists 
 in Guatama. 
 
 CHAPTER XI. 
 
 Since three hundred years, the loo'is of 
 God's allotment to the earth, had been pro- 
 viding the generations of men unto the 
 coming work of God. And through these 
 had God, Jehovih's Son, raised up one 
 thousand two hundred men, to be directly 
 under the inspiration of the second resur- 
 rection, for establishing an emancipated 
 government for mortals. And these one 
 thousand two hundred men were raised to 
 grades above sixty, and some of them to 
 eighty. 
 
 Chief of these men raised up by God, to 
 establish the foundation of Jehovih's king- 
 dom with mortals, were/the following, all 
 of whom were above grade eighty: Paine, 
 Jefferson, Adams, Franklin, Carroll, Han- 
 cock and Washington. 
 
 Into the hands of these seven men did 
 Jehovih, through God, His Son, place the 
 leadership of the mortal hosts; and they 
 were under the guidance of Jehovih's Lord, 
 Yotahiza. 
 
 And the Lord caused Paine, to proclaim 
 the new doctrines, as against Looeamong 
 and the sacred books, on which the inqui- 
 
 sitions had been carried out. These, then, 
 were the doctrines of Paine, inspired by 
 the Lord, Jehovih's Son: 
 
 One, the Creator, Who is Almighty, 
 matchless in wisdom, truth, power and un- 
 ity of purpose; the author of all things, on 
 the earth. 
 
 That the soul of man is immortal and 
 everlasting, and shall ultimately attain to 
 peace and joy in the heavens of the Al- 
 mighty. That, according to man's good or 
 evil deeds, words, thoughts and actions 
 whilst on earth, even so shall he inherit in 
 heaven, light or darkness, joy or unhappi- 
 ness. 
 
 That all the world is my country; to do 
 good, my religion. 
 
 That man hath a natural right, above all 
 kings, priests and sacred writings, to serve 
 his Creator in his own way. 
 
 That this is an age of reason, in which 
 all men should be inspired, to read and 
 think, and judge with their own judgment 
 and not through any priest or church or 
 Savior. 
 
 That the doctrine of a Savior is unjust; 
 that no honest man should accept another's 
 dying for him. 
 
 That the so-called sacred books are not 
 the writings of the Creator; that their mul- 
 tiplicity of defects prove them to have been 
 manufactured by corruptible authors. 
 
 That, in practice, the said sacred books 
 have been used by unprincipled priests to 
 promote wars, 'inquisitions, tyranny and 
 destruction. 
 
 That man should rise up in his might to 
 embrace his Creator, by the practice of 
 good works, and by promoting brotherly 
 love toward all men; and by charity and 
 independence elicit the protection, the 
 pride and the glory of the Almighty. 
 
 The doctrines of God, Paine proclaimed 
 publicly; and they were printed, and cir- 
 culated amongst the inhabitants of Guat- 
 ama. And they fell into the hands of such 
 men and women as had been previously 
 prepared by God to receive them. And 
 these people applauded the new doctrines 
 to so great an extent that the colonies re- 
 pudiated the Divine right of kings to gov- 
 ern without the consent of the goverr ~d. 
 
 Looeamong, the false Kriste, pex reived 
 the design of God, Jehovih's Son, and im- 
 mediately sent down to the earth, to Guat- 
 
564 
 
 KOSMON 
 
 CYCLE OE LIKA 
 
 ama, two thousand angel warriors, to over- 
 throw Paine's doctrines, and to precipitate 
 the colonies into war against the home 
 government in western Uropa. So, war in 
 Guatama, on earth, and in the heavens 
 thereof, set in, mortals against mortals and 
 angels against angels. 
 
 The Lord, Yotahiza, now assigned the 
 army of the inquisition, the seven thousand 
 angel volunteers to be the protecting hosts 
 to the seven leaders of the Guatama revolt. 
 
 Besides these angels, who were generals 
 and captains of the hosts, there were of 
 non-commissioned angel officers, two thou- 
 sand seven hundred and eighty-four, who 
 had also been martyred as to earth-life, by 
 scourging, and by the rack, and by being 
 pulled in quarters, and by being burnt, who 
 were distributed amongst the mortal ar- 
 mies of soldiers. And these angel officers 
 had angel armies and companies, discip- 
 lined and quartered in the camps of the 
 mortals with the soldiers. 
 
 Such, then, were the inspiring hosts, 
 varying in number from six million to 
 twelve million, who remained with the sol- 
 diers of the republic during the war, day 
 and night, inspiring them to fortitude, and 
 manipulating them to give them health and 
 strength and endurance. 
 
 God spake to the angel commander of 
 these hosts, saying: Though thy hosts in- 
 spire these mortals to liberty as to earthly 
 things, yet thou shalt also take advantage 
 of this opportunity to sow the seed of 
 higher spiritual light amongst them. Re- 
 member, then, the sermon of the All High: 
 And with this shall thy hosts forever in- 
 spire mortals. 
 
 For seven years the war lasted, and dur- 
 ing all the while, the earthly commander, 
 Washington, was under the guardianship 
 of the commander of the angel hosts, and 
 one thousand angels, day and night. And 
 though he was shot at, and in many ways 
 sought for to be destroyed, these angels 
 saved him, even catching in their hands the 
 bullets that were fired at him. And in like 
 manner were many other mortal leaders 
 and privates in the war protected and saved 
 from harm by the angels. 
 
 And yet all this while the angels of 
 Looeamong fought on the other side, en- 
 deavoring to pull away the guarding an- 
 gels, and so make the mortal leaders vul- 
 
 nerable. But these angels were lower in 
 grade and less potent, and, withal, not so 
 enthusiastic, for they had not suffered mar 
 tyrdom. 
 
 And the republic was established. 
 
 And God caused the commander of the 
 angels who had accomplished this work, 
 to call his hosts together, that they might 
 hear the voice of Jehovih. And there thus 
 assembled eighteen million three hundred 
 and forty thousand in number, in an ex- 
 temporized heaven above the Haguan 
 mountains, where the chiefs of Paradise 
 had already prepared an altar to Jehovih 
 for the occasion. Of the higher grades 
 from other plateaux, were here assembled 
 in the sacred circle, seventy million angels, 
 to promote the Voice. Of which matters 
 God had previously sent word to Aronu, 
 that a chain of light might be made to the 
 upper heavens. 
 
 Now, when the angels of the inquisition 
 were thus assembled before God, and duly 
 placed by the marshals, God caused the 
 light to be lowered, so that they might re- 
 joice rather than suffer because of its bril- 
 liancy. And when God sat on the throne, 
 and the es'enaurs had chanted unto Jeho- 
 vih glory for having founded the republic 
 of mortals, a ray of light was seen descend- 
 ing from the upper realms, and it extended 
 down to the throne of God, where now, on 
 all sides, the illumination was in splendor. 
 Presently, just above the throne, a single 
 star of light was formed, and out of this 
 came the Voice of Jehovih, saying: 
 
 Peace, My beloved. The way is open: 
 liberty to the conscience of mortals is 
 founded on earth. Ye have lifted them 
 above the bondage of Gods. Because ye 
 were cut down before ye had finished your 
 labor on earth, I allowed ye to come back 
 to mortals to complete your own aspira- 
 tions. Because you united with one anoth- 
 er in companies and phalanxes for a good 
 work, instead of working single-handed, 
 ye are now admitted into the second resur- 
 rection of My kingdoms. By the light of 
 My throne are ye this day absolved from 
 the bondage of earth and first resurrection. 
 
 The Voice ceased; but God spake unto 
 his marshals, saying: Provide ye an aval- 
 anza sufficient for the ascension of these 
 my beloved angels, and take them to the 
 fields and forests of Attusasabak, in the Or- 
 
KOSMON 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 565 
 
 theon plateau, where I have already pro- 
 vided them ample residences. And, after 
 they are delivered, grade them, and give 
 unto them suitable instructors and compan- 
 ions, that in due time they may become 
 Brides and Bridegrooms to Jehovih, and 
 ascend to the emancipated kingdoms in the 
 etherean worlds. 
 
 Suffer them now to pass before the 
 throne, that they may receive badges from 
 the Most High! For these will be to them 
 a connection with the exalted kingdoms. 
 
 The marshals then filed them past the 
 throne, and there fell, from the heavens 
 above, upon them, badges of immortal 
 light, unchangeable. And the builders in 
 Yutis brought them an avalanza, and they 
 went therein, to the sound of the singing 
 of three million voices in Jehovih's praise. 
 And when they were within, God again 
 spake to them, saying: 
 
 Ye go now far off from the earth. But 
 as ye freed this land unto itself, and now 
 go away, behold, I will call ye back again 
 before another hundred years, to free the 
 people from the doctrines and creeds of the 
 ancients. No God nor Lord nor Savior 
 shall be enforced in this land! Till then, 
 Jehovih will be with you all, and give you 
 joy and happiness! 
 
 Thereupon, the officers of the avalanza 
 set it in motion, rising upward. And the 
 musicians, they that remained and they 
 that ascended, sang and trumpeted until 
 the fire-ship ascended out of sight. 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 For three hundred years prior to the 
 above transactions, the four false Gods had 
 been in war to a limited extent in their hea- 
 vens, and for certain earth possessions also. 
 
 In Chine'ya, the Ka'yuans had made 
 great progress, to the injury of the false 
 Brahma, Ennochissa. But the latter had 
 pushed his people into Vind'yu and Par'- 
 si'e. 
 
 On the part of Kabalactes, the false 
 Budha, he had pushed his people into 
 Chine'ya and Par'si'e also. And in many 
 parts of Vind'yu, these Budhists had treat- 
 ed the Brahmins with great slaughter. 
 
 But neither of the above false Gods was 
 a match for God-Gabriel. Under the name 
 and doctrines of Mohammed, he had made 
 great inroads upon the possessions of the 
 
 other two false Gods, both as to the earth 
 and the heavens thereof. 
 
 And yet, on the other hand, Looea- 
 mong, the false Kriste, had taken advant- 
 age of all the other three false Gods. He 
 had found mortal emissaries in western 
 Uropa whom he had inspired under the 
 name, East India Company. To these he 
 had said: Come, I will lead you where 
 there is great wealth and most luxurious 
 enjoyment. Behold, ye shall possess the 
 place, and overcome the heathen of a rich 
 country. 
 
 So, Looeamong led them, and they took 
 with them missionaries, bibles, swords and 
 cannons, and warships. And when they 
 arrived at Vind'yu, Looeamong, through 
 his angel hosts, said unto them: 
 
 Tell these heathen, ye are worshippers 
 of the Lamb of Peace; that ye have come 
 in love and for righteousness' sake. And, 
 behold, they will receive you. And it shall 
 come to pass, when ye are once within, ye 
 shall fall upon them, and destroy them by 
 the million, men, women and children. 
 And ye shall fall upon their aqueducts, 
 which irrigate the lands, and ye shall de- 
 stroy them also; and, behold, millions of 
 these heathen shall starve every year, be- 
 cause of the famines that shall surely come 
 upon them. 
 
 Now, all these came to pass; the idola- 
 ters of Looeamong. fell upon the Bud- 
 hists' earthly possessions, and possessed 
 the land of Vind'yu, and, in the name of 
 Kriste and the Holy Ghost, killed seven 
 million men, women and children. And 
 they also destroyed the aqueducts whereby 
 famines came upon the Vind'yuans, so that, 
 in course of time, thirty million more per- 
 ished of starvation. 
 
 Now, although Kabalactes thus lost, in 
 a great measure, his earthly possessions, he 
 still maintained the heavens of Vind'yu, so 
 that Looeamong really gained but few 
 souls, in heaven, after all his destructions. 
 
 Looeamong had also led his mortal 
 emissaries into Chine'ya, in hope to possess 
 that country also. He had said to them: 
 Go thither, and enforce upon them the opi- 
 um trade. And because thereof, they 
 will become a drunken and worthless peo- 
 ple, and ye shall fall upon them, and over- 
 come them, and possess all their country, 
 wherein are stored great riches. 
 
566 
 
 K08M0N 
 
 CYCLE OF LIKA 
 
 And the idolaters of trie false Kriste 
 fell upon the Chine'yans and enforced 
 the opium trade, and also made many 
 of them a drunken and worthless people. 
 And after they were thus drunk, the idola- 
 ters of the false Kriste raised the cry: Be- 
 hold, the drunken heathen! The indulgers 
 in opium! Nevertheless, the Ka'yuans of 
 Chine'ya were a mighty power, and they 
 baffled Looeamong's emissaries in all fur- 
 ther encroachments. 
 
 Now, although Looeamong had been 
 beaten by the wisdom of God, in possessing 
 the colonies of Guatama, nevertheless, 
 Looeamong still hoped to regain the coun- 
 try to himself. And to carry out his de- 
 signs, he sent two thousand million angel 
 warriors to accomplish the destruction of 
 the Algonquin tribes that inhabited the 
 country. And the idolaters of Looeamong 
 fell upon the Algonquins, and caused three 
 million of them to be put to death, men 
 women and children. 
 
 CHAPTER XIII. 
 
 When the right time came, Jehovih 
 spake to God, saying: My Son, behold, 
 the kosmon era is near, and the light of 
 the Arc of Kosmon entereth the fields of 
 Paradise. Stretch forth thy hand over the 
 nations of Earth and over the heavens 
 thereof, and sweep clean thy kingdoms 
 for My everlasting light. The four false 
 Gods, the perpetuators of the beast, will 
 call out in agony, but thou shalt heed them 
 not in My judgments. 
 
 Then God sent forth his disciplined 
 hosts, twelve thousand million, to cut off 
 the supplies of the earth. Even as a mor- 
 tal general cutteth off the supplies of a 
 wicked city to subdue it, so was cut off 
 the accumulated power of the four false 
 Gods, they that had proclaimed themselves 
 the Saviors of mortals and angels. And 
 the angels of God spread around about the 
 whole earth! In armies of millions and 
 tens of millions, well disciplined, they gath- 
 ered together in the mortal cities, and in 
 the country places, amongst all nations, 
 tribes and peoples. And these angel ar- 
 mies were officered and drilled to work in 
 concert, with lines of light extending to 
 the throne of God. 
 
 And God spake in Paradise, by means 
 of the lines of light, and his voice went 
 
 into all the mighty armies of his hosts, the 
 twelve thousand million, saying: 
 
 Cut off the earth supplies of the four 
 beasts of the earth! They and their count- 
 less legions of followers have become pro- 
 fitless in the resurrection of mortals and 
 angels. Their names have become a stench 
 upon the earth. Their mortal followers are 
 grovelers in all manner of uncleanness. 
 Their spirits have become as vagabonds on 
 the earth and in the heavens thereof. My 
 hosts have tried to persuade them, but they 
 will not hear; the light of the upper king- 
 doms, they will not receive. But I will 
 make them look up. Like beasts that are 
 untamed, they shall cry out for sustenance, 
 but they shall not find it in the places of 
 their old haunts. 
 
 Then, the hosts of God marched in be- 
 twixt the drujas, the worshippers of the 
 four false Gods, and their mortal harvests. 
 And the drujas turned to their respective 
 Gods, the false Brahma, the false Budha 
 and Gabriel, and the false Kriste, crying 
 out: 
 
 Behold, our supplies are cut off! Is not 
 the earth thy kingdom, and the place of 
 thy footstool? Saidst thou not that thou 
 wert the Almighty? How, then, hath an- 
 other God come between? If thou art, 
 indeed, our Savior, now save us! But if 
 thou hast been all this while deceiving, 
 then shall hell be thy portion! 
 
 The four false Gods heard the cry of 
 anger and suspicion in their mighty king- 
 doms; heard the wailings of the sixty thou- 
 sand million. And they feared, and trem- 
 bled. Most of all in fear was the false 
 Kriste, for, for sake of aggrandizing his 
 own kingdom, he had had it proclaimed on 
 the earth that: Whosoever believeth in me 
 shall be saved; but whosoever believeth 
 not in me, shall be in danger of hell-fire! 
 
 And countless millions of mortals had 
 taken no thought as to self-resurrection, 
 but taken him at his word; and so had 
 lived and died and become his slaves for 
 hundreds of years. Millions of these an- 
 gels had heavenly banners made, with the 
 promises of this false Lord inscribed there- 
 on, and with these went in processions in 
 heaven, crying out: Bread or blood! 
 Bread or blood! We come not to bring 
 peace in heaven; we come to bring a 
 sword! We come to set angel against an- 
 
KOSMON 
 
 CYCLE OF ES 
 
 567 
 
 gel! Give unto us, O thou, our God, or 
 hell shall be thy portion! 
 
 And the four false Gods, fearing the 
 fires of hell, went about, crying out: I am 
 not the true Brahma! I am not the true 
 Budah! I am not the true God! I am not 
 the true Kriste! 
 
 For they hoped thereby to save them- 
 selves. But, alas, for them. Their thou- 
 sands of millions fell upon their heavenly 
 cities, palaces and thrones, and robbed 
 them. And, when their fury found vent, 
 behold, the vast multitudes rushed for the 
 false Gods, and fell upon them, beat them, 
 suffocated them with foul smells, covered 
 them up with suffocating gases, walled 
 them in with sulphurous fires. And they 
 brought the officers and priests and monks 
 and high officers, and cast them into hells 
 also, millions and millions of high-ruling 
 angels of the false Gods. 
 
 Thus were these four false Gods hem- 
 med in, even within their own dissolute 
 kingdoms, and every day and every hour 
 grew more terrible. It was the infuriated 
 madness of sixty thousand million deceived 
 angels, broken loose from slavery, turned 
 upon them. 
 
 Then Jehovih's God, from Paradise, 
 went forth in a ship of fire, brilliant, past 
 the endurance of drujas; went forth with 
 ten million high in the grades from the 
 realms of Aroqu and Harivya, well discip- 
 lined for the purpose. And on the ship, 
 and on the banners thereof, were inscribed 
 these words: 
 
 There is but one Great Spirit, Jehovih. 
 To Assimilate with Him, is the salvation 
 of mortals and angels. He crieth out: 
 Come unto Me; My kingdoms are ample 
 unto all the living. Be ye strong in resur- 
 rection, for I am come to deliver. 
 
 And God gathered in from the highest 
 grades of the disrupted heavenly kingdoms 
 thirteen thousand million homeless angels, 
 who had been worshippers of the four false 
 Gods. And God had them sent to Luana, 
 on the plateau, Hivestos, where he officered 
 them in colonies, with places for education 
 and labor. 
 
 God said unto them: Ye hoped to as- 
 cend to Jehovih's highest kingdom by 
 prayers and confessions to false Gods. Be- 
 hold, I say unto you, there is no resurrec- 
 tion but by developing the talents Jehovih 
 
 created unto all men. Go ye to work, 
 therefore, and to places of education, that 
 ye may become fit companions to Jehovih's 
 exalted angels. 
 
 CHAPTER XIV. 
 
 CYCLE OF ES. 
 
 Now was God, Jehovih's Son, master 
 of the whole Earth and her heavens. The 
 light of the Arc of Kosmon had fallen on 
 the throne of God. Jehovih's Orian Chiefs 
 from the emancipated heavens had come! 
 Paradise was like a new kingdom. A 
 thousand million ethereans had arrived to 
 labor with God, in clearing away the hells 
 of the lower heavens, and in providing for 
 opening the gates of the heavens for the 
 angels to appear unto mortals. 
 
 Methazi, Goddess of Alefad, in the 
 roads of Loo, in etherea, had brought 
 back the armies of the inquisitions. Ha- 
 tivi, Goddess of the Lutian swamps, in 
 Wessatow plains, in etherea, was there, 
 with Massecred of Bough-ghan-ghad. 
 Monetzian, Goddess of Tussia, was there. 
 Norwothchissa, Goddess of the forest of Ni- 
 dea, in etherea, were there. Besides these, 
 there were forty-six other Goddesses, each 
 with a host of angels who had in the an- 
 cient times striven against Jehovih, in favoi 
 of some false God. But now, in the com 
 ing of kosmon, behold, they returned as 
 pure and exalted Gods and Goddesses. 
 
 And God, Jehovih's Son, called forth all 
 these one-time persecutors, and he said 
 unto them : 
 
 Behold, there are four great hells and 
 six smaller hells and fourteen still smaller 
 hells, still existing in these lower heavens. 
 Since ye were once cast into hells, and af- 
 terward delivered by the angels of Jeho- 
 vih, go ye now, and deliver the hells of 
 these heavens. And bring ye the chief 
 false Gods before me. My marshal will al- 
 lot you to the respective places I have ap- 
 pointed unto you. 
 
 Then went forth the Gods and Goddess- 
 es as appointed by God to deliver the 
 twenty-four hells of the heavens of the 
 earth. And they took with them unto this 
 labor six thousand million angel laborers 
 well skilled in such matters. And, in thir- 
 ty-four days, the hells were delivered, brok- 
 
568 
 
 KOSMON 
 
 CYCLE OF CS 
 
 en up and gone, And from these hells, 
 there were thus delivered more than sev- 
 enty thousand million angels; who were 
 carried to the plateaux, prepared for them 
 by God, Jehovih's Son. 
 
 And God had also provided unto them, 
 in their new heavenly places, divisions and 
 sub-divisions, with generals, captains, over- 
 seers and such other officers, necessary to 
 prevent them running into knots and hells 
 again. 
 
 Of the false Gods and Goddesses thus 
 delivered and brought before God, in Para- 
 dise, for judgment, the chiefs of them were: 
 Looeamong, Kabalactes, Ennochissa, Ga- 
 briel, Baal, Ashtaroth, Dagon, Ashdod, 
 Yotemas, Sathias, Goluth, Plutoya, Itis, 
 Hamgad, Moak and Hoar. Besides these, 
 there were seventy other false Gods and 
 Goddesses delivered, but who were not 
 brought before the throne of God, but were 
 sent to hospitals, because they were in 
 chaos. 
 
 God had previously provided Paradise, 
 through his Holy Council, for the time of 
 the judgment of the false Gods, that were 
 brought before him. So the Holy Councils 
 were formed in crescent, so that the throne 
 of God laid betwixt the horns thereof, in 
 order to promote the Voice. The mar- 
 shals then brought the false Gods and God- 
 desses into the arena of circle where the 
 light should fall upon them. 
 
 CHAPTER XV. 
 
 The Voice spake out of the light over 
 the throne of God, saying: 
 
 Because I admonished both earth and 
 heaven, saying: Whoso setteth up more 
 than the I Am, shall be bound: And whoso 
 hearkeneth unto them, and runneth after 
 them, shall be bound unto them. And they 
 heeded not My commandments, but made 
 worshipful other Gods than Me, so shall 
 they reap the harvest they have sown. 
 
 Because they drew the sword to estab- 
 lish themselves, they were bound by the 
 sword. Because they took upon them- 
 selves heavenly kingdoms, I bound them 
 thereunto. 
 
 Because they professed salvation in the 
 names of false Gods, I let them run their 
 course; and, behold, they have shown no 
 salvation in heaven or earth. They have 
 
 built up kingdom against kingdom, stand- 
 ing army against standing army. Verily, 
 they have brought judgment upon them- 
 selves. 
 
 Hear the words of Jehovih, O ye false 
 Gods and Goddesses, who set up heavenly 
 kingdoms against Me. Who slew hun- 
 dreds of millions of mortals, in order to 
 make other names than Mine worshipful 
 on earth and in the heavens thereof. 
 
 Ye, who cried out falsely: Behold me; 
 I am the light and the life; through me is 
 the way of salvation. 
 
 Ye, who have used your names to lead 
 mortals and angels away from the Creator; 
 saying of yourselves: Behold me, I am the 
 Lord; I am God; my heavenly place is the 
 all highest. 
 
 Behold, I had spoken in the olden times, 
 saying: 
 
 Whosoever taketh from My people 
 for his own glory or dominion, shall ren- 
 der unto Me the just value. 
 
 These have been My doctrines since 
 thousands of years, and known unto you 
 before ye deserted My kingdoms. 
 
 Hear ye, then, the judgment of Jehovih: 
 Whosoever hath established the name of 
 any God but the Creator, and made it wor- 
 shipful on earth or in heaven, shall be 
 bound in the first resurrection till that 
 name is no longer worshipful on earth or in 
 heaven. 
 
 And whatever God or Goddess hath 
 said: Come unto me, ye that are heavily 
 laden, and I will give you rest, for I am the 
 way of salvation and of light and of ever- 
 lasting life, then, that God or Goddess 
 shall be bound in the first resurrection as 
 long as mortals or angels go unto him or 
 her. 
 
 And, when all of you have purified, and 
 raised up all those who idolize you, in that 
 same time, will I raise you up to higher 
 heavens also. 
 
 And now, when the Voice ceased, and 
 all was still, the false Gods and Goddesses 
 raised up their heads, and they spake with 
 one voice, saying: 
 
 Thou art just, O Jehovih. Unto Thee 
 do I now covenant that I will serve Thee 
 forever. Neither will I aspire to rise to 
 higher heavens till I have raised up all 
 whom I have led astray. Make me strong, 
 O Jehovih, in this my everlasting cove- 
 
KOSKON 
 
 CYCLE OF ES 
 
 569 
 
 nant! Teach me, O Father, the labor I 
 should do, that Thou shalt be glorified for- 
 ever! 
 
 Thus ended the judgment. God's mar- 
 shals removed them to the places allotted 
 for them, and they went to work. 
 
 CHAPTER XVI. 
 
 Such, then, was the fate of the chief 
 false Gods in the lower heavens. But, dur- 
 ing the last three or four hundred years, 
 many of the officers of these false Gods 
 had seceded from them, and had set up 
 small heavenly kingdoms of their own. 
 And their mortal followers were called 
 sects. 
 
 These little heavens were, for the most 
 part, situated on the earth, and usually 
 these small Gods inhabited the churches 
 where mortals came to worship. And the 
 preachers within these churches fell under 
 the inspiration of these itinerant Gods and 
 their gangs of wandering spirits. 
 
 In Guatama, these inspirations were car- 
 ried to such an extent, by these drujan 
 Gods, that the mortals of one sect were 
 made hostile, one sect against another. 
 An enmity, therefore, existed betwixt pro- 
 testants and catholics, and betwixt protest- 
 ants themselves, and betwixt all of these 
 and Jews. And, not only on earth, betwixt 
 mortals, did these things take place, but 
 these petty Gods had small kingdoms of 
 their, own; as a Presbyterian heaven; a 
 Methodist heaven; a Baptist heaven, and 
 so on. And, when a mortal member died, 
 his spirit fell into his heaven, where he had 
 lived, becoming a servant to these drujas. 
 And, when he cried out: I want to go to 
 Jesus, I want to go to Kriste, he was 
 shown the drujan God, and told: That is 
 he! Which he would believe to be true. 
 For what is bound on earth, is bound in 
 heaven. 
 
 A drujan God, Piad, established a sect, 
 and named it Mormon, and he located his 
 kingdom on earth with his mortal follow- 
 ers, and he became master over the spirits 
 of his mortal followers in the same way, 
 calling himself, the True Kriste. Piad 
 taught, that all good Mormons would ulti- 
 mately attain to rule over some planet and 
 her heavens. But, he never permitted the 
 angels of his kingdom to go out of his 
 
 reach. He also taught mortals, that the 
 more numerous progeny a man begot, the 
 greater would be his heavenly kingdom, in 
 time to come. For this was Piad's scheme, 
 to make his own heavenly kingdom large 
 and powerful. 
 
 Another drujan God, Lowganus, estab- 
 lished a kingdom on earth, and named it 
 Shaker Heaven, pretending he was the 
 True Kriste. And his place became a hea- 
 venly bondage unto himself. . 
 
 Another drujan God, Sayawan, estab- 
 lished a heavenly kingdom on earth, and 
 called it The All Highest Heaven. This 
 Lord called himself The Lord. He raised 
 up a mortal, Swedenborg, whom he took in 
 spirit, subjectively, into many of the low- 
 est heavens and hells, saying to him: 
 
 Behold, they that serve not The LordL 
 How hard it is with them! And he fur- 
 ther said: This place of darkness is the 
 Brahman heaven; that place of darkness is 
 the Budhist heaven! But this place of light 
 is my heaven, I, The Lord. 
 
 Thus did this drujan God establish a 
 Swedenborg heaven, and mortals looked 
 upon him as the true Kriste, and, after 
 death, their souls went thither. So, it came 
 to pass, as had been prophesied of old: Lo, 
 Kriste, here! Lo, Kriste, there! 
 
 And, as it was with Looeamong's hea- 
 venly kingdoms, thus split into hundreds 
 of remnants, even so was it with the hea- 
 venly kingdoms of the other false Gods, 
 Brahma, the false, and Budha, the false, 
 so that there were on earth thousands of 
 petty Gods' heavenly kingdoms of dark- 
 ness and misery. 
 
 Now, all of these drujan Gods, whether 
 of Chine'ya, or Vind'yii, or Arabin'ya, or 
 Uropa, or Guatama, rejected Jehovih, but 
 took the name of some one of the four false 
 Gods, and protested that he himself was the 
 real and true God and Savior. And mortal 
 sects, that followed them, did the same 
 thing; and none of them practiced right- 
 eousness and good works, but were war- 
 riors and money-getters, for self sake. 
 
 God said: Behold, I give a new testi- 
 mony unto the nations of the earth: In the 
 time I overcame, and cast out the four 
 heads of the beast, the acrimony existing 
 between the different sects began, suddenly, 
 to die out, and they spake friendly to one 
 another. 
 
570 
 
 KOSMON 
 
 CYCLE OF ES 
 
 CHAPTER XVII. 
 THE DAWN OF KOSMON. 
 
 Now, whilst the Holy Council were still 
 sitting in Paradise, a light, like a star, 
 came, and stood above the throne of God. 
 And the Voice came out of the light, say- 
 ing: 
 
 Behold, the false Gods are cast out, and 
 sent unto their places. Never more shall 
 there be any other false God, or Lord, or 
 Savior, to lead My people away. I am 
 sufficient unto Mine own creations. 
 
 Let this, therefore, be the beginning of 
 the kosmon era. 
 
 My people have settled the whole earth 
 around, from east to west; the lands on 
 the western borders of Guatama have be- 
 come inhabited. 
 
 Go, then, My Son, open the gates of 
 heaven unto mortals. Let the angels meet 
 them, and talk with them, face to face. 
 
 Behold, My etherean embassadress, 
 Che'sivi'anathaotes, cometh in a sea of 
 fire! 
 
 The ship of the etherean Goddess was 
 seen descending from the higher heavens, 
 coming as an open ring, to embrace the 
 whole earth. 
 
 Swifter and swifter came the etherean 
 archangels, till all the heavens of Paradise 
 were encircled in the love of the Almighty. 
 
 Then, God called out the legions who 
 had the matter in charge, where mortals 
 had been born for the work of Jehovih's 
 kingdom. And God said: 
 
 Open the gates of heaven; let the angels 
 of Jehovih speak with mortals; the time 
 of the Father's kingdom is at hand! Open 
 the gates of heaven! Let the angels come 
 forth in power! 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII. 
 
 Now, when God looked abroad over 
 Guatama, he saw four million people in 
 bondage, as slaves; and he saw that they 
 must be liberated. And so, God inquired 
 of the chief mathematician in the Holy 
 Council, one Arak, saying: 
 
 Who, of all the kings of earth, hath had 
 the greatest number of slaves? 
 
 And Arak said: Xerxes, who dwelleth 
 in Yope'gah, in atmospherea. 
 
 God said: Send thou a heavenly ship 
 for him, and for a thousand million of his 
 
 angels. And send also for Leonidas, the 
 Argos'yan, and for a thousand million of 
 his angels. And, when they are brought 
 here, they shall descend to the earth, to 
 these barbarians, and liberate their slaves. 
 
 Arak saluted, and departed, giving his 
 instructions to the heavenly marshals, who 
 at once sent ships and messengers as di- 
 rected. 
 
 God, then, said: I will now recall the 
 ashars, who hold guard over these mortals; 
 and for a season they shall dwell in drujan 
 darkness. 
 
 And this was accomplished, and 
 straightway a war ensued betwixt the own- 
 ers of the slaves and the neighboring 
 states. Then came the Gods and angels, 
 high in the grades, to witness the play of 
 mortal death, and to determine how best 
 to win to liberty and to Jehovih, the in- 
 habitants of this great land. 
 
 And, there rose up two million men in 
 arms, pushing on in war on every side, 
 coursing the rich soil in mortal blood. And 
 yet, neither side had defined its principles, 
 or taken stand for righteousness' sake. 
 But went on in fearful destruction, laying 
 in death tens of thousands, and tens of 
 thousands! 
 
 Jehovih said: Send thou, thy Par'siVan 
 and Argos'yan angels, down to these mor- 
 tals, and, by inspiration and by dreams and 
 by visions, thy angels shall say to them: 
 Whoso professeth the earth, shall battle in 
 vain; but whoso professeth righteousness 
 in My name, shall win. 
 
 And millions of angels descended, and 
 tried to persuade them. But mortals would 
 not hear. Even the chief general, on lib- 
 erty's side, closed his soul against Jehovih. 
 Aye, himself, enforced slavery with his 
 mighty army. And years went on, and all 
 the people began to perceive that, without 
 righteousness, there would be no end to 
 the war. 
 
 Jehovih said: Only death can reach 
 these people, or make them behold My 
 hand. Yet, thou shalt send thy angel 
 hosts over all the north regions and inspire 
 them to call out for liberty. 
 
 Then went forth Xerxes and Leonidas, 
 with their two thousand million angels, to 
 overspread the north, to inspire mortals to 
 a more heavenly stand, to make them see 
 justice and liberty. And, for a hundred 
 
KOSMQN 
 
 CYCLE OF ES 
 
 571 
 
 •days, these angels dwelt with mortals; but 
 many mortals were too gross to com- 
 prehend. Then, Xerxes came to New 
 York, and took hence the guardian 
 angels, those of holiness, and he left the 
 city in the hand of drujas. And, at once, 
 the city was plunged in riots, and the peo- 
 ple were as a mad people, wild and fearful. 
 
 Again, Jehovih spake in the Holy Coun- 
 cil in heaven: Let My angels go once 
 more, and inspire mortals to rise to the 
 light of My will. 
 
 Again, the angels overrun the land, in- 
 spiring mortals day and night to demand 
 freedom for the slaves. And the Embas- 
 sadress of Jehovih said to her inspiring 
 hosts of angels: Number ye the mortals, 
 north and south, as to their majority voice 
 for freedom. 
 
 Now, when the Gods numbered the 
 mortals and graded them, they discovered 
 the majority had turned to freedom's side. 
 
 Jehovih said to His Embassadress: Take 
 thine own inspiring host, and go down to 
 the City of Washington, to the president, 
 and hold this matter up to him, that he 
 may understand Me. For he is not bound 
 in doctrines. For which reason My angels 
 made him president. And the president 
 will hear thee, and he shall resolve in his 
 own mind unto freedom for the slaves. 
 But he will seek for some external sign, 
 fearing he may have mistaken the angels 
 that minister unto him. But I will pro- 
 vide a way for this also. 
 
 And the angels of Jehovih went to the 
 president in a vision, like a dream, and 
 they called unto him. And he answered: 
 Who art thou? 
 
 And the angels said: Such as come in 
 Jehovih's name for freedom's sake. Behold, 
 millions of His angels look down from 
 heaven, and would come to thy armies, if 
 thou wouldst but proclaim freedom to the 
 slaves. Jehovih's hand is in this matter. 
 
 The president awoke, and was troubled 
 with his dream. 
 
 The next night, the angels came again, 
 and re-told their words, and added there- 
 unto: The great majority of the country is 
 ripe for this matter. Thou fearest this is 
 but a foolish dream. Behold, we will give 
 the proof to-morrow. 
 
 The president awoke more troubled than 
 before, but remembered, the angels said: 
 We will give thee proof to-morrow. 
 
 Jehovih said: I will make this a matter 
 of testimony to this nation, so that no man 
 may gainsay it. And I will show also how 
 My angels work singly and in mighty le- 
 gions. 
 
 Now, at that time, there was living in 
 Washington a seeress, through whom spir- 
 its spake by entrancement. And on the 
 day mentioned, the angels spake through 
 her, saying: Go and bring the president 
 into the presence of this woman. 
 
 And the president was told what was 
 said. And when the president came before 
 the seeress, the angel of Jehovih entranced 
 her, and said unto him: 
 
 We said we would give thee proof to- 
 morrow. Behold, we repeat unto thee, Je- 
 hovih is in this matter. Save thou pro- 
 claimest the freedom of the slaves thou 
 shalt not succeed. Do thou this, and the 
 enemy's armies shall melt away like snow 
 in the sun. 
 
 The president's eyes were opened, and 
 he went straightway, and proclaimed free- 
 dom to the whole four million slaves. 
 
 Xerxes said to Leonidas: Thou, great 
 conqueror, thou shalt conquer me. Take 
 thy thousand million angels, and go with 
 the armies of the north, and inspire them 
 on to victory. Give them such strength 
 and courage as they have not before mani- 
 fested. And, as for myself and my hosts, 
 we will go to the armies of the south, and 
 we will inspire them to believe they are 
 conquered, and so make them flee before 
 thy soldiers. 
 
 Thus, these great angel warriors allot- 
 ted themselves to the war. And, behold, 
 the northern armies ran forth over the 
 enemy's country as if war were but play; 
 and the southern armies vanished, disarm- 
 ing themselves, and returning to their 
 homes. 
 
 The slaves were free! 
 
 Jehovih said: Let this be a testimony, 
 that this land is the place of the beginning 
 of the kosmon era. There shall be no caste 
 amongst My people. Behold, I went to 
 the Israelites, and I said: Keep yourselves 
 as a separate people! For I had work for 
 
572 
 
 KOSMON 
 
 cvcle or ES 
 
 
 them; which was to travel westward, and 
 establish Me, the All One. And they came 
 westward, and fulfilled My command- 
 ments. Wherefore I have blessed them. 
 And I went to Chine'ya, and I said: Let 
 the followers of Chine keep themselves as 
 an exclusive people; for I have work for 
 them; which was to establish Me, the All 
 One, and to demonstrate the most numer- 
 ous people in all the world united as one 
 people, peacefully. And they have accom- 
 plished their work. And I blessed them. 
 And I went to Vind'yu also, and establish- 
 ed a mighty people with a multiplicity of 
 Gods and languages. For I had a work 
 for them to do, which was to preserve My 
 revelations of some of the divisions in My 
 heavens above; and to prove, in after-time, 
 things which I had revealed to the ancients. 
 They have accompished their work also, 
 and I have blessed them. 
 
 But, in this era, I come not to an ex- 
 clusive people, but to the combination of 
 all peoples commingled together as one 
 people. 
 
 Henceforth, My chosen shall be of the 
 amalgamated races, who choose Me. And 
 these shall become the best, most perfect 
 of all peoples on the earth. And they shall 
 not consider race or color, but health and 
 nobleness as to the mortal part; and as to 
 spirit, peace, love, wisdom and good works, 
 and one Great Spirit only. 
 
 Leonidas said to Xerxes: It will be re- 
 vealed ere long that we have been here with 
 our angel hosts. As a testimony of this, 
 let us allot a number of our angels to re- 
 main a season with mortals. And they 
 shall inspire them to athletic sports pecu- 
 liar to the Argos'yans and Par'si'e'ans. 
 
 To this, Xerxes consented, and they 
 asked for six hundred thousand angel vol- 
 unteers; and they received them, and offi- 
 cered them, and distributed them in such 
 way that their inspiration should develop 
 mortals in health, strength and endurance, 
 by means of athletic games. And it came 
 to pass that the angels of heaven establish- 
 
 ed athletic games amongst this people, far 
 and near. 
 
 CHAPTER XIX. 
 
 God, Jehovih's Son, was now relieved 
 of his arduous toils over Earth and her 
 heavens; and his successor and the Lords 
 were duly crowned. Then, the Chieftain- 
 esses and high Gods and Goddesses, from 
 the etherean heavens, prepared for the mar- 
 riage of Jehovih's Brides and Bridegrooms. 
 
 And God and his Lords and high offi- 
 cers called in all heavenly grades prepared 
 for the third resurrection; and there were, 
 in all, twenty-seven thousand million 
 Brides and Bridegrooms. Beside these, 
 there were in Paradise, to witness the cere- 
 monies, more than thirty thousand million 
 angels of lower grades. 
 
 So, accordingly, the ceremonies were 
 accomplished in the usual form; and the 
 Brides and Bridegrooms were conducted 
 into the avalanzas, of which there were 
 eleven in number. Then went in the ether- 
 ean hosts, who had brought forth the birth 
 of kosmon. And, after them, God and his 
 Lords and high officers. In the meantime, 
 the es'enaurs and trumpeters, two thousand 
 million, chanted and played before the 
 hosts in glory to Jehovih. 
 
 After that, the Chieftainess gave the 
 signal for the ascent, and, with. one voice, 
 the mighty hosts said: Arise! To Thee, 
 Jehovih! Nearer, nearer to Thee. Thou 
 Almighty. 
 
 And the fire-ships started upwa.J, turn- 
 ing and rising. With more than forty thou- 
 sand million angels aboard, rose the avalan- 
 zas above the pillars of fire, above the 
 throne of God, higher and higher. And 
 the angels arising, and the angels below, 
 clapped their hands and shouted in glee 
 and exalted glory, because of the over- 
 whelming scene. 
 
 Thus rose up, and departed to the high- 
 er heavens, those thousands of millions of 
 worshippers of the Creator, who had wit- 
 nessed the birth of the kosmon era, for the 
 angels and morals of the red star, Earth. 
 
The Merchants Publishing Co. 
 
 Printers and Binders, 
 
 Denver. 
 
Jtaly-ie. isoi 
 
W^Wi 
 
 *«8 
 
 -JlfeA^i^Sfe ^ Wllirm/r:li^ PreservationTechnologies 
 
 FV^HK I W"^^^ V^ JkC0 A WORLD LEADER ,N PAPER PRESErJaV.ON 
 
 m^\, y '/ W ^i Wd&il .ll^^U 4r^-V* LrP^J ^^ / f i S«y 111 Thomson Park Drive 
 
 (724)779-2V 
 

 £ \ m